Skip to main content

Full text of "Department of State bulletin"

See other formats


^A!h<)AA^£Q 


^ 


Given  By 

n  .q  SITPT.  OF  DOCIJJ^^NTr. 


3^ 


"^//ve/  zllefia^tmen^  ^  tnaier 


I  XXVIII,  No.  719 
April  6,  1953 


U.  S.  AND  FRANCE  DISCUSS  MEASURES  TO  PRO- 
MOTE PEACE: 

Text  of  Communique  of  March  28 4.91 

Statements  by  Vice  President  Nixon,  Secretary  Dulles, 
and  Prime  Minister  Mayer ^92 

INTERNATIONAL  ASPECTS  OF  THE  STATUS  OF 

WOMEN    •    Statements  by  Mrs.  Lorena  B.  Hahn      .      .      .      507 

THE  SOVIET  ATTITUDE  TOWARD  THE  DISARMA- 
MENT PROBLEM    •    Statement  by  Ernest  A.  Gross     .      .     503 

PROPOSALS      FOR     EXCHANGE     OF     SICK     AND 

WOUNDED    PRISONERS    OF    WAR 494 


For  index  see  back  cover 


UAe 


Boston  Public  Library 
Superintendent  of  Documents 

APR  3  0  1953 


zl)e/ia/yl?n€^^  £il^ t/iale 


bulletin 


Vol.  XXVIir,  No.  719  •  Publicatio>  4999 
April  6,  1953 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  o(  Documents 

U.S.  Government  Printing  Office 

Washington  2S,  D.C. 

Price: 

62  issues,  domestic  $7.60,  forei^  $10.25 

Single  copy,  20  cents 

The  printing  of  this  puhllcation  has 
been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Budget  {January  22,  1952). 

Note:  Contents  of  this  publieallon  are  not 
copyrighted  and  Items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  Department 
OF  State  Bulletin  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  BULLETIN, 
a  weekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publications, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  trith  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  tcork  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETIN  includes 
selected  press  releases  on  foreign  pol- 
icy issued  by  the  White  House  and 
the  Department,  and  statements  and 
addresses  made  by  the  President  and 
by  the  Secretary  of  State  and  other 
officers  of  the  Department,  as  well  as 
special  articles  on  various  phases  of 
international  affairs  and  the  func- 
tions of  the  Department.  Informa- 
tion is  included  concerning  treaties 
and  international  agreements  to 
which  the  United  States  is  or  may 
become  a  party  and  treaties  of  gen- 
eral international  interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
well  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently . 


U.S.  and  France  Discuss  Measures  To  Promote  Peace 


TEXT  OF  COMMUNIQUE  OF  MARCH  28 

Press  release  160  dated  March  28 

1.  Kepresentatives  of  the  United  States  and 
France,  meeting  in  Washington,  today  concluded 
a  detailed  review  of  a  wide  range  of  problems 
which  face  both  governments  in  Europe,  the  Far 
East  and  the  Near  East.  Peace  will  always  re- 
main the  basic  policy  of  the  United  States  and 
France.  The  discussions,  therefore,  centered  on 
measures  for  obtaining  peace  where  there  is  fight- 
ing and  for  consolidating  peace  where  threats 

2.  It  was  agreed,  in  the  absence  of  any  tangible 
proof  to  the  contrary,  that  recent  developments  m 
the  Soviet  Union  had  not  changed  the  basic  nature 
of  the  threat  confronting  the  free  world.  The 
representatives  of  both  countries  were  in  full 
agreement  on  the  necessity  of  concerting  then- 
efforts  so  as  to  defeat  Communist  aggression  m 
the  Far  East  and  to  strengthen  the  defenses  of  the 
free  countries  in  the  West.  They  remain  con- 
vinced that  true  peace  can  be  achieved  and  main- 
tained only  by  constructive  efforts  of  all  free 
nations. 

3.  It  was  recognized  that  Communist  aggres- 
sive moves  in  the  Far  East  obviously  are  parts  of 
the  same  pattern.  Therefore,  while  the  full  bur- 
den of  the  fighting  in  Indochina  falls  on  the  forces 
of  the  French  Union  including  those  of  the  Asso- 
ciated States,  and  similarly  the  United  States 
bears  the  heaviest  burden  in  Korea,  the  prosecu- 
tion of  these  operations  cannot  be  successfully 
carried  out  without  full  recognition  of  their  inter- 
dependence. This  in  turn  requires  the  continua- 
tion of  frequent  diplomatic  and  military  consulta- 
tion between  the  two  Governments. 

The  French  Government  reasserted  its  resolve 
to  do  its  utmost  to  increase  the  effectiveness  of  the 
French  and  Associated  States  forces  m  Indochina, 
with  a  view  to  destroying  the  organized  Com- 
munist forces  and  to  bringing  peace  and  prosper- 
ity to  her  free  associates  within  the  French  Union, 
Cambodia,  Laos  and  Viet-Nam.  The  Ambassa- 
dors of  Viet-Nam  and  Cambodia  were  present  and 
participated  in  this  phase  of  the  discussions. 

Advantage  was  taken  of  this  meeting  to  con- 
Apr//  6,   1953 


tinue  discussion  of  plans  prepared  by  the  High 
Command  in  Indochina  for  military  action  there. 
These  plans  are  being  developed  with  a  view  to 
achieving  success  in  Indochina  and  are  being  given 
intensive  study  so  as  to  determine  how  and  to  what 
extent  the  United  States  may  be  able  to  contribute 
materiel  and  financial  support  to  their 
achievement. 

Obviously  any  armistice  which  might  be  con- 
cluded in  Korea  by  the  United  Nations  would  be 
entered  into  in  the  hope  that  it  would  be  a  step 
toward  peace.  It  was  the  view  of  both  Govern- 
ments, however,  that  should  the  Chinese  Com- 
munist regime  take  advantage  of  such  an  armistice 
to  pursue  aggressive  war  elsewhere  in  the  Far 
East,  such  action  would  have  the  most  serious  con- 
sequences for  the  efforts  to  bring  about  peace  in 
the  world  and  would  conflict  directly  with  the 
understanding  on  which  any  armistice  in  Korea 
would  rest. 

4.  The  two  Governments  reaffirmed  their  com- 
mon interest  in  controlling  together  with  other 
nations  of  the  free  world  the  movement  of  strate- 
gic materials  to  nations  whose  policies  jeopardize 
the  peace  and  security  of  the  free  world.  Both 
Governments  undertook  to  continue  action  toward 
that  end. 

In  order  to  render  more  effective  the  application 
of  the  United  Nations  General  Assembly  resolu- 
tion of  May  18,  1951,^  the  French  Government 
intends  to  take  the  measures  necessary  to  prevent 

a)  the  bunkering  of  ships  carrying  to  Com- 
munist China  cargoes  of  strategic  mate- 
rials, and 

b)  the  transportation  by  French  ships  of  car- 
goes of  strategic  character  to  ports  of 
Communist  China. 

The  two  Governments  in  cooperation  with  other 
interested  Governments  will  keep  under  constant 
review  the  list  of  items  embargoed  to  Communist 
China  in  order  to  include  goods  whose  strategic 
character  will  have  been  demonstrated. 

5.  In  their  discussions  on  the  European  area, 
the  two  Governments  recognized  the  continuing 
uro-ent  need  to  permit  a  German  military  contri- 


'  Bulletin  of  May  28,  1951,  p.  849. 


491 


bution  to  tlie  defense  of  Europe  and  through  the 
Contractual  Agreements  replace  the  present  occu- 
pation regime  of  Germany.  Both  Governments 
agreed  on  the  necessity  of  the  establishment,  with 
minimum  delay,  of  the  European  Defense  Com- 
munity, which  will  promote  sincere  cooperation 
between  France  and  Germany  and  thus  serve  the 
interests  of  the  Atlantic  Community  as  well  as 
advance  the  security  and  unity  of  Europe. 

The  two  delegations  noted  with  satisfaction  the 
agreement  by  the  Interim  Committee  of  the  Euro- 
pean Defense  Community  on  the  protocols  inter- 
pretative to  the  Treaty.  For  their  part  the  repre- 
sentatives of  France  foresaw  their  acceptance  by 
their  Government. 

It  was  recognized  that  this  important  step  to- 
ward ratification  of  the  Treaty  would  enable  rapid 
progress  in  the  Interim  Committee  on  the  tech- 
nical steps  preparatory  to  the  Treaty  coming  into 
force  and  thereby  ensure  that  its  benefits  would 
be  secured  as  soon  as  possible  after  ratification. 

The  importance  of  a  settlement  of  tlie  question 
of  the  Saar  was  recognized  and  it  was  agreed  that 
this  should  be  sought  at  tlie  earliest  opportunity 
on  a  basis  which  would  provide  a  European  status 
for  the  Saar  conforming  to  the  principles  of  the 
European  Defense  and  the  Coal  and  Steel  Com- 
munities. The  French  delegation  explained  in 
detail  the  reasons  which,  in  its  view,  justify  and 
render  necessary  a  Franco-German  agreement  on 
such  a  settlement  prior  to  ratification  of  the  Euro- 
pean Defense  Community  Treaty. 

6.  The  French  delegation  explained  the  eco- 
nomic and  budgetary  implications  for  France  of 
carrying  out  her  defense  programs  in  Europe  as 
well  as  m  the  Far  East. 

7.  The  two  delegations  recognized  that  the  Eu- 
ropean Defense  Community  is  to  be  constituted 
within  a  constantly  developing  Atlantic  Com- 
munity. 

Therefore  they  place  great  importance  upon 
efforts  to  improve  the  effectiveness  of  the  North 
Atlantic  Treaty  Organization. 

This  general  question  as  well  as  that  of  the  es- 
sential balance  between  military  necessities  and 
economic  possibilities  will  again  be  considered 
during  the  next  meeting  of  the  North  Atlantic 
Council  in  Paris  on  April  23. 

8.  The  participation  by  France  in  the  Euro- 
pean Community  alters  in  no  way  her  interests 
and  responsibilities  outside  of  Europe.  In  the 
light  of  the  world  position  of  both  nations,  which 
is  reflected  in  particular  in  the  charter  of  the 
United  Nations,  the  United  States  Government 
and  the  Government  of  France  will  consult  with 
one  another  on  general  problems  as  occasion 
demands  in  the  future  as  in  the  past. 

9.  An  exchange  of  views  was  also  held  on  eco- 
nomic and  financial  questions. 

The  discussions  included  a  survey  of  the 
budgetary  position  and  outlook  as  well  as  a  review 

492 


of  economic  developments  in  the  United  States 
and  in  France. 

The  French  representatives  outlined  their  views 
on  the  recent  talks  at  the  Organization  for  Euro- 
pean Economic  Cooperation  in  Paris  concerning 
progress  toward  better  balanced  and  expanding 
world  trade,  and  the  objective  of  convertibility  of 
currencies  and  multilateral  trade  and  payments. 
It  was  agreed  that  steps  to  advance  this  progress 
would  require  further  study  by  the  United  States, 
the  member  countries  of  the  Organization  for 
European  Economic  Cooperation  and  other 
governments. 

ARRIVAL  OF^FRENCH  MINISTERS 

Press  release  155  dated  March  2B 

Following  are  the  texts  of  statements  of  welcome, 
m/ide  by  Vice  President  Nixon  and  Secretary 
Dulles  to  the  French  Ministers  on  their  arrival  at 
the  Washingtu7i  National  Airport  on  March  25, 
together  with  the  reply  of  Prime  Minister  Rene 
Mayer: 

Vice  President  Nixon 

I  am  honored  on  behalf  of  the  President  and 
the  Government  of  the  United  States  to  welcome 
the  Prime  Minister,  the  Foreign  Minister,  the 
Minister  for  the  Associated  States  of  Indochina, 
and  the  Finance  Minister  of  our  great  sister  Re- 
public of  France. 

It  is  quite  significant  that  this  is  the  first  official 
visit  of  the  Head  of  Government  of  a  foreign  state 
since  the  inauguration  of  President  Eisenhower. 
It  is,  I  think,  particularly  fitting  that  this  is  the 
case  because  we  all  recall  that  the  Government  of 
France  was  the  first  to  enter  into  diplomatic  re- 
lationships with  our  Government  during  our  war 
of  independence.  It  was  175  years  ago  during  a 
very  bitter  cold  winter  at  Valley  Forge  that  the 
treaty  of  alliance  and  friendship  between  our  two 
countries  was  entered  into,  and  since  that  time, 
over  a  century  and  a  half,  our  two  peoples  and 
our  two  Governments  have  stood  together  in  meet- 
ing great  crises. 

Today  we  are  confronted  with  great  problems 
in  the  world  but  we  are  convinced  that  the  dis- 
cussions and  meetings  which  will  take  place  at  the 
very  highest  level  between  the  representatives  of 
our  two  Governments  will  not  only  assist  in  solv- 
ing the  mutual  problems  which  confront  us  but 
also  will  serve  the  cause  of  peace  and  freedom 
throughout  the  world.     Thank  you. 

Secretary  Dulles 

We  welcome  the  Prime  Minister  of  France,  Mr. 
Mayer,  and  the  Ministers  who  accompany  him. 
We  meet  as  personal  friends  as  well  as  official 
friends.     I  have  long  known  Mr.  Mayer  and  Mr. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Bidault,  now  the  Minister  of  Foreign  Affairs. 
We  resume  here  conversations  which  Mr.  Stassen 
and  I  began  in  Paris  last  month. 

We  meet  here  as  representatives  of  two  great 
and  friendly  powers.  We  in  the  United  States 
respect  and  admire  France,  whose  leaders  vigor- 
ously seized  the  opportunity  to  advance  postwar 
Europe  toward  unity  and  strength.  Among  those 
leaders  stands  Prime  Minister  Mayer,  a  man  of 
vision  and  determination  who  boldly  and  coura- 
geously fights  for  victories  of  peace  in  Europe  and 
victories  of  war  against  communism  in  Asia. 
That  is  the  spirit  which  symbolizes  the  France  we 
love  and  are  proud  to  acclaim  as  our  ally. 

The  Prime  Minister 

I  Mr.  Vice  President,  Mr.  Secretary :  I  am  deeply 
moved  by  your  very  kind  words,  so  deeply  moved 
that  before  I  venture  to  go  to  my  prepared  state- 
ment I  win  try  from  the  bottom  of  my  heart  to 
convey  to  you  the  appreciation  and  friendship 
of  the  people  of  France  to  the  sister  of  liberty 
who  in  our  history  have  always  been  on  the  same 
side. 

We  have  fought  in  two  wars  and  come  out  on 
top,  and  in  Asia  we  are  fighting  side  by  side  and 
with  our  common  determination  and  our  coop- 
eration we  shall  both  see  through  to  victory  and  to 
peace. 

And  now  may  I  turn  to  my  statement:  In  the 
course  of  the  past  few  years,  Mr.  Bidault,  my  col- 
leagues and  mvself  have  several  times  enjoyed  the 
hospitality  of  this  beautiful  capital  and  we  already 
find  a  great  pleasure  in  this  same  friendly  atmos- 
phere. As  I  told  you  in  Paris  a  few  months  ago, 
it  will  be  a  special  privilege  for  us  to  meet  Presi- 
dent Eisenhower  again.  To  the  French,  his  name 
has  been,  since  the  war,  a  symbol  of  victory  and 
freedom  and  it  has  more  recently  become  also  the 
symbol  of  unity  in  the  Atlantic  community. 

We  will  devote  much  time,  during  our  visit 
here,  to  discuss  the  political,  economic,  and  mili- 
tary problems  this  community  is  presently  faced 
with. 

In  this  respect,  we  will  stress  our  efforts  to  build 
up  a  united  Europe  and  to  create  the  European 
Defense  Community  (Edc).  The  Government  I 
preside  has  submitted  the  Edc  treaty  to  the  French 
Parliament  and  has  committed  itself  to  request 
its  ratification.  I  have  clearly  stated  the  pre- 
requisite conditions  of  this  ratification. 

We  will  likewise  discuss  our  common  problems 
outside  Europe.  In  Asia,  our  two  countries  have 
unfortunately  a  large  number  of  soldiers  engaged 
in  bitter  fighting  against  the  same  enemy.  How 
we  can  best  defeat  aggression  will  be  an  essential 
part  of  our  talks.  We  are  confident  we  will,  like 
you  in  Korea,  reach  victory  in  Indochina  with 
the  participation  of  the  peoples  of  Vietnam,  Laos, 
and  Cambodia.  In  many  other  areas  of  the  world, 
[   we  also  have  common  responsibilities  or  identical 

April  6,   1953 


duties,  among  which  the  advancement  of  democ- 
racy and  the  progress  of  economic  welfare  in 
underdeveloped  areas  occupy  a  prominent  place. 

I  feel  sure  that  our  mutal  understanding  and 
our  unity  of  action  will  greatly  benefit  from  these 
consultations. 


U.S.  Represented  on  Commission 

for   Anglo-Egyptian   Sudan    Elections 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  March 
23  (press  release  154)  that,  in  reply  to  requests 
received  from  the  Governments  of  Egypt  and  the 
United  Kingdom,  the  Government  of  the  United 
States  has  agreed  to  participate  on  the  Mixed 
Electoral  Commission  for  the  Anglo-Egyptian 
Sudan.  Warwick  Perkins,  a  Foreign  Service 
career  officer  of  class  one,  has  been  nominated 
as  U.S.  representative  on  the  Commission.  Mr. 
Perkins  departed  for  Khartoum  on  March  19, 
1953,  and  has  been  accorded  by  the  President  the 
personal  rank  of  Minister  for  the  duration  of  his 
service  on  this  Commission. 

The  Anglo-Egyptian  Agreement  of  February 
12,  1953,  on  the  Sudan  provided  for  the  election 
of  a  Sudanese  Parliament  as  a  step  toward  self- 
government  and  self-determination  in  that  coun- 
try. The  election  is  to  be  supervised  by  a  Mixed 
Electoral  Commission  consisting  of  representa- 
tives of  the  Sudan,  Egypt,  India,  the  United 
Kingdom,  and  the  United  States. 

Harold  W.  Glidden,  who  is  at  present  a  member 
of  the  Department's  Division  of  Research  for  the 
Near  East,  will  assist  Mr.  Perkins.  Also  a  Foreign 
Service  officer,  he  formerly  was  attached  to  the 
Embassy  at  Cairo. 


President  Expresses  Sympatiiy 
on  Death  of  Queen  Mary 

White  House  press  release  dated  March  24 

The  President  on  March  £4,  sent  the  following 
cable  to  Winthrop  Aldrich,  tl.S.  Arribassador  to 
the  Court  of  St.  James,  for  delivery  to  Queen 
Elizabeth  II: 

Please  extend  to  Her  Majesty  and  to  all  the 
members  and  peoples  of  the  British  Common- 
wealth my  deep  personal  sympathy  on  the  passing 
of  Queen  Mary.  The  hearts  of  all  Americans  go 
out  to  Her  Majesty  tonight  as  our  prayers  are 
extended  to  her,  Princess  Margaret  and  the  mem- 
bers of  the  Royal  Family  for  the  great  personal 
loss  they  have  sustained. "  Queen  Mary  was  a  good 
and  great  Queen.  Free  peoples  the  world  over 
will  mourn  her  loss. 

D WIGHT  D.  Eisenhower 


493 


Exchange  of  Sick  and  Wounded  Prisoners  of  War 


On  February  "22  Gen.  Mark  Clark,  V.N.  Com- 
mander in  Korea,  asked  the  North  Korean  and 
Chinese  C ommunist  leaders  to  agree  to  an  imme- 
diate exchange  of  sick  and  woxmded  prisoners  of 
war.  The  proposal  was  one  that  had  heen  -made 
several  times  since  the  beginjiing  of  trnce  nego- 
tiations in  July  1951.  On  March  28  the  Peiping 
radio  broadcast  the  text  of  a  reply  in  which  the 
Communist  leaders  expressed  willingness  to  pro- 
ceed with  the  repatriation  of  sick  and  wounded 
prisoners  and  proposed  resumption  of  the  truce 
negotiations  which  were  suspended  on  October  8, 
1952.  Following  are  texts  of  the  correspondence 
and,  of  statements  by  Secretary  Dulles  and  Lincoln 
White,  Deputy  Special  Assistant  for  Press 
Relatione. 


GENERAL  CLARK'S  LETTER 

To  Kim  II  Sung,  Supreme  Commander  of  the 
Korean  People's  Army,  and  Pen<r  Teh-Huai,  Com- 
mander of  the  Chinese  People's  Volunteers : 

The  Executive  Committee  of  the  League  of  Eed 
Cross  Societies,  in  a  resolution  adopted  in  Geneva, 
Switzerland,  on  1?>  December  1952  called  on  both 
sides  in  the  Korean  conflict  as  a  gesture  of  good 
will  to  take  immediate  action  in  implementing  the 
humanitarian  provisions  of  the  Geneva  Conven- 
tion by  repatriating  sick  and  wounded  prisoners 
of  war  in  accordance  with  appropriate  articles  of 
the  Geneva  Convention. 

As  has  been  repeatedly  stated  to  you  in  the 
course  of  negotiations  at  Panmunjom  the  United 
Nations  Command  has  from  the  very  beginning 
adhered  scrupulously  to  the  humanitarian  provi- 
sions of  the  Geneva  Convention  and  in  particular 
has  been  pi'epared  to  carry  out  the  provisions  of 
the  Geneva  Convention  in  regard  to  the  sick  and 
wounded  prisoners  in  its  custody.  The  United 
Nations  Command  remains  ready  immediately  to 
repatriate  those  seriously  sick  and  seriously 
wounded  captured  personnel  who  are  fit  to  travel 
in  accordance  witii  provisions  of  Article  109  of 
the  Geneva  Convention. 

I  wish  to  be  informed  whether  you  are  prepared 
for  your  part  to  proceed  immediately  with  the  re- 


patriation of  seriously  sick  and  wounded  capturec 
personnel  of  the  United  Nations  Command  who 
are  in  your  hands.  The  United  Nations  Com- 
mand liaison  officers  will  be  prepared  to  meet  your 
liaison  officers  to  make  necessary  arrangements  ■ 
for  impartial  verification  of  the  conditions  and 
for  the  mutual  exchange  of  such  seriously  sick  and 
wounded  in  accordance  with  the  provisions  oi 
Article  109  of  the  Geneva  Convention. 


COMMUNISTS'  REPLY  ' 

General  Mark  Clark,  Commander  in  Chief,  United 
Nations  Command : 

We  received  your  letter,  dated  February  22d. 
concerning  the  question  of  repatriation,  with  pri- 
ority, of  seriously  sick  and  seriously  injured 
prisoners  of  war  of  both  sides.  The  delegates  for 
armistice  negotiations  of  both  sides  had,  as  a 
matter  of  fact,  reached  agreement  in  accordance 
with  humanitarian  principles  on  paragraph  53  of 
the  draft  Korean  armistice  agreement. 

It  was  solely  because  the  Korean  armistice  ne- 
gotiations were  suspended  that  there  was  no  way 
to  implement  this  agreed  provision.  In  conse- 
quence, it  has  not  been  possible,  up  to  the  present, 
to  repatriate  seriously  sick  and  seriously  injured 
prisoners  of  war  of  both  sides. 

Since  your  side  now  expresses  readiness  to  apply 
the  provisions  of  the  Geneva  Convention  to  sick 
and  injured  prisoners  of  war  in  the  custody  of 
both  sides,  our  side,  as  an  expression  of  similar 
intent,  fully  agrees  to  your  side's  proposal  to 
excliange  sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war  of 
both  sides  during  the  period  of  hostilities. 

This  proposal  could  be  dealt  with  in  accordance 
with  the  provisions  of  Article  109  of  the  Geneva 
Convention. 

At  the  same  time  we  consider  that  the  reasonable 
settlement  of  the  question  of  exchanging  sick  and 
injured  prisoners  of  war  of  both  sides  during  the 
period  of  hostilities  should  be  made  to  lead  to  the 
smooth  settlement  of  the  entire  question  of  pris- 
oners of  war,  thereby  achieving  an  armistice  in 
Korea,  for  which  peoples  throughout  the  world 
are  longing. 


494 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


Therefore,  our  side  proposes  that  the  delegates 
'or  armistice  negotiations  of  both  sides  immedi- 
ately resume  the  negotiations  at  Panmunjom. 
Furthermore,  our  liaison  officer  is  prepared  to 
neet  your  liaison  officer  to  discuss  and  decide  on 
he  date  for  resuming  the  negotiations. 

Supreme  Commander  of  the  Korean  PeopWs 
\i,)iy.  Kim  II  Sung 

Commander  of  the  Chinese  People's  Volunteers 

Peng  Teh-Htjai 


STATEMENT  BY  SECRETARY  DULLES 

['r.'vs  release  159  dated  March  28 

For  some  time  in  the  past,  the  U.N.  Command 
in  Korea  has  been  seeking  an  exchange  of  wounded 
and  sick  prisoners  of  war  as  a  humanitarian  move. 
These  eiforts  have  been  without  result  until  on 
February  22,  1953,  that  effort  was  resumed.  It 
now  appears  that  our  offer  made  on  that  date  has 
been  accepted. 

The  U.S.  Government  hopes  that  this  exchange 
of  prisoners  will  occur  promptly  and  provide 
relief  to  those  who  suffer  and  to  their  anxious  rela- 
tives and  friends. 


STATEMENT  BY  PRESS  OFFICER  WHITE* 

[Excerpts] 

The  Communist  message  is  an  unconditional 
acceptance  of  the  proposal  made  by  General  Clark 
on  February  22  for  the  exchange  of  sick  and 
wounded  prisoners  of  war  who  are  fit  to  travel  in 
accordance  with  article  109  of  the  Geneva  Con- 
vention. 

That  article  provides  just  that:  that  prisoners 
of  war — that  is,  sick  and  wounded  prisoners  of 
war  who  are  fit  to  travel— be  permitted  to  go  home 
on  a  voluntary— I  emphasize  voluntary— basis. 

Clark's  letter  made  the  specific  proposal  that 
arrangements  be  made  to  carry  this  out  through 
the  liaison  officers.  Therefore,  this  does  not  re- 
quire a  resumption  of  armistice  negotiations  by 
the  delegations.  The  acceptance  of  this  Pow  pro- 
posal is  an  entirely  separate  question.     .  .  . 

Now,  as  I  say,  the  precise  figures  will  have  to 
be  worked  out  between  the  liaison  people,  and  on 
the  exchange  itself  Clark  has  full  authority  to  go 
ahead.  He  has  had  it  since  this  offer  was 
made.     .  .  . 


-  Made  at  a  press  and  radio  conference  on  Mar.  28. 


Editob'8  Note.     Following  are  the  texts  of  the  relevant 
I  articles  of  the  Geneva  Convention : 

Article  109 

Subject  to  the  provisions  of  the  third  paragraph  of  this 
Article,  Parties  to  the  conflict  are  bound  to  send  back  to 
their  own  country,  regardless  of  number  or  rank,  seriously 
wounded  and  seriously  sick  prisoners  of  war,  after  having 
cared  for  them  until  they  are  fit  to  travel.  In  accordance 
with  the  first  paragraph  of  the  following  Article. 

Throughout  the  duration  of  hostilities,  Parties  to  the 
conflict  shall  endeavour,  with  the  cooperation  of  the  neu- 
tral Powers  concerned,  to  make  agreements  for  the  accom- 
modation in  neutral  countries  of  the  sick  and  wounded 
prisoners  of  war  referred  to  in  the  second  paragraph  of 
the  following  Article.  They  may,  in  addition,  conclude 
agreements  with  a  view  to  the  direct  repatriation  or 
Internment  in  a  neutral  country  of  able-bodied  prisoners 
of  war  who  have  undergone  a  long  period  of  captivity. 

No  sick  or  injured  prisoner  of  war  who  is  eligible  for 
repatriation  under  the  first  paragraph  of  this  Article,  may 
be  repatriated  against  his  will  during  hostilities. 

Article  110 

The  following  shall  be  repatriated  direct: 

(1)  Incurably  wounded  and  sick  whose  mental  or  phy- 
sical fitness  seems  to  have  been  gravely  diminished. 

(2)  Wounded  and  sick  who,  according  to  medical  opin- 
ion, are  not  likely  to  recover  within  one  year,  whose 
condition  requires  treatment  and  whose  mental  or  pnysi- 
cal  fitness  seems  to  have  been  gravely  diminished. 

(3)  Wounded  and  sick  who  have  recovered,  but  whose 
mental  or  physical  fitness  seems  to  have  been  gravely  and 
permanently  diminished. 


The  following  may  be  accommodated  in  a  neutral 
country : 

(1)  Wounded  and  sick  whose  recovery  may  be  expected 
within  one  vear  of  the  date  of  the  wound  or  the  beginning 
of  the  illness,  if  treatment  in  a  neutral  country  might 
increase   the   prospects   of  a    more   certain   and   speedy 

(2)  Prisoners  of  war  whose  mental  or  physical  health, 
according  to  medical  opinion,  is  seriously  threatened  by 
continued  captivity,  but  whose  accommodation  m  a  neu- 
tral country  might  remove  such  a  threat. 

The  conditions  which  prisoners  of  war  accommodated 
in  a  neutral  country  must  fulfill  in  order  to  permit  their 
repatriation  shall  be  fixed,  as  shall  likewise  their  status, 
by  agreement  between  the  Powers  concerned.  In  general, 
prisoners  of  war  who  have  been  accommodated  in  a  neu- 
tral country,  and  who  belong  to  the  following  categories, 
should  be  repatriated: 

(1)  Those  whose  state  of  health  has  deteriorated  so  as 
to  fulfill  the  conditions  laid  down  for  direct  repatriation ; 

(2)  Those  whose  mental  or  physical  powers  remain, 
even  after  treatment,  considerably  impaired. 

If  no  special  agreements  are  concluded  between  the 
Parties  to  the  conflict  concerned,  to  determine  the  cases 
of  disablement  or  sickness  entailing  direct  repatriation 
or  accommodation  in  a  neutral  country,  such  cases  shall 
be  settled  in  accordance  with  the  principles  laid  down  in 
the  Model  Agreement  concerning  direct  repatriation  and 
accommodation  in  neutral  countries  of  wounded  and  sick 
prisoners  of  war  and  in  the  Regulations  concerning  Mixed 
Medical  Commissions  annexed  to  the  present  Convention. 


April   6,    1953 


495 


Formal  Diplomatic  Claims  Preferred  Against  Hungary  and  U.  S.  S.  R. 
for  Their  Conduct  in  1951  Plane  Case 


SUMMARY  OF  U.  S.  NOTES  OF  MARCH  17 


Press  release  140  dated  March  17 

The  U.S.  Government  on  March  17  preferred 
formal  diplomatic  claims  against  the  Soviet  and 
Hungarian  Governments  on  account  of  their  con- 
duct in  the  case  of  the  USAF  C-47  airplane  6026 
and  its  crew  who  came  down  in  Hungary  on  No- 
vember 19,  1951.  These  claims  were  contained  in 
notes  delivered  on  March  17  to  the  Soviet  Govern- 
ment by  Jacob  D.  Beam,  Charge  d'Affaires  ad 
tntenm  of  the  United  States  at  Moscow,  and  to 
tlie  Hungarian  Government  by  George  M.  Abbott, 
Charge  d'Affaires  ad  interim  of  the  United  States 
at  Budapest.^ 

The  note  directed  to  the  Soviet  Government  in- 
corporates, by  reference,  the  allegations  in  the  note 
directed  to  the  Hungarian  Government,  and  vice 
versa.  The  notes  assert  a  joint  and  several  liability 
on  the  part  of  both  Governments  for  all  the  dam- 
age caused  by  them  to  the  United  States  and  to 
the  four  American  airmen  who  constituted  the 
crew  of  the  airplane:  Capt.  Dave  H.  Henderson, 
Capt.  John  J.  Swift,  Sgt.  Jess  A.  Duff,  and  Sgt. 
James  A.  Elam. 

The  notes  demand  payment  of  $637,894.15  in 
damages,  broken  down  into  $98,779.29  with  inter- 
est at  6  percent  from  November  19,  1951,  for  the 
value  of  the  airplane,  its  equipment,  and  cargo; 
$123,605.15  with  interest  at  6  percent  from  De- 
cember 28,  1951,  on  account  of  the  fine  paid  by 
the  U.S.  Government  to  the  Hungarian  Govern- 
ment under  protest  to  obtain  the  release  of  the  four 
airmen ;  $200,000,  the  amount  of  the  damages  to 
the  four  airmen  in  consequence  of  their  unlawful 
detention  and  mistreatment,  and  manifest  denials 
ot  justice  concerted  against  them  by  both  accused 
Governments;  and  $215,509.67  on  account  of  the 
damages  to  the  United  States  by  both  accused 
Governments  acting  in  concert,    the  notes  state: 

'  Texts  of  the  notes,  iu  pamphlet  form,  mav  be  obtained 

Jo!".''°?, '"  '^*'  '^^'^^  "f  ">"  Legal  Adviser,  Department 
of  State,  Washington  25,  D.  C. 

496 


The  United  States  Government  declares  that  the  figure 
of  $215,509.67  .  .  .  does  not  include  any  sum  on  account 
of  the  Item  of  intangible  injury  deliberately  and  inten- 
tionally caused  the  United  States  Government  and  the 
Aniencan  people  by  the  wrongful  actions  of  the  Soviet 
and  Hungarian  Governments.  Such  injury  is  not  easily 
calculable  in  money  and  money  could  not  compensate  for 
It.  The  United  States  Government  has  determined  there- 
fore, for  the  present  to  defer  the  formulation  of  the  kind 
and  measure  of  redress  or  other  action  the  Soviet  Govern- 
ment  and  the  Hungarian  Government  should  take  which 
would  be  appropriate  in  international  law  and  practice  to 
confirm  the  illegality  of  the  actions  directed  by  them 
against  the  United  States  Government  and  the  American 
people. 

The  liability  of  the  two  Governments  being  joint 
and  several,  any  payments  by  either  Government 
would  be  considered  as  a  credit  to  the  account  of 
the  other,  but  both  remain  liable  to  the  United 
States  for  the  entire  sum. 

If  the  Soviet  and  Hungarian  Governments,  in 
their  reply,  acknowledge  indebtedness  and  agree 
to  pay  damages  due  the  United  States,  the  U.S. 
Government  is  prepared  to  present  detailed  evi- 
dence m  support  of  its  calculations  of  damages 
suffered  and  alleged.  The  notes  conclude  that  in 
the  event  that  the  accused  Governments  contest 
liability  they  should  so  state,  and  they  are  notified 
that  the  U.S.  Government  proposes  in  that  event 
that  the  disputes  be  presented  for  hearing  and  de- 
cision in  the  International  Court  of  Justice. 
Since  the  Soviet  and  Hungarian  Governments 
have  not  accepted  the  compulsory  jurisdiction  of 
the  International  Court  of  Justice,  they  are  re- 
quested to  take  the  necessary  steps  to  empower 
the  Court  to  determine  the  issues  of  fact  and  law 
set  forth  in  the  notes.  i 

Notes  heretofore  delivered  by  the  U.S.  Govern-    I 
ment  to  the  two  accused  Governments  =  were  in- 
tended as  preliminary  to  the  preference  by  the 
United  States  of  formal  diplomatic  claims.     The 

'  Bulletin  of  Dec.  22,  1952,  pp.  981-984 ;  iftid.,  Jan   12, 
1953,  pp.  51-52;  and  »6irf.,  Feb.  16,  1953,  pp.  258-259. 

Deporfmenf  of  %iaie  Bullef'm 


preliminary  notes  gave  both  Governments  ade- 
quate opportunity  to  return  the  plane  and  its 
equipment  and  cargo  which  they  had  unlawfully 
seized,  to  disclose  evidence  in  their  possession 
,bearing  on  the  incident,  and  to  provide  justifica- 
'tion,  if  any  existed,  for  the  actions  which  they 
took.  Both  Governments  failed  or  declined  to 
make  responsive  or  satisfactory  replies  or  to  pro- 
vide any  of  the  material  requested.  Thereupon 
the  liability  of  both  Governments  for  acts  of  con- 
certed and  deliberate  international  wrong  to  the 
four  airmen  and  to  the  United  States  became 
legally  absolute. 

The  notes  delivered  on  March  17  set  out  in  con- 
siderable detail,  for  the  first  time,  the  essential 
facts  which  an  intensive  investigation  by  the  U.S. 
Government  since  the  incident  occurred  has  dis- 
closed, and  which  the  U.S.  Government  "is  pi'e- 
pared  to  prove  in  an  appropriate  forum  by  evi- 
dence." The  violations  both  of  international  law 
and  existing  treaty  obligations,  of  which  the 
Soviet  and  Hungarian  Governments  are  guilty, 
are  also  set  out. 

The  notes  show  the  flight  of  C^7  6026  from 
Erding,  Germany,  on  November  19,  1951,  was 
solely  for  the  purpose  of  delivering  air  freight 
to  the  American  air  attache  at  Belgrade;  that  the 
airplane  was  blown  off  course  by  winds  whose  di- 
rection and  velocity  were  unknown  to  the  crew; 
that  the  plane  unknown  to  the  crew  flew  north  of 
course  to  Rumania;  that,  therefore,  being  unable 
to  descend  at  Belgrade  the  crew  turned  westward 
to  return  to  their  base;  and  that  unwittingly  they 
crossed  the  Hungarian  border. 

The  notes  assert  further  that  the  crew,  finding 
they  were  lost,  in  darkness,  and  running  low  in 
fuel,  made  every  effort  to  obtain  assistance  from 
persons  on  the  ground;  that  the  Soviet  and 
Hungarian  authorities  knowing  these  facts  delib- 
erately withheld  assistance  and  then,  by  pre- 
arrangement,  when  the  airplane  was  a  few  minutes 
from  the  safety  of  the  British  Zone  of  Austria,  a 
Soviet  fighter  craft  brought  the  plane  down  at 
what  turned  out  to  be  a  Soviet-controlled  field  near 
Papa,  Hungary.  It  is  asserted  that  the  crew  at  no 
time  knew  that  they  were  overflying  any  country 
but  Yugoslavia  and  thought  they  had  landed  in 
Yugoslavia  when  they  came  down  at  6 :00  p.  m.  on 
the  evening  of  November  19,  1951. 

The  note  to  the  Soviet  Government  then  details 
the  various  illegal  actions  taken  by  the  Soviet 
authorities  against  the  men,  such  as  their  seizure 
and  detention,  refusal  to  notify  the  U.S.  Govern- 
ment that  the  plane  had  come  down  safely  on 
Hungarian  soil  and  was  in  Soviet  custody,  causing 
the  United  States  to  spend  large  sums  in  fruitless 
search ;  although  the  men  truthfully  answered  all 
questions  put  to  them,  the  Soviet  authorities  de- 
ceived them  into  believing  that  they  would  be  freed 
but  refused  them  access  to  American  officials  in 
Hungary  and  then  turned  them  over  to  Hungarian 


authorities.  Both  notes  point  out  that  the  Soviet 
Government  had  no  authority  whatever  to  turn 
the  men  or  the  plane  over  to  Hungarian  authori- 
ties, and  assert  that  the  Soviet  Government  re- 
mains liable  for  the  seizure  and  conversion  of  the 
airplane  and  its  contents. 

The  legal  authority  of  the  Soviet  Government  to 
exercise  sovereignty  in  Hungary  is  flatly  denied. 

Asserting  that  the  Soviet  Government  and  the 
Hungarian  Government  aided  and  abetted  each 
other  in  the  events  that  took  place  from  November 
19  on,  the  note  to  the  Soviet  Government  specifies 
various  false  statements  made  by  the  Soviet  Gov- 
ernment on  this  subject,  particularly  those  by  the 
Soviet  Foreign  Office  and  by  the  Soviet  Foreign 
Minister  Andrei  Y.  Vyshinsky  in  the  course  of 
debates  in  the  U.N.  General  Assembly  at  Paris  in 
December  1951  and  January  1952.  Point  by  point, 
the  United  States  demonstrates  the  falsity  of  the 
statements  made  by  Vyshinsky  and  states  that 
these  statements  were  known  to  the  Soviet  Govern- 
ment to  be  false  when  they  were  made. 

The  note  to  the  Hungarian  Government  sets 
forth  in  detail  the  actions  which  the  Hungarian 
Government  took  against  the  men  after  they  were 
turned  over  to  Hungarian  custody.  It  details  the 
acts  of  deception  and  fraud  against  the  four  air- 
men, and  recounts  in  detail  the  star-chamber  pro- 
ceedings against  the  men  on  trumped-up  charges 
by  a  military  court  in  Budapest. 

The  recitals  show  that  the  men  were  placed  on 
trial  without  warning,  without  a  chance  to  choose 
counsel  or  to  prepare  a  defense  or  to  understand 
the  charges.  The  trial  is  shown  to  have  been  re- 
plete not  only  with  violations  of  international  law 
but  with  violations  of  clear  provisions  of  Hun- 
garian domestic  law  and  procedure.  The  note 
characterizes  as  false,  and  as  known  by  the  Hun- 
garian Government  to  be  false,  various  statements 
which  the  Hungarian  Government  has  made  with 
respect  to  the  trial,  including  those  made  in  the 
Hungarian  Government's  most  recent  notes  to  the 
United  States  on  this  subject,  the  latest  being 
February  9,  1953. 

The  note  to  the  Hungarian  Government  further 
points  out  that  the  judgment  of  the  military  court 
fining  the  airmen  360,000  forints  (over  $30,000) 
each  was  without  any  justification  even  by  any 
provision  of  Hungarian  law.  As  further  evi- 
dence of  the  true  motives  of  the  two  Governments, 
the  note  discloses  the  violation  by  the  Hungarian 
Government  of  three  existing  written  agreements 
between  the  United  States  and  Hungary  by  which 
the  U.S.  Government  had  the  right  to  call  on  the 
Hungarian  Government  to  provide  local  currency 
to  the  United  States  for  expenditures  in  Hungary 
out  of  a  large  dollar  balance  then  due  to  the  U.S. 
Government  from  the  Hungarian  Government. 
The  Hungarian  Government  arbitrarily  de- 
manded that  the  United  States  pay  U.S.  dollars 
from  sources  outside  of  Hungary  on  account  of 
the  fine,  although  the  fine  was  levied  in  local  cur- 


April  6,   J  953 


497 


rency.  The  note  charges  that  nevertheless  the 
United  States  paid  the  dollars  demanded,  under 
protest,  and  points  out  that  if  the  United  States 
had  not  paid,  the  two  accused  Governments  plan- 
ned to  turn  the  men  over  for  trials  in  Rumania 
and  perhaps  other  Soviet-controlled  areas. 

The  motives  of  the  accused  Governments  are 
related  to  a  Soviet  propaganda  campaign  in  the 
General  Assembly  of  the  United  Nations  meeting 
in  Paris,  and  to  a  purpose  of  extorting  dollars 
from  the  United  States  and  of  converting  to  their 
own  use  the  i^jnerican  airplane  and  its  contents. 
The  notes  say : 

The  actions  of  the  Soviet  and  Hungarian  Governments 
with  reference  to  this  matter  coincided  in  time  with  the 
meeting  of  the  General  Assembly  of  the  United  Nations 
in  Paris.  The  Soviet  Government,  in  prearranged  concert 
with  its  allies  (including  the  Hungarian  Government), 
in  and  out  of  the  United  Nations,  were  engaged  in  a 
campaign  of  propaganda  and  vilification  against  the 
United  States,  seeking  to  make  it  appear  that  the  United 
States  Government  had  embarked  on  a  program  of  sub- 
version of  the  Soviet  and  allied  governments  under  the 
authority  of  the  Mutual  Security  Act  enacted  by  the 
United  States  Congress.  The  United  States  Government 
believes,  and  asserts,  that  this  campaign  was  intended  by 
the_  Soviet  Government  to  divert  the  minds  of  the  inter- 
national public  and  the  member  governments  of  the  United 
Nations,  then  meeting  in  Paris,  from  the  systematic  oper- 
ations of  international  subversion  of  estai)lished  govern- 
ments and  social  institutions  throughout  the  world,  and 
other  misconduct,  carried  on  by  the  Soviet  Government 
and  its  allies,  overtly  and  secretly. 

Largely  unsuccessful  in  this  campaign,  the  Soviet  and 
Hungarian  Governments  in  concert  seized  upon  the  for- 
tuitous and  wholly  innocent  presence,  within  their  physi- 
cal power,  of  four  American  airmen  whom  they  had 
caused  to  come  down  in  Hungary  and  be  detained  "there, 
in  order  to  provide  so-called  evidence  to  prove  the  Soviet 
and  Soviet-allied  propaganda  charges  against  the  United 
States.  Knowing  at  all  times  that  the  charges  against 
the  airmen,  as  against  the  United  States,  were  false  and 
unfounded  and  that  a  free  and  open  hearing  or  investiga- 
tion according  to  the  practice  of  civilized  and  honorable 
governments  would  demonstrate  the  falsity  of  these 
charges  the  Soviet  and  Hungarian  Governments  in  con- 
cert deliberately  denied  the  airmen  access  to  American 
consular  or  diplomatic  authorities,  denied  the  airmen 
representation  by  independent  legal  counsel,  subjected 
the  airmen  to  a  trial  by  a  military  court  whose  iudgment 
was  predetermined,  held  the  trial  in  camera  where  no 
member  of  the  public  was  present,  kept  the  airmen  con- 
tinuously incommunicado,  denied  them  and  the  United 
States  Government  access  to  judicial  records  and  dossiers 
in  the  case,  and  in  other  ways  attempted  to  conceal 
from  the  airmen,  the  United  States  Government,  and  the 
international  public  the  manifest  iniustices  deliberately 
perpetrated  by  the  Soviet  and  Hungarian  Governments 
upon  these  American  nationals  as  upon  the  United  States 
Government. 

The  statements  issued  by  the  Soviet  and  Hungarian 
authorities  in  concert  with  respect  to  this  matter  were 
deliberately  and  wilfully  broadcast  to  the  world  by  these 
governments,  or  were  uttered  so  as  to  be  so  broadcast  in 
the  usual  dissemination  of  news  of  international  interest, 
with  the  purpose  and  intention  of  causing  damage  to 
the  United  States  and  to  the  airmen  themselves. 

The  United  States  Government  is  compelled  to  conclude, 
and  it  charges,  that  the  foregoing  actions,  whether  com- 
mitted separately  by  the  Soviet  Government  or  in  con- 
junction or  in  concert  with  the  Hungarian  Government. 
were  deliberately  and  unlawfully  committed  with  ulterior 
intent  to  serve  a  propaganda  purpose  of  the  Soviet  Gov- 

498 


ernment,  to  cause  unlawful  damage  to  the  four  American 
airmen  above  named,  and  to  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment, to  convert  unlawfully  to  the  use  and  profit  of  the 
Soviet  Government  and  the  Hungarian  Government  the 
United  States  Air  Force  plane  6026,  its  equipment  and 
its  cargo,  and  to  obtain  unlawfully  from  the  United 
States  the  sum  of  .$123,605.15. 


Mr.  Dougfas  Heads  Trade  Survey 

At  his  press  conference  on  March  19  the  Presi- 
dent announced  that  Lewis  W.  Douglas,  former 
Ambassador  to  the  United  Kingdom  and  former 
Director  of  the  Budget,  had  been  named  head  of 
a  committee  to  study  U.S.  trade  relations.  The 
group  will  make  a  broad  survey  which  will  cover 
money  problems,  commodities,  raw  materials, 
markets,  and  surpluses. 


Expansion  of  Point  Four  Program 
in  Egypt 

Press  release  145  dated  March  19 

A  large-scale  program  in  which  the  United 
States  will  assist  the  Government  of  Egypt  in 
reclaiming  wastelands  and  resettling  landless 
farmers  was  announced  on  March  19  by  the  Tech- 
nical Cooperation  Administration,  Department  of 
State. 

An  agreement  covering  the  cooperative  pro- 
gram, which  involves  a  considerable  expansion  of 
Point  Four  activities  in  Egypt,  was  signed  at 
Cairo  on  that  date  by  representatives  of  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  United  States  and  the  Government 
of  Egypt. 

Tlie  United  States  will  contribute  $10,000,000 
to  a  joint  fund,  to  which  the  Government  of  Egypt 
will  contribute  a  sum  amounting  to  approximately 
the  equivalent  of  $15,700,000  in  Egyptian  pounds. 
An  Egyptian-American  Rural  Improvement 
Service  is  being  established  to  administer  tlie  fund, 
which  will  be  jointly  controlled  by  the  president 
of  the  Egyptian  National  Resources  Development 
Board  and  John  R.  Nichols,  director  of  the  Point 
Four  Program  in  Egypt. 

Present  plans  call  for  carrying  out  the  develop- ' 
ment  work  in  two  project  areas,  one  in  the  Delta 
province  of  Baheira  and  the  other  in  the  province  i 
of  Fayoum,  south  of  Cairo.     Some  20,000  acres  1 
in  the  Baheii;a  area  and  G0,000  acres  in  the  Fayoum 
will  be  reclaimed  by  drainage  and  other  mea'sures 
and  a  total  of  about  16,000  families  of  landless  ^ 
peasants  will  be  resettled,  according  to  prelimi- 
nary estimates. 

The  present  Government  of  Egypt  has  under- 
taken a  vigorous  program  of  reform  and  national 
development,  aimed  primarily  at  improving  the 
lot  of  Egypt's  20  million  people,  most  of  whom 
are  dependent  upon  agriculture  for  a  living.  The 
typical  peasant  is  extremely  poor  and  agricultural 
land  is  scarce.    Less  than  4  percent  of  Egypt's 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


area  is  habitable,  and  the  population  density  aver- 
ages about  1,600  persons  to  the  square  mile  of 
cultivated  area. 

Secretary  Dulles  recently  expressed  the  interest 
of  the  United  States  and  its  sympathy  for  the 
progressive  attitude  and  energetic  efforts  of  the 
Government  of  General  Naguib  to  meet  and  over- 
come the  internal  problems  that  face  the  Egyptian 
people,  and  wished  the  Government  every  success 
in  its  efforts.' 

The  land-development  and  resettlement  pro- 
gram represents  a  major  expansion  of  American 
assistance  to  Egypt  in  its  economic  development. 
Cooperative  Point  Four  activities  in  Egypt  at 
the  present  time  involve  expenditures  of  about 
$".000,000  by  the  Technical  Cooperation  Admin- 
istration in  the  fiscal  year  ending  June  30,  1953. 

These  activities,  carried  out  under  the  general 
Point  Four  agreement  between  the  United  States 
and  Egypt,  signed  May  5,  1-951,"  consist  of  techni- 
cal advice  and  demonstration  supplies  and  equip- 
ment in  various  fields  including  agi'iculture, 
health,  education,  rural  improvement,  industrial 
development,  natural  resources,  and  public  ad- 
ministration. A  demonstration  of  range  improve- 
ment is  under  way  in  the  western  desert  which 
it  is  hoped  will  result  in  the  eventual  development 
of  2  or  3  million  acres  for  livestock  production. 
A  team  of  American  industrial  specialists  is  help- 
ing the  Egyptian  Government  locate  and  promote 
oiiportunities  for  industrial  expansion  with  the 
aid  of  private  capital.  Improved  building  ma- 
terials from  inexpensive  local  sources  are  being 
perfected.  American  technicians  are  assisting 
their  Egyptian  colleagues  in  rural-improvement 
activities  through  village  centers,  helping  improve 
health  and  sanitation  conditions,  aiding  in  im- 
proving educational  facilities  and  methods,  and 
helping  train  Egyptian  technicians  in  many  kinds 
of  specialized  work. 

The  resettlement  projects  to  be  undertaken  as  a 
result  of  the  new  agreement  will  be  developed 
around  villages,  the  accepted  pattern  of  rural  life 
in  Egypt.  These  villages  will  be  planned  and 
built  with  fullest  use  of  local  labor  and  materials. 
Improved  housing,  community  facilities,  voca- 
tional schools,  public-health  services,  sanitation 
works,  small-scale  marketing  and  processing  facil- 
ities for  farm  crops,  and  farm-to-market  roads 
must  be  provided  in  the  project  areas.  They  will 
employ  the  services  of  the  villagers  to  the  greatest 
possible  extent.  The  project  also  includes  assist- 
ance in  the  organization  and  operation  of  coop- 
eratives, demonstrations  of  improved  water  con- 
servation and  management  practices,  training  of 
agricultural  extension  and  other  rural-service 
workers,  and  advice  to  the  farmers  in  farm  man- 
agement and  improved  methods. 


"  Bulletin  of  Feb.  23,  1953,  p.  306. 
'  Ibid.,  May  21,  I'Jol,  p.  823. 


MSA  Defense  Support  Funds 
for  Turkey 

The  Mutual  Security  Agency  announced  on 
March  17  that  Turkey  will  receive  $54  million  in 
MsA  defense  support  funds  during  the  present 
fiscal  year. 

These  funds,  Msa  said,  will  permit  Turkey  to 
purchase  essential  capital  equipment  and  other 
commodities  which  are  important  to  Turkey's  ex- 
panding defense  effort.  Turkey  also  is  receiving 
substantial  amounts  of  American  assistance 
through  participation  in  Msa's  productivity  and 
technical  assistance  program  and  the  military  end- 
item  progi-am  of  the  Department  of  Defense. 
MsA  may^nake  available  a  further  $1  million  for 
Turkey  if  agi-eement  is  reached  on  the  use  of 
special  funds'for  the  promotion  of  free  enterpi'ise. 

To  date  Msa  has  made  allotments  totaling  $45 
million  to  Turkey  for  the  current  fiscal  year. 

Reporting  on  the  Turkish  defense  effort,  Msa 
said  that  Turkey  is  devoting  approximately  40 
percent  of  its  national  budget,  including  counter- 
jjart  funds,  for  defense  and  that  its  military  force, 
in  relation  to  population,  is  one  of  the  highest  of 
the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization  (Nato) 
members.  Next  to  South  Korea,  the  United 
States,  and  the  British  Commonwealth,  Turkey  is 
making  the  largest  contribution  to  the  U.N.  forces 
in  Korea. 

Defense  support  funds  are  designed  to  permit 
the  European  Nato  members  to  make  greater  con- 
tributions to  the  common  defense  effort  than 
would  be  possible  with  their  own  resources.  Tur- 
key's position  as  a  gi'owing  producer  of  such 
highly  important  strategic  materials  as  copper, 
magnesium,  and  chrome,  as  well  as  other  com- 
modities such  as  wheat  and  coal  is  an  important 
factor,  Msa  points  out,  in  developing  a  stronger 
Turkish  economy  and  in  meeting  the  raw  ma- 
terials deficiencies  of  Western  Europe  and  the 
United  States. 

In  addition  to  support  in  these  fields,  Msa 
through  its  technical  assistance  program  is  help- 
ing Turkey  to  develop  such  vital  activities  as  its 
telecommunications  network,  its  transportation 
system,  and  its  airfields.  All  of  these  are  impor- 
tant, Msa  said,  to  the  defense  of  Western  Europe's 
southern  flank. 

The  growth  of  Turkish  economy  in  tenns  of 
gross  national  product  has  been  rapid,  expanding 
more  than  a  third  since  the  start  of  the  Marshall 
Plan  in  1948.  Chromite  production  has  increased 
75  percent;  copper,  118  percent;  cereals,  37  per- 
cent ;  cotton,  175  percent,  and  sugar  beets,  85  per- 
cent over  this  period.  New  power  facilities  have 
been  constructed  and  the  number  of  tractors  on 
farms  has  grown  from  3,000  to  approximately 
35,000.     • 

Aid  extended  to  Turkey  during  the  Marshall 
Plan  by  the  Economic  Cooperation  Administra- 
tion, Msa's  predecessor  agency,  was  designed  to 


April  6,    7953 


499 


strengthen  the  economic  base  upon  which  Turkey 
is  building  its  defense  program.  This  aid, 
through  June  30, 1952,  amounted  to  $222.5  million, 
of  which  $84  million  was  in  loans.  This  does  not 
include  drawing  rights  under  the  intra-European 
payments  agreements  and  credits  accorded  Tur- 
key under  the  European  Payments  Union  (Epu). 
Counterpart  funds  generated  as  a  result  of  Eca- 
MsA  dollar  grants  to  Turkey  (Turkey  deposits  an 
equivalent  amount  of  Turkish  lira  in  the  counter- 
part fund  to  match  Msa  grants)  is  also  being  used 
to  support  the  Turkish  defense  program.  Ap- 
pro.ximately  $87  million  in  Turkish  lira,  more  than 
half  tlie  total  available  counterpart,  has  been  used 
to  develop  armament  production,  provide  addi- 
tional troop  training,  and  build  air  bases. 

Canadian  Prime  Minister 
to  Visit  Washington 

White  House  press  release  dated  March  13 

The  Wliite  House  announced  on  March  13  that 
the  Prime  Minister  of  Canada,  Louis  S.  St. 
Laurent,  will  be  in  Washington  as  the  euest  of  the 
President  on  May  7  and  May  8.  The' President's 
invitation  to  the  Prime  Minister  was  conveyed  to 
Mr.  St.  Laurent  by  Don  C.  Bliss,  Charge  d'Af- 
faires  of  the  United  States  Embassy  in  Ottawa. 

In  addition  to  seeing  the  President,  the  Prime 
Minister  will  meet  with  Secretary  Dulles  and 
other  Government  officials.  No  agenda  for  the 
conversations  has  as  yet  been  determined  but  it  is 
expected  that  matters  of  general  interest  to  the 
United  States  and  Canada  will  be  considered  at 
that  time. 

Guaranty  Issued  for  Private 
Investment  in  France 

International  Water  Corporation  of  Pittsburgh 
has  obtained  a  U.S.  Government  guaranty  of  cur- 
rency convertibility  to  protect  an  investment  in 
France  of  water-well-drilling  equipment  and  the 
licensing  of  techniques  and  processes,  the  Mutual 
Security  Administration  announced  on  March  17. 

This  business  venture  by  International  Water 
Corporation  is  intended  to  promote  the  develop- 
ment of  large-scale  water  supplies  for  municipali- 


ties and  industries  in  France,  thus  contributing  tc 
essential  needs  of  the  country.  The  etjuipmeni 
and  methods  also  may  be  used  in  other  countrie- 
of  Western  Europe. 

The  U.S.  guaranty,  issued  by  the  Mutua 
Security  Agency  under  its  Investment  Guarantiee 
Program,  insures  the  American  corporation  dj 
being  able  to  convert  into  dollars  up  to  $51,000  ir 
French  franc  receipts  from  these  new  investments 
The  well-drilling  equipment,  valued  at  $12,00u 
will  be  invested  by  International  in  Societe  Fran- 
gaise  de  Forages  Layne  France,  in  which  Inter- 
national has  held  51  percent  stock  ownership  oi 
control.  The  remainder  of  the  common  stock  is 
owned  or  controlled  by  a  French  company,  the 
Societe  Lyonnaise  des  Eaux  et  de  I'Eclairage. 

This  investment,  equivalent  to  4,178,000  francs 
will  be  part  of  a  24-million  franc  increase  in  the 
capital  of  Layne  France,  from  the  present  16  mil- 
lion francs  to  40  million.  The  French  interests 
represented  by  the  Societe  Lyonnaise  will  con- 
tribute 19,822,000  francs  of  the  new  capital.  The 
result  will  be  to  reduce  International's  holding  tc 
31  percent  of  the  stock  of  Layne  France. 

The  Msa  guaranty  insures  the  convertibility  of 
up  to  $21,000  in  receipts  from  the  equipment  in- 
vestment, the  remaining  $30,000  of  the  guaranty 
covering  royalty  receipts  from  the  licensing  of 
processes  to  the  French  company,  estimated  at  a 
maximum  of  $3,000  a  year  for  10  years.  The  pro- 
cesses to  be  licensed  are  a  development  of  Layne  & 
Bowler,  Inc.  of  Memphis,  an  affiliate  of  Inter- 
national Water. 

The  guaranty  is  the  13th  granted  by  Msa  under 
its  Investment  Guaranties  Program  to  cover  an 
American  investment  in  France.  The  Interna- 
tional Water  Corporation  investment  was  ap- 
proved for  a  guaranty  by  the  French  Government, 
and  by  the  Director  for  Mutual  Security  as  re- 
quired by  legislation  authorizing  the  Msa 
guaranty  program. 

Msa  oifers  guaranties  against  loss  from  expro- 
priation, as  well  as  currency  convertibility  protec- 
tion, for  new  American  investments  in  those 
countries  participating  in  the  mutual  security  pro- 
gram which  have  agreements  with  the  United 
States  covering  such  guaranties.  A  fee  is  charged, 
based  on  the  amount  covered  by  a  guaranty.  The 
guaranty  contracts  are  executed  by  the  Export- 
Import  Bank  of  Washington. 


500 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


INTERNATIONAL  ORGANIZATIONS  AND  CONFERENCES 


Calendar  of  Meetings ' 


Adjourned  during  March  1953 

IcAO  (International  Civil  Aviation  Organization):  ,,     ^      ,  t„      iq  ato-   07 

Council:    18th  Session ll'^'l'^^^] ith   ItlMtr   Z 

First  Air  Navigation  Conference Montreal Feb.  24-Mar.  24 

Fag  (Food  and  Agriculture  Organization): 

Meeting  of  Group  of  Experts  on  Emergency  Food  Reserve Rome ^eb.  ^d-Mar.  / 

Coordinating  Committee:   3d  Session    ....._. ?T°™^-, -ii,: vih' otMf^r   M 

Commonwealth  Advisory  Committee  on  Defense  Science New  Delhi Feb.  25-Mar.  14 

Ilo  (International  Labor  Organization): 

Governing  Bodv:    121st  Session     .    •    •    • geneva Mnr   ifi  98 

Committee  on  Work  on  Plantations:   2d  Session  .    ....    .    .    .  Habana ^Z'  A'^f 

Meeting  of  Governments  who  are  Beneficiaries  of  Article  16  of  Treaty  of  London Mar.  4-J& 

Peace  with  Japan — Working  Group. 

Who  (World  Meteorological  Organization): 

Commission  for  Climatology:   1st  Session Washington Mar.    2-25 

World  Svmposium  on  Sferics Zu"ch Mar.  17-20 

U.N.  (United  Nations): 

International  Children's  Emergency  Fund: 

Executive  Board New  York Mar 

Program  Committee New  York M«r   2^  ^0 

International  Tin  Study  Group:  7th  Meeting London Mar.  2ci-dU 

In  Session  as  of  March  31, 1953 

International  Wheat  Council:   11  th  Session Washington 1^1  f~ 

International  Wheat  Council:  8th  Session  (Reconvening  of) Washington teb.  Z- 

U.N.  (United  Nations):  „       ,^    ,  •r,„.     r,. 

General  Assemblv:   7th  Session  (Reconvening  of) New  York Feb   2^ 

Commission  on  the  Status  of  Women:   7th  Session New  York Mar.  16- 

Commission  on  Narcotic  Drugs:  8th  Session New  York Mar.  30- 

Economic  and  Social  Council:    15th  Session New  \ork Mar.  3^- 

Indian  Railwav  Centenary  Exhibition ^  •    ■    ■    •  t"  T    :,  ^"^  M«r'  ts 

n„„„    /nffi„„   „f   ■I^,,,.^r^o^>r,    Fr-nnf<min    C nnnprnt \ cn)  i   EuroDean    inland  Fans i\iar.  lo- 


19-25 
19-25 


Oeec    (Office   of   Europea'n    Economic    Cooperation):    European    Inland 
Transport  Conference. 
(Food  and  Agriculture  Organizatio: 
with  International  Organizations. 


Transport  Conference.                                           ^          .              „  ,   ,•          t,  a/t..^   Qn_ 

FAo(Foodand  Agriculture  Organization):  Council  Committee  on  Relations    Rome Mar.  dU- 


Scheduled  April  1-June  30,  1953 

Wmo    (World    Meteorological    Organization):  Commission    for    Synoptic  Washington Apr.  2- 

Meteorology:   1st  Session. 

U.N.  (United  Nations):  ,   ,     ^  .    •  -o-    a     t„ ;-„  Ar,..  k 

Economic  Commission  for  Latin  America:   5th  Session  of  the  Commission  Rio  de  Janeiro ....  Apr.  6- 
Seminar  on  the  Prevention  of  Crime  and  Treatment  of  Offenders  in  Latin  Rio  de  Janeiro  .    .    .    .  Apr.  fa- 
American  Countries.  „  Ai-,t-  7_ 

Human  Rights  Commission:  9th  Session Oeneva Apr.  1 

vid  Hoc  Committee  on  Forced  Labor;   4th  Session  .  .......  Geneva a^!!  9^_ 

Economic  Commission  for  Asia  and  the  Far  East:  Regional  Conference  Tokyo Apr.  ^U- 

on  Mineral  Resources  Development.  .^      -,    ,  .        „- 

Fiscal  Commission:  4th  Session o..- o"    •■  "    '    "  J^^"^  \°'''^ A^r' 97- 

High  Commissioner's  Advisory  Committee  on  Refugees:  3d  Session  .    .  Genev  a Apr   z/ 

Social  Commission:  9th  Session ,    •  .-    •••■„•    •  S<^^  ^°'^ ullu 

International  Conference  to  Adopt  a  Protocol  on  Limitation  of  the  Pro-  New  York      May  11- 

ductionof^Opium. 

■Prepared  in  thel Division  of  International  Conferences,  Department  of  State,   Mar.  27,   1953.     Asterisks  indicate 
tentative  dates. 

Apri7  6,   1953  *°^ 


Calendar  oj  Meetings — Continued 

Scheduled  April  1-June  30,  l^SZ—Coniinued 

Uiiitoii  Nations — CoiUinned 

Ad  Hoc  Commission  on  Prisoners  of  War:   4th  Session New  York May  11- 

Special   Committee  to  Consider   Measures   to   Limit  the   Duration   of  New  York May  25- 

Regular  Sessions  of  the  General  Assembly. 

International  Law  Commission:   5th  Session Geneva June  1- 

Trusteeship  Council:    12th  Session New  York June  16- 

Economic  and  Social  Council:    16th  Session Geneva June  30- 

Committee  on  Non-Governmental  Organizations Geneva June- 
International  Sugar  Conference London* June  or  July 

Technical  Assistance  Committee Geneva June- 
Interparliamentary  Union:  Meeting  of  the  Council Monaco Apr.  8- 

Carilibean  Timbers,  Their  Utilization  and  Trade  within  the  Area,  Con-  Trinidad Apr.  13- 

ference  on  (Caribbean  Commission). 
IcEM  (Intergovernmental  Committee  for  European  Migration): 

Finance  Subcommittee Geneva Apr.  13- 

Fifth  Session  of  Committee Geneva Apr.  16- 

Inter-American  Seminar  on  Adult  Education Ciudad  Trujillo   .    .    .  Apr.  14— 

Rice  Consultative  Committee:  6th  Session Singapore Apr.  15- 

South  Pacific  Conference:  2d  Session Noumea Apr.  16- 

Inter-American  Council  of  Jurists:  2d  Meeting Buenos  Aires    ....  Apr.  20- 

Paso  (Pan  American  Sanitary  Organization) :  Executive  Committee:  19th  Washington Apr.  20- 

^Ieeting. 
Fao  (Food  and  Agriculture  Organization) : 

Technical  Advisory  Committee  on  Desert  Locust  Control:  3d  Meeting  .  Rome Apr.  21- 

International  Poplar  Commission Munster-Munich     .    .  Apr.  29- 

Latin  American  Seminar  on  Land  Problems Sao  Paulo May  25- 

International  Chestnut  Commission Spain-Portugal     .    .    .  May- 
Committee  on  Commodity  Problems:  21st  Session Rome June  3- 

Meeting  of  the  Council:  i7th  Session Rome June  15- 

N.\T0  (North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization) :   Ministerial  Meeting  of  the  Paris Apr.  23- 

North  Atlantic  Council. 

South  Pacific  Commission:  11th  Session Noumea Apr.  25- 

Icsu  (International  Council  of  Scientific  Unions): 

Joint  Commission  on  Physiological  Optics Madrid Apr.- 

Committee  on  the  International  Geophysical  Year  1957-1958 Brussels June  30- 

Sudan  Elections:  Mixed  Electoral  Commission Khartoum Apr.- 

Itu  (International  Telecommunication  Union) : 

Administrative  Council:  8th  Session Geneva May  2- 

International  Telegraph  Consultative  Committee  :8th  Plenary  Assembly  .  Arnheim May  26- 

International  Cotton  Advisory  Committee:  12th  Plenary  Meeting  .    .    .  Washington May  4- 

Uph   (Universal  Postal   Union) :   Meeting  of  the   Executive  and  Liaison  Bern May  4— 

Committee. 
Who  (World  Heath  Organization) : 

Sixth  World  Health  .Assembly Geneva May  5- 

Executive  Board:  12th  Session Geneva May  26- 

IcAO  (International  Civil  .Aviation  Organization): 

Standing  Committee  on  Aircraft  Performance:  4th  Session Paris May  6- 

Assembly:  7th  Session Brighton  (England)    .  June  16- 

Caribbean  Commission:  16th  Meeting Surinam May  11- 

International  Rubber  Study  Group:  10th  Meeting Copenhagen     ....  May  11- 

Unesco  (United  Nations  Educational,  Scientific  and  Cultural  Organiza- 
tion) : 

Executive  Board:  34th  Session Paris May  15- 

General  Conference:  2d  Extraordinary  Session Paris May  18- 

International  Center  for  Workers  Education Compiegne May  30- 

International  Conference  on  the  Role  and  Place  of  Music  in  Education  .  Brussels June  29- 

Tribunales  de  Cuentas  (Triljunals  of  Accounts) :  1st  International  Congress  Habana May  20- 

of. 

International  Commission  for  the  Northwest  Atlantic  Fisheries:  3d  Annual  New  Haven May  25- 

Meeting. 

Tenth  Congress  of  the  International  Seed  Testing  Association Dublin May  25- 

Horticultural  Congress  and  Exposition Hamburg May- 

Ilo  (International  Labor  Organization): 

Permanent  Agricultural  Committee:  4th  Session Geneva May- 

36th  International  Labor  Conference Geneva June  4— 

Traffic  and  Safety  Exhibition,  International Milan May- 
American  International  Institute  for  the  Protection  of  Childhood:  Annual  Montevideo June  2- 

Meeting  of  Directing  Council. 

Eighth  Pan  American  Railway  Congress Washington    and     kt-  June  12- 

lantic  City. 

Acoustical  Congress Netherlands June  16- 

Thirteenth  International  Dairy  Congress  and  Exposition The  Hague June  22 

International  Commission  for  the  Regulation  of  Whaling:  5th  Meeting  .    .  London June  22- 

Ad  Hoc  Committee  on  Quarantine  Regulation  (South  Pacific  Commission)  .  Noumea June- 

502  Oeparfmenr  of  State   BuHelin 


The  Soviet  Attitude  Toward  the  Disarmament  Problem 


by  Ernest  A.  Gross 

U.S.  Representative  to  the  General  Assemily'^ 


U.S./U.N.  press  release  dated  March  21 

We  have  come  a  full  circle,  I  think,  since  3  days 
ago  when  the  debate  on  this  subject  opened  in 
this  Committee.  At  that  time,  on  behalf  of  the 
U.S.  Government,  I  asked  what  we  thought  were 
two  reasonable  questions,  addressing  them  to  the 
representative  of  the  Soviet  Government  sittmg 
here,  and  I  do  not  believe  that  we  have  had  an 
afiirmative  response.^ 

The  U.S.  Government  asked  two  questions: 
Whether  this  was  the  time  when  the  Soviet  Gov- 
ernment was  prepared  to  discuss  constructively 
the  problem  of  disarmament,  and  whether  this, 
the  United  Nations,  is  the  place  in  which  the 
Soviet  Government  is  prepared  to  negotiate 
iioriGst'lv  • 

I  do  not  think  I  need  to  assure  the  members  of 
this  Committee  that  these  questions  were  not  in- 
tended merely  as  rhetorical  exercises,  but  were  a 
sincere  effort  to  find  out  whether  the  new  Soviet 
leadership  is  really  interested  in  talking  seriously 
about  disarmament.  They  are  not  difficult  ques- 
tions to  answer  affirmatively,  if  the  Soviet  Gov- 
ernment is  sincere  and  interested.  We  did  not 
request  and  did  not  expect  a  quick  debater's 
answer,  and  we  much  prefer,  even  at  this  stage, 
a  considered  judgment  of  the  Soviet  Government, 
which  we  do  not  feel  we  have  yet  obtained. 

I  have  said  that  our  purpose  in  putting  the  ques- 
tions to  the  Soviet  representative  were  sincere, 
and  we  cannot  conceal  some  disappointment  at  the 
way  in  which  the  questions  have  been  treated— 
that  the  only  reference  made  to  them  was  on  a 
previous  occasion  when  the  Soviet  representative 
branded  them  as  artificial.  . 

We  began  our  work  here  on  this  subject  m  the 
knowledge  that  the  change  in  the  Soviet  Govern- 


'  statement  made  in  Committee  I  (Political  and  Secu- 
rity) on  Mar.  21.  At  the  same  meeting  the  Committee 
approved  the  resolution  as  amended  (A/C.  1/L.  33)  by  a 
vote  of  50-5-5. 

=  For  Ambassador  Gross'  statement  of  Mar.  IN  see 
Bulletin  of  Mar.  30,  1953,  p.  476. 

April  6,    7  953 


ment  had  produced  words  of  peace  frorn  the 
Kremlin,  and  in  this  forum  which  we  feel  is  the 
appropriate  place  to  do  so,  my  delegation  seeks  to 
learn  what  substance  lies  behind  those  words.  If 
we  were  to  be  lightly  discouraged,  the  response  of 
the  Soviet  delegate  might  lead  us  to  believe  that 
there  is  no  substance  there,  that  the  Soviet  Gov- 
ernment is  not  prepared  to  negotiate  genuinely 
and  honestly  for  a  disarmament  plan  at  this  time. 
However,  we  must  place  our  hope  for  peace  above 
the  disappointments  which  met  us  here.  We  must 
say  to  the  Soviet  delegate :  "Surely  this  is  not  your 
last  word  on  the  subject;  surely  you  would  not 
have  us  believe  that  the  words  of  Premier  Malen- 
kov  were  empty  words  and  that  the  Soviet  Union 
is  determined  to  use  the  United  Nations  merely  to 
gain  a  tactical  military  or  strategic  advantage 
through  trick  schemes  which  are  labeled  disarma- 
ment,'1but  which  are  really  designed  to  strip  free 
nations  of  their  defenses." 

If  the  Soviet  Government  truly  desires  peace, 
will  it  not  in  the  name  of  humanity  and  m  the 
interest  of  its  own  people  seek  the  authority 
through  the  delegate  here  to  work  side  by  side 
with  us  toward  a  program  to  effect  disarmament 
which  we  can  all  accept,  a  program  which  can  pro- 
vide security  for  us  all  and  a  new  hope  for  man- 

kind  ? 

I  liave  felt  constrained  to  make  these  remarks 
at  the  opening  of  my  brief  statement  because  I 
think  that  without  exception,  and  I  have  listened 
very  carefully  to  two  statements  by  the  Soviet 
representative,  no  new  suggestion  has  been  put 
forward;  there  is  no  real  indication  m  anything 
which  he  has  said  or  which  the  Soviet  bloc  repre- 
sentatives have  said  which  reveal  any  true  pur- 
pose towarcl  reaching  a  solution  on  this  problem. 

We  have  felt  and  continue  to  feel  that  this  is 
an  important  and  the  right  time  in  which  to  dis- 
cuss this  subject.  The  balanced  reduction  of 
armed  forces  and  of  armaments  would  have  in- 
calculable advantages  to  the  Kussian  people  and 
to  other  peoples  living  under  Soviet  rule,  as  well 

503 


as  to  people  everywhere  else  in  the  world.  I  am 
sure  that  these  people  deeply  desire  just  a  little 
butter  instead  of  so  many  guns  and  that  they 
yearn  for  a  decent  standard  of  living;  disarma- 
ment can  yield  this  to  the  people  of  the  Soviet 
Union  and  to  the  areas  presently  under  their  con- 
trol. Disarmament  can  yield  this  result  to  these 
people  without  in  anyway  jeopardizing  or  under- 
mining the  security  of  the  Soviet  state. 
_  Real  disarmament  would  lift  the  fear  of  aggres- 
sion from  all  peoples  by  reducing  the  capacity, 
the  ability  of  states  to  wage  aggressive  war.  This 
way  we  can  be  sure— all  peoples  including  the 
Russian  people— that  there  would  be  tangible 
guarantees  of  security.  "^ 

My  Government,  within  a  year  after  the  mo- 
mentous discovery  in  our  country  of  the  war 
potential  of  the  atom,  proposed  that  the  United 
Nations  undertake  an  effective  plan  for  the  inter- 
national control  of  atomic  energy.  Within  the 
same  year,  we  took  the  initiative  in  placing  before 
the  U.N.  Atomic  Energy  Commission  the  basic 
principles  of  a  constructive  plan  to  bring  that 
about.  We  are  confident — we  were  then  and  we 
still  are— that  this  plan  could  do  the  job  of  con- 
trolling effectively  the  atomic  weapon  and  other 
related  weapons  as  well,  since  its  procedures 
would  actually  encompass  the  entire  field  of 
atomic  energy. 

The  world  has  not  forgotten  how  after  the  war 
the  United  States  along  with  other  states  in  the 
free  world  demobilized  their  forces  and  disarmed 
and  dismantled  a  mighty  military  establishment. 
We  have  never  since  changed  our  opinion  about 
the  method  by  which  the  world's  resources  and 
energies  should  be  devoted  to  peace  and  to  im- 
provement of  the  standard  of  living.  We  have 
always  supported  the  U.N.  plans  and  principles 
which  are  designed  to  lift  the  crushing  burden 
of  armament,  but  to  do  so  in  an  effective,  a  prac- 
tical, and  an  honest  manner. 

The  distinguished  representative  of  the  Nether- 
lands in  his  statement  in  the  Committee  yesterday 
pointed  out  the  vital  importance  of  avoiding  the 
illusion  of  security.  He  said,  "We  must  shun 
sham  solutions  and  there  is  no  such  thing  as  a 
short  cut  to  peace  and  security."  It  does  not 
come  so  much  as  a  matter  of  surprise  as  a  matter 
of  disappointment  that  the  Soviet  representative 
should  repeat  today  again  the  old  outworn  and 
utterly  impractical  suggestion  that  somehow,  as 
he  says,  a  decision  should  precede  a  practical  plan 
for  accomplishing  the  very  result  which  the  deci- 
sion is  aimed  to  accomplish. 

The  Soviet  representative  in  his  two  statements 
here  has  failed  to  refer  to  the  simple  fact  that  the 
United  Nations  itself  by  overwhelming  majorities 
has  stated  its  position  and  has  made  its  objectives 
and  general  procedures  clear.  The  resolution  of 
January  11,  1952,^  establishing  the  Disarmament 

'  Ibid.,  Mar.  31,  1952,  p.  507. 

504 


Commission,  omits  no  major  aspect  of  the  disarm- 
ament problem.  The  Soviet  representative  re- 
ferred to  proposals  placed  before  the  Disarma- 
ment Commission,  speaking  as  if  a  proposal  for 
ceilings  upon  armed  forces  was  made  without 
reference  to  other  aspects  of  the  disarmament  pro- 
gram, including  the  effective  measures  for  elimi- 
nating the  atomic  weapon  and  other  methods  of 
mass  destruction.  The  U.N.  General  Assembly 
has  spoken  its  mmd  on  these  subjects.  The  Gen- 
eral Assembly  has  called  for  the  regulation,  the 
limitation,  and  the  balanced  reduction  of  all  armed 
forces  and  all  armaments.  It  has  called  for  the 
elimination  of  all  major  weapons  adaptable  to 
mass  destruction.  It  has  called  for  the  effective 
international  control  of  atomic  energy  to  insure 
the  prohibition  of  atomic  weapons  and  the  use  of 
atomic  energy  for  peaceful  purposes  only.  And 
m  this  connection,  it  has  provided  that  the  Dis- 
armament Commission  should  use  the  present  U  N 
plan  as  the  basis  for  the  Commission's  considera- 
t.ion  until  a  better  or  no  less  effective  plan  is 
devised. 

U,N.  Disarmament  Aims  Made  Clear 

Then  the  General  Assembly  in  1952  called  for  a 
progressive  and  continuing  disclosure  and  veri- 
fication of  all  armed  forces  and  all  armaments,  in- 
cluding atomic,  and  recognized  that  the  carrving 
out  of  such  a  program  for  disclosure  and  verifica- 
tion IS  the  first  and  indispensable  step  in  achiev- 
ing a  disarmament  program. 

We  fail  to  understand  how  it  can  be  seriously 
advanced  as  an  apparently  honest  argument  that 
before  disclosure  and  verification  is  carried  out 
before  states  tell  the  truth  and  assure  that  what 
they  tell  is  the  truth,  that  some  magic  purpose 
is  to  be  served  by  some  decision  which  assumes 
the  result  and  which  is  based  upon  ignorance  of 

tuG  l3.CtS. 

^  Mr.  Chairman,  in  his  statement  2  davs  ago,  the 
boviet  representative  made  some  remarks  which 
were  out  of  context,  which  did  not  accurately  re- 
fleet  the  positions  taken  in  the  Disarmament  Com-  ■ 
mission  and  which  I  believe  it  is  fair  to  say  dis- 
torted the  objectives  and  efforts  on  the  part  of 
my  Government  in  the  Disarmament  Commission. 
1  do  not  intend  to  go  extensively  into  these  dis- 
tortions, nor  these  misquotations,  but  I  should 
like  to  cite  two  for  illustrative  purposes. 

I  said  in  this  Committee  on  Wednesday  that  in 
the  Disarmament  Commission  the  Soviet  repre- 
sentative had  consistently  declined  to  explain  the 
meaning  of  vague  and  ambiguous  proposals  which 
he  had  put  forward  and  that  he  had  characterized 
our  efforts  to  secure  explanations  and  clarifications 
of  these  points  as,  to  use  his  words,  "playing  with 
questions  and  answers." 

The  Soviet  representative  in  this  Committee  has 
replied  that  there  is  no  word  of  truth  in  this  con- 
tention.   The  Soviet  representative  then  went  on 

Department  of  Stale  Bulletin 


at  length  to  quote  from  Soviet  proposals  made  to 
the  U.N.  Atomic  Energy  Commission  on  June  19, 
1947,  in  order  to  establish  that  the  Soviet  Govern- 
ment had  in  fact  introduced  very  detailed  pro- 
posals for  the  establishment  of  international  con- 

i  trol  of  atomic  energy. 

1  It  is,  of  course,  entirely  true  that  the  Soviet 
Government  in  1947  did  introduce  proposals  into 
the  Atomic  Energy  Commission  and  that  these 
proposals  were  considerably  more  detailed  than 
the  Soviet  Government  has  put  forward  since 
that  time.  In  fact,  the  Soviet  proposals  of  1947 
were  sufficiently  detailed  to  permit  the  U.N. 
Atomic  Energy  Commission  to  study  them  and 
to  determine  soberly  that  they  were  wholly  in- 
adequate. 

To  quote  from  the  third  report  of  the  Atomic 
Energy  Commission,  "They" — that  is,  the  Soviet 
proposals  made  at  that  time  in  1947 — "ignore  the 
existing  technical  knowledge  of  the  problem  of 
atomic  energy  control,  do  not  provide  an  adequate 
basis  for  the  effective  international  control  of 
atomic  energy  and  the  elimination  from  national 
armaments  of  atomic  weapons,  and,  therefore,  do 
not  conform  to  the  terms  of  reference  of  the 
Atomic  Energy  Commission." 

So  spoke  the  Commission  with  regard  to  these 
1947  proposals,  and  the  General  Assembly  of  the 
United  Nations  confirmed  this  decision  of  the 
Atomic  Energy  Commission  in  November  of  1948, 
through  adopting  the  third  report  of  the  Atomic 
Energy  Commission  and  through  rejecting  the 
Soviet  resolution  which  called  upon  the  Assembly 
to  approve  its  proposals. 

Now,  the  purpose  of  the  questions  which  we  and 
other  members  of  the  Disarmament  Commission 
addressed  to  the  Soviet  representative  there  and 
which  he  declined  to  answer  was  to  determine 
whether  the  Soviet  proposals  which  the  Soviet 
Government  was  then  making  in  the  Disarmament 
Commission  were  new  proposals  or  whether  they 
were  the  same  old  proposals  which  had  been  ad- 
vanced and  rejected.  Members  of  the  Committee 
will  recall  that  in  the  General  Assembly  on 
January  11,  1952,  Mr.  Vyshinsky  stated  that  the 
Soviet  Government  would  make  new  proposals  in 
the  Disarmament  Commission.  As  I  explained 
in  my  statement  the  other  day,  despite  our  per- 
sistent efforts  in  the  Disarmament  Commission  to 
find  out  whether  the  broad,  general,  vague,  and 
ambiguous  proposals  of  the  Soviet  Government  in 
the  Disarmament  Commission  were  new  proposals 
of  a  sort  which  Mr.  Vyshinsky  had  promised  or 
whether  they  were  the  same  old  proposals,  our 
attempt  to  find  out  the  answer  to  that  question 
elicited  no  reply.  It  may  be  that  Mr.  Zorin  has 
given  us  the  answer  to  this  question  through  quot- 
ing the  1947  proposals.  In  other  words,  despite 
the  statement  of  Mr.  Vyshinsky  on  January  11, 
1952,  that  he  had  new  proposals,  it  now  appears 
that  all  we  had  were  the  same  old  proposals  which 
the  General  Assembly  had  found  to  be  inadequate. 


I  do  not  make  this  as  a  statement.  It  is  a  ques- 
tion. It  is  a  question  which  we  feel  can  only  be 
answered  in  the  Disarmament  Commission  itself. 

It  seems  clear  to  my  delegation,  Mr.  Chairman, 
that  it  will  not  be  possible  to  obtain  anything 
but  debaters'  answers  in  the  Committee.  As  I 
said  before,  it  was  not  my  purpose  in  asking  the 
two  questions  I  addressed  to  the  Soviet  represent- 
ative the  other  day  to  elicit  a  quick  debater's 
answer.  We  ourselves  look  to  the  future.  We 
hope  that  the  past  will  bury  the  stale  propaganda, 
the  monstrous  lies,  the  evasions,  the  hate  cam- 
paigns, which  have  in  the  past  characterized  the 
Soviet  Government  conduct  in  international 
community. 

In  looking  back  over  the  work  of  the  Commis- 
sion, it  has  not  been  our  purpose  to  reawaken  the 
memory  of  old  evils.  If  we  look  back  over  our 
shoulder  at  the  frustrated  work  of  the  Disarma- 
ment Commission,  it  is  not  to  score  a  debating 
point  but  to  see  more  clearly  the  direction  in  which 
we  must  go. 

For  us,  peace  is  not  merely  an  objective.  It  is 
a  way  of  living  and  it  is  a  method  of  negotiating 
and  settling  disputes  honestly,  including  disputes 
regarding  disarmament.  I  do  not  think,  Mr. 
Chairman,  that  this  debate  in  the  Committee  re- 
garding disarmament  has  by  any  means  been 
wasted  effort  or  lost  motion.  We  have,  for  our 
part,  reaffirmed  our  intention  to  proceed  in  the 
Disarmament  Commission  to  a  full  exploration  of 
all  practical  and  honest  proposals  which  may  be 
put  forward. 

Soviet  Draft  Resolution 

I  conclude  by  referring  to  the  Soviet  draft 
resolution  which  is  before  us.*  This  resolution 
does  not  give  much  room  for  optimism  or  for 
confidence.  The  preamble  to  the  resolution  is 
purely  propaganda.  The  General  Assembly  and 
the  members  of  the  United  Nations,  in  particular 
those  who  are  represented  in  the  Disarmament 
Commission,  are  fully  aware  of  the  true  reasons 
for  lack  of  progress  in  the  Disarmament  Commis- 
sion. They,  I  think,  are  fully  aware  that  11  states 
on  the  Disarmament  Commission  made  or  sup- 
ported constructive  proposals  and  that  one  state 
alone  wished  to  use  the  discussions  solely  for 
propaganda  purposes.  The  resolution  proposed 
by  the  Soviet  representative  would  undo  a  great 
deal  of  the  progress  which  was  made  in  Paris  at 
the  Sixth  General  Assembly  of  the  United  Na- 
tions, and  which  resulted  in  the  resolution  of 
January  11,  1952,  to  which  I  have  referred. 

Among  other  things,  that  resolution  directed 
the  Disarmament  Commission  to  prepare  pro- 
posals "for  the  regulation,  limitation,  and  balanced 
reduction  of  all  armed  forces  and  all  armaments." 
The  Soviet  draft  resolution  proposes  armaments 


*  U.N.  doc.  A/C.  1/L  31. 


April  6,   1953 


505 


reduction  without  any  reference  to  armed  forces 
whatever.  The  General  Assembly  resolution  of 
January  11, 1952,  provided  that  the  Disarmament 
Commission  should  be  ready  to  consider  any  pro- 
posals or  plans  for  control  that  may  be  put  for- 
ward involving  either  conventional  armaments 
or  atomic  energy.  Unless  a  better  or  no  less  effec- 
tive system  is  devised,  the  U.  N.  plan  for  the  in- 
ternational control  of  atomic  energy  and  the  pro- 
hibition of  atomic  weapons  should  continue  to 
serve  as  the  basis  for  the  international  control  of 
atomic  energy  to  insure  the  prohibition  of  atomic 
weapons  and  the  use  of  atomic  energy  for  peaceful 
purposes  only. 

The  Soviet  resolution  throws  all  this  progress  * 
out  tJie  window.  In  effect,  it  abandons  or  seeks 
to  abandon  the  U.N.  atomic  energy  plan  and  only 
calls  upon  the  Disarmament  Commission  to  pro- 
ceed with  the  question  of  the  unconditional  pi'O- 
hibition  of  atomic  weapons,  bacterial  weapons,  and 
other  types  of  mass  destruction,  and  of  the  estab- 
lishment of  strict  international  control  over  com- 
pliance with  these  decisions. 

The  General  Assembly  resolution  of  January  11, 
1952,  directs  the  Commission  to  formulate  plans 
for  the  establishment  within  the  framework  of 
the  Security  Council  or  an  international  control 
organ  or  organs  to  assure  the  implementation  of 
the  treaty  or  treaties  which  the  resolution  contem- 
plates. In  other  words,  the  entire  disarmament 
program  is  to  be  subject  to  safeguards. 

The  Soviet  draft  resolution  limits  the  safe- 
guards, so-called  safeguards,  to  international 
control  merely  over  compliance  with  decisions  re- 
garding the  prohibition  of  atomic  weapons  and 
other  weapons  of  mass  destruction.  There  is  no 
provision  for  control  over  other  portions  of  the 
program  such  as  the  reduction  of  weapons  other 
than  those  adaptable  to  mass  destruction  or  the 
reduction  in  armed  forces. 

We  recognize  that  in  this  resolution  for  the  first 
time  the  Soviet  Government  has  admitted  by  im- 
plication the  possibility  of  reduction  of  nonatomic 
armaments  on  a  basis  other  than  a  flat  percentage 
cut.  If  I  am  not  mistaken,  to  my  knowledge,  this 
is  the  first  resolution  proposed  by  the  Soviet  Gov- 
ernment which  does  not  call  for  a  flat  one-third 
percentage  cut.  I  sincerely  hope  that  this  is  an 
indication  of  greater  flexibility  and  a  desire  for 
a  genuine  negotiation  on  this  all-important  prob- 
lem. When  the  Disarmament  Commission  recon- 
venes, we  shall  have  a  clear  test  of  Soviet  inten- 
tions. Under  the  General  Assembly  resolution  of 
January  11,  1952,  and  the  draft  resolution  which 
has  now  been  submitted  by  14  cosponsors  before 
the  Committee^ — under  these  resolutions,  the 
Soviet  Government  will  be  in  a  position  to  make 
new  disarmament  proposals  of  any  nature,  and  I 
assure  you  that  my  Government  will  give  the  most 
cai-eful  and  sympathetic  consideration  to  any  i)ro- 


'  U.N.  floe.  A/C.VL30. 


506 


posal  which  has  any  possibility  of  achieving  a 
genuinely  safeguarded  system  of  disarmament. 

For  these  reasons,  my  Government  will  vote 
against  the  Soviet  draft  resolution  which  we  be- 
lieve the  Committee  should  reject  decisively  and 
will,  of  course,  vote  in  favor  of  the  14-power 
resolution. 

Senate  Resolution  on  Minorities 
Transmitted  to  U.N. 

U.S. /U.N.  press  release  dated  March  13 

The  following  letter  and  its  enclosure  were 
trmumitted  on  March  13  iy  Henry  Cabot  Lodge. 
Jr.,  to  U.N.  Secretary-General  Trygve  Lie: 

Excellency  :  Enclosed  are  copies  of  a  resolution 
(S.  Ees.  84,  83rd  Congress,  1st  Session)  adopted 
on  February  27,  1953,  by  the  Senate  of  the  United 
States,  expressing  the  sense  of  the  Senate  that  the 
inhuman  campaigns  conducted  by  the  Soviet  Gov- 
ernment and  its  puppet  governments  in  satellite 
states  in  Europe  and  Asia  against  religious  and 
ethnic  minority  groups  deserve  the  strongest 
condemnation. 

I  request  that  you  transmit  copies  of  the  resolu-  I 
tion  and  of  this  communication  to  the  Representa-  ' 
tive  of  each  Member  of  the  United  Nations. 

Accept,  Excellency,  the  renewed  assurances  of 
my  highest  consideration. 

Henry  Cabot  Lodge,  Jr. 
Ainbassador 

Resolution  Adopted  by  the  Senate  of  the 
United  States 

Fehrmi-y  27, 1953  I 

S.  Res.  84,  83rd  Congress,  1st  Session 

Resolved,  That  it  is  the  sense  of  the  Senate  of 
the  United  States  that  the  vicious  and  inhuman 
campaigns  conducted  by  the  Soviet  Government 
and  its  puppet  governments  in  satellite  states  in 
Europe  and  Asia  against  minority  groups  such 
as  the  persecution  of  Greek  orthodox  congrega- 
tions, the  imprisonment  of  Roman  Catholic  prel- 
ates, the  harassment  of  Protestant  denominatons, 
the  suppression  of  Moslem  communities,  the  per- 
secution and  scattering  of  ethnic  groups  in 
Poland,  in  the  Ukraine,  in  the  Baltic  and  Balkan 
States  and  in  many  other  areas  under  Soviet  domi- 
nation, and  most  recently  the  increasing  persecu- 
tion of  the  people  of  the  Jewish  faitli,  deserve  the 
strongest  condemnation  by  all  jjeoples  who  believe 
that  spiritual  values  are  the  bases  of  human 
progress  and  freedom. 

Resolved  further.  That  the  President  of  the 
United  States  is  hereby  urged  to  take  appropriate 
action  to  protest,  particularly  in  the  General 
Assembly  of  the  United  Nations,  against  these 
outrages,  in  order  that  the  United  Nations  shall 
take  such  action  in  opposition  to  them  as  may  be 
suitable  under  its  Charter. 

Department   of  State   Bulletin 


International  Aspects  of  the  Status  of  Women 


Statements  by  Mts.  Lorena  B.  Hahn 

U.S.  Representative  an  the  Commission  on  the  Status  of  Women^ 


NATIONALITY  OF  MARRIED  WOMEN 

U.S. /U.N.  press  release  dated  March  16 

The  United  States  has  repeatedly  voiced  its  in- 
terest in  equality  for  women  in  the  field  of  na- 
tionality and  in  the  development  of  a  convention 
incorporating  the  principles  adopted  by  this  Com- 
mission in  1950.  The  report  of  the  International 
Law  Commission  indicates  that  it  is  making 
progress  in  reviewing  the  whole  problem  of  na- 
tionality. We  are  glad  that  the  International  Law 
Commission  has  been  able  to  initiate  this  study. 
The  material  gathered  at  the  request  of  the  Com- 
mission on  the  Status  of  Women  on  conflicts  of 
law  relating  to  the  nationality  of  married  women 
should  be  useful.  I  hope  the  valuable  supplement 
(doc.  E/Cn.G/206)  prepared  for  our  use  this  year 
will  also  be  brought  to  the  attention  of  the  Inter- 
national Law  Commission. 

Some  criticism  has  been  voiced  because  the  prin- 
ciples adopted  here  3  years  ago  have  not  yet  been 
made  into  a  special  convention  on  the  nationality 
of  married  women.  For  the  time  being  our  na- 
tionality item  must  be  regarded  as  "unfinished 
business,"  and  everyone  likes  to  see  "unfinished 
business'"  completed  and  off  the  agenda.  However, 
the  United  States  does  not  regard  this  delay  as 
lost  time.  On  the  contrary,  the  supplementary 
report  provided  this  year  shows  that  a  number  of 
countries  are  revising  their  nationality  laws  in  the 
direction  of  the  principles  adopted  by  the  Com- 
mission and  already  in  force  in  many  countries. 

U.S.  law  already  conforms  with  these  princi- 
ples, and  the  United  States  is  a  party  to  the  Inter- 
American  Convention  signed  at  Montevideo  in 
1933  which  contains  the  same  basic  provisions.  It 
seems  probable  that  our  recommendations  of  this 
Commission  have  had  a  considerable  influence  on 
legislation  enacted  since  1950,  and  will  make  it 


'  Made  before  the  Commission  on  the  Status  of  Women 
at  U.  N.  Headquarters  on  Mar.  16,  17,  and  25,  respectively. 
Mrs.  Hahn  was  confirmed  by  the  Senate  on  Mar.  11  to  be 
U.S.  representative  on  the  Commission. 


possible  for  a  larger  number  of  countries  to  sup- 
port and  become  parties  to  a  convention  along  the 
lines  we  recommend.  I  want  to  talk  further  about 
this  report  a  little  later  on.  In  the  meantime,  it  is 
enough  to  note  that  only  17  countries  are  listed  as 
requiring  an  alien  wife  to  accept  her  husband's 
nationality,  and  over  40  as  permitting  choice  under 
varying  conditions.  At  least  10  countries  have 
improved  their  laws  since  our  1950  report.  This 
is  a  good  omen  for  a  convention  of  the  type  we 
recommend;  indeed,  without  the  10,  acceptance  of 
these  principles  might  not  be  certain. 

Another  question  that  has  been  raised  in  regard 
to  the  stucly  of  the  International  Law  Commission 
is  whether  the  nationality  of  married  women 
should  be  dealt  with  in  a  separate  convention  or 
in  one  that  may  cover  a  wider  range  of  nationality 
questions.  This  question  was  never  fully  dealt 
with  in  the  Commission  on  the  Status  of  Women 
because  it  was  evident  that  we  were  dealing  with 
only  a  part  of  a  large  field,  and  though  the  con- 
fusions arising  for  families  of  mixed  nationality 
are  very  great,  we  could  not  be  sure  in  this  one 
Commission  that  we  could  make  wise  judgments 
on  U.N.  action  as  a  whole.  It  is  on  this  question, 
on  the  scope  of  a  new  convention  in  the  nationality 
field,  that  the  United  Nations  especially  needs  the 
advice  of  the  experts  on  the  International  Law 
Commission.  The  United  States  hopes  that  the 
1953  session  of  this  Commission  can  give  specific 
guidance  on  this  matter.  The  situation  of  women 
who  marry  aliens  is  an  international  question  that 
can  be  dealt  with  separately  and  should  be  dealt 
with  promptly.  It  is  not,  however,  a  problem 
which  exists  in  a  vacuum,  apart  from  other  aspects 
of  nationality. 

Interrelationships  of  Nationality  Procedures 

Perhaps  I  can  illustrate  the  interrelationships 
of  nationality  procedures  best  by  citing  two  prob- 
lems— the  situation  of  children  born  to  couples  of 
differing  nationality  and  the  multiple  nationality 


April  6,   1953 


507 


enjoyed,  or  should  I  say  suffered,  by  individuals 
who  can  claim  citizenship  in  several  countries  by 
reason  of  birth,  residence,  parentage,  naturaliza- 
tion, and  other  grounds. 

The  situation  of  children  born  to  parents  of 
differing  nationality  is  one  in  which  women  nat- 
urally fe«l  an  interest,  and  most  of  us  probably 
know  of  one  or  more  young  people  facing  com- 
plications on  property  settlements  or  conscrip- 
tion requirements  because  they  have  more  than  one 
nationality.  Most  countries  recognize  persons 
born  on  their  soil  as  nationals.  In  addition,  it  is 
usual  to  allow  a  child  to  derive  nationality  from 
his  father,  and,  in  some  countries  also  from  his 
mother.  This  may  mean  that  a  child  born  in  one 
country  to  parents  having  nationality  in  two 
other  countries  can  claim  citizenship  in  three 
countries.  Generally  it  is  provided  that  on  ma- 
turity a  child  must  choose  one  of  these  nationali- 
ties for  his  own,  thereby  renouncing  others,  but 
provisions  of  this  sort  vary  and  few  of  them  come 
into  effect  early  enough  to  prevent  conflicting 
claims  from  countries  which  require  young  men 
to  go  into  military  training  at  18. 

Consideration  of  the  nationality  of  children  is 
not  the  function  of  this  Commission,  for  the  wel- 
fare of  the  child  should  be  the  determining  factor, 
and  on  this  the  Social  Commission  and  various 
others  are  the  appropriate  bodies  to  take  the  lead. 
However,  there  is  no  doubt  that  governments  are 
harassed  by  conflicting  claims  to  the  allegiance  of 
persons  who  have  multiple  nationality,  and  that 
a  clarification  of  procedures  would  be  welcomed. 
In  our  debate  in  1950  the  United  States  tried  to 
work  out  one  principle  that  might  be  applicable, 
the  principle  that  if  a  child  receives  nationality 
through  parentage,  rather  than  through  place  of 
birth  or  some  other  source,  then  the  mother  should 
have  the  same  right  to  transmit  nationality  as  the 
father.  It  will  allow  the  child  the  benefit  of 
choice,  which  may  be  greatly  to  his  advantage, 
particularly  if  the  nationality  of  his  father  is 
unknown.  This  was  not  included  in  the  princi- 
ples we  adopted  but  was  recommended  for  con- 
sideration by  appropriate  bodies.  The  Interna- 
tional Law  Commission  is  such  a  body,  and  it  is 
the  hope  of  my  Government  that  when  it  studies 
this  problem,  it  will  recognize  the  right  of  the 
mother  to  transmit  nationality  as  equal  to  that  of 
the  father. 

Women  may  also  have  problems  of  nationality 
which  do  not  arise  from  marriage.  Such  prob- 
lems are  usually  the  same  for  men  and  women,  and 
arise  through  parentage,  changes  of  frontiers,  and 
other  factors.  It  is  problems  of  this  sort  to  which 
the  International  Law  Commission  will  undoubt- 
edly be  giving  attention  in  its  study  of  nationality, 
and  women  stand  to  gain  by  any  clarifications  that 
can  be  agreed  upon.  I  am  sure  these  problems 
have  been  present  in  the  thinking  of  some  of  our 
consultant  organizations  who  have  queried 
whether  we  have  given  adequate  thought  to  the 


entire  subject  of  nationality  of  women,  including 
problems  of  single  women.  It  is  therefore  to  the 
advantage  of  botli  men  and  women  that  the  field 
of  nationality  be  properly  studied  and  a  careful 
decision  made  as  to  what  questions  can  usefully 
be  clarified  at  the  present  time  through  a  national-  J 
ity  convention.  ' 

Certainly  it  will  help  when  there  is  general 
agreement  among  governments  that  neither  mar- 
riage nor  its  dissolution  shall  affect  the  nationality 
of  either  spouse.  These  principles  are  in  effect  in 
U.S.  law,  and  it  will  be  easier  for  our  Government, 
and  our  citizens,  when  they  are  stated  as  the  uni- 
form i)rocedure  of  as  manj'  countries  as  possible. 
If,  however,  there  are  other  nationality  questions 
on  which  wide-scale  agreement  is  becoming  possi- 
ble, governments  should  have  an  opportunity  to 
deal  with  them  promptly,  and  we  will  all  profit 
by  the  result.  A  separate  instrument  devoted 
only  to  the  nationality  of  married  women  might 
delay  such  overall  consideration  and  discourage 
progress  on  other  problems. 

Changing  Circumstances  Necessitate  Convention 

There  may  be  some  who  interpret  the  action  of 
the  International  Law  Commission  last  summer  as 
unsympathetic,  or  even  a  repudiation  of  the  recom- 
mendations adopted  by  this  Commission.  The 
United  States  notes  with  satisfaction  that  no  such 
conclusion  shoidd  be  drawn  from  the  record.  On 
the  contrary,  we  can  feel  satisfaction  that  while 
the  International  Law  Commission  did  not  accept 
the  draft  convention  proposed  by  Prof.  Manley 
Hudson,  it  did  not  reject  either  the  draft  or  the 
principles  contained  therein.  The  decision  of  the 
International  Law  Commission  last  July  was 
merely  one  of  procedure  to  permit  study  of  the  full 
implications  of  nationality  in  relation  to  the  many 
new  developments  of  modern  life.  After  all,  a 
good  deal  has  happened  since  the  Hague  conven- 
tion in  1930  and  the  Montevideo  conference  in  1933 
to  which  we  trace  back  present-day  proposals  on 
the  nationality  of  women.  The  General  Assembly 
last  December  adopted  a  convention  on  stateless- 
ness which  cuts  into  some  of  our  problem.  Today 
there  are  matters  of  property  rights  and  taxation, 
and  of  business  management  which  may  be  con- 
siderably affected  by  an  individual's  nationality, 
particularly  in  other  countries  than  the  United 
States.  There  are  U.S.  women  in  international 
business  today  to  whom  these  are  important  issues, 
and  I  am  sure  others  around  this  table  know 
women  in  their  countries  with  similar  interests. 
I  am  not  suggesting  that  these  or  any  other  aspects 
of  nationality  need  to  be  treated  in  a  convention, 
but  I  am  sure  we  will  agree  that  our  problems 
should  be  solved  in  relation  to  the  vast  sweep  of 
modern  interchange,  and  that  the  International 
Law  Commission  should  be  encouraged  to  do  a 
thorough  job. 

Now  I  want  to  talk  about  the  future  of  this  item 


508 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


on  nationality,  over  and  beyond  the  completion  of 
a  convention.    What  we  want,  I  am  sure,  is  the 
assurance  that  men  and  women  who  marry  across 
frontiers  can  do  so  without  fear  as  to  their  na- 
tionality or  the  nationality  of  their  children.     A 
convention  will  help  greatly  in  defining  a  standard 
around  which  equitable  procedures  can  be  estab- 
lished between  governments.     But  the  completion 
of  a  draft  convention  in  the  International  Law 
Commission,  and  its  approval  by  the  General  As- 
sembly, will  be  only  the  beginning  of  this  process. 
We  hope,  of  course,  that  many  governments  will 
ratify  such  a  convention  promptly,  and  that  the 
remainder  will  do  so  before  many  years  pass.     In 
the  meantime,  there  will  be  great  differences  be- 
tween countries  as  there  are  now.     Even  among 
the  parties  to  the  convention  there  will  be  a  great 
deal  of  difference  in  the  way  its  principles  are 
spelled  out,  and  probably  in  the  procedures  by 
which  they  become  effective  between  the  parties. 
The  changes  reported  in  the  Secretary  General's 
memorandum  on  nationality  of  married  women 
this  year  illustrate  the  progress  that  is  being  made 
and  what  will  happen  in  the  transition  years  and 
beyond.     As  I  said  earlier,  the  laws   in  many 
countries,  including  the  United  States,  permit  a 
married   woman   to    keep   her   own    nationality. 
Most  countries  also  make  special  provision  for 
the  naturalization  of  foreigners  who  marry  their 
citizens.     As  I  recall  it,  these  principles  had  been 
adopted  in  about  half  the  countries  of  the  world. 
Today,  thanks  to  recent  changes,  the  proportion 
is  considerably  greater.     Most  of  the  new  laws 
show  a  realistic  appreciation  of  problems  in  the 
transition  period.     For  instance,  in  Belgium  a 
wife  who  has  acquired  Belgian  nationality  by 
marriage,  and  has  or  can  recover  another  na- 
tionality, may  renounce  Belgian  nationality  by 
making  a  declaration  within  6  months.     This  pro- 
vision insures  against  statelessness  and  at  the  same 
time  provides  freedom  of  choice.    In  Egypt  an 
alien  woman  marrying  an  Egyptian  may  retain 
her  nationality  unless  she  desires  to  acquire  her 
husband's,  a  provision  in  the  direction  of  equality 
with  freedom  of  choice  and  protection  against 
double  nationality.     In  Norway,  where  a  foreign 
woman  automatically  acquires  the  nationality  of 
a  Norwegian  husband,  she  may  under  certain  cir- 
cumstances be   released   provided   she   possesses 
another    nationality    or    intends    to    acquire    it. 
Switzerland  has  recently  adopted  legislation  per- 
mitting an  alien  wife  to  reattain  her  own  na- 
tionality through  a  declaration  at  the  time  of 
marriage. 

These  are  only  a  few  of  the  possible  variations ; 
if  we  review  laws  in  effect  in  other  countries  we 
would  find  still  more.  One  of  the  elements  of 
great  value  in  these  changes  is  concern  to  prevent 
a  woman  becoming  stateless.  This  is  apparent 
also  in  various  provisions  I  have  not  quoted  to 
permit  a  woman  whose  marriage  has  been  dis- 
solved to  recover  her  original  nationality.     Some 

April  6,   T953 


of  these  provisions  do  not  accord  in  principle  with 
the  recommendation  of  this  Commission  that  mar- 
riage should  not  affect  the  nationality  of  either 
spouse,  but  in  actuality  they  give  general  effect 
to  this  principle  through  practical  safeguards 
needed  in  a  transition  period. 

Progress  Anticipated  on  Women's  Status 

The  Secretary  General's  memorandum  is  of  a 
type  which  will  be  helpful  to  my  Government  and 
to  every  other  government.  It  summarizes  the 
latest  information  from  all  countries  and  brings 
up  to  date  the  1950  pamphlet  which  is  already  a 
recognized  reference  document.  There  are  many 
governments  which  collect  such  data  through  their 
embassies  and  maintain  their  own  files.  But  there 
are  occasional  omissions  even  in  the  best  reporting 
systems  and  an  authoritative  collection  of  nation- 
ality laws  affecting  women  is  a  valuable  check  on 
what  is  known  from  other  sources.  This  infor- 
mation is  needed  not  only  as  a  basis  for  official 
decisions  but  more  frequently,  and  perhaps 
equally  important,  to  answer  the  questions  of 
young  people  or  older  people  who  are  about  to 
marry  and  want  to  know  what  problems  they  will 
face.  A  document  like  this  would  be  even  more 
useful  if  it  could  be  brought  out  at  regular  inter- 
vals, preferably  once  a  year.  The  United  States 
would  like  to  ask  whether  the  Secretary  General 
believes  it  would  be  practicable  to  place  this  mem- 
orandum on  an  annual  basis  similar  to  the  proce- 
dure for  the  memorandum  on  political  rights. 
This  would  also  mean  keeping  nationality  as  a 
routine  item  on  our  agenda  so  that  we  can  review 
the  report  and  also  determine  how  long  it  should 
be  continued. 

Tlie  Secretary  General  may  have  suggestions  on 
the  form  of  an  annual  memorandum  on  nation- 
ality, particularly  as  to  additional  categories  of 
information.  The  tables  at  the  end  of  this  docu- 
ment cover  the  effect  of  marriage  on  acquisition  of 
nationality  by  the  alien  spouse,  but  do  not  show 
clearly  whether  a  woman  marrying  an  alien  may 
retain  her  own  nationality  if  she  so  desires.  The 
questions  usually  asked  by  women  considering 
marriage  to  a  foreigner  are  (I)  Can  I  retain  my 
own  nationality ;  (2)  Must  I  acquire  my  husband's 
nationality,  temporarily  or  permanently ;  (3)  Will 
I  be  in  danger  of  becoming  stateless;  (4)  Are 
there  special  provisions  for  naturalization  of  alien 
spouses.  Tables  setting  up  warning  signals  as  to 
retention  of  nationality  and  statelessness  would 
be  especially  helpful.  It  seems  a  little  easier  to 
find  particular  countries,  also,  when  they  are 
listed  alphabetically  with  the  pertinent  informa- 
tion laid  out  in  columns  beside  them. 

In  closing,  I  would  like  to  say  a  little  in  appre- 
ciation of  the  interest  our  consultant  organizations 
have  maintained  in  this  project.  For  some  of 
them  the  problems  of  nationality  have  been  the 
subject  of  discussion  for  two  generations,  back 

509 


into  tlie  time  of  our  mothers  and  perhaps  our 
grandmothers.  Tliere  have  been  great  gains  in 
tliis  period.  In  the  Americas  the  Montevideo 
Convention  on  the  Nationality  of  Women  is  a 
milestone.  Eleven  of  our  American  Republics  are 
parties  to  this  convention,  which  provides  that 
neither  marriage  nor  its  dissolution  shall  aflFect  a 
woman's  nationality.  The  adoption  of  equality 
principles  by  the  Commission  on  the  States  of 
Women  in  1950  is  another  milestone.  A  milestone 
has  been  set  by  each  country  which  has  revised 
its  nationality  laws  to  provide  free  and  equal 
choice  by  each  of  the  marriage  partners. 

As  in  all  matters  involving  international  proce- 
dure, the  first  milestones,  are  the  hardest  to 
achieve ;  as  the  new  way  becomes  the  usual  way  it 
is  easier  to  conform  than  to  differ.  At  the  same 
time,  we  need  not  think  of  our  objectives  as  uni- 
formity. If  we  work  intelligently  the  chances  are 
we  will  constantly  be  finding  ways  to  improve 
legislation ;  that  is  evident  already  in  some  of  the 
new  provisions  to  prevent  statelessness  and  clarify 
choices  for  both  men  and  women.  The  report  be- 
fore us  today  promises  a  time  when  international 
conferences  of  women  may  be  able  to  do  without 
the  familiar  speech  on  "Problems  of  Nationality." 
Instead  of  problems,  however,  I  would  like  to  see 
us  look  forward  to  a  series  of  progress  reports. 
The  observations  of  our  consultant  organizations 
will  be  important  in  helping  this  Commission 
evaluate  progress  and  to  point  out  the  areas  where 
more  can  be  done. 

WOMEN'S  STATUS  IN  THE  FAMILY 

U.S. /U.N.  preBS  release  dated  March  17 

As  a  new  memlier  of  the  Commission  it  is 
therefore  very  gratifying  to  me  that  the  subject 
of  women's  status  in  the  family  will  be  mider 
discussion  for  the  first  time  at  this  session  and 
that  it  has  been  given  highest  priority. 

As  we  begin  our  discussion  it  is  my  privilege 
to  express  the  appreciation  of  my  Government 
for  the  extensive  work  of  the  Secretary  General's 
staff  in  compiling  the  reports  from  official  sources 
on  women's  status  nndei'  family  law  and  prop- 
erty law  and  also  in  making  available  the  inde- 
pendent reports  and  comments  of  the  nongovern- 
mental organizations.  The  detailed  information 
contained  in  these  documents  will  be  invaluable 
as  a  basis  for  consideration  of  women's  needs  and 
problems.  I  feel  sure  that  all  of  you  will  have 
studied  the  documents  with  great  interest  and 
care  and  a  sense  of  the  enormous  responsibilities 
before  us.  As  our  discussions  jn'oceed,  I  know 
there  will  be  additional  information  which  you 
will  probably  want  from  me  and  which  I  in  turn 
will  want  to  know  from  other  countries. 

I  regard  our  work  on  the  family  status  of 
woman  as  one  of  the  most  important  aspects  of 
woman's  position  with  which  this  Commission 
will  be  called  upon  to  deal.     Family  law — the  set 


of  legal  principles  which  govern  marriage,  the 
relationship  of  husband  to  wife,  and  of  parents 
to  children — touches  every  aspect  of  human  life. 
Women's  status  in  the  family  directly  affects  the 
contribution  which  women  are  able  to  make  to  the 
economic,  social,  and  cultural  life  of  their  country, 
and  thereby  to  the  whole  progress  of  civilization. 
In  seeking  to  understand  each  other's  needs  and 
problems  in  this  area  we  have  an  opportunity  to 
formulate  principles  as  to  the  equitable  treatment 
of  women  in  marriage  which  will  be  of  potential 
benefit  not  only  to  women  themselves  but  to  the 
whole  fabric  of  our  society. 

The  age  in  which  we  are  living  has  seen  numer- 
ous and  far-reaching  changes  in  the  status  of 
women.  Women  everywhere  are  striving  to  realize 
their  full  potentialities  as  individuals  and  to  make 
their  maximum  contribution  to  the  society  in 
which  they  live.  It  was  my  privilege  to  have  a 
part  in  shaping  or  directing  the  postwar  develop- 
ment of  this  movement  in  one  of  the  war-torn 
countries  when  I  had  charge  in  the  late  40's  of 
organizing  the  Women's  Affairs  Branch  for  the 
U.  S.  Army  in  Germany.  Guarantees  made  to 
women  in  the  Bonn  Constitution,  which  had  just 
been  adopted  at  that  time,  are  now  receiving  con- 
sideration as  to  legal  implementation.  Our  dis- 
cussions here  will  be  of  vital  interest  to  women 
working  for  legislative  action  to  implement  that 
Constitution  and  to  women  in  other  countries 
where  to  a  constantly  increasing  extent  the  re- 
ciprocal rights  and  obligations  of  women  are  re- 
ceiving recognition  in  terms  of  the  greater  con- 
tribution to  human  welfare  which  such  recognition 
would  make  possible. 

Legal  Complications  in  Various  Countries 

In  reading  the  extensive  documentation  on 
family  law  supplied  us  by  the  Secretary  General, 
I  was  impressed  by  the  scope  and  variety  of  legal 
principles  which  we  are  called  upon  to  consider  in 
the  various  countries.  I  note,  for  example,  that  in 
some  countries  only  the  father  has  the  right  to 
exercise  authority  over  the  care,  custody,  and 
education  of  the  children.  This  situation  was  re- 
ported from  Greece,  Argentina,  Chile,  and  Brazil. 
In  some  countries,  such  power  belongs  jointly  to 
the  father  and  mother,  including  Japan,  Norway, 
Turkey,  and  Denmark.  In  still  other  countries, 
such  as  England  and  France,  parental  authority 
is  vested  jointly  in  the  father  and  mother,  but  the 
father  alone  has  the  right  to  exercise  it  during 
marriage.  Still  another  variation  is  Lebanon, 
where  so  far  as  concerns  the  care  and  custody,  gen- 
eral and  religious  education,  and  the  right  of  pun- 
ishment, the  report  shows  that  the  mother  has 
authority  over  children  \ip  to  the  age  of  7  in  the 
case  of  boys,  and  9  in  the  case  of  girls.  After 
those  ages,  these  rights  pass  to  the  father.  In 
Pakistan,  also,  the  mother  has  custody  of  the  son 
until  he  is  7,  and  of  the  daughter  until  she  reaches 
l>uberty. 


510 


Deparfment  of  State   Bulletin 


1  An  additional  complication  of  which  I  was 
i  aware  but  which  the  reports  have  brought  more 
vividly  to  my  attention  is  that  in  countries  estab- 
Hshed  on  the  Federal-State  basis,  legal  principles 
•  may,  and  often  do,  vary  within  the  same  country. 
In  my  own  country,  for  example,  laws  relating  to 
the  family  and  to  property  rights  are  the  exclusive 
jurisdiction  of  the  States,  not  of  the  Federal  ( iov- 
ernment.  Because  of  historical  factors  and  orig- 
inal differences  in  customs  and  backgrounds,  there 
is  considerable  variation  in  the  statute  laws  of  the 
48  States.  Each  State  differs  in  some  respect  from 
all  the  others. 

In  the  area  that  I  have  just  been  discussing— 
that  of  the  right  of  control  over  the  child— over 
half  of  the  States  (26  States)  recognize  both 
parents  as  joint  natural  guardians  and  as  such 
jointly  entitled  to  the  child's  custody,  services,  and 
earnings.  However,  about  a  third  of  our  States 
(15  States)  give  the  father  the  first  right  to  a 
child's  custody,  services,  and  earnings,  permitting 
the  mother  to  succeed  only  after  the  father's  death, 
mental  incapacity  or  desertion.  Eight  States  that 
have  the  community-property  system  of  law  con- 
sider the  child's  earnings  as  joint  property  but 
generally  under  control  of  the  father. 

In  tlie  field  of  property  law,  such  documentation 
as  has  been  made  available  to  date  from  the  various 
countries  shows  that  here  also  the  legal  principles 
with  which  we  will  be  called  upon  to  deal  are  of 
o-reat  variety  and  complexity.     I  was  interested, 
fn  the  recentreport  (E/CN  .Q/208) ,  to  note  that  the 
laws  in  the  countries  reporting  establish  three 
main  types  of  property  arrangements  between  hus- 
band and  wife  :  the  regime  of  community  property. 
;  dowry,  and  separate  property.     In  addition,  a 
system  of  "union"  property  regime  prevails  in 
China ;  and  a  system  of  the  "family  estate"  exists 
only  in  the  Ital'ian  Civil  Code.     Moreover,  the  re- 
port shows  that  in  India  and  Pakistan  property 
rights  are  based  on  religious  law  and  that  such 
rights  differ  in  accordance  with  the  religious  com- 
munity to  which  the  woman  belongs.     Thus  a 
Hindu  woman  may  have  absolute  ownership  only 
to  property  acquired  before  marriage  and  to  earn- 
ings acquired  during  marriage.     Even  this  prop- 
erty may  be  taken  and  used  by  the  husband  in  cer- 
tain contingencies.     In  contrast  under  Mohamme- 
dan  law,   in  both  those  countries   and   also   in 
Lebanon,  a  Moslem  woman  may  hold  property 
g   separately  and  have  full  power  to  dispose  of  it. 
To  illustrate  the  variety  and  complexity  of  the 
subject  of  property  relations  between  husband  and 
wife,  I  need  go  no  further  than  the  laws  of  my 
own  country.     Two  systems  of  property  rights 
prevail  in  the  United  States :  one,  the  system  de- 
rived from  the  English  common  law  in  which  the 
husband    and   wife   hold    separate    and   distinct 
property ;  the  other,  the  community-property  sys- 
tem derived  from  the  Spanish  civil  law,  in  which 
a  marriage  partnership  of  property  is  recognized, 
husband  and  wife  being  partners  and  equal  owners 

April  6,   1953 


of  the  community  estate.  In  the  two  systems  the 
rules  of  acquisition  of  property,  its  management 
and  control,  and  its  disposition  differ  today  as  they 
differed  in  the  original  systems  m  which  the  rules 
had  their  source. 

Equitable  Treatment  of  Family  Status 

In  every  common  law  State  married  woman's 
property  acts  have  been  enacted  during  the  last 
100  years,  which  have  radically  changed  the  hus- 
band's common  law  rights  in  his  wife's  real  and 
personal  property  and  have  also  generally  altered 
the  rule  as  to  his  ownership  of  his  wife's  earnings 
from  work  outside  of  her  home  and  for  persons 
other  than  her  husband.  Property  acquired  dur- 
ing the  marriage  is  regarded  as  the  property  of  the 
husband  subject  to  certain  safeguards  which  the 
law  attaches  in  the  interest  of  the  wife  and  family. 
The  proceeds  of  the  wife's  work  in  her  home  are 
still  very  generally  regarded  as  belonging  to  her 
husband  and  he  is  under  no  legal  obligations  to 
pay  her  for  such  services. 

in  the  eight  States  with  a  community-property 
system,  with  fundamental  rules  derived  from  the 
law  of  Spain  directly,  or  indirectly  by  way  of 
Mexico  (or  in  the  case  of  Louisiana  by  way  of 
France),  the  property  rights  of  husband  and  wife 
differ  markedly  from  those  in  our  common  law 
States.  Under  this  system  all  property  which  the 
husband  and  wife  acquire  belongs  equally  to  both 
of  them,  except  that  which  is  proved  to  belong  to 
either  of  them  separately.  The  proceeds  of  the 
labor  of  each  becomes  a  part  of  the  common  or 
community  property,  in  which  the  wife  has  the 
same  extent  of  ownership  as  the  husband.  The 
marriage  is  a  partnership;  and  its  property  like 
that  in  any  other  partnership  is  primarily  liable 
for  the  payment  of  its  debts.  The  husband,  how- 
ever, usually  has  the  sole  management  of  the  com- 
munity property  during  marriage. 

In  view  of  these  divergencies  in  laws  and  cus- 
toms, I  have  come  to  realize  that  for  me  at  least 
it  would  be  most  helpful  if  at  this  session,  if  in 
place  of  addressing  ourselves  to  specific  statutory 
discriminations,  we  would  undertake  to  reach 
agreement  on  objectives  or  standards  designed  to 
bring  equity  to  women.  The  broader  area  of  ob- 
jectives and  standards  offer  us  a  common  meeting 
o-round,  so  that  if  we  direct  our  discussions  to 
this  area,  I  believe  we  would  have  some  expecta- 
tion of  reaching  agreement  as  to  the  basic  princi- 
ples designed  to  bring  equitable  treatment  to 
women  under  law. 

In  order  to  lay  a  solid  basis  on  which  to  arrive 
at  constructive  suggestions,  I  would  personally 
find  it  most  helpful  if  we  might  center  the  discus- 
sion this  year  around  normal  family  relationships 
as  distinguished  from  special  problems.  Al- 
though the  reports  show  a  great  deal  that  is  out- 
side of  U.  S.  law  and  experience,  it  would  be  most 
helpful  to  discuss  normal  family  relationships  in 
terms  of  the  religious,  economic,  and  social  back- 

511 


ground  and  customs  of  the  various  countries.  In 
this  way,  all  of  us  would  gain  an  insight  into  the 
needs  of  women  in  other  countries  and  learn  to 
understand  their  problems.  What  we  might  ex- 
pect to  come  out  of  such  a  program  would  be  a  set 
of  principles  on  family  law  and  property  relations 
which  \vomen  themselves  would  accept  as  equitable 
and  which  could  be  expected  to  add  to  the  dignity 
of  the  family  relationship  and  to  strengthen,  not 
weaken,  the  fabric  of  our  society. 

As  a  start,  we  have  the  basic  standards  set  forth 
in  the  Universal  Declaration  of  Human  Eights. 
The  preamble  of  the  Declaration  states  that : 

...  the  peoples  of  the  United  Nations  have  in  the 
Charter  reaffirmed  their  faith  in  fundamental  human 
rights,  in  the  dignity  and  worth  of  the  human  person  and 
in  the  equal  rights  of  men  and  women  and  have  determined 
to  promote  social  progress  and  better  standards  of  life  in 
larger  freedom, 

In  arriving  at  a  set  of  principles  consistent  with 
the  spirit  and  purpose  of  these  accepted  human 
values  there  are  several  major  areas  of  family  law 
to  which  I  believe  we  might  well  give  priority. 
One  of  the  areas  that  suggests  itself  as  appropriate 
for  early  discussion  is  the  institution  of  marriage. 
What  is  the  purpose  and  what  are  the  sanctities  of 
marriage  in  our  differing  legal  and  religious  sys- 
tems? Viewed  against  the  economic  and  social 
background  of  the  individual  country  concerned, 
what  should  be  the  rights  and  obligations  of 
woman  with  respect  to  entrance  into  marriage, 
choice  of  a  partner,  age  of  consent?  Once  a  mar- 
riage is  consummated,  what  constitutes  a  mutually 
satisfactory  relationship  between  husband  and 
wife  during  marriage?  What  should  be  their  re- 
ciprocal rights  and  obligations  with  respect  to 
responsibility  for  family  support,  control  of  chil- 
dren, choice  of  domicile?  What  principles  gov- 
erning the  control  of  property  acquired  after 
marriage  would  both  insure  justice  to  the  parties 
concerned  and  promote  the  welfare  of  the  family? 
What  standards  should  be  applied  in  dealing  with 
(a)  the  separate  property  of  the  wife,  and  (b)  the 
property  acquired  through  the  joint  efforts  of  both 
partners? 

Our  discussions  of  this  topic  will  give  us  an 
opportunity  to  examine  the  laws  that  govern  the 
position  of  women  in  the  family  and  to  determine 
what  should  be  the  reciprocal  rights  and  obliga- 
tions of  women  in  the  light  of  existing  conditions 
in  the  various  countries.  On  the  basis  of  this  dis- 
cussion we  may  hope  to  arrive  at  an  understanding 
as  to  the  underlying  principles  which  will  insure 
the  equitable  treatment  of  women  in  marriage, 
safeguard  the  rights  and  obligations  of  mother- 
hood, and  promote  the  welfare  of  the  family  as 
the  basic  institution  of  our  society.  The  approach 
I  am  suggesting  may  prove  to  be  a  long,  hard  road 
and  it  may  not  easily  be  finished  in  one  or  even 
two  annual  sessions.  However,  since  it  affords  the 
possibility  of  constructive  help  in  promoting  the 
family  status  of  women  in  all  our  countries,  I  be- 
lieve it  would  be  well  worth  the  effort. 


EDUCATIONAL  OPPORTUNITIES  FOR  WOMEN 

U.S./U.N.  press  release  dated  March  25 

We  endorse  wholeheartedly  the  principle  of  the 
fullest  educational  opportunities  for  women.  We 
wish  to  re-emphasize  our  belief  that  education 
should  always  be  considered  in  terms  of  the  in- 
dividual without  any  discrimination  on  the  basis 
of  sex.  This  is  the  philosophy  prevailing 
throughout  the  United  States,  embodied  in  the 
educational  pattern  in  each  one  of  the  48  States 
and  the  various  territories  under  our  jurisdiction. 

In  the  United  States,  education  is  regarded  as 
a  right,  available  to  all  children,  girls  or  boys, 
regardless  of  the  economic  or  social  status  of  the 
family.  We  are  fully  in  accord  with  the  state- 
ment of  the  Fifteenth  International  Conference 
on  Public  Education  at  Geneva  in  1952,  "that  ev- 
ery person,  man  or  woman,  should  be  able  to  re- 
ceive an  education  enabling  him  to  develop  his 
aptitudes  as  fully  as  possible,  plan  an  effective 
part  as  a  member  or  citizen  of  his  community,  his 
nation,  and  the  world,  and  meet  the  demands  of 
his  special  tasks  in  life." 

As  was  indicated  in  this  country's  report  to 
that  conference,  the  constitutions  of  all  our  states 
make  it  obligatory  to  organize  free  public-school 
facilities  for  all  children,  and  provide  either  ex- 
plicitly or  implicitly  for  equal  educational  oppor- 
tunities regardless  of  sex.  The  duration  and  the 
age  limits  of  compulsory  education  are  the  same 
for  girls  as  for  boys ;  all  public  elementary  schools 
and  the  great  majority  of  the  public  high  schools 
are  coeducational,  there  is  equal  access  to  all  types 
of  vocational  and  technical  training  and  to  higher 
education,  the  great  majority  of  all  post-secondary 
institutions  being  coeducational. 

Even  the  economic  and  social  factors  which 
sometimes  affect  the  opportunitj'  of  women  for 
higher  education  are  becoming  less  and  less  signi- 
ficant as  earlier  prejudices  are  outgrown  and  em- 
ployment opportunities  open  in  a  wider  and  wider 
range  of  professions  and  occupations.  Today  it 
would  be  practically  impossible  to  cite  any  kind  of 
job  for  which  a  qualified  woman  could  not  obtain 
appropriate  educational  training  in  the  United 
States.  As  early  as  1930  women  were  employed 
in  all  but  30  of  the  534  occupations  in  the  census 
list  of  that  year.  By  11)40  there  were  only  9  in 
which  no  woman  was  employed  and  by  1943  the 
admission  of  women  to  the  various  military  serv- 
ices left  only  3,  now  there  is  virtually  no  occupa- 
tion in  which  there  are  not  a  few  women  success- 
fully performing  a  job. 

Promoting  Ideals  of  Democracy 

Furthermore,  we  have  discovered  and  proved 
again  and  again  the  validity  of  the  truism,  "edu- 
cate a  woman  and  you  have  educated  a  family — 
and  a  community."  Every  woman  is  to  some  ex- 
tent an  educator,  whether  or  not  she  is  a  member 


512 


Departmenf  of  Stafe   Bulletin 


of  the  teaching  profession.  In  the  home  she 
helps  her  children  put  into  practice  the  learning 
experiences  acquired  in  the  schools,  trains  them 
in  good  health  and  living  habits,  and  takes  a  lead- 
ing role  in  developing  family  attitudes  and  in 
transmitting  the  ideals  of  democracy.  In  the 
community,  she  carries  her  housekeeping  ability 
and  her  desire  for  clean  and  safe  surroundings 
for  her  family  into  the  organizing  of  health  and 
welfare  services  and  of  public-service  organiza- 
tions of  many  kinds  for  bettering  her  neighbor- 
hood. She  has  been  concerned  to  see  that  the 
water  and  food  supply  are  kept  clean  and  pure, 
and  that  effective  sanitation  facilities  and  safe 
streets  are  provided. 

It  may  be  reassuring  to  some  countries  where 
there  is  still  latent  opposition  to  higher  educa- 
tion for  women  to  discover  that  educated  women 
in  this  country  have  a  real  interest  in  being  wives 
and  mothers — in  recent  years  three- fourths  of  our 
women  college  graduates  marry,  and  current  sta- 
tistics show  an  upward  trend  in  the  number  of 
their  children.  A  recent  questionnaire  to  college 
graduates  showed  that  many  feel  they  are  better 
mothers  because  of  their  education,  better  in  un- 
derstanding, training  and  rearing  their  cliildren, 
and  more  able  to  help  and  guide  them. 

Eecent  trends  in  American  education  have 
tended  to  focus  the  whole  school  curriculum  in 
the  direction  of  education  for  family  and  com- 
munity living.  Experience  indicates  that  both 
men  and  women  can  profit  by  broad  instruction  in 
relation  to  family  life,  including  the  joint  respon- 
sibilities and  privileges  undertaken  in  marriage 
and  parenthood.  Life  adjustment  courses  in  sec- 
ondary schools  and  for  adults  are  growing  in 
American  schools  and  communities.  Through  ex- 
periments in  both  rural  and  urban  areas,  schools 
at  the  elementary  as  well  as  the  more  advanced 
level  are  orienting  their  teaching  toward  the  rais- 
ing of  living  standards  in  the  whole  community, 
by  making  scientific  knowledge  available  in  a  form 
which  can  be  used  by  young  children  and  their 
parents,  and  by  developing  in  applying  such 
knowledge  to  the  raising  of  living  standards. 

The  concept  of  the  school  as  a  community  center 
rather  than  merely  a  place  of  instruction  for  chil- 
dren has  grown  markedly  in  recent  years.  School 
buildings  are  used  for  adult  education  and  other 
community  purposes  outside  the  formal  school 
hours.  Such  school  activities  as  the  school-lunch 
program,  greatly  influence  the  life  of  the  commu- 
nity. The  growth  of  informal  educational  pro- 
grams, such  as  agricultural  extension,  labor 
education,  and  educational  activities  of  libraries 
further  reflects  the  trend  toward  relating  educa- 
tion directly  to  problems  of  democratic  living. 

Responsibility  of  the  community  for  its  schools 
also  reflects  the  processes  of  democratic  partici- 
pation— processes  in  which  women  as  citizens  play 
an  important  part.  It  has  always  been  the  prin- 
ciple of  the  American  public-school  system  that 


policy  making  and  ultimate  control  of  the  schools 
shall  lie  in  the  hands  of  citizens  of  each  locality 
rather  than  in  the  hands  of  the  government  or 
of  professional  educators.  School  boards  elected 
by  the  citizenry,  on  which  women  and  men  both 
serve,  are  the  governing  bodies  of  American  pub- 
lic schools.  The  Parent  Teacher  Association, 
which  brings  together  parents  and  teachers  to  con- 
sider needs  of  children  and  school,  provides  a  fur- 
ther channel  for  participation  by  women  of  the 
community  in  planning  for  and  promoting  the 
education  of  their  children. 

Education  for  responsible  citizenship  and  dem- 
ocratic participation  has  always  been  a  major  ob- 
jective of  American  education.  Such  education 
first  took  the  form  of  school  courses  in  civics.  In 
most  schools,  these  courses,  limited  to  the  structure 
and  processes  of  government,  have  been  replaced 
by  courses  which  integrate  the  study  of  history, 
civics,  and  other  social  sciences,  and  address  them- 
selves to  "Problems  of  Democracy."  Student  or- 
ganizations within  the  school  are  patterned  on 
national,  state,  or  local  government  and  provide 
boys  and  girls  with  direct  experience  in  the  re- 
sponsible use  of  democratic  procedures.  Within 
the  classroom,  democratic  processes  are  used  as  a 
consciously  developed  teaching  method,  and  em- 
phasis is  placed  on  developing  the  ability  to  eval- 
uate facts  and  to  engage  in  public  discussion  which 
is  basic  to  democracy. 

Interest  in  Public  Affairs 

These  educational  developments  have  been  re- 
flected in  the  role  played  by  American  women  in 
their  participation  in  State  and  Federal  activities 
for  the  general  welfare  and  for  international 
peace  and  security.  Citizenship  training  is  re- 
flected especially  in  improved  standards  of  local 
government  for  which  women  have  worked  vigor- 
ously as  part  of  their  responsibility  for  the  family. 
It  is  reflected  also  in  the  activity  of  women's 
organizations  to  improve  laws  and  their  admin- 
istration through  honest  government,  sound  judi- 
cial procedures,  and  positive  public  programs 
relating  to  health,  education,  and  welfare.  Pos- 
sibly its  strongest  reflection  is  in  the  contributions 
of  women's  organizations  to  education.  The  ex- 
perience in  parliamentary  law  and  effective 
conduct  of  discussion  which  women  have  obtained 
in  their  organizations,  in  trade  unions,  and  also 
in  formal  classes  in  schools  has  proved  of  great 
value  for  women  in  their  political  life. 

The  interaction  between  the  fact  that  women  are 
increasingly  well  educated  and  increasingly  con- 
cerned with  public  affairs  is  reflected  in  the 
development  of  women's  magazines.  The  inter- 
action between  women's  magazines  and  their  read- 
ers has  steadily  raised  the  level  of  public  discus- 
sion in  those  magazines  until  they  have  become 
principal  forums  for  the  discussion  of  important 
issues,  read  by  men  as  well  as  by  women.    Women 


April  6,   1953 


513 


and  women's  organizations  have  been  in  the  lead 
in  developing  and  supporting  voluntary  welfare 
services,  in  tlie  study  of  social  problems,  and  in 
suppoi't  of  Ifjcal  and  national  legislation  to  deal 
with  these  problems.  Tliey  liave  frequently  paved 
the  way  for  men  and  women  to  work  togetlier  on 
these  matters  through  labor  unions  and  other 
citizen  groups. 

A  comprehensive  study  of  the  education  of 
women  in  the  United  States  will  be  carried  on  by 
a  newly  established  commission  on  women's  edu- 
cation of  the  American  Council  on  Education.  It 
will  explore  tlie  current  and  long-range  needs  re- 
sulting from  the  impact  of  changing  social  condi- 
tions upon  women  as  individuals,  members  of 
families,  career  women,  citizens,  and  as  creators 
and  perpetuatore  of  values.     It  will  include  a  con- 


sideration of  women  in  faculty  and  administrative 
positions  in  higher  education,  the  opportunities 
for  women  students  in  colleges  and  universities, 
and  the  development  of  plans  for  continuing  the 
education  of  women  at  the  adult  level. 

The  woman  who  plays  a  significant  and  con- 
structive role  in  the  world  today  will  be  the  woman 
whose  clarity  of  thinking,  whose  experience, 
standards,  and  judgments  can  raise  the  cultural 
sights  of  her  family  and  contribute  to  their 
psychological  and  emotional  well-being.  She  is 
the  woman  who  brings  to  her  profession  or  busi- 
ness a  wider  range  of  vision,  who  is  conscious  of 
her  responsibilities  as  a  citizen  in  a  democracy  and 
does  something  about  it.  In  other  words,  her 
education  has  trained  her  to  be  a  good  member  of 
society. 


The  United  States  in  tlie  United  Nations 


[March  1&-25] 

General  Assembly 

Committee  I  {Political  and  Security) — The 
U.S.S.R.  on  March  11)  submitted  a  resolution  de- 
termining that  the  Disarmament  Commission,  es- 
pecially the  United  States,  France,  and  the  United 
Kingdom,  had  repeatedly  attempted  to  substitute 
for  the  question  of  armaments  reduction  "that  of 
illegally  obtaining  intelligence  reports  on  the 
armaments  of  individual  states."  The  Soviet 
draft  would  direct  the  Disarmament  Commission 
to  proceed  forthwith  with  the  study  of  practical 
measures  to  acliieve  armaments  reduction,  par- 
ticularly among  the  five  Great  Powers,  and  with 
the  unconditional  prohibition  of  atomic  weapons, 
bacteriological,  and  other  weapons  of  mass  de- 
struction, and  the  establishment  of  strict  inter- 
national control.  The  Disarmament  Commission 
would  be  asked  to  report  back  to  the  Security 
Council  and  the  General  Assembly  not  later  than 
July  1. 

Before  introducing  his  resolution.  Valerian 
Zorin  (U.S.S.R.)  brushed  aside  the  questions  put 
to  him  March  18  by  Ambassador  Ernest  A.  Gross, 
as  to  whether  the  Soviets  were  willing  to  discuss 
disarmament  constructively  in  the  United  Nations. 
He  declared  that  the  U.S.S.R.  had  consistently 
advocated  armaments  reduction  and  prohibition 
of  atomic  energy  as  the  greatest  guaranties  of 
peace. 

Speaking  in  support  of  the  14-power  resolution. 
D.  J.  von  Balluseck  (Netherlands)  noted  the 
fundamental  difference  in  approach  as  between  the 
West  and  the  U.S.S.R.     It  was  essential,  he  said, 


to  begin  with  the  question  of  disclosure  and  veri- 
fication. The  U.S.S.R.,  however,  wanted  to  start 
at  the  "far  end"  with  reduction  of  armaments 
and  prohibition  of  atomic  weapons.  There 
would  be  no  value  in  such  premature  decisions, 
which  might  only  continue  the  imbalance  of 
power.  A  sy.stem  of  checks  and  balances  was 
needed. 

Leslie  K.  Munro  (New  Zealand)  pointed  out 
that  clear  and  explicit  answers  to  Ambassador 
Gross'  questions  of  March  18  would  "help  us  to 
assess"'  the  prospects  of  making  progi'ess  in  dis- 
armament. Recalling  Premier  Malenkov's  recent 
"peace  policy"  statements,  he  noted  that  press 
reports  of  a  Pravda  article  advocating  an  all-out 
drive  to  strengthen  Soviet  power  w-ere  a  "depress- 
ing sequel." 

Speaking  for  the  United  Kingdom.  Sir  Glad- 
wyn  Jebb  also  referred  to  Premier  Malenkov's 
talk  of  peace  and  proposed  that  if  he  really  wanted 
to  settle  all  outstanding  problems  peaceably,  he 
would  do  well  to  start  in  the  Disarmament  Com- 
mission. Even  if  the  new  Soviet  Government 
could  just  take  a  new  look  at  the  whole  disarma- 
ment problem  and  try  to  get  away  from  stale  slo-  i 
gans,  some  progi-ess  would  be  achieved.  11 

At  the  March  20  meeting  of  the  Committee, 
Egyjit,  Iraq,  Syria,  and  Yemen  jointly  introduced 
amendments  to  the  14-power  draft  wliich,  among 
other  things,  would  add  a  reference  to  hopes  that 
"all  members  of  the  Commission  will  cooperate 
in  efforts  to  produce  constructive  proposals  likely 
to  facilitate  its  task." 

On  March  21,  Mr.  Zorin   made   an   umisually 


514 


Depariment   of  Sfate   Bulletin 


moderate  statement  in  which  he  said  that  the 
Soviet  Union  deemed  it  essential  that  the  Disarma- 
ment Commission  continue  its  work  and  endeavor 
to  find  common  ground.  His  Government  could 
not  agree  with  the  Western  Powers'  insistence  that 
'disclosure  of  information  must  precede  reduction 
of  armaments;  in  the  absence  of  agreement  to 
reduce  armaments,  countries  could  not  be  expected 
to  disclose  information  on  their  armaments  for 
this  might  result  in  some  states  claiming  that  they 
were  obliged  to  rearm  further. 

Ambassador  Gross  expressed  disappointment  at 
the  way  in  which  his  questions  of  March  18  had 
been  treated.  If  the  United  States  were  easily 
discouraged,  he  said,  the  response  of  the  Soviet 
delegation  might  lead  it  to  believe  there  was  no 
substance  in  the  words  of  peace  from  the  Kremlin. 
However,  "we  must  say  to  the  Soviet  delegate: 
Surely  this  is  not  your  last  word  on  the  subject; 
surely  you  would  not  have  us  believe  the  words 
of  Premier  Malenkov  were  empty  words." 

The  U.S.  delegate  pointed  to  the  incalculable 
advantages  which  balanced  reduction  of  armed 
forces  would  have  for  the  Russian  people  and 
other  peoples  living  under  Soviet  rule.  He  was 
sure  they  yearned  for  a  decent  standard  of  living, 
and  disarmament  could  yield  this  without  in  any 
way  jeopardizing  the  security  of  the  Soviet  state, 
the  Soviet  resolution.  Ambassador  Gross  felt, 
would  undo  a  great  deal  of  the  progress  made  at 
the  last  General  Assembly.  It  proposed  arma- 
ments reduction  without  any  reference  to  armed 
forces.  It  sought  to  abandon  the  U.N.'s  atomic 
energy  plan.  On  the  other  hand,  the  United 
States  recognized  that  in  this  resolution  for  the 
first  time  the  Soviet  Government  had  admitted  by 
implication  the  possibility  of  reduction  of  non- 
atomic  armaments  on  a  basis  other  than  a  flat  per- 
centage cut.  He  sincerely  hoped  this  was  an  indi- 
cation of  greater  flexibility  and  a  desire  for  gen- 
uine negotiation  on  this  important  problem. 
Wlien  the  Disarmament  Commission  reconvened, 
there  would  be  a  clear  test  of  Soviet  intentions. 
He  concluded  by  assuring  that  the  United  States 
would  give  the  most  careful  and  sympathetic  con- 
sideration to  any  Soviet  proposals  which  might 
lead  to  a  genuinely  safeguarded  system  of  dis- 
armament.    (For  text,  see  p.  503.) 

In  the  voting,  the  li-power  draft  as  amended 
was  approved  50-5  (Soviet  bloc) -5  (Saudi  Arabia, 
Burma,  India,  Indonesia,  Argentina).  (During 
the  paragraph-by-paragraph  voting,  the  Soviet 
bloc  had  cast  affirmative  votes  on  the  preamble 
and  on  the  portion  of  operative  paragraph  2  re- 
questing continuation  of  the  Disarmament  Com- 
mission's work ;  it  had  abstained  on  paragraph  3, 
requesting  the  Commission  to  report  by  September 
1,  1953,  and  expressing  hope  for  cooperation 
within  the  Commission.) 
I  The  Soviet  draft  resolution  was  rejected  by  a 
'  vote  of  5^1-13  (Bolivia,  Afghanistan,  Argentina, 

April  6,   1953 


Egj'pt,  Ethiopia,  Burma,  Iraq,  Iran,  Indonesia, 
India,  Saudi  Arabia,  Syria,  Yemen) . 

On  Marcli  23  Czechoslovakia  opened  debate  on 
its  resolution  calling  upon  the  General  Assembly 
to  condemn  the  U.S.  Mutual  Security  Act  and  to 
recommend  abrogation  of  the  section  which  ap- 
propriates 100  million  dollars  for  alleged  espio- 
nage and  subversive  activities  behind  the  Iron 
Curtain.  Both  Vaclav  David,  Czechoslovak  For- 
eign Minister,  and  Andrei  Gromyko  quoted  liber- 
ally from  statements  of  congressional  and  other 
U.S.  leaders  and  from  evidence  given  at  spy  trials 
in  satellite  countries  in  order  to  back  up  their  con- 
tentions regarding  interference  by  the  United 
States  aimed  at  overthrowing  governments. 

Replying  to  their  charges.  Ambassador  Lodge 
declared  that  no  valid  indictment  of  the  United 
States  could  be  based  on  newspaper  clippings 
and  remarks  of  individual  legislators  since 
people  in  this  country  were  free  to  speak  and  write 
as  they  chose.  As  for  the  question  of  subversion, 
Czechoslovakia  itself  was  a  flagrant  case  in  point. 
Ambassador  Lodge  described  the  Communist  sub- 
version of  the  Czechoslovak  state  at  the  time  of 
the  coup  (Tetat  in  February  1948. 

With  this  record,  Ambassador  Lodge  pointed 
out,  the  present  rulers  of  Czechoslovakia,  who  in- 
troduced this  resolution  criticizing  the  United 
States,  do  not  come  into  court  with  clean  hands. 
Turning  to  the  question  of  escapees.  Ambassa- 
dor Lodge  pointed  out  that  if  the  Kremlin  leaders 
are  really  looking  for  the  people  who  are  subvert- 
ing life  behind  the  Iron  Curtain,  they  should  look 
at  themselves — at  their  laws,  their  decrees,  their 
practices  of  oppression.  Ambassador  Lodge 
showed  how  in  order  to  escape  these  practices  of 
oppression  and  to  seek  freedom  to  speak,  write, 
vote,  and  worship,  men  and  women  made  heroic 
efforts  to  escape  through  the  Iron  Curtain  despite 
armed  guards  watching  from  observation  towers 
and  vicious  dogs  patrolling  the  frontiers.  He 
showed  how  the  money  expended  under  the  Ker- 
sten  amendment  had  been  used  to  provide  recep- 
tion and  living, quarters,  food,  clothing,  medical 
care;  help  in  their  search  for  visas;  vocational 
training;  and  employment  and  emigration  advice 
to  assist  in  the  permanent  resettlement  of  these 
escapees. 

Ambassador  Lodge  went  on  to  show  how  the 
funds  appropriated  under  the  Kersten  amend- 
ment were  part  of  the  larger  sums  the  United 
States  is  now  spending  under  the  Mutual  Security 
Act  and  has  previously  spent  under  the  Marshall 
l^lan  to  lielp  the  free  nations  to  stay  free— to  stop 
future  Koreas  and  future  Czech oslovaki as  before 
they  start.  As  for  U.S.  intentions  toward  other 
countries,  he  cited  U.S.  technical-assistance  pro- 
grams and  bv  contrast  the  recent  Technical  As- 
sistance Conference  where  Soviet  representatives 
were  conspicuously  absent.  In  conclusion  he 
called  for  an  emphatic  rejection  of  the  Czech 
resolution. 

515 


During  the  debate  on  March  25,  Mr.  von  Bal- 
luseck  said  that  the  Czechoslovak  Government  and 
its  "political  friends"  were  really  complaining  that 
citizens  of  the  Iron  Curtain  countries  preferred 
liberty  to  serfdom  and  were  leaving  the  "peace 
camp"  in  ever-increasing  numbers  for  the  free- 
dom of  the  West.  The  escapees  were  branded  as 
agents  of  the  ruling  circles,  and  those  who  re- 
ceived them  and  treated  them  as  human  beino-s 
were  condemned  by  the  Communist  world  as  ag- 
gressors and  subversionists.  The  Netherlands 
delegation  would  vote  against  the  Czechoslovak 
resolution,  in  the  belief  that  giving  aid  to  destitute 
political  refugees  was  no  crime. 

Selim  Sarper  (Turkey)  stated  that  Ambassador 
Lodge  had  given  convincing  answers  to  the  Soviet 
charges.  Eca  and  Msa  had  accomplished  much  in 
Turkey,  he  added ;  there  were  2,500  tractors  in  his 
country  in  1948  and  35,000  in  1952,  and  the  cereal 
crop  had  been  increased  by  4,500,000  tons  in  the 
same  period. 

There  was  nothing  sinister  about  Msa  aid  to 
Free  China,  Chun-Ming  Chang  declared.  De- 
scribing the  constructive  objectives  of  the  U.S. 
program,  he  contrasted  it  with  the  Soviet  Union's 
30-year  record  of  promoting  subversive  activities 
in  foreign  countries.  The  Chinese  people  were 
opposed  to  the  Communist  regime,  the  most  brutal 
form  of  domination  ever  known  in  the  world. 

Ambassador  Lodge  on  ]\Iarch  25  asked  the 
Soviet  delegation  two  additional  questions,  as  to 
what  future  plans  "the  Kremlin's  Czechoslovak 
puppet"  has  for  William  Oatis  and  what  fate 
the  Peiping  regime  has  in  store  for  the  100-odd 
A.mericans  in  Communist  China.  Summarizing 
his  delegation's  attitude  toward  the  Czechoslovak 
attack  on  the  Mutual  Security  Act,  he  concluded : 

.  .  .  the  only  aspect  of  the  escapee  program  which 
merits  condemnation  is  the  fact  that  the  world  is  today  so 
organized  that  there  are  escapees.  The  free  peoples  of  the 
world  can  hardly  do  too  much  for  these  victims  of  Soviet 
tyranny. 

Our  aid  to  escapees  can  only  stop  when  escapees  stop 
coming — when  millions  of  men  and  women,  now  trapped 
behind  the  Iron  Curtain,  need  no  longer  look  elsewhere 
for  freedom.  A  problem  like  this  is  not  solved  by  tighten- 
ing border  controls  and  intensifying  purges.  When 
national  aspirations  are  subverted,  when  human  rights 
are  suppressed,  pressure  builds  up  to  the  boiling  point. 
One  outcome  of  this  pressure  is  a  flow  of  escapees.  And 
this  flow  will  not  stop  until  the  Soviet  leaders  permit 
peoples  under  their  sway  to  live  their  own  lives  in  their 
own  way. 

So  long  as  escapees  continue  to  come,  the  duty  to  assist 
them  is  a  matter  of  common  humanity  for  the  United 
States  and  the  rest  of  the  free  world.  It  is  also  a  duty 
imixised  on  us  by  the  Charter.  For,  in  essence,  the  United 
Nations  Charter  is  a  Charter  of  hope  and  freedom.  It  is 
a  Charter  of  emancipation  from  religious  and  civil  per- 
secution, from  poverty  and  disease,  and  from  the  even 
more  hideous  scourges  of  concjuest  and  de.spotism. 

It  is  a  magnet  drawing  vast  populations  who  .see  in  it 
the  expression  of  their  hope  to  live  their  own  lives  in 
well-being  and  freedom. 

Mr.  Chairman,  we  want  to  make  this  magnet  irresistible, 
strongly  charging  it  with  our  support  and  strength. 

516 


Our  Mutual  Security  Program  will  stop  when  the  threat 
of  aggression— not  only  for  us,  but  for  all  the  free  world- 
is  lifted.  The  United  States,  like  all  the  free  world,  pre- 
fers peaceful  settlements  to  a  dangerous  and  burdensome 
armaments  race.  We  do  not  enjoy  that.  We  long  for 
the  day  of  honest  negotiations  which  my  Government 
asked  for  in  this  committee  last  week.  We  will  meet  the 
Soviet  Union  half-way  at  any  time. 


Economic  and  Social  Council  ' 

Commission   on   the   Status   of   Women — The  I 
Commission  on  March  19  approved  12-0-5  (U.S.)  I 
a  French-Lebanese-Pakistani  text  requesting  in-| 
elusion  of  article  1  of  the  Human  Rights  Dectara^ 
tion  in  the  Civil  and  Political  Rights  Covenant. 
At  the  following  day's  meeting,  a  compromise  I 
resolution  on  the  nationality  of  married  women,  i 
formulated  by  the  resolutions  committee,  was  ap- 
proved by  a  vote  of  12-3  (Soviet  bloc)-2  (China,  I 
U.K.).     The  resolution  recommends  that  the  Eco- 
nomic and  Social  Council  request  the  Secretary 
General  to  circulate  to  members  the  draft  conven-  ' 
tion  on  nationality  of  married  persons  proposed  ' 
by  Cuba,  with  the  request  that  members  send  in 
their  comments  by  January  1954,  in  time  for  con- 
sideration at  the  Commission's  eighth  session. 

During  the  same  meeting,  unanimous  approval  \ 
was  given  to  a  resolution  on  the  status  of  women 
in  private  law,  recommending  that  the  Economic  i 
and  Social  Council  call  on  governments  to  take 
all  possible  measures  to  insure  equality  of  rights  ' 
and  duties  of  husband  and  wife  in  family  mat- 
ters, and  to  the  wife  full  legal  capacity  and  the 
right  to  engage  in  work  outside  the  home  and  the 
right  to  acquire,  administer,  enjoy,  and  dispose 
ot  property  on  equal  terms  with  her  husband.  ' 

Discussion  of  political  rights  opened  on  March  ' 
23.     Mrs.  Lorena  B.  Hahn  (U.S.)  urged  that  at-  ' 
tention  now  be  focused  on  methods  of  helping  gov- 
ernments to  provide  equal  suffrage.     As  women  ' 
lacked  the  vote  in  more  than  15  nations,  almost  all  ' 
of  which  are  U.N.  members,  she  believed  that  help- 
ful recommendations  could  be  made.  \ 
On  March  24  the  Commission  adopted  a  reso-  i 
lution  urging  signature  of  the  Convention  on  Po-  ■ 
litical  Rights.     The  vote  was  10-0-7  (U.S.,  U.K., 
Soviet    bloc,    Chile).     Action    on    the    political 
rights  item  was  completed  on  March  25,  with  the 
nearly  unanimous  adoption  of  three  resolutions 
on  submission  of  information  drawn  from  annual   ' 
reports  on  trust   territories,  on  suggestions  for 
future  reports  by  the  Secretary  General,  and  on 
development  of  the  political  rights  of  women  in 
trust  and  non-self-governing  territories. 

Debate  then  opened  on  educational  opportuni- 
ties for  women.  Describing  the  situation  in  the 
United  States,  Mrs.  Hahn  reported  that  equal 
educational  opportunities  for  women  were  guar- 
anteed in  all  States.  There  was  practically  no  job 
for  which  a  qualified  woman  could  not  obtain 
appropriate  educational  training.     (See  p.  512.) 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Communiques  Regarding  Korea 
^to  the  Security  Council 

1  The  Headquarters  of  the  U.N.  Command  has 
I  transmitted  communiques  regarding  Korea  to  the 
'Secretary  General  of  tlie  United  Nations  under 
the  following  U.N.  document  numbers:  S/2904, 
Jan.  14;  S/2921,  Feb.  2;  S/2923,  Feb.  4;  S/2924, 
Feb.  3;  S/2925,  Feb.  9;  S/2926,  Feb.  10;  S/2931, 
Feb.  13 ;  S/2932,  Jan.  28 ;  S/2933,  Feb.  18 ;  S/2935, 
I  Feb.  24 ;  S/2937,  Feb.  25 ;  S/2938,  Feb.  25 ;  S/2940, 
I  Feb.  26;  S/2941,  Feb.  27;  S/2943,  Mar.  2;  S/2944, 
•Mar.  4. 


U.S.  Delegations 

to  international  Conferences 

Commission  on  the  Status  of  Women  (ECOSOC) 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  March 
16  (press  release  137)  that  Mrs.  Lorena  B.  Hahn, 
U.S.  representative  on  the  Commission  on  the 
Status  of  Women  of  the  U.N.  Economic  and  Social 
Council  (Ecosoc),  will  attend  the  seventh  session 
of  the  Commission,  which  opened  at  New  York  on 
March  16.  Mrs.  Hahn  will  be  assisted  by  the 
following  advisers: 

Mrs.  Alice  Angus  Morrison,  Women's  Bureau,  Department 

of  Labor 
Mrs.  Rachel  C.  Nason,  Office  of  U.N.  Economic  and  Social 

Affairs,  Department  of  State 
Mrs.  Harriet  G.  Filler,  Division  of  Research  for  U.S.S.R. 

and  Eastern  Europe,  Department  of  State 

The  agenda  for  this  session  provides  for  the 
consideration  of  reports  concerning  ( 1 )  the  status 
of  women  in  the  family,  including  the  property 
rights  of  married  women;  (2)  equal  suffrage  for 
women,  with  special  attention  being  given  to  the 
action  which  has  been  taken  to  bring  into  force  the 
Convention  on  the  Political  Rights  of  Women 
which  was  adopted  by  the  General  Assembly  last 
December;  (3)  civil  rights  of  women,  including 
access  to  Government  service ;  (4)  economic  oppor- 
tunities ;  (5)  equal  pay  for  equal  work  for  men  and 
women  workers;  (6)  educational  opportunities; 
(7)  the  extent  to  which  women  are  serving  in  dele- 
gations of  their  governments  to  the  United  Nations 
and  the  specialized  agencies;  and  (8)  progress  on 
the  convention  on  the  nationality  of  married 
women.  A  report  on  the  work  of  the  Commission 
will  be  prepared  for  submission  to  Ecosoc. 

The  Commission  on  the  Status  of  Women,  which 
was  established  in  1946,  is  one  of  the  permanent 
functional  commissions  of  Ecosoc.  It  is  respon- 
sible for  the  preparation  of  recommendations  and 
reports  to  the  Council  on  the  promotion  of  women's 
rights  in  political,  economic,  social,  educational, 
and  civil  fields.  Eighteen  Governments,  elected 
by  the  Council,  comprise  the  membership  of  the 
Commission.  Its  last  (sixth)  session  was  held  at 
Geneva,  March  24-April  5,  1952. 


Technical  Assistance  Committee  CECOSOC) 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  March 
20  (press  release  147)  that  Isador  Lubin,  the  U.S. 
representative  on  the  Technical  Assistance  Com- 
mittee of  the  U.N.  Economic  and  Social  Council 
(Ecosoc),  will  attend  the  meeting  of  the  Commit- 
tee which  is  scheduled  to  open  at  New  York  on 
March  23. 

The  following  advisers  will  assist  the  U.S.  rep- 
resentative: Philip  M.  Burnett,  acting  officer  in 
charge  of  the  technical  assistance  unit.  Office  of 
U.N.  Economic  and  Social  Affairs,  Department 
of  State;  Eleanor  Dennison,  adviser  on  multilat- 
eral affairs,  Technical  Cooperation  Administra- 
tion, Department  of  State;  and  Johanna  von 
Goeckingk,  Division  of  International  Adminis- 
tration, Department  of  State. 

The  responsibility  for  review  of  the  programs 
and  the  administrative  problems  of  the  U.N.  ex- 
panded program  of  technical  assistance  is  carried 
primarily  by  two  bodies.  The  Technical  Assist- 
ance Board,  composed  of  the  heads  of  the  partici- 
pating organizations,  undertakes  the  detailed  re- 
view, coordination,  and  integration  of  the 
programs  or  projects  submitted  by  the  various 
agencies  and  makes  reports  and  recommendations 
thereon  to  the  Technical  Assistance  Committee. 
The  Technical  Assistance  Committee,  on  which 
the  18-member  governments  of  the  Ecosoc  are 
represented,  reviews  the  reports  and  recommenda- 
tions made  by  the  Board ;  reviews  the  administra- 
tive problems  common  to  all  organizations  partici- 
pating in  the  operation  of  the  program;  gives 
general  policy  guidance;  evaluates  the  effective- 
ness of  the  total  program;  and  makes  recom- 
mendations to  the  Ecosoc. 

The  last  meeting  of  the  Technical  Assistance 
Committee  was  held  at  New  York  in  July  1'952. 


Work  Plantation  Committee  (ILO) 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  March 
16  (press  release  138)  that  on  that  date  the  Com- 
mittee on  Work  on  Plantations  of  the  Interna- 
tional Labor  Organization  would  begin  its  second 
session  at  Habana,  Cuba.  The  U.S.  delegation 
is  as  follows : 

Repbesentino  the  Goveenment  of  the  United  States  : 

Delegates 

Clara   M.   Beyer,  Associate  Director,   Bureau   of  Labor 
Standards,  Department  of  Labor,  Washington,  D.  C. 

Fernando  Sierra  Berdecia,  Secretary  of  Labor  of  Puerto 
Rico,  San  O'uan,  Puerto  Rico 

Adviser 

Irving  Lippe,  Labor  Attach^,  U.S.  Embassy,  Habana,  Cuba 

Repeesentinq  the  Employees  of  the  United  States  : 

Delegates 

W.  B.  Hellis,  General  Manager,  Irvine  Company,  Tustin. 
Calif. 


April  6,   1953 


517 


Franklin  J.  Farrington,  Assistant  Director,  Plantations 
Division.  U.   S.  Rubber  Company,   New  York.   N.  Y. 

Adviser 

Ross    Armsby,    Secretaiy,    Manufacturing    Commission, 
Rubber  JIanufacturers  Association,  New  York,  N.  Y. 

This  committee,  which  lield  its  first  session  at 
Bandung,  Indonesia,  December  4-16,  19.50,  was 
establisiied  by  tlie  Governing  Body  of  the  Inter- 
national Labor  Office  to  examine  problems  com- 
mon to  plantation  workers  in  all  areas  of  the 
world  and  to  devise  methods  for  dealing  with 
those  problems  within  the  framework  of  the  In- 
ternational Labor  Organization.  In  November 
19.51  the  Governing  Body  decided  that  the  agenda 
for  the  second  session  should  include  (1)  a  gen- 
eral I'eport  covering  actions  taken  on  the  basi's  of 
the  conclusions  of  the  first  session  and  recent 
events  and  developments  affecting  work  on  plan- 
tations; (2)  definition  of  the  term  "plantations"; 
(3)  regulation  of  wages  on  plantations;  and  (4) 
health  and  social  services  on  plantations. 

The  Committee  is  composed  of  representatives 
from  18  countries:  Belgium,  Brazil,  Burma,  Cey- 
lon. Cuba,  Dominican  Republic,  France,  India, 
Indonesia,  Liberia,  the  Netherlands.  Pakistan,  the 
Philippines,  Portugal,  Thailand,  United  King- 
dom, the  United  States,  and  Vietnam. 

World  Symposium  on  Sferics  (WMO) 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  March 
17  (press  release  141)  that  a  World  Symposium 
on  Sfencs  would  convene  on  that  date  at  Zurich 
under  the  auspices  of  a  Working  Group  on  Radio- 
Electric  Meteorology  of  the  Commission  for  Aer- 
ology of  the  World  Meteorological  Organization 
(Wmo).  The  U.S.  Government  will  be  repre- 
sented at  the  Symposium  by  observers. 

Arthur  W.  Johnson,  Meteorological  Attache 
American  Legation,  Bern,  will  be  principal  ob- 
server. Clayton  H.  Jensen,  Major,  U.S.A.F., 
Chief,  Evaluation  and  Development  Division,  Di- 
rectorate of  Scientific  Services,  Air  Weather 
Service,  Department  of  the  Air  Force,  and  Law- 
rence A.  Pick,  Chief,  Meteorological  Branch, 
Sferics  Section,  Evans  Signal  Corps  Laboratory, 
Department  of  the  Army,  also  will  be  observers. 

Tlie  purpose  of  the  Symposium  is  to  bring  to- 
gether comprehensive  information  on  sferics 
(radio-electric  storm  detection),  particularly  with 
respect  to  the  latest  techniques  in  observing,  re- 
cording, and  transmitting  data;  new  develop- 
ments in  equipment;  and  lists  of  existing  sferics 
networks. 

Worldwide  inquiries  on  the  subject  have  been 
initiated  because  of  the  value  of  sferics  in  synoptic 
meteorology,  especially  in  areas  with  widely  scat- 
tered stations  and  over  the  ocean.  Sferics  is  a 
new  field  of  weather  research  which  has  practical 
.significance  in  relation  to  many  human  activities, 
including  the  protection  of  lives  and  property 
from  severe  .storms  and  the  navigation  of  aircraft 
and  surface  vessels. 

518 


THE  DEPARTMENT 


Termination  of  VOA  Contracts 

Press  release  152  dated  March  20 

Contracts  for  construction  at  the  Voice  o: 
America's  two  high-powered  radio  stations,  Bakei 
East  near  Wilmington,  N.C.,  and  Baker  West  ai 
Port  Angeles,  Wash.,  were  terminated  on  March  2( 
by  Robert  L.  Johnson,  Administrator  of  thi 
International  Information  Administration. 

The  construction  contracts  for  these  two  trans 
mitting  plants  were  suspended  on  February  17  bj 
Mr.  Johnson's  predecessor  and  substantial  mainte 
nance  costs  were  still  being  incurred. 

Since  taking  office  on  ]\Iarch  3,  Mr.  Johnson  has 
met  with  members  of  the  U.S.  Advisory  Commis 
sion  on  Information,  members  of  the  Radic 
Advisory  Committee,  and  obtained  technical  ad 
vice  from  experts  in  and  outside  the  Government 

As  a  result  of  this  series  of  studies,  Mr.  Jolmsor 
said  he  has  not  attempted  to  make  a  final  decisior 
as  to  whether  or  not  these  stations  should  be  con- 
structed at  some  future  date  but  he  has  concludec 
that  it  would  not  be  justifiable  to  proceed  undei 
present  contracts  for  construction  at  Baker  Easi 
or  Baker  West  and  that  these  contracts  should  not 
be  continued  in  suspension. 

Department's  Security  Processes 

Press  Conference  Statement  by  Secretary  Dullei 

Press  releases  149,  151.  dated  March  20 

I  thought  it  might  be  useful  if  I  first  made  a 
little  educational  statement  (at  least  I  hope  it 
will  be  educational),  about  the  FBI  reports  and 
the  way  that  they  are  handled. 

We  are  trying  here  to  get  FBI  checkups  as  rap- 
idly as  we  can  on  all  of  the  key  people  and  im- 
portant officials  in  the  different  departments  of  the 
Government.  That  includes,  of  course,  the  State 
Department.  In  the  beginning  we  can  only  cover 
the  top  people,  because  there  are  so  many  people  in 
this  Department  and  in  the  other  Departments 
that  if  we  tried  to  do  everything  at  one  time  the 
FBI  facilities  would  be  completely  swamped. 

The  ordinary  FBI  field  checkup  takes  from  4 
to  5  weeks,  depending  on  how  diverse  have  been 
the  activities  of  the  subject  of  the  investigation. 
If  he's  lived  all  his  life  in  one  spot  it's  fairly  easy; 
if  he's  been  in  different  parts  of  the  country  and  in 
different  businesses  it  takes  much  longer. 

When  the  FBI  field  report,  comes  in.'^it's  a  mass 
of  interviews  with  persons  of  all  sorts  and  varie- 
ties and  of  undetermined  reliability.  The  in- 
vestigators' job  is  to  find  information  that  is  ad- 
verse, if  there  is  any,  because  their  business  is  to 
try  to  detect  anything  which  is  suspicious.     Then, 

Department   of  State   Bulletin 


I 


Iwhen  the  field  reports  are  concluded,  the  FBI 
makes  summaries  and  these  summaries  deal  pri- 
marily with  the  derogatory  material  because  what 
we  are  looking  for  is  danger  signals.  It  summa- 
rizes that  derogatory  material  but  does  not  at- 
tempt to  evaluate  it.  FBI  reports  are  summaries. 
For  example,  they  never  say  that  on  the  basis  of 
our  investigation  we  conclude  that  "Mr.  X"  is 
or  is  not  a  good  security  or  a  good  loyalty  risk. 
That  job  of  evaluating  the  report  is  left  to  the 
responsible  officers  of  the  Departments  concerned. 

Now,  here  in  the  Department  of  State  these 
FBI  summaries  in  the  case  of  important  persons 
are  often  sent  to  me  directly  and  personally  by 
Mr.  J.  Edgar  Hoover.  I  then  ask  our  security 
officer,  now  Mr.  McLeod,  to  handle  the  matter 
himself  or  to  speak  to  me  about  it.  Either  I,  or 
one  of  the  Under  Secretaries  acting  for  me,  have 
the  responsibility  of  making  the  final  evaluation 
as  far  as  the  State  Department  is  concerned. 

Then,  in  the  case  of  Presidential  nominations, 
we  report  to  the  President  and  he  sends  the  nomi- 
nation to  the  Senate.  Sometimes  where  the  nom- 
ination is  deemed  to  be  urgent,  the  Department 
and  the  President  act  in  the  first  instance,  on  the 
basis  of  quick  FBI  checks  which  are  designed 
merely  to  show  whether  there  is  already  in  the 
files  of  the  FBI  any  derogatory  material.  In 
that  case  the  matter  is  supplemented  by  subsequent 
field  investigations. 

Sometimes  the  Foreign  Relations  Committee,  as 
is  its  right,  wants  to  question  the  Secretary  of 
State  with  reference  to  evaluations  that  are  put 
on  FBI  reports.  It  is  not,  however,  customary 
to  make  generally  available  the  FBI  reports 
themselves  or  the  summaries  because  this  would 
disclose  and  dry  up  for  the  future  sources  of  in- 
formation of  great  value  to  the  Government.  The 
President  and  the  Attorney  General,  under  whom 
the  FBI  operates,  closely  restrict  access  to  these 
records.  It  is,  however,  permissible  for  the  Sec- 
retary of  State  to  tell  the  Foreign  Relations  Com- 
mittee in  executive  session  about  the  contents  of 
reports  without  actually  disclosing  names  and 
sources. 

In  recent  cases  the  Foreign  Relations  Commit- 
tee has  accepted  the  round  evaluations  given  them 
by  the  Secretary  of  State.  He  cannot,  of  course, 
guarantee  that  there  is  no  possible  loyalty  or  secu- 
rity risk;  the  most  that  he  can  do  is  to  say  that 
the  records  of  the  FBI  disclose  no  evidence  of  such 
a  risk. 

Where  there  are  anonymous  or  unsubstantiated 
allegations,  the  Department  would  normally  ask 
the  FBI  to  continue  to  seek  the  facts  and  to  in- 
tensify its  investigation.  We  are  doing  all  that  is 
humanly  possible  to  eliminate  loyalty  and  secu- 
rity risks  and  in  this  respect  we  are  getting 
splendid  cooperation  from  the  Foreign  Relations 
Committee  and  from  the  FBI. 

In.  reply  to  a  question  conceiving  Charles  E. 
BohJen,  vjhom-  the  President  nominated  on  Febru- 


ary 27  to  be  Ambassador  to  the  U.S.S.R.,  Secre- 
tary Dulles  said  further: 

I  did  not  find  in  the  FBI  reports  in  summary, 
any  facts  indicating  that  Mr.  Bohlen  might  be  a 
security  or  a  loyalty  risk.  Now,  it's  been  said 
that  this  Bohlen  case  is  an  acid  test.  I  think  it's 
an  acid  test  of  the  orderly  processes  of  our  Gov- 
ernment. There  was  a  thorough  investigation, 
the  reports  were  brought  before  the  Foreign  Re- 
lations Committee,  they  were  discussed  there  with 
me  for  a  period  of  nearly  3  hours,  and  then,  as  I 
say,  the  Committee  voted  unanimously  to  report 
the  nomination  out  to  the  floor  of  the  Senate.  If 
matters  can't  be  dealt  with  and  disposed  of  in  that 
orderly  way,  it  will  very  much  disorganize  the 
conduct  of  public  affairs  and  foreign  affairs  at  a 
very  critical  moment  in  history. 

Confirmations 

Livingston  T.  Merchant 

The  Senate  on  March  11  confirmed  Livingston  T.  Mer- 
chant as  Assistant  Secretary  for  European  Affairs. 

Robert  D.  Murphy 

The  Senate  on  March  20  confirmed  Robert  D.  Murphy 
as  Assistant  Secretary  for  United  Nations  Affairs. 

Walter  S.  Robertson 

The  Senate  on  March  27  confirmed  WaUer  S.  Robertson 
as  Assistant  Secretary  for  Far  Eastern  Affairs. 

Douglas  MacArthur,  2d 

The  Senate  on  March  11  confirmed  Douglas  MacArthur, 
2d,  as  Counselor  of  the  Department. 


THE  FOREIGN  SERVICE 


Confirmations 

The  Senate  on  March  27  confirmed  Charles  E.  Bohlen  as 
Ambassador  to  the  U.S.S.R. 


Checi(  List  of  Department  of  State 
Press  Releases:  Mar.  23-28, 1953 

Releases  may  be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  the 
Special  Assistant  for  Press  Relations,  Department 
of  State,  Washington  25,  D.C. 

Press  releases  issued  prior  to  Mar.  23  which 
appear  in  this  issue  of  the  Bulletin  are  Nos.  137 
of  Mar.  10,  138  of  Mnr.  1(1,  140  of  Mar.  17,  141  of 
Mar.  17,  145  of  Mar.  19,  147  of  Mar.  20,  149  of  Mar. 
20,  151  of  Mar.  20,  and  152  of  Mar.  20. 

No.       Date  Sabject 

154  3/23  Anglo-Egyptian  Sudan  Commission 

155  3/25  Nixon-Dulles :  French  Ministers 
tl56  3/24  Soviet  reply  to  U.S.  on  plane  attack 
*157  3/25  Exchange  of  persons 

*158    3/26     Cabot  to  visit  Middle  America 

159  3/28     Dulles :  Exchange  of  wounded  Pow's 

160  3/28     U.S.-French  communique 

*Not  printed. 

tHeld  for  a  later  issue  of  the  Bulletin. 


April  6,    ?953 


519 


AprU  6,  1953 


Index 


Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  719 


Africa 

EGYPT:   Expansion  of  Point  Four  program     .     .       498 
SUDAN:   U.S.    represented   on    Commission   lor 

Anglo-Egyptian  Sudan  Elections     ....       493 

Arms  and  Armed  Forces 

Formal  diplomatic  claims  preferred  against 
Hungary  and  U.S.S.R.  for  their  conduct  in 
1951  plane  case  (Summary  of  U.S.  notes  of 
March  17) 496 

Asia 
KOREA: 

Communiques  regarding  Korea  to  the  Security 

Council 517 

Exchange  of  sick  and  wounded  prisoners  of 

war 494 

TURKEY:  MsA  defense  support  funds     ....       499 

Canada 

Prime  Minister  to  visit  Washington 500 

Congress 

Senate  resolution  on  minorities  transmitted  to 

UJ<.  (Lodge) 506 

Disarmament  Commission 

The   Soviet  attitude   toward   the   disaxmament 

proDlem    (Gross) 503 

Europe 

Formal  diplomatic  claims  preferred  against 
Hungary  and  U.S.S.R.  for  their  conduct  in 
1951  plane  case  (Siimmary  of  U.S.  notes  of 
March  17) 496 

FRANCE: 

Guaranty  issued  for  private  Investment     .     .       500 
U.S.  and  Prance  discuss  measures  to  promote 

peace    (text   of   communique) 491 

U.K.:   President  expresses  sympathy  on  death  of 

Queen  Mary 493 

U.S.S.R.:  The  Soviet  attitude  toward  the  dis- 
armament problem  (Gross) 503 

Finance 

Guaranty    Issued    for    private    Investment    In 

Prance 500 

Foreign  Service 

Confirmatious  (Bohlen) 519 

Human  Rights 

International  aspects  of  the  status  of  women 

(Hahn) 607 

Senate  resolution  on  minorities  transmitted  to 

UJ^.  (Lodge) 506 

International  Information 

Termination   of   VGA   contracts 518 

International  Meetings 

Calendar  of  meetings 501 

U.S.  DELEGATIONS: 

Commission     on     the     Status     of     Women 

(Ecosoc) 517 

Technical  Assistance  Committee  (Ecosoc)    .     .  517 

Work  Plantation  Committee   (Ilo)      ....  517 

World  Symposium  on  Sferics 518 

Mutual  Security 

Guaranty    issued    for    private    Investment    In 

France 500 

MSA  defense  support  funds  for  Turkey     ....      499 


Presidential  Documents 

President     expresses    sympathy     on     death     of 

Queen  Mary 493 

Prisoners  of  War 

Exchange  of  sick  and  wounded  prisoners  of  war    .       494 

Protection  of  U.S.  Nationals  and  Property 

Formal  diplomatic  claims  preferred  against 
Hungary  and  U.S.S.R.  for  their  conduct  in 
1951  plane  case  (Summary  of  U.S.  notes  of 

March  17) 496 

State,  Department  of 

Confirmatious    (Merchant,  Murphy,  Robertson, 

MacArthur) 519 

Department's    security   processes    (Dulles)      .     .  518 

Termination   of    VOA   contracts 61a 

Technical  Cooperation  and  Development 

Expansion  of  Point  Four  program  in  Egypt     .     .  498 

Trade 

Mr.  Douglas  heads  trade  survey 498 

Treaty  Information 

U.S.  represented  on  Commission  for  Anglo- 
Egyptian  Sudan  Elections 493 

United  Nations 

Commission  on  the  Status  of  Women  (Ecosoc)      .  517 

Communiques  regarding  Korea  to  the  Security 

Council 517 

Exchange   of   sick   and   wounded   prisoners   of 

war 494 

International  aspects  of  the  status  of  women 

(Hahn) 507 

Senate  resolution  on  minorities  transmitted  to 

U.N.  (Lodge) 506 

Soviet  attituae  toward  the  disarmament  prob- 
lem (Gross) 503 

Technical  Assistance  Committee  (Ecosoc)      .     .  517 

The  United  States  In  the  United  Nations     .     .     .  514 

Name  Index 

Beyer,    Clara   M 517 

Bohlen,   Charles   E 518,  519 

Clark.     Mark 494 

Douglas,   Lewis   W 49d 

Duiies,  Secretary 492,  494,  518 

Eisenhower,  President 493 

Parrington,  F.  J 518 

GUddeu,  Harold  W 493 

Gross,  Ernest  A 503 

Hahn,  Mrs.  Lorena  B 507,  517 

Hellis,  W.  B 617 

Johnson,  Arthur  W 518 

Johnson,  Robert  L 518 

Kim  II  Sung 494 

Lodge,  Henry  Cabot,  Jr 506 

Lubm,  Isador 617 

MacArthur,  Douglas,  H 519 

Mary,    Queen 493 

Mayer,   Prime   Minister  Ren6 492 

Merchant,  Livingston  T 519 

Murphy,  Robert  D 519 

Nixon,  Vice  President 492 

Perkins,     Warwick 493 

Robertson,   Walter   S 519 

Sierra  Berdecia,   Fernando 517 

St.   Laurent,  Louis   S 500 

White,    Lincoln 494 


'I     S.  GOVEBNMENT    PRINTINC    OFFICE      198S 


^Jie/  Q}efia/d^%e7ii/  <^  t/iate^ 


XXVIII,  No.  720 
April  13, 1953 


OPPOSITION    TO    RESTRICTIONS    ON    CERTAIN 
AGRICULTURAL  IMPORTS: 
Statement  by  Assistant  Secretary  Linder 554 

Protest  Notes  of  Eight  Governments 555 

THE    PATTERN    OF    U.S  .-INDIAN     RELATIONS     • 

523 

by  George  V.  Allen 

CZECHOSLOVAK  SUBVERSION  CHARGES  AGAINST 

U.S.  REFUTED  •  Statements  by  Henry  Cabot  Lodge,  Jr.    .     539 

REVIEW  OF  THE  ECE  ECONOMIC  SURVEY  OF 

EUROPE      •      Statement  by  Miriam  Camp 534 


For  index  see  back  cover 


Boston  Public  Library 
Superintendent  of  Documents 

APR  3  01953 


^WT  o. 


Me  9e/ut^fmen^ ^ Sflaie    V^XSWqWW. 


Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  720  .  Publication  5026 
April  13,  1953 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents 

U.S.  Oovemment  Printing  OdSce 

Washington  25,  D.C. 

Price: 

62  issues,  domestic  $7.60.  foreign  $10.25 

Single  copy,  20  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has 
been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Budget  (January  22,  1952). 

Note:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  Department 
OF  State  Bulletin  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  BULLETIN, 
a    weekly    publication    compiled   and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publications, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public     and     interested    agencies     of 
the  Government  with  information  on 
developments  in   the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  work  of  the  De- 
partment  of  State  and    the    Foreign 
Service.      The  BULLETIN  includes 
selected  press  releases  on  foreign  pol- 
icy  issued  by    the    White   House  and 
the  Department,  and  statements  and 
addresses  made  by  the  President  and 
by   the  Secretary  of  State  and  other 
officers  of  the  Department,  as  well  as 
special  articles  on  various  phases  of 
international   affairs    and    the  func- 
tions of  the  Department.     Informa- 
tion  is   included  concerning    treaties 
and  international  agreements  to 
which    the    United  States   is   or    may 
become  a  party  and  treaties  of  gen- 
eral international  interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
well  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


The  Pattern  of  U.S.-lndian  Relations 


ly  George  V.  Allen 
Ambassador  to  India  ^ 


I  am  deeply  sensible  of  the  friendly  spirit  which 
has  motivated  the  India  League  of  America  in  in- 
viting me  to  be  with  you  here  today.  It  is  a  source 
of  considerable  satisfaction  to  us  who  work  in  the 
official  or  governmental  sphere  of  U.S.-India  rela- 
tions to  know  that  there  is  a  group  of  men  and 
women,  distinguished  in  the  professions,  the  arts, 
and  business,  who  at  the  same  time  are  actively 
eno-ao-ed  in  a  private  effort  to  increase  understand- 
in|  between  the  United  States  and  India  and  fur- 
ther to  strengthen  relations  between  the  two. 

I  believe  the  key  to  sound  and  enduring  rela- 
tions between  nations  lies  in  private  effort  m 
whatever  spheres-cultural  relations,  education, 
economic  assistance,  or  trade  and  finance— by  or- 
ganizations such  as  yours.  Official  or  government 
action  is  of  course  necessary,  but  it  has  substance 
only  insofar  as  the  atmosphere  of  friendship  has 
been  created  between  the  peoples  of  the  countries 
concerned. 

I  am  aware  that  the  India  League  ot  America 
has  been  active  for  many  years.  Before  India  s 
independence  it  was  effective  in  mobilizing  opinion 
in  this  country  on  behalf  of  India's  freedom. 
Since  then  it  has  been  in  the  forefront  as  a  private 
agency  for  the  dissemination  of  information  about 
India  and  U.S.-lndian  affairs  and  for  the  develop- 
ment of  closer  understanding  between  our  two 

peoples.  1  •    TTT    t. 

Only  a  few  days  ago  land  was  allotted  in  Wash- 
ington, D.  C,  for  the  site  of  a  Gandhi  memorial— 
a  project  which  was  conceived  and  is  being  carried 
out  by  the  League.  In  activity  of  this  sort,  in 
which  private  citizens  show  by  action  their  interest 
in  India  and  in  the  development  of  better  under- 
standing, there  is,  in  my  opinion,  far  more  value 
than  any  number  of  speeches  by  government  of- 
ficers or  diplomats  which  proclaim  friendship  and 
understanding  which  may  or  may  not  exist.  And 
as  these  private  and  spontaneous  actions  continue, 
official  declarations  of  friendship  will  inevitably 
carry  more  weight  and  conviction. 

'  Remarks  made  before  the  India  League  of  America  ai 
New  York  City  on  Apr.  1. 

AprW   13,   1953 


I  am  very  glad  to  find  myself  once  again  pro- 
fessionally concerned  with  U.S.-lndian  relations 
after  a  lapse  of  7  years  in  somewhat  different 
work.  Prior  to  my  assignment  in  1946  as  Am- 
bassador to  Iran,  I  shared  in  the  work  of  that  part 
of  the  Department  of  State  which  dealt  with 
Indian  affairs.  This  was  before  Indian  inde- 
pendence, and,  of  course,  there  have  been  great 
changes  since  then.  Then,  India  was  the  greatest 
jewel  in  the  crown  of  empire.  Now  it  is  the  largest 
democratic  republic  in  the  world.  Then,  Indian 
leaders  were  revolutionaries ;  today,  many  of  these 
revolutionaries  hold  the  responsibilities  of  govern- 
ment and  grapple  with  different  but  perhaps  no 
less  difficult  problems. 

No  man  could  approach  the  assignment  1  have 
been  given  but  with  humility  and  a  full  awareness 
of  the'challenge  the  assignment  offers.  Yet  I  have 
every  confidence  that  my  work  will  be  easier  be- 
cause, I  believe,  the  broad  pattern  of  U.  S.-Indian 
relations  has  already  been  well-established.  That 
pattern  involves  growing  understanding  and 
friendship  between  the  two  countries  and  closer, 
more  fruitful  cooperation  in  international  affairs. 
It  is  based  on  scrupulous  care  that  the  sovereignty 
and  national  aspirations  of  each  not  be  offended. 

We  attach  the  greatest  importance  to  the  efforts 
which  India  is  making  to  develop  its  economy  and 
improve  the  lot  of  its  people.  If  those  efforts 
succeed,  it  will  encourage  peoples  throughout  Asia 
and  fortify  faith  in  democratic  methods  every- 
where. If  they  do  not  succeed,  the  very  founda- 
tions of  the  Indian  Republic  and  of  the  Orient  may 
be  shaken.  America's  interest,  in  one  sentence,  is 
that  India,  which  has  achieved  full  sovereign 
status,  shall  retain  that  status  completely,  and 
that  the  faith  which  the  vast  majority  of  the  In- 
dian people  have  in  democracy's  ability  to  give 
them  a  better  and  fuller  life  be  sustained  and 
fortified. 

India's  problems  are  in  a  very  real  sense  the 
world's  problems,  and  many  nations,  recognizing 
this,  are  offering  whatever  help  they  can.  The 
United  States  is  in  the  forefront  as  regards  mate- 

523 


rial  help  and  moral  encouragement  to  India.  We 
do  not  give  our  help  as  charity ;  on  the  contrary, 
our  help  has  been  in  the  nature  of  an  investment  in 
India  s  sovereignty  and  independence.  We,  and 
the  rest  of  the  free  vporld,  stand  to  receive  rich  divi- 
dends in  strengthened  democracy  and  in  develop- 
ing a  strong  spiritual  bastion  against  the  heartless 
and  dangerous  forces  of  materialism. 

I  am  confident  that  we  will  continue  to  offer  our 
help  and  encouragement. 

There  is  in  the  United  States  today  an  ever- 
growing understanding  of  India's  problems  and 
sympathy  for  India's  courageous  efforts,  and  in 
India  s  position,  in  the  world  or  its  great  potential. 

I  am  unaware  of  any  proposals  under  considera- 
tion which  would  reverse  or  cancel  the  policies 
which  the  United  States  has  been  following  for 
some  time  and  which  have  received  the  support  of 
Republicans  and  Democrats  alike.  Rather,  I  think 
you  may  find  a  quickened  interest  in  India,  and 
an  even  stronger  determination,  on  our  part  to 
clear  up  any  misunderstanding  and  to  reaffirm'  by 
word  and  deed  our  abiding  friendship  for  India 
lo  this  end  I  have  dedicated  myself  and  ask  your 
continued  help  and  support. 

Assessment  of  Soviet  Gestures 

Remarks  by  Secretary  Dulles 

Press  release  173  dated  April  3 

In  response  to  various  questions  concerning  the 
(usessment  placed  by  the  United  States  on  recent 
'Soviet  moves  and  their  possible  outcome,  Secretary 
Dulles  made  the  following  extemporaneous  re- 
marks at  his  news  conference  on  April  3: 

Nothing  that  has  happened,  or  which  seems  to 
me  Jikely  to  happen,  has  changed  the  basic  situa- 
tion of  danger  in  which  we  stand.  There  are  three 
basic  facts  which,  I  think,  we  should  always  have 
in  mind  as  long  as  they  are  the  facts. 

The  first  is  this :  The  Soviet  Union  is  a  heavily 
armed  totalitarian  state,  subject  to  the  dictates  of 
a  small  group,  whose  total  control  extends  to  one- 
third  of  the  people,  and  the  natural  resources  of 
the  world. 

The  second  fact  is  that  the  leaders  of  the  Soviet 
Union  are  basically  and  deeply  hostile  to  any  other 
state  which  does  not  accept  Soviet  Communist 
control.  That  is  part  of  their  fanatically  held 
creed. 

The  third  fact  is  that  the  Soviet  Communist 
leaders  do  not  recognize  any  moral  inhibitions 
against  the  use  of  violence.  In  fact,  they  do  not 
admit  the  existence  of  such  a  thing  as  the  moral 
law. 

Now  those  facts  combine  to  create  a  gi-ave 
danger,  and  as  I  said,  nothing  that  has  happened 
or  seems  likely  to  happen  in  the  near  future  ends 
that  danger,  or  our  need,  or  the  need  of  the  free 

524 


world  generally,  to  take  precautions  against  it. 
That,  however,  does  not  prevent  accommodations 
from  time  to  time  which  may  be  useful— useful  if, 
but  only  if,  they  do  not  blind  us  to  the  persistence 
of  the  danger. 

At  the  moment  I  see  nothing  which  ends  that 
danger  or  would  justify  us  in  changing  any  of  our 
basic  defensive  policies,  either  alone  or  in  con- 
junction with  our  allies.  Now,  there  are,  as  I  have 
said,  possibilities  of  useful  accommodation  that 
could  relate  to  such  matters  as  the  exchange  of 
wounded  and  sick  prisoners  of  war  in  Korea,  and 
if  good  faith  is  shown  in  relation  to  that,  then 
there  may  be  the  possibility  of  an  armistice  in 
Korea. 

There  is  a  question  of  an  Austrian  treaty  which 
could  also  be  a  matter  of  accommodation. 

There  are  a  whole  series  of  outstanding  ques- 
tions which  can  be  a  matter  of  accommodation. 

The  point  I  want  to  make  is  that  so  long  as  these 
three  conditions  persist,  to  which  I  referred,  we 
must  not,  in  my  opinion,  assume  that  the  danger  is 
over  and  that  we  are  living  in  a  peaceful  world 
which  requires  neither  armament  nor  our  allies. 

I  see  nothing  which  should  delay  or  hamper  the 
European  Defense  Community  and  the  other  basic 
policy  measures  that  we  are  trying  to  take. 

Asked  whether  there  was  any  incoTisistency  be- 
tween this  view  and  that  expressed  by  President 
Eisenhower  the  day  before,"-  Mr.  Dulles  replied: 

I  am  confident  that  the  general  philosophy 
which  I  have  expressed  is  the  philosophy  of  the  ad- 
ministration. The  President  said,  I  think— I 
haven't  actually  seen  the  transcript  of  his  state- 
ment— that  we  are  prepared  to  take  up  concrete 
matters,  such  as  peace  in  Asia,  where  it  is  to  our 
advantage  to  do  so,  and  test  out  the  Communist 
words,  in  practical  operation. 

I  think  that  the  events  that  are  happening  are, 
to  a  very  large  extent,  due  to  the  vigorous  position 
which  the  Eisenhower  administration  has  taken 
since  it  has  been  in  office. 

We  have  had  indications  from  so-called  neutral 
sources  m  contact  with  the  Soviet  Union  that  the 
leaders  there  were  waiting  to  see  what  the  policies 
of  the  new  administration  would  be,  whether  they 
would  be  weak  or  strong  policies. 

Now,  in  fact,  we  have  taken  some  fairly  strong 
policies,  both  in  Asia  and  in  Europe. 

In  Asia  we  have  ended  the  orders  of  the  Seventh 
Fleet  which  protected  the  Chinese  Communist 
Mainland.  We  have  intensified  the  build-up  of 
indigenous  forces.  South  Korean  forces,  in  the 
Republic  of  Korea.  We  indicated  to  the  French 
our  disposition  to  increase  help  to  them  there. 
We  pointed  out  that  an  armistice  in  Korea  could 
not  be  used  as  a  basis  for  enabling  the  Chinese 

'  At  bis  press  conference  on  Apr.  2,  the  President  said 
that  the  United  States  should  take  at  face  value  every  offer 
that  was  made  until  it  was  proved  not  to  be  worthy  of 
being  so  taken. 

Deparfment  of  Stafe   Bullefin 


Communists  to  shift  their  forces  and  to  commit 
aggression  elsewhere,  or  at  least  if  they  attempted 
that  it  would  have  serious  consequences. 

In  Europe,  we  have  actively  revived  the  program 
for  a  European  Defense  Community,  and  increased 
unity — military,  in  the  first  instance;  ultimately, 
political,  and  economic. 

In  all  those  respects  we  have  had  vigorous,  posi- 
tive policies.  In  my  opinion  they  are  beginning 
to  bear  some  fruit,  although  how  much  that  fruit 
will  turn  out  to  be  still  remains  to  be  tested.  It  is 
still  in  words  primarily  rather  than  in  actual 
deeds. 


Fourth  Anniversary  of  NATO 

STATEMENT  BY  THE  PRESIDENT 

White  Honee  press  release  dated  April  4 

Just  4  years  ago  today  the  representatives  of  12 
free  nations  met  in  Washington  to  sign  their  names 
to  a  document  which  free  men  will  long  remember. 
That  document  was  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty. 

In  the  years  since  that  date  other  nations  have 
signed  their  names  and  pledged  their  strength — 
to  make  Nato  the  central  source  of  strength  for 
defense  of  the  western  world. 

This  year  it  happens  that  we  commemorate  the 
anniversary  of  Nato  at  Easter  time.  To  peoples 
of  all  faiths  the  spiritual  idea  of  the  Prince  of 
Peace  carries  meaning.  And  Nato  is  an  instru- 
ment of  peace.  It  endangers  none  who  will  respect 
freedom.  It  serves  all  who  love  freedom — and 
wish  to  enjoy  it  in  peace. 

We  have  learned  from  bitter  and  conclusive  ex- 
perience that  peace  cannot  be  defended  by  the 
weak.  It  demands  strength — strength  of  our 
armies,  strength  of  our  economies,  and,  above  all, 
strength  of  our  spirit. 

This  strength  can  be  born  only  of  unity.  Nato 
signifies  the  resolve  of  the  free  nations  of  the 
North  Atlantic  community  to  be  united  against 
any  aggression.  The  North  Atlantic  Treaty  served 
notice  that  an  attack  upon  any  of  the  Nato  coun- 
tries would  be  resisted  by  all.  It  did  yet  more: 
It  called  upon  all  participating  nations  to  develop 
that  strength  which  could  not  only  win  war  but 
more  importantly  could  prevent  war. 

The  two  hundred  million  people  of  the  Nato 
nations  of  Europe  are  in  the  deepest  sense  bound 


together  by  a  unity  more  profound  than  any  pact. 
They  are  skilled  in  work,  courageous  in  spirit, 
and  tenacious  in  their  love  of  freedom.  They — 
their  spirit  and  strength  and  resources — are  in- 
dispensable to  the  defense  of  freedom  everywhere. 
If  they  and  their  resources  ever  were  captured  and 
exploited  by  an  aggressor,  there  Avould  be  no  corner 
of  safety  anywhere  in  the  world.  But  so  long  as 
these  people  and  these  resources  are  joined  with 
those  of  the  United  States  in  our  common  cause, 
no  aggressor  can  be  blind  to  the  folly  of  attack. 

The  woi'k  of  Nato  is  far  from  complete.  This 
anniversary,  then,  should  be  the  signal  for  all 
Nato  nations  to  dedicate  themselves  with  renewed 
vigor  to  the  work  that  remains  to  be  done.  So 
doing,  each  and  all  must  know  that  they  are 
serving — not  the  wishes  or  needs  of  some  big  alien 
power,  nor  even  a  lofty  abstract  ideal — but  simply 
their  own  salvation  and  survival  in  freedom. 

Each  and  all  must  remind  themselves  that  the 
faint  of  heart  and  the  slow  of  deed  are  the  first 
and  the  surest  to  invite  the  torment  of  aggression. 

Each  and  all  of  us  must  summon  to  mind  the 
words  of  Him  whom  we  honor  this  Easter  time: 
"When  a  strong  man,  armed,  keepeth  his  palace, 
his  goods  are  in  peace." 


Secretary  Dulles'  Message  to  Lord  Ismay  > 

On  this  fourth  anniversary  of  the  signing 
of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  I  want  to  ex- 
tend to  you,  and  through  you  to  the  chairman 
of  the  North  Atlantic  Council  and  the  repre- 
sentatives of  other  Nato  Governments,  the 
greetings  of  the  Government  of  the  United 
States.  Let  me  also  express  appreciation  of 
the  imaginative  and  devoted  leadership  you 
have  demonstrated  during  the  past  year.  It 
has  been  a  year  of  substantial  progress,  and 
with  continued  unity  of  effort  there  is  reason 
to  hope  that  even  greater  progress  can  be 
achieved  during  the  coming  year.  I  can  as- 
sure you  of  the  continued  interest  and  co- 
operation of  the  U.S.  Government,  because 
we  are  convinced  that  a  strong  and  enduring 
Atlantic  partnership  is  vitally  important  to 
the  security  and  peace  of  the  entire  world. 

'  Sent  on  Apr.  3.  Lord  Ismay  is  Secretary-General 
of  Nato. 


April   13,    1953 


525 


Proposal  for  Settlement  of  Korean  Prisoner-of-War  Question 


Premier  Chou  En-lai  of  Conwnunist  China  on 
March  30  proposed  that  negotiations  should  begin 
at  once  on  the  exchange  of  sick  and  wounded 
prisoners  of  war  in  Korea.,  and  that,  after  the  ces- 
sation of  hostilities,  all  prisoners  who  do  not  wish 
to  he  repatriated  should  he  turned  over  to  a  neutral 
country  '■'■so  as  to  insure  a  just  solution  to  the  ques- 
tion of  their  repatriation.  Following  is  the  text 
of  his  statement,  which  was  hroadcast  by  the  New 
China  News  Agency  {Radio  Peiping),  together 
tvith  a  statement  by  Lincoln  White,  Deputy  Spe- 
cial Assistant  for  Press  Relations,  a  letter  from. 
Gen.  Mark  Clark  to  the  Communist  Commanders, 
and  a  statement  by  Soviet  Foreign  Minister 
Vyacheslav  M.  Molotov. 

CHOU   EN-LAI'S  STATEMENT  OF  MARCH  30' 

U.N.  doc.  A/2378 
Dated  March  31,  1953 

Enclosed  herewith  the  full  text  of  my  statement 
on  the  question  of  the  Korean  armistice  negotia- 
tions issued  on  30  March  1953.  Please  distribute 
the  full  text  of  this  statement  to  all  the  delegations 
of  the  member  states  of  the  United  Nations,  ex- 
cept the  so-called  "delegation"  of  the  remnant 
Chinese  Kuomintang  clique. 

[Enclosure] 

The  Central  People's  Government  of  the  People's  Repub- 
lic of  China  and  the  Government  of  the  Democratic 
People's  Kepublic  of  Korea,  having  jointly  studied  the 
proposal  put  forward  by  Gen.  Mark  W.  Clark.  Commander 
in  Chief  of  the  United  Nations  Command,  on  Feb.  22,  1953, 
concerning  the  exchange  of  sick  and  injured  prisoners  of 
war  of  both  sides  during  the  period  of  hostilities,  are  of 
the  common  opinion  that  it  is  entirel.v  possible  to  achieve  a 
reasonable  settlement  of  this  question  in  accordance  with 
the  provision  of  Article  109  of  the  Geneva  Convention  of 
1949. 

A  reasonable  settlement  of  the  question  of  exchanging 
sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war  clearly  has  a  very 
significant  bearing  upon  the  smooth  settlement  of  the  entire 
question  of  prisoners  of  war.  It  is,  therefore,  our  view 
that  the  time  should  be  considered  ripe  for  settling  the 
entire  question  of  prisoners  of  war  in  order  to  insure  the 
cessation  of  hostilities  in  Korea  and  to  conclude  the 
armistice  agreement. 

The  Government  of  the  People's  Republic  of  China  and 
the  Government  of  the  Democratic  People's  Republic  of 

"  Cablegram  sent  to  President  Lester  B.  Pearson  of  the 
U.N.  General  Assembly  by  the  Communist  Chinese 
Premier. 


526 


Korea  hold  in  common  that  the  delegates  of  the  Korean 
People's  Army  and  the  Chinese  People's  Volunteers  to  the 
armistice  negotiations  and  the  delegates  of  the  United 
Nations  Command  to  the  armistice  negotiations  should 
immediately  start  negotiations  on  the  question  of  exchang- 
ing sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war  during  the  period  ol 
hostilities,  and  should  proceed  to  seek  an  over-all  settle- 
ment of  the  question  of  prisoners  of  war. 

The  Korean  armistice  negotiations  in  the  past  one  yeai 
and  more  have  already  laid  the  foundation  for  the  realiza- 
tion of  an  armistice  in  Korea.  In  the  course  of  the  nego- 
tiations at  Kaesong  and  Panmunjom,  the  delegates  of  both 
sides  have  reached  agreement  on  all  questions  except  that 
of  prisoners  of  war. 

In  the  first  place,  on  the  question  of  a  ceasefire  in  Korea, 
about  which  the  whole  world  is  concerned,  both  sides  have 
already  agreed  that  "the  Commanders  of  the  opposing 
sides  shall  order  and  enforce  a  complete  cessation  of  all 
hostilities  in  Korea  by  all  armed  forces  under  their  con- 
trol, including  all  units  and  personnel  of  the  ground,  naval, 
and  air  forces,  effective  twelve  hours  after  this  Armistice 
Agreement  is  signed"  ( Paragraph  12  of  the  draft  Korean 
armistice  agreement).' 

Secondl.v,  both  sides  have  further  reached  agreement 
on  the  various  important  conditions  for  an  armistice.  On 
the  question  of  fixing  a  military  demarcation  line  and 
establishing  a  demilitarized  zone,  both  sides  have  already 
agreed  that  the  actual  line  of  contact  between  both  sides 
at  the  time  when  the  armistice  agreement  becomes  effec- 
tive shall  be  made  the  military  demarcation  line  and  that 
"both  sides  shall  withdraw  two  kilometers  from  this  line 
so  as  to  establish  a  demilitarized  zone  between  the  oppos- 
ing forces  ...  as  a  bulfer  zone  to  prevent  the  occurrence 
of  incidents  which  might  lead  to  a  resumption  of  hos- 
tilities" (Paragraph  1  of  the  draft  armistice  agreement). 

On  the  question  of  supervising  the  implementation  of 
the  armistice  agreement  and  settling  violations  of  the 
armistice  agreement,  both  sides  have  already  agreed  that 
a  military  armistice  commission,  composed  of  five  senior 
oflScers  appointed  jointly  by  the  Supreme  Commander  of 
the  Korean  People's  Army  and  the  commander  of  the 
Chinese  People's  Volunteers,  and  five  senior  officers 
appointed  by  the  Commander  in  Chief  of  the  United 
Nations  Command,  shall  be  set  up  to  be  responsible  for 
the  supervision  of  the  implementation  of  the  armistice 
agreement,  including  the  supervision  and  direction  of  the 
committee  for  repatriation  of  prisoners  of  war,  and  for  ; 
settling  through  negotiations  any  violations  of  the  armi- 
stice agreement  (Paragraphs  19,  20,  24,  25  and  56  of  the 
draft  armistice  agreement)  :  both  sides  have  also  agreed 
that  a  neutral  nation's  supervisory  commission  shall  be 
set  up,  composed  of  two  senior  officers  appointed  as  rep- 
resentatives by  Poland  and  Czechoslovakia,  neutral  na- 
tions nominated  jointly  by  the  Supreme  Commander  of 
the  Korean  People's  Army  and  the  Commander  of  the 
Chinese  I^eople's  Volunteers,  and  two  senior  officers 
appointed  as  representatives  by  Sweden  and  Switzerland, 
neutral  nations  nominated  by  the  Commander  in  Chief  of 
the  United  Nations  Command,  and  that  under  this  com- 
mission there  shall  be  provided  neutral  nations  inspection 


'  U.  N.  doc.  A/2228,  Annex  A.  | 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


teams  composed  of  oflScers  appointed  as  members  to  the 
teams  by  the  aforementioned  nations. 

These  inspection  teams  shall  be  stationed  at  the  fol- 
lowing ports  of  entry  in  North  Korea  :  Sinuiju,  Chongjin, 
Hungnam.  Manpo,  Sinanju,  and  at  the  following  ports  of 
entry  in  South  Korea  :  Inchon,  Taegu,  Pusan,  Kangnung 
and  Kuiisan,  to  supervise  and  inspect  the  implementation 
of  the  provisions  that  both  sides  cease  the  introduction 
into  Korea  of  reinforcing  military  personnel  and  combat 
aircraft,  armored  vehicles,  veeapons  and  ammunition 
(except  for  rotation  and  replacement  as  permitted  by 
these  provisions),  and  may  conduct  special  observations 
and  inspections  at  those  places  outside  the  demilitarized 
zone  where  violations  of  the  armistice  agreement  have 
been  reported  to  have  occurred,  so  as  to  ensure  the  sta- 
bility of  the  military  armistice  ( Paragraphs  36,  37,  40,  41, 
42  and  43  of  the  draft  armistice  agreement) . 

In  addition,  both  sides  have  reached  agreement  that 
"the  military  commanders  of  both  sides  hereby  recom- 
mend to  the  governments  of  the  countries  concerned  on 
both  sides  that,  within  three  months  after  the  armistice 
agreement  is  signed  and  becomes  effective,  a  political 
conference  of  a  higher  level  of  both  sides  be  held  by 
representatives  appointed  respectively  to  settle  through 
negotiations  the  questions  of  the  withdrawal  of  all  foreign 
forces  from  Korea,  the  peaceful  settlement  of  the  Korean 
question,  etc."  (Paragraph  60  of  the  draft  armistice 
agreement ) . 

As  stated  above,  in  the  course  of  the  Korean  armistice 
negotiations  one  question  alone — the  question  of  prisoners 
of  war — blocks  the  realization  of  an  armistice  in  Korea. 
And  even  with  respect  to  the  question  of  prisoners  of  war, 
both  sides  have  reached  agreement  on  all  the  provisions 
in  the  draft  armistice  agreement  on  the  arrangements 
relating  to  prisoners  of  war,  except  on  the  question  of 
the  repatriation  of  prisoners  of  war.  Had  the  Korean 
armistice  negotiations  not  been  interrupted  for  more  than 
five  months,  a  solution  might  long  since  have  been  found 
to  this  issue  of  the  repatriation  of  prisoners  of  war. 

Now  inasmuch  as  the  United  Nations  Command  has 
proposed  to  settle,  in  accordance  with  Article  109  of  the 
Geneva  Convention,  the  question  of  exchanging  sick  and 
injured  prisoners  of  war  during  the  period  of  hostilities, 
we  consider  that  subsequent  upon  the  reasonable  settle- 
ment of  the  question  of  sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war, 
it  is  entirely  a  matter  of  course  that  a  smooth  solution  to 
the  whole  question  of  prisoners  of  war  should  be  achieved, 
provided  that  both  sides  are  prompted  by  real  sincerity  to 
bring  about  an  armistice  in  Korea  in  the  spirit  of  mutual 
compromise. 

Regarding  the  question  of  prisoners  of  war,  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  People's  Republic  of  China  and  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  Democratic  People's  Republic  of  Korea  have 
alwa.vs  held  and  continue  to  hold  that  a  reasonable  solu- 
tion can  only  lie  in  the  release  and  repatriation  of  war 
prisoners  without  delay  after  the  cessation  of  hostilities 
in  accordance  with  the  stipulations  of  the  1949  Geneva 
Convention,  particularly  those  of  Article  118  of  the 
convention.^ 

However,  in  view  of  the  fact  that  the  differences  be- 
tween the  tveo  sides  on  this  question  now  constitute  the 

'  Article  118  of  the  Geneva  Convention  reads : 

"Prisoners  of  war  shall  be  released  and  repatriated 
without  delay  after  the  cessation  of  active  hostilities. 

"In  the  absence  of  stipulations  to  the  above  effect  in 
any  agreement  concluded  between  the  Parties  to  the  con- 
flict with  a  view  to  the  cessation  of  hostilities,  or  failing 
any  such  agreement,  each  of  the  Detaining  Powers  shall 
itself  establish  and  execute  without  delay  a  plan  of  re- 
patriation in  conformity  with  the  principle  laid  down  in 
the  foregoing  paragraph. 

"In  either  case,  the  measures  adopted  shall  be  brought 
to  the  knowledge  of  the  prisoners  of  war. 

"The  costs  of  repatriation  of  prisoners  of  war  shall  in 
all  cases  be  equitably  apportioned  between  the  Detaining 
Power  and  the  Power  on  which   the  prisoners  depend. 

April  13,   1953 


only  obstacle  to  the  realization  of  an  armistice  in  Korea, 
and  in  order  to  satisfy  the  desire  of  the  people  of  the 
world  for  peace,  the  Government  of  the  People's  Republic 
of  China  and  the  Government  of  the  Democratic  People's 
Republic  of  Korea,  in  pursuance  of  their  consistently 
maintained  peace  policy  and  their  position  of  consistently 
working  for  the  speedy  realization  of  an  armistice  in 
Korea  and  striving  for  a  peaceful  settlement  of  the  Korean 
question,  thus  to  preserve  and  consolidate  world  peace, 
are  prepared  to  take  steps  to  eliminate  the  differences  on 
this  question  so  as  to  bring  about  an  armistice  in  Korea. 
To  this  end,  the  Government  of  the  People's  Republic  of 
China  and  the  Government  of  the  Democratic  People's 
Republic  of  Korea  propose  that  both  parties  to  the  nego- 
tiations should  undertake  to  repatriate  immediately  after 
the  cessation  of  hostilities  all  those  prisoners  of  war  in 
their  custody  who  insist  upon  repatriation  and  to  hand 
over  the  remaining  prisoners  of  war  to  a  neutral  state  so 
as  to  insure  a  just  solution  to  the  question  of  their  repa- 
triation. 

It  must  be  pointed  out  that,  in  advancing  this  proposal, 
we  by  no  means  relinqui.sh  the  principle  of  release  and  re- 
patriation of  war  prisoners  without  delay  after  the  cessa- 
tion of  hostilities  set  forth  in  Article  118  of  the  Geneva 
Convention,  nor  do  we  acknowledge  the  assertion  of  the 
United  Nations  Command  that  there  are  among  the  pris- 
oners of  war  individuals  who  allegedly  refuse  repatriation. 
It  is  only  because  the  termination  of  the  bloody  war  in 
Korea  and  the  peaceful  settlement  of  the  Korean  question 
is  bound  up  with  the  question  of  the  peace  and  security  of 
the  people  of  the  Far  East  and  the  world  that  we  take  this 
new  step  and  propose  that,  after  the  cessation  of  hostilities, 
those  captured  personnel  of  our  side  who,  under  the  in- 
timidation and  oppression  of  the  opposite  side,  are  filled 
with  apprehensions  and  are  afraid  to  return  home,  be 
handed  over  to  a  neutral  state  and  that  explanations  be 
given  them  by  the  side  concerned,  thus  insuring  that  the 
question  of  their  repatriation  will  be  justly  settled  and 
will  not  obstruct  the  realization  of  an  armistice  in  Korea. 
We  are  convinced  that  this  new  step  taken  by  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  People's  Republic  of  China  and  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  Democratic  People's  Republic  of  Korea  for 
terminating  the  hostilities  in  Korea  is  in  complete  accord 
with  the  vital  interests  of  the  peoples  whose  sons  are 
fighting  on  both  sides  in  Korea  and  is  also  in  complete 
accord  with  the  fundamental  interests  of  the  people  of 
the  whole  world.  If  the  United  Nations  Command  has 
the  good  faith  to  seek  peace,  this  proposal  of  our  side  ought 
to  be  accepted  by  it. 

STATEMENT  BY  PRESS  OFFICER  WHITE 

At  a  news  conference  on  March  30,  Lincoln 
White  made  the  following  statement  in  reply  to 
questions  concerning  proposals  for  the  exchange 
of  sick  and  wounded  prisoners  of  war: 

After  more  than  10  months,  beginning  in  Decem- 
ber 1951,  of  fruitless  efforts  by  the  U.N.  Command 

This  apportionment  shall  be  carried  out  on  the  following 

"(a)  If  the  two  Powers  are  contiguous,  the  Power  on 
which  the  prisoners  of  war  depend  shall  bear  the  costs  of 
repatriation  from  the  frontiers  of  the  Detaining  Power. 

"(b)  If  the  two  Powers  are  not  contiguous,  the  Detain- 
ing Power  shall  bear  the  costs  of  transport  of  prisoners 
of  war  over  its  own  territory  as  far  as  its  frontier  or 
its  port  of  enibarl;ation  nearest  to  the  territory  of  the 
Power  on  which  the  prisoners  of  war  depend.  The  Parties 
concerned  shall  agree  between  themselves  as  to  the  equita- 
ble apportionment  of  the  remaining  costs  of  the  repatria- 
tion. Tlie  conclusion  of  this  agreement  shall  in  no  cir- 
cumstances justify  any  delay  in  the  repatriation  of  the 
prisoners  of  war." 

527 


negotiators  to  reach  agreement  with  the  Commu- 
nists on  the  question  of  the  repatriation  of  pris- 
oners of  war  on  a  humanitarian  basis,  negotiations 
were  suspended  at  Panmunjom  on  October  8, 1952. 
At  that  time  the  U.N.  Command  made  clear  that 
it  had  exhausted  every  effort  to  find  a  formula  to 
this  end,  only  to  have  every  proposal  it  put  for- 
ward summarily  rejected  by  the  Communists.'' 

Accordingly,  it  stated  that  its  proposals  stood 
and  it  was  prepared  to  resume  negotiations  if  the 
Communists  desired  to  accept  any  of  those  pro- 
posals or  would  make  a  constructive  proposal  of 
their  own. 

In  the  absence  of  any  proposals  from  the  Com- 
munist side,  General  Clark,  on  February  22,  re- 
newed the  oft-repeated  U.N.  proposal  that,  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  Geneva  Convention,  an  ex- 
change of  seriously  sick  and  wounded  prisoners  of 
war  not  await  conclusion  of  an  armistice  but  be 
carried  out  immediately. 

Somewhat  over  a  month  later,  the  Communists 
replied  in  what  appeared  to  be  an  acceptance  of 
General  Clark's  proposal.  As  the  Secretary  stat«d 
Saturday ,=  it  is  our  hope  that  arrangements  for 
this  exchange  can  promptly  be  completed  and  car- 
ried out. 

Meanwhile,  as  stated  last  October,  U.N.  Com- 
mand liaison  officers  remain  available  at  Panmun- 
jom to  receive  any  constructive  proposals  or  fur- 
ther communications  with  regard  to  the  armistice 
negotiations  which  the  Communists  wish  to  bring 
to  our  attention.  As  far  as  we  know  here,  they 
have  received  nothing  further  since  the  Commu- 
nists' letter  of  March  28.  We,  of  course,  welcome 
any  indications  that  the  Communists  are  now  in- 
terested in  resolving  the  entire  prisoner-of-war 
question  on  a  humanitarian  basis. 

LETTER  FROM  GENERAL  CLARK 
TO  THE  COMMUNIST  COMMANDERS 

Press  release  163  dated  March  31 

On  March  31  Gen.  Mark  W.  Clark  sent  to  Gen- 
eral Kim  II  Sung,  Commander  of  the  Korean 
People's  Army,  and  Gen.  Peng  Teh-Huai,  Com- 
mander of  the  Chinese  PeopWs  Volunteers,  the  fol- 
lowirig  reply  to  their  letter  of  March  28  ^  concern- 
ing^ the  repatriation  of  seriously  sick  and  wounded 
prisoners  of  ivar  in  Korea: 

1.  I  hereby  acknowledge  with  pleasure  the  re- 
ceipt of  your  letter  of  28  March,  1953,  in  reply  to 
my  letter  of  22  February,'^  and  understand  that 
you  are  fully  prepared  in  accordance  with  our 
proposal   to   proceed   inmiediately   with   the   re- 

*  For  texts  of  statements  by  General  Clark  and  Lt.  Gen. 
William  K.  Harrison,  Jr.,  on  the  suspension  of  truce  talks, 
see  BULLETIN  of  Oct.  20,  1952,  pp.  600,  601. 

°  For  Secretary  Dulles'  statement  of  Mar.  28,  see  iUd., 
Apr.  6,  195.3,  p.  495. 

'  [hid.,  Apr.  6.  1953.  p.  494. 

528 


patriation  of  all  seriously  sick  and  wounded  cap- 
tured personnel  during  the  period  of  hostilities. 
Accordingly,  I  propose  that  a  meeting  of  the 
liaison  groups  headed  by  a  General  or  Flag  Officer 
representative  from  each  side  be  held  at  Pan  Mun 
Jom,  at  your  earliest  convenience,  to  make  neces- 
sary detailed  arrangements  for  the  exchange  of 
these  captured  persons. 

2.  I  share  the  hope  you  expressed  that  a  con- 
clusion of  the  exchange  of  sick  and  wounded  pris- 
oners of  war  during  the  period  of  hostilities  would 
make  more  likely  a  smooth  settlement  of  the  entire 
prisoner  of  war  question.  Accordingly  I  will  be 
prepared  to  instruct  my  liaison  group  as  a  second 
order  of  business  to  meet  with  your  liaison  group 
to  arrange  for  a  resumption  of  armistice  negotia- 
tions by  our  respective  delegations.  We  take  it  as 
implicit  in  your  suggestion  in  this  respect  that  you 
would  be  prepared  to  accept  U.N.  Command  pro- 
posals or  make  some  comparable  constructive  pro- 
posal of  your  own  which  would  constitute  a  valid 
basis  for  resumption  of  Delegation  meetings. 

3.  I  request  that  you  advise  me  as  soon  as  possi- 
ble of  your  decision  on  my  proposal  with  regard 
to  the  time  of  meeting  between  the  liaison  groups 
of  both  sides  to  arrange  for  the  repatriation  of  all 
seriously  sick  and  wounded  captured  persons. 

STATEMENT  BY 

SOVIET  FOREIGN   MINISTER   MOLOTOV 

Folloioing  is  the  text  of  a  statement  hy  Vyache- 
slav  M.  Molotov,  Soviet  Foreign  Minister,  as 
broadcast  by  the  Moscow  radio  on  April  1: 

On  the  28th  of  March,  a  letter  of  reply  was  published 
from  Kim  II  Sung,  Commander  in  Chief  of  the  Korean 
People's  Army  and  Peng  Teh-huai,  Commander  of  the 
Chinese  People's  Volunteers  addressed  to  General  Clark, 
Commander  in  Chief  of  the  United  Nations  forces  in  Korea 
regarding  the  exchange  of  sick  and  wounded  prisoners  of 
war. 

The  letter  voices  agreement  with  the  exchange  of  sick 
and  wounded  prisoners  of  war  of  both  sides  and  indicates 
that  in  this  question  virtual  agreement  was  reached  during 
the  course  of  the  Korean  truce  talks  and  that  only  the  in- 
terruption of  the  Panmunjom  truce  talks  prevented  this 
exchange  from  taking  place  earlier. 

Agreement  has  also  been  expressed  to  exchange  sick  and 
wounded  prisoners  of  war  in  accordance  with  clauses  of 
Article  109  of  the  Geneva  Convention  referring  to  the 
period  of  military  operations.  At  the  same  time,  the  ; 
letter  stresses  that  such  an  exchange  of  sick  and  wounded 
prisoners  of  war  must  lead  to  the  unhindered  settlement 
of  the  entire  prisoner-of-war  question  and  thereby  to  the 
achievements  of  an  armistice  in  Korea. 

With  this  aim  in  view  it  is  proposed  immediately  to 
resume  talks  in  Panmunjom.  Following  this,  a  statement 
was  made  in  Peiping  by  the  Premier  of  the  State  Adminis- 
trative Council  and  Minister  of  Foreign  Affairs  of  the 
Chinese  People's  Republic,  Chou  En-lai,  and  in  Pyongyang 
by  the  Chairman  of  the  Cabinet  of  Ministers  of  the  Korean 
People's  Democratic  Republic,  Kim  II  Sung. 

Both  the  Governments  of  the  Chinese  People's  Republic 
and  the  Government  of  the  Korean  People's  Democratic 
Republic  have  stated  that  they  agree  to  the  proposal  for 
the  exchange  of  sick  and  wounded  prisoners  of  war  and, 

Xiepatimen^   of  State   Bulletin 


as  before,  express  readiness  to  reach  agreement  on  the 
immediate  settlement  of  the  entire  prisoner-of-war  ques- 
tion and  thereby  of  ending  the  war  in  Korea. 

I  am  authorized  to  state  that  the  Soviet  Government 
expresses  its  full  solidarity  with  this  noble  act  of  he 
Government  of  the  Chinese  People's  Republic  and  the 
Government  of  the  Korean  People's  Democratic  Republic 
and  has  no  doubt  that  this  act  will  find  ardent  support 
among  peoples  throughout  the  world. 

The  Soviet  Government  also  expresses  confidence  that 
this  proposal  will  be  correctly  understood  by  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  United  States  of  America. 

The  Soviet  Government  has  unswervingly  supported  all 
steps  directed  toward  the  reaching  of  a  just  armistice  and 
the  ending  of  the  war  in  Korea.  The  beginning  for  this 
was  laid  in  the  reply  of  the  head  of  the  Soviet  Government. 
J.  V.  Stalin,  to  the  request  of  the  Premier  of  India,  Mr. 
Nehru,  as  far  back  as  July,  1950.  ^    ,    ■     t„„^ 

As  is  known,  the  radio  broadcast  in  New  Jork  in  June, 
1951  bv  the  D.S.S.R.  representative  in  the  Security  Coun- 
dl'  seTved  as  a  basis  for  beginning  truce  talks  in  Korea_ 
These  truce  talks,  which  first  took  place  m  Kaesong  and 
subsequently  in  Panmunjom,  led  to  agreement  on  all  con- 
dUions  of  the  armistice  excepting  the  question  of  the 
repatriation  of  prisoners  of  war  but  the  truce  talks  were 
[Xi"pted  by  General  Clark  in  October  last  year,  which 
delayed  the  conclusion  of  an  armistice. 

The  Chinese  and  Korean  side  have  accepted  General 
Clark's  proposal  that  an  exchange  of  sick  and  wounded 
prisoners  of  war  should  be  made  in  conformity  with  Arti- 
cle 109  of  the  Geneva  Convention  of  1949  concerning  treat- 
ment of  prisoners  of  war. 

This  Article  states :  .  .  .'  .        ,.     ..i. 

This  Article  of  the  Geneva  Convention  refers  to  the 
period  prior  to  the  armistice,  when  military  operations 
have  not  yet  been  suspended.  Since  the  agreement  on 
the  application  of  this  Article  has  been  reached  b>  now 
and  mav  be  signed  in  the  next  few  days  by  both  sides,  no 
^stacles  will  be  left  in  the  way  of  the  exchange  of  sick 
and  wounded  prisoners  of  war  beginning  without  further 

*^^The  aforementioned  letter  of  the  Commander  in  Chief  of 
the  Korean  People's  Army.  Kim  II  Sung,  and  the  Com- 
mander of  the  Chinese  People's  Volunteers  Gen^  Pen 
Teh-huai.  not  only  expresses  consent  to  Geneial  Clark  s 
proposal  of  Feb.  22  on  the  exchange  of  sick  and  '"'ounded 
prisoners  of  war,  but  also  proposes  resumption  of  the 
Armistice  talks  in  order  to  put  an  end  to  the  war  m  Korea. 
Particular  attention  must  be  paid  to  the  fact  that  the 
statement  of  Foreign  Minister  Chou  En-lai  on  March  30 
worked  out  jointly  by  the  Governments  of  the  Chinese 
People's  Republic  and  the  Korean  People's  Democratic 
Republic,  proposes  not  only  to  exchange  the  sick  and 
wounded  prisoners  of  war.  but  also  to  decide  the  question 
on  repatriation  of  prisoners  of  war  as  a  whole,  leading 
to  the  conclusion  of  an  agreement  on  an  armistice  and 
the  cessation  of  the  war  in  Korea. 

The  Government  of  the  Chinese  People's  Republic  and 
the  Government  of  the  Korean  People's  Repubhc  on  their 
side  propose:  Following  the  sensible  settlement  of  the 
question  concerning  the  sick  and  wounded  prisoners  of 
war  to  solve  the  whole  question  of  prisoners  of  war  in 
order  that  both  sides  be  guided  by  the  sincere  desire  to 
reach  an  armistice  in  Korea  in  the  spirit  of  a  mutual 
compromise.  .  j=  „„^ 

The  question  of  the  repatriation  of  prisoners  of  war 
must  of  course,  be  decided  in  conformity  witli  the  prm- 
cinles  of  the  Geneva  Convention  on  which,  naturally,  the 
Soviet  Government  insisted,  as  did  the  Governments  of 
the  Chinese  People's  Republic  and  the  Korean  Peoples 
Democratic  Republic.  As  is  known  neither  the  prolonged 
talks  in  Panmunjom,  however,  nor  the  repeated  discus- 


'  For  an  excerpt  from  the  statement  made  by  Jacob  A. 
Malik  on  June  23,  1951,  see  ibid.,  July  9,  1951,  p.  4o. 

•  For  text  of  the  article  quoted  by  Mr.  Molotov.  see  ibid.. 
Apr.  6,  1953,  p.  495. 

April    13,    1953 


sions  of  this  question  at  the  General  Assembly  of  United 
Nations,  produced  any  positive  results.  Hifforonc^ 

Inasmuch  as  this  question  remained  the  only  difference 
between  the  belligerent  sides  in  Korea  presenting  an 
obstacle  to  an  agreement  on  an  armistice  the  Govern- 
ments of  the  Chinese  People's  RepubUc  and  the  Korean 
People's  Democratic  Republic,  guided  by  the  desire  to 
achieve  peace  and  an  end  of  the  war  in  Korea,  took  a  step 
toward  a  final  solution  of  this  question. 

Thev  proposed  that  both  sides  resume  talks  on  «e  ar- 
mistice,  committing  themselves  to  repatriate,  immediately 
after  the  cessation  of  military  operations,  all  prisoners  of 
war  in  their  hands  insisting  on  repatriation,  while  hand- 
ing over  the  rest  of  the  prisoners  of  war  to  a  neutral  state 
with  the  object  of  ensuring  a  fair  solution  of  the  question 
of  their  repatriation.  .  

Tills  proposal  allows  for  a  fair  solution  of  the  question 
of  the  repatriation  of  prisoners  of  war  and  for  an  ehmina- 
tion  of  the  remaining  obstacles  for  the  realization  of  an 

armistice  in  Korea.  ,        *  ^v,     „v,«io 

There  can  be  no  doubt  that  the  peoples  of  the  whole 
world,  desiring  to  put  an  end  to  the  war  in  Korea  and  to 
promote  the  strengthening  of  peace  and  the  security  of 
the  peoples  in  the  Far  East  and  all  the  world,  vnU  welcome 
this   proposal   with   warm    sympathy    and    offer    it    lull 

^"The^Soviet  Government  recognizes  the  entire  fairness  of 
this  proposal  of  the  Government  of  the  Chinese  People  s 
Republic  and  the  Government  of  the  Korean  Peoples 
Democratic  Republic,  and  is  prepared  to  cooperate  fully 
in  its  realization.  „„„„^~ 

Naturally  the  United  Nations  could  do  more  as  regards 
an  armistice  in  Korea  if  it  were  to  include  legal  repre- 
sentatives of  China  and  Korea.  ^  ,^  ,,  „„„,„ 
The  fact  that  the  Chinese  people  and  the  Korean  people 
are  deprived  of  their  lawful  representation  in  the  United 
Nations,  firstly,  undermines  the  prestige  of  this  organiza- 
tion and  secondly,  deprives  it  of  the  possibility  of  assist- 
ing as  it  should  in  the  strengUiening  of  international 
security  and  universal  peace.  .  ^  ,  ^  „ 
The  Soviet  Government  considers  it  its  duty  to  recau 
that  the  question  of  the  restitution  of  the  rights  of  the 
Chinese  and  Korean  peoples  in  the  United  Nations  is  one 
of  the  most  urgent  questions,  and  that  the  restitution  of 
the  rights  of  China  and  Korea  in  the  United  Nations,  par- 
ticularly under  present  conditions,  is  in  the  interests  of 
the  raising  of  the  prestige  and  international  importance  of 
the  United  Nations  and  will  promote  the  strengthening 
of  peace  throughout  the  world. 

Visit  of  Chancellor  Adenauer 

On  April  1  the  Department  of  State  announced 
that  the  Chancellor  of  the  Federal  Republic  of 
Germany,  Konrad  Adenauer,  and  his  party  will 
arrive  a"t  Washington  on  April  7.  The  Chan- 
cellor's party  will  be  met  at  Washington  National 
Airport  by  Vice  President  Nixon,  Secretary 
Dulles,  and  other  officials  of  the  Government,  in- 
cluding George  M.  Humphrey,  Secretary  of  the 
Treasury;  Charles  E.  Wilson,  Secretary  of  De- 
fense ;  and  Harold  M.  Stassen,  Director  for  Mu- 
tual Security.  At  12  noon  the  Chancellor  will 
meet  with  President  Eisenhower  at  the  Whit© 
House  and  at  3  p.m.  he  will  call  on  Secretary 

Dulles.  _         ^,  ,      .„     . 

On  April  8  the  National  Press  Club  will  give  a 
luncheon  in  honor  of  the  Chancellor  at  the  Na- 
tional Press  Building ;  an  afternoon  meeting  with 
Secretary  Dulles  will  follow.  On  that  evening. 
Secretary  Dulles  will  give  a  dinner  in  honor  of 
the  Chancellor. 

529 


On  April  9,  following  a  meeting  with  Chancel- 
lor Adenauer,  the  President  will  give  a  luncheon 
in  his  honor. 

On  April  10  the  Chancellor  and  his  party  will 
depart  for  San  Francisco. 

P'rom  April  11  to  April  18,  the  Chancellor  and 
party  will  visit  Carmel,  Calif.,  Chicago,  New 
York,  Boston,  and  Ottawa. 

Included  in  Chancellor  Adenauer's  party  are 
the  following  persons:  Miss  Lotte  Adenauer, 
daughter  of  the  Chancellor;  Dr.  Walter  Halstein, 
State  Secretary  of  Foreign  Affairs;  Dr.  Vollrath 
Freiherr  von  Maltzan,  Chief,  Office  of  Foreign 
Trade;  Hans  Heinrich  von  Herwarth,  Chief  of 
Protocol;  Felix  von  Eckardt,  Chief,  Press  and 
Information  Office ;  and  Dr.  Alexander  Boker  of 
the  Foreign  Office. 


Planning  Board  To  Assist 
National  Security  Council 

White  House  press  release  dated  Marcb  23 

The  President  has  been  giving  attention  to 
strengthening  and  improving  the  operations  of 
the  National  Security  Council  (Nsc).  On  several 
occasions  he  has  stressed  the  importance  which  he 
places  upon  the  effective  functioning  of  the  Coun- 
cil. He  feels  that  in  these  critical  times  the  Coun- 
cil can  afford  the  greatest  possible  assistance  to 
the  President  in  deciding  policy  issues  affecting 
the  national  security. 

The  President  has  decided  that  he  expects  to 
have  in  regular  attendance  at  Council  meetings, 
in  addition  to  himself  and  the  "Vice  President,  the 
following:  the  Secretary  of  State,  the  Secretary 
of  Defense,  the  Secretary  of  the  Treasury,  the  Di- 
rector for  Mutual  Security,  and  (when  appointed) 
the  Director  of  Defense  "Mobilization. 

Beside  the  above  Council  members,  those  regu- 
larly attending  Council  meetings  as  advisers  will 
be  the  Chairman  of  the  Joint  Chiefs  of  Staff,  the 
Director  of  Central  Intelligence,  and  the  Special 
Assistant  to  the  President  for  Cold  War  Planning 
(C.  D.  Jackson).  For  executive  and  staff  func- 
tions at  Council  meetings,  there  will  be  in  attend- 
ance Robert  Cutler,  administrative  assistant  to  the 
President,  and  the  Council's  executive  secretary 
and  deputy  executive  secretary. 

The  President  has  named  Mr.  Cutler  as  special 
assistant  to  the  President  for  National  Security 
Affairs.  Mr.  Cutler  will  be  the  principal  executive 
officer  of  the  National  Security  Council  and  serve 
as  chairman  of  its  newly  established  Planning 
Board. 

To  bring  to  Council  deliberations  a  fresh  point 
of  view,  not  burdened  with  departmental  responsi- 
bilities, the  President  plans  from  time  to  time  to 
call  upon  qualified  civilians  to  act  as  informal 
consultants  to  the  Council.  At  present,  seven 
prominent  citizens  are  spending  a  good  part  of 

530 


1 


the  month  of  March  in  Washington  as  civilian 
consultants.  The  President  believes  that  this  pro- 
cedure will  prove  useful  to  him  and  to  the  other 
Council  members. 

In  order  to  provide  continuous  assistance  to  the 
Council  in  its  planning  operations,  the  President 
has  established  an  Nsc  Planning  Board  to  take 
the  place  of  the  former  Nsc  Senior  Staff.  This 
Board  will  be  composed  of  qualified  members  and 
advisers  from  the  departments  and  agencies  repre- 
sented at  the  Council  table.  Each  person  selected 
for  the  Planning  Board  is  appointed  by  the  Presi- 
dent, on  nomination  of  the  chief  of  the  department 
or  agency  concerned,  and  for  this  purpose  will 
become  a  special  assistant  for  National  Security 
Affairs.  To  date  the  President  has  appointed  the 
following: 

Chairman  :  Robert  Cutler,  Special  Assistant  to  the  Presi- 
dent for  National  Security  Affairs 

Treasury  Member:  Andrew  N.  Overby,  Assistant  Secre- 
tary of  the  Treasury 

Defense  Member :  Frank  O.  Nash,  Assistant  Secretary  of 
Defense 

Mutual    Security   Member:  Frank   N.   Roberts,   Military 
Adviser,  Director  for  Mutual  Security 

0dm   Member:  William  Y.  Elliott,  Office  of  Director  of 
Defense  Mobilization 

Joint  Chiefs  of  Staff  Adviser :  Maj.  Gen.  John  K.  Gerhart 
Office,  Joint  Chiefs  of  Staff 

Central  Intelligence  Agency  Adviser :  Robert  Amory,  Jr. 
Assistant  Deputy  Director  for  Intelligence 

Psychological  Strategy  Board  Adviser  :  George  A  Morgan 
Acting  Director,  Psychological  Strategy  Board 

A  member  from  the  Department  of  State  will 
be  named  during  the  next  few  days.  ■ 

The  President  has  authorized  additional  tech-  1 
meal  staff  assistance  for  the  Council.  He  also  has 
reappointed  James  S.  Lay,  Jr.,  and  S.  Everett 
Gleason  as  executive  secretary  and  deputy  execu- 
tive secretary,  respectively.  They  will  continue  to 
head  the  permanent  staff  of  the  Council. 


Burma  Asks  Discontinuance 
of  U.  S.  Aid  Program 

The  Foreign  Mijiister  of  Burma,  Sao  Bkwn 
Hkio,  on  March  17  sent  the  following  letter  to 
William  Sebald,  U.S.  Ambassador  at  Rangoon: 

My  DEAR  Mr.  Ambassador,  I  am  to  request  under 
Article  V  of  the  Economic  Cooperation  Agree- 
ment between  our  two  governments  that  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  United  States  of  America  will 
accept  notice  that  we  do  not  desire  the  aid  program 
to  continue  beyond  June  30,  1953. 

The  Government  of  the  Union  of  Burma,  how- 
ever, wish  to  put  on  record  their  appreciation  and 
gratitude  for  the  materials  and  services  received 
under  the  Economic  Cooperation  Agreement 
which  are  of  great  help  to  them  in  implementing 
their  rehabilitation  programs. 
Believe  me,  etc., 

Sao  Hkun  Hkio. 

Department  of  State   Bulletin 


Treaty  of  Friendship,  Commerce, 
and  Navigation  Witli  Japan 

Press  release  170  dated  April  2 

A  treaty  of  friendship,  commerce,  and  naviga- 
tion between  the  United  States  and  Japan  was 
signed  on  April  2  at  Tokyo.  Ambassador  Robert 
D.  Murphy  signed  for  the  United  States  and 
Foreign  Minister  Katsuo  Okazaki  signed  for 
Japan.  The  treaty  must  be  ratified  by  both  Gov- 
ernments before  it  will  become  effective.  It  is 
expected  that  the  treaty  will  shortly  be  submitted 
to  the  U.S.  Senate  with  a  view  to  obtaining  its 
advice  and  consent  to  ratification  of  the  treaty  by 
this  Government. 

In  article  12  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  with  Japan, 
signed  at  San  Francisco  on  September  8,  19.51, 
Japan  declared  its  readiness  to  enter  into  negotia- 
tions with  each  of  the  Allied  Powers  of  treaties 
"to  place  their  trading,  maritime  and  other  com- 
mercial relations  on  a  stable  and  friendly  basis." 
As  Secretary  Dulles  observed  in  his  statement  at 
the  opening  of  the  San  Francisco  conference,  the 
Treaty  of  Peace  by  itself  could  do  little  more  in 
the  field  of  general  economic  relations  than  "point 
the  way  to  a  healthy  trade  relationship  and  create 
the  opportunity  to  go  in  that  way."  The  treaty 
signed  April  2  marks  a  significant  advance  in 
relations  between  the  United  States  and  Japan,  for 
by  this  treaty  the  two  Governments  record  their 
agreement,  in  completely  mutual  terms,  upon  ad- 
vanced and  enlightened  principles  to  govern  on  an 
enduring  basis  the  conduct  of  general  economic 
relations  between  the  two  countries. 

In  common  with  other  treaties  of  friendship, 
commerce,  and  navigation  entered  into  by  the 
United  States  in  recent  years,  the  new  treaty  deals 
in  considerable  detail  with  a  wide  range  of  sub- 
ject matter.  In  general,  each  of  the  two  Govern- 
ments (1)  agrees  to  accord,  within  its  territories, 
to  citizens  and  corporations  of  the  other,  treatment 
no  less  favorable  than  it  accords  to  its  own  citizens 
and  corporations  with  respect  to  the  normal  run 
of  commercial  and  industrial  pursuits;  (2)  affirms 
its  adherence  to  the  principles  of  nondiscrimina- 
tory treatment  of  trade  and  shipping;  (3)  for- 
mally endorses  standards  regarding  the  protection 
of  persons,  their  property,  and  interests  that  reflect 
the  most  enlightened  constitutional  principles; 
and  (4)  recognizes  the  need  for  special  attention 
to  the  problems  of  stimulating  the  flow  of  private 
capital  investment. 

Specifically,  the  provisions  of  the  treaty  fall 
into  eight  broad  categories :  (1)  entry,  travel,  and 
residence;  (2)  basic  personal  freedoms;  (3) 
guarantees  for  property  rights;  (4)  the  conduct 
and  control  of  business  enterprises;  (5)  taxation; 
(6)  exchange  restrictions;  (7)  the  exchange  of 
goods;  and  (8)  navigation.  While  the  new 
treaty  adheres  closely  to  the  substantive  pattern  of 
other  recent  treaties,  it  contains  several  provisions 


that  are  new  to  U.S.  commercial  treaties.  Notable 
among  these  is  the  provision  establishing,  pur- 
suant to  authorization  given  in  the  new  Immigra- 
tion and  Nationality  Act,  a  special  category  of 
treaty  aliens,  who  are  permitted  entry  for  the  pur- 
pose of  developing  the  operations  of  business 
enterprises  in  which  they  have  a  substantial  in- 
vestment. Another  noteworthy  new  provision  is 
one  designed  to  assure  the  maintenance  of  a  free 
market  in  the  field  of  marine  insurance. 

Pending  the  entry  into  force  of  the  new  treaty, 
general  economic  relations  between  the  United 
States  and  Japan  will  continue  to  be  governed  by 
article  12  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace,  which  sets  forth 
certain  broad  rules  for  the  conduct  of  such  rela- 
tions between  the  Allied  Powers  and  Japan  during 
an  interim  period  of  4  years.  When  the  new 
treaty  comes  into  effect,  it  will  supersede  these 
provisions  of  article  12  as  between  the  two 
countries. 


Technical  Cooperation  Agreement 
With  Pakistan 

Press  release  172  dated  April  3 

The  Technical  Cooperation  Administration  of 
the  Department  of  State  has  been  informed  that 
a  supplementary  program  agreement  for  fiscal 
year  1953  was  signed  at  Karachi  April  1  for  tech- 
nical cooperation  between  the  United  States  and 
Pakistan.  It  provides  for  an  American  allotment 
up  to  $12,254,000.  The  Government  of  Pakistan 
will  bear  all  rupee  costs  of  joint  projects  which 
will  at  least  equal  the  American  costs.  The  agree- 
ment is  supplementary  to  the  Point  Four  Program 
agreement  signed  between  the  two  Governments 
February  2,  1952.' 

At  the  same  time  Country  Director  Ralph  Will, 
and  Said  Hassam,  representing  the  Government 
of  Pakistan,  signed  project  agreements  for  the 
utilization  of  $8,437,500  of  these  funds  on  specific 
activities. 

The  specific  agreements  are 

1.  The  United  States  will  make  available 
$437,000  for  the  continuation  of  the  Village  Agri- 
cultural and  Industrial  Development  Program 
toward  which  it  gave  $2,300,000  of  fiscal  year  1952 
funds.  This  program  is  designed  to  increase  the 
efficiency  of  agricultural  production,  improve 
health  and  sanitary  conditions,  expand  the  pro- 
duction of  goods  and  services  at  the  village  level 
to  meet  local  needs,  and  to  introduce  cottage  in- 
dustries to  provide  off-season  employment  to  raise 
the  level  of  real  income  and  expand  total  net  gross 
income. 

2.  The  United  States  will  make  available 
$3,700,000  for  the  importation  of  fertilizer.  In- 
creased food  production  is  one  of  Pakistan's  prime 

'  Bulletin  of  Feb.  25,  1952,  p.  296. 


April   13,    1953 


531 


requirements  and  its  major  source  is  agriculture. 
Last  fiscal  year  the  United  States  provided 
$900,000  towards  the  i)urcha.se  of  10,000  tons  of 
fertilizer.  The  now  profrram  will  provide  the 
fertilizer  to  Pakistani  fai-mers  to  enable  them  to 
step  up  the  production  of  wheat  and  other  essen- 
tial grains  to  meet  a  situation  which  is  causing 
deep  concern  to  tlie  Pakistan  Government. 

3.  $100,000  will  be  furnished  by  the  United 
States  toward  the  construction  of  a  Water  Devel- 
opment Laboratory  at  Karachi  to  provide  water 
research  services  for  the  entire  nation. 

4.  The  United  States  will  supply  $3  million  to 
assist  in  the  construction  of  a  fertilizer  factory 
at  Karachi.  The  entire  cost  of  the  factory  is  esti- 
mated at  $13,307,000,  exclusive  of  consultants'  fees 
and  ocean  freight  on  materials  purchased  outside 
of  Pakistan.  Wlien  completed  the  factory  will 
produce  approximately  50,000  tons  of  ammonium 
sulphate  annuallv. 

.5.  $450,000  will  be  furnished  by  the  United 
States,  principally  in  engineering  services,  toward 
the  construction  of  a  dnm  across  the  Bolan  River 
at  Sibi  in  Baluchistan  and  for  the  irrigation  and 
reclamation  of  land  in  that  area.  This  project 
also  is  being  assisted  by  the  Colombo  plan.  The 
dam  will  be  constructed  by  Pakistan  and  will  be 
finished  within  one  year.  It  will  be  earth-filled 
and  will  have  a  height  of  70  feet  and  be  600  yards 
long.  It  should  provide  irrigation  for  about 
35,000  acres  and  the  resettlement  of  2,500  refugee 
families. 

6.  Assistance  to  the  amount  of  $750,000  will  be 
provided  by  the  United  States  for  the  develop- 
ment of  modern  fishing  facilities  in  Karachi.  The 
tremendous  increase  in  the  population  of  Karachi, 
from  about  400,000  before  partition  to  the  present 
1,500,000  has  posed  an  urgent  problem  of  increased 
food  production.  The  construction  of  modern 
facilities  for  handling  fish,  motorizing  the  fishing 
fleet,  and  other  improvements  in  the  service  should 
result  in  important  increases  in  the  volume  of  fish 
and  insure  safe  supplies  of  this  important  food 
item. 

In  addition  to  the  above  project  agreements,  con- 
sultations are  under  way  in  Karachi  for  the  for- 
mulation of  others  to  round  out  the  entire  program 
as  outlined  in  the  general  agreement  signed 
April  1. 

Control  of  Shipments  to 
Communist  China,  North  Korea 

Discussion  With  Senator  McCarthy 

Press  release  168  dated  AprU  1 

Secretary  Dulles  and  Senator  McCarthy  had 
lunch  on  April  1  at  Senator  McCarthy's  sugges- 
tion. They  discussed  measures  for  the  control  of 
trade  with  countries  of  the  Communist  bloc. 

Senator  McCarthy  told  of  the  informal  under- 
standing which   certain   Greek   shipowners   had 


communicated  to  the  Senate  Permanent  Subcom- 
mittee on  Investigations  in  which  they  undertook 
to  abstain  from  certain  areas  of  trade  with  the 
Soviet  bloc. 

The  Secretary  reviewed  the  progress  recently 
made  by  the  Department  of  State  in  securing  the 
cooperation  of  foreign  nations  in  accomplishing 
the  policy  declared  by  Congress  in  the  Battle  Act 
"to  apply  an  embargo  on  the  shipment  of  strategic 
materials  to  the  countries  of  the  Soviet  Bloc."  It 
was  noted  that  cooperation  and  advice  from  mem- 
bers of  Congress  is  helpful  in  the  administration  of 
the  act.  However,  that  act  places  on  the  Admin- 
istrator of  the  act  (Mr.  Stassen)  the  responsibility 
for  coordinating  the  activities  of  the  agencies  con- 
cerned with  security  controls  over  exports  from 
other  countries.  It  was  pointed  out  the  dangers 
that  would  result  if  congressional  committees 
entered  into  the  field  of  foreign  relations,  which  is 
in  the  exclusive  jurisdiction  of  the  Chief  Execu- 
tive. 

Senator  McCarthy  stated  that  he  was  aware  of 
these  considerations  and  had  no  desire  or  intention 
to  act  contrary  to  them.  He  said  that  in  the  con- 
duct of  his  committee's  investigation  facts  had 
been  developed  which  would  be  useful  and  for  the 
benefit  of  the  country. 

Senator  McCarthy  further  pointed  out  that 
neither  he  nor  his  committee  had  made  or  con- 
templated making  any  agreement  with  any  for- 
eign governments  or  foreign  shipping  groups,  but 
that  as  a  by-product  of  the  committee's  investiga- 
tion, certain  foreign  shipping  groups  had  volun- 
tarily agreed  among  themselves  to  abstain  from 
participation  in  the  Communist  China  trade  and 
inter-Soviet  bloc  trade,  a  result  which  both  Secre- 
tary Dulles  and  Senator  McCarthy  felt  was  in  the 
national  interest. 

The  Secretary  thanked  the  Senator  for  the  in- 
formation tendered  and  said  that  it  would  be  help- 
ful in  further  negotiations  with  foreign  countries. 
Senator  McCarthy  further  advised  that  if  in  the 
future  similar  information  would  be  developed  it 
would  be  promptly  communicated  to  the  proper 
authorities  to  the  end  that  the  most  advantageous 
iise  of  it  would  be  made. 

Department  Statement 

The  following  statement  was  issiied  by  the  De- 
partment on  March  30  in  response  to  queries  con- 
cerning the  action  taken  by  the  Greek  Government 
to  prevent  the  shipment  of  strategic  materials  to 
Commtmist  China  and  North  Korea: 

On  March  23  the  Council  of  Ministers  of  the 
Greek  Government  reached  a  decision  to  prohibit 
all  Greek  flag  vessels  from  calling  at  any  port  in 
Communist  China  or  North  Korea.  This  decision 
had  the  effect  of  law  immediately,  although  it  is 
subject  to  ratification  by  the  Greek  Parliament. 
Its  effect  is  binding  on  all  ships  of  Greek  registry. 

Other  countries  which  have  taken  similar  action 


532 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


in  compliance  with  the  U.N.  General  Assembly 
resolution  of  May  18, 1951  ^  are : 

Honduras — December  22,  1950 

Liberia^July  23, 1951 

Panama — August  18,  1951 

Costa  Rica— January  26,  1952. 
The  United  Kingdom  on  March  7, 1953,  decided, 
in  addition  to  the  system  of  controls  already  in 
force  to  prevent  the  shipment  of  strategic  mate- 
rials to  Communist  China  and  North  Korea,  to 
introduce  a  system  of  voyage  licensing  for  vessels 
registered  in  the  United  Kingdom  and  the  colonies 
so  that  strategic  materials  from  non-British 
sources  could  not  be  carried  to  China  in  British 
ships  and  to  prevent  the  bunkering  in  British  ports 
of  ships  of  Soviet  bloc  or  other  nationality  carry- 
ing strategic  cargoes  to  Communist  China. 

On  March  28  the  French  Government  agreed  to 
take  the  necessary  measures  to  prevent  the  bunker- 
ing in  French  ports  of  ships  carrying  to  Commu- 
nist China  cargoes  of  strategic  materials  and  the 
transportation  by  French  ships  of  cargoes  of 
strategic  character  to  ports  of  Communist  Cliina.^ 
For  a  considerable  period  Canada  has  main- 
tained a  strict  embargo  over  shipments  of  strategic 
materials  to  Communist  China,  and  since  August 
1951  no  ships  of  Canadian  registry  have  been  en- 
gaged in  trade  with  Communist  China. 

For  its  part,  the  United  States  on  December  3, 
1950,  brought  all  shipments  to  Communist  China 
and  North  Korea  under  licensing  control.^  On 
December  8, 1950,  an  order  was  issued  prohibiting 
ships  of  U.S.  registry  from  carrying  without  prior 
approval  controlled  commodities  to  any  Soviet 
bloc  ports,  including  Communist  China  and  North 
Korea.*  On  December  16, 1950,  the  United  States 
placed  under  control  all  Chinese  Communist  assets 
within  U.S.  jurisdiction  and  also  issued  an  order 
prohibiting  U.S.  ships  and  aircraft  from  touching 
at  mainland  China  and  North  Korean  ports  and 
from  carrying  anywhere  in  the  world  goods 
destined  for  Communist  China.^ 

In  all,  some  45  countries  have  indicated,  in 
response  to  the  U.N.  China  Embargo  Resolution, 
that  they  are  preventing  the  shipment  of  strategic 
commodities  to  Communist  China  and  North 
Korea  or  that  they  do  not  produce  or  trade  in  the 
items  concerned. 


'  Bulletin  of  May  28,  1951,  p.  849. 

=  Ibid.,  Apr.  6,  1953,  p.  491. 

'  For  a  complete  report  on  U.S.  action,  see  iHd.,  July  9, 
1951,  p.  54. 

■•Transportation  Order  T-1,  ibid.,  p.  59. 

'Transportation  Order  T-2,  ibid.,  p.  60.  For  Depart- 
ment statement  on  this  order  and  on  the  blocking  of 
Chinese  Communist  assets,  see  ibid.,  Dec.  25,  1950,  p.  1004. 


Current  Legislation  on  Foreign  Policy 

Providing  For  An  Under  Secretary  of  State  (For  Admin- 
istration).    Report  (To  accompany  S.  243).     H.  Kept. 
5,  83d  Cong.,  1st  Sess.     4  pp. 
Thirteenth  Semiannual  Report  of  the  Atomic  Energy  Com- 
mission.    S.  Doc.  3,  83d  Cong.,  1st  Sess.     210  pp. 

Nomination  of  Charles  E.  Bohlen.  Hearings  Before  the 
Committee  on  Foreign  Relations,  United  States  Sen- 
ate, Eighty-Third  Congress,  First  Session  on  the 
Nomination  of  Charles  E.  Bohlen  to  be  United  States 
Ambassador  Extraordinary  and  Plenipotentiary  to 
the  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics.  March  2  and 
IS,  1953.     128  pp. 

German  Consulate-America  House  Program.  First  Inter- 
mediate Report  of  the  Committee  on  Government  Op- 
erations.    H.  Rept.  168,  83d  Cong.,  1st  Sess.     8  pp. 

German  Consulate-America  House  Program.  Hearing  Be- 
fore a  Special  Subcommittee  of  the  Committee  on 
Government  Operations,  House  of  Representatives, 
Eighty-Third  Congress,  First  Session.  February  17, 
1953.     86  pp. 

Inquiring  Into  Certain  Operations  and  Conditions  in 
Korea.  Adverse  Report  (To  accompany  H.  Res.  171). 
H.  Rept.  164,  83d  Cong.,  1st  Sess.     7  pp. 

World  War  II  International  Agreements  and  Understand- 
ings Entered  Into  During  Secret  Conferences  Con- 
cerning Other  Peoples.  March  12,  1953.  Committee 
Print.     83d  Congress,  1st  Session.     138  pp. 

Organization  of  Federal  Executive  Departments  and 
Agencies.  Report  of  the  Committee  on  Government 
Operations.     S.  Rept.  80,  83d  Cong.,  1st  Sess.     32  pp. 

Proceedings  at  the  Enshrining  of  The  Declaration  of  In- 
dependence, The  Constitution  of  the  United  States  and 
The  Bill  of  Rights  in  the  Exhibition  Hall  of  the 
National  Archives  Building  December  Fifteenth,  Nine- 
teen Hundred  and  Fifty-two.  S.  Doc.  13,  83d  Cong., 
1st  Sess.     22  pp.  , 

War  Claims  Arising  Out  of  World  War  II.  Letter  From 
the  War  Claims  Commission  Transmitting  the  Sup- 
plementary Report  of  the  War  Claims  Commission  on 
War  Claims  Arising  Out  of  World  War  II,  Pursuant 
to  Section  8  of  the  War  Claims  Act  of  1948,  As 
Amended,  and  the  Letter  of  the  President,  Dated  Jan- 
uary 16,  1953.  H.  Doc.  67,  83d  Cong.,  1st  Sess. 
247  pp. 

Joining  With  the  President  of  the  United  States  In  a 
Declaration  Regarding  the  Subjugation  of  Free  Peo- 
ples by  the  Soviet  Union.  Hearing  Before  the  Com- 
mittee on  Foreign  Affairs,  House  of  Representatives, 
Eighty-Third  Congress,  First  Session  on  H.  J.  Res. 
200,  Joining  With  the  President  of  the  United  States 
in  a  Declaration  Regarding  the  Subjugation  of  Free 
Peoples  by  the  Soviet  Union  (and  Similar  Pending 
Measures).    February  26,  19.53.    61  pp. 

Studying  the  Palestinian  Arab  Refugee  Situation.  Report 
(to  accompany  S.  Res.  81).  S.  Rept.  52,  83d  Cong., 
1st  Sess.    2  pp. 

Second  Supplemental  Appropriation  Bill,  1953.  Report 
(To  accompanv  H.  R.  3053).  S.  Rept.  48,  83d  Cong., 
1st  Sess.    23  pp. 

Status  of  International  Military  Headquarters  Set  Up 
Pursuant  to  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty.  Message 
From  the  President  of  the  United  States  Transmitting 
A  Protocol  on  the  Status  of  International  Military 
Headquarters  Set  Up  Pursuant  to  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty.  Signed  at  Paris,  on  August  28,  19.52.  S.  Exec. 
B,  83d  Cong..  1st  Sess.    11  pp. 


April   13,   1953 


533 


Review  of  the  ECE  Economic  Survey  of  Europe 


Statement  by  Miriam  Cam,p  ' 


Before  I  begin  my  comments,  I  should  like  to 
refer  to  the  Executive  Secretary's  opening  remarks 
concerning  the  late  date  of  publication  of  the 
survey.^  As  he  recognized,  it  has  been  impossible 
in  view  of  the  short  time  the  survey  has  been  avail- 
able to  have  had  it  thoroughly  considered  by  the 
interested  branches  of  my  Government,  and  there- 
fore my  comments  can  only  be  of  a  very  prelim- 
inary character.  It  may  well  be  that  the  U.S. 
representative  at  Ecosoc  will  wish  to  comment 
further. 

This  year  the  Secretariat  [of  the  Economic 
Commission  for  Europe]  has  produced  for  us, 
once  again,  a  survey  of  the  economic  problems  and 
prospects  of  Europe  which  embodies  that  imag- 
inative approach  and  statistical  energy  which  we 
have  come  almost  to  take  for  granted,  but  for 
which  we  must  nonetheless  remain  continuingly 
grateful  and  impressed.  The  fact  that  the  survey 
this  year  presents  a  broad  analysis  of  developments 
since  the  war  and  outlines  comprehensively  an 
independent  view  of  the  directions  which  Euro- 
pean policy  should  take  in  the  future  greatly 
enhances  its  value. 

I  should  like  to  say  at  once  that  in  the  very 
broadest  terms,  both  the  diagnosis  of  the  economic 
problems  of  Western  Europe  and  the  prescriptions 
offered  seem  to  us  to  look  in  the  right  directions 
and  are  presented  in  ways,  and  with  a  wealth  of 
factual  information,  which,  at  least  for  me,  have 
shed  new  light  on  the  problems  with  which  we 
are  all  so  concerned.  Like  its  predecessor,  but 
like  too  few  other  economic  studies,  it  is  lucidly 
and  skillfully  written.  Having  said  this  and  hav- 
ing done  so  from  real  conviction  and  not  from 
mere  inaugural  politeness,  I  feel  more  at  liberty  to 
proceed  to  a  few  less  favorable  reactions. 


'  MadP  on  Mar.  16  before  the  U.N.  Economic  Commis- 
sion for  Europe  at  Geneva.  Miss  Camp,  who  served  as 
acting  head  of  the  U.S.  delegation  to  the  Ece  meeting,  is 
Officer  in  Charge  of  Economic  Organization  Affairs,  Office 
of  European  Regional  Affairs,  Department  of  State. 

'  The  Economic  Survey  of  Europe  Since  the  War:  A  Re- 
appraisal of  ProMetns  and  Prospects  (U.N.  doc.  E/ECE/ 
157). 


534 


I  am  sure  that  the  Secretariat  is  by  now  inured — 
indeed,  perhaps  completely  numb — to  the  com- 
ment that  it  sometimes  appears  to  be  aspiring  to 
the  position  of  the  economic  Cassandra  of  Europe. 
Nonetheless,  I  feel  that  there  is  a  point  of  real 
substance  in  this  general  comment,  and  I  feel 
bound  to  say,  once  again,  a  few  words  on  the 
subject. 

A.  careful  review  of  the  facts  and  figures  to  be 
found  in  the  survey  indicates  that  a  rather  re- 
markable amount  of  progress  has  been  made  by 
the  free  world  in  the  past  5  years — in  increasing 
production,  in  bringing  inflation  under  control, 
in  expanding  trade,  in  maintaining  a  high  level 
of  investment,  in  avoiding  any  major  recessing, 
in  achieving  a  more  equitable  distribution  of  in- 
come, in  mounting  a  necessary  and  substantial 
defense  effort,  and  in  developing  units  of  and 
institutions  for  international  economic  coopera- 
tion. In  short,  an  impressive  groundwork  for 
continued  progress  and  for  an  expanding  world 
economy  has  been  established.  Yet  this  is  not 
the  impression  one  receives  from  the  survey,  par- 
ticularly not  from  a  quick  reading  of  the  survey. 

The  economist  is,  of  course,  always  free  to  take 
a  broad  historical  approach  to  the  problems  with 
which  he  is  dealing.  Given  our  limited  under- 
standing of  economic  processes,  and  given  the 
harsh  character  of  the  economic  history  of  recent 
decades,  such  an  approach  must,  almost  "inevitably, 
highlight  the  past  failures  of  government  policy 
and  emphasize  the  possibility  that  such  failures 
will  recur. 


Different  Approach  Needed 

It  seems  to  me,  however,  that  economists  who  are 
closely  concerned  with  analyzing  problems  of 
government  policy  from  month  to  month  and  year 
to  year,  and  with  appraising  the  practical  alterna- 
tives of  policy  for  the  future,  would  do  us  a  greater 
service  if  they  were  to  take  a  somewhat  different 
approach.  Past  disasters  and  failures  of  policy 
should   serve  primarily   to   illuminate  decisions 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


I 


which  must  be  taken  in  the  present.  The  future 
might  be  viewed  against  less  perfectionist  stand- 
ards and  with  less  apparent  certainty  that  the 
errors  of  the  past  will  De  repeated. 

Another  general  comment  which  I  should  like 
to  make  concerns  the  treatment  accorded  to  the 
I']astern  European  countries  in  comparison  with 
that  given  to  the  West.  The  survey's  approach 
to  the  Eastern  European  countries  is  reflected  in 
the  statement  that  "the  cloud  of  difficulties  which 
has  arisen  in  particular  industries  at  various  times 
should  not  be  allowed  to  obscure  the  picture  of 
achievement  of  the  Eastern  European  govern- 
ments." For  the  Western  European  countries,  the 
approach  appears  to  be  that  the  massive  achieve- 
ments since  the  war  should  not  be  allowed  to  ob- 
scure the  inadequacies  of  policy  in  the  past  and 
the  major  difficulties  with  which  the  governments 
of  Western  Europe  are  still  faced. 

There  sometimes  seems  to  be  a  lack  of  parallel- 
ism in  the  methods  of  economic  analysis  that  are 
applied  to  the  two  areas  and  to  the  standards 
against  wjiich  achievements  are  treated.  Results 
that  are  wide  of  the  target  tend  to  be  "failures" 
in  Western  Europe  but  only  "shortfalls"  in  East- 
ern Europe.  Social  costs,  political  factors,  alter- 
native lines  of  policy  all  come  in  for  more  scrutiny 
and  comment  in  those  sections  of  the  report  that 
deal  with  Western  Europe,  as  indeed  they  do  in 
Western  Europe  itself.  The  very  availability  of 
an  abundance  of  public  discussion  and  analysis  in 
one  area,  and  its  absence  in  the  other,  undoubtedly 
tends  to  this  result. 

The  Polish  delegate'  in  his  remarks  on  Satur- 
day made  a  considerable  point  of  the  fact  that  he 
felt  the  Eastern  European  countries  could  not  and 
should  not  be  judged  by  the  same  standards  as  are 
used  in  judging  the  countries  of  the  West,  and  he 
strongly  felt  the  Secretariat  had  been  wrong  to 
try  to  do  so. 

I  feel,  on  the  contrary,  that  they  should  be  com- 
mended for  trying  and  encouraged  to  try  even 
harder  in  the  future.  For  unless  achievements 
can  be  tested  against  the  same  standards  and  un- 
less the  methods  of  analysis  and  the  degree  of 
critical  judgment  applied  are  the  same  for  all 
areas  dealt  with  by  the  survey,  the  usefulness  of 
any  attempt  at  an  all-European  economic  analysis 
will  be  seriously  undermined. 

Difficulties  of  Obtaining  Data 

The  chapters  on  the  Soviet  Union  and  the  other 
countries  of  Eastern  Europe  inevitably  reflect  the 
familiar  inability  of  even  the  most  energetic  and 
persistent  research  worker  to  secure  adequate  in- 
formation on  developments  in  this  area.  The  best 
that  it  appears  to  be  possible  to  do,  so  far  as  the 
U.S.S.E.  is  concerned,  is  to  present  an  exposition 
of  plans  of  varying  duration,  largely  accepting  at 

'Eugeniusz  .Jan  Milnikiel,  Polish  Minister  to  Sweden, 
who  spoke  on  Mar.  14. 


face  value  data  whose  significance  cannot  really 
be  tested.  In  fact,  in  the  case  of  the  U.S.S.R.,  it 
seems  to  be  impossible  even  to  avoid  presenting 
statistical  series  which  are  clearly  not  comparable. 

There  can,  of  course,  be  little  doubt  that  produc- 
tion and  investment  have  risen  substantially  in 
the  Eastern  countries.  There  can  equally  be  no 
doubt  that  we  shall  never  really  know  the  true 
magnitude  of  these  increases,  and  that  any  dis- 
crepancies between  planned  and  actual  increases 
will  be  concealed  in  those  countries,  to  the  best  of 
governmental  ability. 

From  the  standpoint  of  trying  to  compare  eco- 
nomic trends  in  the  East  and  the  West,  perhaps 
the  most  interesting  sections  are  those  concerning 
living  standards  and  the  distribution  of  incomes 
in  the  Eastern  countries.  It  is  made  quite  clear 
that  an  increase  in  living  standards  plays  no  part 
in  the  immediate  policy  objectives  of  the  Eastern 
European  governments ;  and,  even  though  reliable 
information  in  this  field  is  as  meager  as  in  others, 
it  is  equally  clear  that  the  Eastern  governments 
have  been  successful  in  directing  productive  re- 
sources to  industrial  and  military  production  at 
the  expense  of  improved  living  standards. 

One  of  the  most  interesting  problems  with  which 
the  Eastern  governments  appear  to  be  faced  is  that 
of  preventing  increases  in  workers'  productivity 
from  being  translated  into  increases  either  in 
money  wages  or  in  real  wages.  This  current 
policy  of  the  Eastern  countries  might  be  compared 
with  the  contrasting  one  of  wage  increases  in  ac- 
cord with  productivity  increases  which  is  being 
embodied  more  and  more  in  major  American  wage 
contracts. 


Reasons  for  Decline  in  East-West  Trade 

The  survey  also  throws  light  on  some  of  the 
fundamental  reasons  for  the  great  decline  in  trade 
between  Eastern  and  Western  Europe;  reasons 
which  were  omitted  from  most  of  the  statements 
made  in  the  course  of  the  trade  discussion  the  other 
day.  The  tables  presented  show  tliat  the  volume 
of  exports  from  Eastern  to  Western  Europe  in 
1951  was  little  more  than  one-fourth  as  great  as 
in  1938,  whereas  exports  from  the  West  to  the 
East  were  about  one-half  as  large  in  volume. 
Price  changes  were  of  course  an  important  factor 
in  the  relatively  larger  decline  in  exports  from 
the  East. 

The  survey  points  out  one  reason  for  hesitation 
on  the  part  of  the  West  to  increase  trade  with  the 
East — the  fact  that  useless  credits  have  been  ac- 
cumulated by  the  W^est  in  several  Eastern  countries 
because  of  failure  by  the  latter  to  provide  the 
volume  of  exports  foreseen  in  the  trade  agree- 
ments which  they  negotiated  and  signed. 

However,  an  analysis  of  the  data  presented  in 
the  survey  indicates  a  more  basic  cause  for  this 
shrinkage  in  the  exports  from  Eastern  to  Western 
European    countries.      The    most    fundamental 


April   13,    1953 


535 


cause  of  the  continuing  decline  of  East- West  trade 
is,  I  believe,  to  be  found  in  the  fact  that  each  of 
the  Eastern  European  countries  is  pursuing  a 
policy  of  autarchy,  of  economic  self-sufficiency  to 
the  nuixiinum  extent  of  its  ability,  and  that,  where 
such  a  policy  of  individual  autarchy  is  not  feas- 
ible, every  effort  is  made  to  buy  goods  from,  and 
to  sell  them  to,  other  countries  in  Eastern  Europe 
rather  than  the  West.  Trade  among  the  Eastern 
countries  had  increased  tenfold  since  before  the 
war,  in  contrast  with  the  steep  decline  in  their 
exports  to  the  West.  Each  country  in  Eastern 
Europe  is  seeking  to  develop  not  only  basic  indus- 
tries, but  also  engineering,  transportation  equip- 
ment, and  other  such  industries,  and  the  area  as 
a  whole  is  pursuing  policies  clearly  designed  to 
insure  that,  at  the  earliest  possible  time,  the  Soviet 
world  can  achieve  economic  isolation. 

Not  only  is  this  objective  implicit  in  the  mate- 
rial presented  in  the  survey  but  it  is  an  objective 
which  has  been  publicly  expressed  many  times  by 
the  highest  officials  of  the  U.S.S.R.  and  of  the 
other  countries  of  Eastern  Europe.  From  such 
statements  of  policy  as  the  well-known  Bolshevik 
article  of  February  1,  1952,  published  this  last 
autumn,  one  cannot  escape  the  conclusion  that 
trade  with  the  West  is  looked  upon  as  a  transi- 
tional measure,  as  a  means  to  end  such  trade. 

Western  European  Policies 

Turning  now  to  those  much  more  informative 
and  critical  sections  of  the  survey  which  deal  with 
the  countries  of  Western  Europe,  I  have  already 
commented  on  the  survey's  tendency  to  concen- 
trate on  the  inadequacies  of  Western  policies  at 
the  expense  of  giving  due  weight  to  the  truly 
major  achievements  since  the  war  in  the  expansion 
of  production  and  trade.  This  approach  is  per- 
haps least  happily  exemplified  in  the  remark 
about  "the  much-advertised  conditions  in  some 
highly  industrialized  countries,  which  by  skillful 
policy  or  good  luck  have  escaped  mass  unemploy- 
ment." 

It  seems  to  me  wrong  to  belittle  in  this  way  a 
reduction  of  unemployment  in  Northwestern  Eu- 
rope which,  according  to  the  survey  table,  fell 
from  3.1  million  in  1938  to  only  800,000  in  1951, 
or  by  nearly  three- fourths.  To  allow  this  achieve- 
ment to  be  obscured  by  the  peculiar  difficulties  of 
assimilating  refugees  in  Western  Germany  and  by 
the  structural  problems  of  the  South,  seems  to  me 
an  unfortunate  distortion.  It  was  hardly  to  be 
expected  that  the  millions  of  refugees  who  came 
from  the  East  just  before  the  war — or.  indeed,  the 
thousands  now  pouring  in  from  the  East — could 
be  easily  or  quickly  absorbed. 

These  comments  are  not,  of  course,  intended  in 
any  way  to  question  the  seriousness  of  the  un- 
employment problem  in  Southern  Europe  and  in 
Western  Germany,  or  the  need  for  remedies  on 
which  the  survey  rightly  places  so  much  emphasis. 


The  gains  of  Western  European  countries  in 
expandmg  production  and  trade  since  the  war 
have  been  as  impressive  as  their  success  in  main- 
taining high  levels  of  employment.  The  survey, 
however,  is  unquestionably  correct  in  pointing 
out  that  a  few  years  ago  too  much  hope  was  held 
out  that  a  simple  expansion  of  production  and 
trade  would  bring  a  solution  to  Europe's  prob- 
lems; and  that  there  was  too  little  recognition 
of  the  very  major  changes  that  were  needed  in 
the  pattern  of  production,  prices,  and  trade,  and 
in  the  efficiency  and  flexibility  of  European  pro- 
duction. The  survey  is  undoubtedly  right  also 
in  emphasizing  that  the  countries  of  Western 
Europe  have  been  perhaps  too  generous  in  their 
judgments  of  what  they  could  afford  to  send  with-' 
out  return  to  associated  countries  overseas,  and 
too  lenient  in  their  views  of  the  increases  in  living 
standards  at  home  which  were  compatible  with 
economic  strength  over  the  long  term.  These 
were  undoubtedly  "inadequacies"  of  policy.  They 
cannot,  however,  it  seems  to  me,  justly  be  called 
"failures."  And,  at  least  in  the  West,  we  may 
see  some  merit  in  the  fact  that  these  inadequacies 
were  ones  of  generosity  and  of  humanity. 

Broadly  speaking,  the  survey's  conclusions  con- 
cerning the  needed  directions  of  Western  Euro- 
pean policy  point  the  right  way.  The  judgment 
that  Western  European  countries  must  increase' 
production  in  directions  which  will  expand  their 
dollar  earnings  in  relation  to  their  dollar  expend- 
itures is  hardly  open  to  debate.  Equally  un- 
arguable is  the  need  for  a  more  effective  alloca- 
tion and  use  of  the  supplies  of  goods  and  capital 
which  Western  European  countries  have  been 
sending  abroad;  and,  indeed,  in  the  allocation  of 
investment  in  Western  European  countries  them- 
selves. 

These  objectives  can  certainly  be  achieved  only 
by  some  relative  displacement  of  American  pro- 
duction, whether  that  production  is  exported  or 
used  at  home.  If  there  is  any  quarrel  with  the 
general  lines  of  the  survey's  analysis  and  recom- 
mendations in  this  field,  it  would  be  that  they 
appear  to  imply  a  static  level  of  world  trade  for 
some  years  into  the  future — a  constant  amoimt 
from  which  the  countries  of  Western  Europe  must 
carve  an  increased  share  at  the  expense  of  U.S. 
exports  or  domestic  production  rather  than  an 
expanding  level  in  which  Western  Europe  gains 
an  increasing  share.  In  the  chapter  on  integra- 
tion, the  survey  very  rightly  stresses  that  progress 
toward  greater  European  unification  can  be  ex- 
pected to  be  reasonably  rapid  only  in  the  context 
of  expanding  economies.  The  same  consideration 
surely  applies  to  the  problem  of  finding  a  lasting 
solution  to  Europe's  trade  difficulties. 

I  would  not  wish  these  comments  to  be  in- 
terpreted as  an  indication  that  the  United  States 
would  not  welcome  more  effective  European  com- 
petition in  world  trade.  Indeed,  the  United 
States,  both  through  substantial  economic  aid  and 


1 


536 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


I 


througli  many  other  programs,  has  emphasized 
the  need  for,  and  has  sought  to  make  a  direct  con- 
tribution to,  increased  European  efficiency  and 
competitiveness. 

U.S.  Economic  Policies 

In  this  general  connection,  the  sum^ey,  and  a 
number  of  speakers,  have  emphasized  the  need  for 
action  by  the  U.S.  Government  on  tariffs  and 
related  measures  which  might  make  it  easier  for 
foreign  goods  to  be  sold  in  the  American  market. 
This  whole  problem  is,  as  you  know,  one  that  is 
now  receiving  the  close  attention  of  our  new  ad- 
ministration. In  his  first  State  of  the  Union  mes- 
sage to  the  Congi-ess,*  President  Eisenhower  called 
particular  attention  to  the  need  for  a  revision  in 
our  customs  regulations  and  for  an  immediate 
study  of  the  Reciprocal  Trade  Agreements  Act. 
These  questions  have  also  been  the  subject  of  in- 
creased attention  by  public  gi'oups  in  the  United 
States.  Just  recently  the  Public  Advisory  Board, 
composed  of  distinguished  private  citizens  repre- 
senting business,  agriculture,  and  labor,  and  the 
Council  of  Economic  Development,  a  prominent 
business  group,  have  both  issued  reports  advocat- 
ing sweeping  changes  in  our  tariff  laws  and 
regulations.^ 

As  a  final  comment  on  the  survey's  approach  to 
the  achievements  of  "Western  Europe  in  expanding 
production  and  trade,  I  should  like  to  question  the 
appropriateness  of  the  frequency  with  which  the 
term  "'stagnation''  is  used  to  describe  economic 
developments  over  the  past  18  months.  It  was.  of 
course,  inevitable  that  the  survey's  analysis  should 
be  based  on  data  extending  only  through  the  third 
quarter  of  last  year.  The  fact  that  this  third 
quarter  usually  shows  a  sharp  seasonal  decline, 
however,  together  with  the  marked  divergency  in 
trends  among  the  various  industries,  might,  in  my 
opinion,  have  led  the  Secretariat  to  use  some  more 
cautious  word  than  "stagnation"' — perhaps  "level- 
ing off." 

The  information  now  available  for  the  fourth 
quarter,  although  it  presents  a  somewhat  mixed 
picture,  on  balance,  shows  signs  of  a  marked  up- 
turn. The  index  of  industrial  production  for  the 
Oeec  countries  which  stood  at  129  in  the  third 
quai'ter  of  1952  rose  to  145  in  the  fourth.  This, 
of  course,  is  also  a  normal  seasonal  development. 
Intra -"Western  European  trade  rose  to  a  new  high 
and  deficits  with  the  United  States  and  Canada 
were  reduced. 

The  survey's  last  chapter,  that  on  "Problems  of 
Economic  Integration,"  opens  with  the  gloomy 
statement  that : 

The  process  of  international  economic  disintegration  in 
Europe  has  been  going  on,  more  or  less  continuously, 
during  the  last  four  decades. 


*  Bulletin  of  Feb.  9,  ia'53,  p.  207. 

'  For  a  summary  of  the  former  report,  see  ibid.,  Mar.  23, 
1953,  p.  436. 

April  )3,   1953 

249310—63 3 


It  goes  on  to  say  that : 

So  far  there  have  been  no  clear  signs  of  a  reversal  of  these 
trends.  Quite  apart  from  the  effects  of  the  East-West 
split,  the  main  tendency  in  Western  Europe  has  been  one 
towards  continued  disintegration  of  the  international 
economy. 

The  first  statement,  of  course,  has  very  substan- 
tial truth  in  it.  The  automatic  gold  standard 
has,  indeed,  disappeared,  and  the  universal  ac- 
ceptance by  "Western  governments  of  the  need  to 
maintain  high  levels  of  employment  and  rising 
living  standards  has  certainly  increased  the  prac- 
tical difficulties  with  which  governments  are  faced 
both  in  meeting  their  domestic  aims  and  in  seeking 
an  expanding  and  freer  world  trade. 

The  question  may  be  asked,  however,  whether 
it  woulcl  really  be  better  if  these  new  aims  of  gov- 
ernment were  to  be  abandoned.  And  if  the  an- 
swer to  this  question  is  "no,"  as  the  survey  itself 
implies,  the  further  question  may  be  asked  whether 
it  is  not  somewhat  beside  the  point  to  characterize 
a  period  in  which  major  new  aims  and  policies 
have  been  assumed  as  one  of  "continuing 
disintegi-ation." 

As  for  the  statement  that  "the  main  tendency 
in  "Western  Europe  has  been  one  toward  continued 
disintegration  of  the  international  economy,"  the 
evidence  to  the  contrary  seems  to  me  to  deserve 
rather  more  attention  than  it  receives.  Surely 
the  Oeec,  embracing  as  it  does  the  European  Pay- 
ments Union  with  its  concomitant  program  of 
trade  liberalization,  has  been  a  major  factor  in 
arresting  the  threatened  disintegration  of  the  im- 
mediate postwar  years  and  in  promoting  increas- 
ing integration  of  the  "Western  European  economy. 
The  establishment  of  the  Coal  and  Steel  Commu- 
nity was  a  tremendously  bold  step  forward.  In- 
deed, it  does  seem  to  me  that  examination  of  the 
evidence  in  this  survey — although  it  reveals  very 
great  difficulties  which  have  made  progress  less 
rapid  than  had  been  hoped  and  which  will  un- 
doubtedly continue  to  be  a  brake  on  as  rapid  fu- 
ture progress  as  might  be  hoped  for — leads  to  the 
conclusion  that  the  trend  in  Western  Europe  over 
the  past  5  years  has  been  toward  increasing  rather 
than  decreasing  economic  integration. 

The  survey's  emphasis  on  the  need  for  develop- 
ing the  underdeveloped  areas  in  Southern  Europe 
is  greatly  to  be  welcomed;  although  the  survey 
perhaps  goes  a  little  far  in  interrelating  as  closely 
as  it  does  the  problem  of  further  AVestern  Euro- 
pean integration  in  Western  Europe  and  the  so- 
lution of  the  problems  of  the  underdeveloped 
countries  in  the  South. 

Particularly  questionable  is  the  suggestion  that 
substantial  tariff  protection  is  essential  to  aid 
these  underdeveloped  areas  of  Southern  Europe. 
Surely  there  are  many  alternative  possibilities 
which  would  be  considered  before  embarking  on 
a  major  new  system  of  tariff  protection,  which 
could  have  so  many  damaging  repercussions  in 
other  areas  of  policy.    A  full  historical  appraisal 

537 


of  the  causes  of  continued  poverty  in  Southern 
Italy  would  reveal  many  causes  in  addition  to, 
and  of  more  fundamental  importance  than,  lack 
of  tariff  i)rotection. 

In  suniminj^  up  this  section,  the  survey  rightly 
concludes  that  "experience  suggests  the  need  to 
realize  that  the  institutional  setting  in  Western 
Europe  necessitates  a  very  empirical  approach  to 
the  practical  problems  of  international  integra- 
tion. '  This  endorsement  of  the  practical  ap- 
proach is  to  be  welcomed  and  can  well  be  imder- 
iined  as  a  guide  to  the  governments  which  are 
striving  to  make  further  progress  in  this  field, 
although  with  the  Dutch  delegate,  I  feel  that  if 
real  progress  is  to  be  made,  the  empirical  approach 
has  to  be  combined  with  goals  that  fire  the 
imagination. 

In  coming  to  the  end  of  my  statement,  I  am  very 
aware  that  the  balance  has  been  more  on  the  side 
of  criticism  than  on  praise.  Indeed,  I  am  afraid 
I  have  yielded  to  that  weakness  which  seemed  to 
me  to  have  characterized  too  much  of  the  survey's 
approach  to  the  problems  of  Western  Europe— 
the  weakness  of  picking  out  what  seem  to  me  to 
be  the  flaws  instead  of  concentrating  on  the  very 
real  and  great  merits  of  the  survey.  As  I  indi- 
cated at  the  beginning  these  seem  to  me  to  be  so 
great  as  to  command  the  admiration  of  all  of  us. 
And  I  should  like  to  close  by  paying  tribute  to 
all  those  who  have  worked  so  hard  in  producing 
what  is,  despite  such  faults  as  various  of  us  may 
choose  to  mention,  a  constructive  and  imaginative 
analysis  of  Europe's  problems. 

Mr.  Chairman,  I  should  now  like  to  make  one 
additional  remark.  During  the  course  of  this  de- 
bate and  our  earlier  debates,  numerous  charges 
have  been  made  by  the  delegates  from  Eastern 
Europe  concerning  U.S.  intentions  and  actions  in 
Western  Europe,  in  Korea,  and  in  other  parts  of 
the  world. 

I  have  not  repeatedly  intervened  to  set  the  rec- 
ord straight,  for  two  reasons :  First,  because  I  did 
not  wish  to  contribute  to  the  tendency  to  discuss 
questions  which  are  not  germane  to  the  problems 
under  discussion,  and  second,  because  the  state- 
ments made  are  believed  by  no  one  here  except 
those  who  deliberately  choose  to  do  so  in  blind 
disregard  for  the  facts. 

The  United  States  is  not  perfect,  nor  does  it 
pretend  to  be.  We  welcome  constructive  criticism 
of  our  actions  and  policies  such  as  those  made 
during  this  debate  by  the  delegates  from  France, 
the  Netherlands,  and  Denmark. 

However,  we  totally  reject  malicious  falsehoods 
and  attempts  to  distort  the  facts  of  our  support 
for  the  United  Nations  in  Korea  or  of  the  pur- 
poses of  our  assistance  to  Western  Europe,  which 
have  been  and  continue  to  be  to  promote  economic 
well-being  and  the  conditions  for  peace. 


Current  U.N.  Documents: 
A  Selected  Bibliography 

Economic  and  Social  Council 

Recommendation  for  the  Expansion  of  Unicef  Program  ' 
To  Develop  Permanent  Cliild  Health  Centers:  Joint 
Statement  by  Sixteen  Non-Governmental  Organiza- 
tions Having  Consultative  Status  With  the  Unicef 
Executive  Board.  E/ICEF/NGO  5,  Mar.  16,  1953. 
3  pp.  mimeo. 

Arrangement  of  Business  at  the  Fifteenth  Session  of  the 
Council.  Working  Paper  by  the  Secretary-General 
E/L.472,  Mar.  3,  1953.     5  pp.  mimeo. 

Basic  Programme  of  the  Council  for  1953.  Note  by  the 
Secretary-General.  E/L.468,  Dec.  18,  1952.  7  pp. 
mimeo. 

Basic  Programme  of  the  Economic  and  Social  Council  for 
19.53.  Note  by  the  Secretary-General.  E/L.469,  Dec. 
18,  1952.     3  pp.  mimeo. 

United  Nations  Opium  Conference.  Observations  of  the 
Permanent  Central  Opium  Board  and  the  Drug  Super- 
visory Body  on  the  Draft  Protocol  for  Regulating  the 
Production  of,  International  and  Wholesale  Trade 
in,  and  Use  of  Opium.  Note  by  the  Secretary-General. 
E/CONF.14/2,  Feb.  6,  19.53.     4  pp.  mimeo. 

Economic  Commission  for  Europe,  Eighth  Session.  Re- 
ports From  the  Committees  of  the  Commission  on 
Their  Activities,  and  an  Additional  Note  bv  the  Execu- 
tive Secretary.  E/ECE/153,  Jan.  27,  1953.  84  pp. 
mimeo. 

Other  Activities  of  the  Economic  Commission  for  Europe 
and  its  Secretariat— Note  by  the  Executive  Secretary. 
E/ECE/154,  Jan.  27,  1953.     10  pp.  mimeo. 

Decisions  of  the  Economic  and  Social  Council  and  the 
General  Assembly  Bearing  Upon  the  Economic  Com- 
mission for  Europe — Note  by  the  Executive  Secretary. 
E/ECE/155,  Jan.  27,  1953.     4  pp.  mimeo. 

The  Economic  Commission  for  Europe's  Programme  of 
Work  for  1953/1954.  E/ECE/156,  Jan.  27,  1953. 
50  pp.  mimeo. 

Programme  of  the  International  Children's  Centre  for 
1953.     E/ICEF/215,  Jan.  23,  1953.     16  pp.  mimeo. 

General  Assembly 

Complaint  of  Non-Compliance  of  States  Still  Detaining 
Members  of  the  Greek  Armed  Forces  With  the  Pro- 
visions of  Resolution  382  A  (V),  Adopted  by  th» 
General  Assembly  on  1  December  19.50,  Recommend- 
ing "The  Repatriation  of  All  Those  Among  Them  Who 
Express  the  Wish  to  be  Repatriated."  Note  by  the 
Secretary-General.  A/2365,  Feb.  17,  1953.  8  pp. 
mimeo. 

Third  United  Nations  Technical  Assistance  Conference. 
Note  by  the  Secretary-General.  A/CONF.4/2,  Feb.  3, 
19.53.     4  pp.  mimeo. 

'Printed  materials  may  be  secured  in  the  United  States 
from  the  International  Documents  Service,  Columbia  Uni- 
versity Press,  2960  Broadway,  New  York  27,  N.  Y.  Other 
materials  (mimeographed  or  processed  documents)  may 
be  consulted  at  certain  designated  libraries  in  the  United 
States. 

The  United  Nations  Secretariat  has  established  an 
Official  Records  series  for  the  General  Assembly,  the 
Security  Council,  the  Economic  and  Social  Council,  the 
Trusteeship  Council,  and  the  Atomic  Energy  Commission 
which  includes  summaries  of  proceedinirs,  resolutions,  and 
reports  of  the  various  commissions  and  committees.  Pub- 
lications in  the  Officinl  Records  series  will  not  be  listed  in 
this  department  as  heretofore,  but  information  on  securing 
subscriptions  to  the  series  may  be  obtained  from  the 
International  Documents  Service. 


538 


Deparfmenf  of  Stale  Bulletin 


Czechoslovak  Subversion  Charges  Against  U.S.  Refuted 


Statements  hy  Henry  Cabot  Lodge,  Jr. 
U.S.  Representative  to  the  General  Assembly  ^ 


THE  FACTS  ON  MSA  AID 

U.S./U.N.  press  release  dated  March  23 

Once  again,  let  me  say  to  the  representatives  of 
the  Communist  bloc— I  have  said  it  many  times 
before  and  I  guess  I  will  go  on  saying  it  quite  a 
few  times  again— that  no  valid  indictment  against 
the  United  States  can  ever  be  based  on  newspaper 
clippings  and  remarks  of  individual  legislators. 
I  realize  that  if  this  truth  were  taken  to  heart,  it 
would  eliminate  90  percent  of  the  Communist 
attacks.  __   ,  » 

But  it  is  a  truth  ]ust  the  same.  We  have  a  tree 
press  in  America;  newspapers,  magazines  say 
what  they  want  to  say,  and  disagree  with  each 
other.  The  writer  disagrees  with  the  editor  and 
the  editor  disagrees  with  the  owner.  We  have 
free  speech  in  America.  We  have  free  speech  in 
the  House  of  Representatives.  We  have  tree 
speech  in  the  U.S.  Senate,  and  it  is  seldom,  if  ever, 
that  statements  are  made  there  that  are  made  with 
official  authority.  It  is  always  easy  to  know  what 
the  U.S.  Government  thinks  by  what  its  oilicials 
say  on  their  official  authority.  tn     • , 

The  Czech  representative  [Vaclav  David, 
Czechoslovak  Foreign  Minister]  says  that  the 
U.S.  is  engaged  in  subversion,  which  of  course  is 
completely  untrue.  His  speech  reminds  me  a 
little  bit  of  the  statement  that  used  to  be  made  by 
a  cynical  political  boss  who  existed  for  a  while 
here  and  who  said  this:  "Blame  everything,  con- 
cede nothing,  and  if  defeated,  allege  fraud. 
Well,  he  didn't  last  very  long  either. 

There  were  many  surprising  statements  m  the 
speech  of  the  Czech  representative.     One  of  them 

'Made  in  Committee  I  (Political  and  Security)  on  Mar. 
23  and  Mar.  25  during  debate  on  the  Czechoslovak  item 
entitled:  "Interference  of  the  United  States  "% A"ierica 
In  the  Internal  Affairs  of  Other  States  as  Manifested  by 
the  Organization  on  the  Part  of  the  Government  of  the 
United  States  of  America  of  Subversive  and  Espionage 
ActivUies  Against  the  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  RepuhUcs, 
fhe  People's  Republic  of  China,  the  Czechoslovak  RepubUc, 
and  Other  People's  Democracies." 

April  13,  1953 


was  that  the  American  soldiers  wanted  to  stay  m 
Czechoslovakia.  Mr.  Chairman,  there  is  one 
thing  that  all  American  soldiers  have  in  com- 
mon—it is  a  burning  desire  to  get  home.  I  have 
never  yet  met  one  who  did  not  want  to  come  liome 
as  soon  as  he  could.  The  Czech  representative 
spoke  about  the  U.S.  abusing  its  forces  on  the 
border  of  Czechoslovakia.  And  yet  the  world 
remembers  well  because  it  happened  on  the  10th 
of  March,  when  two  Mio  planes  of  the  Czecho- 
slovak air  force  shot  down  an  American  plane.^ 
The  weather  was  good  that  day  and  he  knew 
exactly  where  he  was  and  he  was  directly  over 
the  American  Zone  of  Germany.  Two  days  later, 
a  British  bomber  was  shot  down  and  six  British 
airmen  were  killed,  for  which  we  express  our 
heartfelt  sympathy. 

The  Coup  d'Etat  in  Czechoslovakia 

Mr  Chairman,  if  we  consider  the  question  of 
subversion,  the  case  of  Czechoslovakia  itself  is  a 
most  flagrant  case  in  point. 

Remember  that  on  February  19, 1948,  the  small 
free  state  of  Czechoslovakia  was  having  a  Cabinet 
crisis  which,  had  it  been  settled  legally,  would 
have  reduced  Communist  strength  in  the  Govern- 
ment. Suddenly,  there  appeared  a  series  of  re- 
ports carefully  planted  by  Soviet  agents  that  the 
Red  army  was  about  to  invade  Czechoslovakia. 
Tension  was  further  increased  by  the  sudden  ar- 
rival in  Prague  of  Soviet  Deputy  Foreign  Min- 
ister Zorin,  accompanied  by  six  Soviet  generals, 
the  same  Mr.  Zorin  who  is  our  colleague  here  to- 
day representing  the  Soviet  Union  at  the  United 
Nations.  If  I  make  any  mistake  in  describing 
what  happened  next  I  hope  he  will  correct  me. 

Mr.  Zorin's  arrival  in  Prague  was  accompanied 
by  the  appearance  of  many  heavily  armed  Com- 
munist police  who,  under  the  Communist  Minister 
of  the  Interior,  began  to  patrol  the  streets  and 


'  Bulletin  of  Mar.  30, 1953,  p.  474. 


539 


search  the  headquarters  of  all  opposition  political 

garties.  They  were  soon  joined  by  regiments  of 
ommunist  militia  who  marched  in  military  for- 
mations led  by  Soviet-trained  leaders  and  carry- 
in<j  Soviet  fla<^s. 

The  next  day,  February  20,  the  country  was 
sliaken  by  more  rumors  of  imminent  Soviet  in- 
vasion. Mr.  Zorin  and  his  jjenerals  were  still  in 
Prague  and  the  Conanunist  police  militia  had 
prochiimed  virtual  martial  law. 

The  Kremlin  took  the  next  step  in  converting 
Czechoslovakia  into  a  puppet  state  by  calling  to 
arms  all  members  of  its  so-called  Czechoslovak 
"action  committees."  Planted  in  every  walk  of 
life,  they  constituted  a  fifth  colunm  in  every  busi- 
ness organization,  factory,  and  public  service — 
even  in  the  opposition  political  parties. 

On  February  21  members  of  this  Communist 
fifth  column  seized  control  of  the  police,  civil  serv- 
ice, ti'ade  unions,  business  firms,  factories,  public 
utilities,  and  banks.  Following  a  preconceived, 
well  organized  plan,  they  then  dismissed  chair- 
men, directors,  and  other  key  figures  and  put  in 
their  own  men.  By  the  end  of  the  day  all  the 
features  of  a  Soviet  police  state  had  appeared  in 
what  had  been  a  democratic  country;  control  of 
broadcasting  facilities,  elimination  of  all  non- 
Communist  newspaper  editors,  suppression  of 
non-Communist  periodicals  and  complete  censor- 
ship. All  non-Communist  political  parties  had 
been  eliminated  and  many  of  their  officials  had 
been  arrested. 

Thus,  in  3  days  the  country  had  been  taken  over. 
Four  days  later,  on  February  25,  aged  President 
Benes  was  forced  to  sign  a  Cabinet  list  which  set 
up  a  government  consisting  entirely  of  Commu- 
nists and  Communist  dupes. 

What  happened  after  that? 

Jan  Masaryk  was  inexplicably  driven  to  his 
death.  Clementis  was  hanged.  Mr.  Slansky  is 
dead.  But,  both  Mr.  Slansky  and  Mr.  Gottwald 
left  us  a  testament  on  subversion  when  they 
boasted  that  they  had  gone  to  Moscow  to  learn 
"how  to  wring  the  neck  of  the  bourgeoisie"  in  their 
native  country. 

This  Czecho.slovak  coup  d'etat  is  certainly  one 
of  the  most  glaring  examples  of  subversion  in 
modern  times.  With  this  record  hung  around 
their  necks,  the  present  rulers  of  Czechoslovakia, 
who  introduced  this  resolution  criticizing  the 
United  States,  do  not  come  into  court  with  clean 
hands.  Their  charges,  therefore,  are  not  to  be 
believed. 

They  charge  that  in  1951  and  again  in  1952 
the  United  States  appropriated  $100,000,000  for 
alleged  espionage,  terrorism,  and  recruitment  of 
refugees  into  military  formations — all  of  this,  ac- 
cording to  the  charge,  for  the  purpose  of  subvert- 
ing the  U.S.S.R.,  Czechoslovakia,  and  other  so- 
called  "Peoples  Democracies"  in  Eastern  Europe 
and  the  Far  East. 


Aid  to  Escapees 

The  nations  of  the  world  are  entitled  to  the 
facts  and  here  they  are : 

In  1951,  $100,000,000  was  authorized  under  sec- 
tion 101  of  the  Mutual  Security  Act.  No  further 
sums  were  authorized  under  this  section  in  1952. 

The  $100,000,000  is  being  spent  as  follows :  $95,- 
700,000  is  going  for  regular  military  and  economic 
aid — a  part  of  the  larger  sums  the  United  States 
is  now  spending  under  the  Mutual  Security  Act 
and  has  previously  spent  under  the  Marshall  plan 
to  help  the  free  nations  to  stay  free.  Before  the 
subversion  of  the  free  State  of  Czechoslovakia,  she, 
too,  wanted  to  get  this  aid.  But  the  Kremlin  said 
"no,"  because  it  knew  this  assistance  was  designed 
to  strengthen  collective  security  against  aggres- 
sion— to  stop  future  Koreas  and  future  Czecho- 
slovakias  before  they  start. 

The  remaining  $4,300,000  is  being  spent  to  help 
escapees  from  Iron  Curtain  countries.  The  Czech 
delegate  is  evidently  baffled  because  there  are  no 
escapees  going  into  the  Iron  Curtain  countries. 
All  the  escapees  are  coming  out.    I  wonder  why? 

An  escapee  is  a  person  who  has  escaped  from 
the  Soviet-dominated  world  during  the  last  5 
years,  and  has  not  been  granted  citizenship  in  his 
country  of  refuge.  He  thus  differs  from  the  mil- 
lions of  Germans  and  the  hundreds  of  thousands 
of  Turks  and  Greeks  who  fled  Soviet-dominated 
areas  in  recent  years  and  who  have  since  been 
granted  citizenship  in  Western  Germany,  Turkey, 
and  Greece.  Unlike  them,  the  person  we  ai'e  help- 
ing has  literally  no  place  in  this  world. 

But  he  j-earns  for  a  freedom  which  has  been 
denied  him — freedom  to  speak,  to  write,  to  vote, 
to  worship  as  he  pleases  and  build  his  life  in  his 
own  way.  He  also  yearns  for  freedom  from  speed- 
ups,  labor  disciplines,  the  internal  passports  which 
make  Soviet  life  a  hell  for  the  ordinary  person, 
and  freedom  from  the  threat  of  the  secret  police, 
the  mass  deportation,  and  the  forced  labor  camp. 

This  person — this  stateless  man — has  given  up 
his  home,  his  possessions,  his  friends,  and  often 
his  family.  Heroically,  he  has  cracked  the  Iron 
Curtain,  even  though  that  curtain  is  constantly 
being  strengthened.  Because,  as  life  becomes 
harder  and  harder  behind  the  Iron  Curtain,  more 
and  more  people  want  to  escape.  More  armed 
guards  may  be  watcJiing  from  observation  towers, 
vicious  dogs  may  be  patrolling  the  frontiers.  Yet 
people  continually  get  through. 

Flights  to  Freedom 

For  example : 

Here  are  three  Czechs  who  climbed  a  200-meter 
airshaft  to  escape  from  a  coal  mine  near  Kladno, 
Czechoslovakia,  and  fled  to  West  Germany  on 
June  21,  1950.  They  escaped  because  they  "were 
condemned  to  forced  labor  for  anti-Communist 
activities  before  the  Czech  coup  d'etat. 


540 


Deparfment  of  Sfate   Bulletin 


Here  is  Vladimir  Drazan,  another  Czech  es- 
capee, who  was  wounded  by  an  exploding  mine 
while  climbing  barbed  wire  entanfjlements,  and 
who  swam  the  Morava  River  under  nre  from  Com- 
munist guards  and  arrived  safely  on  the  Austrian 
^iJe  on  December  14,  li)52.  He  escaped  because  of 
depressed  living  conditions  in  Communist  Czecho- 
slovakia. 

Here  are  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Steven  Kantor,  a  Hun- 
garian couple  who  hid  for  4  days  in  an  empty 
wine  vat  in  a  boxcar  on  a  sealed  train  from  Buda- 
pest to  Switzerland.  They  broke  out  in  Linz, 
Austria,  on  March  19, 1952.  They  escaped  because 
their  repair  shop  was  nationalized  without  com- 
pensation and  they  were  denied  employment 
because  of  their  anti-Communist  record. 

Here  are  a  Hungarian  farmer,  wife,  and  three 
small  children  who  reached  the  Western  Zone  of 
Austria  on  October  29,  1952,  after  swimming  a 
river  and  fleeing  clear  across  Hungary  from  the 
Rumanian  border.  They  escaped  because  it  was 
impossible  to  fulfill  unreasonable  crop  quotas  and 
they  were  forced  to  sell  livestock  to  pay  con- 
fiscatory taxes. 

Here  is  a  Charles  University  student  from 
Prague  accompanied  by  his  fiancee,  who  took 
poison  when  apprehended  by  East  German  police 
at  the  "West  Berlin  border.  He  was  rescued  by 
the  West  German  border  patrol  and  was  cured  in 
a  West  Berlin  hospital  in  August  1952.  He  es- 
caped because  he  was  accused  of  "cosmopolitan- 
ism"'— isn't  that  a  terrible  crime? — and  unable  to 
continue  his  studies. 

Here  is  a  young  foundry  worker  with  his  wife 
and  small  child  who  crossed  the  Hungarian- 
Austrian  border  on  February  8,  1953,  after  evad- 
ing man-and-dog  patrols,  passing  over  mined 
areas,  and  cutting  through  barbed-wire  barriers. 
This  family  escaped  because  it  was  impossible  to 
live  in  Hungary  and  bring  up  their  child  in  a 
democratic  manner. 

These  are  a  few  examples. 

Escapee  Program  Set  Up 

There  are  more  than  15,000  such  escapees  in 
West  Germany,  Austria,  Italy,  Trieste,  Greece 
and  Turkey,  and  they  continue  to  come  in  at  the 
rate  of  several  hundred  a  month.  All  of  them  are 
not  young  men — there  are  wives,  small  children, 
mimarried  girls,  and  elderly  people. 

When  they  arrive,  they  are  destitute — unlike 
the  millions  of  refugees  from  East  Germany  who 
have  gone  to  West  Germany  and  who  are  fleeing 
fi'om  tyranny  to  freedom  at  the  rate  of  30,000  a 
month.  These  stateless  persons  are  entirely  with- 
out citizenship  rights,  and  their  very  presence  adds 
to  the  gi-eat  burdens  of  the  countries  of  free 
Europe. 

To  help  these  people,  to  keep  hope  in  the  hearts 
of  others,  the  United  States  authorized  the  sum 
of  $4,300,000  to  be  used  to  set  up  an  escapee  pro- 


gram in  March  1952.'  It  is  a  pretty  inhuman 
heart  that  is  not  touched  by  the  need  and  by  the 
courage — which  makes  $4,300,000  appear  small 
enough. 

I  think,  Mr.  Chairman,  that  Congressman  Ker- 
sten  is  to  be  commended  for  having  done  a  good 
deed.* 

The  money  is  used  to  help  the  host  countries 
provide  reception  and  living  quarters,  food,  cloth- 
ing, medical  care,  help  in  their  search  for  visas, 
vocational  training,  and  employment  and  emigra- 
tion atlvice  for  emigration  is  strongly  encouraged. 

The  program  which  began  last  March  had  by 
August  helped  122  escapees  to  leave  Europe.  By 
the  end  of  xVugust,  almost  700  were  on  their  way 
overseas.  As  of  March  1,  1953,  a  total  of  2,483 
escapees  had  been  settled  in  21  non-European 
countries.  More  than  another  thousand  had  been 
accepted  by  other  nations. 

News  of  this  program  has  spread  behind  the 
Iron  Curtain.  More  and  more  people  are  escap- 
ing from  t3Tanny.  Those  who  choose  freedom 
in  the  futui-e  may  even  include  some  of  the  highest 
officials. 

Mr.  Chairman,  if  there  is  one  trait  which  sets 
man  above  the  animals,  it  is  spiritual  courage. 
These  people  show  a  tough,  unbeatable  type  of 
courage  which  deserves  our  commendation  and  our 
help. 

This  Czech  resolution  should  be  emphatically 
rejected. 

SOVIET  POLICY  OF  AGGRESSIVE 
INTERVENTION 

U.S./U.X.  press  release  dated  March  23 

I  would  just  like  for  a  few  minutes  to  point 
out  a  few  of  the  inaccuracies  and  lacunae  in  the 
statement  of  the  representative  of  the  Soviet 
Union  [xVndrei  Gronwko]. 

He  spoke  of  the  Roosevelt-Litvinov  agreement 
concerning  nonintervention  in  the  affairs  of  one 
state  bj'  another.  I  would  like  to  point  out  that 
for  all  practical  purposes  the  Soviet  Government 
made  a  dead  letter  of  the  Roosevelt-Litvinov 
agreement  shortlj'  after  it  was  signed.  Shortly 
after  the  establishment  of  diplomatic  relations. 
President  Roosevelt  instructed  our  Ambassador 
in  Moscow  to  make  all  protests  against  the  viola- 
tions of  the  Roosevelt-Litvinov  agreement  by  the 
Soviet  Union.  When  in  1935,  the  Comintern  met 
in  Moscow  and  instructed  the  American  Com- 
munist Party  to  use  Trojan  hoi'se  tactics  against 
the  American  Government,  the  President  sent  a 
strong  protest  to  the  Soviet  Government.    He  said 


'  Ihid.,  Apr.  14,  1952,  p.  602. 

*  Rep.  Charles  J.  Kersteu  is  the  author  of  the  amend- 
ment to  the  Mutual  Security  Act  of  1951  that  authorizes 
expenditure  of  $100,000,000  to  assist  "selected  persons  who 
are  residing  in  or  escapees  from"  the  Soviet  dominated 
areas.  He  was  one  of  several  U.S.  leaders  attacked  by 
the  Czechosloval£  representative  in  his  statement  of 
Jlar.  23. 


AprU  13,   1953 


541 


the  United  States  anticipated  the  most  serious 
consequences  if  the  Soviet  Government  refused 
to  prevent  further  acts  in  disregard  of  the  solemn 
pledge  given  by  it  to  tlie  United  States. 
Hardly  a  niontli  after  the  Soviet  regime  seized 

fower  in  1917,  all  allied  and  neutral  missions  in 
'etrograd  received  this  circular  note  from  the 
Soviet  leaders :  ".  .  .  the  Soviet  Government  con- 
siders necessary  diplomatic  relations  not  only  with 
governments  but  also  with  the  revolutionary 
socialist  parties  which  are  striving  for  the  over- 
throw of  existing  governments."  .  .  .^ 

Since  the  end  of  the  war,  the  Soviet  Government 
has  persistently  followed  a  policy  of  aggressive 
intervention  in  the  domestic  affairs  of  otlier  na- 
tions and  peoples.  Upon  the  very  countries  listed 
in  the  complaint  before  this  Committee,  the  Soviet 
Union  has  imposed  dictatorial  Communist  re- 
gimes. The  profoundest  feelings  for  family  and 
country  of  peoples  of  Czechoslovakia,  Poland, 
Rumania,  and  Hungary  have  been  deliberately 
trampled  upon. 

Only  a  shoi't  time  ago,  the  Yugoslav  delegation 
presented  to  the  Assembly  a  case  history  of  Soviet 
intervention  in  the  domestic  affairs  of  a  foreign 
nation — in  this  instance,  Yugoslavia.  When  the 
Yugoslav  Communist  Party  was  expelled  from 
the  Cominform,  the  highest  leaders  of  the  Soviet 
State  then  demanded  that  the  Yugoslav  people 
oveithrow  the  Yugoslav  Government. 

Nor  will  the  world  ever  forget  the  most  out- 
standing case  of  intervention  of  all — the  Com- 
munist attack  upon  the  Republic  of  Korea  sup- 
ported by  Soviet  equipment,  training,  and  propa- 
ganda.    I  do  not  think  that  ought  to  be  left  out. 

Now,  Mr.  Chairman,  a  sarcastic  reference  was 
made  by  tiie  representative  of  the  Soviet  Union 
to  the  Statue  of  Liberty,  saying  that  the  quota- 
tion which  is  written  on  it  should  be  changed  so 
that  instead  of  being  words  of  welcome  as  they 
now  are,  there  be  some  expression  to  the  effect  that 
all  those  within  the  United  States  should  abandon 
hope.  Well,  I  think  the  best  answer  to  that  is  to 
see  how  many  people  who  are  now  in  the  United 
States  want  to  leave.  Actions,  you  know,  speak 
a  good  deal  louder  than  words  in  these  cases. 
And  I  repeat  my  observation  of  this  morning  that 
a  lot  of  people  want  to  come  out  all  the  time  from 
behind  the  Iron  Curtain,  but  no  people  from 
outside  want  to  go  in. 

The  representative  of  the  Soviet  Union  asked 
us  to  demonstrate  a  talent  for  peaceful  occupa- 
tions. Well,  only  a  few  weeks  ago,  Mr.  Chairman, 
I  was  sitting  right  over  at  a  meeting  of  the  Tech- 
nical Assistance  Conference  and  I  pledged  my 
Government,  I  think  the  sum  was  $14  million,"  and 

'  See  Foreign  Relations  of  the  United  States,  1918,  Rus- 
sia, Vol.  I,  p.  303  for  the  full  text  of  tliis  communication, 
which  was  sent  on  Dec.  14,  1917,  by  the  National  Com- 
missariat for  Foreign  Affairs  to  the  U.S.  Ambassador  at 
Petrograd. 

"  Bulletin  of  Mar.  9,  1953,  p.  384. 


other  nations  pledged  other  sums  to  drain  the! 
swamps,  to  irrigate  the  deserts,  to  wipe  out  disease,! 
to  increase  the  food  supply,  to  make  life  worth  liv- j 
ing  for  people,  to  make  peace  worth  strugglins 
for,  to  bind  up  the  wounds  of  the  world.  And 
as  I  looked  around,  to  my  amazement  there  was 
no  one  in  the  seat  of  the  Soviet  Union,  there  was 
no  one  in  the  seat  of  the  Ukrainian  S.S.R.,  there 
was  no  one  in  the  seat  of  the  Byelorussian  S.S.R.,  j 
there  was  no  one  in  the  seat  allocated  to  Poland, 
and  no  one  in  the  seat  allocated  to  Czechoslovakia. 
Now,  there  is  a  case  of  deeds,  of  doing  sometliing 
to  help  people. 

Now,  the  representative  of  the  Soviet  Union 
made  a  number  of  quotations  from  various  promi- 
nent Americans  and  he  rested  a  good  part  of  his 
case  on  that.  With  all  due  respect,  that  part  of 
his  case  was  rested  on  sand.  One  of  the  Congress- 
men to  whom  he  referred  as  one  who  had  violently 
opposed  the  Soviet  Union  during  the  war  was, 
to  the  best  of  my  knowledge,  not  in  Congress  dur- 
ing the  war.  He  was  elected  in  1946.  Mr.  Stas- 
sen,  whom  he  quoted,  was  not  in  public  office  at  all 
at  the  time  the  quotation  was  made.  I  think  he 
was  President  of  the  University  of  Pennsylvania. 
Mr.  Dewey  is  a  Governor,  and  he  was  speaking  as 
a  private  citizen.  The  State  of  New  York,  great 
as  it  is,  has  no  foreign  relations,  as  I  am  sure  its 
able  and  distinguished  Governor  would  be  the 
first  to  admit.  Mr.  Dulles,  who  was  quoted,  was 
not  in  public  office  at  the  time  that  .statement  was 
made.  Senator  Wiley,  Senator  Mundt,  and  Sen- 
ator Taft,  who  are  all  distinguished  men,  were  not 
speaking  officially  when  they  made  the  utterances 
quoted  b}'  the  representative  of  the  Soviet  Union, 
and  they  have  no  claim  to  be  doing  so.  In  fact, 
when  you  anah-ze  the  list  of  American  political 
figures  who  were  quoted  by  the  representative  of 
the  Soviet  Union,  not  one  was  speaking  for  the 
U.S.  Government. 

Now,  that  is  a  fact  worth  noting  as  indicating 
the  authority  underlying  those  quotations.  I  will 
try  once  again  to  explain  to  the  representative  of 
the  Soviet  Union  that  we  have  435  representatives 
in  the  House  of  Representatives ;  we  have  96  Sen- 
ators. They  are  all  individuals,  every  one  of 
them.  They  often  disagree  with  each  other.  We 
have  free  speech  and  free  press  in  America,  and 
free  speech  means  much  speech,  and  we  have  much 
speech  here  in  this  country  in  case  nobody  knew 
it.  And  the  practitioners  of  free  speech  often  try 
to  get  into  the  free  press.  That  may  happen  in 
other  countries  where  we  have  both  free  speech 
and  free  press.  Specific  propositions  may  at  any 
given  moment  be  debatable  but  they  sjiring  from 
a  belief  in  man  being  superior  to  the  state  and 
they  spring  from  a  hatred  of  aggression. 

Under  our  system  of  government,  the  Executive 
speaks  for  the  United  States  in  foreign  affairs. 
Now,  let  that  be  understood.  Congress  represents 
the  outside  check,  the  independent  audit,  the  ca- 
pacity of  the  free  jDCople  to  judge  its  own  govern- 


542 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


ment— an  institution,  by  the  way,  which  is  a  great 
source  of  national  strength  and  an  unknown  tea- 
ture  of  life,  I  gather,  in  the  Soviet  Union.  _ 

Finally,  Mr.  Chairman,  the  representative  ot 
the  Soviet  Union  referred  to  a  bill  which  I  spon- 
sored when  I  was  a  Senator,  and  which  provided 
for  the  enlistment  of  stateless  young  anti-Commu- 
nist Slavs  in  the  U.S.  Army.    Well,  now   I  see 
no  reason  at  all  for  me  to  apologize  for  having 
sponsored  that  legislation.    It  provided  that  these 
young  men  would  come  into  the  American  Army 
at  American  wages  and  under  American  living 
conditions  with  American  citizenship  to  follow; 
to  be  mixed  right  in  with  American  soldiers  and 
have  an  equal  chance  to  ^o  to  officer  candidate 
school  and  to  be  promoted.     Contrast  that  with 
the  action  of  the  Soviet  Union  in  flagrantly  im- 
pelling others  to  fight  its  battles  for  it— the  North 
Koreans  and  the  Chinese.    Now,  these  people  who 
are  fio-hting  the  battles  for  the  Soviet  Union  have 
been  treated  as  second-rate  satellites.    We,  on  the 
other  hand,  have  invited  others  to  help  us  resist 
ago-ression  on  an  equal  basis  and  as  volunteers. 
There  is  all  the  difference  in  the  world  between 
master  and  slave  on  the  one  hand  and  mutual 
comradeship  on  the  other. 


THE  SUPERSENSITIVE  OUTLOOK 
OF  SOVIET   LEADERS 

U.S. /U.N.  press  release  dated  March  25 

We  face  the  charges  of  the  Czech  delegation 
that  the  U.S.  program  of  assistance  to  escapees, 
initiated  under  section  101  (a)  of  the  Mutual  Se- 
curity Act,  is  an  act  of  aggression.     _  . 

We  contend  that  far  from  there  being  anything 
illegal  about  our  helping  these  homeless  people, 
this  is  a  project  which  is  humane  and,  being  illu- 
minated by  the  spirit  of  the  Charter,  deserves  gen- 
eral commendation.  The  program  ot  he  p nig 
escapees  is  part  of  an  entire  program  of  helping 
to  keep  the  free  world  free.  We  are  forced  to 
adopt  these  programs  because  of  the  actions  ot 
the  Soviet  Union.  If  people  were  not  made  un- 
happv  by  the  Soviet  Union,  they  would  not  teel 
the  desperate  urge  to  escape  and  there  would 
therefore  be  no  need  to  help  them. 

If  small  states  like  Czechoslovakia  were  not  sub- 
verted by  the  Soviet  Union  there  would  be  no 
need  to  have  a  program  of  protection  against  fur- 
ther subversion.  And  if  shooting  wars  were  not 
aided  and  abetted  bv  the  Soviet  Union,  as  m 
Korea,  there  would  be  no  need  for  a  program  ot 
military  action.  .  tt  -^  j 

It  is  the  Soviets— and  not  we  m  the  Unitecl 
States,  or  we  in  the  United  Nations— who  started 
these  things. 

We  aren't  the  ones  who  force  people  to  leave  the 
Iron  Curtain ;  they  want  to  leave.  We  aren't  the 
ones  who  are  subverting  countries  and  sponsoring 
aggressive  war. 

April  J  3,  1953 


We  in  the  United  States  actually  embarked  on  a 
headlong  disarmament  at  the  end  of  World  War 
II,  but  the  confidence  which  American  authorities 
had  at  that  time  in  our  recent  ally  now  appears 
to  have  been  a  major  miscalculation  because,  while 
we  disarmed,  the  Soviet  Union  remained  armed 
to  the  teeth. 

We  asked  nothing  more  than  to  live  m  peace, 
but  the  Soviets  ha\e  forced  us  to  take  these  neces- 
sary actions  to  prevent  all  human  rights  from 
being  wiped  out  and  to  frustrate  the  establishment 
of  an  iron  dictatorship  throughout  the  world. 

If  the  Kremlin  leaders  are  really  looking  for  the 
people  who  are  subverting  life  behind  the  Iron 
Curtain,  they  should  look  at  themselves— at  then- 
laws,  their  decrees,  their  practices  of  oppression. 
They  should  look  at  the  Lenin-Stalinist  doctrine 
on  which  they  have  impaled  nearly  half  the  world. 
That  doctrine  is  the  centrifugal  force  which  drives 
people  out  through  the  Iron  Curtain  to  freedom. 
It  is  also  the  force  which  sends  others  out  beyond 
the  curtain— aggressive  armies,  reaching  out  m 
Korea,  in  southeast  Asia,  threatening  central  and 
western  Europe  in  an  imperialistic  design  to  en- 
fold still  more  millions  into  the  Soviet  prison. 

The  Mutual  Security  Act  does  two  things:  It 
gives  asylum  to  the  one  group— the  escapees;  ana 
it  is  designed  to  halt  the  other  group— the  armies 
of  Soviet  aggression. 

Ninety-five  percent  of  ^he  $100  million  author- 
ized under  the  Kersten  amendment  is  going  to  na- 
tions of  the  free  world  as  an  integral  part  of  the 
larger  sum  which  helps  these  people  build  their 
ramparts  asainst  aggression.  The  other  nye  P"- 
cent  goes  to  assist  those  who  escape  from  behind 
the  Iron  Curtain.  The  hypersensitive  Soviet 
leaders  regard  both  parts  of  this  program  as 
aggressive.  Well,  they  have  no  aggressive  poten- 
tiality at  all. 

Mr  Chairman,  thev  do  so  because  ot  the  super- 
sensitive outlook  which  leads  them  to  imagine 
threats  to  their  position.     And  that  is  why  they 
consider  it  necessarv  and  are  willing  to  shoot  down 
an  unarmed  foreign  aircraft,  or  lash  their  people 
with  forced  collectivization,  or  sign  a  pact  with 
Hitler— re<^ardless  of  the  unfavorable  repercus- 
sions.    To  be  sure,  they   are  sensitive  to  these 
repercussions  for  such  actions  weaken  the  hoped- 
for  attraction  of  their  claims  to  be  the  champions 
of  peace  and  humanity.     But  they  are  willing  to 
expose  this  vulnerability  in  the  struggle  of  ideas 
in  order  to  protect  what  they  consider  to  be  their 
power    interests.     "Let    the   enemy    consider    us 
nasty  people,"  says  a  Pravda  article.     "From  the 
mouths  of  the  enemy  this  is  praise. 

How  Tyrannical  Power  is  Protected 

The  Soviets  go  about  protecting  the  sources  of 
this  tvrannical  power  by,  first,  preventing  Soviet 
citizens  from  communicating  with  the  outside 
world  except  through  controlled  means.  The 
Soviet  Government  prohibits  them  from  traveling 

543 


abroad  except  on  official  missions;  contains  them 
withm  tlie  Soviet  Union  by  the  most  elaborate 
l3order  controls  of  any  state  in  the  world ;  provides 
in  the  criminal  code  that  tlieir  families  be  pun- 
ished if  they  should  flee;  prohibits  uncensored 
communications  to  other  countries;  bars  Soviet 
citizens  married  to  foreigners  from  leaving  the 
U.^.fciK.;  discourages  communication  with  for- 
eigners m  the  U.S.S.R.  by  the  State  Secrets  Act 
that  encompasses  wide  areas  of  normally  public 
"i— T"*.'""  ^"'^^y  decrees  that  prohibit  Soviet 
officia  s  from  talking  with  foreigners  unless  spe- 
cihcally  authorized.  It  also  quarantines  Soviet 
occupation  troops  in  foreign  areas  and  prohibits 
traternization  with  the  local  population 

Next,  the  Soviet  Government  prevents  foreio-n- 
ers  trom  viewing  the  Soviet  Union  freely.  Only 
tour  types  of  non-Communist  foreigners  are  per- 
mitted to  enter:  diplomats,  newspapermen,  fur 
buyers  and  similar  businessmen,  and  members  of 


specially    invited    delegations.      Each    ^,unn    is 
closely  restricted.    More  than  80  percent  Sf  Soviet 
territory  is  closed  to  foreign  diplomats.     Their 
movements  within  Moscow  are  subjected  to  vari- 
ous harassments,  and  their  work  is  publicly  de- 
scribed as  "espionage."    The  artificially  hio-'h  ex- 
change rate  for  the  ruble  discourages  some  coun- 
tt'S^c^°"\t      P"^^  diplomatic  missions  in  the 
U.fe.to  K.    Newspapermen  are  confined  largely  to 
the  city  of  Moscow,  restricted  mainly  to  reportin.T 
what  appears  in  the  Soviet  press,  subjected  to  cen': 
sorship,  and  constantly  faced  with  the  threat  of 
expulsion.     They  no  longer  are  given  re-entry 
permits  before  departing  from  the  USSR     At 
present,  there  are  only  six  non-Communist  corre- 
spondents and  applications  of  other  newspaper- 
men for  entry  have  been  ignored.     Businessmen 
are  largely  confined  to  the  Leningrad  fur  auctions, 
helected  foreign  delegations  are  carefully  shep- 
herded on  prearranged  tours.    Meanwhile,  the  So- 
viet Government  reveals  only  the  barest  informa- 
tion about  Itself.    It  refuses  to  jjublish  statistics 
on  almost  all  aspects  of  Soviet  life;  what  it  does 
reveal  is  vague  and  often  meaningless. 

These  various  measures  are  designed  to  block 
the  world  from  seeing  Soviet  life  as  it  really  is. 
Meanwhile,  the  Soviet  Union  through  its  own 
propaganda  activities  and  those  of  Its  forei-n 
Communist  and  fellow-traveling  supporters  seeks 
in  an  unending  campaign,  to  portray  Soviet  real- 
ity in  glowing  terms  and  at  the  same  time  to  keen 
up  a  constant  and  vigorous  exposure  of  unsatis- 
factory conditions  in  non-Communist  countries 
I  he   immense   scope   of   Moscow's    preventive 
measures  and  the  intensity  of  its  propaganda  ef- 
forts^ provide  striking  evidence  of  how  touchy 
the  Soviet  leaders  are  where  foreign  scrutiny  is 
concerned.    One  of  the  few  times  that  the  worth 
of  an  individual  is  recognized  by  the  Soviet  Gov- 
ernment IS  when  he  flees  the  country,  as  has  been 
demonstrated  by  Soviet  willingness  to  accept   he 
risks  involved  in  murdering  or  kidnaping  es- 

544 


capees.  The  Soviet  Consul  General  in  New  York 
tor  example,  attempted  in  1948  the  kidnapino-  oi 
TT  o  o  ?>*  "^'''A?/'^  teacher  unwilling  to  return  to'^the 
U.b.h.K  I  he  brutal  abduction  in  Berlin  last 
summer  of  Dr.  Walter  Linse  by  East  German 
authorities '  was  a  sharp  reminder" that  kidnapino-s 
have  become  an  almost  routine  Communist  prac- 
tice along  the  Soviet  frontiers  of  Germany  and 
Austria.  By  their  repeated  evasion  of  requests 
tor  help  in  recovering  this  eminent  member  of  the 
Committee  of  Free  Jurists,  the  Soviet  authorities 
only  show  their  fear  of  permitting  free  men  to 
stay  free.  Such  incidents  as  the  Linse  case  throw 
light  on  Communist  unwillingness  to  allow  pris- 
oners of  war  a  freedom  of  choice  with  regard  to 
repatriation.  '^ 

From  the  Kremlin's  point  of  view.  Communist 
troops  captured  in  the  course  of  their  imperialist 
adventures  cannot  be  pennitted  to  choose  whether 
to  return  home  or  to  stay  outside  the  Iron  Curtain, 
for  some  of  them  might  choose  freedom.    But  the 
same  Communist  logic  requires  the  Kremlin  to 
deny  to  foreign  soldiers  and  civilians  alike  held 
captive  m  the  Soviet  Empire  the  right  to  go  home. 
Among  these,  as  we  have  heard,  are  3,000  Greek 
soldiers  and  many  thousand  Greek  children,  to- 
gether with  many  thousands  of  Austrians,  and 
even  thousands  of  satellite  nationals.     In  addi- 
tion, we  have  reports  of  63,000  Italians  and  over 
300,000  Japanese.     There  are  well  substantiated 
reports  of  at  least  98,000  German  soldiers  and 
(50,000  German  civilians  in  the  Soviet  Union; 
8,243  German  civilians  held  captive  in  Czecho- 
slovakia; and  11,550  German  civilians  in  Poland 
3,240  of  whom  are  children  far  from  home  and 
family.     All  of  these  people,  except  for  those 
mercitully  dead,  are  regarded  by  the  Kremlin  as 
a  permanent  increment  to  the  imprisoned  millions 
of  the  Soviet  Empire.    These  are  facts,  gentlemen. 
The  Kremlin  cannot  admit  that  any  person 
native  or  foreign,  would,  if  given  the  choice,  select 
freedom  as  against  Soviet  tyranny.     Thus  it  is 
that  the  Kremlin  charges  "aggression"  when  aid 
IS  given  to  Soviet  and  satellite  citizens  who  have 
chosen  freedom  and  pierced  the  Iron  Curtain. 
Thus  It  IS  that  the  Kremlin  must  launch  purges 
must  fabricate  tales  of  subversion,  and  must  stage 
"show"  trials  about  "defectors"  and  "traitors" 
in  order  to  account  for  those  who  choose  freedom, 
or  merely  in  order  to  liquidate  those  pitiful  servi- 
tors of  tyranny,  like  Slansky,  who  have  fallen 
into  disfavor. 

Mr.  Chairman,  I  do  not  for  the  time  being  pro- 
pose to  dwell  on  that  special  feature  of  Soviet 
tyranny— the  persecution  of  Christians,  Moslems, 
and  Jews— which  adds  further  impetus  to  the 
flow  of  escapees  from  the  Soviet  orbit. 

Nor,  Mr.  Chairman,  do  I  propose  to  speak  in 
detail  about  Soviet  persecution  of  non-Eussian 

oj'TotTo''"'  ^2^2™^  °^  ^'■-  ^'°^«'^  kidnaping,  see  ibid.,  Nov. 
^4,  1952,  p.  823. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


ethnic  groups.  There  are,  however,  two  aspects 
of  Soviet  ethnic  persecution  that  I  thnik  it  ap- 
propriate to  refer  to  at  the  present  time. 

Soviet  Ethnic  Persecution 

The  full  facts  about  the  first  of  these  were  docu- 
mented only  within  the  past  year  although  the 
event  took  place  in  Poland  at  the  outset  ot  World 
War  II  This  event  was  the  Katyn  massacre  in 
which  more  than  4,000  Polish  army  officers— the 
flower  of  the  Polish  nation— were  ruthlessly 
slaughtered. 

These  gallant  Polish  officers  had  committed  two 
offenses  which  led  to  their  death:  The  first  was 
the  defense  of  their  homeland  against  the  Soviet 
invasion  of  Poland  in  1939 ;  the  second  was  falling 
captive  to  the  advancing  Red  army.     Withm  a  few 
months  after  their  capture  sudden  silence  fell  and 
their    fate   was   unknown   until,    in    1943,    Nazi 
Germany  proclaimed  to  the  world  the  discovery  of 
the  bodies  of  thousands  of  Poles— lying  in  mass 
graves  and  shot  through  the  back  of  the  head— m 
Katyn  Forest  near  Smolensk  in  the  Soviet  Union. 
To  a  world  familiar  with  Nazi  atrocities  and 
with  the  Nazi  technique  of  attacking  others  for 
their  own  crimes,  credence  was  not  easily  put  in 
Nazi  charges  that  the  Katyn  massacre  was  the 
handiwork  of  Soviet  agents.     The  crime  was  typi- 
cal of  the  Hitlerite  pattern,  so  that  at  first  it  was 
uncertain  whether  those  who  died  at  Katyn  were 
not  but  added  names  on  the  endless  roster  of  the 
victims  of  Nazi  tyranny. 

But  the  lingering  doubts  as  to  the  real  facts 
provoked  demands  for  fresh  inquiry.  This  was 
particularly  true  here  in  the  United  States  where 
many  millions  of  citizens  of  Polish  ancestry  felt  a 
deep  sense  of  personal  identification  with  those 
killed  at  Katyn.  And  so  it  was  that  in  1951  the 
House  of  Representatives  of  the  U.S.  Congress 
provided  for  the  establishment  of  a  select  commit- 
tee to  conduct  an  investigation  and  study  of  the 
facts,  evidence,  and  circumstances  of  the  Katyn 
massacre. 

I  will  not  attempt  to  detail  here  the  gruesome 
facts  disclosed  by  the  select  committee.  These 
facts  are  now  known  to  each  government  repre- 
sented here,  since  the  findings  of  the  select  com- 
mittee were  circulated  to  each  permanent  repre- 
sentative.' Suffice  it  to  say  that  the  select  com- 
mittee's investigation  disclosed  that  responsibility 
for  the  massacre  lay  with  the  Soviet  Government  s 
infamous  Nkvd.  The  committee's  findings  are  ot 
direct  and  deep  concern  to  all  states  pledged  to  the 
furtherance  of  Charter  principles.  The  people  ot 
the  United  Nations  will  measure  these  facts  against 
their  determination,  expressed  in  the  Preamble  ot 
the  Charter,  "to  reaffirm  faith  in  fundamental 
human  rights,  in  the  dignity  and  worth  of  the 
human  person." 

Mr.  Chairman,  another  aspect  of  Soviet  tyranny 

•/6i(i.,  Feb.  23,  1953,  p.  322. 
April   13,   7953 


over  non-Russian  groups  is  illustrated  by  Soviet 
colonial  practices  in  Soviet  Central  Asia.     Mos- 
cow's haste  to  exploit  as  well  as  consolidate  its  grip 
on  the  vast  wealth  of  this  region  has  meant  the 
influx  of  thousands  of  Slav  colonists  to  a  point 
where,  in  some  areas,  they  outnumber  Uie  local 
population.     And  while  an  apparent  effort  has 
been  made  to  give  prestige  positions  to  selected 
local  representatives,  the  ruling  managers  and 
the  white  collar  class  remain  predominantly  Slav 
For  example,  the  percentage  of  natives  employed 
in  some  eight  local  ministries  of  food  and  industry 
in  Kazakhstan  in  1948  varied  from  2  to  a  maxi- 
mum of  14  percent.     In  Kirghistan,  Uzbehistan, 
and  Tadzhikistan  a  loss  of  interest  in  industrial 
positions  has  been  reported  by  the  Soviet  press  due 
to  the  lack  of  opportunity  for  advancement. 

Only  recently,  I  read  an  article  by  Dr.  Riaz  All 
Shah   entitled   "Islam   is   Dying   in   the    Soviet 
Union."    Dr.  Riaz  is  the  distinguished  Pakistani 
tuberculosis  specialist  and  head  of  the  Punjab 
Medical  Association  who  visited  South  Central 
Asia  last  spring  on  the  invitation  of  the  Soviet 
Government.    In  Tashkent,  he  reports  "the  better 
dressed  men,  women  and  children  were  usually 
Western  Russians.    Although  there  were  a  num- 
ber of  Uzbeks  in  the  governmental  posts,  the  Rus- 
sians   outnumbered    them   by    a    wide    margin. 
Regarding  medical  training  in  Tashkent,  Riaz 
said :  "In  the  morning  I  visited  the  medical  col- 
leo-e  and  hospital.    Sixty  percent  of  the  students 
and  the  majority  of  the  staff  were  Western  Rus- 
sians "    In  Alma  Ata,  the  capital  of  Kazakhstan, 
S.S.R.,  he  found  that  60  percent  of  the  students 
and  60  percent  of  the  persons  in  responsible  ]obs 
were  Western  Russians  who  had  settled  there. 
And  here  again  he  observed  that  the  better  dressed 
and  fed  children  and  adults  were,  as  a  rule,  West- 
ern Russians.  . 

When  we  hear  reports  about  the  immense  Rus- 
sian mission  in  Peiping  and  the  way  in  which 
subjects  of  the  Soviet  Union  are  infiltrating  in 
all  the  Chinese  Communist  bureaus,  we  wonder 
how  long  it  will  be  before  there,  too,  all  the  best 
jobs  are  taken  by  the  foreign  Russian  invader, 
leaving  the  Chinese  to  a  fate  which  can  only  equal 
that  of  the  earliest  days  of  colonialism. 

Mr.  Chairman,  within  this  brief  space  I  have 
tried  to  outline  the  skeleton  of  Soviet  tyranny 
in  order  that  we  may  best  comprehend  the  forces 
which  impel  thousands  of  escapees  to  leave  their 
homes  and  risk  their  lives  in  order  to  reach  free- 
dom beyond  the  Iron  Curtain. 

We  may  well  ask  how  long  the  men  in  the  Krem- 
lin propose  to  perpetuate  this  vast  and  systema- 
tized oppression.  We  seek  no  hasty  answer,  for 
the  question  is  momentous.  But  the  world  de- 
serves a  reply.  Perhaps  Mr.  Vyshinsky,  when 
he  returns  to  our  midst,  can  bring  new  word  from 
the  Kremlin. 

In  addition,  Mr.  Chairman,  let  me,  on  behalf  of 
my  fellow  countrymen,  ask  the  Soviet  delegation 

545 


certain  specific  questions:  What  plans  does  the 
Kremlin's  Czechoslovak  puppet  have  for  William 
Oatis.  a  courageous  American  newspaperman  who 
still  languishes  in  prison? 

Further,  Mr.  Chairman,  on  behalf  of  my  fellow- 
countrymen,  let  me  ask  the  Soviet  delegation 
whether  it  knows  what  fate  the  Peiping  regime  has 
in  store  for  the  hundred-odd  Americans  in  Com- 
munist China?  This  too  is  a  solemn  question,  for 
the  U.S.  Government  is  informed  that  5  of  these 
Americans  have  already  died  as  the  result  of  mal- 
treatment by  the  Peiping  regime.  At  least  28  of 
the  Americans  in  Communist  China  are  im- 
prisoned, 4  more  are  under  house  arrest,  and  on 
March  21  of  this  year,  3  more  Americans  were 
abducted  by  Chinese  Communists  from  a  yacht  off 
Hongkong. 

Mr.  Chairman,  these  matters  are  of  profound 
and  tragic  importance  to  the  people  of  the  United 
States.    We  would  like  answers  to  these  questions. 

Mr.  Chairman,  I  now  wish  to  direct  my  atten- 
tion to  the  draft  resolution  which  is  before  us. 

For  the  question  before  this  Assembly  is  not  the 
catalog  of  gossip  and  libel  presented  by  Mr.  David, 
Mr.  Gromyko,  and  their  friends.  The  parliamen- 
tary question,  and  the  essential  question,  which 
this  Assembly  must  decide  is  whether  the  United 
States,  by  assisting  escapees  from  the  "people's 
democracies"  is,  and  I  quote  from  paragraph  one 
of  the  draft  resolution,  engaging  in  "acts  of  ag- 
gression" and  "interference  in  the  internal  affairs 
of  other  states." 

Aid  Can  Stop  When  Escapees  Stop  Coming 

I  submit,  Mr.  Chairman,  that  the  only  aspect 
of  the  escapee  program  which  merits  condemna- 
tion IS  the  fact  that  the  world  is  today  so  organized 
that  there  are  escapees.  The  free  peoples  of  the 
world  can  hardly  do  too  much  for  these  victims  of 
Soviet  tyranny. 

Our  aid  to  escapees  can  only  stop  when  escapees 
stop  coming— when  millions  of  men  and  women, 
now  trapped  behind  the  Iron  Curtain,  need  no 
longer  look  elsewhere  for  freedom.  A  problem 
like  this  is  not  solved  by  tightening  border  con- 
trols and  intensifying  purges.  When  national 
aspirations  are  subverted,  when  human  rights  are 
suppressed,  pressure  builds  up  to  the  boiling  point. 
One  outcome  of  this  pressure  is  a  flow  of  escapees. 
And  this  flow  will  not  stop  until  the  Soviet  leaders 
permit  peoples  under  their  sway  to  live  their  own 
lives  in  their  own  way. 

So  long  as  escapees  continue  to  come,  the  duty 
to  assist  them  is  a  matter  of  common  humanity 
for  the  United  States  and  the  rest  of  the  free 
world.  It  is  also  a  duty  imposed  on  us  by  the 
Charter.  For,  in  essence,  the  U.N.  Charter  is  a 
Charter  of  hope  and  freedom.  It  is  a  Charter  of 
emancipation  from  religious  and  civil  persecu- 
tion, from  poverty  and  disease,  and  from  the  even 
more  hideous  scourges  of  conquest  and  despotism. 


It  IS  a  magnet  drawing  vast  populations  whc 
see  in  It  the  expression  of  their  hope  to  live  their 
own  lives  in  well-being  and  freedom. 

Mr.  Chairman,  we  want  to  make  this  magnet 
irresistible,  strongly  charging  it  with  our  supijort 
and  strength. 

Our  mutual  security  program  will  stop  when 
the  threat  of  aggression— not  only  for  us,  but  for 
all  the  free  world— is  lifted.  The  United  States, 
like  all  the  free  world,  prefers  peaceful  settle- 
ments to  a  dangeous  and  burdensome  armaments 
race.  We  do  not  enjoy  that.  We  long  for  the 
day  of  honest  negotiations,  which  my  Government 
asked  for  m  this  Committee  last  week.  We  will 
meet  the  Soviet  Union  half-way  at  any  time. 

Progress  Toward  Universal 
Equal  Suffrage 

Statement  by  Mrs.  Lorena  B.  JJahn 
U.S.  Representative  on  the  Commission 
on  the  Status  of  Wom^n  ^ 

U.S./U.N.  press  release  dated  March  23 

We  meet  this  year  with  a  great  sense  of  achieve- 
ment because  the  General  Assembly  has  opened 
for  signature  the  Convention  on  the  Political 
Rights  of  Women  recommended  by  this  body  over 
the  last  3  years.  The  action  clauses  of  this  con- 
vention, which  provide  that  women  shall  vote  and 
hold  public  office  on  equal  terms  with  men,  with- 
out any  discrimination,  set  a  standard  for  legis- 
lation in  every  country  in  the  world.  During  dis- 
cussion of  the  need  for  this  convention,  the  point 
was  made  that  in  some  countries  proposals  to 
grant  suffrage  to  women  had  been  confused  by 
party  antagonism.  It  was  felt  that  a  convention 
proposed  by  the  United  Nations  could  be  con- 
sidered in  any  country  on  its  merits.  The  con- 
vention can  therefore  open  the  way  to  progress  in 
countries  which  have  not  yet  granted  women  the 
right  to  vote. 

Each  year  shows  progress.  Since  we  last  met, 
Lebanon,  Bolivia,  Greece,  Pakistan,  and  Mexico 
have  made  important  extensions  of  suffrage  to 
women.  The  grant  in  Lebanon  is  equal  and  com- 
plete, and  I  hope  the  representative  of  Lebanon 
in  this  Commission  will  tell  us  about  it.  Since 
Mrs.  Ledon  of  Mexico  is  also  here,  as  the  repre- 
sentative of  the  Inter-American  Commission  of 
Women,  perhaps  she  will  tell  us  of  the  new  grant 
there.  The  women  in  Bolivia  and  Greece  had 
previously  been  granted  the  right  to  vote  in  local 
elections,  and  the  new  grants  expand  their  rights 
to  cover  all  elections. 

The  Secretary-General's  memorandum,  docu- 
ment A/2145,  is  especially  impressive  this  year 
because  it  includes  the  date  on  which  women  were 
originally  granted  suffrage  in  each  country.    This 

'Made  before  the  U.N.  Commission  on  the  Status  of 
Women  on  Mar.  23. 


546 


Deparlmenf  of  State   Bulletin 


addition  has  involved  much  research,  evidenced 
by  the  detail  in  the  footnotes.  The  tine  quality 
of  this  work  deserves  commendation.  The  dates 
of  suffrage  grants  will  help  governments,  for 
they  show  how  long  women  have  exercised  the 
franchise  in  each  country  and  where  experience 
has  been  gained  which  may  be  applicable  to  their 
own  situation. 

I  have  only  one  suggestion  of  importance  in  re- 
gard to  this  memorandum.  Insofar  as  possible, 
the  United  States  would  like  to  see  the  various 
lists  as  complete  as  possible.  For  some  reason 
Spain  has  been  omitted,  and  also  Laos  and  Cam- 

^It'might  help  if  some  standard  list  were  used 
in  this  document,  possibly  the  members  of  the 
United  Nations  and  the  specialized  agencies,  in- 
formation on  the  laws  of  all  countries  can  usually 
be  obtained  from  authoritative  sources,  so  that 
it  should  not  be  necessary  to  send  out  special  in- 
quiries to  governments  on  this  matter. 

How  the  U.N.  Can  Help 

Because  one  of  our  objectives  has  been 
achieved— namely  a  convention  on  political 
rio-hts— this  is  a  good  time  to  take  stock  of  our 
situation  and  consider  what  we  need  to  do  m  the 
year  or  two  ahead.  There  are  today  still  more 
than  15  countries  in  which  women  lack  the  vote, 
and  almost  all  of  them  are  members  of  the  United 
Nations.  The  provision  of  equal  suffrage  m  some 
of  these  countries  will  involve  real  problems,  prob- 
lems of  education  and  customs  as  well  as  leader- 
ship There  are  various  ways  in  which  the  United 
Nations  may  be  able  to  help  these  governments, 
and  it  is  our  responsibility  to  think  through  their 
particular  needs  and  make  recommendations  on 
how  to  meet  them. 

One  possibility  of  aid  will  be  some  evaluation  of 
the  effect  of  progressive  grants.    The  Secretary- 
General's  memorandum  provides  some  interesting 
history  on  this  point.     In  some  of  the  countries 
where  women  voted  early,  such  as  New  Zealand, 
Australia,  and  the  United  States,  gains  were  made 
piecemeal— first  in  certain  states  and  provinces, 
and  then  pushed  on  from  these  geographical  sub- 
divisions toward  national  suffrage.    Some  suffrage 
crants  have  been  made  on  a  nationwide  basis,  but 
have  been  limited  at  the  beginning  to  local  elec- 
tions.    In  some  countries  women  have  been  sub- 
ject to  certain  educational  or  other  qualifications 
not  required  of  men.    My  immediate  observation 
is  that  where  suffrage  grants  were  made  first  m 
certain  sections  of  a  country,  women  have  even- 
tually achieved  rights  throughout  the  nation,     it 
also  seems  to  be  true  that  where  women  have  first 
been  granted  the  right  to  vote  in  local  elections, 
there  is  a  tendency  to  extend  this  right  to  include 
all  elections.     I  am  not  so  clear  of  the  effect  of 
distinctions  based  on  educational  achievements. 
An  analysis  by  the  Secretary-General  of  these 

April   13,   7953 


variations  in  procedure  might  help  women  and 
their  governments  decide  whether  limited  grants 
are  useful,  and  if  so  on  what  basis.  We  would  like 
to  see  such  an  analysis  prepared  by  the  Secretary- 
General  for  our  study  next  year. 

There  is  another  aspect  of  suffrage  which  does 
not  show  in  these  memorandums  but  on  which  we 
should  have  information,  especially  if  the  grants 
of  suffrage  are  on  a  restricted  basis.  That  is 
whether  elections  have  been  held  in  which  women 
have  actually  voted.  In  some  countries  no  elec- 
tions may  have  been  held  since  the  grant  was  made, 
so  that  in  actual  fact  women  may  never  have  gone 
to  the  polls.  If  possible,  I  hope  the  Secretary- 
General  next  year  can  give  us  some  reassurance 
along  this  line. 

Another  way  in  which  the  United  Nations  may 
be  helpful  to  governments  is  in  developing  leader- 
ship. We  speak  often  of  the  right  of  suffrage 
being  granted  to  women,  but  there  would  be  little 
value  in  such  a  grant  unless  the  women  of  that 
country  are  interested  in  public  questions. 

The  U.N.  fellowship  program  has  included  a 
number  of  women,  and  I  believe  some  of  them  have 
worked  in  the  field  of  public  administration. 
There  may  be  other  programs  in  the  United 
Nations  or  in  the  specialized  agencies  which  can 
be  used  to  help  the  leaders  in  a  country  where 
women  lack  suffrage  or  have  just  achieved  it.  We 
have  not  been  well  informed  in  this  Commission 
as  to  what  possibilities  there  are.  A  statement 
from  the  Secretary-General  next  year  would  help 
us  evaluate  opportunities  and  also  help  govern- 
ments take  advantage  of  them.  Such  opportuni- 
ties may  be  useful  to  women  in  trust  and  non-self- 
governing  territories  as  well  as  to  women  in  other 
countries.  Regional  conferences  similar  to  the 
seminar  on  the  status  of  women  conducted  recently 
by  UNESCO  in  India  may  also  be  a  source  of 
leadership  training. 

Now  I  want  to  talk  about  what  we  should  be 
doing  with  our  good  ideas.  This  Commission  has 
had  a  great  many  good  ideas,  especially  in  regard 
to  political  rights  for  women,  and  we  have  done 
a  great  many  different  things  with  them.  We 
now  have  the  convention,  and  can  center  our 
thinking  on  how  governments  can  implement  the 
standards  set  forth  in  the  convention  as  rapidly 
as  possible  and  with  the  greatest  possible  effect. 
There  is  considerable  danger,  it  seems  to  us,  that 
if  we  scatter  our  recommendations  too  widely,  or 
put  them  forward  in  unrelated  documents,  gov- 
ernments will  not  find  it  easy  to  locate  the  sug- 
gestions they  need  and  will  feel  confused  as  to 
what  we  have  recommended. 

Two  years  ago  when  the  Ilo  adopted  the  con- 
vention on  equal  remuneration  for  men  and  wom- 
en workers  for  work  of  equal  value — known  as 
the  equal  pay  convention — it  also  adopted  a  for- 
mal recommendation  to  governments  on  how  to 
promote  the  principle  of  equal  pay.  This  con- 
tained a  series  of  specific  suggestions  as  to  de- 

547 


veloping  legislation  and  standards  and  also  on 
evaluating  results.    We  believe  that  something  of 
the  same  sort  would  be  useful  in  regard  to  the 
Convention  on  Political  Rights  of  Women,  and 
that  we  miglit  ask  the  Secretary-General  to  gather 
together  during  the  coming  year  the  various  sug- 
gestions that  might  go  into  it.    These  suggestions 
might  come  from  different  sources,  and  be  direc- 
ted, at  least  at  the  start,  to  governments  where 
equal  suffrage  has  not  yet  been  attained.     Each 
of  us  can  probably  contribute  some  ideas  for  a 
recommendation  of  this  sort,  and  our  non-govern- 
mental organization  consultants  will  alsoliave  a 
great  deal  to  offer.     The  Secretary-General  can 
also  draw  on  earlier  actions  in  this  Commission, 
such  as  the  pamphlet  on  Political  Education  of 
Women  which  has  proved  useful  in  a  number  of 
countries.     The  recommendation  should  be  very 
simple  and  practical,  and  realistic,  a  how-to-do-it 
plan  to  supplement  the  statement  of  principles 
in  the  convention. 

"Ground  Floor"  Approach  Urged 

For  instance,  some  governments  may  feel  that 
they  cannot  yet  win  parliamentary  approval  of 
votes  for  women,  but  believe  that  in  a  few  years 
the  parliament  will  be  ready  to  give  its  assent. 
We  might  recommend  that  in  such  countries  any 
new  laws  or  constitutions  adopted  avoid  limiting 
suffrage  specifically  to  male  citizens,  and  instead 
provide  that  Parliaments  have  the  power  to  define 
the  qualifications  for  voters.  This  would  make 
it  unnecessary  to  go  through  the  long  process  of 
constitutional  revision  when  the  country  is  ready 
to  extend  the  vote  to  women.  The  new  constitu- 
tion of  Libya  follows  this  plan.  A  recommen- 
dation along  this  line  might  have  been  helpful 
during  the  drafting  of  the  new  constitution  of 
Eritrea.  The  Eritrean  constitution  provides  suf- 
frage rights  only  for  men,  so  that  will  have  to 
be  amended  when  Eritrean  women  gain  the 
franchise. 

Another  recommendation  that  might  help  a 
great  deal  in  countries  where  the  institutions  of 
self-government  are  just  beginning  to  take  shape, 
is  to  take  women  in  at  the  beginning  and  avoid  any 
tradition  of  segregation  of  women  and  their  in- 
terests. This  recommendation  may  be  especially 
useful  in  the  trust  and  non-self-governing  terri- 
tories, but  it  applies  to  new  activities  in  all  gov- 
ernments, developed  as  well  as  less  developed. 

If  there  is  any  one  lesson  we  can  draw  from 
experience,  I  suppose  it  is  that  it  is  never  too 
early  to  begin.  Once  an  organization  is  set  up 
with  the  women  on  the  outside,  even  a  department 
of  government,  it  is  difficult  for  women  to  be  ac- 
cepted as  full  participants.  Much  trouble  can  be 
avoided  if,  as  each  institution  of  government  is 
developed,  schools,  health  services,  local  police, 
political  parties,  town  or  tribal  councils,  or  what- 
ever it  may  be,  women  are  brought  in  on  the 
administration  of  such  projects  from  the  start, 

548 


as  members  of  school  boards,  public-health  direc- 
tors, policewomen,  party  workers  and  committee 
chairmen,  and  also  in  professional  and  staff  posi- 
tions. If  It  is  found  women  have  not  had  a  chance 
to  tram  for  such  jobs,  they  can  be  given  special 
opportunities  to  catch  up  on  essentials. 

International  Materials  Conference 

Distribution  of  Molybdenum 

Tlie  Tungsten-Molybdenum  Committee  of  the 
International  Materials  Conference  announced 
on  March  23  its  recommended  distribution  of 
molybdenum  for  the  second  calendar  quarter  of 
1953.1  The  Governments  of  all  13  countries  repre- ' 
sented  on  the  Committee  have  accepted  the  recom- 
mendations. These  countries  are  Australia,  Bo- 
livia, Brazil,  Canada,  Chile,  France,  the  Federal 
Kepubhc  of  Germany,  Japan,  Portugal,  Spain, 
bweden,  the  United  Kingdom,  and  the  United 
States. 

Molybdenum  and  nickel  remain  now  the  only 
commodities  subject  to  distribution  by  the  Inter- 
national Materials  Conference. 

In  accepting  the  recommendations,  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  United  States  restated  the  condition 
that  domestic  users  of  molybdenum  in  the  United 
States  should  be  authorized  to  purchase  the  quan- 
tity of  such  material  allocated  to  other  countries 
participating  in  the  International  Materials  Con- 
ference and  not  used  by  any  such  participating 
country.  In  view  of  this,  the  Committee  agreed 
to  continue  the  arrangements  made  whereby  such 
domestic  users  in  the  United  States  or  other  coun- 
tries would  have  the  opportunity  to  purchase 
molybdenum  allocated  to  other  countries  par- 
ticipating in  the  International  Materials  Con- 
ference but  not  used  by  any  such  participating 
country. 

The  total  free  world  production  of  molybdenum 
m  the  first  quarter  of  19.53  is  estimated  by  the 
Committee  at  6,448.25  metric  tons  metal  content 
Total  availabilities  exceed  this  amount  by  a  carry- 
over of  30  tons  from  1952  availabilities.    The  esti- 
niated  production  for  the  second  quarter  is  at 
about  the  same  level  as  that  for  the  first  quarter  of 
1953,  which  was  over  75  percent  above  the  rate 
of  production  in  1950.     On  the  other  hand,  the 
defense  and  stockpiling  requirements  of  the  free     1 
world  are  still  in  excess  of  the  estimated  produc-     I 
tion.  ; 

The  plan  recommended  provides  for  the  distri- 
bution of  the  whole  free  world  production  of 
molybdenum,  both  in  the  form  of  ores  and  concen- 
trates and  primary  products.  Primary  product*  ' 
are  defined,  as  m  the  case  of  previous  distribu- 
tions by  the  Committee,  as  ferro-molybdenum, 
molybdic  acid  and  molvbdenum  salts,  including 
calcium-molybdate  and  molybdic  oxide.    Roasted 

'  For  distribution  plan,  .see  Imc  press  release  of  Mar.  23. 
Deparfmenf  of  Sfafe   Bulletin 


molybdenum  concentrates   are  regarded  by  the 
Committee  as  being  included  in  ores  and  concen- 
j  trates,  as  in  the  case  of  previous  distribution  plans. 
i     In  framing  the  recommended  plan  of  distribu- 
I  tion,  the  needs  of  all  countries,  whether  members 
*  of  the  Committee  or  not,  were  carefully  consid- 
ered.   The  distribution  plan  is  now  transmitted 
to  all  governments,  including  those  not  repre- 
sented on  the  Committee,  wherever  the  countries 
concerned  are  interested  in  the  export  or  import 
of  molybdenum  in  the  form  of  ores  and  concen- 
trates or  primary  products.    All  Governments  are 
being  requested  to  carry  out  the  plan  of  distri- 
bution recommended. 

Copper-Zinc-Lead  Committee  To  Be  Terminated 

The  Copper-Zinc-Lead  Committee  of  the  Inter- 
national Materials  Conference  announced  on 
March  20  that  its  members  have  agreed  to  the  dis- 
solution of  the  Committee  on  March  31,  1953. 
This  announcement  follows  the  Committee's  re- 
cent decision  to  discontinue  international  alloca- 
tion of  primary  copper  on  February  15,^  and 
reflects  the  continuing  improvement  in  the  sup- 
ply/demand position  of  copper  in  the  free  world. 

The  Copper-Zinc-Lead  Committee,  which  was 
the  first  of  the  commodity  groups  to  be  established 
within  the  framework  of  the  Imc,  met  for  the  first 
time  on  February  26, 1951.  The  Committee's  rec- 
ommendations for  the  first  international  alloca- 
tions of  copper  and  zinc  were  accepted  by  its  mem- 
ber governments  for  the  fourth  quarter  of  1D51 
and  continued,  for  zinc,  until  the  end  of  May 
1952,  and  for  copper,  until  the  middle  of  Febru- 
ary 1953.  Although  the  supply/demand  position 
of  lead  was  kept  under  review  the  Committee  did 
not,  at  any  time,  find  it  necessary  to  recommend 
international  allocation  of  that  metal. 

The  following  countries  were  represented  on 
the  Committee :  Australia,  Belgium  (representing 
Benelux) ,  Canada,  Chile,  France,  the  Federal  Re- 
public of  Germany,  Italy,  Mexico,  Norway,  Peru, 
the  United  Kingdom,  and  the  United  States. 

Distribution  of  Primary  Nicltel 

The  Manganese-Nickel-Cobalt  Committee  of 
the  International  Materials  Conference  on  March 
26  announced  acceptance  by  13  of  its  14  member 
governments  of  a  second  quarter  1953  plan  of  dis- 
tribution^ for  primary  nickel  and  oxides.  The 
reply  of  the  Government  of  Belgium  is  still 
awaited.  The  recommended  plan  has  been  for- 
warded to  all  interested  governments  for  imple- 
mentation. 

In  this  plan,  as  in  those  for  the  last  two  quarters 
of  1952  and  the  first  quarter  of  1953,  provision 
has  been  made  whereby  any  nickel  allocated  to 
countries  participating  in  the  distribution,  but 
not  used  by  them,  will  become  available  for  pur- 

=  Bulletin  of  Feb.  23,  1953,  p.  303. 

'  For  distribution  plan,  .see  Imc  press  release  of  Mar.  ib. 

April   13,    1953 


chase  by  consumers  in  the  United  States  and  in 
other  countries. 

The  total  production  estimate  of  primary 
nickel  and  oxides  for  the  second  quarter  of  1953, 
excluding  Japanese  production,  shows  an  increase 
of  about  200  metric  tons  nickel  content  over  the 
figure  for  the  first  quarter,  or  less  than  one-half 
of  one  percent.  About  500  tons  of  nickel  oxides 
(in  nickel  content),  produced  in  the  U.S.  Nicaro 
plant  in  Cuba  during  the  second  half  of  1952  m 
excess  of  the  original  estimate  for  that  period, 
has  been  included  in  the  second  quarter  distribu- 
tion. The  total  quantity  distributed  in  the  recom- 
mended plan  amounts  to  37,800  metric  tons  nickel 
content. 

An  amount  of  approximately  500  metric  tons 
of  Japanese  nickel  available  for  export  is  not 
included  in  the  plan  of  distribution  because  the 
Committee  so  far  has  not  been  able  to  determine 
to  what  extent  importing  countries  would  pur- 
chase this  high-priced  nickel. 

The  countries  represented  on  the  Manganese- 
Nickel-Cobalt  Committee  are  Belgium  (for  Bene- 
lux), Brazil,  Canada,  Cuba,  France,  the  Federal 
Republic  of  Germany,  India,  Italy,  Japan,  Nor- 
way. Sweden,  the  Union  of  South  Africa,  the 
United  Kingdom,  and  the  United  States. 


U.S.  Delegations 

to  International  Conferences 

Commission  on  Human  Rights 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  March 
31  (press  release  165)  that  Mrs.  Oswald  B.  Lord, 
U  S  representative  on  the  U.N.  Commission  on 
Human  Rights,  will  attend  the  ninth  session  of  the 
Commission,  scheduled  to  be  held  at  Geneva,  April 
6-June  1,  1953.  In  addition  to  Mrs.  Lord,  the 
U.S.  delegation  to  this  meeting  will  be  as  follows: 

Principal  Adviser 

PhlUp    Halpern,    Associate    Justice    of    the    Appellate 

Division  of  the  Supreme  Court  of  New  York  State, 

Third  Department 

Advisers 

James  F.  Green,  Deputy  Director,  Office  of  U.N.  Economic 

and  Social  Affairs,  Department  of  St;ite 
Warren  E.  Hewitt.  Office  of  the  Assistant  Lesal  Adviser 

for  U.N.  Affairs,  Department  of  State 

The  Commission  on  Human  Rights,  which  is 
one  of  the  permanent  functional  commissions  of 
the  U.N.  Economic  and  Social  Council,  was  estab- 
lished in  1946  to  advise  and  assist  the  Council  on 
all  matters  relating  to  the  obligation  assumed  by 
the  members  of  the  United  Nations  to  cooperate 
with  the  United  Nations  toward  the  achievement 
of  universal  respect  for,  and  observance  of,  human 
rights  and  fundamental  freedoms  for  all,  without 
distinction  as  to  race,  sex,  language,  or  religion. 

549 


Eighteen  governments,  elected  by  the  Council, 
comprise  the  mcmbersliip  of  the  Commission.  Its 
eighth  session  was  held  at  New  York,  April  14- 
June  6,  1952. 


Economic  and  Social  Council 

Tlie  Department  of  State  announced  on  March 
31  (press  release  164)  that  at  the  fifteenth  session 
of  the  Economic  and  Social  Council  of  the  United 
Nations,  which  opened  at  New  York  on  that  date, 
the  U.S.  Government  would  be  represented  by  the 
following  delegation : 

U.S.  representative 

James  J  Wadsworth,  Jr.,  Deputy  U.S.  Representative  to 
the  United  Nations 

Deputy  D.S.  representative 

Walter  M.  Kotsclinig,  Director,  Office  of  United  Nations 
Economic  and  Social  Affairs,  Department  of  State 

Advisers 

Philip  Arnow,  Associate  Director,  Office  of  International 
Labor  Affairs,  Department  of  Labor 

Kathleen   Bell,   Office   of  United  Nations  Economic  and 
Social  Affairs,  Department  of  State 

Isaiah  Frank,  Office  of  Economic  Defense  and  Trade 
Policy,  Department  of  State 

Katherine  G.  Heath,  Office  of  International  Relations 
rederal  Security  Agency 

Forrest  Murden,  U.S.  Mission  to  the  United  Nations,  New 
York,  N.  Y. 

Robert  B  Schwenger,  Chief,  Regional  Investigations 
Blanch,  Office  of  Foreign  Agricultural  Relations.  De- 
partment of  Agriculture 

William  J.  Stibravy,  Special  Assistant  to  the  Director 
Office  of  Financial  and  Development  Policy  Depart- 
ment of  State 

William  H.  Wynne,  Office  of  International  Finance  De- 
partment of  the  Treasury  ' 

Recent  developments  in  the  world  economic  sit- 
uation will  be  discussed  at  the  forthcoming  ses- 
sion in  the  light  of  comprehensive  reports  which 
have  been  prepared  by  the  U.N.  Secretariat,  as 
well  as  by  the  Secretariats  of  the  Economic  Com- 
mission for  Asia  and  the  Far  East,  Economic 
Commission  for  Europe,  and  Economic  Commis- 
sion for  Latin  America.  The  Council  will  also 
review  (1)  the  annual  report  by  the  International 
Monetary  Fund  concerning  its  activities  since  the 
previous  session;  (2)  the  annual  report  of  the 
International  Bank  for  Reconstruction  and  De- 
velopment on  its  financial  activities  and  resources; 
(3)  a  report  by  the  Council's  Technical  Assist- 
ance Committee  on  the  program  of  technical  as- 
sistance; and  (4)  reports  by  several  of  its 
functional  commissions,  including  the  Transport 
and  Communications  Commission,  Statistical 
Commission,  and  Population  Commission. 

Provision  is  also  made  in  the  29-item  agenda 
of  the  session  for  the  consideration  of  several 
topics  which  have  been  the  subject  of  special  study 
pursuant  to  resolutions  adopted  by  the  Council 

550 


or  the  Oeneral  xV.ssembly  of  the  United  Nations. 
Among  those  topics  are  measures  for  the  economic 
develojjinent  of  underdeveloped  countries;  the  in- 
ternational action  that  may  be  taken  to  promote 
an  integrated  approach  to  and  a  systematic  anal- 
ysis of  the  problems  of  conservation  and  use  of 
nonagricultural  resources;  the  steps  which  may 
be  taken  by  the  United  Nations  and  its  specialized 
agencies  to  develop  international  respect  for  the 
right  of  peoples  to  self-determination;  measures 
that  can  be  taken  by  the  United  Nations  to  help 
governments  eliminate  slavery,  the  slave  trade, 
and  servitude  similar  to  slavery;  and  allegations 
regarding  infringements  of  trade-union  rights. 

The  fourteenth  session  of  the  Council  was  held 
at  New  York  May  20-August  1, 1952.  Its  18  mem- 
bers are  Argentina,  Australia,  Belgium,  China, 
Cuba,  Egypt,  France,  India,  the  Philippines,  Po- 
land, Sweden,  Turkey,  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist 
Republics,  United  Kingdom,  the  United  States, 
Uruguay,  Venezuela,  and  Yugoslavia. 

U.N.  Commission  on  Narcotic  Drugs 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  March 
30  (press  release  162)  that  Hari-y  J.  Anslinger, 
Commissioner  of  Narcotics,  Department  of  the 
Treasury,  and  U.S.  representative  on  the  U.N. 
Commission  on  Narcotic  Drugs,  will  attend  the 
eighth  session  of  that  Commission  which  will  con- 
vene at  New  York  on  March  30. 

George  A.  Morlock,  Office  of  U.N.  Economic 
and  Social  Affairs,  Department  of  State,  and 
Alfred  L.  Tennyson,  Chief  Counsel,  Bureau  of 
Narcotics,  Department  of  the  Treasury,  will  serve 
as  advisers  to  the  U.S.  representative. 

The  Commission  on  Narcotic  Drugs  was  fop 
mally  established  on  a  permanent  basis  in  1946. 
It  assists  the  Economic  and  Social  Council  of  the 
United  Nations  in  exercising  supervision  over  the 
application  of  international  conventions  and 
agreements  dealing  with  narcotic  drugs;  carries 
out  such  of  the  functions  of  the  League  of  Nations 
Advisory  Committee  on  Traffic  in  Opium  and 
Other  Dangerous  Drugs  as  the  Economic  and 
Social  Council  has  assumed  and  continued;  ad- 
vises the  Council  on  all  questions  concerning  the 
control  of  narcotic  drugs,  and  prepares  draft 
international  conventions  on  the  subject;  and  con- 
siders changes  required  in  the  existing  machinery 
for  the  international  control  of  narcotics. 

The  provisional  agenda  of  the  eighth  session 
contains  29  items  for  consideration  by  the  Com- 
mission. The  items  relate  to  such  matters  as  (1) 
the  proposed  single  convention  on  narcotic  drugs; 
(2)  cooperation  between  the  United  Nations  and 
the  Universal  Postal  Union  in  respect  to  the  con- 
trol of  narcotic  drugs;  (3)  the  abolition  of  opium 
smoking  in  the  Far  East;  (4)  annual  reports  made 
by  governments  pursuant  to  article  21  of  the  con- 
vention of  July  13, 1931,  for  limiting  the  manufac- 
ture and  regulating  the  distribution  of  narcotic 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


drugs,  as  amended  by  a  protocol  signed  at  Lake 
Success  December  11,  1946;  (5)  illicit  traffic,  in 
whicli  connection  the  Commission  is  to  consider 
both  summaries  of  reports  on  illicit  transactions 
and  seizures  made  pursuant  to  article  23  of  the 
1931  convention,  as  amended  by  the  1946  protocol, 
and  a  proposal  by  Burma  relating  to  the  coordina- 
tion of  the  efforts  of  certain  Far  Eastern  Govern- 
ments to  suppress  poppy  cultivation  and  the 
smuggling  of  opium ;  (6)  the  problem  of  synthetic 


drugs;  (7)  the  problem  of  Indian  hemp;  (8) 
scientific  research  on  narcotics;  and  (9)  the  list  of 
narcotic  drugs  under  international  control. 

The  seventh  session  of  the  Commission  was  held 
at  New  York  April  15-May  9, 1952.  The  15  mem- 
bei-s  of  the  Commission  at  the  present  time  are 
Canada,  China,  Egypt,  France,  India,  Iran, 
Mexico,  the  Netherlands,  Pern,  Poland,  Turkey, 
Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics,  United  King- 
dom, the  United  States,  and  Yugoslavia. 


The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations 


[March  26-April  1] 

Security  Council 

At  a  closed  meeting  on  March  31,  the  Security 
Council  by  a  vote  of  10-0-1  adopted  a  proposal 
by  the  French  representative  recommending  to 
the  General  Assembly  that  Dag  Hammarskjold, 
Swedish  Minister  of  State,  be  appointed  U.N. 
Secretary-General.  This  recommendation  was 
transmitted  to  the  President  of  the  General  As- 
sembly, and  Ahmed  Bokliari  (Pakistan),  Presi- 
dent of  the  Security  Council,  sent  Mr.  Hammar- 
skjold a  cable  informing  him  of  the  recommenda- 
tion.   The  message  concluded: 

In  view  of  the  immense  importance  of  this  post,  more 
especially  at  tlie  pre.sent  time,  members  of  the  Security 
Council  express  the  earnest  hope  that  you  will  agree  to 
accept  the  appointment  if,  as  they  hope  and  believe,  it  is 
shortly  made  by  the  General  Assembly. 

In  a  statement  issued  later  that  day,  Trygve 
Lie,  retiring  Secretary-General,  said  of  the  recom- 
mendation : 

...  If  the  General  Assembly  approves  the  nomina- 
tion, which  the  Assembly  certainly  will  do,  I  shall  be  able 
to  lay  down  the  heavy  burdens  of  my  office  with  a  clear 
conscience,  knowing  that  a  very  able  man  with  sound 
political,  diplomatic,  and  administrative  experience  will 
take  over  and  carry  on.     .     .     . 

On  April  1  Mr.  Hammarskjold  announced  at 
Stockholm  that  he  had  sent  the  following  message 
to  Mr.  Bokhari : 

With  a  strong  feeling  of  personal  insufficiency,  I  hesi- 
tate to  accept  candidature  but  I  do  not  feel  that  I  could 
refuse  to  assume  the  task  imposed  on  me  should  the  As- 
sembly follow  the  recommendation  of  the  Security  Council 
by  which  I  feel  deeply  honoured. 


General  Assembly 

General  debate  on  the  personnel  policy  item 
opened  in  plenary  on  March  28.  Henry  Cabot 
Lodge,  Jr.  (U.S.)  underlined  the  necessity  of 
having  the  full  support  of  world  public  opinion 
in  order  to  have  the  United  Nations  as  an  effective- 
force.  He  also  pointed  out  that  public  opinion  in 
the  United  States  was  concerned  lest  the  United 
Nations  effectiveness  be  impaired  because  of  the- 
existence  of  a  serious  personnel  problem.  Mr. 
Lodge  indicated  that : 

The  U.S.  (Jovernment  does  not  believe  that  persons 
engaged  or  who,  based  on  their  past  and  present  record, 
seem  likely  to  engage  in  subversive  activities  against  any 
memi)er  .state  should  be  employed  in  an  international 
organization.  We  will  do  all  in  our  power  to  provide  the 
Secretary-General  with  the  information  necessary  to  en- 
able him  to  make  a  determination  on  this  matter.  This- 
does  not  constitute  nor  is  it  intended  to  constitute  dicta- 
tion to  the  Secretary-General  or  other  member  Govern- 
ments. It  is  a  service  to  the  United  Nations  in  the  inter- 
est of  maintaining  a  Secretariat  which  measures  up  to- 
standards  established  in  the  Charter  for  international 
civil  servants. 

It  seemed  clear  from  his  report  that  the  stand- 
ards the  Secretary-General  proposed  to  apply 
would  protect  staff  members  against  inadequately 
supported  or  unreliable  representations  from 
member  governments ;  consequently,  there  should 
be  no  doubt  as  to  the  continued  independence  of 
the  Secretariat  or  as  to  the  safeguarding  of  indi- 
vidual rights. 

Ambassador  Lodge  stated  that  the  U.S.  delega- 
tion believed  the  Assembly  should  take  no  actioa 
which  would  hinder  the  Secretary-General  in  deal- 
ing   with    the    existing   situation.     However,    a. 


April   13,   1953 


55  T 


further  discussion  of  this  question  might  be  under- 
taken at  the  next  session,  when  developments  of 
the  intervening  period  could  be  reviewed.  For 
these  reasons  the  United  States  would  vote  against 
any  text  which  postponed  further  action  on  per- 
sonnel questions  pending  the  proposed  study  by 
a  committee. 

The  resolution  introduced  jointly  by  the  United 
States,  United  Kingdom,  and  France  which  had 
the  effect  of  simply  taking  note  of  the  report  was 
amended  to  request  a  progress  report  on  the  de- 
velopment of  personnel  policy,  and  the  number  of 
its  sponsors  was  increased  to  13. 

Action  on  the  personnel  policy  item  was  com- 
pleted April  1  with  the  adoption  of  the  13-power 
resolution  by  a  vote  of  41-13  (Soviet  bloc,  India, 
Indonesia,  Burma,  Saudi  Arabia,  Iraq,  Syria)^. 
Under  the  approved  resolution,  the  Secretary- 
General  will  be  permitted  to  continue  to  conduct 
and  develop  his  policies  along  the  lines  contained 
in  his  report  and  will  be  asked  to  submit  a  further 
report  to  the  Eighth  General  Assembly.  The  12- 
power  text  calling  for  the  creation  of  a  15-member 
commission  was  rejected  by  a  vote  of  21-29-8. 

The  Assembly  then  recessed  until  April  7. 

Committee  I  {Political  and  Security) — The 
Committee  on  March  26  rejected  the  Czechoslovak 
resolution  charging  U.S.  interference  in  the  affairs 
of  other  states.  The  vote  was  5  (Soviet  bloc)- 
41-14  (Afghanistan,  Argentina,  Burma,  Egypt, 
Guatemala,  India,  Indonesia,  Iran,  Iraq,  Lebanon, 
Pakistan,  Saudi  Arabia,  Syria,  Yemen) .  In  state- 
ments made  before  the  voting,  the  Soviet  and 
Czechoslovak  repi'esentatives  contended  that  the 
U.S.  statements  on  the  item  had  contained  slan- 
derous charges  intended  to  divert  the  Committee's 
attention  from  the  substance  of  the  matter.  After 
the  balloting,  several  Arab  States  explained  that 
their  abstentions  were  based  in  part  on  the  fact 
that  the  issue  of  Zionism  had  been  raised. 

At  the  next  day's  meeting  debate  began  on  the 
U.S.  request  for  an  impartial  investigation  of 
charges  that  U.N.  forces  used  bacteriological  war- 
fare. Ambassador  Ernest  A.  Gross  (U.S.)  intro- 
duced a  16-power  resolution  under  which  a  five- 
state  commission  would  be  set  up  to  carry  out  an 
inquiry  after  the  President  of  the  General  Assem- 
bly had  received  indications  that  the  parties  con- 
cerned had  accepted  the  proposed  investigation. 

As  the  debate  opened.  Valerian  A.  Zorin 
(U.S.S.R.),  proposed  that  the  Committee  invite 
representatives  of  Communist  China  and  the 
North  Korean  authorities  to  participate.  An  im- 
partial investigation  of  the  bacteriological  war- 
fare question  would  be  possible  only  with  the 
participation  of  the  states  directly  concerned  with 
and  affected  by  the  use  of  bacterial  weapons.  The 
motion  was  rejected  by  a  vote  of  15  (Soviet  bloc, 
Egypt,  Iraq,  India,  Indonesia,  Afghanistan, 
Burma,  Syria)^0-5  (Argentina,  Lebanon, 
Yugoslavia). 


Representatives  of  South  Africa,  Australia,  the 
Netherlands,  and  New  Zealand,  speaking  as  co- 
sponsors  of  the  resolution,  pointed  out  the  neces- 
sity of  exposing  the  hollowness  of  the  charges. 
If  those  making  the  charges  did  not  accept  the 
resolution,  the  obvious  conclusion  would  be  that 
the  charges  were  baseless  and  the  world  would 
treat  any  further  allegations  or  protestations  with 
the  contempt  they  deserved. 

The  Netherlands  welcomed  the  U.S.  request  to 
place  the  item  on  the  agenda,  D.  J.  von  Balluseck 
said.  The  full  membership  of  the  United  Nations 
should  express  itself  when  some  governments  lev- 
eled accusations  against  others,  yet  persistently 
refused  to  permit  an  impartial  investigation  of  the 
charges.  The  investigation  should  be  undertaken 
as  soon  as  possible,  in  his  view,  and  should  include 
an  examination  of  the  so-called  confessions  of  the 
prisoners  of  war. 


Economic  and  Social  Council 

At  the  opening  meeting  of  its  loth  session,  the 
Council  on  April  1  adopted  by  a  vote  of  14—0-4 
a  resolution  transmitting  to  the  Human  Rights 
Commission  the  General  Assembly's  request  for 
continued  preparation  of  recommendations  con- 
cerning international  respect  for  the  right  of  peo- 
ples to  self-determination.  Also  approved,  by  a 
vote  of  15-2  (Poland,  U.S.S.R.)-!  (Sweden),  was 
a  Latin  American  draft  modifying  the  rules  of 
procedure  to  include  Spanish  as  a  working  lan- 
guage of  the  Council  and  its  functional  organs. 
A  Soviet  motion  requestinf^  favorable  considera- 
tion by  the  General  Assembly  of  a  similar  status 
for  the  Russian  language  failed,  4  (U.S.S.R., 
Poland,  India,  Egypt)-10-4  (France,  Yugoslavia, 
Uruguay,  Philippines). 

As  its  third  item,  the  Council  debated  the  U.S. 
request  that  Libya,  Nepal,  Spain,  and  the  Republic 
of  Korea  be  invited  to  the  Conference  on  the  Limi- 
tation of  the  Production  of  Opium,  scheduled  to 
begin  May  11.  Recalling  that  the  inscription  of 
the  last  two  countries  had  not  been  unanimous, 
James  J.  Wadsworth  (U.S.)  held  that  the  United 
Nations  was  interested  in  Spanish  participation 
since  Spain  was  an  important  manufacturing  and 
consuming  country  which  had  in  the  past  shown 
willingness  to  agree  to  controls  on  narcotics.  As 
to  the  Republic  of  Korea,  he  pointed  out  that  the 
General  Assembly  had  recognized  it  as  the  lawful 
Korean  Government  and  that  it  was  a  large  opium 
producer. 

G.  F.  Saksin  (U.S.S.R.)  said  that  since  he  had 
learned  that  the  countries  in  question  had  not 
asked  to  be  invited  to  the  conference,  the  action 
proposed  by  the  United  States  was  contrary  to 
self-determination  and  infringed  on  national  sov- 
ereignty. He  now  could  not  even  vote  for  invita- 
tions to  Libya  and  Nepal,  which  his  Government 
had  originally  favored. 


552 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Commission  on  the  Status  of  Women— Mrs. 
Lorena  B.  Hahn  (U.S.)  on  March  26  introduced 
a  United  States-Haitian  resolution  urging  that 
re<nilations  regarding  distribution  of  scliolarships 
provide  equal  opportunities  for  girls  and  women, 
requesting  that  tlie  Secretary-General  continue  to 
cooperate  with  Unesco  to  advance  opportunities 
for  education  for  women,  and  expressing  hope  that 
in  programs  of  fundamental  education  attention 
would  be  given  to  the  importance  of  providing 
equal  opportunities  for  women  to  acquire  a  lan- 
<rua"-e  "which  will  permit  them  access  to  the  re- 
sources of  knowledge  in  the  general  culture  of  the 
country." 

It  was  later  agi-eed  to  refer  to  the  resolutions 
committee  this  proposal  and  a  French  draft  relat- 
ing to  the  number  of  study  fellowships  and  schol- 
arships granted  to  men  and  women  students  in 
primary,  secondary,  higher,  and  technical  educa- 
tion in  the  member  countries. 

Representatives  of  several  nongovernment  or- 
ganizations made  statements  on  women's  educa- 
tion.    Groups  represented   included   the  World 
Federation  of  Trade  Unions,  the  International 
Federation  of  Women  Lawyers,  the  International 
Council  of  Women,  the  World  Union  of  Catholic 
Women's    organizations,    and   the   International 
Federation  of  Business  and  Professional  Women. 
On  March  27  the  Commission  adopted  a  revised 
Polish  resolution  which  regretted  that  the  Wom- 
en's International  Democratic  Federation  rejire- 
sentative  "has  not  been  granted  an  entry-visa    to 
permit  her  to  attend  the  Commission's  session, 
called  the  attention  of  the  Economic  and  Social 
Council  to  that  "abnormal   situation,"   and  re- 
quested that  the  Council  examine  the  question  at 
its  15th  session  in  order  to  take  appropriate  meas- 
ures.   The  vote  was  13-1  (U.S.)-2  (China,  U-K.). 
Members  then  approved  by  a  vote  of  14-0-3 
(U   S  )  a  Cuban-French  proposal  recommending 
that  Ecosoc  draw  the  attention  of  Governments 
and  specialized  agencies  to  the  need  of  ensuring 
identical  basic  school  curricula  for  pupils  ot  both 
sexes      Action  on  the  educational  item  was  com- 
pleted with  the  unanimous  approval  of  the  resolu- 


Correction 

Bui-LETiN  Of  March  30,  1953,  p.  4S0:  Mrs  Lord's 
title  should  be,  "V.  8.  Representative  on  the  V.H. 
Commission  on  Human  Rights." 


tions  committee's  version  of  the  U.  S.-Haitian  and 
French  drafts  on  granting  scholarships  to  women 
and  on  allowing  women  opportunities  to  acquire  a 
second  language  in  countries  where  native  and 
official  languages  exist.  ,  j      vi 

At  the  same  meeting,  Mrs.  Hahn  submitted,  with 
Cuba,  a  resolution  on  the  equal-pay-for-equal- 
work  item.  The  proposal  noted  that  the  principle 
was  sound  business  practice,  urged  increased  ef- 
forts toward  widespread  implementation  in  all 
states,  and  asked  the  International  Labor  Organi- 
zation to  furnish  periodic  progress  reports.  It 
was  agreed  that  this  text  would  be  combined  with 
another  equal-pay  draft  sponsored  by  France,  the 
Netherlands,  and  Pakistan. 

On  March  30  the  Commission  approved  a  JNeth- 
erlands-Pakistan  proposal  relating  to  the  work  of 
women  in  cottage  industries  and  handicrafts  and 
in  seasonal  agricultural  work  in  underdeveloped 
countries.     The  vote  was  12-3    (Soviet  bloc)-l 

(France).  ^^    ,      ,      i    -r.  i  • 

The  combined  Cuba-France-Netherlands-Faki- 
stan-U.S.  text  on  equal  pay,  as  slightly  modified  by 
the  resolutions  committee,  was  adopted  on  March 
31  by  a  vote  of  14-0-3  (Soviet  bloc).  Also 
adopted  was  an  amended  version  of  a  Dominican 
Eepublic- Venezuelan  resolution  on  participation 
of  women  in  the  work  of  the  United  Nations ;  the 
vote  was  15-0-2  (U.  K.,  New  Zealand) .  A  Paki- 
stani draft  recommending  the  appointment  of 
qualified  women  to  technical-assistance  posts  was 
adopted  unanimously.  . 

The  Commission  completed  its  substantive  work 
on  April  1  after  unanimously  approving  a  priori- 
ties program  for  1953-54  as  proposed  by  the 
United  States.  Consideration  of  the  item  on 
women  in  public  law  was  deferred  to  the  Com- 
mission's next  session. 


Confirmations 

./olin  il.  Allison 

The  Senate  on  April  2  confirmed  John  M.  Allison  as 
Ambassador  to  Japan. 
William  Howard  Taft,  III 

The  Senate  on  April  2  confirmed  William  Howard  Taft, 
III,  as  Ambassador  to  Ireland. 


April   13,   1953 


553 


Department  Opposes  Continuation  of  Extraordinary  Restrictions 
on  Certain  Imports 

Statement  by  Harold  F.  hinder 
Assistant  Secretary  for  Economic  Affairs  * 


Press  release  166  dated  April  1 

I  wish  to  thank  the  committee  for  the  oppor- 
tunity of  testifying  with  respect  to  this  bill.  The 
Department  is  interested  mainly  in  two  problems 
related  to  the  bill,  namely,  the  need  for  continuing 
powers  to  insure  that  adequate  supplies  of  mate- 
rials are  available  for  the  free-world  defense  effort 
and  the  deletion  of  section  104  from  the  bill.= 

The  Department  agrees  with  the  premise  that 
direct  economic  controls,  while  basically  incom- 
patible with  the  American  system,  may  be  needed 
in  certain  circumstances.  Experience  has  shown 
that  the  benefits  of  such  controls  in  an  emergency 
period  extend  not  only  to  the  United  States  but 
to  allied  and  other  friendly  nations  throughout  the 
world.  A  significant  contribution  to  world  eco- 
nomic stability  was  made  when  the  United  States 
instituted  comprehensive  economic  controls  after 
the  invasion  of  Korea.  In  another  comparable 
emergency,  the  interests  of  the  whole  free  world 
might  again  rest  on  prompt  action  by  the  U.S. 
Oovernment  to  hold  inflationary  forces  in  check 
and  channel  resources  to  essential  needs. 

Whetlier  it  is  necessary  to  enact  standby  author- 
ity for  the  several  types  of  direct  economic  con- 
trols, as  they  are  no  longer  currently  needed,  is  a 
■question  which  the  Department  considers  to  be  out- 
side Its  competence.  It  defers  in  this  to  the  agen- 
cies responsible  for  those  controls. 

The  Department  does,  however,  have  specific 
comments  on  certain  other  aspects  of  S.  753.  This 
bill  would  place  in  standby  condition  title  I  of  the 
present  Defense  Production  Act.  The  authority 
to  establish  priorities  and  to  allocate  materials  and 
taciJities,  conveyed  by  section  101,  like  that  to 
stimulate  expansion  of  productive  capacity  (title 
liJ.),  IS  stilJ  needed  to  assure  adequate  materials 

'Wade  before  the  Senate  Banking  and  Currency  Com- 

T\    %  7nro  .r*'^!'*''^'  'o  S.  753,  "Emergency  Stabilization 
Act  of  19.53,"  on  Apr.  1. 

=  Text  of  section  104  of  S.  753  is  identical  to  section  104 
of  the  present  Defense  Production  Act.  Except  for  cer- 
tain discretions  given  the  Secretary  of  Agriculture  in  the 
administration  of  the  import  restrictions,  section  104  is 
that  printed  in  the  Bulletin  of  Mar.  31, 1952,  p.  518. 

554 


for  the  free-world  defense  effort.  Section  101 
should  be  retained  on  an  active,  unconditional 
basis  so  that  there  can  be  a  prompt  and  orderly 
transition  to  the  modified  system  of  materials 
control  needed  to  safeguard  defense  production 
after  June  30. 

It  is  not  only  U.S.  defense  programs  that  might 
be  impaired  by  lapse  of  this  section.  The  progress 
of  military  programs  of  other  free  nations  now 
depends  in  part  upon  U.S.  supplies.  The  law 
presently  permits  us  to  assure  supplies  for  these 
programs  as  well  as  for  our  own.  It  is  in  the  in- 
terest of  our  total  defensive  strength  that  this 
continues  to  be  possible. 

As  I  said  at  the  outset,  this  Department  attaches 
great  importance  to  the  deletion  from  the  new 
legislation  of  section  104,  which  restricts  imports 
of  certain  agricultural  commodities  includino- 
dairy  products.  This  section  would  not  appear  to 
be  germane,  to  the  general  purposes  of  S.  753,  to 
provide  standby  authority  for  emergency  economic 
controls.  Eather,  it  deals  with  current  problems 
affecting  our  international  trade  relations  and  do- 
mestic agricultural  programs. 

Apart  from  the  question  of  appropriateness  in 
this  context,  the  Department  of  State  has  given 
careful  thought  to  the  need  for  continuation  of  sec- 
tion 104,  and  we  can  only  conclude  that  this  pro- 
vision has  been  so  harmful  to  our  international 
trade  relations  that  to  continue  it,  whether  on  an 
active  or  a  standby  basis,  would  be  unwise.  In 
saying  this,  I  want  to  make  it  perfectly  clear  to 
the  committee  that  the  Department  of  State  is 
keenly  aware  of  the  difficulties  with  which  we  are 
now  faced  in  connection  with  our  domestic  dairy 
products  program.  However,  there  are  other 
remedies  m  our  laws  which  can  be  used  to  deal 
with  situations  in  which  imports  might  impair 
agricultural  programs  for  dairy  products  or  cause 
serious  injury  to  the  dairy  industry.  Such  reme- 
dies exist  in  section  22  of  the  Agricultural  Adjust- 
ment Act  of  1934  as  amended  and  in  the  "escape 
clause"  of  the  Trade  Agreements  Extension  Act 
of  1951. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


The  extension  of  section  104  by  the  United  States 
ivould  do  considerable  damage  to  our  efforts  to 
ichieve  economic  strength  and  solvency  among 
friendly  foreign  countries.  The  President  empha- 
?ized  in  his  State  of  the  Union  message  to  the 
Congress  that,  "Our  foreign  policy  will  recognize 
Uie  importance  of  profitable  and  equitable  world 
trade  "  '  By  introducing  trade  barriers  which  are 
not  essential  to  the  protection  of  American  agri- 
culture, the  restrictions  imposed  under  section  104 
defeat  this  objective. 

The  extension  of  section  104  controls  would 
compel  the  United  States  to  continue  to  act  in- 
consistently with  agreements  previously  under- 
taken with  friendly  countries.  The  continued 
disreo'ard  of  these  commitments  m  the  face  ot 
well-founded  and  repeated  protests  froni  10  coun- 
tries is  seriously  undermining  efforts  to  build  con- 
fidence in  our  leadership  along  the  whole  front  of 
our  foreign  policy  as  may  be  observed  from  the 
notes  we  have  received,^  copies  of  which  I  should 
like  to  submit  for  the  record. 

It  is  difficult  to  overemphasize  the  significance 
which  foreign  countries  attribute  to  section  104 
and  our  action  under  it.    In  part,  the  reason  for 
their  concern  lies  in  the  injurious  effect  ot  our 
section  104  restrictions  on  their  trade;  it  hampers 
their  efforts  to  overcome  balance-of-payments  dith- 
culties  and  makes  it  more  difficult  to  reduce  their 
need  for  extraordinary  assistance  from  the  United 
States.    But  it  is  to  a  perhaps  even  greater  degree 
the  symbolic  significance  of  section  104,  as  to  the 
direction  of  U.S.  trade  policy,  which  arouses  con- 
cern    The  fact  is  that,  for  them,  the  bill  carries 
the  implication  that  the  United  States  is  moving 
away  from  a  policy  of  cooperation  with  its  allies 
toward  a  restrictionism  which  disregards  both  our 
obligations  and  their  needs.    Even  our  friends  m 
other  countries  are  hard  put  to  defend  us.    Our 
enemies  seize  upon  each  such  example  to  make 
the  claim  that  the  United  States  wants  not  free 
partners  in  a  mutual  exchange  of  goods,  but  only 
dependencies  where  American  surpluses  can  be 
conveniently  dumped. 

It  has  to  be  borne  in  mind  that  one  of  the  express 
purposes  of  the  international  agreements  which 
section  104  compels  the  United  States  to  violate 
is  to  further  the  interests  of  American  agriculture. 
The  prosperity  of  American  agriculture  depends, 
in  the  first  instance,  on  domestic  prosperity.  But, 
as  the  President  pointed  out  in  his  message  on  the 
state  of  the  Union,  it  depends  also  "upon  the  op- 
portunity to  ship  abroad  large  surpluses  of  partic- 
ular commodities,  and,  therefore,  upon  sound  eco- 
nomic relationships  between  the  United   States 

1         »76frf.,  Feb.  9,  1953,  p.  208.  iqw  nrp 

I  *  Texts  of  eight  notes  submitted  since  June  1,  1952  ^re 
printed  as  an  annex  to  Mr.  Linder's  statement.  Jo' J^xts 
of  earlier  notes,  see  part  4  of  the  Hearings  on  Defense 
Production  Act  Amendments  of  l^^l  before  Committee 
on  Banking  and  Currency,  U.S.  Senate,  82d  Cong.,  1st  sess., 
pp.  2951-2958. 

April   13,   T953 


and    many     foreign    countries."     By     denying 
friendly  foreign  countries  an  opportunity  to  en- 
£ra<re  in  profitable  and  equitable  trade  with  the 
United  States,  this  law  limits  their  purchases  of 
American  agricultural  commodities  as  well  as  a 
wide  range  of  products  from  other  American  in- 
dustries and  enterprises.     The  close  tie  between 
our  imports  and  our  export  sales  is  illustrated  by 
the  fact  that  one  government,  the  Netherlands,  has 
curtailed  its  imports  of  wheat  flour  from  the 
United  States  specifically  because  of  section  104 
restrictions,  and  several  other  governments  are 
considering  similar  action.    At  a  time  ^•lien  Amer- 
ican agricultural  exports  are  already  falling  off, 
we  can  ill  afford  any  further  decline  m  such  sales. 
For  these  reasons,  this  Department  is  of  the  viev? 
that  section  104  should  be  permitted  to  expire  and 
that  there  should  be  no  extension  of  this  provision 
beyond  June  30,  1953,  either  in  the  legislation 
under  consideration  or  other  acts  of  Congress. 


ANNEX 

Canadian  Note  of  February  10, 1953 

The  Canadian  Ambassador  presents  his  compliments 
to  the  Secretary  of  State  and  has  the  honour  to  refer 
to  the  Canadian  Embassy's  Notes  of  AuRUst  28,  1951 
(No  496)  and  Sanuary  17,  1952,  regardins  the  restric- 
tions imposed  upon  imports  of  fats,  oils  and  da.ry  prod^ 
ucts  under  Section  104  of  the  Defense  Production  Act  of 

^^The  Secretary  of  State  will  be  aware  that  these  import 
resw'ctfonf  we^e  considered  at  the  ^^l^-^JT^^ 
sessions  of  the  contracting  parties  t°  "^^^^XJons  wer^ 
ment  on  Tariffs  and  Trade  and  that  resolutions  were 
Sted   recognizing  these  measures   to  be  contrary   to 

""ortttcca^ionrflSrannSuncement  on  December  30 
195^  of  further  import  restrictions,  relating  to  dried 
milk  products,  the  Canadian  Government  re-examined  the 
Stuation  resulting  from  these  restrictions.  On  he  basis 
of  thi^3  review  the  Canadian  Government  would  again 
exnress  its  serious  concern  at  this  infringement  of  inter- 
nSal  apreements  to  which  the  Governments  of  the 
United  States  and  of  Canada  are  parties.  The  Gov- 
ernment of  Canada  wishes  to  call  the  attention  of  the 
Government  of  the  United  States  to  the  effects  of  these 
melsur^s  not  only  on  trade  between  the  United  States  and 
Canada  bv?t  also  on  the  broad  commercial  policy  interests 

""'ill  rve"?nmenTo7  Canada  considers  that  such  depar 
tures  from  accepted  principles  of  commercial  Pohcy  by 
the  leamng  trading  nation  can  hardly  fail  to  weaken  the 
force  of  those  principles  and   to   damage  seriously   the 
development  of  world  trade  on  a  constructive  basis. 

Both  Canada  and  the  United  States,  recognizing  the 
weakening  effect  of  continued  reliance  on  import  restric- 
Sons  on  economies  of  friendly  countries,  have  frequently 
encouraged  them  to  seek  solutions  to  their  balance  of  pay- 
ment difficulties  through  increasing  exports  rather  than 
curtailing  imports.  Actions  by  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment such  as  that  represented  by  these  import  restric- 
tions tend  to  undermine  the  confidence  of  overseas  deficit 
coimtrfes  in  their  ability  to  approach  a  balance  by  in- 
creasing their  dollar  earnings.  These  measures  may  in 
consequence  have  the  effect  of  discouraging  attempts 
which  miglit  be  made  by  such  countries,  in  the  face  of 
great  difficulties,  to  change  the  general  direction  of  na- 

555 


tlonal  policies  away  from  reliance  on  discriminatory 
Import  restrictions  as  methods  of  aciiieving  international 
balance. 

The  Government  of  Canada,  accordingly,  takes  this 
opportunity  to  urge  once  more  that  the  import  restric- 
tions imposed  under  Section  104  of  the  Defense  Produc- 
tion Act  of  1951  be  removed  as  soon  as  possible. 


New  Zealand  Note  of  March  31, 1953  s 

The  Ambassador  of  New  Zealand  presents  his  compli- 
ments to  the  Secretary  of  State  and  has  the  honour  to 
refer  to  the  recent  decision  of  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment to  place  an  embargo  on  imports  of  dried  wholemilk 
dried  buttermilk  and  dried  cream,  effective  from  1  April 
1953.  It  may  be  recollected  that  the  importance  of  this 
trade  to  New  Zealand  was  discussed  by  the  Ambassador 
with  the  Assistant  Secretary  of  State  for  Economic  Affairs 
on  9  March,  and  that  a  note  was  addressed  to  the  Sec- 
retary of  State  at  that  time,  explaining  the  effect  on  New 
Zealand's  economy  of  all  United  States  restrictions 
against  imports  of  dairy  products. 

^v^^^'*^^  "^  ^^'^  ^""  information  already  supplied  to 
the  United  States  Government  in  this  connection  it  is 
felt  unnecessary  at  this  time  to  enter  into  a  detailed  state- 
ment of  tlie  difficulties  created  in  New  Zealand  by  the 
decision  to  place  an  embargo  on  imports  of  dried  milk 
products.  The  New  Zealand  Government  has  asked  how- 
ever, that  the  United  States  Government  should  be  in- 
formed of  the  surprise  and  disappointment  with  which 
the  recent  decision  has  been  received  in  New  Zealand  The 
immediate  loss  of  potential  dollar-earnings  is  one  that 
f^w  Zealand  can  ill  afford.  The  new  embargo  has  the 
effect  of  seriously  restricting  New  Zealand's  dollar  earn- 
ing capacity  which  has  already  been  weakened  by  the 
actions  of  the  United  States  in  placing  embargoes  on  butter 
^'i'^.^'^'i"*''**  '^'■'*^'^  ™'"^  s°''<'s  and  in  permitting  imports 
of  Cheddar  cheese  only  under  a  quota  system.  The  range 
of  the  United  States  restrictions  on  imports  of  dairy 
products,  which  accounts  for  one-third  of  all  New 
^aland  s  export  earnings,  is  now  so  broad  that  New  Zea- 
land s  capacity  to  secure  dollar  exchange  from  exports  is 
gravely  reduced. 

The  New  Zealand  Government  has  drawn  the  attention 
of  the  United  States  Government  on  other  occasions  to 
the  fact  that  restrictions  of  the  kind  adopted  by  the  United 
btates  in  respect  of  dairy  products  have  been  recognised 
as  a  clear  breach  of  the  General  Agreement  on  Tariffs  and 
Irade.  Although  the  countries  affected  have  been  given 
rights  of  retaliation  under  the  Agreement,  the  New  Zea- 
land Government  still  does  not  consider  such  action  to  be 
a  satisfactory  answer  to  the  problem.  The  New  Zealand 
Government  is,  however,  concerned  over  the  apparent  lack 
of  harmony  between  the  actions  of  the  United  States  in 
respect  of  dairy  products,  and  the  spirit  of  under..^tanding 
that  prevails  in  other  relations  between  the  two  countries 

The  hope  is  earnestly  expressed  that  the  United  States 
Government  will,  upon  reflection,  recognise  the  broad 
economic  implications  of  trade  restrictions  of  this  kind 
and  the  difficulties  they  create  in  a  country  like  New 
Zea  and  which  is  so  heavily  reliant  upon  free  access  to 
world  markets  for  its  limited  range  of  export  products. 
ICe  New  Zealand  Government  sincerely  trusts  that  the 
United  States  Government  may  find  it  possible  to  permit 
a  resumption  of  New  Zealand's  export  trade  with  the 
United  States  in  dried  milk  and  other  dairy  products  thus 
bnnging  its  practice  in  this  field  into  accord  with  the 
letter  and  the  spirit  of  the  mutual  obligations  undertaken 
by  the  two  countries  through  the  General  Agreement  on 
lariffs  and  Trade. 


inlJ'""''^  P'"^^*o°s  notes  dated  Sept.  17,  1952,  Jan.  15, 
1953,  and  Mar.  9,  1953,  have  been  sent  by  the  Government 
of  Aew  Zealand. 

556 


Australian  Note  of  March  30,  1953' 

The  Australian  Ambassador  presents  his  compliments  to 
the  Honourable  the  Secretary  of  State  and  upon  instruc-' 
tions  from  the  Australian  Government,  has  the  honour 
to  make  the  following  communication. 

On  January  23,  1953,  the  Australian  Government  drew 
the  attention  of  the  G'^vernment  of  the  United  States  to 
the  situation  created  by  the  continued  operation  of  re- 
strictions on  the  importation  of  dairy  products  into  the 
United  States  under  Section  104  of  the  Defence  Produc- 
tion Act.  At  the  same  time  the  Australian  Government 
referred  to  the  recent  application  of  import  quotas  to 
dried  whole  milk  and  dried  buttermilk  and  requested  the 
United  States  Government  to  amend  the  Australian  quota 
which  had  been  based  on  a  period  unfavourable  to  Aus- 
tralian exports  of  these  items.  On  September  11,  1951 
representations  were  also  made  by  the  Australian  Govern- 
ment in  regard  to  import  restrictions  on  dairy  products 
authorised  by  the  Defence  Production  Act  and  notes  were 
presented  concerning  the  prohibition  on  imports  of  butter 
on  June  6,  1950,  October  7,  1949  and  September  23,  1949 
The  Australian  Government  regrets  that  it  must  now 
once  more  draw  the  attention  of  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment to  the  recently  announced  prohibition  on  imports  of 
dried  whole  milk,  dried  buttermilk  and  dried  cream  as 
from  April  1,  1953. 

The  Australian  Government  has  previously  pointed  out 
that  restrictions  and  prohibitions  on  the  importation  of 
dairy  products  into  the  United  States  not  only  accentuate  i 
the  difficulties  of  re-establishing  world  trade  equilibrium  i 
and  nullify  attempts  made  in  Australia  to  adapt  the  Aus-   I 
trahan  dairying  industry  to  the  requirements  of  a  major   I 
potential  market  but  have  been  determined  by  the  Con-   I 
tracting  Parties  to  the  General  Agreement  on  Tariffs  and 
Trade  to  impair  concessions  negotiated  under  that  agree- 
ment and  infringe  Article  XI  of  the  Agreement. 

For  a  number  of  years  the  Australian  Government  has 
supported  trade  policies  advocated  by  the  United  States 
which  found  expression  in  the  General  Agreement  on  Tar- 
iffs and  Trade.  However,  it  has  become  increasingly 
difficult  to  find  justification  for  the  restrictions  that  the 
Agreement  imposes  on  the  methods  which  Australia  may 
adopt  to  foster  its  own  developing  industries.  It  is  only 
by  the  promotion  of  exports  through  a  free  access  to  mar- 
kets for  Its  major  industries  such  as  the  dairving  industry 
that  the  Australian  economy  can  support  some  restriction 
on  its  freedom  to  protect  domestic  production. 

The  Australian  Government  therefore  trusts  that  the 
United  States  Government  will,  at  an  early  date  see  its 
way  to  remove  the  recently  imposed  prohibitions'  on  im- 
ports of  dried  whole  milk  and  buttermilk  and  its  long 
standing  prohibition  on  imports  of  butter  and  other  re- 
strictions imposed  on  the  importation  of  dairy  products 
under  the  Defence-Production  Act. 


Danish  Note  of  March  17,  1953' 

.v'^'j?  Danish  Ambassador  presents  his  compliments  to 
the  Honorable  the  Secretary  of  State  and  has  the  honor 
once  more  to  draw  the  attention  of  the  United  States 
Government  to  the  serious  concern  of  his  Government  at 
the  restrictions  imposed  under  Section  104  in  the  Defense 
Production  Act  on  imports  into  the  United  States  of  Dairy 
Products.  ■' 

Under  the  above  provisions  the  import  of  one  of  the 
principal  Danish  export  commodities.  Butter,  is  subject  to 
a  complete  embargo  nullifying  tariff  concessions  obtained 
from  the  United  States  Government  by  Denmark  and  other 
countries  on  a  quid  pro  quo  basis  under  the  General  Agree- 
ment on  Tariffs  and  Trade. 

Imports   of  another   product,   which   would   otherwise 

"  A  previous  note  dated  Jan.  23,  19.53  was  also  sent  bv 
the  Australian  Government. 

'A  previous  note  was  sent  by  the  Danish  Government 
on  Sept.  9,  1952. 


Department   of  State   Bulletin 


have  been  a  particularly  suitable  object  of  endeavors  to 
increase  Ilanish  dollar  earnings.  Blue  Mold  Cheese,  have 
been  kept  at  an  artificially  low  level. 

In  addition  hereto  quota  limitations  have  recently  been 
aoDlied  to  the  import  of  Dry  Whole  Milk,  at  a  time  when 
Danish  exporters  had  succeeded  in  establishing  a  com- 
netitive  market  here  for  this  product  trying,  in  this  way, 
W  make  up  for  lost  markets  here  for  other  milk  products 
such  as  butter  and  cheese. 

The  nature  of  the  provisions  of  Section  104  is  well  illus- 
trated by  the  fact  that  while  falling  domestic  production 
would  invoke  action  through  imposition  of  quotas  under 
sub-paragraph  a,  an  increasing  domestic  production  may 
establish  a  case  for  import  restrictions  under  c. 

Both  at  the  6th  and  7th  sessions  of  the  Contracting 
Parties  to  the  General  Agreement  on  Tariffs  and  Trade  a 
resolution  was  passed  to  the  effect  that  the  United  States 
Import  restrictions  under  Section  104  constitute  an  in- 
fringement of  Article  XI  of  the  General  Agreement,  and 
that  the  circumstances  were  serious  enough  to  justity 
recourse  to  Article  XXIII,  par.  2  (withdrawal  of  conces- 
sions) by  the  contracting  parties  affected.  It  was  rec- 
ommended (in  the  words  of  the  resolution  of  the  (th 
session)  "that  the  United  States  Government  have  regard 
to  the  effects  of  its  continued  application  of  these  restric- 
tive measures  in  breach  of  the  General  Agreement  and 
continue  its  efforts  to  secure  the  repeal  of  Section  104 
of  the  Defense  Production  Act  as  the  only  satisfactory 
solution  of  this  problem."  The  United  States  Government 
was  requested  "to  report  to  the  Contracting  Parties  at  as 
early  a  date  as  possible  and,  in  any  case,  not  later  than 
the  opening  of  the  8th  session  of  the  Contracting  Parties 
on  the  action  which  it  has  taken." 

It  is  the  earnest  hope  of  the  Danish  Government  that 
the  United  States  Government  will  continue  to  use  its 
best  endeavors  to  secure  the  abolishment  of  the  provisions 
in  Section  104  at  the  expiry  of  the  Defense  Production 
Act  on  June  30,  this  year,  and  to  use  its  influence  to  pre- 
vent actions  to  establish  a  substitute  legislation  based  on 
similar  principles. 

It  would  seem  to  be  a  matter  of  particular  concern  that 
the  United  States  Government  should  not  let  itself  be 
distracted  from  this  aim — or  Congress  be  unduly  in- 
fluenced—by the  existence  of  temporary  Government  sur- 
plus stocks  of  butter.  As  repeatedly  pointed  out  by  the 
Administration,  and  also  by  a  leading  Farmers'  Organ- 
ization, during  discussions  in  Congress  on  Section  104, 
other  provisions,  such  as  Section  22  in  the  Agricultural 
Adjustment  Act  as  amended,  establish  authority  and  pro- 
cedure for  limitation  of  imports  of  any  products  for  whicu 
there  is  an  agricultural  program  (including  price  support) , 
whenever  it  is  found  that  imports  interfere,  or  are  prac- 
tically certain  to  interfere,  materially  with  such  a 
program. 

The  Danish  Government,  of  course,  does  not  view  with 
favor  any  such  provisions.  However,  the  application  of 
Section  22,  as  it  now  stands,  and  similar  provisions  would 
not,  as  seems  to  be  the  case  of  Section  104,  mean  the 
establishment  once  and  for  all  of  what  in  practical  terms 
amounts  to  a  complete  embargo  on  the  importation  of 
butter. 

The  Danish  Government  has  noted  with  great  interest 
the  very  specific  recommendations  on  the  question  of 
dairy  imports,  including  butter,  made  in  the  recent  report 
to  the  President  by  the  National  Advisory  Board  of  the 
Mutual  Security  Agency  and  trusts  that  eventually  action 
will  be  taken  along  the  lines  suggested.  It  has  also  noted 
that  several  important  trade  organizations,  including  some 
representing  agriculture,  have  recommended  the  abolish- 
ment of  the  provisions  of  Section  104.  The  same  recom- 
mendation was  contained  in  the  socalled  "Sawyer-Report" 
of  December  last  year.  The  provisions  are  condemned  as 
incompatible  with  the  traditional  policy  of  the  United 
States  Government  to  establish  a  more  liberal  interna- 
tional trade  and  payments  system,  the  progress  of  which 
has  been  frustrated  by  the  difficulties  of  overseas  countries 

April  13,   7  953 


to  earn  a  sufficient  amount  of  dollars  to  pay  for  imports 
from  the  United  States  of  agricultural  and  other  products. 
It  is  noted  that  certain  modifications  of  the  cheese  import 
restrictions  have  been  made  lately.  These  modifications, 
however,  apply  principally  to  types  of  cheese  imported 
from  countries  other  than  Denmark,  which  means  that  a 
de  facto  discriminatory  element  has  been  established  in 
the  administration  of  Section  104.  As  already  pointed 
out  in  Monsieur  de  Kauffmann's  note  of  September  9,  1952, 
it  is  a  matter  of  special  regret  to  the  Danish  Government 
that  full  restrictions  are  maintained  on  imports  of  Blue 
Mold  Cheese  at  a  time  when  another  type  of  cheese,  which 
from  a  practical  point  of  view  must  be  considered  quite 
similar  in  respect  of  appearance,  quality,  taste  and  con- 
sumption purposes,  has  been  wholly  exempted  from 
control. 

In  a  press  release  of  December  30,  19.52,  Mr.  Brannan, 
then  Secretary  of  Agriculture,  announced  an  increase  of 
500,000  lbs.  in  the  basic  annual  quota  for  Blue  Mold 
Cheese.  It  is  interesting  to  note  that  the  communique 
stated  that  the  quota  increase  was  made  in  recognition  of 
the  strong  demand  for  this  type  of  cheese.  Further  it 
stated  that  "although  domestic  production  of  Blue  Mold 
Cheese  has  recovered  substantially  in  the  past  years, 
prices  of  both  the  domestic  and  the  imported  product 
have  remained  firm".  In  the  opinion  of  the  Danish  Gov- 
ernment it  might  not  have  been  unreasonable  to  expect 
that,  under  the  circumstances  referred  to,  the  Depart- 
ment of  Agriculture  would  have  found  occasion  to  in- 
clude Blue  Mold  Cheese  among  the  several  other  types 
of  cheese  released  from  import  control,  thereby  removing 
a  cause  of  friction.  On  a  prima  facie  basis  it  would  seem 
that  removal  of  the  import  restrictions  on  Blue  Mold 
Cheese,  under  the  circumstances,  in  no  way  would  be  con- 
trary to  the  provisions  of  Section  104.  In  this  connection 
it  is  well  worth  observing  that,  to  the  knowledge  of  the 
Danish  Government,  none  of  the  modifications  of  restric- 
tions on  dairy  imports,  granted  so  far,  have  met  with 
public  criticism  in  the  press  or  otherwise. 

The  Danish  Government  would,  therefore,  ask  that  the 
United  States  Government  once  more  consider  the  matter 
with  a  view  to  exempting  Blue  Mold  Cheese  from  the  quota 
restrictions. 

As  pointed  out  by  the  Cheese  Importers  Association  of 
America,  during  hearings  on  the  13th  instant  in  the  Senate 
Banking  and  Currency  Committee  to  terminate  restric- 
tions on  cheese  imports,  these  imports  do  not,  under  the 
present  circumstances  anyway,  threaten  domestic  manu- 
facture. Prices  of  imported  types  of  cheese,  possibly 
with  the  exception  of  Cheddar,  are  higher  than  prices 
of  domestic  cheeses.  The  retail  price  of  Danablue  is  at 
present  87-89  cents  per  lb.  or  14-21  cents  per  lb.  more  than 
the  price  of  domestic  Blue  Cheese. 

While  there  seems  to  be  a  very  firm  demand  for  this 
type  of  cheese,  as  also  pointed  out  in  the  announcement  by 
the  Department  of  Agriculture  on  the  30th  of  December, 
domestic  production  has  increased  by  5,000,000  lbs.  from 
1951  to  1952,  and  imports  were  cut  about  2,000,000  lbs. 
by  the  import  restrictions. 

If,  in  spite  of  this  situation  and  against  the  sincere  hopes 
of  the  Danish  Government,  the  Department  of  Agriculture 
does  not  consider  it  possible  to  remove  Blue  Mold  Cheese 
from  the  list  of  cheeses  still  subject  to  quota  restrictions, 
it  is  very  much  hoped  that  it  will  be  possible,  at  the  very 
least  to  increase  the  present  quota  which  permits  an 
import  during  the  first  half  of  1953  of  only  1,575.000  lbs. 
as  compared  with  2,450,000  lbs.  during  the  second  half 

of  1952.  ,.,«.. 

If  the  quota  is  not  increased  this  will  not  only  affect 
Danish  dollar  earnings,  but  may  also  create  serious  diffi- 
culties in  the  long  run  for  the  sale  of  Danablue  in  the 
American  market.  Danablue  is  distributed  by  the  im- 
porters mainly  to  a  number  of  large  retail  stores.  These 
stores  insist  on  being  able  to  rely  on  regular  deliveries  of 
certain  minimum  quantities  and,  due  to  the  shortage,  a 
few  have  already  discontinued  handling  Danablue. 

557 


Swedish  Note  of  March  30,  1953 

Tlip  ('liar;:<>  d'Affaircs  a.i.  of  Sweden  presents  his  com- 
pliments to  llie  Honorable  the  Secretary  of  State  and  has 
the  honor  to  bring  the  following  to  bis  attention. 

On  December  30,  1952,  the  Department  of  Agriculture 
announced  import  quotas  for  dried  whole  milk,  dried 
buttermilk  and  dried  cream,  which  products  had  until  then 
been  imported  without  restrictions. 

On  March  24,  195.3,  the  Department  of  Agriculture 
placed  the  import  of  the  said  products  under  embargo, 
starting  April  1.  Of  the  quotas  granted  for  the  first  quar- 
ter of  1953  onl.v  such  quantities  will  be  allowed  to  enter, 
which  are  shipped  through  March  31. 

The  Swedish  Government  has  instructed  me  to  express 
its  grave  concern  about  these  import  restrictions,  which 
have  been  imposed  pursuant  to  Section  104  of  the  Defense 
Production  Act,  as  amended.  In  doing  so,  I  wish  to  call 
attention  especially  to  the  following  facts  and  circum- 
stances. 

Already  before  World  War  II  Sweden  was  a  better 
customer  of  goods  produced  in  the  United  States  than 
were  the  United  States  of  goods  produced  in  Sweden. 
After  World  War  II  there  has  been  a  great  export  surplus 
from  the  United  States  to  Sweden.  For  each  of  the  years 
1951  and  1952  this  surplus  amounted  to  more  than  70,000,- 
000  dollars. 

A  considerable  export  surplus  on  the  side  of  the  United 
States  has  existed  also  with  regard  to  agricultural  prod- 
ucts. In  1951  Sweden  imported  from  the  United  States 
food  products  to  an  amount  of  about  10,000,000  dollars 
but  exported  to  the  United  States  such  products  to  an 
amount  of  only  about  1,500,000  dollars.  Furthermore,  in 
the  same  year  Sweden  imported  from  the  United  States 
large  amounts  of  other  agricultural  products  than  food, 
i.e.  cotton  and  tobacco.  The  same  trend  seems  to  have 
been  prevailing  during  19.52. 

However,  the  quantity  of  agricultural  products  im- 
ported to  Sweden  from  the  United  States  during  the  last 
years  has  been  smaller  than  the  quantity,  which  used  to 
be  imported  before  World  War  II.  Scarcity  of  dollars 
has  made  it  impossible  for  Sweden  to  buy  such  products 
in  the  United  States  to  the  same  extent  as  earlier. 

From  what  now  has  been  said  it  will  be  clear  that  ob- 
stacles to  Swedish  exports  to  the  United  States  must  lead 
to  a  decrease  in  the  United  States  exports  to  Sweden, 
Including  decreased  outlets  for  the  agricultural  production 
of  the  United  States. 

The  Swedish  Government  has  on  many  occasions  shown 
its  willingness  to  cooperate  fully  in  the  efforts  to  expand 
world  trade,  in  which  the  United  States  has  taken  a  lead- 
ing part.  The  Swedish  Government  for  its  part  has 
proved  this  readiness  as  one  of  the  Contracting  Parties 
of  the  General  Agreement  of  Tariffs  and  Trade.  The 
United  States  restrictions  on  the  imports  of  dairy  prod- 
ucts have  been  generally  recognized  as  contrary  to  this 
Agreement. 

The  Swedish  Government  has  with  great  satisfaction 
noticed  the  interest  in  developing  free  trade,  expressed 
by  the  President  of  the  United  States.  It  has  also  noticed 
the  strong  support,  which  the  leaders  of  the  three  great 
American  Farm  Organizations  have  given  to  a  liberaliza- 
tion of  American  trade  policy,  also  with  regard  to  agri- 
cultural products.  There  seems,  however,  to  be  an  ap- 
parent lack  of  harmony  between  on  one  hand  the  expressed 
policy  of  the  United  States  and  the  views  of  the  great 
ma.lority  of  American  farmers  as  stated  by  their  leaders 
and  on  the  other  hand  the  restrictions  on  the  imports  of 
dairy  products. 

The  Swedish  Government,  therefore,  sees  with  greatest 
concern  the  imposition  at  this  time  of  a  further  import 
restriction  on  a  Swedish  agricultural  product,  which  dur- 
ing recent  months  has  been  able  to  find  an  expanding 
market  in  the  United  States  and  thus  would  in  the  future 
contribute  substantially  to  the  Swedish  dollar  earning. 

With  reference  to  the  above  the  Swedish  Government 
expresses  its  sincere  hope  that  the  Government  of  the 
United  States  will  find  it  possible  to  reconsider  the  re- 


strictions imposed  under  the  Section  104  of  the  Defense 
Production  Act. 


Netherlands  Note  of  March  31,  1953 « 

The  Netherlands  Ambassador  presents  his  compliments 
to  the  Honorable  the  Secretary  of  State  and  has  the  honor 
to  refer  to  a  press  release  of  the  United  States  Department 
of  Agriculture,  Production  and  Marketing  Administration, 
dated  March  24,  1953,  in  which  an  embargo  on  imports  of 
dried  whole  milk,  dried  butter  milk,  and  dried  cream, 
effective  April  1,  19.53  is  announced. 

The  absolute  character  of  this  measure,  coming  in  addi- 
tion to  continuing  restrictions  on  the  import  of  Nether- 
lands Edam  and  Gouda  cheeses,  will  undoubtedly  have  a 
severely  adverse  effect  upon  Netherlands  public  opinion 
in  general  and  that  of  the  export  community  in  particular. 
In  this  connection  Dr.  Van  Roijen  refers  to  his  note  of 
March  2,  1953,  in  which  he  transmitted  the  great  concern 
of  the  Netherlands  Government  about  the  import  restric- 
tions on  dried  milk  products  which  had  been  imposed  on 
December  30,  1952,  under  Section  104  of  the  Defense 
Production  Act.  It  was  hoped  that  the  United  States 
Government  would  see  its  way  to  reconsider  the  Import 
limitations  on  Netherlands  dairy  products. 

While  not  yet  having  received  instructions  from  his 
Government,  the  Netherlands  Ambassador  would  like  to 
express  his  keen  disappointment  at  the  present  action 
which  appears  to  scatter  the  hope  he  expressed  in  his 
previous  note. 


Italian  Note  of  June  30, 1952'> 

The  Italian  Embassy  presents  its  compliments  to  the 
Department  of  State  and  has  the  honor  to  inform  of  the 
following: 

The  Congressional  Record  of  June  28,  1952,  page  8585, 
has  published  the  report  of  the  Senate-House  Conference 
on  Section  104  of  the  Defense  Production  Act,  concerning 
imports  of  oils  and  fats,  and  informs  that  the  Secretary 
of  Agriculture  will  be  authorized  to  increase  by  15%  the 
limitations  on  ini|)orts  of  foreign  cheeses  "for  each  type 
or  variety  which  he  might  deem  necessary,  taking  into  con- 
sideration the  broad  effects  on  international  relationship 
and  trade." 

The  Committee  of  conference  has  moreover  stated  in 
its  report  that  the  control  on  cheese  imports  will  not  be 
exercised  with  respect  to  types  of  cheeses,  such  as  Roque- 
fort and  Switzerland  Swiss,  which,  because  of  their  U.S. 
selling  price,  arc  clearly  not  competitive  with  domestically 
produced  cheeses. 

The  Italian  Embassy  wishes  to  call  attention  to  the 
fact  that  Italian  cheeses,  although  not  specifically  men- 
tioned in  the  congressional  records,  are  not  competitive 
loith  the  domestic  production  and  therefore  should  be 
exempted  from  import  control. 

As  pointed  out  in  previous  notes  of  this  Embas.sy,  Italian 
cheeses  exported  to  the  United  States  consist  largely  of 
sheep's  milk  cheeses  such  as  Pecorino  and  Provolone  (not 
produced  in  this  country),  or,  as  in  the  case  of  Parmigiano, 
Reggiano  and  other  Italian  grating  cheeses,  they  are 
subject  to  particularly  lengthy  processes  of  production 
and  seasoning,  which  causes  their  selling  price  in  the 
United  States  to  be  50%  higher  than  the  American  product. 

The  differentials  in  current  retail  prices  of  these  Italian 
cheeses  and  American  type  are  as  high  or  higher  than 
those  of  Roquefort  and  Switzerland  Swiss  cheese.  For 
this  reason  the  Italian  Embassy  insists  that  Italian 
cheeses  be  exempted  from  import  control  as  they  are  not 
competitive  witli  domestically  produced  cheeses. 

The  difference  in  prices  between  Italian  type  and  other 

'Two  previous  notes  dated  .July  7,  19.52  and  Mar.  2,  1953 
have  been  sent  by  the  Government  of  the  Netherlands. 

'  For  text  of  a  note  rrrbnle  from  the  Italian  Government 
dated  .Ian.  15,  1952,  together  with  the  U.S.  reply  of  Apr.  15, 
see  Bulletin  of  Apr.  28,  19.52,  pp.  060-661. 


558 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


foreign  and  domestic  cheeses  has  been  reported  In  the 
Congressional  Record  of  June  19  ( page  7781 ) .  The  prices 
of  typical  Italian  cheese  and  domestic  production  are  as 
follows : 

Cheese  type  Retail  price 

Italian  Parmigiano   (imported) $1.29-1.80 

American    Parmesan 0.  75-0.  85 

Italian  HegKiano   (imported) 1.15-2.25 

American  type 0.  89 

Italian  Pecoiino  Romano  (imported) 0.95-1.19 

American  type 0.69 

Italian  Provolone  (imported) 1.19-1.30 

American    Provolone 0.  65-0.  69 

The  Italian  Embassy  asks  the  Department  of  State  to 
kindly  bring  these  facts  to  the  attention  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  Agriculture,  so  that  Italian  typical  cheeses  may 
be  exempted  from  import  controls,  on  the  same  basis  as 
Roquefort  and  Switzerland  Swiss,  which  in  the  report 
of  the  conference  have  been  mentioned  as  an  example 
(i.  e..  "such  as"). 

In  the  event  that  the  Department  of  Agriculture  should 
exempt  only  these  two  types  of  cheeses  mentioned  in  the 
report,  the  Italian  Embassy  wishes  to  point  out  that  such 
treatment  would  constitute  a  discrimination  against 
Italian  cheeses,  particularly  in  view  of  the  even  more 
striking  characteristics  and  price  differentials  of  the 
Italian  cheese  with  the  American  domestic  product,  and 
in  view  also  of  the  serious  damage  that  is  being  caused 
to  the  Italian  economy  by  recent  import  restrictions. 

The  cheese  quotas  have  deprived  Italy  of  the  possibility 
to  earn  an  estimated  $2,000,000  which  would  have  been 
used  to  buy  United  States  products  (especially  agricul- 
tural products). 

Restrictions  against  cheese  exports  to  the  United  States 
bear  chiefly  on  Sardinia  and  other  regions  of  Southern 
Italy  for  which  the  manufacture  of  cheese  has  been  for 
centuries  the  main  source  of  livelihood.  As  it  is  known, 
the  communist  agitators  have  seized  upon  the  economic 
distress  in  these  regions  resulting  from  United  States  im- 
port restrictions,  to  foment  trouble  and  disorder. 

For  the  above  reasons,  the  Embassy  urges  the  suspen- 
sion of  any  restrictions  on  typical  Italian  cheeses,  in  har- 
mony with  the  recent  decisions  of  Congress  to  exempt  from 
import  control  foreign  cheeses  which  are  not  competitive 
with  American  products. 

The  Italian  Embassy  expresses  Its  thanks  to  the  De- 
partment of  State  for  its  consideration  and  assistance. 


Argentine  Note  of  March  5,  1953 

Mr.  Secret aky  : 

I  have  the  honor  to  inform  Your  Excellency  that,  with 
the  return  of  climatic  conditions  to  normalcy,  the  produc- 
tion of  cheese  has  increased  in  Argentina,  and  this  has 
made  it  possible  again  to  build  up  considerable  exportable 
stocks. 

Argentina  has  traditionally  been  a  large  exporter  of 
cheeses  to  the  United  States,  especially  cheeses  of  the 
Italian  type,  so  sought  after  by  consumers  in  this  country. 
As  a  result  of  the  extraordinary  drought  which  occurred 
in  my  country  in  recent  years,  Argentine  exports  of  cheese 
to  the  Uiited  States  have  declined  greatly,  particularly 
since  lO.ll. 

Our  Government  had  the  opportunity  on  previous  oc- 
casions to  express  its  opinion  regarding  the  harm  done 
to  the  trade  between  our  two  countries  by  the  provisions 
of  Section  104  of  the  Defense  Production  Act  of  1950,  and 
the  subsequent  amendment  thereof  permitting  one-third 
of  the  quotas  fixed  for  each  date  to  be  transferred  to 
another  country,  according  to  supply  needs.  The  amend- 
ment has  meant  a  considerable  cut  in  Argentina's  quota 
in  favor  of  Italy.    These  provisions  are  making  their  nega- 


tive effects  especially  felt  at  a  time  when  the  recovery 
of  Argentine  production  permits  considerably  increasing 
the  shipments  to  the  United  States.  Argentina  is  at  pres- 
ent in  a  position  to  fill  the  entire  quota  fixed  in  the  said 
legal  provision,  including  the  one-third  transferred  to 
Italy,  and  we  therefore  respectfully  request  that  this 
situation  be  given  consideration  in  the  amounts  to  be 
imported  to  the  end  of  the  present  period,  i.  e.,  June  30 
of  this  year.  We  likewise  request  that,  should  new  quotas 
be  established  for  the  year  1953-54,  full  consideration  he 
given  to  the  Argentine  situation.  In  such  an  event,  we 
also  request  modification  of  the  present  basis  for  tlie 
assignment  of  quotas,  which  took  the  average  for  the 
years  1948-50  as  a  period  showing  the  proportions  for  each 
country  and  each  importer.  We  aflSrm  that  the  adoption 
of  that  period  was  not  really  fair,  for  during  those  years 
imports  from  Argentina  declined  in  comparison  with 
previous  years,  as  a  result  of  the  drought. 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  Argentina  had  exported  substan- 
tial quantities  from  1940  on.  In  some  of  those  years,  the 
figure  of  10,000  tons  per  year  was  exceeded.  Thus  tlie 
ratios  between  Argentine  cheese  imports  and  total  cheese 
imports  into  the  United  States  were  very  high  during 
those  years,  in  several  instances  exceeding  80  percent. 
Those  quantities  and  especially  the  ratios  decreased  ap- 
preciably from  1947,  so  that  in  the  three-year  period 
adopted  as  a  base  (1948-50),  Argentine  imports  were 
reduced  to  an  average  of  3,500  tons  and  represented  only 
20.6  percent  of  the  total  imports  of  the  United  States, 
whereas  adopting  a  longer  period  and  therefore  one  more 
representative  of  the  situation  of  international  trade, 
for  example,  the  period  1938-1950,  leads  to  tlie  conclusion 
that  Argentine  exports  to  the  United  States  averaged 
4,500  tons,  or  nearly  35  percent  of  the  total  imports. 

Now,  if  reference  is  made  only  to  cheeses  subject  to 
quota,  which  comprise  most  of  the  cheeses  that  Argentina 
exports  to  the  United  States,  the  proportions  for  the 
periods  1048-50  and  1938-50  are  32  percent  and  51  per- 
cent, respectively.  We  therefore  maintain  that  the  abso- 
lute quantities  and  the  proportions  adopted  for  Argentina 
according  to  the  regulations  do  not  represent  the  true 
share  that  has  traditionally  fallen  to  our  country  in  the 
total  imports. 

It  behooves  us  to  mention  the  circumstances  that  cheese 
imports  are  proportionately  very  small  in  the  United 
States  domestic  market  and  are  steadily  decreasing. 
From  somewhat  more  than  10  percent  at  the  beginning  of 
the  thirties,  these  imports  have  declined  appreciably 
and  are  now  oscillating  around  3  i)ercent,  so  tliat  they 
cannot  cause  serious  disturbances  in  the  domestic  market 
or  in  production,  nor  can  they  be  reflected  in  increased 
expenses  resulting  from  the  Government  price-support 
policy. 

Furthermore,  the  maintenance  of  quotas  does  not  seem 
to  be  in  accord  with  the  new  trends  of  tlie  Government's 
economic  policy  or  with  the  necessary  expansion  of 
regional  economies,  a  basic  factor  in  the  general  advance- 
ment of  well-being  in  the  world. 

For  these  reasons  and  in  compliance  with  express  in- 
structions from  my  Government,  I  request  Your  Excel- 
lency to  be  so  good  as  to  see  that  the  proper  authorities 
of  tlie  United  States  Government  consider  tlie  elimination 
of  the  quota  system  affecting  Argentine  cheese  imports 
or,  failing  that,  to  have  a  new  analysis  made  of  the 
present  system  of  distribution  of  quotas  of  the  said 
product,  so  that  it  may  be  fairer  and  may  definitively 
permit  a  substantial  increase  in  Argentine  cheese  exports 
to  the  United  States,  which  my  country  will  be  in  a  posi- 
tion to  satisfy  to  the  extent  required. 

I  avail  myself  of  the  opportunity  to  express  to  Your 
Excellency  the  assurances  of  my  highest  and  most  dis- 
tinguislied  consideration. 

[Signed]     Hip6lito  J.  Paz 
Ambassador 


April  13,  1953 


559 


April  13,  1953 


Index 


Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  720 


Agriculture 

Department    opposes    continuation    of    certain 

agricultural  Imports  (texts  of  notes)   .     .     .       554 
Technical  cooperation  agreement  with  Pakistan  .       531 

American  Principles 

The  pattern  of  U.S. -Indian  relations  (Allen)  523 

Asia 

BURMA:  Asks  discontinuance  of  U.S.  aid  pro- 
gram (telegraphic  text) 530 

Control    of   shipments    to    Communist    China, 

North  Korea 532 

INDIA:    The   pattern   of   U.S.-Indlan   relations 

(Allen) 523 

JAPAN:    Treaty  of  friendship,  commerce,   and 

navigation 531 

KOREA:  Proposal  for  settlement  of  prisoner- 
of-war  question  (Chou  En-lal,  White,  Clark, 
Molotov) 526 

PAKISTAN:  Technical  cooperation  agreement  .      531 

Congress 

Current  legislation  on  foreign  policy  listed  .     .      533 

Europe 

CZECHOSLOVAKIA;  Subversion  charges  against 

U.S.  refuted  (Lodge) 539 

Fourthanniversaryof  NATO  (Eisenhower, Dulles)  .  525 
GERMANY:  Visit  of  Chancellor  Adenauer  .  .  529 
Review  of  the  £!ce  Economic  Survey  of  Europe 

(Camp) 534 

U.S.S.R.:  Assessment  of  Soviet  gestures  (Dulles)  .       524 

Foreign  Service 

Confirmations   (Allison,  Taft) 553 

Human  Rights 

Commission  on  Human  Rights 649 

International  Meetings 

International  Materials  Conference 548 

U.S.  DELEGATIONS: 

Commission  on  Human  Rights 549 

Economic  and  Social  Council 550 

U.N.  Commission  on  Narcotic  Drugs  ....       550 

Mutual  Aid  and  Defense 

Burma  asks  discontinuance  of  U.S.  aid  program  .       530 


Check  List  of  Department  of  State 
Press  Releases:  Mar.  30-Apr.  3, 1953 

Releases  may  be  obtained  from  the  OlBce  of  the 
Si)ecial  Assistant  for  Press  Relations,  Department 
of  State,  Washington  25,  D.  C. 

Subject 

Poland :  Publication  attacking  U.S. 
U.N.  Commission  on  narcotics 
Gen.  Clark  :  Repatriation  of  sick  Pow's 
15th  session  of  Ecosoc 
Commission  on  human  rights 
Linder :  Section  104  restrictions 
Adenauer :  Itinerary  of  U.S.  visit 
Dulles-McCarthy  meeting 
Non-renewal  of  VOA  contracts 
Friendship  treaty  with  .Japan 
Validation  of  German  dollar  bonds 
Suppl.  Pt.  4  agreement  with  Pakistan 
Assessment  of  Soviet  gestures 

t  Held  for  a  later  issue  of  the  Bitlletin. 


No. 

Date 

tl61 

3/30 

162 

3/30 

im 

3/31 

164 

3/31 

165 

3/31 

166 

4/1 

167 

4/1 

168 

4/1 

tl69 

4/1 

170 

4/2 

tl71 

4/2 

172 

4/3 

173 

4/3 

National  Security  Council 

Planning    board    to    assist    National    Sectu'lty 

Council 530 

North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization 

Fourth  anniversary  of  Nato  (Elsenhower,  Dulles) .      625 

Prisoners  of  War 

Proposals  for  settlement  of  Korean  prisoner-of- 
war  question  (Chou  En-lal,  White,  Clark, 
Molotov) 626 

State,  Department  of 

Department  opposes  continuation  of  extraor- 
dinary restrictions  on  certain  agricultural 
imports    (texts   of   notes) 564 

Strategic  Materials 

International  Materials  Conference 548 

Technical  Cooperation  and  Development 

Technical  cooperation  agreement  with  Pakistan  .       531 

Trade 

Control    of    shipments    to    Communist    China, 

North  Korea 532 

Department  opposes  continuation  of  extraor- 
dinary restrictions  on  certain  agricultural 
Imports    (texts  of   notes) 554 

Treaty  of  friendship,  commerce,  and  navigation 

with    Japan 531 

Treaty  Information 

Treaty  of  friendship,  commerce,  and  navigation 

with    Japan 531 

United  Nations 

Current  U.N.  documents:  A  selected  bibli- 
ography   538 

Czechoslovak   subversion   charges   against   U.S. 

refuted  (Lodge) 539 

Economic  and  Social  Council 550 

Progress     toward     universal      equal      suffrage 

(Hahn) 546 

Proposal  for  settlement  of  Korean  prisoner-of- 
war  question  (Chou  En-lal,  White,  Clark, 
Molotov) 526 

Review  of  the  EcE  Economic  Survey  of  Europe 

(Camp) 534 

U.N.  Commission  on  Narcotic  Drugs     ....      550 

U.S.  In  the  U.N 561 

Name  Index 

Adenauer,    Konrad 629 

Allen,  George  V 523 

Allison.  John  M 653 

Ansllnger,  Harry  J 550 

Camp,  Miriam 534 

Chou  En-lal 526 

Clark,  General 526 

Cutler,  Robert 530 

Dulles,  Secretary 524,  525,  532 

Eisenhower,   President 524,  525,  530 

Halin,  Mrs.  Lorena  B 546 

Kotschnig,  Walter  M 550 

Linder,    Harold    F 554 

Lodge,  Henry  Cabot,  Jr 639 

Lord.  Mrs.  Oswald 649 

McCarthy.    Senator 632 

Molotov,    V.    M 526 

Murphy,  Robert  D 531 

Okazaki.   Katsuo 631 

Sao    Hkun    Hklo 630 

Sebald,    William 630 

Taft.  William  Howard  III 553 

Wadsworth,    James   J.,   Jr 560 

White,    Lincoln 626 

U.  S.  GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE:  1953 


tJ/ie/  ,^^^^^^fi6/^[e^ /^t>^z^ 


Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  721 
April  20,  1953 


THE  PAN  AMERICAN  UNION:  A  TRUE  COMMUNITY 

OF   EQUAL  NATIONS   •  Address  by  the  President     .      .      563 

TALKS  ON  REPATRIATION  OF  SICK  AND  WOUNDED 
PRISONERS: 
Summary  of  Meetings  at  Panmunjom,  April  6-9     .     .     570 

Statement  by  Ambassador  Lodge 574 

Text  of  Agreement  Signed  April  11 576 

PUERTO  RICO'S  NEW  SELF-GOVERNING  STATUS     .    584 

U.S.  POLICY  ON  HUMAN  RIGHTS: 

President's  Message  to  the  Human  Rights  Commission  .  580 

Secretary  Dulles'  Letter  to  Mrs.  Lord 579 

Statement  by  Mrs.  Lord 581 

THE  MAKING  OF  TREATIES  AND  EXECUTIVE 

AGREEMENTS   •   Statement  by  Secretary  Dulles   ...      591 


For  index  see  back  cover 


Boston  Public  Library 
Superintendent  of  Documents 

MAY  2  0  1953 


Me  Qle/ia^l^e^ ^/ 9Lte    JOUllGtlD. 


Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  721  •  Publication  5036 
April  20,  1953 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents 

U.S.  Qovemnient  Printing  Office 

Washington  25,  D.C. 

Prick: 

62  issues,  domestic  $7.50,  foreign  $10,25 

Single  copy,  20  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has 
been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  tbe  Budget  (January  22, 1962). 

Note:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  Department 
or  State  Bulletin  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  BULLETIN, 
a  weekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publications, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  with  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  work  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETIN  includes 
selected  press  releases  on  foreign  pol- 
icy issued  by  the  White  House  and 
the  Department,  and  statements  and 
addresses  made  by  the  President  and 
by  the  Secretary  of  State  and  other 
officers  of  the  Department,  as  well  as 
special  articles  on  various  phases  of 
international  affairs  and  the  func- 
tions of  the  Department.  Informa- 
tion is  included  concerning  treaties 
and  international  agreements  to 
which  the  United  States  is  or  may 
become  a  party  and  treaties  of  gen- 
eral international  interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
well  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  internatioruil  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


The  Pan  American  Union:  A  True  Community  of  Equal  Nations 


Address  hy  the  President  * 


My  pride  and  pleasure  in  participating  in  the 
ceremonies  today  have  a  simple  source.  They 
spring  from  the  pride  which  the  whole  citizenry 
of  the  United  States  feels  in  the  Pan  American 
Union  and  the  ideals  for  which  it  stands. 

The  code  that  governs  our  union  is  founded 
upon  the  most  deeply  held  moral  convictions.  And 
this  fact  makes  especially  appropriate  our  meet- 
ing on  this,  our  Sabbath  Day. 

Ours  is  an  historic  and  meaningful  unity.  It 
has  been,  for  our  whole  continent,  an  honest  and 
productive  unity.  It  can  be,  for  other  areas  of 
the  world,  a  prophetic  and  inspiring  unity.  For 
it  is  triumphant  testimony  before  all  the  world 
that  peace  and  trust  and  fellowship  can  rule  the 
conduct  of  all  nations,  large  and  small,  who  will 
respect  the  life  and  dignity  of  each  other. 

In  this  deepest  sense,  then,  we  nations  of 
America  do  more  than  enjoy  a  political  systern 
constructed  for  ourselves.  We  are  custodians  of 
a  way  of  life  that  can  be  instructive  for  all  man- 
kind. 

The  history  of  the  Americas  over  the  span  of 
the  63  years  since  the  founding  of  our  regional 
organization  has  not  been  spotlessly  perfect.  Like 
all  peoples,  our  nations — every  one  of  them,  the 
United  States  included — have  at  times  been  guilty 
of  selfish  and  thoughtless  actions.  In  all  dealings 
with  our  neighbors  we  have  not  always  bravely 
resisted  the  temptations  of  expediency. 

But  the  special  merit  of  the  Pan  American 
achievement  is  to  have  triumphed  as  well  as  we 
have  over  the  temptations  of  heedless  nationalism. 
We  have  seen  and  we  have  acted  on  the  need  to 
work  cooperatively  together  to  achieve  common 
purposes.  So  doing,  we  have  forged  a  true  com- 
munity of  equal  nations.  I  am  profoundly  dedi- 
cated to  doing  all  that  I  can  to  perfect  the  under- 
standing and  trust  upon  which  this  community 
must  rest. 


'Made  at  the  Pan  American  Union,  Washinjrton,  D.C., 
on  Apr.  12  and  released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House 
on  the  same  date. 

Apttl  20,   1953 


The  vitality  of  this  unity  springs,  first  of  all. 
from  our  common  acceptance  of  basic  moral  and 
juridical  principles.  But  it  is  inspired  no  less 
by  our  recognition  of  the  rights  of  each  of  our 
nations,  under  these  principles,  to  perfect  its  own 
individual  life  and  culture.  Ours  is  no  compul- 
sory unity  of  institutions.  Ours  is  a  unity  that 
welcomes  the  diversity,  the  initiative,  and  the 
imagination  that  make  our  common  association 
progressive  and  alive.  This  is  the  American 
way — the  free  way — by  which  people  are  bound 
together  for  the  common  good. 

I  know  that  these  facts,  these  simple  ideals,  are 
not  new.  But  they  are  given  a  new,  a  sharp  mean- 
ing, by  the  nature  of  the  tension  tormenting  our 
whole  world.  For  it  is  not  possible  for  this 
hemisphere  to  seek  security  or  salvation  in  any 
kind  of  splendid  isolation. 

The  forces  threatening  this  continent  strike  at 
the  very  ideals  by  which  our  peoples  live.  These 
forces  seek  to  bind  nations  not  by  trust  but  by 
fear.  They  seek  to  promote,  among  those  of  us 
who  remain  free  and  unafraid,  the  deadliest  divi- 
sions— class  against  class,  people  against  people, 
nation  against  nation.  They  seek  not  to  eradi- 
cate poverty  and  its  causes,  but  to  exploit  it  and 
those  who  suffer  it.  Against  these  forces  the 
widest  oceans  offer  no  sure  defense.  The  seeds 
of  hate  and  of  distrust  can  be  borne  on  winds  that 
heed  no  frontier  or  shore. 

Our  defense,  our  only  defense,  is  in  our  own 
spirit  and  our  own  will.  We  who  are  all  young 
nations,  in  whom  the  pioneering  spirit  is  still 
vitally  alive,  need  neither  to  fear  the  future  nor 
be  satisfied  with  the  present.  In  our  spiritual, 
cultural,  and  material  life,  in  all  that  concerns 
our  daily  bread  and  our  daily  learning,  we  do 
and  should  seek  an  ever  better  world. 

We  know  that  this  economic  and  social  better- 
ment will  not  be  achieved  by  engagintr  in  experi- 
ments alien  to  our  very  souls,  or  listening  to 
prophets  seeking  to  destroy  our  very  lives. 

We  know  that  it  can  come  to  pass  only  by  faith- 
fully applying  the  rules  of  national  conduct  we 

563 


know  to  have  been  tested  and  proved  wise:  A 
mutual  trust  that  makes  us  honorable  and  under- 
standing neighbors,  and  a  self-reliance  that  sum- 
mons each  nation  to  work  to  the  full  for  its  own 
welfare. 

I  do  not  think  it  unjust  to  claim  for  the  Govern- 
ment and  the  people  of  the  United  States  a  readi- 
ness, rarely  matched  in  history,  to  help  other  na- 
tions improve  their  living  standards  and  guard 
their  security.  Despite  unprecedented  burdens 
of  national  debt  and  worldwide  responsibility,  our 
people  have  continued  to  demonstrate  this 
readiness. 

Private  investment  has  been  the  major  stimulus 
for  economic  development  throughout  the  hemi- 
sphere. Beyond  this,  the  U.S.  Government  is 
today  engaged  with  our  sister  Republics  in  im- 
portant efforts  to  increase  agricultural  produc- 
tivity, improve  health  conditions,  encourage  new 
industries,  extend  transportation  facilities,  and 
develop  new  sources  of  power. 

The  pursuit  of  each  of  these  goals  in  any  one 
nation  of  the  Americas  serves  the  good  of  all  the 
Americas.  Kjiowing  this,  I  am  anxious  that  the 
Government  of  the  United  States  take  careful 
stock  of  the  economic  and  social  conditions  now 
prevailing  throughout  our  continent  and  of  all 
the  efforts  being  pressed  to  bring  a  better  life  to 
all  our  peoples.  Such  an  assessment  can  properly 
be  made  only  through  direct  personal  unc^rstand- 
ing  of  the  facts.  Because  my  current  duties  make 
impossible  my  making  personal  visits  of  courtesy 
to  the  countries  of  Latin  America,  as  I  wish  I 
could  do,  I  have  asked  my  brother,  Milton  Eisen- 
hower, president  of  Pennsylvania  State  College, 
to  visit  shortly  a  number  of  these  great  Republics. 
He  will  carry  to  each  of  the  governments  he  visits 
the  most  sincere  and  warm  greetings  of  this  ad- 
ministration. He  will  report  to  me,  to  Secretary 
of  State  Dulles,  and  to  Assistant  Secretary  Cabot 
on  ways  to  be  recommended  for  strengthening  the 
bonds  between  us  and  all  our  neighbors  in  this 
Pan  American  Union. 

Today,  Mr.  Chairman,  I  think  it  appropriate 
to  conclude  with  one  thought :  However  real  and 
just  be  our  concern  with  constructive  material  de- 
velopment, we  must  never  forget  that  the  strength 
of  America  continues  ever  to  be  the  spirit  of 
America. 

We  are  Christian  nations,  deeply  conscious  that 
the  foundation  of  all  liberty  is  religious  faith. 

Upon  all  our  peoples  and  nations  there  rests, 
with  equal  weight,  a  responsibility  to  serve  wor- 
thily the  faith  we  hold  and  the  freedom  we  cherish, 
to  combat  demagoguery  with  truth,  to  destroy 
prejudice  with  understanding  and,  above  all,  to 
thwart  our  common  enemies  by  our  fervent  dedi- 
cation to  our  common  cause. 

So  dedicated,  our  Republics,  united  in  spirit,  can 
look  forward  to  a  future  of  happy  and  productive 
peace. 


Observance  of  Pan  American  Day 


A    PROCLAMATION' 

Whereas,  the  Governing  Board  of  the  Pan  America! 
Union  recommended  in  1930  that  April  14  be  officially  ob 
served  each  year  by  every  member  country  as  Pan  Ameri 
ican  Day ;  and  | 

Whebeas  the  people  of  the  United  States  of  Americt 
customarily  have  joined  vclth  their  friends  and  neighbors 
in  the  other  American  republics  In  observing  Pan  Ameri 
can  Day ;  and 

Whereas  April  14,  1953,  will  mark  the  sixty-thW! 
anniversary  of  the  founding  of  the  organization  lonf 
known  as  the  Pan  American  Union,  which  now  serves  tu'i 
the  General  Secretariat  of  the  Organization  of  Amerlcait 
States  I  and 

Whereas  the  forthcoming  Tenth  Inter-American  Con' 
ference  of  the  Organization  of  American  States,  to  be  held 
at  Caracas,  Venezuela,  will  demonstrate  anew  to  peoples  i 
throughout  the  world  the  cooi)eration  and  good-will  among 
the  neighbors  of  the  Americas  which  have  contributed  sc  i 
much  to  their  spiritual,  as  well  as  material,  development: 
and  strength  ;  and  ' 

Whereas  It  is  the  firm  resolve  of  the  Government  and- 
the  people  of  the  United  States  of  America  that  the  ties- 
binding  the  twenty-one  sovereign  and  equal  Americai' 
republics  shall  be  maintained  and  strengthened : 

Now,  THEREFORE,  I,  Dwlght  D.  Elsenhower,  President  ol 
the  United  States  of  America,  do  hereby  proclaim  Tues- 
day, April  14,  1953,  as  Pan  American  Day,  and  I  direct! 
the  appropriate  officials  of  the  Government  to  arrange! 
for  the  display  of  the  flag  of  the  United  States  on  all| 
public  buildings  on  that  day. 

I  also  invite  the  Governors  of  the  States,  Territories,; 
and  possessions  of  the  United  States  to  Issue  similar' 
proclamations  for  the  observance  of  Pan  American  Day. 
And  I  urge  all  interested  organizations,  and  the  people, 
generally,  to  unite  in  suitable  ceremonies  commemorative ' 
of  the  founding  of  the  Pan  American  Union,  thereby  testi- ' 
fying  to  the  close  bonds  of  friendship  existing  between  the  ' 
people  of  the  United  States  and  those  of  the  other 
American  republics. 

In  WITNESS  WHEREOF,  I  have  hereunto  set  my  hand  and 
caused  the  Seal  of  the  United  States  of  America  to  be 
affixed.  ' 

Done  at  the  City  of  Washington  this  sixth  day  of  April '. 
in  the  year  of  our  Lord  nineteen  hundred  and 
(SEAL)   fifty-three,  and  of  the  Independence  of  the  United 
States  of  America  the  one  hundred  and  seventy- 
seventh. 


By  the  President : 


AV  <~'i-s-y  C-iZU  U-iCu.^  X.*<v^ 


John  Foster  Dulles 
Secretary  of  State 


'  18  Fed.  Reg.,  1953. 


564 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


J.S.  and  Germany  Discuss  Economic,  Political,  and  Cultural  Relations 


COMMUNIQUE  ON  ECONOMIC,  POLITICAL 
irALKS 

;'ress  release  183  dated  April  9 

I  The  President  of  the  United  States,  the  Secre- 
lary  of  State,  and  other  members  of  the  Cabinet 
nave  met  during  the  past  3  days  with  the  Chan- 
i-ellor  of  the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany  and 
iiad  a  full  and  frank  exchange  of  views  on  the 
.Torld  situation  in  general  and  on  American-Ger- 
inan  relations  in  particular.  The  conversations 
iX)ok  place  in  a  spirit  of  friendship  and  coopera- 
I  don  and  revealed  a  far-reaching  identity  of  views 
md  objectives. 

The  President  and  the  Chancellor  discussed  the 
effects  which  recent  developments  in  the  Soviet 
Drbit  might  have  on  the  East-West  conflict.  They 
were  fully  agreed  that,  while  no  opportunity 
should  be  missed  to  bring  about  a  general  relaxa- 
tion of  tension,  the  free  nations  of  the  West  must 
not  relax  their  vigilance  nor  diminish  their  efforts 
to  increase  their  unity  and  common  strength. 
They  were  further  agreed  that  if  the  Soviet  rulers 
are  genuinely  desirous  of  peace  and  cooperation 
among  all  nations,  they  could  furnish  no  better 
proof  of  their  good  will  than  by  permitting  gen- 
uinely free  elections  in  the  Soviet  occupied  Zone 
of  Germany  and  by  releasing  the  hundreds  of 
thousands  of  German  civilian  deportees  and  war 
prisoners  still  in  Soviet  hands.  They  further 
stated  their  joint  conviction  that  there  can  be  no 
lasting  solution  of  the  German  problem  short  of 
a  reunification  of  Germany  by  peaceful  means  and 
on  a  free  and  democratic  basis.  The  achievement 
of  this  purpose  calls  for  sustained  common  efforts 
of  the  signatory  powers  to  the  contractual  agree- 
ments signed  at  Bonn  last  year. 

There  was  unanimity  of  conviction  that  all  con- 
cerned should  press  forward  unwaveringly  toward 
European  unity  through  early  ratification  of  the 
treaty  establishing  a  European  Defense  Commu- 
nity. Achievement  of  this  goal  will  be  accom- 
panied by  the  establishment  of  German  inde- 
pendence and  sovereignty  under  the  contractual 
agreements.  The  Chancellor  declared  that  the 
Federal  Republic  of  Germany  is  ready  and  willing 
to  cooperate  on  a  basis  of  equality  and  partnership 
with  all  the  free  nations  of  the  West  in  strengthen- 


ing the  defenses  of  the  free  world.  The  Chancellor 
was  given  assurance  that  the  United  States  would 
supply  military  equipment  to  the  European  De- 
fense Community  to  assist  in  equipping  the  Ger- 
man contingents,  once  the  treaty  has  been  ratified. 

The  problem  of  the  Saar  was  discussed  and  it 
was  agreed  that  an  early  agreement  should  be 
sought  in  the  common  interest. 

Consideration  was  given  to  the  special  situation 
of  Berlin  and  admiration  expressed  for  the  politi- 
cal firmness  and  courage  of  its  inhabitants.  It 
was  agreed  that  the  moral  and  material  support 
needed  to  keep  the  city  strong  is  a  matter  of  pri- 
mary importance.  The  Chancellor  indicated  that 
he  had  in  mind  further  measures  to  increase  pro- 
duction and  reduce  unemployment.  The  Secre- 
tary stated  that  consideration  was  now  being  given 
to  assistance  by  the  U.S.  Government  to  invest- 
ment and  other  programs  to  improve  economic 
conditions  in  Berlin. 

The  Chancellor  indicated  the  great  difiiculties 
facing  the  Federal  Republic  because  of  the  ne- 
cessity to  assimilate  not  only  the  millions  of  ex- 
pellees who  came  earlier  from  eastern  areas  but 
the  renewed  stream  of  refugees  from  the  Soviet 
Zone  and  beyond.  The  President  and  Secretary 
of  State  recognized  the  great  efforts  undertaken 
by  the  Federal  Republic  to  care  for  these  homeless 
persons  and  to  preserve  economic  and  social  sta- 
bility. The  discussion  took  account  of  the  possi- 
bility that  the  Federal  Republic  and  Berlin  might 
be  unable  to  bear  this  burden  alone.  The  Director 
for  Mutual  Security  stated  that  careful  considera- 
tion of  this  matter  would  be  given  in  the  course  of 
the  preparation  of  the  Mutual  Security  Program 
for  the  year  beginning  July  1,  1963. 

The  Chancellor  raised  the  problem  of  war 
criminals.  The  future  of  the  war  criminals  now 
in  U.S.  custody  was  discussed.  The  U.S.  repre- 
sentative stated  that  his  Government  would  re- 
examine the  status  of  these  prisoners  and  would 
also  look  forward  to  the  possible  adoption  of  new 
review  procedures  with  German  participation,  as 
soon  as  German  ratification  of  the  treaties  was 
completed. 

The  representatives  of  both  Governments  ex- 
changed views  concerning  progress  toward  the 
freeing  and  expansion  of  world  trade  and  the 


April  20,    J  953 


565 


achievement  of  currency  convertibility.  The  Ger- 
man representatives  expressed  particular  interest 
in  the  reduction  of  tariffs  and  customs  admin- 
istrative barriers.  For  their  part,  the  U.S.  rep- 
resentatives noted  President  Eisenhower's 
statement  of  April  7  that  "the  world  must  achieve 
an  expanding  trade,  balanced  at  high  levels  which 
■will  permit  each  nation  to  make  its  full  contri- 
bution to  the  progress  of  the  free  world's  economy 
and  to  share  fully  the  benefits  of  this  progress." 

Representatives  of  the  two  Governments  dis- 
cussed a  number  of  specific  problems  connected 
with  the  normalization  of  commercial  relations 
between  the  United  States  and  Germany,  includ- 
ing the  prospects  for  increased  use  by  German 
exporters  of  the  trademarks  owned  l^y  German 
nationals  prior  to  "World  War  II.  It  was  noted 
that  considerable  progress  had  already  been 
achieved  in  making  such  trademarks  available  to 
former  German  owners  and  that  future  progress 
in  that  direction  was  being  sympathetically 
studied  by  the  United  States. 

Tlie  Chancellor  and  the  Secretary  of  State 
agreed  that  the  conclusion  of  a  new  treaty  of 
friendship,  commerce,  and  navigation  between  the 
United  States  and  the  Federal  Republic  would  be 
of  benefit  to  both  countries  and  that  negotiations 
for  such  a  treaty  should  begin  at  a  very  early  date. 
Meanwhile,  as  an  interim  measure,  the  two  Gov- 
ernments are  negotiating  an  agreement  to  restore 
to  force  the  1923  treaty  of  friendship,  commerce, 
and  consular  rights  as  it  stood  prior  to  the  war, 
taking  into  account  the  requirements  of  the  pres- 
ent situation.  This  interim  agreement,  when 
ratified  in  both  countries,  would,  among  other 
things,  re-establish  a  basis  on  which  businessmen 
of  each  country  would  be  able  to  reside  and  carry 
on  business  in  the  other. 

The  German  representatives  indicated  their  in- 
terest in  the  placing  of  off-shore  procurement 
contracts  in  Germany.  They  were  informed  that 
as  soon  as  the  contractual  and  European  Defense 
Community  treaties  have  entered  into  force,  the 
same  criteria  will  be  applied  in  the  placing  of  such 
contracts  in  Germany,  within  the  framework  of 
the  European  Defense  Community,  as  are  applied 
with  respect  to  the  placing  of  contracts  in  other 
European  countries. 

In  order  to  foster  closer  cultural  cooperation 
between  Germany  and  the  United  States  and  pro- 
mote mutual  understanding  between  their  two 
peoples,  an  exchange  of  notes  is  taking  place. 

The  two  Governments  reaffirmed  tlieir  common 
interest  in  controlling,  together  with  other  na- 
tions of  the  free  world,  the  movement  of  strategic 
materials  to  nations  whose  policies  jeopardize  the 
peace  and  security  of  the  free  world.  Both  Gov- 
ernments undertook  to  continue  action  to  that 
end,  and,  in  particular,  to  keep  under  constant 
review  the  list  of  items  which  from  time  to  time 
may  be  subject  to  embargo  to  Communist  China. 
The  representatives  of  the  Federal  Republic  also 


expressed  their  Government's  intention,  in  co- 
operation with  other  trading  and  maritime  na- 
tions, to  apply  supplementary  measures,  such  a5 
transshipment  controls,  against  violations  oi 
evasions  of  existing  strategic  controls. 

Announcement  is  being  made  simultaneously  ii 
the  two  capitals  of  the  return  to  the  Federal  Re- 
public of  approximately  350  vessels  formerly  ol 
German  ownership.  Arrangements  for  then 
transfer  to  German  authorities  will  be  completed 
by  the  U.S.  High  Commissioner  in  Germany. 

The  President  and  the  Chancellor  are  convinced 
that  the  conversations  just  concluded  have  madt 
a  solid  contribution  to  the  achievement  of  commor 
goals  of  the  two  countries,  in  strengthening  the 
ties  of  friendship  now  happily  re-established  and 
in  consolidating  the  aims  and  strength  of  the  free 
world. 


TRANSFER  OF  SHIPS  TO  GERMANY 

Press  release  1S3-A  dated  April  9 

Tlie  following  are  the  details  of  the  transfer  U. 
the  German  Federal  Republic  by  the  United  State; 
of  former  German  vessels  noted  in  the  joint  com- 
munique issued  on  April  9  at  the  conclusion  ol 
talks  in  Washington  between  Chancellor  Adenauei 
and  U.S.  officials. 

The  decision  to  return  these  vessels  to  Germar 
ownership  is  based  upon  the  essential  functior 
they  can  perform  in  Germany,  and  the  desire  ol 
the  United  States  to  relinquish  responsibility  foi 
their  ownership  before  the  contractual  agreements 
between  the  German  Federal  Republic  and  the 
United  States,  the  United  Kingdom,  and  France 
come  into  effect. 

The  United  States  is  returning  to  the  German 
Federal  Republic  350  of  the  vessels  which  the 
Tripartite  Naval  Commission  (Tnc)  allocated  to 
the  United  States  in  1946.  The  vessels  are  pres- 
ently on  charter  to  the  German  economy. 

In  June  of  1917  the  Department  of  the  Navy 
transferred  to  the  Department  of  the  Army 
(Omgus)  these  vessels.  Omgus  (U.S.  Military 
Governor  in  Germany)  in  turn  made  the  vessels 
available  to  tlie  German  economy  on  a  charter 
basis.  This  was  done  to  assist  the  German  econ- 
omy to  meet  inland  waterway  and  coastal  shipping 
requirements;  to  increase  food  production  through 
the  availability  of  124  trawlers,  cutters,  and 
luggers  for  fishing ;  and  to  make  possible  employ- 
ment in  German  shipyards  by  making  available 
20  floating  docks  and  four  pontoons. 

The  original  fleet  was  reduced  in  size  through 
marine  casualties,  scrapping  of  overage  vessels, 
transfer  of  certain  vessels  to  tlie  control  of  the 
U.S.  Army  and  Navy,  and  the  sale  of  vessels  sur- 

&lus  to  the  German  economy,  and  U.S.  needs  by  the 
ffice  of  the  Foreign  Liquidation  Commission. 
The  present  charterers  of  the  Tnc  vessels  in 
the  service  of  the  German  economy  have  spent  con- 
siderable funds  to  rehabilitate  and  convert  these 


566 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


ex -German  naval  vessels  to  make  them  suitable 
and  economical  to  operate  in  the  German  com- 
mercial service.  These  capital  improvements  to 
the  vessels  were  amortized  by  the  operators  by 
deducting  an  agreed  amount  from  the  charter  fees 
duo  Gmgus/Hicog. 

Tlie  1950  appraised  value  of  the  vessels  being 
returned  to  tlie  Federal  Republic  is  approximately 
Dt'utschemarks  30  million  or  $7.1  million. 

The  following  types  of  vessels  will  be  included 
in  the  transfer  to  the  Federal  Republic : 

Inland  waterway  vessels — dumb  and  self-propelled, 

tank  and  dry  cargo 
Coastal  tankers  and  dry  cargo  vessels 
Tug  boats — harbor,  river,  and  deep  sea 
Small  passenger  boats  and  ferries 
Fire,  pilot,  and  police  boats 
Resean-h  vessels 
Hotel  ships 

Salvage  and  diving  vessels 
Dredgers — suction  and  bucket 
Floating  docks  and  pontoons 
Fishing  trawlers,  cutters,  luggers 
Workshop  and  miscellaneous  vessels 

The  cargo-carrying  type  vessels  being  returned 
under  this  agreement  have  a  maximum  deadweight 
of  3,000  tons.  The  largest  floating  dock  has  a 
lifting  capacity  of  16,000  tons. 

Final  arrangements  for  the  return  of  these  ves- 
sels, the  time  and  date  of  transfer,  and  other  details 
will  be  worked  out  between  the  competent  author- 
ities of  HicoG  and  the  Federal  Republic. 


U.S.—GERMAN   UNDERSTANDINGS 
ON   CULTURAL  EXCHANGE 

On  A-pril  9  Secretary  Dulles  and  Chancellor 
Adenauer  exclianged  notes  concerning  cultural 
exchange  between  the  United  States  and  the  Fed- 
eral Eepublic  of  Germany.  Following  are  the 
texts  of  the  notes,  together  with  the  texts  of  re- 
marks made  by  Secretary  Dulles  and  Chancellor 
Adenauer  at  the  time  of  the  exchange  of  notes. 

Texts  of  Notes 

Press  release  1S4  dated  April  9 

ExcELLENCT :  I  liavB  the  honor  to  refer  to  con- 
versations which  have  recently  taken  place  be- 
tween representatives  of  our  two  Governments 
concerning  the  cultural  relations  between  the 
United  States  of  America  and  the  Federal  Re- 
public of  Germany.  I  understand  that  it  will  be 
the  intent  of  each  Government : 

1.  To  encourage  the  coming  together  of  the 
peoples  of  the  United  States  of  America  and  the 
Federal  Republic  of  Germany  in  cultural  coopera- 
tion and  to  foster  mutual  understanding  of  the 
intellectual,  artistic,  scientific,  and  social  lives  of 
the  peoples  of  the  two  countries. 

2.  Recognizing  that  the  understanding  between 
its  peoples  will  be  promoted  by  better  knowledge 


of  the  history,  civilization,  institutions,  literature, 
and  other  cultural  accomplishments  of  the  people 
of  the  other  Government,  to  encourage  the  exten- 
sion of  such  knowledge  within  its  own  territory. 

3.  To  use  its  best  efforts  to  extend  to  citizens  of 
the  other  Government  engaged  in  activities  pur- 
suant to  this  agreement  such  favorable  treatment 
with  respect  to  entry,  travel,  residence,  and  exit 
as  is  consistent  with  its  national  laws. 

4.  To  promote  and  facilitate  the  interchange 
between  the  United  States  of  America  and  the 
Federal  Republic  of  Germany  of  prominent  citi- 
zens, specialists,  professors,  teachers,  students  and 
other  youths,  and  qualified  individuals  from  all 
walks  of  life. 

5.  As  facilitating  the  interchange  of  persons 
referred  to,  to  look  with  favor  on  establishment 
of  scholarships,  travel  grants,  and  other  forms  of 
assistance  in  the  academic  and  cultural  institutions 
within  its  territory.  Each  Government  will  also 
endeavor  to  make  available  to  the  other  informa- 
tion requested  by  the  other  with  regard  to  facili- 
ties, courses  of  instruction  or  other  opportunities 
which  may  be  of  interest  to  nationals  of  the  other 
Government. 

6.  To  endeavor,  whenever  it  appears  desirable, 
to  establish  or  to  recommend  to  appropriate  agen- 
cies the  establishment  of  committees,  composed  of 
representatives  of  the  two  countries,  to  further 
the  purpose  of  this  agreement. 

The  responsibilities  assumed  by  each  Govern- 
ment under  this  agreement  will  be  executed  within 
the  framework  of  domestic  policy  and  legislation, 
procedures  and  practices  defining  internal  juris- 
diction of  governmental  and  other  agencies  within 
their  respective  territories. 

This  understanding  shall  be  applicable  also  in 
the  territory  of  Berlin  as  soon  as  the  Government 
of  the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany  makes  a  con- 
forming declaration  to  the  Government  of  the 
United  States  of  America. 

I  have  the  honor  to  propose  that,  if  these  under- 
standings meet  with  the  approval  of  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany,  the 
present  note  and  your  note  concurring  therein  will 
be  considered  as  confirming  those  understandings, 
effective  on  the  date  of  your  note. 

Accept,  Excellency,  the  renewed  assurances  of 
highest  consideration. 

John  Foster  Dulles 


Mr.  Secretary  or  State:  I  have  the  honor  to 
acknowledge  the  receipt  of  Your  Excellency's  note 
of  April  9,  1953,  concerning  the  cultural  relations 
between  the  United  States  of  America  and  the 
Federal  Republic  of  Germany.  I  understand  that 
it  will  be  the  intent  of  each  government : 

[Points  1  through  6  of  the  U.S.  note  are  repeated 
here.] 

I  have  the  honor  to  concur  in  the  proposal  made 


Apti\  20,   1953 


567 


in  Your  Excellency's  note  and  to  inform  you  that 
the  understandings  set  forth  therein  meet  "with  the 
approval  of  the  Government  of  the  Federal  Re- 
public of  Germany.  That  note  and  the  present 
note,  accordingly,  are  considered  as  confirming 
those  understandings,  which  become  effective  on 
this  date. 

Accept,  Excellency,  the  assurances  of  my  high- 
est and  most  distinguished  consideration. 

KoNRAD  Adenauer 

Remarks  by  Secretary  Dulles  and  Chancellor 
Adenauer 

Press  release  185  dated  April  9 

Secretary  Dulles 

Mr.  CharweUor:  The  notes  which  we  are  about 
to  exchange  manifest  the  desire  of  my  Govern- 
ment to  re-establish  friendly  relations  with  the 
people  of  the  German  Federal  Republic.  Cul- 
tural exchange  between  the  United  States  and 
Germany  has  in  the  past  contributed  substantially 
to  better  mutual  understanding.  In  giving  formal 
recognition  to  this  exchange,  we  wish  to  empha- 
size a  reciprocal  character;  beyond  that,  we  wish 
to  encourage  private  citizens  and  organizations 
of  both  countries  to  contribute  in  ever-increasing 
measure  to  this  cultural  exchange. 

Chancellor  Adenauer 

[Translation] 

Mr.  Secretary:  I  am  glad  that  during  my  visit 
to  Washington  we  could  have  this  exchange  of 
notes.  I  agree  with  you  that  the  establishment 
of  such  cultural  relations  is  the  best  way  of  giving 
expression  to  a  common  sentiment  and  the  best 
means  to  bring  our  two  peoples  together  to  serve 
peace  and  freedom. 

ARRIVAL  OF  CHANCELLOR  ADENAUER 

Press  release  176  dated  April  7 

Following  are  the  texts  of  statements  of  welcome 
made  by  Vice  President  Nixon  and  Secretary 
Dulles  to  Chancellor  Konrad  Adenauer  of  the 
Federal  Rejniblic  of  Germany  on  his  arrival  at  the 
Washington  National  Airport  on  April  7,  together 
with  the  reply  of  Chancellor  Adenauer: 


As  a  matter  of  fact,  in  a  park  only  a  stone's 
throw  away  from  the  house  in  which  you  will  stay, 
a  statue  has  been  erected  which  expresses  the  grati- 
tude of  the  American  people  for  what  he  did  for 
us  during  that  period.  And  all  of  you,  of  course, 
are  aware  of  the  tremendous  contribution  which 
has  been  made  by  the  millions  of  (iermans  who 
have  become  American  citizens — a  contribution  to 
our  culture,  to  our  strength,  and  to  our  progress. 
It  .seems  to  us  that  one  of  the  great  tragedies  of 
our  generation  has  been  that  twice  within  almost 
a  generation  our  two  peoples  have  been  torn  asun- 
der by  conflict.  We  are  confident  that  we  are 
now  entering  a  new  era — a  new  era  of  peace  and 
friendsliip  between  our  two  peoples  and  we  are 
confident — we  hope  and  pray  that  under  your 
leadership  and  the  leadership  of  those  in  your 
Government  in  the  new  Germany,  and  with  our 
leadership,  that  together  we  can"  re-e-stablish  the 
old  bonds  of  friendship  which  for  so  long  repre- 
sented the  relationships  between  the  German  and 
the  American  people. 

I  recall  when  I  visited  Germany  in  1947  the 
terrible  destruction  that  we  saw  then.  Like  many 
who  visited  Germany  at  that  time,  I  wondered 
if  the  German  people  and  the  German  economv 
could  ever  recover.  But  under  your  leadership 
and  the  people  of  your  Government  with  new 
leaders  and  a  new  Germany,  a  remarkable  recovery 
has  taken  place,  and  Germany  is  fast  again  assum'- 
ing  Its  rightful  place  in  the  family  of  nations. 

We  hope  that  progress  can  continue,  and  I  am 
speaking  for  all  the  American  people  when  I  say 
that  we  are  hoping  and  praying  that  in  your  visit 
here,  working  with  our  leaders,  that  you  will  be 
able  to  make  a  contribution  to  the  peace  and 
friendship  which  should  exist  between  our  two 
countries. 

And  so,  therefore,  it  gives  me  a  great  deal  of 
pleasure  to  extend  on  behalf  of  the  President  of 
the  United  States  and  on  behalf  of  the  American 
people  our  heartfelt  welcome  to  you  and  to  the 
other  members  of  your  party.  And  we  are  hope- 
ful as  you  sit  down  with  our  leaders  that  you  will 
be  able  to  develop  a  program  which  will  be  of 
great  assistance  in  meeting  our  mutual  problems 
and  will  make  a  remarkable  contribution  to  the 
peace  and  friendship  which  will  mean  so  much  to 
the  people  of  the  world. 


The  Vice  President 

Mr.  Chancellor,  your  visit  marks  a  historic  oc- 
casion in  the  relationships  between  the  people  of 
Germany  and  the  United  States.  There  are  very 
few  American  schoolchildren  who  do  not  recall 
the  dramatic  period  in  the  American  War  for 
Independence  when  Baron  von  Steuben  helped 
to  train  the  disorganized  and  ragged  Continental 
soldiers  at  Valley  Forge  and  develop  the  forces 
which  went  on  to  win  the  victory  at  Yorktown 
which  resulted  in  the  independence  of  this  country. 

568 


Secretary  Dulles 

Mr.  Adenauer,  a  few  weeks  ago  you  did  me  the 
honor  of  greeting  me  when  I  arrived  at  your  capi- 
tal at  Bonn.  And  it  is  a  very  great  pleasure  and 
an  honor  to  me  now  to  reciprocate  by  meeting  you 
here  in  Washington.  That  honor  is  greater 'be- 
cause you  are,  I  think,  t\\Q  first  German  Chancellor 
in  office  to  ever  visit  the  United  States.  You  can 
be  sure  you  will  receive  here  a  very  hearty  wel- 
come, indeed. 

In    Europe  great  events  are   in   the  making. 

Department  of  State   Bulletin 


There  is  a  growing  sense  of  unity  and  strength 
which  has  long  been  desired,  needed,  but  never 
yet  realized.  We  have  great  hopes  now  that  they 
will  be  realized.  Those  hopes  are  based  largely 
upon  the  fact  that  there  is  in  Germany  the  strug- 
ixh  for  liberty  and  statesmanship  which  is  repre- 
sented by  yourself.  The  whole  world  can,  indeed, 
l>e  grateful  that  at  this  critical  time  Germany 
through  you  and  your  leadership  is  making  a  con- 
structive contribution  to  the  creation  of  this  unity 
and  strength  and  freedom  in  Europe  which  is  in- 
dispensable. 

T  am  glad,  Mr.  Chancellor,  that  you  will  not 
only  be  in  Washington  where  I  am  sure  we  will 
have  constructive  talks  with  our  government  lead- 
ers and  officials,  but  you  are  going  to  do  something 
more  than  be  in  Washington.  You  are  going  to 
travel  a  little  around  our  country  and  I  am  glad 
you  are  going  to  do  that.  This  will  give  you  a 
sense  of  the  welcome  not  only  here  but  a  welcome 
that  comes  out  of  the  hearts  of  the  American  peo- 
])le.     We  are  very  glad,  indeed,  that  you  are  here. 

TheXhancellor 

[Translation] 

Mr.  Vice  President,  Mr.  Secretary :  I  am  deeply 
moved  as  I  step  on  this  soil  of  your  Capital  by  the 
words  you  have  addressed  to  myself  and  to  the 
German  people.  They  were  so  warm  and  so  full 
of  deep  meaning  that  I  find  it  hard  to  reply  in  a 
very  good  manner. 

You,  Mr.  Vice  President,  have  spoken  of  Gen- 
eral von  Steuben.  I  thank  you  for  the  chivalrous 
manner  in  which  you  referred  to  the  long  period  of 
common  work  between  the  Germans  and  the  Amer- 
icans in  the  past  without  putting  too  much  em- 
phasis on  the  last  two  decades. 

You,  Mr.  Secretary,  spoke,  like  the  Vice  Presi- 
dent, of  new  tasks,  of  the  work  which  will  have  to 
be  done,  of  the  sacrifices  which  will  have  to  be 
made  by  all  men  of  good  will,  by  all  men  who  re- 
gard freedom,  right,  and  justice  as  the  highest 
goods  of  mankind ;  and  they  are  ready  to  defend 
these  bridges  and  goods  with  all  their  strength. 
Please  accept  from  me  in  this  memorable  moment, 
this  solemn  declaration. 

The  German  people  are  on  the  side  of  freedom. 
The  German  people  are  on  the  side  of  right  and 
justice  for  all  nations.  To  your  President,  whom 
I  hold  in  the  very  highest  esteem,  I  am  most 
sincerely  grateful,  and  so  are  the  German  people, 
for  the  opportunity  of  having  at  this  eventful 
time  the  frank  and  free  exchange  of  views  on 
all  questions  of  mutual  concern. 


As  the  representative  of  the  German  people  I 
would,  above  all,  like  to  thank  your  President 
and  the  American  people  for  all  the  help  that 
they  have  rendered  to  the  people  of  Germany  in 
a  spirit  of  true  human  sympathy.  This  we  shall 
never  forget.  We  shall  be  the  loyal  and  helpful 
partner  on  the  grave  and  difficult  road  on  which 
the  United  States  is  leading  mankind  to  freedom. 

Let  me  add  another  word,  Mr.  Secretary.  I 
well  remember  the  talks  we  had  in  Bonn,  the  free 
and  frank  discussions,  and  I  am  looking  forward 
to  continuing  these  discussions  with  you  now.  1 
am  particularly  looking  forward  to  seeing  again 
your  President,  whom  I  once  met  in  Bonn  when  he 
was  the  Supreme  Commander  of  Nato.  I  have  a 
very  high  respect  for  your  President,  and  I  am 
looking  forward  to  meeting  him  again. 

Validation  of  German  DoBlar  Bonds 

Press  release  171  dated  April  2 

The  Governments  of  the  United  States  and  the 
Federal  Republic  of  Germany  signed  a  further 
agreement  on  April  1  at  Bonn  concerning  valida- 
tion of  German  dollar  bonds.  The  agreement  is 
related  both  to  the  Agreement  on  German  Ex- 
ternal Debts  signed  at  London  last  February  27  ^ 
and  to  the  agreement  establishing  procedures  for 
validation  which  was  signed  at  Bonn  on  the  same 
day.=  It  will  be  submitted  to  the  Senate  for  ad- 
vice and  consent  to  ratification,  together  with  the 
Agreement  on  German  External  Debts  and  the 
related  agreements. 

The  purpose  of  validation  is  to  separate  valid 
bonds  from  those  which  were  looted  in  Germany 
during  World  War  II.  Under  the  terms  of  the 
Agreement  on  German  External  Debts,  only  obli- 
gations which  have  been  validated  will  be  eligible 
for  payment.  The  procedures  to  be  established 
in  accordance  with  the  agreement  of  February  27 
will  provide  the  mechanism  for  meeting  the  re- 
quirement of  validation. 

The  agreement  signed  April  1  provides  that 
German  dollar  bonds  will  not  be  enforceable  unless 
they  have  been  validated  in  accordance  with  the 
terms  of  the  earlier  agreement,  or  by  the  com- 
petent German  authorities.  This  will  serve  the 
interests  of  the  holders  of  validated  bonds,  for  it 
will  prevent  the  holders  of  looted  bonds  from  en- 
forcing payment  of  them  and  thus  reducing  the 
funds  available  for  the  payment  of  validated 
bonds. 


>  Bulletin  of  Mar.  9,  1953,  p.  373. 
'Ibid.,  p.  376. 


April  20,   1953 


569 


Talks  on  Repatriation  of  Sick  and  Wounded  Prisoners 


LETTER  FROM  THE  COMMUNIST  COMMANDERS 
TO  GEN.  MARK  W.  CLARK,  APRIL  2 

We  received  your  letter  dated  March  31,  1953.^ 
"We  agree  to  the  proposal  advanced  in  your  letter 
and  hereby  inform  you  that  the  liaison  group  of 
our  side  will  be  prepared  to  hold  meeting  with  the 
liaison  group  of  your  side  at  Panmunjom,  on  April 
6, 1953,  to  arrange  preliminarily  the  matter  of  ex- 
change by  both  sides  of  injured  and  sick  prisoners 
of  war  and  to  discuss  and  decide  on  the  date  for 
resuming  the  armistice  negotiations. 

Enclosed  please  find  a  copy  each  of  each  of  the 
statements  of  the  Government  of  the  People's  Re- 
public of  China  -  and  the  Government  of  the  Demo- 
cratic People's  Republic  of  Korea  ^  concerning  a 
proposal  on  the  question  of  repatriation  of  pris- 
oners of  war. 

Kim    II    Sung, 
Supreme  Commander  of  the  Korean 
Peofle^  Army 

Peng  Teh-Hual, 

Commander  of  the  Chinese 

People''s  Volunteers 

LIAISON  OFFICERS'  MEETINGS 

FoUoxcing  are  statetnents  issued  by  the  U.N. 
Command  at  Tokyo  swmnurizing  the  meetings 
held  at  Panmunjom  hy  Ual'ion  officers  appointed 
to  discuss  the  repatriation  of  sick  and  loounded 
prisoners  of  war.  The  U.N.  liaison  group  was 
headed  by  Rear  Adm..  John  C.  Daniel;  the  chief 
Commu7iist  liaison  officer  wa^  Maj.  Gen.  Lee  Sang 
Jo. 

Meeting  of  April  6 

1.  Senior  liaison  firoup  met  at  1000,  this  date.  Sub- 
stance of  record  follows : 

2.  Unc  :  "I  have  been  appointed  as  senior  member  of 
the  United  Nations  Command  liaison  group  for  the  purpose 
of  discussing  arrangements  for  the  repatriation  of  sick  and 
wounded  captured  personnel.  Here  are  my  credentials." 
(Hands  credentials  to  ilaj.  Gen.  Lee  Sang  Jo.) 

3.  Communists:  "I  will  show  you  my  credentials  in 
which  the  commander  of  our  side  appointed  me  responsible 


"  BuLi  ETiN  of  April.  13,  1935,  p.  528. 
'  rhid.,  p.  526. 
'  Not  printed. 


man  of  the  liaison  group  of  our  side."  (Hands  creden- 
tials to  Rear  Adm.  Daniel.) 

4.  Unc  :  "The  United  Nations  Command  is  pleased  that 
your  side  has  finally  accepted  our  proposal,  as  first  ad- 
vanced by  us  on  22  December  1951,  for  the  repatriation  of 
sick  and  wounded  captured  personnel  under  Article  109 
of  the  Geneva  Convention.'  Accordingly,  we  are  ready  to 
begin  immediately  the  implementation  of  plans  for  this 
repatriation. 

"The  United  Nations  Command  is  prepared  to  conduct 
the  repatriation  operations  at  Panmunjom  in  order  to  take 
advantage  of  the  neutral  area  already  estalilished.  For 
its  part,  the  United  Nations  Command  is  prepared  to  be- 
gin immediately  the  construction  of  necessary  facilities 
for  the  delivery  of  sick  and  wounded  captured  personnel 
held  in  its  custody,  and  the  receipt  of  sick  and  wounded 
United  Nations  Command  captured  personnel  held  by  your 
side. 

"The  United  Nations  Command  is  prepared  to  commence 
delivery  of  sick  and  wounded  captured  personnel  in  its 
custody  to  the  control  of  representatives  of  your  side  at 
Panmunjom  not  later  than  7  days  after  final  agreement 
on  repatriation  procedures  is  made  by  the  liaison  groups 
of  both  sides. 

"The  United  Nations  Command  proposes  to  deliver  sick 
and  wounded  captured  personnel  at  the  rate  of  approxi- 
mately 500  captured  personnel  per  day  until  delivery 
of  all  sick  and  wounded  captured  personnel  in  United 
Nations  Command  is  completed. 

"The  United  Nations  Command  will  continue  to  treat 
sick  and  wounded  captured  personnel  in  strict  accordance 
with  the  humanitarian  provisions  of  the  Geneva  Conven- 
tion as  long  as  they  remain  under  our  control. 

"In  order  to  insure  tliat  the  sick  and  wounded  captured 
personnel  of  both  sides  are  given  maximum  protection 
during  the  full  period  of  this  repatriation,  our  side  is  pre- 
pared to  agree  with  you  on  procedures  to  guarantee  im- 
munity from  aerial  attacks  to  all  rail  and  motor  move- 
ments carrying  sick  and  wounded  captured  personnel  in 
Kaesong  and  Munsan-Ni  respectively,  and  thence  through 
the  presently  established  immunity  routes  to  Panmunjom. 

"During  the  period  while  sick  and  wounded  personnel 
are  being  repatriated  througli  Panmunjom,  the  22  Octo- 
ber 1951  agreement '  between  our  officers  will  of  course 
remain  in  effect.  The  liaison  groups  of  both  sides  and 
their  parties  should  have  free  access  to,  and  free  move- 
ment within,  the  Panmunjom  conference  site  area.  The 
composition  of  each  liaison  group  and  its  parties  should 
be  as  determined  by  tlie  senior  member,  but  to  avoid 
congestion,  each  side  should  agree  to  limit  the  total  num- 
ber of  personnel  under  its  control,  including  captured 
personnel,  which  will  be  allowed  at  any  one  time  in  the 
conference  site  area. 

"In  order  to  expedite  the  final  arrangements  for  the 
repatriation  of  sick  and  wounded  captured  personnel,  our 
side  has  prepared  a  draft  of  a  proposed  agreement  in- 


'  Bulletin  of  Aiir.  6,  19.53,  p.  495. 
'  Ibid.,  Feb.  IS,  1952,  p.  270. 


570 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


corporatins  the  foreKoins  provisions.  I  now  present  you 
a  copy  of  this  proposed  draft"  for  your  study  and  any 
recommendations  you  may  have.  I  propose  that  we  ap- 
point officers  to  discuss  immediately  the  administrative 
details  involved  in  this  repatriation. 

"I  propose  that  we  simultaneously  exchange  the  esti- 
mated figures  by  nationality  of  sick  and  wounded  cap- 
tured personnel  under  each  side's  control  who  will  be 
repatriated  under  the  provisions  of  Article  109  of  the 
Geneva  Convention.  I  propose  that  we  exchange  these 
figures  now." 

5.  Coiuniuni.'its:  "I  have  taken  notice  of  your  proposal 
concerning  the  specific  arrangement  of  both  sides  to  ex- 
change sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war.  As  for  your 
proposal,  we  will  seriously  study  it  and  will  present,  as 
soon  as  possible,  our  complete  views. 

"As  it  was  pointed  out  by  the  commanders  of  our  side 
in  their  letter  of  28  March  to  your  commander,'  the  dele- 
gates of  both  sides  to  the  negotiations  have  long  since 
reached  agreement  in  accordance  with  the  humanitarian 
princiiiles  on  the  question  of  sick  and  injured  prisoners 
of  war  in  the  custody  of  both  sides ;  to  repatriate  them 
with  priority.  It  was  solely  because  the  Korean  armistice 
negotiations  were  suspended  that  there  was  no  way  to 
implement  this  agreement.  In  consequence  it  has  not 
been  possible  up  to  the  present  to  repatriate  the  sick  and 
injured  prisoners  of  both  sides.  Now  that  the  com- 
manders of  the  two  sides  liave  agreed  to  repatriate  sick 
and  injured  prisoners  of  war  in  accordance  with  Article 
10!)  of  the  Geneva  Convention  relating  to  prisoners  of 
war,  our  side  is  prepared  to  repatriate  all  tlie  sick  and 
injured  prisoners  of  war  held  in  our  custody  for  the 
purpose  of  speedily  and  thoroughly  settling  this  question. 
That  is  to  say,  our  side  is  prepared  to  repatriate  all  the 
sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war  entitled  to  be  directly 
repatriated  and  accommodated  in  a  neutral  country  accord- 
ing to  the  provisions  of  Articles  100  and  110  of  the  1949 
Geneva  Convention  relative  to  the  prisoners  of  war." 

6.  Unc  :  "I  have  a  statement  to  make.  In  order  to 
proceed  without  delay  in  plans  for  the  repatriation  of 
sick  and  wounded  captured  personnel  I  propose  that  we 
exchange  numbers  of  sick  and  wounded  captured  person- 
nel by  nationality  now." 

7.  Coiiinuonsts:  "Our  side  also  considers  that  both  sides 
should  exchange  as  quickly  as  possible  the  estimated 
figures  of  sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war.  But,  in 
order  to  determine  the  estimated  figures  of  sick  and  in- 
jured prisoners  of  war,  the  categories  of  sick  and  injured 
prisoners  of  war  to  be  repatriated  should  be  determined 
first.  Therefore,  our  side  is  willing  to  exchange  views 
with  your  side  on  this  question  first." 

8.  Unc:  "What  are  your  views  as  to  the  categories  of 
sick  and  wounded  i>ersonnel  to  be  exchanged?" 

9.  Communists:  "Our  side  is  prepared  to  repatriate  all 
the  sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war  held  in  our  custody 
for  the  purpose  of  speedily  and  thoroughly  settling  this 
question.  That  is  to  say.  our  side  is  prepared  to  repatriate 
all  the  sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war  entitled  to  be 
directly  repatriated  or  accommodated  in  a  neutral  coun- 
try according  to  the  provisions  of  Article  109  and  110  of 
the  1949  Geneva  Convention  relative  to  prisoners  of  war." 

10.  I'NC:  "We  propose  that  we  recess  until  1100  hnurs 
to  consider  your  statement." 

11.  Communists:  "We  agree  to  your  proposal."  (Re- 
cessed at  1036  hours.) 

12.  Unc  :  "I  have  a  statement  to  make.  We  are  pre- 
pared to  repatriate  directly  through  Panmunjom  all  sick 
and  wounded  captured  personnel  specified  in  Article  109 
of  the  Geneva  Convention.  We  have  not  divided  them  into 
categories.  We  have  total  figures  by  nationality  which 
we  are  prepared  to  exchange." 

13.  Communists:  "I  have  stated  that  our  side  is  pre- 
pared to  repatriate  all  sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war 
in  our  custody.    I  wish  to  know  whether  your  side  is  also 


'Not  printed. 

'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  6, 1953,  p.  494. 

April  20,  1953 


prepared  to  repatriate  sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war 
who  are  entitled  to  be  accommodated  in  a  neutral  country 
according  to  the  provisions  of  Articles  109  and  110  of  the 
Geneva  Convention." 

14.  Unc  :  "I  have  a  statement  to  make.  We  will  care- 
fully consider  your  proposals.  I  suggest  that  you  care- 
fully consider  ours. 

"I  have  another  matter.  In  reference  to  the  proposal 
which  the  commanders  of  your  side  made  to  General  Clark 
on  2  April  relating  to  the  question  of  repatriation  of  pris- 
oners of  war,  the  United  Nations  Command  would  be 
pleased  to  receive  at  as  early  a  date  as  possible  a  detailed 
statement  of  suggestions  on  the  implementation  of  the 
proposal  in  order  that  it  can  be  studied  while  the  arrange- 
ments for  the  repatriation  of  sick  and  wounded  captured 
personnel  are  being  completed. 

"We  suggest  that  we  recess  until  eleven  o'clock  tomor- 
row." 

l.">.  Communists:  "I  have  noted  your  statement.  I  will 
report  it  to  my  superiors.  I  agree  to  your  proposal  to 
recess." 

16.  Meeting  adjourned  at  1128  hours. 


Meeting  of  April  7 

1.  Meeting  of  senior  liaison  groups  convened  at  1100 
hours  this  date.     Substance  of  record  follows : 

2.  Unc  :  "I  have  a  statement  to  make.  Yesterday  I 
proposed  that  our  two  sides  exchange  simultaneously  the 
estimated  figures  by  nationality  of  sick  and  wounded  cap- 
tured personnel  under  each  side's  control  who  will  be 
repatriated  under  the  provisions  of  Article  109  of  the 
Geneva  Convention.  You  agreed  that  the  estimated  figures 
should  be  exchanged  as  quickly  as  possible,  but  you  indi- 
cated that  the  categories  of  personnel  to  be  repatriated 
should  be  determined  first.  You  further  indicated  that 
your  side  was  prepared  to  repatriate  all  the  sick  and 
wounded  prisoners  of  war  in  your  custody  who  are  en- 
titled 'to  be  directly  repatriated  or  accommodated  in  a 
neutral  country  according  to  the  provisions  of  Article  109 
and  110  of  the  1949  Geneva  Convention,  relative  to  prison- 
ei's  of  war.' 

"I  interpret  your  remarks  to  indicate  that  you  are 
willing  to  repatriate  directly  through  Panmunjom,  not 
only  tho.se  persons  provided  for  in  the  first  paragraph  of 
Article  109,  but  also  those  sick  and  wounded  personnel 
who  might  normally  be  accommodated  in  neutral  countries 
as  provided  by  the  second  paragraph  of  Article  110.  The 
United  Nations  Command  is  in  agreement  with  this  inter- 
pretation subject  to  the  provision  that  no  individual  shall 
be  eligible  for  repatriation  except  in  accordance  with 
Paragraph  3  of  Article  109. 

"The  United  Nations  Command  does  not  consider  it 
necessary  or  desirable  to  break  down  the  over-all  figures 
of  sick  and  wounded  to  be  repatriated  under  the  fore- 
going understanding,  but  takes  the  position  that,  for 
humanitarian  reasons,  the  broadest  possible  scope  should 
be  given  to  the  interpretation  of  'sick  and  wounded'  in 
determining  the  captured  personnel  to  lie  repatriated  ;  and 
further  takes  the  position  that  such  repatriation  should 
be  started  without  delay. 

"If  you  are  in  agreement  with  the  foregoing  definition 
of  categories,  I  propose  that  we  exchange  the  estimated 
totals  by  nationalities  of  sick  and  wounded  captured  per- 
sonnel-^all  of  whom  will  be  repatriated  directly  through 
Panmunjom — so  that  we  can  proceed  with  the  detailed 
arrangement  of  repatriation." 

3.  Communists:  "I  have  noted  your  statement.  I  pro- 
pose to  recess  for  20  minutes." 

4.  Unc:  "We  agree."  (Recessed  at  1114  hours  for  20 
minutes.)     (Meeting  reconvened  at  ll."3  hours.) 

5.  Communists:  "I  have  a  statement  to  make.  I  have 
noted  the  statement  you  made  today.  I  understand  that 
your  side  agrees  to  include  in  the  scope  of  sick  and  injured 
prisoners  of  war  to  be  directly  repatriated  this  time  those 
sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war  who  may  be  accommo- 
dated in  neutral  countries  according  to  the  provisions  of 


571 


Article  109  of  the  Geneva  Convention  relative  to  prisoners 
of  war. 

"Regarding  the  question  of  Paragraph  3  of  Article  109 
which  you  mentioned,  1  wish  to  point  out  that  this  pro- 
vision must  not  be  used  as  a  pretext  for  obstructing  the 
repatriation  of  sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war  who  are 
willing  to  be  repatriated  during  h(j.stilities. 

"As  I  have  expressed  yesterday  and  now  repeat  once 
more,  our  side  is  still  prepared  immediately  to  repatriate 
directly  to  your  side  all  the  sick  and  injured  prisoners  of 
war  wlio,  according  to  Article  109  of  the  Geneva  Conven- 
tion relating  to  prisoners  of  war,  are  entitled  to  be  di- 
rectly repatriated  or  accommodated  in  a  neutral  country. 

"Our  side  wants  to  make  clear  that  we  reserve  the  right 
to  ask  for  the  accommodation  in  a  neutral  country  of 
those  prisoners  of  war  in  the  custody  of  your  side  who 
will  not  be  directly  repatriated. 

"Now  in  this  meeting  of  the  Liaison  Group,  I  would  like 
to  proceed  to  the  discussion  of  the  specific  arrangements 
for  the  sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war  whom  both  sides 
are  prepared  immediately  to  repatriate  directly." 

6.  UNO  :  "We  suggest  that  we  recess  until  1330  hours  in 
order  to  have  lunch  and  study  your  proposal." 

7.  Communists:    "I  agree  to  the  proposal  for  recess." 

8.  Meeting  recessed  at  1200  hours. 


1.  Meeting  of  Senior  Liaison  Groups  reconvened  at  1330 
hours  this  date.     Substance  of  record  follows: 

2.  UNO  :  "I  have  a  statement  to  make.  I  note  that  you 
are  ready  to  proceed  with  the  discussion  of  the  specific 
arrangements  for  the  direct  repatriation  through  Pan- 
munjom  of  sick  and  wounded  captured  personnel.  Before 
we  proceed  further,  I  propose  that  we  exchange  estimated 
totals  by  nationality  of  personnel  to  be  repatriated." 

3.  Communists:  "I  have  noted  your  statement.  Our 
side  agrees  that  both  sides  should  exchange  as  quickly  as 
possible  the  estimated  figures  of  sick  and  injured  pris- 
oners of  war  to  be  repatriated.  But  our  side  considers 
that  the  estimated  figures  furnished  by  both  sides  should 
conform  to  the  actual  situation  as  much  as  possible  so 
that  they  may  really  facilitate  the  preparatory  work  of 
repatriating  sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war.  Our  side 
is  actively  checking  the  number  of  all  sick  and  injured 
prisoners  of  war  held  in  our  custody.  Your  side  will  be 
Informed  by  our  side  as  soon  as  a  result  comes  out.  We 
estimate  that  this  can  be  done  within  one  or  two  days. 

"With  regard  to  the  contents  of  the  proposed  agreement 
relating  to  the  repatriation  of  sick  and  wounded  captured 
personnel  which  your  side  presented  to  our  side  on  6  April, 
our  side  has  already  made  a  preliminary  study  of  it  and 
is  of  the  opinion  that  this  proposed  agreement  can  be  a 
basis  for  discussion  between  the  two  sides.  To  some  of 
the  articles  in  this  proposed  agreement,  our  side  can  read- 
ily agree  now.  Our  side  agrees  completely  to  the  first 
article  of  the  proposed  agreement  of  your  side  which  sets 
Panmunjom  as  a  place  for  the  exchange  of  sick  and  in- 
jured captured  personnel.  Our  side  can  also  agree  to  the 
Fourth  Article  on  the  delivery  of  sick  and  injured  captured 
personnel  in  groups  as  well  as  the  times  included  in  the 
roster  of  each  group  and  the  Fifth  Article  relating  to  the 
procedure  for  delivery  and  receipt  of  sick  and  injured 
personnel.  Our  side  agrees  in  principle  to  the  Sixth  Ar- 
ticle on  the  protection  of  sick  and  injured  captured  per- 
sonnel, but  the  various  paragraphs  of  this  article  have 
to  be  studied  in  connection  with  the  actual  conditions. 
As  for  the  rest  of  the  articles,  our  side  will  present  our 
specific  views  after  giving  them  further  study.  Further- 
more, our  side  will  also  recommend  additions  to  the  con- 
tents of  this  agreement  if  necessary." 

4.  Unc  :  "I  have  a  statement.  I  am  please<l  that  you 
are  ready  to  get  down  to  the  business  of  settling  the  ques- 
tion of  the  repatriation  of  the  sick  and  wounded. 

"It  appears  that  the  settlement  of  the  various  issues 
relating  to  the  agreement  will  be  time  consuming.  I  pro- 
pose that  we  confine  ourselves  to  the  major  Lssues  in  our 
discussions  between  the  senior  members  of  the  respective 


liaison  groups,  and  that  we  appoint  officers  to  work  out 
simultaneously  the  administrative  details  for  the  repatri- 
ation. If  you  agree  with  this  proposal,  I  am  prepared  to 
appoint  now  the  staff  officers  who  will  represent  our  side." 

5.  Communists:    "I   have  noted  the  proposal  of  your 
side.    I  will  give  you  our  an.swer  to  the  question  tomorrow. 

"I  suggest  we  recess  until  eleven  o'clock  tomorrow. 

6.  Unc  :   "We  agree  to  recess  until  eleven  o'clock  tomor- 
row." 


Meeting  of  April  8 

1.  Meeting  of  Senior  Liaison  Group  convened  at  1100 
hours  this  date.     Substance  of  record  follows : 

2.  Communists:  a.  "I  now  inform  your  side  that  the 
estimated  figure  of  sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war  in 
our  custody,  whom  our  side  will  directly  repatriate  to 
your  side,  is  around  600,  of  which  around  450  are  sick 
and  injured  Korean  prisoners  of  war  and  around  150  are 
sick  and  injured  non-Korean  prisoners  of  war.  Our  side 
is  further  checking  the  classified  figures,  by  nationality, 
of  the  sick  and  injured  non-Korean  prisoners  of  war.  I 
will  inform  your  side  as  soon  as  a  result  comes  out." 

b.  "In  order  that  the  problems  relating  to  the  specific 
arrangements  for  repatriating  sick  and  injured  prisoners 
of  war  may  be  studied  and  the  actual  preparations  may 
be  undertaken,  I  would  like  to  know  the  estimated  figures 
of  sick  and  injured  prisoners  whom  your  side  is  prepared 
to  repatriate  to  our  side." 

3.  Unc  :  "I  acknowledge  receipt  of  the  total  numbers  of 
sick  and  wounded  of  our  captured  personnel  that  you  are 
prepared  to  repatriate.  The  figures  of  sick  and  wounded 
captured  personnel  that  you  say  you  will  repatriate  seem 
incredibly  small  in  view  of  the  total  number  of  captured 
personnel  you  have  previously  indicated  you  have  in  your 
custody.  Accordingly,  I  request  that  you  have  these  fig- 
ures reviewed,  and  a  more  liberal  interpretation  made  of 
your  definition  of  'sick  and  wounded  captured  personnel.' 
I  reserve  the  right  to  make  further  comments  on  these 
figures  at  a  later  date.  At  this  time,  I  give  you  the  total 
number  of  sick  and  injured  personnel  of  your  side  which 
the  United  Nations  Is  prepared  to  repatriate,  which  is  700 
Chinese  and  5100  Koreans.  When  do  you  expect  to  have 
the  complete  breakdown  by  nationality  of  sick  and 
wounded  personnel  to  be  repatriated?" 

4.  Communists:  "We  have  offered  the  figures  of  sick  and 
injured  prisoners  of  war  only  after  we  have  checked  the 
matter  in  detail.  Accordingly,  I  can't  find  any  reason 
why  the  figures  are  incredibly  small.  As  I  have  pointed 
out  in  my  statement  of  today,  after  I  have  checked  the 
complete  figures,  I  will  inform  you  of  the  figures  of  the 
sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war." 

5.  UNO :  "We  are  now  ready  to  receive  your  comments 
on  our  proposal  of  yesterday." 

6.  Communists:  "I  will  give  you  the  answer  to  that 
question.  I  would  like  to  express  agreement  to  the  pro- 
posal submitted  by  your  side  yesterday  for  confining  the 
discussion  between  the  senior  members  of  the  respective 
liaison  groups  to  the  major  issues  and  for  appointing  of- 
ficers to  settle  the  administrative  details  for  repatriation. 
I  now  designate  Colonel  Lao  Pyong  U  and  Colonel  Wang 
Chien  as  the  officers  representing  our  side." 

7.  Unc  :  "I  appoint  Colonel  Willard  B.  Carlock,  Colonel 
Douglas  M.  Cairns,  and  Colonel  Soo  Young  I^ee  as  my 
representatives,  with  such  assistants  as  they  may  require. 
I  propose  that  they  meet  one  hour  after  this  meeting  is 
adjourned." 

8.  Communists:  "In  order  to  conclude  speedily  an 
agreement  for  the  repatriation  of  sick  and  injured  pris- 
oners of  war  and  to  commence  with  the  repatriation  of 
sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war  as  early  as  actual  con- 
ditions permit,  I  agree  to  the  proposal  of  your  side  for 
convening  the  officers'  meeting  of  both  sides  after  the 
meeting  of  liaison  groups.  Our  officers  will  be  pleased  to 
hear  any  suggestions  of  your  side  concerning  the  admin- 
istrative details  for  the  repatriation  of  sick  and  injured 
prisoners  of  war." 


572 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


9  Unc  :  "Now  I  ask  if  you  are  ready  to  present  your 
proposed  amendments  to  the  draft  agreement  which  we 
presented  to  you." 

10.  Communists:  a.  "With  regard  to  the  'proposed 
agreement  relating  to  the  repatriation  of  sick  and 
wounded  captured  personnel,'  presented  by  you  on  6  April, 
I  would  like  to  take  up  now  2  questions  for  discussion 
by  the  liaison  groups  of  both  sides." 

6.  "For  the  purpose  of  maintaining  order  in  the  Pan- 
munjom  conference  site  area,  our  side  proposes  to  in- 
crease the  military  police  of  each  side  who  undertake  to 
maintain  order  within  the  conference  site  area  from  the 
present  maximum  number  of  15  to  30,  during  the  period 
when  sick  and  injured  captured  personnel  are  being  re- 
patriated through  the  conference  site  area." 

c.  "Regarding  this  question,  I  would  like  to  know  your 
opinion." 

11.  Unc:  "Please  go  on  and  give  me  your  other  com- 
ments on  the  rest  of  the  proposed  agreement.  After  I 
have  heard  them  all,  we  can   then  discuss  them  more 

easily."  „     -    ,. 

12.  Communists:  a.  "With  regard  to  Article  6  of  the 
proposed  agreement  of  your  side,  I  have  already  pointed 
out  in  the  7  April  meeting  that  our  side  agreed  to  the 
principle  of  insuring  that  the  sick  and  injured  captured 
personnel  of  both  sides  are  given  maximum  protection 
during  the  full  period  of  his  repatriation.  However,  some 
(it  the  specific  conditions  set  forth  in  this  article  by  your 
side  are  difficult  to  be  effected  because  of  actual  condi- 
tions. Your  side  proposed  that  movement  of  motor  con- 
voys to  Kaesong  and  Munsan-Ni  respectively  should  con- 
sist of  not  less  than  10  vehicles  per  convoy,  moving  in  close 
formation  ;  but  this  provision  is  not  practicable  due  to 
the  scattered  locations  of  prisoner  of  war  camps  of  our 
side.  Moreover,  this  provision  is  not  necessary  since  the 
motor  convoys  wiU  have  clear  markings  and  the  time  and 
the  routes  of  their  movements  and  their  bivouac  areas 
and  night  stop-over  locations  for  motor  convoys  will  have 
been  informed,  in  advance,  by  both  sides  to  each  other." 

6.  "Therefore,  I  proixise  to  cancel  this  provision  in  the 
first  paragraph  of  Article  6  of  your  proposed  agreement." 

c.  "As  to  the  arrangements  for  mutually  informing  the 
time  and  route  of  each  movement  and  the  bivouac  areas 
and  tlie  night  stop-over  locations  as  provided  in  paragraph 
1)  and  E  of  Article  6,  our  side  will  present  a  revised  text 
based  on  actual  conditions." 

13.  Unc  :  "Do  you  have  any  more  views  or  material  to 
present  now  in  relation  to  other  paragraphs  of  the  agree- 
ment?" 

14.  Communists :  "As  to  the  other  paragraphs  of  the  pro- 
posed agreement,  we  are  now  studying  them,  so  after 
having  finished  our  study,  I  will  answer  to  you." 

15.  Unc  :  "I  propose  that  we  recess  now  to  give  us  a 
chance  to  review  your  statements,  and  that  we  meet  here 
again  at  1330." 

16.  Communists:  "I  agree  to  your  proiwsal  to  recess, 
and  my  opinion  is  that  the  officers'  meeting  of  both  sides 
will  be  convened  at  two  o'clock  PM.  If  the  time  is  incon- 
venient for  you,  we  can  arrange  to  convene  the  officers' 
meeting  after  this  meeting  has  finished." 

17.  UNO :  "As  I  understand  it,  the  full  liaison  group, 
including  you  and  I,  will  meet  here  at  1330,  and  then  we 
will  arrange  later  for  the  meeting  of  the  officers  designated 
by  us." 

18.  Communists:  "That  is  correct." 

19.  Unc  :   "I  propose  that  we  recess  now  until  1330." 

20.  Communists :   "1  agree." 

21.  Meeting  recessed  at  1142. 


1.  Meeting'  of  Senior  Liaison  Group  reconvened  at  1330 
hours  this  date.     Substance  of  record  follows : 

2.  Unc  :  o.  "I  have  studied  your  comments  with  respect 
to  Article  6  and  7  of  the  draft  agreement  which  we  handed 
you  on  6  April." 

6.  "With  regard  to  your  proposal  to  increase  from  15 
to  30  the  maximum  number  of  security  jjersonnel  of 
each  side  who  can  be  in  the  conference  site  area  at  any 


one  time  during  the  period  when  sick  and  injured  cap- 
tured personnel  are  being  repatriated  through  the  confer- 
ence site,  I  agree.  I  assume  the  reference  was  only  to 
armed  security  i)ersonnel." 

c.  "I  desire  to  withhold  comment  on  Article  6  until  you 
have  presented  us  with  your  revised  text." 

d.  "I  feel  that  it  would  expedite  the  conclusion  of  the 
agreement  if  you  would  present  us  with  a  complete 
revised  text  of  the  whole  agreement  incorporating  such 
articles  of  our  text  to  which  you  can  agree  and  setting 
forth  reasons  for  your  proposed  changes.  I  will  then  be 
able  to  consider  the  matter  in  one  package  and  arrive 
speedily  to  the  items  which  are  controversial.  I  projwse 
that  we  recess  until  such  time  as  you  can  present  your 
text  of  the  whole  agreement.  Meanwhile,  the  officers 
designated  by  us  this  morning  can  meet  and  be  working 
on  the  administrative  details." 

3.  Communists:  "I  propose  to  recess  for  15  minutes." 

4.  Unc:  "I  agree." 

(Meeting  recessed  at  1338  hours.  Meeting  reconvened 
at  1853  hours.) 

5.  Communists:  "Our  side  proposes  to  recess  until  11 
o'clock  tomorrow  morning,  and  our  side  is  ready  to  con- 
vene the  officers'  meeting  of  both  sides  as  soon  as  this 
meeting  recesses  if  it  is  convenient  for  your  side." 

6.  Unc  :  "I  agree  to  your  proposal." 

7.  Meeting  recessed  at  1354  hours. 


Meeting  of  April  9 

1.  Meeting  of  Senior  Liaison  Group  convened  at  1100 
hours,  this  date.    Substance  of  record  follows. 

2.  Communists:  a.  "Now  I  would  like  to  present  to  you 
out  revised  text"  of  the  'proposed  agreement  relating  to 
the  repatriation  of  sick  and  wounded  captured  personnel,' 
which  your  side  presented  on  6  April." 

6.  "In  our  revised  text,  some  amendments  have  already 
been  agreed  to  by  your  side.  Some  amendments  our  side 
has  explained  and  some  amendments  are  self-evident 
without  explanation." 

c.  "As  to  Paragraph  E  of  Article  6  of  proposed  agree- 
ment of  your  side — that  is,  Paragraph  D  of  Article  6  in 
the  revised  text  of  our  side — I  would  like  to  make  the 
following  explanation  :" 

d.  "According  to  actual  conditions,  we  consider  that 
bivouac  areas  and  night  stop-over  locations  are  necessary 
for  motor  convoys  carrying  sick  and  Injured  prisoners 
of  war  for  repatriation.  In  order  to  Insure  the  security  of 
the  facilities  in  these  bivouac  areas  and  night  stop-over 
locations,  we  propose  that  both  sides  inform  each  other 
beforehand  of  their  locations  and  markings." 

e.  "As  to  the  mutual  informing  by  the  most  expeditious 
means  of  communication  of  emergency  stop-overs,  it  is 
difficult  to  carry  out  in  practice;  therefore  our  side  pro- 
poses to  cancel  this  provision." 

"What  I  have  now  delivered  to  you  is  the  draft  agree- 
ment of  our  side."  (Hands  proposed  revision  to  Rear 
Admiral  Daniel.) 

3.  Unc:  "We  propose  to  recess  until  1145  to  consider 
your  changes." 

4.  Communists:  "I  agree  to  your  proposal  to  recess." 
(Meeting  recessed  at  1108  hours.  Meeting  reconvened 
at  1200  hours.) 

5.  Unc  :  o.  "From  preliminary  study  of  your  proposed 
changes,  it  appears  that  there  are  no  controversial  issues 
between  us.  We  will  give  it  further  study  and  give  you 
our  full  comments  tomorrow.  In  the  meantime  I  have  a 
few  questions." 

"(1)  How  soon  after  the  agreement  is  signed  do  you 
expect  to  be  able  to  start  actual  repatriation  at 
PanmunjomV 

"(2)  To  insure  the  safety  of  the  personnel  being  re- 
patriated, we  would  like  to  have  your  convoys  south  of 
Pyongyang  to  have  at  least  5  vehicles.  WiU  this  be 
possible? 

*  Not  printed. 


April  20,   1953 


573 


"(3)  We  would  like  the  provision  for  emergency  stop- 
over left  in  some  form,  even  though  it  is  ditlioult  to  effect, 
so  as  to  afford  maximum  protection  to  captured  personnel 
being  repatriated. 

"(4)  We  feel  that  the  termination  date  of  the  agree- 
ment should  be  twenty  days  after  the  commencement  of 
the  initial  repatriation.     Do  you  have  any  ideas  on  thisV" 

b.  "We  al.so  have  a  few  minor  ideas  on  wording,  which 
we  will  give  you  in  detail  tomorrow." 

c.  "That  is  all  the  questions  regarding  the  agreement." 
6.  Co>iimuni.<fts:  a.  "According  to  the  proposed  agree- 
ment submitted  by  your  side,  the  date  for  commencing 
the  repatriation  and  the  date  for  signing  the  agreement 
are  related  to  each  other.  If  this  agreement  can  lie 
signed  on  10  April,  then  according  to  the  actual  condi- 
tions of  our  side,  repatriation  may  be  commenced  at 
Pannumjiini  not  later  than  ten  days  after  the  signing  of 
the  agreement." 

6.  "As  to  the  other  questions  submitted  by  your  side, 
after  my  study  I  will  answer  to  your  side." 

c.  "If  you  have  no  other  questions,  I  propose  to  recess 
until  1100  hours  tomorrow." 

7.  Unc:  a.  "It  would  expedite  the  signing  of  the 
agreement  if  we  could  have  your  answers  forwarded  to 
us  today  throu'-'h  a  liaison  or  security  officer." 

i6.  "I  have  another  matter.  In  regard  to  the  fiiures 
mat  you  gave  us  yesterday  of  the  estimated  numbers  of 
sick  and  wounded  captured  personnel  which  you  are  will- 
ing to  repatriate,  it  is  my  hope  that  yon  will  give  the 
broadest  possible  scope  to  the  definition  of  'sick  and 
wounded'  when  you  make  your  final  determination." 

c.  "I  agree  to  recess  until  11  AM  tomorrow,  and  I  pro- 
pose that  the  officers  whom  we  desitrnated  to  work  on 
details  meet  here  at  13.30  to  continue  their  work." 

8.  Communists:  it.  "The  figures  which  otir  side  gave 
you  yesterday  are  the  result  of  serious  checking  on  the 
part  of  our  side ;  and  as  to  the  question  of  scope,  we  have 
already  presented  our  ideas  to  you." 

6.  "Therefore,  I  think  we  have  no  argument  about  the 
definition  of  scope  of  the  sick  and  injured  prisoners  of 
war,  and  I  agree  to  your  proposal  to  the  meeting  of  staff 
otflcers." 

9.  Unc:  "May  we  expect  to  receive  the  information  on 
the  question  this  afternoon?" 

10.  Communists:  As  to  the  question,  I  will  answer  you 
tomorrow." 

11.  Unc:  "It  would  hasten  matters  if  we  could  obtain 
the  answer  today,  if  possible." 

12.  Communists:  "I  have  taken  notice  of  your  state- 
ment." 

13.  Unc:  "That  is  all  I  have." 

14.  Meeting  recessed  1221  hours. 


STATEMENT  BY  AMBASSADOR  LODGE 

FoUoioing  is  the  text  of  a  statement  which  Am- 
bassador Henry  Cahot  Lodge,  Jr.,  U.S.  representa- 
tive to  the  United  Nations,  made  in  the  General 
Assemhly  on  April  7 : 

D.S./U.N.  press  release  dated  April  7 

I  am  authorized  by  my  Government,  which  bears 
responsibility  for  tlie  Unified  Command,  to  malie 
a  brief  report  to  the  General  Assembly  regardinji 
the  recent  developments  which  have  encouraged  all 
of  us  wlio  seek  peace  in  Korea. 

On  February  22  General  Clark  sent  to  the  Com- 
munist commanders  a  letter  statinji  that  the  U.N. 
Command  remained  prepared,  in  accordance  with 
the  Geneva  Convention,  to  repatriate  immediately 
those  sick  and  wounded  captured  personnel  who 
were  fit  to  travel  and  inquiring  whether  the  Com- 


munists were  prepared  to  proceed  immediately 
with  their  repatriation.  General  Clark's  letter 
simply  repeated  a  long  standing  proposal  that  had 
been  made  initially  by  the  U.N.  Command  nego- 
tiators at  Panmunjom. 

We  were  encouraged  when  on  March  28  General 
Clark  received  a  favorable  response  to  his  letter.  ' 
The  Communist  commanders  indicated  agreement 
with  the  jjroposal  to  exchange  sick  and  wounded 
persons  and  stated  that  they  considered  the  "rea- 
sonable settlement  of  the  question  of  exchanged 
sick  and  wounded  prisoners  of  war  of  both  sides 
during  the  ]:)eriod  of  hostilities  should  be  made  to 
lead  to  the  smooth  settlement  of  the  entire  question 
of  prisoners  of  war." 

The  Communists'  letter  of  March  28  was  fol- 
lowed on  March  30  by  a  statement  of  the  Chinese 
Communist  Foreign  Minister,  Chou  En-lai,  sub- 
sequently endorsed  by  the  Prime  Minister  of  the 
North  Korean  regime. 

On  March  31  General  Clark,  in  a  letter  to  the 
commander  of  the  Korean  People's  Army  and  the 
commander  of  the  Chinese  People's  Volunteers, 
proposed  that  a  meeting  of  the  liaison  groups  from 
each  side  be  held  at  Panmunjom  to  make  the  nec- 
essary detailed  arrangements  for  the  exchange  of 
the  sick  and  wounded  personnel.  In  response  to 
General  Clark's  proposal  the  Communist  com- 
manders suggested  that  the  liaison  groups  meet  at 
Panmunjom  on  the  6th  of  April  "to  arrange  pre- 
liminarily the  matter  of  exchange  by  both  sides  of 
injured  and  sick  ])risoners  of  war  and  to  discuss 
and  decide  on  the  date  for  resuming  the  armistice 
negotiations." 

The  U.N.  Command  sent  its  next  response  on 
April  5.^  In  this  letter  the  U.  N.  Command  agreed 
to  send  its  liaison  group  to  meet  with  the  Com- 
munist liaison  group  on  April  6.  The  U.N.  Com- 
mand also  invited  the  Communists  to  make  de- 
tailed suggestions  for  settling  the  entire  question 
of  repatriating  prisoners  of  war.  I  should  like 
to  read  one  paragraph  from  General  Clark's  let- 
ter of  April  5 : 

At  as  early  a  date  as  possible,  I  request  that  your 
liaison  group  furnish  our  liaison  group  with  a  detailed 
statement  of  suggestions  on  the  implementation  of  the 
proposal  for  settling  the  entire  question  of  repatriating 
prisoners  of  war  as  set  forth  in  the  statement  of  Foreign 
Minister  Chou  En-lai,  and  endorsed  by  Marshal  Kim  Kl 
Sung,  in  order  that  it  may  be  studied  while  reasonable 
settlement  of  the  repatriation  of  sick  and  wounded  is 
being  effected. 

The  first  meeting  of  the  liaison  groups  took 
place  on  April  6  at  Panmunjom.  The  U.N.  Com- 
mand representative  stated  that  it  is  prepared  to 
exchange  all  sick  and  wounded  prisoners  of  war 
as  expeditiously  as  possible  in  accordance  with 
article  109  of  the  Geneva  Convention.  The  Com- 
miniist  delegate  made  a  statement  to  the  same  ef- 
fect. The  U.N.  Command  representative  asked 
both  sides  to  exchange  simultaneously  estimated 

'  Not  printed. 


574 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


figures  by  nationality  of  the  sick  and  wounded 
prisoners  of  war  to  be  repatriated.  The  Commu- 
nists agreed,  but  said  that  in  order  to  determine 
tlie  numbers  of  sick  and  wounded  prisoners  of  war 
to  be  repatriated,  the  category  of  sick  and 
■wounded  prisoners  of  war  should  be  first  deter- 
mined as  provided  by  article  110  of  the  Geneva 
Convention. 

At  this  same  meetin"  the  U.N.  Command  dele- 
o-ation  repeated  orally  the  request  previously  made 
in  General  Clark's  letter  of  April  5  that  the  U.N. 
Command  would  be  pleased  to  receive  at  an  early 
date  a  detailed  statement  of  suggestions  from  the 
Communist  commander  in  implementation  of  the 
proposal  contained  in  the  Chou  En-lai  statement 
regarding  the  repatriation  of  all  prisoners  of  war. 

At  the  April  7  meeting  some  further  progress 
was  made.  The  Communists  would  require  some 
time  before  furnishing  the  number  of  sick  and 
wounded  prisoners  to  be  exchanged  and  they  ac- 
cept the  nine-point  proposal  of  the  Unified  Com- 
mand for  arrangements  for  the  exchange  of  sick 
and  wounded  as  a  basis  for  discussion. 

Let  me  promise  you,  Mr.  Chairman  and  dele- 
gates, that  the  U.S.  Government,  which  bears  re- 
sponsibility for  the  Unified  Command,  will  report 
from  time"to  time  to  you  on  the  progress  at  Pan- 
munjom.  It  is  apparent  from  the  report  I  have 
made  to  vou  that  progress  is  being  made.  We 
hope  thatthe  progress  will  continue  and  will  lead 
to  the  conclusion'of  an  honorable  armistice  and 
a  peace  in  Korea  consistent  with  U.N.  objectives. 


LETTER  FROM  THE  COMMUNIST  COMMANDERS 
TO  GENERAL  HARRISON,  APRIL  9 

General  William  K.  Harrison,  Senior  Delegate, 
United  Nations  Command  Delegation. 

We  have  received  the  letter  dated  April  5, 1953, 
from  General  Mark  W.  Clark,  Commander-in- 
Chief  of  the  United  Nations  Command,  in  reply 
to  Marshal  Kim  U  Sung,  Supreme  Commander  of 
the  Korean  People's  Army  and  General  Peng  Teh- 
Huai,  Commander  of  the  Chinese  People's  Volun- 

On  March  30  and  31,  1953,  respectively,  Chou 
En-lai.  Premier  of  the  Government  Administra- 
tion Council  and  Minister  for  Foreign  Affairs  of 
the  Central  People's  Government  of  the  People's 
Republic  of  China,  and  Marshal  Kim  U  Sung, 
Premier  of  the  Democratic  People's  Republic  of 
Korea  issued  statements,  proclaiming  the  common 
proposal  of  the  governments  of  China  and  Korea 
for  settling  the  entire  question  of  prisoners  of 
war,  that  is,  ''both  parties  to  the  negotiations 
should  undertake  to  repatriate  immediately  after 
the  cessation  of  hostilities  all  those  prisoners  of 
war  in  their  custody  who  insist  upon  repatriation 
and  to  hand  over  the  remaining  prisoners  of  war  to 
a  neutral  state  so  as  to  ensure  a  just  solution  to  the 
question  of  their  repatriation."    The  two  afore- 


mentioned statements,  enclosed  in  the  letter  of 
April  1,  1953,  from  Marshal  Kim  II  Sung  and 
General  Peng  Teh-Huai  to  General  Mark  W. 
Clark,  have  already  been  delivered  to  your  side.  I 
am  now  instructed  to  present  to  you  the  following 
statement  on  this  proposal : 

(1)  Article  118  of  The  Geneva  Convention  rela- 
tive to  the  treatment  of  prisoners  of  war,  of  Aug- 
ust 12,  1949,  well-established  principles  and  prac- 
tice in  international  law,  and  paragraph  51  of  the 
draft  Korean  armistice  agreement  have  all  estab- 
lished the  principle  that  all  prisoners  of  war  on 
both  sides  should  be  released  and  repatriated  with- 
out delay  after  the  cessation  of  active  hostilities. 
It  is,  therefore,  our  view  that  the  principle  of  re- 
patriation of  all  prisoners  of  war  of  both  sides 
after  the  armistice  so  that  they  can  return  home 
to  lead  a  peaceful  life  is  unshakable. 

(2)  However,  in  view  of  the  fact  that  the  dif- 
ferences between  the  two  sides  on  the  question  of 
repatriation  of  prisoners  of  war  have  now  consti- 
tuted the  only  obstacle  of  the  realization  of  an  ar- 
mistice in  Korea,  and  in  order  to  eliminate  the 
differences  so  as  to  bring  about  an  armistice  in 
Korea,  the  Korean  and  Chinese  side,  in  this  new 
l^roposal,  makes  the  following  obvious  concession 
as  to  the  steps,  time,  and  procedure  of  the  repatri- 
ation of  prisoners  of  war.  The  Korean  and  Chi- 
nese side  holds  that  the  repatriation  of  prisoners 
of  war  should  be  carried  out  in  two  steps,  that  is, 
both  parties  to  the  negotiations  should  undertake 
to  repatriate  immediately  after  the  cessation  of 
hostilities  all  those  prisoners  of  war  in  their  cus- 
tody who  insist  upon  repatriation  and  to  hand  over 
the  remaining  prisoners  of  war  to  a  neutral  state 
so  as  to  insure  a  just  solution  to  the  question  of 
their  rraatriation. 

(3)  In  making  this  concession  the  Korean  and 
Chinese  side  by  no  means  relinquishes  the  prin- 
ciple as  embodied  in  Article  118  of  the  Geneva 
Convention  in  international  practice  and  in  para- 
graph 51  of  the  draft  armistice  agreement,  which 
our  side  has  firmly  maintained.  It  is  precisely 
on  the  basis  of  this  principle  of  repatriation  of  all 
prisoners  of  war  that  our  side  firmly  maintains 
that  the  detaining  side  should  insure  that  no  coer- 
cive means  whatsoever  be  employed  against  all  the 
prisoners  of  war  in  its  custody  to  obstruct  their 
returning  home  to  effect  forcible  retention,  and, 
at  the  same  time,  should  insure  that  the  remaining 
prisoners  of  war  who  are  not  directly  repatriated 
after  the  armistice  be  released  and  handed  over  to 
a  neutral  state  so  as  to  secure  a  just  solution  to  the 
question  of  their  repatriation. 

(4)  The  Korean  and  Chinese  side  does  not  ac- 
knowledge that  there  are  prisoners  of  war  who  are 
allegedly  unwilling  to  be  repatriated.  Therefore, 
the  question  of  the  so-called  forced  repatriation  or 
repatriation  by  force  does  not  exist  at  all,  and  we 
have  always  opposed  this  assertion.  Based  on  this 
stand  of  ours,  our  side  maintains  that  those  cap- 
tured personnel  of  our  side  who  are  filled  with  ap- 


April  20,   1953 


575 


prehensions  and  are  afraid  to  return  home  as  a 
result  of  having  been  subjected  to  intimidation  and 
oppression  should  be  handed  over  to  a  neutral  state 
and  throu<rh  explanations  given  by  our  side,  grad- 
ually freed  from  apprehensions,  thereby  attaining 
a  just  solution  to  the  question  of  repatriation. 

(5)  The  foregoing  is  a  full  explanation  of  the 
new  proposal  of  our  side.  As  to  the  concrete  meas- 
ures for  implementing  this  proposal,  they  can  only 
be  dicussed  and  decided  upon  at  the  meetings  of 
negotiations  between  the  delegates  on  both  sides. 
And,  in  negotiations  with  both  sides  on  an  equal 
footing,  only  consultation  and  discussion  at  the 
conference  are  the  proper  way  of  settling  ques- 
tions. General  Nam  II,  Senior  Delegate,  Delega- 
tion of  the  Korean  People's  Army  and  the  Chinese 
People's  Volunteers. 

TEXT  OF  AGREEMENT  SIGNED  APRIL  11 

[Unofficial] 

The  senior  member  of  the  United  Nations  Command  liai- 
son group  and  the  senior  member  of  the  Korean  People's 
Army  and  the  Chinese  People's  Volunteers  liaison  group, 
in  order  to  effect  the  repatriation  of  sicli  and  injured  cap- 
tured personnel  in  accordance  with  provisions  of  article 
109  of  the  1949  Geneva  Convention  relative  to  the  treat- 
ment of  prisoners  of  vpar,  agree  to  the  following : 

Repatriation  shall  be  accomplished  at  Panmunjom. 

Repatriation  shall  commence  at  Panmunjom  not  later 
than  10  days  after  the  signing  of  this  agreement. 

a.  The  Korean  People's  Army  and  the  Chinese  People's 
Volunteers  shall  deliver  sicli  and  injured  captured  per- 
sonnel at  the  rate  of  approximately  100  per  day  until  de- 
livery of  all  siclc  and  injured  captured  personnel  to  be 
repatriated  by  the  Korean  People's  Army  and  the  Chinese 
People's  Volunteers  is  completed.  The  number  of  persons 
actually  delivered  each  day  shall  be  contingent  upon  the 
ability  of  the  United  Nations  Command  to  receive  them, 
but  delivery  shall  in  any  case  be  completed  prior  to  the 
termination  date  of  this  agreement. 

b.  The  United  Nations  Command  shall  deliver  sick  and 
injured  captured  personnel  at  the  rate  of  approximately 
.500  per  day  until  delivery  of  all  sicli  and  injured  captured 
personnel  to  be  repatriated  by  the  United  Nations  Com- 
mand is  completed. 

The  number  of  persons  actually  delivered  each  day  shall 
be  contingent  upon  the  ability  of  the  Korean  People's  Army 
and  Chinese  People's  Volunteers  to  receive  them,  but  de- 
livery shall  in  any  case  be  completed  prior  to  the  termi- 
nation of  this  agreement. 

The  United  Nations  Command  shall  deliver  sick  and 
injured  captured  personnel  in  groups  of  approximately 
twenty-five.  Each  group  shall  be  accompanied  by  rosters, 
prepared  by  nationality,  to  include:  (a)  Name,  (6)  rank, 
(c)  internment  or  military  serial  number. 

After  each  group  of  sick  and  injured  captured  person- 
nel is  delivered  and  received,  a  representative  of  the  re- 
ceiving side  shall  sign  the  roster  of  the  captured  person- 
nel delivered  as  a  receipt  and  shall  return  this  to  the 
delivering  side. 

In  order  to  insure  that  the  sick  and  injured  captured 
personnel  of  both  sides  are  given  maximum  protection 
duriiii:  the  full  period  of  repatriation,  both  sides  agree 
to  guarantee  immunity  from  all  attacks  to  all  rail  and 
motor  movements  carrying  sick  and  injured  captured 
personnel  to  Kaesong  and  Munsan-Ni,  respectively,  and 
thence  through  presently  established  immunity  routes  to 
Panmunjom,  subject  to  the  following  conditions : 

a.  Movement  of  motor  convoys  to  Kaesong  and  Munsan- 
Ni,  respectively,  shall  be  restricted  to  daylight  hours,  and 
each  convoy  shall  consist  of  not  less  than  five  vehicles 
in  close  formation :  except  that  north  of  Panmunjom,  be- 


cause of  actual   conditions,   the   latter   provisions   shall 
apply  only  to  the  route  from  Pyongyang  to  Kaesong. 

6.  Each  car  in  rail  movements  and  each  vehicle  in  motor 
convoys  shall  di.splay  clearly  visible  identification  mark- 
ings. 

c.  Each  side,  prior  to  the  initial  movement,  shall  pro- 
vide the  liaison  group  of  the  other  side  with  a  detailed 
description  of  the  markings  utilized  to  identify  motor  con- 
voys and  rail  movements.  This  shall  include  color,  size, 
and  manner  in  which  the  markings  will  be  displayed. 

Each  side,  prior  to  the  initial  movement,  shall  provide 
the  liaison  group  of  the  other  side  with  the  sites  and 
markings  of  the  bivouac  areas  and  night  stop-over  loca- 
tions for  motor  convoys. 

Each  side  shall  inform  the  liaison  group  of  the  other 
side,  twenty-four  hours  in  advance  of  each  movement, 
of  the  selected  route,  number  of  cars  in  rail  movement 
or  number  of  vehicles  in  motor  movement,  and  the  esti- 
mated time  of  arrival  at  Kaesong  or  Munsan-Ni. 

Each  side  shall  notify  the  liaison  group  of  the  other 
side,  by  the  most  expeditious  means  of  communication 
available,  of  the  location  of  emergency  stop-overs. 

During  the  period  while  sick  and  injured  captured  per- 
sonnel are  being  repatriated  through  the  Panmunjom  con- 
ference site  area,  the  Oct.  22,  10.51,  agreement  between 
liaison  officers,  with  the  exception  of  the  part  therein 
provided  for  in  Paragraph  8  of  this  agreement,  shall  con- 
tinue in  effect.  Liaison  groups  of  both  sides  and  their 
parties  shall  have  free  access  to,  and  free  movement 
within,  the  Panmunjom  conference  site  area.  The  com- 
position of  each  liaison  group  and  its  party  shall  be  as 
determined  by  the  senior  member  thereof:  however,  in 
order  to  avoid  congestion  in  the  conference  site  area, 
the  number  of  personnel  of  each  side  in  the  area,  includ- 
ing captured  personnel  under  its  control,  shall  not  exceed 
300  persons  at  any  one  time.  Each  side  shall  transfer 
repatriated  personnel  out  of  the  Panmunjom  conference 
site  area  as  expeditiously  as  possible. 

During  the  period  while  sick  and  injured  captured  per- 
sonnel are  being  repatriated  through  the  Panmunjom 
conference  site  area,  the  armed  military  police  of  each 
side,  who  undertake  to  maintain  order  within  the  confer- 
ence site  area,  shall  be  Increased  from  the  maximum  num- 
ber of  fifteen,  as  provided  in  the  Oct.  22,  1951,  agreement 
between  liaison  oflJcers,  to  thirty. 

Other  administrative  details  shall  be  mutually  arranged 
by  officers  designated  by  the  senior  member  of  the  liaison 
group  of  each  side. 

This  agreement  is  effective  when  signed  and  will  termi- 
nate twenty  days  after  the  commencement  of  repatriation 
of  sick  and  injured  captured  personnel  at  Panmunjom. 

Done  at  Panmunjom,  Korea,  this  eleventh  day  of 
April,  1953,  in  the  English,  Korean  and  Chinese  languages, 
all  texts  being  equally  authentic. 

Lee  Sang  Cho,  Major  Oen-      J.  C.  Daniel,  Rear  Admirai, 
eral,     Korean     People's  United  States  Navy,  sen- 

Army,     senior     member  ior  member   United  Na- 

Korean    People's    Army  tions    Command    liaison 

and      Chinese      People's  group. 

Volun  teers  liaison  group. 


Special  Representative 

for  Korean  Economic  Affairs 


The  White  House  on  April  9  announced  that  the 
President  had  appointed  Henry  J.  Tasca  as  his 
special  representative  for  Korean  Economic 
Affairs. 

Mr.  Tasca  will  investigate  ways  and  means  of 
strengthening  the  Korean  economy  in  the  light  of 


576 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


U.S.  security  interests.  He  will  report  his  recom- 
mendations to  the  President  through  the  Com- 
mander-in-Chief, U.N.  Command,  at  the  earliest 
practicable  date.  Mr.  Tasca  will  leave  immedi- 
ately for  Korea. 

Mr.  Tasca  is  presently  Deputy  for  Economic 
Allairs  to  Ambassador  William  H.  Draper,  Jr., 
the  U.S.  special  representative  in  Europe.  In 
this  post  Mr.  Tasca  serves  as  adviser  to  the  special 
representative  on  economic  matters,  serving  as 
alternate  to  the  special  representative  in  Min- 
isterial Council  meetings  of  the  Organization  for 
European  Economic  Cooperation,  as  well  as  direct- 
ing the  Office  of  Economic  Affairs. 

Mr.  Tasca  was  previously  Director  of  the  Plans 
and  Policy  Staff  in  the  Office  of  the  Special  Repre- 
sentative and  was  associated  for  nearly  4  years 
with  the  ISIutual  Security  Agency  and  its  pred- 
ecessor, the  Economic  Cooperation  Administra- 
tion, at  the  Paris  regional  headquarters.  He  par- 
ticipated in  the  negotiations  which  led  to  the 
creation  of  the  European  Payments  Union  in  1950. 

Last  year  Mr.  Tasca  headed  the  special  task 
group  which  assisted  W.  Averell  Harriman,  then 
Director  for  Mutual  Security,  and  Mr.  Draper  in 
the  Temporary  Council  Committee  preparations 
for  the  Lisbon  Conference  of  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty  Organization. 


Soviet  Attack  on  U.S.  Plane 
in  North  Pacific  Ocean 

Department  Statements 

Press  release  144  dated  March  18 

I  The  American  Embassy  at  Moscow  on  March 
18,  on  instructions  from  the  Department  of  State, 
lodged  a  vigorous  protest  with  the  Soviet  Foreign 
Office  against  the  attack  by  Mig  fighters  upon  a 
U.  S.  Air  Force  RB-50  in  the  North  Pacific  Ocean 
on  March  15. 

The  note  sets  forth  the  position  of  the  U.S.  f)lane 
when  attacked  (about  100  miles  northeast  of 
Petropavlosk  and  at  least  25  miles  from  the  nearest 
Soviet  territory),  vigorously  protests  the  action 
of  the  Soviet  aircraft,  states  that  the  Government 
of  the  United  States  expects  to  be  informed  at  an 
early  date  of  the  disciplinary  action  taken  with 
regard  to  the  Soviet  personnel  responsible  for  the 
attack,  and  asks  for  information  concerning  meas- 
ui-es  adopted  by  Soviet  authorities  to  prevent  a 
recurrence  of  incidents  of  this  kind. 

Press  release  156  dated  March  24 

The  Department  has  studied  the  text  of  a  note 
received  from  the  Soviet  Government  on  March 
22  in  response  to  our  note  of  March  18.  We  find 
the  allegations  made  by  the  Soviets  completely  at 
variance  with  the  facts  as  established  by  a  careful 
investigation. 

As  we  pointed  out  in  our  note  the  U.S.  EB-50 

April  20,   1953 

250146—53 3 


aircraft  involved  was  at  all  times  over  inter- 
national waters  and  at  the  time  of  the  incident 
was  at  least  25  miles  from  the  nearest  Soviet  terri- 
tory. Without  any  reason  whatever  the  Soviet 
aircraft  opened  fire  on  our  plane,  which  was 
oblisied  to  return  the  fire  in  self-defense. 

The  present  Soviet  note  is  a  typical  attempt  by 
the  Soviet  Government  to  avoid  responsibility  for 
an  unwarranted  action  of  its  military  personnel 
through  the  device  of  fabricating  an  unfounded 
version  of  the  affair.  We  stand  on  our  note  of 
March  18  and  continue  to  expect  that  the  Soviet 
Government  will  take  measures  to  discipline  the 
Soviet  personnel  responsible  and  to  prevent  re- 
currence of  such  incidents. 

U.S.  Note  of  March  18 

No.  683 

The  Embassy  of  the  United  States  of  America 
presents  its  compliments  to  the  Ministry  of  For- 
eign Affairs  of  the  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Re- 
publics and  has  the  honor  to  bring  the  following 
matter  to  the  attention  of  the  Ministry. 

On  March  15,  1953,  a  United  States  Air  Force 
plane  of  the  RB-50  type  was  attacked  by  Soviet 
fighter  aircraft  over  the  open  seas  at  Latitude 
64 :  02  North  and  Longitude  161 :  04  East.  After 
one  of  the  Soviet  planes  of  the  Mig  type  opened 
fire  on  the  RB-50  the  latter  was  forced  to  return 
the  fire. 

It  is  reported  that  no  damage  occurred  to  the 
American  plane,  and  none  was  observed  with  re- 
gard to  the  Soviet  plane. 

The  Embassy  has  been  instructed  to  protest 
vigorously  this  action  on  the  part  of  the  Soviet 
aircraft.  The  United  States  Government  expects 
to  be  informed  at  an  early  date  concerning  the 
disciplinary  action  taken  with  regard  to  the  Soviet 
personnel  responsible  and  also  concerning  the 
measures  adopted  to  prevent  a  recurrence  of  in- 
cidents of  this  kind. 

Soviet  Note  of  March  22 

[Unofficial  translation] 

The  Foreign  Ministry  of  the  TJ.S.S.R.,  referring  to  a 
note  of  the  United  States  of  America,  Number  683  of 
18th  March,  1953,  deems  it  necessary  to  state  the 
following : 

In  accordance  with  verified  data,  it  has  been  estab- 
lished that  an  American  bomber  of  the  B-29  type  violated 
on  15th  March  at  11 :  57  time  in  the  district  of  Cape 
Krestovoi  the  state  frontier  of  the  U.S.S.E.,  and  flew 
over  the  territory  of  Kamchatka  np  to  seventy  kilometers 
over  a  distance  of  fifteen  to  seventeen  kilometers  from 
the  edge  of  the  shore  only  a  short  distance  from 
Mutnovskaya  Height  and  turned  in  the  direction  of  the 
sea. 

At  12 :  26  the  American  aircraft  B-29  type  appeared 
again  and  violated  the  state  frontier  of  the  TJ.S.S.R. 
northeast  of  the  town  of  Petropavlovsk  in  Kamchatka  in 
the  area  of  the  village  of  Zhupanovo. 

Good  weather,  which  in  both  cases  enabled  the  crew 
of  the  aircraft  to  carry  out  visual  reconnaissance  on  a 
large  scale,  excluded  the  possibility  of  loss  of  orientation 

577 


and  confiniH'd  that  the  above  two  eases  of  violation  of 
the  state  frontier  of  the  U.S.S.R.  were  of  a  clearly  pre- 
meditated character. 

Wlien  the  two  Soviet  fighter  aircraft,  which  had  taken 
off,  aiiproached  the  American  bomber  aircraft,  which 
was  in  tlie  process  of  a  second  violation  of  the  Soviet 
state  frontier,  the  American  aircraft  opened  fire  against 
the  Soviet  fighter  aircraft. 

For  the  purpose  of  self-defense,  one  of  the  Soviet  air- 
craft had  to  open  fire,  after  which  the  infringing  aircraft 
turned  round,  left  the  Soviet  coast  and  disappeared  in 
an  eastern  direction. 

The  above  facts  show  that  the  protest  made  by  the 
Government  of  the  U.S.A.  in  a  note  of  18th  March  is 
without  foundation  and  therefore  the  Soviet  Government 
rejects  that  protest. 

In  view  of  the  fact  that  the  above-quoted  data  confirm 
the  fact  of  violation  of  the  state  frontier  of  the  U.S.S.R. 
by  an  American  military  aircraft,  the  Soviet  Govern- 
ment sends  a  protest  to  the  Government  of  the  U.S.A. 
against  the  above-mentioned  infringement  and  expects 
that  the  Government  of  the  U.S.A.  will  take  due  measures 
to  prevent  in  the  future  violation  of  the  state  frontier  of 
the  U.S.S.K.  by  American  aircraft. 


Polish  Embassy  Asked  To  Cease 
Distributing  Anti-U.S.  Bool< 

U.S.  Note  of  March  28 

Press  release  161  dated  March  30 

The  Deparhnent  of  State  on  March  28  sent  to  the 
Polish  Evibassy  at  'Washington  a  note  requesting 
that  distribution  of  a  jyuhlication  hy  the  Embassy 
making  false  charges  against  the  United  States 
he  stopped  immediately  and  that  any  further  dis- 
tribution of  similar  material  he  discontinued. 

The  text  of  the  U.S.  note  follows: 

The  Secretary  of  State  wishes  to  inform  His 
Excellency  the  Ambassador  of  Poland  that  it  has 
come  to  the  attention  of  the  Department  of  State 
that  the  Embassy  has  sent  to  various  recipients  in 
this  country  copies  of  a  publication  entitled 
"Documents  on  the  Hostile  Policy  of  the  United 
States  Government  Towards  People's  Poland". 
This  book  contains  numerous  false  charges  of  ag- 
gressive and  subversive  activities  on  the  part  of 
the  United  States  against  Poland.  In  this  con- 
nection reference  is  made  to  the  United  States 
Government's  note  dated  February  9,  1953  ^  and 
earlier  communications  to  the  Polish  Government. 

The  dissemination  by  the  Embassy  of  this  col- 
lection of  propaganda  is  not  consistent  with  the 
views  expressed  by  the  United  States  Government 
contained  in  its  note  to  the  Embassy  of  March  21, 
1952  -  regarding  the  issuance  of  publications  and 
press  releases  by  the  Embassy.  The  Department 
of  State  consequently  requests  the  Embassy  im- 
mediately to  cease  distribution  of  this  publication 
and  to  refrain  from  any  further  distribution  of 
publications  of  a  similar  character. 

'  Bulletin  of  Feb.  23,  1953,  p.  304. 
=  /6i(?.,  Mar.  31,  1952,  p.  498. 


PUBLICATIONS 


Recent  Releases 

For  sale  hy  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  Government 
Printing  Office,  Washington  25,  D.  C.  Address  requests 
direct  to  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  except  in  the 
case  of  free  publications,  xchioh  may  be  obtained  from  the 
Department  of  State. 

Agriculture,  Cooperative  Program  in  Costa  Rica.  Trea- 
ties and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2511.  Pub.  4720. 
4  pp.     5<f. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Costa 
llica — Signed  at  San  .lose  Jan.  10  and  25,  19.'52 ;  en- 
tered into  force  Jan.  25,  1952. 

Health  and  Sanitation,  Cooperative  Program  in  Costa 
Rica.  Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2512. 
Pub.  4721.     4  pp.     5('. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Costa 
Rica— Signed  at  San  Jost5  Jan.  10  and  24,  1952 ;  en- 
tered into  force  Jan.  24,  1952. 

Consular  Officers.  Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts 
Series  2494.     Pub.  4729.     25  pp.     10«f. 

Convention,  with  protocol  of  signature,  between  the 
United  States  and  the  United  Kingdom — Signed  at 
Washington  June  C,  1951 ;  entered  into  force  Sept.  7, 
1952. 

Health  and  Sanitation,  Cooperative  Program  in  Uruguay. 

Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2453.  Pub. 
4745.     10  pp.     lOif. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Uruguay — 
Signed  at  Montevideo  Oct.  4,  1950  and  Mar.  7,  1951 ; 
entered  into  force  Mar.  S,  1951 ;  agreement  between  the 
Government  of  Uruguay  and  The  Institute  of  Inter- 
American  Affairs — Signed  at  Montevideo  Mar.  8,  1951. 

Settlement  of  Disputes  Arising  Under  Article  15  (a)  of 
the  Treaty  of  Peace  With  Japan.  Treaties  and  Other  In- 
ternational Acts  Series  25.50.     Pub.  4756.     33  pp.     15^. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Other  Gov- 
ernments and  Japan — Opened  for  signature  at  Wash- 
ington June  12,  1952 :  Signed  for  the  United  States 
June  19,  1952;  Signed  for  Japan  June  12,  1952;  en- 
tered into  force  between  the  United  States  and  Japan 
June  19,  1952. 

Educational  Exchange  Grants.  International  Informa- 
tion and  Cultural  Series  27.     Pub.  4792.     28  pp.     10^. 

Explains  International  Educational  Exchange  Pro- 
gram, with  information  for  applicants  on  grants, 
and  summaries  of  basic  laws  concerned. 

United  States  Educational  Commission  in  the  Federal 
Republic  of  Germany.  Treaties  and  Other  International 
Acts  Series  2553.     Pub.  4S09.     21  pp.     10«*. 

Agreement  lietween  the  United  States  and  the  Fed- 
eral Republic  of  Germany — Signed  at  Bonn  July  18, 
1952 ;  entered  into  force  July  18,  1952. 

United  States  Educational  Foundation  in  the  ITnion  of 
South  Africa.  Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts 
Series  2,554.     Pub.  4S10.     12  pp.     lOi^. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  the  Union 
of  South  Africa— Signed  at  Cape  Town,  Mar.  26, 1952 ; 
entered  into  force  Mar.  26, 1952. 


578 


Department  of  Stale  Bulletin 


U.S.  Policy  on  Human  Rights 


Printed  lelow  are  the  texts  of:  1)  a  message 
sent  ly  President  Eisenhower  on  April  7  to  mein- 
bcrs  of  the  U.  N.  Commission  on  Human  Rights, 
which  convened  at  Geneva  on  that  date;  2)  a  letter 
dated  April  3  from  Secretary  Dulles  to  Mrs.  Os- 
wald B.  Lord,  U.S.  representative  on  the  Com- 
mission; and  3)  a  statement  made  hy  Mrs.  Lord 
before  the  Commission  on  April  8: 

U.S./U.N.  press  release  dated  April  9 

LETTER    FROM    SECRETARY    DULLES 
TO    MRS.  LORD 

Mr  DEAR  Mrs.  Lord  : 

As  you  leave  for  Geneva  to  represent  the  United 
States  at  the  Ninth  Session  of  the  United  Nations 
Commission  on  Human  Rights,  the  best  wishes 
of  our  Government  and  of  the  American  people  go 
with  you.  The  President  and  I  are  anxious  that 
you  carry  a  personal  message  to  the-  Commission. 

We  believe  that  the  American  people  are  de- 
termined to  do  all  within  their  power  to  make  the 
United  Nations  an  increasingly  vigorous  instru- 
ment of  international  order  and  justice.  It  is  our 
earnest  wish  that  the  United  Nations  become  an 
ever  more  effective  agency  for  promoting,  in  the 
words  of  the  Charter,  "respect  for  human  rights 
and  fundamental  freedoms  for  all  without  dis- 
tinction as  to  race,  sex,  language,  or  religion." 

The  United  States  stands  for  full  and  complete 
enjoyment  of  these  fundamental  rights.  The 
whole  American  philosophy  of  government  is 
based  on  the  conviction  that  man  was  endowed 
with  these  rights  by  his  Creator  and  that  they  are 
inalienable.  This  conviction  is  expressed  at  many 
points  in  the  legal  structure  of  our  national  and 
state  governments  and  is  most  clearly  set  forth 
in  the  Declaration  of  Independence  and  in  the  Bill 
of  Rights  in  the  Constitution  of  the  United  States. 

Our  history  demonstrates  that  nationwide  ob- 
servance of  fundamental  human  rights  did  not 
sjjring  into  being  upon  the  enactment  of  statutes. 
In  the  years  that  have  intervened  between  the 
ratification  of  the  Bill  of  Rights  and  the  present, 
we  in  the  United  States  have  made  important 
advances.  Through  education  and  publicity,  we 
have  developed  a  human  rights  conscience  which 


is  perhaps  the  strongest  factor  in  the  progress  we 
have  made.  In  its  most  recent  report  to  the 
United  Nations  for  publication  in  the  agency's 
Yearbook  on  Human  Rights,  the  Government  of 
this  country  has  submitted  detailed  evidence  of 
the  progress  recorded  in  a  single  year.^  AVe  in- 
tend that  these  advances  shall  continue. 

Moreover,  our  Government  has  noted  with  satis- 
faction the  improvements  in  the  observance  of 
human  rights  which  have  taken  place  in  other 
countries;  but  it  has  noted  as  well  that  much  re- 
mains to  be  done.  We  recognize  that  injustices 
occur  to  a  greater  or  lesser  degree  in  all  countries, 
including  our  own.  They  cannot  be  overcome 
in  a  day.    We  must  work  to  eliminate  them. 

Background  for  the  U.S.  Decision 

In  the  light  of  our  national,  and  recently,  inter- 
national experience  in  the  matter  of  human  rights, 
the  opening  of  a  new  session  of  the  Commission 
on  Human  Rights  appears  an  appropriate  occa- 
sion for  a  fresh  appraisal  of  methods  through 
which  we  may  realize  the  human  rights  goals  of 
the  United  Nations.  These  goals  have  a  high 
place  in  the  Charter  as  drafted  at  San  Francisco 
and  were  articulated  in  greater  detail  in  the  Uni- 
versal Declaration  of  Human  Rights  as  adopted 
by  the  United  Nations  General  Assembly  at  Paris 
in  1948. 

Since  the  establishment  of  these  goals,  much 
time  and  effort  has  been  expended  on  the  drafting 
of  treaties,  that  is.  Covenants  on  Human  Rights, 
in  which  it  was  sought  to  frame,  in  mutually 
acceptable  legal  form,  the  obligations  to  be  as- 
sumed by  national  states  in  regard  to  human 
rights.  We  have  found  that  such  drafts  of  Cov- 
enants as  had  a  reasonable  chance  of  acceptance  in 
some  respects  established  standards  lower  than 
those  now  observed  in  a  number  of  countries. 

While  the  adoption  of  the  Covenants  would  not 
compromise  higher  standards  already  in  force, 
it  seems  wiser  to  press  ahead  in  the  United  Na- 
tions for  the  achievement  of  the  standards  set 
forth  in  the  Universal  Declaration  of  Human 
Rights  through  ways  other  than  the  proposed  Cov- 

^For  text  of  the  U.S.  report,  see  Bulletin  of  Feb.  2, 
1953,  p.  178. 


AprW  20,    1953 


579 


enants  on  Human  Eights.  This  is  particularly 
important  in  view  of  the  likelihood  that  the  Cov- 
enants will  not  be  as  widely  accepted  by  United 
Nations  members  as  initially  anticipated.  Nor 
can  we  overlook  the  fact  that  the  areas  where 
human  rights  are  being  persistently  and  flagrantly 
violated  are  those  where  the  Covenants  would 
most  likely  be  ignored. 

In  these  circumstances,  there  is  a  grare  ques- 
tion whether  the  completion,  signing  and  ratifica- 
tion of  the  Covenants  at  this  time  is  the  most 
desirable  method  of  contributing  to  human  better- 
ment particularly  in  areas  of  greatest  need.  Fur- 
thermore, experience  to  date  strongly  suggests  that 
even  if  it  be  assumed  that  this  is  a  proper  area 
for  treaty  action,  a  wider  general  acceptance  of 
human  rights  goals  must  be  attained  before  it 
seems  useful  to  codify  standards  of  human  rights ' 
as  binding  international  legal  obligations  in  the 
Covenants. 

Re-examining  tlie  Covenants'  Metliod 

With  all  these  considerations  in  mind,  the 
United  States  Government  asks  you  to  present  to 
the  Commission  on  Human  Rights  at  its  forth- 
coming session  a  statement  of  American  goals  and 
policies  in  this  field ;  to  point  out  the  need  for  re- 
examining the  approach  of  the  Human  Rights 
Covenants  as  the  method  for  furthering  at  this 
time  the  objectives  of  the  Universal  Declaration 
of  Human  Rights;  and  to  put  forward  other  sug- 
gestions of  method,  based  on  American  experience, 
for  developing  throughout  the  world  a  human 
rights  conscience  which  will  bring  nearer  the 
goals  stated  in  the  Charter.  In  making  such  sug- 
gestions, I  am  sure  you  will  want  to  give  special 
weight  to  the  value  of  bringing  the  facts  to  the 
light  of  day,  to  the  value  of  common  discussion  of 
problems  in  the  international  forum  of  the  Com- 
mission on  Human  Rights,  and  to  the  value  of 
each  country  drawing  on  the  experience  of  other 
countries  for  inspiration  and  practical  guidance 
in  solving  its  own  problems. 

We  recognize  that  in  presenting  to  the  Commis- 
sion a  change  in  approach,  extended  discussion 
will  be  required  in  the  Commission  and  later  in  the 
Economic  and  Social  Council  and  General  As- 
sembly as  well.  By  reason  of  the  considerations 
referred  to  above,  the  United  States  Government 
has  reached  the  conclusion  that  we  should  not  at 
this  time  become  a  party  to  any  multilateral  treaty 
such  as  those  contemplated  in  the  draft  Covenants 
on  Human  Rights,  and  that  we  should  now  work 
toward  the  objectives  of  the  Declaration  by  other 
means.  Wliile  the  Commission  continues,  under 
the  General  Assembly's  instructions,  with  the 
drafting  of  the  Covenants,  you  are,  of  course,  ex- 
pected to  participate.  This  would  be  incumbent 
on  the  United  States  as  a  loyal  Member  of  the 
United  Nations. 

Through  the  agency  of  the  United  Nations  and 


Importance  of  U.N. 
Human  Rights  Goals 

White  House  press  release  dated  April  7 

The  President  on  April  7  sent  the  foUowing  mes- 
sage to  the  members  of  the  V.N.  Commission  on 
Human  Rights  at  Geneva: 

I  am  asking  Mrs.  Oswald  B.  Lord,  the  new  repre- 
sentative of  tlie  United  States  on  the  U.N.  Com- 
mission on  Human  Rights,  to  express  to  the  Com- 
mission my  deep  personal  interest  in  its  work.  In 
these  days  of  International  tension  and  strain,  it  is 
encouraging  to  know  that  the  members  of  the  Com- 
mission on  Human  Rights  are  working  to  develop 
effective  programs  to  promote  human  rights  and 
fundamental  freedoms  for  all  people  and  all  nations 
throughout  the  world. 

The  U.N.  Charter  states  the  human-rights  goals 
which  the  United  States  and  the  other  members  of 
the  United  Nations  have  pledged  themselves  to 
achieve  in  cooperation  with  the  United  Nations — 
the  promotion  of  universal  respect  for  human  rights 
and  fundamental  freedoms  for  all  without  distinc- 
tion as  to  race,  sex,  language,  or  religion. 

For  the  people  of  the  United  States,  as  well  as 
for  people  everywhere,  the  U.N.  Universal  Declara- 
tion of  Human  Rights  is  a  significant  beacon  in  the 
steady  march  toward  achieving  human  rights  and 
fundamental  freedoms  for  all. 

People  everywhere  are  seeking  freedom — freedom 
to  live,  freedom  from  arbitrary  restraint,  freedom 
to  think  and  speak  as  they  wish,  freedom  to  .seek 
and  find  the  truth.  We  must  press  ahead  to  broaden 
the  areas  of  freedom.  The  United  States  is  con- 
vinced that  freedom  is  an  indispensable  condition 
to  the  achievement  of  a  stable  peace. 

Unfortunately,  in  too  many  areas  of  the  world 
today  there  is  .subjugation  of  peoples  by  totalitarian 
governments  which  have  no  respect  for  the  dignity 
of  the  human  person.  This  denial  of  the  freedom 
of  peoples,  the  continued  disregard  of  human  rights, 
is  a  basic  cause  of  instability  and  discontent  in  the 
world  today. 

For  these  reasons,  the  work  of  the  Commission 
on  Human  Rights  assumes  greater  importance  and 
meaning.  For  the.se  reasons  also,  there  is  need  for 
a  new  approach  to  the  development  of  a  human- 
rights  conscience  in  all  areas  of  the  world.  I  have 
accordingly  asked  Mrs.  Lord  to  present  positive 
U.N.  action  programs  to  the  Commission  which  we 
feel  will  contribute  to  that  recognition  of  human 
rights  and  fundamental  freedoms  which  people  are 
seeking  throughout  the  world. 


its  powerful  moral  influence,  much  has  been  and 
can  be  accomplished.  Example  and  education  can 
exert  powerful  influence.  The  United  Nat  ions  can 
also  play  an  important  part,  through  health,  wel- 
fare, and  other  technical  assistance  programs,  in 
raising  standards  of  living  throughout  the  world 
and  bringing  a  full  life  to  millions  of  persons  who 
struggle  merely  to  exist.  The  removal  of  restraint'^ 
on  the  rights  of  expression  and  association  can  re- 
lease the  creative  energies  of  the  hunuin  spirit. 

Firm  in  our  belief  that  the  United  Nations  is 
the  most  hopeful  and  effective  means  of  bringing 
about  world  peace  and  of  promoting  the  welfare 
of  mankind  throughout  the  earth,  the  United 


580 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


Stetes  Government  will  support  your  every  effort 
to  these  ends. 

Sincerely  yours, 

John  Foster  DuiiLES 


STATEMENT  BY  MRS.  LORD 

As  this  is  the  first  occasion  in  which  I  have 
had  the  privilege  of  serving  in  the  Commission 
on  Human  Rights,  I  hope  you  will  permit  me  to 
make  a  few  general  remarks  about  the  agenda. 
I  am  happy  to  be  a  member  of  this  Commission 
and  to  join  with  you  in  the  vital  task  of  helping 
to  advance  the  cause  of  freedom.  I  accepted  this 
appointment  from  the  President  of  the  United 
States  because  I  personally  am  convinced  of  the 
importance  of  promoting  respect  for  human 
rights  through  international  cooperation. 

At  the  very  outset  of  our  work,  I  wish  to  assure 
you  that  the  U.S.  Government  continues  to  sup- 
port wholeheartedly  the  promotion  of  respect  for 
and  observance  of  human  rights  and  fundamental 
freedoms.  Both  President  Eisenhower  and  Sec- 
retary Dulles  have  spoken  to  me  personally  about 
their  deep  concern  that  the  United  Nations  move 
steadily  forward  toward  the  goals  laid  down  in 
the  Charter. 

In  order  to  assure  steady  progress  toward  those 
goals,  the  Government  of  the  United  States  is 
suggesting  a  new  and  urgent  approach  to  the 
promotion  of  human  rights,  to  take  account  of 
changed  conditions  in  the  world.  Today,  disre- 
gard of  the  basic  principles  of  human  rights  is 
widespread  and  fundamental  freedoms  are  denied 
peoples  in  many  areas. 

Need  for  Human  Rights  Action  Programs 

Under  these  circumstances,  the  world  does  not 
yet  appear  ready  for  a  treaty  of  such  compre- 
hensive scope  as  the  proposed  covenants  on  human 
rights.  We  need  to  work  together  immediately 
to  develop  a  higher  moral  sense  of  human-rights 
values  in  all  areas  of  the  world.  For  that  reason, 
the  United  States  is  urging  that  this  Commission 
give  immediate  consideration  to  the  development 
of  human-riglits  action  programs. 

The  Commission  on  Human  Rights  already  has 
made  an  outstanding  contribution  to  the  construc- 
tive achievements  of  tlie  United  Nations.  The 
Universal  Declaration  of  Human  Rights  stands 
as  a  major  landmark  of  progress  in  this  difficult 
field.  It  is  with  understandable  pride  that  I 
participate  in  this  Commission,  where  our  two 
past  chairmen,  Mrs.  Roosevelt  and  Mr.  Malik,  and 
their  colleagues  have  brought  intelligence  and 
skill  to  bear  upon  some  of  the  most  challenging 
problems  of  our  times. 

The  agenda  of  the  Commission  clearly  falls 
into  two  distinct  parts :  the  completion  of  the  draft 


covenants  and  the  consideration  of  a  wide  range 
of  other  matters. 

The  General  Assembly  and  the  Economic  and 
Social  Council  have  asked  that  the  Commission 
complete  the  drafting  of  the  covenants.  This 
task  will  necessarily  occupy  a  considerable  portion 
of  our  time ;  but  perhaps,  if  we  could  set  May  1 
as  a  target  date  for  completing  the  remaining 
portions  of  the  two  covenants,  we  need  not  devote 
more  than  half  of  our  session  to  this  task. 

Since  the  completion  of  the  Universal  Declara- 
tion of  Human  Rights  in  1948,  the  Commission 
has  been  entirely  engrossed  in  the  drafting  of 
the  proposed  covenants  on  human  rights.  As 
discussions  have  proceeded  on  the  covenants,  it 
begins  to  appear  that  they  are  not  receiving  the 
acceptance  which  had  been  initially  anticipated 
and  that  they  will  not  be  ratified  as  widely  as  had 
been  hoped.  The  climate  of  world  opinion  does 
not  yet  seem  favorable  to  the  conclusion  of  the 
covenants  in  the  United  Nations.  The  covenants 
will  not  have  the  expected  effectiveness  in  the 
field  of  human  rights.  For  these  reasons,  my 
Government  has  concluded  that  in  the  present 
stage  of  international  relations  it  would  not  ratify 
the  covenants. 

Inasmuch  as  the  United  States  is  a  loyal  mem- 
ber of  the  United  Nations,  its  delegation  will  con- 
tinue to  collaborate  in  the  drafting  of  these 
covenants  and  to  make  suggestions  for  improving 
them.  The  covenants  will  be  looked  upon  as  a 
more  precise  and  definitive  statement  of  the  prin- 
ciples embodied  in  the  Universal  Declaration  of 
Human  Rights,  irrespective  of  their  ratification 
or  nonratification.  My  Government  hopes  that 
there  will  be  a  time  when  human  rights  will  be 
sufficiently  respected  in  fact  and  when  a  human- 
rights  conscience  will  be  sufficiently  developed 
throughout  the  world  so  that  a  codification  of 
the  then  prevailing  principles  will  be  worthwhile. 
When  and  if  such  a  time  comes  the  United  States 
may  give  consideration  to  the  ratification  of  a 
covenant  on  human  rights,  and  for  that  reason  we 
are  concerned  with  the  drafting  of  the  covenants 
now  so  that  they  will  be  in  the  most  acceptable 
form  and  will  require  the  least  possible  change  if 
they  are  used  as  a  model  for  future  treaties. 

It  seems  increasingly  important,  therefore,  that 
alternative  and  more  effective  and  acceptable  ways 
be  devised  by  the  Commission  to  achieve  the  goals 
of  the  Charter  for  the  promotion  of  human  rights 
and  fundamental  freedoms. 

Initiating  Programs  of  Practical  Action 

The  remaining  part  of  our  agenda  contains  a 
large  number  of  items  not  related  to  the  draft 
covenants.  The  U.S.  delegation  endorses  the 
listing  on  the  provisional  agenda  and  the  order 
of  that  listing.  At  the  appropriate  time,  however, 
I  shall  suggest  that  some  of  these  items  be  given 
priority.     A  number  of  these  items  are  of  the  ut- 


April  20,    1953 


581 


most  significance  and  deserve  our  most  earnest 
consideration.  It  is  for  this  reason  that  I  hope 
that  perhaps  the  last  half  of  our  session  might 
be  devoted  to  programs  of  practical  action. 

It  is  the  view  of  the  U.S.  Government  that  the 
guiding  principle  for  the  work  of  the  Commission 
should  be  to  find  the  surest  and  speediest  methods 
of  raising  the  level  of  practice  around  the  world 
in  the  observance  of  human  rights.  This  would 
require  that  we  initiate  a  number  of  action  pro- 
grams. I  shall  be  prepared  to  make  detailed  pro- 
posals about  such  action  programs  in  connection 
with  specific  agenda  items.  For  the  present  I 
should  like  merely  to  outline  the  three  principal 
proposals  which  luy  Government  wishes  me  to 
submit  to  the  Commission. 

First,  we  will  propose  that  the  Commission  in- 
stitute a  study  of  various  aspects  of  human  rights 
throughout  the  world.  The  Commission  could 
undertake  this  with  the  assistance  of  a  rapporteur. 
The  rapporteur  would  consult  with  nongovern- 
mental organizations  as  well  as  governments  and 
the  specialized  agencies  for  relevant  data  to  sub- 
mit to  the  Commission.  The  report  of  the  rap- 
porteur would  be  considered  in  the  Commission, 
which  might  then  make  general  recommendations 
concerning  the  subject  under  discussion.  Two 
subjects  that  might  well  be  considered  first  are 
freedom  of  religion  and  the  right  to  a  fair  trial. 

Second,  we  will  propose  that  annual  reports  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  human  rights  be  pre- 
pared by  each  member  government  with  the  as- 
sistance of  a  national  advisory  committee.  These 
reports  would  be  considered  in  the  Commission  at 
the  same  time  as  the  study  of  the  proposed  rap- 
porteur would  be  submitted. 

Third,  we  will  propose  that  the  United  Nations 
establish  advisory  services  on  specific  aspects  of 
human  rights  along  the  lines  of  the  advisory  serv- 
ices now  being  provided  in  the  economic,  social, 
and  public-administration  fields.  These  services 
■would  be  in  the  form  of  experts  going  to  coun- 
tries requesting  the  services,  scholarships  and  fel- 
lowships being  provided  for  training  abroad,  and 
arrangements  for  seminars. 

These  are  action  programs  that  the  Commission 
can  undertake  now.  There  is  no  need  for  the 
Commission  to  limit  itself  to  the  drafting  of 
covenants  on  human  rights,  which  in  any  event 
will  have  limited  applicability.  The  Commission 
should  give  more  of  its  attention  to  constructive 
programs  which  can  be  initiated  without  delay  in 
the  United  Nations  for  the  promotion  of  the  hu- 
man-rights principles  of  the  charter.  Indeed,  it 
will  be  greatly  to  the  advantage  of  the  Commission 
itself  if  it  can  at  this  session  begin  work  on  some 
of  these  affirmative  tasks  even  before  the  cove- 
nants are  considered  by  the  General  Assembly. 
In  this  way  the  Commission  could  mark  out  the 
basic  lines  of  its  future  action  programs  and  es- 
tablish firmly  its  position  in  this  field. 

With  all  these  potential  programs  for  immediate 


action  at  this  session  of  the  Commission,  I  think 
that  you  can  appreciate  my  view  that  we  should 
reserve  adequate  time  for  the  consideration  of 
these  later  items. 

It  is  my  earnest  hope  that  the  work  of  this  ses- 
sion will  be  successful,  especially  in  the  launching 
of  new  programs  that  will  contribute  effectively 
to  the  safeguarding  of  human  liberty. 

Revised  Disarmament 
Resolution  Adopted 

The  plenary  session  of  the  U.N.  General  As- 
semhly  on  April  8  voted  to  ask  the  Disarmament 
Co7nmission  to  continue  developing  plans  for  the 
regulation,  limitation,  and  balanced  reduction  of 
aimied  forces  and  armaments ;  the  elimination  and 
prohihition  of  weapons  of  mass  destruction;  and 
interjiational  control  of  atomic  energy.  One  of 
tivo  Soviet  amendments  to  the  text  approved  by 
Committee  I  was  adopted;  a  second  amendmerit, 
which  xoould  have  deleted  reference  to  the  1952 
resolution  establishing  the  Commission,  was  re- 
jected. The  vote  on  the  resolution  as  a  whole 
was  52^  (Soviet  bloc) -3. 

Following  is  the  text  of  a  statement  by  Henry 
Cabot  Lodge,  Jr.,  U.S.  represe7itative  to  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly,  together  with  the  text  of  the 
resolution. 

Ambassador  Lodge's  Statement  of  April  8 

U.S./U.N.  press  release  dated  April  8 

My  delegation  has  carefully  studied  the  pro- 
posed Soviet  amendments  to  the  resolution  on  dis- 
armament adopted  by  the  Political  Committee. 
Our  test,  and  we  feel  it  would  be  the  test  of  the 
members  of  the  (leneral  Assembly  as  well,  is 
whether  the  adoption  of  these  proposed  amend- 
ments would  strengthen  or  weaken  genuine  dis- 
armament efforts.  AVe  for  our  part  have  reluc- 
tantly concluded  that  their  adoption  would  in  fact 
weaken  these  efforts,  and  I  regret  to  add  that  the 
statement  made  this  morning  by  the  Soviet  dele- 
gate merely  serves  to  confirm  this  conclusion.  I 
should  like  to  explain  why  I  say  that. 

With  regard  to  the  first  Soviet  amendment 
which  has  just  been  referred  to  by  Sir  Gladwyn 
Jebb,  the  proposal  to  delete  the  commendation 
of  the  Disarmament  Commission  for  its  efforts 
since  the  Sixth  General  Assembly,  is  a  matter  of 
language  rather  than  a  matter  of  substance.  It 
is  in  that  respect  very  different  from  the  second 
Soviet  amendment.  With  regard  to  the  first 
amendment  which  would  delete  the  commendation 
of  the  Disarmament  Commission,  and  those  mem- 
bers who  loyally  attempted  to  carry  out  the  man- 
date and  principles  established  by  the  General 
Assembly,  we  think  it  wholly  appropriate,  as  the 
Political  Committee  itself  did,  to  express  the  satis- 
faction of  the  General  Assembly  for  the  work  of 
the  Commission.     But  we  do  not  consider  that 


582 


Deparimenf  of  State   Bulletin 


this  is  a  matter  of  sufficient  importance  to  warrant 
drawing  an  issue.  We,  of  course,  would  not  con- 
sider tliat  the  adoption  of  the  first  Soviet  amend- 
ment would  in  any  way  support  the  previously 
expressed  Soviet  view  that  it  was  the  United 
States,  the  United  Kingdom,  or  France  which  ob- 
structed the  Commission's  work.  Of  course,  we 
do  not  think  that  any  such  inference  could  be 
drawn  from  the  first  Soviet  amendment. 

However,  with  regard  to  the  second  Soviet 
amendment,  we  shall  vote  against  that  amendment. 
This  proposes  the  deletion  from  the  second  para- 
graph of  the  resolution  adopted  by  the  Committee 
the  reaffirmation  of  the  General  Assembly  resolu- 
tion of  January  11, 1952.^  This  resolution,  which 
is  basic  to  the  disarmament  efforts  of  the  United 
Nations  itself,  established  the  Disarmament  Cora- 
mission  and  defined  its  terms  of  reference.  It  was 
adopted  in  January  of  1952  after  thorough  dis- 
cussion and  was  reaffirmed  by  the  Political  Com- 
mittee this  year  on  March  23,  by  a  vote  of  49  to  5. 
The  Soviet  amendment  would,  in  our  view, 
simply  turn  back  the  clock.  It  would  scuttle  or 
threaten  to  scuttle  the  important  accomplishments 
in  the  disarmament  field  of  the  Sixth  General 
Assembly,  the  Disarmament  Commission,  and  of 
the  present  Assembly.  The  Soviet  representative 
in  the  Political  Committee  made  clear  his  inten- 
tion, and  in  this  respect  I  feel  my  statement  is 
justified  that  Mr.  Vyshinsky's  remarks  this  morn- 
ing reaffirmed  the  position  taken  by  the  represen- 
tative   of    the    Soviet    Union    in    the    Political 

1  Committee. 

'  In  the  Political  Committee  on  March  19,  the 
Soviet  representative  there  attacked  the  1952 
Assembly  resolution.  He  did  so  in  somewhat 
more  blunt  and  pointed  terms  than  was  done  this 
morning,  but  the  effect  was  precisely  the  same, 
and  the  meaning  and  intention  is  not  changed. 
The  Soviet  representative  in  the  Political  Com- 
mittee argued  that  the  Disarmament  Commission 
should  have  confined  itself  to  considering  the  pro- 
posals which  the  Soviet  Union  had  presented  to 
the  Sixth  Assembly.  That  was  the  argument 
made  and  that  was  the  intention  underlying  the 
Soviet  amendments  as  they  were  explained  to  the 
Political  Committee. 

Mr.  President,  the  1952  General  Assembly  res- 
olution constitutes  the  U.N.  mandate  and  guidance 
to  the  Disarmament  Commission.  It  is,  therefore, 
a  basic  document.  We  are  dealing  not  simply 
with  a  title,  a  mere  name,  or  style  of  a  General 
Assembly  resolution,  but  with  the  very  terms  of 
reference  of  the  Disarmament  Commission  itself- 
This  is  not  a  mere  matter  of  words  and  phrases. 
It  is  the  question  whether  we  should  carry  forward 
on  a  solid  basis  of  the  accumulated  wisdom  and 
experience  slowly  and  painfully  built  up  in  the 
United  Nations  over  the  past  6  years  on  this 
matter — or  whether,  as  the  Soviet  Government 

'  BuiXETiN  of  Mar.  31,  19.52,  p.  507. 
April  20,  J  953 


now  suggests,  we  should  in  effect  wipe  the  slate 
clean  and  start  all  over  again.  This  is,  indeed, 
a  high  price  to  pay  for  an  unknown  destination. 
May  I  call  to  the  attention  of  the  General  Assem- 
bly some  of  the  more  important  guiding  principles 
established  by  the  1952  General  Assembly  resolu- 
tion, which  were  opposed  by  the  Soviet  delega- 
tion in  that  Assembly  and  which,  as  was  indicated 
again  this  morning  by  Mr.  Vyshinsky,  still  are 
opposed  by  the  Soviet  delegation.  For  that  in- 
deed is  the  only  reason  advanced  for  the  adoption 
of  the  second  Soviet  amendment. 

First,  the  1952  resolution  on  disarmament,  the 
basic  mandate  and  guiding  principle  in  this  field, 
laid  down  the  policy  that  there  must  be  progres- 
sive disclosure  and  verification  on  a  continuing 
basis  of  all  armed  forces  and  all  armaments. 
Second,  that  such  verification  must  be  based  on 
effective  international  inspection  to  insure  the  ade- 
quacy and  accuracy  of  the  information  disclosed. 
Both  these  points  have  been  repeatedly  attacked 
by  the  Soviet  delegation  as  unwarranted  and  not 
permissible.  Third,  that  unless  a  better  or  no  less 
effective  system  is  devised,  the  U.N.  plan  for  the 
international  control  of  atomic  energy  and  the 
prohibition  of  atomic  weapons  should  continue 
to  serve  as  the  basis  for  the  international  control 
of  atomic  energy.  And  fourth,  that  there  must 
be  an  adequate  system  of  safeguards  to  insure 
observance  of  the  disarmament  program.  These 
are  some  of  the  basic  and  indispensable  elements 
which  form  part  of  the  fiber  and  core  of  the  U.N. 
program  and  policy. 

If  the  Soviet  amendment  were  accepted,  the 
Soviet  Union,  as  we  believe  is  its  intention,  would 
be  in  a  position  at  the  very  least  to  cast  doubt 
upon  the  General  Assembly's  support  of  these 
principles  which  have  been  repeatedly  endorsed 
by  the  majority  of  U.  N.  members.  The  Soviet 
amendment  would  raise  the  question  whether  the 
General  Assembly  continues  to  support  the  U.N. 
plan  for  control  of  atomic  energy.  It  would  lead 
to  doubt  whether  the  General  Assembly  continues 
to  support  its  1952  decision  that  the  progressive 
and  continuing  disclosure  and  verification  of  all 
armed  forces  and  armaments  is  a  first  and 
indispensable  step  in  carrying  out  an  agreed 
disarmament  program. 

Mr.  President,  I  would  conclude  by  saying  that 
the  U.S.  Government  welcomes  any  signs  that  the 
new  Soviet  leadership  is  interested  in  negotiating 
constructively  for  solutions  to  the  many  prob- 
lems which  confront  us,  including  disarmament. 
However,  we  seek  the  substance,  not  the  shadow  of 
an  agreement.  It  is,  of  course,  too  early  to  tell 
whether  we  are  going  to  be  able  to  make  signifi- 
cant progress  in  the  disarmament  field.  Cer- 
tainly, the  Soviet  amendment,  which  I  have  been 
discussing,  does  not  promise  to  contribute  to  such 
progress.  Yet,  my  Government  remains  deeply 
interested  in  the  considered  judgment  of  the 
Soviet  Government  on  the  possibilities  of  honest 

583 


and  constructive  disarmament  negotiations.  We 
hope  for  positive  and  tangible  response  from  the 
Soviet  Government  when  the  Disarmament  Com- 
mission resumes  its  work. 

The  resolution  as  adopted  by  the  Political 
Committee  does  not  in  any  way  preclude  the  sub- 
mission by  the  Soviet  Government  in  the  Dis- 
armament Commission  of  any  proposals  the  Soviet 
Government,  or  any  other  member  for  that  matter, 
desires  to  put  forward.  For  our  part,  we  pledge 
ourselves  to  continue  to  work  constructively  for 
a  genuinely  safeguarded  .system  of  disarmament 
and  at  the  same  time  to  give  sympathetic  and 
honest  consideration  to  any  concrete  and  practical 
proposals  which  the  Soviet  Government  may  make 
toward  this  end. 


Text  of  Resolution 

D.N.  doe.  A/L.  149 
Adopted  April  8.  1953 

The  General  Assembly, 
Reoognizinq  that 

Under  the  Charter  of  the  United  Nations  all  States 
are  bound  to  settle  their  international  disputes  by  peace- 
ful means  in  such  a  manner  that  international  peace  and 
security,  and  justice,  are  not  endangered,  and  to  refrain 
In  their  international  relations  from  the  threat  or  use 


of  force  against  the  territorial  integrity  or  political  inde- 
pendence of  any  State,  or  in  any  other  manner  incon- 
sistent with  the  purposes  of  the  United  Nations. 

The  aim  of  a  system  of  world-wide  disarmament  is  to 
prevent  war  and  release  the  world's  Imman  and  economic 
resources  for  the  purposes  of  peace, 

1.  Takes  7vote  of  the  report  of  the  Disarmament  Com- 
mission [and  commends  the  Commission  for  its  efforts 
to  curry  out  the  instructions  laid  down  by  the  General 
Assembly  at  its  sixth  regular  session]  ; ' 

2.  Reafflrms  General  Assembly  resolution  502  (VI) 
and  requests  the  Disarmament  Commission  to  continue 
its  work  for  the  development  by  the  United  Nations  of 
comprehensive  and  co-ordinated  plans  providing  for : 

(a)  the  regulation,  limitation  and  balanced  reduction 
of  all  armed  forces  and  armaments; 

(b)  the  elimination  and  prohibition  of  all  major 
weapons,  including  bacteriological,  adaptable  to  mass 
destruction ; 

(c)  the  effective  international  control  of  atomic  energy 
to  ensure  the  prohibition  of  atomic  weapcjiis  and  the  use 
of  atomic  energy  for  i)eaceful  purposes  only. 

The  whole  programme  to  be  carried  out  under  effective 
international  control  in  such  a  way  that  no  State  would 
have  cause  to  fear  that  its  security  was  endangereil ; 

3.  Requests  the  Commission  to  reiwrt  to  the  General 
Assembly  and  to  the  Security  Council  no  later  than  1 
September  1U53,  and  hopes  that  all  the  members  of  the 
Commission  will  co-operate  in  efforts  to  produce  construc- 
tive proposals  likely  to  facilitate  its  task. 

'  The  clause  in  brackets  was  deleted  from  the  Com- 
mittee I  text  of  the  resolution,  on  a  Soviet  motion. 


Puerto  Rico's  New  Self-governing  Status 


U.S./U.N.  press  release  dated  March  21 

Ambassador  Henry  Cabot  Lodge,  Jr.,  U.S.  rep- 
resentative to  the  United  Nations,  announced  on 
March  S3  the  transmittal  to  Secretary-General 
Trygve  Lie  of  the  new  Constitution  of  the  Com- 
monwealth of  Puerto  Rico  and  other  documents 
pertaining  to  the  Commonwealth'' s  new  self- 
governing  statiis.  Following  is  the  transmittal 
letter: 

I  have  the  honor  to  refer  to  the  U.S.  representa- 
tive's note  UN-1727/89  dated  January  19,  1953,' 
notifying  you  tliat  as  a  result  of  the  entry  into 
force  on  July  25,  1952,  of  the  new  Constitution 
establishing  the  Commonwealth  of  Puerto  Rico, 
the  U.S.  Government  has  decided  to  cease  to  trans- 
mit information  on  Puerto  Rico  under  article 
73  (e)  of  the  Charter. 

The  attainment  by  the  people  of  Puerto  Rico 
of  their  new  Commonwealth  status  is  a  most  sig- 
nificant step.  This  is  the  kind  of  progress  to  self- 
government  contemplated  by  the  U.N.  Charter. 
This  is  the  democratic  pattern  of  the  free  world — 
of  goals  set  and  hopes  realized.     The  people  of 

'  Bulletin  of  Feb.  9,  1953,  p.  229. 


Puerto  Rico  expressed  their  view  by  resolution  at 
their  Constitutional  Convention  in  the  following 
words : 

Thus  we  attain  the  goal  of  complete  self-government,  the 
last  vestiges  of  colonialism  having  disappeared  in  the 
principle  of  Compact,  and  we  enter  into  an  era  of  new 
developments  in  democratic  civilization. 

I  invite  your  attention  in  particular  to  the  en- 
closed letter  of  Governor  Muiioz  Marin  of  the 
Commonwealth  of  Puerto  Rico  in  which,  after  re- 
questing the  termination  of  the  transmittal  of 
information  under  article  73  (e)  with  respect  to 
Puerto  Rico,  and  after  recounting  the  develop- 
ment of  the  Island's  political  progress,  he  says: 

The  people  of  Puerto  Rico  are  firm  supporters  of  the 
United  Nations  and  this  great  organization  may  con- 
fidently rely  upon  us  for  a  continuation  of  that  good  will. 

Let  me  add  that  the  jieople  of  Puerto  Rico  at  this 
moment  are  proudly  cooperating  to  the  utmost  in 
the  U.N.  effort  to  repel  aggression  in  Korea.  The 
men  of  Puerto  Rico  who  are  bearing  the  hardships 
of  battle  with  other  U.N.  troops  have,  by  their 
courage  and  determination,  demonstrated  their 
strong  love  for  freedom. 


584 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


There  are  enclosed  for  the  information  of  the 
members  of  the  United  Nations  the  followin<r  doc- 
uments in  compliance  with  the  terms  of  Resolution 
'2-2'2  (III)  of  the  General  Assembly: 

(1)  Text  of  the  Constitution  of  the  Common- 
wealth of  Puerto  Rico.^ 

(2)  Memorandum  by  the  Government  of  the 
United  States  of  America  Concerning  the  Cessa- 
tion of  Transmission  of  Information  Under 
Article  73  (e)  of  the  Charter  With  Regard  to  the. 
Commonwealth  of  Puerto  Rico, 

(3)  Copy  of  the  letter  dated  January  17,  1953, 
from  the  Governor  of  Puerto  Rico  to  the  Presi- 
dent of  the  United  States. 

MEMORANDUM  BY  THE  GOVERNMENT  OF  THE 
UNITED  STATES  OF  AMERICA  CONCERNING 
THE  CESSATION  OF  TRANSMISSION  OF  IN- 
FORMATION UNDER  ARTICLE  73  (e)  OF  THE 
CHARTER  WITH  REGARD  TO  THE  COMMON- 
WEALTH OF  PUERTO  RICO 

Introduction 

1  The  United  States  Government,  in  pursuance  of 
Article  73  (e)  of  the  Charter  of  the  United  Nations,  has, 
in  accordance  with  Resolution  66  (I)  adopted  by  the 
General  Assembly  of  the  United  Nations  on  December  14, 
1946,  transmitted  annually  to  the  Secretary  General  since 
1946  information  on  Puerto  Rico.  During  this  period 
successive  advances  have  been  made  in  the  growth  and 
development  of  self-governing  institutions  in  Puerto  Rico 
and  in  the  vesting  of  powers  of  government  in  the  Puerto 
Rican  people  and  their  elected  representatives.  This 
process  has  reached  its  culmination  with  the  establish- 
ment of  the  Commonwealth  of  Puerto  Rico  and  the  pro- 
mulgation of  the  Constitution  of  this  Commonwealth  on 
July  25,  1952.  ,  ^      ^ 

2.  With  the  establishment  of  the  Commonwealth  of 
Puerto  Rico,  the  people  of  Puerto  Rico  have  attained  a 
full  measure  of  self-government.  Accordingly,  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  United  States  has  decided  that  it  is  no 
longer  appropriate  for  it  to  submit  information  on  Puerto 
Rico  pursuant  to  Article  73  (e)  of  the  Charter. 

3.  Resolution  222  (III),  adopted  by  the  General  As- 
sembly on  November  3,  1948,  states  that,  having  regard 
to  the  provisions  of  Chapter  XI  of  the  Charter,  it  is  es- 
sential that  the  United  Nations  be  informed  of  any  change 
in  the  constitutional  position  and  status  of  any  non-self- 
governing  territory  as  a  result  of  which  the  responsible 
government  concerned  thinks  it  unnecessary  to  transmit 
information  in  respect  of  that  territory  under  Article 
73  (e)  of  the  Charter.  The  Members  of  the  United  Na- 
tions concerned  are  requested  by  this  resolution  to  com- 
municate to  the  Secretary  General,  within  a  maximum 
period  of  six  months,  such  information  as  may  be  appro- 
priate, including  the  constitution,  legislative  act  or  exec- 
utive order  providing  for  the  government  of  the  territory 
and  the  constitutional  relationship  of  the  territory  to  the 
government  of  the  metropolitan  country. 

4.  As  a  result  of  the  change  in  the  constitutional  posi- 
tion and  status  of  Puerto  Rico  as  described  in  this  mem- 
orandum, the  Government  of  the  United  States  considers 
it  unnecessary  to  transmit  further  information  under 
Article  73   (e)    of  the  Charter  concerning  the  Commou- 


"  H.  doc.  435,  82d  Cong.,  2d  sess. 
Apr//  20,   1953 


wealth  of  Puerto  Rico.  The  United  States  Government 
desires  that  the  United  Nations  be  fully  informed  of  the 
background  of  this  decision.  Accordingly,  and  in  pursu-. 
ance  of  Resolution  222  (III),  this  memorandum  has  been 
prepared  and,  together  with  a  copy  of  the  Constitution  of 
the  Commonwealth  of  Puerto  Rico  and  a  letter  from  the 
Governor  of  Puerto  Rico  is  transmitted  to  the  Secretary 
General  for  circulation  to  the  Members  of  the  United 
Nations  for  their  information. 

Constitutional  Development  of  Puerto  Rico 
Under  United  States  Administration 

5.  Puerto  Rico  has  been  administered  by  the  United 
States  since  1898  when  Spain  ceded  its  sovereignty  to  the 
Island  under  terms  of  the  Treaty  of  Paris.  Puerto  Rico 
had  a  military  government  until  1900  when  the  United 
States  Congress  enacted  the  first  organic  law  providing 
for  a  civil  form  of  government.  The  establishment  of 
the  Commonwealth  in  July  1952  marks  the  culmination 
of  a  steady  progression  in  the  exercise  of  self-government 
initiated  by  the  first  organic  law. 

6.  The  first  organic  law,  known  as  the  Foraker  Act, 
provided  for  a  Governor  appointed  by  the  President  of 
the  United  States,  with  the  advice  and  consent  of  the 
Senate  of  the  United  States,  a  legislative  assembly  in 
which  the  lower  house  was  elected  but  the  upper  house 
was  composed  of  the  heads  of  executive  departments  of 
the  government  and  five  other  persons,  all  appointed  by 
the  President  with  the  advice  and  consent  of  the  Senate ; 
and  a  supreme  court,  the  members  of  which  were  also 
appointed  by  the  President  with  the  advice  and  consent 
of  the  Senate,  justices  of  the  lower  courts  being  appointed 
by  the  Governor  with  advice  and  consent  of  the  upper 
house  of  the  legislature.  The  act  provided  for  Puerto 
Rico's  representation  before  all  departments  of  the  Fed- 
eral Government  by  a  popularly  elected  Resident  Com- 
missioner. The  Resident  Commissioner  has  a  seat  in  the 
House  of  Representatives  of  the  Congress  of  the  United 
States. 

7.  In  1917,  the  scope  of  self-government  was  increased 
with  enactment  by  the  Congress  of  a  second  organic  law 
known  as  the  Jones  Act.  Under  it,  the  people  of  Puerto 
Rico  elected  both  houses  of  their  legislature,  and  the  popu- 
larly elected  upper  house  advised  and  consented  to  the 
Governor's  appointment  of  justices  of  the  lower  courts. 
The  President  retained  authority  to  appoint  the  Governor, 
the  justices  of  the  supreme  court,  the  heads  of  the  de- 
partments of  justice  and  education,  and  the  auditor,  but 
all  other  heads  of  executive  departments  were  appointed 
by  the  Governor.  The  people  of  Puerto  Rico  became  citi- 
zens of  the  United  States.  The  protection  of  a  bill 
of  rights  patterned  on  the  bill  of  rights  of  the  United 
States  Constitution  was  extended  to  Puerto  Rico.  Pro- 
vision for  representation  before  the  various  departments 
of  the  Federal  Government  remained.  The  legislature 
could  repass  a  bill  over  the  Governor's  veto,  but  if  the 
Governor  did  not  then  approve  it,  it  did  not  become  law 
unless  it  received  the  approval  of  the  President. 

8.  In  1946,  the  President  appointed  as  Governor,  with 
the  advice  and  consent  of  the  Senate,  a  Puerto  Rican  who 
had  formerly  been  Resident  Commissioner  from  Puerto 
Rico.  This  was  the  first  time  that  a  Puerto  Rican  had 
been  appointed  Governor. 

9.  In  1947,  the  Congress  authorized  the  people  of  Puerto 
Rico  to  elect  their  Governor,  beginning  with  the  general 
election  in  1948,  and  provideil  a  line  of  succession  in  the 
event  of  a  vacancy  in  the  position  of  Governor  or  of  the 
Governor's  temporary  absence  or  disability.  The  elected 
Governor  was  authorized  to  appoint  all  the  members  of 
his  cabinet,  the  heads  of  the  executive  departments,  in- 
cluding the  attorney  general  and  commissioner  of  educa- 
tion. No  change  was  made  at  that  time  in  the  provisions 
respecting  appointment  of  the  auditor  and  justices  of  the 
supreme  court. 

585 


Development  and  Adoption  of  the  Constitution 
of  the  Commonwealth  of  Puerto  Rico 

10.  In  1948,  the  candidates  for  Governor  and  Resident 
Commissioner  from  Puerto  Rico,  who  were  elected  by  very 
substantial  majorities,  ran  on  a  platform  calling  for  the 
adoption  by  the  people  of  I'uerto  Rico  of  a  constitution 
of  their  own  drafting,  within  the  framework  of  a  con- 
tinuing relationship  with  the  United  States  to  which  the 
people  of  Puerto  Rico  would  consent.  In  that  election, 
the  candidates  who  advocated  statehood  for  Puerto  Rico 
and  independence  for  Puerto  Rico  were  defeated.  An 
overwhelming  number  of  candidates  for  the  legislature 
who  ran  on  the  same  program  as  the  successful  candidates 
for  Governor  and  Resident  Commissioner  were  also  elected. 
In  accordance  with  the  expressed  wishes  of  the  people 
of  Puerto  Rico,  there  was  introduced  in  the  Congress  a 
bill  to  provide  for  the  organization  of  a  constitutional 
government  bv  the  people  of  Puerto  Rico.  It  was  enacted 
on  July  3,  1950  as  Public  Law  000,  81st  Cong.  (61  Stat- 
319). 

11.  That  law  expressly  recognized  the  principle  of 
government  by  consent,  and  declaring  that  it  was  "adopted 
in  the  nature  of  a  compact",  required  that  it  be  submitted 
to  the  voters  of  Puerto  Rico  in  an  island-wide  referendum 
for  acceptance  or  rejection.  If  the  act  were  approved  by  a 
majority  of  participating  roters,  the  Legislature  of  Puerto 
Rico  was  authorized  to  call  a  constitutional  convention  to 
formulate  a  constitution,  which  would  become  effective 
upon  its  adoption  by  the  people  if  approved  by  the  Con- 
gress after  a  finding  by  the  President  that  it  conformed 
with  the  applicable  provisions  of  the  act  and  of  the  Con- 
stitution of  the  United  States.  Those  provisions  of  the 
Organic  Act  which  related  to  matters  of  local  government 
would  thereupon  be  repealed,  while  the  remaining  pro- 
visions of  the  Organic  Act,  relating  to  such  matters  as 
Puerto  Rico's  economic  relationship  to  the  United  States, 
the  force  and  effect  of  applicable  Federal  laws,  and  con- 
tinued representation  in  Washington,  would  thenceforth 
be  known  as  the  Puerto  Rican  Federal  Relations  Act.  The 
Congress  made  only  two  stipulations  with  respect  to  the 
content  of  the  constitution  to  be  adopted;  that  it  provide 
a  republican  form  of  government  and  that  it  include  a 
bill  of  rights. 

12.  Four  political  parties  participated  in  the  campaign 
preceding  the  referendum :  two  advocated  approval  of 
Public  Law  COO,  81st  Congress,  one  opposed  it,  and  one 
was  divided  in  its  position.  On  June  4,  19:j1,  506,185 
persons,  65.08  percent  of  the  777,675  qualified  voters  of 
Puerto  Rico,  participated  in  the  referendum,  and  76.5 
percent  of  those  voting  approved  the  act.  On  August  27, 
1951,  ninety-two  delegates  were  elected  to  a  constitutional 
convention,  representing  the  Popular  Democratic,  the 
Statehood  and  the  Socialist  parties.  The  convention  met 
in  September  1951,  and  concluded  its  painstaking  work 
in  February  1952.  An  official  English  and  an  official 
Spanish  version  of  the  constitution  were  adopted,  and 
the  text  was  puhlistied  in  the  four  daily  newspapers  of 
Puerto  Rico  in  both  languages.  Copies  of  the  document 
were  distributed  throughout  the  Island. 

13.  On  March  3.  1952,  the  constitution  was  submitted 
for  adoption  or  rejection.  Of  the  783,610  qualified  voters, 
456,471  participated  in  the  referendum.  Of  these,  373,594 
or  81.84  percent  of  those  voting  supported  adoption  of  the 
constitution  ;  only  82,877  or  18.16  percent  of  those  voting 
disapproved  it.  All  of  the  elections  and  referenda  held 
in  Puerto  Rico  in  connection  with  the  development  of  the 
constitution  were  on  the  basis  of  universal  adult  suffrage 
without  property  or  literacy  requirements.  Puerto  Rico 
has  bad  universal  adult  suffrage  since  1929.  There  have 
been  no  property  requirements  since  1906  and  the  last 
literacy  requirements  were  removed  in  1935. 

14.  On  April  22,  19.52,  the  President  transmitted  the 
Constitution  to  the  Congress  with  his  recommendation 
for  approval,  and  by  Public  Law  447,  82nd  Cong.  (66 
Stat.  327),  signed  by  the  President  on  July  3,  19.52,  the 
Congress  approved   the   Constitution   subject   to   certain 


conditions  which  were  to  be  submitted  for  approval  to 
the  Puerto  Rican  Constitutional  Convention.  Public  Law 
447,  in  its  preambular  provisions,  recalled  that  the  Act  j 
of  July  3,  1950  "was  adopted  by  the  Congress  as  a  com- 
pact with  the  people  of  Puerto  Rico,  to  become  operative 
upon  its  approval  by  the  people  of  Puerto  Rico";  that  the 
Ijeople  of  i'uerto  Rico  had  overwhelmingly  approved  this 
Act  and  that  the  Constitution  of  Puerto  Rico  had  been 
drafted  by  a  Constitutional  Convention;  that  the  Consti- 
tution was  adopted  by  the  people  of  Puerto  Rico  in  a 
referendum ;  that  the  President  of  the  United  States 
had  declared  that  the  Constitution  conformed  fully  with 
the  applicable  provisions  of  the  .\ct  of  July  3,  1950  and 
the  Constitution  of  the  United  States,  that  it  contained 
a  Bill  of  Rights,  and  provided  for  a  republican  form 
of  government ;  and  that  the  Congress  of  the  United 
States  had  considered  the  Constitution  and  found  that 
it  conformed  with  the  stipulated  requirements.  The 
operative  part  of  Public  Law  447  recorded  the  approval 
by  the  Congress  of  the  United  States  of  the  Constitution 
of  the  Commonwealth  of  Puerto  Rico  subject  to  certain 
conditions,  among  which  was  that  the  following  new 
sentence  be  added  to  Article  VII :  "Any  amendment  or 
revision  of  this  Constitution  shall  be  consistent  with  the 
resolution  enacted  by  the  Congress  of  the  United  States 
approving  this  Constitution,  with  the  applicable  provi- 
sions of  the  Constitution  of  the  United  States,  with  the 
Puerto  Rican  Federal  Relations  Act,  and  with  Public  Law 
600,  Slst  Cong.,  adopted  in  the  nature  of  a  compact."  The 
Puerto  Rican  Constitutional  Convention  considered  and 
approved  these  conditions.  On  July  25,  1952.  the  Governor 
of  Puerto  Rico  proclaimed  the  establishment  of  the  Com- 
monwealth of  Puerto  Rico  under  its  Constitution. 


Principal  Features  of  the  Constitution 
of  the  Commonwealth 

15.  The  Constitution  of  the  Commonwealth,  as  it  be- 
came effective  with  the  approval  of  the  Congress,  provides 
that  "Its  political  power  emanates  from  the  people  and 
shall  be  exercised  in  accordance  with  their  will,  within 
the  terms  of  the  compact  agreed  upon  between  the  people 
of  Puerto  Rico  and  the  United  States  of  .\merica"  (Art. 
I,  Secticm  1).  The  Constitution  of  the  Commonwealth 
is  similar  to  that  of  a  State  of  the  Federal  Union.  It 
establishes  a  tri-partite  form  of  government,  with  a  popu- 
larly elected  Governor,  a  popularly  elected  bicameral 
legislature  and  a  judicial  branch.  The  heads  of  all  execu- 
tive departments  are  appointed  by  the  Governor,  with  the 
advice  and  consent  of  the  Puerto  Rican  Senate:  appoint- 
ment of  the  Secretary  of  State  also  requires  the  consent 
of  the  House  of  Representatives.  It  should  be  noted  that 
with  the  establishment  of  the  Commonwealth  neither 
the  President  nor  the  United  States  Senate  participates 
in  any  way  in  the  appointment  of  any  oflBcial  of  the  gov- 
ernment of  the  Commonwealth. 

16.  The  Legislative  Assembly,  which  is  elected  by  free, 
universal  and  secret  suffrage  of  the  people  of  Puerto  Rico, 
has  full  legislative  authority  in  respect  to  local  matters. 
The  Commonwealth  has  the  power  to  impose  and  collect 
taxes,  and  to  contract  debts.  Acts  of  the  Legislative 
Assembly  become  law  upon  approval  of  the  Governor,  or, 
in  the  event  that  an  act  is  vetoed  b.v  the  Governor,  \jpon 
its  reenactment  by  two-thirds  of  the  total  number  of 
members  of  which  each  house  is  composed.  The  Presi- 
dent may  no  longer  prevent  a  bill  repassed  over  the 
Governor's  veto  from  becoming  law  by  disapproving  it. 
The  protection  of  a  bill  of  rights  is  extended  to  persons 
in  Puerto  Rico.  All  public  officials  must  take  an  oath  to 
support  the  Constitution  of  the  United  States  and  the 
Constitution  and  laws  of  the  Commonwealth.  Amend- 
ments to  the  Constitution  may  be  proposed  by  the  Legis- 
lative Assembly,  and  will  be  voted  on  at  a  referendum, 
becoming  effective  if  ratified  by  a  majority  of  the  electors 
voting  thereon.  The  Constitution  does  not  restrict  the 
substance  of  future  amendments,  except  to  provide  that 


586 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


they  shall  be  consistent  with  the  act  approving  the  Con- 
stitution, with  the  applicable  provisions  of  the  Federal 
Constitution,  with  the  Puerto  Kican  Federal  Relations 
Act,  and  with  the  act  of  Congress  authorizing  the  drafting 
and  adoption  of  a  constitution. 

17.  The  judiciary  of  the  Commonwealth  is  independent 
under  the  Constitution.  The  justices  of  the  Supreme 
Court  are  no  lonjier  appointed  by  the  President  but  are 
appointed  by  the  Governor  with  the  advice  and  consent 
of  the  Senate  of  Puerto  Rico.  .Justices  hold  office  during 
good  behavior  and  may  be  removed,  after  impeachment, 
for  causes  specified  in  the  Constitution.  The  number  of 
justices  may  be  increased  only  by  law  at  the  request  of 
the  court  itself.  No  judge  may  make  a  direct  or  indirect 
financial  contribution  to  any  political  organization  or 
party,  or  hold  any  elective  office  therein,  or  participate 
in  any  political  campaign  or  be  a  candidate  for  elective 
office  unless  he  has  resigned  his  judicial  office  at  least  six 
months  prior  to  his  nomination.  Although  judgments  of 
the  Supreme  Court  of  Puerto  Rico  may  be  appealed  to  the 
United  States  Court  of  Appeals,  decisions  of  the  United 
States  Supreme  Court  have  estalilished  that  the  Supreme 
Court  of  Puerto  Rico  is  the  final  authority  on  the  meaning 
of  a  Puerto  Rican  law  and  that  its  decision  interpreting 
such  a  law  may  not  be  reversed  unless  the  interpretation 
is  "inescapalily  wrong"  and  the  decision  "patently  errone- 
ous" ;  it  is  not  sufficient  to  justify  reversal  that  the  Fed- 
eral Court  merely  disagree  with  the  Puerto  Rican 
Supreme  Court's  interpretation.  There  continues  to  be 
a  Federal  District  Court  in  Puerto  Rico,  but  its  jurisdic- 
tion does  not  differ  from  the  jurisdiction  of  Federal  Dis- 
trict Courts  functioning  within  the  boundaries  of  States. 

IS.  Under  the  Constitution,  there  is  full  and  effective 
participation  of  the  population  of  Puerto  Rico  in  the 
Government  of  Puerto  Rico.  Article  II,  section  1,  pro- 
vides that  no  di.scrimination  shall  be  made  on  account  of 
race,  color,  sex,  birth,  social  origin  or  condition,  or  polit- 
ical or  religious  ideas  and  requires  the  laws  to  embody 
these  principles.  Puerto  Rico  is  divided  by  the  Constitu- 
tion into  senatorial  and  representative  districts  for  pur- 
poses of  electing  members  of  the  Legislative  Assembly, 
and  provision  is  also  made  for  election  of  senators  and 
representatives  elected  at  large.  By  a  special  procedure 
established  by  Article  III  of  the  Constitution,  minority 
parties  are  assured  of  representation  which  recognizes 
their  island-wide  voting  strength.  Elections  will  be  held 
every  four  years. 

19.  Article  II,  section  2,  requires  that  the  laws  shall 
guarantee  the  expression  of  the  will  of  the  people  by 
means  of  equal,  direct,  and  secret  universal  suffrage  and 
shall  protect  the  citizen  against  any  coercion  in  the  exer- 
cise of  the  electoral  franchise.  Article  VI,  section  4,  pro- 
vides that  every  person  over  twenty-one  years  of  age  shall 
be  entitled  to  vote  if  he  fulfills  the  other  conditions  deter- 
mined by  law  and  prohibits  depriving  a  person  of  the 
right  to  vote  because  he  does  not  know  how  to  read  or 
write  or  does  not  own  property. 


Present  Status  of  Puerto  Rico 

20.  The  people  of  Puerto  Rico  continue  to  be  citizens 
of  the  United  States  as  well  as  of  Puerto  Rico  and  the 
fundamental  provisions  of  the  Constitution  of  the  United 
States  continue  to  be  applicable  to  Puerto  Rico.  Puerto 
Rico  will  continue  to  be  represented  in  Washington  by 
a  Resident  Commissioner  whose  functions  are  not  altered 
by  the  establishment  of  the  Commonwealth.  Matters  of 
foreign  relations  and  national  defence  will  continue  to  he 
conducted  by  the  United  States,  as  is  the  case  with  the 
States  of  the  Union. 

21.  At  the  request  of  the  people  of  Puerto  Rico  and 
with  the  approval  of  the  Government  of  the  United  States, 
Puerto  Rico  has  voluntarily  entered  into  the  relationship 
with  the  United  States  which  it  has  chosen  to  describe 
as  a  "commonwealth"  relationship.     The  term  "common- 


Apri!  20,   1953 


wealth"  was  adopted  by  Puerto  Rico  as  the  official  English 
designation  of  the  body  politic  created  by  the  Constitu- 
tion (the  official  Spanish  title  is  "estado  libra  asociado"), 
to  define  the  status  of  that  body  as  "a  state  which  Is  free 
of  superior  authority  in  the  management  of  its  own  local 
affairs  but  which  is  linked  to  the  United  States  of  America 
and  hence  is  a  part  of  its  political  system  in  a  manner 
compatible  with  its  Federal  structure",  and  which  "does 
not  have  an  independent  and  separate  existence"  (Reso- 
lution No.  22  of  the  Constitutional  Convention).  By  the 
various  actions  taken  by  the  Congress  and  the  people  of 
Puerto  Rico,  Congress  has  agreed  that  Puerto  Rico  shall 
have,  under  that  Constitution,  freedom  from  control  or 
interference  by  the  Congress  in  respect  of  internal  gov- 
ernment and  administration,  subject  only  to  compliance 
with  applicable  provisions  of  the  Federal  Constitution, 
the  Puerto  Rican  Federal  Relations  Act  and  the  acts  of 
Congress  authorizing  and  approving  the  Constitution,  as 
may  be  interpreted  by  judicial  decision.  Those  laws 
which  directed  or  authorized  interference  with  matters  of 
local  government  by  the  Federal  Government  have  been 
repealed. 

22.  In  Hawaii,  Alaska.  Guam  and  the  "Virgin  Islands  of 
the  United  States  the  chief  executive  is  appointed  by  the 
President  with  the  advice  and  consent  of  the  Senate,  not 
popularly  elected  by  the  people ;  the  executive  officer  im- 
mediately subordinate  to  the  Governor  is  appointed  by 
the  President,  either  alone  or  with  the  advice  and  consent 
of  the  Senate,  but  not  by  the  Governor ;  and  judges  of  the 
highest  courts  exercising  local  jurisdiction  are  appointed 
by  the  President  with  the  advice  and  consent  of  the  Sen- 
ate, not  by  the  Governor.  This  is  so  provided  by  their 
respective  organic  acts  as  enacted  by  the  Congress.  This 
is  not  the  case  with  respegt  to  Puerto  Rico.  The  people 
of  Puerto  Rico  will  participate  effectively  in  their  govern- 
ment through  universal,  secret  and  equal  suffrage,  in  free 
and  periodic  elections  in  which  differing  political  parties 
offer  candidates,  and  which  are  assured  freedom  from 
undemocratic  practices  by  the  Constitution  itself.  These 
elections  will  be  conducted  in  the  future,  as  they  have  been 
in  the  past,  without  interference  by  the  United  States. 
The  people  of  Puerto  Rico  have  complete  autonomy  in 
internal  economic  matters  and  in  cultural  and  social  af- 
fairs under  a  Constitution  adopted  by  them  and  approved 
by  the  Congress. 

23.  Under  the  Puerto  Rican  Federal  Relations  Act, 
there  will  still  be  free  trade  with  the  United  States,  only 
United  States  coins  and  currency  will  be  legal  tender  in 
Puerto  Rico,  and  the  statutory  laws  of  the  United  States 
not  locally  inapplicable  will,  with  some  exceptions,  have 
the  same  force  and  effect  in  Puerto  Rico  as  in  the  United 
States.  United  States  internal  revenue  laws  do  not  apply 
in  Puerto  Rico,  and  the  people  of  Puerto  Rico  will  con- 
tinue to  be  exempt  from  Federal  income  taxes  on  the  in- 
come they  derive  from  sources  within  Puerto  Rico.  The 
proceeds  of  United  States  excise  taxes  collected  on  articles 
produced  in  Puerto  Rico  and  shipped  to  the  United  States 
and  the  proceeds  of  customs  collected  on  foreign  mer- 
chandise entering  Puerto  Rico  are  covered  into  the  Treas- 
ury of  Puerto  Rico  for  appropriation  and  expenditure  as 
the  legislature  of  the  Commonwealth  may  decide. 

24.  The  final  declaration  of  the  Constitutional  Conven- 
tion of  Puerto  Rico  (Resolution  No.  23),  expresses  the 
views  of  the  people  of  Puerto  Rico  as  to  the  status  they 
have  now  achieved. 

"When  this  Constitution  takes  effect,  the  people  of 
Puerto  Rico  shall  thereupon  be  organized  into  a  common- 
wealth established  within  the  terms  of  the  compact  en- 
tered into  by  mutual  consent,  which  is  the  basis  of  our 
union  with  the  United  States  of  America. 

"Thus  we  attain  the  goal  of  complete  self-government, 
the  last  vestiges  of  colonialism  having  disappeared  in  the 
principle  of  Compact,  and  we  enter  into  an  era  of  new 
developments  in  democratic  civilization." 

587 


Conclusion 

25.  The  United  States  Government,  therefore,  has  de- 
cided that,  with  the  entry  into  force  on  July  25,  1952,  of 
the  new  constitutional  arrangements  establishing  the 
Commonwealth  of  Puerto  Rico,  it  is  no  longer  appropriate 
for  the  United  States  to  continue  to  transmit  information 
to  the  United  Nations  on  Puerto  Rico  under  Article  73  (e) 
of  the  Charter.  This  conclu.sion  constitutes  a  recognition 
of  the  full  measure  of  self-government  which  has  heen 
achieved  by  the  people  of  Puerto  Rico. 


THE  GOVERNOR  OF  PUERTO  RICO  TO  THE 
PRESIDENT  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES 

Januaby  17,  1953 
The  Peesident  of  the  United  States, 
Washington,  D.C. 
My  Deab  Mr.  President: 

On  July  25, 1952,  the  Commonwealth  of  Puerto  Rico  was 
formally  installed  in  response  to  the  wish  of  an  over- 
whelming majority  of  the  people  of  Puerto  Rico  pursuant 
to  a  compact  between  them  and  the  Government  of  the 
United  States.  Puerto  Rico  became  a  Commonwealth  in 
free  and  voluntary  association  with  the  United  States,  and 
its  people  have  now  attained  a  full  measure  of  self-gov- 
ernment. Accordingly,  I  respectfully  suggest  on  behalf 
of  the  Commonwealth  of  Puerto  Rico  that  the  Government 
of  the  United  States  take  steps  to  notify  the  United 
Nations  of  the  status  of  Puerto  Rico,  that  it  is  no  longer 
a  non-self-governing  area,  and  that  reports  concerning 
it  are  no  longer  appropriate  under  Article  73  (e)  of  the 
Charter. 

This  development  has  climaxed  fifty-four  years  of 
growth  in  mutual  understanding  and  mutual  good  will. 
Democratic  rights  in  Puerto  Rico  have  been  progressively 
recognized  as  self-government  has  increased.  Since  1917, 
the  people  of  Puerto  Rico  elected  all  members  of  their 
legislature  which  had  comprehensive  powers  to  enact  laws 
for  Puerto  Rico.  Since  1948,  the  people  of  Puerto  Rico 
also  elected  their  own  governor,  and  all  other  officials  of 
Puerto  Rico  were  locally  elected  or  appointed  by  elected 
officials  except  the  Auditor  of  Puerto  Rico  and  the  Justices 
of  the  Supreme  Court.  Until  the  Commonwealth  of  Puerto 
Rico  began  to  function,  the  latter  officials  were  appointed 
by  the  President  of  the  United  States  with  the  advice  and 
consent  of  the  United  States  Senate.  The  Congress  of 
the  United  States,  however,  retained  full  jurisdiction  to 
legislate  with  respect  to  Puerto  Rico  without  the  consent 
of  its  people,  to  override  its  laws,  to  change  its  form  of 
government  and  to  alter  its  relations  to  the  United  States. 

These  reservations  have  been  to  a  large  extent  formal. 
In  the  entire  fifty-four  years  history  of  United  States  ad- 
ministration of  Puerto  Rico,  Congress  did  not  in  any 
instance  exercise  Its  power  to  annul  or  amend  an  Act 
of  the  Puerto  Rico  legislature,  nor  did  it  modify  the  rela- 
tions of  Puerto  Rico  to  the  United  States  except  progres- 
sively to  extend  self-government  to  its  people  in  response 
to  their  wishes.  Even  before  1948,  the  appointed  Governor 
of  Puerto  Rico  was  a  Puerto  Rican  whose  selection  was 
recommended  by  the  majority  political  party  of  the  island. 
After  1948,  the  appointed  Auditor  and  Justices  of  the 
Supreme  Court  were  Puerto  Ricans,  also  appointed  with 
the  recommendation  and  approval  of  the  majority  party. 

This  political  history  has  been  accompanied  by  a 
mutually  beneficial  economic  relationship.  The  people  of 
Puerto  Rico  have  received  many  services  from  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  United  States  and  have  benefited  by 
grants-in-aid.  Puerto  Ricans  have  not  been  subject  to 
the  payment  of  taxes  and  have  been  entirely  free  of  im- 
posts, duties  or  any  form  of  exactions  for  the  support  of 
the  federal  Government.  At  all  times  since  the  turn  of 
the  century  we  have  enjoyed  free  trade  with  the  United 


States,  and  since  1917  we  have  had  the  benefit  of  common 
citizenship.  Despite  the  fact  that  our  population  has 
grown  from  953,000  inhabitants  in  1900  to  2,219,000  in 
1950,  our  standard  of  living  has  substantially  increased. 
For  example,  the  averau'e  per  capita  income  in  1930  was 
$122.00  as  compared  with  $319.00  in  1950. 

The  people  of  Puerto  Rico  have  been  keenly  aware  of 
our  basic  economic  problems  due  to  the  density  of  popu- 
lation and  the  poverty  of  natural  resources.  We  are 
proud  of  the  progress  that  we  have  made  and  are  con- 
tinuing to  make  by  the  utilization  of  our  own  talents  and 
our  democratic  institutions.  This  progress  would  have 
been  impossible,  however,  if  it  had  not  been  for  the  sym- 
pathetic cooperation  of  the  United  States,  manifested  in 
a  wide  variety  of  ways,  material  and  political.  We  have 
been  helijed  in  building  sounder  social  and  educational 
bases  for  the  exercise  of  our  political  rights  and  for  our 
own  economic  advancement.  Our  joint  efforts  in  com- 
batting illiteracy  and  improving  health  conditions  have 
produced  remarkable  results.  In  1900  the  literacy  rate 
in  Puerto  Rico  was  20  percent  as  compared  to  78  percent 
in  1950 ;  and  in  the  same  period  the  death  rate  has  dropped 
from  25.3  per  thousand  to  10  per  thousand. 

Although  the  relationship  was  one  of  freedom  and 
justice  in  practice,  the  people  of  Puerto  Rico  were  not 
satisfied  to  remain  in  a  status  which  appeared  to  reflect 
the  imposition  upon  a  people  of  the  will  of  another  com- 
munity. We  are  proud  of  our  culture  and  background, 
and  we  cherish  our  individual  dignity  and  our  common 
heritage.  We  profoundly  believe  that  our  government 
should  be  solidly  based  upon  our  own  will  and  our  own 
free  choice.  Accordingly,  for  some  years,  as  our  demo- 
cratic institutions  developed  and  became  firmly  estab- 
lished, the  people  considered  and  debated  the  matter  of 
their  status. 

Specifically,  the  people  of  Puerto  Rico  discussed  three 
choices :  independence,  statehood  within  the  Federal 
Union,  or  association  with  the  United  States  as  a  free 
Commonwealth.  At  no  time  did  we  consider  that  our 
choice  was  restricted,  or  that  any  alternative  was  fore- 
clo.«ed  to  us  or  could  not  be  achieved  by  peaceful  means ; 
and  it  should  be  said  that  at  no  time  did  the  United  States 
attempt,  directly  or  indirectly,  to  interfere  with  our 
choice.  On  the  contrary.  President  Truman  said  in  a 
message  to  the  Congress  as  long  ago  as  October  1945 : 

"It  is  the  settled  iwlicy  of  this  Government  to  promote 
the  political,  social,  and  economic  development  of  people 
who  have  not  yet  attained  full  self-government  and 
eventually  to  make  it  possible  for  them  to  determine  their 
own  form  of  government  •  *  *.  It  is  now  time,  in  my 
opinion,  to  ascertain  from  the  people  of  Puerto  Rico  their 
wishes  as  to  the  ultimate  status  which  they  prefer,  and, 
within  such  limits  as  may  be  determined  by  the  Congress, 
to  grant  to  them  the  kind  of  government  which  they 
desire." 

And  in  his  message  to  the  Congress  in  January  1946,  he 
said, 

"This  Government  is  committed  to  the  democratic  prin- 
ciple that  it  is  for  the  dependent  peoples  themselves  to 
decide  what  their  status  shall  be." 

Each  of  the  alternatives  of  independence,  statehood, 
and  association  has  been  represented  in  Puerto  Rico  by 
a  political  party  which  favored  it,  and  which  actively 
campaigned  for  the  support  of  the  electorate  and  nomi- 
nated candidates  for  the  legislature  and  the  governorship. 
In  the  1948  elections  the  three  alternatives  were  fully 
presented  to  the  electorate  by  the  three  main  political 
parties.  The  preference  of  the  people,  expressed  in  an 
election  which  was  as  democratic  as  any  in  the  world,  was 
unmistakably  expressed  in  favor  of  the  third  alternative: 
a  free  Commonwealth  associated  with  the  United  States 
on  the  basis  of  mutual  consent.  Their  choice  is  aptly 
summed  up  in  the  Spanish  name  of  the  new  body  politic, 
"Bstado  Libre  Asociado." 

It  was  at  the  request  of  the  officials  of  the  Puerto  Rican 


588 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


government  acting  pursuant  to  the  mandate  of  the  people 
that  the  Congress  of  the  United  States  initiated  the  series 
of  actions  which  resulted  in  the  creation  of  the  Common- 
wealth. On  July  3,  1950,  tJhe  81st  Congress  enacted  Public 
Law  600.  This  was,  in  effect,  an  offer  by  the  Congress 
to  the  people  of  Puerto  Rico,  which  we  might  accept  or 
reject,  to  enter  into  a  compact  defining  the  status  of 
Puerto  Rico  and  the  relationships  between  the  respective 
communities.  The  compact  offered  the  people  of  Puerto 
Rico  an  opportunity  to  establish  our  own  government  and 
to  remain  in  association  with  the  United  States  on  defined 
terms.  It  was  the  precise  formula  that  the  people,  through 
their  elected  representatives,  had  requested. 

According  to  its  terms.  Public  Law  600  was  submitted 
to  the  qualified  voters  of  Puerto  Rico  in  a  referendum 
held  on  June  4,  1951  after  months  of  intensive  debate. 
The  Law  was  accepted  by  the  people  of  Puerto  Rico  by 
a  vote  of  387,016  to  119,169.  Sixty-five  percent  of  the 
eligible  voters  participated  in  the  referendum.  In  this 
as  in  all  elections  in  Puerto  Rico,  all  citizens  of  at  least 
21  years  of  age,  male  or  female,  without  property  or 
literacy  requirements,  were  entitled  to  vote. 

After  acceptance  of  Law  600,  a  Constitutional  Conven- 
tion was  elected  on  August  27,  1951  in  an  election  where 
all  the  qualified  voters  had  the  right  to  participate.  The 
Convention  met  at  San  Juan  on  September  17,  1951  and 
proceeded  to  draft  a  Constitution.  On  February  6,  1952 
it  approved  the  Constitution  of  the  Commonwealth  of 
Puerto  Rico  which  it  had  drafted,  by  a  vote  of  88  to  3. 
On  March  3,  1952  the  qualified  voters  of  Puerto  Rico  again 
went  to  the  polls  to  express  approval  or  disapproval  of 
the  Constitution  drafted  by  the  Convention.  The  Con- 
stitution was  ratified  in  this  referendum  by  a  vote  of 
373,594  in  favor  of  approval  and  82,877  against  approval. 

Pursuant  to  the  provisions  of  the  Compact,  the  Congress 
of  the  United  States  on  July  3,  1952,  approved  the  Con- 
stitution of  the  Commonwealth  of  Puerto  Rico.'  On  July 
11,  1952,  the  Constitutional  Convention  of  Puerto  Rico 
by  resolution  accepted  amendments  proposed  by  the  Con- 
gress and  took  the  final  step  in  ratifying  the  Constitution 
of  the  Commonwealth.  The  Commonwealth  was  duly 
installed  on  July  25,  1952,  and  the  flag  of  Puerto  Rico 
was  raised  beside  the  flag  of  the  United  States. 

The  Commonwealth  of  Puerto  Rico,  therefore,  repre- 
sents tlie  government  that  the  people  of  Puerto  Rico  have 
freely  adopted.  It  reflects  our  own  decision  as  to  the 
type  of  institutions  and  the  liind  of  relationship  to  the 
United  States  which  we  desire.  There  can  be  no  doubt 
that  in  the  full  sense  of  the  term,  in  form  as  well  as  in 
fact,  the  people  of  Puerto  Rico  are  now  self-governing. 
We  have  chosen  our  institutions  and  relationship  with 
the  United  States.  We  have  determined  the  nature  and 
distribution  of  the  powers  of  government.  We  have  cre- 
ated our  own  Constitution  under  which  we  established 
our  own  government,  the  nature  of  which  is  described 
in  Article  I,  Section  2  of  the  Constitution  as  follows : 

"The  government  of  the  Commonwealth  of  Puerto  Rico 
shall  be  republican  in  form  and  its  legislative,  judicial 
and  executive  branches  as  established  by  this  Constitu- 
tion shall  be  equally  subordinate  to  the  sovereignty  of 
the  people  of  Puerto  Rico." 

Under  this  Constitution,  of  course,  all  of  our  officials  are 
either  elected  by  the  people  or  are  appointed  by  officials 
whom  we  elect.  The  legislative  power  of  the  Common- 
wealth under  the  compact  and  the  Constitution  essen- 
tially parallels  that  of  the  state  governments.  The  laws 
enacted  by  the  Government  of  the  Commonwealth  pur- 
suant to  the  compact  cannot  be  repealed  or  modified  by 
external  authority,  and  their  effect  and  validity  are  sub- 
ject to  adjudication  by  the  courts.     Our  status  and  the 


'  For  President  Truman's  message  to  the  Congress  re- 
questing approval  of  the  Constitution,  see  Bulletin  of 
May  5,  1952,  p.  721.  For  his  statement  on  signing  the 
joint  resolution  of  approval,  see  ibid.,  July  21,  1952,  p.  91. 


terms  of  our  association  with  the  United  States  cannot 
be  changed  without  our  full  consent. 

The  people  of  Puerto  Rico  are  firm  supporters  of  the 
United  Nations,  and  this  great  organization  may  confi- 
dently rely  upon  us  for  a  continuation  of  that  good  will. 
The  Government  of  the  Commonwealth  of  Puerto  Rico 
will  be  ready  at  all  times  to  cooperate  with  the  United 
States  in  seeking  to  advance  the  purposes  and  principles 
of  the  United  Nations. 
Sincerely  yours, 

Luis  Munoz  Mabin 
Got'Ornor 
Commonwealth  of  Puerto  Rico 

U.  S.  Delegations 

to  International  Conferences 

U.N.  Economic  Commission  for  Latin  America 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  April  9 
(press  release  179),  that  Merwin  L.  Bohan,  U.S. 
representative  on  the  Inter-American  Economic 
and  Social  Council,  had  been  designated  acting 
U.S.  representative  for  the  fifth  session  of  the 
U.N.  Economic  Commission  for  Latin  America, 
which  is  to  open  on  that  date  at  the  Hotel  Quitan- 
dinha  in  Petropolis,  Brazil. 

The  acting  U.S.  representative  will  be  assisted 
by  the  following  advisers : 

Robert  E.  Asher,  Office  of  Assistant  Secretary  for  Eco- 
nomic Affairs,  Department  of  State 

James  C.  Carliss,  Office  of  Regional  Inter-American  Af- 
fairs, Department  of  State 

Edmund  H.  Kellogg,  Office  of  U.N.  Economic  and  Social 
Affairs,  Department  of  State 

Fred  Burton  Smith,  Office  of  the  General  Counsel,  Depart- 
ment of  the  Treasury 

Mrs.   Kathryn   H.   Wylie,   agricultural   economist,   Latin 
American  Division,  Department  of  Agriculture 

George  Wythe,  OflSce  of  International  Trade,  Department 
of  Commerce 

At  its  forthcoming  session,  the  Commission  will 
make  an  extensive  survey  of  the  current  economic 
situation  in  Latin  America.  Among  the  subjects 
which  will  be  considered  in  this  connection  are: 
trends  in  production  and  the  rate  of  development ; 
inflationary  tendencies ;  trends  in  exports  and  im- 
ports; price  movements  of  export  commodities; 
payments  problems — in  particular,  changes  in  the 
pattern  of  payments  with  reference  to  Europe; 
and  problems  of  intra-regional  trade.  Of  the 
several  important  background  documents  which 
will  be  used  by  the  Commission  in  its  consideration 
of  these  subjects,  one  relates  to  the  possibility  of 
effecting  multilateral  compensation  agreements 
between  Latin  American  and  European  countries 
through  the  facilities  of  the  European  Payments 
Union ;  another  is  the  Resolution  of  the  U.N.  Gen- 
eral Assembly  on  "Financing  of  Economic  Devel- 
opment through  the  establishment  of  fair  and 
equitable  international  prices  for  primary  com- 
modities and  through  the  execution  of  national 
programmes  of  integrated  economic  develop- 
ment." 


April  20,   J  953 


589 


Inter-American  Council  of  Jurists 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  April  9 
(press  release  181)  that  the  United  States  would 
be  represented  by  the  following  delegation  at  the 
Second  Meeting  of  the  Inter- American  Council  of 
Jurists,  which  is  scheduled  to  convene  at  Buenos 
Aires  on  April  20, 1953 : 

U.S.  representative 

William  Sanders,  Special  Assistant  and  Planning  Adviser, 
Bureau  of  United  Nations  Affairs 

Alternate  U.S.  representative 

George  H.  Owen,  U.S.  Member,  Inter-American  Juridical 
Committee,  American  Embassy,  Rio  de  Janeiro 

Advisers 

Edward  A.  Jamison,  Deputy  Director,  Office  of  Regional 
American  Affairs,  Department  of  State 

Marjorie    M.    Whiteman,    Assistant    Legal    Adviser    for 
Inter-American  Affairs,  Department  of  State 

The  agenda  for  the  forthcoming  meeting,  as 
approved  by  the  Council  of  the  Oas  on  January 
26,  1053,  contains  13  topics  for  consideration  by 
the  Inter-American  Council  of  Jurists.  Those 
topics  relate  to  politico-juridical  matters,  codifica- 
tion and  uniformity  of  legislation  matters,  and 
organizational  matters. 


ators  of  prize-winning  films  of  previous  festivals, 
except  that  no  persons  who  have  participated  in 
tiie  production  or  presentation  of  a  film  entered 
this  year  may  be  a  jury  member. 

The  U.S.  Government  will  show  the  film  "And 
Now,  Miguel,"  produced  for  the  Overseas  Infor- 
mation Service  of  the  Department  of  State.  The 
Mutual  Security  Agency  will  be  I'epresented  by 
several  films  attributed  to  the  countries  of  origin. 
The  American  motion  picture  industry  is  tenta- 
tively planning  to  show  "Lili"  (Metro-Goldwyn- 
Maver ) ,  "Call  Me  Madam"'  (Twentieth  Century- 
Fox),  Walt  Disney's  "Peter  Pan"  (Rko),  "I  Con- 
fess" (Warner  Brothers),  "Come  Back,  Little 
Sheba"  (Paramount),  and  two  short  films,  "La 
Gloire  de  Renoir"  ("The  Art  of  Renoir")  (Twen- 
tieth Centurv-Fox)  and  Walt  Disney's  "Sea 
Birds"  (RkoJ. 


THE  DEPARTMENT 


Nonrenewal  of  VOA  Contracts 


SSx.ch  international  Film  Festival 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  April  9 
(press  release  182)  that  the  U.S.  would  be  repre- 
sented at  the  Sixth  International  Film  Festival, 
to  be  held  at  Cannes,  France,  April  15-29,  1953, 
by  the  following  delegation : 

Delegate 

Robert  A.  Kissacli,  Jr.,  Visual  Aids  Specialist,  Office  of 
the  Chief  of  Army  Field  Forces,  Department  of  the 
Army,  Fort  Monroe,  Va. 

Alternate  Delegate 

Stephen  J.  Campbell,  Attach^,  American  Embassy,  Paris 

Advisers 

Joseph   D.    Ravotto,    Films   Officer,   American   Embassy, 

Paris 
Patricia  Sussman,  Film  Distribution  Chief,  Office  of  the 

Special   Representative   in  Europe,  Mutual   Security 

Agency,  Paris 

The  purpose  of  this  series  of  international  film 
festivals  is  to  promote  cooperation  among  the 
producers  and  clirectors  of  motion  pictures  in  all 
countries  and  to  stimulate  the  development  of  the 
art  of  cinematography  and  the  progress  of  the 
film  industry  in  the  world.  Among  the  awards 
which  will  be  made  during  the  1953  festival  are 
grand  prizes  for  the  best  long  film  and  the  best 
short  film,  special  prizes  for  the  best  national  se- 
lection in  each  category,  and  eight  other  prizes, 
the  character  of  which  will  be  determined  by  the 
juries.  The  juries  will  be  selected  from  among 
the  best  qualified  persons  in  France  and  the  cre- 


Press  release  169  dated  April  1 

Notices  of  the  nonrenewal  of  contracts  for  the 
Voice  of  America's  use  of  facilities  at  five  radio 
transmitting  plants,  effective  June  30,  were  sent 
out  by  Robert  L.  Johnson,  Administrator  of  the 
International  Information  Administration,  on 
March  31. 

The  decision  to  discontinue  the  use  of  facilities 
of  two  private  companies  in  California,  two  in 
Massachusetts,  and  one  in  Ohio  was  made  as  a 
necessary  economy  move  to  comply  with  the  Bu- 
reau of  the  Budget's  directive  of  February  3  and 
will  effect  an  annual  savings  in  excess  of  half  a 
million  dollars,  Mr.  Johnson  said.  The  Adminis- 
trator explained  that  the  Voice  of  America's  re- 
duction of  more  than  15  percent  in  radio  program 
hours  within  the  current  fiscal  year  has  left  an 
excess  of  transmitting  capacity. 

As  a  result  of  a  series  of  studies  made  by  experts 
in  and  outside  the  Government,  Mr.  Johnson  said, 
"I  believe  it  is  mandatory  upon  me  to  take 
promptly  whatever  steps  are  necessary  to  prevent 
the  Government  from  being  obligated  for  facilities 
or  services  which  I  believe  will  not  be  needed." 

The  companies  receiving  notices  to  terminate 
their  contracts  are  Associated  Broadcasters  of  San 
Francisco,  Calif.;  Crosley  at  Mason,  Ohio;  Gen- 
eral Electric  at  Behuont,  Calif. ;  Westinghouse  at 
Hull,  Mass.;  and  World  Wide  Broadcasting  Cor- 
poration at  Scituate,  Mass.  In  his  letter  to  the 
firms  affected,  Mr.  Johnson  said,  "This  action  is 
taken  with  genuine  regret  particularly  because 
you  and  your  Company  have  rendered  in  many 
ways  services  of  great  value  to  the  United  States." 


590 


Department   of  State   Bulletin 


The  Making  of  Treaties  and  Executive  Agreements 


Statevient  by  Secretary  Dulles  ^ 


Press  release  174  of  April  6 

S.J.  Res.  1  and  S.J.  Res.  43  involve  proposals 
of  the  utmost  importance.  They  would  basically 
change  the  Constitution  of  the  United  States  rel- 
ative to  the  making  of  treaties  and  executive  agree- 
ments. 

Each  of  the  resolutions  would  deprive  the 
nation  of  treaty-making  power  in  large  areas. 
They  would  deny  to  all  treaties  the  force  of  law, 
making  their  enforcement  depend  on  subsequent 
action  of  the  Congress  and,  in  the  case  of  S.J. 
Res.  43,  also  of  the  48  States.  They  would  subject 
the  current,  day-by-day  conduct  of  foreign  affairs 
to  impediments  which  might  be  stifling. 

Obviously,  these  far-reaching  proposals  should 
not  be  enacted  without  careful  study  and  nation- 
wide awareness  of  their  implications. 

The  Historical  Background 

Our  present  constitutional  system  was  framed 
in  the  light  of  the  external  dangers  which  had 
resulted  from  the  feeble  power  of  the  Confedera- 
tion to  deal  with  foreign  affairs. 

Perhaps  the  most  urgent  reason  for  calling  of 
the  Convention  which  framed  our  Constitution 
■was  the  fact  that  treaties  made  under  the  Articles 
of  Confederation  were  not  enfoi'ceable  because 
they  operated  upon  the  States  and  not  upon  in- 
dividuals. There  was  no  federal  judiciary  with 
authority  to  enforce  treaties  as  part  of  the  in- 
ternal law. 

Out  of  this  grew  the  treaty  provisions  of  our 
Constitution.  The  debates  of  the  Convention  and 
of  the  Federalist  papers  show  the  extreme  care 
that  was  taken  in  their  formulation.  They  reveal 
too  that  some  of  tlie  pi'oposals  contained  in  the 
resolutions  now  being  considered  were  advanced 
and  rejected.  For  instance,  Gouverneur  Morris 
made  a  motion  that  no  treaty  should  be  binding 


'  Made  on  Apr.  6  before  the  Senate  Committee  on  the 
Judiciary  in  regard  to  S..J.  Res.  1,  "proposing  an  amend- 
ment to  the  Constitution  of  the  United  States  relative  to 
the  making  of  treaties  and  executive  agreements,"  and 
S..I.  Res.  43,  "Proposing  an  amendment  to  the  Constitution 
of  the  United  States,  relating  to  the  legal  effect  of  certain 
treaties." 


"which  is  not  ratified  as  a  law."  This  was  voted 
down  8  to  1  (2  Farrand  392) . 

The  treaty-making  power,  as  it  was  written  into 
our  Constitution,  is,  to  be  sure,  a  large  power. 
Treaties  made  by  the  President  and  concurred  in 
by  a  two-thirds  vote  of  the  Senate  become  "law 
of  the  land."  No  limitation  upon  the  treaty- 
making  powers  are  explicitly  defined  in  the  Con- 
stitution or  decisions  of  the  Supreme  Court.  But 
the  treaty-making  power  is  not  an  unlimited 
power.  All  of  the  Supreme  Court  cases  which 
deal  with  the  subject  are  uniform  to  that  effect. 

Furthermore,  while  the  Constitution  provides 
that  treaties  made  under  the  authority  of  the 
United  States  shall  be  the  supreme  law  of  the 
land,  they  only  rank  on  an  equality  with  congres- 
sional enactments. 

The  effect  of  any  treaty  as  internal  law  can  be 
overcome  by  a  simple  act  of  Congress. 

That  is  a  Constitutional  fact  which  must  be, 
and  is,  accepted  by  all  other  nations  which  make 
treaties  with  us. 

The  present  system  has  worked  well  for  160 
years.  The  Supreme  Court  has  never  had  occa- 
sion to  hold  a  treaty  to  be  unconstitutional.  On 
the  other  hand,  no  treaty  has  ever  yet  been  made 
which  can  be  cited  as  an  example  of  the  abuse  of 
the  treaty-making  power.  These  two  circum- 
stances are  persuasive  evidence  of  the  care  with 
which  treaty  power  has  been  exercised  during  the 
entire  existence  of  our  Republic. 

Origin  of  Proponents'  Fears 

During  recent  years  there  developed  a  tendency 
to  consider  treaty  making  as  a  way  to  effectuate 
reforms,  particularly  in  relation  to  social  matters, 
and  to  impose  upon  our  Republic  conceptions  re- 
garding human  rights  which  many  felt  were  alien 
to  our  traditional  concepts.  This  tendency  caused 
widespread  concern,  a  concern  which  is  reflected  in 
the  proposed  resolutions  before  you,  resolutions 
whicli  first  took  form  in  a  prior  Congress. 

I  believe  that  that  concern  was  then  a  legiti- 
mate one.  Those  who  shared  it  were  alert  citizens. 
I  believe  they  have  performed  a  patriotic  service 
in  bringing  their  fears  to  the  attention  of  the 


April  20,   J  953 


591 


American  public.     But  I  point  out  that  the  arous- 
ing of  that  concern  was  a  correction  of  the  evil. 

There  has  been  a  reversal  of  the  trend  toward 
trying  to  use  the  treaty-making  power  to  effect 
internal  social  changes.  This  administration  is 
committed  to  the  exercise  of  the  treaty-making 
power  only  within  traditional  limits.  By  "tradi- 
tional" I  do  not  mean  that  to  imply  that  the  bound- 
ary between  domestic  and  international  concerns 
is  rigid  and  fixed  for  all  time.  I  do  mean  that 
treaties  are  contracts  with  foreign  governments 
designed  to  promote  the  interests  of  our  nation 
by  securing  action  by  others  in  a  way  deemed 
advantageous  to  us.  I  do  not  believe  that  treaties 
should,  or  lawfully  can,  be  used  as  a  device  to 
circumvent  the  constitutional  procedures  estab- 
lished in  relation  to  what  are  essentially  matters 
of  domestic  concern. 

The  Present  Trend 

To  illustrate  my  point  about  the  change  of  trend, 
I  am  authorized  to  say : 

1.  The  present  administration  intends  to  en- 
courage the  promotion  everywhere  of  human 
rights  and  individual  freedoms,  but  to  favor 
methods  of  persuasion,  education,  and  example 
rather  than  formal  undertakings  which  commit 
one  part  of  the  world  to  impose  its  particular 
social  and  moral  standards  upon  another  part  of 
the  world  community,  which  has  different  stand- 
ards. That  is  the  point  of  view  I  expressed  in 
1951  in  relation  to  the  Japanese  peace  treaty. 
Therefore,  while  we  shall  not  withhold  our  counsel 
from  those  who  seek  to  draft  a  treaty  or  covenant 
on  human  rights,  we  do  not  ourselves  look  upon 
a  treaty  as  the  means  which  we  would  now  select 
as  the  proper  and  most  effective  way  to  spread 
throughout  the  world  the  goals  of  human  liberty 
to  which  this  nation  has  been  dedicated  since  its 
inception.  We  therefore  do  not  intend  to  become 
a  party  to  any  such  covenant  or  present  it  as  a 
treaty  for  consideration  by  the  Senate. 

2.  This  administration  does  not  intend  to  sign 
the  Convention  on  Political  Rights  of  Women. 
This  is  not  because  we  do  not  believe  in  the  equal 
political  status  of  men  and  women  or  because  we 
shall  not  seek  to  promote  that  equality.  Rather 
it  is  because  we  do  not  believe  that  this  goal  can 
be  achieved  by  treaty  coercion  or  that  it  con- 
stitutes a  proper  field  for  exercise  of  the  treaty- 
making  power.  We  do  not  now  see  any  clear  or 
necessary  relation  between  the  interest  and  welfare 
of  the  United  States  and  the  eligibility  of  women 
to  political  office  in  other  nations. 

These  same  principles  will  guide  our  action  in 
other  fields  which  have  been  suggested  by  some 
as  fields  for  multilateral  treaties. 

3.  The  Constitution  provides  that  the  President 
shall  have  power  to  make  treaties  by  and  with 
the  advice  and  consent  of  the  Senate.     This  ad- 


ministration recognizes  the  significance  of  the 
word  "advice."  It  will  be  our  effort  to  see  that 
the  Senate  gets  its  opportunity  to  "advise  and 
.consent"  in  time  so  that  it  does  not  have  to 
choose  between  adopting  treaties  it  does  not  like 
or  embarrassing  our  international  position  by  re- 
jecting what  has  already  been  negotiated  out  with 
foreign  governments. 

Prevention  of  Abuses  of  Power 

Recent  developments  illustrate  the  ways  by 
which  abuses  of  the  treaty-making  power  can  be 
avoided.  In  one  way  or  another,  abuses  have 
been  avoided  throughout  the  life  of  our  Republic. 
The  question  thus  is  whether,  in  the  face  of  160 
years  of  nonabuse  of  the  treaty-making  power,  it 
is  desirable  to  amend  our  Constitution  as  now  pro- 
posed. 

I  have  been  sympathetic  to  the  point  of  view 
reflected  in  S.J.  Resolution  1,  and  I  have  so  ex- 
pressed myself.  I  have,  however,  now  come  to 
the  conclusion  that  this  whole  matter  requires  fur- 
ther study,  because  analysis  of  the  pending  reso- 
lutions shows  that  they  may  seriously  weaken  our 
Government  in  the  field  of  foreign  relations  in 
ways  which,  I  know,  the  proponents  of  the  resolu- 
tions do  not  intend  or  desire.  The  two  different 
proposals  before  you,  and  independent  drafting 
efforts  of  my  own,  convince  me  that  it  is  difficult, 
if  not  impossible,  to  amend  the  Constitution  so  as 
to  exclude  possible  abuses,  without  incurring  risks 
that  are  far  greater  than  the  risk  that  the  present 
powers  will  be  abused. 

Present  Importance  of  Treaty  Power 

At  this  time,  perhaps  more  than  ever  before  in 
history,  the  United  States  should  be  able  to  make 
effective  contracts  with  other  nations. 

We  need  national  power  to  achieve  free-world 
unity  of  purpose  and  performance. 

Today  about  50  free  countries,  representing  ap- 
proximately two-thirds  of  the  peoples  and  natural 
resources  of  the  world,  face  a  grave  threat.  That 
threat  comes  from  a  single  totalitarian  dictator- 
ship which  rules  one-third  of  the  peoples  and 
natural  resources  of  the  world.  This  single  des- 
potic power  has  enormous  advantages  unless  the 
free  nations  can  work  together.  This  cooperation 
of  the  free  cannot  be  achieved  by  imposed  unity. 
It  must  be  achieved  largely  through  treaties  and 
executive  agreements  which  will  coordinate  the 
military  and  economic  strength  of  the  free  world, 
and  promote  friendly  cooperation  and  under- 
standing. The  ability  of  the  United  States  to  use 
treaties  and  agreements  to  effect  this  result  can 
become  a  matter  of  national  survival. 

We  need  national  power  to  make  treaties  with 
our  potential  enemies,  in  order  to  mitigate  our 
dangers  and  to  ease  our  burdens  through  measures 
which  would  effectively  control  armaments.    Such 


592 


Department  of  Slate  Bulletin 


treaties  do  not  now  seem  likely  but  their  possi- 
bility should  not  be  excluded. 

If  we  should  be  attacked,  and,  unhappily,  there 
should  be  war,  the  President  as  Commander-in- 
Chief  would  need  the  power  through  executive 
agreements  to  achieve  unity  of  purpose  and  of 
action  with  our  allies.  And  when  victory  was 
won,  we  would  need  national  power  to  make 
treaties  of  peace  which  would  heal  the  wounds  of 
war. 

It  is  against  this  background  that  the  pending 
resolutions  must  be  judged. 

Discussion  of  Resolution 

I  could  discourse  about  the  resolutions  at  length. 
It  may,  however,  be  enough,  if,  at  this  time,  I  il- 
lustrate, principally  in  terms  of  S.J.  Res.  1,  why 
in  my  opinion  the  pending  resolutions,  despite  the 
good  intentions  which  prompt  them,  actually 
could  be  dangerous  to  our  peace  and  security. 

Secticn  1  of  S.J.  Kes.  1  provides  that  no  treaty 
shall  abridge  any  right  enumerated  in  the  Con- 
stitution. The  Constitution  specifies  the  power 
of  Congress  to  declare  war.  Does  Section  1  of 
the  proposed  Constitutional  amendment  mean  that 
the  United  States  can  never  make  a  treaty  which 
would  outlaw  war?  Can  we  never  agree,  with 
other  nations,  to  abridge  the  present  unqualified 
right  of  Congress  in  relation  to  war  ?  Surely  this 
is  no  time  for  the  United  States  to  make  itself 
unable  to  enter  into  treaties  which  would  effec- 
tively ban  the  terrible  spectre  of  a  war. 

Section  2  of  the  proposed  resolution  says  that  no 
international  organization  may  supervise  or  con- 
trol the  rights  of  citizens  of  the  United  States 
within  the  United  States  if  those  rights  are 
enumerated  in  the  Constitution  or  are  "essentially 
within  the  domestic  jurisdiction  of  the  United 
States."  This  could  mean  that  the  United  States 
could  not  make  effective  treaty  arrangements  for 
the  international  control  of  atomic  energy  and 
mass  destruction  weapons.  The  United  States 
has  always  insisted  in  negotiations  and  debates 
with  the  Soviet  Union  that  no  limitation  or  con- 
trol of  armaments  would  be  acceptable  unless  en- 
forced by  strict  international  supervision.  This 
was  the  so-called  Baruch  plan.  The  Soviet  Union 
has  so  far  refused  to  accede  to  such  international 
control.  But  surely  this  is  no  time  for  the  United 
States  to  make  itself  unable  to  participate  in  the 
effective  international  control  of  armaments. 

And  how  about  international  supervision  of 
aviation,  radio,  narcotics,  and  quarantine  require- 
ments? Mere  assertion  that  these  are  interna- 
tional and  not  domestic  matters  will  not  settle  the 
question.  We  can  but  speculate  as  to  what  de- 
cisions the  Supreme  Court  may  reach  as  to  the 
meaning  and  application  of  the  proposed  amend- 
ment to  our  Constitution. 

Section  3  of  the  proposed  resolution  says  that 
no  treaty  shall  become  "law  of  the  land"  except 

April  20,   7953 


through  legislation  by  the  Congress.  This  would 
make  it  much  more  difficult  to  consummate  effec- 
tive treaties.  Our  nation's  ability  to  deal  with 
other  nations  would  be  gravely  impaired.  For  all 
treaties  which  operate  within  the  United  States 
would,  in  the  first  instance,  have  to  be  consented 
to  by  the  Senate  by  the  traditional  two-thirds 
majority  and  then  also,  at  a  later  date,  be  put  into 
force  by  laws  requiring  the  concurrence  not  only 
of  the  Senate  but  also  of  the  House. 

In  the  past  it  has  often  been  charged  that  our 
present  Constitutional  treaty-making  process  is 
too  difficult,  being  subject  to  block  by  %  ph;s  1  of 
the  Senators  present.  This  has  been  criticized  as 
"government  by  minority."  It  has  also  been  sug- 
gested that  the  %  Senate  requirement  be  aban- 
doned in  favor  of  a  majority  of  both  the  Houses. 
But  now  it  is  suggested  that  a  %  vote  of  the  Sen- 
ate is  not  enough — that  there  must  also  be  a 
majority  vote  of  the  House  of  Representatives 
if  a  treaty  is  to  be  effective  within  our  country. 

In  many  countries,  the  Senate  or  Upper  House 
has  become  relegated  to  an  unimportant  role.  In 
this  country,  the  Senate  has  proudly  exercised  a 
unique  role  of  participating  with  the  President  in 
the  making  of  treaties.  It  would  occasion  sur- 
prise and  misgivings  in  many  quarters  if  the  Sen- 
ate should  now  feel  so  unsure  of  itself  that  it 
sought  to  subject  its  %  approval  to  veto  by  a 
majority  of  the  House. 

Section  4-  of  the  proposed  resolution  deals  with 
executive  agreements.  It  provides  that  the  Presi- 
dent cannot  make  any  agreement  of  any  sort  with 
any  foreign  government  or  official  except  as  the 
Congress  may  prescribe.  This  section  would 
gravely  embaiTass  the  President  in  dealing  cur- 
rently with  foreign  affairs.  Today  he  is  one  of 
the  coordinate  branches  of  government  with 
exclusive  jurisdiction  in  relation  to  the  current 
conduct  of  foreign  affairs.  The  proposed  amend- 
ment would  drastically  alter  the  President's  posi- 
tion in  that  respect  and  change  the  present 
Constitutional  concept  of  balance  of  power. 

Executive  agreements  of  major  importance  are 
now  customarily  made  pursuant  to  congressional 
or  treaty  authorization,  or  depend  on  congres- 
sional action  for  their  implementation. 

But  every  day  the  President,  directly  or  through 
his  agents,  makes  minor  agreements  of  some  kind 
or  description  with  other  governments  or  officials. 
There  are  masses  of  agreements  made  and  changed 
almost  daily  with  relation  to  the  development  of 
foreign  bases  and  disposition  of  our  troops  abroad. 
There  are  many  agreements  with  other  govern- 
ments to  impose  restrictions  upon  trade  with  areas 
unfriendly  to  us.  There  are  daily  agreements  re- 
garding a  host  of  matters.  This  proposed  reso- 
lution would  subject  this  entire  process  to 
congressional  prescription. 

I  know  full  well  that  the  proponents  of  this 
resolution  are  not  activated  by  a  purpose  to  em- 
barrass the  President  in  such  matters.     But  that 

593 


S.J.  Res.  1 

JOINT    RESOLUTION 

Proposing  an  amendment  to  the  Constitution  of  the 
United  States  relative  to  the  making  of  treaties 
and  executive  agreements. 
Resoh-cd  by  the  Senate  and  House  of  Represent- 
atives of  the  United  States  of  America  in  Congress 
assembled    {two-thirds   of  each  House   concurrino 
therein).  That  the  following  article  is  proposed  as 
an  amendment   to  the  Constitution  of  the  United 
States,  which  shall  be  valid  to  all  intents  and  pur- 
poses as  part  of  the  Constitution  when  ratified  by 
the    legislaturea   of    three-fourths    of   the   several 
States: 

"Abticle  — 

"Section  1.  A  provision  of  a  treaty  which  denies 
or  abridges  any  right  enumerated  in  this  Constitu- 
tion shall  not  be  of  any  force  or  effect. 

"Sec.  2.  No  treaty  shall  authorize  or  permit  any 
foreign  power  or  any  international  organization  to 
supervise,  control,  or  adjudicate  rights  of  citizens 
of  the  United  States  within  the  United  States  enu- 
merated in  this  Constitution  or  any  other  matter 
essentially  within  the  domestic  jurisdiction  of  the 
United  States. 

"Sec.  3.  A  treaty  shall  become  effective  as  in- 
ternal law  in  the  United  States  only  through  the  en- 
actment of  appropriate  legislation  by  the  Congress. 

"Sec.  4.  All  executive  or  other  agreements  be- 
tween the  President  and  any  international  organi- 
zation, foreign  power,  or  official  thereof  shall  be 
made  only  in  the  manner  and  to  the  extent  to  be 
prescribed  by  law.  Such  agreements  shall  be  sub- 
ject to  the  limitations  imposed  on  treaties,  or  the 
making  of  treaties,  by  this  article. 

"Sec.  5.  The  Congress  shall  have  power  to  en- 
force this  article  by  appropriate  legislation. 

"Sec.  6.  This  article  shall  be  inoperative  unless 
It  shall  have  been  ratified  as  an  amendment  to  the 
Constitution  by  the  legislatures  of  three-fourths  of 
the  several  States  within  seven  years  from  the  date 
of  Its  submission." 


is  what  the  amendment  would  do.  It  would  so 
detract  from  the  authority  of  the  office  of  the 
President  of  the  United  States  that  his  capacity  to 
deal  currently  with  international  affairs  would 
be  gravely  impaired. 

Executive  Agreements 

It  has  long  been  recognized  that  there  is  an 
undefined,  and  probably  undefinable,  borderline 
between  executive  agreements  which  may  be  made 
by  the  President  alone  and  those  that  require 
validation  by  the  Senate  as  treaties,  or  the  Con- 
gress as  laws.  This  has  occasionally  caused  con- 
troversy between  the  executive  and  legislative 
branches  of  government. 

There  is  a  similar  undefined,  and  probably  un- 
definable, borderline  between  international  agree- 
ments which  require  two-thirds  Senate  concur- 
rence, but  no  House  concurrence,  as  in  the  case  of 
treaties  and  agreements  which  should  have  the 
majority  concurrence  of  both  Chambers  of  Con- 
gress. This  has  occasionally  caused  controversy 
between  the  Senate  and  the  House. 


The  danger  to  the  nation,  however,  from  agree- 
ments not  submitted  to  the  Senate  as  treaties,  or 
to  the  Congress  for  legislative  validation,  cannot 
be  great  because,  without  either  Senate  or  con- 
gressional action,  these  agreements  cannot  consti- 
tutionally become  "law  of  the  land." 

This  is  an  area  to  be  dealt  with  by  friendly 
cooperation  between  the  three  Departments  of 
Government  wliich  are  involved,  rather  than  by 
attempts  at  constitutional  definition,  which  are 
futile,  or  by  the  absorption  by  one  branch  of  gov- 
ernment of  responsibilities  which  are  presently 
and  properly  shared. 

In  order  to  promote  that  friendly  cooperation, 
I  am  authorized  by  the  President  to  advise  this 
Committee,  the  Senate  Foreign  Relations  Com- 
mittee, and  the  House  Foreign  Affairs  Committee 
as  follows : 

It  has  long  been  recognized  that  difficulties  exist 
in  the  determination  as  to  which  international 
agreements  should  be  submitted  to  the  Senate  as 
treaties,  which  ones  should  be  submitted  to  both 
Houses  of  the  Congress,  and  which  ones  do  not  re- 
quire any  congressional  approval. 

Differences  of  opinion  resulting  from  these  diffi- 
culties have  given  rise  in  the  past  to  disputes  be- 
tween the  executive  branch  and  the  Congress 
concerning  the  handling  of  international  agree- 
ments. It  must  be  recognized  that  it  would  be 
extremely  difficult  if  not  impossible  to  fit  all 
agreements  into  set  categories.     At  times  there 


S.J.  Res.  43 

JOINT  RESOLUTION 

Proposing  an  amendment  to  the  Constitution  of  the 
United  States,  relating  to  the  legal  effect  of  cer- 
tain treaties. 
Resoli-ed  6;/  the  Senate  and  House  of  Represent- 
atives of  the  United  States  of  America  in  Congress 
assembled    (two-thirds   of  each  House   concurring 
therein).  That  the  following  article  is  proposed  as 
an  amendment  to  the  Constitution  of  the  United 
States,  which  shall  be  valid  to  all  intents  and  pur- 
poses as  part  of  the  Constitution  when  ratified  by 
the    legislatures    of    tliree-fourths    of   the   several 
States: 

"Abticle  — 

"Section  1.  A  provision  of  a  treaty  which  conflicts 
with  any  provision  of  this  Constitution  shall  not  be 
of  any  force  or  effect.  A  treaty  shall  become  ef- 
fective as  internal  law  in  the  United  States  only 
through  legislation  which  would  be  valid  in  the 
absence  of  treaty.  Executive  agreements  shall  be 
subject  to  regulation  by  the  Congress  and  to  the 
limitations  imposed  on  treaties  by  this  article. 

"Sec.  2.  The  Congress  shall  have  power  to  en- 
force this  article  by  appropriate  legislation. 

"Sec.  3.  This  article  shall  be  inoperative  unless 
it  shall  have  been  ratified  as  an  amendment  to  the 
Constitution  by  the  legislatures  of  three-fourths  of 
the  several  States  within  seven  years  from  the  date 
of  its  submission." 


594 


Department  of  Slate  Bulletin 


may  be  disagreement  as  to  the  manner  in  which 
agreements  are  to  be  dealt  with.  While  recog- 
nizing this,  the  Executive  cannot  surrender  the 
freedom  of  action  which  is  necessary  for  its  op- 
erations in  the  foreign  affairs  field.  In  the  in- 
terest of  orderly  procedure,  however,  I  feel  that 
the  Congress  is  entitled  to  know  the  considerations 
that  enter  into  the  determinations  as  to  which 
procedures  are  sought  to  be  followed.  To  that 
end,  when  there  is  any  serious  question  of  this 
nature  and  the  circumstances  permit,  the  execu- 
tive branch  will  consult  with  appropriate  con- 
gressional leaders  and  committees  m  determining 
the  most  suitable  way  of  handling  international 
agreements  as  they  arise. 

5.J.  Res.  43 

S.J.  Res.  43,  which  follows  the  language  pro- 
posed by  a  Committee  of  the  American  Bar  Asso- 
ciation, contains  a  further  provision.  This 
would  require  that  no  treaty  shall  be  effective  in 
any  field  in  which  Congress  in  the  absence  of  a 
treaty  cannot  legislate.  This  would  create  a  no- 
man's  land  in  foreign  affairs.  It  would  require 
the  concurrence  of  all  48  States  to  make  effective 
such  common  treaties  as  treaties  of  friendship, 
commerce  and  navigation;  extradition;  reciprocal 
inheritance  taxation;  migratory  birds;  collection 
of  foreign  debts;  and  status  of  foreign  troops. 
In  this  field  of  foreign  affairs  our  country  would 
not  speak  with  one  voice  but  with  49.  The  pri- 
mary objective  of  the  f ramers  of  our  Constitution 
in  this  respect  would  be  defeated. 

A  Balancing  of  Risks 

I  feel  sure  that  the  proponents  of  the  resolu- 
tions do  not  intend  to  do  other  than  to  eliminate 
the  risk  of  abuses.  Their  motives  are,  I  know,  of 
the  highest.  The  trouble  is  that,  when  it  comes 
to  putting  their  desire  into  legal  form,  the  result 
is  greatly  reduced  capacity  for  national  action 
in  an  area  where  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance 
that  our  nation  should  have  power. 

Of  course,  there  can  never  be  power  without 
risk  of  its  abuse.  But  our  present  Constitutional 
processes  have  worked  successfully  for  160  years. 
Never  during  this  period  has  any  actual  treaty 
produced  the  results  which  the  proponents  of  the 
resolution  fear.  Whenever  there  has  seemed  to 
be  danger  of  that,  the  people  of  the  United  States, 
the  Judiciary  of  the  United  States,  the  Senate  of 
the  United  States,  and  the  Executive  Branch  of 
the  United  States  have,  in  their  respective  spheres, 
moved  to  repel  that  danger.  What  has  happened 
in  recent  months,  including  the  exertions  of  the 
proponents  of  the  resolution,  demonstrates  that 
the  resolution  is  unnecessary.  The  trend  they 
feared  has  been  checked. 

In  this  connection,  a  special  tribute  is  due  to 
Senator  Bricker.     His  exertions  to  alert  our  na- 


tion to  possible  danger  will  long  be  remembered. 
It  can,  however,  be  judged  that  the  proponents 
of  these  resolutions  have  themselves  sliown  that 
amendment  of  the  Constitution  is  unnecessary. 

The  test  of  any  Constitution  is  not  the  way  it 
reads  but  the  way  it  works.  George  Washington 
in  his  Farewell  Address  pointed  out  that  "ex- 
perience is  the  surest  standard  by  which  to  test 
the  real  tendency  of  the  existing  constitution  of  a 
counti-y."  He  went  on  to  warn  against  "changes, 
upon  the  credit  of  mere  hypothesis  and  opinion." 
That,  he  said,  "exposes  to  perpetual  change  from 
the  endless  variety  of  hypothesis  and  opinion." 

Our  Constitution,  as  it  is,  has  served  us  well 
in  the  field  of  foreign  relations.  There  is  no 
actual  experience  to  clemonstrate  the  need  of  the 
far-reaching  changes  here  proposed.  The  fears 
are  hypothetical.  Therefore,  I  suggest  that  this 
constitutional  area  is  one  which  deserves  to  be 
kept  under  constant  observation  and  study,  but 
that  there  is  no  present  need  for  constitutional 
change. 

The  Department  of  State  has  prepared  a  more 
detailed  memorandum  dealing  with  the  legal 
questions  raised  by  these  resolutions.  I  submit 
this  for  the  information  of  the  Committee  and 
ask  that  it  be  included,  with  its  annexes,  in  the 
record  of  this  hearing.- 


'  Copies  of  this  material  may  be  obtained  by  writing 
to  the  Division  of  Publications,  Department  of  State. 


Check  List  of  Department  of  State 
Press  Releases:  Apr.  6-11, 1953 

Releases  may  be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  the 
Special  Assistant  for  Press  Relations,  Department 
of  State,  Washington  25,  D.C. 

Press  releases  issued  prior  to  Apr.  6  which  appear 
in  this  issue  of  the  Bulletin  are  Nos.  144  of  Mar. 
18,  156  of  Mar.  24,  161  of  Mar.  30,  169  of  Apr.  1, 
and  171  of  Apr.  2. 

Subject 

Dulles :  Treaty-making  powers 
Restrictive  business  practices 
Arrival  of  Chancellor  Adenauer 
Smith :  N.\to  treaty 
Draper  to  Wiley  :  Status  of  Nato 
U.N.  Commission  for  Latin   America 
Biographic  sketch  of  Ambassador  Taft 
Inter-American  council  of  jurists 
6th  international  film  festival 
Communique  on  U.S.-German  talks 
Transfer  of  German-owned  vessels 
Dulles-Adenauer  exchange  of  notes 
Dulles-Adenauer :  CMltural  relations 
Linder :  Agricultural  imports 
Iraq  :  Pt.  4  land  assistance 
Adult-education  .seminar 
Linder :  Additional  testimony 
Libby  Dam  and  Reservoir 

*Not  printed. 

tHeld  for  a  later  issue  of  the  Bulletin. 


No. 

Date 

174 

4/6 

tl75 

4/6 

176 

4/7 

tl77 

4/7 

tl78 

4/7 

179 

4/7 

*180 

4/9 

181 

4/9 

182 

4/9 

183 

4/9 

183A 

4/9 

184 

4/9 

185 

4/9 

tl86 

4/10 

tl87 

4/10 

tl88 

4/10 

tlS9 

4/10 

tl90 

4/11 

April  20,    1953 


595 


April  20,  1953 


Ind 


ex 


Vol.  XXVIII  No.  721 


American  Principles 

Arrival  of  Chancellor  Adenauer 568 

The  Pan  American  Union :  A  true  community  of 

free  nations  (Elsenhower) 563 

U.S.   and  Germany  discuss   economic,   political, 

and  cultural  relations 565 

American  Republics 

Inter-American  Council  of  Jurists 590 

Observance  of  Pan  American  Day 564 

The  Pan  American  Union :  A  true  community  of 

free   nations    (Elsenhower) 563 

U.N.  Economic  Commission  for  Latin  America   .  589 

Asia 

KOREA: 

Special   representative   for  Korean   economic 

affairs 576 

Talks   on   repatriation  of   sick  and   wounded 

prisoners     (text    of    agreement)      ....       570 

Congress 

The    making   of   treaties    and    executive    agree- 
ments ( Dulles ),  texts  of  resolutions     .     .     .      591 

Europe 

GERMANY: 

Arrival  of  Chancellor  Adenauer 568 

U.S.  and  Germany  discuss  economic,  political, 

and   cultural   relations 565 

Validation  of  German  dollar  bonds    ....       569 
POLAND:   Polish   Embassy  asked   to   cease   dis- 
tributing anti-U.S.  book 578 

U.S.S.R.:   Soviet  attack  on  U.S.  plane  In  North 

Pacific  Ocean  (texts  of  notes) 577 

Finance 

Validation  of  German  dollar  bonds 569 

Human  Rights 

Importance  of  U.N.  human  rights  goals  (Elsen- 
hower)     580 

U.S.  policy  on  human  rights  (Dulles)     ....       579 

International  Information 

Nonrenewal  of  VOA  contracts 590 

International  Meetings 

U.S.  DELEGATIONS: 

Inter-American  Council  of  Jurists     ....       590 

Sixth  International  Film  Festival 590 

U.N.       Economic       Commission       for       Latin 
America 589 

Presidential  Documents 

Importance  of  U.N.  human  rights  goals    .     .     .       580 
PROCLAMATIONS:    Observance  of  Pan  Ameri- 
can  day 564 


Prisoners  of  War 

Talks  on  repatriation  of  sick  and  wounded  pris- 
oners   (text   of   agreement) 570 

Protection  of  U.S.  Nationals  and  Property 
Soviet   attack   on   U.S.    plane    in   North    Pacific 

Ocean 577 

Publications 

Polish  Embassy  asked  to  cease  distributing  antl- 

U.S.  book 578 

Recent   releases 578 

Puerto  Rico 

Puerto      Rico's       new      self-governing      status 

(Lodge)        584 

State,  Department  of 

Nonrenewal  of  Voa  contracts 590 

The  making  of  treaties  and  executive  agree- 
ments (Dulles),  texts  of  resolutions     .     .     .      591 

Treaty  Information 

Validation  of  German  dollar  bonds 569 

United  Nations 

Importance  of  U.N.  human  rights  goals  (Elsen- 
hower)      580 

Puerto      Rico's      new      self-governing      status 

(Lodge)        584 

Revised       disarmament       resolution       adopted 

(Lodge)        582 

Talks  on  repatriation  of  sick  and  wounded  pris- 
oners   (text   of   agreement) 570 

U.N.  Economic  Commission  for  Latin  America  .       589 

U.S.  policy  on  human  rights  (Dulles)     ....       579 

Name  Index 

Adenauer,  Chancellor 565. 568 

Bohan.  Merwln  L 589 

Chou    En-lal 570 

Clark,   Gen.  Mark 570 

Dulles,  Secretary 565.  568,  591 

Elsenhower,  President 563,  564,  576,  580 

Elsenhower,   Milton 563 

Harrison,  Gen.  Wm.   K 675 

Johnson,  Robert  L 590 

Kim  II   Sung 570 

Kissack,  Robert  A.,  Jr 590 

Lodge,  Henry  Cabot,  Jr 570,  582,  584 

Lord.  Mrs.  Oswald 579 

Munoz  Marin.  Luis 589 

Nixon,  Vice  President 568 

Peng    Teh-huai 570 

Sanders.  William 590 

Tasca,   Henry   J 576 


U.  S.  eOVERHBENT  PRINT1N6   OFFICEi  1913 


/  oo  ^'^ 


j/v€/  uleha/yi^meni/  a)^  cnate^ 


KXVIII,  No.  722 
Ipril  27, 1953 


THE  CHANCE  FOR  PEACE  •  Address  by  the  President      .     599 


THE  FIRST  90  DAYS  •  Address  by  Secretary  Dulles 


603 


SENATE  BEGINS  CONSIDERATION  OF  NATO 

TREATIES 628 


FULL  TRUCE  TALKS  TO  REOPEN  AT  PANMUNJOM  .    608 

THE  SOVIET  GERM  WARFARE  CAMPAIGN:  A  CASE 

HISTORY  •  Statements  by  Ernest  A.  Gross 612 


For  index  see  back  cover 


Boston  Public  T-virary 
Superintendent  of  Documents 

MAY  2  0  1953 


%J/ie 


z/Jeficc/y&yieTtt  ^^ t/iate    yj  W  i  JL  \J  L  J.  JL 1 


Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  722  •  Publication  5041 
April  27,  1953 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents 

U.S.  Oovcmment  Printing  Office 

Washington  25,  D.C. 

Price: 

62  Issues,  domestic  $7.50,  foreign  $10.26 

Single  copy,  20  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has 
been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Budget  (January  22,  1952). 

Note:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  Department 
oy  State  Bulletin  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  BULLETIN, 
a  weekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publications, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  with  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  trork  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETIN  includes 
selected  press  releases  on  foreign  pol- 
icy issued  by  the  White  House  and 
the  Department,  and  statements  and 
addresses  made  by  the  President  and 
by  the  Secretary  of  State  and  other 
officers  of  the  Department,  as  well  as 
special  articles  on  various  phases  of 
international  affairs  and  the  func- 
tions of  the  Department.  Informa- 
tion is  included  concerning  treaties 
and  international  agreements  to 
which  the  United  States  is  or  may 
become  a  party  and  treaties  of  gen- 
eral international  interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
well  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


The  Chance  for  Peace 


Address  by  the  President  "^ 


White  House  press  release  dated  April  16 

In  this  spring  of  1953  the  free  world  weighs  one 
question  above  all  others:  the  chance  for  a  just 
peace  for  all  peoples. 

To  weigh  this  chance  is  to  summon  instantly 
to  mind  another  recent  moment  of  great  decision. 
It  came  with  that  yet  more  hopeful  spring  of  1945, 
bright  with  the  promise  of  victory  and  of  freedom. 
The  hope  of  all  just  men  in  that  moment  too  was 
a  just  and  lasting  peace. 

The  8  years  that  have  passed  have  seen  that 
hope  waver,  grow  dim,  and  almost  die.  And  the 
shadow  of  fear  again  has  darkly  lengthened  across 
the  world. 

Today  the  hope  of  free  men  remains  stubborn 
and  brave,  but  it  is  sternly  disciplined  by  ex- 
perience. It  shuns  not  only  all  crude  counsel  of 
despair  but  also  the  self-deceit  of  easy  illusion. 
It  weighs  the  chance  for  peace  with  sure,  clear 
knowledge  of  what  happened  to  the  vain  hope 
of  1945. 

In  that  spring  of  victory  the  soldiers  of  the 
Western  Allies  met  the  soldiers  of  Russia  in  the 
center  of  Europe.  They  were  triumphant  com- 
rades in  arms.  Their  peoples  shared  the  joyous 
prospect  of  building,  in  honor  of  their  dead,  the 
only  fitting  monument — an  age  of  just  peace.  All 
these  war-weary  peoples  shared  too  this  concrete, 
decent  purpose:  to  guard  vigilantly  against  the 
domination  ever  again  of  any  part  of  the  world 
by  a  single,  unbridled  aggressive  power. 

This  common  purpose  lasted  an  instant  and 

'  Made  before  the  American  Society  of  Newspaper  Edi- 
tors and  broadcast  to  the  Nation  over  radio  and  television 
networks  on  Apr.  16.  Also  printed  as  Department  of  State 
publication  5042. 


perished.  The  nations  of  the  world  divided  to 
follow  two  distinct  roads. 

The  United  States  and  our  valued  friends,  the 
other  free  nations,  chose  one  road. 

The  leaders  of  the  Soviet  Union  chose  another. 

The  Road  Followed  by  the  United  States 

The  way  chosen  by  the  United  States  was  plainly 
marked  by  a  few  clear  precepts,  which  govern 
its  conduct  in  world  affairs. 

First:  No  people  on  earth  can  be  held,  as  a 
people,  to  be  an  enemy,  for  all  humanity  shares 
the  common  hunger  for  peace  and  fellowship  and 
justice. 

Second :  No  nation's  security  and  well-being  can 
be  lastingly  achieved  in  isolation  but  only  in  ef- 
fective cooperation  with  fellow  nations. 

Third :  Any  nation's  right  to  a  form  of  govern- 
ment and  an  economic  system  of  its  own  choosing 
is  inalienable. 

Fourth :  Any  nation's  attempt  to  dictate  to  other 
nations  their  form  of  government  is  indefensible. 

And  fifth:  A  nation's  hope  of  lasting  peace 
cannot  be  firmly  based  upon  any  race  in  arma- 
ments but  rather  upon  just  relations  and  honest 
understanding  with  all  other  nations. 

In  the  light  of  these  principles  the  citizens  of 
the  United  States  defined  the  way  they  proposed 
to  follow,  through  the  aftermath  of  war,  toward 
true  peace. 

This  way  was  faithful  to  the  spirit  that  in- 
spired the  United  Nations :  to  prohibit  strife,  to 
relieve  tensions,  to  banish  fears.  This  way  was 
to  control  and  to  reduce  armaments.  This  way 
was  to  allow  all  nations  to  devote  their  energies 
and  resources  to  the  great  and  good  tasks  of  heal- 


April  27,  1953 


599 


ing  the  war's  wounds,  of  clothing  and  feeding 
and  housing  the  needy,  of  perfecting  a  just  politi- 
cal life,  of  enjoying  the  fruits  of  their  own  free 
toil. 

The  Road  Followed  by  the  Soviet  Union 

The  Soviet  government  held  a  vastly  different 
vision  of  the  future. 

In  the  world  of  its  design,  security  was  to  be 
found,  not  in  mutual  trust  and  mutual  aid  but  in 
force:  huge  armies,  subversion,  rule  of  neighbor 
nations.  The  goal  was  povcer  superiority  at  all 
cost.  Security  was  to  be  sought  by  denying  it 
to  all  others. 

The  result  has  been  tragic  for  the  world  and,  for 
the  Soviet  Union,  it  has  also  been  ironic. 

The  amassing  of  Soviet  power  alerted  free  na- 
tions to  a  new  danger  of  aggression.  It  com- 
pelled them  in  self-defense  to  spend  unprecedented 
money  and  energy  for  armaments.  It  forced 
them  to  develop  weapons  of  war  now  capable  of 
inflicting  instant  and  terrible  punishment  upon 
any  aggressor. 

It  instilled  in  the  free  nations — and  let  none 
doubt  this — the  unshakable  conviction  that,  as 
long  as  there  persists  a  threat  to  freedom,  they 
must,  at  any  cost,  remain  armed,  strong,  and  ready 
for  any  risk  of  war. 

It  inspired  them — and  let  none  doubt  this — to 
attain  a  unity  of  purpose  and  will  beyond  the 
power  of  propaganda  or  pressure  to  break,  now 
or  ever. 

There  remained,  however,  one  thing  essentially 
unchanged  and  unaffected  by  Soviet  conduct:  the 
readiness  of  the  free  nations  to  welcome  sincerely 
any  genuine  evidence  of  peaceful  purpose  enabling 
all  peoples  again  to  resume  their  common  quest 
of  just  peace. 

The  free  nations,  most  solemnly  and  repeatedly, 
have  assured  the  Soviet  Union  that  their  firm  as- 
sociation has  never  had  any  aggressive  purpose 
whatsoever.  Soviet  leaders,  however,  have 
seemed  to  persuade  themselves,  or  tried  to  per- 
suade their  people,  otherwise. 

And  so  it  has  come  to  jmss  that  the  Soviet  Union 
itself  has  shared  and  suffered  the  very  fears  it  has 
fostered  in  the  rest  of  the  world. 

This  has  been  the  way  of  life  forged  by  8  years 
of  fear  and  force. 

What  can  the  world,  or  any  nation  in  it,  hope 
for  if  no  turning  is  found  on  this  dread  road? 


A  Life  of  Fear 

The  worst  to  be  feared  and  the  best  to  be  ex- J 
pected  can  be  simply  stated.  ' 

The  icorst  is  atomic  war. 

The  best  would  be  this :  a  life  of  perpetual  fear 
and  tension  ;  a  burden  of  anns  draining  the  wealth 
and  the  labor  of  all  peoples ;  a  wasting  of  strength 
that  defies  the  American  system  or  the  Soviet 
system  or  any  system  to  achieve  true  abundance 
and  happiness  for  the  peoples  of  this  earth. 

Every  gun  that  is  made,  every  warship  launched, 
every  rocket  fired  signifies,  in  the  final  sense,  a 
theft  from  those  who  hunger  and  are  not  fed,  those 
who  are  cold  and  are  not  clothed. 


The  Costs  of  a  World  in  Arms 

This  world  in  arms  is  not  spending  money  alone. 

It  is  spending  the  sweat  of  its  laborers,  the 
genius  of  its  scientists,  the  hopes  of  its  children. 

The  cost  of  one  modern  heavy  bomber  is  this: 
a  modern  brick  school  in  more  than  30  cities. 

It  is  two  electric  power  plants,  each  serving  a 
town  of  60,000  population. 

It  is  two  fine,  fully  equipped  hospitals. 

It  is  some  50  miles  of  concrete  highway. 

We  pay  for  a  single  fighter  plane  with  a  half 
million  bushels  of  wheat. 

We  pay  for  a  single  destroyer  with  new  homes 
that  could  have  housed  more  than  8,000  people. 

This,  I  repeat,  is  the  best  way  of  life  to  be  found 
on  the  road  the  world  has  been  taking. 

This  is  not  a  way  of  life  at  all,  in  any  true  sense. 
Under  the  cloud  of  threatening  war,  it  is  humanity 
hanging  from  a  cross  of  iron. 

These  plain  and  cruel  truths  define  the  peril 
and  point  the  hope  that  come  with  this  spring  of 
1953. 

This  is  one  of  those  times  in  the  affairs  of 
nations  when  the  gravest  choices  must  be  made,  if 
there  is  to  be  a  turning  toward  a  just  and  lasting 
peace. 

It  is  a  moment  that  calls  upon  the  govermnents 
of  the  world  to  speak  their  intentions  with  sim- 
plicity and  with  honesty. 

It  calls  upon  them  to  answer  the  question  that 
stirs  the  hearts  of  all  sane  men :  is  there  no  other 
way  the  world  may  live? 

Beginning  of  a  New  Era 

The  world  knows  that  an  era  ended  with  the 
death  of  Joseph  Stalin.  The  extraordinary  30- 
year  span  of  his  rule  saw  the  Soviet  Empire 


A 


600 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


expand  to  reach  from  the  Baltic  Sea  to  the  Sea 
of  Japan,  finally  to  dominate  800  million  souls. 

The  Soviet  system  shaped  by  Stalin  and  his 
predecessors  was  born  of  one  World  War.  It  sur- 
vived with  stubborn  and  often  amazing  courage  a 
second  "World  War.  It  has  lived  to  threaten  a 
third. 

Now  a  new  leadership  has  assumed  power  in  the 
Soviet  Union.  Its  links  to  the  past,  however 
strong,  cannot  bind  it  completely.  Its  future  is, 
in  great  part,  its  own  to  make. 

This  new  leadership  confronts  a  free  world 
aroused,  as  rarely  in  its  history,  by  the  will  to 
stay  free. 

This  free  world  knows,  out  of  the  bitter  wisdom 
of  experience,  that  vigilance  and  sacrifice  are  the 
price  of  liberty. 

It  knows  that  the  defense  of  Western  Europe 
imperatively  demands  the  unity  of  purpose  and  ac- 
tion made  possible  by  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty 
Organization,  embracing  a  European  Defense 
Community. 

It  knows  that  Western  Germany  deserves  to  be 
a  free  and  equal  partner  in  this  community  and 
that  this,  for  Germany,  is  the  only  safe  way  to  full, 
final  unity. 

It  knows  that  aggression  in  Korea  and  in  south- 
east Asia  are  threats  to  the  whole  free  community 
to  be  met  by  united  action. 

This  is  the  kind  of  free  world  which  the  new 
Soviet  leadership  confronts.  It  is  a  world  that 
demands  and  expects  the  fullest  respect  of  its 
rights  and  interests.  It  is  a  world  that  will  always 
accord  the  same  respect  to  all  others. 

So  the  new  Soviet  leadership  now  has  a  precious 
opportunity  to  awaken,  with  the  rest  of  the  world, 
to  the  point  of  peril  reached  and  to  help  turn  the 
tide  of  history. 

Will  it  do  this? 

We  do  not  yet  know.  Recent  statements  and 
gestures  of  Soviet  leaders  give  some  evidence  that 
they  may  recognize  this  critical  moment. 

We  welcome  every  honest  act  of  peace. 

We  care  nothing  for  mere  rhetoric. 

We  care  only  for  sincerity  of  peaceful  purpose 
attested  by  deeds.  The  opportunities  for  such 
deeds  are  many.  The  performance  of  a  great  num- 
ber of  them  waits  upon  no  complex  protocol  but 
upon  the  simple  will  to  do  them.  Even  a  few  such 
clear  and  specific  acts,  such  as  the  Soviet  Union's 
signature  upon  an  Austrian  treaty  or  its  release  of 
thousands  of  prisoners   still  held   from   World 


War  II,  would  be  impressive  signs  of  sincere  in- 
tent. They  would  carry  a  power  of  persuasion 
not  to  be  matched  by  any  amount  of  oratory. 

This  we  do  know :  a  world  that  begins  to  witness 
the  rebirth  of  trust  among  nations  can  find  its  way 
to  a  peace  that  is  neither  partial  nor  punitive. 

With  all  who  will  work  in  good  faith  toward 
such  a  peace,  we  are  ready,  with  renewed  resolve, 
to  strive  to  redeem  the  near-lost  hopes  of  our  day. 

The  first  great  step  along  this  way  must  be  the 
conclusion  of  an  honorable  armistice  in  Korea. 

This  means  the  immediate  cessation  of  hostilities 
and  the  prompt  initiation  of  political  discussions 
leading  to  the  holding  of  free  elections  in  a 
united  Korea. 

It  should  mean,  no  less  importantly,  an  end  to 
the  direct  and  indirect  attacks  upon  the  security 
of  Indochina  and  Malaya.  For  any  armistice  in 
Korea  that  merely  released  aggressive  armies  to 
attack  elsewhere  would  be  a  fraud. 

We  seek,  throughout  Asia  as  throughout  the 
world,  a  peace  that  is  true  and  total. 

Out  of  this  can  grow  a  still  wider  task — the 
achieving  of  just  political  settlements  for  the  other 
serious  and  specific  issues  between  the  free  world 
and  the  Soviet  Union. 

None  of  these  issues,  great  or  small,  is  insolu- 
ble— given  only  the  will  to  respect  the  rights  of  all 
nations. 

Again  we  say:  the  United  States  is  ready  to 
assume  its  just  part. 

We  have  already  done  all  within  our  power  to 
speed  conclusion  of  a  treaty  with  Austria,  which 
will  free  that  country  from  economic  exploita- 
tion and  from  occupation  by  foreign  troops. 

We  are  ready  not  only  to  press  forward  with 
the  present  plans  for  closer  unity  of  the  nations 
of  Western  Europe  but  also,  upon  that  founda- 
tion, to  strive  to  foster  a  broader  European  com- 
munity, conducive  to  the  free  movement  of  persons, 
of  trade,  and  of  ideas. 

This  community  would  include  a  free  and 
united  Germany,  with  a  government  based  upon 
free  and  secret  elections. 

This  free  community  and  the  full  independence 
of  the  East  European  nations  could  mean  the  end 
of  the  present  unnatural  division  of  Europe. 

Reduction  of  Armaments 

As  progress  in  all  these  areas  strengthens  world 
trust,  we  could  proceed  concurrently  with  the 
next  great  work — the  reduction  of  the  burden  of 


April  27,   1953 


601 


armaments  now  weighing  upon  the  world.  To 
this  end  we  would  welcome  and  enter  into  the  most 
solemn  agreements.  These  could  properly  in- 
clude : 

1.  The  limitation,  by  absolute  numbers  or  by 
an  agreed  international  ratio,  of  the  sizes  of  the 
military  and  security  forces  of  all  nations. 

2.  A  commitment  by  all  nations  to  set  an  agreed 
limit  upon  that  proportion  of  total  production 
of  certain  strategic  materials  to  be  devoted  to 
military  purposes. 

3.  International  control  of  atomic  energy  to 
promote  its  use  for  peaceful  purposes  only  and 
to  insure  the  prohibition  of  atomic  weapons. 

4.  A  limitation  or  prohibition  of  other  cate- 
gories of  weapons  of  great  destructiveness. 

5.  The  enforcement  of  all  these  agreed  limita- 
tions and  prohibitions  by  adequate  safeguards, 
including  a  practical  system  of  inspection  under 
the  United  Nations. 

The  details  of  such  disarmament  programs  are 
manifestly  critical  and  complex.  Neither  the 
United  States  nor  any  other  nation  can  properly 
claim  to  possess  a  perfect,  immutable  formula. 
But  the  formula  matters  less  than  the  faith— the 
good  faith  without  which  no  formula  can  work 
justly  and  effectively. 

A  New  Kind  of  War 

The  fruit  of  success  in  all  these  tasks  would 
present  the  world  with  the  greatest  task,  and  the 
greatest  opportunity,  of  all.  It  is  this:  the  dedi- 
cation of  the  energies,  the  resources,  and  the  imagi- 
nations of  all  peaceful  nations  to  a  new  kind  of 
war.  This  would  be  a  declared  total  war,  not 
upon  any  human  enemy  but  upon  the  brute  forces 
of  poverty  and  need. 

The  peace  we  seek,  founded  upon  decent  trust 
and  cooperative  effort  among  nations,  can  be  forti- 
fied, not  by  weapons  of  war  but  by  wheat  and 
by  cotton,  by  milk  and  by  wool,  by  meat  and  by 
timber  and  by  rice.  These  are  words  that  trans- 
late into  every  language  on  earth.  These  are 
needs  that  challenge  this  world  in  arms. 

This  idea  of  a  just  and  peaceful  world  is  not 
new  or  strange  to  us.  It  inspired  the  people  of 
the  United  States  to  initiate  tlie  European  Ke- 
covery  Program  in  1947.  That  program  was  pre- 
pared to  treat,  with  like  and  equal  concern,  the 
needs  of  Eastern  and  Western  Europe. 


We  are  prepared  to  reaffirm,  with  the  most  con- 
crete evidence,  our  readiness  to  help  build  a  world 
in  which  all  peoples  can  be  productive  and  pros- 
perous. 

This  Government  is  ready  to  ask  its  people  to 
join  with  all  nations  in  devoting  a  substantial  per- 
centage of  the  savings  achieved  by  disarmament 
to  a  fund  for  world  aid  and  reconstruction.  The 
purposes  of  this  great  work  would  be  to  help 
other  peoples  to  develop  the  undeveloped  areas  of 
the  world,  to  stimulate  profitable  and  fair  world 
trade,  to  assist  all  peoples  to  know  the  blessings 
of  productive  freedom. 

The  monuments  to  this  new  kind  of  war  would 
be  these :  roads  and  schools,  hospitals  and  homes, 
food  and  health. 

We  are  ready,  in  short,  to  dedicate  our  strength 
to  serving  the  i^eds,  rather  than  the  fears,  of  the 
world. 

We  are  ready,  by  these  and  all  such  actions,  to 
make  of  the  United  Nations  an  institution  that 
can  effectively  guard  the  peace  and  security  of 
all  peoples. 

I  know  of  nothing  I  can  add  to  make  plainer  the 
sincere  purpose  of  the  United  States. 

I  know  of  no  course,  other  than  that  marked 
by  these  and  similar  actions,  that  can  be  called  the 
highway  of  peace. 

I  know  of  only  one  question  upon  which  prog- 
ress waits.     It  is  this : 
What  Is  the  Soviet  Union  Ready  To  Bo? 
Wliatever  the  answer  be,  let  it  be  plainly  spoken. 
Again  we  say :  the  hunger  for  peace  is  too  great, 
the  hour  in  history  too  late,  for  any  government 
to  mock  men's  hopes  with  mere  words  and  prom- 
ises and  gestures. 

The  test  of  truth  is  simple.  There  can  be  no 
persuasion  but  by  deeds. 

Is  the  new  leadership  of  the  Soviet  Union  pre- 
pared to  use  its  decisive  influence  in  the  Commu- 
nist world,  including  control  of  the  flow  of  arms, 
to  bring  not  merely  an  expedient  truce  in  Korea 
but  genuine  peace  in  Asia  ? 

Is  it  prepared  to  allow  other  nations,  including     ' 
those  of  Eastern  Europe,  the  free  choice  of  their 
own  forms  of  government  ? 

Is  it  prepared  to  act  in  concert  with  others  upon 

serious  disarmament  proposals  to  be  made  firmly 

effective  by  stringent  U.  N.  control  and  inspection  ? 

If  not,  where  then  is  the  concrete  evidence  of 

the  Soviet  Union's  concern  for  peace  ? 

The  test  is  clear. 


602 


Deparimenf   of  Sfate   Bulletin 


There  is,  before  all  peoples,  a  precious  chance 
to  turn  the  black  tide  of  events.  If  we  failed  to 
strive  to  seize  this  chance,  the  judgment  of  future 
ages  would  be  harsh  and  just, 
"if  we  strive  but  fail  and  the  world  remains 
armed  against  itself,  it  at  least  need  be  divided 
no  longer  in  its  clear  knowledge  of  who  has  con- 
demned humankind  to  this  fate. 

The  purpose  of  the  United  States,  in  stating 
these  proposals,  is  simple  and  clear. 

These  proposals  spring,  without  ulterior  pur- 


pose or  political  passion,  from  our  calm  conviction 
that  the  hunger  for  just  peace  is  in  the  hearts  of  all 
peoples— those  of  Russia  and  of  China  no  less  than 
of  our  own  country. 

They  conform  to  our  firm  faith  that  God  cre- 
ated men  to  enjoy,  not  destroy,  the  fruits  of  the 
earth  and  of  their  own  toil. 

They  aspire  to  this :  the  lifting,  from  the  backs 
and  from  the  hearts  of  men,  of  their  burden  of 
arms  and  of  fears,  so  that  they  may  find  before 
them  a  golden  age  of  freedom  and  of  peace. 


The  First  90  Days 


Address  hy  Secretary  Dulles'^ 


Press  release  200  dated  April  18 

President  Eisenhower,  speaking  here  last  Thurs- 
day,^ opened  the  door  to  the  mansion  of  peace.  He 
invited  the  Soviet  Union  to  come  in.  That  invita- 
tion was  not  mere  rhetoric.  Its  timing  was  not 
chosen  at  hazard.  It  marked  a  planned  stage  in 
the  evolution  of  Eisenhower  foreign  policy.  The 
speech  really  had  its  beginning  when  President 
Eisenhower  took  office,  which  was  90  days  ago 
tomorrow. 

The  words  which  President  Eisenhower  uttered 
might  have  been  uttered  at  any  time  during  these 
past  90  days.  But  these  words  gained  immensely 
in  significance  because  they  came  against  a  back- 
ground of  cohesive,  positive  action. 

When  President  Eisenhower  first  took  office,  a 
plea  for  peace  such  as  he  made  this  week  might 
have  been  interpreted  as  a  sign  of  weakness  or  a 
mere  gesture  of  sentimentality.  In  order  that  such 
a  plea  should  carry  maximum  impact,  it  was  first 

'  Made  before  the  American  Society  of  Newspaper  Edi- 
tors and  broadcast  to  the  Nation  over  radio  and  television 
networks  on  Apr.  18.  Also  printed  as  Department  of  State 
publication  5044. 

'  Supra. 

April  27,   1953 


necessary  to  demonstrate  to  the  world,  and  to  So- 
viet leaders  in  particular.  President  Eisenhower's 
will  and  capacity  to  develop  foreign  policies  so 
firm,  so  fair,  so  just  that  the  Soviet  leaders  might 
find  it  expedient  to  live  with  these  policies  rather 
than  to  live  against  them. 

I  should  like  briefly  to  review  this  90-day  period, 
which  had  as  its  climax  the  President's  historical 
address. 

The  European  Defense  Community 

One  of  the  worries  of  the  free  world,  and  one 
of  the  hopes  of  the  Soviet  world,  has  been  disunity 
in  Western  Europe.  For  example,  it  would  be 
particularly  disastrous  for  the  West  if  Franco- 
German  antagonism  were  revived.  That  would 
indeed  aiTord  Soviet  intrigue  a  fertile  field  of 
operation. 

The  continental  European  countries  themselves, 
including  France  and  Germany,  had  seen  the 
danger  and  had  devised  a  program  to  meet  it. 
They  had  proposed  to  create  a  European  Defense 
Community,  the  members  of  which  would  merge 
their  military  power  into  a  single  force.    A  treaty 

603 


to  this  effect  was  signed  nearly  a  year  ago.  It  was 
contemplated  by  the  treaty  that  it  would  be  rati- 
fied and  come  into  force  within  6  months.  But, 
following  the  signature  of  the  treaty,  nothing  hap- 
pened. Last  January  it  seemed  that  the  project 
was  dying. 

The  President,  out  of  his  own  intimate  knowl- 
edge of  European  conditions,  felt  that  our  Gov- 
ernment should  indicate  its  deep  concern  and  point 
out  that  failure  to  realize  the  European  Defense 
Community  could  mean  collapse  of  the  hopes  and 
efforts  that  inspired  the  Marshall  plan,  the  North 
Atlantic  Treaty,  and  the  mutual  security  program. 
Therefore,  on  January  30,  just  10  days  after  the 
President's  inaugural,  Mr.  Stassen  and  I,  at  the 
President's  request,  visited  the  six  European  De- 
fense Community  countries  and  also  Great  Britain. 
As  a  result  of  our  visit  and  the  return  visits  to 
Washington  of  several  European  leaders,  this  proj- 
ect has  now  been  revived.  It  cannot  yet  be  con- 
fidently predicted  that  it  will  be  realized.  But  it 
is  today  the  livest  single  topic  before  the  six 
parliaments  of  continental  Europe. 

The  Soviet  Union  now  faces  the  likelihood  that 
Western  Europe  will  produce  a  unified  military 
force,  including  French  and  Germans.  Thus 
would  come  to  a  final  end  one  of  the  hopes  from 
which  Soviet  imperialism  has  taken  comfort. 

NATO 

It  was  never  expected  that  the  European  Defense 
Community,  when  created,  would  alone  carry  the 
burdens  of  making  Western  Europe  secure.  Edo, 
a  community  of  6,  would  stand  within  the  frame- 
work of  Nato,  a  partnership  of  14.  This  partner- 
ship, however,  also  presented  us  with  urgent  prob- 
lems. For  most  of  the  members  had  come  to  feel 
that  the  program  for  Nato  represented  a  type  of 
effort  which  they  could  not  continue  indefinitely  to 
bear. 

The  United  States  and  its  Nato  partners  had 
been  operating  on  the  assumption  that  the  moment 
of  greatest  danger  was  some  early,  predictable 
date.  Therefore,  it  had  been  reasoned,  emergency 
efforts  should  be  made  to  meet  that  date,  leaving 
subsequent  years  for  stabilization  and  re- 
cuperation. 

But  the  Soviet  Union  did  not  conveniently  relax 
its  threat  in  order  to  meet  the  preconceived  time- 
table of  the  Nato  countries.  Accordingly  it  was 
found  necessary  each  year  to  prolong  the  extraor- 

604 


dinary  exertion  and  to  defer  the  period  of  stabih- 
zation.  This  spasmodic  approach  was  exhaustive 
to  all  concerned.  Several  of  our  allies  told  us  that 
they  could  not  hold  to  the  present  pace  without 
greatly  increased  help  from  the  United  States. 

The    situation    obviously    called    for    a    fresh 
approach. 

Because  we  did  not  believe  that  any  specific  date 
of  peak  danger  could  be  reliably  forecast ;  because 
Soviet  communism  itself  professes  to  operate  in 
terms  of  "an  entire  historical  era";  because  new 
weapons  inevitably  change  the  aspect  of  the  mih- 
tary  task ;  because  a  vigorous  and  happy  society  is 
itself  an  important  ingredient  of  freedom— for 
these  reasons  we  decided  to  find  programs  which, 
on  the  one  hand,  will  provide  Europe  with  sub-' 
stantial  insurance  against  being  overrun  by  Soviet 
attack  and  which,  on  the  other  hand,  can,  if  neces- 
sary, be  sustained  for  an  indefinite  period  with 
growing  reliance  on  Western  Europe's  own 
strength. 

Next  week  the  Secretary  of  the  Treasury.  Mr. 
Humphrey,  the  Secretary  of  Defense,  Mr.  Wilson, 
the  Director  for  Mutual  Security,  Mr.  Stassen,  and 
I  will  go  to  Paris  to  meet  with  the  other  members 
of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization  Coun- 
cil. There  we  shall  listen  sympathetically  to  the 
pomt  of  view  of  our  partners  and  together  with 
them  concert  military  programs  designed  to  deter 
attack  from  without,  without  undermining  inner 
strength. 

All  will  know,  and  I  am  confident  that  the  So- 
viet leaders  know  best  of  all,  that  what  we  plan 
is  not  greater  weakness  but  greater  strength.  The 
productivity  of  the  free  world  is  so  prodigious, 
its  inventiveness  so  phenomenal,  that  any  military 
aggressor  that  attacked  our  free- world  partnership 
would  be  doomed  to  sure  defeat. 

What  we  plan  is  to  dissipate  another  Soviet 
hope,  the  hope  expressed  by  Stalin  when  he  said 
that  "the  moment  for  the  decisive  blow"  would 
come  when  the  opponents  of  communism  "have 
sufficiently  weakened  themselves  in  a  struggle 
which  is  beyond  their  strength  .  .  .  have  suffi- 
ciently disgraced  themselves  through  their  prac- 
tical bankruptcy  so  that  our  victory  is  assured." 
We  do  not  intend  that  that  moment  of  bankruptcy 
shall  come. 

Let  me  add  that  the  policy  here  expressed  was 
determined  upon  without  regard  to  any  of  the 
recent  Soviet  moves.  We  are  not  dancing  to  any 
Russian  tune.     Nothing  that  has  happened  has  in- 

Depar/menf  of  Stale  Bulletin 


'  duced  in  us  a  mood  of  relaxation  or  any  desire  to 
'  weaken  Nato.     The  purpose  and  the  result  wiU 
'  be  a  Nato  more  sure  to  live  and  to  perform  its 
appointed  tasks. 

The  Far  East 

,  In  the  Far  East  vigorous  policy  decisions  were 
,  also  taken  since  the  90  days  began.  In  Korea  we 
embarked  upon  a  program  to  change  the  complex- 
ion of  that  struggle.  As  President  Eisenhower 
told  you,  we  still  welcome  an  armistice,  not  merely 
to  end  the  fighting  but  on  the  assumption  that  it 
will  lead  to  a  peace  which  accords  with  the  prin- 
ciples of  the  United  Nations — and  that  means  a 
free  and  united  Korea.  Of  course  we  want  peace 
in  Korea.  But  we  do  not  play  the  role  of 
suppliants. 

We  have  vastly  improved  our  relations  with  the 
National  Government  of  China.  We  now  have  an 
Ambassador  at  Taipei,  Formosa,  the  provisional 
capital.  We  are  speeding  the  delivery  of  military 
assistance,  which  was  woefully  in  arrears.  Presi- 
dent Eisenhower  has  changed  the  instructions  to 
the  Seventh  Fleet  so  that,  while  it  is  still  instructed 
to  protect  Formosa,  it  is  no  longer  instructed  to 
protect  the  Chinese  Communists  on  the  mainland. 
In  relation  to  Indochina,  the  French  Govern- 
ment and  the  Associated  States  have  been  told  that 
we  would  be  favorably  disposed  to  giving  increased 
military  and  financial  assistance  to  plans  realisti- 
cally designed  to  suppress  the  Communist-inspired 
civil  war,  which  for  6  years  has  wracked  the  area 
and  seriously  drained  the  metropolitan  resources 
of  France. 

We  recently  annoimced,  in  conjunction  with  the 
French  Government,^  that  should  the  Chinese  Com- 
munist regime  take  advantage  of  a  Korean  armi- 
stice to  pursue  aggressive  war  elsewhere  in  the  Far 
East,  such  action  would  have  the  most  serious  con- 
sequences and  would  conflict  directly  with  the  un- 
derstanding on  which  any  armistice  in  Korea  was 
reached.  That  decision  was  taken  prior  to  the  re- 
cent revival  of  prospects  for  a  Korean  armistice. 
It  was  part  of  our  effort  to  anticipate  what  may 
happen  rather  than  to  catch  up  with  what  has 
happened. 

We  negotiated  with  the  Governments  of  Britain, 
France,  and  other  maritime  powers  for  a  tighten- 
ing of  the  blockade  of  Communist  China.  They 
are  taking  important  practical  measures  to  restrict 

'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  6,  1953,  p.  491. 


the  voyages  of  their  own  ships  to  China  and  to 
withhold  fuel  from  ships  of  other  nations  which 
are  carrying  strategic  goods  to  China. 

You  can  see,  as  others  have  seen,  that  a  new  order 
of  priority  and  urgency  has  been  given  to  the  Far 
East.  Further,  it  has  been  made  clear  that  we 
consider  that  our  Eastern  friends,  from  Japan, 
Korea,  and  Formosa  to  Indochina  and  Malaya, 
face  a  single  hostile  front,  to  be  met  with  a  common 
purpose  and  growing  cooperation  as  between  the 
component  parts  of  freedom. 

This  means  that  the  Communists  in  the  Far  East 
can  no  longer  count  on  winning  by  shifting  their 
strength  and  by  focusing  attack  on  one  or  another 
free-world  position  that  is  isolated  from  the  others. 
The  Communist  strategy,  based  on  a  contiguous 
land  mass,  is  now  confronted  by  a  growing  free- 
world  unity  based  upon  the  peninsular  positions 
and  offshore  island  chain  now  controlled  by  the 
free  peoples  of  Asia. 

The  Middle  East  and  Latin  America 

The  Middle  East  and  Latin  America,  two  areas 
far  apart,  have  both  been  the  subject  of  Communist 
attempts  at  infiltration.  The  ground  was  fertile 
because  these  areas  have  somewhat  lacked  our  at- 
tention ;  and,  in  the  case  of  the  Middle  East,  there 
has  developed  a  spirit  of  nationalism,  which  has 
at  times  grown  fanatical  in  its  opposition  to  the 
Western  Powers. 

As  was  announced  some  weeks  ago,  Mr.  Stassen 
and  I  have  been  invited  by  the  governments  of 
more  than  a  dozen  countries  of  the  Middle  East 
and  South  Asia  to  visit  them.  We  have  accepted 
and  plan  to  go  next  month.  That  is  significant, 
for  no  United  States  Secretary  of  State  has  ever 
visited  any  of  these  countries.  It  will  afford  us 
an  opportunity  to  meet  at  firsthand  many  of  the 
leaders  and,  I  hope,  to  dissipate  the  false  impres- 
sions which  Communist  propaganda  has  fomented. 

As  President  Eisenhower  announced  last  Sun- 
day,* the  State  Department  is  organizing  a  good- 
will mission  to  South  America,  which  will  be 
headed  by  the  President's  brother.  Dr.  Milton 
Eisenhower.  He  will  personally  carry  the  Presi- 
dent's sentiments  of  good  will  toward  the  Repub- 
lics and  peoples  to  the  south  of  us.  Our  new  As- 
sistant Secretary  for  this  area  is  already  in  Central 
America. 

I  have  had  the  pleasure  of  two  meetings,  one  at 

*  lUd.,  Apr.  20, 1953,  p.  563. 


April  27,   7953 


605 


the  United  Nations  and  the  other  at  Washington, 
with  the  representatives  of  all  20  of  the  American 
Republics. 

What  we  have  done,  and  what  we  already  plan, 
mark  a  determination  to  develop  better  mider- 
standing  and  more  fellowship  with  peoples  whom 
we  know  and  respect  but  whose  friendship  we 
have  taken  too  much  for  granted.  Thereby  we 
may  close  another  possible  avenue  of  Soviet  Com- 
mimist  aggression. 

Captive  Peoples 

The  free  peoples  are  susceptible  to  Soviet  guile 
because  they  so  passionately  want  peace  that  they 
can  readily  be  attracted  by  illusions  of  peace.  One 
such  illusion  is  a  settlement  based  on  the  status  quo. 
This  present  status  involves  the  captivity  of  hun- 
dreds of  millions  of  persons  of  distinctive  nation- 
ality, race,  religion,  and  culture.  The  hardest  task 
of  the  Soviet  rulers  is  to  beat  this  disunity  into 
Communist  conformity.  If  that  can  be  done,  then 
the  menace  of  Soviet  communism  will  be  immeas- 
urably increased. 

It  was  of  the  utmost  importance  that  we  should 
make  clear  to  the  captive  peoples  that  we  do  not 
accept  their  captivity  as  a  permanent  fact  of  his- 
tory. If  they  thought  otherwise  and  became  hope- 
less, we  would  unwittingly  have  become  partners 
to  the  forging  of  a  hostile  power  so  vast  that  it 
could  encompass  our  destruction. 

President  Eisenhower,  anticipating  some  of  the 
events  that  have  since  occurred,  acted  immediately 
after  his  inauguration  to  propose  that  our  national 
position  should  be  made  clear  through  a  solemn 
resolution  concurred  in  by  Congress  and  the  Presi- 
dent. The  Congress  has  yet  to  act.  However,  I 
am  persuaded,  and  I  trust  that  the  captive  peoples 
are  persuaded,  that  Congress  in  fact  fully  shares 
the  point  of  view  that  President  Eisenhower  ex- 
pressed. In  any  event  the  Chief  Executive  has 
formulated  his  position  on  this  important  matter 
and  by  doing  so  has  foreclosed  another  of  the  hopes 
which  Soviet  rulers  had  optimistically  entertained. 

State  Department  Organization 

Wliile  we  have  been  making  these  policy  de- 
cisions, we  have  at  the  same  time  been  acting  to 
assure  that  the  State  Department  would  be  able 
to  make  new  policies  wherever  these  would  seem 
better  than  the  old  and  to  assure  a  steadily  rising 
level  of  performance. 

606 


In  addition  to  the  new  Secretary  of  State,  there 
are  two  new  Under  Secretaries,  one  of  whom 
specializes  in  administration  and  security  matters. 
There  are  six  new  Assistant  Secretaries.  There  is 
a  new  Legal  Adviser,  a  new  Counselor,  a  new 
Director  of  International  Information  Adminis- 
tration, who  has  responsibility  for  the  Voice  of 
America.  The  whole  Policy  Planning  Staff  is  to 
go  under  new  direction  and  be  coordinated  closely 
with  the  revitalized  National  Security  Council. 

We  are  also  bringing  fresh  vision  and  new  vigor 
into  our  United  Nations  Mission  and  into  our  Em- 
bassies abroad.  The  Chief  of  the  Permanent  Mis- 
sion to  the  United  Nations,  former  Senator  Austin, 
retired  last  January  after  many  years  of  distin- 
guished service.  He  has  been  succeeded  by  for- 
mer Senator  Henry  Cabot  Lodge,  who  now  heads 
the  Permanent  Mission.  His  vigor  and  parlia- 
mentary skill  already  demonstrate  that  the  Soviet 
leaders  cannot  look  forward  to  using  the  United 
Nations  as  a  sounding  board  for  propaganda  but 
that  they  will  have  to  deal  in  the  United  Nations 
with  a  mobilized  body  of  world  opinion  which  is 
determined  that  the  United  Nations  shall,  in  fact, 
serve  its  avowed  purpose  to  maintain  international 
peace  and  security  in  conformity  with  the  prin-  i 
ciples  of  justice.  1 

New  Ambassadors  are  installed  or  being  in-  I 
stalled  in  Great  Britain,  Ireland,  France,  Italy, 
Germany,  Russia,  Spain,  Mexico,  Brazil,  Japan, 
Free  China,  India,  and  Pakistan.    Other  appoint- 
ments are  in  contemplation. 

For  the  first  time  in  State  Department  history, 
all  of  our  major  appointments  are  subject  to  FBI 
field  checks  so  as  to  eliminate  security  risks  and 
possibility  of  hostile  infiltration  into  high  places. 
So  far  as  is  humanly  practical,  we  are  seeing  to 
it  that  Communist  agents  shall  not  have  access  to 
the  State  Dejiartment. 

We  are  fortunate  in  having  a  body  of  Foreign 
Service  career  men  and  women  who  can  be  the  main 
reliance  of  the  President  and  myself.  They  are  a 
permanent  and  nonpolitical  part  of  Government. 
They  became  such  under  the  Rogers  Act,  enacted 
by  a  Republican  Congress  during  the  administra- 
tion of  President  Coolidge  and  Secretary  Hughes. 

There  is  a  tendency  in  some  quarters  to  feel 
that  confidence  cannot  be  placed  in  these  career 
officials  because  in  the  past,  as  was  their  duty,  they 
served  under  Democrat  Presidents  and  Democrat 
Secretaries  of  State.  It  is,  however,  easier  than 
most  think  for  our  career  Foreign  Service  men  and 

DeparfmeM  of  State   Bulletin 


women  to  adapt  themselves  to  new  Eepublican 
leadership.  Like  career  soldiers,  Foreign  Service 
ofiBcers  respect  and  welcome  high-level  policy  di- 
rection such  as  they  are  getting  under  President 
Eisenhower.  They  are,  with  rare  exceptions,  a 
splendid  and  patriotic  group  of  men  and  women, 
with  a  fine  tradition.  They  are  experts,  trained 
to  analyze  and  interpret  foreign  conditions  and  to 
carry  out  designated  missions,  usually  of  delicacy, 
sometimes  of  danger.  Just  as  the  Nation  depends 
for  defense  purposes  on  the  graduates  of  our  Mili- 
tary and  Naval  academies,  so  the  Nation  for 
foreign  services  depends  on  our  career  diplomats. 

Our  people  here  at  home,  our  friends  abroad, 
and  our  enemies  abroad  can  know  that  we  have 
not  only  strong  foreign  policies  but  that  we  are 
rapidly  molding  an  organization  which  will  be 
secure  and  which  will  be  efficient  in  action. 

I  might  add,  as  of  particular  interest  to  this 
distinguished  group  of  American  editors,  that 
these  foreign  policies  of  which  I  speak  are  no 
longer  looked  upon  as  state  secrets.  We  are  de- 
termined that  the  public  shall  be  as  fully  informed 
as  possible,  and  in  the  clearest  and  simplest  lan- 
guage possible,  about  what  we  are  doing  in  the 
State  Department  and  what  our  foreign  policy  is. 

I  have  long  felt  that,  under  our  form  of  govern- 
ment, the  effectiveness  of  foreign  policy  depends  in 
large  measure  upon  public  understanding  and  sup- 
port of  it. 

The  Soviet  Peace  Defensive 

Our  conduct  has  been  calmly  strong,  never 
truculent  nor  blustering.  In  the  face  of  it  Soviet 
leaders  gave  evidence  that  they  were  changing 
their  policies.  They  initiated  what  presents  to  you 
and  to  me  one  of  the  most  perplexing  problems  of 
our  time.  It  is  a  problem  that  I  think  is  largely 
due  to  a  misnomer.  The  Kremlin  launched  what 
is  commonly  called  a  "peace  offensive."  Wliatever 
it  is  that  the  Kremlin  has  launched— and  no  one 
can  be  sure  just  yet  what  it  is — it  is  not  a  peace 
offensive.    It  is  a  peace  defensive. 

It  is  gratifying  that  Soviet  leaders  appear  now 
to  have  shifted  from  an  offensive  to  a  defensive 
mood.  But  we  cannot  yet  tell  whether  this  repre- 
sents a  basic  change  or  merely  a  tactical  shift.  It 
is  prudent,  for  the  present,  to  assume  that  we  are 
witnessing  a  tactical  move  of  the  kind  which  Soviet 
communism  has  often  practiced. 

Stalin,  in  his  classic  treatise  on  "Strategy  and 


Tactics,"  taught  that,  from  time  to  time,  "conces- 
sions" may  have  to  be  made  "in  order  to  buy  off  a 
powerful  enemy  and  gain  a  respite."  He  went  on 
to  explain  the  necessity  of  maneuvering  with  a 
"view  to  effecting  a  proper  retreat  when  the  en- 
emy is  strong.  .  .  .  The  object  of  this  strategy  is 
to  gain  time  and  to  accumulate  forces  in  order  later 
to  assume  the  offensive." 

Is  the  successor — or  should  I  say,  are  the  suc- 
cessors—following this  strategy  of  the  dead 
Stalin? 

Whatever  the  reason  and  purpose  of  present 
Soviet  moves,  the  fact  is  that  the  Communist 
leaders  seem  now  disposed  to  grant  some  things 
-which  they  formerly  denied. 

Last  February  22,  in  an  effort  to  probe  the 
mood  of  the  enemy  in  Korea,  we  quietly  proposed 
an  exchange  of  sick  and  wounded  prisoners  of  war.' 
Such  proposals  had  frequently  been  made  before, 
without  results.  This  time  a  result  seems  to  be  in 
the  making. 

I  should  perhaps  explain,  to  end  some  misunder- 
standing, that  while  under  the  agreement  made 
we  will  return  many  more  sick  and  wounded  pris- 
oners than  we  will  receive,  that  is  because  the  total 
number  of  prisoners  which  we  hold  is  many  times 
the  number  held  by  the  Communists.  The  ratio  of 
returning  sick  and  wounded  to  the  total  prisoners 
of  war  held  is  approximately  the  same  for  both 
sides,  with  a  slight  advantage  in  our  favor. 

It  also  now  appears  that  the  enemy  may  now 
want  an  armistice  in  Korea,  after  having  evaded 
it  for  nearly  2  years. 

In  other  respects  and  in  other  quarters  Com- 
munist leadership  is  making  concessions.  These 
are  all  still  minor  but  not  without  significance. 
They  suggested  to  us  that  the  time  had  come  to 
launch  a  true  peace  offensive.  That  President 
Eisenhower  has  done.  Soviet  leadership  is  now 
confronted  by  the  Eisenhower  tests.  Will  it  meet, 
one  by  one,  the  issues  with  which  President  Eisen- 
hower has  challenged  it  ?  If  so,  will  it  abolish  and 
abandon,  in  fact  as  well  as  in  name,  the  Comin- 
f  orm  through  which  it  endlessly  conspires  to  over- 
throw, from  within,  every  genuinely  free  govern- 
ment in  the  world  ?  We  await  the  deeds  which  wiU 
give  answer  to  these  questions.  We  profoundly 
hope  that  these  deeds  will,  in  fact,  end  a  black 
chapter  of  distrust  and  open  a  bright  new  chapter 
of  peace  and  good  will. 

°  lUd.,  Apr.  6,  1953,  p.  494. 


Apn\  27,    1953 


607 


The  New  Era 

Some  weeks  ago  when  I  was  at  the  United  Na- 
tions, I  said  that  the  Stalin  era  had  ended  and  that 
the  Eisenhower  era  had  begun,  bringing  with  it 
new  hope  for  all  mankind.®  Already  that  predic- 
tion is  in  process  of  confirmation.  President 
Eisenhower's  address  is  a  fact  which  will  inevitably 
influence  the  course  of  history.  Around  the  world 
peoples  and  governments  have  universally  wel- 
comed that  address.  In  all  the  capitals  of  the  free 
world,  press  and  radio  have  demonstrated  an  un- 
precedented spontaneous  support  for  the  Presi- 


'  Ibid.,  Mar.  23,  1953,  p.  430. 


dent's  call  for  a  world-wide  peace  offensive  and 
his  challenge  to  the  new  Soviet  leadership  to  back 
up  their  words  with  deeds.  That  response  is  not 
merely  because  of  the  words  the  President  used  but 
because  what  he  said  had  its  setting  in  a  90-day 
framework. 

I  do  not  attempt  to  read  the  future.  That  must 
always  remain  obscure  so  long  as  vast  power  is 
possessed  by  men  who  accept  no  guidance  from 
the  moral  law.  But  surely  our  duty  is  clear.  Those 
who  represent  a  Nation  with  the  tradition  and 
power  of  the  United  States  must  act  boldly  and 
strongly  for  what  they  believe  to  be  right.  The 
future  is  for  a  higher  verdict. 


Full  Truce  Talks  To  Reopen 
at  Panmunjom 


LETTER  FROM  GENERAL  HARRISON 
TO  GENERAL  NAM  II,  APRIL  17  > 

To  General  Nam  II,  Senior  Delegate,  Delegation 
of  the  Korean  People's  Army  and  the  Chinese 
People''s  Volunteers. 

1.  The  Commander  in  Chief  of  the  United  Na- 
tions Command  has  authorized  me  to  instruct  the 
United  Nations  Command  Liaison  Group  to  meet 
with  the  Liaison  Group  of  your  side  on  April  18 
or  as  soon  thereafter  as  is  agreeable  to  your  side, 
to  discuss  matters  incidental  to  reopening  plenary 
sessions  of  the  Armistice  Delegations  as  requested 
by  your  Liaison  Group  on  11  April,  1953. 

2.  The  United  Nations  Command  has  studied 
the  statement  of  the  official  position  of  your  side 
which  you  presented,^  but  does  not  find  the  ampli- 
fication of  details  regarding  the  statements  of 
Foreign  Minister  Chou  En-lai  and  Marshall  Kim 
U  Sung,  which  was  requested  in  General  Clark's 
letter  of  5  April,  1953.  However,  in  view  of  the 
agreement  by  your  commanders  in  their  letter  of 
1  April  to  the  proposal  advanced  in  General 
Clark's  letter  of  31  March,  it  is  assumed  that  you 
are  prepared  to  accept  Unc  proposals  or  make  a 
comjiarable  constructive  proposal   of  your  own 

'  On  Apr.  18  the  Communists  replied  to  General  Harri- 
son's letter,  and  liaison  officers  met  on  Apr.  19.  They 
agreed  to  reopen  plenary  sessions  on  Apr.  25. 

'  BuixETiN  of  Apr.  20,  1953,  p.  575. 

608 


which  would  constitute  a  valid  basis  for  resump- 
tion of  the  meetings. 

3.  With  reference  to  the  statements  of  Foreign 
Minister  Chou  En-lai  and  Marshall  Kim  U  Sung, 
the  Unc  would  consider  that  an  arrangement  such 
as  the  following  would  be  reasonable  and  con- 
structive and  could  lead  to  a  prompt  resolution  of 
the  problem  of  prisoners  of  war : 

(1)  That  the  neutral  state  be  a  nation  such  as 
Switzerland,  traditionally  recognized  as  appro- 
priate in  matters  of  this  kind ; 

(2)  That  in  the  interest  of  practicality,  pris- 
oners of  war  who  are  not  directly  repatriated  be 
released  to  the  custody  in  Korea  of  the  neutral 
state ; 

(3)  That  after  allowing  a  reasonable  time  such 
as  60  days  during  which  opportunity  has  been 
afforded  by  the  neutral  state  to  the  parties  con- 
cerned to  determine  the  attitudes  of  individuals 
in  its  custody  with  respect  to  their  status,  the 
neutral  state  M-ill  make  arrangements  for  the 
peaceable  disposition  of  those  remaining  in  its 
custody. 

4.  The  United  Nations  Command  is  of  the  opin- 
ion that  unless  the  meetings  of  the  full  delegations 
indicate  that  an  acceptable  agreement  will  be 
reached  in  a  reasonable  time,  it  will  be  advisable 
to  recess  the  meetings  again. 

William  K.  Harrison,  Jr.,  Lt.  Gen.  USA 

Senior  Delegate,  UNC  Delegation. 

Department  of  Slate   Butletin 


SUMMARY  OF  LIAISON  MEETING  OF  APRIL  11 

1.  Meeting  of  Senior  Liaison  Group  convened  at  1100 
hours  this  date.    Suhstance  of  record  follows : 

2.  UNO :  "I  have  a  statement  to  make.  Yesterday  you 
said  you  had  around  15  prisoners  of  war  of  other  national- 
ities, including  those  of  Turl^ey,  Canada,  Greece,  the 
Kctherlands,  etc.  You  also  said  you  were  checking  the 
figure  to  determine  the  breakdown  by  nationality.  Do 
you  have  this  breakdown  today?" 

3.  Communists:  "As  I  pointed  out  yesterday  to  your 
side,  I  will  give  you  the  figures  as  soon  as  our  checking 
is  finished.  I  propose  that  prior  to  signing  the  agreement 
the  interpreters  of  both  sides  check  the  drafts  we  are  to 
sign." 

4.  Unc  :  a.  "I  have  been  studying  the  figures  you  have 
furnished  which  indicate  the  approximate  number  of  sick 
and  injured  captured  personnel  you  intend  to  repatriate. 
I  believe  that  you  will  agree  that  medicine  is  not  an  exact 
science;  accordingly,  for  humanitarian  reasons,  I  again 
request  that  you  use  the  broadest  interpretation  of  the 
degree  of  sickness  in  determining  the  final  number  of 
captured  personnel  who  will  he  repatriated.  We  will 
do  the  same. 

6.  "We  have  prepared  our  copies  of  the  agreement  for 
repatriation  of  sick  and  injured  captured  personnel  for 
signature.  If  your  side  has  prepared  your  copies  of  the 
agreement,  I  agree  that  the  interpreters  check  the  various 
versions  and  that  we  recess  for  this  purpose  for  10 
minutes." 

5.  Communists:  a.  "As  I  have  pointed  out  before,  the 
estimated  figures  of  sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war 
furnished  by  our  side  are  the  result  of  serious  checking 
in  accordance  with  the  principle  which  our  side  has  con- 
sistently maintained,  that  is,  the  principle  of  repatriating 
all  sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war.  Our  side  considers 
that  there  should  be  no  further  dispute  about  this 
question. 


6.  "In  order  to  check  the  versions  of  the  agreement, 
Captain  Munchae  Su,  Nka,  and  Tuan  Lien  Chung,  Ccf, 
will  participate  in  this  work." 

6.  Unc  :  "I  appoint  Lt.  Underwood,  Captain  Lum,  and 
Lt.  Wu  for  our  side." 

7.  Communists:  "I  agree  to  your  proposal  to  recess  for 
10  minutes." 

(Meeting  recessed  at  1110  hours.  Meeting  reconvened 
at  1205  hours.) 

8.  Communists:  "Prior  to  signing  of  both  sides,  I  want 
to  make  a  statement  as  follows : 

a.  "Both  sides  have  reached  agreement  on  the  exchange 
of  sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war  during  the  period 
of  hostilities  in  accordance  with  the  principles  of  Article 
10  of  the  Geneva  Convention  relative  to  the  treatment  of 
prisoners  of  war.  Our  side  has  consistently  stood  for 
and  will  immediately  carry  out  the  repatriation  in  toto 
of  sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war  held  in  our  custody. 
Your  side  has  stated  that  you  will  invoke  the  provisions 
of  paragraph  3  of  Article  109  of  the  Geneva  Convention 
and  repatriate  only  a  part  of  the  sick  and  injured  prisoners 
of  war  held  in  your  custody. 

b.  "In  this  connection  our  side  has  pointed  out  that 
the  provisions  of  paragraph  3  of  Article  109  of  the  Geneva 
Convention  can  by  no  means  be  used  as  a  pretext  for 
employing  coercive  means  to  obstruct  the  repatriation  of 
sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war  who  are  willing  to 
return  to  our  side  during  the  period  of  hostilities. 

c.  "Now  our  side  must  state  again  that  our  side  reserves 
the  right  to  request  that  the  sick  and  injured  captured  per- 
sonnel of  our  side  not  repatriated  this  time  be  handed 
over  to  a  neutral  state  so  as  to  secure  a  just  solution 
to  the  question  of  their  repatriation  after  an  armistice. 

d.  "Furthermore,  our  side  proposes  that  the  liaison 
group  meetings  shall  be  continued  after  the  signing.  We 
have  other  matters  to  bring  up  at  the  meeting. 

e.  "Then,  I  propose  to  begin  to  sign." 

9.  Unc:  "I  agree."  (Actual  signing  begins  at  1208  and 
is  completed  at  1210  and  one  half  hours.)  ' 

10.  Unc;  "I  have  a  statement  to  make. 

a.  "We  are  ready  to  start  the  actual  repatriation  at 
Panmunjom  of  the  sick  and  wounded  captured  personnel 
held  in  our  custody  on  72  hours  notice.  Can  you  tell  me 
when  you  will  be  able  to  start  repatriating  our  captured 
personnel? 

6.  "I  agree  to  the  continuation  of  the  liaison  group 
officers'  meeting.  I  recommend  that  we  recess  now.  I 
will  be  ready  to  meet  with  you  again  at  any  time  you 
desire." 

11.  Communists:  a.  "As  to  the  question  raised  by  yotir 
side.  I  will  answer  tomorrow. 

6.  "Now  I  would  like  to  raise  a  question  concerning  the 
resumption  of  the  plenary  session  of  the  delegations  of 
both  sides.  In  the  letter  ot  March  28  addressed  to  your 
commander '  our  commanders  liave  already  pointed  out 
that  the  reasonable  settlement  of  the  question  of  exchang- 
ing sick  and  injured  prisoners  of  war  of  both  sides  during 
the  period  of  hostilities  should  be  made  to  lead  to  the 
smooth  settlement  of  the  entire  question  of  prisoners  of 
war.  Such  a  view  has  already  been  agreed  to  by  your 
commander.  Now,  inasmuch  as  both  sides  have  signed 
the  agreement  for  the  repatriation  of  sick  and  injured 
captured  personnel  and  our  side  has  in  addition  put  forth 
a  new  proposal  for  settling  the  entire  question  of  repatria- 
tion of  prisoners  of  war,  and  has  given  a  full  exiilanation 
of  this  proposal,  our  side  considers  that  the  plenary  ses- 
sion of  the  delegations  of  both  sides  should  be  resumed 
immediately  to  discuss  and  settle  the  entire  question  of 
prisoners  of  war  so  as  to  realize  an  armistice  in  Korea. 
I  would  like  to  know  the  views  of  your  side  on  the  date 
of  resuming  the  plenary  session." 

12.  Unc  :  "I  have  noted  your  statement  and  will  Inform 
my  superiors. 


'  For  text  of  the  agreement,  see  ibid.,  p.  576. 
*  Ibid.,  Apr.  6,  1953,  p.  494. 


April  27,  1953 


609 


a.  "I  propose  that  we  recess  now  and  I  will  notify  you 
through  liaison  officers  when  we  are  ready  to  meet  again 
to  give  you  our  answer. 

6.  "I  suggest  that  the  staff  officers  meet  at  1345  to  con- 
tinue their  work." 

i:^.  Communints:  a.  "Our  side  holds  that  both  .sides 
should  immediately  discuss  and  decide  on  the  date  for  re- 
suming the  plenary  sessions  of  the  delegations.  Since 
your  side  has  proposed  a  recess  to  consider  it  we  would 
not  insist,  hut  our  side  still  hopes  that  the  liaison  groups' 
meeting  should  be  resumed  within  one  (1)  or  two  (2) 
days  to  discuss  and  decide  on  the  date  for  resuming  the 
plenary  sessions. 

6.  "I  agree  to  your  proposal  that  the  staff  officers'  meet- 
ing be  resumed." 

14.  UNO ;  "We  have  noted  your  statement.  We  agree  to 
recess." 

15.  Meeting 'adjourned  at  1222  hours. 

Technical  Assistance  to  Iraq 
For  Land  Development  Program 

Press  release  187  dated  April  10 

Under  an  agreement  signed  at  Baghdad  on 
April  7,  the  U.S.  Technical  Cooperation  Mission 
in  Iraq  will  provide  technical  assistance  to  the 
Government  of  Iraq  in  carrying  out  its  vast  "Miri 
Sirf "  land  development  and  resettlement  program. 

The  Miri  Sirf  (state-owned  lands)  of  Iraq  in- 
volve about  19  million  acres,  about  two-thirds  of 
which  are  considered  to  be  capable  of  agricultural 
use  with  some  degree  of  development.  There  are 
more  than  2  million  landless  farmers  in  Iraq, 
tenants  and  peasants  of  large  landholders,  pres- 
ently averaging  $200  or  less  per  family  per  year 
in  income. 

About  3  years  ago,  the  Government  of  Iraq 
enacted  legislation  providing  for  the  division  of 
state-owned  lands  into  family-size  farms,  pro- 
viding for  irrigation  water  and  other  types  of 
assistance  needed  to  develop  the  lands  for  agricul- 
ture, and  for  opening  them  up  for  settlement  by 
peasant  families. 

At  present  there  are  three  projects  in  operation, 
involving  some  200,000  acres  and  1,600  families. 
Other  projects  in  various  stages  of  development 
involve  well  over  a  million  acres  and  are  planned 
to  accommodate  about  10,000  families.  The 
annual  income  of  farmers  already  settled  averages 
two  to  three  times  their  former  incomes,  mainly 
as  a  result  of  being  able  to  retain  the  proceeds  of 
their  labor. 

The  Miri  Sirf  program  holds  great  significance, 
as  one  of  the  most  important  and  largest-scale 
efforts  by  a  Near  Eastern  government  to  encour- 
age and  assist  peasants  to  become  owner-operators 
of  family-sized  farms.  A  considerable  amount 
of  Iraq's  oil  revenues  are  being  devoted  to  the 
development  of  the  lands,  providing  community 
facilities,  building  roads,  giving  financial  assist- 
ance and  guidance  to  the  farmers,  providing 
health  services,  schools,  water  supplies,  and  the 
like.     The  program  is  considered  by  the  Govern- 

610 


nient  of  Iraq  to  be  of  great  significance  in  its 
social  and  economic  development  and  in  improving 
the  living  conditions  of  its  people. 

A  major  difficulty  in  carrying  out  this  vast  pro- 
gram lias  been  the  general  scarcity  of  technicians 
in  Iraq.  Tlie  project  involves  enormous  prob- 
lems—lands must  be  surveyed  and  classified 
according  to  their  agricultural  capabilities;  soil 
surveys  must  be  made;  irrigation  works  must  be 
planned  and  constructed;  peasant  farmers  must 
be  given  assistance  in  farm  planning  and  man- 
agement through  the  first  critical  years  of  inde- 
pendent operation ;  credit  facilities  must  be  offered 
with  some  supervision  of  loans;  schools  must  be 
set  up  and  provided  with  teachers;  health  clinics 
must  be  established  and  manned;  guidance  must 
be  given  in  the  formation  and  operation  of  coop- 
eratives; instruction  in  improved  methods  of 
farming  is  needed  by  most  of  the  settlers;  malaria 
control  is  necessary  in  many  sections;  and  so  on. 
The  small  staff  of  specialists  in  the  Ministry  of 
Agriculture,  which  administers  the  program,  and 
the  Ministries  of  Education  and  Health  which 
are  assisting  with  it,  are  spread  thinly  over  the 
huge  program,  which  will  reach  into  almost  every 
part  of  Iraq. 

Under  the  new  agi-eement,  the  Technical  Co- 
operation Administration  (which  administers  the 
technical  cooperation  program)  will  assist  in 
planning  the  program,  will  lielp  provide  technical 
advice,  will  help  train  Iraqi  technicians,  will  assist 
with  some  of  the  research  and  survey  work,  and 
will  provide  some  demonstrational  equipment  and 
supplies  as  needed  to  teach  improved  methods. 

The  agreement  does  not  provide  for  any  addi- 
tional allocation  of  funds  or  additional  American 
personnel,  although  future  project  agreements 
may  provide  for  supplies,  equipment,  and  possibly 
additional  personnel. 

The  technical  cooperation  program  in  Iraq  is 
carried  out  under  a  general  agreement  for  tech- 
nical cooperation  between  the  Government  of  Iraq 
and  the  United  States,  which  was  signed  on  April 
10,  1951.'  Cooperative  activities  are  now  under 
way  in  the  fields  of  agriculture,  water  resources, 
education,  industrial  development,  highway 
transportation,  health  and  sanitation,  and  social 
affairs. 


MSA  Grant  to  Yugoslavia 

The  Mutual  Security  Agency  (Msa)  on  April  6 
announced  a  special  grant  of  $11  million  to 
Yugoslavia  for  the  current  fiscal  year. 

This  sum,  like  a  similar  grant  of  $20  million 
announced  in  January,^  has  been  made  to  offset 
the  results  of  last  year's  disastrous  drought  by  pro- 

'  Btn.LETiN  of  Apr.  23,  1951,  p.  653. 
'  Bulletin  of  Jan.  26, 1953,  p.  135. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


viding   funds  for  the  purchase  of  foodstuffs — 
principally,  corn,  wheat,  lard,  and  sugar- 

The  new  grant  brings  to  $109,000,000  the  total 
of  U.S.  aid  in  defense-support  funds  to  Yugo- 
slavia during  the  current  fiscal  year.  In  addition 
to  the  $31  million  for  drought  relief,  Yugoslavia 
is  receiving  $78  million  from  Msa  as  part  of  a 
$99  million  tripartite-aid  program  to  which  the 
United  Kingdom  and  France  are  also  contributing. 
The  tripartite  program  is  designed  to  assist 
Yugoslavia  in  maintaining  its  defense  effort. 


Libby  Dam  and  Reservoir 

Press  release  190  dated  April  11 

The  following  letter  was  sent  by  Secretary 
Dulles  to  the  International  Joint  Commission — 
United  States  and  Canada,  regarding  the  applica- 
tion by  the  Government  of  the  United  States  for 
the  construction  and  operation  of  Libby  Dam  and 
Reservoir,  filed  with  the  Commission  on  January 
12,1951: 

April  8,  1953 

The  International  Joint  Commission, 

Washington,  D.  C,  United  States  of  America;  and 
Ottawa,  Ontario,  Dominion  of  Canada. 

SiBS: 

Reference  Is  made  to  the  Application  dated  January  12, 
1951  filed  by  the  Government  of  the  United  States  with 
the  International  Joint  Commission  for  approval  of  the 
construction  and  operation  of  a  dam  and  reservoir  re- 
ferred to  as  "Libby  Dam"  on  the  Kootenai  Kiver  near 
Libby,  Montana. 

Consideration  has  been  given  by  the  Chief  of  Engineers 
of  the  Department  of  the  Army  to  the  advisability  of  the 
withdrawal  of  the  Application  in  order  that  examination 
might  be  made  with  respect  to  certain  domestic  questions 
as  selection  of  the  axis  for  the  dam,  relocations  and 
related  matters  that  could  be  dealt  with  in  accordance 
with  regularly  established  procedures,  rather  than  inter- 
mingled with  investigation  of  the  international  aspects 
of  the  case. 

In  view  of  these  developments  you  are  advised  that 
the  Government  of  the  United  States,  in  accordance  with 
a  request  of  the  Secretary  of  the  Army,  hereby  withdraws 
the  Application  for  the  approval  of  the  Libby  Dam  project 
effective  as  of  this  date. 


Very  truly  yours, 


John  Fosteb  Dulles 

Secretary  of  State 


Specified  Exemption  Laws 
for  Escapee  Program 

EXECUTIVE     ORDER' 

By  virtue  of  the  authority  vested  in  me  by  section  532 
of  the  Mutual  Security  Act  of  1951,  as  added  by  section  7 
(m)  of  the  Mutual  Security  Act  of  1952  (Public  Law  400, 
approved  June  20,  1952,  66  Stat.  146),  it  is  hereby  deter- 
mined that  the  performance  of  functions  with  respect 
to  the  escapee  program,  authorized  by  the  Mutual  Security 
Act  of  1951,  as  amended,  and  administered  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  State,  without  regard  to  the  three  following- 
designated  provisions  of  law  will  further  the  purposes 
of  the  said  Mutual  Security  Act  of  1951,  as  amended : 

1.  Section  3648  of  the  Revised  Statutes,  as  amended, 
60  Stat.  809  (31  U.  S.  C.  529). 

2.  Section  305  of  the  Federal  Property  and  Administra- 
tive Services  Act  of  1949,  approved  June  30,  1949,  ch. 
288,  63  Stat.  396  (41  U.  S.  C.  255). 

3.  Section  3709  of  the  Revised  Statutes,  as  amended 
(41  U.  S.  C.  5). 

This  order  supersedes  Executive  Order  No.  10410  of 
November  14,  1952,'  entitled  "Specification  of  Laws  from 
which  the  Escai^ee  Program  Administered  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  State  Shall  be  Eiempt." 


DWIGHT  D.  EllSENHOWEB 


The  White  House, 
April  n,  1953. 


Upon  receipt  of  the  letter  the  Commission  has 
taken  action  in  accordance  therewith. 


U.  S.  Interest  in  Stability 
of  Japan's  Economy 

The  folio-wing  statement  loas  made  on  April  15 
by  Michael  J.  McDei^iott,  Special  Assistant  for 
Press  Relations: 

The  future  stability  of  the  Japanese  economy 
is,  of  course,  of  great  concern  to  the  United  States, 
which  is  giving  a  great  deal  of  thought  to  this 
question.  In  recent  years  Japan's  balance-of- 
payments  position  has  been  largely  supported  by 
U.S.  expenditures  arising  from  hostilities  in 
Korea,  the  maintenance  of  U.S.  forces  in  Japan, 
and  various  U.S.  mutual-assistance  programs  for 
the  Far  East.  The  Department  believes  that 
total  U.S.  expenditures  in  Japan  will  not  be 
sharply  reduced  but  will  remain  at  a  relatively 
high  level  for  at  least  the  next  2  years.  However, 
if  a  serious  situation  were  ever  to  develop  in  the 
Japanese  economy,  the  Department  is  sure  that 
the  U.S.  officials  would  want  to  sit  down  together 
with  Japanese  representatives  to  consider  ways 
in  which  this  Government  could  help. 

'  10446,  18  Fed.  Reg.  2209. 

'  Bulletin  of  Dec.  8,  1952,  p.  909. 


April  27,   J  953 


611 


The  Soviet  Germ  Warfare  Campaign:  A  Case  History 


Statements  hy  Ernest  A.  Gross 

U.  S.  Representative  to  the  General  Assembly ' 


U.S./U.N.  press  release  dated  March  27 

I  should  like  to  explain  why  the  United  States 
requested  the  General  Assembly  to  consider  as  part 
of  its  agenda  the  item  which  has  now  been  reached : 
"The  Question  of  an  Impartial  Investigation  of  the 
Charge  of  Use  by  the  United  Nations  Forces  of 
Bacteriological    Warfare."     My    Government    is 
asking  the  General  Assembly  to  create  and  to 
supervise    an    impartial    investigation    of    these 
charges  which  the  Soviet  representative  in  the 
Security  Council  has  called  "a  serious  interna- 
tional accusation  against  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment."   In  fact,  the  target  of  these  charges  is 
no  less  a  body  than  the  United  Nations  itself!    If 
this  Organization  is  worthy  of  our  support  and  of 
our  confidence,  then  it  must  see  these  charges  for 
what  they  are  and  see  that  they  are  weighed  and 
set  at  rest.     What  could  be  a  more  fundamental 
revolt  against  the  purpose  of  the  Charter  to  de- 
velop friendly  relations  among  nations  than  the 
repeated  charge  of  germ  warfare  ? 

In  attacking  the  United  Nations  itself,  they  seek 
to  undermine  the  collective  effort  of  the  U.N. 
forces  in  meeting  aggression  in  Korea.  We  can- 
not ignore  an  attack  of  this  nature  upon  the 
character  of  the  men  who  are  giving  their  lives 
for  the  free  world  in  this  collective  effort. 

While  the  Chinese  and  North  Korean  people 
fight  and  die  in  their  aggressive  war  in  Korea,  the 
Soviet  Union  furnishes  supplies  and  lies. 

This  false  and  malicious  campaign,  this  "serious 
international  accusation,"  is  designed  and  in- 
tended to  spread  hatred,  division,  and  suspicion  in 
the  minds  of  men.  It  is  designed  to  increase  the 
tensions  in  the  world.  This  being  the  inevitable 
result  of  the  Soviet  campaign  of  lies  and  hatred 
the  question  arises  whether  it  is  the  considered' 
purpose  of  the  Soviet  Government  thus  to  under- 

'  Made  on  Mar.  27  and  Apr.  8  in  Committee  I  (Political 
and  Security). 

612 


mine  and  destroy  the  very  foundation  of  interna- 
tional good  will  and  cooperation.  If  this  indeed 
is  the  considered  purpose  of  the  new  Soviet  leader- 
ship, how  are  we  to  appraise  their  professions  of 
peace  ?  How  can  we  achieve  a  peaceful  settlement 
of  outstanding  issues  when  one  side  continues  to 
spread  charges  that  are  false,  known  to  be  false, 
and  which  it  has  never  been  willing  to  put  to  the 
proof  ? 

This  campaign  of  international  communism 
must  not  be  ignored.  Its  venom  is  intended  to 
make  each  man  fear  his  neighbor  just  as  inter- 
national communism  would  have  each  nation  of 
the  free  world  suspect  its  neighbor  and  so  foster 
the  tension  upon  which  Soviet  imperialism  thrives. 
Quite  clearly,  one  specific  objective  is  to  isolate 
the  free  M'orld  from  the  United  States  by  attempt- 
ing to  single  out  my  Government  for  special  con- 
demnation. That  is  why  the  people  of  the  free 
world  should  for  the  sake  of  their  own  security 
look  long  and  hard  at  the  facts. 


How  the  Charges  Have  Survived 

But  how,  one  may  ask,  can  these  vicious  charges 
live— how  can  they  be  repeated  when  in  the  United 
Nations,  and  in  the  free  world  at  least,  the  truth 
IS  there  for  any  man  to  see  and  to  hear  if  he  will 
seek  It  out  ?  We  must  first  of  all  look  at  just  how 
these  charges  have  been  able  to  survive. 

Since  March  of  1952  until  today,  an  impartial 
investigation  of  the  charge  of  bacteriological  war- 
fare has  been  offered  over  and  over  again  by  the 
United  Nations,  by  the  World  Health  Organiza- 
tion, and  by  the  International  Committee  of  Red 
Cross  Societies.  It  has  been  offered  also  by  my 
own  Government  within  and  without  the  United 
Nations  just  as  it  is  put  forward  by  my  own 
Government  here  today. 

There  has  been  no  response  from  the  Soviet 
Union,  the  Chinese  Communist  regime,  and  the 
North  Korean  authorities  except  on  one  occasion. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


It  is  not  part  of  their  plan  to  respond.  It  is  their 
plan  to  lie  and  then  hide  from  an  impartial  in- 
vestigation. Their  tactic  of  "lie  and  hide  is 
cowardly— but  it  is  a  calculated  cowardice. 

The  one  response  from  the  Soviet  Union  to  tne 
decision  of  the  Security  Council  to  investigate 
what  the  Soviet  representative  himself  called  a 
serious  international  accusation"  was  a  Soviet  veto. 
That  is  not  a  response  which  is  open  to  the  Soviet 
representative  in  this  forum. 

We  must  see  this  campaign  for  what  it  is.  it  is 
the  technique  of  the  big  lie.  Let  me  briefly  trace 
its  history.  No  one  describes  it  better  than  Hitler 
when,  writing  in  Mein  Kampf,  he  said : 

In  the  size  of  the  lie,  there  is  always  contained  a  certain 
factor  of  credibility  .  .  .  [The  masses]  ^lU  more 
easily  fall  victims  to  a  great  lie  than  to  a  small  one 
since  they  themselves  perhaps  also  lie  sometimes  in  1  ttle 
lings  b'ft  would  be  too  much  ashamed  of  too  great  Ues^ 
Thus,  such  an  untruth  will  not  enter  their  heads  and 
therefore  they  will  be  unable  to  believe  in  the  possibility 
of  the  enormous  impudence,  of  the  most  infamous  dis- 
tortions, in  others. 

But  it  was  Stalin  himself  who  invented  the  bac- 
teriological warfare  lie.  Back  on  January  i,  ld66, 
in  a  statement  to  the  Joint  Plenum  of  the  Central 
Committee  and  Central  Control  Commission  of  the 
Communist  Party  of  the  Soviet  Union,  he  attacked 
certain  resistance  elements  of  the  Soviet  popula- 
tion which,  he  said : 

Organize  wrecliing  activities  in  the  collective  and  state 
farms,  and  some  of  them,  including  certain  Professors, 
go  to  such  lengths  in  their  zeal  for  wrecking  as  to  inject 
the  germs  of  plague  and  anthrax  into  cattle  on  the 
collective  farms,  help  spread  meningitis  among  horses, 
etc. 

In  the  Purge  Trials  of  1937  and  1938,  with  which 
Mr.  Vyshinsky  is  not  unfamiliar,  again  we  hnd 
the  bacteriological  warfare  lie.  One  defendant 
"confessed"  to  manufacturing  virulent  bacteria  in 
three  separate  factories  in  order  to  destroy  herds 
of  Soviet  swine.  Another  defendant  "confessed 
that  he  had  connived  with  Japanese  intelligence 
to  infect  the  Red  army  with  "highly  virulent 
bacilli"  in  the  event  of  war. 

Global  Organization  of  the  Campaign 

I  come  now  to  the  second  stage  of  the  case  his- 
tory of  the  lie.  The  campaign  charging  germ 
warfare  in  Korea  was  launched  on  February  21, 
1952  It  has  been  with  us  ever  since.  It  is  a  long- 
term  affair  and  fully  organized  on  a  global  basis. 
From  Moscow  the  campaign  is  directed,  from 
Peiping  and  other  Communist  capitals  it  is  co- 
ordinated. By  all  the  Communist  and  fellow- 
traveler  communication  media  and  apparatus  it  is 
disseminated.  The  division  of  labor  is  clear-cut. 
Eaw  material  flows  from  Moscow  and  Peipmg. 
By  that,  I  mean  the  so-called  documentation,  an- 
nouncements of  raids,  protests,  etc.  The  eye- 
witness evidence"  is  provided  by  the  Chinese  Com- 
munists and  the  North  Koreans.    It  is  they  who 

Apr//  27,  7953 

250917—53 8 


issue  the  initial  protests.  The  Soviet  Government, 
in  addition  to  exercising  primary  responsibility 
for  coordination  of  the  worldwide  big  lie  eflorts, 
bolsters  the  so-called  "evidence"  with  its  own 
peculiar  interpretations  of  evidence  and  state- 
ments, arranges  for  satellite  and  international 
front  organization  protests,  and  conducts  the  big 
lie  campaign  in  the  United  Nations. 

The  Communist-front  World  Peace  Council 
leads  most  of  the  protest  movements  and  is  the 
focal  point  for  various  groups  who  call  themselves 
investigatory  commissions  and  make  reports  on 
tHf*  cli^rffGS. 

You  will  undoubtedly  soon  hear  from  the  lips 
of  the  Soviet  representative  the  latest  product  of 
this  campaign.  It  has  been  continued  regularly 
in  the  columns  of  the  Soviet  Government  press. 
For  example,  as  recently  as  March  16  a  headline 
appeared  in  Pravda:  "American  Aggressors  Con- 
tinue Bacteriological  Warfare  in  Korea.  ihe 
story  goes  on  to  charge  that  American  planes  have 
recently  dropped  16  types  of  insects  m  various 
villages  in  Korea.  ,  u    i.-u 

Let  me  now  turn  to  certain  devices  used  by  tne 
Communists  in  building  up  and  spreading  the  lie. 
The  Communists  have  repeatedly  employed  Com- 
munist-controlled "investigations,"  and  they  have 
resorted  to  extorted  confessions.  They  have  done 
this  in  an  attempt  to  provide  an  ostensibly  scien- 
tific and  legal  basis  for  their  false  charges. 

The  Communists  have  staged  three  so-called 
investigations : 

1.  On  March  13,  1952,  Peiping  announced  the 
formation  of  a  so-called  "Investigation  Commis- 
sion." This  was  carefully  selected  from  among 
Chinese  Communists  to  insure  its  partiality.  Be- 
fore it  began  its  work,  its  chairman  amiounced 
that  its  purpose  was  "to  gather  the  various  crim- 
inal facts  on  bacteriological  warfare  waged  by 
the  American  imperialists." 

2.  Another  so-called  investigation  was  staged 
by  a  committee  of  the  Communist  front— Inter- 
national Association  of  Democratic  Lawyers.  Ac- 
cording to  Pravda,  on  March  4,  1952,  this  group 
was  sent  out  "in  order  to  investigate  and  establish 
the  crimes  conmiitted  by  the  interventionists  in 
Korea,  in  violation  of  all  international  agree- 
ments." The  Commission  was  made  up  of  cur- 
rently faithful  followers  of  the  party  line.  Its 
chairman,  Brandweiner,  was  also  a  former  Nazi. 

3.  Last  September,  the  Chinese  Communists 
published  a  lengthy  report  of  the  Communist- 
sponsored  "International  Scientific  Commission 
for  the  Investigation  of  Facts  Concerning  Bac- 
teriological Warfare  in  Korea  and  China."  This 
group  of  so-called  investigators  was  organized  by 
a  member  of  the  Chinese  Communists'  Peace  Com- 
mittee. It  was  composed  of  Communists  or 
Communist  sympathizers.  The  only  member  pro- 
fessionally qualified  as  a  scientist  for  the  subject 
supposedly  under  investigation  was  a  Soviet  epi- 
demiologist.   Dr.    M.    M.    Zhukov-Verezhinikov 

613 


(U.S.S.R. ) ,  Vice-President  of  the  Soviet  Academy 
of  Medicine.  In  a  speech  carried  by  Soviet  news- 
papers on  March  14,  1952  (months  before  the  in- 
vestigation), he  had  ah-eady  announced  his 
judgment: 

The  American  imperialists  have  perpetrated  a  new 
crime.  They  have  carried  out  a  bacteriological  attack  on 
the  Korean  Peoples  Democratic  Republic  and  on  the  Chi- 
nese Peoples  llepublic. 

This  supposedly  scientific  body  was  not  only 
composed  of  members  who  had  formed  their  judg- 
ments before  going  to  China,  but  the  Commission 
itself  did  not  even  bother  to  examine  the  so-called 
evidence  of  bacteriological  warfare  on  the  spot. 
For  example,  Dr.  Andrea  Andreen  stated  upon  her 
return  to  bweden  in  September  1952 : 

We  felt  so  sure  of  the  integrity  of  our  Chinese  hosts 
that  we  entirely  trusted  statements  which  they  made  re- 
garding American  use  of  germ  warfare.  The  scientific 
foundation  of  the  Commission's  work  consisted  of  the  fact 
that  the  delegates  implicitly  believed  the  Chinese  and 
North  Korean  accusations  and  evidence. 

"Confessions"  in  Communist  Statecraft 

We  all  know  that  confessions  play  an  important 
part  in  the  statecraft  of  Communist  countries. 
From  the  earliest  purge  trials  to  the  present  day, 
the  Communists  have  developed  methods  for 
breaking  the  strongest  human  spirit  and  com- 
pelling innocent  people  to  confess  to  any  tale  which 
the  state  authorities  may  require. 

The  techniques  consist  primarily  of  prolonged 
deprivation  of  sleep  which  in  time  exerts  a  toxic 
effect  similar  to  drugs,  spinal  injection  of  truth 
serum,  and  enforced  maintenance  of  rigid  postures 
for  long  periods.  Psychological  methods  are  also 
used:  subjecting  the  prisoner  to  terrifying  mass 
denunciations ;  the  creation  of  a  sense  of  isolation 
and  the  futility  of  resistance  in  the  mind  of  the 
prisoner;  use  of  fellow  prisoners  as  stool  pigeons; 
alternation  of  severe  and  lenient  treatment ;  com- 
pelling the  prisoner  to  write  hundreds  of  pages  of 
self-disclosure;  and,  finally,  deceit  and  trickery. 
The  more  orthodox  method  of  beating  is  also  fre- 
quently used. 

I  have  looked  at  the  facts  of  the  specific  cases 
which  are  here  generalized,  and  I  admit  that  these 
tacts  shocked  me  so  that  I  have  not  felt  free  to 
put  them  before  this  Committee  in  detail.  I  will 
cite,  however,  one  of  the  least  shocking  examples : 
A  Belgian  priest.  Father  Schijns,  who  was  kept 
in  solitary  confinement  for  6  months  by  the  Chi- 
nese Communists  in  1951,  says: 

The  sleeplessness,  the  pain,  the  total  abandonment  and 
isolation,  and  the  headaches  brought  me  gradually  to  a 
state  of  comiilete  hallucination.  I  began,  entirely  awake 
and  not  dreaming,  to  see  spots  and  shadows  on  the  walls 
of  my  room  transformed  into  wild  beasts  and  war  scenes 
At  t'mes;^  I  found  myself  weeping  aimlessly  and  sense- 
lessly. The  psychological  effect  of  such  a  rigid  isoiation 
was  that  I,  Just  as  all  the  others  in  our  house,  finally  sat 
down  in  front  of  a  typewriter  and  began  to  write  down 
confessions  hundreds  of  pages  in  length.  I  took  the  hint 
to  recite  the  facts  about  everything  that  I  knew  and  did. 

614 


our  work,  our  cares,  our  activity.  Anyone  might  read  It 
It  was  all  patent  and  well-known.  I  had  only  to  leave  it 
to  my  Communist  masters  to  construe  misdeeds  from  these 
facts. 

I  turn  now  to  a  consideration  of  the  so-called 
confessions  extorted  by  their  Communist  captors 
of  A.merican  prisoners  of  war  in  their  hands.  It 
is  difficult  to  approach  this  question  without  a 
feeling  of  strong  emotion  and  resentment.  There 
of  course  can  be  no  doubt  that  a  captor,  hardened 
to  use  of  methods  such  as  I  have  described,  would 
not  hesitate  to  turn  these  helpless  men  into  tools 
for  their  propaganda  machine. 

Mr.  Vyshinsky  has  recently  circulated  to  the 
members  of  this  Committee  two  recent  alleged 
confessions  of  American  military  personnel.  He 
is  the  same  Mr.  Vyshinsky  who  stated  on  Novem- 
ber 10,  1952,  in  this  same  Committee: 

Under  conditions  of  war  imprisonment,  there  is  not  and 
cannot  be  the  most  minimum  conditions  for  the  free  ex- 
pression of  the  will  of  any  war  prisoner. 

These  so-called  confessions  are  false  in  their 
general  assertions  and  in  their  specific  allegations. 
They  are  of  course  in  no  event  entitled  to  credence. 
They  should  be  presumed  to  be  false  against  the 
background  of  the  circumstances  in  which  they  are 
extorted.  However,  we  need  not  rely  upon  a  mere 
presumption  of  their  falsity.  We  have  specific 
refutation. 

These  military  officers  have  allegedly  identified 
a  certain  directive  from  the  Joint  Chiefs  of  Staff 
of  the  United  States  which  is  supposed  to  have 
instituted  a  plan  for  bacteriological  warfare  in 
Korea.  They  have  allegedly  identified  certain 
military  personnel  who  are  said  to  have  partici- 
pated in  meetings  for  carrying  this  plan  into 
operation. 

There  was  no  such  directive,  and  there  were  no 
such  meetings. 

Statements  by  American  Military  Officers 

Mr.  Chairman,  I  read  to  this  Committee  a  state- 
ment by  Gen.  Omar  N.  Bradley,  Chairman  of  the 
Joint  Chiefs  of  Staff  of  the  United  States.  The 
statement  was  written  on  March  25.     I  quote : 

(1)  The  Joint  Chiefs  of  Staff  have  never  made  a  plan 
for  bacteriological  warfare  in  Korea. 

(2)  The  Joint  Chiefs  of  Staff  liave  never  sent  a  directive 
to  the  Commanding  General,  Far  East  Command,  or  any 
other  individual  in  the  Far  East,  by  any  means  directing 
the  initiation  of  bacteriological  warfare  in  Korea. 

(3)  The  Joint  Chiefs  of  Staff  cateirorically  deny  that 
any  military  forces  of  the  United  States  have  engaged  in 
bacteriological  warfare  in  that  area  including  contiguous 
Chinese  territory. 

Next,  Mr.  Chairman,  I  read  this  Committee  a 
.statement  by  Maj.  Gen.  C.  F.  Schilt,  who  was 
Commanding  General  of  the  First  Marine  Air- 
craft Wing  in  Korea  from  July  1951  to  April  1952. 
This  is  the  responsible  officer  who  commanded  the 
organization  which  has  been  alleged,  by  these 
latest  confessions,  to  have  dropped  germ  bombs 
in  Korea : 

Department  of  Sfate  Bulletin 


I  categorically  aflBrm  that  the  account  of  bacteriological 
warfare  activity  on  the  part  of  United  Nations  and/or 
United  States  forces  contained  therein  are  complete  fabri- 
cations. In  particular  the  activities  of  the  First  Marine 
Aircraft  Wing  which  were  a  matter  of  intimate  knowledge 
to  me  in  my  oflScial  capacity  at  no  time  participated  in 
bacteriological  warfare.  None  of  the  statements  on  the 
subject  attributed  to  me  are  true.  At  no  time  did  I  re- 
ceive or  issue  any  instruction  concerning  bacteriological 
warfare  nor  did  i  ever  attend  any  conferences  or  engage 
in  any  other  planning  activities  connected  with  this  sub- 
ject No  special  security  measures  were  ever  imposed 
upon  the  wing  or  any  of  its  units  and  during  all  my 
service  in  Korea  I  never  heard  of  the  alleged  code  word 
super  propaganda   (SUPROP). 

Next,  Mr.  Chairman,  I  read  this  Committee  a 
statement  by  Maj.  Gen.  Clayton  C.  Jerome  who 
replaced  INIajor  General  Schilt  as  Commanding 
General  of  the  First  Marine  Aircraft  Wing  and 
served  in  that  capacity  to  January  8,  1953 : 

It's  all  a  damn  lie,  and  I  would  like  to  go  up  to  the  U.N. 
and  tell  them  so  under  oath. 

I  categorically  deny  the  truthfulness  of  the  accusations 
contained  in  the  alleged  confessions  of  Col.  Schwable  and 
Major  Bley  that  United  Nations  and/or  U.  S.  Forces 
planned  or  participated  in  bacteriological  warfare.  As 
Commanaing  General  of  the  First  Marine  Aircraft  Wing 
during  the  period  11  April  1952  to  8  January  1953,  I  posi- 
tively state  that  no  orders  were  received  by  the  First 
Marine  Aircraft  Wing  or  issued  to  subordinate  units  of 
the  Wing  which  related  to  bacteriological  warfare.  There 
were  no  plans  for  bacteriological  warfare  prepared  by 
the  First  Marine  Aircraft  Wing.  The  allegations  that 
I  discussed  such  matters  with  the  5th  Air  Force  and 
conducted  conferences  within  the  First  Marine  Aircraft 
Wing  relating  to  bacteriological  warfare  are  completely 
false. 

Other  statements  in  the  two  alleged  confessions 
are  equally  false.  I  will  not  burden  the  Committee 
by  reading  the  sworn  statements  of  the  persons 
mentioned"  in  these  two  alleged  confessions.  I 
have  these  statements  here,  and  I  now  request  the 
Secretary-General  to  circulate  them  to  the  mem- 
bers of  the  United  Nations  for  their  inspection.^ 
In  the  greatest  detail,  persons,  places,  meetings, 
and  activities  referred  to  in  the  so-called  confes- 
sions are  denied  and  refuted.  The  "confessions" 
emerge  as  cleverly  forged  and  contrived  documents 
with  no  substance  whatever. 

I  have  described  the  nature  and  origins  of  this 
Soviet  plot.  The  whole  apparatus  of  a  police- 
state  system,  centering  in  the  Kremlin,  is  being 
used  to  manufacture  and  distribute  a  total  lie — 
false  in  all  its  parts,  both  general  and  particular. 
How  should  the  General  Assembly  meet  this 
assault  upon  the  United  Nations  and  upon  the 
effort  of  the  United  Nations  to  resist  aggression 
in  Korea? 

Repeated  offers  of  an  impartial  investigation  of 
the  charges  have  been  made  by  the  United  States, 
by  the  International  Committee  of  the  Red  Cross, 
and  by  the  U.N.  Security  Council  itself.  These 
offers  have  been  ignored,  rejected,  or  vetoed. 

'  U.N.  doc.  A/C.IA'.ST,  dated  Mar.  27. 
April  27,  1953 


How  the  U.N.  Should  Meet  the  Assault 

Despite  this  fact — or  indeed,  because  of  it — it 
seemed  to  us  fitting  to  submit  this  question  to  the 
General  Assembly.  It  is  the  U.N.  Charter  itself 
which  is  being  subverted  by  Soviet  actions,  and 
we  are  assembled  here  as  custodians  and  trustees 
of  the  Charter. 

I  have  introduced  a  resolution  on  this  matter, 
so  that  the  moral  weight  and  dignity  of  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  may  be  brought  to  bear.  This  does, 
after  all,  embody  the  collective  judgment  of  the 
world  community. 

We  propose,  along  with  all  the  other  nations 
whose  forces  are  engaged  in  repelling  aggression 
in  Korea,  that  the  General  Assembly  do  now  for- 
mally take  note  of  the  accusations  which  have  been 
made  and  repeatedly  denied  by  the  Unified  Com- 
mand. We  think  the  Assembly  should  record  the 
fact  that  offers  of  impartial  investigation  have 
been  rejected  by  the  very  persons  who  originate 
and  disseminate  the  false  charges. 

We  propose  that  the  General  Assembly  should 
now  call  upon  the  Governments  and  authorities 
concerned  to  cooperate  with  a  Commission  estab- 
lished by  the  Assembly  itself  to  conduct  an  im- 
partial investigation  of  the  charges  that  have  been 
made.  The  Commission  should  be  allowed  to 
travel  freely  throughout  such  areas  of  North  and 
South  Korea,  the  Chinese  mainland,  and  Japan, 
as  the  Commission  may  think  necessary  in  the 
performance  of  its  task.  It  should  have  freedom 
of  access  to  such  persons,  places,  and  documents  as 
it  considers  necessary.  And  it  should  be  free  to 
examine  any  witness,  including  prisoners  of  war. 
A  special  problem  is  presented  by  reason  of  the 
base  Communist  practice,  which  I  have  described, 
of  using  the  device  of  extorted  confessions.  We 
feel  there  is  a  right  way  to  deal  with  this  matter. 
The  General  Assembly  should  ask  the  Commu- 
nists whether  they  will  submit  the  so-called  con- 
fessions to  impartial  investigations. 

We  challenge  the  Communist  authorities  con- 
cerned to  permit  all  United  States  military  per- 
sonnel, whose  so-called  confessions  have  been  pub- 
lished, to  be  brought  to  a  neutral  area.  There  they 
should  be  given  a  fair  chance  to  tell  the  truth  to 
an  impartial  U.N.  Commission.  I  ask  that  they 
be  brought  to  an  area  in  some  country  which  is 
neither  a  participant  in  the  U.N.  Command  in 
Korea  nor  whose  Government  has  supported  or 
approved  the  action  of  the  aggressors  in  Korea. 
There  they  would  remain  under  the  responsibility 
and  custody  of  the  Commission  and  would  be 
interned  until  the  conclusion  of  hostilities  in  order 
to  preclude  fear  of  later  reprisals  by  their  Com- 
munist captors.  After  an  adequate  period  of  rest 
and  recuperation,  they  would  be  informed  of  the 
propaganda  use  which  has  been  made  of  their 
alleged  "confessions"  and  asked  by  the  Commis- 
sion to  verify  or  deny  the  facts  contained  therein. 

615 


It  is  for  the  Soviet  delegate  to  accept  this  offer, 
in  the  name  of  truth. 
We  await  his  reply. 

CHARGES  BY  THE  PEIPING  RADIO 

U.S. /U.N.  press  release  dated  April  8 

Several  days  ago,  in  introducing  the  subject  of 
this  debate,  the  U.S.  delegation  made  clear  what 
our  objective  was  and  what  it  has  been  from  the 
moment  when  these  false  charges  became  a  part 
of  the  established  Communist  propaganda  pol- 
icy. We  have  since  then  heard  statements  by  the 
Soviet  representative  and  by  several  of  the  mem- 
bers of  the  Soviet  bloc. 

One  of  the  points  which  has  been  stressed  in  all 
the  statements  made  by  the  Soviet  group,  al- 
though with  varying  degrees  of  emphasis,  has 
been  the  alleged  fault  of  this  Committee  in  failing 
to  invite  the  Chinese  Communist  regime  and  the 
North  Korean  authorities  to  attend  our  meetings 
for  the  purpose,  as  it  has  been  put  again  this  after- 
noon by  the  Polish  representative,  of  participating 
in  our  discussions. 

Mr.  Chairman,  the  question  has  been  asked  by 
other  speakers  before  me  and  I  think  it  only  appro- 
priate to  ask  again  what  purpose  would  be  served 
by  inviting  the  Chinese  and  the  North  Korean 
authorities  to  come  here  to  propagate  a  lie  ?  There 
are  not  two  sides  to  a  lie.  A  lie  is  an  empty  thing. 
It  has  only  one  side,  an  outside.  This  lie,  as  we 
have  demonstrated  by  our  highest  authorities,  by 
the  most  responsible  officials  of  the  U.S.  Govern- 
ment speaking  for  themselves  within  their  respon- 
sibility as  representatives  of  the  U.N.  Command 
in  Korea,  is  false  in  all  its  generalities  and  in  every 
particular. 

The  Chinese  Communists  and  the  North  Korean 
authorities  have  never  at  any  time  requested  or 
suggested  that  an  impartial  investigation  be  con- 
ducted into  the  grave  charges  which  they  have 
persisted  in  leveling  against  the  United  States  and 
the  United  Nations.  I  do  not  think  it  is  neces- 
sary to  speculate  concerning  the  nature  of  the 
propaganda  and  lying  testimony  which  these  au- 
thorities would  engage  in  if  invited  to  attend  our 
discussions. 

On  March  30,  and  I  must  note  as  a  matter  of 
tragic  irony  and  coincidence,  on  the  same  day 
when  Chou  En-lai  issued  a  statement  regarding 
the  prisoners  of  war  in  Korea,  on  that  same  day 
when  the  hopes  of  the  world  were  raised,  the 
Peiping  Radio  commented  upon  the  proposal 
which  I  laid  before  this  Committee  on  behalf  of 
the  16  cosponsors.  I  should  like  to  explain  to 
the  Committee  in  the  words  of  the  Peiping  broad- 
cast the  attitude  which  the  Chinese  Communist 
authorities  take  in  what  I  think  may  fairly  be 
characterized  as  a  desperate  attempt  to  evade  an 
impartial  investigation. 

616 


Speaking  before  the  Political  Committee  had 
before  it  tlie  proposed  composition  of  the  com- 
mittee of  investigation,  before  any  names  had 
been  suggested  for  inclusion  in  the  draft  resolu- 
tion, Peiping  Eadio  characterized  the  proposal 
that  the  General  Assembly  set  up  a  commission 
to  conduct  what  it  called  a  so-called  impartial 
investigation  and  a  commission  which  would  have 
free  access  to  areas  necessary  to  its  investigation, 
and  said  such  a  so-called  commission — and  I  point 
out  that  the  membership  of  the  Commission  had 
not  then  yet  been  suggested — that  such  a  so-called 
commission  could  more  suitably  be  termed  a  special 
detachment  of  the  United  States  intelligence  to 
collect  information  about  germ  warfare  waged 
by  the  American  Forces.  And  the  Peiping  Radio 
went  on  to  say  that  it  is  quite  obvious  tliat  the 
U.S.  Government,  which  is  still  continuing  bac- 
teriological warfare,  is  in  urgent  need  of  first- 
hand information  concerning  the  results  of  this 
warfare. 

This  is  the  manner  in  which  the  Peiping  Radio 
characterized  a  solemn  and  dignified  proposal  for 
the  creation  of  an  impartial  commission  and  at- 
tacked and  undermined  a  commission  whose  com- 
position had  not  even  at  that  point  been  suggested. 

With  regard  to  our  proposal,  which  is  contained 
in  this  draft  resolution,  to  turn  over  to  the  com- 
mission the  prisoners  of  war  who  are  alleged  to 
have  made  confessions,  the  Peiping  Radio  on  that 
same  day  characterized  this  proposal  as  a  des- 
perate attempt — to  use  their  language — to  get 
these  prisoners  of  war  handed  over  to  a  commis- 
sion which  is  in  the  exclusive  service  of  the  U.S. 
Government.  Again  I  remind  the  Committee  the 
members  of  the  commission  had  not  even  then 
been  named  or  proposed. 

The  Peiping  Radio  went  on  to  say  that  the 
"United  States  Gestapo" — to  use  their  language — 
could  then  employ  threat  and  persuasion  for  the 
so-called  repudiation  of  these  prisoners  of  war. 
In  other  words,  it  is  a  move  directed  toward  co- 
ercing them  to  repudiate  their  own  depositions. 
By  this  attempt  to  use  such  a  shameful  dodge, 
Peipmg  Radio  said,  to  get  a  repudiation  of  the 
confessions  made  by  the  captured  U.S.  Air  Force 
officers  the  U.S.  Government  fools  nobody.  On 
the  contrary,  it  only  proves  that  the  U.S.  Gov- 
ernment is  at  its  wits  end  and  can  find  no  way 
of  evading  the  grave  responsibility  for  using  bac- 
terial weapons. 

This  is  the  language  of  the  Chinese  Communist 
authorities  on  March  30.  Do  we  need  to  speculate 
further  concerning  the  nature  of  the  statements 
which  would  be  made  if  their  representatives  were 
invited  to  participate  in  our  deliberations? 

Mr.  Chairman,  what  the  U.S.  Government  has 
proposed  from  the  beginning  and  what  we  now 
urgently  continue  to  maintain  is  not  a  discussion, 
not  a  debate,  but  an  investigation.  Impartial 
experts  who  would  be  selected  by  the  commission 
proposed  in  this  resolution  would  work  with  mi- 

Departmenl  of  State  Bulletin 


ci'oscopes,  not  with  microphones.  This  is  not  a 
propaganda  maneuver.  This  is  an  honest  and 
practical  device  to  expose  charges  which  I  think 
all  the  world  knows  to  be  false. 

Reference  has  been  made  to  what  I  think  has 
been  called  the  moderate  tone  of  the  Soviet  repre- 
sentative in  dealing  with  this  subject  yesterday. 
Mr.  Chairman,  it  is  somewhat  startling  that  when 
the  Soviet  representative  whispers,  to  hear  the 
echoes  shout  back.  The  tone  which  we  have  heard 
from  other  spokesmen  has  not  been  as  moderate 
and  restrained  as  the  whispers  of  the  Soviet  repre- 
sentative. However,  we  feel  that  a  lie  is  just  as 
false  whether  it  is  whispered  or  shouted. 

In  an  attempt  to  evade  the  investigation — and 
this  repeats  a  performance  with  which  we  have 
become  familiar  and  which  we  saw  last  summer 
in  the  Security  Council — the  Soviet  representative 
and  his  louder  echoes  have  referred  to  the  Geneva 
Protocol  and  to  the  desirability  of  ratifying  the 
Geneva  Protocol. 

Mr.  Chairman,  whose  good  faith  is  on  trial 
here?  We  are  urging  an  impartial  investigation 
and  an  honest  method  which  we  Imow — and  say 
with  a  sense  of  responsibility — will  expose  a  lie. 
Now,  why  does  the  Soviet  representative  intro- 


duce the  subject  of  the  Geneva  Protocol?  It  has 
nothing  to  do  with  the  truth  or  the  falsity  of  the 
charges  of  germ  warfare.  It  is,  therefore,  an  eva- 
sion of  the  point  at  issue  here,  a  pretext  for  evad- 
ing our  suggestion  for  an  investigation.  The 
question  of  the  ratification  of  the  Geneva  Protocol 
relates  to  a  quite  different,  although  a  very  im- 
portant matter;  that  is,  what  is  the  most  practical, 
effective,  and  honest  method  of  eliminating  bac- 
teriological weapons  and  other  weapons  of  mass 
destruction  from  national  arsenals. 

The  Geneva  Protocol  does  not  meet  the  need  of 
the  present  difficult  world  for  security  against  the 
use  of  bacteriological  weapons.  The  protocol 
merely  collects  promises  not  to  use  poison  gas 
and  bacteriological  weapons  first.  If  every  mem- 
ber of  the  United  Nations  were  to  sign  the  Geneva 
Protocol  and  ratify  it  today,  the  Soviet  Govern- 
ment having  already  hurled  the  lie  about  the 
United  Nations  use  of  germ  warfare  in  Korea 
would  be  free  under  its  own  reservations  to  the 
Geneva  Protocol  to  use  germ  warfare  against  any 
U.N.  member.  There  is  no  security  in  such  an 
arrangement. 

The  Geneva  Protocol  permits  the  continued 
manufacture  and  stockpiling  of  bacteriological 


Draft   Resolution  on   Impartial   Investigation 
of  Germ  Warfare  Charges* 

U.N.  doc.  A/C.  1/L,  36/Rev.  2 
Adopted  April  8,  1953 

The  General  AsscmMy, 

Noting  that  accusations  have  been  made  by  cer- 
tain governments  and  autliorities  charfrfng  the  use 
of  bacteriological  warfare  by  United  Nations  forces, 
and  that  the  Unified  Command  for  Korea  has  re- 
peatedly denied  such  charges, 

Recallinf!  that  when  the  charges  were  first  made 
the  Unified  Command  for  Korea  requested  that  an 
impartial  inve.stigation  be  made  of  them. 

Noting  that  tlie  Central  People's  Government  of 
the  People's  Republic  of  China  and  the  North  Korean 
authorities  have  so  far  refused  to  accept  an  offer 
by  the  International  Committee  of  the  Ked  Cross 
to  carry  out  an  investigation, 

Noting  that  the  draft  resolution  submitted  in  the 
Security  Council  by  the  Government  of  the  United 
States  proposing  an  investigation  of  these  charges 
by  the  International  Committee  of  the  Red  Cross 
failed  to  carry  because  of  the  negative  vote  of  the 
Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics, 

Desiring  to  serve  the  interests  of  truth, 

1.  Resolves  that,  after  the  President  of  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  has  received  an  indication  from  all 
the  governments  and  authorities  concerned  of  their 
acceptance  of  the  investigation  proposed  in  this 
resolution,  a  Commission  composed  of  Brazil,  Egypt, 
Pakistan,  Sweden,  and  Uruguay  shall  be  set  up  and 
shall  carry  out  immediately  an  investigation  of  the 
charges  that  have  been  made ; 

2.  Calls  upon  the  governments  and  authorities 
concerned  to  enable  the  Commission  to  travel  freely 
throughout  such  areas  of  North  and  South  Korea, 
the  Chinese  mainland,  and  Japan  as  the  Commission 
may  deem  necessary  in  the  performance  of  its  task 


and  to  allow  the  Commission  freedom  of  access 
to  such  persons,  places  and  relevant  documents  as 
it  considers  necessary  for  the  fulfillment  of  its  task 
and  to  allow  it  to  examine  any  witness  Including 
prisoners  of  war  under  such  safeguards  and  con- 
ditions as  the  Commission  shall  determine :  all 
prisoners  of  war  who  are  alleged  to  have  made  con- 
fessions regarding  the  use  of  bacteriological  war- 
fare shall,  prior  to  examination  by  the  Commission, 
be  taken  to  a  neutral  area  and  remain  under  the 
responsibility  and  custody  of  the  Commission  until 
the  end  of  the  Korean  hostilities ; 

3.  Requests  the  President  of  the  General  As- 
sembly to  transmit  this  resolution  immediately  to 
the  governments  and  authorities  concerned  re- 
questing them  to  indicate  their  acceptance  of  the 
investigation  proposed  in  this  resolution ; 

4.  Requests  the  President  of  the  General  Assem- 
bly to  report  to  the  General  Assembly  at  the  earliest 
practicable  date  on  the  results  of  his  efforts ; 

5.  Directs  the  Commission,  when  set  up,  to  enlist 
the  aid  of  such  scientists  of  international  reputa- 
tion, especially  epidemiologists,  and  such  other 
experts  as  it  may  select ; 

6.  Directs  the  Commission,  after  acceptance  of 
the  investigation  proposed  In  this  resolution  by  aU 
the  governments  and  authorities  concerned,  to  re- 
port to  the  Members  of  the  General  Assembly 
through  the  Secretary-General  as  soon  as  possible 
and  no  later  than  1  September  1953 ; 

7.  Requests  the  Secretary-General  to  furnish  the 
Commission  with  the  necessary  staff  and  facilities. 

*Sponsored  hy  Australia,  Belgium,  Canada,  Co- 
lombia, Ethiopia,  France,  Greece,  Luxembourg, 
Netherlands,  New  Zealand,  Philippines,  Thailand, 
Turkey,  Union  of  South  Africa,  United  Kingdom, 
and  the  United  States;  adopted  by  Committee  I  on 
April  8  by  a  vote  of  52-5-3. 


April  27,   1953 


617 


wenpons.  It  does  not  provide  for  international 
control  to  prevent  facilities  for  waging  mass  germ 
warfare  from  becoming  a  part  of  the  armaments 
of  nations. 

U.S.  Proposal  on  Disarmament 

We  think,  and  we  have  advised  the  Disarma- 
ment Commission  of  our  view  in  this  regard  and 
this  view  has  been  supported,  that  the  Disarma- 
ment Commission  should  continue  its  work  for 
the  development  by  the  United  Nations  of  com- 
prehensive and  coordinated  plans  providing  for 
the  elimination  and  prohibition  of  all  major 
weapons,  including  bacteriological,  adaptable  to 
mass  destruction.'  That  is  what  the  General  As- 
sembly resolution  provides,  which  we  voted  on 
this  very  morning.*  Within  the  Disarmament 
Commission  we  have  repeatedly  stated  our  desire 
to  provide  for  effective,  honest  international  con- 
trol of  bacteriological  weapons.  We  have  pointed 
out  that  safeguards  must  be  devised  to  insure  the 
elimination  of  bacteriological  weapons,  their  fa- 
cilities and  appliances  for  their  production  and 
their  use.  We  regard  it  essential  that  there  be 
an  effective  and  continuous  system  of  disclosure 
and  verification  of  all  armed  forces  and  arma- 
ments, including  the  weapons  of  mass  destruction. 

This  is  our  program  laid  before  the  Disarma- 
ment Commission,  a  program  to  which  my  Gov- 
ernment is  pledged  and  dedicated  to  further  and 
to  develop,  we  hope,  to  a  successful  conclusion. 

It,  therefore,  seems  clear  to  my  Government  as 
we  come  close  to  a  vote  on  the  draft  resolution 
before  us  that  the  procedure  we  suggest  is  honest, 
that  the  commission  we  propose  is  fair,  and  that 
there  is  no  logical  or  sensible  reason  to  be  found 
in  evasions. 

I  challenge  the  Soviet  representative,  remind- 
ing him  that  these  charges  have  been  made  in 
Moscow,  have  been  disseminated  by  Moscow,  to 
state  whether  his  Government  is  prepared  to  sup- 
port an  impartial  investigation  of  the  charges 
which  the  Moscow  Eadio  and  the  Communist 
newspapers  of  the  Soviet  Union  have  propagated 
and  disseminated.  And  I  ask  him  whether  the 
countries  proposed  for  the  commission  to  conduct 
this  impartial  investigation — Brazil,  Egypt, 
Pakistan,  Sweden,  and  Uruguay — can  be  stigma- 
tized and  slandered? 

I  believe,  Mr.  Chairman,  that  we  should  proceed 
with  the  resolution.  I  am  confident  that  the  over- 
whelming majority  of  the  members  of  this  Com- 
mittee will  support  a  procedure  which  we  know 
will  result  in  an  exposure  of  an  infamous  lie. 


'  For  a  r^sum$  of  U.S.  proposals  on  disarmament,  see 
ibid.,  Mar.  30,  1953,  p.  477. 
*  Ibid.,  Apr.  20,  1953,  p.  584. 


Trygve  Lie's  Work  Praised; 
Welcome  Extended  to  his  Successor 

Statements  by  Henry  Cahot  Lodge,  Jr. 
U.S.  Representative  to  the  General  Assembly 

Tribute  to  Trygve  Lie 

U.S. /U.N.  press  release  dated  April  7 

On  behalf  of  the  Government  of  the  United 
States,  I  wish  to  express  appreciation  for  the  work 
of  the  retiring  Secretary-General,  Trygve  Lie.' 
Duriii"  his  more  than  7  years  of  service  to  the 
United  Nations  he  has  given  of  himself  unreserv- 
edly to  promote  the  ideals  of  the  Charter.  His 
difficult  task  he  has  carried  out  with  courage,  with 
energy,  and  with  devotion. 

Mr.  Lie  has  generally  been  regarded  as  a  symbol 
of  the  United  Nations.  The  Preparatory  Com- 
mission in  London  in  1945  prophesied  that  the 
United  Nations  could  not  prosper  nor  its  aims  be 
realized  without  the  active  and  steadfast  support 
of  the  peoples  of  the  world,  and  that  the  Secretary- 
General  more  than  anyone  else  would  stand  for 
the  United  Nations  as  a  whole  in  the  eyes  of  the 
world.  Mr.  Lie  has  recognized  the  responsibility 
that  this  concept  placed  upon  his  shoulders  and  he 
said,  himself,  some  years  later:  "The  office  I  hap- 
pen to  hold — the  office  of  Secretary-General — 
stands  for  the  hopes  for  peace  and  civilization 
that  are  bound  up  in  the  United  Nations." 

It  was  Mr.  Lie's  task  to  set  up  the  organization 
at  the  very  stai't  and  to  make  it  a  going  concern. 
His  was  the  task  of  establishing  uie  precedents 
which  might  guide  his  successors.  He  has  done 
this  in  a  manner  which  has  enhanced  the  dignity 
of  his  office.  He  has  not  failed  to  look  beyond 
the  immediate  problem  to  the  future  and  he  has 
taken  the  initiative  in  presenting  his  views  on 
long-range  planning  for  the  United  Nations. 

The  great  test  of  the  United  Nations  itself  came 
when  the  organization  was  faced  with  the  attack 
in  Korea.  The  issue  was  whether  the  organiza- 
tion itself  should  survive  or  should  perish. 
Within  15  hours  after  the  Secretary-General  was 
informed  that  a  conflict  appeared  to  have  broken 
out  in  Korea,  he  courageously  stated  his  views  to 
the  Security  Council.  Having  asked  for  a  report 
from  the  U.N.  Commission  in  Korea,  he  told  the 
Security  Council  on  June  25,  1950,  that  the  situa- 
tion was  in  his  view  a  serious  one  and  a  threat  to 
international  peace,  and  he  said :  "The  Security 
Council  is,  in  my  opinion,  competent  to  deal  with 
it.  I  consider  it  is  the  clear  duty  of  the  Security 
Council  to  take  steps  necessary  to  re-establish 
peace  in  that  area." 

The  7  years  of  Mr.  Lie's  Secretary-Generalship 
have  presented  him  with  the  problems  of  moving 

'  Dag  Hammarskjold  of  Sweden  was  elected  by  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  on  Apr.  7  to  succeed  Mr.  Lie  as  Secretary- 
General. 


618 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


the  headquarters  of  the  organization  from  one  tem- 
porary location  to  another — from  the  Henry  Hud- 
son Hotel  to  Hunter  College,  then  to  Lake  Success, 
and  finally  to  the  new  Headquarters  building  in 
which  we  sit.  It  was  a  long  way  from  Church 
House  in  London,  where  the  Preparatory  Commis- 
sion met,  to  this  Headquarters  building.  It  could 
be  said  that  in  a  way  this  headquarters  is  a  monu- 
ment to  Mr.  Lie,  because  under  his  guidance  it 
came  into  being. 

However,  I  suggest  that  a  monument  to  his  work 
lies  not  in  stone  and  glass  and  mortar.  The 
United  Nations  is  neither  one  building  nor  another. 
It  is  the  peoples  of  the  world  here  meeting  through 
their  representatives  on  the  basis  of  Charter  prin- 
ciples. From  his  first  report  to  the  General  As- 
sembly to  his  last,  Mr.  Lie  has  seen  what  the 
United  Nations  really  is.  He  said  in  June  of  1946  ^ 
that  it  is  a  machinery  through  which  nations  can 
cooperate;  that  it  can  be  used  and  developed  in 
the  light  of  its  activities  and  experience  to  the 
untold  benefit  of  humanity  or  it  can  be  discarded 
and  broken.  And  in  his  last  report  to  us  in  Sep- 
tember of  1952  he  stated  that  so  long  as  the  United 
Nations  exists  and  functions  we  can  keep  alive 
the  hope  and  continue  the  effort  for  peaceful  ad- 
justments, for  workable  bases  of  coexistence,  and 
even  ultimately  for  the  reconciliation  of  what  to- 
day may  seem  unreconcilable. 

I  suggest  that  the  true  monument  to  Mr.  Lie  is 
his  stated  conviction  and  belief  in  the  principles 
of  the  U.N.  Charter. 

It  could  not  be  an  easy  task  for  a  man  of  prin- 
ciple and  integrity  to  attempt  to  administer  an 
organization  composed  as  it  is  today  of  60  mem- 
bers. Differences  of  opinion  are  bound  to  arise 
and  are  to  be  expected.  Mr.  Lie's  position  re- 
minds me  of  the  two  lines  in  John  Gilpin's  ride : 

And  those  behind  cried  "Forward," 
And  those  in  front  cried  "Back." 

As  he  takes  leave  of  us,  Mr.  Lie  should  have 
the  satisfaction  of  knowing  that  his  is  a  job  well- 
done.  He  has  not  only  the  grateful  thanks  of  the 
U.S.  Government — the  best  wishes  of  the  Ameri- 
can people  go  with  him  also. 

Welcome  to  Dag  Hammarskjold 

n.S./U.N.  press  release  dated  April  10 

It  is  a  pleasure  to  welcome  on  behalf  of  the 
United  States,  Dag  Hammarskjold  as  Secretary- 
General.  He  is,  of  course,  no  stranger  to  the 
United  Nations,  having  represented  his  Govern- 
ment here  at  this  very  session. 

As  Secretary-General  he  will  hold  a  key  posi- 
tion in  an  organization  to  which  my  Government 
attaches  the  greatest  importance.  The  Secretary- 
General,  together  with  his  staff,  comprises  what 
the  charter  calls  a  principal  organ  of  the  United 
Nations. 


'  U.N.  doc.  A/2141. 
ApriJ  27,  1953 


Sweden  has  a  great  tradition  of  service  by  her 
citizens  in  international  affairs.  Mr.  Ham- 
marskjold's  father,  in  addition  to  serving  his  coun- 
try as  its  Prime  Minister  and  as  a  judge,  has 
worked,  written,  and  taught  in  the  field  of  inter- 
national law  and  international  organization.  His 
father  is  also  the  President  of  the  Nobel  Founda- 
tion, that  body  which  carries  on  the  aspirations  of 
another  great  Swede,  Alfred  Nobel.  We  all  cher- 
ish the  memory  of  Count  Folke  Bernadotte  who, 
as  a  U.N.  Mediator,  laid  down  his  life  in  the  serv- 
ice of  the  United  Nations. 

In  keeping  with  this  tradition,  it  is  most  appro- 
priate that  Mr.  Hammarskjold,  himself  a  most 
distinguished  citizen  of  Sweden,  should  be  Secre- 
tary-General of  the  United  Nations. 

The  role  of  the  United  Nations  and  therefore 
the  role  of  the  Secretary-General  is  as  broad  as  the 
entire  field  of  human  endeavor.  We  are  fortunate 
that  Mr.  Hammarskjold  brings  to  it  not  only  his 
skill  as  a  diplomat  and  as  a  minister,  but  also  his 
broad  experience  in  economic  and  financial  mat- 
ters. All  these  talents  directly  relate  to  important 
fields  of  U.N.  work. 

As  Mr.  Hammarskjold  takes  up  his  duties  he 
becomes  part  of  a  living  organization  which  has 
gone  further  toward  organizing  peace  and  organ- 
izing security  than  any  other  body  in  modern  his- 
tory, and  this  result  has  occurred  at  a  time  of 
great  threats  to  the  peace  and  the  security  of  the 
international  community. 

Today  no  state  can  be  an  island.  A  web  of 
interrelations  must  exist  between  it  and  other 
states. 

Today  an  international  organization  must  rep- 
resent different  cultures  and  different  races,  al- 
though a  little  over  100  years  ago  the  Council  of 
Europe  was  conceived  as  a  group  of  sovereigns, 
products  of  the  same  civilization  and  background, 
maintaining  the  stability  of  Europe. 

Today,  as  then,  we  must  expect  conflict  among 
people  and  among  states.  But  that  does  not  mean 
that  this  conflict  need  be  physical.  Shifting  tides 
of  power  among  men  and  among  nations  can  be 
tested  by  quick  access  to  world  public  opinion. 
That  is  what  the  United  Nations  provides. 

From  his  post  the  Secretary-General  will  be 
able  to  see  whether  the  technical  advances  of  pure 
science  can  be  balanced  through  corresponding 
advances  in  the  means  by  which  men  and  nations 
can  live  in  peace  with  their  neighbors.  To  this 
quest  he  can  contribute. 

No  one  would  tell  Mr.  Hammarskjold  that  his 
work  will  be  easy.  His  problems  will  be  even 
more  numerous  than  the  60  members  of  the  United 
Nations,  and  as  one  problem  is  resolved,  others 
will  appear  to  take  its  place.     .     .     . 

Mr.  Secretary-General  ...  my  Govern- 
ment is  happy  to  have  cast  its  vote  in  favor  of 
placing  this  organization— this  instrumentality 
for  peace  and  security — in  your  custody. 

619 


Maintaining  Charter  Standards  for  International  Civil  Servants 


Statement  hy  Henry  Cabot  Lodge,  Jr. 

U.S.  Representative  to  the  Geiieral  Assembly  ■ 


U.S./U.N.  press  release  dated  March  28 

Let  US  begin  by  paying  tribute  to  Secretary- 
General  Lie  and  to  the  important  and  efficient 
work  done  by  the  staff  members  of  the  Secretariat 
in  this,  as  well  as  in  past,  Assemblies.  In  1950, 
and  again  in  this  General  Assembly,  I  have  ob- 
served the  fine  efforts  of  the  men  and  women  who 
selflessly  and  anonymously  serve  us  in  our  search 
for  peace. 

It  is  sometimes  forgotten  that  the  task  under- 
taken by  Mr.  Lie  in  the  organizational  period  of 
the  United  Nations  was  nothing  short  of  monu- 
mental. That  he  brought  together  a  staff  wliich 
met  the  needs  of  governments,  which  were  holding 
hundreds  of  meetings,  stands  to  his  everlasting 
credit.  I  have  every  confidence  that  the  U.N. 
Secretariat  will  continue  to  provide  for  the  needs 
of  this  international  organization  with  increasing 
efficiency. 

Mr.  Lie,  in  his  statement  before  this  Assembly j^^ 
gave  a  full  report  on  the  problems  he  has  had  to 
face  in  a  period  of  world  trouble.  He  dealt  in 
some  detail  with  his  relationships  with  some  of 
the  member  goverimients.  My  own  remarks  will 
deal  less  with  the  past  than  with  the  present  and 
future. 

The  position  of  the  U.S.  Government  on  this 
question  is  determined  by  the  importance  of  the 
United  Nations  in  American  foreign  policy.  Pres- 
ident Eisenhower  in  his  inaugural  speech  described 
the  United  Nations  as  "the  living  sign  of  all  peo- 
ples' hopes  for  peace  ....  We  shall  strive  to 
make  it  not  merely  an  eloquent  symbol  but  an 
effective  force."  This  is  the  basic  instruction  of 
the  U.S.  delegation. 

If  the  United  Nations  is  to  be  an  effective  force, 
it  must  have  the  full  support  of  world  public 

"  Made  on  Mar.  28  in  plenary  session  on  the  Report  of 
the  Secretary-General  on  Personnel  Policy. 

'  For  a  summary  of  Trygve  Lie's  statement  of  Mar  10 
see  Bulletin  of  Mar.  23, 1953,  p.  452. 


opinion.  Public  opinion  and  moral  force  are  the 
strength  of  the  Organization.  We  have  seen,  in 
the  past,  the  weight  of  public  opinion  in  bringing 
questions  to  issue  and  settlement  in  the  United 
Nations. 

World  public  opinion  is,  in  large  part,  the  com- 
bined public  opinion  in  the  several  member  states. 
Public  opinion  in  the  United  States  is  concerned 
that  the  effectiveness  of  the  United  Nations  may 
be  impaired  because  of  the  existence  of  a  serious 
personnel  problem.  Senator  Wiley,  chairman  of 
the  Senate  Foreign  Relations  Committee,  summed 
up  the  general  view  in  the  United  States  when  he 
said,  "There  is  absolutely  no  place  in  the  inter- 
national secretariat  for  a  single  American  Com- 
munist or  any  American  of  doubtful  loyalty." 
And  later  on,  "the  United  Nations  should  not 
become  a  haven  for  disloyal  Americans  or  for 
espionage." 

As  I  said  upon  presenting  my  credentials  to  the 
Secretary-General,  this  essentially  administrative 
problem  has  been  one  of  the  principal  obstacles  in 
the  United  States  to  increased  confidence  in  the 
United  Nations. 

The  Secretary-General  has  demonstrated  that 
he,  also,  is  fully  cognizant  of  the  fact  that  the 
United  Nations  effectiveness  is  profoundly  influ- 
enced by  the  extent  of  public  faith  and  confidence 
in  the  Secretariat. 

It  is  because  of  the  fundamental  importance  of 
this  problem  that  the  following  steps  have  been 
taken : 

First:  The  Secretary-General  has  dismissed  the 
individuals  whose  actions  he  regarded  as  a  failure 
to  meet  the  fundamental  obligations  of  interna- 
tional civil  servants. 

Second:  He  asked  the  U.S.  Government  to  fur- 
nish him  with  full  information  concerning  both 
present  and  prospective  U.S.  members  of  his  staff 
so  that  he  can  insure  that  the  Charter  standards 
are  met. 


620 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Third:  The  U.S.  Government  has  agreed  to  un- 
dertake investigations  necessary  to  supply  the 
needed  information. 

Fourth:  These  investigations  are  now  in 
process. 

You  have  before  you  in  the  Report  of  the  Secre- 
tary-General '  the  procedures  which  are  being  fol- 
lowed by  the  U.S.  iTOvernment  in  conducting  these 
investigations.  Although  some  modification  may 
be  necessary  from  time  to  time  to  assure  that  U.S. 
employees  or  applicants  for  the  United  Nations 
are  accorded  the  same  protection  as  employees  of 
or  applicants  for  the  U.S.  federal  service,  the  pri- 
mary concern  here  is  that  the  advice  provided  to 
the  "Secretary-General  by  the  U.S.  Government 
will  be  based  on  a  thorough  inquiry  into  the  facts 
and  that  the  U.S.  Government  regards  the  infor- 
mation provided  only  as  advice.  While  we  hope 
that  the  information  so  provided  will  prove  ade- 
quate to  permit  the  Secretary-General  responsibly 
to  reach  conclusions  similar  to  those  reached  by 
the  U.S.  Government,  we  recognize  that  the  re- 
sponsibility for  final  judgment  in  the  matter  rests 
solely  with  the  Secretary-General. 

The  investigations  are  proceeding  rapidly. 
Nearly  1,800  investigation  forms  have  been  filed, 
and  investigators  are  currently  working  on  most 
of  these  cases.  I  am  confident  that  most  of  these 
investigations  will  have  been  completed  in  the 
next  few  months  and  that  the  Secretary-General 
will  have  been  furnished  the  information  he  has 
asked  of  the  U.S.  Government  by  the  next  regular 
session  of  the  General  Assembly. 

The  U.S.  Government  considers  that  the  issues 
raised  in  the  last  few  months  can  be  satisfactorily 
met  within  the  spirit  of  the  Charter  by  the  proce- 
dures which  the  Secretary-General  indicates  m 
his  report  he  will  follow  in  reviewing  the  infor- 
mation to  be  supplied  and  by  the  action  he  pro- 
poses to  take  on  cases  where  the  information  dis- 
closes the  individual  is  engaging  in  or  is  likely 
to  engage  in  subversive  activities. 

Protecting  Individual  Employees 

These  procedures  do  not  lose  sight  of  the  neces- 
sity of  protecting  the  individual  employee  from 
unjust  accusation  and  arbitrary  action.  We  fully 
share  the  concern  that  many  of  you  have  expressed 
both  privately  and  publicly  that  the  independence 
of  the  Secretariat  must  be  maintained.  We  recog- 
nize that,  in  order  to  do  so,  employees  cannot  be 
penalized  simply  because  they  do  not  personally 
agree  with  the  policies  of  the  particular  regime  m 
power  in  their  country  of  citizenship.  We  have 
no  interest  in  knowing  whether  any  American  m 
the  Secretariat  is  Republican  or  Democrat  or 
Independent,  so  long  as  he  meets  the  Charter 
standards  of  efficiency,  competence,  and  integrity. 
However,   we  do  have  an  interest  in  knowing 

'  U.N.  doc.  A/2364  dated  Jan.  30. 

ApiW  27,  1953 


whether  he  is  a  member  of  a  conspiracy  dedicated 
to  the  forcible  overthrow  of  our  democratic  form 
of  government — and  undoubtedly  most  of  you  have 
a  similar  interest. 

Since  the  power  of  selection  resides  solely  in  the 
Secretary-General  and  since  it  seems  clear  to  us 
from  the  Secretai-y-General's  Report  that  the 
standards  he  proposes  to  apply  will  protect  staff 
members  against  inadequately  supported  or  un- 
reliable representations  from  member  govern- 
ments, there  should  be  no  doubt  as  to  the  continued 
independence  of  the  Secretariat  or  the  safeguard- 
ing of  individual  rights. 

Consequently,  the  U.S.  delegation  believes  the 
Secretary-General  should  continue  to  apply  the 
policies  outlined  in  his  report. 

Of  course,  it  is  probable  that  all  delegations  find 
certain  points  of  emphasis  or  detail  in  the  Report 
of  the  Secretary-General  with  which  they  may 
disagree.  There  are  a  number  of  aspects  which 
the  United  States  believes  could  be  improved  by 
amendments.  But  we  consider  the  Report  as  a 
whole  to  be  acceptable. 

Further,  some  delegations  have  expressed  the 
view  that  there  should  be  a  full  discussion  of  the 
possibility  of  a  fundamental  revision  of  the  Char- 
ter provisions  relating  to  the  Secretariat.  We  cer- 
tainly are  not  opposed  to  such  a  discussion.  But 
such  a  discussion  has  no  direct  bearing  on  the 
practical  situation  we  face,  which  is  that  tlie  Sec- 
retary-General is  meeting  the  problem  before  him 
in  an  effective  and  forthright  manner  and  should 
not  be  prevented  from  working  out  a  full  solution. 
The  U.S.  delegation  believes  this  Assembly 
should  take  no  action  which  will  hinder  the  Sec- 
retary-General in  taking  whatever  action  may  be 
necessary  to  deal  with  the  existing  situation.  But, 
of  course,  the  United  States  has  no  objection — in 
fact  we  welcome  it — a  further  discussion  of  this 
question  at  the  Eighth  Session  of  tlie  General 
Assembly,  such  discussion  to  take  fully  into  ac- 
count the  developments  during  the  intervening 
period. 

In  order  to  accomplish  these  two  purposes,  the 
U.S.  delegation  has  joined  with  other  delegations 
in  sponsoring  a  draft  resolution  which  is  before 
you  for  consideration.^  The  U.S.  delegation  for 
the  same  reasons  will  vote  against  the  resolution 
proposed  by  several  other  delegations,  which  pro- 
poses to  suspend  any  further  action  on  personnel 
questions  while  a  detailed  study  is  made  by  a 
committee  of  15  members.  We  consider  that  such 
action  by  the  General  Assembly  would  make  it 
impossible  for  the  Secretary-General  to  deal  ade- 
quately with  the  personnel  problems  confronting 
the  Organization. 

Reverting  to  the  Secretary-General's  Report  for 
a  moment,  there  are  two  questions  which  have  been 

'  U.N.  doc.  A/L.  146,  dated  Mar.  28.  The  resolution  is 
sponsored,  in  addition  to  the  United  States,  by  France  and 
the  United  Kingdom. 

621 


directed  to  me  in  private  discussion  on  which  com- 
ment might  be  appropriate. 

A  question  has  been  raised  about  the  conclusion 
of  the  Secretary-General's  Report  that  a  refusal, 
on  the  ground  of  possible  self-incrimination,  to 
testify  before  public  investigatory  bodies  may  be 
held  to  be  inconsistent  with  the  obligations  of  staff 
members.  Let  me,  therefore,  speak  briefly  about 
the  privilege  against  self-incrimination. 


Resolution  on  Personnel  Policy* 

U.N.  doc.  A/Resolution  95 
Adopted  April  1,  1953 

The  General  Assemily, 

Recalling  the  following  provisions  of  Articles  100 
and  101  of  the  Charter  : 

Article  100 

"1.  In  the  performance  of  their  duties  the  Secre- 
tary-General and  the  staff  shall  not  seek  or  receive 
instructions  from  any  government  or  from  any  other 
authority  external  to  the  Organization.  They  shall 
refrain  from  any  action  which  might  reflect  on  their 
position  as  international  oflicials  responsible  only  to 
the  Organization. 

"2.  Each  Member  of  the  United  Nations  under- 
takes to  respect  the  exclu.sively  international  char- 
acter of  the  responsibilities  of  the  Secretary-General 
and  the  staff  and  not  to  seek  to  influence  them  in 
the  discharge  of  their  responsibilities. 

Article  101 

"1.  The  staff  shall  be  appointed  by  the  Secretary- 
General  under  regulations  established  by  the  General 
Assembly. 


"3.  The  paramount  consideration  in  the  employ- 
ment of  the  staff  and  in  the  determination  of  the 
conditions  of  service  shall  be  the  necessity  of  secur- 
ing the  highest  standards  of  efficiency,  competence 
and  integrity.  Due  regard  shall  be  paid  to  the  im- 
portance of  recruiting  the  staff  on  as  wide  a  geo- 
graphical basis  as  possible", 
and 

Having  reviewed  and  considered  the  report  of  the 
Secretary-General  on  personnel  policy   (A/2364), 

1.  Expresses  its  confidence  that  the  Secretary- 
General  will  conduct  personnel  policy  with  these 
considerations  in  mind  ; 

2.  Requests  the  Secretary-General  to  submit  to 
the  General-Assembly  at  its  eighth  session  a  report 
on  the  progres.s  made  in  the  conduct  and  develop- 
ment of  personnel  policy,  together  with  the  com- 
ments of  the  Advisory  Committee  on  Administrative 
and  Budgetary  Questions  thereon ; 

3.  Invites  the  Secretary-General  and  the  Advisory 
Committee  on  Administrative  and  Budgetary  Ques- 
tions to  submit,  after  appropriate  consultations  with 
the  administrative  heads  of  the  specialized  agencies, 
their  recommendations  as  to  any  further  action 
that  may  be  required  of  the  General  Assembly ; 

4.  Calls  upon  all  Members  of  the  United  Nations 
to  assist  the  Secretary-General  in  the  discharge  of 
his  responsibilities  as  chief  administrative  officer 
of  the  United  Nations. 

*Adopted  by  the  General  Assembly  on  Apr.  1 
by  a  vote  of  41-13-4- 


The  Privilege  Against  Self-incrimination 

Many  of  the  nations  represented  here  share  with 
my  country  a  common  tradition  of  the  rule  of  law 
and  of  jealous  concern  for  the  protection  of  the 
rights  of  individuals  against  invasion  by  arbitrary 
governmental  power.  But  the  conditions  and  the 
manner  in  which  this  protection  is  provided  often 
vary. 

The  privilege  of  witnesses  to  refuse  testimony  to 
legislative  bodies  is  a  case  in  point.  In  many, 
perhaps  in  a  number  of  countries  legislative  bodies 
are  not  generally  granted  the  power  to  compel  the 
attendance  of  witnesses  and  the  jsroduction  of  rec- 
ords and  to  compel  testimony  under  oath  in  aid  of 
independent  investigations.  Where  such  powers 
are  rare,  or  unknown,  the  refusal  of  a  citizen  to 
cooperate  in  an  investigation  may  well  be  regarded 
as  an  assertion  of  a  simple  right.  In  such  a  situa- 
tion, to  draw  inference  from  the  refusal  to  testify 
may  appear  questionable. 

In  the  United  States,  however,  the  position  of  an 
uncooperative  witness  is  quite  different.  The 
power  of  the  legislature  and  its  committees  to 
make  independent  investigations  and  to  exercise 
the  ancillary  powers  necessary  thereto  is  well  estab- 
lished and  fully  recognized  both  in  the  written 
Constitution  and  by  custom.  This  power  is  a 
necessary  consequence  of  our  constitutional  system 
with  its  strict  separation  of  executive,  legislative, 
and  judicial  powers.  To  exercise  its  responsibili- 
ties, the  legislature  must  be  able  to  assure  itself  of 
access  to  the  information  it  needs  directly  from  the 
community.  Lacking  the  power  of  parliamentary 
legislatures  where  executive  and  legislative  func- 
tions coexist  in  the  same  people,  it  need  not  rely 
merely  on  information  made  available  to  it  by  the 
Cabinet.  This  independent  power  of  the  legisla- 
ture to  ascertain  facts  has  been  recognized  to  be  not 
an  invasion  of  liberty,  but  an  essential  guaranty  of 
that  liberty  and  of  democracy.  It  is  in  jpact 
broader  and  less  limited  than  the  corresponding 
powers  vested  in  the  executive.  It  springs  from 
our  system  of  separation  of  powers  which,  I 
believe,  exists  in  no  other  nation  to  the  extent  that 
it  exists  here. 

Accordingly,  the  obligation  to  cooperate  with 
legislative  investigations  and  to  make  available  the 
information  required  by  legislative  bodies  is  recog- 
nized as  a  fundamental  obligation  of  American 
citizenship. 

The  privilege  against  self-incrimination  is  di- 
rected primarily  at  court  proceedings  and  does  not 
excuse  the  citizen  from  his  obligation  to  disclose 
information  to  a  legislative  committee.  The  main 
purpose  of  the  privilege  is  the  protection  of  the 
individual  against  being  compelled  to  disclose 
facts  which  may  put  him  in  jeopardy  of  criminal 
prosecution.  But  it  may  not  be  invoked  as  a 
means  of  giving  effect  to  a  general  objection  to  any 
given  investigation,  its  subject  matter,  its  methods, 
or  the  persons  conducting  it. 


622 


Department  of  Stale  Bulletin 


Thus  it  is  no  violation  of  any  "right"  of  Ameri- 
cans in  the  Secretariat  if  the  Secretary-General 
takes  a  grave  view  of  failure  to  respond  to  legiti- 
mate questions  by  U.S.  legislative  bodies,  particu- 
larly if  the  inquiry  is  concerned  with  possible 
subversive  activities  affecting  the  very  safety  of 
the  United  States.  We  do  not  think  any  citizen 
has  a  "right"  to  hold  public  oflBce ;  we  consider  such 
tenure  to  be  a  privilege. 

In  liis  Report,  the  Secretary-General  does  not 
propose  to  ignore  the  nature  of  the  questions  asked 
or  to  disregard  the  other  information  conceiuiing 
the  individual  which  may  have  been  made  avail- 
able to  him  in  determining  the  consequences  of  a 
refusal  to  testify.  I  hope  that  what  I  have  said 
about  the  obligation  of  Americans  to  cooperate 
with  public  investigations  may  have  helped  to 
demonstrate  that  the  Secretary -General's  position 
is  not  only  consistent  with  law  but  is  a  policy  which 
fairly  takes  into  account  these  considerations  about 
Americans  who  fear  self-incrimination  when  asked 
about  subversion  in  the  United  States. 


Estimating  Personnel  Performance 

The  second  question  relates  to  paragraphs  97, 98, 
and  99  which  state  in  part :  "The  Secretary-Gen- 
eral should  not  retain  a  staff  member  in  the 
employment  of  the  United  Nations  if  he  has 
reasonable  grounds  for  believing  that  that  staff 
member  is  engaging  or  is  likely  to  engage  in  sub- 
versive activities  against  the  government  of  any 
member  state."  Wliile  this  statement  and  the 
accompanying  test  seem  to  me  to  be  clear  and 
unequivocal,  I  have  heard  reservations  about  the 
policy  of  refusing  employment  to  individuals  on 
grounds  of  "the  likelihood  of  engaging  in  subver- 
sive activities."  This  is  because  it  is  held  to  be 
almost  impossible  to  make  such  a  determination 
with  any  degree  of  accuracy.  The  U.  S.  Govern- 
ment believes  that,  as  in  the  case  of  judging  any 
other  factor  of  probable  personnel  performance, 
one  must  look  at  the  individual's  past  record. 
Admittedly  it  is  a  difficult  decision  but  no  more 
difficult  than  an  attempt  to  appraise  the  courage 
and  leadership  qualities  of  a  soldier  or  the  ability 
of  a  diplomat  to  respect  confidences.  All  human 
actions  which  include  an  appraisal  of  the  future 
are  estimates  of  likelihood.  No  one  is  ever  hired 
for  any  job  without  an  estimate  of  his  probable 
future  performance.  There  are  no  absolutes  of 
judgment,  but,  if  the  guide  is  past  performance, 
the  prediction  is  likely  to  be  accurate.  The  pro- 
cedures established  by  the  U.  S.  Government  and 
by  the  Secretary-General  assure  objectivity  and 
fairness  in  reaching  these  decisions.  It  is  for  this 
purpose  that  the  U.  S.  Government  is  investigat- 
ing the  background,  employment  history,  and 
character  of  present  and  prospective  U.  S.  citizen 
staff  members  not  only  as  regards  loyalty  but  also 
the  probability  of  competent  performance.    We 


wish  to  provide  the  Secretary-General  with  in- 
formation on  the  basis  of  which  he  can  make  as 
informed  a  judgment  as  possible  on  this  point. 

In  summary,  Mr.  President,  the  position  of  the 
United  States  is:  The  U.  S.  Government  does  not 
believe  that  persons  engaged  or  who,  based  on 
their  past  and  present  record,  seem  likely  to  en- 
gage in  subversive  activities  against  any  member 
state  should  be  employed  in  an  international 
organization.  We  will  do  all  in  our  power  to 
provide  the  Secretary-General  with  the  informa- 
tion necessary  to  enable  him  to  make  a  determina- 
tion on  this  matter.  This  does  not  constitute,  nor 
is  it  intended  to  constitute,  dictation  to  the  Sec- 
retary-General or  other  member  governments.  It 
is  a  service  to  the  United  Nations  in  the  interest  of 
maintaining  a  Secretariat  which  measures  up  to 
standards  established  in  the  Charter  for  inter- 
national civil  servants. 

We,  therefore,  commend  the  policies  adopted  by 
the  Secretary-General  as  measures  designed  to 
strengthen  the  Secretariat  and  the  United  Nations 
itself  to  meet  the  challenges  which  face  us  in  the 
unknown  future.  In  our  view,  these  policies  de- 
serve a  fair  trial.  The  Secretary-General  and  the 
U.  S.  Government  will  require  time  and  support 
to  make  them  effective.  The  General  Assembly 
will  be  able  to  judge  the  value  of  the  policy  by 
their  results.  World  public  opinion  as  well  as 
U.  S.  public  opinion  will  have  an  opportunity  to 
judge  the  results.  I  am  confident  that  these  pol- 
icies will  prove  themselves  in  the  main  test.  They 
will  serve  to  make  the  United  Nations  an  effective 
force. 

Accordingly,  I  urge  you  to  approve  the  draft 
resolution  of  which  my  delegation  is  a  co-sponsor. 


Greece  Unifies  Exchange  System 

The  Government  of  Greece  has  consulted  the 
International  Monetary  Fund  on  unification  of  its 
exchange  system. 

Effective  April  9,  Greece  eliminated  all  multiple 
currency  practices  and  adjusted  the  official  ex- 
change rate  from  15,000  drachmas  per  U.S.  dollar 
to  30,000  drachmas  per  U.S.  dollar. 

The  Fund  welcomes  and  concurs  in  the  action 
proposed  by  the  Greek  Government  to  unify  its 
exchange  system  by  the  elimination  of  its  multiple 
currency  practices  and  adjustment  of  the  Greek 
official  exchange  rate. 

The  Fund  notes  that  this  unification  of  the  ex- 
change system  has  been  made  possible  by  the  de- 
termination of  the  Greek  Government  to  achieve 
monetary  stability  through  the  pursuance  of  an 
internal  stabilization  program.  The  Fund  con- 
siders that  these  policies  should  contribute  to  the 
further  development  of  the  Greek  economy,  but 
wishes  to  emphasize  the  importance  of  continuing 
firm  anti-inflationary  measures. 


April  27,   J  953 


623 


The  United  States  in  tlie  United  Nations 


[April  2-16] 

General  Assembly 

By  a  secret  vote  of  57-1-1,  the  General  Assem- 
bly on  April  7  confirmed  the  Security  Council's 
recommendation  for  the  appointment  of  Dag 
Hammarskjold  of  Sweden  as  the  new  U.N. 
Secretary-General.     He  was  sworn  in  on  April  10. 

At  the  April  7  meeting,  V.  K.  Krishna  Menon 
of  India  referred  to  the  developments  in  Korea 
and  expressed  the  hope  that  the  U.N.  Command 
would  keep  the  United  Nations  informed  of  the 
status  of  negotiations.  At  tlie  request  of  President 
Pearson,  Ambassador  Henry  Cabot  Lodge,  Jr., 
reported  briefly  on  behalf  of  the  Unified  Command 
on  the  recent  events  that  had  encouraged  "all  of 
us  who  seek  peace  in  Korea."  (For  text,  see 
Bulletin  of  Apr.  20,  1953,  p.  574.) 

On  April  8  the  Assembly  voted  52-5 (Soviets) -3 
to  continue  the  Disarmament  Commission,  after 
accepting  a  Soviet  amendment  deleting  from  the 
text  a  commendation  of  the  Commission's  work. 
Anotlier  Soviet  proposal  to  omit  a  reference  to 
the  General  Assembly  resolution  establishing  the 
Commission  was  rejected  by  a  vote  of  10-33 
(U.S.)-13. 

The  Czechoslovak  resolution  condemning  al- 
leged U.S.  interference  in  the  internal  affairs  of 
certain  states  was  rejected,  5-41-14. 

Committee  I  {Political  and  Security) — By  a 
vote  of  52-5  (Soviet  bloc)-3  (Burma,  India,  In- 
donesia), the  Committee  on  April  8  adopted  the 
joint  resolution  establishing  a  commission  com- 
posed of  Brazil,  Egypt,  Pakistan,  Sweden,  and 
Uruguay  to  make  an  impartial  inquiry  into  charges 
of  the  use  of  germ  warfare.     ( For  text,  see  p.  617.) 

General  debate  on  the  Polish  omnibus  item 
opened  on  April  9,  with  Stanislaw  Skrzesewski 
(Poland)  as  first  speaker.  He  explained  that  the 
recent  Communist  Chinese  and  North  Korean  pro- 
posals offered  a  basis  for  the  solution  of  the 
Korean  and  related  problems,  and  he  therefore 
introduced  a  revised  text  of  the  original  Polish 
draft  to  take  into  account  the  changed  state  of 
affairs.  The  revised  version  recommended  "the 
immediate  resumption  of  truce  negotiations  .  .  . 
it   being   understood   that  .  .  .  the   parties   will 

624 


exert  every  effort  to  reach  agreement  on  the  ques- 
tion of  the  exchange  of  sick  and  wounded  prison- 
ers of  war  and  .  .  .  of  prisoners  of  war  as  a  whole, 
endeavoring  thereby  to  remove  the  obstacles 
preventing  the  termination  of  the  war  in  Korea." 

Andrei  Vyshinsky  (U.S.S.R.)  then  made  a 
lengthy  speech  during  which  he  declared  that  the 
Soviet  Union  still  adhered  to  the  principle  that  all 
prisoners  must  be  repatriated,  regardless  of  their 
desires.  He  further  stated  that  the  U.S.S.R.  rec- 
ognized the  fairness  and  justice  of  Chou  En-lai's 
proposal  that  prisoners  resisting  repatriation 
should  be  sent  to  a  neutral  country  (Bulletin  of 
Apr.  13,  1953,  p.  526).  He  emphasized  his  coun- 
try's desire  for  peace  and  the  incompatibility  of 
Nato  with  this  objective,  as  had  the  Polish  repre- 
sentative. Mr.  Vyshinsky  also  endorsed  the  re- 
maining part  of  the  Polish  resolution,  which 
called  for  a  one-third  reduction  of  all  armed  forces 
and  unconditional  prohibition  of  atomic  weapons; 
called  upon  states  which  had  not  done  so  to  ac- 
cede to  or  ratify  the  Geneva  Protocol  of  1925; 
asked  the  General  Assembly  to  declare  participa- 
tion m  Nato  incompatible  with  U.N.  membership; 
and  called  for  a  five-power  "peace"  pact. 

Commenting  briefly,  Ernest  A.  Gross  (U.S.) 
said  the  Vyslunsky  speech  was  reminiscent  of  a 
past  which  the  new  Soviet  leaders  profess  was  a 
bygone  past.  The  Soviet  intervention  seemed  to 
him  stale,  dull,  and  regressive.  As  for  the  Po- 
lish text,  it  contained  only  all  the  old  slogans 
which  the  Soviet  Union  had  offered  at  previous 
sessions — no  more  and  no  less. 

Speaking  again  on  April  10,  Ambassador  Gross 
told  the  Committee  that  U.N.  debate  on  a  Korean 
armistice  at  the  present  time  would  not  facilitate 
the  Panmunjom  negotiations.  He  attributed  the 
current  conciliatory  Soviet  gestures  to  the  West's 
policy  of  strength  and  unity  and  declared  the 
Polish  proposals  would  contribute  nothing  to  the 
quest  for  agreement. 

On  April  14,  the  Brazilian  delegation  circulated 
a  draft  resolution  noting  with  satisfaction  that 
agreement  had  been  reached  on  the  exchange  of 
sick  and  wounded  prisoners  of  war  in  Korea,  ex- 
pressing hope  that  the  exchange  would  promptly 
be  effected  and  that  further  negotiations  at  Pan- 

Department  of  Sfafe   BuHetin 


munjoni  would  result  in  an  early  armistice,  and 
proposing  to  recess  the  present  session  after  com- 
pletion of  current  agenda  items  until  the  signing 
of  an  armistice  or  other  developments  in  Korea 
require  Assembly  consideration. 

Henrique  de  Souza  Gomes  (Brazil)  on  April  15 
offered  a  clarification  of  the  motives  behind  his 
delegation's  proposal.  In  view  of  the  recent 
change  in  the  international  atmosphere,  it  seemed 
necessary  to  reevaluate  the  situation  and  to  explore 
every  possible  means  likely  to  alleviate  pi'esent 
world  tensions.  He  cautioned,  however,  that  it 
would  be  futile  to  ignore  the  very  serious  diver- 
gencies still  prevalent. 

The  Brazilian  draft  singled  out  the  problem  of 
the  Korean  armistice  because  the  delegation 
thought  this  was  the  most  "burning"  question, 
which  at  the  same  time  held  the  highest  hopes  of 
settlement,  he  explained.  He  added  that  this 
settlement  was  an  essential  step  in  preventing  a 
new  world  war  or  the  extension  of  present  con- 
flicts. A  "modest"  approach  between  despair  and 
unwarranted  optimism  guided  the  delegation  in 
its  desire  to  enunciate  certain  points  which  had 
found  unanimous  support. 

Mr.  Vyshinsky,  after  renewing  his  delegation's 
attack  on  Nato  and  on  Western  disarmament  pro- 
posals and  noting  that  the  U.N.  commander  in 
Korea  had  not  yet  replied  to  the  Communists'  re- 
quest for  the  resumption  of  peace  talks,  said  that 
the  Brazilian  draft  was  worthy  of  the  most  care- 
ful study  and  attention. 

Ambassador  Gross  (U.S.)  refuted  the  familiar 
charges  as  to  Nato  and  disarmament;  he  then 
welcomed  Mr.  Vyshinsky's  apparent  intention  to 
support  the  Brazilian  proposal,  which  the  United 
States  also  endorsed. 

Economic  and  Social  Council 

The  Council  on  April  2  adopted  in  four  separate 
votes  the  U.S.  resolution  requesting  the  Secretary- 
General  to  invite  Libya,  Spain,  Nepal,  and  the  Re- 
public of  Korea  to  attend  the  Conference  on  the 
Limitation  of  the  Production  of  Opium  scheduled 
to  begin  May  11.  The  invitations  to  Libya  and 
Nepal  were  approved  unanimously ;  that  to  Spain 
by  a  vote  of  13-4  (U.S.S.R.,  Poland,  Uruguay, 
Yugoslavia)-l  (India) ;  and  that  to  the  Republic 
of  Korea  by  a  vote  of  14-2  (U.S.S.R.,  Poland)-2 
(India,  Yugoslavia). 

Walter  Kotschnig  (U.S.)  on  April  6  introduced 
a  resolution  on  international  cooperation  on  car- 
tography, noting  the  Secretary-GeneraPs  report 
and  the  efforts  made  by  governments  to  stimulate 
accurate  surveying  and  mapping  of  their  terri- 
tories. The  draft  requested  continuance  of  the 
Secretary-General's  consultations  regarding  the 
holding  of  regional  cartographic  conferences  and 
also  the  submission  in  due  course  of  a  report  to 


the  Council  on  such  consultations.  Mr.  Kotsch- 
nig explained  that  the  United  States  felt  that 
priority  should  be  given  to  poorly  mapped  areas, 
especially  Asia,  the  Far  East,  and  the  Middle 
East.  "Work  already  under  way  by  a  Pan  Amer- 
ican body  met  the  needs  of  Latin  America,  he 
added,  indicating  that  this  region  would  not  re- 
quire U.N.  interest. 

India  suggested  an  amendment  to  the  U.S.  text 
which  would  provide  for  the  Secretary-General's 
consultations  to  cover  also  the  adoption  of  a 
standard  method  of  writing  geographic  names  on 
maps.  Following  U.S.  acceptance  of  the  Indian 
amendment,  the  draft  was  approved  by  a  vote  of 
15-2  (U.S.S.R.,  Poland)-!  (Belgium). 

Other  resolutions  adopted  on  April  6  included 
a  U.K.  draft  asking  further  work  on  the  Inter- 
national Map  of  the  World  on  the  Millionth  Scale 
and  a  proposal  that  Ecosoc  should  grant  the  free- 
dom-of-information  rapporteur's  request  for 
access  to  communications  dealing  with  freedom  of 
information. 

On  April  9  the  Council  completed  action  on  the 
trade-union-rights  item  by  approving  a  five-part 
U.K.-Swedish  proposal  providing,  among  other 
things,  for  automatic  referral  of  complaints  con- 
cerning Ilo  members  to  the  Ilo  Governing  Body 
for  consideration,  noting  the  U.S.S.R.  failure  to 
cooperate  in  answering  allegations,  reiterating  a 
request  to  Spain  and  Rumania  to  cooperate,  dis- 
missing the  allegation  concerning  Trieste  as  not 
meriting  further  examination,  and  inviting  the 
competent  authorities  of  the  Saar  to  submit 
observations  on  a  new  allegation. 

At  the  same  session,  Mr.  Wadsworth  announced 
that  the  United  States  was  unable  to  grant  per- 
mission to  representatives  of  the  Women's  Inter- 
national Democratic  Federation  and  the  World 
Federation  of  Trade  Unions  to  enter  the  United 
States  for  the  purpose  of  attending  U.N.  sessions. 
Following  is  the  text  of  his  statement : 

I  am  instructed  by  my  Government  to  state  that  it  has 
found  it  impossible  to  grant  the  recent  application  of 
Mrs.  Margarette  Lucliock,  a  representative  of  the  Wom- 
en's International  Democratic  Federation,  and  Mr.  Jan 
Dessau,  a  representative  of  the  World  Federation  of 
Trade  Unions,  for  admission  to  the  United  States  to 
attend  sessions  of  United  Nations  bodies,  including  the 
Economic  and  Social  Council,  at  United  Nations  Head- 
quarters in  Nevp  York.  In  denying  these  applications, 
my  Government  has  found  it  necessary  to  invoke  the 
right  to  safeguard  its  security  which  it  reserved  to  itself 
in  Section  6  of  the  Joint  Kesolution  (Public  Law  357) 
of  the  80th  Congress,  which  authorized  the  United  States 
to  enter  into  the  Headquarters  Agreement,  and  in  the 
note  of  its  Representative,  dated  November  21, 1947,  bring- 
ing the  Headquarters  Agreement  into  effect.  My  Govern- 
ment is  communicating  with  the  Secretary-General  of 
the  United  Nations  in  reply  to  his  inquiry  dated  March 
19.  1953  concerning  the  application  of  Mrs.  Luckock. 

I  wish  to  assure  you  that,  in  denying  these  visa  ap- 
plications, my  Government  has  acted  only  after  the  most 
careful  consideration  and  in  full  recognition  of  the  re- 
sponsibilities which  it  has  assumed  towards  the  United 
Nations. 


April  27,   1953 


625 


A  U.S.  draft  resolution  deferring  decision  on  a 
U.N.  narcotics  laboratory  pending  study  before 
Ecosoc's  18th  session  by  an  expert  committee  and 
the  Narcotics  Commission  was  approved  on  April 
10.  At  the  same  meeting,  the  Commission  con- 
firmed members  of  functional  commissions  and 
agreed  unanimously  to  invite  Italy  to  accede  to 
the  Convention  on  the  Death  of  Missing  Persons. 

Eugene  Black,  president  of  the  International 
Bank  for  Reconstruction  and  Development,  pre- 
sented the  bank's  annual  report  on  April  14,  and 
five  resolutions  relating  to  the  Population  Com- 
mission's work  were  approved.  At  the  next  day's 
meeting,  the  Council  considered  two  reports  of 
the  Technical  Assistance  Committee  and  ap- 
proved the  resolution  deciding  that  the  new 
method  of  obtaining  payment  toward  the  living 
costs  of  experts  recommended  by  the  Tag  should 
be  substituted  for  the  existing  one  not  later  than 
January  1954. 


Proposals  for  Agreement 
on  Cartel  Practices 

Press  release  17,5  dated  April  6 

The  Ad  Hoc  Committee  on  Restrictive  Business 
Practices  of  the  U.N.  Economic  and  Social  Council 
(Ecosoc)  has  released  its  report  containing  the 
Committee's  proposals  for  an  international  agree- 
ment to  prevent  harmful  cartel  practices.^  The 
report,  which  has  been  under  preparation  for  over 
a  year,  will  provide  the  basis  for  further  dis- 
cussions by  the  Council  at  its  16th  session  this 
summer. 

Tlie  Conimittee  proposes  that  countries  agree 
to  take  action  and  cooperate  with  each  other  to 
prevent  restrictive  business  practices  affecting  in- 
ternational trade  having  demonstrably  harmful 
effects.  These  practices  would  be  subject  to  in- 
quiry upon  complaint  to  determine  whether  such 
harmful  effects  were  present.  Practices  involved 
would,  for  example,  include  agreements  among 
competing  business  firms  to  abide  by  certain  prices, 
not  to  make  or  sell  more  than  specified  amounts,  or 
not  to  sell  in  specified  geographic  areas. 

The  Committee,  operating  as  a  group  of  experts, 
has  had  the  assignment  of  preparing  these  pro- 
posals for  the  consideration  of  governments.  The 
Ecosoo  discussions  should  reveal  whether  these 
proposals  form  the  basis  for  the  negotiation  of  an 
international  agreement  acceptable  to  govern- 
ments. Governments  will  use  the  interval  between 
now  and  the  summer  session  of  Ecosoc  to  review 
the  report.  This  interval  will  provide  an  oppor- 
tunity for  discussion  of  its  contents  with  interested 
U.S.  groups. 

The  Committee  was  established  by  resolution  of 
Ecosoc  in  the  summer  of  195 1.^     This  resolution, 

'  U.N.  doc.  E/2380,  E/AC.  37/3. 
Bulletin  of  Oct.  8,  1951,  p.  595. 

626 


which  was  introduced  by  the  United  States,  rec- 
ommended to  members  of  the  United  Nations  that 

they  take  appropriate  measures  and  cooperate  with  each 
other,  to  prevent  .  .  .  business  practices  affecting  inter- 
national trade  which  restrain  competition,  limit  access  to 
niarliets,  or  foster  monopolistic  control,  whenever  such 
practices  have  harmful  effects  on  the  expansion  of  pro- 
duction or  trade,  on  the  economic  development  of  under- 
developed areas,  or  on  standards  of  living. 

The  Committee,  consisting  of  representatives  of 
Belgium,  Canada,  France,  India,  Mexico,  Paki- 
stan, Sweden,  the  United  Kingdom,  the  United 
States,  and  Uruguay,  was  established  to  develop 
proposals  as  to  methods  to  be  adopted  by  interna- 
tional agreement  to  implement  this  recommenda- 
tion. 

The  U.S.  position  has  been  that  this  sort  of 
trade  restriction  should  be  eliminated.  Healthy 
and  active  competition  provides  a  spur  for  lower 
costs,  lower  prices,  and  higher  productivity,  which 
in  turn  lead  to  greater  trade  and  increasing  stand- 
ards of  living.  In  this  Government's  view,  re- 
strictive business  practices  can  have  harmful  ef- 
fects on  international  trade  similar  to  those  of 
governmental  barriers  such  as  quotas  and  excessive 
tariffs.  In  proposing  to  Ecosoc  that  this  action 
be  taken,  the  United  States  had  in  mind  that  such 
practices  often  cannot  be  dealt  with  effectively  by 
one  nation  alone  under  its  own  domestic  laws,  and 
that  therefore  supplementary  international  action 
IS  needed  to  cope  with  the  portions  of  the  problem 
wliich  he  beyond  a  single  country's  jurisdiction. 

The  Committee  held  sessions  in  January,  April, 
and  September  of  last  year.  Its  final  session 
started  on  January  12  of  this  year  and  continued 
through  February  21.  In  summary,  the  plan 
which  the  Committee  has  developed  provides  that, 
on  the  complaint  of  any  country,  a  practice  al- 
leged to  have  harmful  effects  would  be  subject  to 
inquiry  in  order  to  determine  whether  such  effects 
actually  exist.  This  determination  would  be  made 
m  the  light  of  facts  submitted  by  governments. 
These  facts  would  be  obtained  by  each  government 
in  accordance  with  its  own  procedures  and  would 
be  assembled  for  analysis.  Representatives  of 
governments  participating  in  the  agreement  would 
determine  on  the  basis  of  this  analysis  wliether  the 
practice  complained  of  had  a  harmful  effect  in  the 
light  of  the  objectives  of  the  agreement.  If  they 
so  found,  the  governments  concerned  would  be 
requested  to  take  remedial  action. 

The  governments  participating  in  the  agreement 
would  undertake  to  adopt  measures  by  legislation 
or  otherwise  to  carry  out  the  purposes  of  the 
agreement.  Each  government  would  further  agree 
to  take  full  account  of  the  findings  and  recom- 
mendations transmitted  to  it  concerning  specific 
business  practices,  to  take  the  action  it  considered 
appropriate,  having  regard  to  its  obligations  under 
the  agreement,  and,  if  in  any  instance  it  did  not 
act,  to  state  the  grounds  for  its  inaction. 

The  agreement  would  apply  to  the  business  prac- 
tices of  commercial  enterprises  whether  publicly 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


or  privately  owned.  It  would  not  apply  to  busi- 
ness practices  specifically  required  by  govern- 
ments, but,  where  some  governments  impose  such 
a  requirement  and  others  do  not  the  agreement 
might  be  applied  at  the  discretion  of  the  partici- 
pating countries.  Moreover,  the  effects  of  such 
aovernmentally  imposed  restrictive  practices 
might  be  brought  to  the  attention  of  countries  that 
had  imposed  the  requirement. 

Copies  of  the  Committee's  report  may  be  ob- 
tained from  U.N.  Headquarters.  The  Govern- 
ment will  be  glad  to  receive  the  views  of  those 
interested  in  the  report  and  to  answer  inquiries 
directed  to  it.  Any  interested  groups  which  desire 
to  discuss  the  proposals  of  the  Committee  with  the 
Government  will  be  given  an  opportunity  to  do  so. 
Requests  may  be  addressed  to  the  Secretary  of  the 
Interdepartmental  U.N.  Economic  Committee, 
Department  of  State.  Views  which  are  received 
will  be  taken  fully  into  account  when  a  position 
is  formulated  for  the  Council  discussions. 


Adult  Education  Seminar 

To  Convene  at  Ciudad  Trujillo 

Press  release  188  dated  April  10 

The  U.S.  Government  has  accepted  the  invita- 
tion of  the  Government  of  the  Dominican  Eepub- 
lic  to  send  a  representative  to  a  Seminar  on  Adult 
Education  which  will  be  convened  at  Ciudad  Tru- 
jillo on  April  14,  19&3.  Dr.  Bess  Goodykoontz, 
who  is  the  Director  of  Comparative  Education, 
Division  of  International  Education,  Office  of 
Education,  Federal  Security  Agency,  has  been 
designated  U.S.  representative  at  the  seminar. 

The  purpose  of  the  seminar  is  to  provide  an 
opportunity   for  specialists  from  the  American 
Eepublics  to  review  recent  progress  and  consider 
specific  aspects  in  the  education  of  adults.     The 
participants  will  discuss  the  fundamental  educa- 
tion of  the  adult,  including  techniques  for  teach- 
ing adults  how  to  read  and  write,  and  national 
literacy  campaigns;  the  primary  school  and  its 
role  in  the  prevention  of  adult  illiteracy ;  expand- 
t    ing  cultural  opportunities   for  adults,  by  such 
'    means  as  night  schools,  educational  motion  pic- 
tures and  radio  and  television  broadcasts,  and 
public  libraries;   programs  and  means   for  im- 
proving, adult  life  in  industry  and  agriculture  as 
well  as  in  the  home  and  the  community ;  and  the 
relation  of  adult  education  to  international  peace. 
The  seminar  is  being  convened  on  the  initiative 
of  the  Government  of  the  Dominican  Eepublic, 
pursuant  to  a  1952  resolution  of  the  U.N.  Educa- 
tional, Scientific  and  Cultural  Organization  which 
recommended  that  member  governments  develop 
activities  in  adult  education  in  their  respective 
countries  and  that  they  hold  regional  and  national 
meetings  on  the  subject. 

April  27,    1953 


Current  United  Nations  Documents: 
A  Selected  Bibliography ' 

General  Assembly 

Report  of  the  Secretary-General  on  Personnel  Policy. 
Note  bv  the  Secretarv-General.  A/2366,  Mar.  4,  1953, 
3  pp.  liimeo  and  A/2367,  Mar.  4,  1953,  11  pp.  mimeo. 

Korea  (a)  Reports  of  the  United  Nations  Commission 
for  the  Unification  and  Reliabilitation  of  Korea,  (b) 
Reports  of  the  United  Nations  Agent  General  for 
Korean  Reconstruction.  Supplementary  report  of  the 
First  Committee.     A/2368,  Mar.  9, 1953.     6  pp.  mimeo. 

Methods  Which  Might  Be  Used  To  Maintain  and 
Strengthen  International  Peace  and  Security  in  Ac- 
cordance With  the  Purposes  and  Principles  of  the 
Charter:  Report  of  the  Collective  Measures  Com- 
mittee. Report  of  the  First  Committee.  A/2370, 
Mar.  17,  1953.     3  pp.  mimeo. 

Regulation,  Limitation  and  Balanced  Reduction  of  All 
Armed  Forces  and  All  Armaments:  Report  of  the 
Disarmament  Commission.  Report  of  the  First  Com- 
mittee.    A/2373,  Mar.  23,  1953.     5  pp.  mimeo. 

Question  of  Impartial  Investigation  of  Charges  of  Use 
by  United  Nations  Forces  of  Bacteriological  Warfare. 
Letter  dated  5  March  19.53  from  the  Head  of  the  dele- 
gation of  the  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics 
addressed  to  the  President  of  the  General  Assembly. 
A/C.1/L.28,  Mar.  12,  1953.     17  pp.  mimeo. 

Security  Council 

Letter  Dated  28  February  1953  From  the  Minister  for 
Foreign  Affairs  of  Syria  Addressed  to  the  Secretary- 
General  Concerning  the  Report  Dated  30  October  1952 
of  the  Chief  of  Staff  of  the  Truce  Supervision  Organ- 
ization   (S/2S33).     S/2956,    Mar.    12,    1953.     10    pp. 

mimeo.  ,  ^     ._^     c         -4. 

Decisions  Taken  and  Resolutions  Adopted  by  the  becurity 
Council  During  the  Year  1952.  S/INF/7,  Feb.  20, 
1953.     7  pp.  mimeo. 

Trusteeship  Council 

United  Nations  Visiting  Mission  to  Trust  Territories  in 
West  Africa  1952.  Report  on  Procedures  of  Visiting 
Missions.     T/1044.  Mar.  16,  1953.     9  pp.  mimeo. 

List  of  Documents  Circulated  by  the  Secretary-General 
Pursuant  to  Rules  24  and  85,  Paragraph  2  of  the  Rules 
of  Procedure.  Memorandum  prepared  by  the  Secre- 
tariat.    T/C.2/L.27,  Mar.  5,  1953.     19  pp.  mimeo. 

Economic  and  Social  Council 

Allegations  Regarding  Infringements  of  Trade_  Union 
Ri-'hts  Received  Under  Council  Resolution  2(7  (X). 
Communications  received  from  the  General  Workers 
Union  of  British  Honduras.     E/2333/Add.27,  Feb.  24, 

19.53.     5  pp.  mimeo.  ^     ^      i:<  /oq-i  / 

Report  of  the  International  Monetary  Fund.  l<./2dol/ 
Add.l,  Jlar.  5,  1953.    7  pp.  mimeo. 


»  Printed  materials  may  be  secured  in  the  United  States 
from  the  International  Documents  Service,  Columbia 
University  Press.  2960  Broadway,  New  York  2i,  N.  y. 
Other  materials  (mimeoffraphed  or  processed  documents) 
may  be  consulted  at  certain  designated  libraries  in  the 

United  States.  .        ,  .  v,,-  i    .,    „„ 

The  United  Nations  Secretariat  has  established  an 
OflBcial  Records  series  for  the  General  Assembly,  the 
Security  Council,  the  Economic  and  Social  Council,  the 
Trusteeship  Council,  and  the  Atomic  Energy  Commission, 
which  includes  summaries  of  proceedings,  resolutions,  and 
reports  of  the  various  commissions  and  committees.  In- 
formation on  securing  subscriptions  to  the  series  may  be 
obtained  from  the  International  Documents  Service. 

627 


Senate  Begins  Consideration  of  NATO  Treaties 


On  April  7  the  Senate  Committee  on  Foreign 
Relations  began  its  consideration  of  three  NATO 
treaties:  The  Status  of  Forces  Agreement,  the 
Protocol  thereto  on  International  Military  Head- 
quarters, and  the  Agreement  on  the  Status  of 
NA  TO  Forces. 

Expressions  of  support  for  the  treaties  came  in 
the  form  of  a  statement  made  before  the  Com- 
mittee by  Under  Secretary  Smith  and  in  a  letter 
addressed  by  Ambassador  William  H.  Draper,  Jr. 
U.S.  special  representative  in  Europe,  to  Senator 
Alexander  Wiley,  Chairman  of  the  Committee  on 
t  oreign  Relations. 

Fotlowing  are  the  texts  of  Under  Secretary 
kmiths  statement;  President  Eisenhower'' s  mes- 
sage transmitting  to  the  Senate  the  Protocol  on 
MUitary  Headquarters,  together  with  Secretary 
Dulles''  letter  forwarding  the  Protocol  to  the  Presi- 
dent; and  Ambassador  Draper's  letter  to  Senator 
Wiley. 


UNDER  SECRETARY  SMITH'S  STATEMENT 
OF  APRIL  7 

Press  release  177  dated  April  7 

I  am  here  to  support  three  documents  which 
you  are  now  considering:  The  Nato  Status  of 
-borces  Agreement/  the  Protocol  thereto  on  Mili- 
tary Headquarters/  and  the  Agreement  on  the 
btatus  of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Or^aniza- 
tion.3  ■'        *= 

Secretary  Dulles  has  asked  me  to  express  his 
regrets  that,  because  of  the  arrival  of  Chancellor 
Adenauer  today,  he  cannot  appear  before  you 
1  know  that  he  would  have  liked  to  have  per- 
sonally expressed  his  strong  support  for  the  early 
ratification  of  these  three  treaties. 

We  have  here  three  treaties  designed  to  trans- 
late policy  into  action.  These  are  multilateral 
treaties,  consonant  with  our  obligations  under  the 
U.N.  Charter  and  under  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty.     They  were  negotiated  within  the  North 

'  S.  Rxec.  T,  82(1  Cong.,  2d  sess 
S.  Exec.  B,  83d  Cong.,  1st  sess. 
S.  Kxeo.  U,  82d  Cong.,  2d  sess. 

628 


Atlantic  Treaty  Organization  in  order  to  estab- 
lish a  uniform  basis  for  dealing  with  a  large  num- 
ber of  the  legal  and  administrative  problems 
which  have  naturally  arisen  in  connection  with 
operations  of  the  Organization.  The  United 
States  was  one  of  the  leaders  in  developing  the 
text  of  these  treaties.  I  hope  that  the  United 
States  will,  by  adopting  these  treaties,  continue  to 
evidence  its  support  of  this  vital  collective-se- 
curity effort  and  its  leadership  in  seeking  prac- 
tical solutions  for  practical  problems. 

The  treaties  under  consideration  provide  for 
the  operations  of  Nato  forces,  Nato  headquarters, 
and  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization  it- 
.self. 

First,  there  is  the  Agreement  on  the  Status  of 
Forces,  signed  at  London  on  June  19,  1951.  This 
agreement  is  intended  to  establish  a  uniform  basis 
of  responsibilities,  rights,  and  privileges  appli- 
cable to  the  forces  of  the  respective  Nato  coun- 
tries and  related  civilians  while  in  the  territory  of 
other  Nato  countries. 

The  second  agreement  is  a  protocol  to  the  Status 
of  Forces  Agreement.  It  establishes  the  entity  of 
the  integrated  military  headquarters  of  N.ato  and 
creates  certain  responsibilities,  rights,  and  privi- 
leges necessary  for  their  operations  within  the 
territory  covered  by  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty. 

The  third  agreement  deals  with  the  North  At- 
lantic Treaty  Organization  itself,  its  international 
staff  and  national  representatives  thereto  and  es- 
tablishes the  responsibilities,  rights,  and  privile"-es 
that  will  govern  them.  I  should  like  to  speak 
briefly  about  the  major  aspects  of  each  of  these 
documents  m  turn. 

Status  of  Forces  Agreement 

Turning  first  to  the  Agreement  on  the  Status 
of  Nato  Forces,  it  is  noteworthy  that  this  ao-ree- 
ment,  like  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  effort  itself, 
is  precedent-making.  Never  before  have  peace- 
loving  nations  dedicated  themselves  to  a  peace- 
time effort  which  would  integrate  their  defense 
preparations.  This  concept  of  integrated  defense 
planning  gives  greater  defensive  strength  for  the 
same  amount  of  expenditure  in  manpower,  mate-  I 
nel,  and  money.     Naturally,  it  involves  the  poten- 

Department  of  State   Bulletin 


tial  stationing  and  movement  of  forces  of  each  of 
the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  nations  in  the  territory 
of  any  one  of  them,  as  Nato  phxns  are  directed 
toward  the  defense  of  the  whole  North  Atlantic 
Treaty  area. 

The  administrative  problems  connected  with  the 
stationing  of  foreign  forces  in  the  territory  of  any 
member  Nato  state  are  manifold.  An  orderly 
basic  system  of  rights,  responsibilities,  and  proce- 
dures must  be  established  for  the  following 
reasons:  (1)  to  reduce  the  administrative  burden 
on  the  troop  commanders ;  (2)  to  reduce  to  a  mini- 
mum the  area  of  possible  dispute  between  countries 
who  send  troops  and  countries  who  receive  them ; 
(3)  to  insure  that  the  people  of  the  countries  who 
receive  troops  are  protected  as  to  life,  limb,  prop- 
erty, and  security  from  acts  of  foreign  troops  or 
civilians. 

We  have  had  arrangements  concluded  in  war- 
time on  these  legal  and  administrative  subjects 
governing  our  troops  abroad  both  in  World  War  I 
and  World  War  II.  Such  arrangements  are  quite 
different  from  the  treaties  before  you,  which  are 
intended  to  govern  deployments  for  the  indefinite 
period  of  the  cold  war.  Provisions  that  were 
proper  for  agreements  negotiated  in  wartime 
obviously  could  not  be  expected  to  be  applied  to 
this  different  operation.  We  have  secured  the  best 
possible  terms  for  these  circumstances.  They  ai'e 
very  good  terms.  They  will  provide  a  firm  and 
uniform  base  in  lieu  of  the  varied  informal, 
interim,  and  ad  hoc  arrangements  which  have  gov-  - 
erned  our  present  deployments  abroad  pending 
action  on  this  treaty. 

Each  country,  of  course,  has  had  to  reconcile  its 
desires  to  have  maximum  rights  for  its  troops 
abroad  with  its  natural  inclination  to  grant  mini- 
mum privileges  to  other  troops  coming  to  its  terri- 
tory. The  controlling  idea  has  been  to  provide  a 
reasonable  and  just  basis  that  would  serve  the  pur- 
poses I  have  just  outlined. 

The  resulting  agreement  therefore  represents, 
as  do  all  three  agreements,  a  giving  and  a  taking 
on  the  part  of  all.  Insofar  as  it  affects  the  United 
States,  I  believe  that  it  both  protects  our  interests 
as  a  nation  sending  troops  abroad  and  as  a  nation 
receiving  foreign  troops  here. 

This  agreement  covers  all  members  of  the  armed 
forces  of  any  Nato  nation,  civilians  employed  by 
those  armed  forces  and  serving  with  them,  and 
their  immediate  dependents,  while  in  other  Nato 
nations  under  orders.  It  establishes  very  clearly 
that  these  persons  must  respect  the  law  of  the 
foreign  country  in  which  they  may  be  stationed. 

It  then  deals  with  a  number  of  aspects  of  rights, 
responsibilities,  and  privileges,  and  with  your 
permission  I  should  like  to  refer  to  certain  of  the 
most  important  aspects  which  are  covered. 

We  had  to  develop  arrangements  that  would 
permit  ready  movement  of  military  forces  in 
peacetime  across  international  borders.  At  the 
same  time,  those  procedures  could  not  overlook 

Apri7  27,   1953 


the  security  interests  of  the  nations  receiving 
forces.  Although  the  result  has  been  to  exempt 
military  personnel  from  passport  and  visa  regu- 
lations and  immigration  inspection  as  well  as  from 
alien  registration  control  laws,  this  does  not  mean 
that  security  will  be  neglected.  Military  person- 
nel must  be  appropriately  identified,  of  course. 
I  can  assure  the  Committee  that  screening  proce- 
dures are  being  established  and  that  an  interim 
procedure  has  been  adopted  for  immediate  appli- 
cation which  all  interested  agencies  of  the  execu- 
tive branch  are  agreed  on  as  appropriate  and 
adequate  for  that  purpose.  If  the  circumstances 
require,  any  state  may  arrange  the  removal  of 
any  individual  from  its  territory. 

The  problem  of  jurisdiction  in  cases  of  criminal 
offenses  had  to  be  settled.  Even  as  this  country 
did  not  wish  to  surrender  all  of  its  rights  with 
respect  to  criminal  jurisdiction  for  offenses  com- 
mitted by  foreign  forces  here,  other  countries 
were  reluctant  to  totally  surrender  their  rights. 
At  the  same  time,  it  was  fully  appreciated  that 
the  government  which  sends  persons  abroad  would 
wish  to  insure  that  any  trials  of  its  personnel 
were  appropriately  conducted. 

The  result  was  the  creation  of  a  system  of  juris- 
diction that  provides  that  offenses  committed  in 
performance  of  duty,  or  treason,  or  espionage 
against  his  own  country,  will  subject  a  person  to 
trial  by  his  own  authorities.  Other  offenses 
against  the  law  of  the  foreigri  country  where  a 
man  is  stationed  will  be  subject  to  trial  in  the 
foreign  courts,  but  the  foreign  government  must 
give  sympathetic  consideration  to  requests  for 
waiver  of  that  right.  The  normal  safeguards  of 
fair  trial— the  right  of  counsel,  the  right  to  a 
fair  and  speedy  trial,  the  right  to  procure  wit- 
nesses, and  protection  against  double  jeopardy- 
are  expressly  covered. 

The  Committee  is  aware  that  under  the  adniin- 
istrative  agreement  with  Japan  we  agreed  to  im- 
mediately conclude  with  Japan,  at  its  option,  once 
we  have  ratified  this  Status  of  Forces  Agreement, 
an  agreement  on  criminal  jurisdiction  similar  to 
the  provisions  of  this  agreement. 

The  subject  of  claims  is  a  complex  and  technical 
one.  Again,  we  had  to  resolve  these  problems  on 
a  basis  of  practicality  and  equity.  The  provisions 
on  claims  had  to  be  clearly  established  in  order 
that  the  rights  of  the  citizenry  as  well  as  the 
states  covered  by  the  agreement  would  be  pro- 
tected. The  procedures  adopted  result  in  the 
sharing  of  liability  in  cases  of  normal  military 
operations  and  the  appropriate  determination  of 
responsibility  on  an  equitable  basis  in  other  cases. 

The  treaty  sets  forth  a  number  of  procedures 
designed  to  safeguard  the  economy  of  the  country 
receiving  foreign  forces  from  the  impact  of  uncon- 
trolled local  purchasing,  and  similar  operations. 
Reasonable  and  practical  channels  of  dealing  with 
the  civilian  community  are  established. 

I  know  that  the  Congress  has  been  interested 

629 


in  the  subject  of  tax  relief.  The  treaty  neither 
provides  nor  precludes  general  tax  relief  on  ex- 
penditures for  the  common  defense.  The  execu- 
tive brancli  has  concluded  a  series  of  arrangements 
with  pertinent  Nato  countries,  parties  to  this 
agreement,  which  provide  for  relief  from  taxes 
upon  such  U.S.  expenditures.  Copies  of  these 
arrangements  are  available. 

The  treaty  provides  for  the  contingency  that 
operations  in  time  of  hostilities  may  require  dif- 
ferent arrangements.  Provision  is  made  for 
necessary  moclifications. 

The  grant  and  receipt  of  certain  customs  exemp- 
tions and  of  freedom  from  certain  customs  pro- 
cedures are  covered,  and  other  administrative 
privileges  and  immunities  are  set  forth  in  the 
agreements. 

In  summation  of  this  agreement  then,  we  find 
that  procedures  are  established  which  will  reduce 
possible  areas  of  frictions  and  eliminate  the 
worries  of  governments  and  populations  as  to  the 
conduct  of  foreign  troops  upon  their  soil.  Some 
such  procedures  are  essential.  These  procedures 
appear  reasonable,  equitable,  and  just.  In  con- 
sidering them  from  a  practical  point  of  view,  the 
Senate  will  also  wish  to  recall  that  the  stationing 
of  large  numbers  of  foreign  forces  in  the  United 
States  is  probably  not  indicated,  whereas  we  have 
many  people  abroad. 

Protocol  on  Military  Headquarters 

I  should  like  to  turn  now  to  the  Protocol  on 
Military  Headquarters.  This  protocol  is  neces- 
sary because  of  the  international  character  which 
necessarily  attaches  to  the  military  headquarters 
of  an  integrated  force. 

This  protocol  will  apply  to  the  respective  head- 
quarters of  the  Supreme  Allied  Commanders  of 
Nato.  These  will  include  General  Ridgway's 
Headquarters  in  Paris,  Admiral  McCormick's 
Headquarters  at  Norfolk,  Va.,  and  the  Headquar- 
ters of  the  Commanders-in-Chief  of  the  Channel 
Command  in  England.  It  will  also  cover  head- 
quarters immediately  under  them  and  such  other 
subordinate  headquarters  as  the  North  Atlantic 
Council  determines. 

Because  it  is  desirable  to  consider  these  head- 
quarters as  separate  entities,  they  are  given  the 
right  to  acquire  property,  make  contracts  and 
the  capacity  to  sue  and  be  sued. 

In  general,  persons  attached  to  these  headquar- 
ters by  the  respective  Nato  nations  and  their 
civilian  components  and  employees  are  given 
rights  and  responsibilities  parallel  with  those 
created  in  favor  of  individuals  and  forces  covered 
by  the  Nato  Status  of  Forces  Agreement. 

A  few  points  of  difference  are  noteworthy. 
The  International  Headquarters  are  given  no  ju- 
risdiction to  handle  criminal  cases,  certain  claims 
matters,  and  certain  other  administrative  matters 
in  their  own  right — these  remain  the  responsi- 


bility of  the  state  attaching  the  individual  to  the 
headquarters.  For  obvious  reasons  of  military 
security,  the  records  of  the  headquarters  are  de- 
clared to  be  immune  from  process. 

And,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Status  of  Forces  Agree- 
ment, provision  is  made  for  change  in  the  protocol 
in  case  of  actual  hostilities. 

Again,  and  before  leaving  our  consideration 
of  the  protocol,  we  should  note  that  this  action 
is  precedent-making.  We  know  of  no  peacetime 
situation  where  integrated  international  head- 
quarters of  a  military  nature  have  been  estab- 
lished. Friction  between  headquarters  and  the 
countries  where  they  are  situated,  over  adminis- 
trative matters,  would  deter  sorely  the  Nato  de- 
fense effort.  The  procedui^es  established  in  this 
agreement  present  a  sound  basis  to  eliminate  that 
difficulty. 

Agreement  on  NATO 

The  third  agreement  is  the  one  dealing  with  the 
North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization  itself.  The 
provisions  of  the  agreement  give  to  the  Organiza- 
tion legal  stature  with  powers  and  obligations 
consistent  with  its  functions.  In  many  respects 
it  assimilates  the  Organization  to  a  diplomatic 
mission  and  provides  appropriate  status  for  the 
international  staff  and  members  of  delegations 
to  the  Organization. 

The  agreement  is  necessary  if  the  respective 
delegations  and  representatives  to  the  Nato  and 
their  staffs,  together  with  the  international  secre- 
tariat and  subordinate  bodies  of  the  Organization, 
are  to  perform  their  functions. 

The  Council  and  the  subsidiary  bodies  concerned 
are  the  entities  covered  by  the  treaty.  Most  of 
these  are  situated  at  Paris.  A  few  others  are 
situated  elsewhere  in  Europe.  At  the  present 
time  the  only  entities  covered  by  this  treaty  and 
situated  in  the  United  States  are  the  Standing 
Group  of  the  Military  Committee  and  the  Mili- 
tary Kepresentatives  Committee  which  are  located 
in  Washington.  The  Military  Headquarters,  as 
we  have  already  noted,  are  covered  by  the  special 
protocol  dealing  with  them. 

The  agreement  includes  safeguards  to  assure 
cooperation  and  respect  for  local  laws.  Provision 
is  made  for  waiver  of  immunity  from  process,  and 
each  nation  retains  an  unabridged  right  to  require 
any  person  who  abuses  any  privilege  to  leave  its 
territory. 

There  are  provisions  in  this  agreement,  as  in 
the  case  of  the  Protocol  on  Military  Headquarters, 
which  authorize  the  United  States  to  enter  into 
an  arrangement  with  the  Organization  providing 
that  the  United  States  may  employ  and  tax  its 
own  citizens.  The  United  States  has  entered  into 
such  arrangements. 

I  have  mentioned  the  most  important  parts  of 
these  agreements.  They  deal  with  matters  of 
interest  to  various  government  agencies  and  have 


630 


Departmenf  of  Sfaie  Bulhfin 


oeen  negotiated  in  consultation  with  the  Depart- 
ments of  Justice,  Defense,  and  Treasury,  whose 
representatives  are  also  present  here. 

A  bill  to  implement  the  claims  provisions  of 
the  treaties  has  been  transmitted  to  the  Congress.* 
The  interested  agencies  are  agreed  that  they  do 
not  require,  and  do  not  plan  to  submit,  further 
legislation  to  implement  any  of  the  proposed 
treaties. 

I  would  like  to  refer  to  the  respective  messages 
of  the  President  transmitting  these  agreements  to 
the  Senate,  as  well  as  to  the  letters  of  the  Secre- 
tary of  State  forwarding  them  to  the  President, 
and  to  say  that  I  support  the  statements  contained 
therein.  .     . 

In  conclusion  I  want  to  express  my  appreciation 
for  this  opportunity  to  appear  before  this  Com- 
mittee, to  assure  you  of  the  desire  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  State  to  be  as  helpful  as  possible  in  ex- 
plaining any  matters  connected  with  these 
proposals,  and  to  submit  to  this  Committee  my 
personal  belief  that  the  early  ratification  of  these 
agreements  will  be  a  step  forward  in  the  integra- 
tion of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  area. 

The  Nato  nations  are  agreed  that  the  early  rati- 
fication of  these  agreements  is  desirable.  Already 
there  are  three  ratifications  of  the  Status  of  Forces 
and  Civilian  Agreements,  and  one  of  the  protocol. 

In  the  interest  of  setting  up  fair  and  equitable 
ground  rules  under  which  nationals  of  one  country 
can  be  stationed  in  and  work  in  the  territory  of 
other  countries,  in  furtherance  of  the  vital  Nato 
defense  effort,  I  consider  these  agreements  desir- 
able and  in  the  best  interests  of  the  vital  foreign 
policy  of  the  United  States. 

MESSAGE   FROM    PRESIDENT   EISENHOWER 
TO  THE  SENATE^ 

The  White  Hottse, 

February  27, 1953. 
With  a  view  to  receiving  the  advice  and  consent 
of  the  Senate  to  ratification,  I  transmit  herewith 
a  certified  copy  of  a  protocol  on  the  status  of  Inter- 
national Military  Headquarters  set  up  pursuant 
to  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty,  signed  at  Paris  on 
August  28,  1952.  This  document  is  a  protocol  to 
the  agreement  regarding  status  of  forces  of  parties 
of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty,  and  is  related  to  the 
agreement  on  the  status  of  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty  Organization,  both  previously  transmitted 


*  Reference  here  is  to  draft  legislation  transmitted  by 
the  Department  of  Defense  on  Jan.  19  entitled  "A  Bill 
To  Provide  for  the  Orderly  Settlement  of  Certain  Claims 
Arising  Out  of  Acts  or  Omissions  of  Civilian  Employees 
and  MUitary  Personnel  of  the  United  States  in  ForeigQ 
Countries  and  of  Civilian  Employees  and  Military  Per- 
sonnel of  Foreign  Countries  in  the  United  States,  and  for 
other  purposes." 

"  S.  Exec.  B,  83d  Cong.,  1st  sess.  President  Truman  s 
Messages  to  the  Senate  and  forwarding  letters  sent  to  him 
by  Secretary  Acheson  are  contained  in  S.  Exec.  T,  82d 
Cong.,  2d  sess.,  and  S.  Exec.  U,  82d  Cong.,  2d  sess. 

AprW  27,   J  953 


to  the  Senate  in  the  second  session  of  the  82d 
Congress. 

The  Status  of  Forces  Agreement  of  1951  and  the 
present  protocol,  as  well  as  the  companion  agree- 
ment relating  to  the  status  of  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty  Organization  itself,  are  necessary  parts  of 
the  new  machinery  we  need  to  carry  forward  the 
vital  program  for  the  integrated  defense  forces  of 
the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization.  These 
are  multilateral  agreements  and  thus  provide  that 
basis  of  uniformity  in  these  fields  which  is  essential 
for  Nato  and  its  integrated  operations.  While 
these  agreements  do  not  in  every  respect  reflect  the 
maximum  desires  of  each  country,  and  to  that 
extent  represent  certain  compromises  on  the  part 
of  all,  it  is  my  considered  belief  that  they  provide 
a  workable,  equitable,  and  desirable  framework 
for  Nato  activities  and  peacetime  Nato  military 
operations.  The  early  acceptance  of  these  agree- 
ments by  the  Nato  nations  is  very  important  to  the 
furtherance  of  the  Nato  collective-defense  effort. 

I  also  transmit,  for  the  information  of  the 
Senate,  the  report  made  to  me  by  the  Secretary  of 
State  regarding  this  protocol. 

DwiGHT  D.  Eisenhowek 

SECRETARY     DULLES'     FORWARDING     LETTER 
TO  THE  PRESIDENT' 

Department  of  State, 

February  25,  1953. 

I  have  the  honor  to  submit  to  you  a  certified 
copy  of  a  protocol  on  the  status  of  International 
Military  Headquarters  set  up  pursuant  to  the 
North  Atlantic  Treaty,  signed  at  Paris  on  August 
28, 1952,  with  the  recommendation  that  it  be  trans- 
mitted to  the  Senate  for  its  advice  and  consent  to 
ratification.  .  . 

The  protocol  has  as  its  purpose  the  definition  ot 
the  status  of  any  Supreme  Headquarters  or  Allied 
Headquarters,  and  members  of  their  staffs,  which 
may  be  established  in  the  territory  of  any  of  the 
parties  to  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty.  Supreme 
Headquarters  is  defined  in  the  protocol  to  mean 
Supreme  Headquarters  Allied  Powers  in  Europe, 
Headquarters  of  the  Supreme  Allied  Commander 
Atlantic,  and  any  equivalent  international  mili- 
tary headquarters  set  up  pursuant  to  the  North 
Atlantic  Treaty.  Allied  Headquarters  is  defined 
to  mean  any  Supreme  Headquarters  and  any 
international  military  headquarters  which  is 
immediately  subordinate  to  a  Supreme  Head- 
quartei-s. 

The  status  of  an  Allied  Headquarters  and  its 
personnel  is  determined  primarily  by  setting  forth 
in  the  protocol  the  principles  which  shall  govern 
the  application  thereto  of  the  agreement  between 
the  parties  to  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  regard- 
ing the  status  of  their  forces,  signed  at  London 
June  19, 1951  (S.  Ex.  T,  82d  Cong.,  2d  sess.) .    Sub- 


'  S.  Exec.  B,  83d  Cong.,  1st  sess. 


631 


ject  to  the  provisions  of  the  protocol,  the  agree- 
ment is  to  apply  to  Allied  Headquarters  in  the 
territory  of  a  party  to  the  protocol  in  the  North 
Atlantic  Treaty  area,  and  to  the  military  and  civil- 
ian i)ersonnel  of  such  Headquarters  and  their  de- 
pendents. The  basic  points  covered  with  respect 
to  applying  the  status  of  forces  agreement  of  1951 
may  be  summarized  as  follows: 

1.  The  rights  and  obligations  which  the  agree- 
ment gives  to  or  imposes  upon  the  sending  state 
or  its  authorities  in  respect  of  its  forces  or  their 
civilian  components  shall,  in  respect  of  an  Allied 
Headquarters  and  its  personnel,  be  vested  in  or  at- 
taclied  to  the  appropriate  Supreme  Headquarters 
and  the  authorities  responsible  under  it,  subject 
to  certain  exceptions  enumerated  in  article  4  of  the 
protocol. 

2.  The  obligations  to  waive  claims  imposed  on 
the  contracting  parties  by  article  VIII  of  the 
agreement  shall  be  attached  both  to  Allied  Head- 
quarters and  to  any  party  to  the  protocol  con- 
cerned. The  claims  to  which  paragraph  5  of  ar- 
ticle "VIII  of  the  agreement  applies  shall  include 
claims  arising  out  of  acts  or  omissions  of  any  of 
the  employees  of  an  Allied  Headquarters,  or  out 
of  any  other  act,  omission,  or  occurrence  for  which 
an  Allied  Headquarters  is  legally  responsible,  and 
causing  damage  in  the  territory  of  a  receiving  state 
to  third  parties  other  than  to  any  of  the  parties 
to  the  protocol. 

3.  The  exemption  from  taxation  accorded  under 
article  X  of  the  agreement  to  members  of  a  force 
or  civilian  component  in  respect  of  their  salaries 
and  emoluments  shall  apply,  as  regards  personnel 
of  an  Allied  Headquarters,  to  salaries  and  emolu- 
ments paid  to  them  as  such  personnel  by  the  armed 
service  to  which  they  belong  or  by  which  they  are 
employed,  except  that  they  shall  not  be  exempt 
from  taxation  imposed  by  a  state  of  which  they  are 
a  national. 

4.  An  Allied  Headquarters  shall  have,  subject 
to  the  same  conditions,  the  rights  granted  to  a 
force  under  article  XI  of  the  agreement  with  re- 
spect to  customs  laws  and  regulations  of  a  receiv- 
ing state. 

In  addition  to  prescribing  how  the  status  of 
forces  agreement  of  1951  shall  apply,  the  protocol 
accords  to  an  Allied  Headquarters  special  privi- 
leges and  benefits.     These  include : 

1.  For  the  purpose  of  facilitating  the  establish- 
ment, construction,  maintenance,  and  operation  of 
Allied  Headquarters,  such  Headquarters  are  to  be 
relieved  so  far  as  practicable  from  duties  and  taxes 
affecting  expenditures  by  them  in  the  interest  of 
common  defense  and  for  their  official  and  exclusive 
benefit,  and  each  party  to  the  protocol  is  to  enter 
into  negotiations  with  any  Allied  Headquarters 
operating  in  its  territory  for  the  purpose  of  con- 
cluding an  agreement  to  give  effect  to  this  pro- 
vision. 


632 


2.  No  measure  of  execution  or  measure  directed 
to  the  seizure  or  attachment  of  its  property  oFh 
funds  shall  be  taken  against  any  Allied  Headquar-  ■ 
ters,  except  for  the  purpose  of  paragraph  6  (a)  ii 
of  article  VII  and  article  XIII  of  the  agreement . 

3.  To  enable  it  to  operate  its  international  ■ 
budget,  an  Allied  Headquarters  may  hold  currency  \ 
of  any  kind  and  operate  accounts  in  any  currency. 

4.  The  archives  and  official  documents  of  an 
Allied  Headquarters  kept  in  premises  used  by 
those  Headquarters  or  in  the  possession  of  any 
properlj-  authorized  member  of  the  Headquarters  ' 
shall  be  inviolable,  unless  the  Headquarters  has 
waived  this  immunity.  Allied  Headquarters 
shall,  however,  at  the  request  of  the  receiving  state 
and  in  the  presence  of  a  representative  of  that 
state,  verify  the  nature  of  any  of  such  documents 
to  confirm  they  are  entitled  to  such  immunity. 

The  protocol  further  provides  that  each  Su- 
preme Headquarters  shall  possess  juridical  per- 
sonality and  recognizes  the  capability  of  a  Su- 
preme Headquarters,  under  certain  conditions,  to 
conclude  contracts  and  to  acquire  or  dispose  of 
property.  A  Supreme  Headquarters  may  also, 
subject  to  the  provisions  of  article  VIII  of  the 
agreement,  engage  in  legal  proceedings  as  claim- 
ant or  defendant. 

Under  the  protocol,  any  assets  acquired  from 
the  international  funds  of  an  Allied  Headquarters 
under  its  capital  budget  and  no  longer  required  by 
the  Headquarters  are  to  be  disposed  of  under 
arrangements  approved  by  the  North  Atlantic 
Council  and  the  proceeds  distributed  among  or 
credited  to  the  parties  to  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty  in  the  proportions  in  which  they  have 
contributed  to  the  capital  costs  of  the  Headquar- 
ters. Any  land,  buildings,  or  fixed  installations 
provided  for  the  use  of  an  Allied  Headquarters 
by  the  receiving  state  without  charge  to  the  Head- 
quarters are  to  be  handed  back  when  no  longer 
needed  to  the  receiving  state,  and  any  increase  or 
loss  in  the  value  of  such  property  resulting  from 
its  use  by  the  Headquarters  shall  be  determined 
by  the  North  Atlantic  Council  and  distributed 
among  or  credited  or  debited  to  the  parties  to  the 
North  Atlantic  Treaty  in  the  proportions  in  which 
they  have  contributed  to  the  capital  costs  of  the 
Headquarters. 

With  respect  to  taxation  of  employees  of  an 
Allied  Headquarters  of  categories  agreed  by  the 
North  Atlantic  Council,  a  formula  has  been  pro- 
vided in  the  protocol  that  is  similar  to  the  one 
evolved  in  the  agreement  on  the  status  of  the 
North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization,  signed  at 
Ottawa  on  September  20,  1951  (S.  Ex.  U,  82d 
Cong.,  2d  sess.),  concerning  taxation  on  the  sala- 
ries and  emoluments  jiaid  by  the  Organization  to 
its  officials.  This  formula  provides  exemption  for 
employees  who  are  paid  directly  by  Allied  Head- 
quarters, but  enables  those  states  which  desire  to 
conclude  an  arrangement  with  Allied  Headquar- 

Department  of  Sfate   Bulletin 


tcis  to  employ  and  assign  all  of  its  nationals  who 
are  to  serve  on  the  staff  of  Allied  Headquarters, 
to  pay  the  salaries  and  emoluments  of  such  persons 
from  its  own  funds  at  a  scale  fixed  by  it,  and  to 
charge  income  tax  on  the  salaries  and  emolu- 
ment's so  paid.  In  accordance  with  this  provision, 
the  United  States  is  about  to  sign  an  agreement 
with  the  North  Atlantic  Council,  acting  on  behalf 
of  International  Military  Headquarters,  whereby 
this  Government  will  employ  and  assign  to  such 
Headquarters  all  United  States  nationals  who  are 
to  serve  on  the  staff  thereof  and  pay  the  salaries 
and  emoluments  of  such  persons  from  its  own 
funds  at  a  scale  fixed  by  it.  This  arrangement 
will  be  similar  to  the  one  transmitted  to  the  Senate 
for  its  information  in  connection  with  the  agree- 
ment on  the  status  of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty 
Organization  and  printed  in  Senate  Executive  U, 
82d  Congress,  2d  session. 

This  protocol  is  related  to  the  agreement  regard- 
ing tlie  status  of  forces  of  parties  to  the  North 
Atlantic  Treaty,  and  the  agreement  relating  to 
the  status  of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organiza- 
tion, transmitted  to  the  Senate  in  the  second  ses- 
sion of  the  82d  Congress.  The  former  agreement 
also  relates  to  the  administrative  agreement  with 
Japan,  insofar  as  that  agreement  provides  that 
upon  the  coming  into  force  with  respect  to  the 
United  States  of  the  "Agreement  between  the 
Parties  to  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Kegarding 
the  Status  of  Their  Forces,"  signed  at  London 
June  19,  1951,  the  United  States  will  immediately 
conclude  with  Japan,  at  the  option  of  Japan,  an 
agreement  on  criminal  jurisdiction  similar  to  the 
corresponding  provisions  of  that  agreement. 

These  agreements  provide  for  the  basic  uni- 
formity in  these  fields  which  is  required  in  the 
interest  of  integrated  operations.  They  repre- 
sent a  successful  reconciliation  of  the  views  of 
the  various  countries  concerned  and  establish 
basic  rights  and  responsibilities  which,  though  not 
fully  satisfying  the  views  of  all  countries  in  every 
respect,  nevertheless  represent  a  reasonable,  prac- 
tical, and  realistic  formula  for  these  areas  from 
the  point  of  view  of  the  United  States,  both  as 
a  nation  sending  troops  abroad  under  these  agree- 
ments and  as  a  nation  which  may  be  receiving 
foreign  troops  here  under  their  terms. 

It  is  considered  important,  from  the  point  of 
view  of  furthering  the  Nato  collective  defense 
effort,  that  these  agreements  be  accepted  by  the 
Nato  nations  at  the  earliest  possible  date. 

It  is  hoped  that  the  Senate  will  give  favorable 
consideration  to  the  protocol  at  the  same  time 
that  it  considers  the  agreement  on  the  status  of 
forces  of  1951. 

I  am  authorized  to  state  that  the  Secretary  of 
Defense  concurs  in  the  necessity  for  the  early 
ratification  of  these  agi'eements. 
Respectfully  submitted- 

John  Foster  Dulles 

April  27,   1953 


AMBASSADOR  DRAPER'S  LETTER  OF  MARCH  6 

Press  release  178  dated  April  7 

Paris,  France, 

March  6, 1953. 
Mr  Dear  Senator  Wiley:  I  understand  that 
your  committee  is  presently  considering  the  Status 
of  Forces  Agreement,  the  protocol  on  the  status  of 
International  Military  Headquarters,  and  the 
agreement  on  the  status  of  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty  Organization  itself. 

As  United  States  special  representative  in 
Europe,  and  as  the  United  States  permanent  rep- 
resentative to  the  North  Atlantic  Council,  I  urge 
prompt  approval  of  these  agreements  by  your  com- 
mittee ancl  by  the  Senate  of  the  United  States. 
During  the  past  two  years  the  fourteen  nations  of 
the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization,  in  view 
of  the  existing  threat  of  armed  aggression  and  in 
the  interest  of  their  own  individual  and  collective 
security  have  placed  large  forces  under  Interna- 
tional Command,  many  of  them  outside  their  own 
country.  Common  military  headquarters  have 
been  created  and  are  now  functioning  in  several 
Nato  countries.  It  is  obvious,  in  these  circum- 
stances, that  solutions  on  some  permanent  and 
mutually  acceptable  basis  had  to  be  found  for  a 
whole  series  of  problems  concerning  the  relation- 
ship of  the  forces  and  the  international  military 
headquarters  to  the  countries  in  which  they  are 
stationed. 

These  day-to-day  problems  concerning  customs, 
jurisdiction,  claims,  and  many  other  similar  mat- 
ters can  only  be  solved  in  a  spirit  of  mutual  good 
will.  Nato  military  cooperation  in  peacetime  can- 
not be  effective  unless  these  many  troublesome 
questions  are  the  subject  of  common  agreement. 

It  is  a  tribute  to  the  spirit  of  intimate  coopera- 
tion which  now  prevails  among  the  members  of 
the  alliance  that  all  of  them  have  been  able  to 
reach  common  agreement  on  the  principles  which 
should  control  the  relationship  of  armed  forces 
and  of  international  military  headquarters  to  the 
countries  in  which  they  are  located. 

The  Status  of  Forces  Agreement  now  before 
the  Senate  is  the  result  of  patient  and  friendly 
negotiations  over  a  period  of  months.  It  pro- 
vides for  uniform  treatment  of  all  Nato  forces 
and  makes  possible  equal  treatment  for  United 
States  forces  regardless  of  the  country  in  which 
they  may  be  stationed.  It  appropriately  safe- 
guards tiie  interests  of  the  United  States  and  of 
each  of  our  other  Nato  partners.  I  recommend 
its  approval  without  reservation  or  amendment. 
It  will,  when  ratified,  make  possible  satisfactory 
solution  of  the  problems  raised  by  the  presence 
of  national  forces  in  countries  outside  their  own. 
Approval  by  the  Senate  will  be  further  evidence 
of  the  continued  support  of  the  American  people 
for  the  principle  of  collective  security  and  their 
confidence  in  friendly  peacetime  collaboration 
with  our  treaty  partners.     Without  such  an  agree- 

633 


ment  the  task  of  the  Nato  military  commanders 
would  be  infinitely  more  difficult  and  the  steady 
development  of  common  training,  and  planning 
of  the  Nato  armed  forces  would  be  seriously 
impaired. 

The  agreement  on  the  status  of  the  North 
Atlantic  Treaty  Organization  itself  giving  appro- 
priate status  to  its  staff  and  to  the  fourteen  na- 
tional delegations  accredited  to  it,  is  indispensable 
for  the  proper  operation  of  the  organization.  It 
deals  appropriately  with  the  variety  of  problems 
yrhich  emerge  whenever  an  international  organ- 
ization is  created.  It  gives  the  organization  a 
legal  standing,  defines  its  privileges  and  immuni- 
ties, and  the  status  of  the  staff  of  the  organization 
and  that  of  the  national  delegations  to  Nato. 
This  charter  for  the  organization  follows  closely 
similar  agreements  relating  to  international 
organizations. 

The  military  headquarters  protocol  adapts  the 
appropriate  provisions  of  the  Status  of  Forces 
Agreement  to  the  personnel  assigned  to  interna- 
tional headquarters  and  gives  the  necessary  legal 
status  to  the  headquarters  themselves. 

Approval  of  these  documents  by  the  United 
States  Senate  and  by  the  other  Nato  governments 
will,  in  my  opinion,  mark  a  milestone  in  the  field 
of  international  cooperation  and  the  continued 
progress  of  Nato.  The  fact  that  these  agreements 
are  necessary  is  eloquent  testimony  to  the  fact 
that  Nato  has  progressed  from  an  organization 
which  existed  only  on  paper  a  few  years  ago  to  a 
functioning  peacetime  political  and  military 
organization  in  which  fourteen  nations  are  act- 
ually pooling  their  strength  in  the  interest  of 
their  own  security. 

Respectfully  yours, 

William  H.  Draper,  Jr., 
U.S.  Special  Representative  in  Europe. 

Recommendation  for  Extension 
of  Trade  Agreements  Act 

Message  of  the  President  to  the  Congress  ^ 

In  my  State  of  the  Union  message  I  recom- 
mended that  "the  Congress  take  the  Reciprocal 
Trade  Agreements  Act  under  immediate  study 
and  extend  it  by  appropriate  legislation." 

I  now  recommend  that  the  present  act  be  re- 
newed for  the  period  of  1  year.  I  propose  this 
action  as  an  interim  measure.  As  such,  it  will 
allow  for  the  temporary  continuation  of  our  pres- 
ent trade  program  pending  completion  of  a  thor- 
ough and  comprehensive  re-examination  of  the 
economic-foreign  policy  of  the  United  States. 

I  believe  that  such  a  re-examination  is  impera- 
tive in  order  to  develop  more  effective  solutions 
to  the  international  economic  problems  today  con- 

'  S.  doc.  38,  83d  Cong.,  1st  sess. 

634 


fronting  the  United  States  and  its  partners  ii 
the  community  of  free  nations.  It  is  my  inten 
tion  that  the  executive  branch  shall  consult  witl 
the  Congress  in  developing  recommendations 
based  upon  the  studies  that  will  be  made. 

Our  trade  policy  is  only  one  part,  although  a 
vital  part,  of  a  larger  problem.  This  probleir 
embraces  the  need  to  develop,  through  coopera- 
tive action  among  the  free  nations,  a  strong  and 
self-supporting  economic  system  capable  of  pro- 
viding both  the  military  strength  to  deter  aggres- 
sion and  the  rising  productivity  that  can  improv? 
living  standards. 

No  feature  of  American  policy  is  more  impor- 
tant in  this  respect  than  the  course  which  we  set 
in  our  economic  relations  with  other  nations.  The 
long-term  economic  stability  of  the  whole  free 
world  and  the  overriding  question  of  world  peace 
will  be  heavily  influenced  by  the  wisdom  of  oui 
decisions.  As  for  the  United  States  itself,  its 
security  is  fully  as  dependent  upon  the  economic 
health  and  stability  of  the  other  free  nations  as 
upon  their  adequate  military  strength. 

The  problem  is  far  from  simple.  It  is  a  com- 
plex of  many  features  of  our  foreign  and  domestic 
programs.  Our  domestic  economic  policies  cast 
their  shadows  upon  nations  far  beyond  our 
borders.  Conversely,  our  foreign-economic  pol- 
icy has  a  direct  impact  upon  our  domestic  econ- 
omy. "We  must  make  a  careful  study  of  these 
intricate  relationships  in  order  that  we' may  chart 
a  sound  coui-se  for  the  nation. 

The  building  of  a  productive  and  strong  eco- 
nomic system  within  the  free  world,  one  in  which 
each  country  may  better  sustain  itself  through 
its  own  efforts,  will  require  action  by  other  gov- 
ernments, as  well  as  by  the  United  States,  over 
a  wide  range  of  economic  activities.  These  must 
include  adoption  of  sound  internal  policies,  crea- 
tion of  conditions  fostering  international  invest- 
ment, assistance  to  underdeveloped  areas,  progress 
toward  freedom  of  international  payments  and 
convertibility  of  currencies,  and  trade  arrange- 
ments aimed  at  the  widest  possible  multilateral 
trade. 

In  working  toward  these  goals,  our  own  trade 
policy  as  well  as  that  of  other  countries  should 
contribute  tothe  highest  possible  level  of  trade  on 
a  basis  that  is  profitable  and  equitable  for  all.  The 
world  must  achieve  an  expanding  trade,  balanced 
at  high  levels,  which  will  permit  each  nation  to 
make  its  full  contribution  to  the  progress  of  the 
free  world's  economy  and  to  share  fully  the  bene- 
fits of  this  progress.  ■ 
The  solution  of  the  free  world's  economic  prob-  * 
lems  is  a  cooperative  task.  It  is  not  one  which  the  ; 
United  States,  however  strong  its  leadership  and 
however  firm  its  dedication  to  these  objectives,  can 
effectively  attack  alone.  But  two  truths  are  clear  : 
the  United  States'  share  in  this  undertaking  is  so 
large  as  to  be  crucially  important  to  its  success — 
and  its  success  is  crucially  important  to  the  United 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


States.  This  last  truth  applies  with  particular 
force  to  many  of  our  domestic  industries  and  es- 
pecially to  agriculture  with  its  great  and  expand- 
ing output. 

I  am  confident  that  the  governments  of  other 
countries  are  prepared  to  do  their  part  in  working 
with  us  toward  these  common  goals,  and  we  shall 
from  time  to  time  be  consulting  with  them.  The 
extension  for  one  year  of  the  present  Reciprocal 
Trade  Agreements  Act  will  provide  us  the  time 
necessary  to  study  and  define  a  foreign  economic 
policy  which  will  be  comprehensive,  constructive, 
and  consistent  with  the  needs  both  of  the  American 
economy  and  of  American  foreign  policy. 

Mr.  DeMille  To  Confer 
With  Mr.  Johnson 

Press  release  19S  dated  April  18 

Kobert  L.  Johnson,  Administrator  of  the  Inter- 
national Information  Administration,  has  asked 
Cecil  B.  DeMille,  outstanding  leader  in  the  film 
industry,  to  come  to  Washington  to  confer  with 
him  on  tlie  use  of  motion  pictures  in  the  overseas 
information  program. 

Motion  pictures  are  one  of  five  means  of  commu- 
nication used  by  our  overseas  information  pro- 
gram which  also  includes  the  worldwide  use  of 
press,  radio,  Usis  libraries,  and  the  Educational 
Exchange  Program.  This  conference  with  Mr. 
DeMille,  starting  April  20,  is  pai't  of  Mr.  John- 
son's overall  plan  to  invite  leading  experts  in 
various  fields  to  give  him  the  benefit  of  their 
advice  and  thinking. 


Alfred  H.  Morton  To  Become 
Consultant  on  Telecommunications 

Press  release  197  dated  April  17 

Robert  L.  Johnson,  Administrator  of  the  Inter- 
national Information  Administration,  has  asked 
Alfred  H.  Morton,  Deputy  Administrator  and 
head  of  the  Voice  of  America  in  New  York,  to 
come  to  Washington  to  serve  as  his  chief  con- 
sultant in  "the  all-important  field  of  telecommuni- 
cation." 

Mr.  Johnson  said  he  is  determined  to  create  a 
stronger,  more  effective,  and  more  efficient  Inter- 
national Information  and  Educational  Exchange 
Program  because  "'this  activity  is  vitally  impor- 
tant to  the  United  States  Government." 

Mr.  Johnson,  President  Eisenhower's  choice  to 
revitalize  U.S.  overseas  information  activities, 
said  "the  program  which  the  new  administration 
envisages  requires  careful  thought,  study,  and 
long-range  planning." 

The  Administrator  pointed  out  that  Mr.  Mor- 
ton's 30  years'  experience  in  radio  and  active  in- 
terest in  television  since  its  inception  would  be  in- 
valuable to  him  at  this  time,  and  added,  "I  am 


asking  him  to  make  that  experience  more  readily 
available  to  me  by  serving  as  my  chief  consultant 
on  those  matters  here  in  Washington." 

Mr.  Morton,  well-known  leader  in  the  radio  in- 
dustry who  has  directed  the  Voice  of  America 
since  October  1,  1952,  stated  that  he  agreed  to 
assume  these  new  responsibilities  at  Mr.  Johnson's 
request  and  plans  to  take  over  his  duties  in  Wash- 
ington on  Monday,  April  20. 

Robert  J.  Francis  will  be  Acting  Deputy  Ad- 
ministrator of  the  Voice  of  America  in  New  York 
until  such  time  as  a  new  director  is  appointed. 


PUBLICATIONS 


Recent  Releases 

For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  Oovern- 
ment  Printing  Oflicc,  Wasldngton  25,  D.  C.  Address  re- 
guests  direct  to  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  except 
in  the  case  of  free  publications,  ichich  may  be  obtained 
from  the  Department  of  State. 

Telecommunications.  Treaties  and  Other  International 
Acts  Series  24S9.     Pub.  4685.     113  pp.     30{S. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  American 
Republics  replacing  Inter-American  radio  agreement 
of  Jan.  26,  1940. 

Safety  at  Sea,  North  Atlantic  Ice  Patrol.  Treaties  and 
Other  International  Acts  Series  2507.  Pub.  4719.  16  pp. 
10^. 

Interim  arrangement  between  the  United  States  and 
Other  Governments  revising  the  scale  of  contribu- 
tions under  article  37  of  the  International  Convention 
on  Safety  of  Life  at  Sea — Signed  at  London  May  31, 
1929. 

Regulation    of    Production    and    Marketing    of    Sugar. 

Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2526.  Pub. 
4725.     7  pp.     10«!. 

Protocol  between  the  United  States  and  Other  Gov- 
ernments (prolonging  the  international  agreement  of 
May  6,  1937)— Signed  at  London  Aug.  31,  1951. 

Consular  OflBcers.  Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts 
Series  2J94.     Pub.  4729.     25  pp.     10<f. 

Convention  with  protocol  of  signature  between  the 
United  States  and  the  United  Kingdom — Signed  at 
Washington  June  6,  1951. 

Mutual  Defense  Treaty.  Treaties  and  Other  Interna- 
tional Acts  Series  2529.     Pub.  4733.     8  pp.     10«>. 

Treaty  between  the  United  States  and  the  Republic 
of  the  Philippines — Signed  at  Washington  Aug.  30, 
1951. 

Eradication     of    Foot-and-Mouth    Disease    in     Mexico. 

Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2404.  Pub. 
4736.     47  pp.     20«f. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Mexico — Signed  at  Washington  Mar.  17  and  18,  1947 ; 
Feb.  9  and  Mar.  28,  1949 ;  and  at  Mexico  City  Sept.  26 
and  Oct.  3,  1947 ;  Nov.  24  and  26,  1947 ;  and  Dec.  15, 
1947 ;  agreement  dated  at  Mexico  City  Feb.  3  and  12, 
1949. 


April  27,    1953 


635 


April  27,  1953 


Index 


Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  722 


Agriculture 

Technical  assistance  to  Iraq  for  land  develop- 
ment   program 610 

American  Principles 

Maintaining  Charter  standards  for  International 

civil  servants   (Lodge),  text  of  resolution  .       620 

The  chance  for  peace   (Elsenhower) 599 

The  first  90  days  (Dulles) 603 

American  Republics 

Adult  education  seminar  to  convene  at  Cludad 

TrujUlo 627 

Asia 

JAPAN:  U.S.    interest   in   stability   of   Japan's 

economy 611 

KOREA : 

Full  truce  talks  to  reopen  at  Panmunjom  .  .  .       608 
The   Soviet   germ   warfare   campaign:    A   case 

history    (Gross) 612 

Canada 

Libby  Dam  and  reservoir 611 

Congress 

Recommendation  for  extension  of  trade  agree- 
ments act    (Elsenhower) 634 

Senate  begins  consideration  of  Nato  treaties  .  .  .  628 
Specified  exemption  laws  for  escapee  program  .  ,  611 
Europe 

GREECE:  Unifies  exchange  system 623 

YUGOSLAVIA:   MsA  grant  to  Yugoslavia 610 

U.  S.  S.  R. :   The  Soviet  germ  warfare  campaign: 

A  case  history  (Gross) 612 

Finance 

Greece  unifies  exchange  system 623 

International  Information 

Alfred  H.  Morton  to  become  consultant  on  tele- 
communications           635 

Mr.  DeMille  to  confer  with  Mr.  Johnson 635 

International  Meetings 

Adult  education  seminar  to  convene  at  Ciudad 

Trujillo 627 

Mutual  Aid  and  Defense 

Senate  begins  consideration  of  Nato  treaties  .  .  628 
Mutual  Security 

MsA  grant  to  Yugoslavia 610 

The  chance  for  peace  (Elsenhower) 599 

The  first  90  days  (Dulles) '  '  603 


Near  and  Middle  East 

IRAQ:  Technical   assistance  for  land  develop- 
ment program 610 

North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization 

Senate  begins  consideration  of  Nato  treaties  .  .  .      628 

Presidential  Documents 

MESSAGES  TO   CONGRESS:    Recommendation 

for  extension  of  trade  agreements  act  ....  634 
Specified  exemption  laws  for  escapee  program  .  .  611 
Prisoners  of  War 

Pull  truce  talks  to  reopen  at  Panmunjom  ....      608 
Publications 
Recent  Releases 635 

Technical  Cooperation  and  Development 

Technical  assistance  to  Iraq  for  land  develop- 
ment   program 610 

Trade 

Proposals  for  agreement  on  cartel  practices  .  .  .      626 
Recommendation  for  extension  of  trade  agree- 
ments act 634 

United  Nations 

Adult  education  seminar  to  convene  at  Ciudad 

Trujillo g27 

Maintaining  Charter  standards  for  international 

civil  servants  (Lodge),  text  of  resolution  .  .  620 

Proposals  for  agreement  on  cartel  practices  .  .  .  626 

The  chance  for  peace  (Eisenhower) 599 

The  Soviet  germ  warfare  campaign:  A  case  his- 
tory   (Gross) 612 

Trygve  Lie's  work  praised;  welcome  extended  to 

his  successor  (Lodge) 618 

U.N.  Documents:  A  selected  bibliography  .      '  '.  627 

U.S.  in  the  U.N ........  624 

Name  Index 

DeMille,    Cecil   B 53= 

Draper,  William  H.,  Jr 633 

Dulles,   Secretary .'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.  603  631 

Eisenhower,  President 599   611  631  634 

Goodykoontz,  Dr.  Bess '  527 

Gross,  Ernest  A !!!!!!  612 

Hammarskjold,    Dag ."..'.'.'.'.  .  .  .'  619 

Harrison,  General 608 

Johnson,  Robert  L 635 

Lodge,  Henry  Cabot,  Jr 618  620 

Lodge,  Henry  Cabot,  Jr '  "  '  6I8'  620 

Lie,  Trygve '. '  '  'gin 

Morton,  Alfred  H gog 

Smith,  Walter  Bedell g^B 


Check  List  of  Department  of  State 
Press  Releases:  April  13-18, 1953 

Releases  may  be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  the 
Special  Assistant  for  Press  Relations,  Department 
of  State,  Washington  25,  D.  C. 

Press  releases  issued  prior  to  April  13  which 
appear  in  tliis  issue  of  the  BtrLLETiN  are  Nos.  175 
of  Apr.  6,  177  of  Apr.  7,  178  of  Apr.  7,  187  of  Apr. 
10,  188  of  Apr.  10,  and  190  of  Apr.  11. 

Subject 

Rubottom :  Pan  Americanism 
Swiss-German  property  agreement 
Auerbach  :  Visa  function 
Morton  :  U.S.  trade  policy 
Linder  :  House  dairy  committee 
Text  of  German  bond  agreement 
Morton  :  Chief  consultant,  Mr.  Johnson 
Mr.  DeMille  to  confer  with  Iia 
Ministerial  meeting  of  Nac 
Dulles  :  The  first  90  days 

tHeld  for  a  later  issue  of  the  Bulletin. 
*Not  printed. 


No. 

Date 

tl91 

4/13 

tl92 

4/15 

tl93 

4/15 

tl94 

4/16 

*195 

4/16 

tl96 

4/16 

197 

4/17 

198 

4/18 

tl99 

4/18 

200 

4/18 

U.   S.   GOVERNMENT   PRINTING    OFFICE;  1953 


^Uie/  Q)efia^t'meni/  o^  t/iate^ 


■*Te3 


AT  THE  CROSSROADS  IN  U.S.  TRADE  POLICY    • 

647 
by  /Assistant  Secretary  Morton 

THE   UNITED   NATIONS:   A   PLACE    TO  PROMOTE 

PEACE     •      by  Henry  Cabot  Lodge,  Jr 658 

THE  VISA  FUNCTION  UNDER  THE  IMMIGRATION 

AND  NATIONALITY  ACT    •    by  Frank  L.  Auerbach      .     642 

PRESIDENT  FAVORS  INCREASED  AID  TO  MIGRANTS 
FROM  EUROPE: 

Letter  to  Congressional  Leaders 639 

Exchange  of  Letters  With  Queen  Juliana 639 

Letter  to  Migration  Committee 641 


For  index  see  back  cover 


Boston  Public  Library 
Superintendent  of  Documents 

JUN  1-1953 


Me  Qje/iwic^e^ ^/ y^a^    JOllllGtin 


Vol.  XXVIII.  No.  723  •  Publication  5051 
May  4,  1953 


For  sale  by  the  Snperlntendent  of  Docnments 

U.S.  OovernmeDt  Printing  Office 

Washington  26,  D.O. 

Peick: 

(2  Issues,  domestic  $7.60,  (oreign  $10.26 

Single  copy,  20  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has 
been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Budget  (January  22,  1962). 
note:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinfd.  Citation  of  the  Depaetmkni 
o?  Statu  Bdlletdj  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  BVLLETIN, 
a  weekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publications, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  with  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  work  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETIN  includes 
selected  press  releases  on  foreign  pol- 
icy issued  by  the  While  House  and 
the  Department,  and  statements  and 
addresses  made  by  the  President  and 
by  the  Secretary  of  State  and  other 
officers  of  the  Department,  as  well  as 
special  articles  on  various  phases  of 
international  affairs  and  the  func- 
tions of  the  Department.  Informa- 
tion is  included  concerning  treaties 
and  international  agreements  to 
which  the  United  States  is  or  may 
become  a  party  and  treaties  of  gen- 
eral international  interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
u>ell  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


President  Favors  Increased  Aid  to  Migrants  From  Europe 


Following  are  the  texts  of  an  identical  letter 
which  the  President  sent  on  April  22  to  Vice  Presi- 
dent Nixon,  President  of  the  Senate,  and  Joseph 
W.  Martin,  Jr.,  Speaker  of  the  House  of  Repre- 
sentatives, recommending  the  enactment  of  emer- 
gency immigration  legislation  for  the  special  ad- 
mission of  European  immigrants;  a  letter  dated 
March  18  from  Queen  Juliana  of  the  Netherlands 
to  the  President  and  his  reply,  dated  April  k,  re- 
garding the  problem  of  aid  to  refugees;  and  a  let- 
ter from  the  President  dated  April  11  to  Hugh 
Gibson,  Director  of  the  Intergovernm.ental  Com- 
mittee for  Migration  from  Europe,  regarding  an 
intematioruil  program  to  aid  migrants. 


LETTER  TO  CONGRESSIONAL  LEADERS 

White  House  press  release  dated  April  22 

We  are  all  aware  of  the  tragic  developments  of 
the  past  several  years  which  have  left  countless 
thousands  of  individuals  homeless  refugees  in  the 
heart  of  Europe.  In  recent  months,  the  number 
of  refugees  has  been  increased  by  the  steady  flow 
of  escapees  who  have  braved  death  to  escape  from 
behind  the  Iron  Curtain.  These  refugees  and 
escapees  searching  desperately  for  freedom  look 
to  the  free  world  for  haven. 

In  addition,  the  problem  of  population  pres- 
sures continues  to  be  a  source  of  urgent  concern 
in  several  friendly  countries  in  Europe. 

It  is  imperative  that  we  join  with  the  other 
nations  in  helping  to  find  a  solution  to  these  grave 
questions.  These  refugees,  escapees,  and  dis- 
tressed peoples  now  constitute  an  economic  and 
political  threat  of  constantly  growing  magnitude. 
Tliey  look  to  traditional  American  humanitarian 
concern  for  the  oppressed.  International  political 
considerations  are  also  factors  which  are  involved. 
We  should  take  reasonable  steps  to  help  these 
people  to  the  extent  that  we  share  the  obligation 
of  the  free  world. 

Therefore,  after  consideration  of  all  the  points 
of  view  which  have  been  presented,  I  recommend, 
within  the  framework  of  the  immigration  laws, 
the  enactment  of  emergency  inamigration  legisla- 

May  4,   1953 


tion  for  the  special  admission  of  120,000  immi- 
grants per  year  for  the  next  two  years. 

In  order  to  help  resolve  this  current  immigra- 
tion and  refugee  problem  in  the  tradition  of  our 
American  policy,  I  urge  that  the  Congress  give 
this  recommendation  its  earliest  consideration. 
Sincerely, 

DwiGHT  D.  Eisenhower 

EXCHANGE  OF  LETTERS  BETWEEN  THE 
PRESIDENT  AND  QUEEN  JULIANA 


White  House  press  release  dated  April  23 


April  4,  1953 


My  Dear  Queen  Juliana  : 

Prince  Bernhard  has  given  me  your  letter  of 
March  18,  1953  and  an  accompanying  memoran- 
dum '  concerning  the  plight  of  refugees  through- 
out the  world.  Your  preoccupation  with  the 
challenge  which  refugees  present  to  the  free  world 
at  a  time  when  your  own  country  and  people  are 
facing  so  nobly  the  burdens  of  over-crowding  and 
the  disastrous  effects  of  the  recent  floods,  demon- 
strates again  the  compassion  which  Your  Majesty 
has  always  shown  for  those  in  distress  beyond  her 
own  borders.  I  share  this  concern  with  you.  The 
United  States  Government  stands  ready  at  any 
time  to  consider  constructive  international  meas- 
ures to  alleviate  the  problems  presented  so  sympa- 
thetically in  your  letter  and  memorandum. 

The  refugees  in  Germany  constitute  a  substan- 
tial proportion  of  the  German  population.  The 
United  States  Government,  in  planning  economic 
measures  of  assistance  with  the  authorities  of  the 
German  Federal  Eepublic,  has  always  taken  the 
refugees  into  account.  Along  with  the  indigenous 
population,  they  have  in  large  part  contributed  to 
and  benefited  from  the  rising  level  of  the  German 
economy.  The  achievement  of  economic  balance 
and  the  expansion  of  employment  opportunities 
in  Germany  have  been  primary  objectives  of 
United  States  measures  of  assistance  to  the  Ger- 
man economy.  The  United  States  Government 
will  persist  in  these  efforts  in  collaboration  with 


'  The  memorandum  is  not  printed  here. 


639 


the  German  Federal  authorities.  This  collabora- 
tion has  been  particularly  close  and  continuous  in 
recent  months  since  the  flow  of  refugees  into  Berlin 
has  increased. 

Your  letter  points  out  that  emigration  may  also 
play  a  role  in  relieving  population  pressures  in 
Germany  and  other  countries  whose  governments 
also  provide  asylum  for  refugees.  To  provide 
opportunities  for  decent  livelihood  in  countries  of 
immigration  for  migrants  and  refugees,  the  United 
States  Government  has  given  active  support  to 
the  Intergovernmental  Committee  for  European 
Migration.  At  its  forthcoming  session  in  Geneva, 
the  Migration  Committee  will  give  further  atten- 
tion to  ways  and  means  of  expanding  oppor- 
tunities for  emigration  overseas. 

The  United  States  Government,  under  its 
Escapee  Program,  is  also  providing  assistance  in 
assimilation  and  resettlement  for  those  who  are 
currently  fleeing  from  Eastern  European  countries 
into  German_y,  Trieste,  Austria,  Turkey,  Italy  and 
Greece.  Tlus  assistance  is  supplementary  to  that 
provided  by  these  countries  of  first  asylum  and 
the  voluntary  agencies  which  provide  the  essen- 
tial human  touch  in  their  services  to  refugees. 

Present  efforts  to  re-establish  refugees  either 
through  integration  in  their  present  countries  of 
residence  or  emigration,  should  be  intensified. 
I  am  confident  that  the  free  world  will  respond 
to  meet  the  challenge  which  the  refugees  present 
not  only  because  they  are  human  beings  whose 
dignity  and  self-respect  are  at  stake,  but  because 
they  desire  with  us  to  play  their  part  in  achieving 
peace  and  order  in  the  world. 

With  expressions  of  great  respect  and  warm 
personal  esteem. 
Sincerely, 

DwiGHT  D.  Eisenhower 


March  18,  1953 

My  Dear  Mr.  President, 

The  people  of  the  United  States  have  magnifi- 
cently shown  their  warmhearted  sympathy  for 
those  in  our  country  who  through  the  flood  lost 
their  homes  and  are  in  great  distress.  American 
help  came  pouring  into  our  stricken  land.  Help 
came  indeed,  from  all  over  the  world,  to  relieve 
us  in  our  dire  need.  With  profound  gratitude  in 
our  hearts  we  see  the  problem  of  our  homeless 
solved  on  a  world  basis  by  one  spontaneous  move 
of  generosity  from  peoples  and  governments  alike. 
This  generous  support  has  been  of  great  material, 
and  also  of  immeasurable  moral  help  to  us. 

Sympathy  for  the  victims  of  distress  is  well 
known  to  be  a  great  American  tradition.  I  feel 
justified,  therefore,  to  ask  for  your  warm  attention 
to  the  problem  of  those  who  became  homeless  by 
persecution :  the  refugees  of  the  entire  world. 

I  appeal  to  you  for  personally  taking  the  lead  in 
solving  this  ever  increasing  world  problem  on  a 

640 


world  basis.  I  strongly  feel  that  this  problem  is 
one  of  the  most  dangerous  and  tragic  elements 
in  an  uncertain  future. 

I  am  aware  that  in  the  past  year,  through  inter- 
national effort  generously  supported  by  the  United 
States  Government,  a  great  many  refugees  have 
found  a  new  home,  but  the  problem  is  still  far  from 
solved.  Thousands  of  new  refugees,  mostly  in 
circumstances  of  great  distress  and  often  in  a  state 
of  mental  despair,  are  in  need  of  our  help. 

There  are  still  over  400,000  refugees  living  in 
camps  in  Europe.  Tens  of  thousands  of  refugees 
are  fleeing  from  the  Eastern  Zone  of  Germany 
into  West  Berlin.  There  are  still  many  thousands 
of  refugees  elsewhere  in  the  world.  A  concerted 
international  action  is  therefore  indicated. 

The  problem  of  the  refugees  can  only  be  solved 
if  they  are  given  opportunities  to  resettle  in  new 
countries,  or  if  they  are  assimilated  in  their  coun- 
tries of  present  residence. 

Mass  resettlement  schemes,  however,  are  seri- 
ously hampered  at  the  present  time,  because  in 
various  countries  of  immigration  refugees  are  not 
given  enough  economic  opportunities.  Moreover, 
in  certain  European  countries,  like  my  own,  the 
pressure  of  surplus  population  leaves  little  room 
for  absorbing  them. 

Unless  legislation  in  the  countries  of  immigra- 
tion specifically  permits  the  entry  of  refugees  and 
their  families,  including  those  in  destitute  circum- 
stances, it  is  to  be  feared  only  very  small  numbers 
of  refugees  will  get  a  chance  to  emigrate. 

A  new  approach  is  necessary,  therefore,  which 
opens  large  opportunities  for  immigration  and 
also  creates  the  necessary  economic  conditions  per- 
mitting the  assimilation  of  refugees  in  the  coun- 
tries of  their  present  residence. 

Efforts  to  stimulate  this  assimilation  are  at  the 
present  time  being  made  in  several  countries,  in 
particular  through  the  operation  of  an  important 
grant  from  an  American  foundation,  in  close  co- 
operation between  the  Governments  concerned 
and  the  Voluntary  Agencies  working  on  behalf 
of  the  refugees.  However,  private  agencies  do 
not  dispose  of  the  necessary  resources.  Govern- 
mental action  will  be  necessary  to  open  credit 
facilities  for  all  those  refugees  who  are  only  too 
willing  to  support  and  house  themselves  if  they 
are  given  the  initial  opportunity  to  regain  their 
independence. 

These  aspects  should  receive  due  attention  when- 
ever plans  are  made  to  promote  the  economic  de- 
velopment and  stability  of  the  world.  Neglecting 
them  means  that  tens  of  thousands  of  refugees 
are  condemned  to  live  in  camps  without  any  hope 
for  the  future  for  many  more  years.  Such  a 
tragedy,  if  it  were  to  occur,  would  destroy  the 
faith  in  the  privileges  of  freedom  not  only  of  the 
refugees  themselves,  but  also  of  their  kinsmen 
whom  they  have  left  behind. 

Discontentment,  frustration  and  even  despair  is 
felt  by  millions  of  uprooted  people,  dislocated  all 

Department  of  State   Bulletin 


over  the  world.  The  free  world  cannot  tolerate 
so  rrmch  suffering  in  its  midst  without  having  to 
suffer  itself. 

To  preserve  their  human  dignity  and  restore 
their  self-respect,  the  right  psychological  and 
spiritual  approach  is  of  overriding  importance. 
How  could  refugees  ever  trust  free  society  if  it 
shows  interest  only  for  trained  muscles  or  brains, 
but  lacks  respect  for  the  higher  values  of  life ;  if 
it  looks  at  refugees  only  as  labor  potential,  and 
refuses  those  who  cannot  work;  if  it  separates 
tliem  from  their  families  ? 

It  is  my  conviction  that  the  refugee  problem 
should  be  tackled  in  the  shortest  possible  time  in 
its  entirety. 

The  Netherlands  will  be  glad  to  cooperate  in 
any  planning  and,  within  the  practical  limits  of 
its  capacities,  in  any  constructive  effort  to  arrive 
at  results. 

Although  I  fully  understand  the  multitude  and 
magnitude  of  the  problems  confronting  you,  I  had 
to  lay  this  matter  of  ever-growing  importance 
before  you,  conscious  of  the  responsibility  of  all 
for  all,  a  responsibility  which  in  the  plight  of  the 
Netherlands  the  entire  world  has  accepted  and 
lived  up  to  in  such  an  impressive  way.  In  all 
humility  we  saw  the  lesson  of  loving  one's  neigh- 
bor being  observed  in  a  world  otherwise  so  deeply 
disturbed  by  international  strife. 

I  am  confident  you  will  find  the  right  approach 
to  this  problem.     May  it  be  given  you  to  solve  it. 
Thus  world  peace  will  gain. 
Yours  sincerely, 

Juliana 

LETTER  TO  MIGRATION  COMMITTEE 

April  11,  1953 

Dear  Mr.  Gibson  : 

Recalling  your  recent  conference  with  me  at  the 
White  House  at  which  you  so  ably  set  forth  the 
gravity  and  extent  of  population  pressures  in 
certain  countries  in  Europe  and  the  additional 
burdens  assumed  by  many  of  these  countries  in 
the  reception  of  new  refugees  from  Eastern 
Europe,  I  welcome  the  opportunity  afforded  by 
the  Fifth  Session  of  the  Intergovernmental  Com- 
mittee for  European  Migration  to  respond  to  your 
presentation  on  behalf  of  the  Committee. 

I  am  fully  aware  of  the  need  for  international 
action  and  collaboration  in  developing  opportuni- 
ties in  many  countries  of  the  world  for  those  in 
Europe  who  desire  to  emigrate.  By  emigration 
they  may  achieve  self-dependence  through  useful 
employment  and  live  with  their  families  in  dignity 
and  self-respect  doing  their  part  to  contribute  to 
peace  and  order  in  the  world.  The  Migration 
Committee,  organized  in  Brussels  in  1951,  has 
taken  important  initial  steps  to  facilitate  the 
movement  of  migrants  and  refugees  from  Europe. 
The  United  States  Government  notes  with  satis- 


faction not  only  the  financial  support  which  the 
member  governments  have  given  to  the  Commit- 
tee, but  the  manner  in  which  these  governments 
have  assisted  by  receiving  migrants  and  refugees. 

You  stated  that  the  results  to  date  have  been 
modest.  I  believe  that  greater  achievement  is 
possible  and  will  depend  upon  sound  and  modest 
beginnings.  The  task  before  the  Committee  calls 
for  intensive  effort  and  resourcefulness  in  finding 
step-by-step  the  best  ways  and  means  of  develop- 
ing and  applying  available  international  resources 
in  assistance  to  the  emigration  and  immigration 
countries  in  resolving  their  mutual  problems. 
The  United  States  Government  fully  supports  the 
efforts  which  the  Committee  is  making  to  assist 
those  in  Europe  seeking  opportunities  for  a  liveli- 
hood in  other  countries  which  are  in  a  position  to 
receive  them.  The  problems  which  face  the  Com- 
mittee are  under  constant  examination  by  the 
competent  agencies  of  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment and,  as  the  work  of  the  Committee  develops, 
consideration  will  be  given  to  the  manner  in  which 
the  United  States,  in  concert  with  other  govern- 
ments, can  most  helpfully  assist  the  Committee 
in  its  further  efforts. 

I  wish  the  Committee  every  success  in  its  de- 
liberations at  the  Fifth  Session. 
Sincerely, 

DwiGHT  D.  Eisenhower 

The  Honorable  Hugh  Gibson 

Director,  Intergovernmental  Committee  for 
European  Migration 
63  rue  des  Paquis 

Geneva,  Switzerland 


U.S.  Expresses  Sympathy 
for  People  of  Laos 

At  a  news  conference  on  April  17  Michael  J. 
McDerviott,  Special  Assistant  for  Press  Relations, 
made  the  following  statement: 

The  Royal  Government  of  Laos  has  issued  a 
statement  drawing  attention  to  the  attack  upon  the 
territory  of  the  Kingdom  by  Viet  Minh  troops  and 
stating  the  determination  of  the  Government,  the 
army,  and  the  people  of  Laos  with  the  aid  of 
French  Union  troops  to  resist  this  aggression. 

The  Government  of  the  United  States  is  follow- 
ing developments  with  the  closest  attention.  It 
expresses  its  sympathy  with  the  people  of  Laos 
in  their  present  emergency  and  its  fervent  wishes 
to  them,  to  their  troops,  and  to  those  of  the  French 
Union  in  their  efforts  to  resist  and  turn  back  the 
invaders.  The  United  States  will  continue  to  pro- 
vide and  will  study  ways  and  means  of  making 
more  effective  its  assistance  to  the  Associated 
States  of  Indochina  and  to  France  in  the  struggle 
to  destroy  Communist  aggression  in  Laos,  Cam- 
bodia, and  Vietnam. 


May  4,   7953 


641 


The  Visa  Function  Under  the  Immigration  and  Nationality  Act 


iy  Frank  L.  Auerhach  ^ 


Press  release  193  dated  April  15 

I  am  glad  to  be  here  today  and  to  review  with 
you  some  of  the  more  important  changes  the  Im- 
migration and  Nationality  Act  has  brought  about 
in  relation  to  the  visa  function  of  the  Department 
of  State. 

The  new  law,  commonly  referred  to  as  the 
McCarran-Walter  Act,  became  effective  on  Decem- 
ber 24, 1952,  and  thus  has  been  in  operation  for  less 
than  4  months,  a  rather  brief  period  to  assess  its 
effect  in  any  thorough  fashion.  But  compared 
with  the  old  law,  the  new  act  has  brought  about 
certain  changes  in  our  immigration  laws  and  con- 
sequently in  implementing  regulations,  the  effect 
of  whicli  can  already  clearly  be  recognized  in  the 
day-by-day  operations.  I  should  like  to  discuss 
with  you  some  of  these  changes. 

One  of  the  most  important  changes,  if  not  the 
most  important  change  brouglit  about  by  the  new 
law,  is  that  it  eliminates  racial  discrimination 
frorn  naturalization  and  makes  aliens  of  all  races 
eligible  for  immigration  into  the  United  States. 

Before  the  new  act  became  operative  on  Decem- 
ber 24,  1952,  the  Immigration  Act  of  February 
5,  1917,  provided  for  the  so-called  Asiatic  barred 
zone,  natives  of  which,  with  few  exceptions,  could 
not  come  to  the  United  States  as  immigrants.  In 
addition  the  Immigration  Act  of  1924  made  in- 
eligible for  immigration  all  persons  who  under 
our  nationality  laws  were  barred  from  naturali- 
zation. These  provisions  of  the  1924  act  made 
ineligible  for  immigration,  among  others,  natives 
of  Korea  and  Japan.  In  recent  years  this  resulted 
in  many  unfortunate  situations,  particularly  in 
the  case  of  American  servicemen  who  married 

"Address  made  at  New  York  City  before  the  Federal 
Bar  Association  of  New  Torlc.  New  Jersey,  and  Con- 
necticut on  Apr.  16.  Mr.  Auerbach  is  a  foreign  affairs 
officer  in  the  Visa  Office.  For  an  article  entitled  -'Visa 
Work  of  the  Department  of  State  and  the  Foreign  Serv- 
ice," see  BULLETIN  of  Feb.  2,  1953,  p.  195,  and  Feb.  9,  1953, 
p.  232  (also  available  as  Department  of  State  publication 
4you ) . 


642 


Japanese  or  Korean  girls  only  to  discover  that 
under  the  then  applicable  immigration  laws  they 
could  not  bring  their  wives  into  the  United  States. 

In  providing  for  the  immigration  of  persons 
of  Asian  ancestry  the  Immigration  and  Nation- 
ality Act  follows,  generally  speaking,  the  pattern 
set  up  in  1943  when  the  Congress  upon  the  urging 
of  President  Roosevelt  repealed  the  Chinese  Ex- 
clusion Act  and  set  up  a  quota  for  Chinese  persons. 
Different  from  the  case  of  other  immigi-ants 
whose  quota  is  determined  by  place  of  birth,  the 
law  provided  in  the  case  of  Chinese  persons  that 
ancestry  rather  than  place  of  birth  was  to  be  the 
determining  factor  in  establishing  an  alien's  quota. 
A  similar  formula  was  followed  in  1946  when 
Congress  set  up  a  quota  for  East  Indians. 

As  stated  already,  the  new  law  follows  in  gen- 
eral the  formula  of  the  1943  act  as  to  the  determi- 
nation of  quota  chargeability  of  Asian  peoples 
with  some  very  significant  liberalizing  exceptions. 
Under  the  old  law  the  East  Indian  husband,  wife, 
or  child  and  the  Chinese  husband  and  child  of  an 
American  citizen  could  enter  the  United  States 
only  as  quota  immigrants,  which  mostly  meant 
many  years  of  waiting  due  to  the  smallness  of  and 
the  heavy  demand  on  these  quotas.  The  new  law 
accords  nonquota  status  to  any  child,  wife,  and 
husband  of  an  American  citizen,  regardless  of 
their  ancestry  or  race. 

The  sahitory  effect  of  this  liberalization  can  be 
observed  in  the  day-by-day  work  in  the  Visa  Office 
of  the  Department  of  State. 

Quota  Chargeability  of  Asian  Immigrants 

The  quota  chargeability  of  an  Asian  immigrant 
who  is  not  entitled  to  nonquota  status  is  de- 
termined by  his  place  of  birth  if  he  is  born  within 
the  so-called  Asia-Pacific  Triangle,  covering 
roughly  all  Asian  countries  from  India  to  Japan 
and  all  Pacific  Islands  north  of  Australia  and  New 
Zealand.  In  other  words,  a  Japanese  person  born 
in  Korea  is  chargeable  to  the  Korean  quota  while 

Department  of  State   Bulletin 


an  East  Indian  born  in  Japan  is  chargeable  to 
the  Japanese  quota.  If  an  immigrant  who  is 
attributable  by  as  much  as  one-half  of  his  an- 
cestry to  a  people  or  peoples  indigenous  to  the 
xVsia-Pacific  Triangle  is  born  outside  of  the  Tri- 
angle his  quota  is  determined  by  his  ancestry 
rather  than  by  his  place  of  birth.  Due  to  specific 
statutory  provisions  Chinese  persons  who  are 
quota  immigrants  are  always  chargeable  to  the 
Chinese  quota  regardless  of  whether  they  are  born 
within  or  without  the  Asia-Pacific  Triangle. 

Apart  from  the  provisions  relating  to  the  immi- 
gration of  Asian  peoples  the  national  origins  sys- 
tem in  allocating  immigration  quotas  has  by  and 
large  been  continued  in  the  new  act  from  the 
Immigration  Act  of  1924. 

A  new  provision  in  the  Immigration  and  Na- 
tionality Act  places  a  ceiling  of  100  on  the  number 
of  quota  visas  which  may  be  issued  to  natives  of 
colonies  and  dependencies  who  are  chargeable  to 
the  quota  of  the  governing  country.  For  example, 
natives  of  Malta,  Hong  Kong,  Bermuda,  or  Trini- 
dad who  are  chargeable  to  the  quota  of  Great 
Britain  may  not  be  issued  in  any  one  year  more 
than  100  visas  each  of  the  total  quota  of  Great 
Britain.  This  new  provision  has  particular  sig- 
nificance in  the  Portuguese  and  Spanish  quotas 
where  the  colonies  may  absorb  all  of  the  mother 
country's  quota. 

In  order  to  facilitate  the  administration  of  this 
provision  of  the  law  the  Department  of  State  has 
established  by  regulation  so-called  subquotas  of 
100  each.  The  term  subquota  designates  that 
portion  of  the  quota  of  a  governing  country  which 
may  be  made  available,  subject  to  a  limitation  of 
100  annually,  to  quota  immigrants  born  in  any 
colony  or  other  component  or  dependent  areas 
overseas  from  the  governing  country.  Charge- 
able to  such  subquotas  is,  as  a  rule,  any  quota  im- 
migrant born  in  a  colony,  component,  or  dependent 
area.  The  Department  has  determined  that  there 
are  at  present  a  total  of  78  subquotas  of  8  coun- 
tries :  the  quota  for  Great  Britain  and  Northern 
Ireland  has  44  subquotas;  France  16  subquotas; 
Portugal  8  subquotas ;  Spain  and  the  Netherlands 
3  subquotas  each ;  India  2  subquotas ;  and  Belgium 
and  Denmark  1  subquota  each.  Nine  of  the  44 
subquotas  of  Great  Britain  are  allocated  to  British 
colonies  and  dependent  areas  in  the  Western  Hem- 
isphere. They  are  the  Bahamas,  Barbados,  Ber- 
muda, British  Guiana,  British  Honduras,  Ja- 
maica, Leeward  Islands,  Trinidad,  and  Windward 
Islands. 

Change  in  Preference  Quotas 

Another  significant  change  brought  about  by 
the  new  law  is  the  system  of  preferences  within 
quotas.  Under  the  old  law  the  first  50  percent  of 
a  quota  was  available  to  parents,  and  to  husbands 
by  marriage  since  January  1,  1948,  of  American 
citizens  and,  in  the  case  of  quotas  over  300,  to 

May  4,    1953 


so-called  skilled  agriculturists.  The  next  50  per- 
cent of  the  quota  was  available  to  the  wives  and 
children  of  permanent  resident  aliens.  Those 
portions  of  a  quota  not  used  by  either  preference 
group  were  available  to  all  other  immigrants  some- 
times referred  to  as  new  seed  immigrants  because 
they  had  no  close  ties  in  the  United  States. 

Under  the  new  law  relative  preferences  have 
been  expanded  and  in  addition  a  system  of  selec- 
tive immigration  has  been  introduced.  The  first 
50  percent  of  each  quota  is  first  available  to  so- 
called  skilled  aliens  whose  services  are  needed 
urgently  in  the  United  States  because  of  their  high 
education,  technical  training,  specialized  experi- 
ence, or  exceptional  ability.  The  next  30  percent 
of  each  quota  is  available  to  parents  of  American 
citizens  and  the  remaining  20  percent  to  spouses 
and  children  of  aliens  lawfully  admitted  for  per- 
manent residence. 

Any  portion  not  used  by  any  of  these  three  pref- 
erence groups  is  first  available  to  aliens  in  any  of 
the  other  preference  groups  and  if  not  required  by 
them  becomes  available  to  nonpreference  quota 
immigrants.  Twenty-five  percent  of  this  portion 
of  the  quota  not  used  by  the  first  three  preference 
groups,  however,  is  made  available  to  a  so-called 
fourth  preference  quota  group  consisting  of 
brothers  and  sisters  of  American  citizens,  and  to 
the  sons  and  daughters  of  American  citizens  who 
do  not  qualify  for  nonquota  status  because  they 
are  married  or  over  21  years  of  age. 

Up  to  this  time  the  number  of  aliens  who  have 
been  found  qualified  for  the  so-called  first  prefer- 
ence quota  has  been  rather  small,  probably  due  to 
the  fact  that  this  new  preference  for  skilled  aliens, 
which  it  is  expected  will  eventually  benefit  Amer- 
ican economy  and  industry,  has  not  yet  become 
well-known.  There  has  been  a  considerable  de- 
mand for  fourth  preference  quota  visas  particu- 
larly by  brothers  and  sisters  of  American  citizens 
who  through  this  new  preference  find  their  cases 
considered  ahead  of  those  aliens  without  such 
close  family  ties  in  the  United  States. 

Protection  of  American  Labor 

The  introduction  of  the  system  of  selective  im- 
migration was  accompanied  by  another  significant 
change  in  our  immigration  law.  The  new  law 
did  not  re-enact  the  so-called  contract  labor  pro- 
visions but  has  substituted  provisions  designed  to 
safeguard  American  labor  more  effectively  and 
more  flexibly.  The  contract  labor  provisions  of 
the  old  law,  with  few  exceptions,  excluded  from 
admission  into  the  United  States  aliens  who  \yere 
promised  or  had  a  contract  for  labor  in  the  United 
States  which  was  predominantly  manual  in  charac- 
ter. The  purpose  of  this  provision  was  to  protect 
American  labor  from  competition  of  immigrant 
labor.  The  new  law  approaches  this  problem  dif- 
ferently. Immigrants  who  seek  to  enter  the 
United  States  to  perform  skilled  or  unskilled  labor 

643 


are  barred  from  admission  only  if  the  Secretary 
of  Labor  certifies  to  the  Secretary  of  State  and 
the  Attorney  General  a  sufficiency  of  workers  in 
the  United  States  wlio  are  able,  willing,  and  quali- 
fied to  perform  at  the  place  to  which  the  alien 
is  destined  such  skilled  or  unskilled  labor  as  the 
alien  is  seeking  to  perform,  or  that  the  employ- 
ment of  certain  immigrants  will  adversely  affect 
the  wa^es  and  workinn;  conditions  of  the  workers 
in  the  United  States  similarly  employed.  In  the 
absence  of  such  certification  by  the  Secretary  of 
Labor  this  provision  is  inoperative.  So  far,  the 
Secretary  of  Labor  has  not  made  a  certification 
as  contemplated  by  the  law.  The  scope  of  this 
potential  ground  for  exclusion  is  limited.  Even 
after  the  Secretary  of  Labor  has  made  a  certifica- 
tion as  to  the  sufficiency  of  labor  in  a  given  locality 
the  resulting  excluding  provision  applies  only  to 
nonpreference  quota  immigrants  and  immigrants 
entitled  to  nonquota  status  as  natives  of  the  West- 
ern Hemisphere  or  as  former  American  citizens. 
It  does  not  apply  to  any  of  the  other  nonquota 
immigrant    categories    or    to    preference    quota 


immigrants. 


The  abolition  of  the  contract  labor  provisions  of 
the  old  law  has  a  significance  which  affects 
another  important  requirement  of  the  law.  Both 
under  the  old  and  new  law  an  immigrant  may  be 
issued  a  visa  only  if  he  can  show  that  he  will  not 
become  a  public  charge  in  the  United  States. 
Unless  the  alien  had  at  his  disposal  in  this  country 
funds  of  his  own,  proof  that  he  was  not  likely  to 
become  a  public  charge  under  the  old  law  usually 
was  presented  by  the  submission  of  a  so-called 
affidavit  of  support  from  a  relative  or  close  friend 
in  the  United  States  who  expressed  his  willingness 
and  showed  his  ability  to  take  care  of  the  alien 
in  such  way  that  he  would  not  become  a  public 
charge.  The  presentation  of  a  work  contract  in 
this  connection  was  unacceptable  unless  the  alien's 
vocation  was  predominantly  mental.  The  pre- 
sentation of  a  work  contract  for  manual  employ- 
ment not  only  did  not  overcome  the  likelihood  of 
becoming  a  public  charge  but  led  mandatorily  to 
the  denial  of  a  visa  under  the  contract  labor  j)ro- 
visions.  Under  the  new  law  the  presentation  of 
a  work  contract  may  in  some  cases  very  well  be 
the  sole  proof  required  by  the  consul  to  satisfy  the 
requirement  of  the  law  that  the  alien  is  not  likely 
to  become  a  public  charge. 

The  law  contains  another  new  provision  which 
permits  an  immigrant  in  certain  cases  to  over- 
come a  likelihood  of  becoming  a  jniblic  charge. 
In  the  case  of  an  alien  ineligible  to  receive  a  visa 
because  he  is  likely  to  become  a  public  charge  a 
bond  may  be  posted  with  the  Attorney  General. 
Under  the  Department  of  State  visa  regulations 
the  posting  of  such  bond  with  the  Attorney  Gen- 
eral will  be  accepted  by  the  consular  officer  as 
satisfactory  proof  that  the  alien  is  not  likely  to 
become  a  public  charge  in  the  United  States. 

At  this  point  I  should  like  to  comment  briefly 


on  the  public  charge  provision  of  the  statute  as 
it  is  implemented  by  the  regulations  of  the  De- 
partment of  State.  In  the  language  of  tlie  statute 
an  alien  is  ineligible  to  receive  a  visa  if  in  the 
opinion  of  the  consular  officer  at  the  time  of  ap- 
plication for  a  visa,  the  alien  is  likely  at  any  time 
to  become  a  public  charge.  Under  the  Depart- 
ment's regulations  any  conclusion  that  an  alien, 
eligible  to  receive  a  visa,  is  likely  to  become  a  pub- 
lic charge  must  "be  predicated  upon  the  existence 
of  facts  or  circumstances  which  indicate  a  reason- 
able probability  that  the  immigrant  will  become 
a  charge  upon  the  public  after  entry  into  the 
United  States." 

Another  provision  of  the  new  law  relating  to 
the  issuance  of  visas  to  immigrants  is  of  consid- 
erable significance.  Since  the  Alien  Registra- 
tion Act  became  law  in  1940  and  until  the  new 
law  took  effect,  not  only  present  but  also  former 
members  of  proscribed  organizations  were  ex- 
cluded from  admission  into  the  United  States.  In 
other  words,  under  the  old  law  an  alien  who  was  a 
member  of  the  Communist  Party  some  20  years 
ago  but  had  long  since  terminated  his  membership 
could  not  be  issued  an  immigration  visa  even  if 
he  had  become  one  of  the  most  outspoken  and 
effective  fighters  against  communism. 

For  the  first  time  an  escape  clause  for  former 
voluntary  members  of  proscribed  organizations  is 
provided  by  the  new  act.  It  contains  a  defector 
clause  which  permits  the  issuance  of  an  immi- 
grant visa  to  former  voluntary  members  of  pro- 
scribed organizations  if  the  alien  since  the  termi- 
nation of  his  membership,  and  for  at  least  5  years 
before  the  date  of  his  visa  application,  has  been 
actively  oj>posed  to  the  doctrine,  program,  prin- 
ciples, and  ideology  of  the  proscribed  organiza- 
tion to  which  he  belonged.  The  issuance  of  a 
visa  to  such  an  alien  is  conditioned  on  a  finding 
that  his  admission  into  the  United  States  would 
be  in  the  public  interest.  Visa  regulations  of  the 
Department  of  State  provide  that  in  the  interest 
of  a  coordinated  and  uniform  interpretation  of 
what  constitutes  the  public  interest  in  issuing  or 
refusing  visas  to  political  defectors,  all  such  cases 
will  be  referred  by  the  field  to  the  Secretary  of 
State  for  possible  consultation  with  the  Attorney 
General. 

Elimination  of  Sex  Discrimination 

Another  change  in  our  immigration  laws  which 
affects  the  visa  function  of  the  Department  of 
State  should  be  mentioned.  The  new  law  elimi- 
nates the  discrimination  between  sexes  which  could 
be  found  both  in  the  Immigration  Act  of  Febru- 
ary 7, 1917,  and  in  the  act  of  1924.  Under  the  old 
law  an  American  citizen  could  bring  to  this  coun- 
try his  alien  wife  as  a  nonquota  immigrant;  but 
an  American  woman  could  bring  her  alien  hus- 
band by  marriage  since  January  1,  1948,  only  as 
a  preference  quota  immigrant.  An  alien  law- 
fully  admitted   for   permanent   residence  could 


644 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


brin<^  his  wife  to  this  country  as  a  preference 
quota  immigrant  while  an  alien  woman  lawfully 
admitted  to  this  country  could  bring  her  alien 
husband  only  as  a  nonpref  erence  quota  immigrant 
which  in  the  case  of  smaller  quotas  meant  consid- 
erable and  often  indefinite  delay.    .If  an  immi- 
grant husband  and  wife  were  born  in  two  diller- 
Int  countries  and  the  wife  was  chargeable  to  an 
oversubscribed    quota    while    the    husband    was 
chargeable  to  an  open  quota,  under  the  old  law 
the  wife  could  be  charged  to  her  husband  s  quota. 
But  the  reverse  did  not  apply.     In  other  words, 
a  husband  chargeable  to  an  oversubscribed  quota 
could  not  be  charged  to  the  open  quota  ot  his  ac- 
companying wife.     These  and  many  other  pro- 
visions of  the  old  law  which  discriminated  against 
women  have  all  been  eliminated  under  the  Immi- 
gration and  Nationality  Act.    Wives  have  been 
aiven  the  same  status  in  all  respects  as  are  granted 
to  husbands.     In  other  words,  an  alien  husband 
of  an  American  woman  may  be  issued  a  nonquota 
visa  as  can  the  alien  wife  of  an  American  citizen; 
and  an  alien  lawfully  admitted  for  permanent 
residence  may  bring  his  spouse  as  preference  quota 
immigrant  regardless  of  whether  the  preceding 
spouse  is  the  husband  or  the  wife. 

One  new  feature  of  the  Immigration  and  JNa- 
tionality  Act  which  refers  both  to  immigrants  and 
nonimmigrants  is  the  requirement  that  visa  peti- 
tions be  filed  with  the  Immigration  and  Natural- 
ization Service  in  the  case  of  aliens  coming  tem- 
porarily to  the  United  States  for  employment  or 
training  and  in  the  case  of  all  preference  quota 
and  nonquota  immigrants  except  those  who  are 
nonquota  immigrants  due  to  their  birth  m  the 
Western  Hemisphere. 

The  petition  procedure  in  these  cases  rests  ex- 
clusively with  the  Immigration  and  Naturaliza- 
tion Service.  Upon  the  approval  of  a  petition  by 
the  Immigration  and  Naturalization  Service  the 
Department  of  State  is  notified  and  m  turn  for- 
wards to  the  consular  offices  abroad  the  Attorney 
General's  classification  of  the  alien. 

Visas  for  Business  Visitors 

Some  questions  have  arisen  as  to  whethex  cer- 
tain nonimmigrant  aliens  coming  to  the  United 
States  temporarily  are  to  be  considered  tem- 
porary workers  requiring  petitions,  or  visitors  tor 
business  in  whose  case  a  nonimmigrant  visa  may 
be  issued  without  the  prior  approval  of  a  petition. 
Since  it  was  obviously  the  intent  of  the  law  to 
protect  by  the  petition  requirement  American 
labor,  the  Department  of  State  and  the  Immigra- 
tion and  Naturalization  Service  have  agreed  that 
certain  classes  of  nonimmigrant  aliens  who  are 
coming  to  the  United  States  temporarily  for  non- 
compensatory and  noncompetitive  employment 
or  instruction  may  properly  be  classified  as  visi- 
tors for  business.  For  example,  various  American 
firms  who  have  purchased  abroad  machinery  or 

May  4,    1953 


other  equipment  and  have  arranged  for  expert  per- 
sonnel to  install  in  this  country  such  machinery 
and  to  instruct  the  American  personnel  m  its 
operation.  These  aliens,  it  has  been  agreed,  will 
be  considered  visitors  for  business  and  may,  there- 
fore, be  issued  visitors'  visas  without  a  prior  peti- 
tion if  they  continue  to  draw  their  pay  from  their 
foreign  employer  and  receive  from  the  American 
firm  not  more  than  a  subsistence  allo^yance  and 
reimbursement  for  other  expenses  incidental  to 
their  temporary  stay  in  this  country.  . 

Another  example  is  that  of  a  group  ot  minis- 
ters of  religion  who  for  years  have  been  coming 
from  England  in  exchange  with  American  min- 
isters going  to  England  during  the  summer 
months.  These  ministers  coming  from  England 
continue  to  draw  their  salary  in  England  and  are 
the  guests  in  this  country  of  the  American  church 
at  which  they  serve,  or  of  its  members  Here 
a<rain  it  has  been  held  that  a  visitor-for-busmess 
visa  may  properly  be  issued  rather  than  a  visa 
requiring  a  visa  petition. 

A  third  group  of  aliens  is  considered  qualified 
for  classification  as  visitors  for  business  rather 
than  as  temporary   workers.     These  are  aliens 
brouo-ht   to   the  United   States   temporarily    by 
American  exporters  who   are  selling  American 
goods  abroad  and  who  bring  these  aliens  to  this 
country  in  order  to  familiarize  them  with  the 
manufacture,  service  or  sales  methods  of  the  Amer- 
ican product.     The  Immigration  and  Natural- 
ization Service  and  the  Department  of  State  have 
ao-reed  that  these  aliens  may  be  classified  visitors 
for  business  if  the  nature  of  their  instruction  is 
predominantly  mental;  if  securing  this  instruc- 
tion benefits  the  American  national  interest;  and 
if  these  aliens  continue  to  draw  their  pay  from 
their  foreign  employer  who  may  be  a,  foreign 
branch  of  an  American  firm,  and  receive  from 
the  American  firm  not  more  than  a  subsistence 
allowance  and  reimbursement  for  other  expenses 
incidental  to  their  temporary  stay. 

In  view  of  the  concern  sometimes  expressed 
about  the  allegedly  unlimited  power  of  consular 
officers  in  refusing  visas,  as  a  final  point  I  should 
like  to  discuss  the  administrative  procedures  sur- 
rounding the  refusal  and  revocation  of  immigrant 

^^  Wiien  an  immigrant  visa  is  refused  by  a  con- 
sular officer  a  memorandum  of  refusal  is  prepared 
and  retained  in  the  consular  file.  The  action  of 
refusing  an  immigrant  visa  by  a  consular  officer 
has  to  be  reviewed  by  the  consular  officer  in  charge 
of  visa  work  at  the  foreign  post.  If  this  superior 
officer  concurs  in  the  refusal  he  has  to  counter- 
sign the  memorandum  of  refusal.  If  he  does  not 
concur  in  the  refusal  the  case  is  referred  to  the 
Department  for  an  advisory  opinion. 

Once  an  immigrant  visa  is  issued  it  may  be  re- 
voked only  under  the  following  circumstances: 
( 1 )  The  consular  officer  knows,  or  after  investiga- 
tion is  satisfied,  that  the  visa  was  procured  by 

645 


fraud,  willingly  false  or  misleading  representa- 
tion, the  willful  concealment  of  a  material  fact, 
or  other  unlawful  means;  or  (2)  the  consular  offi- 
cer obtains  information  establishino;  the  alien  was 
otherwise  ineligible  to  receive  the  particular  visa 
at  the  time  it  was  issued. 

Notice  of  revocation,  if  practicable,  is  to  be 
given  to  the  alien  at  his  last  known  address  before 
his  departure  for  the  United  States.  Whenever 
circumstances  permit  the  alien  will  also  be  given 
opportunity  to  show  why  he  believes  revocation 
to  be,  or  to  have  been,  unwarranted. 

Once  an  immigrant  visa  has  been  revoked  a  full 
report  concerning  the  revocation  has  to  be  sub- 
mitted to  the  Department  of  State  for  transmis- 
sion to  the  Attorney  General.  If  it  was  not 
practicable  to  give  the  alien  notice  of  revocation 
before  his  departure  for  the  United  States,  the 
report  submitted  to  the  Department  of  State  has 
to  explain  all  the  pertinent  circumstances  in  the 
case. 

In  addition  to  this  procedure  prescribed  by 
regulations  it  has  long  been  the  administrative 
practice  of  the  Visa  Office  to  entertain  inquiries 
by  attorneys  and  other  interested  persons  in  the 
United  States  concerning  the  disposition  of  visa 
cases.  If  there  is  no  case  record  in  the  Depart- 
ment on  the  case  in  which  an  inquiry  is  received 
a  request  for  a  report  on  the  case  will  be  directed 
to  the  field.  If  on  the  basis  of  the  facts  available 
in  the  Department  or  upon  the  report  received 
from  the  field  it  is  found  that  the  handling  of  the 
case  by  the  consular  officer  is  not  consistent  with 
the  Department's  interpretation  of  law  and  regu- 
lations an  appropriate  advisory  opinion  will  be 
despatched  to  the  consular  officer  having  juris- 
diction in  the  case. 

In  this  connection,  I  should  like  to  refer  to  the 
provision  of  the  Immigration  and  Nationality 
Act  which  establishes  that  determination  and 
ruling  by  the  Attorney  General  with  respect  to 
all  questions  of  law  are  controlling  for  all  agen- 
cies entrusted  with  the  administration  of  this  Taw. 
Therefore,  the  interpretation  of  the  Immigration 
and  Nationality  Act  by  the  Department  of  State 
is  not  only  guided  by  pertinent  court  decisions  but 
also  by  rulings  and  requested  opinions  of  the 
Attorney  General. 

These  are  some  of  the  provisions  of  the  Immi- 
gration and  Nationality  Act  which  hare  been 
given  little  if  any  publicity,  but  which  are  of  con- 
siderable importance  to  those  administering  the 
law  and  particularly  to  those  who  are  affected  by 
the  law,  the  immigrant,  the  nonimmigi-ant,  and 
their  sponsors  and  representatives  in  this  country. 
Of  course,  it  is  unavoidable  that  a  new  law  deal- 
ing with  a  subject  matter  as  complicated  as  that 
of  immigration  will  raise  problems,  many  of 
which  cannot  be  recognized  until  the  law  has'been 
in  operation  for  some  time.  As  far  as  the  first 
4  months  of  the  law's  operations  are  concerned, 
it  has  not  presented  any  serious  operational  diffi- 

646 


culties  in  the  visa  field  which  could  not  be  re- 
solved by  reasonable  interpretation  or  adjustment 
of  administrative  procedures. 

The  Visa  Office  of  the  Department  of  State,  by 
the  issuance  of  instructions  and  advisory  opinions, 
IS  doing  all  in  its  power  to  assist  consular  officers 
throughout  the  world  to  achieve  as  uniform  an 
interpretation  of  the  law  as  is  possible.     . 


Secretary  Dulles  Departs 
For  NAC  Ministerial  Meeting 

Statement  by  the  Secretary  ' 

Press  release  206  dated  April  21 

I  believe  the  forthcoming  meeting  of  the  Nato 
ministers  will  be  a  very  important  one.  This  wiU 
be  the  first  time  that  representatives  of  the  Eisen- 
hower administration  have  participated  directly 
in  Nato  ministerial  meetings.  There  are  a  num- 
ber of  matters  which  we  will  wish  to  discuss  with 
allied  governments,  and  there  are  several  impor- 
tant decisions  to  be  taken. 

Our  principal  immediate  objective  will  be  to 
reach  agreement  on  broad  Nato  defense  programs 
for  1953.  I  believe  such  an  agreement  will  be  at- 
tained and  will  provide  for  a  substantial  increase 
in  Nato's  defensive  strength.  In  addition,  we  will 
wish  to  examine  the  current  world  situation, 
especially  in  the  light  of  the  proposals  of  Presi- 
dent Eisenhower  in  his  speech  of  April  16  before 
the  American  Society  of  Newspaper  Editors.^  "We 
also  wish  to  lay  the  groundwork  for  the  develop- 
ment of  plans  for  future  years— long-range  plans 
which  will  enable  us  to  deter  military  attack  from 
without  while  maintaining  our  inner  economic  and 
political  strength. 

In  our  discussions  in  Paris,  we  will  naturally 
wish  to  consider  recent  statements  and  actions  by 
the  Soviet  Government,  in  which  all  Nato  peoples 
have  a  common  interest.  However,  I  do  not  be- 
lieve that  our  present  security  planning  can  be 
modified  by  recent  Soviet  moVes.  As  I  said  in 
my  address  to  the  editors  last  Saturday ,3  nothing 
that  has  happened  so  far  justifies  any  relaxation 
of  effort  nor  any  weakening  of  Nato  defenses. 
Instead,  there  is  good  reason  to  believe  that  the 
growing  strength  of  the  free  world  may  influence 
the  Soviet  Union  decisively  in  the  direction  of 
peace.  The  commonsense  course  for  nations  of 
the  Atlantic  community  is  to  move  forward 
steadily  toward  greater  .strength  and  unity,  main- 
taining always  an  appropriate  balance  between 
our  military  defenses  and  the  basic  economic  sta- 
bility upon  which  both  our  defenses  and  our  entire 
social  order  depend. 

'  Made  at  the  Washington  National  Airport  on  Apr  21 
'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  27,  19.53,  p.  599. 
'  Ibid.,  p.  603. 

Department   of  State   Bulletin 


At  the  Crossroads  in  U.S.  Trade  Policy 


hy  Thruston  B.  Morton 

Assistant  Secretary  for  Congressional  Relations  ^ 


Since  this  city,  the  State  of  Louisiana,  and  as 
a  matter  of  fact  the  entire  Mississippi  Valley,  has 
Buch  an  important  stake  in  international  trade,  i 
am  sure  that  you  would  like  to  know  how  the 
administration  feels  about  your  theme,  Balance 
Trade,  Reduce  Aid."  „      •  i     ^        j  ^i 

I  can  assure  you  that  the  President  and  the 
executive  branch  of  the  Government  agree  that  it 
is  in  our  national  interest  and  m  the  interest  ot 
the  entire  free  world  that  we  increase  trade  and 
thus  reduce  the  need  for  aid.  But  we  are,  in  Wb6, 
at  the  crossroads  in  U.S.  trade  policy. 

This  administration  is  going  to  be  assailed  witn 
two  lines  of  argument.  On  the  one  hand,  im- 
portant groups  will  be  saying:  "We  must  keep  the 
\merican  market  for  American  products.  Why 
should  we  want  to  engage  in  foreign  trade  and 
thus  make  ourselves  dependent  upon  other  na- 
tions over  whom  we  have  no  possible  means  ot 
control  Wliy  should  we  share  our  incompar- 
ably rich  and  extensive  markets  with  other  na- 
tions and  allow  foreign  goods  to  compete  with  the 
products  of  American  workers?" 

They  will  also  argue  that  we  must  keep  out  the 
goods  of  foreign  countries  produced  by  'cheap 
labor  in  order  to  avoid  lowering  our  standard  ot 
living  They  will  claim  that  if  we  permit  im- 
ports from  abroad  we  will  be  faced  with  unem- 
ployment in  our  industries  and  the  closing  down 
of  productive  facilities. 

Then  as  a  final  argument,  the  opponents  ot  any 
measures  to  lower  barriers  to  trade  will  note  that 
our  tariffs  are  the  lowest  they  have  ever  been  in 
our  history,  lower  than  many  other  nations  ot  the 
free  world.  AVliy,  they  conclude,  should  we  lower 
them  any  further?  . 

On  the  other  side  we  have  those  groups  which 
will  contend  that  without  a  solid  economic  foun- 
dation the  mutual-defense  effort  in  the  free  world 


•  Address  made  before  the  8th  Mississippi  Valley  World 
Trade  Conference  at  New  Orleans,  La.,  on  Apr.  17  (press 
release  194  dated  Apr.  16). 

Moy  4,    1953 


is  built  on  quicksand.  They  will  point  out  that 
we  cannot  have  international  political  cooperation 
and  economic  isolation.  They  will  say  that  with 
our  storehouses  piling  up  with  butter,  cheese, 
dried  milk,  cotton,  grains,  and  other  products,  it 
does  not  take  much  imagination  to  realize  how 
dependent  we  are  on  export  markets.  It  we  try 
to  keep  the  American  market  for  our  products, 
foreigners   are   going  to   keep   theirs   for   their 

products.  ,    ,  .,        1 

This  side  also  will  point  out  that  it  makes  no 
sense  to  say  that  low  labor  costs  abroad  can  cut 
our  standard  of  living  if  we  import. 

They  will  note  that  American  automobile  tac- 
tory  workers  get  higher  wages  than  those  of  any 
other  country  and  better  pay  than  most  worlcers 
in  other  American  nonexport  industries.  ISut 
American  cars  are  cheaper  than  foreign  cars  and 
can  undersell  them  in  open  competition.  The  im- 
portant factor  in  trade  isn't  the  wage  per  day; 
it's  the  wage  per  unit  of  product.  Our  workers, 
with  the  mechanized  means  of  production  and 
highly  developed  technology,  are  able  to  produce 
a  greater  number  of  products  per  hour,  thus  re- 
sulting in  lower  costs  per  unit  even  though  their 
wages  per  hour  are  high. 

Furthermore,  they  will  note,  the  U.S.  economy 
has  developed  on  the  basis  of  the  theory  that 
competition  is  what  keeps  our  system  dynamic 
and  progressive.  Give  in  to  the  protection  senti- 
ment, they  say,  and  you  destroy  the  ingredient  m 
American  society  that  makes  it  grow. 

And  lastly,  they  will  reply  that  our  tariffs  may 
be  the  lowest  in  our  history,  but  that  there  are  still 
many,  many  rates  ranging  from  50  to  400  percent 
ad  valorem. 

And  so  the  battle  rages.  Although  the  argu- 
ments of  those  who  recognize  the  need  for  lower- 
ing barriers  to  trade  may  be  more  persuasive  m 
the  abstract,  the  troops  with  special  interests  are 
infinitely  more  effective  in  getting  their  views  pre- 
sented where  it  counts  the  most^before  our  legis- 

647 


Jators.  If  we  are  ever  to  get  a  foreign-trade  policy 
capable  of  serving  as  the  foundation  for  a  strong 
free  world  defense  effort,  it  is  incumbent  upon 
groups  such  as  yours  to  stimulate  a  broader  under- 
standing of  the  issues  involved. 

I'd  like  to  take  myself  out  of  this  crossfire  and 
give  you  some  of  the  facts  which  reveal  the  dan- 
gers to  the  United  States  of  pulling  back  from 
our  policy  of  international  cooperation  in  the  field 
of  trade. 

Gone  are  the  days  when  diplomacy  was  a  mat- 
ter of  ambassadors  influencing  individuals  in 
power  in  foreign  countries  and  dealing  solely  in 
the  political  plane.  Economic  and  trade  policy 
are  very  much  a  part  of  our  diplomacy  and  our 
defense  effort.  President  Eisenhower  put  it  very 
well  in  his  inaugural  address :  ^ 

...  we  are  linked  to  all  free  peoples  not  merely  by 
a  noble  idea  but  by  a  simple  need.  No  free  people  can 
for  long  cling  to  any  privilege  or  enjoy  any  safety  in 
economic  solitude.  For  all  our  own  material  might,  even 
we  need  markets  in  the  world  for  the  surpluses  of  our 
farms  and  our  factories.  Equally,  we  need  for  these 
same  farms  and  factories  vital  materials  and  products 
of  distant  lands.  This  basic  law  of  interdependence,  so 
manifest  in  the  commerce  of  peace,  applies  with  thousand- 
fold intensity  in  the  event  of  war. 

Trade  Restrictions:  An  Aid  to  the  Kremlin 

A  most  important  part  of  our  leadership  is  how 
to  provide  an  economic  foundation  for  a  healthy 
free  world — how  to  build  strength  and  security 
to  counter  both  the  Communist  threats  of  aggres- 
sion and  the  Communist  efforts  to  divide  the  free 
world.  This  problem  is  just  as  real  today  as  it 
was  3  weeks  or  a  month  ago,  when  the  Commu- 
nists launched  on  the  newest  zig  of  their  zigzag 
policy.  If  we  don't  come  up  with  the  right  an- 
swers it  isn't  going  to  matter  to  any  of  us  how 
much  cheese,  glassware,  silk  scarves,  tuna  fish, 
and  shrimp  enter  the  United  States  in  1953,  1954, 
or  any  other  year. 

The  Kremlin's  policy  is  to  create  weakness  and 
disunity  in  the  free  world.  Those  who  tend  to 
pass  off  lightly  the  part  that  U.S.  trade  policy 
plays  in  our  over-all  foreign  policy  should  read 
the  article  that  Stalin  wrote  before  his  death  in 
the  Russian  magazine  Bolshevik  for  October  1952 : 

The  most  important  result  of  the  Second  World  War 
in  its  economic  consequences  must  be  considered  the  dis- 
integration of  a  united,  all-embracing  world  market. 
This  circumstance  determined  further  the  deepening  of 
the  general  crisis  of  the  capitalist  system  .  .  . 

.  .  .  idleness  of  enterprises  in  these  countries  will  in- 
crease. In  this,  properly  speaking,  there  consists  a  deep- 
ening of  the  general  crisis  of  the  world  capitalist  system 
in  connection  with  the  disintegration  of  the  world  market. 

Stalin  saw  that  crisis  in  terms  of  an  "inevitable" 
trade  conflict  between  the  nations  of  the  free 
world.  He  assured  his  readers  that  this  conflict 
meant  the  certain  disintegration  of  free  world 

'  Bulletin  of  Feb.  2,  1953,  p.  168. 

648 


unity  and  the  ultimate  world  triumph  of  com- 
munism. 

"We  need  not  worry,"  was  the  essence  of  his 
remarks.  "The  free  nations  will  destroy  them- 
selves. They  haven't  got  what  it  takes  to  work 
and  prosper  together." 

And  those  who  thought  that  perhaps  with 
Stalin's  death  we  might  get  a  different  Commu- 
nist line  should  read  the  speech  delivered  on  March 
14  by  the  Polish  representative  to  the  Economic 
Commission  for  Europe. 

E.  Milnikiel,  Polish  Minister  to  Sweden,  told 
the  Western  European  countries  at  a  meeting  of 
the  U.N.  unit  not  to  expect  any  help  from  the 
United  States  in  solving  its  economic  problems 
by  "trade,  not  aid." 

Milnikiel's  speech  would  not  have  been  remark- 
able had  it  not  revealed  the  complete  coverage  that 
Communist  information  services  are  currently 
giving  to  every  evidence  of  what  we  may  broadly 
call  "protectionism"  in  the  West — everything 
from  "Buy  American"  to  the  escape-clause  actions 
which  are  invoked  in  an  attempt  to  keep  out  im- 
ports from  the  United  States. 

Those  who  are  anxious  to  avoid  providing  the 
Communists  with  a  weapon  to  beat  us  over  the 
head  are  concerned  by  the  introduction  of  many 
restrictionist  bills  in  this  session  of  Congress. 

At  least  38  bills  have  already  been  introduced 
this  session  to  cut  imports  from  our  friends  and 
allies. 

At  least  22  bills  have  been  presented  in  the 
House  and  2  in  the  Senate  to  cut  imports  of  fuel 
oil.  Two  bills  would  put  a  35  percent  ad  valorem 
duty  on  imported  shrimp.  Three  bills  would 
double  the  duty  on  Swiss  watches.  One  bill  to 
put  a  5-cents-per-pound  duty  on  fresh  or  frozen 
tuna  would  really  hit  Japan  hard. 

And  one  bill  would  give  to  a  Cabinet  officer  the 
power  to  shut  off  imports  when  he  considered 
them  "excessive." 

Communist  Use  of  the  Trade  Issue 

To  cite  an  example  of  how  the  Communists  use 
the  trade  issue,  I  would  like  to  tell  you  about  the 
time  our  restrictions  on  cheese  imports  were  im- 
posed, when  a  tariff  quota  was  imposed  on  al- 
monds, when  minor  escape-clause  actions  were 
taken  which  affected  Italy. 

The  Communists  in  Southern  Italy  and  Sicily 
went  into  action.  Hardly  had  our  restrictions 
gone  into  effect  than  a  Soviet  ship  appeared  in 
southern  Italian  ports  accompanied  by  wide- 
spread publicity  that  the  Soviet  Union  intended 
to  buy  Italian  products.  It  was  a  very  effective 
gesture,  especially  when  they  bought  some  boat- 
loads of  lemons  and  almonds. 

One  American  official  who  traveled  in  Southern 
Italy  at  this  time  reported  that  the  Communists 
were  also  using  our  trade  actions  to  attack  the 
Nato  defense  effort.    The  Communists  plastered 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


wallposters  far  and  wide  and  repeated  by  word 
of  mouth,  "The  United  States  is  ready  to  take 
our  sons,  but  she  won't  take  our  goods." 

Clearly,  if  we  want  our  allies  to  throw  their 
economic  lot  in  with  us  and  abandon  their  his- 
toric markets  to  the  East,  we  must  assure  them 
that  we  will  be  a  responsible  and  reliable  leader. 
Not  just  now  and  then,  but  consistently. 

Of  course,  we'll  need  cooperation  from  the  other 
countries  of  the  free  world  if  we  are  to  build  a 
strong  economic  foundation. 

Countries  of  the  free  world  must  take  measures 
to  control  inflation;  restrictive  business  and  labor 
practices  must  be  curbed ;  competition  in  industry 
encouraged;  productivity  increased;  and  a  better 
climate  provided  for  foreign  investment.  All 
these  measures  would  strengthen  the  economies 
of  the  free  world. 

Another  danger  which  would  result  from  our 
failure  to  encourage  the  free  world  to  reduce  bar- 
riers to  trade  is  that  the  Soviet  bloc  could  make 
big  gains  in  the  battle  of  production. 

The  Kremlin  can,  by  decrees,  eliminate  the 
national  economies  of  the  satellites  and  merge 
them  all  into  a  Soviet  economy  covering  the  entire 
heartland  of  Europe  and  Asia. 

If  we  look  at  a  map  and  trace  the  outlines  of  the 
Soviet  bloc,  we  can  see  that  the  major  part  of 
Europe  and  Asia  is  combined  under  the  iron  con- 
trol of  the  Soviet  Union.  The  Soviet  bloc,  with 
its  potential  resources  and  a  potentially  huge  in- 
ternal market,  can  maximize  its  production  with- 
out much  international  trade.  Conceivably,  by 
dictation  from  the  Kremlin,  every  part  of  the 
Soviet  bloc  could  be  directed  to  produce  the  things 
it  is  best  suited  to  produce.  It  could  thus  assure 
that  the  best  possible  use  of  its  resources,  plants, 
and  manpower  is  being  made. 

The  remainder  of  Europe,  Asia,  and  the  West- 
ern Hemisphere,  on  the  other  hand,  is  frag- 
mentized into  over  50  individual  countries,  each 
with  its  own  economic  structure,  each  lacking  raw 
materials,  resources,  plants,  and  key  skills  found 
only  in  otiier  countries.  Each  is  separated  from 
the  others  by  numerous  currency  and  trade  bar- 
riers that  impede  the  flow  of  trade  among  these 
various  free  countries. 

To  compensate,  the  free  world  needs  to  lower 
barriers  to  trade  among  its  member  countries. 

Not  only  does  the  lowering  of  barriers  to  trade 
strengthen  the  free  world  by  permitting  each 
country  to  obtain  needed  materials  at  the  lowest 
cost,  by  permitting  each  to  achieve  top  efficiency 
from  large-scale  production,  but  it  also  raises  the 
standard  of  living  of  all  countries  of  the  free 
world. 

The  world  took  a  big  step  forward  when  man- 
kind decided  that  division  of  labor  enabled  all 
the  villagers  to  live  better.  "When  the  shoemaker 
stopped  making  his  own  clothes  and  concentrated 
on  making  shoes,  when  the  farmer  concentrated  on 
raising  crops  instead  of  trying  to  build  his  own 


equipment,  the  whole  community  benefited.  That 
same  principle  holds  for  the  nations  of  the  free 
world. 


The  Tariff  Curtain  and  the  Iron  Curtain 

Today  one  of  Western  Europe's  most  pressing 
problems  is  that  of  trade.  Figuratively  speaking, 
her  shoemakers  can't  sell  their  shoes  to  pay  for 
the  agricultural  and  other  products  they  need 
from  us. 

This  problem  has  intensified  since  the  historic 
trade  between  Eastern  and  Western  Europe  has 
been  cut  down.  Formerly,  up  until  World  War 
II,  nearly  one-third  of  Western  Europe's  com- 
'merce  was  conducted  with  Russia,  Poland,  Hun- 
gary, Bulgaria,  Rumania,  and  Czechoslovakia. 
Broadly,  the  countries  behind  the  Iron  Curtain 
supplied  Western  Europe  with  cereals,  metals, 
timber,  hides,  and  other  raw  materials  in  exchange 
for  textiles,  hardware,  machinery,  electrical  equip- 
ment, chemicals,  and  other  manufactured  goods. 
The  cutback  of  East- West  trade  to  prevent  strate- 
gic materials  from  going  to  the  Soviet  bloc  has 
sharply  cut  down  a  key  source  of  raw  materials 
for  Western  Europe  and  has  shrunk  drastically 
a  major  market  for  its  manufactured  goods. 
Moreover,  Western  Europe's  whole  trading  pat- 
tern with  Asia  and  other  less  developed  areas  was 
disrupted  during  World  War  II  and  has  not  been 
altogether  restored  since. 

This  situation  spotlights  another  danger  which 
a  restrictionist  U.S.  trade  policy  would  create. 
Western  Europe  must  find  new  markets.  A  re- 
strictive trade  policy  by  us  would  crush  our  allies 
between  the  tariff  curtain  and  the  Iron  Curtain. 

We  seem  to  our  friends  to  be  very  inconsistent 
when  we  ask  the  countries  of  Western  Europe  to 
refrain  from  East- West  trade  and  then  shut  the 
door  to  trade  with  the  United  States  by  our  own 
restrictions  on  the  importation  of  foreign  goods. 

Furthermore,  such  restrictions  are  not  in  our 
own  self-interest.  If  we  do  not  give  the  people 
of  Western  Europe  the  opportunity  to  earn 
dollars,  how  can  we  expect  them  to  buy  our  goods? 
Restrictions  on  imports  that  deny  the  right  to  our 
customers  to  earn  dollars  mean  lost  markets  for 
American  business. 

We  should  permit  access  to  our  markets  from 
abroad,  or  else  that  segment  of  business  and  agri- 
culture which  sells  abroad  must  become  accustomed 
to  diminishing  markets.  You  are  undoubtedly 
familiar  with  the  restrictions  imposed  by  Congress 
on  the  importation  of  cheese  which  has  cut  the 
sale  of  foreign  cheese  in  the  United  States.  This 
has  resulted,  specifically  in  the  case  of  France,  in 
the  cancellation  of  contracts  for  the  purchase  of 
citrus  fruit,  because  the  dollars  were  not  available 
due  to  French  inability  to  earn  dollars  in  the 
American  market.  We  must  recognize  that  for 
every  dollar  of  sale  prevented  in  the  United  States 
there  is  a  dollar  of  American  exports  lost  abroad. 


May  4,    1953 


649 


We  are  really  in  a  very  peculiar  situation. 
After  having  helped  to  build  up  the  production 
of  our  allies  and  our  former  enemies  so  that  the 
countries  of  the  free  world  can  stand  on  their  own 
feet  in  competitive  world  trade,  we  have  not  at 
the  same  time  been  able  to  lower  our  trade  barriers 
to  make  it  possible  for  them  to  sell  to  us. 

Take  the  case  of  Japan — a  bulwark  against 
communism  in  the  Far  East.  The  80  million 
people  crowded  into  the  island  of  Japan,  an  area 
smaller  than  California,  must  trade  in  order  to 
live.  We  have  spent  hundreds  of  millions  of  dol- 
lars a  year  to  keep  Japan  alive  and  to  rebuild  her 
economic  strength.  Japan  in  return  has  cut  off 
most  of  her  once  rich  trade  with  China,  although 
this  has  meant  paying  higher  prices  for  raw  ma- 
terials and  losing  an  important  market. 

If  we  are  going  to  keep  Japan  on  the  free 
world's  side,  she  must  expand  her  trade  with  the 
free  world  or  go  on  being  subsidized  by  the  Amer- 
ican taxpayer.  There  is,  of  course,  one  other 
possibility.  She  could  tie  her  economy  in  with 
the  Soviet  bloc,  but  that  isn't  the  solution  that  we 
would  like  to  see. 

Stalin,  before  his  death,  predicted  that  the  free 
world  could  not  absorb  the  export  capacities  of 
Germany  and  Japan.  It  is  incumbent  upon  the 
free  world  to  prove  him  wrong  in  this,  as  in  his 
other  predictions. 

There  is  still  another  danger  if  we  withdraw 
from  international  cooperation  in  the  trade  field. 
This  is  a  danger  to  our  economy. 

In  the  postwar  period  from  1946  to  1952,  the 
cumulative  dollar  deficit  of  the  United  States  with 
the  rest  of  the  world  amounted  to  approximately 
$34  billion.  It  was  covered  by  aid  from  the 
United  States  and  the  use  of  gold  and  dollar  re- 
serves. With  the  reduction  of  foreign  aid,  which 
has  made  possible  a  large  part  of  U.S.  shipments 
abroad  of  agricultural  and  manufactured  prod- 
ucts, exports  will  drop  sharply,  unless  we  increase 
our  imports  and  permit  other  countries  to  earn  the 
dollars  needed  to  maintain  their  purchases  of 
American  products. 

In  this  dilemma  the  United  States  faces  three 
choices  in  its  trade  policy : 

1.  We  can  cut  exports  and  accept  defaults  on 
payments  of  loans ; 

2.  We  can  meet  the  trade  deficit  with  money 
from  the  public  treasury — the  taxpayer's  pocket; 
or 

3.  We  can  face  the  economic  facts  of  life  and 
recognize  that  the  only  way  we  can  receive  pay- 
ment for  goods  is  in  the  form  of  imports  of  goods 
and  services. 

President  Eisenhower,  recognizing  the  dangers 
and  aware  of  the  need  for  trade  to  strengthen  the 
economic  foundations  of  the  free  world,  has  rec- 
ommended to  Congress  the  extension  for  1  year  of 
the  present  Reciprocal  Trade  Agreements  Act  as 


an  interim  measure.'  He  also  recommended  that 
we  revise  our  customs  regulations  to  remove  ad- 
ministrative barriers  to  trade;  encourage  the  flow 
of  private  American  investment  abroad;  utilize 
facilities  overseas  for  the  production  of  articles 
which  are  needed  for  mutual  defense ;  and  import 
greater  amounts  of  important  raw  materials 
which  we  do  not  ourselves  possess. 

The  right  answers  in  the  field  of  foreign  eco- 
nomic policy  are  not  easy  to  come  by,  and  there 
is  one  thing  of  which  we  can  be  certain — none  of 
them  are  easy  to  adopt. 

You  are  probably  all  aware  that  hearings  vtill 
begin  on  April  22  before  the  House  Ways  and 
Means  Committee  to  decide  which  of  the  cross- 
roads the  United  States  shall  take  in  its  trade 
policy.  The  hearings  will  be  held  on  a  bill  which 
would  tear  the  vitals  out  of  the  present  Reciprocal 
Trade  Agreements  Act.  Adoption  of  such  a  bill 
would  create  consternation  among  countries  of 
the  free  world  and  would  lend  credence  to  the 
Communist  theme  that  the  United  States  wants 
to  sell  but  it  does  not  want  to  buy. 

The  Need  for  a  Customs  Simplification  Bill 

Hearings  will  also  be  held  in  the  near  future  on 
a  customs  simplification  bill.  Such  a  bill  is  long 
overdue.  We  haven't  had  any  real  changes  since 
1930,  despite  the  rapid  strides  we  have  made  in 
technology.  This  has  led  to  some  strange  devel- 
opments in  the  Customs  Houses  around  the  coun- 
try. I'd  just  like  to  cite  a  few  strange  situations 
which  arise  from  our  present  law. 

Take  paragraph  1559  for  example.  It  provides 
for  the  classification  of  those  imported  articles 
not  specifically  provided  for  in  the  Tariff  Act  of 
1930.  It's  called  the  "general  basket  clause."  It 
specifies  that  each  and  every  article  not  named  in 
the  tariff  shall  be  assessed  the  duty  charged  for 
the  product  it  most  resembles.  Where  an  article 
that  isn't  listed  by  its  own  name  resembles  two 
other  named  articles,  on  which  different  rates 
apply,  it  is  assessed  at  the  rate  for  the  article 
paying  the  highest  duty.  This  rule  has  caused 
some  fantastic  results. 

For  example,  staple  fiber  nylon  yarn  is  classi- 
fied under  the  wool  schedule  if  the  yarn  has  a 
crimp  or  crinkle  in  it.  Exactly  the  same  yarn  is 
classified  under  the  silk  schedule  and  charged  a 
different  rate  if  there  is  no  crimp  in  it. 

Since  the  enactment  of  the  1930  tariff,  many 
new  products  have  been  developed,  and  when  any 
of  these  products  are  imported  the  question  of  tar- 
iff classification  arises  at  once.  That's  when  the 
customs  collectors  run  into  the  "rule  of  similitude." 
Collectors  of  customs  are  given  no  latitude  by 
paragraph  1559  to  use  their  good  judgment,  ex- 
perience, or  common  sense.  This  paragi-aph  says 
if  they  find  that  an  imported  article  resembles 

'  Ibid.,  Apr.  27,  1953,  p.  634. 


650 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


more  than  one  enumerated  article,  the  classifica- 
tion must  blindly  follow  the  rule  of  highest  rate. 

Under  this  rule,  radar  equipment  was  classified 
as  clocks  until  the  Customs  Court  reversed  the 
decision  many  months  later.  The  Court  held  that 
the  clock  paragraph  was  intended  by  Congress  to 
apply  to  instruments  desi^ied  to  provide  a  more 
accurate  measurement  of  time  than  a  radar  device 
does. 

I  have  also  heard,  but  I  can't  vouch  for  it,  that 
interpretations  under  our  complicated  customs 
rules  brought  a  young  collector  widespread  re- 
nown in  the  Customs  Service.  He  had  to  figure 
out  how  to  rule  on  a  body  in  a  coffin.  The  body 
was  that  of  an  American  being  shipped  home  for 
burial.  This  bright  collector's  solution  was  to 
classify  the  body  as  "an  American  product,  not 
advanced  in  value  or  improved  in  condition." 
Under  that  legitimate  customs-law  classification 
it  could  come  in  duty  free.  The  collector  also 
admitted  the  coffin  without  charge,  on  the  theory 
that  it  was  the  "usual  container"  for  such  goods. 

Unfortunately  I  didn't  bring  along  my  crystal 
ball,  so  I  am  not  going  to  try  to  predict  what 
course  of  action  Congress  is  going  to  take  with 
regard  to  trade  policy  and  how  it  will  affect  the 
theme  of  this  conference,  "Balance  Trade,  Reduce 
Aid."  However,  I  do  know  that  our  Senators  and 
Representatives  try  to  reflect  the  views  of  their 
constituents.    We  can,  therefore,  expect  no  prog- 


ress in  legislation  to  help  balance  trade  unless 
there  is  general  public  understanding  and  support 
throughout  the  country  for  such  a  move. 

For  that  reason,  as  well  as  to  develop  a  forward- 
looking  foreign  economic  policy  which  will  be  in 
the  best  interest  of  the  entire  country.  President 
Eisenhower  has  announced  that  he  plans  to  ap- 
point a  commission  to  undertake  a  fundamental 
study  of  U.S.  foreign  economic  policy. 

I  am  certain  that  the  study  will  consider  realis- 
tic measures  which  are  required  to  face  up  to 
present-day  problems.  And  I  am  sure  that  the 
realism  of  this  commission  will  not  fit  the  descrip- 
tion which  Disraeli,  the  great  British  Prime  Min- 
ister of  the  last  century,  gave  of  a  realist.  He  said, 
"A  realist  is  a  man  who  insists  on  making  the  same 
mistakes  his  grandfather  made." 

Up  to  the  present  time  the  United  States  has 
failed  to  adopt  a  policy  adequate  to  the  needs  of 
a  creditor  nation — a  creditor  nation  which  wants 
to  be  paid  for  its  exports.  The  renewal  of  the 
present  Reciprocal  Trade  Agreements  Act  and 
the  passage  of  a  customs  simplification  act,  as 
requested  by  the  President,  are  not  the  final  meas- 
ures which  need  to  be  taken  to  meet  the  demands 
of  these  perilous  times,  but  they  are  what  is  needed 
to  keep  the  situation  from  deteriorating  until  we 
can  have  a  thorough  study  which  will  result  in 
recommendations  which  the  American  people  and 
the  Congress  will  support. 


Problems  of  American  Agriculture  and  Foreign  Trade 

Statement  hy  Harold  F.  hinder 
Assistant  Secretary  for  Econoirdc  Affairs  ^ 


Press  releases  186,  189  dated  April  10 

I  was  very  glad  to  receive  the  Committee's  in- 
vitation to  comment,  on  behalf  of  the  Department 
of  State,  on  the  relation  of  our  agricultural  im- 
ports and  exports  to  our  domestic  agricultural 
programs. 

This  is  a  subject  which,  all  too  frequently,  is 
dealt  with  in  bits  and  pieces  as  emergency  situa- 
tions arise.  It  is  timely,  it  seems  to  me,  for  these 
problems  to  be  reviewed  in  some  systematic  way, 
so  that  we  can  find  the  course  most  in  harmony 
with  our  national  objectives.  I  think  that  such  a 
course  can  be  found  and  that  reviews  of  the  sort 
your  Committee  is  conducting  are  needed  to  help 
find  it. 

On  the  surface,  it  might  appear  that  there  was 
no  need  for  Americans  to  worry  very  much  either 

'  Made  before  the  Senate  Committee  on  Agriculture  and 
Forestry  on  Apr.  10. 


about  exports  or  imports.  Superficially,  we  seem 
to  have  a  fairly  self-sufficient  economy.  When 
we  look  at  the  figures  in  the  aggregate  neither  our 
imports  nor  our  exports  seem  to  bulk  very  large 
compared  to  what  we  produce  at  home.  For  every 
dollar  of  domestic  production,  we  import  only  3 
cents  worth  and  we  export  only  4  cents  worth  of 
goods.  Except  for  the  Soviet  Union,  these  figures 
are  lower  than  those  of  any  major  country  in  the 
world. 

Yet,  like  so  many  figures  of  this  kind,  the  im- 
pression they  give  is  deceptive.  The  fact  is  that 
critical  parts  of  our  economy  are  geared  to  doing 
a  substantial  amount  of  business  with  foreign 
countries.  This  is  especially  true,  as  you  know,  in 
tlie  field  of  agriculture.  We  sell  a  great  deal  of 
our  cotton,  wheat,  tobacco,  and  rice  overseas ;  last 
year,  for  example,  just  under  40  percent  of  each 
of  these  crops  was  marketed  abroad.  To  a  lesser 
extent,  we  market  a  good  manj^  of  our  specialty 


May  4,    J953 


651 


crops  abroad  as  well.  Our  apple,  orange,  raisin, 
and  prune  producers  have  always  relied  on  foreign 
markets  to  provide  the  extra  margin  of  profit  that 
makes  the  ditference  between  a  lean  year  and  a 
prosperous  one.  Taken  all  together,  these  exports 
require  the  use  of  about  CO  million  acres  of  Amer- 
ican farmland,  an  area  larger  than  the  cultivated 
areas  of  all  our  Southeastern  States. 

The  importance  to  the  farmer  of  his  export 
markets  is  something  of  which  he  himself  is  not 
always  aware.  As  far  as  the  farmer  is  concerned 
his  contact  is  with  domestic  merchants,  not  with 
foreign  users.  What  he  is  not  in  a  position  to  see 
is  that  these  crops  are  resold  by  these  merchants 
for  export  abroad.  Once  these  foreign  markets 
dry  up,  the  pipline  is  clogged  and  the  domestic 
buyers  disappear. 

Effects  of  a  Reduction  in  Foreign  Markets 

Another  point  that  needs  to  be  stressed  is  the 
fact  that  when  foreign  markets  for  our  export 
crops  are  reduced,  it  is  not  the  cotton  or  wheat  or 
tobacco  farmer  alone  who  is  affected.  Our  whole 
agricultural  economy  feels  the  effect,  through  a 
number  of  different  channels.  Perhaps  the  most 
important  result  is  that  farmers  tend  to  turn  over 
some  of  their  land  from  export  crops  to  domestic 
crops,  from  cotton  to  cattle  grazing,  from  tobacco 
to  truck  farming,  from  wheat  to  dairying,  and  so 
on.  And  the  resultant  pressures  are  felt  through- 
out the  whole  range  of  agricultural  production. 
Prosperity  for  our  export-crop  producers,  there- 
fore, is  inseparably  tied  in  with  prosperity  for 
the  farmer  producing  for  the  home  market. 

This  brings  me  to  the  next  stage  of  our  problem. 
How  can  we  maintain  a  situation  in  which  our 
overseas  markets  remain  willing  and  able  to  buy 
American  agricultural  products?  The  Marshall 
plan  answered  this  problem  to  some  extent.  Of 
course,  the  Marshall  plan  was  conceived  for  a 
much  larger  purpose  and  accomplished  a  great 
deal  more  than  simply  providing  an  overseas  mar- 
ket for  American  farmers.  But  it  did  serve  the 
incidental  purpose  of  providing  foreign  countries 
with  dollars,  some  of  which  were  used  to  buy  our 
American  export  crops. 

This  means  of  disposing  of  American  farm 
products,  however,  is  one  which  none  of  us  wants 
to  continue  for  any  longer  than  necessary,  neither 
the  American  taxpayer  nor  the  American  farmer, 
nor  even  the  foreign  governments  who  receive  our 
aid.  Foreign  buying  must  be  placed  on  a  basis 
on  which  it  pays  its  own  way.  The  only  practical 
way  of  achieving  this  is  to  make  sure  that  the 
foreign  countries  have  every  reasonable  oppor- 
tunity to  earn  the  dollars  that  they  need  to  buy 
our  Arnerican  products.  This  means  that  foreign 
countries  should  have  every  reasonable  chance  to 
sell  their  goods  in  our  markets. 

It  is  at  this  point  that  American  agriculture 
is  faced  with  a  dilemma.     Some  of  the  products 

652 


which  other  countries  have  been  selling  to  us  and 
want  to  keep  on  selling  to  us  are  items  which  we 
can  produce  for  ourselves,  provided  domestic 
prices  are  high  enough.  And  one  way  of  helping 
to  keep  these  prices  high,  in  addition  to  govern- 
ment buying,  is  to  reduce  or  eliminate  the  imports 
we  have  been  receiving  from  foreign  producers. 

A  reduction  of  imports  is  often  an  attractive 
and  seemingly  painless  solution,  when  one  segment 
or  another  of  American  agriculture  is  demanding 
some  action.  Yet  when  we  apply  restrictions  to 
keep  out  the  normal  imports  of  foreign  producers, 
we  clearly  are  running  serious  risks.  Foreigners, 
finding  that  their  American  market  is  gone,  will 
be  forced  to  cut  back  on  their  purchases  of  our 
export  crops  as  a  result.  And  some  of  the  farmers 
who  previously  raised  export  crops  will  turn  to 
production  for  the  home  market,  thereby  adding 
to  home  competition  and  adding  to  the  pressure 
on  our  support  programs.  Everybody  may  lose; 
our  cotton  farmers  may  lose  their  markets  over- 
seas, and  foreign  producers  may  lose  their  domes- 
tic markets  in  the  United  States.  We  balance  our 
trade  with  the  rest  of  the  world  in  the  worst  pos- 
sible way,  by  restricting  it  both  ways. 

I  do  not  pretend  to  have  any  easy  answers  for 
this  dilemma  which  American  agriculture  faces. 
As  long  as  we  recognize  the  equity  of  support 
prices  for  the  American  farmer,  we  shall  always 
be  faced  with  the  problem  of  reconciling  the 
farmer's  interest  in  maintaining  these  programs 
and  his  interest  in  maintaining  his  overseas  mar- 
kets. We  may  never  be  able  to  achieve  a  perfect 
balance  between  these  two  interests.  But  I  feel 
sure  that  we  can  achieve  a  better  balance  than 
our  present  policies  now  provide. 

I  have  had  occasion  to  make  these  points  to 
a  good  many  groups  in  the  recent  past  and  from 
time  to  time  I  have  been  told :  "This  is  all  very 
well,  but  isn't  it  true  that  countries  abroad  are 
imposing  more  and  more  restrictions  on  American 
products  and  that  their  current  dependence  on  our 
cotton,  wheat,  tobacco,  and  so  forth,  is  no  more 
than  a  flash  in  the  pan?" 

Foreign  Demand  and  tlie  Scarcity  of  Dollars 

To  begin  with,  I  want  to  point  out  that  the 
reasons  that  countries  maintain  their  present  re- 
strictions on  some  American  products  is  precisely 
because  they  are  buying  other  American  products 
so  heavily.  In  other  words,  the  demand  of  for- 
eigners for  American  exports  has  grown  much 
faster  than  the  dollars  that  they  have  been  able 
to  earn;  as  a  result,  foreign  governments  have 
had  to  ration  their  supply  of  scarce  dollars  for 
the  various  competing  demands  which  have  been 
made  upon  them.  And  in  rationing  their  scarce 
dollars,  many  of  these  countries  have  tried  to  re- 
duce their  purchases  of  apples,  peaches,  and  other 
less  basic  products  as  a  way  of  meeting  part  of  the 
cost  of  their  increased  purchases  of  cotton,  wheat, 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


and  tobacco.  Far  from  reducing  their  overall 
purchases  of  American  agricultural  products  they 
have  greatly  increased  these  purchases. 

The  fio-ures  present  a  striking  story.     1  he  rest 
of  the  world,  which  bought  about  700  million 
dollars  of  our  agricultural  products  annually  m 
the  years  just  before  the  war,  has  been  buying 
from  us  at  an  annual  rate  of  about  3,500  million 
dollars  since  the  end  of  the  war.    This  increase 
in  our  exports  is  much  greater  than  the  rise  m 
our  imports  of  agricultural  products;  before  the 
war  we  imported  about  600  million  dollars  an- 
nually of  the  kinds  of  products  American  agri- 
culture can  produce,  whereas  since  the  war  the 
ficrure  has   risen   to   only   1,600   million   dollars 
annually.     It   should   be   pointed   out  that  tlie 
world's  increased  purchases  of  American  agri- 
cultural products  have  been  reflected  m  a  relatively 
laro-e  number  of  the  individual  commodities  in- 
volved     For   some  crops,   both  quantities   and 
prices  of  exports  have  gone  up;  for  others,  the 
increase  has  been  principally  m  the  price.    The 
only  quantity  decreases  in  exports  of  important 
crops  have  been  in  fruits. 

There  has  been  considerable  speculation  on  how 
long  the  increased  dependence  of  the  rest  of  tlie 
world  on  American  agriculture  is  likely  to  last. 
No  one,  of  course,  can  speak  with  certainty  about 
the  lono--run  prospects.  But  as  nearly  as  can  be- 
iudo-ed  from  the  facts,  there  is  every  reason  to' 
suppose  that  the  demand  by  foreign  countries  tor 
American  export  crops  will  remain  high  over  the 
years,  provided  foreign  countries  have  the  dollars 
to  buy  these  crops. 

The  Increased  Emphasis  on  Industrialization 

There  are  a  number  of  reasons  why  this  is  to  be 
expected.     In  the  period  immediately  following 
the  war,  it  was  generally  thought  that  our  ab- 
normal exports  of  agricultural  products  simply 
reflected  the  effects  of  overseas  war  destruction. 
But  as  time  went  on  and  our  agricultural  exports 
were  maintained  and  expanded  we  began  to  see 
other  causes  for  this  extraordinary  development. 
One  major  cause  was  the  increased  emphasis  ot 
a  threat  many  countries  on  industrialization.    Ar- 
gentina, for  example,  followed  a  deliberate  policy 
of  attracting  workers  from  the  farms  to  the  cities. 
As   a   result,   wheat   acreage   in  Argentina   has 
dropped  to  about  20  percent  below  its  prewar  level, 
and   wheat   production   in   Argentina   has   been 
equally  depressed.     Countries  which  previously 
relied  upon  Argentine  wheat  exports  have  had  to 
turn  to  other  sources.    In  addition  to  the  loss  of 
Argentine  wheat,  other  normal  prewar  sources 
of  wheat,  such  as  Eastern  Germany,  the  Balkan 
countries  and  the  Soviet  Union,  also  have  shrunk. 
The  loss  of  these  sources,  like  the  loss  of  Argentine 
wheat,  has  largely  been  due  to  the  policy  of  forced 
industrialization,  which  has  sharply  reduced  the 
amounts  of  agricultural  products  available  for 

May  4,   1953 


foreign  buyers.  The  forces  that  have  tended  to 
diminish  prewar  sources  of  wheat  have  also  re- 
duced the  supplies  of  other  agricultural  products. 
The  result  has  been  that  many  countries  have  had 
to  turn  to  the  United  States  and  Canada  to  till 
the  gap  created  by  the  loss  of  supplies  from  other 

areas.  .        ,    .    ,     ,  •  v     j.- 

The  emphasis  on  continued  industrialization 
around  the  world  gives  American  farmers  every 
right  to  anticipate  that  the  rest  of  the  world  is 
o-oing  to  remain  a  good  customer  for  American 
products  in  the  years  ahead,  always  provided  these 
countries  are  allowed  to  earn  the  dollars  that  are 
needed  for  that  purpose.    America's  best  custom- 
ers are  the  countries  with  expanding  production 
and  expanding  incomes.    These  are  the  countries 
which  develop  the  internal  needs  for  American 
essentials  and  the  desires  for  American  luxuries. 
As  long  as  incomes  in  any  country  are  on  the 
increase,  demands  for  one  or  another  of  America  s 
diverse  export  crops  are  bound  to  increase  as  well ; 
if  not  for  wheat,  then  for  cotton ;  and  if  not  for 
cotton,  then  for  peaches.    But  in  order  to  translate 
this  growing  demand  into  actual  purchases,  we 
must  be  willing  to  give  these  countries  the  chance 
to  earn  dollars;  we  must  be  willing,  in  short,  to 
have  trade  run  on  a  2-way  street. 

These  are  some  of  the  facts  which  it  seems  to 
me  this  Committee  will  have  to  take  into  account 
in  considering  the  problems  of  American  agricul- 
ture and  foreign  trade.  I  am  sure  that  similar 
considerations  will  be  elaborated  and  analyzed 
in  the  study  which  the  President  has  initiated  of 
our  overall  foreign  economic  policy.'  Only  if 
such  facts  are  fully  appraised  can  we  move  ahead 
with  a  mutually  consistent  agricultural  policy 
and  trade  policy  which  will  advance  our  total 
national  interests. 

At  the  close  of  his  main  statement,  Mr.  Linder 
made  the  following  additional  remarks: 

Section  22  of  the  Agricultural  Act 

It  is  our  understanding  that,  at  yesterday's 
hearin"-,  suggestions  were  made  for  amending  sec- 
tion 22  of  the  Agricultural  Act  so  that  restrictions 
could  be  imposed  on  agricultural  imports  before 
the  Tariff  Commission  had  come  to  a  conclusion 
as  to  whether  or  not  such  imports  were  interfering 
with  domestic  agricultural  programs.  I  believe 
that  this  proposed  amendment  came  up  in  connec- 
tion with  the  proposal  supported  by  the  adminis- 
tration for  the  removal  of  section  104  of  the  De- 
fense Production  Act,  which  now  imposes  severe 
restrictions  on  imports  of  dairy  products  as  well 
as  certain  other  products.^     Some  fear  was  ex- 

=  For  text  of  the  President's  message  announcing  this 
study  and  requesting  the  Congress  to  extend  the  Recipro- 
cal Trade  Agreements  Act  for  1  year  pending  its  comple- 
tion, see  Bulletin  of  Apr.  27,  1953,  p.  634. 

» For  text  of  a  statement  made  by  Mr.  Linder  relating 
to  section  104,  see  ibid.,  Apr.  13, 1953,  p.  554. 

653 


pressed  that  in  view  of  the  prospective  expiration 
of  section  104  on  June  30  of  this  year  the  Tariff 
Commission  mij^ht  not  act  promptly  enou<^h  in 
deciding  upon  sucli  restrictions  as  might  prove  to 
be  necessary  to  prevent  imports  from  interfering 
witli  tlie  domestic  dairy  products  pro";ram. 

The  Department  of  State  has  not  had  an  op- 
portunity to  consider  all  the  implications  of  the 
proposed  amendment  to  section  22.  Our  prelim- 
inary view,  however,  is  that  such  an  amendment 
would  fundamentally  alter  the  present  procedures 
by  placing  restrictions  on  imports  before  a  con- 
sidered judgment  had  been  reached  as  to  whether 
or  not  such  restrictions  were  in  fact  necessary  to 
prevent  impairment  of  domestic  programs.  I  am 
not  at  all  sure  that  restrictions  imposed  in  this  way 
would  not  create  for  us  many  of  the  international 
difficulties  which  we  have  had  in  connection  with 
section  104.  It  may  be  that  some  change  in  sec- 
tion 22  will  prove  to  be  necessary.  It  is  our  view, 
however,  that  any  substantial  changes  in  our  for- 
eign-trade policy  should  be  undertaken  only  after 
the  careful  and  comprehensive  study  contemplated 
in  the  President's  recent  message  to  Congress  on 
the  Reciprocal  Trade  Agreements  Act.  As  you 
know,  the  President  in  his  message  asked  that  the 
Trade  Agreements  Act  be  extended,  in  its  present 
form,  for  a  period  of  one  year  pending  a  complete 
and  comprehensive  review  of  our  foreign-eco- 
nomic policy.  Such  a  review  would  include  a 
study  of  the  relationship  between  our  foreign- 
trade  policy  and  our  domestic  agricultural  pro- 
grams with  the  idea  of  finding  more  effective  solu- 
tions to  the  problems  which  confront  us.  Basic 
changes  in  the  operation  of  section  22  at  this  time 
would,  in  our  judgment,  tend  to  prejudice  the  out- 
come of  this  study. 

The  proposed  amendment  under  section  22 
would  not  appear  to  be  necessary  in  connection 
with  the  removal  of  104  restrictions.  Since  yes- 
terday's hearing,  the  President  has  requested  the 
Tariff  Commission  to  institute  immediately  an 
investigation  under  section  22  with  respect  to 
commodities  now  subject  to  restriction  under  104. 
In  his  letter  to  the  Tariff  Commission  he  has  asked 
that  the  Tariff  Commission  report  back  to  him 
not  later  than  June  1,  that  is  to  say  a  full  30  days 
before  the  scheduled  expiration  of  section  104. 

Submission  of  U.S.  Claims 
on  German  Property 

Press  release  192  dated  April  15 

The  Department  of  State  has  been  informed 
that  the  agreement  between  Switzerland  and  the 
Federal  Republic  of  Germany  concerning  German 
assets  in  Switzerland  became  effective  March  20, 
1953.^ 

'  See  Bm-LETiN  of  Sept.  8,  1952,  p.  363  for  (1)  Synopsis 
of  the  Swiss-German  Agreement  of  Aug.  26;  (2)  Text  of 
tlie  related  Swiss-Allied  agreement  of  Aug.  28  and  sum- 
mary of  letters  annexed  thereto. 


Under  article  5  of  the  Swiss-German  agreement, 
protection  is  afforded  to  persons  having  interests 
in  German  assets  in  Switzerland,  in  general,  as 
follows : 

1.  Persons  having  assets  of  a  total  value  of  less 
than  10,000  Swiss  francs. 

2.  Persons  who,  on  February  10, 1945,  were  dual 
U.S. -German  nationals,  provided  that  the  United 
States  supports  their  claim. 

3.  Persons  deprived  of  life  or  substantially  of 
liberty  or  of  full  citizenship  rights  under  Nazi 
discriminatory  laws. 

4.  Persons  who  can  prove  by  certain  certified 
statements  that  their  property  in  Switzerland  was 
returned  to  tliem  pursuant  to  the  laws  in  Germany 
on  restitution. 

5.  Non-German  persons  having  a  25  percent  or 
more  interest  in  firms  organized  under  German 
law,  which  firms  have  assets  in  Switzerland. 

6.  Non-German  beneficiaries  of  a  family  foun- 
dation. 

Under  article  IS  and  the  related  letter,  protec- 
tion is  afforded  American  interests  of  25  percent 
or  more  in  firms  organized  outside  of  Germany 
and  Switzerland,  in  which  Germans  participate  to 
the  extent  of  50  percent  or  more  and  which  have 
assets  in  Switzerland. 

Under  article  7  of  the  Swiss-German  agreement 
the  Swiss  Compensation  Office,  an  agency  of  the 
Swiss  Government,  is  required  to  "despatch  re- 
quests in  an  appropriate  manner  to  all  owners  of 
property  in  Switzerland  asking  them  to  apply, 
personally  or  through  agents,  within  2  months 
from  publication  of  such  request  for  the  unblock- 
ing of  their  property  according  to  Article  5."  By 
article  13  the  Swiss  Compensation  Office  is  to  un- 
block the  properties  specified  in  article  5  if  a 
request  by  the  owner  has  been  filed  within  2 
months  of  the  announcement  referred  to  in 
article  7. 

It  is  suggested  that  claimants  in  the  United 
States  not  await  receipt  of  notice  from  the  Swiss 
Compensation  Office  but  instead  communicate  im- 
mediately with  the  Swiss  Compensation  Office  re- 
questing the  unblocking  of  their  property.  The 
address  of  the  Swiss  Compensation  Office  is  Tal- 
strasse  62,  Ziirich,  Switzerland. 

In  a  letter  of  August  26,  1952,  the  Federal  Re- 
public of  Germany  advised  the  United  States  that 
it  would  afford  protection  to  U.S.  nationals  (and 
certain  other  non-German  nationals)  who  had 
funds  in  Switzerland  deposited  through  a  Ger- 
man bank,  if  the  German  bank  had  advised  the 
U.S.  national  that  the  funds  received  were  depos- 
ited with  a  specified  Swiss  bank  in  a  specified 
account  and  if  the  account  exists  today.  Any  U.S. 
national  having  funds  in  this  category  should 
communicate  with  the  Department  of  Stata 
regarding  the  procedure  to  obtain  protection. 


654 


Department   of  Sfafe   Bulletin 


Questions  Relating  to 
Korean  Settlement 

Press  Conference  Remarks  hy  Secretary  Dulles 

I 

Press  release  203  dated  April  20 

When  ashed  at  a  press  conference  on  April  20 
whether  there  had  been  dLscussion  within  the  ad- 
ministration of  a  possible  political  frontier  being 
established  at  the  toaist  of  Korea,  the  Secretary 
made  the  follotving  response: 

No.  The  waistline  has  always  been  one  of  the 
lines  which  has  been  given  important  considera- 
tion in  terms  of  the  military  position  in  Korea. 
That  line  is  a  fairly  short  line  of  about  100  miles, 
I  think,  as  against  the  present  line  of  about  120, 
and  as  against  the  northern  line  which  would  be 
about  600  miles.  So  the  waistline  has  for  a  long 
time  been  one  of  the  lines  which  has  been  con- 
sidered from  a  military  standpoint. 

From  a  political  standpoint  there  has  been  no 
renunciation  of  the  goal  of  a  United  Korea,  which 
was  the  goal  which  was  laid  down  by  the  United 
Nations.  It  was  first  laid  down  in  1947  when  I 
handled  the  matter  as  a  member  of  the  U.S.  dele- 
gation. It  was  reaffirmed  in  1948  in  Pans  when 
I  was  also  on  the  U.S.  delegation  handling  the 
matter.  It  was  again  reaffirmed  in  1950  when  I 
was  a  delegate  to  the  United  Nations.  That  posi- 
tion was  expressed  by  the  President  last  Thursday 
and  so  expressed  by  me  on  Saturday.^ 


Secretary  Dulles  replied  as  follows  lohen  ashed 
about  proposals  that  a  political  solution  be  made 
a  condition  to  a  military  truce  in  Korea: 

I  believe  that  we  should  try  as  far  as  is  practi- 
cable to  assure  that  a  political  discussion  shall  as 
nearly  as  possible  coincide  with  the  military  armi- 
stice discussions,  and  that  we  should  not  face  a 
long  period  of  debate  about  an  armistice  which 
would  postpone  indefinitely  political  discussions. 
We  have  been  through  nearly  2  years  of  that,  and 
I  hope  that  if,  and  as,  armistice  negotiations  are 
renewed,  as  they  probably  will  be  next  Friday, 
that  they  will  be  quick  and  to  the  point,  and  not 
for  long  postpone  political  discussions. 

Of  course,  the  armistice  agreement,^  which  is 
not  just  a  U.S.  document  but  a  U.N.  document, 
has  already  been  formulated  in  the  sense  that  it 
provides  by  article  IV,  section  60,  that  it  will  be 
recommended  that  within  3  months  after  the  ar- 
mistice agreement  is  signed  a  political  conference 
be  held.  So  to  that  extent,  the  order  of  events 
has  already  been  fixed  by  a  document  which  the 
United  States  alone  is  not  at  liberty  to  change. 

'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  27,  1953,  pp.  599  and  603. 
'  rx  doc.  A/222S,  dated  Oct.  IS,  1952. 

May  4,   1953 


But  I  believe  that  we  can  expedite  the  armistice 
negotiations  and,  if  they  are  successful,  bring 
about  a  prompt  political  discussion. 


Asked  whether  he  loould  favor  going  ahead  with 
the  armistice  first  and  then  go  into  politkal  discus- 
sions, the  Secretary  replied: 

Yes,  I  think  we  are  committed  to  that  by  the 
agreement  as  drawn  and,  which,  I  say,  is  not  just 
a  U.S.  document,  but  a  U.N.  document.  It  was 
reported  to  the  United  Nations  on  October  18, 
1952. 

Asked  whether  the  United  States  at  the  truce 
negotiations  intended  to  sound^  out  the  Commu- 
nists as  to  their  views  on  a  political  settlement,  the 
Secretary  replied: 

I  doubt  that  that  would  be  an  appropriate  forum 
for  such  a  sounding,  because  that  is  a  military 
discussion  by  military  leaders  and  the  armistice 
is  a  military'  document.  It  could  be  done  through 
some  other  means  but  that  doesn't  mean  to  say  it 
will  be.    I  just  say  it  could  be. 


Asked  whether  he  thought  the  Communists 
would  permit  free  elections  and  how  the  country 
could  be  unified  toithout  free  elections  throughout 
Korea,  Secretary  Dulles  replied: 

I  mean  the  kind  of  thing  which  was  envisaged 
by  the  U.N.  resolutions  of  '47  and  '48  which  did 
contemplate  elections  under  neutral  auspices. 
There  was  a  commission,  you  know,  sent  out  there. 
The  United  States  was  not  represented  on  the 
commission.  It  was  largely  a  commission  of  so- 
called  neutrals.  And  they  did  supervise  elections 
in  part  of  the  area  but  they  were  not  allowed  to 
proceed  into  the  northern  part  of  Korea.  But 
refusals  are  not  always  permanent.  We  have  been 
hoping  for  changes,  and  sometimes  they  come 
unexpectedly. 

You  take  what  is  happening  today,  the  exchange 
of  sick  and  wounded  prisoners  of  war,  that  is 
something  which  the  Government  had  sought  a 
good  many  times  over  the  past  couple  of  years.  It 
has  always  been  rejected.  WHien  under  President 
Eisenhower's  and  my  suggestion  the  proposal  was 
renewed  again  last  February  22,  it  was  accepted. 
There  are  oftentimes  unpredictable  changes  in  the 
point  of  view  and  attitude  of  the  Soviet  Commu- 
nist regime,  and  it  is  never  wise  to  abandon  hope 
permanently. 


Correction 

Bulletin  of  April  20, 1953,  page  575,  first  column  : 
Tlie  lieading  should  read:  Letter  from  General 
Nam  II  to  General  Harrison,  April  9. 


655 


INTERNATIONAL  ORGANIZATIONS  AND  CONFERENCES 


Calendar  of  Meetings' 


Adjourned  During  April  1953 

International  Wheat  Council:   11th  Session 

International  Wheat  Council:  Reconvening  of  8th  Session 

Indian  Railways  Exhibition 

U.  N.  (United  Nations) : 

Commission  on  Status  of  Women:  7th  Session 

Commission  on  Narcotic  Drugs:  8th  Session 

Consultative  Group  in  the  Field  of  Prevention  of  Crime  and  Treatment 
of  Offenders — Latin  American  Regional. 

Economic  Commission  for  Latin  America:  5th  Session 

Economic  Commission  for  Europe:  East- West  Trade  Conference  .    . 

General  Assembly:  Reconvening  of  7th  Session 

Fag  (Food  and  Agriculture  Organization) : 

Committee    on    Relations    with    International    Organizations:  14th 
Session. 

Technical  Advisory  Committee  on  Desert  Locust  Control 

Wmo   (World   Meteorological  Organization) :  Commission  for  Synoptic 

Meteorology:   1st  Session. 
UNESCO     (United     Nations     Educational,     Scientific     and     Cultural 
Organization):  Executive  Board:  33d  Session. 

Milan  International  Trade  Fair 

Conference  on  Caribbean  Timbers,  Their  Utilization  and  Trade  Within 

the  Area. 
IcEM  (Intergovernmental  Committee  for  European  Migration) : 

Finance  Committee 

5th  Session  of  Committee 

6th  International  Film  Festival 

Rice  Consultative  Committee:  6th  Meeting 

South  Pacific  Conference:  2d  Session 

Paso   (Pan   American   Sanitary   Organization):    Executive   Committee: 

19th  Meeting. 
Nato  (North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization):  Ministerial  Meeting  of  the 
North  Atlantic  Council. 


Washington  . 
Washington  . 
New  Delhi    . 

New  York.  . 
New  York.  . 
Rio  de  Janeiro 

Rio  de  Janeiro 
Geneva .    .    , 
New  York. 


Jan.  30-Apr.2 
Feb.  2-Apr.  13 
Mar.  4- Apr.  17 

Mar.  16-Apr.  3 
Mar.  30-Apr.  24 
Apr.  6-19 

Apr.  9-17 
Apr.  13-18* 
Feb.  24-Apr.  23 
(recessed) 


Rome Mar.  SO-Apr.  2 


Rome.    .    . 
Washington 

Paris .    .    . 


Milan    . 
Trinidad 


Apr.  21-24 
Apr.  2-29* 

Apr.  8-20 

Apr.  12-29 
Apr.  13-18 


Geneva Apr.  13-15 

Geneva Apr.  16-25 

Cannes Apr.  15-29 

Singapore Apr.  15-16 

Noumea Apr.  16-28 

Washington      Apr.  20-30 

Paris Apr.  23-25 


In  Session  as  of  April  30,  1953 


Washington Feb. 

Paris Mar. 


International  Materials  Conference 

Oeec   (Office  of   European   Economic  Cooperation):   European  Inland 

Transport  Conference. 
U.N.  (United  Nations): 

Economic  and  Social  Council: 

15th  Session  of  the  Council New  York Mar.  31- 

Commission  on  Human  Rights:  9th  Session Geneva Apr.  7- 

Fisoal  Commission:  4th  Session New  York Apr.  27- 

Ad  Hoc  Committee  on  Forced  Labor:  4th  Session      Geneva Apr.  17- 

High  Commissioner's  Advisory  Committee  on  Refugees Geneva Apr.  27- 

Inter-American  Council  of  Jurists:  2d  Meeting Buenos  Aires Apr.  20- 

South  Pacific  Commission:  11th  Session Noumea Apr.  25- 


26,  1951- 

18- 


Scheduled  May  1-July  31,  1953 

Itu  (International  Telecommunication  Union): 

Administrative  Coimcil:  8th  Session Geneva May  2- 

International  Telegraph  Consultative   Committee:   8th  Plenary  As-     Arnheim May  26- 

sembly. 

International  Cotton  Advisory  Committee:  12th  Plenary  Meeting  .    .    .      Washington May  4- 


'  Prepared  in  the  Division  of  International  Conferences,  Department  of  State,  Apr.  23,   1953. 
tentative  dates. 


Asterisks  indicate 


656 


Departmenf  of  State  Bulletin 


iOpu  (Universal  Postal  Union):  Meeting  of  the  Executive  and  Liaison 

Committee. 
UN.  (United  Nations): 

Social  Commission:  9th  Session     ...    •••■•. 

Ad  Hoc  Commission  on  Prisoners  of  War:  4th  Session  ._   .    •    •    •    ■    • 
International  Conference  to  Adopt  Protocol  on  Limitation  of  the  1  ro- 
duction  of  Opium. 
■     International  Law  Commission:  5th  Session   ...    .    .    ...    •    .    ■ 

I    Economic  Commission  for  Europe:  3d  Regional  Meeting  of  European 
Statisticians. 

Trusteeship  Council:  12th  Session.    .    .  _ 

Economic  and  Social  Council:  16th  Session 

Ad  Hoc  Committee  on  Administrative  Unions 

Committee  on  Non-Governmental  Organizations 

Technical  Assistance  Committee    .    •    •    -    •    ■    •  .•    •    •    •.  ■  .■   :    ■    ■ 
Ad  Hoc  Committee  on  Factors  (Non-Self-Governing  Territories)    .    . 

International  Sugar  Conference 

Who  (World  Health  Organization) : 

6th  World  Health  Assembly 

Executive  Board:  12th  Session _. 

IcAO  (International  Civil  Aviation  Organization) :  . 

Standing  Committee  on  Aircraft  Performance:  4th  Session     .... 

Assembly:  7th  Session 

North  Atlantic  Ocean  Weather  Stations 

Ilo  (International  Labor  Organization) : 

Permanent  Agricultural  Committee:  4th  Session 

Governing  Body  (and  Committees)       

Annual  Conference  of  the  Ilo:  36th  Session   •■■•.•••••■• 
Meeting  of  Experts  on  Systems  of  Payment  by  Results  in  Construction 
Industry. 

Caribbean  Commission:   16th  Meeting    ■  ,•    •    .- 

International  Rubber  Study  Group:  10th  Meeting 

International  Svmposium  on  Neurosecretion  .    ...    •.••.■•.•    •  „\ 
International   Commission   for  the   Northwest   Atlantic   Fisheries:  3d 

Meeting. 
Fag  (Food  and  Agriculture  Organization): 

Latin  American  Seminar  on  Land  Problems 

Committee  on  Commodity  Problems:  21st  Session 

Council:   17th  Session „V^ 

International  Seed  Testing  Association:   10th  Congress     .    .    ...    •    • 
UNESCO  (United  Nations  Educational,  Scientific  and  Cultural  Organ- 
ization): 

International  Center  for  Workers  Education 

Executive  Board:   34th  Session  .    .    .    .    ...    •    •    •    •    •.   •.  •„•,•• 

International  Conference  on  the  Role  and  Place  of  Music  in  Educa- 
tion. 

2d  Extraordinary  Session 

International  Chestnut  Commission 

Horticultural  Congress  and  Exposition 

International  Traffic  and  Safety  Exhibition    ••■•.• 

Pan  American  Highway  Congress,  Provisional  Committee  .    .    .    ■    ■    ■ 
Meeting  of  Directing  Council  of  the  American  International  Institute 

for  the  Protection  of  Childhood. 
8th  Pan  American  Railway  Congress 

13th  International  Dairy  Congress  and  Exposition 

International  Whaling  Commission,  5th  Meeting  .    .    .    •    •    ■    •„;;•, 
International    Commission    for    Criminal    Investigation:  22d    General 

Assembly- 

20th  International  Aeronautical  Exposition     . 

Icsu  (International  Council  of  Scientific  Unions): 

Committee  on  the  International  Geophysical  Year  19&/-a»     .... 

Executive  Board:  5th  Meeting  .    .....    .    .    •    •    ■    :„ :  ^   ■    •  .  • 

Ad  Hoc  Committee  on  Quarantine  Regulations  (South  Pacific  Commis- 

Comm°ission  of  International  Union  of  Pure  and  Applied  Physics  on  Cos- 
mic Ravs. 

16th  International  Conference  on  Pubhc  Education 

International  Film  Festival \  ■„'■    '   i    A„o„^;ot;^'r,   for 

Wmo  (Worid   Meteorological   Organization):  Regional   Association  tor 

South  America.  „  ■    ■         t  Ttr„™o„ 

9th  General  Assembly  of  the  Inter- American  Commission  of  Women  .  . 


Bern      May  4- 

New  York May  4- 

New  York May  11- 

New  York May  11- 

Geneva     June  1- 

Geneva June  15- 

New  York June  16- 

Geneva June  30- 

New  York June 

Geneva June 

New  York June 

New  York July  21- 

London* June  or  July* 

Geneva May  5- 

Geneva May  25- 

Paris May  6- 

Brighton,  England  .    .    .      June  16- 
Brighton,  England  .    .    .      July  8- 

Geneva May  6- 

Geneva May  2fr- 

Geneva June  3- 

Geneva July  21- 

Paramaribo,  Surinam  May  11- 

Copenhagen May  11- 

Naples May  18- 

New  Haven May  25- 

Sao  Paulo May  25- 

Rome June  3- 

Rome June  15- 

Dublin May  25- 

Compilgne,  France     .    .      May  30- 

Paris June  8- 

Brussels June  29- 

Paris July  1- 

Spain-Portugal  ....  May- 
Hamburg May- 
Milan  May- 
Washington  June  1- 

Montevideo June  2 

Washington    and   Atlan-  June  12- 
tic  City. 

The  Hague June  22- 

London June  22- 

Oslo June  24- 

Paris June  26- 

Brussels June  30- 

Strasbourg July  6- 

Noum^a June- 

Bagnferes-de-Bigorre  .    .      July  5- 

Geneva July  6- 

Rio  de  Janeiro July- 
Rio  de  Janeiro July- 
Washington*  Juiy- 


May  4,   1953 


657 


The  United  Nations:  A  Place  To  Promote  Peace 


by  Henry  Cabot  Lodge,  Jr. 

U.S.  Representative  to  the  United  Nations 


U.S./D.N.  press  release  dated  April  15 

I  come  to  you  tonight  from  that  interesting, 
novel,  hopeful,  primitive,  sometimes  exasperating 
but  always  essential  contrivance  known  as  the 
United  Nations.  Calvin  Coolidge  once  said  that 
politicians  are  men  who  are  twice  spoiled — by 
extravagant  praise  on  the  one  hand  and  extrava- 
gant abuse  on  the  other.  I  do  not  think  the 
United  Nations  is  spoiled  but  it  certainly  suffers 
from  extravagant  hopes  which  have  inevitably 
led  to  extravagant  disappointments. 

I  personally  approached  the  United  Nations 
convinced  of  its  essentiality  but  with  some  ex- 
asperation and  without  great  expectations.  I 
recognized  that  most  Americans  were  troubled 
about  it  for  two  principal  reasons :  First,  because 
of  the  reports  of  American  employees  of  the 
United  Nations  who  were  subversive,  and  second, 
because  of  the  impression  that  the  Soviet  Union 
was  using  the  United  Nations  as  a  device  to  help 
it  win  the  cold  war. 

Let  me  assure  you  tonight  that  the  personnel 

Eroblem  in  the  United  Nations  is  in  process  of 
eing  solved.  On  the  day  that  I  presented  my 
credentials  I  told  the  Secretary-General  of  the 
importance  of  this  problem  to  American  public 
opinion.  The  next  day  I  called  again  with  2,000 
forms,  each  of  6  pages  in  length— to  be  filled  out 
by  each  employee,  and  that  very  afternoon,  at  the 
suggestion  of  the  Secretary-General,  the  Amer- 
ican employees  had  lined  themselves  up  in  the 
corridors  for  fingerprinting.  All  forms  have 
been  filled  out  and  are  being  processed  by  the  Fbi 
and  the  Civil  Service  Commission.  The  Secre- 
tary-General has  cooperated.  I  think  this  prob- 
lem is  well  on  its  way  to  satisfactory  solution  and 
should  be  cleaned  up  in  a  matter  of  months. 
As  far  as  the  cold  war  is  concerned,  we  can  set 

'  Address  made  at  the  Women's  National  Press  Club 
dinner  honoring  the  American  Society  of  Newspaper  Edi- 
tors at  Washington  on  Apr.  15. 

658 


down  the  following  thoughts  about  the  Unitec 
Nations : 

It  is  a  place  where  we  can  see  what  the  Com 
munists  are  doing  in  the  war  of  ideas  and  some- 
times in  other  ways.  Without  it  we  could  not  set 
nearly  as  much. 

It  is  a  place  where  Americans  can  see  how  theii 
American  public  servants  are  conducting  th( 
American  side  in  the  cold  war,  and  it  therefon 
enables  us  to  correct  our  mistakes.  If  it  were  no( 
for  the  United  Nations  I  do  not  know  how  wf 
would  ever  become  speedily  aware  of  whether  oui 
conduct  of  the  cold  war  was  adequate  or  not. 

It  is  a  place — and  we  as  newspapermen  will  par- 
ticularly appreciate  this — where  you  can  get  au- 
thoritative reactions  quickly  on  the  state  of 
opinion  in  almost  any  pai't  of  the  world,  which  it 
would  take  you  days  if  not  weeks,  to  get  other- 
wise. For  example,  a  few  weeks  ago  Mr.  Vyshin- 
sky  turned  to  me  and  with  upraised  hand  shouted: 
"You  Americans  have  lost  Asia  anyway."  My 
answer,  of  course,  was  that  we  Americans  were  not 
trying  to  get  Asia,  that  we  did  not  think  of  Asia 
as  some  prize  inhabited  by  slaves  but  as  a  place 
inhabited  by  human  beings  who  wanted  to  live 
their  own  lives,  and  that  9ie  way  to  regard  Asia 
was  as  a  place  to  be  helped  rather  than  as  a  pawn 
in  the  game  of  power  politics.^ 

Within  5  minutes  after  I  said  this  there  werej 
representatives  from  Far  Eastern  nations  who,' 
knowing  the  public  opinion  in  their  own  countries, 
said  that  my  statement  would  be  of  such  interest 
that  it  should  be  translated  into  many  oriental 
languages  and  broadcast  on  the  Voice  of  America. 
This,  of  course,  was  immediately  done.  It  is  use- 
ful for  the  United  States  to  have  a  place  where 
that  kind  of  quick  reaction  can  be  obtained. 

It  is  a  place  where  is  located  the  greatest  sound- 

^Por  text   of  Ambassador  Lodge's  General  Assembly 
statement  of  Mar.  11,  see  Bulletin  of  Mar.  23, 1953,  p.  446. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


ing  board  in  the  world — where  public  opinion  is 
developed  for  the  world — and  never  forget  that 
public  opinion  is  basic  in  the  modern  world  today 
in  spite  of  iron  curtains. 

It  is  a  place  where  the  free  world  gets  consoli- 
dated. Being  free,  the  non-Communist  nations 
naturally  tend  to  go  their  own  way  and  to  drift 
apart.  But  sooner  or  later  some  Communist 
spokesman  will  make  some  statement  that  is  so 
monstrous  and  so  outlandish  and  so  offensive  that 
you  can  almost  see  the  free  nations  getting  together 
before  your  very  eyes.  This  more  than  counter- 
balances whatever  advantages  the  Communists 
may  get  out  of  their  propaganda. 

It  is  a  place  where  representatives  of  nations 
can  meet  informally  without  raising  considera- 
tions of  prestige  and  thus  settle  disputes.  The 
Berlin  airlift,  for  example,  was  brought  to  an  end 
as  the  result  of  an  American  and  a  Soviet  repre- 
sentative more  or  less  "bumping  into  each  other" 
in  the  corridors  of  the  United  Nations.  It  is  the 
best  place  in  the  world  for  this  kind  of  contact — 
which  can  prevent  such  enormous  quantities  of 
human  bloodshed. 

It  is  a  place  where  we  have  developed  allies — 
certainly  not  as  many  as  we  should  have  liked. 
But,  equally  certain,  whatever  allies  we  have  are 
welcome  and  are  that  much  clear  gain. 

U.N.  Divisions  on  tlie  Korean  Battleiine 

One  gets  a  sense  of  how  utterly  real  the  value  of 
the  United  Nations  is  when  it  is  recalled  that  in 
Korea,  only  5  of  15  divisions  in  the  line  are  Ameri- 
can. Of  a  155-mile-long  battlefront,  60  percent 
is  held  by  Eok  (Republic  of  Korea)  troops,  15  per- 
cent by  units  from  other  U.N.  countries,  and  25 
percent  by  Americans.  And  the  Republic  of 
Korea,  over  and  above  its  own  divisions,  is  giving 
us  still  more  fighting  help  in  the  form  of  Katusa's 
(Korean  Augmentation  to  U.S.  Army).  Of  the 
American  divisions  in  the  line,  roughly  one- fourth 
of  the  men  consist  of  such  Koreans. 

All  of  this,  added  to  the  fact  that  the  American 
percentage  is  undoubtedly  decreasing,  gives  the 
United  Nations  some  very  poignant  value  in  actual 
terms  of  flesh  and  blood.  Sixteen  nations,  in  ad- 
dition to  Korea,  have  proved  by  actually  sending 
their  manhood  that  they  believe  in  the  principle 
of  collective  security.  To  me,  these  nations- 
Australia,  Belgium,  Canada,  Colombia,  Ethiopia, 
France,  Greece,  Luxembourg,  New  Zealand,  the 
Netherlands,  the  Philippines,  Thailand,  Turkey, 
the  Union  of  South  Africa,  and  the  United  King- 
dom— should  have  a  special  place  in  the  affec- 
tions of  the  American  people.  If  we  did  not  have 
their  help  and  that  of  the  Koreans,  we  would  need 
10  more  U.S.  divisions  in  the  line. 

It  is  a  place  in  which  hypocrisy  can  be  exposed. 
Wlioever  has  ever  served  in  Congi-ess  knows  that 
there  is  nothing  like  face-to-face  debate  to  reveal 
a  stuffed  shirt  to  public  gaze.     The  United  Na- 

fAay  4,   7953 


tions  fills  a  similar  place  in  revealing  hypocrisy 
among  nations. 

It  is  a  place  where  the  threat  of  war  in  Iran  in 
1946  was  moderated  and  gradually  extinguished; 
it  is  a  place  from  which  the  initiative  was  taken, 
with  substantial  American  backing,  to  prevent 
Communist  encroachment  on  Greece  in  1947;  it  is 
a  place  which  enormously  facilitated  the  advent  of 
Israel  into  the  family  of  nations  and  prevented 
that  advent  from  causing  extensive  hostilities;  it 
is  a  place  which,  working  with  the  Netherlands 
and  the  Indonesians,  found  the  way  to  give  full 
independence  to  the  76  million  people  inhabiting 
Indonesia ;  it  is  a  place  which  means  much  to  the 
independence  of  Libya  and  will  undoubtedly 
mean  much  to  the  independence  of  Somaliland. 

It  is  a  place  in  which  the  age-old  American  be- 
lief that  a  meeting  of  minds  produces  more  yris- 
dom  than  the  single  opinion  of  even  a  brilliant 
mind  is  often  demonstrated.  The  United  States 
frequently  brings  proposals  before  the  United  Na- 
tions which  have  been  extensively  studied  and 
prepared.  Yet  on  many  occasions  these  proposals 
have  been  altered  and  improved  as  a  result  of  the 
debate. 

It  is  a  place  in  which  six  of  the  member  nations 
consist  of  peoples  who  were  under  alien  control 
when  the  Charter  was  signed.  Of  the  800  million 
people  in  the  free  world  who  were  dependent  10 
years  ago,  some  600  million,  or  three- fourths,  have 
won  full  independence  since  1945,  and  many  more 
have  been  placed  under  U.N.  trusteeship.  The 
newly  independent  countries  include  the  U.N. 
member  states  of  India,  Pakistan,  Burma,  the 
Philippines,  Indonesia,  and  Israel.  They  also 
include  such  nonmember  states  as  Ceylon,  Jordan, 
the  Associated  States  of  Indochina,  and  Libya. 

It  is  a  place  which  at  this  moment  is  exerting  a 
strong  influence  to  prevent  the  dispute  over  Kash- 
mir between  India  and  Pakistan  from  breaking 
out  into  open  war. 

It  is  a  place  in  which  a  veto-proof  method  has 
at  last  been  evolved  for  bringing  a  real  collective- 
defense  program  into  being.  When,  as,  and  if 
aggression  occurs  in  the  future  we  will  no  longer 
be  paralyzed  by  the  Communist  abuse  of  the  veto. 

A  Glass  House  Without  Secrets 

It  is  a  place  which  makes  it  hard  for  those  who 
want  to  divide  and  rule.  The  strategy  of  Genghis 
Khan  and,  after  him,  Tamerlane,  was  to  cajole 
one  nation  with  false  favors  while  attacking  a 
neighbor  nation.  Sometimes  I  think  that  this  is 
one  of  the  more  striking  instances  in  modern  times 
of  inherited  characteristics.  But  certainly  it  is 
true  that  it  is  much  harder  to  play  this  kind  of  a 
game  when  the  entire  free  world  is  looking  in  on 
the  glass  house  on  the  East  River,  where  there 
are  no  secrets  and  everyone  can  see  what  you're 
doing. 

It  is  a  place  which,  from  the  point  of  view  of  the 

659 


Kremlin,  must  be  a  real  headache.  They  camiot 
control  it;  they  camiot  break  it  up;  they  do  not 
dare  leave  it. 

All  this  is  not  to  blind  our  eyes  to  the  failures; 
the  United  Nations  has  appeared  at  times  to  be 
engaged  in  a  stodgy  routine  instead  of  being  the 
arena  where  the  world  struggle  is  dealt  with  most 
boldly ;  and  the  United  Nations  has  not  prevented 
the  Communist  victory  in  China — a  victory  which 
achieved  what  imperialist  Japan  was  seeking  and 
wliich  we  risked  war  in  order  to  avert.  Although 
Soviet  communism  has  suffered  one  serious  setback 
in  Yugoslavia  and  has  been  held  back  in  Western 
Europe  at  the  cost  of  great  exertions,  there  have 
been  Communist  successes  in  other  places  which 
we  would  be  foolish  not  to  admit. 

There  are  a  few  other  things  which  the  United 
Nations  is  not.  The  United  Nations  is  not  a 
place  which  in  any  way  destroys  U.S.  sovereignty. 
The  charter  specifically  prohibits  its  intervention 
in  domestic  matters.  Your  representative  at  the 
United  Nations  is  not  called  Congressman  or  Sen- 
ator but  Ambassador,  and  for  the  simjDle  reason 
that  he  represents  a  sovereign  state. 

It  is  not  a  place  which  threatens  the  destruction 
of  our  Constitution.  The  Supreme  Court  in  the 
case  of  Afiakura  vs.  The  City  of  Seattle  has  said 
that  the  treaty-making  "power  does  not  extend  as 
far  as  to  authorize  what  the  Constitution  forbids." 
Any  treaty,  whether  drafted  in  the  United  Na- 
tions or  not — and  I  am  one  who  thinks  that  too 
many  treaties  have  originated  there — needs  a  two- 
thirds  vote  of  the  Senate  as  well  as  the  signature 
of  the  President,  and  almost  all  treaties  need  con- 
gressional legislation  later. 

It  is  not  a  nest  of  Communist  spies,  for  the 
simple  reason  that  there  is  nothing  to  spy  on  in 
the  United  Nations.  The  Russians  haven't  even 
filled  their  quota  of  employees  at  the  United  Na- 
tions. No  U.S.  citizen  employed  by  the  United 
Nations  has  ever  been  prosecuted  for  espionage. 

It  is  not  a  place  which  is  controlled  by  Soviet 
Russia  and  the  Communists.  It  is  a  rare  day 
when  the  Soviets  can  count  on  more  than  5  votes 
out  of  the  60. 

It  is  not  a  snare  which  dragged  the  United 
States  into  the  Korean  war.  The  United  States 
asked  the  United  Nations  to  take  action  after  the 
Korean  war  had  broken  out. 

It  is,  of  course,  not  a  place  which  can  send 
American  boys  to  fight  anywhere.  This  power  is 
a  wholly  American  power.  Moreover,  the  United 
States  has  the  right  to  veto  any  action  of  the  Se- 
curity Council  of  the  United  Nations  dealing  with 
armed  force. 

The  United  Nations  is,  of  course,  not  a  place 
which  can  prevent  great  powers  from  fighting  if 
they  want  to  fight.  But,  as  Secretary  Dulles  has 
said. 

It  can  help  them  to  avoid  fighting  when  they  really 
do  not  want  to  fight  but  feel  that,  unless  there  is  some 
face-saving  device,  use  of  force  may  be  the  only  alterna- 


tive to  a  disastrous  loss  of  prestige.  World  organization 
provides  a  lap  into  which  even  the  great  powers  may 
choose  to  drop  their  disputes.  It  provides  a  better  way 
as  against  the  alternatives  of  humiliating  surrender  and 
violent  defiance. 

In  the  words  of  the  charter,  it  is  a  "center  for 
harmonizing." 

None  of  the  60  Nations  comprising  the  United 
Nations,  except  for  the  Soviet  Union,  is  able  to 
maintain  its  economic  and  strategic  existence 
alone — and  the  Soviet  Union  can  only  do  it  by 
requiring  the  harshest  kind  of  slave  labor.  It  is 
particularly  true  that  the  United  States  cannot 
stand  alone.  Our  country  cannot  maintain  itself 
without  supplies  far  in  excess  of  what  we  produce 
here — metals,  tin,  copper,  nickel,  chrome,  man- 
ganese, cobalt,  etc.,  and  ultimately  oil.  If  we 
were  denied  as  few  as  20  essential  materials  we 
would  be  completely  crippled. 

Tlie  only  answer  to  this  dilemma  is  to  strengthen 
the  bonds  of  enlightened  self-interest  and  of  mu- 
tual self-respect  with  other  nations. 

To  conclude,  the  United  Nations  is  a  place  where 
world  communism  can  see  us  at  close  range  and 
that  suggests  this  observation : 

Recent  Changed  Appearance  of  Soviet  Policy 

There  are  probably  several  reasons  for  the  re- 
cent clianged  appearance  of  Soviet  policy.  For 
one  thing,  it  is  the  kind  of  change  of  pace  which 
a  nation  can  use  when  it  has  the  initiative.  Hav- 
ing the  initiative  enables  a  nation  on  one  day  to 
anger  and  alert  its  rival  and  cause  him  to  "tool 
up" — and  then,  just  as  he  is  beginning  to  get 
strong,  to  use  honeyed  words  on  some  other  day 
and  cause  the  rival  to  "tool  down."  One  reason  for 
the  changed  appearance  of  Soviet  policy  is  the 
strength  of  America  under  the  leadership  of  Pres- 
ident Eisenhower  as  this  has  been  reflected  at  the 
United  Nations  where  the  Soviets  have  had  a  good 
chance  to  observe  it.  I  think  we  are  giving  the 
impression  of  a  people  united  as  they  have  not 
been  in  a  long  time  behind  a  leader  who  has  at  his 
command  many,  many  strong  tools  which  he  can 
use  to  regain  the  initiative  and  to  build  a  peaceful 
world. 

For  the  future,  therefore,  we  should  look  at 
deeds  and  not  at  words.  Words  have  become  so 
debased  by  communism  that  they  are  inaccurate 
guides  to  the  truth  of  world  strategy.  We  should 
watch  for  results  and,  when  one  action  has  been 
completed,  then  watch  for  the  next.  We  will  meet 
the  Soviets  halfway  at  any  time,  in  the  realm  of 
deeds,  and  it  is  only  deeds  which  can  bind  up  the 
wounds  of  the  world. 

The  United  Nations  is  not  in  any  sense  a  finality. 
It  is  in  a  primitive  stage,  but,  primitive  though  it 
is,  we  know  that  if  it  disappeared,  war  would  seem 
inevitable. 

With  all  its  faults,  the  United  Nations  is  a  liv- 
ing organization  which  has  gone  further  toward 


660 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Ijrganizing  peace  and  organizing  security  than  any 
jther  body  in  modern  history— and  this  result  has 
occurred  at  a  time  of  great  threats  to  the  peace 
and  the  security  of  the  international  community. 

I  have  said  that  war  would  seem  inevitable  if 
the  United  Nations  disappeared.  If,  on  the  other 
hand,  the  United  Nations  continues  and  we  do 
have  armed  aggression,  then  it  would  be  the  in- 
dispensable vehicle  for  repelling  that  aggression. 
This  is  undoubtedly  one  reason  why  the  Commu- 
nists don't  leave  it. 

We  can  also  be  sure  that  if  the  United  Nations 
did  not  exist,  even  in  its  present  imperfect  form, 
men  of  good  will  throughout  the  world  would  be 
straining  every  nerve  to  create  what  we  have  now. 
It  was  possible  to  get  along  without  a  place  like 
the  United  Nations  in  the  days  when  the  4y2-day 
boat  to  Europe  was  the  quickest  way  to  travel 
across  the  seas.  But  now  a  place  like  the  United 
Nations  is  just  as  necessary  in  international  poli- 
tics as  an  airport  is  in  international  travel  and 
for  many  of  the  same  reasons. 

You  ladies  and  gentlemen  who  play  such  a  de- 
cisive role  in  molding  the  opinions  of  your  fellow 
citizens  have  a  great  responsibility  in  this  field. 
Tlie  issue  of  war  and  peace  depends  on  the  exist- 
ence of  a  consensus  of  moral  judgment  as  to  what 
is  right  and  just.  You  play  a  decisive  part  m 
developing  that  consensus.  But  this  is  not  all. 
Remember  tliat  when  the  Wright  brothers  in- 
vented the  first  airplane  and  caused  it  to  fly  a  few 
hundred  yards  at  Kitty  Hawk,  N.C.,  they  did  not 
immediately  chop  it  to  pieces  with  hatchets  and 
burn  it  up  with  a  blow  torch  because  it  had  not 
flown  further.  They  set  about  to  improve  it  and 
so  we  have  the  wonderful  airplanes  of  today.  Let 
us  work  together  to  improve  what  we  have,  and 
in  this  work  no  single  group  can  play  as  decisive 
a  part  as  can  this  gathering  of  American  news- 
paper editors. 


Adoption  of  Resolution 
on  Korean  Question 

Stateinent  by  Ernest  A.  Gross 

U.S.  Representative  to  the  General  Assembly  ^ 

U.S. /U.N.  press  release  dated  April  18 

We  have  just  repeated  in  the  Assembly  an  un- 
precedented step  which  was  taken  earlier  this  week 
in  the  Political  and  Security  Committee.  We 
have  adopted  unanimously  a  resolution  on  the 
Korean  question.  The  resolution  expresses  the 
hope  that  the  exchange  of  sick  and  wounded  pris- 
oners of  war  will  be  speedily  completed  and  that 
the  further  negotiations  at  Panmunjom  will  re- 
sult in  achieving  an  early  armistice  in  Korea  con- 
sistent with  U.N.  principles  and  objectives. 

"  Made  on  Apr.  18  in  plenary  session. 

May  4,   1953 


Text  of  General  Assembly's 
Resolution  on  Korea 

U.N.  doc.  A/Resolution  99 
Adopted  April  18,  1953 

Tlie  General  Assembly, 

Reaffirming  its  unswerving  determination  to 
spare  no  efforts  likely  to  create  conditions  favour- 
able to  the  attainment  of  the  purposes  of  peace 
and  conciliation  embodied  in  the  Charter  of  the 
United  Nations,  , 

Noting,  following  the  United  Nations  Command 
initiative  for  the  exchange  of  sick  and  wounded 
prisoners  of  war,  the  communication  by  the  Min- 
ister for  Foreign  Affairs  of  the  Central  People's 
Government  of  the  People's  Republic  of  China  dated 
31  March  1953  to  the  President  of  the  General 
Assembly,  and  the  exchange  of  communications  be- 
tween the  United  Nations  Command  and  the  Com- 
manders of  the  Chinese  People's  Volunteers  and 
the  Korean  People's  Army  in  regard  thereto, 

Confident  that  a  just  and  honourable  armistice 
in  Korea  will  powerfully  contribute  to  alleviate  the 
present  international  tension, 

1  Notes  with  deep  satisfaction  that  an  agreement 
has  been  signed  in  Korea  on  the  exchange  of  sick 
and  wounded  prisoners  of  war; 

2.  Expresses  the  hope  that  the  exchange  of  sicK 
and  wounded  prisoners  of  war  will  be  speedily 
completed  and  that  the  further  negotiations  at 
Panmunjom  will  result  in  achieving  an  early  armi- 
stice in  Korea,  consistent  with  the  United  Nations 
principles  and  objectives ; 

3  Decides  to  recess  the  present  session  upon  com- 
pletion of  the  current  agenda  items,  and  requests 
the  President  of  the  General  Assembly  to  recon- 
vene the  present  session  to  resume  consideration 
of  the  Korean  question  (a)  upon  notification  by 
the  Unified  Command  to  the  Security  Council  of 
the  signing  of  an  armistice  agreement  in  Korea; 
or  (b)  when  in  the  view  of  a  majority  of  Members 
other  developments  in  Korea  require  consideration 
of  this  question. 


This  is  an  impressive  development.  It  expres- 
ses a  real  striving  for  peace.  It  is  a  response  to 
the  desire  of  the  peoples  of  the  world  for  a  lessen- 
ing of  tensions.  ,      o     •  .  /-> 

We  are  pleased  to  see  that  the  Soviet  (jovem- 
ment,  and  those  who  vote  with  it,  for  the  first  time 
have  voted  today  with  the  overwhelming  i«a]ority 
of  the  United  Nations  in  the  General  Assembly  on 
a  resolution  dealing  with  Korea.  It  remains  to 
be  seen  whether  this  action  warrants  the  hope  and 
optimism  that  has  been  engendered  by  this  vote 
and  by  some  recent  Communist  statements.  It  is 
easy  enough  for  the  Soviets  to  talk  for  peace. 
They  have  done  that  only  too  frequently  before. 
It  remains  to  be  seen  whether  they  really  want 
peace  and  whether  this  promise  will  be  reflected 
in  constructive  performance  around  the  confer- 
ence table  at  Panmunjom. 

This  strikes  us  as  a  solemn  moment  of  hope 
rather  than  of  gratitude.  While  these  develop- 
ments are  encouraging,  this  is  not  in  our  judgment 
a  moment  for  elation.  It  is  a  time  for  sober  re- 
flection, for  further  practical  action  at  Panmun- 
jom which  can  result  in  an  armistice. 

661 


Let  there  be  no  misunderstanding.  Progress 
has  been  made.  We  realize  it  and  we  are  glad. 
The  U.N.  Command  negotiators  and  the  Connnun- 
ist  commanders  have  agreed  to  exchange  sick  and 
wounded  prisoners  of  war,  a  humanitarian  task 
which  is  scheduled  to  begin  on  April  20.  I  am 
sure  that  all  of  us  will  be  watching  carefully  in 
the  hope  that  this  important  agreement  will  be 
carried  out  expeditiously. 

On  April  7  last,  the  chairman  of  the  U.S.  dele- 
gation, Ambassador  Lodge,  gave  a  report  to  this 
Assembly  regarding  developments  which  had 
taken  place  in  Panmunjom  up  to  that  time.=  A 
supplementary  report  of  the  communications  ex- 
changed since  April  7  is  being  transmitted  to  the 
President  of  the  General  Assembly  for  the  infor- 
mation of  the  members  of  the  United  Nations. 

We  are  hopeful  that  the  exchange  of  sick  and 
wounded  will  be  completed  shortly.  We  are 
hopeful  also  that  the  letter  of  April  16  [17]  of  the 
U.N.  Command^  will  lead  to  a  resumption  of 
negotiations  on  the  overall  question  of  prisoners 
of  war. 

My  Government,  which  bears  the  responsibility 
for  the  Unified  Command,  will  continue  to  seek 
peace  by  every  honorable  and  decent  means.  The 
true  initiative  for  peace  has  been  with  the  United 
States  and  other  loyal  supporters  of  the  United 
Nations.  As  President  Eisenhower  said  on  April 
16,  the  first  great  step  toward  peace  must  be  the 
conclusion  of  an  honorable  armistice  in  Korea. 


U.S.  Delegations 

to  International  Conferences 

Ministerial  Meeting  of  NAC 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  April 
18  (press  release  199)  that  a  Ministerial  Meeting 
of  the  North  Atlantic  Council  will  be  held  at 
Pans  beginning  April  23,  1953.  The  U.S.  delega- 
tion to  the  meeting  will  be  as  follows : 

U.S.  Representatives 

John  Foster  Dulles,  Secretary  of  State 

George  M.  Humphrey,  Secretary  of  the  Treasury 

Charles  E.  Wilson,  Secretary  of  Defense 

Harold  E.  Stassen,  Director  for  Mutual  Security 

U.S.  Permanent  Representative 

William  H.  Draper,  Jr. 

Advisers 

0.  Douglas  Dillon,  American  Ambassador  to  France 

W.  Randolf  Burgess,  Consultant  and  Deputy  to  the  Sec- 
retary of  the  Treasury 

Omar  N.  Bradley,  General  of  the  Army,  Chairman,  Joint 
Chiefs  of  Staff 

Carl  W.  MeCardle,  Assistant  Secretary  of  State  for  Pub- 
lic Affairs 

Livingston  T.  Merchant,  Assistant  Secretary  of  State  for 
European  Affairs 

'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  20,  1953,  p.  574. 
tbid.,  Apr.  27,  in.'ia,  p.  G08. 

662 


Douglas  llacArthur,  2d,  Counselor,  Department  of  State 
Andrew  N.  Overby,  Assistant  Secretary  of  the  Treasury 
Frank  C.  Nash,  Assistant  Secretary  of  Defense 
Frederick  L.  Anderson,  Deputy  U.S.  Special  Representa- 
tive in  Europe 
David  K.  E.  Bruce,  U.S.  Observer  to  the  Interim  Commit- 
tee of  the  European  Defense  Community  and  U.S. 
Representative    to    the    European    Coal "  and    Steel 
Community 
John  Ohly,  Deputy  to  the  Director  for  Mutual  Security 

il  embers  I 

Charles  W.  Adair,  Jr.,  William  Batt,  Royden  E.  Beebe,  Jr., 
Brig.  Gen.  Usaf,  Henry  E.  Billingsley,  James  S.  Bii- 
lups,  Lt.  Col.,  UsA,  Arthur  C.  Davis,  Vice  Adm.,  Usn, 
C.  Burke  Elbrick,  Roger  Ernst,  Russel  Fessenden, 
Luke  W.  Finlay,  Richard  B.  Freund,  William  Gal- 
loway, Harrison  A.  Gerhardt,  Col.,  Usa,  C.  Dillon 
Glendinuing,  Lincoln  Gordon,  John  C.  Hughes,  Fred 
W.  Jandrey,  Helen  P.  Kirkpatriek,  Jeffrey  C.  Kitchen, 
Willis  S.  Mathews,  Brig.  Gen.,  Usa,  Ben  T.  Moore, 
Roderic  O'Connor,  William  N.  Tomlinson,  George  H. 
Willis,  Robert  J.  Wood,  Brig.  Gen.,  Usa,  James  K. 
Woolnough,  Jr.,  Col.,  Usa 

Executive  Secretary 
Millard  L.  Kenestrick 
Assistant  Executive  Secretaries 
John  E.  Fobes,  Joseph  Slater 

Mineral  Resources  Development  (ECAFE> 

I 
The  Department  of  State  announced  on  April  20  (press 
release  205)  that  the  U.S.  Government  had  accepted  the 
invitation  of  the  U.N.  Economic  Commission  for  Asia 
and  the  Far  East  (Ecafe)  to  participate  in  a  Regional 
Conference  on  Mineral  Resources  Development  which 
will  be  held  at  Tokyo  from  April  20  to  30,  1953.  The  U.S. 
delegation  to  this  conference  is  as  follows :  |i 

Chairman  ' 

Peyton  Kerr,  Economic  Officer,  American  Embassy,  Tokyo 

Members  I 

David    A.    Andrews,    Assistant   Chief,    Foreign    Geology 
Branch,   Geological   Survey,   Department' of  the   In-   . 
terior  ■ 

Wesley  Clifford  Haraldson,  Economic  Officer,  American 
Embassy,  Tokyo 

Earl  Irving,  Senior  Mining  Consultant,  Special  Technical 
Economic  Mi.ssion.  Manila 

K.  P.  Wang,  Chief,  Far  East  Branch,  Foreign  Minerals 
Division,  Bureau  of  Mines,  Department  of  the  In- 
terior 

The  conference  at  Tokyo  has  been  called  by  Ecafe  to 
provide  an  opportunity  for  experts  on  mineral  resources 
to  exchange  views  on  and  discuss  techniques  for  the  de- 
velopment of  the  mineral  resources  of  the  countries  of 
the  Far  East.  In  addition  to  discussions  concerning 
mineral  resources  exploration  and  exploitation  in  con- 
nection with  the  overall  economic  development  of  the 
region,  the  conference  will  be  concerned  with  status  re- 
ports by  country  exiierts  regarding  specific  minerals. 
Activities  undertaken  under  the  technical  cooperation 
program,  the  United  Nations  Expanded  Technical  Assist- 
ance Program,  and  other  programs  of  technical  assistance 
in  the  field  of  mineral  resources  development  will  also  be 
considered. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


The  United  States  in  tlie  United  Nations 


[April  16-23] 


General  Assembly 

The  Assembly  on  April  18  unanimously  adopted 
Committee  I's  resolution  noting  with  satisfaction 
the  agreement  on  the  exchange  of  sick  and 
wounded,  expressing  hope  for  an  early  Korean 
armistice,  and  providing  for  recessing  the  present 
session  after  completion  of  the  current  agenda 
items.  In  an  explanation  of  vote,  Ernest  A.  Gross 
(US.)  expressed  his  Government's  pleasure  at 
seeing  the  U.S.S.R.  and  those  who  voted  with  it 
join  The  overwhelming  majority  for  the  first  time 
on  a  General  Assembly  resolution  dealing  with 
Korea.  It  remained  to  be  seen,  he  went  on, 
whether  this  action  warranted  the  hope  and  op- 
timism that  had  been  engendered  by  this  vote 
and  by  some  recent  Communist  statements.  It 
was  easy  enough  for  the  Soviets  to  talk  of  peace ; 
whether  they  really  wanted  peace,  and  whether 
this  promise  would  be  reflected  around  the  Pan- 
muniom  conference  table,  was  another  matter. 

The  United  States,  Ambassador  Gross  con- 
tinued, was  hopeful  that  the  exchange  of  sick  and 
wounded  prisoners  of  war  would  be  completed 
shortly  and  that  negotiations  on  the  overall  pris- 
oner question  would  be  resumed.  The  true  initia- 
tive for  peace,  he  went  on,  was  with  the  United 
States  and  the  other  loyal  supporters  of  the  United 
Nations. 

Earlier  in  the  meeting.  President  Lester  Pearson 
explained  that  since  Committee  V  (Administrative 
and  Budgetary)  was  not  meeting  during  the  second 
half  of  the  session,  the  Secretary-General  had  pre- 
pared a  report  on  the  fiscal  implications  of  Com- 
mittee I's  report  on  the  bacteriological-warfare 
item.  He  requested  unanimous  consent  for  a  pro- 
posal that  the  Assembly  examine  the  estimates 
itself,  without  reference  to  Committee  V.  Andrei 
Vvshinsky  (U.S.S.R.)  objected  to  the  proposal  on 
tlie  grounds  that  it  was  contrary  to  the  rule  requir- 
ing study  of  all  financial  implications  by  Com- 
mittee V  and  that,  in  any  event,  the  investigatory 
body  was  unnecessary  inasmuch  as  the  germ-war- 
fare charges  already  had  been  investigated  by 
what  he  called  impartial  groups. 
Because  of  tliis  objection.  President  Pearson 

May  4,    1953 


said  Committee  V  would  be  called  into  session  and 
that  its  report  would  be  taken  up  at  the  next 
plenary  meeting.^  »      -i  oq 

The  Assembly  completed  its  agenda  on  April  ^5, 
by  adopting  Committee  I's  resolutions  on  the  bac- 
teriological-warfare item  and  on  the  Burmese 
complaint,  and  went  into  recess.  Under  the  terms 
of  the  resolution  on  Korea  adopted  on  April  18,  it 
will  reconvene  to  resume  consideration  of  the 
Korean  question  after  conclusion  of  an  armistice 
in  Korea  or  if  other  Korean  developments  require 

it  to  do  so.  .  ,,.       J! 

The  vote  on  the  resolution  calling  for  an  impar- 
tial investigation  of  germ-warfare  charges  was 
51-5  (Soviet  bloc) -4  (Burma,  India,  Indonesia, 
Saudi  Arabia) .  The  Saudi  Arabian  delegate  ex- 
plained his  abstention  on  the  ground  that  prior 
agreement  had  not  been  reached  by  the  parties 

cUrectly  concerned.  ,  .       ,,         ^  rani 

On  the  Burmese  complaint,  the  vote  was  5y-U-l 
( China ) .  The  representative  of  Burma,  who  had 
abstained  from  voting  on  the  resolution  m  Com- 
mittee I,  this  time  cast  an  affirmative  vote  on  in- 
structions from  Rangoon;  his  Government,  he 
said,  had  been  impressed  by  the  efforts  made  to- 
ward reaching  general  agreement  on  the  question. 
Committee  I  {Political  and  Security)— Ihe  re- 
vised  Brazilian  resolution  on  Korea  was  adopted 
unanimously  on  April  16.  The  Committee  voted 
after  the  Polish  delegate,  Stanislaw  Skzreszewski, 
announced  that  he  would  withdraw  the  Korean 
section  of  his  resolution,  in  view  of  the  new 
initiative"  by  the  Chinese  Communists  and  North 
Koreans:  his  delegation  would  vote  for  the  Bra- 
zilian proposal.  On  instructions  from  his  Gov- 
ernment, he  also  would  not  insist  on  a  vote  on  the 
remaining  sections  of  his  resolution,  dealing  with 
disarmament  and  Nato,  since  the  debate  indicated 
that  those  two  problems  needed  further  discussion 
He  reserved  the  right  to  raise  them  at  the  next 
regular  session  of  the  Assembly. 

At  the  next  day's  meeting,  debate  began  on  the 
Burmese  complaint  of  aggression  by  the  National 
Government  of  China,  a  new  item  which  the  Gen- 

^On  April  21  Committee  V  voted  32-5  (Soviet  bloc M 
to  inform  the  Assembl.v  that  the  adoption  and  implementa- 
tion of  the  Committee  I  resolution  would  involve  about 
$65,000,  to  be  financed  out  of  the  Working  Capital  Fund. 

663 


eral  Committee  on  March  31  had  recommended  for 
inclusion  on  tlie  Assembly's  agenda. 

U  Myint  Thein  (Burma)  charged  that  Chinese 
Nationalist  forces  which  had  retreated  into  Burma 
in  1950  were  committing  aggression  against  his 
country.  Dr.  Tingfu  Tsiang  (China)  denied  tliat 
his  (jovernment  had  any  control  over  the  Chinese 
troops  in  Burma.  However,  if  Burma  wanted  the 
National  Government  to  further  Burmese  wishes 
on  the  matter,  the  National  Government  stood 
ready  to  cooperate ;  but  the  resolution  was  neither 
just  nor  helpful. 

Following  is  the  te.xt  of  a  statement  which  Am- 
bassador Henry  Cabot  Lodge,  Jr.  (U.S.)  made 
during  the  debate  on  April  21 : 

The  problem  before  the  Committee  is  essentially  one 
of  achieving  a  peaceful  settlement  of  Burma's  complaint 
concerning  the  presence  of  Chinese  irregular  troops  in 
Burma  contrary  to  tie  wishes  of  the  Burmese  Govern- 
ment. Some  of  these  troops  settleil  in  the  Kengtung  area 
at  the  end  of  World  War  II,  and  others  have  drifted  into 
Burma  since  then.  Some  1,700  troops  under  General 
Li  Ml  retreated  into  Burma  in  1950  and  have  since  then 
been  joined  by  stragglers  from  neighboring  regions.  The 
total  number  of  Chinese  irregular  troops  presently  on 
J^iirmese  soil  is  estimated  by  the  Burmese  Governmeiit  at 

_  The  United  States  believes  that  Burma  is  entirely 
justified  in  its  desire  to  eliminate  from  its  territories  these 
troops  in  view  of  the  fact  that  they  do  not  submit  to  its 
authority  and  that  elements  of  them  have  been  engaged 
in  depredations  against  peaceful  Burmese  villages  It  is 
in  the  common  interest  of  Burma  and  China,  and  of  the 
United  Nations,  that  eflfective  steps  be  taken  to  remove 
through  pacific  means  this  challenge  to  Burma's 
sovereignty. 

Since  Burma  and  the  Republic  of  China  do  not  main- 
tain diplomatic  relations,  some  intermediary  which  has 
relations  with  both  has  been  needed.  At  the  request  of 
Burma,  the  United  States  has  acted  as  this  intermediary. 
Within  the  last  few  months,  my  government  has  been 
engaged  in  a  vigorous  efifort  to  bring  the  parties  to 
agreement  on  a  method  of  meeting  the  situation. 

We  believe  that  the  fundamental  basis  for  any  negotia- 
tions is  an  agreement  in  principle  by  the  Chinese  Govern- 
ment to  cooperate  to  the  best  of  its  ability  in  effecting  a 
withdrawal  of  Li  Mi's  troops  from  Burma.  After  this 
there  should  be  a  ces.sation  of  hostile  activities  and  an 
examination  of  feasible  methods  of  withdrawing  the 
troops.  This  in  turn  should  be  followed  by  a  laying  down 
of  arms  and  departure  of  the  troops  from  Burma  It  is 
toward  this  type  of  solution  that  the  United  States  is 
worliing. 

We  consider  that  progress  has  been  made  in  these  ef- 
forts and  we  have  ground  for  belief  that  with  cooperation 
along  these  lines  tangible  results  will  be  forthcoming.  In 
his  statement  the  Representative  of  China  gave  certain 
assurances  concerning  the  cessation  of  support  and  supply 
of  the  troops.  And  we  noted  with  special  interest  the 
statement  of  the  Delegate  of  Thailand  that  his  government 
stands  ready  to  facilitate  the  evacuation  of  the  Chinese 
irregular  troops  through  his  country,  if  agreement  is 
reached  on  this  course.  It  is  only  through  such  helpful 
moves  as  this  that  a  solution  can  be  found.  We  are  in 
constant  contact  with  both  parties;  and  our  efCorts  are 
continuing  and  will  continue  as  long  as  they  are  desired 
and  there  is  a  prospect  of  useful  results. 

The  problem  is  not  an  easy  one.  It  appears  doubtful 
to  us  that  a  full  solution— that  is,  the  departure  of  all 
these  irregular  troops— will  be  feasible.  Many  of  the 
troops  seem  to  be  common  bandits  posing  as  Chinese  Na- 
tionalists.    Numerous  others  are  not  under  the  control 

664 


of  anyone  and  have  long  looked  upon  certain  parts  of  the 
Kengtung  area  as  their  home.  We  hope,  however,  that  if 
the  present  negotiations  are  successful,  a  substantial  num- 
ber can  be  induced  to  leave  Burma,  thus  reducing  the 
problem  to  manageable  proportions  for  the  Government  of 
Burma. 

The  United  States  Delegation  does  not  believe  that  the  i 
draft  resolution  proposed  by  Burma,  in  its  present  form,  ' 
is  the  best  approach  to  this  problem.  Adoption  of  such 
condemnatory  language  by  the  Assembly  would  be  likely 
to  retard  rather  than  promote  the  agreement  which  is 
clearly  needed.  Moreover,  we  do  not  believe  that  the 
procedure  established  in  the  Burmese  draft  resolution- 
action  in  the  General  Assembly  calling  for  subsequent 
and  essentially  duplicate  consideration  in  the  Security 
Council— would  be  desirable  as  a  general  practice  or 
helpful  in  this  case.  We  think  that,  instead,  the  Assembly 
should  address  itself  to  the  promotion  of  eftorts  for  a 
peaceful  and  practical  settlement.  .  .  . 

Two  additional  resolutions  were  introduced 
April  21  A  proposal  by  Argentina  requested 
Burma,  China,  and  others  directly  concerned  to 
enter  into  negotiations,  especially  "to  bring  about 
the  immediate  withdrawal"  of  the  troops  A 
Mexican  draft  provided  that  the  General  Assem- 
bly should  call  upon  the  foreign  troops  whose 
presence,  hostile  activities,  and  depredations  it 
considered  a  violation  of  Burmese  sovereignty, 
to  submit  to  disarmament  and  agree  to  internment 
or  to  leave  Burma  at  once.  The  text  also  con- 
demned the  hostile  acts  of  the  forces  and  affirmed 
that  assistance  to  them  was  contrary  to  the  charter. 
It  invited  Burma  to  report  on  the  situation  to  the 
next  Assembly. 

n^7  \  Proposal  introduced  by  Argentina  and 
Chile,  the  Mexican  draft  was  amended  to  recom- 
mend that  the  negotiations  in  progress  through 
the  good  offices  of  other  states  be  continued.  The 
Mexican  draft  was  further  amended  by  Lebanon 
and  was  adopted  on  April  22  by  a  vote" of  58-0-2 
Because  the  Committee,  on  a  motion  by  Iran' 
decided  to  give  the  Mexican  draft  priority  in  the 
voting,  the  Burmese  text  did  not  come  up  for  a 
vote.  The  Burmese  delegate,  explaining  his  ab- 
stention, expressed  regret  that  the  Committee  had 
not  seen  eye  to  eye  with  it  on  the  dispute. 

As  the  Committee  ended  its  work,  Chairman 
Joao  Carlos  Muniz  (Brazil)  said  that  in  his  view 
the  meetings  had  been  marked  by  a  high  level  of 
debate.  After  several  speakers  had  paid  warm 
tributes  to  the  chairman,  Andrei  Vyshinsky, 
speaking  for  the  "so-called  Soviet  bloc— which  was 
a  figment  of  the  imagination,"  remarked  that 
Chairman  Muniz  had  done  a  good  job  on  the  whole. 

Economic  and  Social  Council 

Discussion  of  the  world  economic  situation  be- 
gan on  April  16.  In  general,  the  speakers  agreed 
that  current  prospects  for  peace  did  not  threaten 
the  international  economy.  Delegates  from  Bel- 
giuni,  India,  and  Sweden,  however,  urged  that 
studies  be  made  of  the  problems  involved  in  recon- 
version and  possible  economic  recession.  Sir 
Gladwyn  Jebb    (U.K.)    expressed   apprehension 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


over  the  continued  imbalance  of  payments  and 
warned  that  any  increase  in  obstacles  to  U.S.  im- 
ports would  have  "very  serious"  consequences. 
Speaking  for  the  United  States,  James  J.  Wads- 
worth  stressed  the  importance  of  encouraging 
individual  incentive  and  said  his  Government 
would  have  a  "cooperative  approach"  to  the  prob- 
lem of  building  a  productive,  strong  economic  sys- 
tem within  the  free  world. 

On  April  17  the  Council  adopted  unanimously 
an  Argentine-Australian-French  draft  recom- 
mending continuance  of  international  action  for 
conservation  and  utilization  of  nonagricultural 
and  water  resources  under  previous  Council 
resolutions. 

Action  on  the  world  economic  situation  was  com- 
pleted on  April  23  with  the  adoption  of  a  request 
that  the  Secretary-General  include  index  numbei-s 
for  marine  freight  rates  in  future  reports.  At 
the  same  meeting,  the  Council  approved  unani- 
mously a  revised  six-state  resolution  on  rapid  in- 
dustrialization of  underdeveloped  countries,  thus 
concluding  its  consideration  of  integrated  eco- 
nomic development.  The  revised  draft  author- 
ized the  Secretary-General  to  consult  experts 
(rather  than  to  convene  an  expert  group,  as  in  the 
original  text)  in  continuing  his  studies  on  the  pro- 
cess and  problems  of  industrialization,  and  re- 
quested that  a  report  be  submitted  before  the 
Council's  eighteenth  session  opened.  A  U.S.- 
French amendment  suggesting  that  such  studies 
be  carried  out  by  subsidiary  Council  bodies  was  re- 
jected, 5-11-2. 


THE  CONGRESS 


German  Debt  Settlement  Agreements 
Transmitted  to  the  Senate 

Message  of  the  President  to  the  Senate 

White  House  press  release  dated  April  10 

I  transmit  herewith  for  the  consideration  of  the 
Senate  a  copy  of  each  of  the  following  agree- 
ments : 

1.  Agreement  on  German  External  Debts  signed 
at  London  on  February  27,  1953,  by  the  Federal 
Republic  of  Germany  and  by  the  United  States 
and  17  other  creditor  countries.^ 

2.  Agreement  between  the  United  States  and 
the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany  regarding  the 
Settlement  of  the  Claims  of  the  United  States  for 
Postwar  Economic  Assistance  (other  than  sur- 
plus property)  to  Germany  signed  at  London  on 
February  27,  1953.^ 

'  S.  Exec.  D,  SSd  Cong.,  Lst  sess. 
'  S.  Exec.  E,  SSd  Cong.,  1st  sess. 


3.  Agi-eement  between  the  United  States  and 
the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany  relating  to  the 
Indebtedness  of  Germany  for  Awards  made  by 
the  Mixed  Claims  Commission,  United  States  and 
Germany,  signed  at  London  on  February  27, 
1953.^ 

4.  Agreement  between  the  United  States  and 
the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany  concerning  the 
Validation  of  German  Dollar  Bonds  signed  at 
Bonn  on  April  1,  1953.* 

I  request  the  advice  and  consent  of  the  Senate  to 
the  ratification  of  these  four  agreements. 

In  addition,  I  transmit  for  the  information  of 
the  Senate  two  related  agreements  between  the 
Federal  Republic  of  Germany  and  the  United 
States  and  a  report  made  to  me  by  the  Secretary 
of  State  covering  all  six  of  these  agreements.  One 
of  the  agreements  is  concerned  with  the  settle- 
ment of  the  obligation  of  the  Federal  Republic  of 
Germany  to  the  United  States  for  surplus  prop- 
erty furnished  to  Germany.  This  agreement  was 
signed  at  London  on  February  27,  1953,  and  was 
concluded  under  the  authority  of  the  Federal 
Property  and  Administrative  Services  Act  of 
1949  (P.  L.  152,  81st  Cong.).  The  other  agree- 
ment signed  at  Bonn  on  February  27,  1953,  is  an 
executive  agreement  relating  to  the  establishment 
of  procedures  for  the  validation  of  dollar  bonds 
of  German  issue.° 

The  arrangements  set  forth  in  these  several 
agreements  provide  for  the  orderly  settlement  of 
German  external  debts,  including  the  prewar 
debts  due  mainly  to  private  persons  and  the  claims 
of  the  U.S.  Goveriunent  arising  from  postwar 
economic  assistance  to  Germany.  On  the  former 
of  these  categories,  the  effect  will  be  to  end  the 
state  of  default  which  has  existed  for  about  20 
years.  The  consideration  of  reparation  and 
other  governmental  claims  arising  from  World 
Wars  I  and  II  is  deferred  under  the  terms  of  the 
agreement. 

The  complex  documents  transmitted  herewith 
are  the  result  of  negotiations,  extending  over  more 
than  2  years,  in  which  all  of  the  interests  con- 
cerned have  been  represented.  In  particular,  it 
is  to  be  noted  that  the  settlement  terms  and  pro- 
cedures for  debts  due  to  private  creditors  were 
worked  out  by  negotiations  between  representa- 
tives of  private  creditor  interests  and  of  the  debt- 
ors. In  the  light  of  all  of  the  circumstances,  it  is 
the  view  of  the  Executive  Branch  of  the  U.S.  Gov- 
ernment that  the  settlement  arrangements  em- 
bodied in  the  Agreement  on  German  External 
Debts  and  in  the  various  bilateral  agreements  are 
reasonable,  satisfactory,  and  equitable  to  the 
interests  concerned. 

With  regard  to  debts  due  to  private  creditors, 
maturity  dates  have  been  extended  and  the  credi- 
tors are  called  upon  to  accept  a  reduction  in  in- 

"  S.  Exec.  P,  SSd  Cong.,  1st  sess. 

'  S.  Exec.  G,  83d  Cong.,  1st  sess.    For  text,  see  below. 

"  For  text  see  Bulletin  of  Mar.  9,  1953,  p.  376. 


May  4,    1953 


665 


terest  arrears  and  interest  rates,  but  the  principal 
of  the  debts  is  unchanged.  With  regard  to  the 
claims  for  economic  assistance  given  to  Germany 
in  tlie  postwar  period,  for  which  the  U.S.  Gov- 
ernment is  by  far  the  largest  claimant,  the  settle- 
ment is  comjoarable  to  the  terms  which  other 
countries  have  received  for  similar  assistance.  On 
both  categories  of  debt,  the  German  Federal  Re- 
public has  undertaken  to  make  very  considerable 
payments,  but  these  payments  may  reasonably  be 
considered  within  the  Federal  Republic's  capacity 
to  pay.  Should  the  German  Federal  Republic, 
however,  get  into  payment  difficulties,  consulta- 
tive machinery  to  deal  with  the  situation  is  pro- 
vided for. 

The  elimination  of  the  German  state  of  default 
will  contribute  substantially  and  directly  to  the 
development  of  normal  commercial  relationships 
between  the  German  Federal  Republic  and  the  rest 
of  the  free  world.  It  will  open  up  the  possibili- 
ties of  new  credit,  for  both  short-term  trade 
financing  and  long-term  investment. 

These  agreements  should  be  considered  by  the 
Senate  not  only  in  the  light  of  the  direct  financial 
benefits  to  the  United  States  but  also  in  relation 
to  the  contribution  they  will  make  to  the  achieve- 
ment of  the  principal  objective  of  U.S.  policy 
toward  Germany,  that  of  restoring  Germany  to 
the  position  of  a  responsible  nation  in  the  com- 
munity of  free  nations. 

I  recommend,  therefore,  that  the  Senate  give 
early  and  favorable  consideration  to  the  Agree- 
ment on  German  External  Debts  and  to  the  three 
bilateral  agreements  between  the  United  States 
and  the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany  relating, 
respectively,  to  the  settlement  of  claims  for  post- 
war economic  assistance  to  Germany,  to  the  in- 
debtedness of  Germany  for  the  Mixed  Claims 
Commission  awards,  and  to  the  validation  of  Ger- 
man dollar  bonds,  and  give  its  advice  and  consent 
to  their  ratification,  in  order  that  the  debt  settle- 
ment arrangements  may  be  made  effective  as 
promptly  as  possible. 

Text  of  U.  S. -German  Dollar  Bond  Agreement 

Press  release  196  dated  April  16 

The  Department  of  State  made  public  on  April 
11  the  final  text  of  the  agreement  between  the 
United  States  and  the  Federal  Republic  of  Ger- 
many regarding  certain  matters  arising  from  the 
validation  of  German  dollar  bo7ids.  The  agree- 
ment loas  signed  at  Bonn  on  April  i,  1953.^ 

The  final  text  of  the  agreement  is  as  follows: 

Aqkeement  Between  the  United  States  of  America  and 
THE  Federal  Republic  of  Germany  Uegarding  Certain 
Matters  Arising  From  the  Validation  of  German 
Dollar  Bonds 

Whereas  the  United  States  of  America  (hereinafter 
referred    to   as   "the   United   States")    and   the   Federal 

'  For  text  of  the  Department's  announcement  of  the 
signing,   see  ibid.,  Apr.   20,  1953,   p.   569. 


Republic  of  Germany  (hereinafter  referred  to  as  "tht 
Federal  Republic")  have  agreed  that  it  is  in  their  com 
mou  interest  to  provide  for  the  determination  of  tlK 
validity  of  German  dollar  bonds  in  view  of  the  possibilitj 
that  a  large  number  of  such  bonds  may  have  been  unlaw- 
fully acquired  during  hostilities  in  Germany  or  soon 
thereafter ; 

Whereas  they  have  agreed  on  procedures  for  accom- 
plishing this  purpose  in  the  Agreement  Between  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  United  States  of  America  and  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany  Regarding  the 
Validation  of  Dollar  Bonds  of  German  Issue  (hereinafter 
referred  to  as  "the  Agreement  on  Validation  Procedures") 
signed  at  Bonn  on  February  27,  1953 ; 

Whereas  the  Federal  Republic  on  the  one  hand  and 
the  United  States  and  other  countries  on  the  other  signed 
the  AsTeement  on  German  External  Debts  at  London  on 
February  27,  1953,  for  the  settlement  of  Germany's  ex- 
ternal obligations,  including  German  dollar  bonds,  the 
benefits  of  which  will  apply  only  to  bonds  which  have 
been  duly  validated  ;  and 

Whereas  the  United  States  and  the  Federal  Republic 
agree  that  further  measures  are  required  to  permit 
debtors  and  creditors  to  proceed  to  the  orderly  settlement 
of  the  obligations  arising  from  German  dollar  bonds  with 
confidence  in  the  stability  of  the  procedures  regarding 
validation  and  with  assurance  that  claims  prejudicial  to 
such  settlement  will  not  be  asserted  on  the  basis  of  bonds 
which  were  unlawfully  acquired : 

Therefore,  the  United  States  and  the  Federal  Republic 
have  agreed  as  follows : 

Article  I 

Except  as  may  be  agreed  between  the  Federal  Republic 
and  the  United  States,  the  Federal  Republic  will  not 
amend,  modify,  or  repeal  its  Law  for  the  Validation  of 
German  Foreign  Currency  Bonds  of  August  2.5,  1952 
(Bundesgesetzblatt  1952,  Part  I,  page  553)  (hereinafter 
referred  to  as  "the  Validation  Law")  or  the  Schedule 
thereto  insofar  as  they  relate  to  bonds,  debentures,  or 
other  obligations  (hereinafter  referred  to  as  bonds)  listed 
in  the  said  Schedule  or  in  the  First  Implementing  Ordi- 
nance under  the  said  Law  of  February  21,  1953  (Bundes- 
gesetzblatt 19,53,  Part  I,  page  31)  and  in  respect  of  which 
the  Schedule  or  the  said  Ordinance  describes  the  United 
States  as  the  Country  of  Offering,  or  to  coupons,  dividend 
warrants,  renewal  certificates,  subscription  warrants  or 
other  secondary  instruments  issued  in  connection  with 
such  bonds.  Except  as  may  lie  so  agreed,  the  Federal 
Republic  will  not  extend  the  provisions  of  the  said  Law 
to  bonds  offered  in  the  United  States  and  not  listed  in 
the  said  Schedule  or  the  said  Ordinance. 

Article  II 

No  bond,  coupon,  dividend  warrant,  renewal  certificate, 
subscription  warrant  or  other  secondary  instrument  re- 
ferred to  in  the  first  sentence  of  Article  I  above  shall  be 
enforceable  unless  and  until  it  shall  be  validated  either 
by  the  Board  for  the  Validation  of  German  Bonds  in  the 
United  States  established  by  the  Agreement  on  Validation 
Procedures,  or  by  the  authorities  competent  for  that  pur- 
pose In  the  Federal  Republic. 

Article  III 

The  members  of  the  Board  for  the  Validation  of  Ger- 
man Bonds  in  the  United  States  are  authorized  and  bound 
to  waive  all  immunity  from  service  of  process  issuing  from 
courts  in  the  United  States  in  proceedings  brought  to 
determine  whether  the  requirements  for  validation  of 
bonds  under  the  Validation  Law  have  been  met.  Such 
proceedings  must  be  brought  within  three  months  from 
receipt  of  the  decision  of  the  Board  by  the  party  seeljing 
validation  of  the  bond.  It  is  agreed  that  such  "members 
will  comply  with  any  judgments,  orders  or  decrees  that 
such  courts  may  issue  in  such  proceedings.  The  term 
"members'"  as  used  in  this  Article  includes  the  chairman 
and  the  deputies  of  the  members  when  acting  as  members. 


666 


Department  of  State  Bvlletin 


Article  IV 

For  the  purpose  of  all  proceedings  in  the  United  States, 
the  English  texts  of  the  Validation  Law  and  of  the  Sec- 
ond Implementing  Ordinance  thereunder  of  March  7,  1953 
(Bundesanzeiger  Nr.  50  of  March  13,  1953)  which  are 
annexed  to  the  Agreement  on  Validation  Procedures  shall 
be  authentic. 

Article  V 

This  Agreement  shall  be  ratified  by  the  TJnited  States 
and  the  Federal  Republic  in  accordance  witli  their  re- 
spective constitutional  procedures.  The  Agreement  shall 
enter  into  force  upon  (a)  the  excliange  of  instruments  of 
ratification  at  Washington,  and  (6)  the  entry  into  force 
of  the  Agreement  on  German  External  Debts  between  the 
Federal  Republic  on  the  one  hand,  and  France,  the  United 
Kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and  Northern  Ireland,  the 
United  States  and  other  countries  on  the  otlier  hand. 

Done  in  duplicate,  in  the  lOnglish  and  German  lan- 
guages, both  authentic,  at  Bonn,  this  1st  day  of  April, 
1953. 

For  the  United  States  of  America: 
James  B.  Conant 

For  the  Federal  Republic  of  Qermany: 

SCHAEFFEB 


PUBLICATIONS 


Recent  Releases 

For  sale  by  the  Svperintendcnt  of  Documents,  Qovemment 
Printing  Office,  Washington  25,  D.C.  Address  requests 
direct  to  tlie  Superintendent  of  Documents,  except  in  the 
case  of  free  publications,  which  may  be  obtained  from  the 
Department  of  State. 

United  States  Educational  Foundation  in  Finland.  Trea- 
ties and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2555.  Pub.  4811. 
13  pp.     10<t. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Finland — 
Signed  at  Helsinki  July  2,  1952 ;  entered  into  force 
July  2,  1952. 

Progress  in  the  War  of  Ideas.  International  Information 
and  Cultural  Series  30.     Pub.  4858.     6  pp.     Free. 

Address  by  Wilson  Compton,  broadcast  Dec.  23,  1952. 

Ninth  Semiannual  Report  of  the  Secretary  of  State  to 
Congress  on  the  International  Information  and  Educa- 
tional Exchange  Program.  International  Information 
and  Cultural  Series  31.     Pub.  4867.     42  pp.     25«f. 

Reviews  the  activities  carried  on,  the  effectiveness 
achieved,  and  the  expenditures  incurred  by  Iia  during 
the  period  Jan.  1-June  30,  1952. 

Health  and  Sanitation,  Cooperative  Program  in  Uruguay. 

Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2453.  Pub. 
4745.     10  pp.     10^. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Uruguay — Signed  at  Montevideo  Oct.  4,  1950,  and 
Mar.  7,  1951 ;  agreement  between  Government  of 
Uruguay  and  the  Institute  of  Inter-American  Af- 
fairs— Signed  at  Montevideo  Mar.  8,  1951. 

Technical  Cooperation,  Supplementing  Agreement  of  Feb. 
9,  1951.  Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series 
2506.     Pub.  4766.     4  pp.     5<t. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Pakistan — 
Signed  at  Karachi  Feb.  2,  1952. 


Vocational  Education  Mission  to  El  Salvador,  Modifying 
and  Extending  Agreement  of  Jan.  27  and  Feb.  12,  1951. 

Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2523.  Pub. 
4767.     4  pp.     5^. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
El  Salvador — Signed  at  San  Salvador  Feb.  19  and  28, 
1952. 

Relief  Supplies  and  Packages  for  the  United  Kingdom, 
Payment  of  Transportation  Charges,  Amending  Agree- 
ment of  Dee.  1,  1948.  Treaties  and  Other  International 
Acts  Series  2473.     Pub.  4829.     3  pp.    5^ 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  the 
United  Kingdom — Signed  at  London  Feb.  23,  and 
Apr.  7,  1951. 

Economic  Cooperation,  Guaranties  Under  Public  Law 
472,  80th  Congress,  as  Amended.  Treaties  and  Other  In- 
ternational Acts  Series  2500.    Pub.  4832.    4  pp.    5^. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Turkey — Signed  at  Ankara  Nov.  15,  1951. 

Economic  Cooperation,  Relief  Supplies  and  Packages  for 
the  United  Kingdom,  Terminating  Agreement  of  Dec.  1, 
1948,  as  Amended.  Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts 
Series  2474.    Pub.  4855.    2  pp.    5(t. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the-United  States  and  the 
United  Kingdom — Signed  at  London  June  1,  1951. 

Point  4 — What  It  Is  and  How  It  Works.  Economic  Co- 
operation Series  39.    Pub.  4868.     12  pp.    5<S. 

This  booklet  deals  with  our  Government's  program 
of  assistance  to  other  countries  in  developing  re- 
sources and  in  giving  technical  training. 

Double  Taxation,  Taxes  on  Estates  of  Deceased  Persons. 

Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2595.  Pub. 
4897.    23  pp.    10^. 

Convention  between  the  United  States  and  Finland — 
Signed  at  Washington  Mar.  3,  1952. 


Check  List  of  Department  of  State 
Press  Releases:  Apr.  20-24, 1953 

Releases  may  be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  the 
Special  Assistant  for  Press  Relations,  Department 
of  State,  Washington  25,  D.C. 

Press  releases  issued  prior  to  Apr.  20  which  ap- 
pear in  this  issue  of  the  Bulletin  are  Nos.  186  of 
Apr.  10,  ISO  of  Apr.  10,  192  of  Apr.  15,  193  of  Apr.  15, 
194  of  Apr.  16,  196  of  Apr.  16,  and  199  of  Apr.  18. 

No.      Date  Subject 

Exit  visa  for  Pvt.  Bergen 

Cale:  Latin  American  trade 

Dulles :  Possible  Korean  settlement 

Dulles:  Private  organizations  «&  Pt.  4 

Mineral  resources  (Ecafe) 

Dulles:  11th  meeting  of  Nac 

Kimball,  Carolan  appointed  to  Iia 

Fsi  graduates  Pt.  4  technicians 

Curtailment  of  Iia  staff 

de  Mille   to  assist   Iia 

Prewar  treaties  with  Japan 

Fiscal  Commission  (Ecosoc) 

Smith  :  Advance  text  of  address  in  N.  H. 

*  Not  printed. 

t  Held  for  a  later  issue  of  the  Bulletin. 


t201 

4/20 

t202 

4/20 

203 

4/20 

t204 

4/20 

205 

4/20 

206 

4/21 

•207 

4/21 

*208 

4/22 

t209 

4/22 

*210 

4/23 

t211 

4/24 

t212 

4/24 

*213 

4/24 

May  4,    7953 


667 


May  4,  1953 


Index 


Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  723 


Agriculture 

Problems  of  American  agriculture  and  foreign 

trade   (Under) 651 

American  Principles 

At  the  crossroads  In  U.S.  trade  policy  (Morton)   .       647 
The  United  Nations:  A  place  to  promote  peace 

(Lodge) 658 

Asia 
KOREA: 

Adoption   of  resolution   on   Korean   question 

(text  of  resolution,  Gross  statement)      .     .       661 

Questions  relating  to  possible  settlement  of 

Korean  question  (Dulles) 655 

LAOS:  U.S.  expresses  sympathy  for  people  .     .     .       641 

Claims  and  Property 

Submission  of  U.S.  claims  on  German  Property  .       654 

Congress 

German  debt  settlement  agreements  transmit- 
ted to  the  Senate  (Elsenhower),  text  of 
agreement 665 

Europe 

GERMANT: 

Debt  settlement   agreements   transmitted  to 

the  Senate    (Elsenhower) 665 

Submission  of  U.S.  claims  on  German  prop- 
erty  654 

President  favors  increased  aid  to  migrants  from 

Europe 639 

Finance 

German  debt  settlement  agreements  transrait- 
ted  to  the  Senate  (Elsenhower),  text  of 
agreement 665 

Foreign  Service 

The  visa  function  under  the  Immigration  and 

Nationality  Act  (Auerbach) 642 

Immigration  and  Naturalization 

President  favors  Increased  aid  to  migrants  from 

Europe 639 

The  visa  function  under  the  Immigration  and 

Nationality  Act  (Auerbach) 642 

International  Meetings 

Calendar  of  meetings 656 

U.S.  DELEGATIONS: 

Mineral  resources  development  (Ecafe)  .     .     .      862 
Ministerial  meeting  of  Nac 662 


North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization 

Ministerial  meeting  of  Nac 662 

Secretary    Dulles    departs    for    Nac    ministerial 

meeting 646 

Presidential  Documents 

German  debt  settlement  agreements  trans- 
mitted to  the  Senate 665 

President  favors  increased  aid  to  migrants  from 

Europe 639 

Prisoners  of  War 

Adoption  of  resolution  on  Korean  question  (text 

of  resolution,  Gross  statement) 661 

Publications 

Recent  releases 667 

Refugees  and  Displaced  Persons 

President  favors  Increased  aid  to  migrants  from 

Europe 639 

State,  Department  of 

The  visa  function  under  the  Immigration  and 

Nationality  Act   (Auerbach) 642 

Trade 

At  the  crossroads  in  U.S.  trade  policy  (Morton)  .      647 
Problems  of  American  agriculture  and  foreign 

trade   (Under) 651 

Treaty  Information 

Text  of  U.S. -German  dollar  bond  agreement  .     .      665 

United  Nations 

Adoption  of  resolution  on  Korean  question  (text 

of  resolution.  Gross  statement)      ....      661 

Questions    relating   to   possible   settlement    of 

Korean  question  (Dulles) 655 

The  United  Nations:  A  place  to  promote  peace 

(Lodge)        658 

The  United  States  In  the  United  Nations  .     .     .       663 

Name  Index 

Auerbach,  Frank  L 642 

Dulles,  Secretary 646,  655,  662 

Eisenhower.  President 639, 665 

Gibson,  Hugh 641 

Gross,  Ernest  A 661 

Humphrey,  George  M 662 

Juliana,    Queen 639 

Kerr,   Peyton 662 

Linder,  Harold  F 651 

Lodge,  Henry  Cabot,  Jr 658 

Martin,  Joseph  W.,  Jr 639 

McDermott,  Michael  J 641 

Morton,   Thruston   B 647 

Nixon,  Vice  President 639 

Stassen,  Harold  E 662 

Wilson,   Charles  E 662 


U     S.    eOVERHUENT  PRINTING    OFFICE:   I9B3 


jAe/  ^efia^tmeni/  /O^  CHaie^ 


Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  724 
May  11,  1953 


RESULTS     OF     NORTH     ATLANTIC     COUNCIL'S 
ELEVENTH  MEETING: 

Address  by  Secretary  Dulles 671 

Text  of  Final  Communique 673 

DOCUMENTS     ON     KOREAN     ARMISTICE 

NEGOTIATIONS 686 

THE    WORLD    ECONOMIC    SITUATION   •   Statement  by 

James  J.  tf'adsivorth 683 

THE  FOREIGN  SERVICE  AS  AN  ARM  OF  U.S. 

POLICY  •  by  Clare  Boothe  Luce 679 

PRACTICALITIES     OF     POWER      •      by   Under  Secretary 

Smith 675 


For  index  see  back  cover 


Boston  Public  Library 
Superintendent  of  Documents 

JUN  1-1953 


^.^,wyr^  bulletin 


Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  724  •  Publication  5053 
May  11,  1953 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents 

U.S.  Qovernment  Printing  OfHce 

Washington  25,  D.C. 

Prick: 

62  issues,  domestic  $7.S0,  foreign  $10.25 

Single  copy,  20  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has 
been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Budget  (January  22,  1962). 

Note:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  Department 
or  State  Bulletin  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  BULLETIN, 
a  weekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publications, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  ivith  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  it'orfc  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETIN  includes 
selected  press  releases  on  foreign  pol- 
icy issued  by  the  White  House  and 
the  Department,  and  statements  and 
addresses  made  by  the  President  and 
by  the  Secretary  of  State  and  other 
officers  of  the  Department,  as  icell  as 
special  articles  on  various  phases  of 
international  affairs  and  the  func- 
tions of  the  Department.  Informa- 
tion is  included  concerning  treaties 
and  international  agreements  to 
which  the  United  States  is  or  may 
become  a  party  and  treaties  of  gen- 
eral international  interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
well  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


Results  of  North  Atlantic  Council's  Eleventh  Meeting 


ADDRESS  BY  SECRETARY  DULLES  > 

Last  Monday  [April  27]  I  returned  from  5  work- 
ing days  in  Em-ope  with  Secretary  Humphrey, 
Secretary  Wilson,  and  Governor  Stassen.  We 
went  to  attend  the  meeting  of  the  Council  of 
Nato.  We  have  reported  to  the  President  and 
to  the  Congress  and  now  I  report  to  you. 

First  let  me,  for  background,  recall  what  Nato 
is.  Nato  is  the  grand  alliance  of  14  nations  that 
was  created  under  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty. 
That  treaty  was  adopted  4  years  ago  as  a  biparti- 
san act  to  prevent  a  third  world  war  coming  out 
of  Europe.  The  administration  was  then  Demo- 
cratic, but  Republicans  in  the  Senate,  of  which  I 
was  then  one,  took  an  active  part  in  bringing  about 
Senate  consent  to  ratification.  Then,  in  1950, 
General  Eisenhower  was  called  to  be  the  first 
Supreme  Commander  of  the  Nato  forces  in  Eu- 
rope. So  he  knows  a  great  deal  about  it.  It  was 
indeed  his  vision,  energy,  and  inspiration  which 
largely  converted  this  organization  from  a  paper 
blueprint  into  a  solid  bulwark  which  already  has 
tremendous  protective  value  to  the  United  States. 

Let  me  recall  what  this  value  is.  Suppose,  for 
example,  that  Western  Europe  were  overrun  by  tlie 
Red  armies  so  that  the  Soviet  world  included  all 
of  Europe.  That  would  so  shift  the  balance  of 
industrial  power  that  we  would  be  in  great  peril. 
Take  steel  production  as  an  example,  because  steel 
is  a  basic  commodity.  Today  we  and  our  allies 
have  an  advantage  of  about  three  to  one  over  the 
Communist  world.  But  if  Western  Europe  were 
shifted  from  the  free  world  side  to  the  Red  side 
of  the  ledger,  then  the  steel  ratio  would  be  about 
50-50.  Under  those  circumstances  the  Soviet 
leaders  would  be  much  more  likely  to  attack  us 
than  is  the  case  today. 

Of  course,  our  concern  is  much  more  than  mate- 
rial. Europe  is  the  cradle  of  our  civilization  and 
dear  to  many  of  us  as  the  home  of  our  ancestors. 
It  would  be  a  terrible  blow,  spiritually  and  mor- 
ally, if  Europe's  religion  and  culture  were  to  be 
stamped  out  by  ruthless  atheism. 

We  could  not  and  would  not  sit  idly  by  in  the 
face  of  such  an  attack  on  Europe.     So  it  is  a  case 

'  Made  over  radio  and  television  networks  on  Apr.  29 
(press  release  225 ) . 


where  we  should  seek  prevention  which  is  cheaper 
than  cure,  as  two  world  wars  have  taught  us. 
Nato  is  prevention,  we  hope,  against  a  repetition 
of  1914  and  1939. 

Nato  now  has  approximately  50  divisions  in 
Western  Europe  and  there  are  more  than  25  di- 
visions in  the  southern  flank  of  Greece  and  Turkey. 
Some  of  these  units  are  not  fully  trained  and 
equipped  and  there  is  still  much  to  be  done  to 
get  maximum  combat  effectiveness.  Nevertheless 
the  existing  forces  have  great  value  as  a  deterrent 
to  aggression.  Europe  is  not  yet  fully  secure,  but 
it  is  no  longer  a  "pushover,"  so  weak  that  it  is  a 
temptation  to  others  to  seize  it  by  an  act  of  war. 

At  last  week's  Nato  meeting  we  tried  to  find 
practical  ways  of  making  Nato  even  stronger.  We 
went  at  this  with  some  new  ideas,  largely  drawn 
from  President  Eisenhower's  own  personal  experi- 
ence and  judgment. 


Combat  Effectiveness  To  Be  Increased 

1.  We  sought  military  strength  which  would  be 
borne  out  of  economic  health,  not  economic  sick- 
ness. The  European  members  have  been  strain- 
ing toward  a  theoretical  goal  and  now  they  are 
beginning  to  get  out  of  breath.  Since  we  cannot 
foresee  the  year  of  greatest  danger.  President 
Eisenhower  believes  that  it  is  safest  to  adopt  a 
pace  which  can  be  maintained  with  growing 
strength,  rather  than  run  the  risk  of  dropping 
exhausted  by  the  wayside  before  the  haven  is 
reached.  Therefore,  at  this  Nato  meeting  we  put 
our  emphasis  on  getting  greater  strength  by  less 
costly  methods.  This  can  be  done  by  improving 
quality,  rather  than  by  seeking  an  immediate  large 
increase  in  quantity.  In  a  world  of  toughness,  it 
is  better  to  be  compact  and  hard  rather  than  to  be 
big  and  soft.  There  will  be  a  steady  Nato  build- 
up, but  in  the  main  this  year's  and  next  year's 
adfled  strength  will  come  through  im])roved 
quality.  That  will  tend  to  relieve  the  excessive 
strain  which  has  been  placed  upon  the  budgets  and 
currencies  of  some  of  the  countries,  including  our 
own.  At  the  same  time  there  will  be  a  big  lift  in 
Nato's  combat  effectiveness.  You  can  figure  this 
to  be  as  much  as  30  percent  this  year. 


Alay   7?,   7953 


671 


2.  We  sought  to  fill  the  big  gap  in  European 
defense  which  is  the  present  lack  of  (ierman 
forces.  This  gap  in  the  center  cannot  be  made 
good  by  any  eO'ort,  however  great,  put  forward 
by  tlie  other  countries.  Further,  I  do  not  believe 
that  Americans,  or  British,  or  French  want  to  an- 
ticipate fighting  to  defend  (iermany  while  the 
Germans  look  on  as  spectators.  At  present  Ger- 
mans are  only  spectators  because  the  surrender 
terms  do  not  authorize  Germany  to  have  any 
armed  forces. 

The  continental  Euroi)ean  countries  themselves 
thought  out  a  solution  which  was  to  make  agree- 
ments largely  restoring  West  Germany's  sover- 
eignty and  permitting  Germans  to  rearm  not  just 
as  German  national  forces,  which  might  serve  na- 
tional ambitions,  but  as  j^art  of  a  single  European 
Defense  Community.  This  in  turn  would  fit  into 
Nato's  defense  plans. 

These  agreements  were  signed  almost  a  year 
ago,  but  still  they  have  not  yet  been  brought  into 
force.  At  this  Nato  Council  meeting  I  intro- 
duced a  resolution  calling  for  the  prompt  creation 
of  the  European  Defense  Community  (Edc). 
This  was  unanimously  adopted. 

All  of  the  Edc  governments  are  fully  aware  of 
the  importance  of  early  action.  But  in  each  of 
the  countries  there  are  parliamentary  delays. 
This  strains  our  patience.  But  it  should  not  break 
it.  There  is  no  other  good  solution  of  the  problem 
of  establishing  adequate  strength  and  peace  in 
Europe,  as  the  cabinets  realize  and  I  trust  that 
the  parliaments  too  will  accept  that  same  view 
during  the  coming  months. 

3.  We  put  great  emphasis  on  what  is  called  "in- 
frastructure.'^ That  is  a  strange  new  word,  which 
has  come  to  have  great  importance.  It  means  the 
network  of  facilities  in  one  country  available  for 
Nato  forces  drawn  from  different  countries.  This 
requires  that  airfields,  pipelines,  supply  depots, 
radio  communication,  radar  and  the  like,  in  each 
country,  be  made  available  to  many  national  forces 
on  a  common  basis.  In  past  years,  there  has  been 
long  haggling  about  working  this  out.  This  time 
we  foimd  agreement  on  a  3-year  program  for  de- 
veloping this  "infrastructure."  At  moderate  cost, 
it  will  add  enormously  to  the  efficiency  of  the  exist- 
ing forces.  For  example,  it  will  create  50  new  air- 
fields in  a  year  for  common  use  in  Europe.  There 
can  be  a  dispersion  and  deployment  of  aircraft  on 
the  ground,  so  that  all  will  not  be  the  concentrated 
target  of  a  few  bombs.  And  if  some  airfields  are 
bombed  out,  there  will  be  alternate  fields,  well 
equipped,  on  which  planes  aloft  can  land  and  take 
off.  This  will  make  Nato  forces  much  more  effec- 
tive and  secure. 

4.  We  gave  much  thought  to  new  tactical  weap- 
ons, and  to  the  increased  power  which  they  can 
give  to  the  defense  of  Europe.  We  are  starting 
some  Nato  training  in  these  matters  with  due 
regard  to  security. 


Talks  With  Military  Leaders 

Just  before  leaving  Paris,  I  talked  at  length  with 
two  of  the  top  military  leaders  of  Nato,  General 
Ridgway  and  his  Chief  of  Staff,  General  Gruen- 
ther.  Naturally,  they  would  like  more  land  and 
air  strength  and  they  are  particularly  anxious  to 
see  the  defense  forces  rounded  out  with  German 
contingents.  However,  they  believe  that  today 
there  is  enough  strength  so  that  if  the  Soviets 
planned  to  overrun  Europe,  it  would  be  necessary 
for  tlieni  first  largely  to  re-enforce  the  Red  armies 
now  in  or  near  Eastern  Germany.  This,  they 
could  not  do  without  our  knowledge.  This  fact 
alone  is  of  great  importance.  It  means  that  we 
would  probably  get  the  opportunity  to  bring  into 
final  readiness  counter  measures  both  in  Europe 
and  elsewhere,  which  might  in  fact  deter  the  actual 
assault  and  preserve  the  peace. 

What  I  have  said  gives  you  a  good  idea  of  what 
went  on  at  our  formal  Nato  meetings.  Outside 
of  these  meetings,  we  talked  informally  and  di- 
rectly with  most  of  the  members.  We  did  not 
talk  to  them  as  though  Nato  were  just  our  re- 
sponsibility and  not  theirs.  After  all,  Nato  is  a 
joint  enterprise,  and  it  has  its  primary  location 
in  Europe. 

Also  we  discussed  with  the  British  and  the 
French,  among  others,  the  matter  of  general  eco- 
nomic aid  from  the  United  States.  Some  call  it 
a  "hand-out."  That  is  hardly  fair,  because  the 
United  States  has  gained  intangible,  if  not  specific, 
benefits. 

Americans  have  always  generously  responded  to 
emergency  needs.  But  outright  grants  ought  to 
be  reserved  only  for  real  emergencies.  They  are 
a  kind  of  crutcli  which  may  be  needed  from  time 
to  time.  But  as  soon  as  there  is  economic  health 
and  the  opportunity  for  a  people  to  earn  their  way 
by  their  own  efforts,  then  the  crutch  ought  to  be 
tlirown  away.  We  believe  that  this  is  becoming 
increasingly  possible. 

We  talked  over  that  viewpoint  with  our  friends 
in  Europe.  We  found  that  they  welcomed  a  rela- 
tionship which  would  be  dignified  and  self-respect- 
ing for  all  concerned.  There  are  plenty  of  ways 
whereby  the  British  and  French  and  others 
can  contribute  in  Europe  or  Asia  to  special  efforts 
which  are  in  the  common  interest.  Then  they  will 
be  more  and  more  earning  their  way. 

We  shall  still  be  spending  substantial  sums,  and 
these  friendly  countries  do  not  need  to  anticipate 
too  great  reduction  in  their  dollar  income.  But 
our  Government  will  be  specifically  getting,  for 
the  dollars  it  spends  abroad,  what  may  enable  it 
to  save  in  other  security  measures  and  thus,  on 
balance,  get  more  security  for  less  money. 

At  this  last  week's  Nato  Council  meeting,  in 
the  ways  I  indicated,  there  came  into  Nato  a 
transforming  spirit.  The  full  effect  will  only  be 
apparent  in  later  years  as  we  look  back.  But  as 
we  look  forward,  we  can  anticipate  that  Nato  will 


672 


Department   of  Slate   Bulletin 


never  grow  into  an  organization  which  sucks  the 
Ufe  blood  out  of  the  member  countries,  but  rather 
be  the  shield  behind  which  confidence  will  grow  to 
invigorate  all  of  the  protected  nations. 

It  has  been  said  that  the  proper  role  of  military 
strength  is  to  give  time  for  moral  ideas  to  take 
root.  The  role  of  Nato  is  to  enable  the  gieat 
moral  and  spiritual  principles  of  Western  civili- 
zation to  take  root  and  blossom  again  after  the 
ravages  of  two  world  wars.  That  was  the  con- 
ception of  those  Americans  who,  without  regard 
to  party,  joined  with  the  other  free  peoples  to 
create  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization. 
That  is  the  conception  for  which  so  many  Ameri- 
cans, without  regard  to  party,  have  given  their 
dedicated  efforts.  That  is  the  conception  which 
we  believe  is  now  nearing  realization. 

President  Eisenhower,  in  the  message  which  lie 
sent  tlirough  us  to  the  Nato  Council,  said,  "Nato 
has  become  a  mighty  force  for  peace  and  an  in- 
strument of  enduring  cooperation  among  the  At- 
lantic peoples."  As  such  it  greatly  increases  what 
the  President,  in  his  challenging  address,  called 
"the  chance  for  peace."  ^ 

TEXT  OF  FINAL  COMMUNIQUE  ISSUED  APRIL  25 

1.  The  North  Atlantic  Council,  meeting  in  Paris 
in  Ministerial  Session  with  the  Ministers  of  For- 
eign Affairs,  Defence,  Economics  and  Finance 
present,  and  under  the  chairmanship  of  Lord  Is- 
may,  completed  their  work  today. 

2.  The  Council  agreed  on  short  and  long-term 
programmes  for  Nato.  They  established  a  firm 
military  programme  for  1953  and  a  provisional 
programme  for  1954.  In  addition  to  the  forces 
which  Greece  and  Turkey  are  contributing,  there 
will  be  a  notable  increase  in  the  size  of  the  forces 
assigned  to  Nato  Supreme  Commanders  and  a 
considerable  improvement  in  their  effectiveness. 
Training  is  being  greatly  improved  at  all  levels. 
The  series  of  large-scale  manoeuvres  held  during 
the  last  year  has  appreciably  raised  the  standard 
of  co-operation  of  the  forces  of  the  member  coun- 
tries ;  units  are  being  better  equipped  and  the  or- 
ganization of  support  forces  is  developing.  The 
Nato  military  authorities  consider  that  the  at- 
tainment of  the  foi'ce  goals  in  1953,  and  the  com- 
bined influence  of  these  various  factors,  will  add 
materially  to  the  defensive  strength  of  Nato  dur- 
ing 1953. 

3.  Agreement  was  reached  not  only  on  the  com- 
mon financing  of  the  second  pai-t  (£67,000,000)  to 
the  Fourth  Slice  of  the  Infrastructure  Programme 
(the  first  part  to  the  amount  of  about  £80,000,000 
having  been  settled  at  a  Ministerial  Meeting  in 
December),  but  also  on  a  cost-sharing  formula 
which  would  cover  future  programmes  to  be  sub- 
mitted by  the  Supreme  Commanders  for  the  three- 
year  period  beginning  in  1954,  involving  expendi- 


"A  Mighty  Force  for  Peace" 

Folloiriny  is  the  text  of  a  message  from  President 
Eisenhower  tchteh  Secretary  Dulles  read  to  the 
members  of  the  North  Atlantic  Council  at  the  open- 
ing of  their  eleventh  meeting  on  April  23: 

On  the  occasion  of  this  important  meeting  I  send 
my  iiersonal  greetings  to  the  North  Atlantic  Council. 
As  you  know,  I  have  long  held  the  deep  conviction 
that  the  success  of  Nato's  program  was  essential  to 
world  ijeaee  and  to  the  security  and  well-being  of  all 
Atlantic  nations.  My  subsequent  experience  has  re- 
inforced and  strengthened  this  belief.  Nato  has 
become  a  mighty  force  for  peace  and  an  instrument 
of  enduring  cooperation  among  the  Atlantic  peoples. 
We  deplore  the  fact  that  civilized  nations  are  com- 
pelled at  this  stage  of  human  history  to  devote  so 
large  a  portion  of  their  energies  and  resources  to  the 
purpose  of  military  defense.  I  have  already  ex- 
pressed my  hope  that  it  will  be  possible  in  the  fore- 
seeable future  to  devote  part  of  these  resources  and 
energies  to  more  constructive  purpo.ses.  I  know 
that  this  can  be  accomplished  if  all  nations  will  co- 
operate sincerely  in  creating  the  necessary  condi- 
tions for  lasting  peace.  But  until  the  conditions 
for  genuine  peace  have  been  firmly  established  it 
would  be  foolhardy  for  us  to  delude  ourselves  about 
the  dangers  confronting  us.  It  is  still  the  foremost 
task  of  free  governments  to  develop  sutBcient  eco- 
nomic, defensive,  and  moral  strength  to  make  cer- 
tain that  our  civilization  is  spared  the  horror  and 
devastation  of  another  world  war. 

All  honest  men  know  that  Nato  has  no  intention 
of  aggression  and  that  we  seek  only  enough  strength 
to  deter  aggression  by  others.  We  cannot  afford 
to  .seek  less. 

As  this  meeting  opens  there  is  an  opportunity 
for  mankind  to  move  forward  toward  a  new  era  of 
Ijeace  and  progress.  The  realization  of  this  oppor- 
tunity will  depend  primarily  upon  the  deeds  of 
others.  But  our  own  task  is  clear.  While  we  carry 
the  hope  of  peace  in  our  hearts  unblemished  by 
self-delusion  or  wishful  thinking,  we  will  also  em- 
ploy the  skill  of  our  minds  and  hands  to  make  this 
hope  a  living  reality.  Throughout  the  changing  and 
unpredictable  events  of  future  months  and  years  we 
will  remain  steadfast  in  purpose  and  imited  in 
action. 

A  quotation  from  Lincoln  seems  to  have  particular 
significance  for  our  situation  of  today.  We  have 
malice  toward  none.  We  have  charity  for  all  peo- 
ples. But  we  vrill  remain  firmly  determined  to  do 
the  right  as  God  gives  us  to  see  the  right  and  will 
strive  on  to  finish  the  work  we  have  begun. 


'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  27,  195."5,  p.  599. 
Aioy   J  J,   J953 


ture  of  up  to  £250,000,000,  subject  to  the  approval 
of  Parliaments.  These  programmes  will  include  a 
wide  range  of  projects  such  as  airfields,  telecom- 
munications, naval  bases  and  port  facilities,  pipe- 
lines and  radar  installations.  The  military 
authorities  of  Nato  now  have  a  financial  planning 
figure  to  which  they  can  work  for  over  three  years. 
In  addition,  an  improved  system  is  ready  to  be  put 
into  operation  to  ensure  closer  financial  super- 
vision over  the  expenditure  of  common  infrastruc- 
ture funds. 

4.  The  Council  gave  close  attention  to  various 
economic  and  financial  factors  affecting  the  rate  of 
expansion  of  the  defence  efforts.  It  wiis  agreed 
that  the  development  of  sound  national  economies 

673 


and  the  increase  of  military  forces  should  be  pur- 
sued concurrently ;  in  certain  fields  the  establish- 
ment of  long-term  joint  military  production 
programmes  appeared  to  be  the  least  costly  and 
the  most  efficient  solution. 

5.  It  was  on  these  lines  that  the  Member  Gov- 
ernments and  the  International  Staff  developed 
a  method  for  preparing  correlated  production  pro- 
grammes. The  object  of  this  is  both  to  ensure  that 
the  defence  production  undertaken  by  European 
countries  within  their  own  budgets  is  on  the  most 
economic  lines  and  to  make  defence  production 
in  Europe  more  effective.  The  participation  of 
the  United  States,  through  off-shore  procurement, 
adds  to  the  contribution  of  the  European  coun- 
tries and  plays  a  very  important  part  in  these 
achievements.  The  additional  fighter  aircraft 
production  programme,  which  has  recently  been 
announced  is  a  first  important  result  of  this. 
It  will  facilitate  the  expansion  of  the  aircraft  in- 
dustries in  five  European  countries  while  at  the 
same  time  strengthening  the  air  defence  capacity 
of  the  Alliance.  Other  programmes  are  being  con- 
sidered. Nato  is  also  studying  the  means  of  de- 
veloping production  in  Europe  of  spare  parts  for 
the  maintenance  of  eqviipment  of  American  and 
Canadian  origin. 

6.  The  Secretary  General's  Progress  Report  to 
the  Council  stressed  the  close  collaboration  be- 
tween the  civilian  and  military  agencies  of  Nato, 
and  outlined  the  current  work  of  the  International 
Staff.  It  emphasised  the  importance  of  develop- 
ing a  better  public  understanding  of  the  aims 
and  achievements  of  Nato,  a  matter  to  which  Gov- 
ernments should  give  their  constant  attention. 
The  Report  described  the  progress  made  in  the 
many  and  varied  technical  studies  by  Committees 
of  the  Council  in  a  mmiber  of  widely  different 
fields,  such  as  civil  defence  and  other  aspects  of 
civil  organization  in  time  of  war. 

In  the  course  of  discussion  on  the  Report,  the 
Council  re-emphasised  their  interest  in  the  Nato 
countries'  co-operation  in  the  economic,  cultural 
and  social  fields.  They  noted  with  satisfaction 
the  initiative  taken  by  the  President  of  the  United 
States  of  America,  recently  announced,  with  a 
view  to  fostering  the  solution  of  over-population 
problems  in  certain  countries.'' 

7.  The  Council  continued  their  regular  practice 
of  exchanging  views  on  political  matters  of  com- 
mon concern.  In  reviewing  the  international  sit- 
uation they  were  in  full  agreement.  This  agree- 
ment included  their  estimate  of  the  recent  Soviet 
moves  and  gestures.  To  the  extent  that  these 
moves  and  gestures  are  proved  by  events  to  be 
genuine  efforts  to  reduce  international  tension, 
they  will  be  welcomed  by  Member  Governments, 
whose  policy  has  always  been  to  seek  every  oppor- 
tunity for  world  peace. 

8.  Nevertheless,  the  Council  found  that  there  had 
not  yet  in  fact  been  any  change  in  the  funda- 

"  Ibid.,  May  4,  1953,  p.  6.39. 


mental  threat  to  the  security  of  free  peoples.  The 
most  striking  evidence  of  this  continuing  threat 
is  the  huge  and  constantly  strengthened  military 
force  maintained  by  those  nations  whose  policies 
have  been  responsible  for  the  present  tension,  and 
who  are  still  promoting  aggressive  war  in  several 
parts  of  the  world.  The  most  recent  example  is 
the  extension  of  hostilities  in  Laos.  This  serious 
development  has  increased  the  burden  of  France 
in  the  struggle  against  aggression  and  has  given 
rise  to  deep  concern  on  the  part  of  other  Member 
Governments. 

9.  The  Council,  therefore,  reaffirmed  the  policy 
of  collective  defence  which  has  proved  fully  justi- 
fied, and  which  has  been  responsible  for  the  grow- 
ing confidence  of  the  free  world  in  the  future. 
The  Council  felt  that  there  was  every  prospect 
that  this  policy,  continued  with  firmness  and  pa- 
tience, will  create  a  basis  for  a  just  settlement  of 
unresolved  international  problems. 

10.  The  Council  considei'ed  it  essential  that 
Member  Governments  should  continue  to  develop 
the  free  Atlantic  Community  which  should  in- 
clude a  European  Defence  Community  to  be  estab- 
lished as  soon  as  possible  in  an  ever  more  closely 
united  Europe. 

11.  The  Council  reaffirmed  their  fundamental  de- 
sire to  build  for  peace.  They  looked  forward 
to  the  day  when  a  greater  share  of  the  resources 
of  their  countries  would  be  devoted  to  national 
and  international  reconstruction  and  development. 
Convinced  that  in  unity  lies  their  greatest 
strength,  they  are  resolved  to  broaden  co-operation 
in  every  field,  economic,  political  and  social,  as 
well  as  military,  and  so  to  make  the  Atlantic 
Community  a  lasting  reality. 

TEXT  OF  RESOLUTION  ON  EDC  ADOPTED 
APRIL  24 

The  North  Atlantic  Council, 

Recalling  its  previous  resolutions  of  May  26th 
and  December  I7th,  1952,  concerning  the  treaty 
establishing  the  European  Defence  Community 
and  the  Additional  Protocol  to  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty  on  guarantees  to  members  of  the  European 
Defence  Conununity ;  ^ 

Taking  note  of  the  progi-ess  which  has  been 
made  since  the  previous  session,  including  sub- 
mission of  the  Treaty  to  the  parliaments  of  all 
signatory  countries  and  the  fact  that  five  signa- 
tories have  now  completed  parliamentary  action 
on  the  Additional  Protocol  to  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty  on  the  guarantees  given  by  the  Parties  to 
the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  to  members  of  the 
European  Defence  Conmiunity; 

Taking  note  of  the  progress  of  the  Interim 
Committee,  created  by  the  governments  signatory 
to  the  Treaty  establishing  the  European  Defence 

'For  text  of  the  additional  protocol,  see  ibid.,  .Tune  9, 
1952,  p.  89a;  for  text  of  the  Nac  resolution  of  Dec.  17, 
1952,  see  ibid.,  .Tan.  5,  1953,  p.  4. 


674 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Community,  in  connection  witli  tlie  technical 
planning  and  other  steps  necessary  to  the  Treaty's 
coming  into  force,  inchiding  the  completion  of  the 
Additional  Protocols  and  agreements  proposed  by 
the  Interim  Committee  and  designed  to  facilitate 
the  carrying  out  of  certain  important  provisions 
of  the  Treaty ; 


Stresses  that  the  Atlantic  Community  continues 
to  attach  paramount  importance  to  the  rapid  entry 
into  force  of  the  Treaty  establishing  the  European 
Defence  Community,  and,  consequently,  to  its 
ratification  by  all  signatories,  as  well  as  to  the 
ratification  of  the  Additional  Protocol  to  the 
North  Atlantic  Treaty. 


Practicalities  of  Power 


ly  Under  Secretary  Smith  ^ 


The  Chinese  philosopher  who  lived  and  wrote 
about  3,000  years  ago  said  once,  "It  is  not  only 
that  at  times  certain  men  are  dangerous  to  society, 
but  that  at  times  certain  societies  are  dangerous  to 
all  honest  and  decent  men."  We  still  confront  the 
most  dangerous  of  those  societies  as  we  have  in 
the  past  confronted  a  series  of  them.  Those  which 
are  dangerous  today  are  represented  by  Soviet 
Russia  and  Communist  China. 

Now  this  morning  at  about  one  o'clock  I  was 
awakened  by  the  news  yesterday  that  Pravda 
had  published  in  full  the  text  of  President 
Eisenhower's  recent  speech  on  foreign  relations. 
The  fact  that  any  other  newspaper  in  the  world 
published  the  full  text  of  President  Eisenhower's 
speech  would  arouse  no  comment  at  all.  The  fact 
that  Pravdcu  in  a  totalitarian  state,  publishes  such 
a  speech  approaches  a  major  stature  of  a  miracle, 
and  you  see  in  that  one  little  vignette  the  difference 
between  our  free  society  and  that  which  exists  in 
the  Soviet  Union.^ 

I  recall  about  8  years  ago  the  Manchester  Guard- 
ian, I  think  it  was,  published  a  cartoon  which  im- 
pressed me  enormously.  The  ordinarily  four-by- 
four  cartoon  square  was  divided  into  16  little  one- 
inch  squares  and  in  the  first  of  those  squares  the 
world,  depicted  as  a  cringing  little  dog,  was  get- 
ting a  pat  on  the  back  from  a  benign,  pipe-smoking 
Stalin  and  the  little  animal  was  wriggling  all  over 
with  pleasure.  In  the  next  square  the  same  little 
animal  was  getting  a  kick  from  Molotov,  the  stars 
were  flying  m  all  directions  and,  of  course,  it  was 


'Address  made  at  the  University  of  New  Hampsliire, 
Durham,  X.  H.,  on  Apr.  25  (press  release  21.3). 

'  For  a  White  House  statement  on  this  subject,  see  p.  67S. 

May    II,    1953 


yowling  with  anguish.  The  third  square  was  a 
repetition  of  the  first,  the  fourth  of  the  second, 
and  so  on  over  the  whole  16  squares— alternate 
pats  and  kicks— alternate  wriggles  of  pleasure  and 
yowls  of  anguish,  but  a  constant  repetition  of  the 
same  thing. 

Under  these  circumstances  I  think  it  will  help 
us  remain  oriented  if  we  can  keep  constantly  m 
mind  the  real  fundamentals  of  present  world  con- 
ditions. One  such  real  fundamental  is  power,  and 
I  mean  by  power,  military  power,  regrettably. 
With  a  full  understanding  of  the  place  of  power  m 
world  relationships,  we  can  better  adjust  our- 
selves to  the  requirements  which  have  been  im- 
posed upon  us  and  we  can  resolve  satisfactorily  in 
our  own  minds  what  might  appear  to  be  contra- 
dictions in  American  foreign  policy. 

For  instance,  there  seems  to  be  a  contradiction 
when  in  all  sincerity  we  advocate  disarmament 
while  we're  spending  billions  of  dollars  to  rearm 
ourselves  and  to  rearm  our  allies.  There  seems 
to  be  a  basic  conflict  in  our  unremitting  efforts  for 
peace  while  we  go  ahead  with  the  development  of 
more  effective  and  destructive  weapons.  But  ac- 
tually, there  isn't  any  contradiction  at  all.  The 
necessity  for  this  derives  from  the  place  of  power 
in  the  world  situation.  We  didn't  inject  this  fac- 
tor into  it— it  was  and  it  has  been  there  for  many 
centuries.  But  the  fact  that  we're  not  responsible 
for  its  presence  does  not  permit  us  to  ignore  it.  To 
do  so  would  be  the  height  of  folly,  and  that  is  my 
theme  today. 

Since  we  cannot  ignore  the  ix)wer  factor,  then 
obviously  we  have  to  deal  with  it,  and  if  we're  to 
deal  with  it  successfully  it  must  be  understood  both 
in  its  origin  and  in  its  evolution.     The  lessons  of 

675 


history  are  too  well  known  on  this  campus  for  me 
to  repeat  them.  It  is  sufficient  for  me  to  remind 
you  that  within  the  memory  of  a  good  many  of  you 
here,  there  were  some  governments  that  were  in- 
clined to  look  on  an  expeditionary  force  or  on  a 
cruiser  as  a  convenient  instrument  for  the  conduct 
of  international  negotiations. 

Today  most  members  of  the  world  community 
have  abandoned  some  earlier,  essentially  primitive 
patterns  of  international  beliavior — and  since 
World  War  II  we  and  like-minded  nations  have 
joined  in  an  effort  to  replace  force  as  the  decisive 
factor  in  the  relationship  between  states  with  a 
more  civilized  mechanism.  The  cause  of  this 
evolution  and  our  ideas  regarding  the  application 
of  military  strength  in  world  affairs  are  very 
simple.  We  realize  that  man's  capacity  to  destroy 
himself  and  his  works  have  increased  almost  be- 
yond the  scope  of  imagination.  The  thoughtful 
man  of  today  lives  with  the  sobering  knowledge 
that  weapons  exist  which  could  bring  modern 
civilization  to  an  explosive  end.  Consequently  the 
United  States  and  like-minded  nations  have  broken 
witli  the  historic  and  primitive  ])attern  of  power 
politics.  We're  trying  to  resolve  international  dif- 
ferences and  tensions  by  economic,  political,  and 
diplomatic  negotiation. 

Possibly  the  tragedy  enacted  in  Geneva  in  the 
1920's  was  a  necessary,  if  painful,  lesson  to  the 
people  of  the  world,  l)ut  the  failure  of  the  League 
of  Nations  hasn't  deterred  us  from  making  a  new 
and  much  more  pi'omising  effort.  We  now  have 
an  international  organization  to  which  disputes 
can  be  brought  for  discussion  and  arbitration,  and 
there  isn't  one  of  you  here  that  would  dispute  the 
fact  that  this  procedure  is  the  right  and  possibly 
the  only  road  to  a  just  and  peaceful  world  order. 
We  know  very  well  tlie  futility  of  seeking  solutions 
through  violence.  We  would  discard  force  in 
favor  of  the  peaceful  methods  of  negotiation  and 
compromise.  Now  if  this  fact  were  univer-sally 
accepted,  our  worries  and  our  present  danger 
would  be  reduced  to  zero.  Unfortunately  it  is  not 
universally  accepted.  A  very  large  segment  of 
the  peoples  of  the  world  are  under  the  complete 
control  of  leaders  who  prefer  to  rely  on  military 
power  as  the  definitive  factor  in  their  relationship 
with  other  nations. 

Now  in  this  tragically  simple  fact  are  the  im- 
plications of  immense  consequences.  Every  time 
I  think  of  it  I  think  of  an  aphorism,  attributed, 
I  believe,  to  Chesterton,  who  said,  "Christianity 
is  mankind's  gi'eatest  and  finest  thought — the  only 
trouble  is  it  has  never  really  been  tried.''  We 
have  a  situation,  many  of  the  aspects  of  which 
are  those  of  peace,  and  yet  we  really  have  no 
peace.  We  want  to  be  rid  of  the  burden  of  arma- 
ments, yet  we  have  to  spend  billions  for  arms  and 
are  likely  to  have  to  continue  to  spend  billions  for 
arms.  We  and  our  allies  yearn  for  peace  and 
we're  fighting  in  Korea  and  we're  fighting  in  Indo- 
china and  we're  fighting  in  Malaya. 


The  Soviet  Obsession 

The  root  of  the  paradox  lies  in  the  Soviet  ob- 
session witli  the  power  factor,  which  I  don't  think 
any  of  you  should  ever  forget.  Because  of  this 
obsession  we're  compelled  to  create  strength  of 
our  own  as  a  counterweight  to  the  strength  of 
the  Soviet  Union.  I^ven  though  we  reject  force 
as  an  instrument  in  our  relationship  with  other 
nations,  we've  learned  through  bitter  experience 
that  Soviet  intransigence  reaches  a  peak  when  the  « 
negotiator  across  the  table  lacks  power.  If  the  I 
Kremlin  .should  as  a  temporary  expedient  make 
conmiitments,  we  can  look  forward  to  the  likeli- 
hood that  they  maj'  be  violated  before  the  ink  is 
dry  on  the  document  if  the  commitments  are  made 
to  an  associate  or  another  nation  which  lacks 
power.  On  the  other  hand,  we've  learned  that 
it's  possible  to  negotiate  with  the  Soviet  Union  if 
our  negotiating  position  has  solid  strength 
behind  it. 

Nothing  that  has  liajipened  in  the  past  weeks 
can  be  construed  as  evidence  of  lessening  the  Soviet 
preoccupation  with  the  power  factor.  Since  1919 
there  have  been  a  great  many  twists  and  turns  in 
Soviet  policy,  but  as  far  as  we  know  and  as  far 
as  we  can  tell  today,  the  fundamentals  on  which 
Russian  policy  is  based  have  really  not  altered  in 
any  significant  way.  To  understand  this  we 
should  recognize  that  those  fimdamentals  have 
existed  for  a  long  time  and  they  were  really  not 
changed  by  the  Bolshevik  Kevolution. 

I  have  often  quoted  Lord  Pahnerston,  a  British 
statesman  of  the  last  centui-y,  a  man  who  was  ex- 
tremely well-informed  and  a  perceptive  observer 
of  Russia.     Pahnerston  said : 

It  h;is  always  been  tlie  pnlicy  and  the  practice  of  the 
Ru.ssian  government  to  expand  its  frontiers  as  rapidly  as 
the  apathy  or  the  tinjidity  of  its  neighbors  would  permit, 
but  usually  to  halt  and  often  to  recoil  when  confronted 
by  determined  opposition,  then  to  await  the  next  favorable 
opportunity  to  spring  upon  its  intended  victim. 

Now  that  analysis  fits  the  postwar  action  of  the 
Soviet  Union  very  well  indeed. 

The  Kremlin  tried  to  keep  troops  in  Northern 
Iran,  then  withdrew  them  in  the  face  of  deter- 
mined opposition.  The  legitimate  Greek  Gov- 
ernment after  tlie  war  looked  rij^e  for  overthrow. 
Tlie  Kremlin  in.stigatcd  revolt  and  later  aban- 
doned the  rebels  when  they  were  met  with  deter- 
mined opjiosition,  Berlin  had  all  the  earmarks  of 
a  soft  touch.  I  was  in  Moscow  at  that  time.  I 
had  very  little  hope  for  the  situation.  Soviet  mil- 
itary forces  blockaded  the  city  and  then  when 
they  encountered  really  determined  op])osition — 
and  it  wasn't  military  opposition  either;  it  was 
moral  and  economic  opposition  backed  up  by  an 
airlift — they  lifted  tlie  blockade.  Now  each  of 
these  withdrawals  was  effected  when  determined 
opposition  was  met  and  not  before. 

Stalin  spelled  the  thing  out  in  a  speech  which 
I  have  read  many  times.  It  is  included  also  in 
his  famous  work,  Problem.^  of  Lemmsm.     He  was 


676 


Department   of   State   Bulletin 


describing  the  mishaps  of  the  Czarists'  govern- 
ment and  he  said : 

The  history  of  Russia  of  the  olden  days  was  that  she 
was  always  getting  defeated  for  her  backwardness.  Such 
is  the  law  of  the  exploiters  to  beat  those  who  are  back- 
ward and  weak.  If  you  are  backward,  if  you  are  weak, 
that  means  you  are  wrong.  That  means  that  you  can  be 
defeated  and  enslaved. 

Now  he  was  using  that  argument  as  a  spur  to  tlie 
5-year  phm  and  for  increasing  enormously  the 
heavy  industry  of  Russia  to  support  a  military 
potential,  but  quite  obviously  those  were  his 
thoughts  and  he  applied  those  ideas  equally  to 
other  and  to  weaker  nations  than  the  Soviet  Union. 
We  know  very  well  that  the  Kremlin  has  never 
visualized  a  world  of  coequals.  Lenin  himself 
said : 

We  great  Rus.sians  have  never  been  able  to  make  anything 
but  slaves  of  captive  peoples.  We  have  visualized  a 
dominant  Russia  among  a  galaxy  of  satellites  and  armed 
might  is  the  first  requisite  for  attaining  such  a  globe- 
girdling  objective. 

In  addition  to  the  means  of  reducing  the  strength 
of  the  intended  victim,  military  force  and  sub- 
versive tactics  are  also  a  necessity  to  weaken  that 
strength  before  brute  force  is  applied. 

Now  our  own  aspirations,  as  all  of  you  know, 
are  very  different,  but  different  though  they  are, 
we  cannot  disregard  for  a  moment  the  Soviet  re- 
liance on  force  as  a  main  means  to  get  what  it 
wants.  Fortunately  there  have  been  several  fac- 
tors which  have  exerted  a  restraining  influence 
on  Eussia's  aggressive  tendencies.  One  was  the 
apparent  belief  that  the  mere  existence  of  great 
strength  can  exert  pressure  enough  so  that  the 
victim  may  give  way  without  war,  as  in  the  case 
of  Czechoslovakia.  The  second  is  related  to  the 
Soviet  thory  that  capitalism  bears  the  seeds  of  its 
own  destruction.  They  think  that  time  is  on  their 
side.     I  think  that  time  is  on  ours. 


Reasons  for  Conciliatory  Moves 

From  their  point  of  view,  if  they  were  convinced 
that  a  major  move  would  be  confronted  by  de- 
termined opposition,  it's  reasonable  to  assume  they 
would  switch  to  a  more  conciliatory  line.  On  the 
other  hand,  of  course,  as  you  have  seen,  that  doesn't 
mean  that  a  small  war  which  possibly  doesn't  in- 
volve the  risk  of  global  conflict  may  not,  from 
the  Soviet  point  of  view,  be  entirely  logical  and 
extremely  profitable.  That's  one  of  the  reasons 
wliy  we're  fighting  in  Korea  and  one  of  the  reasons 
wjiy  our  allies  are  fighting  in  Indochina  and 
Malaya. 

In  recent  weeks  we've  witnessed  what  appears 
to  be  a  reversal  of  the  Soviet  line.  Naturally 
there  has  been  great  speculation  as  to  the  reasons 
for  this  change.  I  have  given  you  one.  Another 
is  that  the  new  Soviet  directorate  recognizes  the 
necessity  of  time  for  consolidating  its  position.  It 
may  be  that  the  Kiemlin  realizes  that  it  is  over- 
extended  and    requires    a   breathing   spell.     The 


men  in  the  Politburo  are  thoroughly  aware  of 
the  facts  of  history  and  they  know  that  several 
times  in  the  past  Russia  has  swallowed  more  than 
she  could  digest  and  has  had  to  disgorge  in  a 
welter  of  bloodshed  and  confusion.  And  it  can- 
not be  said  that  the  satellite  states  are  yet  digested. 

But,  as  I  have  said,  it  .seems  more  probable  that 
the  new  regime  is  reacting  to  the  effectiveness  of 
Western  methods  in  the  face  of  danger;  in  other 
words,  that  there  is  a  realization  that  they  will 
be  confronted  by  determined  opposition  and  if  a 
new  policy  is  really  developing  we  cannot  of  course 
afford  to  lose  siglit  of  the  fact  that  it  may  be  de- 
signed to  split  our  developing  coalition  and 
weaken  our  capability  for  providing  determined 
opposition. 

We  certainly  won't  reject  the  fact  that  the 
Kremlin  may  be  willing  to  negotiate  East- West 
differences  in  at  least  temporary  good  faith.  As 
President  Eisenhower  said : 

We're  waiting  for  deed.s — we  care  nothing  for  mere 
rhetoric.  We  care  only  for  sincerity  of  peaceful  purpose 
attested  by  acts. 

I  wonder  if  you  are  aware  of  the  real  importance 
of  the  President's  speech  in  Washington  on  April 
16?  "^  Not  only  at  home  here,  but  throughout  the 
world?  It  brought  about  what  is  really  a  dra- 
matic change  in  the  political  climate  almost  every- 
where. Within  hours  of  its  delivery  we  began  to 
receive  cables  from  all  parts  of  the  world  reflecting 
the  approbation  of  chiefs  of  state  and  diplomatic 
chanceries.  In  Western  Euroi^e  it  was  gi'eeted  as 
marking  the  beginning  of  a  new  initiative — in  the 
Near  and  Middle  East  it  has  lieen  warmly  wel- 
comed— in  the  Far  East  and  particularly  in  Japan 
it  has  been  widely  praised. 

We  don't  know  exactly  how  it  has  affected  the 
people  who  live  behind  the  Iron  Curtain.  We  do 
know  that  it  was  taken  very  seriously  in  many 
places.  In  the  satellite  countries  where  it  was 
heard  over  the  Voice  of  America,  it  was  received 
with  great  emotion — in  some  cases,  by  tears. 

As  a  whole,  then,  at  this  moment,  the  peoples 
of  the  world  seem  to  me  to  be  more  united  in  a 
desire  for  the  settlement  of  differences  and  diffi- 
cidties  than  they  have  been  for  a  long  time  indeed. 
But  this  climate  will  not  endure  indefinitely.  So 
we  watch  and  wait  for  signs  that  the  Soviet  Union 
will  respond  in  good  faith,  and  while  waiting  for 
deeds  not  words,  we  must  indeed  follow  a  policy 
which  might  be  described  as  the  "open  hand  and 
the  closed  fist."'  The  open  hand  of  course  is  al- 
ways extended  as  a  sincere  gesture  for  peace — the 
fist  must  be  clenched  in  readiness  because  we're 
dealing  with  a  regime  which  we  know  is  still 
wedded  in  an  archaic  concept  of  power.  The 
choice  rests  with  the  leaders  of  the  Soviet  Union. 
It's  up  to  them  to  choose  which  hand. 

Now  during  this  3-day  convocation  of  yours, 
you  have  heard  a  great  many  wise  words  and  much 

"  BtJLLETiN  of  Apr.  27,  1953,  p.  .599. 


May    11,    1953 


677 


about  the  full  and  thoughtful  life  on  a  college 
campus  where  the  ideas  and  policies  of  the  grow- 
ing generation  which  will  control  this  country  dur- 
ing the  years  to  come  are  being  molded.  Perhaps 
what  I  have  just  said  may  be  a  rather  drab  climax, 
but  you  people  of  New  Hampshire  have  a  reputa- 
tion for  facing  facts  and  I  have  given  some  of  them 
quite  simply  to  you  as  I  see  them. 

One  of  these  facts  is  that  the  world  has  so 
slirunk  in  terms  of  life  and  space  that  we  are  in 
a  way  living  under  conditions  such  as  the  countries 
of  Central  Europe  lived  under  for  a  great  many 
centuries.  That  is,  the  oceans  which  protected  our 
eastern  and  western  coasts  are  no  longer  formid- 
able or  impassable  obstacles.  In  terms  of  time 
and  space  they  can  be  passed  now  in  a  matter  of 
hours  and  thus  they  are  like  the  geographic  fron- 
tiers of  the  countries  of  Central  Europe — a  river, 
or  a  mountain  range — which  might  be  crossed  in 
a  day  or  in  a  matter  of  hours.  Those  nations  for 
centuries  faced  across  those  frontiers  a  potential 
enemy,  as  today  we  face  a  jx)tential  enemy  across 
ours,  and  we  may  live  under  that  state  of  tension 
for  a  long  time  to  come. 

If  you  on  this  campus  live  up  to  the  traditions  of 
your  school  and  of  your  State  and  of  your  ances- 
tors, there  is  no  reason  why,  if  we  have  to  do  it,  we 
should  not  face  such  a  condition  with  calm  confi- 
dence in  our  country  and  in  its  future  and  I  have 
complete  confidence  that  you  will. 


U.S.  To  Assist  Victims 
of  Viet  MinFi  Aggression 

Statement  hy  Secretary  Dulles 

Press  release  238  dated  May  2 

Ever  since  the  invasion  of  Laos  began,  we  have 
been  following  developments  there  with  the 
closest  attention  and  grave  concern.  Here  is  an- 
other case  of  ruthless  and  unprovoked  attack  upon 
a  country  peacefully  ruled  by  a  duly  constituted 
government  recognized  by  35  other  nations. 
When  the  Communist  talk  of  a  Laotian  "libera- 
tion army"  and  of  "Vietnamese  volunteers,"  they 
are  using  the  classic  Communist  phrases  which 
were  invented  to  cloak  aggression  and  which  now 
identify  aggression. 

We  have  encouraging  reports  that  the  people  of 
Laos  are  rallying  around  their  King  and  ai-e  co- 


operating with  the  forces  of  the  French  Union  in 
the  defense  of  their  capital.  Their  efforts  are  an 
integral  jDart  of  the  struggle  of  the  entire  free 
world  against  enslavement  and  are  recognized  as 
such  here. 

We  are  maintaining  close  contact  with  the  Gov- 
ernments of  Laos  and  of  France  regarding  the 
special  requirements  of  the  situation.  We  have 
already  taken  steps  to  expedite  the  delivery  of 
critically  needed  military  items  to  the  forces  de- 
fending Laos. 

We  are  especially  concerned  at  the  plight  of  the 
Laotian  people  who  have  been  driven  from  their 
homes  by  the  invaders.  The  Msa  Mission  in  Laos 
is  arranging  to  be  of  help  to  the  Laotian  Govern- 
ment in  the  furnishing  of  the  funds  and  supplies 
needed  to  care  for  these  victims  of  Viet  Minh 
aggression. 


Soviet  Reaction  to 
President's  Speech 

On  April  25  Pravda  devoted  its  front  page  to  a 
reprint  of  the  Presidenfs  April  16  address  on 
world  peace  (Bulletin  of  April  27, 1953,  p.  599) 
and  to  an  editorial  stating  that  the  Soviet  Union 
was  ready  to  enter  into  ^^iti^inesslilce''''  discussions 
tvith  the  West  to  end  outstanding  controversies. 
James  Hagerty,  the  Presidents  -press  secretary, 
on  April  25  made  the  following  statement  on  the 
Soviet  reaction  to  the  Presidenfs  speech: 

white  House  pre.ss  release  dated  April  25 

I  have  talked  with  the  President  about  the 
Pravda  editorial.  Its  milder  tone  is  a  welcome 
change  from  the  usual  vituperation  against  the 
United  States  and  the  free  woi'ld.  It  is  also  sig- 
nificant that  the  worldwide  interest  in  the  Presi- 
dent's peace  speech  caused  the  Soviet  leaders  to 
reprint  it  in  full  for  the  Russian  people. 

Of  course,  the  Pravda  editorial  cannot  be  con- 
sidered a  substitute  for  an  official  action  by  the 
Soviet  leaders. 

Maybe  this  editorial  is  a  first  step  toward  some- 
thing concrete.  If  so,  the  free  world  will  continue 
to  wait  for  the  definite  steps  that  must  be  made  if 
the  Soviet  leaders  are  sincerely  interested  in  a  co- 
ojDerative  solution  to  world  problems. 

If  the  Soviet  leaders  take  such  steps  they  will 
find  tlie  United  States  and  the  other  free  nations, 
as  always,  ready  to  work  unceasingly  for  peace. 


678 


Department   of  State   Bulletin 


The  Foreign  Service  as  an  Arm  of  U.  S.  Policy 

hy  Clare  Boothe  Luce 
Ambassador  to  Italy  ^ 


Tlie  Foreign  Service  is  the  overseas  arm  of  our 
President  and  Seci'etary  of  State.  Our  Govern- 
ment, in  the  carryina;  out  of  its  foreign  policy,  can 
be  no  stronjier  tlian  the  strenjith  of  that  arm. 

As  you  know,  to  do  the  tremendous  job  of  keep- 
ing Amei'iciins  and  American  interests  safe  at 
home  and  abroad,  there  are  now  about  10,000 
Americans  in  the  Foreign  Service — from  ambassa- 
dors and  ministers  to  clerks  and  stenoorraphers. 

At  the  present  time  there  are  slightly  less  than 
1,500  Foreign  Service  officers,  all  commissioned 
by  the  President,  like  Army,  Navy,  Air  Force,  and 
Marine  Corps  officers.  Like  their  Service  col- 
leagues, these  Foreign  Service  officers  look  to  a 
career  dedicated  in  the  same  way  to  the  service  of 
their  country. 

Too  often,  when  people  think  of  the  work  of  the 
Amei'ican  Foreign  Service,  they  think  of  assign- 
ments to  big,  glamorous  Embassies  such  as  Paris, 
Rome,  London,  or  Rio.  They  forget  that  our 
country  has  about  300  diplomatic  and  consular 
posts  in  75  countries  throughout  the  world.  Most 
of  these  posts  are  small  and  many  extremely  un- 
pleasant. Tihwa,  for  example,  which  was  closed 
when  the  Communists  seized  Northern  China,  was 
1.500  miles  from  the  nearest  contact  with  civiliza- 
tion. There  was  only  one  bathtub  in  the  entire 
city. 

Or  take  Jidda,  in  Arabia,  where  the  year-round 
temperature  is  as  hot  or  hotter  than  our  hottest 
day  here  in  New  York,  where  there  are  frequent 
sandstonns,  where  there  are  no  organized  public 
facilities  for  sports  or  other  entertainment,  where 
all  drinking  water  must  lie  boiled,  and  where  such 
things  as  telephone  service  and  public  transporta- 
tion services  are  virtually  nonexistent.  Or  again, 
take  Accra  on  the  West  Coast  of  Africa,  where 
nearly  all  food  must  be  imported,  where  sewage 
is  carried  beside  the  streets  in  open  ditches,  where 
the  average  humidity  at  davni  is  93  percent,  and 


'  Excerpts  from  an  address  made  before  the  America 
Italy  Society  at  New  York  on  Apr.  8. 


where  it  is  often  necessary  to  wear  mosquito  boots 
whenever  one  leavas  the  house  for  a  visit  to  friends. 

Finally,  let's  look  at  one  of  our  consulates  at  a 
remote  outpost  in  South  America.  In  this  town 
the  temperature  is  from  80  to  90  degrees  all  year 
round.  No  water,  milk,  or  fresh  vegetables  may 
be  consumed  without  boiling.  There  are  no  suit- 
able hospital  or  first  aid  facilities,  and  it  is  often 
impossible  to  find  a  doctor  of  any  kind.  Two- 
thirds  of  the  population  have  no  sewers  or  run- 
ning water,  and  nearly  90  j)ercent  of  the  popula- 
tion are  infected  by  some  form  of  internal  parasite. 
Malaria,  syphilis,  yaws,  junta,  and  tetanus  are 
prevalent.  These  are  only  a  few  examples  of  the 
many  posts  where  thousands  of  men  and  women 
of  the  Foreign  Service  surrender  the  privileges 
and  comforts  of  American  life  in  order  to  help 
maintain  that  way  of  life  for  the  rest  of  us. 

Not  the  least  of  the  hardshij^s  suffered  by  Amer- 
ican Foreign  Service  personnel  is  that  of  being 
compelled  to  become,  to  a  great  extent,  strangers 
to  their  own  country.  It  is  not  pleasant  to  serve 
one's  country  by  accepting  exile  from  it.  But  the 
love  of  America  remains.  It  should  be  remem- 
bered that  the  song  "Home,  Sweet  Home"  was  not 
written  by  a  man  sitting  safely  at  his  fireside,  but 
by  an  American  Foreign  Service  officer  stationed 
in  Tunis. 

Undercover  Work  in  World  War  II 

There  are  many  dramatic  pages  in  the  history  of 
the  Foreign  Service.  Consider  the  part  played 
by  about  a  dozen  officers  in  helping  to  pave  the 
way  for  the  American  landings  in  North  Africa 
in  1942.  These  Foreign  Service  officers  not  only 
provided  a  vast  amount  of  military  information 
about  fortifications  and  other  defense  ai'range- 
ments  in  North  Africa  but  also  worked  quietly  to 
organize  anti-Nazi  resistance  groups  among  the 
French.  Discovery  of  some  of  their  activities 
would  have  meant  imprisoiunent  or  death,  and 
they  were  in  peril  day  and  night.  However,  their 
undercover  operations  were  performed  so  effec- 
tively that  German  agents  were  almost  completely 


May    71,    7953 


679 


fooled.  Captured  Nazi  files  later  revealed  that 
some  of  the  most  effective  American  Foreign  Serv- 
ice officers  had  been  lifrhtly  dismissed  by  the  Nazis 
as  "draftdodgcrs"  and  "playboys."' 

It  would  be  impossible  to  review  all  the  excitinjr 
and  dangerous  adventures  which  befell  these  For- 
eign Service  officers,  but  a  few  may  be  illustrative. 
There  was  one  night  when  one  oflicer  smuggled 
into  a  hotel,  in  full  sight  of  Nazi  officers,  a  radio 
beacon  wrapped  in  a  gunny  sack  for  use  in  guid- 
ing American  transports  carrying  parachutists. 
There  was  the  evening,  shortly  before  the  North 
African  landings,  when  two  American  Foreign 
Service  officers  pretended  to  conduct  a  drunken 
card  game  with  a  French  friend  while  Gen.  Mark 
Clark,  who  had  landed  secretly  from  an  Allied 
submarine,  hid  in  the  cellar  and  while  the  house 
was  being  raided  by  Vichy  French  police.  Then, 
there  was  the  officer  who  was  seized  and  held  in- 
communicado for  5  days  after  the  Allied  landings 
but  who  escaped  and  made  his  way  through  Ger- 
man lines  to  Algiers,  where  he  was  able  to  furnish 
Allied  Military  Headquarters  much  valuable  in- 
formation. 

The  Foreign  Service  officers  in  North  Africa 
had  advance  information  as  to  the  time  of  the  in- 
vasion but  could  not  leave  their  offices  and  hotels 
without  attracting  attention.  Therefore,  they  de- 
liberately exposed  themselves  to  bombing,  artillery 
fire,  and  machinegun  fire  in  order  to  avoid  any 
tipoff  to  the  enemy. 

It  is  difficult  to  estimate  the  number  of  American 
lives  saved  by  the  work  done  by  these  Foreign 
Service  officers  in  "softening"  North  Africa  for 
the  invasion.  For  example,  resistance  groups 
with  whom  thase  officers  worked  virtually  para- 
lyzed Algiei-s  during  the  fii-st  6  hours  of  the  Allied 
Jandings.  Another  prize  example  was  the  com- 
mander 'of  a  defending  French  regiment  who 
issued  only  three  rounds  of  ammunition  to  his  men 
and  ordered  them  to  surrender  when  the  anmiuni- 
tion  was  exhausted.  All  told,  French  resistance 
to  the  Allied  invasion  was  greatly  reduced  by  the 
courage  and  ingenuity  shown  by  these  Foreign 
Service  officers  during  the  long  months  of 
preparation. 

The  skills  and  capabilities  of  American  Foreign 
Service  officers  are  nowhere  more  widely  recog- 
nized than  among  our  senior  military  commanders. 
Top  commanders  such  as  General  Eisenhower, 
General  Ridgway,  General  Clark,  Admiral 
McCormick,  Admiral  Carney,  etc.,  have  repeatedly 
sought  the  services  of  experienced  American  diplo- 
mats for  their  personal  staffs.  Recognizing  the 
need  for  such  services,  the  Department  of  State 
has  assigned  some  of  its  best  Foreign  Service  offi- 
cers to  these  jobs.  Their  advice  and  assistance 
has  proved  itself  of  value  on  many  occasions  and 
has  helped  to  assure  the  closest  coordination  of  our 
diplomatic  policy  with  our  military  strategy. 

During  these  last  minutes  in  Washington  I've 
had  the  very  illuminating  and  thrilling  experience 


of  encountering,  for  the  first  time,  a  number  of  the 
members  of  this  Foreign  Service  on  duty  in  Wash- 
ington. ...  I  have  been  gi'eatly  impressed  by 
the  experienced,  intelligent,  and  dedicated  civil 
servants  with  whom  I  have  been  brought  into 
touch  as  a  result  of  my  new  job. 

I  am  convinced  that  our  Foreign  Sei-vice  should 
be  staffed  with  Americans  who,  in  terms  of  char- 
acter and  intelligence,  are  typical  of  the  best  of 
the  various  sections  of  the  United  States  and  who 
are  highly  qualified  specialists,  professionallj' 
trained  in  all  aspects  of  relations  between  nations. 
I  am  convinced  that  this  is  the  kind  of  staff  we 
have  if  the  Foreign  Service  people  I  have  met  in 
the  Department  are  typical  examples  of  the 
Foreign  Service. 

I  think,  my  friends,  it  is  high  time  the  Ameri- 
can people  began  to  realize  that  they  have  been, 
may  I  say  frankly,  very  unappreciative,  very 
grudging  in  their  recognition  and  applause  of  this 
tremendous  corps  of  loyal  and  dedicated  men. 

Why?  Well,  somehow  the  false  idea  has  got 
about  that  our  Foreign  Service  men  are  political 
jobholders;  that  they,  let  me  put  it  bluntly,  ought 
to  be  ):ioliticians.  and  as  politicos,  they  ought  to  be 
fired  for  following  the  orders  and  directives  given 
to  them  by  previous  presidents  and  secretaries. 

Now  it  is  true  that  when  an  administration's 
foreign  and  domestic  policies  no  longer  reflect  the 
will  of  the  people,  the  people  change  their  ad- 
ministration in  their  national  election.  But  let 
us  also  remember,  by  and  large  what  we  intend  to 
change  is  the  policy  and  the  policymakers.  The 
great  body  of  our  administration  civil  servants 
remain.  If  they  did  not  government  itself  would 
collapse,  because  the  new  administration  would 
not  have  the  political  troops  with  which  to  govern. 

Again,  in  the  army,  in  war  or  in  peace,  when  a 
general  is  replaced  we  do  not  demand  the  de- 
mobilization of  his  troops.  Even  in  the  event  he 
were  court-martialed  for  losing  a  battle,  we  cer- 
tainly would  not  expect  the  general  who  took  his 
place  to  shoot  all  his  junior  officers.  Nevertheless, 
many  people  talk  today  as  though  a  change  of  the 
Secretary  and  Under  Secretaries — and  the  policy- 
makers— should  be  followed  by  a  wholesale  change 
of  our  Foreign  Service  officers. 

Well,  let  us  imagine  that  all  our  Foreign  Service 
officers  overseas  were  ordered  to  pack  their  bags 
and  come  home  within  a  few  weeks  after  the  elec- 
tion of  a  new  President,  simply  because  they  had 
done  what  their  oath  of  office  requires  of  them — 
obeyed  the  directives  and  orders  of  the  previous 
Secretary  and  his  President.  Can  you  possibly 
imagine  the  effect  such  a  procedure  would  have  on 
America's  interests  abroad  and  on  our  diplomatic 
relations?     It  would  be  catastrophic. 

I  hope  I  am  not  being  too  subtle,  my  friends. 
I  am  just  trying  to  say  that  because  there  have 
been  in  the  State  Department  and  the  Foreign 
Service  a  fraction  of  men  who  have  been  unworthy 
of  our  trust  is  no  reason  for  us  to  withhold  from 


680 


Department   of  Slate   Bulletin 


the  loyal  and  dedicated  many  in  onr  Foreign  Serv- 
ice the  great  confidence  and  the  jDraise  the  vast 
majority  of  them  so  richly  deserve. 

And  now  in  closing,  I  address  myself  to  the 
real  ambassadors,  who  are  you  the  people.  Sound 
diplomacy,  it  has  been  said,  is  simply  Christian 
charity  and  prudence  operating  in  international 
affairs. 

But  we  live  in  a  world — at  least  on  our  side  of 
the  Iron  Curtain— where  neither  presidents,  nor 
secretaries,  nor  cabinet  members,  nor  generals,  nor 
ambassadors  can  accomplish  much  without  the 
vigorous  support  of  the  people  and  informed 
public  opinion.     .     .     . 


Role  of  Private  Organizations 

in  Technical  Assistance  Programs 

Press  release  204  dated  April  20 

Secretary  Dulles,  at  his  press  conference  on 
April  20,  made  the  following  reply  to  questions 
conceriiing  whether  his  testimony  lief  ore  the  House 
Appropriations  Suhcommittee  on  March  18^  in- 
dicated that  private  organizations  would  he  ex- 
pected to  conduct  programs  of  assistance  to  under- 
developed countries  shoidd  the  goal  of  Presiderit 
Eisenhower,  to  bring  about  a  general  reduction  in 
armaments,  he  accom^plished? 

No,  I  would  not  think  so.  In  the  first  place, 
there  has  grown  up  a  slight  misapprehension  as  to 
what  I  said  about  private  organizations  handling 
the  Point  Four  Program.  I  did  say  that  the  type 
of  activity  which  is  represented  by  the  Point  Four 
Progi-am  is  one  which  has  in  the  past  been  to  a 
very  considerable  extent  carried  on  by  private 
corporations,  foundations,  and  the  like.  I  felt 
that  it  would  be  healthy  if  they  felt  a  gi-eater  re- 
sponsibility in  those  respects  and  did  not  feel  that 
the  U.S.  Government  was  pre-empting  the  field 
and  that,  therefore,  they  did  not  need  to  exert 
themselves  to  carry  on  activities  relating  to  the 
development  abroad  of  greater  technical 
information. 

I  believe  that  in  all  of  these  matters  it  is  health- 
ier that  the  activities,  if  feasible,  should  be  con- 
ducted by  private  organizations  rather  than  by 
government.  Of  course,  under  present  condi- 
tions it  cannot  be  totally  conducted  by  private 
operations,  and  if  there  was  an  operation  of  the 
magnitude  which  is  contemplated  by  the  Presi- 
dent in  his  address,  that  would  obviously  go  far 
beyond  the  capability  of  any  private 
organizations. 

'  "Hearings  Before  the  Subcommittee  of  the  Committee 
on  Appropriation.?,  House  of  Representatives,  83d  Cong., 
1st  sess..  Department  of  State,"  p.  .5. 

"  President  Eisenhower  outlined  his  views  on  disarma- 
ment in  his  address  before  the  American  Society  of  News- 
paper Editors  on  Apr.  16.  For  test  of  the  address,  see 
Bulletin  of  Apr.  27,  195.3,  p.  599. 


Export-Import  Bank  Credits 
to  Spain,  Japan 

The  Export-Import  Bank  announced  on  April 
13  that  it  has  authorized  the  establishment  of 
a  short-term  credit  of  $12  million  to  assist  in 
financing  Spain's  imports  of  U.S.  raw  cotton  and 
spinnable  waste.  The  credit  is  to  be  extended  to 
the  following  Spanish  commercial  banks  with  the 
guarantee  of  the  Bank  of  Spain : 

Banco  Hispano  Americano 
Banco  Exterior  de  Espana 
Banco  Espanol  de  Credito 
Banco  de  Vizcaya 
Banco  Central 
Banco  de  Bilbao 

Cotton  purchased  under  contracts  entered  into 
subsequent  to  April  9,  1953,  and  shipped  subse- 
quent to  the  date  of  the  contract  will  be  eligible 
for  financing  under  the  line  of  credit.  At  cur- 
rent market  prices  approximately  55,000  bales  of 
cotton  can  be  financed  by  the  credit.  Financing 
will  be  done  through  letters  of  credit  under  which 
18-month  drafts  bearing  an  interest  rate  of  31/2 
percent  per  annum  will  be  drawn  on  the  Bank  of 
Spain  as  agent  for  the  Spanish  commercial  banks. 
The  credit  will  be  available  through  September  30, 
1953. 

Final  details  with  respect  to  the  operation  of  the 
credit  are  yet  to  be  negotiated  and  a  further  an- 
nouncement will  be  made  when  arrangements  have 
been  completed. 


The  Export-Import  Bank  on  April  14  an- 
nounced that  it  has  authorized  a  short-term  credit 
of  $40  million  to  assist  in  financing  Japan's  im- 
ports of  U.S.  raw  cotton  from  the  1952  crop.  The 
credit  will  be  in  favor  of  the  Bank  of  Japan  and 
it  will  operate  through  U.S.  and  Japanese  com- 
mercial banks  and  cotton  marketing  channels 
which  customarily  finance  and  handle  cotton  trade 
between  the  United  States  and  Japan.  At  current 
market  prices,  approximately  200,000  bales  of 
cotton  can  be  financed  by  this  credit. 

The  credit  will  bear  interest  at  3i/^  percent  per 
annum  and  will  be  repayable  within  15  months. 

Final  details  with  respect  to  the  operation  of 
the  credit  are  yet  to  be  negotiated  and  a  further 
announcement  will  be  made  when  arrangements 
have  been  completed.  At  that  time,  all  inquiries 
relating  to  details  of  its  operation  should  be  ad- 
dressed by  the  American  cotton  shipper  to  his 
bank  or  banks  in  the  United  States,  or  to  his 
agents  or  customers  in  Japan. 

The  Bank  pointed  out  that  facilitation  of  the 
cotton  trade,  which  is  the  purpose  of  the  credit, 
is  one  of  the  most  important  factors  in  U.S.- 
Japanese economic  relations.  In  recent  years 
Japan  has  been  the  largest  export  market  for 
U.S.  cotton,  and  hence  is  of  great  significance 


May    J  J,    J953 


681 


to  our  cotton  economy,  the  prosperity  of  wliich 
is  highly  dependent  on  exports.  On  the  other 
hand,  the  Japanese  cotton-textile  industry  is  of 
central  and  basic  importance  to  the  economy  of 
that  country.  Japan  is  dependent  upon  foreign 
trade  for  maintenance  of  its  economy  and  living 
standards.  The  Japanese  textile  industry  con- 
tributes about  half  the  value  of  all  Japanese  ex- 
ports but  it  must  import  all  its  requirements  of 
raw  cotton. 


Guaranty  Issued  for  Private 
Investment  in  Haiti 

Harold  E.  Stassen,  Director  for  Mutual  Secu- 
rity, on  April  15  announced  the  signing  of  the 
first  U.S.  Government  investment-guaranty  agree- 
ment with  an  American  Republic. 

The  agreement  witli  the  Kepublic  of  Haiti 
makes  jiossible  Mutual  Security  Agency  (Msa) 
guaranties  protecting  new  American  investors  in 
that  country  against  currency  inconvertibility  and 
loss  by  expropriation.  The  agreement  was  con- 
cluded in  an  exchange  of  notes  between  John  M. 
Cabot,  Assistant  Secretary  of  State  for  Inter- 
American  Affairs,  and  Jacques  Leger,  Haitian 
Ambassador  to  the  United  States. 

"Private  investment  in  a  friendly  country  can 
be  a  major  economic  benefit  to  that  country  and 
an  important  step  in  President  Eisenhower's  pro- 
gram of  gaining  peace  and  progress  with  pros- 
perity for  tlie  free  world,"  Mr.  Stassen  said.  "I 
am  delighted  that  the  Msa  investment-guaranty 
program  can  now  encourage  United  States  firms 
and  individuals  to  invest  capital  in  another  coun- 
try of  tlie  Western  Hemisphere."  * 

MsA  has  authority  to  extend  guaranties  to  U.S. 
investors  in  any  of  the  57  mutual-security-pro- 
gram countries  after  the  conclusion  of  guaranty 
agreements  between  tlie  U.S.  Government  and  the 
country  involved.  The  jjrogram  originally  was 
limited  to  AVestern  European  countries  participat- 
ing in  the  Marshall  plan  and  their  dependent 
territories. 

Pointing  out  that  Haiti  is  the  16th  nation  to 
enter  into  such  an  agreement,  Stassen  said  that  he 
hoped  the  other  American  Republics  would  follow 
the  lead  of  the  Caribbean  country.  Invitations  to 
discuss  the  program  have  been  extended  to  other 
countries  in  the  Western  Hemisphere,  Mr.  Stassen 
said. 

"The  investment  of  United  States  capital  can 
help  to  promote  industrial  diversification,  provide 
new  employment,  and  stimulate  other  industries 
which  may  produce  raw  materials  or  other  prod- 
ucts used  by  the  newly  created  enterprise,"  Mr. 


Stassen  said.  "These  investments  often  provide 
more  consumer  goods  at  lower  cost,  effect  a  saving 
in  foreign  exchange  and  make  possible  new  earn- 
ings for  the  country  through  increasing  its  export 
potential,"  he  added. 

A  currency  convertibility  guaranty  would  pro- 
vide that,  if  the  investor  should  be  unable  to  con- 
vert local  currency  receipts  from  the  investment 
into  dollars  through  regular  banking  channels, 
the  U.  S.  Government  would  provide  the  dollar 
exchange. 

A  guaranty  against  loss  by  expropriation  would 
provide  for  reimbursement  of  the  investor  b.v  the 
U.S.  Government  for  loss  of  investment  property 
due  to  expropriatory  action.  n 

Haiti  has  taken  other  steps  during  the  past  few  n 
years  to  encourage  new  industries.  For  instance, 
legislation  has  been  passed  exempting  from  import 
duties  machinery,  equipment,  and  raw  materials 
necessary  for  new  industries.  A  similar  exemp- 
tion has  been  extended  recently  to  raw  materials 
necessary  for  the  production  of  handicrafts  to  be 
exportetl. 

Another  imjiortant  step  encouraging  new  in- 
vestment in  Haiti  was  a  reduction  of  the  national 
income  tax  by  50  percent  during  the  first  year  of 
an  enterprise  and  20  percent  during  the  next  four. 

A  recent  partial  listing  by  the  Government  of 
Haiti  showed  2o  industries  for  which  raw  ma- 
terials are  available  in  Haiti,  including  leather 
and  shoes,  glass,  salt,  tropical-fruit  ])rocessing, 
dairy  products,  paper,  fish,  cotton  textiles,  rubber 
products,  metals,  transport,  soap,  chemicals,  lime- 
stone, grain,  cliocolate,  fiber  products,  vegetable 
oils,  talc,  lumber,  and  beverages. 

The  agreement  between  the  United  States  and 
Haiti  defines  the  treatment  to  be  accorded  by  the 
Government  of  Haiti  to  currency  or  claims  which 
the  U.S.  Government  might  acquire  if  any  Msa 
guaranties  should  be  invoked  by  an  investor  in 
Haiti. 

If  a  convertibility  guaranty  should  be  invoked 
and  the  U.S.  Government  thus  acquired  local  cur- 
rency, Haiti  would  recognize  the  transfer  of  own- 
ership of  the  currency,  under  the  intergovernment 
agreement.  Such  currency  would  then  be  avail- 
able for  administrative  expenses  of  U.S.  Govei'n- 
ment  representatives  in  Haiti. 

Under  other  terms  of  the  agreement,  any  claims 
to  ownershi])  of  property  acquired  by  the  U.S. 
Government  by  paying  off  an  investor's  expropri- 
ation loss  would  also  be  recognized.  Such  claims 
would  be  negotiated  on  the  diplomatic  level  rather 
than  through  the  local  courts.  If  no  settlement 
were  reached  through  diplomatic  channels,  the 
next  stej)  under  the  agreement  would  be  arbitra- 
tion of  the  claims  by  a  person  selected  by  mutual 
agreement,  or  by  an  arbitrator  selected  by  the 
president  of  the  International  Court  of  Justice. 


682 


Departmenf  of  Sfafe  Bulletin 


The  World  Economic  Situation 


Statement  hy  James  J.  Wadsworth 

U.S.  Representative  in  the  V.N.  Economic  and  Social  Council  ^ 


0.S./D.N.  press  release  dated  April  16 

To  begin  with  I  want  to  express  my  pleasure 
at  being  able  to  Join  in  this  discussion  of  the  world 
econoinic  situation.  Many  of  you  have  partici- 
pated before.    For  me,  this  is  the  first  time. 

I  need  not  emphasize  the  importance  of  this 
annual  debate.  This  Council  is  the  only  world- 
wide forum  on  economic  matters  where  the  views 
of  the  world,  on  the  problems  of  the  world,  can 
be  thoroughly  aii'ed. 

The  studies  of  world  economic  conditions  sub- 
mitted to  us  each  year  in  connection  with  this  de- 
bate are  among  the  less  spectacular  but  most  con- 
structive achievements  of  the  United  Nations. 
The  three  regional  reports  of  the  Economic  Com- 
mission for  Latin  America,  the  Economic  Commis- 
sion for  Asia  and  the  Far  East,  and  the  Economic 
Commission  for  Europe,-  combined  with  the  an- 
nual World  Econoinic  Report  and  its  supplements 
on  Africa  and  the  Middle  East,  provide  unique 
sources  of  information  on  economic  developments 
in  various  parts  of  the  world. 

The  most  comprehensive  of  these  studies  is,  of 
cour.se,  the  World  Econoinic  Report.^  It  is  also 
the  most  difficult  to  prepare.  The  more  it  aims 
at  universality  of  coverage,  the  more  it  runs  into 
the  great  differences  in  the  availability  of  data 
from  country  to  country.  In  the  absence  of  ade- 
quate officialdata  for  such  countries  as  Communist 
China,  there  is  great  temptation  to  use  unverified 
data  obtained  from  questionable  sources. 

I  am  not  suggesting  that  the  authors  of  the 
World  Econoinic  Report  should  simply  omit  any 
reference  to  countries  whose  governments  consist- 
ently refuse  to  let  their  own  people,  or  the,  world, 
know  about  the  true  economic  conditions  in  their 
territories.    I  do  suggest,  however,  that  the  report 


'  Made  in  the  Eeonomi<?  and  Social  Council  on  Apr.  16. 

'  For  a  review  of  the  Ece  report,  see  Bttlletin  of  Apr. 
13,  195.3,  p.  534.  ^     ^^  ^^  ^^ 

'Preliminary  World  Economic  Report  for  1951-54,  U.N. 
doc.  E/2353. 

May    n,    7953 


should  make  it  clear,  much  clearer  than  is  the  case 
at  present,  that  they  are  obliged  to  operate  with 
altogether  inadequate  data  and  that  any  con- 
clusions drawn  from  them  can  at,  best  be  only 
tentative. 

Notwithstanding  these  shortcomings,  I  consider 
the  report,  taken  as  a  whole,  a  well-written,  illumi- 
nating survey.  It  offers  an  excellent  basis  for  a 
discussion  of  world  econoinic  conditions. 

Economic  Effects  of  Armament  Programs 

It  is  now  nearly  3  years  since  the  outbreak  of 
hostilities  in  Korea  imposed  upon  us  the  cruel 
necessity  of  a  sharp  acceleration  of  our  defense 
efforts.  During  that  period  defense  programs 
have  been  a  major  force  in  shaping  trends  in  the 
free  world's  economies.  I  propose  later  to  con- 
sider these  trends  in  relation  to  my  own  country. 
For  the  moment,  however,  I  should  like  to  confine 
myself,  drawing  largely  on  the  World  Econoinic 
Report,  to  a  brief  review  of  the  main  course  of  the 
economy  of  the  free  world  under  the  impact  of 
rearmament  needs.  The  report  gives  virtually  no 
consideration  to  tlie  impact  of  armament  produc- 
tion in  the  Soviet  Union  and  the  so-called  people's 
democracies.  Accordingly,  it  does  not  permit  of 
a  similar  review  of  the  effect  of  their  armament 
programs  on  their  economies.  It  is  a  well  known 
fact,  however,  that  the  levels  of  production  cited 
in  the  report  for  these  countries  include  continu- 
ous and  heavy  armament  expenditures  maintained 
at  the  expense  of  the  standards  of  living  of  their 
people. 

For  nearly  a  year  and  a  half  the  armament  ef- 
fort which  came  with  the  Korean  war  engendered 
an  econoinic  upswing.  The  demand  for  many 
basic  materials  soarecL  Fears  of  impending  short- 
ages in  consumer  goods  led  to  scare-buying. 
Pi-ices,  particularly  of  primary  products,  rose 
sharply.  Inflationary  pressures  were  intensified. 
Governments  endeavored,  with  varying  degrees  of 
success,  to  restrain  these  pressures.     Taxes  were 

683 


increased  and  credit  ti<rlitened.  In  some  instances 
more  direct  measures  were  taken,  such  as  i)rice 
controls,  allocations,  and  limitations  upon  raw 
material  end  uses.  Meanwhile,  there  was  a  shaqi 
upsur<;e  in  production,  accompanied  by  a  rapid 
accumulation  of  inventories. 

By  tlie  closino;  months  of  1951  the  economic  pat- 
tern was  different.  Inflation  was  under  control. 
Anticipatory  and  speculative  buying  virtually 
ended.  As  the  abnormal  commodity  demands  de- 
clined, the  prices  of  primary  commodities  receded. 
Inventory  accumulations  slowed  down.  Indus- 
trial production  for  a  time  ceased  to  ex])and  but 
during  the  last  third  of  19.52  again  turned  upward. 

The  result,  as  the  World  Economic  Report  indi- 
cates, was  that  1952  was  a  year  of  relative  eco- 
nomic stability,  with  a  satisfactory  normal  growth 
in  world  industrial  production.  Tlie  increase  in 
1952  over  the  1951  level  was  about  2  percent,  in 
contrast  to  the  abnormal  rise  in  1951  of  close  to 
14  percent.  The  fact  that  such  a  great  increase 
was  followed  by  a  year  which  was  on  the  whole 
one  of  relative  stability  and  further  growth  in 
world  production  is  ground  for  satisfaction. 

The  defense  effort  has  imposed  heavy  burdens 
on  the  free  world.  It  has  entailed  great  increases 
in  public  expenditure  with  considerable  additions 
to  the  tax  load.  It  has  absorbed,  and  continues  to 
absorb,  a  large  volume  of  resources.  Generally 
speaking,  however,  the  free  world  has  shouldered 
these  burdens  with  less  difficulty  than  was  antici- 
pated. Extraordinary  resilience  and  powers  of 
expansion  have  been  demonstrated  in  the  econ- 
omies of  those  countries  carrying  the  major  bur- 
den of  the  rearmament  effort.  As  a  result  of  these 
qualities  the  arms  needed  for  defense  have  been 
forthcoming.  At  the  same  time,  the  supply  of 
goods  available  for  civilian  consumption  has  been 
increased,  and  large  amounts  of  equipment  es- 
sential for  economic  development  have  been  made 
available  for  export. 

Since  1937,  industrial  production  has  risen  by 
75  percent.  By  contrast,  the  growth  of  food  out- 
put by  only  10  percent  is  disturbing.  Wlien 
viewed  against  the  15  percent  inci-ease  in  world 
population  it  means  that  we  are  still  losing  ground 
in  the  fight  against  hunger. 

The  lag  in  food  production  is  one  of  the  crucial 
economic  and  social  problems  of  our  time.  Vast 
numbers  of  people  are  still  inadequately  fed.  A)i 
expansion  of  world  food  supplies  is  a  vital  neces- 
sity. It  must  be  a  basic  element  in  all  plans  for 
raising  standards  of  living  in  the  imderdeveloped 
parts  of  the  world. 

Economic  Developments  in  the  U.S. 

I  should  like  to  turn  now  to  developments  in 
my  own  country  since  the  beginning  of  the  Korean 
trouble. 

Economic  events  in  the  United  States  have 
paralleled  to  a  high  degree  those  described  for  the 


world  as  a  whole  by  the  Secretary-General. 
There  was  in  this  country,  too,  a  post-Korean 
wave-like  motion  of  inventories  and  prices,  with 
an  upward  trend  of  both  industrial  and  agiicul- 
tural  (juti)ut. 

The  output  of  our  farms,  factories,  mines,  and 
service  industries  continued  to  increase  in  1952, 
although  not  at  the  high  over-all  rates  as  in  1951. 
Moreover,  the  past  6  months  have  shown  a  greater 
rate  of  growth  than  the  first  9  months  of  1952,  the 
period  covered  by  the  Secretary-General's  report. 
For  1952  as  a  whole,  the  gross  national  product 
was  close  to  $350  billion.  In  the  fourth  quarter 
of  that  year  it  exceeded  an  annual  rate  of  $360 
billion.  In  real  terms.  1952  gi'oss  output  was 
almost  21,^  percent  above  1951  and  almost  25  per- 
cent above  1946. 

This  expansion  in  output  was  accompanied  by 
an  expansion  in  employment.  Unemployment 
fell  in  1952  to  only  2.7  percent  of  the  total  civilian 
labor  force. 

Agricultural  production  in  1052  was  the  largest 
in  my  country's  history.  It  permitted  us  to  ex- 
port to  the  rest  of  the  world  564  million  bushels  of 
wheat  and  immense  quantities  of  other  foodstuffs 
vital  to  the  surWval  of  millions  of  people  abroad. 

Since  farming  is  something  I  happen  to  know 
a  little  about  from  pei-sonal  experience.  I  should 
like  to  take  this  occasion  to  say  a  word  about  tlic 
American  farmer.  The  extensive  program  of  our 
Federal  and  State  Governments  to  develop  effi- 
cient land-use  techniques,  to  extend  the  use  of 
fertilizers  and  other  soil  chemicals,  to  improve 
the  quality  of  seeds  and  livestock,  to  control  pests 
and  plant  diseases,  and  in  general  to  make  scien- 
tific practices  known  to  farmers  has,  of  course, 
been  a  most  important  factor  in  increasing  our 
farm  output.  But  it  takes  more  than  education 
and  know-how  to  keep  the  farm  economy  expand- 
ing. I  am  confident  that  we  could  not  have 
achieved  these  ]u-oduction  records  had  not  our 
farmers  had  the  initiative  and  the  iiigenuity  to 
make  full  use  of  these  scientific  developments  and 
improved  technologA-. 

The  year  1952  was  a  period  of  balanced  growth 
in  contrast  to  the  more  uneven  expansion  of  the 
previous  year.  An  upturn  occurred  in  a  wide 
variety  of  soft  goods  industries  which  had  experi- 
enced a  decline  in  1951 — apparel,  leather,  and 
especially  textiles.  This  expansion  has  continued 
into  1953.  Production  of  consumer  durables — 
from  automobiles  to  television  .sets — followed  a 
similar  couree.  Total  retail  sales  in  January  and 
February  of  1953  were  9  percent  above  the  corre- 
sponding months  of  1952.  In  the  civilian  econ- 
omy this  general  expansion  extcutled  also  into 
consumer  services,  capital  goods,  industrial  capac- 
ity, public  works,  and  the  construction  of  houses. 

As  output  increased,  the  inflationary  pressures 
of  the  previous  2  years  abated  in  the  ITnited  States 
as  they  did  elsewhere.  Prices  in  primary  markets 
declined,  while  prices  at  retail  leveled  off.    Wages 


684 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


have  been  rising  and,  by  and  large,  real  incomes 
of  tlie  American  worker  have  increased. 

Emergency  Controls  Eliminated 

The  abundance  of  goods  made  possible  the 
elimination,  in  the  past  6  months,  of  most  of  the 
emergency  economic  controls  previously  imposed. 
It  is  testimony  to  the  great  underlying  potential 
for  expanding  production  that  the  need  for  con- 
trols created  by  the  Korean  war  was  so  short- 
lived. Three  years  after  Korea,  our  economy  is 
once  more  free  from  controls  and  is  producing 
more  civilian  and  defense  goods  combined  than 
ever  before. 

Wliile  domestic  activity  in  the  United  States  in- 
creased during  1952,  our  exports  of  merchandise, 
exclusive  of  military-aid  shipments,  showed  a  de- 
cline. Nevertheless  we  continued  to  increase  our 
shipments  of  capital  goods  to  all  parts  of  the 
world.  Our  exports  of  electrical  and  industrial 
machinery  amounted  to  $2.2  billion,  an  increase 
of  15  percent  over  the  previous  year.  All  of  the 
underdeveloped  areas  of  the  free  world  shared 
in  this  increase.  Our  machinery  shipments  to  the 
Far  East  were  33  percent  higher  than  in  1951. 

At  the  same  time,  the  value,  though  not  the  vol- 
mne,  of  merchandise  imports  fell  slightly  from 
the  alltime  peak  of  1951.  Taking  into  account  all 
current  items — remittances,  tourist  expenditures, 
shipping  and  other  ser^aces,  as  well  as  merchan- 
dise— the  export  surplus  fell  from  $3.2  billion  in 
1951  to  $1.8  billion  in  1952.  This  represented,  of 
course,  a  reduction  of  the  dollar  deficit  of  the  rest 
of  the  world  and  to  that  extent  an  advance  toward 
a  better  balance-of-payments  position.  The  re- 
duced deficit  was  more  than  made  up  by  the  out- 
flow of  private  capital  and  United  States  gi\ants 
and  loans.  As  a  result,  the  rest  of  the  world  in- 
creased its  gold  and  dollar  holdings  during  1952 
by  $1.2  billion. 

Let  me  turn  now  to  a  point  which  may  be  both- 
ering many  of  you — the  fact  that  world  industrial 
production  in  1952  did  not  continue  to  increase 
as  fast  as  in  1951.  Some  may  interpret  this  as 
a  cause  for  concern.  An  analysis  will  show  I 
think,  that  concern  is  not  warranted. 

From  1946  to  1948  there  was  an  increase  of  25 
percent  in  world  production.  This  phenomenal 
increase  was  largely  a  result  of  the  reactivation 
of  idle  capital  and  labor  as  part  of  the  process  of 
recovery  from  war.  In  the  face  of  destruction, 
dislocation,  and  rampant  inflation  which  the  war 
brought,  the  recovery  was  extraordinary.  De- 
mobilized soldiers,  refugees,  damaged  factories, 
dislocated  businesses,  long-unused  avenues  of 
trade — all  these  were  reassembled  and  put  back  to 
work  with  a  speed  which  was  notliing  less  than 
sfiectacular.  Then,  in  1950-51,  many  countries 
were  forced  to  turn  their  efforts  to  the  production 


of    war    materials.     Total    world    output    again 
spurted  upward. 

Once  this  process  was  well  along,  however,  it 
was  hardly  reasonable  to  look  for  a  continued 
increase  in  production  of  such  dramatic  propor- 
tions. A  rate  of  between  2  and  5  percent  a  year 
for  the  world  as  a  whole,  looked  at  in  historical 
pei-spective,  is  in  fact  a  rate  which  the  world  can 
view  with  satisfaction  in  normal  times. 

As  far  as  the  U.S.  economy  is  concerned,  every 
indication  leads  me  to  believe  that  investment  will 
continue  to  expand  in  1953,  giving  strength  to  the 
U.S.  economy  and  more  than  counterbalancing 
any  letup  in  defense  expenditures.  In  each  of  the 
past  2  years  plant  and  equipment  expenclitures  by 
business  firms  have  approximated  $26  billion,  much 
of  which  was  devoted  to  civilian  production.  The 
total  plant  and  equipment  now  planned  for  the 
year  1953  as  a  whole  should  result  in  equally  high 
investment. 

Beyond  these  private  investments  lies  an  area 
of  potential  public  constraction  whose  dimensions 
at  this  point  are  not  fully  known.  We  need  many 
more  schools,  and  state  and  local  governments 
are  actively  planning  for  them.  We  appear  to  be 
on  the  verge  of  a  new  era  in  highway  constiiiction 
brought  on  by  an  extraordinary  gi'owth  in  auto- 
mobile ownership  since  the  end  of  World  War  II. 
If  there  is  concern  lest  these  expansive  forces  be 
dissipated,  I  would  agree  with  Secretary  of  Com- 
merce Sinclair  Weeks  who  recently  called  atten- 
tion to  the  fact  that : 

The  American  system  toflay  ha.s  many  floors  underneath 
to  check  an  old-fashioned  slump — high  savings,  social  se- 
curity, pensions,  emergency  laws  and  other  props  .  .  . 
The  new  administration  would  not  hesitate  to  use  such 
strong  measures  as  might  be  required  in  an  emergency. 

Factors  in  Economic  Progress 

Developments  in  relation  to  production,  em- 
ployment, trade,  and  prices,  with  which  I  have  so 
far  been  mainly  concerned,  are  the  concrete  meas- 
ures of  economic  progress.  I  should  like  now  to 
turn  from  facts  and  figures  to  consider  briefly 
some  of  the  factors  on  which  that  progress  mainly 
depends. 

The  possession  of  abundant  natural  resources 
is  obviously  a  major  advantage  to  any  area.  I 
need  not  dwell  on  such  matters  as  this.  What  I 
wish  to  emphasize  is  the  great  importance  also  of 
an  economic  and  political  environment  which  en- 
courages its  people  to  put  forward  their  best  ef- 
forts to  improve  their  economic  situation. 

The  economic  development  of  the  United  States 
has  been  achieved  under  what  we  call  the  system 
of  free  enterprise.  This  is  a  system  which  we 
believe  encourages  individual  initiative,  leaves 
men  free  to  try  out  new  ways  of  doing  things,  and 
l^romotes  the  most  efficient  and  productive  com- 
bination of  labor  and  management.  The  main- 
tenance of  this  system  has,  I  am  convinced,  been 


Aioy    J  I,    1953 


685 


a  dyiiiUTiic  force  in  promoting  our  economic 
welfare. 

I  recognize  that  this  free  enterprise  system  is 
pursued  also  in  varying  degrees  by  many  other 
nations.  I  do  not  say  that  it  would  necessarily 
fit  all  countries  as  well  as  it  does  the  United  States. 
But  one  thing  I  do  assert  with  some  confidence. 
That  is.  that  healthy  incentives  to  individual  ef- 
fort are  of  vital  importance  for  economic  progress. 

Accordingly  one  of  the  most  important  things 
a  government  can  do  to  promote  economic  well- 
being  is  to  develop  and  maintain  policies  which 
contribute  to  this  individual  dynamic  incentive. 

First  and  foremost  among  such  policies  is  the 
maintenance  of  internal  financial  stability.  All  of 
you  know  the  effects  of  uncontrolled  inflation.  It 
hampers  the  domestic  production  of  goods  re- 
quired for  economic  development.  The  easy  in- 
crease in  money  incomes  weakens  incentives  to 
sustained  work;  the  rise  in  prices  discourages  sav- 
ings; new  investment  tends  to  take  the  form  of 
speculative  ventures  rather  than  real  capital  for- 
mation. The  balance-of -payments  position  de- 
teriorates, making  it  more  difficult  to  import  capi- 
tal goods  needed  to  improve  productivity.  Sound 
tax  policies,  credit  policies,  trade  policies,  are 
among  the  checki'eins  on  those  evils. 

Land  i-eform  is  another  area  of  government  pol- 
icy where  much  can  be  done  to  establish  conditions 
favorable  to  production.  Give  the  farmer  a  real 
stake  in  his  work  and  his  future  and  he  will  exer- 
cise his  best  ingenuity  to  improve  his  land  and  to 
increase  his  outinit.  But  the  job  of  instituting 
such  policies  is  primarily  the  responsibility  of  the 
underdeveloped  countries  themselves,  as  is  stated 
so  well  in  the  World  Economic  Report. 

Economic  growth  can  also  be  stimulated  through 
government  policies  aimed  at  encouraging  private 
investment,  both  domestic  and  foreign.  Domes- 
tically, this  means  stimulating  savings,  mobilizing 
capital,  and  inducing  it  to  enter  lines  of  produc- 
tion which  will  contribute  most  to  development. 
Since  domestic  sources  of  capital  are  typically  in- 
sufficient in  imderdeveloped  countries  to  support 
an  adequate  level  of  investment,  vigorous  efforts 
must  also  be  nuxde  to  establish  an  environment 
congenial  to  the  international  flow  of  private  capi- 
tal. In  the  last  analysis,  only  tlie  local  govern- 
ments can  establish  a  climate  in  which  the  foreign 
investor  feels  welcome  and  is  convinced  that  he 
will  get  an  even  break. 

The  most  fundamental  problem  still  facing  the 
woild  is  the  creation  of  conditions  which  will 
permit  a  steady,  worldwide  improvement  in 
standards  of  living.  Basic  to  such  inq^rovement 
is  increased  production.  President  Eisenhower 
expressed  the  issue  this  way  in  his  message  to 
Congress  last  week :  •• 

The  building  of  a  productive  and  strong  economic  system 
williin  the  free  world,  one  in  wliich  each  country  may 


better  sustain  itself  through  its  own  efforts,  will  require 
action  by  other  governments,  as  well  as  by  the   United 
States,  over  a  wide  range  of  economic  activities.     These    J 
must  include  adoption   of  sound  internal  policies,  crea-  J 
tion    of    conditions    fostering    international    investment,   ^ 
assistance    to    underdeveloped    areas,    progress    toward 
freed<mi  of  international  payments  and  convertibility  of 
currencies,  and  trade  arrangements  aimed  at  the  widest 
possible  multilateral  trade. 

This  means  that  the  approach  of  the  U.S.  Gov- 
ermnent  to  these  problems  will  be  the  cooperative 
approach — working  hand  in  hand  with  those  coun- 
tries who  wish  to  join  in  the  common  endeavor. 
The  President  has  expressed  our  determination 
that  these  efforts  must  succeed.  In  the  same  mes- 
sage from  which  I  just  read,  he  stated  our  deep 
realization  that  the  contribution  of  the  United 
States  to  the  solution  of  the  free  world's  economic  t 
problems  "is  so  large  as  to  be  crucially  important 
to  its  success,"  and  that  its  success  "is  crucially 
important  to  the  United  States." 


Documents  on  Korean 
Armistice  Negotiations 

Summary  of  Liaison  Meeting  of  April  19 

1.  Meeting  of  Senior  Liaison  Groups  convened  at  1100 
hours.     Substance  of  record  follows  : 

2.  Unc  :  "I  have  a  statement  to  make.  The  position  of 
the  United  Nations  Command  with  respect  to  resuming 
plenary  sessions  of  the  Korean  Armistice  negotiations 
was  stated  to  you  in  General  Harrison's  letter  to  General 
Nam  II,  dated  lli  April,  195.3.'  I  reiterate  the  position  of 
the  United  Nations  Conuuand,  that  it  will  resume  plenary 
sessions  in  the  expectation  that  the  detailed  arrangements 
for  the  implementation  of  the  new  proposal  of  your  side 
will  be  along  the  reasonable  and  practical  lines  set  forth 
in  General  Harrison's  letter.  Based  on  the  foregoing,  I 
am  authorized  to  announce  to  you  that  the  United  Nations 
Command  Delegation  will  be  prepared  to  meet  with  your 
delegation  at  11()<)  on  23  April,  liJ53,  for  the  purpose  of 
seeking  an  overall  settlement  of  the  question  of  prisoners 
of  war  along  constructive  and  reasonable  lines." 

3.  Vommunixts:  a.  "I  am  instructed  by  the  Senior  Dele- 
gate of  our  side  to  make  the  following  statement  before 
the  Liaison  Group  meeting  enters  into  discussion  on  the 
date  for  the  resumption  of  plenary  sessions.  We  have 
.studied  the  letter  of  April  16  from  the  Senior  Delegate 
of  your  side  and  consider  it  necessary  to  point  out  that, 
as  the  Senior  Delegate  of  our  side  has  stated  in  his  letter 
of  April  !t "  to  the  Senior  Delegate  of  your  side,  the  new 
proposal  of  our  side  for  settling  the  entire  question  of 
prisoners  of  war  is  a  highly  constructive  proposal.  In 
order  to  eliminate  the  differences  between  the  two  sides 
on  the  (luestion  of  repatriation  of  prisoners  of  war  and 
to  bring  about  an  armistice  in  Korea  for  which  the  whole 
world  has  been  longing,  our  side  has  made  an  obvious 
concession  as  to  the  steps,  time,  and  procedure  of  the 
repatriation  of  prisoners  of  war.  Our  side  proposes  that 
the  rejiatriation  of  prisoners  of  war  be  carried  out  in 
two  steps;  that  is,  both  i)arties  to  the  negotiations  should 
undertake  to  repatriate  immediately  after  the  cessation 
of  hostilities  all  those  prisoners  of  war  in  their  custody 
who  insist  upon  repatriation,  and  to  hand  over  the  re- 
maining prisoners  of  war  to  a  neutral  State  so  as  to  insure 
a  just  solution  to  the  (juestion  of  tlieir  repatriation. 

6.  "The  high  constructiveness  of  this  proposal  has  al- 


*  BiTixETiN  of  Apr.  27,  1953,  p.  634. 
686 


'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  27,  19.53,  p.  608. 
=  Ibid.,  Apr.  20,  1953,  p.  515. 


Department  of  Sfafe   Bulletin 


really  been  i-eeognized  by  the  whole  world.  As  to  the 
concrete  measures  for  iniplementiut;  this  proposal,  it  is 
very  obvious  that  the  meeting  of  negotiations  between  the 
delegates  of  both  sides. 

c.  "The  agreements  of  both  sides  on  various  other  major 
problems  with  regard  to  an  armistice  in  Korea  were  all 
reached  in  this  way.  As  a  matter  of  fact  in  negotiations 
with  both  sides  on  an  equal  footing,  only  consultation 
and  di.scussion  at  the  conference  are  the  proper  way  of 
settling  questions.  The  Korean  People's  Army  and  the 
Chinese  People's  Volunteers  consider  that  the  concrete 
suggestions  of  either  side  should  all  be  put  forth  at  the 
meetings  of  negotiations  between  the  delegates  of  both 
sides. 

d.  "The  progress  of  the  negotiations  depends  on  the 
effort  of  both  sides.  The  task  which  lies  before  both  sides 
before  the  resumption  of  the  meetings  of  negotiations 
should  not  be  to  visualize  a  recess  after  the  resumption 
of  the  plenary  sessions,  but  rather  should  be  to  speedily 
discuss  and  decide  upon  the  date  of  reopening  the  plenary 
sessions  in  order  to  resume  the  negotiations  and  realize 
an  armistice  in  Korea  by  common  efforts. 

e.  "With  regard  to  the  time  and  date  for  the  resumption 
of  the  plenary  sessions  of  the  delegations  to  the  armistice 
negotiations,  our  delegation  is  prepared  to  hold  a  meeting 
with  your  delegation  at  1100  hours  on  2.5  April." 

4.  U-\c  :  "We  agree  that  our  delegation  will  meet  with 
your  delegation  on  25  April,  1953  at  1100  hours." 

5.  ConiitiKiiists  :  a.  "Now  both  sides  have  come  to  a  com- 
mon view  regarding  the  date  for  resuming  the  plenary 
sessions  of  the  delegations  of  both  sides. 

h.  "I  propose  that  the  meetings  of  the  Liaison  Groups 
of  both  sides  recess  tilt  either  side  considers  it  is  neces- 
sary to  hold  a  meeting  to  discuss  the  question  of  repatriat- 
ing sick  and  in.iured  prisoners  of  war." 

0.  Unc  :  "We  agree  with  your  proijosal  to  adjourn  the 
Liaison  Groups  meeting  until  either  .side  requests  a 
meeting." 

7.  Meeting  adjourned  at  1120  hours. 


Summaries  of  Plenary  Talks  ^ 


APRIL  26  SESSION 

The  first  plenary  session  of  the  re-opening  of  the  Armi- 
stice negotiations  at  Panmunjom  convened  today  at  2  p.  m. 
This  was  the  first  plenary  meeting  since  the  recess  called 
by  Lt.  Gen.  William  K.  Harrison,  Jr.,  Chief  Unc  delegate, 
on  October  S,  1952.  General  Harrison  headed  the  Unc 
delegation  and  the  Communist  delegation  was  headed  by 
General  Nam  U. 

General  Nam  II  presented  a  sis-point  proposal  as  the 
basis  on  which  the  Communists  felt  the  Armistice  negotia- 
tions should  be  conducted. 

[Following  is  the  text  of  the  Communist  proposal : 

"First,  within  2  months  after  the  armistice  agreement 
becomes  effective,  both  sides  shall,  without  offering  any 
hindrance,  repatriate  and  hand  over  in  groups  all  these 
prisiiuers  of  war  who  insist  upon  i-epatriation  to  the  side 
to  which  the  prisoner  of  war  belongs  in  accordance  with 
the  related  provisions  of  paragraph  51,  article  111,  of  the 
armistice  agreement  and  in  conformity  witli  the  final 
name  lists  exchanged  and  checked  by  both  sides. 

"I>!ec(iiul,  within  the  time  limit  of  1  month  after  the 
completidM  of  the  direct  repatriation  of  all  those  prisoners 
of  war  who  insist  upon  repatriation,  tlie  detaining  side 
shall  be  responsible  for  sending  to  a  neutral  state,  agreed 
upon  through  consultation  of  both  sides,  the  remaining 
prisoners  of  war  who  are  not  directly  repatriated  and  then 
release  them  from  its  military  control.  Such  prisimers 
of  war  shall  be  received  and  taken  into  custody  by  the 
authorities  of  the  neutral  state  concerned  in  an  area  desig- 


"  Released  to  the  press  at  Munsan. 
May   11,   1953 


nated  by  such  authorities.  The  authorities  of  the  neutral 
state  concerned  shall  have  the  authority  to  exercise  their 
legitimate  functions  and  responsibilities  for  the  control  of 
the  prisoners  of  war  under  their  temporary  jurisdiction. 

"Third,  within  C  months  after  the  date  of  arrival  of  such 
prisoners  of  war  in  the  neutral  state,  the  nations  to  which 
they  belong  shall  have  the  freedom  and  facilities  to  send 
personnel  to  that  neutral  state  to  explain  to  all  the  prison- 
ers of  war  depending  on  these  nations  so  as  to  eliminate 
their  apprehensions  and  to  inform  them  of  all  matters  re- 
lated to  their  return  to  their  homelands,  particularly  of 
their  full  right  to  return  home  to  lead  a  peaceful  life. 

"Fourth,  within  1  month  after  the  arrival  of  the  prison- 
ers of  war  in  the  neutral  state,  and  after  the  explanations 
made  by  the  nations  to  which  they  belong,  the  speedy 
return  to  their  f,-itherlands  of  all  those  prisoners  of  war 
who  request  repatriation  shall  be  facilitated  by  the  au- 
thorities of  the  neutral  state  concerned,  and  there  should 
be  no  obstruction.  The  administrative  details  of  the 
repatriation  of  such  prisoners  of  war  shall  be  settled 
through  consultation  between  the  authorities  of  the  neutral 
state  concerned  and  the  authorities  of  the  nations  to 
which  the  prisoners  of  war  belong, 

"Fifth,  if,  at  the  expiration  of  the  time  limit  of  (5  months 
stipulated  in  paragraphs  3  and  4  of  the  present  proposal, 
there  are  still  prisoners  of  war  in  the  custody  of  the  neutral 
state,  their  disposition  shall  be  submitted,  for  .settlement 
through  consultation,  to  the  political  conference  provided 
in  paragraph  00,  article  IV  of  the  armistice  agreement. 

"Sixth,  all  the  expenditures  of  the  prisoners  of  war  dur- 
ing their  stay  in  the  neutral  state,  including  their  travel- 
ling expenses  in  returning  to  their  fatherlands,  shall  be 
b<irne  by  the  nations  to  which  they  belong."] 

Following  the  presentation  of  the  Communist  proposal. 
General  Harrison  pointed  out  that  certain  arrangements 
were  outlined  in  his  letter  to  the  Communists  of  April  16. 
These  were : 

1.  The  neutral  state  of  a  nation  such  as  Switzerland, 
traditionally  recognized  as  appropriate  in  matters  of  this 
kind. 

2.  That  in  the  Interest  of  practicality,  prisoners  of  war 
who  are  not  directly  repatriated  be  released  in  custody  in 
Korea  of  the  neutral  state. 

3.  That  after  a  reasonable  time,  such  as  60  days,  during 
which  opportunity  has  been  afforded  by  the  neutral  state 
to  parties  concerned  for  determining  the  attitudes  of  the 
individuals  in  its  custody,  the  neutral  state  will  make 
arrangements  for  jieaceable  disposition  of  those  remain- 
ing in  its  custody. 

General  Harrison  then  pointed  out  that  the  Unc  does 
not  consider  that  the  iihysical  removal  of  prisoners  to 
points  outside  of  Korea  is  justified  in  any  sense.  He 
added  that  such  a  move  would  afford  no  material  ad- 
vantage and  would  entail  undesirable  delays  and  many 
practical  difficulties,  such  as  time  consumed  in  transporta- 
tion, housing  and  administrative  accommodations.  This, 
the  General  said,  would  delay  the  release  of  prisoners 
by  months,  and  is  a  very  undesirable  solution.  He  em- 
phasized that  the  neutral  state  could  exercise  adequate 
custody  at  suitable  locations  in  Korea,  and  that  6  months 
was  an  "utterly  exorbitant"  time  and  that  prisoners 
should  not  be  held  in  custody  for  that  period.  "It  is  our 
firm  opinion,"  the  General  said,  "that  60  days  will  he 
ample  for  this  purixise." 

General  Harrison  summed  up  for  the  Unc  by  stating 
that  the  Communists  failed  to  accord  acceptable  recogni- 
tion to  the  arrangements  outlined  in  the  letter  of  April 
16.  He  then  proposed  a  recess  until  11  a.  m.,  tomorrow 
but  General  Nam  U  requested  a  short  recess  until  4  p.  m., 
which  was  agreed  to  by  General  Harrison. 

Following  the  recess.  General  Nam  II  said  that  the  time 
limit  of  6  months  was  "both  necessary  and  reasonable" 
and  Switzerland  was  unsuitable  as  the  neutral  state. 

General  Harrison,  before  recessing,  again  pointed  out 
that  there  should  be  no  objections  on  the  part  of  the  Com- 

687 


itmiiists  to  f>\vitzerliind  as  thp  neutral  state.  Switzerland 
lias  for  many  years  been  recognized  as  neutral  among 
the  nations  of  the  world  and  it  fultills  all  the  requirements 
of  a  neutral  nation. 

General  Harri.son,  in  his  final  statement,  said,  "Tou 
have  .said  nothing  which  would  indicate  that  your  pro- 
posal is  (me  that  we  can  consider  as  constituting  a  reason- 
ahle  and  constructive  basis  for  negotiating  an  armistice." 


APRIL  27  SESSION 

The  second  plenary  session  of  the  reopened  Armistice 
talks  between  the  Unc  and  the  Communists  went  into  ses- 
sion at  11  a.  m.  today  at  Panmunjom. 

Lt.  Gen.  William  K.  Harrison,  .Ir.,  .Senior  Unc  Delegate, 
told  the  Communists  that  their  proposals  submitted  yes- 
terday Would  force  a  prisoner  to  choose  between  return 
to  the  Communists  or  face  detention  without  a  foresee- 
able end. 

The  Unc  Chief  Delegate  oix>ned  the  session  by  pointing 
out  that  their  six  point  proposal  "does  not  form  the  basis 
for  an  acceptable  solution  to  the  prisoner  of  war  ques- 
tion." The  General  added,  "it  is  obvious  that  your  side 
failed  to  consider  seriously  our  letter  of  16  April  in  which 
we  outlined  the  nature  of  a  solution  that  is  reasonable  and 
constructive  and  one  which  would  lead  to  a  prompt  reso- 
lution of  the  problem  of  prisoners  of  war." 

The  Communists  were  told  by  General  Harris<m  that 
their  argument  regarding  Switzerland  as  not  being  suit- 
able as  a  neutral  nation  is  groundless  and  a  strange  one 
indeed.  He  added  that  the  Communists"  proposal  to 
detain  prisoners  of  war  up  to  0  months  after  an  armistice 
is  signed,  and  then  even  longer  while  a  political  confer- 
ence settles  their  disposition  is  neither  reasonable  nor 
constructive.  "It  is  unrea.souable  and  obstructive,"  the 
General  said. 

The  General  again  told  General  Nam  II,  senior  Com- 
munist Delegate  that  the  Communists  liave  proposed  noth- 
ing that  can  he  considered  as  a  reasonable  or  constructive 
basis  for  an  armistice  agreement. 

The  Communists  asked  for  an  adjournment  at  11 :  .j2 
a.  m.  until  11  a.  ni.  tomorrow.  The  Unc  agreed  to  the 
request. 


APRIL  28  SESSION 

Lt.  Gen.  William  K.  Harrison.  Jr.,  Uno  Senior  Delegate, 
today  informed  the  Communists  that  it  was  the  hope  of 
the  Unc  that  both  sides  would  be  able  to  agree  on  a  rea- 
sonable and  honorable  armistice  which  would  protect 
the  human  rights  of  the  prisoners  of  war.  He  went  on  to 
say  that  if  the  Communists  desired  an  armistice  on  this 
basis,  they  had  failed  thus  far  to  give  any  indication  of 
such  an  objective. 

The  Unc  Chief  Delegate  stressed  that,  "We  do  not  in- 
tend to  become  involved  in  protracted  and  useless  argu- 
ments," and  that  "from  your  [the  Communists']  experience 
in  previous  negotiations  with  us,  you  should  be  well  aware 
that  we  mean  what  we  say." 

On  the  Conununists'  rejection  of  Switzerland  as  the 
neutral  state.  General  Harrison  said,  "You  have  cast  doubt 
on  your  own  intentions  to  bring  about  a  speedy  and  honor- 
able truce." 

When  the  Communists  were  asked  if  they  were  prepared 
to  suggest  the  name  of  a  neutral  state,  the  Communists 
replied  that  they  had  "noted  the  question"  and  then  imme- 
diately proposed  a  recess  until  11  a.m.  tomorrow. 


APRIL  29  SESSION 

An  unnamed  Asiatic  country  was  proposed  today  by  the 
Communists  as  a  substitute  for  the  Unc  choice  of  Switzer- 
land as  the  neutral  nation  to  take  custody  of  prisoners  of 
war  who  do  not  wish  to  be  repatriated. 

The  proposal  was  made  to  Lt.  Gen.  William  K.  Harrison, 


.Jr.,  Senior  Delegate  for  the  Unc,  by  General  Nam  II  during 
the  fourth  session  of  the  reopened  plenary  talks  at  Pan- 
munjom. 

General  Harrison,  in  his  opening  statement  today,  again 
stressed  the  .selection  of  Switzerland  as  the  neutral  nation 
in  handling  pii.soners  of  war  and  pointed  out  that  "no  other 
nation  has  comparable  exjjerience  in  this  field."  He  added, 
"The  argument  that  it  is  disqualified  to  serve  in  this  ca- 
pacity by  the  fact  that  it  is  a  member  of  the  neutral  na- 
tions'    supervisory     commission     is     quite     groundless. 

General  Nam  II,  on  the  subject  of  time  required  for  "ex- 
planations" to  prisoners  who  do  not  wish  to  be  repatriated, 
said  the  "specific  length  of  time  could  be  a  subject  of 
discussion." 

General  Harrison  pointed  out  that  the  transportation  of 
many  thousands  of  prisoners  overseas  to  a  neutral  nation 
would,  for  the  great  majority  of  them,  constitute  deporta- 
tion and  expatriation.  "Our  side,"  (ieneral  Harrison  said, 
"cannot  apply  force  to  transixirt  prisoners  to  a  neutral 
countiT  any  more  than  we  can  apply  force  to  repatriate 
them  to  your  side." 

The  Communists  proposed  a  recess  at  12 :  04  p.  m.  until 
11 :  00  a.  m.  tomorrow,  which  was  agreed  to  by  the  Unc. 


APRIL  30  SESSION 

Lt.  Gen.  William  K.  Harrison,  Jr.,  Senior  Unc  Delegate, 
told  the  Communists  today  at  the  fifth  meeting  of  the  re- 
opened armistice  discussions  at  Panmunjom  that  until 
the  Communists  come  to  an  understanding  on  a  neutral 
nation,  "we  see  no  advantage  in  discussing  seriously  the 
other  elements  of  your  proposal." 

General  Harrison  further  stated,  "Not  knowing  the 
name  of  the  country  of  your  selection,  we,  of  course,  are 
not  able  to  consider  the  matter  of  its  neutrality.  We  do 
think  it  worth  while,  however,  to  point  out  that  an  Asian 
country  is  necessaril.v  located  very  close  to  countries 
d(miinated  by  Communists  and  might  therefore  he  sub- 
jected to  Communist  military,  economic,  or  political  in- 
fluence." 

fin  the  question  of  prisoner  repatriation,  the  Senior 
Delegate  of  the  Unc  reminded  the  Communists  that  only 
12,000  of  the  65,000  personnel  captured  during  the  first 
year  of  hostilities  have  been  listed  as  POW's  in  December 
19.51  and  that  a  majority  of  the  missing  had  been  incor- 
porated illegally  into  the  People's  Army. 

This  practice  violates  the  Geneva  Convention  which  re- 
quires that  POW's  be  protected  from  the  effects  of  mili- 
tary operations  and  that  they  not  be  employed  in  labor 
contributing  directly  to  military  operations.  The  General 
said : 

"It  would  seem  appropriate  that  these  Koreans  whom 
we  are  still  holding  as  prisoners  and  who  want  to  live  in 
South  Korea  .should  be  released  without  further  delay 
to  enter  into  civilian  life  of  their  fellow  Koreans  rather 
than  be  retained  indefinitely  as  they  might  under  your 
proposal.  It  has  always  seemed  strange  to  us  that  the 
representatives  of  Communist  China  should  insist  that 
native  Koreans  who  refuse  to  return  to  North  Korea  and 
seek  to  live  in  South  Korea  should  be  forced  to  return  to 


The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations 

"The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations,"  which 
has  been  a  regular  feature  of  the  Bulletin,  is  being 
discontinued  with  this  issue  because  of  space  limita- 
tions. The  Bulletin  will  continue  to  print  texts 
of  major  U.S.  statements  made  at  U.N.  meetings, 
texts  of  important  U.N.  resolutions  and  other  docu- 
ments. Current  United  Nations  Documents :  A  Se- 
lected Bibliography,  and  material  relating  to  the 
U.N.  Command  operations  in  Korea. 


688 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


North  Korea.  The  ohviously  huiuane  thing  wouhl  be  to 
release  the  Korean  prisoners  who  are  now  in  onr  hands. 
Such  release  would  also  greatly  simplify  the  whole  prob- 
lem of  repatriation  and  the  work  of  the  custodial  state. 

•■In  view  of  the  advantages  to  all  concerned,  a  proposal 
by  your  side  at  this  time  to  release  in  South  Korea  all 
Korean  prisoners  who  have  refused  to  return  to  Comuiu- 
nist  Korea  would  greatly  facilitate  agreement  on  an  armis- 
tice and  would  be  received  with  acclaim  by  all  decent  and 
humane  people  throughout  the  entire  world." 

The  meeting  adjourned  until  11  a.  m.  tomorrow 
morning. 


Ambassador  Murphy  To  Assist 
in  Armistice  Negotiations 

Press  release  221  dated  April  28 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  April 
28  that  Ambassador  Robert  D.  Murphy  is  termi- 
nating his  duties  as  Ambassador  to  Japan  on  April 
29,  but  his  departure  from  Japan  has  been  tem- 
porarily postponed  to  permit  him  to  continue  in 
Tokyo  to  assist  Cincunc  [Commander  in  Chief  of 
the  U.N.  Command,  Gen.  Mark  W.  Clark]  in  his 
conduct  of  tlie  armistice  negotiations.  President 
Eisenhower  has  accorded  Mr.  Murphy  the  per- 
sonal rank  of  Ambassador  in  connection  with  his 
temporary  assignment. 

Ambassador  Murphy's  duties  in  this  connection 
do  not  imply  any  change  in  the  military  character 
of  the  armistice  negotiations  nor  in  General 
Clark's  responsibilities  with  regard  thereto. 

As  soon  as  conditions  permit,  Mr.  Murphy  will 
return  to  the  United  States  to  take  up  his  new  post 
as  Assistant  Secretary  of  State  for  U.N.  Affairs. 

Termination  of  Sulphur  Committee 

The  Sulphur  Committee  of  the  International 
Materials  Conference  (Imo)  announced  on  April 
13  that  its  members  have  agreed  to  the  dissolution 
of  the  Committee  on  April  30,  1953.  This  an- 
nouncement follows  the  Committee's  recent  deci- 
sion to  discontinue  international  allocation  of 
crude  sulfur  as  from  March  1.  and  reflects  the  con- 
tinuing improvement  in  the  supj^ly  and  demand 
position  of  sulfur  in  the  free  world. 

The  Sulphur  Committee,  which  was  the  second 
of  the  commoditv  groups  to  be  established  within 
the  framework  of  the  Ijmc,  met  for  the  first  time  on 
March  1,  1951.  The  Committee's  recommenda- 
tions for  the  first  international  allocations  of 
crude  sulfur  were  accepted  by  its  member  govern- 
ments for  the  third  quarter  of  1951  and  allocations 
were  continued  on  a  quarterly  or  half-yearly  basis 
until  March  1, 1953. 

Tlie  following  countries  were  represented  on  the 
Committee:  Australia,  Belgium  (representin<r 
Benelux),  Brazil,  Canada,  France,  the  Federal 
Republic  of  Germany,  India,  Italy,  Japan. 
Mexico,  New  Zealand,  Norway,  Sweden,  Switzer- 
land, the  Union  of  South  Africa,  the  United  King- 
dom, and  the  United  States. 

Aloy    71,   7953 


Current  U.N.  Documents: 
A  Selected  Bibliography  ^ 

Economic  and  Social  Council 

Report  of  the  International  Bank  for  Reconstruction  and 
Development.     E/2360/Add.l,  Mar.  12,  1953.     22  pp. 
mimeo. 
Inter-Governmental    Organizations.    Relations  With   In- 
ter-Governmental Organizations.     Report  by  the  bec- 
retary-General.     E/2366,  Feb.  17, 19.53.     21  pp.  mimeo. 
International  Action  for  Conservation  and  Utilization  of 
Non-Agricultural   Resources.     Report   by   tlie   Secre- 
tary-General on  activities  under  Council  resolution 
345   (XII).     E/2367,  Feb.  23,  1953.     8  pp.  mimeo. 
Inter-Agency     Agreements     and     Agreements     Between 
Agencies    and    Other    Inter-Governmental    Organiza- 
tions.    Letter  dated  16  February  1953  from  the  Di- 
rector-General   of    Who    to    the    Secretary-General. 
E/2369,  Feb.  24,  1953.     4  pp.  mimeo. 
Allegations    Regarding    Infringements    of    Trade    Union 
Rights  Received  Under  Council  Resolution  277   (X). 
Observations   of   the   Permanent   Representative   of 
Greece  to  the  United  Nations  on  the  communication 
from  the  Federation  of  Greek  Maritime  Unions,  Car- 
diff,  England    (Document   E/2333/Add.21).     E/2371, 
Feb.  27,  1953.     5  pp.  mimeo. 
United  Nations  Narcotics  Laboratory.     Note  by  the  Sec- 
retary-General.    E/2372,  Feb.  27,  1953.     9  pp.  mimeo. 
Technical  Assistance  for  Economic  Development  Provided 
Under  General  Assembly  Resolution  200  (III).    Note 
by    the    Secretary-General.     B/2375,    Feb.    27,    1953. 
8  pp.  mimeo. 
Inter-Governmental  Organizations.     Means  for  Further- 
in"-  the  Completion  of  the  International  One-MiUionth 
Map  of  the  World.     Report  by  the  Secretary-General. 
E/2376,  Mar.  5, 1953.    36  pp.  mimeo. 
Plight  of  Survivors  of  Nazi  Concentration  Camps.    Foiirtli 
Progress  Report  by  the  Secretary-General.     ti/2o<8. 
Mar.  10,  1953.     6  pp.  mimeo. 
Economic   Development   of   Under-Developed    Countries: 
Integrated  Economic   Development.     Working  paper 
bv  the  Secretary-General   (Council  resolution  416  F 
(XIV) ).     E/23S4,  Mar.  25,  1953.     30  pp.  mimeo. 
Notes  on  the  Draft  Annual  Report  of  Ec.w'e  to  Eoosoc. 
Statement  submitted  by  Icftu  Delegation  in  connec- 
tion with  the  Annual  Report  of  the  Commission  to 
the  Economic  and  Social  Council.     E/CN.ll/NGU/b, 
Feb.  12,  1953.     4  pp.  mimeo. 
United    Nations    Opium    Conference.     Illicit    Traffic    m 
Opium.     Note   by   the   Secretary-General.     B/CONF. 
14/9,  Mar.  19,  1953.    19  pp.  mimeo. 
Additional  Note  to  the  Reports  of  the  Committees  [Eco- 
nomic Commission  for  Europe]  by  the  Executive  Sec- 
retary.    B/ECE/15:3-H,    Rev.    1,    Feb.    12,    1953.     28 
pp.  mimeo. 
Report  of  the  International  Children's  Centre  on  the  Work 
of    Its    Services   for    the   Year    1952.     E/ICEF/216, 
Jan.  30,  1953.     190  pp.  mimeo. 


•  Printed  materials  may  be  secured  in  the  United  States 
from  the  International  Documents  Service,  C-olumbia 
University  Press,  2960  Broadway,  New  York  2r,  N.  1. 
Other  materials  (mimeographed  or  processed  documents) 
may  be  consulted  at  cerUiin  designated  libraries  m  the 
United  States.  , ,.  ^   ^        r^ta 

The  United  Nations  Secretariat  has  established  an  Olh- 
clal  Records  series  for  the  General  A.ssembly.  the  Security 
Council  the  Economic  and  Social  Council,  the  Trustee.ship 
Council,  and  the  Atomic  Energy  Commission,  which  in- 
cludes summaries  of  proceedings,  resolutions,  and  reports 
of  the  various  commissions  and  committees.  Information 
on  securing  subscriptions  to  the  series  may  be  obtained 
from  the  International  Documents  Service. 

689 


Reports  of  U.N.  Command  Operations  in  Korea ^ 


FIFTY-SEVENTH   REPORT: 

FOR  THE  PERIOD  NOVEMBER  1-15,  1952 

U.N.  doc.  8/2970 
Dated  March  31.  1953 

[Excerpts] 

I  herewith  submit  report  number  57  of  the  United 
Nations  Command  Operations  in  Korea  for  the  period 
1-15  November  1952,  inclusive.  United  Nations  Com- 
mand communiques  numbers  1420-1437  provide  detailed 
accounts  of  these  operations. 

The  Armistice  negotiations  continued  in  recess. 

In  earl.v  November  two  significant  incidents  occurred 
which  provided  additional  factual  evidence  that  intel- 
ligence activities  within  pro-Communist  Prisoner  of  War 
camixs  were  continuing  with  strong  efforts  being  made 
to  maintain  contact  with  outside  agencies.  In  the  pre- 
dawn hours  of  5  November,  two  North  Korean  Communist 
Prisoners  of  War  were  apprehended  while  attempting  to 
escape  from  United  Nations  Prisoner  of  War  Camp  Num- 
ber One,  Koje-Do.  Carefully  sewed  into  the  clothing  of 
one  prisoner  were  six  petitions  addressed  to  North  Korean 
and  Chinese  officials ;  a  hand-drawn  map  of  Korea ;  a 
map  of  Koje-Do  indicating  troop  disposition  of  United 
Nations  Command  securit.v  forces,  as  seen  from  their 
enclosure;  a  partial  list  of  military  units  on  Koje-I>o; 
a  diary  of  a  Communist  party  member ;  two  homemade 
flags,  and  a  crude  compass.  The  petitions  followed 
same  type  of  Communist  propaganda  line  which  appeared 
on  flags  and  banners  prior  to  decentralization  of  Pri.soner 
of  War  population,  which  occurred  at  Koje-Do  in  June 
1952.  Fantastic  accusations  and  threats  against  United 
Nations  Command  were  followed  by  appeals  for  help  and 
promises  of  continued  harassing  measures. 

During  an  interrogation  of  a  Prisoner  of  War  at  Koje-Do 
who  had  escaped  17  October  and  was  recaptured  19 
November,  the  prisoner  admitted  he  had  delivered  a 
package  containing  coded  documents  and  petitions  of 
type  similar  to  that  mentioned  above  to  a  pre-determined 
individual  at  the  Pusan  railroad  station.  He  was  able 
to  identify  his  contact  by  a  peculiar  manner  of  dress  and 
three  code  word.s. 


Transmitted  to  the  Security  Council  bv  the  U.S  rep- 
resentative to  the  U.N.  on  Mar.  30.  Text  of  the  .TOth 
report  appeai-s  in  the  Bulletin  of  i:>ec.  15,  1952,  p  958" 
the  51st  and  52d  reports,  Dec,  29,  19,52.  p.  1034 ;  the  53d 
report,  .Jan.  26,  1953,  p.  155;  the  54th  report,  Feb.  9, 
1953,  p.  224 ;  the  .55th  report,  Feb.  Iti,  1953,  p.  27G ;  and  the 
56th  report.  Mar.  2,  19.53,  p.  348. 


These  efforts  were  obviously  part  of  the  overall  net- 
work which  had  been  covertly  l)Uilt  up  by  Communist 
agencies  in  North  Korea  to  utilize  captured  personnel 
in  the  United  Nations  Command's  custody  as  a  part 
of  their  military  objectives.  A  study  prepared  by  the 
United  Nations  Command  and  due  for  pulilic  release  in 
January  discusses  the  background  of  this  subversive 
movement  and  clearly  establishes  the  control  which  Com- 
munist negotiators  exercised  over  a  series  of  riots  and 
incidents  of  violence  which  have  occurred  in  the  United 
Nations  C(m]mand  camps  during  the  past  year.  Many 
of  these  incidents  have  been  of  a  nature  or  on  a  scale 
requiring  suppression  by  force  with  resultant  deaths  and 
injuries.  The  Communists  have  used  every  opportunity 
to  propagandize  such  outlireaks.  The  connection  between 
incidents  and  tlieir  propaganda  exploitation  is  by  no 
means  accidental.  While  details  of  this  phase  of  war 
which  the  Communists  wage  in  United  Nations  Com- 
mand camps  will  shortly  be  known,  the  conclusions,  ar- 
rived at  after  exhaustive  research,  are  of  particular 
interest. 

From  the  Koje-Do  outbreak  came  the  confirmation 
that  the  Communist  high  command,  undeterred  by  pro- 
vi.sions  of  the  Geneva  Convention  or  any  other  humane 
considerations,  would  use  every  means,  including  murder, 
to  maintain  its  hold  on  those  of  its  personnel  captured 
by  the  other  side  and  to  expend  them  in  whatever  actions 
would  hurt  or  weaken  the  enemy.  A  Communist  Pris- 
oner of  War  therefore,  had  to  be  regarded  by  the  Com- 
munist not  as  a  passive  human  being  in  need  of  care  and 
protection  until  he  could  be  returned  to  his  home  but  as 
still  an  active  soldier  determined  to  fight  on  in  whatever 
way  his  leaders  dictated. 

This  warfare  through  prisoners  did  not  require  that 
they  possess  arms  in  enough  strength  to  overwhelm  their 
guards  and  enter  into  large  scale  military  operations. 
They  were  to  break  out  if  they  could  and  join  the  nearest 
irregulars,  but  they  were  told  this  in  an  attempt  to  fire 
their  imaginations,  rather  than  in  expectation  of  accom- 
]ilishment.  ililitary  olijectives  would  lie  served  no  less, 
the  Conununist  high  command  thought,  if  they  created 
incidents  which  would  make  it  necessary  for  their  guards 
to  u.se  force  against  Prisoners  of  War.  resulting  in  deaths 
and  injuries  which  could  be  represented  to  peoples  in 
both  Communist  and  free  countries  as  convincing  evi- 
dence of  the  "brutality"  and  "inhumanity"  of  the  United 
Nations  Command  and  especially  of  the  United  States. 
The  loss  of  Communist  lives — as  many  hundreds  or  even 


690 


Deparfment  of  State  Bulletin 


thousands  of  them  as  might  be  necessary — was  a  small 
price  to  pay  for  gaining  propaganda  material  to  accom- 
plish two  purposes;  first,  to  turn  free  world  opinion 
against  the  United  States  and  thereby  to  weaken  U.S. 
leadership  in  the  resistance  to  Communism;  and.  second. 
to  unify  pul)lic  opinion  in  Communist  lands  against  the 
United  Nations  cause. 

Over  the  years,  the  Communists  had  become  very  fa- 
miliar with  the  effect  on  public  opinion  of  reports, 
whether  true  or  false,  of  Inhumane  treatment  of  human 
beings.  Though  by  no  means  moved,  except  to  be  even 
more  secretive  about  it,  by  disclosures  of  their  own  wide- 
spread and  flagrant  disregard  for  the  dignity  of  the 
human  individual  and  sanctity  of  his  life,  they  had  seen 
time  and  again  the  horrified  reaction  of  even  many  of 
their  own  friends  in  non-Communist  countries.  The 
leveling  of  similar  charges  against  opponents  became  a 
standard  practice  in  their  own  propaganda.  When  they 
had  nothing  concrete  on  which  to  base  such  propaganda, 
they  manufactured  something,  such  as  the  germ-warfare 
hoax  against  the  United  Nations  Command  in  Korea. 
The  mission  required  of  the  Communist  prisoners  on 
Koje-Do  was  to  provide  a  better  propaganda  base  of 
this  kind  and  such  importance  was  attached  to  it  that 
no  efforts  were  spared  to  build  up  a  fantastically  elaborate 
organization  in  the  Prisoner  of  War  compounds. 

Enlightened  by  this  knowledge,  the  United  Nations 
Command  moved  swiftly  to  block  Ck)mmunist  warfare 
through  the  Koje-Do  prisoners.  Prisoners  who  were 
confirmed  Communists,  as  indicated  by  their  readiness  to 
return  to  Communist  territory,  were  disisersed  into 
smaller  and  more  easily  handled  groups  on  Koje-Do  and 
nearby  islands.  Compounds  were  built  for  an  average 
of  500  to  6(X)  men.  A  much  stricter  regime  was  instituted. 
Compound  inspections  by  camp  authorities  were  more 
frequent,  including  thorough  searches  for  contraband. 
Security  forces  were  strengthened.  In  some  places,  to 
reduce  the  opportunity  for  clandestine  activities,  a  cur- 
few was  enforced  from  1900  to  0.")00  hours.  Intelligence 
systems  were  expanded  to  gain  fuller  information  as  to 
what  was  going  on  in  the  compounds  and  especially  to 
identify  subversive  leaders. 

To  make  it  more  difficult  for  the  Communist  prisoners 
to  receive  and  send  messages  from  and  to  the  high  com- 
mand in  North  Korea  a  native  village  and  isolated 
civilian  homes  which  formerly  sheltered  agents,  were 
moved  out  of  the  camp  area  on  Koje-Do.  Steps  were 
taken  to  prevent  the  carrying  of  oral  instructions  by 
agents  disgui.sed  as  soldiers  who  surrendered  at  the 
front.  Use  of  Prisoner  of  War  hospitals  as  the  internal 
communications  center  for  transmission  of  messages  be- 
tween compounds  and  enclosures  was  broken  up,  and  the 
establishment  of  a  substitute  center  was  made  next  to 
impossible. 

Despite  these  measures  and  others  permissible  under 
the  Geneva  Convention,  it  was  apparent  that  Communist 
Prisoner  of  War  leaders  were  still  organized,  and  were 
capable  of  continuing  their  warfare  against  the  United 
Nations  Command.  The  timing  of  outbreaks  to  syn- 
chronize with  developments  in  the  armistice  negotiations 
or  elsewhere  would  be  handicapped  by  the  loss  of  com- 
munications, but  the  leaders  among  the  prisoners  were 

May    II,    1953 


well  enough  acquainted  with  the  purposes  and  methods 
of  the  party  and  the  army  command  to  know  without 
further  instructions,  that  incidents  at  any  time  could  be 
exploited.  Constant  and  close  surveillance  might  deprive 
prisoners  of  the  advantage  of  surprise,  but  there  can  be 
no  guarantee  that  control  measures  now  in  force  will 
prevent  the  fanatical  Communist  leaders  from  throwing 
away  the  lives  of  those  they  dominate. 

Throughout  the  remainder  of  the  Prisoner  of  War 
Command  scattered  incidents  occurred  in  pro-Communist 
camps  similar  to  those  which  have  been  experienced 
during  the  past  several  months.  There  were  no  such 
incidents  in  the  anti-Communist  camps. 

Except  for  a  few  hundred  individuals  still  hospitalized 
and  undergoing  medical  treatment  at  the  United  Nations 
Command  Hoi5pital,  Pusan,  all  of  the  11,000  civilian 
internees  included  in  Operation  Thanksgiving  were  re- 
leased from  custody,  and  were  being  resettled  in  the 
civilian  economy  of  the  Republic  of  Korea. 

Through  the  medium  of  radio  and  leaflets,  detailed  in- 
formation on  developments  in  the  United  Nations  General 
Assembly  was  made  available  to  peoples  Uving  under 
Communist  tyranny  in  North  Korea.  In  these  radio 
broadcasts  and  leaflets  the  United  Nations  endeavor  to 
achieve  an  armistice  in  Korea  and  lasting  peace  through- 
out the  world  was  kept  in  the  foreground.  United  Nations 
Command  proposals  at  Panmunjom  and  United  Nations 
Command  readiness  to  discuss  constructive  Communist 
proposals  were  reiterated  in  daily  informational  output. 
Meanwhile,  the  Communist  leaders  have  attempted  to 
instill  in  the  peoples  under  their  control  the  belief  that 
the  recess  in  negotiations  constitutes  a  final  break-off. 

Rear  Admiral  B.  Hall  Hanlon,  United  States  Navy,  on 
10  November  was  announced  as  Assistant  Chief  of  Staff, 
J-5  (Civil  Affairs),  United  Nations  Command,  effective 
with  the  establishment  of  the  .Toint  Staff.  Admiral 
Hanlon  has  served  in  Korea  as  the  Deputy  Commander  for 
Civil  Affairs,  Korean  Communications  Zone,  and  as  the 
Commander  in  Chief's  United  Nations  Command  rep- 
resentative on  the  Combined  Economic  Board  in  Korea. 
Admiral  Hanlon  will  continue  as  the  Commander  in  Chief's 
United  Nations  Command  representative  on  the  Combined 
Economic  Board  in  addition  to  his  function  as  Assistant 
Chief  of  Staff,  J-5  for  Civil  Affairs. 

Under  the  terms  of  the  Economic  Coordination  Agree- 
ment of  May  24,  19.52,  the  United  States  Government 
on  7  November  paid  .$17,987,671.43  to  the  Republic  of 
Korea.  This  amount  represented  a  $4,000,000  monthly 
payment  on  account  for  won  expended  for  bonaflde  mil- 
itary uses,  June  through  September  inclusive,  together 
with  payment  for  won  sold  to  troops  during  period  May 
throu.gh  August  inclusive.  To  date  three  such  payments 
have  been  made  to  the  Republic  of  Korea,  totaling 
$65,638,209.07. 

Preliminary  results  of  the  crop  survey  conducted  to 
estimate  the  Republic  of  Korea  rice  crop  for  the  current 
food  year  indicate  that  approximately  thirteen  million 
suk  of  brown  rice  will  be  produced  (1  suk=5.12  bushels). 
This  figure  is  reported  by  the  United  Nations  Command 
members  of  the  crop  survey  team;  Republic  of  Korea 
members  have  not  as  yet  released  their  estimates.     Dur- 

691 


ing  tht  period  11)4044  the  auiiual  average  rice  production 
was  ia,718,51G  sulj,  and  during  the  period  1946-50  the  an- 
nual average  was  14,145,444  suk.  By  comparison  with 
these  figures  for  previous  years,  the  estimate  for  tliis 
year's  crop  shows  that  the  Republic  of  Korea  rice  produc- 
tion will  be  approximately  normal. 

The  lirst  class  of  Itepublic  of  Korea  merchant  seamen 
will  arrive  on  17  November  at  Yoliosuka,  Japan,  for  mer- 
chant marine  training  to  be  conducted  by  the  United  Na- 
tions Command.  The  students  will  be  housed  and 
subsisted  on  a  cargo  barge  converted  at  a  cost  of  $48,000 
for  the  purpose.  The  program  provides  for  training  of 
480  Republic  of  Korea  seamen  during  the  next  twelve 
months.  Classes  will  consist  of  forty  students  and  will 
be  of  thirty  days  duration. 

FIFTY-EIGHTH   REPORT: 

FOR  THE  PERIOD  NOVEMBER  16^30,  1952 

U.N.  doc.  S/2971 
Dated  March  31.  1953 

[Excerpts] 

I  herewith  sul)mit  report  number  58  of  the  United 
Nations  Command  Operations  in  Korea  for  the  period 
16-30  November  19.52,  inclusive.  T'nited  Nations  Com- 
mand communiques  numbers  1438-1449  provide  detailed 
aocount.s  of  these  operations. 

Armistice  negotiations  continued  in  recess.  On  the 
20th  of  November  1952  the  Senior  United  Nations  Com- 
mand delegate  again  requested  the  Communists  to  permit 
captured  personnel  in  their  custody  to  receive  individual 
parcels  through  the  mail  exchange  which  is  now  in  opera- 
tion. The  letter  which  the  Communists  have  Ignored  is 
quoted : 

On  6  October  1952  I  addressed  a  letter  to  you  requesting 
that  your  side  i>ermit  our  captured  personnel  in  yuur 
custody  to  receive  individual  parcels  through  the  mail 
exchange  which  is  now  in  operation.  The  United  Nations 
Command  further  offered  the  same  facilities  for  the 
captured  personnel  of  your  side  whom  we  hold  in  custody. 

In  an  effort  to  simplify  the  administrative  handling 
by  your  side  and  to  expedite  delivery  of  these  parcels,  I 
further  offered  for  your  consideration  an  easy  and  work- 
able plan  which  would  not  impose  any  exceptional  burden 
on  your  logistic  capabilities.  Although  our  proposal  was 
fully  bilateral  and  based  solely  on  the  humanitarian  mo- 
tive of  bringing  some  measure  of  comfort  to  the  captured 
personnel  of  both  sides,  you  have  to  (late  failed  even  to 
acknowledge  receipt  of  my  communication. 

As  I  have  previously  pointed  out,  the  approach  of 
winter  and  the  hardships  imposed  by  cold  weather  make 
it  particularly  desirable  to  take  all  possible  steps  at  this 
time  to  enable  the  captured  personnel  of  l)oth  sides  to 
receive  relief  parcels.  Further,  the  nearness  of  the  holi- 
day and  New  Year  seasons,  which  many  of  the  captured 
personnel  of  both  sides  customarily  observe  as  a  period 
of  special  spiritual  and  familiar  siunificance.  makes  it 
especially  appropriate  that  these  deliveries  should  be 
undertaken  with  mininuun  delay.  Since  it  is  clearly  the 
right  of  prisoners  of  «  ar  under  the  Geneva  Convention  to 
receive  individual  parcels.  It  is  inconceivable  that  vou 
should  continue  to  deny  the  prisoners  of  both  sides  "the 
simple  and  harmless  benefits  of  the  exchange  of  parcels 
which  I  again  propose. 

I  reiterate  tliat  the  United  Nations  Command  is  pre- 
pared to  implement  our  part  of  this  proposal  without 
delay.  Again  I  express  my  sincere  hope  for  vour  early 
and  favorable  reply. 

692 


There  were  no  other  developments  in  the  armistice  nego- 
tiations during  the  jieriod. 

In  tile  few  scattered  incidents  which  occurred  in  pro- 
Communist  Prisoner  of  War  camps  no  particular  trend 
could  be  discerned  other  than  that  of  pure  harassment. 
At  Koje-do,  on  25  November,  three  prisoners  of  war  of 
one  inclosure  assaulted  without  provocation  an  unarmed 
United  States  aid  man  at  the  Inclosure  aid  station  and 
then  fled  to  their  compound.  Orders  which  were  issued 
immediately  by  camp  authorities  for  the  three  prisoners 
responsible  to  report  to  the  inclosure  command  post  were 
refused  and  two  platoons  of  trained  Republic  of  Korea 
Army  Infantry  entered  the  compound  and  removed  the  i 
three  offenders.  During  the  forcible  segregation  of  these  i 
individuals,  twenty-nine  prisoners  were  slightly  injured. 
About  fifteen  minutes  after  this  first  incident  a  similar  i 
one  occurred  in  another  Inclosure  when  three  prisoners  i 
of  a  group  of  thirt.v-five  who  were  on  a  work  detail  as- 
saulted, again  without  provocation,  a  United  States  work 
supervisor.  After  the  work  detail  returned  to  their  in- 
closure a  United  States  Infantry  platoon  entered  the  in- 
closure service  yard  and  disijersed  the  work  detail  which 
was  then  displaying  an  obviously  defiant  attitude.  The 
three  prisoners  of  war  who  had  committed  the  assault 
were  removed. 

The  camp  authorities  at  Koje-do  reixjrted  that  incidents 
of  this  type  would  probably  continue  for  a  period  of 
several  days  as  part  of  carefuUy  planned  violence.  In- 
formation, as  yet  incomplete,  had  been  uncovered  which 
indicated  that  prisoner  groups  had  been  ordered  by  sub- 
versive elements  to  create  incidents  while  International 
Committee  of  the  Red  Cross  delegates  were  at  Koje-do 
on  a  routine  inspection  and  visit. 

Repeated  radio  and  leaflet  warnings  were  employed  to 
Inform  North  Korea  civilians  of  impending  United  Na- 
tions Command  air  attacks  on  military  targets  and  to 
urge  them  to  evacuate  their  families  to  safety.  The  ef- 
fects of  the  campaign  are  considerable  in  spite  of  Com- 
munist efforts  to  prevent  these  humanitarian  warnings 
from  reaching  the  people. 

United  Nations  devotion  to  peace  in  a  world  threat- 
ened by  Communist  aggression  was  reiterated.  Maximum 
dissemination  was  given  to  Information  concerning  United 
Nations  functions  and  development,  stressing  the  identi- 
fication of  the  United  Nations  with  peace  and  human 
rights.  Reports  Indicate  that  the  people  of  North  Korea 
receive  only  a  distorted  picture  of  the  United  Nations 
through  the  enemy's  controlled  propaganda  channels. 

The  estimated  dollar  value  of  civil  assistance  to  Korea 
for  the  period  1  July  19.50  to  31  October  1952,  totals 
$577,926,319.  Approximately  96  per  cent  of  this  amount 
has  been  contril)uted  by  the  United  States,  including 
$32S,13(>,0S8  for  supplies  and  equipment  and  an  esti- 
mated $225,000,000  in  services.  United  Nations  members 
and  other  free  nations  contributed  $11,628,831,  United 
States  voluntary  agencies  $10,797,874  and  United  Nations 
voluntary  agencies  $2,3a3.52G.  A  total  of  thirty-four 
countries,  four  United  Nations  voluntary  agencies  and 
twenty-six  United  States  voluntary  agencies  are  now  par- 
ticipating in  the  Korean  Aid  Program.  As  contributing 
countries,  Thailand  led  with  an  estimated  dollar  value 

Department  of  State   Bulletin 


of  $4,36S,(M)()  ill  lice.  The  Philippines  were  second  with 
$1,875,408  in  rice,  and  Nationalist  Cliina  third  with 
$617,loO  ill  relief  supplies.  The  American  Relief  for 
Korea,  Inc.,  gave  the  larf:est  non-goveninieutal  coutri- 
liUtion,  totaling  $3,871,145.  The  War  Relief  Service  of 
the  National  Catholic  Welfare  Conference  was  second 
with  $3,(il.'3,4!)2. 

At  the  10  November  meeting  of  the  Combined  Economic 
Board,  a  joint  proposal  was  made  for  the  free  allocation 
of  veterinary  drugs  and  supplies  to  establish  and  main- 
tain 200  veterinar.v  clinics  in  Korea  for  six  months. 
These  clinics  will  lie  established  at  the  National  Veteri- 
nar.v Institute,  two  Veterinar.v  Colleges,  one  High  School, 
several  livestock  Breeding  Stations,  and  in  each  major 
cit.v  area  throughout  tlie  Republic  of  Korea,  to  treat 
animal  disease  and  con.serve  livestock.  It  is  estimated 
that  in  six  months'  time  the  clinics  will  be  able  to  begin 
paying  an  increasing  percentage  of  the  cost  of  supplies. 

A  Seminar-workshop  program  currently  is  being  held 
in  Pusan  for  180  educators  from  all  Republic  of  Korea 
provinces.  Conducted  by  members  of  the  American  Edu- 
cation Mission,  the  seminars  cover  five  major  areas  of 
education,  including  teaching  and  learning;  fundamental 
philosophy  of  education;  administration,  and  child  de- 
velopment and  guidance.  The  six  members  of  the 
American  Education  Mission,  who  were  recruited  for  the 
Unitarian  Services  Committee,  will  spend  nine  months  in 
Korea  on  a  technical  assistance  program. 

An  appropriation  of  $1,84.5,000  has  been  made  by  United 
Nations  Korea  Reconstruction  Agency  for  the  orphan's 
program.  Projects  to  be  financed  by  this  appropriation 
have  been  prepared  by  the  .Joint  United  Nations  Civil 
Assistance  Command  Korea-United  Nations  Korean  Re- 
construction Agency-Republic  of  Korea  Child  Welfare 
Committee,  which  was  established  on  6  October  for  the 
purpose  of  studying,  analyzing  and  coordinating  child 
welfare  plans  and  activities.  Three  projects  have  been 
proposed,  which  include  the  establishment  of  a  child 
welfare  center  and  a  rational  model  and  training  institu- 
tion in  each  province ;  extension  and  improvement  of  the 
best  existing  educational  institutions,  and  the  establish- 
ment of  three  vocational  training  institutions. 


FIFTY-NINTH   REPORT: 

FOR  THE  PERIOD  DECEMBER  1  15,  1952 

U.N.  doc.  S/2972 
Dated  March  31,  1953 

[Excerpts] 

I  herewith  submit  report  number  59  of  the  United  Na- 
tions Command  Operations  in  Korea  for  the  periixl  1-15 
December  1952,  inclusive.  United  Nations  Command 
communiques  numbers  1450-1464  provide  detailed  ac- 
counts of  these  operations. 

There  were  no  meetings  of  the  Armistice  Delegations  as 
the  negotiations  continued  in  recess.  Developments  in 
the  United  Nations  General  Assembly  were  followed 
closely  as  possibly  leading  to  the  resumption  of  the  nego- 
tiations. The  rejection  of  the  Indian  resolution  by  the 
Chinese  <'ommunist  and  North  Korean  authorities  made  it 
appear  tliat  the  Communists  will  continue  to  insist  on  an 


Armistice  on   Iheir  own   terms,  and  that  they  will  con- 
tinue to  demand  the  repatriation  of  all  prisoners  of  war. 

The  numlier  of  inciilents  in  the  pro-communist  ijrisoner 
of  war  camps  which  occurred  during  the  prece<ling  .several 
weeks  continued  to  increase.  On  0  Decenilier  19.o2,  the 
prisoner  of  war  command  rciMirted  indications  that  plans 
were  being  formulated  for  a  mass  outbreak  within  the 
United  Nations  Command  prisoner  of  war  and  internee 
camps.  Coded  documents  had  been  intercepted  in  sev- 
eral of  the  compounds.  The  code  was  broken  by  tlie 
authorities  and  the  documents  disclosed  plans  for  mass 
break.  The  code  appeared  to  be  common  throughout  the 
main  camp  and  the  lu-ancli  camp  areas,  indicating  that 
the  plan  was  centrally  directed.  The  date  and  the  time 
that  these  plans  were  to  be  operative  was  not  known. 

An  investigation  was  initiated  at  once.  All  camp  com- 
manders were  acquainted  with  the  situation  and  were 
directed  to  take  every  precaution  to  negate  any  attempt 
by  the  internees  to  put  such  plans  into  effect.  Eight  days 
after  the  first  reports  became  available,  the  plot  matured 
into  violence.  At  noon  on  December  14,  reports  came  to 
the  commander  of  the  camp  that  internees  in  two  of  the 
camp  conqKiunds  were  massing.  It  was  evident  that  im- 
mediate action  was  necessary  to  prevent  the  rioters  from 
lireaking  out  of  their  compounds  and  inciting  their  fel- 
lows in  the  six  other  compounds  to  attempt  similar  action. 
The  compouxid  commander,  with  a  small  detachment  of 
United  States  and  Republic  of  Korea  guards,  had  to  act 
at  once  to  prevent  many  hundreds  of  internees  from  break- 
ing out  of  their  compounds  and  inviting  pitched  battles. 

The  necessity  for  using  force  to  repress  inspired  and 
centrally  directed  outbursts  of  fanatical  violence  by  pris- 
oners is,  at  times,  unavoidable.  That  such  unavoidable 
use  of  force  should  result  in  casualties  is  no  evidence  that 
force  was  not  required.  The  communist  authorities  have 
no  regard  for  human  life.  This  is  evidenced  by  their  fre- 
quent exploitation  of  their  own  prisoners  of  war  by  inspir- 
ing them  to  a  state  of  fanatical  disregard  of  their  own 
lives.  The  prisoner  of  war  disturbances  caused  by  the 
Communists  are  directed  towards  embarrassing  the  United 
Nations  Command  and  aimed  at  reaping  propaganda  bene- 
fits, particularly  if  the  United  Nations  Command  can  be 
forced  into  a  situation  where  force  must  be  used  to  control 
the  prisoners  of  war.  On  the  military  siile,  the  prisoner 
of  war  disturbances  are  designed  to  divert  United  Nations 
Command  Forces  from  front-line  duty. 

lu  all  of  the  camps  housing  anti-Communist  prisoners 
of  war  there  were  no  incidents  during  this  periotl,  and 
interior  administration  and  gradual  improvement  of 
facilities  continued  at  a  satisfactory  rate. 

Developments  in  the  United  Nations  General  Assembly 
relating  to  the  Indian  proposal  for  resolving  the  pris- 
oner repatriation  issue  were  reported  extensively  in  in- 
formational media  directed  to  enemy  troojis  and  to  North 
Korean  civilians.  In  connection  with  the  Indian  proposal. 
United  Nations  Command  efforts  to  achieve  peace  in 
Korea  and  United  Nations  Command  determination  to 
adhere  to  the  humanitariaxi  principle  of  non-forcible 
repatriation  were  reiterated. 


May   J?,    J953 


693 


Demilitarization  of  Jammu  and  Kashmir 


FIFTH   REPORT  BY  THE  U.  N.  REPRESENTATIVE  FOR  INDIA  AND  PAKISTAN 


On  March  27  Frank  P.  Graham,  U.  N.  represent- 
ative for  India  and  Pakistan,  transmitted  to  the 
Secretary-General  his  fifth  report  to  the  Security 
Council  (U.  N.  doc.  S/2967)/  In  the  report, 
Mr.  Graham  reviewed  the  suggestions  made  by 
him  in  his  efforts  to  assist  the  two  Governments  to 
reach  an  agreement  on  the  demilitarization  of 
Jannnu  and  Kashmir,  including  the  latest  explora- 
tory suggestions  made  at  Geneva. 

Pait  I  of  the  report  I'eviews  suggestions  regard- 
ing proposal  7  of  the  12  proposals  for  an  agree- 
ment on  demilitarization;  Part  II  (not  printed 
here)  points  out  the  values  of  inducting  the  Plebi- 
scite Administrator  into  office  at  an  early  fixed 
time;  Part  III  (not  printed  here)  refers  to  assur- 
ances regarding  the  August  18,  1948,  and  January 
5, 1949  resolutions;  Part  IV  (a  portion  of  whicli  is 
printed  here)  summarizes  the  negotiations  since 
the  meeting  of  the  Security  Council  on  December 
23,  1952;  Part  V  emphasizes  the  importance  to  the 
people  of  the  State,  the  two  nations,  and  the  world 
of  an  agreement  on  the  Kashmir  dispute.  Five 
annexes  (not  printed  here)  are  attached  to  the 
report. 


U.N.  doc.  S  2967 

Dated  March  27,  1953  [Excerpts] 


an  effort  to  discover  whether  there  were  circumstances 
under  which  one  or  the  other  of  these  positions  could  be- 
come the  basis  of  an  agreement,  the  United  Nations  Repre- 
sentative made  certain  suggestions  to  the  two  Governments 
as  a  basis  for  their  negotiation. 

The  first  proposals  were  made  on  7  September  1951.' 

Proposal  seven  read  as  follows : 

"7.  Agree  that  the  demilitarization  shall  be  carried  out 
in  such  a  way  that  at  the  end  of  the  period  referred  to  in 
paragraph  6  above  the  situation  will  be :  i 

A.  Oil  the  Pahistan  side  of  the  cease-fire  line:  " 

(i)  the  tribesmen  and  Pakistan  nationals  not  normally 
resident  therein  who  had  entered  the  State  for  the  purpose 
of  fighting  will  have  been  withdrawn ;  p 

(ii)   The   TaUistau   troops  will  have  been   withdrawn  |i 
from  the  State,  and  j 

(iii)  large-scale  disbandment  and  disarmament  of  the 
Azad  Kashmir  forces  will  have  taken  place. 

B.  On  the  Indian  side  of  the  cease-fire  line: 

(i)  the  bulk  of  the  Indian  forces  in  the  State  will  have 
been  withdrawn ; 

(ii)  further  withdrawals  or  reductions,  as  the  case  may 
be,  of  the  Indian  and  State  Armed  forces  remaining  in  the 
State  after  the  completion  of  the  operation  referred  to  in 
B  (i)  above  will  have  been  carried  out ; 

so  that  at  the  end  of  the  period  referred  to  in  paragraph 
6  above  there  will  remain  on  the  present  Pakistan  side  of 

the  cease-fire  line  a  force  of  Civil  Armed  Forces, 

and  on  the  Indian  side  of  the  cease-fire  line  a  force  of 


Number  and  Character  of  Forces 

A.  The  Suggestions   on   Proposal  Seven  Regarding   The 
Nuinher  and,  Character  of  Forces 

Early  in  his  consultations  with  the  two  Governments  on 
the  sub-continent  in  .luly  and  August  19.51,  the  United 
Nations  Representative  found  ( 1 )  that  the  (iovernraent  of 
India  maintained  that  there  should  remain  in  the  terri- 
tory to  be  evacuated  by  the  Pakistan  army  a  civil  force; 
and  (2)  that  the  Government  of  Pakistan  maintained 
that  after  withdrawals  and  reductions  there  should,  in 
general,  be  a  military  balance  on  the  respective  sides.     In 


'  For  excerpts  from  the  1st  report,  see  Bulletin  of  Nov. 
.5,  in.-.l,  p.  788  ;  from  the  I'd,  ihid..  Jan.  14,  10.'52,  p.  .52  ;  from 
the  Md.  ihid.,  May  5,  19.52,  p.  712;  and  from  the  4th,  ibid., 
Oct.  2I>,  T.C.2,  p.  G2G. 


In  resixinse  to  this  proposal,  the  Prime  Minister  of 
India,  on  11  September  1951,  stated  inter  alia: 

".  .  .  the  Government  of  India  will  retain  on  their  side 
of  the  cease-fire  line  in  Jammu  and  Kashmir,  One  Line  of 
Comnninication  Area  Headquarters  and  One  Infantry 
Division  (normal)  but  of  four  brigades  of  four  battalions 
each,"  at  the  end  of  the  period  agreed  upon  in  terms  of 
paragraphs  G  and  '.)  of  tlie  proposals,  provided  that  the 
operations  described  in  paragraph  7.A  (i)  (ii|  and  (iii) 
of  the  proposals  have  been  completed  by  the  end  of  that 
period.  Thus  much  more  than  the  "bulk  of  Indian  forces 
in  the  State"  will  have  been  withdrawn  and  I  wish  to 
emphasize  that  the  forces  left  behind  will  be  wholly 
inadequate  to  resist  any  large-scale  aggression.  Effec- 
tive measures  to  prevent  such  aggression  will,  it  is  pre- 
sumed, be  taken  by  Pakistan." 


■Ibid..  Nov.  .-),  19.51.  p.  740. 

'  Interpreted  by  India  to  be  in  the  order  of  28,000  men. 


694 


Deparfmenf   of  Sfafe   Bulletin 


The  Prime  Minister  of  India  in  the  same  letter  further 
stated : 

"\s  regards  the  Civil  Armed  Forces  to  be  maintained 
on  the  Pakistan  side  of  the  cease-fire  line  at  the  end  of 
the  period  agreed  upon  in  terms  of  paragraph  6  and 
•paragraph  9,  the  Government  of  India  would  agree  to  a 
force^of  4,000.  organized,  equipped  and  composed  as  recom- 
mended to  UNCir  in  C  of  the  memorandum  transmi^tted 
to  Dr  Lozano  under  cover  of  letter  No.  24S-PASG/49 
dated  13  April  1949,  by  their  Secretary-General  in  the 
Jliaistry  of  External  Affairs.'" 

The  Prime  Minister  of  Pakistan  on  12  September  1951 
stated,  inter  alia,  that  his  Government 

consider  that  a  force  of  not  more  than  four  in- 
fantry battalions  (with  the  necessary  administrative 
units)"  should  remain  on  each  side  of  the  cease-fire  line 
at  the  end  of  the  demilitarization  programme  envisaged 
in  paragraph  7.  These  figures  are  based  on  a  careful  con- 
sideration of  all  relevant  factors  such  as,  area,  terrain, 
size  and  distribution  of  population  on  the  two  sides  of 

'  the  cease-flre  line. 

'     "The  Pakistan  Government  are,  however,  of  the  view 

I  that  so  long  as  the  forces  on  each  side  of  the  cease-fire 
line  are  of  the  order  indicated  above,  some  slight  difference 
in  the  strength  or  description  of  the  two  forces  should  not 

:  stand  in  the  way  of  an  agreement  being  reached." 

I     In  his  statement  to  the  Security  Council  on  17  January 
I  1952,  the  United  Nations  Representative  summarized  the 
positions  of  the  two  Governments  as  follows : 

".  .  .  it  should  be  noted  that,  as  a  result  of  three  in- 
formal exploratorv  discussions  at  military  level,  India 
agreed  to  withdraw  an  additional  7,000  of  its  armed 
forces  This  would  bring  the  Indian  and  State  armed 
forces  down  to  21,000,  exclusive  of  the  State  Militia  of 
6  000  which  it  seems  would  be  a  proportion  of  perhaps 
over  7.0  per  cent  of  the  Indian  and  State  armed  forces 
present  in  the  State  at  the  time  of  the  cease-fire  on 
1  January  1949. 

"The  Representative  of  Pakistan  indicated  that  any  pro- 
portionate reduction,  however  heavy,  would  be  matched 
on  the  Pakistan-Azad  Kashmir  side  of  the  cease-fire  line 
as  an  inter-dependent  part  of  a  continuous  process  m  the 
proposed  programme  of  demilitarization. 

"The  official  replies  of  India  and  Pakistan  to  the  basic 
questions  asked  bv  the  United  Nations  Representative 
made  formal  the  wide  differences  between  the  two  Gov- 
ernments on  the  most  basic  questions. 

"With  the  additional  reduction  of  7,000  armed  forces, 
India  held  the  position  that  at  the  end  of  the  period  of 
demilitarization  there  should  be  on  the  Indian  side  of  the 
fine  21,000  Indian  and  State  armed  forces,  exclusive  of 
the  State  Mihtia  of  6,000,  and  there  should  be  on  the  other 
side  of  the  line  a  civil  armed  force  of  2,000  and  an  unarmed 
civil  force  of  2,000.  half  of  whom  were  to  be  followers  of 
Azad  Kashmir  and  half  of  whom  were  not  to  be  followers 
of  Azad  Kashmir,  as  specified  above. 

"Pakistan  maintained  that  at  the  end  of  the  period  of 
demilitarization  there  should  be  approximately  4,000 
armed  forces  on  each  side  of  the  cease-fire  line,  but  for 
the  sake  of  an  agreement  would  accept  a  slight  disparity 
in  favour  of  India. 

"The  wide  difference  in  the  number  of  armed  forces 
proposed  by  tlie  two  Governments  to  be  left  on  each  side 
of  the  cease-fire  line  at  the  end  of  the  period  of  demilitari- 
zation made  it  clear  that  no  agreement  could  be  reached 
on  Proposal  7  at  this  time." 

In  his  Second  Report  the  United  Nations  Representative 
suggested  for  the  consideration  of  the  parties  that  pro- 


'  This  memorandum  states  that  half  of  this  force  should 
be  armed  and  half  unarmed  ;  half  should  be  followers  of 
Azad  Kashmir  and  half  not  followers  of  Azad  Kashmir. 

'  In  the  order  of  4,000  men. 

May   7],    1953 


Iiosal  seven  should  be  revi.sed  to  provide  that  at  the  end  of 
the  demilitarization  period  : ' 

".  .  .  there  will  remain  on  each  side  of  the  cease-fire 
line  the  lowest  possible  number  of  armed  forces  based  in 
proportion  on  the  number  of  armed  forces  existing  on  each 
side  of  the  cease-fire  line  on  1  January  1949". 

Following  this  proposal  a  wide  difference  in  the  posi- 
tions of  the  two  Governments  on  proposal  seven  still 
persisted  regarding  the  number  and  character  of  forces 
to  be  left  at  the  end  of  tlie  period  of  demilitarization. 

In  view  of  the  continuing  differences  between  tlie  two 
Governments,  the  United  Nations  Representative  believed 
it  might  be  useful  if  he  made  suggestions  on  numbers  for 
the  consideration  of  the  parties  in  their  negotiations. 

In  July  1052  the  United  Nations  Representative  sug- 
gested for  the  consideration  of  the  two  Governments  that 
they  attempt  to  agree  on  figures  within  the  brackets  of 
3,000  to  6,000  armed  forces  on  the  territory  to  be  evacuated 
by  the  Pakistan  Army,  and  Indian  army  forces  of  12,000 
to  18,000  on  tlie  Indian  side.  These  figures  did  not  include 
either  the  3,500  Gilgit  and  Northern  Scouts  in  the  evac- 
uated territory  or  the  6,000  State  Militia  on  the  Indian 
side. 

In  the  Geneva  Conference  in  September  1952  the  United 
Nations  Representative  suggested  the  definite  figures  of 
6,000  and  18.000  for  the  respective  sides,  exclusive  of  the 
Scouts  and  the  State  Militia.  This  suggestion  was  fol- 
lowed by  the  suggestion  that  criteria  be  established  by 
which  definite  figures  might  be  agreed  upon  at  a  military 
conference  to  be  held  after  the  signing  of  a  truce  agree- 
ment. 

No  agreement  having  been  reached  between  the  two 
Governments  at  the  Geneva  Conference  or  during  the 
meetings  of  the  Security  Council  held  in  October,  Novem- 
ber and  December  1952,  the  United  Nations  Representa- 
tive, in  the  Conference  held  in  Geneva  in  February  1953, 
referred  to  in  Part  IV  below,  suggested  that  the  Govern- 
ments consider  for  discussion  the  proposal  mentioned 
therein. 

While  during  the  negotiations  on  paragraph  seven  there 
has  been  some  narrowing  of  the  gap  between  the  positions 
of  the  two  Governments  on  the  question  of  the  number 
and  character  of  the  forces  to  remain  on  each  side  of  the 
cease-fire  line  at  the  end  of  the  period  of  demilitarization, 
a  substantial  difference  in  position  still  remains. 

B.  The  United  Nations  Representative,  as  a  Mediator,  has 
made  a  Series  of  Siigf/estions  in  an  Attempt  to  Determine 
whether  a  Basis  can  be  found  for  an  Agreement  hetween 
the  two  Governments  on  the  Character  and  Numher  of 
Forces 

The  United  Nations  Representative  makes  no  preferen- 
tial brief  for  the  lower  figures  of  3,000  to  12,000  or  the 
higher  figures  of  6,000  to  21,000.  As  a  mediator  whose 
responsibility  has  been  to  keep  striving  for  an  agreement 
he  has  hoped  that  a  basis  for  the  negotiation  of  an  agree- 
ment might  be  found.  He  hoped,  for  example,  that  the 
figures  6,000  and  18,000  with  the  accompanying  provisions 
would  be  found  adequate  for  fulfilling  the  respective 
functions :  in  the  evacuated  territory,  of  preserving  law 
and  order  and  the  cease-fire  line  from  violations ;  and  on 
the  Indian  side  of  the  line,  of  preserving  law  and  order 
and  the  cease-fire  line  from  violations,  including  meeting 
the  needs  in  relation  to  defence. 

In  the  belief  that  there  will  be  no  deliberate  and  re- 
sponsible violation  of  the  cease-fire  line  from  either  side, 
it  is  nevertheless  important  that  there  be  alertness  on 
both  sides  of  the  line  against  the  possibility  of  attempted 
violation  by  any  possible  irresponsible  elements. 

It  appears  obvious  that  India  under  the  two  resolutions 
has  some  larger  responsibilities  on  her  side  of  the  cease- 
fire line  than  the  local  authorities  have  in  the  evacuated 
territory  on  the  other  side  of  the  cease-fire  line. 


'  Bulletin  of  Jan.  14.  1952,  p.  54. 


695 


Withmit  reeoKnition  of  tlip  Azad  Kashmir  Government 
and  without  prejudice  to  the  sovereignty  of  the  SfUe  it 
also  appears  obvious,  by  the  nature  of  the  ceasp-lire  line 
and  the  temporary  exercise  of  the  necessary  and  useful 
functions  of  the  local  authorities,  that  (wi"th  the  with- 
drawal of  the  tribesmen  and  of  the  Pakistani  nationals 
not  normally  resident  therein  who  entered  the  State  for 
the  purpose  of  fighting,  and  with  the  withdrawal  of  the 
Pakistan  army  and  authority  and  the  large  scale  disarm- 
ing and  disbanding  of  the  Azad  Kashmir  forces)  there 
should  be  in  the  evacuated  territory  effective  local  au- 
thorities and  effective  armed  forces.  In  the  -\zad 
Kashmir  territory  these  armed  forces  would  be  organized 
out  of  the  reraa,nder  of  the  Azad  Kashmir  forces  without 
armour  or  aitUlery,  and  thereafter  would  be  commanded 
by  local  officers  under  the  local  authorities,  under  the 
surveillance  of  the  United  Nations 

Proposal  seven  takes  on  much  added  significance  because 

of  the  Plebiscite  Administrator  into  office  at  a     "finite 
time  as  provided  in  proposal  ten  of  the  twelve  proposals 


Conference  in  Geneva  from  4  to  19  February  1953' 

The  Conference  in  Geneva  may  be  divided  into  two  dif- 
ferent stages  as  follows : 

'\'q/?"'"^^T'^*'''"*  °^   ^^^^-P  '-esolutio^is   of  13  August 
19J,8  and  5  January  1949 

FeIrnnrfio-'^''''*T^  °^  ^^^  Conference  took  place  on  4 
rVnri  ;  i  ^''^  =«(!  was  Confined  to  discussion  of  the  proce- 
dure to  be  followed.  The  United  Nations  Representative 
made  a  statement  in  which  he  stated,  inter  alia 

tio'n  n^'i'hi'^  like  to  propose  that  we  start  with  the  examina- 
tion of  the  resolution  of  13  August  1948,  Part  bv  Part     In 

ha^  'drJJv  r"''  '^^T"""''  t"  ^^^t  extent  the  resolution 
has  aheady  been  implemented,  and  define,  as  completely 
as  possible,  the  obstacles  which  have  until  now  Zpeded 
the  implementation  of  those  parts  which  have  not  yet  beln 
carried  into  effect.  I  hope  that  with  regard  to  each  of 
such  obs  acles  it  will  be  possible  for  the  Governments 
concerned  to  indicate  the  conditions  under  wh'ch  he 
obstacles  might  be  removed." 

It  was  agreed  that, 

of  P.^rt  r'^'rpor'fi  ""  rV'^'  ^^'^'f  ^""^  ^^«  consideration 
TiMr.™/,  !!'"'*'■*'''''  '^''''">  "f  the  resolution  of  the 
Uncip  of  13  August  194S,  followed  by  Part  II  (Truce 
Agreement)  of  that  resolution,  and 

(6)  the  discussion  of  Part  II  would  be  initiated  with 
consideration  of  paragraph  A,  sub-paragraphs  1  and  -^ 
and  paragraph  B,  sul^paragraphs  1  and  2,  and  then  Tf 
mrr.rTnh  T'"  r^''^""  ""  ''"'""  P°'°t^'  examination  of 
woull^at-piacf  "''''"■''^"■'^^'  ''  =""'  ^'  -^-P-'agraph  3, 

The  representative.,  of  India  and  Pakistan,  assuming  that 
Pait  I  (Cease-fire  Order)  of  the  Uncip's  13  August  1948 
P?;t"r'\';f  l>,r  '-I'lemented,  began  discus^on  of 
rart  n  Attei  the  two  representatives  had  exijressed 
»ieir  ponits  of  view,  it  was  agreed  that  the  discussion 
won  ,1  be  confined  at  least  in  the  initial  stages  to  the 
miplementation  of  Part  II  (Truce  Agreemeift)  of  the 
Uncip  resolution  of  13  August  1948.  The  discussion  was 
confined  to  paragraph  A,  sub-paragraphs  1  and  2  and 
paragraph   B,   sub-paragraphs   1   and   2,   which   read   as 


'  Sir  Gir.ia  Shankar  Ba.ipai  headed  the  Indian  delegation 
P,k?.^r'*V  ^'^  ,Z.«f»"'''h  Khan,  Foreign  Minister  of 
1  .ikistan,  headed  his  country's  delegation. 


696 


(Uncip's  Resolution  of  13  August  1948) 
"Part  II 
"Truce  agreement 
■  ■  ■  A. 

■•1.  As  the  presence  of  troops  of  Pakistan  in  the  terri-' 
tory  of  the  State  of  .Tammu  and  Kashmir  constitutes  a 
material  change  in  the  situation  since  it  was  represented 
by  the  Government  of  Pakistan  before  the  Security  Coun- 
cil, the  Government  of  Pakistan  agrees  to  withdraw  its' 
troops  from  that  State. 

"2.  The  Government  of  Pakistan  will  use  its  best  en- 
deavour to  secure  the  withdrawal  from  the  State  of' 
.lammu  and  Kashmir  of  tribesmen  and  Pakistani  nationals' 
not  normally  resident  therein  who  have  entered  the  Statp' 
for  the  purpose  of  fighting."  ...  ' 

B.  j 

"1.  When  the  Commission  shall  have  notified  the  Gov-' 
ernment  of  India  that  the  tribesmen  and  Pakistani  na- 
tionals referred  to  in  part  II,  A,  2  hereof  have  withdrawn 
thereby  terminating  the  situation  which  was  represented 
by  the  Government  of  India  to  the  Security  Council  a.s 
having  occasioned  the  presence  of  Indian  forces  in  the! 
State  of  .Tammu  and  Kashmir,  and  further,  that  the  Paki-' 
stani  forces  are  being  withdrawn  from  the  State  of  .Tammu 
and  Kashmir,  the  Government  of  India  agrees  to  begin  , 
to  withdraw  the  bulk  of  its  forces  from  that  State  in 
stages  to  be  agreed  up<in  with  the  Commission 

"2.  Peniling  the  acceptance  of  the  conditions  for  a  final 
settlement  of  the  situation  in  the  State  of  Jammu  and 
Kashmir,   the  Indian  Government  will   maintain  within 
the  lines  existing  at   the  moment   of  the  cease-fire  the 
minimum  strength  of  its  forces  which  in  agreement  with 
the  Commission  are  considered   necessary  to  assist   the  ' 
local  authorities  in  the  observance  of  law  and  order     The  : 
Commission  will  have  observers  stationed  where  it  deems  I 
neces.sary."  i 

The  positions  of  India  and  Pakistan  in  regard  to  the  ! 
imrilenientation  of  this  part  of  the  resolution  were  sum- 
marized by  the  two  representatives  as  follows : 

India  I 

"As  regards  the  implementation  of  B.  1  and  '>  of  Part  II  I 
of  the  Resolution  of  the  13th  August,  1948,  India's  p<isition 
IS  that  the  Azad  Kashmir  forces  cannot  be  differentiated  I 
from  the  Pakistan  Army  of  which  thev  are,  for  all  prac- 
tical purjiosps,  an  integral  part,  and  t'hat  their  numbers, 
equipment  and  efiicieney  constitute  a  threat  to  the  secu- 
rity   of   the   State.     The    implementation,    therefore    bv  ' 
Pakistan  of  A.  1  and  2  of  Part  II  of  the  resolution  will  I 
not  materially  diminish  this  threat  which  is  aggravated  I 
by  the  ease  with  which,  owing  to  the  proximity  of  Paki- 
stan s  military  cantonments,  these  forces  could  be  quickly  ' 
reinforced  by  the  Pakistan  army.     So  long  as  agreem,'nt 
regarding  the  complete  disbanding  and  disarming  of  the  ; 
Azad  Kashmir  forces  is  not  reached,  a  truce  agreement 
cannot   create   'the  conditions  for   a   final   settlement  of  ' 
the  situation  in  the  State  of  Jammu  and  Kashmir.'    India 
IS,  therefore,  unable  to  accept  any  reduction  of  its  present 
forces  except  as  part  of  an  overall  arrangement  which 
includes    not    only    the   withdrawal    of   Pakistan    troops,    '< 
tribesmen  and  Pakistan  nationals  not  normally  resident   ' 
in  the  State  who  have  entered  for  the  purpose  of  fighting 
but  also  agreement  on  the  measures  to  be  adopted  for  the 
complete  dLslianding  and  disarming  of  the  Azad  Kashmir 
forces. 

Pakistan 

"It  will  be  seen  that  under  the  Resolution  the  with- 
drawal of  Pakistan  troops  is  contingent  upon  the  with- 
drawal of  the  'bulk'  of  the  Indian  Army  (Clau.se  B  (1)). 
The  Uncip  had  explaine<]  that  's.vnclironization  of  the 
withdrawal  of  the  armed  forces  of  the  two  Governments 
will  be  arranged  between  the  respective  High  Commands 
and  the  Commission.'     (Vide  paragraph  10  of  Appendix  I 

Department   of  State   Bulletin 


to  the  Commission's  letter  dated  27th  August  1948  to 
the  Foreign  Minister  of  Pakistan). 

•■It  was  reafHrmed  by  the  Pakistan  Delegation  on  5 
February  1953  that  once  a  satisfactory  truce  agreement 
bised  on  the  above  principles  was  arrived  at,  the  Govern- 
ment of  Pakistan  would  proceed  to  fulflU  all  the  obliga- 
tions that  devolved  on  it. 

••The  problem  thus  resolved  itself  into  one  of  securing 
India's  agreement  to  withdraw  the  'bulk'  of  Its  forces 
from  the  State  of  Jammu  and  Kashmir  as  provided  for 
in  Part  II  of  the  13th  August  19-18  resolution." 

The  results  of  the  meetings  and  conversations  with  the 
representatives  separately  on  this  approach  led  the  United 
Nations  Representative  to  the  conclusion  that  agreement 
was  not  possible  at  that  time  between  the  two  <'Overn- 
meuts  on  a  truce  agreement  based  solely  on  Part  II  of 
the  13  August  1948  resolution  and  it  appeared  to  him  that 
the  .same  difficulties  that  existed  as  early  as  1949  were 
still  the  main  obstacles  in  the  way  of  carrying  out  the 
commitments  embodied  in  Part  II.  ^    ,    v. 

The  United  Nations  Representative  did  not  teei  he 
could  continue  this  approach  as  the  figures  of  troops 
proposed  by  the  Government  of  India  for  the  withdrawal 
of  the  bulk  of  their  Army  were  not  such  as  he  could 
sponsor  with  Pakistan  ;  nor  were  the  figures  suggested  by 
Pakistan  negotiable  with  India.  _ 

It  was  clear  to  the  United  Nations  Representative,  that 
thi-^  approach  would  not  lead  to  any  fruitful  result  and, 
in  accordance  with  the  terms  of  reference  agreed  upon 
between  the  two  Governments  for  the  Conference,  fur- 
ther consideration  of  the  twelve  proposals  ensued. 

(2)  Further  consideration  of  the  12  pi-oposals 

As  the  United  Nations  Representative  has  pointed  out 
and  as  it  was  borne  out  in  the  last  discussions  in  the  Se- 
curitv  Council,  the  main  problem  under  the  programme 
of  demilitarization  was  tlie  question  dealt  with  under 
paragraph  7  of  his  12  propo.sals,  that  is  to  say,  the  number 
and  character  of  forces  to  remain  on  each  side  of  the 
cease-fire  line  at  the  end  of  a  period  of  demilitarization. 

The  United  Nations  Representative,  having  met  sepa- 
rately with  the  representatives  of  India  and  Pakistan 
to  discuss  with  each  their  positions  on  this  important 
matter,  presented  on  14  February  19.53  to  the  two  repre- 
sentatives for  discussion,  proposals  which  contained, 
inter  alia,  in  paragraph  7  specific  figures  for  the  forces 
on  each  side  of  the  cease-fire  line  at  the  end  of  the  period 
of  demilitarization.  The  revised  text  of  paragraph  7  read 
as  follows : 

"Agree  that  the  demilitarization  shall  be  carried  out  in 
such  a  way  that  at  the  end  of  the  period  referred  to  in 
paragraph  6  above  the  situation  will  be : 

A.  On  the  Pakistan  side  of  the  cease-fire  line: 

(i)  the  tribesmen  and  Pakistan  nationals  not  normally 
resident  therein  who  had  entered  the  State  for  the  pur- 
pose of  fighting  will  have  been  withdrawn ; 

(ii)  the  Pakistan  troops  will  have  been  withdrawn 
from  the  State ; 

(iii)  large-scale  disbanding  and  disarming  of  the  Azad 
Kashmir  forces  will  have  taken  place;  so  that  at  the  end 
of  the  period  of  demilitarization  there  shall  remain  an 
armed  force  of  6,000.  This  force  will  have  been  separated 
from  the  administrative  and  operational  command  of  the 
Pakistan  High  Command  in  accordance  with  para- 
graph 9.     It  will  have  no  armour  or  artillery. 

B.  On  the  Indian  side  of  the  cease-fire  line: 

(i)  the  bulk  of  the  Indian  forces  in  the  State  will  have 
been  withdrawn ; 

(ii)  further  withdrawals  or  reductions,  as  the  case  may 
be,  of  the  Indian  and  State  armed  forces  remaining  in  the 
State  after  the  completion  of  the  operation  referred  to  m 
B  (i)  above  will  have  been  carried  out :  so  that  at  the  end 
of  the  i)eriod  of  demilitarization  there  shall  be  an  Indian 

May   II,   1953 


army  force  of  21,000  including  State  armed  forces.     This 
force  will  be  without  armour  or  artillery." 

The  positions  of  the  representatives  of  India  and 
Pakistan  on  these  proposals  were  set  forth  in  their  com- 
munications of  17  February  1953  and,  in  substance,  stated 
the  following : 

India 

(1)  The  Government  of  India  had  no  comments  on 
paragraphs  1  to  6,  (S  and  the  provisional  clause. 

(2)  As  regards  paragrai)h  7  tlie  Government  of  India 
had  no  comments  on  A  (i)  and  (ii)  and  B  (i)  and  (ii). 
On  the  question  of  ,\zad  Kashmir  forces  referred  to  in 
paragraph  A  (iii)  the  Government  of  India  was  imable  to 
agree  to  the  retention  of  any  militai-y  forces  in  the 
so-called  Azad  Kashmir  territory. 

(3)  In  the  opinion  of  the  Government  of  India  the 
function  of  preventing  violations  of  the  cease-fire  line  on 
the  Azad  Kashmir  side  could  be  effectively  performed  by 
a  civil  armed  force  to  the  formation  of  which  they  had 
already  agreed  (2,000  armed,  2,000  unarmed).  However, 
in  order  to  meet  the  United  Nations  Representative's  point 
regarding  the  neces.sity  of  an  adequate  force  to  prevent 
infringement  of  the  cease-fire  line  from  the  Azad  Kashmir 
side,  the  Government  of  India  was  willing  to  agree  to 
some  increase  in  the  numbers  of  the  propo.sed  Civil  Armed 
force  and  also  to  the  equipment  of  the  armed  section  of 
this  force  with  such  weapons  as  may  be  considered  suit- 
able to  assure  the  satisfactory  discharge  of  this  function. 

(4)  As  regarded  paragraph  9,  the  Government  of  India 
pointed  out : 

(i)  that  the  so-called  Azad  Kashmir  Government  should 
not  be  allowed  to  function  in  this  area  either  collectively 
or  individually  through  its  ministers. 

(ii)  that  all  officials  appointed  by  the  Pakistan  Govern- 
ment should  cease  to  function. 

(iii)  that  no  connexion  should  be  maintained  between 
the  local  authority  and  the  Pakistan  Government. 

(iv)  that  the  administration  should  be  conducted  under 
the  surveillance  of  the  United  Nations  Representative  by 
local  officials  who  could  be  relied  upon  to  discharge  their 
duties  effectively  and  impartially  with  strict  regard  to 
the  needs  and  conditions  of  a  fair  and  impartial  plebiscite. 

(.5)  As  regarded  paragraph  10,  the  Government  of  India 
reaffirmed  the  views  stated  in  paragraph  2  of  the  memo- 
randum annexed  as  Appendix  V  to  the  fourth  report  of 
the   United   Nations   Representative,    that  was: 

"The  Government  of  India's  view  is  that  the  Plebiscite 
Administrator  could  proi>erly  function  only  after  (i)  the 
process  of  demilitarization  is  completed  and  the  United 
Nations  Representative  is  satisfied  that  peaceful  condi- 
tions have  been  restored  and  (ii)  the  local  authorities  are 
recognized  and  are  functioning  on  the  Pakistan  side  of 
the  cease-fire  line  under  the  surveillance  of  the  United 
Nations  Representative.  In  the  interests  of  agreement, 
however,  the  Government  of  India  would  be  prepared  to 
agree  to  his  induction  on  the  last  day  of  the  period  of 
demilitarization  provided  that  it  was  completed  according 
to  plan  and  was  exhaustive  so  that  the  Plebiscite  Adminis- 
trator would,  as  regarded  the  forces  remaining  in  the 
State  after  demilitarization  was  fully  implemented,  be 
concerned  only  with  their  disposition." 

(6)  In  regard  to  paragraph  11  the  Government  of 
India  made  clear  that  it  always  had  understood  the  term 
■'disposal"  in  paragraph  4  (a)  of  the  Uncip  resolution  of 
5  January  1949  to  mean  "disposition"  and  not  reduction 
or  withdrawal. 

Pakistan 

(1)  Paragraph  7  of  the  proposals  contravened  the  Se- 
curity Council's  resolution  of  23  December  19.52. 

(2)  In  the  debate  that  preceded  the  adoption  by  the 
Security  Council  of  its  resolution  of  23  December  1952 

697 


the  members  of  the  Council  were  at  pains  to  affirm  and 
explain  that  the  bracket  of  tigures  of  troops  proiK.sed  in 
the  Anglo-US  draft  resolution  on  Kashmir  had  been  ar- 
rived at  after  taking  into  account  the  military  needs  of 
both  the  Indian  occupied  areas  of  the  State  "and  \zad 
Kashmir.  No  reasons  had  been  advanced  by  the  United 
Nations  Kepresentative  to  justify  any  change.  Tlie  figures 
of  troops  for  tlie  Indian  side  of  the  cease-fire  line  have 
been  arbitrarily  raised,  without  any  justification,  to  21,000. 
The  Pakistan  delegation  was  convinced  that  if  21000 
Indian  and  State  Armed  forces  were  allowed  to  reiiiain 
on  the  Indian  side  of  the  cease-fire  line  as  against  only 
(.,000  Azad  Kashmir  forces,  the  security  of  the  Azad  Kash- 
mir area  would  be  put  in  serious  jeopardy. 

C-i)  The  figures  now  suggested  by  the  United  Nations 
Representative  would  destroy  the  safeguard  contained  in 
paragraph  (8)  of  the  twelve  proposals  (and  alreadv  ac- 
cepted by  both  sides)  that  "the  demilitarization  .shall  be 
earned  out  in  such  a  way  as  to  Involve  no  threat  to  the 
cease-fire  agi-eement  either  during  or  after  the  period" 
of  demilitarization. 

(4)  The  figures  now  proposed  have  avowedly  no  other 
object  than  to  meet  India's  wishes  with  regard  to  the 
number  of  forces  to  be  retained  on  its  side  of  the  cease-fire 
line.  This  fails  to  take  into  account  the  corresponding 
needs  of  .security  on  the  Azad  Ka.shmir  side  of  the  cease- 
fire line.  This  process  of  continuous  yielding  ground  in 
face  of  Indian  intransigeance  amounts"  in  effect  to  an  en- 
dorsement and  abetment  of  the  Indian  attitude  It  was  a 
clear  indication  to  India  that  its  sustained  attitude  of  in- 
transigeance would  ultimately  procure  the  formulation 
of  a  Truce  Agreement  on  its  own  terms. 

After  thorough  consideration  of  these  communications 
and  further  conversations  with  the  representatives  of 
India  and  Paki.stan,  the  United  Nations  Representative 
felt  that  there  was  no  ground  left  at  that  stage  on  which 
to  continue  the  Conference  and  therefore,  in  agreement 
with  the  two  representatives,  he  decided  to  conclude  it 


The  Value  of  an  Agreement 

A.  Values  to  the  People  of  the  State 

The  people  of  the  State  of  Jamniu  and  Kashmir  have 
waited  over  four  years  for  the  fulfilment  of  the  promise 
of  a  plebiscite  under  the  two  agreed  Uncip  resolutions 
The  people  in  the  East  and  the  West  look  for  an  example 
from  the  top  of  the  subcontinent  in  Jammu  and  Kashmir 
that  an  agreement  for  a  plebiscite  will  soon  be  fulfilled 
for  and  by  the  people  of  this  most  ancient,  beautiful  and 
historic  .state.  Renewed  physical  and  spiritual  energies 
would  be  released  by  an  agreed  settlement  of  this  dispute 

The  meaning  of  this  new  freedom  would  shine  across 
the  earth  from  the  top-most  roof  of  the  world,  brightenin-- 
the  lives  of  the  people  in  the  hills  and  valleys,  fields  and 
forests,  the  homes  and  schools,  mosques  and  temples  the 
shops  and  workplaces,  beckoning  near  and  far  to  all'neo 
pie  struggling  to  be  free. 

B.  Values  to  the  People  of  the  Two  Nations 

An  agreement  would  have  many  positive  values  to  India 
and  Pakistan: 

(1)  The  two  Governments,  without  prejudice  to  their 
conceptions  and  claims,  would  by  the  reconciliation  of 
their  long  maintained  differences  over  Kashmir  take  a 
decisive  and  co-operative  step  forward,  rather  than  con- 
tinuing to  the  point  of  possible  catastrophe,  a  disagree- 
ment oyer  the  ways  for  the  carrying  out  of  these  four- 
year-old  agreements  which  provide  for  the  determination 
by  the  people  of  Jammu  and  Kashmir  of  their  relation 
to  India  and  Pakistan. 

(2)  The  dispute  over  Kashmir  would  be  settled  bv  a 
constructive  peace  and  not  by  force  of  arms  or  the  attri- 
tion of  years,  with  their  attendant  international  bitterness 
and  their  running  sores  drawing  off  the  higher  interests 
and  energies  of  two  peoples.  loLeresis 

698 


(3)  Settlement  of  the  Ka.shmir  dispute  might  contriljutei 
to  the  settlement  of  the  disputes  over  evacuee  property  i 
and  waterways,  with  all  the  meaning  of  these  steps  to 
the  morale,  and  the  productive  programmes  of  these  his  ' 
tone  peoples,  most  ancient  on  the  earth,  yet  youngest  in 
the  hopes  and  dreams  of  their  new  liberation,  and  most' 
resolute  in  the  faith  and  courage  of  their  dedicated  I 
leadership.  ' 

C.  Values  to  the  People  of  the  World 

The  universal  yearning  of  the  people  for  peace  is  today 
confronted  with  the  high  potentials  of  the  world  for  war 
The  peoples  of  the  sub-continent  have  an  unprecedented 
opportunity  for  lu-oviding  the  leadership,  setting  the  ex- 
ample and  mayhap  turning  the  direction  of  human  affairs 
away  from  the  tendencies  to  self-destruction,  to  the  ways 
of  self-determination,  peace  and  co-operation  The  .settie- 
^?L'a,l^  Kashmir  di.spute,  with  its  implications  for  the 
400,000,000  people  of  the  sub-continent,  might  set  in  motion 
the  beginnings  of  a  counter  chain  reaction  of  peace  nro- 
duction  and  hope.  The  warmth  of  human  brotherhood 
may  yet  melt  away  the  hard  divisions  between  the  peoples 
in  their  hopes  for  freedom  and  peace  in  the  world 

Instead  of  the  United  Nations  Representative  continuing 
to  report  differences  to  the  Security  Council,  may  the 
leadership  of  over  400,000,000  people,  with  the  good  will 
and  assistance  of  the  United  Nations,  join  in  negotiating 
and  reporting  an  agreement  on  Kashmir  and  therebv 
light  a  torch  along  the  diflicult  path  of  the  people's  pil- 
gnmage  toward  peace. 

Out  of  the  East,  the  cradle  of  civilizations  and  the  home 
of  great  spmtual  faiths,  would  come  again  the  example 
to  the  nations  and  the  call  to  all  peoples  for  demilitariza- 
tion, self-determination,  and  co-operation  in  great  pro- 
grammes fo^-  education,  health,  production,  ancl  peace  on 


National  Security  Interests 
In  St.  Lawrence  Seaway 

White  House  press  release  dated  April  24 

President  Eisenhower  on  April  2i  sent  the  fol- 
lowmg  letters  to  Senator  Alexander  Wiley,  Chair- 
nmn.  Senate  Committee  on  Foreign  Relations,  and 
Ihomas  C.  Buchanan,  Chairman,  Federal  Pover 
Commission: 

Dear  Senator  Wiley  : 

At  my  request,  the  National  Security  Council 
has  considered  the  national  security  interests  in  the 
Samt^  La\yrence-Great  Lakes  Seaway  Project. 
l\\%  Council  has  advised  me  : 

1.  Early  initiation  and  completion  of  tlie  Saint 
Lawrence-Great  Lakes  Seaway  is  in  the  interest 
or  national  security. 

2.  The  TTnited  States  should  promptly  take 
whatever  action  may  be  appropriate  to  clear  the 
way  for  commencement  of  the  project,  whether  by 
Canada  alone,  or,  now  or  as  niav  be  later  devel- 
oped, by  Canada  and  the  United  States  jointly. 

3.  It  IS  desirable  that  the  ITnited  States  partici- 
pate in  the  construction  of  the  Seaway;  the  extent 
of  and  limitations  upon  such  participation  to  be 
the  subject  of  separate  determination  by  authority 
otlier  than  the  Council. 

The  Council's  findings  and  recommendations 
Deporfmenf  of  S/o/e  Bulletin 


iliave  my  approval ;  and  I  propose  now  to  discuss 
iwith  the  Cabinet  tlie  extent  of  and  limitations 
'upon  United  States  participation  in  the  project. 
I  I  am  forwarding  a  copy  of  this  letter  to  the 
I  Chairman  of  the  Federal  Power  Commission  for 
J  his  information  and  such  action  as  he  may  deem 
appropriate. 

Dear  Mr.  Buchanan  : 

Enclosed  for  your  information  and  such  action 
I  as  you  may  deem  appropriate  is  a  copy  of  a  letter 
iwh'ich  I  have  sent  today  to  Senator  Alexander 
I  Wiley,  Chairman,  Committee  on  Foreigcl^  Rela- 
itions.  United  States  Senate.  The  letter  contains 
I  a  statement  of  the  views  and  recommendations  ot 
ithe  National  Security  Council  on  the  Saint  Law- 
'  rence-Great  Lakes  Seaway  Project. 

Current  Legislation  on  Foreign  Policy 

Chancellor  Konrad  Adenauer.  Hearing  Before  the  Com- 
mittee on  Foreign  Relations,  U.S.  Senate,  83d  Cong., 
1st  'iess  informal  meeting  of  the  Committee  with 
Chancelior  Konrad  Adenauer  of  the  Federal  KepubUc 
of  Germany.     April  9,  19.53.     8  pp.  ^  .,   , 

Foreign  Poliev  Address  of  the  President  of  the  United 
States  delivered  before  the  American  Society  ot 
Newspaper  Editors,  April  16,  1953.  S.  Doc.  39,  83d 
Cong..  1st  sess.     6  pp. 

Agreements  Relating  to  the  Status  of  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty  Organization,  Armed  Forces,  and  Military 
Headquarters.  Hearings  Before  the  Committee  on 
Foreign  Relations,  U.S.  Senate,  S3d  Cong.,  1st  sess., 
on  Status  of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization, 
Armed  Forces,  and  Military  Headquarters.  April  7 
and  8,  1953.     117  pp. 

Eighth  Report  Concerning  the  Yugoslav  Emergency  Relief 
Assistance  Program.  Letter  From  Secretary  of  State 
Tran.smitting  tlie  Eighth  Report  Concerning  the  Yugo- 
slav Emergency  Relief  Assistance  Program,  covering 
the  period  September  16,  19.52,  through  December  15, 
1952,  pursuant  to  Section  6  of  Public  Law  897,  81st 
Cong  (The  Yugoslav  Emergency  Relief  Assistance 
Act  of  19.50).    H.  Doc.  128,  83d  Cong.,  1st  sess.    2  pp. 


THE  DEPARTMENT 


Resignation 

Reed  Harris  as  Deputy  Administrator  of  International 
Information  Administration,  effective  April  24,  19.53. 

Curtailment  of  IIA  Staff 

Press  release  209  dated  Apjil  22 

Robert  L.  Johnson,  Administrator  of  the  International 
Information  Administration  (Iia),  said  on  April  -- 
that  approximately  830  people  both  here  and  abroad 
will  be  dropped  from  the  payroll  of  the  overseas  informa- 
tion and  educational  exchange  program,  and  around  100 
unfilled  positions  will  be  abolished.  Mr.  Johnson  said  he 
was  taking  this  action  to  comply  with  the  economy  direc- 
tive issued  bv  the  Bureau  of  the  Budget. 

Of  the  total  number  of  Iia  employees  to  receive  termi- 

May    ^^,    1953 


nation  notices,  approximately  60  hold  positions  in  Wash- 
ington, 399  are  working  in  the  Voice  of  America  and 
supporting  .'.•ervices  in  New  York,  and  the  others,  which 
include  local  nationals,  are  employed  by  press,  motion 
pictures,  Usis  Libraries,  and  the  exchange-of-persons 
program  located  in  Europe,  the  Near  East,  the  Far  East, 
and  Latin  America. 

Because  of  this  economy  move,  the  Iia  Administrator 
said,  the  Voice  of  America  will  reduce  the  number  of 
broadcasts  to  the  free  world  by  eliminating  the  following 
language  broadcasts:  French,  Portuguese,  Spanish  to 
Latin  America,  Hebrew,  JIalayan,  and  Thai.  In  addition, 
the  English  broadcast  service  will  be  reduced  from  a 
worldwide  total  of  5  hours  and  45  minutes  daily  to  30 
minutes  a  day. 

Broadcasts  to  the  Iron  Curtain  countries  will  be  main- 
tained and  relay  facilities  now  nearing  completion  over- 
seas will  strengthen  the  signal  in  certain  critical  areas. 
The  number  of  language  broadcasts'  originating  from 
the  Munich  Program  Center,  which  now  include  Russian, 
Polish,  Lithuanian,  Estonian,  Bulgarian,  and  Hungarian, 
will  be  increased. 

In  Latin  America  as  well  as  Portugal,  France,  and 
Israel,  local  broadcasting  stations  will  continue  to  re- 
ceive some  VoA  features  and  commentaries  by  means  of 
discs,  tapes,  and  scripts. 

Since  program  services  to  the  free  world  will  be  reduced, 
the  bimonthly  world  program  schedule,  with  a  million  and 
a  half  circulation,  which  has  been  puMished  in  English 
and  10  other  languages,  will  be  discontinued. 

This  move,  according  to  Mr.  Johnson,  is  a  contraction  to 
establish  the  essentials  of  a  revitalized,  flexible,  and  hard- 
hitting program  designed  to  achieve  maximum  effec- 
tiveness. 


Check  List  of  Department  of  State 
Press  Releases:  Apr.  27-IVIay  2, 1953 

Releases  may  be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  the 
Special  Assistant  for  Press  Relations,  Department 
of  State,  Washington  25,  D.  C. 

Press  releases  issued  prior  to  Apr.  27  which  appear 
in  this  issue  of  the  Bttlletin  are  Nos.  204  of  Apr.  20, 
209  of  Apr.  22,  and  213  of  Apr.  25. 

Date  Subject 

4/27  Smith :  Chamber  of  Commerce 

4/27  CoUigan  :  U.S.  and  the  foreign  student 

4/27  Taft:  Irish-American  relations 

4/27  U.S.  properties  in  China 

4/27  Signatories  of  wheat  agreement 

4/27  Reed  Mission  to  Pakistan 

4/28  Dulles:  Japanese  treaty  anniversary 

4/28  Murphy :  Assignment  to  Uxc 

4/2S  Further  wheat  agreement  signatories 

4/29  New  Foreign  Relations  volume 

4/29  Tax  negotiations  with  Australia 

4/29  Dulles :  Results  of  Nato  meeting 

5/1  Administrative  Council  (Itu) 

.5/1  Dulles  :  Polish  constitution 

5/1  Vice  Admiral  Wright  visits  Jordan 

5/1  Dulles :  Trip  to  Near  East 

5/1  Return  of  German  art  libraries 

5/1  Cotton  Advisory  Committee 

5/1  Hutchinson  :  IPS  administrator 

5/4  Dulles :  Extension  of  trade  agreements 

5/4  Leddy  :  Senate  investigations  comm. 

5/4  Letter  of  credence  :  Rumania 

5/4  Letter  of  credence:  Egypt 

5/4  Letter  of  credence :  Lebanon 

5/2  Dulles :  Statement  on  Laos 


No. 
t214 
*215 
*216 
t217 
t218 
t219 
t220 
221 
t222 
t223 
t224 
225 
t226 
t227 
*228 
*229 

tasb 

t231 
*2.32 
t233 
t234 
t235 
t236 
t237 
238 


*Not  printed. 

tHeld  for  a  later  issue  of  the  Bitlletin. 


699 


May  11,  1953 


Index 


Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  724 


American  Principles 

Foreign  Service  as  an  arm  of  U.S.  policy  (Luce)  .       679 
Practicalities  of   power   (Smith) 675 

American  Republics 

HAITI:   Guaranty    Issued    for    private    Invest- 
ment   682 

Asia 

JAMMU    and    KASHMIR:     Demilitarization    of 

(Graham) 694 

JAPAN: 

Ambassador   Murphy    to    assist    In    armistice 

negotiations 689 

Export-Import   Banlc   credit    to   help    finance 

imports  of  U.S.  raw  cotton 681 

KOREA : 
Documents  on  armistice  negotiations  ....       686 
Reports  of  U.N.   Command  operations   (57th, 

58th.  and  59th,  excerpts) 690 

LAOS:  U.S.  to  assist  victims  of  Viet  Minh  ag- 
gression   678 

Canada 

National  security  Interests  in  St.  Lawrence  Sea- 
way      698 

Communism 

Practicalities  of  power  (Smith) 675 

Congress 

Current  legislation  on  foreign  policy 699 

National  security  Interests  In  St.  Lawrence  Sea- 
way      698 

Europe 

ITALY:   The  Foreign  Service  as  an  arm  of  U.S. 

policy    (Luce) 679 

SPAIN:   Credit  to  Spanish  banks  for  Import  of 

U.S.  cotton 681 

U.S.S.R. :   Soviet  reaction  to  President's  speech  .       678 

Finance 

Export-Import  Bank  credits  to  Spain  and  Japan  .       681 
World  economic  situation  (Wadsworth)     .     .     .       683 

Foreign  Service 

The   Foreign  Service   as  an   arm  of  U.S.   policy 

(Luce) 679 

Industry 

The  world  economic  situation  (Wadsworth)  .     .       683 

International  Information 

Curtailment  of  Iia  staff 699 


International  Meetings 

Termination  of  Sulphur  Committee 689 

Mutual  Security 

Guaranty  Issued  for  private  Investment  in  Haiti  .       682 
Results  of  North  Atlantic  Council's  11th  meet- 
ing,     text     of     communique,      President's 
message,   text  of  resolution 671 

North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization 

Results  of  North  Atlantic  Council's  llth  meet- 
ing, text  of  communique.  President's 
message,   text  of  resolution 671 

Presidential  Documents 

National  security  interests  in  St.  Lawrence  Sea- 
way      698 

Prisoners  of  War 

Documents  on  Korean  armistice  negotiations     .       686 
State,  Department  of 

Ambassador  Murphy  to  assist  In  armistice  ne- 
gotiations     689 

Curtailment   of  Iia  staff 699 

Resignation    (Harris) 699 

Strategic  Materials 

Termination  of  Sulphur  Committee 689 

Technical  Cooperation  and  Development 

Role  of  private  organizations  in  technical  as- 
sistance programs 681 

United  Nations 

Current  U.N.  documents:  a  selected  bibliog- 
raphy       689 

Demilitarization      of      Jammu      and     Kashmir 

(Graham) 694 

Documents  on  Korean  armistice  negotiations     .       686 

Reports  of  U.N.  Command  operations  in  Korea 

(57th,  58th,  and  59th,  excerpts)      ....       690 

World  economic  situation   (Wadsworth)     .     .     .       683 

Name  Index 

Dulles,  Secretary 671,  678,  681 

Elsenhower,  President 673,  678,  698 

Graham,  Frank  P 694 

Hagerty,   James 678 

Harris,    Reed      .  699 

Johnson,  Robert  L 699 

Luce,  Clare  Boothe 679 

Murphy,  Robert  D 689 

Smith,  Walter   Bedell 675 

Stassen,  Harold  E 682 

Wadsworth.  James  J 683 


V.   S.   GOVERNMENT  PRINTING    OFFICE:  1953 


tJAe/  ^efia/i^wieni/  /(w  tnaie^ 


.  XXVIII,  No.  725 
May  18,  1953 


A    NEW    LOOK    AT    OUR    FOREIGN    POLICY  •   by 

Under    Secretary    Smith 703 


EUROPE  STRIVES  FOR  UNITY   •   by  Henry  B.Cox     .     .     710 


REGISTERING    PUBLIC    OPINION    •    by   H.   Schuyler 

Foster 712 


THE  WORKING  PARTY  OF  THE  INTERNATIONAL 

TIN  STUDY  GROUP  •  Article  by  Clarence  W.  Nichob    .     724 


For  index  see  back  cover 


Boston  Public  Liirary 
Superintendent  of  Documents 

JUN  1-1953 


%/Ae  ~!l)eh€t/yl^€^  ^^  t/ta^    Y^  W  X  ±  \J  L 1 JL  ± 


Vol.  XXVIII.  No.  725  •  Publication  5057 
May  18,  1953 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  DocunieiUs 

U.S.  Government  Printing  Ollice 

Washington  25,  I)  C. 

Price. 

62  issues,  domestic  $7.50,  foreign  $10.';5 

Single  copy,  20  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has 
been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Budget  (January  22,  1952). 

Note:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrichted  and  items  contained  herein  iri.y 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  Departmk.vt 
OF  State  Bulletin  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  BVLLETIIS, 
a  tceekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publications, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  with  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  trork  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETIN  includes 
selected  press  releases  on  foreign  pol- 
icy issued  by  the  White  House  and 
the  Department,  and  statements  and 
addresses  made  by  the  President  and 
by  the  Secretary  of  State  and  other 
officers  of  the  Department,  as  well  as 
special  articles  on  imrioiis  phases  of 
international  affairs  and  the  func- 
tions of  the  Department.  Informa- 
tion is  included  concerning  treaties 
and  international  agreements  to 
which  the  United  States  is  or  may 
become  a  party  and  treaties  of  gen- 
eral international  interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
well  as  Iciiislatire  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


A  New  Look  at  Our  Foreign  Policy 


hy  Under  Secretary  Smith  ^ 


The  administration  in  Washington  realizes  that 
our  international  policies  must  reflect  the  attitudes 
and  interests  of  the  American  people  themselves, 
and  if  they  are  to  be  successful,  must  have  public 
support.  If  they  are  to  have  this  support,  it  is 
essential  that  the  American  people  be  currently 
advised  on  policy  developments.  This  is  one  rea- 
son why  we  attach  so  much  importance  to  the 
work  of  your  World  Affairs  Council  and  to  gather- 
ings like  this  in  wliich  our  fox'eign  policies  are 
discussed.  You  are  key  representatives  from 
various  groups  in  this  great  community.  You  will 
carry  back  to  many  others  the  substance  of  the 
discussions  here.  Similarly,  those  of  us  who  are 
your  spokesmen  and  servants  can  carry  back  with 
us  a  firsthand  impression  of  your  thinking  about 
our  policies  and  about  what  they  should  be.  By 
thus  working  together  we  can  better  serve  the 
interests  of  our  nation. 

You  are  fortunate  to  have  Mr.  Sevareid  -  with 
you  this  morning  and  to  have  the  benefit  of  his 
experienced  analysis  of  the  international  picture. 
You  are  fortunate  also  to  have  the  benefit  of  Sena- 
tor Duff's^  broad  and  mature  judgment;  he  not 
only  looks  at  State  Department  policies  from  the 
standpoint  of  the  national  good  and  the  welfare 
of  the  people,  but  also  he  can  interpi-et  those  pol- 
icies especially  well  for  the  people  of  his  own 
State. 

In  the  short  time  available  this  morning,  I  can 
touch  only  on  a  few  of  the  major  aspects  of  our 
foreign  policy,  but  I  will  attempt  to  give  you  at 
least  the  outline  of  the  new  administration's  look 
at  some  of  our  international  problems. 

Before  doing  so  I  want  to  emphasize  the  strong 
support  which  our  Government  gives  to  the  United 
Nations.  I  can  best  state  our  goal  for  the  United 
Nations  in  the  words  of  President  Eisenhower. 
He  said,  "We  shall  strive  to  make  it  not  merely  an 
eloquent  symbol  but  an  effective  force." 

'  Address   made  before  the  World  Affairs  Council   at 
Philadelphia  on  May  8  (press  release  249). 
^  Erie  Sevareid,  radio  commentator. 
'  Senator  James  H.  Duff  of  Pennsylvania. 


We  are  actively  working  toward  that  goal.  I 
believe  that  the  closing  weeks  of  the  General  As- 
sembly session  which  ended  just  a  few  days  ago 
demonstrate  some  of  that  effectiveness. 

It  is  within  the  framework  of  the  United  Na- 
tions that  we  are  working  with  other  free  nations 
in  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization 
(Nato).  The  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organiza- 
tion is  a  regional  arrangement  to  protect  its  mem- 
bers from  the  threat  of  aggression. 

Member  nations  of  Nato  represent  an  important 
area  in  our  overall  foreign  policy.  They  consti- 
tute the  strongest  segment  in  the  fighting  power 
of  the  free  world.  Not  only  in  a  military  sense 
but  also  economically  and  industrially  they  con- 
tribute great  strength. 

Aside  from  their  role  in  self-defense,  some  Nato 
nations  are  playing  active  and  vital  roles  in  the 
defense  of  other  free  areas  of  the  world.  Consider 
the  heavy  burden  that  France  is  carrying  in  Indo- 
china and  what  Britain  is  doing  in  Malaya. 

We  can  Justly  call  Nato  a  successful  alliance. 
President  Eisenhower  was  one  of  the  guiding 
spirits  in  building  this  organization.  It  has  ac- 
complished much  in  a  comparatively  short  time. 
It  has  produced  a  sizable  degree  of  fighting 
strength,  and  its  united  efforts  have  notably  in- 
creased the  morale  of  the  peoples  of  Europe. 

A  New  Approach  to  the  NATO  Alliance 

All  of  you  here  are  familiar  with  the  broad  con- 
cepts stated  by  the  President  at  his  press  confer- 
ence last  week  [April  30].  He  brought  the  mili- 
tary and  economic  factors  into  focus  with  a  view 
to  creating  "a  situation  of  maximum  military 
strength  within  economic  capacities." 

In  constructing  the  free  world's  defenses,  we 
must  break  neither  our  own  back  nor  the  backs  of 
our  allies  by  overloading  ourselves  to  reach  a  peak 
goal  by  a  given  date.  It  is  much  wiser  to  build 
steadily  at  a  pace  our  respective  economies  can 
bear  over  a  period  of  years.    The  Nato  nations 


Moy   18,   T953 


703 


at  their  recent  meeting  agreed  in  principle  to  a 
looff-rangw  pro<i;ran)  of  increasing  strength.'' 

It  is  imperative  that  we  keep  defense  efforts  of 
the  free  world  balanced  pi'operly  with  economic 
capabilities.  Without  economic  vitality,  military 
defense  becomes  impossible. 

At  the  same  time,  I  want  to  make  it  very  clear 
that  this  new  approach  is  not  a  leveling  off  of  the 
defense  progi-am  but  a  continued  buildup  on  a 
longer,  steadier,  and  less  costly  but  more  efficient 
basis.  Actually,  it  represents  more  security  for 
less  money.  Enqjliasis  will  be  placed  on  quality 
rather  than  on  quantity  in  Nato  forces.  One  first- 
class,  battleworthy  division,  you  can  readily  un- 
derstand, is  better  than  two  or  three  with  low 
battle  efficiency.  We  are  less  interested  in  numbers 
than  in  true  combat  effectiveness. 

Along  with  the  improved  quality  of  existing 
divisions  will  come  the  addition  of  new  divisions 
both  this  year  and  next.  This  is  not  a  backward 
movement.  It  is  an  adjustment  of  defense  plans 
to  economic  capabilities.  We  estimate,  in  fact, 
that  there  probably  will  be  an  increase  of  about 
30  percent  in  the  military  strength  of  the  Nato 
countries  in  1953. 

The  free  European  nations  have  undertaken  to 
develop  a  greater  unity  and  strength  through  the 
establishment  of  a  European  Defense  Community 
(Edc).  Tliis  plan,  which  they  initiated  them- 
selves, would  give  Western  Germany  a  place  in 
the  defense  of  Germany  and  Western  Europe.  It 
was  designed  to  combine  the  military  forces  of  six 
countries  into  an  effective  organization.  German 
forces  would  serve  not  as  a  separate  German  na- 
tional army,  but  as  an  integrated  component  of 
the  armed  strength  of  the  European  Defense 
Community. 

The  European  Governments  concerned  are 
aware  of  the  importance  of  Edc  to  their  own  de- 
fenses. But  until  the  President  sent  Secretary 
Dulles  and  Governor  Stassen  to  Europe  recently 
the  project  was  lagging.  Interest  has  now  been 
revived  and  at  the  recent  Nato  Council  meeting 
the  members  unanimously  called  for  prompt  ac- 
tion. We  are,  of  course,  anxious  for  an  effective 
response  to  this  call. 

The  problem  is  up  to  the  European  parliaments. 
Cabinets  favor  Edc  and  are  pushing  for  it  in  good 
faith.  But  the  parliamentary  or  rather  the  politi- 
cal difficulties  are  great.  Acceptance  of  the  treaty 
means  giving  up  control  of  national  armies  to 
Edc — giving  up  a  degree  of  national  sovereignty. 
We  can  appreciate  the  difficulty  if  we  ask  our- 
selves whether  tlie  United  States  would  be  willing 
to  give  up  a  major  part  of  the  control  of  its  armed 
forces. 

There  are  historic  differences  between  the  peo- 
ples of  this  vast  area.  If  you  will  remember  the 
difficulties  of  the  American  Colonies  after  the  Rev- 


'  For  information  relative  to  this  meeting,  see  Buixetin 
of  May  11, 1953,  p.  673. 

704 


olutionary  War,  in  getting  agreement  on  our 
present  Constitution,  you  will  have  some  idea  of 
the  problems  in  Europe  where  nations  have  a  much 
more  diverse  background  and  infinitely  greater 
prejudices  to  overcome. 

There  are  also  a  number  of  very  complex  legal 
and  budgetary  problems  which  arise  with  the  crea- 
tion of  an  integi-ated  defense  force.  These  are 
purely  practical  and  have  nothing  to  do  with 
national  traditions  or  prejudices.  However,  the 
need  for  Edc  is  so  great  that  all  those  concerned 
with  the  security  of  Europe  hope  for  favorable 
parliamentary  action  at  the  earliest  possible  date. 

In  the  meantime,  there  is  continual  effort  by  the 
European  nations  to  work  out  their  defense  prob- 
lems. At  the  recent  Nato  Council  session  agi-ee- 
ment  was  reached  on  a  3-year  program  for  develop- 
ing networks  of  facilities  in  the  different  countries, 
which  will  be  needed  by  the  added  Nato  forces. 
This  agreement  involves  such  important  installa- 
tions as  airfields  and  supply  depots,  pipelines,  and 
radio  communication.  It  will  increase  efficiency 
and  make  the  combined  foi'ces  more  effective. 

Nato  stands  today  as  one  of  the  most  important 
barriers  to  Communist  expansion  and  one  of  the 
most  important  instruments  for  world  peace.  The 
Mutual  Security  Program,  which  has  just  been 
presented  to  Congi'ess,  demonstrates  America's 
continued  interest  in  maintaining  and  strengthen- 
ing the  North  Atlantic  alliance. 

The  need  for  strengthening  its  defenses  was 
forcibly  brought  home  to  the  free  world  by  the 
Communist  aggression  in  Korea.  It  then  became 
very  clear,  if  proof  were  needed,  that  the  Com- 
munists would  resort  to  armed  force  in  their  drive 
toward  world  domination. 


New  Emphasis  on  the  Far  Eastern  Area 

President  Eisenhower  has  placed  new  emphasis 
on  the  whole  Far  Eastern  area.  Prior  to  his  in- 
auguration, he  visted  Korea  to  become  familiar 
with  the  situation  there  at  first  hand.  He  has 
continued  to  focus  attention  on  that  area  in  his 
efforts  to  bring  about  peace  in  the  world. 

In  Korea  we  have  been  striving  to  obtain  an 
honorable  armistice  which  could  stop  the  fighting, 
permit  repairing  the  ravages  of  war,  and  allow 
discussion  of  a  peaceful  settlement. 

I  am  sure  you  all  appreciate  that  this  issue  con- 
cerning prisoners  of  war  is  not  simply  a  techni- 
cality, but  a  dramatic  focus  of  the  essential  differ- 
ence between  the  Communists  and  free-world 
philosophies  on  the  rights  of  the  individual  man, 
whoever  he  may  be,  and  his  relationship  to  the 
State.  Communist  rulers  view  the  human  being 
as  a  mere  chattel  in  which  the  Communist  State 
has  a  complete  property  right  that  must  be  recog- 
nized. This  is  a  principle  to  which  the  free  world 
cannot  and  will  not  admit. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


In  his  recent  address  on  the  chances  for  peace  ^ 
the  President  referred  to  "an  honorable  armistice 
in  Korea"  as  the  first  great  step  toward  peace.  In 
further  discussing  peace  in  the  Far  East  he  said 
very  pointedly : 

It  should  mean,  no  less  importantly,  an  end  to  the  di- 
rect and  indirect  attacks  upon  the  security  of  Indochina 
and  Jlalaya.  For  any  armistice  in  Korea  that  merely 
released  aggressive  armies  to  attack  elsewhere  would  be 
a  fraud. 

We  seek,  throughout  Asia  as  throughout  the  world,  a 
peace  that  Is  true  and  total. 

To  me,  and  I  think  to  you,  this  means  quite 
clearly  what  it  says,  that  a  truce  in  Korea  which 
simply  gave  the  aggressors  freedom  of  maneuver 
would  be  a  delusion  and  a  sham  truce.  That  is 
why  we  are  especially  concerned  now  with  the 
Communist  attack  on  Laos,  in  Indochina.  It 
seems  to  me  that  Korea  and  Indochina  can  be  re- 
garded as  the  flanks  of  our  defense  against  Com- 
mimist  expansion  in  Asia.  We  are  in  close  contact 
with  the  Governments  of  Laos  and  of  France  and 
are  determined  to  do  all  in  our  means  imder  pres- 
ent circumstances  to  help  them  meet  the  situation. 

We  consider  aggression  not  a  national  or  a  racial 
problem,  but  a  global  problem.  Under  the  United 
Nations  we  join  our  efforts  with  other  countries 
to  prevent  aggression,  as  we  have  done  in  Korea. 

Our  interest  in  the  independence  of  free  coun- 
tries naturally  includes  Japan.  The  progress  that 
Japan  has  made  in  its  first  year  since  the  peace 
treaty  went  into  effect  is  impressive.  We  are  espe- 
cially interested  in  the  future  of  the  Japanese 
economy  and  in  its  role  in  the  economic  develop- 
ment of  the  Far  East,  because,  as  I  said  before, 
economic  stability  is  an  essential  prerequisite  to 
self-defense. 

It  is  unnecessary  for  me  to  enlarge  on  the  rea- 
sons why  the  center  of  the  world's  problems  lies 
in  the  Soviet  Union,  or  to  remind  you  of  the  ra- 
pidity with  which  the  Kremlin  has  expanded  its 
control,  by  overt  or  covert  means,  into  all  parts 
of  the  globe. 

Since  the  death  of  Stalin  the  new  leadership  in 
the  Kremlin  has  shown  some  indication  of  a  change 
in  tone  toward  the  free  world.  This  may  be  due  to 
their  belief  that  the  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Re- 
publics has  overextended  itself  and  needs  time  to 
consolidate  its  expansion.  It  may  be  that  they 
need  time  to  tighten  their  own  grasp  on  their 
absolute  dictatorship.  Almost  certainly  they  are 
reacting  to  the  position  of  strength  which  we  are 
creating  in  the  Nato  area. 

Possibly  some  of  this  reaction  is  in  good  faith. 
But  the  countries  represented  at  the  recent  Nato 
Council  meeting  were  united  in  the  conviction 
that  the  Soviet  peace  offensive  has  not  yet  produced 
anything  to  cause  us  to  relax  our  efforts  toward 
strengthening  our  defenses.  On  the  contrary,  a 
fresh  aggression  is  taking  place  in  Southeast  Asia. 


°  Ihid.,  Apr.  27,  1953,  p.  599. 
May   18,   1953 


Three  weeks  ago  President  Eisenhower  put  the 
issue  of  peace  directly  to  the  new  Soviet  leader- 
ship. He  expressed  the  readiness  of  the  United 
States  to  play  its  part.  He  asked  the  new  leaders 
to  show  their  peaceful  intentions  by  deeds,  to  bring 
their  influence  to  bear  for  genuine  peace  in  Asia, 
for  the  free  choice  by  nations  of  their  own  forms 
of  government,  for  action  on  disarmament 
proposals. 

The  President's  speech  made  such  an  impact  on 
world  opinion  that  the  Soviet  leaders  took  the 
unprecedented  step  of  publishing  his  address  in 
Pravda.  True,  they  spread  across  the  front  page 
a  labored  exposition  of  the  familiar  Moscow  line 
and  relegated  the  speech  to  an  inside  page.  But 
their  defensive  editorial  lacked  the  usual  acid  tone. 

The  reply  made  no  concrete  suggestions  as  to 
how  to  solve  the  issues  set  forth  by  President 
Eisenhower.  On  the  other  hand,  it  did  not  resort 
to  the  usual  vituperative  name-calling.  To  see 
whether  it  actually  means  anything  in  the  direc- 
tion of  peace  we  must  keep  our  eyes  on  develop- 
ments where  events  are  taking  place ;  the  negotia- 
tions at  Panmunjom,  the  Communist  attacks  in 
Indochina,  and  the  disarmament  discussions  in 
the  United  Nations.  We  must  base  our  judgment 
on  actions  toward  the  peaceful  settlement  of  out- 
standing issues. 

The  key  to  the  intentions  of  the  Soviets  lies  in 
their  deecls.  Will  they  sign  an  Austrian  treaty? 
Will  they  release  the  thousands  of  war  prisoners 
they  have  held  since  the  fighting  stopped  in  World 
War  II  ?  Will  they  seek  an  honest  settlement  of 
other  issues  ? 

We  can  rely  on  deeds  alone.  In  no  event  can  we 
afford  to  lower  our  guard  or  to  negotiate  from  a 
weakened  position.  The  Soviet  leaders  respect 
power,  and  they  recognize  no  moral  inhibitions  in 
international  relations. 


Near  Eastern  and  Latin  American  Problems 

Secretary  Dulles  leaves  tomorrow  on  a  trip 
which  will  take  him  to  a  number  of  countries  of 
the  Near  East  and  South  Asia.  This  is  the  first 
time  that  a  Secretary  of  State  has  visited  this  area 
during  his  term  of  office. 

Interest  in  the  area  he  will  visit  is  especially 
keen  because  9  of  the  12  countries  involved  have 
achieved  their  independence  in  the  last  generation. 
These  new  nations  are  struggling  with  internal  and 
external  problems.  We  want  to  see  them  maintain 
their  independence.  We  are  seeking  through  tech- 
nical assistance  and  mutual-security  aid  to  help 
them  better  the  living  standards  of  their  people 
and  to  strengthen  their  economies  and  national 
defenses. 

We  hope  to  pattern  our  future  policies  on  what 
we  learn  on  the  ground  from  the  countries  them- 
selves. We  want  to  make  a  full  re-examination 
and  reappraisal  and  shape  our  actions  in  accord 
with  the  needs  of  these  free  nations.    Mr.  Dulles 

705 


is  making  his  visit  with  no  preconceived  plan  or 
progi'am  for  the  area.  His  object  is  to  learn  their 
problems  from  the  people  themselves. 

We  are  also  giving  close  attention  to  our  rela- 
tions with  our  neiglibors  in  the  Western  Hemi- 
sphere. Our  Mr.  Cabot,  Assistant  Secretary  of 
State  for  Inter-American  Affairs,  has  just  re- 
turned from  Latin  America,  and  in  June  Milton 
Eisenhower,  the  President's  brother,  will  visit  a 
number  of  the  great  Republics  to  the  south. 

Tlie  President  is  anxious,  and  here  I  quote  his 
words, 

that  the  Government  of  the  United  States  take  careful 
stock  of  the  economic  and  social  conditions  now  prevailing 
throughout  our  continent  and  of  all  the  efforts  being 
pressed  to  bring  a  better  life  to  all  our  peoples.  Such 
an  assessment  can  properly  be  made  only  through  direct 
jjersonal  understanding  of  the  facts." 

Upon  his  return  Mr.  Eisenhower  will  report  to 
the  President  and  Secretary  Dulles  on  ways  to 
strengthen  the  bonds  among  the  Republics  of  the 
Western  Hemisphere. 

'Ibid.,  Apr.  20,  1953,  p.  564. 


The  nations  of  Latin  America  and  the  United 
States  have  long  worked  cooperatively  together 
to  achieve  common  purposes.  We  hope  to  work 
togetlier  in  still  greater  strength  in  the  days  which 
lie  ahead. 

This  development  of  facts  at  firsthand  by  rep- 
resentatives of  our  Government  is  important  to 
our  future  policies.  At  least  equally  important 
is  ihe  serious  effort  to  develop  and  understand  the 
spiritual  and  moral  values  involved.  Spiritual 
strength  is  basic  to  our  whole  way  of  life. 

Our  own  spiritual  strength  is  so  deep  and  so 
basic  that  we  sometimes  fail  to  remember  it  is 
there ;  yet  it  is  our  fundamental  beliefs  that  have 
led  us  to  a  great  role  of  leadership  among  nations. 

We  hold  that  leadership  at  a  time  when  power- 
ful and,  I  must  say,  evil  forces  seek  to  dominate 
the  earth.  We  work  with  other  free  nations  to 
restrain  and  drive  back  those  forces.  In  this  task 
the  maintenance  of  our  spiritual  strength  is  vitaL 
Without  it  we  would  be  lost — with  it,  we  can  face 
the  future  with  calm  and  confidence. 


Areas  for  Deeds,  Not  Words 


Remarks  hy  Secretary  Dulles  ' 


Press  release  247  dated  May  7 

You  no  doubt  expect  me  to  say  a  few  words 
about  the  international  situation.  Our  nation's 
position  was  put  forward  on  April  16  by  President 
Eisenhower.  That  speech  had  a  profound  in- 
fluence throughout  the  entire  world.  It  was  so 
newsworthy  that  it  was  printed  in  full  in  the  lead- 
ing newspapers  of  Moscow.  Any  speech  that  can 
thus  put  Soviet  censorship  to  rout  is,  by  that  act 
alone,  a  speech  of  historic  import. 

The  President  ])ut  it  squarely  up  to  the  Soviet 
leaders  to  show  whether  they  were  willing  to  put 
peaceful  deeds  behind  their  peaceful  words.  As 
progress  in  these  matters  strengthens  world  trust, 
then  there  could  come  a  reduction  of  the  arma- 
ments which  everywhere  are  burdening  the  people. 
The  President  specified  certain  areas  for  deeds. 

He  first  specified  Korea.  The  Communist  lead- 
ers used  words  that  indicated  that  they  were  pre- 
pared to  make  possible  an  honorable  armistice. 
Words  are  still  being  exchanged.  But  the  U.N. 
Command  is  not  prepared  indefinitely  to  continue 
bandying  words  about  matters  which  have  already 
been  talked  about  for  nearly  2  years. 

'  Made  before  the  New  York  State  Republican  dinner  at 
New  York  on  May  7. 


We  earnestly  desire  and  seek  an  honorable  peace 
in  Korea.  But  we  shall  not  allow  our  enemies 
there  to  use  peace  talk  as  a  stratagem  for  gaining 
military  advantages  in  their  war  of  aggression. 

The  President  then  specified  Indochina.  Since 
he  spoke,  tliere  has  occurred  a  new  aggression.  The 
peaceful  state  of  Laos  has  been  invaded  by  Com- 
munist forces  from  Vietnam,  many  of  whom  had 
first  been  trained  and  equipped  in  Communist 
China.  These  armed  aggressors  now  also  threaten 
peaceful  Thailand  (Siam).  Thailand  is  one  of 
the  nations  which,  showing  its  faith  in  collective 
security,  has  gallantly  and  substantially  contrib- 
uted to  the  U.N.  effort  in  Korea.  By  performing 
this  act  for  others,  it  has  won  the  right  to  help 
from  others. 

The  third  area  mentioned  bj'  the  President  was 
Austria.  It  is  a  shocking  thing  that  this  small 
nation,  the  first  victim  of  Hitlerite  aggression, 
should  now  for  so  long  have  been  denied  unity  and 
independence.  Red  armies  in  the  Soviet  Zone  ab- 
sorb the  economic  wealth  as  would  a  horde  of  lo- 
custs. For  nearly  7  years  now  the  Western 
Powers  have  been  negotiating  with  the  Soviet 
Union  for  an  Austrian  treaty  of  liberation.  Time 
after  time  it  has  seemed  that  such  a  treaty  was  on 
the    point    of    consummation.     Each    time    the 


706 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Soviet  Government  has  drawn  back.  So  Austria 
remains  an  area  wliere  the  Soviet  leaders,  if  they 
wish,  can  produce  deeds  that  will  be  meaningful. 

Let  no  one  underestimate  our  desire  for  peace 
and  our  willingness  to  contribute  to  an  easing  of 
the  present  tension.  "We  are  not  afraid  of  peace. 
On  the  contrary,  this  administration  is  dedicated 
to  seek  i^eace  and  pursue  it.  President  Eisen- 
hower understands,  better  than  most,  the  horrors 
of  war  and  he  has  demonstrated,  as  have  few,  the 
capacity  to  turn  war  into  victory  and  to  build  on 
the  foundation  of  victory  a  defensive  posture  cal- 
culated to  assure  peace. 

It  is  the  purpose  of  President  Eisenhower  and 
those  who  serve  him  to  develop  policies  so  firm, 
so  just,  so  appealing  to  all  humanity  that  the 
Soviet  leaders  will  elect  to  live  with  these  policies 
rather  than  futilely  to  combat  them. 

That  is  our  great  purpose.  We  must,  however, 
be  constantly  vigilant  lest  we  fall  into  a  trap.  Tlie 
longing  of  our  people  for  peace  is  so  intense  that 
there  is  danger  of  accepting  illusion  for  reality. 
This  danger  is  the  greater  because  Soviet  Com- 
munists have  constantly  taught  and  practiced  the 
art  of  deception,  of  making  concessions  merely  in 
order  to  lure  others  into  a  false  sense  of  security, 
which  makes  them  the  easier  victims  of  ultimate 
aggression. 

You  can  be  confident  that  your  Republican  ad- 
ministration has  goals  which  correspond  to  the 
lofty  idealism  of  the  American  people.  In  pur- 
suit of  these  goals,  we  shall  not  become  weary  or 
grow  faint,  and  also  we  shall  pursue  these  goals  in 
ways  which  are  circumspect  and  which  place  trust 
in  others  only  after  it  has  demonstrably  been 
earned. 

Guided  by  these  principles,  our  administration, 
under  our  great  President,  will  justify  the  leader- 
ship which  last  November  was  demanded  of  it. 


Secretary's  Visit  to  Near  East 
and  SoutKi  Asia 

Background  Information 

Press  release  250  dated  May  8 

Secretary  Dulles  plans  to  leave  by  plane  from 
Washington  on  May  9.  Accompanying  him  on 
the  trip  will  be  Harold  E.  Stassen,  Director  for 
Mutual  Security;  Henry  A.  Byroade,  Assistant 
Secretary  for  Near  Eastern,  South  Asian,  and 
African  Affairs ;  Douglas  MacArthur,  2d,  Coun- 
selor of  the  Department  of  State ;  Robert  E.  Matte- 
son,  Assistant  Director  of  the  Mutual  Security 
Agency  for  Research,  Statistics,  and  Reports; 
Roderic  L.  O'Connor,  Special  Assistant  to  the 
Secretary;  Fred  L.  Hadsel,  Special  Assistant  to 
Mr.  Byroade ;  and  Col.  Stephen  J.  Meade,  military 
aide  and  consultant.  Mrs.  Dulles  and  Mrs.  Stassen 
will  go  with  the  party  as  far  as  Cairo.    They  will 


tlien  (ravel  independently  in  the  Near  East,  re- 
joining the  Secretary's  group  for  the  return  flight 
across  the  Atlantic. 

The  Secretary  will  fly  by  a  special  Air  Force 
Constellation  as  far  as  Cairo  and  Tel  Aviv,  by  car 
and  C-47  in  the  Levant,  and  by  Constellation  again 
for  the  rest  of  the  trip. 

The  party  will  arrive  at  Cairo  on  May  11.  On 
May  13  they  will  fly  to  Tel  Aviv;  on  May  14  they 
will  drive  by  automobile  to  Jerusalem  en  route  to 
Anunan,  wliere  they  will  spend  the  night;  on  May 
15  they  will  fly  to  Damascus;  on  May  16  they  will 
drive  over  the  mountains  to  Beirut ;  on  May  17  they 
will  fly  to  Baghdad;  on  May  18  they  will  fly  to 
Riyadh,  the  capital  of  Saudi  Arabia.  On  the 
afternoon  of  May  19  they  will  stop  briefly  at  the 
oil  center  of  Dhahran  on  the  Persian  Gulf,  and 
that  night  will  fly  to  New  Delhi.  After  2  days 
there,  they  will  go  by  plane  to  Karachi  for  the 
22d  and  23d.  The  night  of  the  24th  will  be  spent 
in  the  plane  en  route  to  Istanbul  where  they  will 
spend  the  25th,  flying  to  Ankara  the  26th.  May 
27  they  will  be  in' Athens  and  May  28  in  Tripoli, 
Libya,  returning  to  Washington  the  afternoon  of 
May  29. 

The  Secretary  and  Mr.  Stassen  regret  that  short- 
ness of  time  and  the  extent  of  the  area  make  neces- 
sary such  relatively  short  stays  in  many  important 
countries  and  even  have  required  the  omission  of 
some  states  from  the  itinerary. 

As  has  been  brought  out  before,  the  purpose  of 
the  trip  is  for  the  Secretary  and  Mr.  Stassen  to 
gain  firsthand  impressions,  to  listen  to  the  views 
of  the  leaders  in  the  area,  and  to  develop  even 
closer  relations  with  the  countries  which  they  will 
visit. 

In  many  cases  the  Secretary  and  Mr.  Stassen 
will  be  guests  of  the  Governments  and  in  all  cases 
they  will  confer  with  the  heads  of  state  prime 
ministers,  foreign  ministers,  and  other  leading 
economic  and  financial  figures. 

Departure  Statement  ' 

Press  release  252  dated  May  9 

Mr.  Stassen  and  I  are  very  glad  to  have  this  op- 
portunity to  visit  many  states  of  the  Near  East 
and  South  Asia.  On  this,  the  first  visit  to  the  area 
by  an  American  Secretary  of  State  while  in  office, 
we  plan  to  stop  in  Egypt,  Israel,  Jordan,  Syria, 
Lebanon,  Iraq,  Saudi  Arabia,  India,  Pakistan, 
Turkey,  Greece,  and  Libya.  We  are  making  the 
trip  at  the  request  of  President  Eisenhower  on 
wliose  behalf  we  shall  express  the  friendship  of 
the  American  people  for  the  Governments  and 
peoples  of  the  countries  we  visit,  and  to  whom  we 
shall  report  observations  and  findings. 

The  period  since  World  War  I,  and  particularly 
the  last  10  years,  has  seen  a  tremendous  change  in 
this  part  of  the  world.  Of  the  12  states  which  we 
shall  be  visiting,  all  but  3  have  obtained  their  in- 

^  Made  at  the  Washington  National  Airport. 


Moy   J8,    J953 


707 


dependence  in  the  last  generation.  Great  progress 
is  being  made  in  such  fields  as  government,  edu- 
cation, economic  development,  and  expansion  of 
local  culture.  But  many  problems  remain  to  be 
solved,  which  are  all  the  more  pressing  because  of 
the  strategic  location  of  these  lands.  Whereas 
many  of  the  problems  are  internal,  others  affect 
all  of  the  states  of  the  area,  and  still  others  affect 
the  freedom  and  security  of  the  entire  free  world. 
As  I  have  already  said,  I  shall  not  bring  with 
me  specific  plans  or  programs,  nor  do  I  intend  to 
ask  the  Governments  I  visit  for  any  decisions.  I 
shall  listen  intently  to  what  I  am  told  and  consider 
the  problems  brought  to  my  attention  with  the 
utmost  interest  and  sympathy.  I  am  pleased  at 
the  thought  that  this  trip  will  give  me  a  chance  to 
renew  old  friendships,  and,  I  am  sure,  make  many 
new  and  lasting  ones.  In  addition,  the  trip  will 
be  an  opportunity  to  dispel  such  misunderstand- 
ings of  the  American  position  as  may  exist,  and 
develop  still  closer  relations  between  the  United 
States  and  the  countries  I  visit  on  my  itinerary. 
Under  these  circumstances,  both  Mr.  Stassen 
and  I  are  looking  forward  to  the  trip  with  keen 
anticipation. 


Developments  in  Laos, 
Thailand,  and  Korea 

Press  Conference  Statement  hy  Secretary  Dulles 

Press  release  253  dated  May  9 

In  view  of  the  recent,  rapid  sequence  of  events 
in  the  Far  East,  I  believe  it  would  be  appropriate 
to  summarize  for  you  our  actions  concerning  de- 
velopments in  Laos  and  Thailand. 

Communist  Viet  Minh  forces  began  their  move- 
ment toward  the  Royal  Capital  City  of  Luang 
Prabang  in  Laos  on  April  12. 

Following  an  appeal  from  the  Government  of 
Laos  on  April  13  to  the  free  world  to  condemn 
the  aggression,  the  United  States  issued  a  state- 
ment of  support  and  sympathy .^ 

The  urgent  need  for  cargo  aircraft  to  aid  French 
and  Lao  forces  in  meeting  this  aggression  was  dis- 
cussed by  me  with  French  officials  during  our  stay 
in  Paris  for  the  recent  Nato  meeting. 

Within  24  hours  it  was  agreed  at  the  highest 
level  that  such  aircraft,  if  available,  should  be 
dispatched  to  Indochina.  Within  another  24  hours 
the  aircraft  were  located  with  the  Far  East  Com- 
mand. Within  another  24  hours  civilian  opera- 
tors were  located  to  fly  the  planes,  because  the 
French  did  not  have  crews  accustomed  to  handle 
these  planes  and  we  did  not  desire  that  our  mili- 
tary personnel  should  fly  into  the  combat  zone. 
The  plan  was  actually  put  into  operation  within 
a  few  hours  after  our  return  from  Paris,  and  the 

'  Bulletin  of  May  4, 1953,  p.  641. 


aircraft  arrived  at  Hanoi  on  May  5  and  were  made 
operational  immediately. 

Three  days  prior  to  the  arrival  of  the  aircraft 
in  Hanoi',  we  announced  on  May  2  ^  that  we  were 
maintaining  close  contact  with  the  Governments 
of  Laos  and  of  France  regarding  the  special  re- 
quirements of  the  situation  and  that  the  Mutual 
Security  Administration  Mission  in  Laos  had 
made  arrangements  to  help  ease  the  refugee  prob- 
lem by  making  available  certain  funds  and  sup- 
plies. 

The  Ambassador  from  Thailand,  Pote  Sarasin, 
canie  to  my  office  at  3 :  30  p.m.  on  Tuesday  of 
this  week.  May  ,5,  to  discuss  the  problems  con- 
fronting his  country  as  a  result  of  the  Viet  Minh 
invasion  of  Laos.^ 

The  Ambassador  expressed  his  country's  urgent 
need  for  small  arms  ammunition  and  for  various 
military  items  urgently  required  by  the  Thai  Navy, 
Army,  and  Air  Force,  which  requests  had  simul- 
taneously been  made  through  the  U.S.  Military 
Assistance  Advisory  Group  and  our  Embassy  at 
Bangkok.  Within  24  hours  of  the  Ambassador's 
request  certain  amounts  of  such  ammunition  were 
in  the  air  on  their  way  to  Bangkok  from  the 
Pacific  area,  and  action  was  taken  to  expedite 
delivery  of  the  other  military  items. 

These  two  instances  illustrate  a  capacity  for 
decision  and  performance  and  of  cooperative  team- 
work between  the  Departments  of  State  and  De- 
fense, which  should,  I  believe,  be  gratifying  to 
the  American  people.  Also,  they  should  be  im- 
pressive to  others,  whether  they  be  friends  or 
aggressors. 


FoUoiinng  his  press  conference,  the  Secretary 
repeated  his  remarks  concerning  Laos  and  Thai- 
land for  the  ienefit  of  radio,  newsreel,  and  tele- 
vision services.  In  addition  to  these  remarks,  he 
made  the  following  statement  {press  release  SS4- 
dated  May  9)  concerning  the  Korean  truce  nego- 
tiations: 

As  I  have  said  many  times,  we  want  peace  in 
Korea  if  it  is  a  peace  with  honor.  Whether  or 
not  the  armistice  terms  will  mean  that  kind  of  a 
peace  is  still  under  discussion  between  the  repre- 
sentatives of  the  two  sides  in  Korea,  under  guid- 
ance, of  course,  as  far  as  we  are  concerned,  from 
Washington.  The  Communists  made  proposals 
day  before  yesterday^  which  we  are  carefully 
studyinjj.  It  is  obvious  that  they  will  require 
elucidation  and  perhaps  modification  before  they 
will  be  acceptable  to  us  as  compatible  with  peace 
with  honor,  but  that  is  a  matter  which  we  are  going 
into  and  which  will  be  developed  in  further  dis- 
cussions which  will  be  taking  place  in  Korea  over 
the  coming  days. 

'  Ihid.,  May  11,  1953,  p.  678. 

'For  information   ccnoerning  the  Ambassador's  visit, 
see  p.  709. 
*P.   727. 


708 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


"Free  Lao  Movement"  Leader 

Press  release  242  dated  May  5 

The  Government  of  Laos  on  May  If.  delivered  a 
jonnal  note  to  the  United  States  which  contains 
errtain  information  pertaining  to  the  -present  sit- 
uation in  Laos.  Following  is  a  condensed  tran.s- 
J<ition  of  the  note: 

The  absence  of  Laotians  among  the  invading 
troops  can  be  verified  by  any  impartial  observer. 

With  reference  to  the  so-called  government 
"free  Lao  State  or  Lao  Fatherland*'  under  Prince 
Souphanouvong,  the  following  should  be  noted: 

(1)  Souphanouvong,  who  has  not  lived  in  Laos 
for  20  years,  joined  Lao  Issara  or  the  free  Lao 
movement,  in  1946. 

(2)  He  was  expelled  from  the  movement  on 
May  16, 1949,  because  of  his  Communist  tendencies 
and  total  subservience  to  the  Viet  Minh,  and  spe- 
cifically for  agreeing  to  the  penetration  of  Lao 
territory  by  armed  bands  from  across  the  frontier. 

(3)  The  Lao  Issara  movement,  which  was 
created  in  October  1946,  was  formally  dissolved 
in  October  1949,  after  signature  of  the  Franco- 
Lao  accords,  with  all  members  rallying  to  the 
Royal  Government.  Of  seven  members  of  the 
present  Royal  Government,  four,  including  the 
Prime  Minister,  were  members  of  the  Lao  Issara 
movement. 

(4)  Since  his  expulsion  from  Lao  Issara,  Soup- 
hanouvong has  been  the  personal  vassal  of  the 
Viet  Minh,  who  sent  him  to  Communist  China  to 
receive  indoctrination  for  the  role  destined  for 
him. 

(5)  Souphanouvong,  therefore,  cannot  claim 
association  with  the  "Free  Laos."  Nor  can  he 
claim  any  popular  mandate,  tacit  or  explicit,  to 
represent  the  aspirations  of  the  Lao  people,  to 
whom  he  is  unknown. 

Thailand  Takes  Measures 
To  Maintain  Security 

Press  release  245  dated  May  6 

The  Thai  Ambassador  described  to  Secretary 
Dulles  on  May  5  the  implications  for  his  Govern- 
ment and  the  Thai  Nation  of  the  dangerous  situa- 
tion created  in  neighboring  Laos  by  aggressive 
Viet  Minli  Communist  forces  and  outlined  various 
measures  of  a  military  and  police  nature  which  his 
Government  is  taking  to  maintain  the  security  of 
Thailand's  borders. 


He  indicated  that  the  present  level  of  prepared- 
ness was  due  in  part  to  existing  training  pro- 
grams and  military  assistance  carried  out  by  the 
U.S.  Military  Assistance  Advisory  Group  in 
Thailand  under  existing  agreements  and  in  part 
due  to  the  battle  experience  of  Thai  troops  fight- 
ing with  the  U.N.  forces  in  Korea.  He  further 
stated  that  his  Government  had  listed  specific  mil- 
itary items  which  were  urgently  needed  and  which 
had  already  been  programed  under  current  mili- 
tary aid  plans  and  asked  that,  if  possible,  im- 
mediate delivery  be  made. 

The  Ambassador  was  assured  that  the  Secretary 
was  aware  of  the  threat  to  Thailand  which  the 
Ambassador  had  outlined,  that  he  was  fully  sym- 
pathetic with  the  Thai  Government's  desire  to 
receive  urgently  needed  military  items,  and  that 
prompt  consideration  would  be  given  to  providing 
the  necessary  items  in  the  light  of  availabilities 
and  U.S.  world  commitments.  He  added  that  he 
had  been  most  favorably  impressed  at  reports  he 
had  received  of  the  many  evidences  of  the  deter- 
mination of  the  Thai  Government  and  people  to 
withstand  Communist  aggression. 


Letters  of  Credence 

Egypt 

The  newly  appointed  Ambassador  of  Egypt, 
Ahmed  Hussein,  presented  his  credentials  to  the 
President  on  May  4,  1953.  For  the  text  of  the 
Ambassador's  remarks  and  for  the  text  of  the 
President's  reply,  see  Department  of  State  press 
release  236  of  May  4. 

Leianon 

The  newly  appointed  Ambassador  of  Lebanon, 
Cliarles  Malik,  presented  his  credentials  to  the 
President  on  May  4,  1953.  For  the  text  of  the 
Ambassador's  remarks  and  for  the  text  of  the 
President's  reply,  see  Department  of  State  press 
release  237  of  May  4. 

Rumania 

The  newly  appointed  Ambassador  of  Rumania, 
Marin  Florea  lonescu,  presented  his  credentials 
to  the  President  on  May  4,  1953.  For  the  text  of 
the  Ambassador's  remarks  and  for  the  text  of  the 
President's  reply,  see  Department  of  State  press 
release  235  of  May  4. 


May   18,    J953 


709 


Europe  Strives  for  Unity 


iy  Henry  B.  Cox 

Deputy  Public  Affairs  Adviser,  Bureau  of  European  Affairs  '■ 


The  field  of  international  relations  has  not  had  a 
dull  winter.  Since  I  visited  with  many  of  you  in 
Philadelphia  last  December,  the  world  has  experi- 
enced important  changes  of  leadership  in  two  of 
its  most  powerful  nations.  One  such  change 
would  have  been  enough  to  keep  any  student  of 
international  affairs  on  his  toes,  but  history  was 
not  content  with  one.  Today  the  foreign-policy 
observer  must  scan  the  news  from  Washington  and 
Moscow  with  equal  vigor  and  discernment  if  he 
seeks  to  anticipate  the  trend  of  world  events. 

Those  who  were  watching  news  from  Washing- 
ton in  January — most  of  the  diplomatic  world  was 
doing  little  else — received  an  early  insight  into  the 
temper  of  the  new  administration.  Ten  days  after 
the  inauguration  of  President  Eisenhower,  the 
new  Secretary  of  State,  John  Foster  Dulles,  and 
the  new  chief  of  Mutual  Security,  Harold  E. 
Stassen,  flew  to  Europe  on  a  special  mission  which 
gave  a  clear  indication  of  the  tremendous  impor- 
tance which  this  Government  attaches  to  Euro- 
pean unity.  The  urgency  of  that  trip  to  Europe 
revealed  the  feeling  that  the  drive  for  European 
unity  was  seriously  lagging. 

It  was  just  a  year  ago  this  month  that  France, 
Italy,  the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany,  and  the 
Benelu.x  (Belgium,  the  Netherlands,  and  Luxem- 
bourg) signed  a  treaty  creating  the  European 
Defense  Community,  commonly  referred  to  as  the 
Edc.  When  Secretary  Dulles  and  Mr.  Stassen 
took  office  the  Edc  treaty  had  been  ratified  by  none 
of  the  parliaments  of  the  participating  countries. 
In  both  France  and  Germany  there  were  serious 
psychological  and  political  obstacles  in  the  way 
of  parliamentary  action.  Consideration  of  the 
Edc  treaty  by  the  Italian  parliament  was  being 
held  up  by  the  prolonged  debate  on  a  new  Italian 
electoral  law.    The  Benelux  countries,  for  their 

^Address  made  before  an  interscholastic  high-school 
group  from  the  Philadelphia  area,  under  .sponsorship  of 
the  Philadelphia  World  Affairs  Council,  at  Philadelphia 
on  May  5. 

710 


part,  were  awaiting  the  lead  of  their  colleagues. 

The  Dulles-Stassen  mission  represented  another 
effort  on  the  part  of  the  United  States  to  give 
needed  impetus  and  support  to  the  growing  Euro- 
pean unity  movement.  Coming  as  it  did  at  one 
of  the  most  crucial  stages  in  that  development,  it 
served  to  bolster  the  resolve  of  Europe's  states- 
men to  press  forward  to  their  ancient  goal  of  a 
European  community. 

Europe  is  one  of  the  most  critical  areas  with 
which  we  have  to  deal  in  the  conduct  of  foreign 
relations.  It  is  important  to  us  for  many  reasons. 
Culturally  it  is  the  cradle  of  our  civilization. 
Then,  too,  the  European  members  of  the  North 
Atlantic  Treaty  Organization  with  a  total  popula- 
tion of  roughly  200,000,000  represents  the  greatest 
reservoir  of  skilled  manpower  in  the  world.  In 
the  major  indices  of  industrial  production — coal, 
crude  steel,  and  electric  power — its  output  sub- 
stantially exceeds  that  of  the  Soviet  bloc.  It  is  not 
difficult  to  imagine  what  a  dramatic  change  would 
occur  in  the  balance  of  power  in  the  cold  war 
struggle  should  the  manpower  resources  and  indus- 
trial capacity  of  Western  Europe  become  avail- 
able to  the  Soviet  Union. 

Following  World  War  II  and  even  before  it, 
U.S.  leaders  recognized  that  continued  disunity 
in  Europe  would  constitute  one  of  the  greatest 
hazards  to  the  security  of  the  free  world.    Speak- 
ing before  the  Senate  Foreign  Relations  Commit- 
tee in  1947,  Mr.  Dulles  urged  that  in  granting  | 
Marshall  plan  aid  to  Europe,  "the  basic  idea  should  ! 
be  not  the  rebuilding  of  the  pre-war  Europe  but  j 
the  building  of  a  new  Europe,  which,  more  unified, 
[would]  be  a  better  Europe."    This  idea  was  ac- 
cepted and  has  been  the  underlying  principle  of 
our    entire    economic    and    military    assistance 
program. 

The  concept  of  a  united  Europe  is  an  old  one 
dating  back  to  the  early  history  of  that  continent. 
Throughout  the  19th  century,  European  alliances 
and  conflicts  clearly  demonstrated  the  inability  j 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


of  any  European  nation  to  stand  alone.  Indi- 
viduai  national  security  went  out  with  the  advent 
of  the  industrial  revolution.  At  various  times 
Europe  was  partially  but  only  temporarily  inte- 
grated through  conquest.  But  political  integra- 
tion within  a  democratic  framework  was  never 
achieved. 

Plans  to  unify  Europe  prior  to  World  War  I 
were  completely  fruitless,  since  they  did  not  take 
into  account  the  political  and  economic  prerequi- 
sites for  an  effective  union  and  were  often  devices 
designed  to  benefit  one  nation.  Moreover,  in  many 
instances  they  were  put  forward  by  individuals 
whose  influence  on  their  governments  was  insig- 
nificant. In  addition  to  these  factors  it  is  prob- 
able that  the  Europeans  were  simply  not  ready 
for  such  a  radical  development. 

The  economic  and  social  problems  resulting 
from  the  First  World  War  caused  rnany  enlight- 
ened European  leaders  to  give  serious  thought 
again  to  the  question  of  European  unity.  The  pri- 
mary motivation  was  the  desire  to  avert  further 
wars  and  to  promote  economic  well-being.  But 
again  the  dream  was  not  realized.  Sufficient  im- 
petus was  lacking  to  preserve  a  League  of  Nations, 
much  less  to  create  a  European  political  commu- 
nity. 

But  the  historic  trend  persisted.  Milestones 
came  faster  in  the  wake  of  the  economic,  social, 
and  political  chaos  created  by  World  War  II. 
Even  while  the  war  was  still  in  progress  and  its 
ultimate  outcome  in  doubt,  Europe's  statesmen  re- 
vived the  unity  concept  as  the  only  satisfactory 
and  enduring  solution  to  Europe's  many  problems. 
In  1944  the  Governments-in-exile  of  Belgium,  the 
Netherlands,  and  Luxembourg  signed  a  treaty  pro- 
viding for  collective  defense  and  cooperation  in 
the  economic,  social,  and  cultural  fields.  Thus 
began  the  so-called  European  movement,  sup- 
ported by  such  leaders  as  Spaak,  Churchill,  Sforza, 
and  Bidault. 

The  Benelux  Union  became  a  reality  in  1947 
and  the  first  steps  were  taken  to  remove  the  cus- 
toms barriers  between  the  three  countries.  The 
following  year  British  Foreign  Minister  Ei'nest 
Bevin,  in  a  major  foreign  policy  address  to  the 
House  of  Commons,  called  for  a  consolidation  of 
Western  Europe.  This  initiative  resulted  in  the 
formation  of  the  so-called  Western  Union  when 
France,  the  United  Kingdom,  and  the  Benelux 
countries  signed  the  Brussels  Pact  in  March  1948. 
The  pact  called  for  closer  collaboration  of  the 
five  members  in  economic,  social,  and  cultural 
matters  and  for  collective  self-defense. 

Through  the  Marshall  plan  the  United  States 
made  its  gi-eatest  contribution  to  European  reha- 
bilitation and  indirectly  gave  an  important  assist 
to  European  integration  in  the  economic  field. 
One  month  following  the  signing  of  the  Brussels 
Pact  the  countries  participating  in  the  Marshall 
plan  formed  the  Organization  for  European  Eco- 
nomic Cooperation    (Oeec),  which  has  actively 


promoted  recovery  and  economic  cooperation  since 
its  inception. 

As  cooperation  among  the  European  nations  in- 
creased there  was  popular  and  parliamentary  pres- 
sure for  the  creation  of  an  organization  which 
would  represent  not  only  the  governments,  but 
also  the  peoples  and  parliaments  of  member  coun- 
tries. In  May  1949  the  Council  of  Europe  came 
into  being  in  response  to  this  need. 

Meanwhile,  faced  with  the  growing  threat  of 
Soviet  aggression  the  nations  of  Western  Europe, 
together  with  the  United  States  and  Canada, 
joined  in  the  establishment  of  an  organization 
designed  primarily  to  further  their  collective  se- 
curity. The  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization, 
more  commonly  known  as  Nato,  was  formed  in 
November  1949. 

In  May  1950  European  unity  in  the  economic 
sphere  made  another  significant  advance  when 
French  Foreign  Minister  Robert  Schuman  made  a 
bold  proposal  for  the  pooling  of  the  coal  and  steel 
resources  of  France  and  Germany  under  a  supra- 
national authority.  Schuman  invited  other  coun- 
tries to  join  and  "in  April  1951  France,  Italy,  the 
Federal  Republic  of  Germany,  Belgium,  the 
Netherlands,  and  Luxembourg  signed  a  treaty  es- 
tablishing the  so-called  European  Coal  and  Steel 
Community.  Today  the  Community  is  a  going 
concern.  Its  executive  branch  and  assembly  are 
already  in  operation  and  it  has  established  a  single 
market  for  coal  and  steel  embracing  its  six  mem- 
ber nations. 

In  the  meantime,  in  spite  of  its  slow  start,  the 
Council  of  Europe  has  made  considerable  progress. 
Not  just  "a  government  in  search  of  a  job,"  as  a 
European  leader  once  characterized  it,  it  has  pro- 
vided Europe  with  a  comprehensive  blueprint  for 
political  union  which  must  now  be  passed  upon 
by  the  parliaments  of  member  nations.  Within 
the  Council  a  working  group  has  recently  com- 
pleted a  draft  European  constitution  calling  for  a 
federal  legislature  of  two  houses,  a  federal  execu- 
tive, and  a  federal  court. 

As  you  can  see,  tremendous  progress  has  been 
made  toward  the  goal  of  a  united  Europe.  But 
European  unity  may  suffer  a  serious  setback  if 
the  six  Schuman  plan  countries  cannot  successfully 
clear  what  is  currently  their  most  difficult  hurdle — 
the  ratification  of  the  European  Defense  Com- 
munity or  Edc  treaty.  Conceived  by  former 
French  Premier  Rene  Pleven,  the  Edc  was  de- 
signed to  fill  the  recognized  need  for  a  (jerman 
military  contribution  to  the  defense  of  Western 
Europe  in  a  form  most  acceptable  to  all  parties 
concerned. 

Since  the  signature  of  the  Edc  treaty  in  May 
1952  only  one  nation  has  started  the  ratification 
process.  In  West  Germany  the  lower  house  of 
Parliament,  the  Bundestag,  has  given  its  approval 
to  ratification.  The  upper  house  or  Bundesrat  has 
just  voted  to  postpone  action  pending  a  ruling  of 
the  Constitutional  Court  on  the  constitutionality 


May   18,   J  953 


711 


of  Geriiiiiii  ])articipation  in  the  Edc.  Opposition 
to  the  tri'aty  in  Gernmny  stems  primarily  from  the 
major  opposition  l)arty,  the  Social  Democrats,  but 
also  includes  some  extreme  rightist  elements.  The 
Social  Democrats  have  maintained  that  the  Edc  in 
its  present  form  does  not  provide  for  German 
participation  on  the  basis  of  complete  equality. 
Moreover,  they  do  not  consider  the  European  de- 
fense force  envisaged  by  the  treaty  as  an  effective 
means  of  defending  Western  Europe  against  pos- 
sible Soviet  aggression. 

In  Paris,  ratification  has  been  hindered  bj'  an 
understandable  reluctance  on  the  part  of  some 
Frenchmen  to  see  Germany  rearm  at  a  time  when 
French  military  resources  are  being  seriously 
drained  by  the  war  in  Indochina.  Under  present 
circumstances  some  French  circles  feel  that  Ger- 
man domination  of  the  Edc,  which  they  desire  to 
prevent,  would  only  be  a  matter  of  time.  Add  to 
these  major  political  and  psychological  obstacles 
Europe's  traditional  nationalist  feelings  of  pride 


in  national  armies  and  reluctance  to  accept  the 
control  of  a  supranational  authority,  and  you  have 
a  fair  idea  of  the  problem  of  Edc  ratification. 

Wliile  clearly  recognizing  the  obstacles  to  be 
overcome  before  ratification  can  be  achieved,  it  is 
our  h<)])e  and  that  of  Europe's  statesmen  that 
eventually  logic  will  win  out  over  traditional  emo- 
tional factors  and  that  relatively  less  important 
national  interests  may  yield  to  more  compelling 
international  realities.  We  remain  convinced  that 
the  Edc  is  the  soundest  possible  approach  to  Euro- 
pean defense,  and  we  will  continue  to  give  it  our 
maximum  support. 

It  has  always  seemed  to  us  that  Edc  was  essen- 
tial to  the  concept  of  European  unity.  As  long  as 
Soviet  strategic  goals  appear  unchanged,  Europe 
cannot  hope  for  unified  security  without  unifie<l 
strength.  In  the  final  analysis,  however,  Euro- 
pean unity,  whether  it  be  economic,  political,  or 
military  is  something  which  can  be  made  a  reality 
only  by  the  Europeans  themselves. 


Registering  Public  Opinion 


liy  n.  Schuyler  Foster 

Chief,  Division  of  Public  Studies  ^ 


The  Department  of  State  carries  on  a  systematic 
effort  to  keep  itself  informed  about  public  opin- 
ion, so  that  policy  decisions  can  be  taken  with  full 
consideration  of  the  views  of  the  American  people. 
The  Department's  officers  realize  the  vital  con- 
nection between  public  opinion  and  U.S.  foreign 
policy.  They  know  that,  as  Secretary  George  Cat- 
lett  Marshall  put  it,  "no  policy — foreign  or  do- 
mestic— can  succeed  without  public  support." 

Under  our  democratic  government,  sustained 
and  intelligent  support  of  foreign  policy  must 
come  from  public  understanding,  from  the  views 
about  foreign  policy  held  by  each  individual. 
Citizens'  views  are  especially  important  today, 
since  much  of  the  execution  of  this  foreign  policy 
requires  active  citizen  participation.  As  Secre- 
tary of  State  John  Foster  Dulles  has  said  in  a 
recent  radio-TV  address  to  the  American  people: 

Foreign  policy  isn't  just  something  that's  conducted  by 
secretaries  of  state  and  by  ambassadors  in  different  parts 

'  Address  made  at  the  Department  of  State  on  Apr.  22 
before  a  group  of  Rhode  Island  high  school  students  visit- 
ing Washinntnn  under  the  sponsorship  of  the  World  Af- 
fairs Council  of  Rhode  Island. 

712 


of  the  world ;  every  one  of  you  has  got  a  part  in  making 
a  successful  foreign  policy  for  the  United  States. " 

You  don't  need  to  be  21  years  old  to  participate 
in  U.S.  foreign  policy.  As  a  taxpayer,  even  on 
lipstick  or  movies,  you  are  contributing  a  share 
of  the  large  sums  needed  to  carry  out  our  foreign 
policy.  Those  young  Americans  now  serving  in 
the  armed  forces  are  called  upon  to  make  a  much 
greater  contribution  for  the  success  of  our  foreign 
policy,  whether  they  are  serving  in  the  United 
States  or  in  Korea.  These  are  contributions  which 
Americans  were  not  normally  called  upon  to  make 
prior  to  World  War  II.  In  earlier  years,  Con- 
gress did  not  appropriate  billions  of  dollars  for 
a  mutual  security  program;  yet  the  American 
public  of  today  has  agreed  to  tax  itself  heavily 
to  carry  out  this  vital  part  of  our  foreign  policy. 

Each  person  in  the  country  contributes  to  Amer- 
ican public  opinion,  whether  by  favoring  our  for- 
eign policies,  by  opposing  them,  or  by  ignoring 
them.  Even  when  a  person  has  no  opinion,  that 
fact  has  an  impact  on  the  total  opinion  picture. 
All  one  has  to  do  to  realize  the  cumulative  result 


'  Bulletin  of  Feb.  9,  p.  216. 

Department  of  Sfafe  Bulletin 


of  individual  opinions  is  to  suppose  that  every- 
body else  shared  your  opinion,  or  lack  of  one. 

The  systematic  analysis  of  opinion  carried  out 
within  the  Department  of  State  makes  it  possible 
for  every  officer  considering  a  foreign-policy  prob- 
lem to  be  familiar  with  public  opinion  on  that 
problem.  American  opinion  is  not,  of  course,  the 
only  factor  entering  into  policy  decisions.  Many 
other  considerations  are  involved  in  deciding  what 
action  would  best  promote  world  peace  and  the 
welfare  of  the  American  nation.  Sometimes  ex- 
pert judgment  is  required  on  such  technical  ques- 
tions as :  How  much  aid  from  the  United  States 
do  European  countries  need  this  year  to  carry  out 
the  joint  defense  program  without  harming  their 
economies?  How  much  aid  can  the  United  States 
afford  to  send  without  harming  its  own  economy? 
Or,  how  far  could  increased  trade  with  European 
countries  reduce  their  need  for  United  States  aid  ? 
Or,  again,  how  feasible  is  it  to  set  up  a  comprehen- 
sive defense  organization  for  the  Pacific  area? 
How  far  are  other  countries  willing  to  go  in  join- 
ing a  defense  organization  ?  Along  with  the  ex- 
pert judgments  on  such  knotty  questions,  the 
Department  of  State  policy  officer  receives  analy- 
ses of  what  the  American  public  is  thinking  about 
such  questions. 

Every  day,  top  officers  of  the  Department  get 
a  summary  of  opinion  developments  of  the  last 
24  hours  on  all  major  aspects  of  our  foreign  policy. 
In  addition,  policy  officers  receive  from  time  to 
time  detailed  analyses  covering,  for  instance,  cur- 
rent opinion  about  the  Far  East  or  Germany.  Or 
perhaps  a  longer-range  study  of  public  attitudes 
over  the  last  year  or  two  toward  the  United 
Nations.  Opinion  studies  are  frequently  requested 
by  Department  officers  who  want  an  analysis 
geared  directly  to  the  specific  problem  which 
confronts  them.  i  •    •  i 

Just  how  does  the  Department  go  about  this  ]ob 
of  registering  public  opinion?  How  can  your 
opinion  be  registered  without  any  consultation 
with  you  ?  It  is  clearly  impossible  to  collect  each 
month  the  opinions  of  millions  of  Americans  on 
the  leading  foreign  affairs  topics  of  that  month, 
but  it  is  possible  to  construct  a  reasonably  accurate 
picture  of  American  public  opinion  on  the  basis 
of  opinion  expressions  which  are  more  readily 
accessible. 

Sources  of  Opinions  Studied 

The  Department's  analyses  of  opinion  are 
broadly  based  upon  all  available  types  of  publicly 
expressed  opinion.  These  include,  first  of  all,  the 
materials  available  from  the  daily  press.  News- 
paper editorials ;  "columns"  by  individual  writers, 
some  of  which  appear  in  papers  across  the 
country ;  and  news  stories  which  report  the  views 
of  outstanding  leaders  of  opinion,  whether  Con- 
gressmen, other  political  leaders,  spokesmen  of  the 
major  national  organizations,  or  other  newsworthy 
figures.     These    press    materials    are    available 

May   18,   1953 


promptly  and  reflect  a  number  of  different  points 
of  view.  So  do  the  broadcasts  of  the  radio  com- 
mentators. 

A  little  later  the  weekly  magazines  are  available, 
and  radio  discussion  programs.  Then  there  are 
the  formal  resolutions  of  major  groups,  such  as 
business,  labor,  or  agricultural  associations,  church 
groups,  patriotic  organizations,  women's  clubs. 
A  wide  variety  of  organizations  show  an  active 
interest  in  international  problems  and  take  public 
stands  on  our  foreign  policy. 

The  nationwide  polling  organizations,  those  of 
Gallup  and  Roper  and  some  of  our  universities, 
often  include  foreign-affairs  topics  in  their  sam- 
plings of  public  opinion.  Individual  citizens 
write  to  the  Secretary  of  State  or  to  the  \\1iite 
House,  giving  direct  expression  to  their  views  on 
foreign  affairs.  Moreover,  Department  officers 
often'  report  on  those  questions  and  attitudes 
which  they  have  found  to  be  most  prominent  at 
meetings  they  have  attended  in  various  parts  of 
the  country.  All  of  these  varied  types  of  opinion 
expression  are  carefully  watched,  from  day  to 
day  and  week  to  week,  by  those  who  are  respon- 
sible for  registering  public  opinion  on  foreign 
affairs. 

On  many  questions  all  of  these  opinion  indica- 
tors point  in  the  same  direction ;  showing,  for  ex- 
ample, the  overwhelming  support  for  continued 
U.S.  participation  in  the  United  Nations.  In- 
deed, on  the  Ijroad  question  of  America's  role,  ever 
since  Pearl  Harbor  public  opinion  has  strongly 
and  consistently  favored  an  "active  part"  in  world 
affairs  for  the  United  States  with  only  a  minority 
desiring  us  to  "stay  out"  of  world  affairs  as  much 
as  we  can.  This  "positive  attitude  is  evident  in 
the  press  and  radio  comment,  in  the  results  of 
public  opinion  polls,  in  the  declarations  by  na- 
tional organizations,  and  by  the  great  majority 
of  other  leaders  and  spokesmen. 

Moreover,  belief  in  an  active  role  in  world 
affairs  is  dominant  in  all  geographical  sections  of 
the  country.  Public  opinion  polls  show  virtually 
the  same  support  for  this  attitude  in  the  Midwest 
as  in  the  East,  in  the  North  as  in  the  South.  It 
is  also  true  that  the  "stay  out"  attitude  is  evenly 
held  by  a  minority  of  Americans  throughout  the 
nation,  and  in  both  of  our  major  political  parties. 
As  students,  however,  you  will  be  interested  in 
knowing  that  the  amount  of  education  a  person 
has  does  make  a  difference  in  foreign-policy  out- 
look. Generally  speaking,  the  more  education  a 
person  has,  the  more  likely  he  is  to  favor  a  positive 
role  for  America. 

Divergent  Views  Analyzed 

On  some  issues,  support  for  the  main  idea  is 
clear  but  there  is  sharp  difference  of  opinion  as 
to  the  degree  to  which  or  the  way  in  which  the 
principle  should  be  carried  out  at  a  particular 
time.  For  instance,  there  is  strong  support  for  a 
large-scale  program  of  aid  to  our  allies;  but  there 

713 


is  difference  of  opinion  about  the  exact  amount  and 
character  of  that  aid  and  about  the  desirability  of 
makin<f  tlie  aid  conditional  on  specific  acts.  In 
such  cases,  tlie  registration  of  public  opinion  re- 
quires a  description  of  just  how  opinion  is  divided  : 
which  groups  witliin  the  population  take  which 
sides  and  for  what  reasons,  which  schools  of 
thought  are  gaining  and  which  declining. 

Tliis  method  of  registering  public  opinion  does 
far  more  justice  to  the  richness  and  diversity  of 
American  thought  than  would  a  simple  conclusion, 
such  as :  The  public  says  yes,  or  the  public  says  no. 

Special  mention  must  be  made,  in  any  discussion 
of  how  the  D^'partment  registers  public  opinion, 
of  the  opportunities  open  to  organizations  and 
their  spokesmen.  Periodically,  those  organiza- 
tions which  have  educational  programs  on  foreign 
affairs  are  invited  to  send  representatives  to  meet- 
ings with  Department  of  State  officers  in  Wash- 
ington. Some  of  these  conferences  are  compre- 
hensive in  their  coverage  and  include  talks  by  the 
Secretary  and  other  top  officials  of  the  Depart- 
ment; others  deal  with  particular  problems  which 
are  of  special  interest  to  some  of  the  organizations 
at  a  particular  time.  All  of  these  meetings,  to 
which  the  organizations  send  their  spokesmen  and 
pay  their  own  expenses,  offer  an  opportunity  for 
the  group  representatives  to  present  their  views, 
their  opinions,  to  responsible  policy  officers  of  the 
Department.  A  diversity  of  views  is  often  evident 
on  these  occasions,  since  these  organizations  repre- 
sent many  different  aspects  of  American  life. 

Between  such  meetings,  too,  organization 
spokesmen  send  statements  of  their  views  to  the 
Department;  or  they  may  secure  interviews  in 
order  to  lay  their  opinions  directly  before  officers 
dealing  with  the  problem  in  question.  In  con- 
nection with  article  71  of  the  U.N.  Charter,  which 
relates  to  the  U.N.'s  Economic  and  Social  Council, 
the  Department  of  State  specifically  undertakes 
"consultation  with  non-governmental  organiza- 
tions which  are  concerned  with  matters  within 
[the  Council's]  competence." 

From  this  summary  description  of  the  numer- 
ous and  representative  sources  from  which  the 
Department  collects  American  opinion,  it  is  clear 
that  the  Department  ascribes  importance  to  what 
the  public  is  thinking.  The  sample  of  news- 
papers, magazines,  and  radio  commentators  is 
designed  to  include  every  outlook,  every  shade  of 
thought  on  these  major  foreign-policy  questions. 
Public  opinion,  as  registered  through  these  vari- 
ous channels,  is  considered  by  desk  officers  con- 
fronted with  day-to-day  problems  and  by  top  offi- 
cials who  must  make  major  decisions.  Public 
opinion  is  often  an  important  factor  in  preparing 
the  Department's  recommendations  to  the  Presi- 
dent for  his  final  action  on  foreign-policy  ques- 
tions. 

The  job  of  the  American  citizen  in  the  second 
half  of  the  20th  century  is  very  challenging,  per- 
haps more  difficult  than  ever  before.     There  are 


not  only  foreign-policy  problems  but  domestic 
problems  which  must  be  faced  on  the  national, 
state,  and  local  levels.  It's  a  big  job ;  but  the  mag- 
nitude of  the  citizen's  job  does  not  diminish  the 
importance  of  his  role  in  foreign  affairs.  It  was 
never  more  important  than  today. 

Soviet  Proposal  for  5-Power  Peace  Pact 

In  response  to  questions  concerning  Soviet  For- 
eign Minister  V.  M.  Molotov's  proposal  for  a  five- 
power  peace  pact  contained  in  a  message  to  the 
Congress  of  the  Peoples  in  Defense  of  Peace, 
Michael  J.  McDermott^  Special  Assistant  for 
Press  Relations,  made  the  following  statement  on 
April  28: 

The  Department  would  regret  if  the  discus- 
sion of  outstanding  issues  now  disturbing  the 
peace  of  the  world  were  to  degenerate  into  a  mere 
propaganda  battle.  Mr.  Molotov  has  seen  fit  to 
address  his  proposal  for  a  five-power  pact,  which, 
incidentally,  has  been  a  standard  Stalinist- 
Communist  proposal  for  many  years,  to  an  un- 
official body  which  has  served  for  a  long  time  as 
a  front  for  the  international  Communist  move- 
ment. 

The  Department  still  awaits  official  action  on 
the  part  of  the  Soviet  Union  to  promote  the  cause 
of  peace,  not  mere  words.  In  any  event,  a  pact 
of  this  sort  appears  to  be  unnecessary  in  view 
of  the  Charter  of  the  United  Nations,  which  is  a 
peace  instrument  binding  on  all  nations. 

International  Wheat  Agreement 
Signed  at  Washington 

Negotiations  which  had  begun  at  the  end  of 
January  culminated  in  the  signing  at  Washington 
on  April  13  of  a  new  International  Wheat  Agree- 
ment.^    Signature  was  made  by  17  countries. 

The  new  agreement  is  the  result  of  the  Inter- 
national Wheat  Council's  decision  to  recommend 
to  member  governments  that  the  present  Wheat 
Agreement,  which  is  due  to  expire  on  July  31 
of  this  year,  be  extended  for  a  further  3-year 
period.  This  3-year  period  will  encompass  a  new 
price  range  of  $2.05  maximum  and  $1.55  minimum 
as  a  replacement  for  the  present  range  of  $1.80 
maximum  and  $1.20  minimum.  (The  new  maxi- 
mum price  of  $2.05  was  found  unacceptable  by  the 
United  Kingdom  delegate,  who  informed  the 
Council  that  while  his  Government  desired  a  re- 
newal of  the  agreement,  it  was  not  prepared  to 
accept  a  maximum  price  above  $2.) 

During  the  course  of  negotiations  the  Council 
also  agreed  to  recommend  to  governments  a  num- 


'  Copies  of  the  renewed  agreement  may  be  obtained  by 
writing  to  tlie  Division  of  International  Conferences,  De- 
partment of  State. 


714 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


ber  of  textual  amendments  to  be  incorporated  in 
the  new  agreement.  These  were  introduced  largely 
on  the  basis  of  tlie  experience  gained  in  the  opera- 
tion of  the  Wheat  Agreement  since  1949  and  are 
intended  to  clarify  certain  parts  of  the  agreement 
and  to  improve  its  operation.  None  of  these  rec- 
ommended changes,  liowever,  alters  the  basic  prin- 
ciples on  which  the  agreement  was  ongnially 
established. 

A  provision  of  the  new  agreement  will  permit 
the  Council,  under  certain  conditions,  to  select  an 
expert  advisory  panel  to  give  the  Council  an 
advisory  opinion  before  taking  a  decision  on  any 
dispute  arising  on  the  application  or  interpreta- 
tion of  the  agreement.  The  present  position  mider 
which  the  Council  is  the  final  arbiter  on  all 
disputes  is  unaffected. 

The  following  tables  set  forth  the  gviaranteed 
imports  and  exports  of  wheat  and  their  distribu- 
tion, bv  countries  which  have  been  recommended 
to  governments  by  the  International  "Wlieat  Coun- 
cilj'^and  will  apply  under  the  renewed  International 
Wlieat  Agreement. 

The  Department  of  State  on  April  27  an- 
nounced (press  release  218)  that  the  agreement 
had  been  signed  on  behalf  of  39  countries  up  to 
and  including  April  24,  1953. 

Those  signatories  include  the  4  exporting  coun- 
tries now  members  of  the  International  Wlieat 
Council,  namely,  Australia,  Canada,  France,  and 
the  United  States  of  America,  and  35  of  the  im- 
porting countries  now  members  of  the  Council, 
namely,  Austria,  Belgium,  Bolivia,  Brazil,  Cey- 
lon, Costa  Rica,  Cuba,  Denmark,  the  Dominican 
Republic,  Ecuador,  Egypt,  the  Federal  Republic 
of  Germany,  Greece,  Guatemala,  Haiti,  Honduras, 
India,   Ireland,   Israel,    Italy,  Japan,   Lebanon, 


Guaranteed  Sales 


Crop  year  August  1 
t"o  July  31 

1953- 

54 

1954- 
55 

1955- 
56 

Equivalent 

in  bushels 

for  each 

crop  year 

thousands  of  metric 
tons 

Australia  ' 

Canada 

France  

United    States   of 
America 

2,041 

6,804 

10 

7,353 

2,041 

6,804 

10 

7,353 

2,041 

6,804 

10 

7,353 

75,  000,  000 

250,  000,  000 

367,  437 

270,  174,  615 

Total      .... 

16,  208 

16,  208 

16,  208  595,  542,  052 

1  In  the  event  of  the  provisions  of  article  X  being  invoked  by  Australia 
bv  r?asSn  of  a  short  crSp,  it  will  be  ^eeogTii^ed  that  certam  markets  by 
virtue  of  their  geographical  position,  are  traditionally  depoident  upon 
Australia  for  the  supply  uf  their  requirements  o  wheat  gram  and  wheat 
flour.  The  necessity  of  meeting  these  requirements  will  be  on"^. f  'f.f  '.''^ 
tors  to  be  taken  into  account  by  the  Council  m  determmmg  the  ability  of 
Australia  to  deliver  its  guaranteed  sales  under  this  agreement  m  any  crop 


Liberia,  Mexico,  the  Netherlands,  Nicaragua,  Nor- 
way, Panama,  the  Philippines,  Portugal,  Saudi 
Arabia,  Spain,  Sweden,  Switzerland,  and  the 
Union  of  South  Africa. 

The  Department  further  announced  on  April  28 
(press  release  222)  that  the  agreement  had  been 
signed  by  El  Salvador,  Iceland,  Indonesia,  New 
Zealand," Peru,  and  Venezuela  on  April  27,  which 
was  the  final  date  for  signature. 

Forty-five  of  the  forty-six  countries,  members 
of  the  International  Wheat  Council,  have  now 
signed  the  agreement.  The  United  Kingdom  did 
not  become  a  signatory. 


Guaranteed  Purchases 


Crop  year  August  1 
to  July  31 


Austria 

Belgium 

Bolivia 

Brazil 

Ceylon 

Costa  Rica 

Cuba 

Denmark 

Dominican  Republic  . 

Ecuador 

Egypt 

El  Salvador 

Germany 

Greece 

Guatemala 

Haiti 

Honduras 

Iceland 

India 

Indonesia 

Ireland 

Israel 

Italy  

Japan     

Lebanon    

Liberia 

Mexico 

Netherlands  .... 

New  Zealand    .    .    . 

Nicaragua 

Norway 

Panama 

Peru 

Philippines    .... 

Portugal 

Saudi  Arabia.    .    .    . 

Spain 

Sweden  

Switzerland  .... 

Union  of  South  Africa 

United  Kingdom  .    . 

Venezuela 


1953- 
54 


1954- 
55 


195.5- 
56 


thousands  of  metric 
tons 


Total  (42  coun- 
tries) ... 


250 
615 
95 
360 
255 
35 
202 
50 
26 
35 
400 
20 
1,500 
350 
25 
45 
15 
11 
1,500 
142 
275 
215 
850 
1,000 
75 
2 
415 
675 
160 
10 
230 
20 
185 
236 
175 
60 
145 
25 
215 
320 
4,819 
170 


16,  208 


250 
615 
95 
360 
255 
35 
202 
50 
26 
35 
400 
20 
1,500 
350 
25 
45 
15 
11 
1,500 
142 
275 
215 
850 
1,000 
75 
2 
415 
675 
160 
10 
230 
20 
185 
236 
175 
60 
145 
25 
215 
320 
4,819 
170 


Equivalent 

in  bushels 

for  each 

crop  year 


250 
615 
95 
360 
255 
35 
202 
50 
26 
35 
400 
20 
1,500 
350 
25 
45 
15 
11 
1,500 
142 
275 
215 
850 
1,000 
75 
2 
415 
675 
160 
10 
230 
20 
185 
236 
175 
60 
145 
25 
215 
320 
4,819 
170 


16,  208  16,  208 


9,  185,  927 
22,  597,  382 

3,  490,  652 

13,  227,  736 
9,  369,  646 
1,  286,  030 
7,  422,  229 
1,  837,  185 

955,  336 
1,  286,  030 

14,  697,  484 
734,  874 

55,  115,  565 

12,  860,  299 

918,  593 

1,  653,  467 
551,  156 
404,  181 

55,  115,  565 
5,  217,  607 

10,  104,  520 

7,  899,  898 
31,232,  154 
36,  743,  710 

2,  755,  778 

73,  487 

15,  248,  640 
24,  802,  004 

5,  878,  994 
367,  437 

8,  451,  053 
734,  874 

6,  797,  586 
8,  671,  515 

6,  430,  149 
2,  204,  623 

5,  327,  838 
918,  593 

7,  899,  898 

11,  757,987 
177,  067,  939 

6,  246,  431 


595,  542,  052 


May  18,    1953 


715 


World  Trade  Week,  1953 

PROCLAAIATION ' 

Whk;E-\.s  it  is  the  policy  of  tliis  Government  to  fibster 
mutual  understanding  and  friendship  amoni;  nations  ;  and 

Wheiusas  world  trade,  freely  conducted  by  private  en- 
terprise, increases  material  well-being  and  develops 
friendly  intercourse  amon^  free  peoples ;  and 

Whereas  international  trade  among  the  nations  of  the 
free  world  adds  to  the  economic  strength  upon  which  their 
common  defense  is  based ;  and 

Whereas  increased  international  exchange  of  goods, 
services,  and  capital  promotes  better  economic  utilization 
of  the  world's  resources  and  higher  standards  of  living; 
and 

Whereas  expanded  world  trade  advances  the  ideal  of 
unity  among  all  mankind  and  strengthens  the  foundation 
for  lasting  peace  and  prosperity  : 

Now,  Therefore,  I,  Dwight  D.  Eisenhower,  President  of 
the  United  States  of  America,  do  hereby  proclaim  the  week 
beginning  May  17,  1953,  as  World  Trade  Week ;  and  I  re- 
quest the  appropriate  officials  of  the  Federal  Government 
and  of  the  several  States,  Territories,  possessions,  and 


municipalities  of  the  Vnited  States  to  cooperate  in  tlie 
observance  of  that  week. 

I  also  urge  business,  labor,  agricultural,  educational, 
and  civic  groups,  as  well  as  the  people  of  the  United  States 
generally,  to  observe  World  Trade  Week  with  gatherings, 
discussions,  exhibits,  ceremonies,  and  other  appropriate 
activities. 

In  Witness  Whereof,  I  have  hereunto  set  my  hand  and 
caused  the  Seal  of  the  United  States  of  America  to  be 
affixed. 

Done  at  the  City  of  Washington  this  twenty-third  day 

of  April  in  the  year  of  our  Lord  nineteen  hundred 

[seal]     and  fifty-three,  and  of  the  Independence  of  the 

United  States  of  America  the  one  hundred  and 

seventy-seventh. 

By  the  President : 

Walter  B.  Smith, 

Acting  Secretary  of  State 


Maintaining  Mutually  Advantageous  Trade  With  Latin  America 

by  Edward  G.  Cede 

Director  of  the  Office  of  Regional  American  Affairs  ^ 


Public  attention  in  the  United  States  in  the 
foreign  relations  field  has  for  some  time  naturally 
been  concentrated  largely  on  developments  in 
Korea  and  in  the  war  torn  areas  surrounding  the 
Soviet  Union.  I  am  glad  to  have  the  opportunity, 
however,  to  call  your  attention  to  the  continued 
significance  to  the  United  States  of  our  neighbors 
south  of  the  Rio  Grande. 

The  United  States  and  the  countries  of  Latin 
America  are  closely  bound  together  by  ties  of 
geography,  history,  and  economics.  We  share 
common  ideals.  Our  interests  and  those  of  the 
Latin  American  countries  are  such  that  we  have 
customarily  found  ourselves  holding  essentially 
the  same  views  on  important  political  issues. 

Our  commercial  interdependence  with  the  Latin 
American  countries  is  very  close.  From  the  stand- 
point of  military  defense  they  are  a  great  asset  to 
us  and  we  to  them. 

Geogi-aphically,  except  for  Canada,  Latin 
America  is  our  closest  neighbor.  It  has  a  popula- 
tion that  is  slightly  larger  than  our  own.  It  con- 
tains regions  of  great  strategic  importance  from 


•  No.  3012,  18  Fed.  Reg.  2469. 

'  Excerpts  from  an  address  made  before  the  Export- 
Import  Club  at  Richmond,  Va.,  on  Apr.  22  (press  release 
202  dated  Apr.  20). 


the  viewpoint  of  U.S.  and  Western  Hemisphere 
defense. 

Our  direct  private  investments  in  the  area  are 
large,  amounting  to  approximately  5  billion  dol- 
lars. In  fact,  if  investments  in  Canada  are  ex- 
cluded, United  States  direct  private  investments 
in  Latin  America  exceed  those  in  all  the  other 
countries  of  the  world  combined. 

Our  trade  with  the  area  is  also  very  large.  In 
1952  Latin  America  exported  to  the  United  States 
about  3.4  billion  dollars  worth  of  goods  or  ap- 
proximately 32  percent  of  total  U.S.  imports  fi'om 
all  sources.  In  addition  to  basic  foodstuffs  such 
as  coffee  and  sugar,  we  imported  from  Latin  Amer- 
ica many  of  the  raw  materials  which  we  must  have 
either  to  live  comfortably  in  peace  or  to  fight  ef- 
fectively in  war.  Included  in  this  group  of  im- 
ports are  many  strategic  and  critical  materials. 
Indeed,  Latin  America  is  the  major  single  source 
of  some  20  materials  on  the  U.S.  stockpile  list. 
Latin  America  is  also  an  important  market  for 
U.S.  exports  and  is  heavily  dependent  on  the  sup- 
plies which  it  receives  from  the  United  States. 
Latin  America's  imports  from  the  United  States 
in  1952  amounted  to  approximately  3.5  billion  dol- 
lars or  about  half  of  its  imports  from  all  sources. 

Tlie  security  and  well-being  of  the  United  States 
require  a  close  and  cooperative  relationship  with 
Latin    America.     Geogi-aphic    proximity    alone 


716 


Deparlmenf  of  Sfafe   Bulletin 


would  necessitate  such  a  relationship,  if  only  to 
secure  the  southern  approaches  to  the  United 
States  and  our  communications  between  the  At- 
lantic and  Pacific  Oceans.  Geographic  proximity 
also  enhances  the  value  to  the  United  States,  par- 
ticularly in  time  of  war,  of  the  wide  variety  and 
laro-e  volume  of  strategic  and  other  raw  materials 
upon  which  our  industries  are  becoming  increas- 
ingly dependent. 

The  Latin  American  countries  also  have  a  vital 
stake  in  the  maintenance  of  close  and  cooperative 
relations  with  the  United  States.  Their  security 
as  well  as  ours  is  involved  in  the  maintenance  of  a 
strong  Western  Hemisphere.  Their  dependence 
upon" their  trade  with  us  is  especially  great. 
Among  the  important  consumer  goods  which  Latin 
America  purchased  in  the  United  States  m  1952 
were  227  million  dollars  of  wheat  and  flour,  82 
million  dollars  of  other  grains  and  preparations, 
72  million  dollars  of  fruits  and  vegetables,  25  mil- 
lion dollars  of  tobacco  and  manufactures,  217 
million  dollars  of  textile  manufactures,  and  431 
million  dollars  of  automobiles,  parts,  and  acces- 
sories. Among  capital  goods  and  industrial  raw 
materials  which  they  purchased  from  us  during 
the  same  year  were  220  million  dollars  of  iron  and 
steel  mill  products,  308  million  dollars  of  chemi- 
cals and  related  products,  and  727  million  dollars 
of  electrical  and  industrial  machinery. 


The  Question  Asked  by  Our  Neighbors 

These  are  dull  figures,  but  they  translate  into 
such  basic  things  as  the  sulfur  needed  to  keep 
Cuba's  rayon  plants  in  operation,  steel  towers  to 
carry  transmission  lines  from  newly  developed 
hydroelectric  plants  in  Brazil,  and  equipment  for 
expanding  Chile's  steel  mill  capacity.  In  the 
period  of  stringency  following  the  Korean  crisis 
the  United  States  kept  these  essential  commodi- 
ties moving  out  to  satisfy  civilian  requirements  in 
Latin  America  on  the  same  priority  schedule  that 
it  used  for  civilian  requirements  here  in  this  coun- 
try. We  were  a  reliable  supplier.  Whether  we 
will  prove  an  equally  reliable  purchaser  now  that 
the  pendulum  is  swinging  in  the  opposite  direction 
is  a  big  question  for  the  future  and  one  which  our 
neighbors  are  asking  with  some  apprehension. 
How  much  they  can  continue  to  buy  here  depends, 
in  a  very  direct  way,  on  how  much  they  can  sell 
here,  for  under  present  conditions  there  is  no  layer 
of  accumulated  capital  for  these  countries  to  draw 
upon. 

Latin  American  exports  to  the  United  States 
represent  much  more  than  the  flow  of  a  given 
amount  of  goods.  They  represent  employment 
for  a  large  segment  of  their  population.  They 
represent  the  means  of  obtaining  the  goods  which 
they  need  to  improve  their  health  and  comfort. 
More  importantly,  perhaps,  they  supply  the  dollar 
exchange  for  the  purchase  of  the  capital  equip- 
ment and  for  the  servicing  of  the  dollar  indebted- 
May   18,   1953 


ness  and  equity  investment  which  are  required  for 
their  economic  development. 

The   need    for   such    development    is   evident. 
Latin  America  has  the  natural  resources  both  to 
build  home  industry  and  agriculture  and  to  expand 
foreign  trade.     However,  while  conditions  vary 
widely   from   country   to   country,   average   per 
capita  income  in  Latin  America  as  a  whole  is  about 
one-eighth  of  the  per  capita  income  in  the  United 
States.     How  urgent  it  is,  from  the  viewpoint  of 
future    inter-American     cooperation,     that    the 
United  States  facilitate  the  further  development 
of  their  resources  becomes  more  evident  from  day 
to  day.    The  people  of  Latin  America  are  today 
deeply  conscious  of  the  disparity  between  the  liv- 
ing standards  of  all  but  the  more  wealthy  among 
them  and  the  living  standards  of  the  average  citi- 
zen in  countries  like  ours.     They  believe  that  this 
disparity  can  and  should  be  overcome.     They  are 
resolved  to  improve  upon  life  as  they  have  known 
and  lived  it  in  the  past.     A  foundation  for  general 
economic  development  in  Latin  America,  is,  in 
fact,  being  established.     The  governments,  and 
private  citizens  as  well,  are  investing  greater  funds 
than  ever  before  in  agriculture,  power,  and  indus- 
trial facilities.     The  governments  are  increasing 
their  budgets   for  education,  health  and  social 
security,  public  works,  and  agricultural  develop- 
ment.    Progress  is  slow,  however,  in  terms  of  need 
for  it. 

We  in  this  country,  in  appraising  the  situation, 
must  realize  that  La'tin  America  is  actually  in  the 
midst  of  a  social  revolution.  We  must  understand 
that  our  Latin  American  neighbors  are  deeply 
conscious  of  the  need  for  social  reform  to  correct 
age-old  abuses.  In  many  areas  of  activity  there 
is  little  that  we  can  or  should  do,  for  the  Latin 
American  countries  must  work  out  their  own 
destinies.  We  should  be  fully  aware,  however, 
that  old  institutions  and  old  concepts— including 
the  concept  of  cooperation  with  the  United 
States — are  being  critically  examined  everywhere. 
We  must,  to  the  extent  that  we  are  able,  help  our 
Latin  American  neighbors  understand  that  our 
attitude  is  one  of  cooperation  but  not  of  inter- 
ference in  their  problems  and  must  endeavor  to 
remove  the  basis  for  any  justifiable  complaint  they 
may  have  against  us.  We,  of  course,  have  the 
right  to  expect  them  to  show  a  corresponding  com- 
prehension of  the  problems  facing  us  and  to  take 
similar  action  regarding  our  grievances. 

It  is  my  opinion  that  nothing  in  our  relations 
with  the  Latin  American  countries  will  be  of 
greater  importance  in  the  immediate  future  than 
the  trade  policy  which  we  adopt.  No  subject  is 
receiving  more  critical  inquiry  on  their  part  at 
the  present  time.  They  are  asking  such  questions 
as  these : 

Are  the  prices  they  receive  for  the  products  they 
sell  to  the  United  States  fair? 

Are  the  prices  which  they  pay  for  the  products 
they  buy  from  us  reasonable  ? 

717 


Does  the  United  States  recognize  any  respon- 
sibility for  lielping  to  afford  a  continuing  marlvct 
for  their  products  after  they  have  expanded  their 
l)roduction  in  order  to  meet  our  temporary  war 
l)roduction  needs? 

Does  the  United  States  expect  them  to  remain 
producers  of  foodstuffs  and  raw  materials  only, 
and  not  to  diversify  their  economies  ? 

I  understand,  of  course,  that  some  of  these  ques- 
tions fail  to  give  sufficient  recognition  to  the  in- 
terests which  the  Latin  American  countries  have 
had  in  the  worldwide  struggles  that  have  raged 
throughout  the  life  of  this  generation;  that  they 
show  insufficient  understanding  of  the  fact  that 
those  struggles  were  the  struggles  of  the  Latin 
American  countries  as  well  as  ours  and  that  the 
rights  and  interests  which  we  have  fought  to  pro- 
tect are  not  only  our  own  rights  and  interests 
but  those  of  free  men  everywhere.  I  believe  that 
it  is  essential  that  we  also  understand,  however, 
that  a  large  part  of  the  people  in  Latin  America 
are  so  much  concerned  with  the  day-to-day  prob- 
lem of  procuring  the  means  of  subsistence  that 
they  have  not  realized,  and  do  not  now  realize, 
that  they  have  any  real  stake  in  the  outcome  of 
those  struggles.  It  is  also  necessary  that  we  under- 
stand, especially  in  view  of  the  social  changes 
that  are  now  occurring  in  Latin  America,  that  it 
is  highly  important  that  not  only  government 
officials  but  the  people  of  Latin  America  know 
and  understand  just  what  the  attitude  of  the 
United  States  is  toward  Latin  America's  problems. 

The  U.N.  Resolution  on  Terms  of  Trade 

I  can  illustrate  the  importance  which  our  Latin 
American  neighbors  attach  to  their  trade  with  us 
and  some  of  the  current  problems  involved  in  that 
trade,  I  believe,  by  indicating  the  role  which  the 
Latin  American  Republics  played  in  the  adoption 
by  the  General  Assembly  of  the  United  Nations 
late  last  fall  of  a  resolution  dealing  with  the 
terms  of  trade.^  By  "terms  of  trade,"  I  mean 
the  ratio  between  the  prices  of  the  goods  a  coun- 
try sells  and  the  prices  of  the  goods  it  buys. 
When  a  fixed  quantity  of  a  country's  exports  will 
exchange  for  more  of  the  goods  the  country  must 
import,  the  terms  of  trade  are  moving  in  its  favor ; 
if  the  quantity  of  goods  it  receives  for  its  imports 
declines,  the  terms  of  trade  are  becoming  less 
favorable.  This  resolution  recommended  that 
governments  which  adopt  measures  affecting  the 
prices  of  raw  materials  entering  into  international 
trade  should  consider  the  effect  of  such  measures 
on  the  terms  of  trade  of  underdeveloped  countries 
in  order  to  insure  that  the  prices  of  these  pri- 
mary commodities  are  kept  in  an  adequate,  just, 
and  equitable  relation  to  the  prices  of  capital 
goods  and  other  manufactured  articles.  The  in- 
tent of  the  resolution,  as  explained  by  its  pro- 


ponents, was  to  facilitate  the  establishment  of  fair 
wage  levels  in  the  less  developed  countries  and  to 
permit  a  more  rapid  growth  of  domestic  savings. 

The  United  States  was  not  opposed  to  the  con- 
cept of  fair  and  equitable  prices.  We  believed, 
however,  that  the  relationship  between  the  prices 
of  raw  materials  and  the  prices  of  manufactured 
goods,  especially  during  recent  years,  has  been 
favorable  to  the  producers  of  the  former.  We  also 
were  of  the  opinion  that  there  is  no  effective  waj^, 
internationally,  of  maintaining  any  fixed  relation- 
ship between  the  prices  of  large  numbers  of  com- 
modities and  that  there  is  no  criterion  other  than 
the  free  play  of  market  forces  by  which  to  deter- 
mine what  is  a  just  price. 

The  resolution  was,  nevertheless,  adopted  by  an 
overwhelming  vote.  It  had  been  introduced  by 
a  representative  of  one  of  the  Latin  American 
countries.  Nineteen  Latin  American  delegations 
joined  with  the  delegations  of  16  other  countries 
to  give  a  total  vote  of  35  for  the  resolution.  Fif- 
teen countries,  including  the  United  States,  op- 
posed it.  The  resolution  was  carried  by  more  than 
a  two-thirds  majority,  and  there  is  no  doubt  in  my 
mind  that  it  had  the  approval  of  the  overwhelm- 
ing majority  of  the  Latin  American  people  who 
had  given  any  consideration  to  it. 

LTndoubtedly  one  of  the  principal  forces  moti- 
vating the  supporters  of  the  resolution  was  the 
fear  that  the  favorable  price  relationship  tliat  has 
existed  during  the  last  several  years  might  not 
continue.  Raw  material  prices  have  generally 
fluctuated  much  more  widely  in  the  past  than  have 
the  prices  of  industrial  goods.  Furthermore,  as 
you  know,  there  has  been  a  tendency  for  tlie  prices 
of  many  foodstuffs  and  raw  materials  to  move 
downward  in  recent  months  and  there  is,  I  am  sure, 
apprehension  on  the  part  of  producers  of  these 
products  in  other  countries  just  as  there  is  among 
producers  of  such  products  in  the  United  States. 

You  will  appreciate  the  fact  that  at  a  time  when 
the  Latin  American  countries  fear  that  they  may 
face  a  period  of  declining  prices  for  their  exports, 
when  they  desire  so  much  to  improve  their  mate- 
rial lot,  and  when  they  recognize  that  one  of  the 
principal  means  of  realizing  this  objective  is 
through  the  maintenance  of  a  high  volume  of  mu- 
tually advantageous  trade  with  us,  our  trade  rela- 
tions with  them  are  of  very  great  importance. 
Whatever  we  do  to  reduce  their  exports  to  us  will 
not  only  reduce  our  exports  to  them,  in  virtually 
the  same  pro)ioi-tion,  but  will  be  reflected  in  their 
political  orientation  and  in  the  ability  of  the  free 
world  to  defend  itself. 

President  Eisenhower  in  his  recent  statement 
to  Congress  concerning  renewal  of  the  Trade 
Aijreements  Act  *  placed  our  trade  policy  in  the 
context  of  our  total  foreign  policy.  What  he  said 
in  that  connection  is  entirely  applicable  to  our 
relations  with  Latin  America  and  may  be  taken 


'  U.N.  doc.    A/resolution  86. 
718 


'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  27,  1953.  p.  634. 

Department  of  Sfafe   Bulletin 


as  a  summary  of  what  I  have  been  trying  to  say 
to  you  this  evening.  In  that  statement  President 
Eisenhower  said: 

Our  trade  policy  is  only  one  part,  although  a  vital  part, 
of  a  larger  problem.  This  problem  embraces  the  need  to 
develop  "through  cooperative  action  among  the  free  nations 
a  strong  and  self-supporting  economic  system  capable  of 
providing  both  the  military  strength  to  deter  aggression 
and    the    rising    productivity    that    can    improve    living 

standards.  .  ^      ^  ■     t,,- 

No  feature  of  American  policy  is  more  important  in  this 
respect  than  the  course  which  we  set  in  our  economic 
relations  with  other  nations.  The  long  term  economic 
stability  of  the  whole  free  world  and  the  overriding  ques- 
tion of  world  peace  will  be  heavily  influenced  by  the 
wisdom  of  our  decisions.  As  for  the  United  States  itself, 
its  security  is  fully  as  dependent  upon  the  economic  health 
and  stability  of  the  other  free  nations  as  upon  their 
adequate  military  strength. 

After  calling  attention  to  the  complexity  of  this 
problem  and  to  the  fact  that  building  a  productive 
and  strong  economic  system  within  the  free  world 
will  require  action  by  other  governments,  as  well 
as  the  United  States,  over  a  wide  range  of  eco- 
nomic activities,  President  Eisenhower  contmued  : 

In  working  toward  these  goals,  our  own  trade  policy 
as  well  as  that  of  other  countries  should  contribute  to 
the  highest  possible  level  of  trade  on  a  basis  that  is  profit- 
able and  equitable  for  all.  The  world  must  achieve  an 
exiJanding  trade,  balanced  at  high  levels,  which  will  permit 
each  nation  to  make  its  full  contribution  to  the  progress 
of  the  free  world's  economy  and  to  share  fully  the  benefits 
of  this  progress. 


OEEC  Group,  U.S.  Officials 
Discuss  Economic  Problems 

Summary  of  Discussions 

Major  economic  problems  of  mutual  concern  to 
the  United  States  and  Western  Europe  were  dis- 
cussed during  a  week  of  conferences,  which  opened 
on  April  10,  between  a  delegation  of  the  Organi- 
zation for  European  Economic  Cooperation 
(Oeec)  and  U.S.  Government  officials. 

The  conferences  opened  with  a  meeting  at  the 
Department  of  State  of  the  Oeec  group.  Under 
Secretary  of  State  Walter  Bedell  Smith,  Secre- 
tary of  the  Treasury  George  M.  Humphrey,  and 
Director  for  Mutual  Security  Harold  E.  Stassen. 

The  European  delegation  was  headed  by  Sir 
Hugh  Ellis-Rees,  chairman  of  the  Council  of  the 
Oeec  and  chief  of  the  U.K.  delegation  to  Oeec. 
Other  members  of  the  delegation  were  Ambassador 
Attilio  Cattani,  chairman  of  the  Oeec  executive 
committee  and  head  of  the  Italian  delegation  to 
Oeec;  Baron  Snoy,  chairman  of  the  Oeec  steering 
board  for  trade  and  secretary  general  of  the  Bel- 
gian ministrv  of  economic  affairs ;  and  Hans  Karl 
von  Mangoldt,  chairman,  European  Payments 
Union  managing  board,  and  member  of  the  Ger- 
man delegation  to  Oeec.  Robert  Marjolin,  Oeec 
secretary  ^general,  also  participated  in  the  talks. 

May    18,   7953 


The  Oeec  is  composed  of  17  European  countries 
including  virtually  all  of  the  nations  of  free 
Europe.  The  United  States  and  Canada  are  as- 
sociated in  the  organization  and  participate  in  its 
work.  The  Oeec  was  created  in  1948  in  recog- 
nition of  the  fact  that  American  assistance  to 
Europe  under  the  Marsliall  plan  could  be  effective 
only  with  maximum  self-help  and  mutual  coopera- 
tion among  the  European  nations  themselves. 

Since  1948  tlie  Oeec  has  provided  machinery 
through  which  the  member  countries  have  worked 
together  to  reduce  trade  barriers,  increase  pro- 
duction, stabilize  finances,  balance  their  accounts 
with  one  another  and  with  the  outside  world,  and 
solve  other  economic  problems. 

Text  of  Joint  Communique 

1.  Representatives  of  the  United  States  and  the 
Organization  for  European  Economic  Cooperation 
(Oeec)  have  today  (April  16)  concluded  a  week 
of  intensive  exploratory  discussions  on  the  com- 
mon economic  and  financial  problems  of  the  North 
Atlantic  area.  The  discussions  were  concerned 
primarily  with  the  problems  raised  last  December 
in  the  Fourth  Report  of  the  Oeec  and  in  last 
month's  US-UK  talks,  and  in  the  Oeec  Ministerial 
Council  Meeting.  As  foreseen  in  the  communique 
issued  following  the  US-UK  talks  in  March,i  the 
United  Kingdom  suggestions  were  discussed  with 
the  Organization  in  the  course  of  the  March  23-24 
Oeec  Ministerial  Council  Meeting.  The  present 
talks  provided  an  opportunity  for  further  con- 
sultations between  representatives  of  the  Oeec  and 
the  United  States. 

2.  The  discussions  were  informal  in  character, 
directed  to  obtain  a  fi-ank  exchange  of  views  on  a 
wide  range  of  economic  problems  of  common  in- 
terest. The  Oeec  delegates  reviewed  develop- 
ments leading  up  to  the  Organization's  Fourth 
Report,  issued  last  December  under  the  title, 
Europe — The  Way  Ahead.  In  this  connection, 
they  pi-esented  an  analysis  of  European  economic 
problems  and  prospects.  They  also  explained  cer- 
tain suggestions  for  meeting  those  problems  which 
would  involve  measui-es  to  be  taken  by  European 
countries  and  by  the  United  States. 

3.  The  Oeec  Delegation  exchanged  views  with 
senior  officials  of  the  United  States  administration, 
including  the  Secretaries  of  State,  Treasury  and 
Commerce,  and  the  Director  for  Mutual  Security. 
During  the  course  of  the  meetings,  U.S.  officials 
and  the  visiting  delegation  discussed  European 
economic  policies  of  common  concern,  and  United 
States  economic  policies  which  have  a  significant 
impact  on  Europe.  The  exchange  led  to  a  better 
understanding  of  the  economic  problems  common 
to  the  United  States  and  Europe. 

4.  The   discussions   revealed   complete   under- 


^  Bulletin  of  Mar.  16,  19.")3,  p.  395. 


719 


standing  and  agreement  on  the  vital  necessity  for 
pui*suing  sound  economic  policies.  Kepresenta- 
tives  foi-  both  sides  stated  it  to  be  their  objective 
to  seek  (/)  stable  and  growing  economies  which 
would  permit  rising  living  standards,  necessary 
investments  and  adequate  collective  or  individual 
defense  efforts,  (w)  sound  internal  economic 
policies  directed  at  maintaining  financial  stability, 
and  {Hi)  freer  and  expanded  world  trade  and  an 
improved  system  of  international  payments. 
There  was  general  agreement  that  these  purposes 
would  be  furthered  by  continuing  efforts  and  close 
cooperation  on  both  sides  of  the  Atlantic. 

5.  In  presenting  their  analysis,  the  Oeec  dele- 
gates stated  that,  despite  the  great  progress  made 
during  the  past  five  years,  they  regarded  the  pres- 
ent economic  situation  in  Europe  as  far  from  satis- 
factory, and  they  stressed  the  urgency  of  the  need 
for  action.  The  Oeec  views  were  along  the  fol- 
lowing lines : 

(a)  The  task  facing  Europe  was  to  continue 
the  cooperative  efforts  which  had  already  pro- 
duced important  results.  Although  the  total 
volume  of  European  exports  to  the  rest  of  the 
world  was  today  about  two-thirds  higher  than 
pre-war  levels,  dollar  earning  from  exports  had  to 
be  increased.  To  that  end,  and  in  order  to  meet 
other  vital  needs,  especially  in  the  field  of  defense, 
it  was  necessary  to  increase  European  production 
and  productivity  and  make  European  exports  more 
competitive.  Further  efforts  should  be  made  to 
reduce  trade  restrictions,  among  the  European 
countries  themselves  and  with  the  rest  of  the 
world ; 

(b)  The  United  States  could  play  a  role  in  re- 
storing conditions  for  expansion  of  world  trade 
and  payments  by  measures  in  the  fields  of  com- 
mercial policy,  foreign  investment  and  raw  ma- 
terials. U.S.  policies  with  regard  to  tariffs, 
shipping  and  customs  procedures  were  of  consider- 
able importance  to  Oeec  countries,  which  require 
dollars  to  buy  agricultural  products,  raw  mate- 
rials and  manufactured  goods  in  the  United  States. 
The  Euroix-an  countries  had  great  interest  in 
increasing  exports  to  the  United  States,  so  as  to 
reduce  the  imbalance  between  them  and  the  United 
States.  U.S.  investment  abroad  could  assist  in 
making  possible  a  freer  international  trade  and 
payments  system.  As  regards  raw  materials,  it 
would  be  useful  if  ways  could  be  found  to  moderate 
the  widespread  disturbances  caused  by  violent 
fluctuations  in  their  prices.  Problems  relating  to 
freer  movement  of  persons  were  also  mentioned. 

6.  Points  raised  by  United  States  representa- 
tives involved  an  exploration  of  various  individual 
or  concerted  measures  by  which  European  coun- 
tries might  improve  the  competitiveness  of  their 
exports  in  third  areas,  as  well  as  in  the  United 
States  market,  with  a  view  to  improving  both  their 
immediate  balance  of  payments  situations  and 

720 


til 
le  I 


their  consequent  opportunities  for  obtaining  th( 
real  economic  benefits  of  freer  trade  and  paymen 
on  a  broader  basis.  With  respect  to  possible 
measures  to  be  taken  by  the  United  States,  the 
representatives  of  the  United  States  pointed  out 
that  reviews  of  U.S.  foreign  economic  policy  were 
being  undertaken.  In  this  connection,  attention 
was  drawn  to  the  appointment  of  Mr.  Lewis 
Douglas,  and  members  of  Mr.  Douglas'  staff  par- 
ticipated in  the  discussions. 

7.  The  representatives  of  the  Government  of  the 
United  States  also  related  their  support  of  these 
objectives  to  tlie  continuing  interest  of  the  United 
States  in  further  progress  toward  European  inte- 
gration, through  such  arrangements  and  institu- 
tions as  the  European  Defense  Community,  the 
European  Political  Community,  the  Coal  and  Steel 
Community,  and  the  Organization  for  European 
Economic  Cooperation. 


U.S.  Terminates  Further  Vesting 
of  German  Property 

White  House  Announcement  of  April  17  > 

The  White  House  on  April  17  announced  the 
termination  of  the  progi-am  for  vesting  German- 
owned  properties  located  in  the  United  States. 
This  action  constitutes  a  further  step  in  the 
orderly  conclusion  of  a  wartime  measure  in- 
augurated by  the  U.S.  Government  shortly  after 
the  outbreak  of  World  War  II. 

Attorney  General  Brownell  stated  that  after 
April  17,  1953,  the  Department  of  Justice  will  not 
issue  any  orders  vesting  new  or  additional  German 
properties.  Secretary  of  State  Dulles  stated  that 
the  decision  taken  represents  one  of  a  series  of 
progressive  steps  looking  toward  the  develop- 
ment of  normal  relations  between  the  United  States 
and  the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany. 

Under  the  provisions  of  the  Trading  with  the 
Enemy  Act,  enemy-owned  properties  in  the  United 
States  at  the  outbreak  of  World  War  II  were 
immediately  immobilized  and  later  vested.  Im- 
mobilization prevented  the  enemy  from  using 
these  assets  to  further  its  war  effort,  and  by  vest- 
ing these  assets  the  U.S.  Government  obtained 
reparation  for  the  payment-of-war  claims. 

Text  of  Statement  by  Chancellor  Adenauer' 

[Translation] 

The  termination  of  the  confiscation  of  German 
prewar  assets  announced  on  April  17  by  the  White 
House  signifies  a  further  important  step  on  the 
path  to  a  complete  normalization  of  German- 
American    economic    relations.      The    American  | 

'  Released  to  the  pres.s  at  Augusta,  Ga. 
2  Made  at  Boston  on  Apr.  17. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Government  has  thus  generously  and  speedily 
complied  with  a  wish  which  the  Federal  Chan- 
cellor liad  presented  during  his  conferences  in 

Washington.^  _         ,     •  ,  .•        r^ 

In  accordance  with  American  legislation,  tjer- 
man  assets  in  the  United  States  were  frozen  at 
the  outbreak  of  the  war,  and  later  were  tor  the 
most  part  confiscated  in  favor  of  the  American 
Government.  Such  confiscation  of  German  pre- 
war assets  continued  until  very  recently.  Today's 
statement  terminates  the  era  of  confiscations 
which  constituted  a  burden  on  German- American 
postwar  relations.     A  new  important  stage  has 

been  entered. 

The  Federal  Government  welcomes  tins  state- 
ment by  wliich  the  American  Govermnent  demon- 
strates again  that  it  is  working  in  an  exemplary 
manner  to  restore  normal  economic  relations  in 
the  interest  of  all  the  countries  of  the  free  world. 
The  Federal  Government  is  convinced  that  this 
step  by  the  leading  economic  nation  of  the  world 
will  have  favorable  repercussions  on  the  treat- 
ment of  German  prewar  assets  in  other  countries, 
too. 


Anniversary  of  Polish  Constitution 

Statement  ly  Secretary  DuUes 

Press  release  227  dated  May  1 

Today  [May  3]  is  the  162d  anniversary  of  the 
adoption  of  the  Polish  Third  of  May  Constitution, 
a  step  of  worldwide  significance  on  the  road 
toward  modern,  Western  democracy.  In  the  days 
of  its  independence  the  Polish  Nation  celebrated 
this  anniversary  freely  and  with  patriotic  de- 
votion as  the  national  holiday.  In  their  present 
unhappy  bondage  the  Polish  people  commemorate 
the  occasion  no  less  solemnly,  although  those  m 
Poland,  as  we  all  know,  may  do  so  only  in  their 
hearts  and  thoughts.  . 

The  Polish  Nation  is  rightly  proud  of  its 
splendid  history  which  illustrates,  as  does  all  his- 
tory, that  no  tyranny  can  suppress  permanently 
the  freedom  of  a  nation  which  truly  desires  free- 
dom. Freedom— the  freedom  of  nations  as  well 
as  freedom  of  the  individual— is  at  the  heart  of 
American  policy.  It  is  the  same  principle  which 
the  Poles  inscribed  on  their  banners— "for  our 
freedom  and  for  yours." 

On  this  occasion  I  send  to  the  Polish  people  an 
expression  of  the  warm,  friendly  sympathy  of  the 
American  people  and  of  their  Government.  We 
salute  true  Poles  wherever  they  may  be.  We  join 
with  them  in  the  hope  and  faith  that  the  Polish  de- 
sire for  freedom  and  independence  will  find  the 
fullest  realization. 


"For  information  relating  to  the  Chancellor's  visit  to 
Washington,  see  Botj-etin  of  Apr.  20,  p.  568. 

May    18,    1953 


Anniversary  Message  on  Japanese 
Peace  Treaty 

Press  release  220  dated  April  28 

Secretary  Dulles  has  sent  the  following  message 
to  the  Jafanese  people  on  the  occasion  of  the  first 
anniversary  of  the  .laparvese  peace  treaty  : 

I  am  happy,  indeed,  to  send  my  greetings  to 
the  people  of  Japan  on  the  first  anniversary  ot 
the  Treaty  of  Peace.  A  year  ago,  Japan  became 
a  sovereign  and  independent  nation  and  a  mem- 
ber of  the  international  society.  I  know  that  the 
Japanese  people  are  proud  of  their  independence 
and  sovereignty  and  will  guard  them  carefully. 

Wliile  the  restoration  of  Japan's  independence 
under  the  peace  treaty  is  indispensable  for  Japan  s 
future,  Japan's  active  interest  and  participation 
in  a  growing  number  of  international  organiza- 
tions is  an  impressive  fulfillment  of  one  of  the 
objectives  underlying  the  Treaty  of  Peace.  I  hope 
that  Japan  can  become  a  full  member  ot  the  United 
Nations,  as  such  a  large  majority  of  its  members 
have  already  favored.  t      a 

During  the  past  year,  our  two  peoples  have  faced 
many  complex  and  difficult  problems  together. 
We  each  have  come  to  a  greater  understanding  of 
the  other's  problems.  I  am  sure  that  this  under- 
standing will  continue  to  increase  as  time  goes 
by  This  anniversary  is  an  occasion  for  the  Jap- 
anese and  American  people  to  reaffirm  their  de- 
termination to  work  together  with  other  friendly 
peoples  for  peace  and  security. 


Notification  Regarding  Prewar 
Agreements  With  Japan 

Press  release  211  dated  April  24 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  April 
U  that  on  Apnl  22,  1963,  the  Japanese  Goverru- 
ment  was  given  official  notification,  m  accordance 
with  the  terms  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  with  Japan 
signed  at  San  Francisco  September  8,  1951,  re- 
garding the  prewar  bilateral  treaties  and  other 
mternational  agreements  with  Japan  which  the 
U.S.  Government  desires  to  keep  in  force  or  revive. 
The  7Wtlficafion,  which  was  handed  by  U.S.  Am- 
bassador John  M.  Allison  to  the  Japanese  Min- 
ister for  Foreign  Affairs,  is  as  follows: 

I  have  the  honor  to  refer  to  the  Treaty  of  Peace 
with  Japan,  signed  at  San  Francisco  September  8, 
1951,  which  came  into  force,  in  accordance  with 
the  provisions  of  article  23  thereof,  on  April  28, 
1952  upon  the  deposit  of  instruments  of  ratifica- 
tion by  Japan,  the  United  States  of  America,  Aus- 
tralia, Canada,  France,  New  Zealand,  Pakistan 
and  the  United  Kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and 
Northern  Ireland.  Article  7(a)  of  the  Treaty  of 
Peace  reads  as  follows : 

721 


Each  of  the  Allied  Powers,  within  one  year  after  the 
present  Treaty  ha.s  come  into  force  between  it  and  Japan 
will  notify  Japan  which  of  its  prewar  bilateral  treaties  or 
conventions  with  Ja])an  it  wishes  to  continue  in  force  or 
revive,  and  any  treaties  or  conventions  so  notified  shall 
continue  in  force  or  be  revived  subject  only  to  such  amend- 
ments as  may  li«  neces.sary  to  ensure  conformity  with  the 
present  Treaty.  The  treaties  and  convention.s  so  notified 
shall  be  considered  as  having  been  continued  in  force  or 
revived  three  months  after  the  date  of  notification  and 
shall  be  reRistered  with  the  Secretariat  of  the  United 
Nations.  All  such  treaties  and  conventions  as  to  which 
Japan  is  not  so  notified  shall  be  regarded  as  abrogated. 

I  have  the  honor,  by  direction  of  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  United  States  of  America  and  on  its 
behalf,  to  notify  the  Japanese  Government,  in  ac- 
cordance with  tlie  provisions  of  the  Treaty  of 
Peace  quoted  above,  that  the  Government  of  the 
United  States  of  America  desires  to  keep  in  force 
or  revive  the  followino;  prewar  bilateral  treaties 
and  other  international  agreements  with  Japan: 
Extradition 

1.  Treaty  relating  to  the  extradition  of  criminals 
Signed  at  Tokyo  April  29,  1886.  Entered  into  force 
November  26,  1886. 

2.  Supplementary  convention  relating  to  the  extradition 
of  criminals.  Signed  at  Tokyo  May  17,  1906.  Entered 
into  force  October  5,  1906. 

Narcotic  Drugs 

3.  Arrangement  for  the  direct  exchance  of  certain  in- 
formation regarding  the  traffic  in  narcotic  drugs  Ef- 
fected by  exchange  of  notes  at  Tokyo  February  16  and  July 
D,  i.t_'8.     Entered  into  force  Jlily  6.  1928. 

4.  Arrangement  for  the  exchange  of  information  relat- 
ing to  the  seizure  of  illicit  narcotic  drugs  and  to  persons 
engaged  in  the  illicit  traffic.  Effected  by  exchange  of 
notes  at  Tokyo  April  23  and  September  6,"l929. 

Postal 

5.  Convention  for  the  exchange  of  money  orders 
lior  t;'''  Washingon  April  1,8,  and  at  Tokyo  May  23, 
15)85.     Jintered  into  force  October  1,  1885. 

6.  Additional  convention  to  the  convention  for  the 
exchange  of  money  orders.  Signed  at  Tokyo  May  2.5  and 
f  ?c<;i'''''"S^''°  '^"°'^  22,  1888.    Entered  into  force  October 

J.,   looo. 

7.  Additional  articles  to  the  convention  for  the  exchange 
of  raone.y  orders.  Signed  at  Tokyo  April  .5  and  at  Wash- 
ington May  4,  1889.     Entered  into  force  June  24,  1889 

8.  Additional  convention  for  the  exchange  of  postal 
money  orders.  Signed  at  Tokyo  Miy  7  and  at  Washington 
June  1,  1904.    Entered  into  force  July  1,  1904 

«if;  ^I'^T'rl  P°'''  ^"''^^™*'"^'  ^"^^  detailed  regulations. 
10?^'',?^^"'??  •^"°<"  !•  ^^^^  •■'"<'  at  Washington  June  20, 
19..8.    Entered  into  force  July  1,  1938. 

Propertij—Lenseholds 

10.  Arrangement  relating  to  perpetual  leaseholds.  Ef- 
fected by  exchange  of  notes  at  Tokyo  March  25,  1937 
iintered  into  force  March  25,  1937. 

Smuggling — Liquor 

11.  Convention  for  the  prevention  of  the  smuggling  of 
uitoxicating  liquors.  Signed  at  Washington  Mav  31,  1928 
iintered  into  force  January  16,  1930. 

Ta.ration 

12  Arrangement  relating  to  reciprocal  exemption  from 
i,?ff "V".?  Z  '"come  from  the  operation  of  merchant  vessels 
l-lfected  by  exchange  of  notes  at  Washington  March  31 
and  .une  8,  1926.  Entered  into  force  June  8,  1926- 
operative  retroactively  from  July  18,  1924. 

The  treaties  and  other  international  agreements 
listed  above  shall  be  considered  as  having  been 

722 


continued  in  force  or  revived  3  months  after  the 
date  of  this  note,  i.  e.,  July  22, 1953. 

It  is  understood,  of  course,  that  either  of  the 
two  Governments  may  propose  revisions  in  any 
of  the  treaties  or  other  agreements  mentioned  in 
the  above  list. 

Further,  it  shall  be  understood  that  any  of  the 
provisions  in  the  treaties  and  other  agreements 
listed  in  this  notification  which  may  be  found  in 
particular  circumstances  to  be  not  "in  conformity 
with  the  Treaty  of  Peace  shall  be  considered  to 
have  been  deleted  so  far  as  the  application  of  the 
Treaty  of  Peace  is  involved,  but  shall  be  regarded 
as  being  in  full  force  and  effect  with  respect  to 
matters  not  covered  by  the  latter  treaty. 

In  compliance  with"  article  7  (a)  of  the  Treaty 
of  Peace,  quoted  above,  the  U.S.  Government  will 
register  with  the  Secretariat  of  the  United  Nations 
the  treaties  and  other  agreements  which  are  by  this 
notification  kept  in  force  or  revived. 

Accept  [etc.] 

U.S.  Properties  on  Chinese  Mainland 

Press  release  217  dated  April  27 

The  Department  has  noted  an  apparent  mis- 
understanding contained  in  a  syndicated  article 
written  by  Robert  S.  Allen,  which  was  published 
in  the  New  York  Post  on  April  16.  The  effect 
of  the  misunderstanding  is  to  do  an  injustice  to 
the  Chinese  Nationalist  Government. 

Possibly  on  the  basis  of  the  recent  hearings 
before  a  subcommittee  of  the  Committee  on  Ap- 
propriations of  the  House  of  Representatives,  the 
erroneous  inference  was  drawn  that  the  Chinese 
Nationalist  Government  unjustifiably  endeavored 
to  collect  $2,600,000  from  the  U.S.  Government 
for  properties  on  the  mainland  of  China  sold  to 
the  U.S.  Government,  but  allegedly  not  delivered 
as  a  result  of  the  withdrawal  of  the  Chinese  Na- 
tionalist Government  to  Formosa  in  late  1949. 

A  condensed  description  of  the  transaction  by 
Leland  W.  King,  Jr.,  Director  of  Foreign  Build- 
ings Operations  for  the  Department,  made  on 
March  25  before  the  subcommittee  on  the  Depart- 
ments of  State,  Justice,  and  Commerce  is  found 
on  page  196  of  the  hearings.  The  fact  is  that 
the  properties  in  question  were  actually  bought 
by  the  Chinese  Nationalist  Government  from  pri- 
vate owners,  paid  for  in  Chinese  currency,  and 
delivered  according  to  agreement  to  the  U.S.  Gov- 
ernment in  1948  and  early  1949.  The  properties 
were  occupied  and  used  by  the  U.S.  Government 
for  some  time,  both  before  and  after  the  with- 
drawal of  the  Chinese  Nationalist  Government 
from  the  mainland.  The  U.S.  Government  ar- 
ranged to  pay  for  these  properties  by  crediting 
their  cost  against  the  Chinese  indebtedness  to  the 
United  States  under  the  surplus  property  disposal 
agreement.  The  Chinese  Nationalist  Government 
never  demanded  payment  in  cash  for  these  prop- 
erties. 

Department  of  State   Bulletin 


The  properties  were  not  vacated  by  the  U.S. 
Government  until  its  Foreign  Service  establish- 
ments in  Communist  China  were  closed  and  all 
Foreign  Service  personnel  withdrawn  from  main- 
land China  early  in  1950.  The  properties  were 
tlien  left  in  the  care  of  the  British  Government, 
which  represents  American  intei-ests  in  Commu- 
nist China.  Most  of  the  properties  were  seized 
by  tlie  Chinese  Communists  late  in  1950. 

The  Chinese  Nationalist  Government  at  the  re- 
quest of  the  U.S.  Government  agreed  in  Septem- 
ber 1952  to  take  back  title  to  certain  of  these 
properties,  thus  releasing  for  use  elsewhere  the 
allotment  earmarked  by  the  Department  of  State 
for  the  purchase  of  these  properties.  Throughout 
these  negotiations  the  cooperative  action  of  the 
Chinese  Nationalist  Government  has  been  evident. 


The  Reed  IVIission  to  Pakistan 

Press  release  219  dated  April  27 

The  Secretary  of  State  and  the  Director  for 
Mutual  Security  are  sending  Harry  Reed  of  Pur- 
due University  to  Pakistan  for  an  on-the-spot 
surve}'  of  the  wheat  situation.  Pakistan  has  re- 
quested U.S.  assistance  in  meeting  a  deficit  this 
year  estimated  by  Pakistan  at  1.5  million  tons.  A. 
forecasted  food  crisis  in  this  drought-stricken 
country  is  of  deep  concern  to  the  United  States.  A 
firstlumd  report  by  Mr.  Reed's  3-man  survey  team 
will  greatly  assist  in  reaching  a  decision  on  Pak- 
istan's request  for  aid. 

Mr.  Reed  is  dean  of  the  College  of  Agriculture 
and  director  of  the  Agriculture  Extension  Service 
of  Purdue  University.  He  has  devoted  his  life  to 
agriculture,  working  in  the  extension  field,  and 
serving  as  a  professor  and  as  director  of  experi- 
ment stations.  His  associates  on  the  mission  in- 
clude Norman  J.  Volk,  associate  director  of  the 
Agriculture  Experiment  Station  at  Purdue  Uni- 
versity, and  Peter  H.  Delaney  of  the  Office  of 
South  Asian  Affairs,  Department  of  State.  The 
date  of  departure  for  Pakistan  is  not  definitely 
determined,  but  it  is  hoped  that  Mr.  Reed  will 
have  a  report  ready  in  May. 

Under  an  emergency  U.S.  loan  of  $15  million 
provided  in  September  1952,^  Pakistan  has  pur- 
chased and  shipped  some  160,000  tons  of  Ameri- 
can wheat  as  a  part  of  its  heavy  wheat  imports 
arranged  since  the  beginning  of  its  current  food 
year  (May  1952-April  1953).  These  1952-53  im- 
ports and  the  anticipated  sharp  deficit  for  the 
19.")3-54  food  year  are  due  to  severe  curtailment 
of  wheat  yields  in  two  successive  years,  resulting 
from  drought  and  insufficient  water  for  irrigation. 


'  Bulletin  of  Sept.  29,  1952,  p.  490. 


Current  Legislation  on  Foreign  Policy 

Protocol  to  Treaty  of  Friendship,  Commerce,  and  Consular 
Rights  With  Finland.  Message  From  the  President 
of  the  United  States  Transmittinfc  Protocol,  Sif-'ned  at 
Washington  on  December  4,  1952,  modifying  the 
Treaty  of  Friendship,  Commerce,  and  Consular 
Rights  Between  the  United  States  and  Finland, 
siirned  at  Washington  on  Februai-y  13,  1934.  S.  Exec. 
C,  S3d  Cong.,  l.st  sess.     4  pp. 

Seventh  General  Assembly  of  the  United  Nations.  Re- 
port of  Senator  Alexander  Wiley  as  a  delegate  to  the 
Seventh  General  Assembly  of  the  United  Nations, 
October  17  to  December  21,  1952,  together  with  cer- 
tain sijeeches  made  in  the  United  Nations.  S.  Doc. 
25,  83d  Cong.,  1st  sess.     6S  pp. 

Importation  of  Foreign  Agricultural  Workers.  Report 
(To  accompany  H.  K.  3480).  H.  Kept.  229,  83d 
Cong.,  1st  sess.     5  pp. 

Rubber  Act  of  1948.  Message  from  the  President  of  the 
United  States  transmitting  recommendations  relative 
to  the  Rubber  Act  of  1948,  as  amended,  relating  to  the 
Synthetic-Rubber  Program.  H.  Doc.  123,  83d  Cong., 
1st  sess.     2  pp. 

Submerged  Lands  Act.  Report  from  the  Committee  on 
Interior  and  Insular  Affairs,  Senate  of  the  United 
States,  to  accompany  S.  J.  Res.  13.  March  27,  1953. 
S.  Rept.  133,  83(1  Cong.,  1st  sess.     81  pp. 

Personnel  Investigations  of  Employees  and  Applicants  For 
Employment  in  the  Executive  Branch  of  the  Govern- 
ment for  Loyalty,  Suitability,  and  Security.  A  Re- 
port With  Conclusion.s  and  Recommendations  Made 
as  a  Result  of  the  Investigation  Into  the  Personnel 
Needs  and  Practices  of  the  Various  Governmental 
Agencies.     S.  Doc.  29,  83d  Cong.,  1st  sess.     20  pp. 

Agreements  With  the  Federal  Kei)ublic  of  Germany.  Mes- 
sage From  the  President  of  the  United  States  trans- 
mitting an  agreement  on  German  external  debts,  an 
agreement  regarding  the  settlement  of  the  claims  of 
the  United  States  for  postwar  economic  assistance 
(other  than  surplus  property),  an  agreement  relating 
to  the  indebtedness  of  Germany  for  awards  made  by 
the  Mixed  Claims  Commission,  an  agreement  Con- 
cerning the  Validation  of  German  Dollar  Bonds.  S. 
Execs.  D,  E,  F,  and  G,  S3d  Cong.,  1st  sess.    243  pp. 


Tax  Treaty  Negotiations 
With  Australia 

Press  release  224  dated  April  29 

U.S.  and  Australian  tax  officials  have  com- 
pleted draft  agreements  of  conventions  between 
the  two  countries.  These  conventions  are  con- 
cerned with  the  avoidance  of  double  taxation 
with  respect  to  taxes  on  income,  gifts,  and  estates 
of  deceased  persons.  In  due  course,  they  will  be 
submitted  to  the  respective  Governments  for  con- 
sideration. The  discussions,  which  were  held  at 
Washington  fi'om  April  13  to  April  25,  were  a 
continuation  of  those  successfully  initiated  at 
Canberra  in  !March  of  1952. 

Head  of  the  U.S.  delegation  was  Eldon  P. 
King,  head  of  Office  of  International  Tax  Rela- 
tions, Bureau  of  Internal  Revenue.  P.  S.  Mc- 
Govern,  Commissioner  of  Taxation  of  Australia, 
headed  the  Australian  delegation. 


May    J8,    7953 


723 


The  Working  Party  of  the  International  Tin  Study  Group 


hy  Clarence  TF.  Nichols 


The  International  Tin  Study  Group  ^  has  ap- 
pointed a  AVorking  Party  to  consider  proposals  for 
intergovernmental  action  regarding  tin.  The 
Working  Party  will  report  to  the  chairman  of  the 
Steering  Committee  of  the  U.N.  Conference  on 
Tin  as  to  whether  conditions  exist  for  the  resump- 
tion of  that  conference  at  a  suitable  date. 

The  action  appointing  the  Working  Party  was 
taken  by  the  seventh  meeting  of  the  Study  Group 
held  at  London  from  March  23-27,  1953.  The 
Working  Party,  which  is  open  to  all  members  of 
the  Study  Group,  is  scheduled  to  meet  at  Brussels 
on  June  15,  1953. 

The  U.N.  Conference  on  Tin,  which  met  at 
Geneva  from  October  25  to  November  21,  1950,  ad- 
journed subject  to  the  possibility  of  being  recon- 
vened on  the  initiative  of  its  chairman.  The 
chairman  submitted  to  the  seventh  meeting  of  the 
Study  Group  a  request  for  advice  concerning  the 
question  of  reconvening  the  Geneva  conference. 
The  Study  Group  concluded  that  it  would  not  be 
advisable  for  the  conference  to  be  reconvened  until 
additional  preparatory  work  had  been  completed. 

The  Study  Group  considered,  however,  that  fur- 
ther informal  consultation  among  the  governments 
which  are  principally  interested  in  tin  should  be 
arranged  as  promptly  as  possible.  This  view  was 
based  particularly  on  the  present  statistical  posi- 
tion of  tin  on  a  world  basis  and  the  prospect  that 
strategic  stockpiles  will  not  continue  to  absorb  a 


'The  International  Tin  Study  Group  was  formed  pur- 
suant to  a  reconimendation  of  tlie  International  Tin  Con- 
ference, held  at  London  in  October  1946.  The  basic 
purpose  of  the  group  is  to  maintain  a  continuous  inter- 
governmental review  of  the  world  supply  and  demand 
situation,  both  present  and  prospective,  with  respect  to  tin 
in  all  its  forms. 

Membership  in  the  Group  is  open  to  all  sovernments 
which  have  a  substantial  interest  in  the  international 
trade  of  tin.  The  \Z  countries  which  are  members  ac- 
counted for  over  00  percent  of  world  production  and  about 
80  percent  of  world  consumption  of  tin,  exclusive  of  the 
U.S.S.R.,  in  1952.  The  member  countries  are  Australia, 
Lelffium,  Bolivia,  British  Colonial  and  Dependent  Terri- 
tories, Canada,  France,  India,  Indonesia,  Italy  the 
Netherlands,  Thailand,  the  United  Kingdom,  and  the 
United  States. 


724 


tonnage  equal  to  the  difference  between  production! 
and  consumption  of  tin  at  the  present  time. 

The  Study  Group  calculated  world-mine  pro- 
duction of  tin  in  1952  at  165,000  long  tons.  World 
consumption  in  1952  was  estimated  at  126,000  long 
tons.  These  figures  are  exclusive  of  tin  produc- 
tion and  consumption  in  China,  Eastern  Germany, 
and  the  U.S.S.R. 

In  estimating  production  for  1953  and  1954,  the 
Study  Group  took  account  only  of  production  from 
plant  and  equipment  already  in  operation,  under 
rehabilitation,  or  under  commitment,  and  assumed 
the  existence  in  the  principal  producing  countries 
of  political  and  social  stability  and  other  factors 
permitting  continuity  of  current  operations. 

As  a  basis  for  its  estimates  concerning  future 
consumption,  the  Study  Group  assumed  that  cur- 
rent levels  of  industrial  production  will  be  main- 
tained in  all  tin-consuming  countries,  that  foreign 
exchange  will  be  available  for  the  purchase  of  full 
requirements  of  tin,  and  that  the  use  of  tin  will 
not  be  restricted  by  official  limitations.  On  the 
basis  of  those  assumptions,  the  Study  Group  esti- 
mated that  the  excess  of  production  over  consump- 
tion in  1953  and  in  1954  would  be  approximately 
as  great  as  it  was  in  1952. 

Tin  had  ceased  to  present  a  problem  of  acute 
shortage  in  the  United  States  during  1952.  Sup- 
plies and  requirements  came  into  approximate  bal- 
ance. Private  importation  of  tin  was  resumed 
by  the  United  States  in  the  summer  of  1952. 
Early  in  1953  the  United  States  discontinued  the 
domestic  allocation  of  tin  and  removed  all  of  its 
remaining  limitations  upon  use  or  inventories  of 
tin. 

The  U.S.  Government  had  indicated  in  a  series 
of  statements  made  during  1952  and  1953  by  the 
Defense  Production  Administration,  the  National 
Production  Authority,  the  Munitions  Board,  and 
U.S.  representatives  in  the  International  Tin 
Study  Group  that  the  strategic  stockpiling  pro- 
gram of  the  United  States  will  soon  have  acquired] 
the  full  amount  of  tin  called  for  by  the  present 
goal  of  the  stockpile. 

Unless  unforeseen  changes  occur  in  the  produc- 

Deparfment  of  State  BuUetin\ 


tion  or  consumption  of  tin,  it  appears  that  a  sub- 
stantial readjustment  might  result  from  the  com- 
pletion of  stockpile  procurement.  Such  an  ad- 
justment could  involve  an  extended  period  of  in- 
stability in  the  price  of  tin,  with  adverse  effects 
upon  the  economic  and  political  interests  of  con- 
suming countries  as  well  as  producing  countries. 
Production  of  tin  is  the  principal  source  of  em- 
ployment, foreign  exchange,  and  governmental 
revenue  in  Bolivia.  The  tin  industry  is  also 
important  in  other  producing  areas,  especially  in 
Malaya,  Indonesia,  Thailand,  Belgian  Congo,  and 
Nigeria.  Adjustments  of  production  in  the  tin 
industry  are  characteristically  slow;  one  difficulty 
is  that  alternative  employment  is  limited  in  the 
tin-producing  areas. 

If  commercial  stocks  of  tin  were  to  accumulate 
to  a  burdensome  extent,  the  capacity  for  produc- 
tion might  eventually  contract  to  a  level  even 
below  the  rate  of  continuing  commercial  demand. 
A.  period  of  unduly  depressed  prices  might  then 
be  followed  by  a  period  of  shortage  and  excessively 
high  prices.  This  would  be  a  repetition  of  an  ex- 
treme cycle  to  which  tin  has  been  subject  in  the 
past. 

The  possibility  that  notably  unstable  conditions 
might  develop  in  the  world  tin  situation  was  the 
principal  concern  of  the  International  Tin  Study 
Group  in  March  1950,  when  the  Group  requested 
that  the  United  Nations  sponsor  an  intergovern- 
mental conference  on  tin.  This  conference,  which 
opened  at  Geneva  6  months  later,  had  available 
as  a  basis  for  its  discussions  the  draft  of  an 
intergovernmental  agreement  prepared  by  the 
Study  Group.  This  draft  agreement  contemplated 
an  intergovernmental  program  through  which  the 
tin-producing  countries  and  the  tin-consuming 
countries  could  act  together  to  reduce  the  degree 
of  instability  which  confronts  the  procurement 
and  marketing  of  the  metal  internationally.  The 
draft  program  included  provisions  concerning  the 
regulation  of  supplies  and  prices  through  the  op- 
eration of  an  international  buffer  stock  and  the 
application  of  export  quotas  by  the  producing 
countries. 

The  situation  and  outlook  for  tin  at  the  time  of 
the  Geneva  conference  were  dominated  by  the 
sharp  increases  in  demand  which  were  then  affect- 
ing practically  all  raw  materials  during  the  months 
immediately  following  the  invasion  of  Korea.  The 
type  of  inibahince  which  the  Study  Group  had 
principally  in  view  as  of  March  1950  did  not  ap- 
pear to  be  imminent  at  the  time  of  the  Geneva 
conference.  The  draft  agi-eement  which  had  been 
submitted  by  the  Study  Group  and  the  various 
international  measures  proposed  during  the  con- 
ference differed  so  widely  in  their  methods  of 
operation  that  the  conference  concluded  that  a 
further  and  separate  examination  by  governments 
of  these  various  alternatives  was  needed. 

The  discussion  during  the  Geneva  conference 
focused  attention  on  several  key  problems  upon 

May   18,   1953 


which  agreement  would  be  needed  in  speciflc  terms 
to  provide  a  basis  for  intergovernmental  action. 
These  key  questions  included :  The  circumstances 
under  which  a  limitation  of  exports  might  lx;come 
effective ;  the  precise  means  by  which  such  a  limita- 
tion could  be  applied;  and  the  manner  in  which 
an  international  buffer  stock  would  be  organized 
and  administered.  An  international  commodity 
agreement  for  tin  would  of  course  also  have  to 
specify  its  objectives  in  terms  of  a  price  range 
considered  reasonable.  In  addition,  such  an  agree- 
ment might  provide  for  international  allocation 
in  time  of  general  shortage. 

The  resolution  of  adjournment  of  the  U.N.  con- 
ference instructed  the  chairman  of  the  conference, 
with  the  assistance  of  the  executive  secretary : 

(a)  to  keep  under  review  the  further  discussions  and 
conclusions   of   the   International   Tin   Study   Group, 

(6)  to  consult,  on  tlie  basis  thereof,  with  the  meuiliers 
of  the  Steering  Committee,  with  a  view  to  deciding  upon 
a  suitable  date  for  a  resumption  of  the  conference, 

(c)  to  consult  the  Secretary-General  of  the  United  Na- 
tions upon  the  further  provision  of  the  services  and  facil- 
ities of  the  conference;  and,  being  satisfied  that  the 
conditions  for  a  resumption  exist,  to  request  the  Secretary- 
General  to  invite  those  governments  which  were  invited 
to  the  present  meetings  to  come  together  again. 

The  Steering  Committee  of  the  U.N.  Confer- 
ence on  Tin  included  the  chairman  of  that  con- 
ference, Georges  Peter  of  France,  and  representa- 
tives of  four  tin-producing  countries  (Belgian 
Congo,  Bolivia,  British  Colonial  and  Dependent 
Territories,  and  Indonesia)  and  four  tin-consum- 
ing countries  (Canada,  India,  United  Kingdom, 
and  United  States),  all  of  which  are  also  repre- 
sented in  the  International  Tin  Study  Group. 

•  Mr.  Nichols,  author  of  the  above  article,  is 
a  special  assistant  in  the  Office  of  International 
Materials  Policy  and  is  U.S.  representative  in  the 
Management  Committee  of  the  International  Tin 
Study  Group.  He  has  been  the  U.S.  delegate  to 
meetings  of  the  International  Tin  Study  Group 
since  19Jf9  and  ivas  chairman  of  the  U.S.  delega- 
tion to  the  1950  U.N.  Conference  on  Tin  at  Geneva. 


Communiques  Regarding  Korea 
to  the  Security  Council 

The  Headquarters  of  the  U.  N.  Command  has 
transmitted  communiques  regarding  Korea  to  the 
Security-General  of  the  United  Nations  under  the 
followino-  U.  N.  document  numbers:  S/2945, 
Mar.  4;  S/2945,  Mar.  6;  S/2946,  Mar.  6;  S/2950, 
Mar.  9 ;  S/2951/Corr.  1,  Mar.  10 ;  S/2952,  Mar.  11 ; 
S/2953,  Mar.  12;  S/2955,  Mar.  12;  S/2958,  Mar. 
16;  S/2959,  Mar.  16;  S/2960,  Mar.  18;  S/2961, 
Mar.  19;  S/2962,  Mar.  23;  S/2964,  Mar.  23; 
S/2966,  Mar.  26;  S/2969,  Mar.  31;  S/2973,  Mar. 
31 ;  S/2976,  Apr.  1 ;  S/2977,  Apr.  2 ;  S/2984,  Apr.  8. 

725 


Documents  on  Korean  Armistice  Negotiations 


Summary  of  May  2  Plenary  Meeting 

1.  Delegations  reconvened  1100  hours  this  date.  Sub- 
stanoe  of  record  follows : 

2.  Communists:  "I  have  a  statement  to  make.  In  your 
statement  of  yesterday  you  mentioned  the  procedure  of 
the  current  negotiations.  According  to  the  nature  of  the 
questions,  our  side  considers  that  the  procedure  of  the 
negotiations  should  be  to  decide  upon  first  the  principle 
of  sending  to  a  neutral  nation  those  prisoners  of  war  not 
directly  repatriated  and  then  the  nomination  of  the  specific 
neutral  nations. 

"Your  side  has  already  been  informed  that  with  the 
prerequisite  of  sending  to  the  neutral  nation  those  prison- 
ers of  war  not  directly  repatriated,  our  side  is  prepared  to 
nominate  an  Asian  neutral  nation. 

"Your  side  indicated  yesterday  that  aside  from  Switzer- 
land you  would  also  consider  Sweden.  With  regard  to 
this  I  would  like  to  point  out  again  that  our  side  fully 
agrees  that  the  neutral  nations  constituting  the  neutral 
nations'  supervisory  commission  agreed  upon  by  both  sides 
are  all  neutral  nations.  But  the  essence  of  the  question 
is  that  under  the  principle  of  sending  to  a  neutral  nation 
those  prisoners  of  war  not  directly  repatriated,  it  is  ob- 
viously impractical  to  send  them  to  Europe  which  is  far, 
far  away.     The  reasons  should  be  very  clear. 

"Among  those  neutral  nations  agreed  upon  by  both  sides 
for  constituting  the  neutral  nations'  supervisory  commis- 
sion there  are  Poland  and  Czechoslovakia  in  addition  to 
Switzerland  and  Sweden.  Would  your  side  agree  to  send- 
ing to  Switzerland,  Sweden,  Poland,  and  Czechoslovakia 
those  prisoners  of  war  not  directly  repatriated? 

"With  the  prerequisite  of  sending  to  a  neutral  nation 
these  prisoners  of  war  not  directly  repatriated,  our  side 
holds  that  both  sides  should  consult  with  each  other  and 
decide  upon  an  Asian  neutral  nation. 

"Your  side  said  that  an  Asian  neutral  nation  was  not 
suitable.  Our  side  does  not  agree  to  such  an  assertion. 
There  are  many  neutral  nations  in  Asia,  such  as  India, 
Burma,  Indonesia,  and  Pakistan.  Can  you  possibly  say 
that  these  neutral  nations  are  not  suitable? 

"Your  side  has  requested  our  side  to  nominate  a  specific 
neutral  nation.  Our  side  is  not  unwilling  to  do  so,  but 
our  side  considers  it  inappropriate  to  proceed  with  the 
specific  nomination  before  the  principle  of  sending  to  a 
neutral  nation  those  prisoners  of  war  not  directly  re- 
patriated is  decided  upon. 

"If  our  side  nominates  a  neutral  nation  where  those 
prisoners  of  war  not  directly  repatriated  will  be  sent  for 
accommodation  while  your  side  refused  to  decide  upon 
the  principle  of  sending  them  to  a  neutral  nation,  would 
this  not  put  the  neutral  nation  which  has  been  nominated 
in  an  embarrassing  position? 

"Therefore,  our  side  holds  that  both  sides  should  first 
decide  upon  the  principle  of  sending  to  the  neutral  nations 
those  prisoners  of  war  not  directly  repatriated.  As  to 
your  objection  to  sending  those  prisoners  of  war  not  di- 
rectly repatriated  to  a  neutral  nation,  your  side  has  failed 
to  give  any  tenable  reason. 

726 


"In  the  interest  of  the  progress  of  the  negotiations  we 
hold  that  the  principle  of  sending  to  a  neutral  nation 
those  prisoners  of  war  not  directly  repatriated  should 
immediately  be  decided  upon. 

"I  would  like  to  hear  any  constructive  views  of  your 
side." 

3.  Unc  :  "Your  statement  this  morning  indicates  a  re- 
turn to  your  negotiating  methods  of  our  earlier  sessions 
which  terminated  in  futility  last  October.  For  example, 
you  have  just  asserted  that  we  said  that  we  rejected  an 
Asian  state  as  the  neutral.  That,  of  course,  is  not  a  true 
statement.  Since  we  said  no  such  thing  and  did  so  in  3 
languages,  English,  Korean,  and  Chinese,  we  cannot  see 
how  you  could  make,  other  than  deliberately,  the  untrue 
statement  we  have  just  heard  from  you. 

"You  should  know  that  such  misstatements  cannot  in 
any  way  help  in  the  reconciliation  of  our  different  posi- 
tions in  these  negotiations. 

"I  note  also  a  second  point  in  your  statement  which  ap- 
pears to  be  illogical.  If  I  understood  you  accurately,  it 
was  to  the  efl:ect  that  it  might  be  embarrassing  to  the  neu- 
tral selected  if  we  do  not  agree  as  a  prerequisite  to  trans- 
portation of  the  prisoners  to  the  territory  of  that  country. 
We  cannot  understand  why  this  should  be  unless  you  have 
already  a  prearranged  understanding  to  that  effect  with 
the  country  you  propose  to  nominate." 

4.  Communists:  "Please  repeat  that  again." 
(Last  paragraph  above  repeated.) 

5.  Unc  :  "In  that  case  we  can  well  understand  that  you, 
rather  than  the  neutral,  would  be  embarrassed  if  we  do 
not  agree  to  send  the  prisoners  to  that  country.  Further, 
we  cannot  see  why  a  true  neutral  could  not  perform  its 
functions  in  Korea  as  well  as  elsewhere. 

"In  this  connection,  you  have  stated  that  the  essence  of 
the  problem  is  that  it  is  'impractical  to  send  the  prisoners 
to  Europe  which  is  far,  far  away.'  With  this  sentiment 
I  can  well  agree.  It  is  in  fact  impractical  to  transport  the 
prisoners  overseas.  The  only  practical  solution  is  for  the 
neutral  nation  to  take  custody  in  Korea. 

"Resuming  these  talks  on  the  basis  of  your  suggestion 
that  the  prisoners  who  are  the  subject  of  this  discussion 
be  turned  over  to  a  neutral  power  for  disposition,  our 
side  sought  agreement  initially  on  Switzerland  as  the  cus- 
todial neutral  and  later  on  Sweden.  Both  are  prominent 
neutrals. 

"In  its  external  relations  Switzerland  has  maintained 
an  absolute  neutrality  for  150  years.  It  has  no  alliances 
with  other  powers;  has  not  even  joined  the  United  Na- 
tions. Internally,  it  is  unified  and  tranquil.  Thus,  its 
government  is  not  subject  to  pressure  from  without  or 
from  within.  Its  government  is  long  established  and  has 
developed  a  high  level  of  competence  in  its  administra- 
tive ofiicials.  Its  economic,  political,  and  social  welfare 
situation  has  been  such  that  it  could  participate  in 
benevolent  activities  in  all  parts  of  the  world  without 
unfavorable  results  to  its  own  people  through  the  diver- 
sion of  effort  and  resources  from  its  domestic  problems. 

"For  these  reasons,  Switzerland  has  frequently  been 
requested  to  serve  in  the  role  of  an  impartial  third  party 
in  disputes  between  nations.     It  has  responded  to  such 

Deparimenf  of  Sfate   Bulletin 


requests  on  numerous  occasions,  and  it  has  always  given 
\n  exact  performance  of  the  duties  so  undertaljen.  As 
1  byproduct  it  has  built  up  a  fund  of  experience  in 
5uch  matters.  Perhaps  the  major  portion  of  such  dis- 
Dutes  have  involved  the  treatment  of  war  prisoners.  As 
a  result,  Switzerland  has  personnel  who  are  better  quali- 
,fied  to  deal  with  this  problem  than  could  be  found 
■slsewhere.  „    ., 

••In  respect  to  the  current  problem,  Switzerland  is  geo- 
graphically far  removed  from  the  area  of  conflict,  which 
further  insures  the  objectivity  of  its  approach  to  problems 
that  mav  have  been  engendered  by  that  war. 

"In  brief,  no  one  could  possibly  name  a  country  better 
qualified  to  serve  in  the  role  of  custodial  neutral  in  the 
current  situation  than  Switzerland.  If  another  country 
could  be  named,  it  would  be  Sweden,  whose  qualifications 
tor  handling  this  problem  differ  only  slightly  from  those  of 
Switzerland  in  that  it  is  a  member  of  the  thiited  Nations. 
In  all  other  aspects,  both  internal  and  external,  Sweden 
and  Switzerland  are  equally  qualified  to  serve  in  the  role 
of  custodial  neutral.  Both  are  preeminently  qualified. 
Either  is  acceptable  to  our  side. 

"Neither  would  it  be  necessary  to  transport  the  pris- 


oners to  either  of  these  countries.  With  you,  we  consider 
it  undesirable  and  the  reason  applies  to  all  o\erseas 
movement  of  the  prisoners.  In  any  such  case  tlie  Pris- 
oners would  require  movement  to  a  port,  loading  on 
ships  overseas  movement,  unloading  at  the  port  ot  the 
neutral  state,  transportation  to  the  actual  site  of  cus- 
tody. In  essence  the  only  difference  between  the  move- 
ment vou  say  is  impracticable  and  the  one  you  demand 
is  a  short  period  of  actual  travel  on  the  sea.  Yet  you 
would  make  these  few  days  a  vital  matter.  The  only 
reasonable  solution  is  to  keep  the  prisoners  m  Korea 
during  the  period  of  custody. 

'•To  facilitate  progress  in  these  negotiations,  you  wiu 
recognize  the  validity  of  these  arguments  and  join  us  in 
a  request  to  one  of  these  two  nations  to  serve  as  the 
custodian  of  those  prisoners  who,  while  in  the  custody  of 
the  detaining  power,  fail  to  avail  themselves  of  their  right 
to  be  repatriated.  j-/i„f„ 

"We  are  prepared  to  hear  the  name  of  your  candidate 
for  the  neutral  state.  If  you  are  not  yet  ready  to  give 
us  that  name  we  see  no  value  in  further  discussion  today. 

6  Communists:  "Today  also  your  side  has  not  shown 
any  effort  for  expediting  the  progress  of  the  negotiations. 


Text  of  Communists'  Proposal  for  Settling  Prisoner  Question 

Fouowino  is   the   te<vt   of   the   proposal  presented  ly  the  chief  Communist  delepate,  General 
Nam  II,  at  Panmunjom  on  May  7; 


(1)  Within  2  months  after  the  armistice 
agreement  becomes  effective,  both  sides  shall, 
without  offering  any  hindrance,  repatriate 
and  hand  over  in  groups  all  those  prisoners  of 
war  who  insist  upon  repatriation  to  the  side 
to  which  the  prisoners  of  war  belong,  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  related  provisions  of  para- 
graph 51,  Article  3  of  the  armistice  agreement 
and  in  conformity  with  the  final  names  lists 
exchanged  and  checked  by  both  sides. 

(2)  In  order  to  facilitate  the  return  to 
their  homelands  of  the  remaining  prisoners 
of  war  who  are  not  directly  repatriated,  both 
sides  agree  that  a  neutral  nations  repatriation 
commission  shall  be  established,  to  be  com- 
posed of  an  equal  number  of  representatives 
appointed  respectively  by  5  nations,  namely, 
Poland,  Czechoslovakia,  Switzerland  and 
Sweden,  the  4  nations  provided  for  in  para- 
graph 37,  Article  2  of  the  armistice  agreement, 
ami  India  as  agreed  upon  by  both  sides. 

(3)  All  prisoners  of  war  of  both  sides,  with 
the  exception  of  those  prisoners  of  war  who 
shall  be  directly  repatriated  as  provided  for 
in  paragraph  1  of  this  proposal,  shall  be  re- 
leased from  the  military  control  and  custody 
of  the  detaining  side  at  the  original  places  of 
detention  and  be  handed  over  to  the  neutral 
nations  repatriation  commission,  provided  for 
in  paragraph  2  of  this  proposal,  which  shall 
receive  them  and  take  them  into  custody.  The 
neutral  nations  repatriation  commission  shall 
have  the  authority  to  exercise  its  legitimate 
functions  and  responsibilities  for  the  control 
ot  the  prisoners  of  war  under  its  temporary 
jurisdiction.  In  order  to  ensure  the  effective 
execution  of  this  authority,  the  member  na- 
tions of  the  neutral  nations  repatriation  com- 
mission shall  each  provide  an  equal  number 
of  armed  forces. 

(4)  The  neutral  nations  repatriation  com- 
mission, after  having  received  and  taken  into 
custody  those  prisoners  of  war  who  are  not 
directly  repatriated,  shall  immediately  make 


arrangements  so  that  within  the  time  limit  of 
4  mouths  after  the  neutral  nations  re- 
patriation commission  takes  over  the  custody, 
the  nations  to  which  the  prisoners  of  war 
belong  shall  have  freedom  and  facilities  to 
send  personnel  to  the  original  places  of  de- 
tention of  these  prisoners  of  war  to  explain 
to  all  the  prisoners  of  war  depending  upon 
these  nations  so  as  to  eliminate  their  ap- 
prehensions and  to  inform  them  of  all  matters 
relating  to  their  return  to  their  homelands, 
particularly  of  their  full  right  to  return  home 
to  lead  a  peaceful  life. 

(5)  Within  4  months  after  the  neutral  na- 
tions repatriation  commission  receives  and 
takes  into  custody  the  prisoners  of  war,  and 
after  tlie  explanations  made  by  the  nations 
to  which  they  belong,  the  speedy  return  to 
their  fatherlands  of  all  those  prisoners  of  war 
who  request  repatriation  shall  be  facilitated 
by  the  neutral  nations  repatriation  commis- 
sion, and  the  detaining  side  shall  not  offer  any 
obstruction.  The  administrative  details  for 
the  repatriation  of  such  prisoners  of  war  shall 
be  settled  through  consultation  between  the 
neutral  nations  repatriation  commission  and 

the  sides.  „    ,,     ,.        ,-    ... 

(6)  If,  at  the  expiration  of  the  time  limit 
of  4  months  as  provided  in  paragraph  4  and  5 
of  this  proposal,  there  are  still  prisoners  of 
war  in  the  custody  of  the  neutral  nations 
repatriation  commission,  their  disposition 
shall  lie  submitted  for  settlement  through 
consultation  to  the  political  conference  as  pro- 
vided in  paragraph  60,  Article  4  of  the  armis- 
tice agreement. 

(7)  All  the  expenditures  of  the  prisoner  of 
war  during  the  period  in  the  custody  of  the 
neutral  nations  repatriation  commission,  in- 
cluding their  traveling  expenses  in  returning 
to  their  fatherlands,  shall  be  borne  by  the 
nations  to  which  they  belong. 

(S)  The  terms  of  this  proposal  and  the 
arrangements  arising  therefrom  shall  be  made 
known  to  all  prisoners  of  war. 


May   18,   1953 


727 


I  hope  your  side  will  make  such  efforts.  Our  side  has 
clearly  shown  its  stand.  I  proi)o.se  to  recess  until  1100 
hours,  May  4." 

7.  TiNc:  "If  agreeable  to  you,  Admiral  Daniel  requests 
your  liaison  group  to  remain  for  scheduled  meeting.  We 
agree  to  rc<ess  until  1100  hours,  4  May." 

8.  Communixt.i:  "In  order  to  hold  the  liaison  group's 
meeting,  Major  (Jeneral  Loe  Sang  Jo  will  remain." 

9.  Meeting  adjourned  at  1205  hours. 


Summary  of  May  4  Plenary  Meeting 

1.  Delegations  reconvened  at  1100  hours  this  date. 
Substance  of  record  follows. 

2.  Unc  :  "I  have  a  statement  to  make. 

"We  are  obliged  to  tell  you  once  again  that  we  will  not 
engage  in  protracted  and  fruitless  discussion  during  the 
current  negotiations. 

"Since  our  return  here  8  days  ago  we  have  heard  you 
submerge,  under  a  variety  of  obstructive  provisions,  the 
essentially  simple  and  constructive  principle  under  which 
we  agreed  to  resume  these  talks — that  those  prisoners 
who  refused  to  be  repatriated  be  turned  over  to  a  neutral 
power  for  disposition. 

"It  is  obvious  that  the  first  matter  to  be  explored, 
in  connection  with  a  principle  such  as  this,  is  the  matter 
of  the  custodial  neutral.  Consequently,  our  side,  in  a 
forthright  manner,  proposed  that  Switzerland  be  requested 
to  serve  in  this  capacity.  We  cited  its  qualifications 
which  cannot  be  equalle<l.  When  your  side  refused  to 
agree  to  Switzerland,  we  proposed  Sweden,  and  we  cited 
its  outstanding  qualifications  for  the  custodial  role.  By 
contrast,  your  side  has  refused  even  to  name  a  neutral. 
You  have  indicated  only  a  geographical  area  from  which 
a  neutral  might  be  selected.  What  can  be  your  motive  for 
conducting   these  negotiations   in   this   obscure  manner? 

"You  have  said  that  the  neutral  must  be  an  Asian  na- 
tion. Since  the  essential  qualifications  of  the  country  to 
take  custody  of  the  prisoners  are  its  neutrality  and  com- 
petence, we  fail  to  see  that  its  geographical  location  is 
relevant.  Nevertheless  you  insist  on  that  requirement, 
you  appear  to  have  even  further  limited  the  field  for 
selection.  In  our  meeting  of  Saturday,  2  May,  you  asked 
us  a  question.  It  was,  'There  are  many  neutral  nations 
in  Asia,  such  as  India,  Burma,  Indonesia,  and  Pakistan. 
Can  you  possibly  say  that  these  neutral  nations  are  not 
suitable?' 

"Unless  your  question  was  intended  to  serve  nothing 
more  than  purposes  of  propaganda,  we  must  assume  that 
you  consider  each  of  the  4  countries  which  you  named  to  be 
both  neutral  and  competent  and,  therefore,  suitable.  It 
is  possible,  of  course,  that  you  may  have  a  particular  one  of 
them  in  mind  for  your  candidate,  but  since  you  have  been 
either  unprepared  or  unwilling  to  name  it,  we  have  had  to 
take  the  initiative  in  this  matter  in  the  furtherance  of  an 
armistice.  In  our  sincere  effort  to  achieve  an  agreement 
which  will  insure  a  just  disposition  of  the  prisoners,  we 
are  prepared  to  meet  you  half  way  in  the  matter  of  the 
neutral  nation.  Although  we  have  previously  nominated 
Switzerland  and  Sweden,  we  are  now  prepared  to  nominate 
one  of  the  four  countries  which  you  have  named.  Based 
on  your  statements,  we  expect  that  our  nomination  will 
be  quite  acceptable  to  .vou  and  will  result  in  quick  agree- 
ment on  this  issue.  If  so.  then  this  will  have  been  the 
first  indication  since  these  talks  began  that  there  may  be 
some  justification  in  our  agreement  to  meet  with  you 
again.  We  hope  that  this  indication  may  not  be  nullified 
by  subsequent  negotiations. 

"We  now  nominate  Pakistan,  an  Asian  nation  both 
neutral  and  coniX)etent,  and  one  of  the  four  whose  suita- 
bility you  obviously  implied  in  your  question  to  us. 
Now  we  expect  you  to  demonstrate  your  sincerity  by 
agreeing  to  have  this  power  serve  as  custodial  neutral." 

3.  ComniunistH:  "I  have  a  statement  to  make. 

"Our  side  holds  that  those  prisoners  of  war  not  directly 
repatriated  should  be  sent  to  a  neutral  nation  so  that 


they  can  be  completely  freed  from  the  influence  of  the 
detaining  side.  With  this  as  a  prerequisite,  our  side  has 
already  indicated  that  our  side  Is  prepared  to  nominate 
an  Asian  neutral  nation. 

"It  must  be  pointed  out  that  there  is  a  vast  difference 
between  the  situation  of  sending  the.se  prisoners  of  war 
to  a  neutral  nation  and  that  of  keeping  them  in  Korea. 
Our  concrete  proposal  for  sending  to  a  neutral  nation 
those  prisoners  of  war  not  directly  repatriated  is  reason- 
able, practical,  and  concrete. 

"Our  proposal  provides  that  the  detaining  side  should  be 
responsible  for  sending  those  prisoners  of  war  not  directly 
repatriated  to  a  neutral  nation  concerned  agreed  upon 
by  both  sides  and  release  them  from  its  military  control. 
The  authorities  of  the  neutral  nations  shall  then  receive 
them  and  take  them  into  custody  in  an  area  designated 
by  such  authorities.  Our  j)roposal  also  provides  that  the 
authorities  of  the  neutral  nation  concerned  should  have 
the  authority  to  exercise  their  legitimate  functions  and 
responsibilities  for  control  of  the  prisoners  of  war  under 
their  temporary  jurisdiction. 

"When  the  prisoners  of  war  not  directly  repatriated  are 
sent  to  a  neutral  nation  agreed  upon  by  both  sides  and 
released  from  the  military  control  of  the  detaining  side 
to  the  custody  of  that  neutral  nation,  then  the  question 
of  forcible  retention  by  the  detainins  side  when  its  mili- 
tary control  [is  removed]  will  not  arise.  Therefore,  our 
proposal  is  reasonable. 

"On  the  other  hand,  the  authorities  of  the  neutral 
nation  shall  have  the  authority  to  exercise  their  legiti- 
mate functions  and  resp<jnsibilities  for  the  control  of  the 
prisoners  of  war  under  their  temporary  jurisdiction.  For 
instance,  they  .shall  place  necessary  armed  forces  to  keep 
guard  on  such  prisoners  of  war.  A  practical  question 
which  must  be  settled  is  thus  settled.  Therefore,  our 
proposal  is  practical.  Your  side  has  never  given  any 
tenable  reason  for  opposing  the  reasonable  and  practical 
proposal  of  our  side. 

"Your  side  objects  to  sending  to  a  neutral  nation  those 
prisoners  of  war  not  directly  repatriated  and  proposes  to 
keep  such  prisoners  of  war  in  their  original  places  within 
the  detaining  side,  using  the  existing  installations  which 
would  be  demilitarized.  But  If  such  prisoners  of  war 
were  not  sent  to  a  neutral  nation,  how  could  the  military 
control  of  the  detaining  side  concretely  be  thoroughly  re- 
moved so  as  to  free  the  prisoners  of  war  completely  from 
the  influence  of  the  detaining  side?  And  how  could  It 
be  possible  at  the  same  time  to  enable  the  neutral  nation 
to  effectively  take  charge  of  such  prisoners  of  war  and 
maintain  order  at  the  locations  where  they  are  to  be 
accommodated  ? 

"Our  proposal  provides  that  after  the  arrival  in  a 
neutral  nation  of  those  prisoners  of  war  not  directly  re- 
patri.ited.  the  nations  to  which  they  belong  shall  send 
I>ersonnel  to  make  explanations  to  all  the  prisoners  of  war 
depending  upon  them,  and  that  the  authorities  of  the 
neutral  nation  concerned  shall  be  responsible  for  facilitat- 
ing the  speedy  return  to  their  fatherland  of  all  those  pris- 
oners of  war  who  request  to  be  repatriated  home. 

"The  provisions  of  our  proposal  are  so  reasonable  and 
explicit  that  your  side  has  failed  to  give  any  reasons  for 
objecting  to  it.  The  contradiction  between  the  2  state- 
ments made  by  your  side  on  this  question  at  the  plenary 
session  of  26  April  only  confirms  us  in  this  impression  of 
ours. 

"It  is  the  concrete  proix)sal  for  effecting  a  settlement 
of  the  entire  question  of  the  prisoners  of  war  that  our  2 
sides  are  discussing  now." 

4.  Unc  :  "You  have  again  failed  to  name  your  candidate 
for  the  neutral  nation.  After  all  the  effort  our  side  has 
made  to  reach  an  equitable  compromise  on  this  issue,  even 
nominating  one  of  the  Asian  states  indicated  by  you  as 
suitable,  the  continued  evasion  by  your  side  can  only  be 
considered  as  inspired  by  motives  other  than  those  of 
reaching  an  equitiible  agreement. 

"Time  in  these  discussions  is  fast  running  out.  Are 
you  prepared  to  accept  Pakistan  as  the  neutral  nation? 
If  not,  we  have  no  other  issue  to  discuss  with  you." 


728 


Deparfment  of  State   Bulletin 


5  Communists:  "Our  side  holds  that  those  prisoners  of 
icar  not  directly  repatriated  should  be  sent  to  a  neutral 
fation  agreed  upon  by  both  sides.  Our  side  has  indicated 
'learly  many  times  that  with  this  prerequisite  our  side 
rurenared  to  nominate  an  Asian  neutral  nation.  Our 
ide  ^till  considers  that  both  sides  should  first  decide  upon 
he  principle  of  sending  those  prisoners  of  war  not  di- 
rectly repatriated  to  a  neutral  nation,  then  proceed  with 
'  he  nomination  of  a  si>eciflc  neutral  nation. 

"On  this  question,  our  side  has  repeatedly  made  clear 
he  position  of  our  side.     I  consider  it  unnecessary  to  re- 

fpriito  it  ■ 

"I  hope  that  vour  side  will  carefully  study  my  state- 

nent.     I  propose  that  we  recess  until  11  o'clock  tomorrow 

norning." 
G.  Unc:  "We  agree." 
7.  Meeting  recessed  at  1140  hours. 


Nummary  of  May  5  Plenary  Meeting 

1.  Delegations  reconvened  at  1100  hours  this  date.  Sub- 
stance of  meeting  follows. 
2  Communists:  "I  have  a  statement  to  make. 
"Our  side  has  noted  that  your  side  has  nominated 
Pakistan  to  serve  as  the  neutral  nation.  Our  side  has 
consistently  held  that  with  the  prerequisite  of  sending 
to  a  neutral  nation  those  prisoners  of  war  not  directly 
repatriated,  both  sides  decide  upon  an  Asian  neutral 
nation.  .    .  »•       i,„ 

"Your  side  agreed  yesterday  that  an  Asian  nation  be 
named  to  serve  as  the  neutral  nation  and  specifically 
nominated  Pakistan.    This  action  is  worth  welcoming. 

••I  would  like  to  know  whether  your  side  has  agreed 
to  transport  to  that  neutral  nation  the  remaining  prison- 
ers of  war  not  directly  repatriated  so  as  to  implement 
the  six-point  proposal  put  forward  by  our  side.  We  hope 
that  your  side  will  clarify  this  question." 

3  Unc  '  "We  consider  that  the  designation  of  the  cus- 
todian is  a  primary  element  of  the  principle  of  custodian- 
ship bv  a  neutral  power.  Our  side  has  tried  diligently 
to  reach  agreement  on  this  matter  and  we  have  at  various 
times  nominated  three  neutral  states,  one  of  which  you 
previously  indicated  would  be  acceptable  to  you.  Are  you 
willing  to  solve  this  problem  or  not? 

"If  I  have  understood  vour  question  correctly,  you  have 
iust  asked  if  we  agree  that  the  prisoners  of  war  not 
directlv  repatriated  shall  be  physically  transported  to 
the  territory  of  the  neutral  country  where  that  country 
will  exercise  its  custodial  functions.  If  this  is  your  ques- 
tion, the  answer  is  'no.' 

"A.S  to  the  place  of  custody,  there  can  be  no  real  prob- 
lem*    The  neutral  state  must  take  custody,  withm  de- 
militarized areas  of  Korea,  of  those  prisoners  who  have 
not  been  directly  repatriated.     To  transport  these  manj 
thousands  of  prisoners  overseas  is  entirely  unnecessary 
to  the  purpose  of  the  custody.    It  would  be  time  consum- 
ing and  would  needlessly  delay  the  final  solution  of  the 
problem.     Moreover,  the  prisoners  could  not  be  moved 
prior  to  the  resolution  of  their  status  without  force,  and 
many  would  destroy  themselves  rather  than  submit  to 
removal  from  Korea.    In  the  face  of  these  facts  and  your 
own  recognition  that  transportation  of  the  prisoners  to 
a  distantland  is  impractical,  your  side  might  well  spare 
itself  the  efifort  of  continuing  to  advocate  that  unaccept- 
able course  of  action."  ,,■,,„„ 
4    Communists:   "The   important   question   which   con- 
fronts the  delegations  of  both  sides  at  present  is  whether 
those  prisoners  of  war  not  directly  repatriated  shall  be 
sent  to  a  neutral  nation  or  be  kept  in  Korea  to  be  taken 
into  custody   there   by   a   neutral   nation.     These   are   ^ 
fundamentally  different  situations,  and  they  require  en- 
tirely different  concrete  arrangements. 

"Our  side  has  consistently  held  that  those  prisoners  of 
war  not  directly  repatriated  shall  be  sent  to  a  neutml 
nation  and  has  objected  to  keeping  them  in  Korea.  We 
consider  it  the  most  reasonable  and  practical  measure 
to  send  them  to  a  neutral  nation.     Your  side  has  held 


May   18,   1953 


that  they  should  be  taken  into  custody  in  Korea  by  a 
neutral  nation  and  has  specifically  nominated  Pakistan 
to  take  them  into  custody  in  Korea.  We  should  like  to 
know  what  steps  your  side  would  take  to  remove  the  mili- 
tary control  of  the  detaining  side  so  as  to  free  the  pris- 
oners of  war  from  its  influence?  How  would  your  side 
at  the  same  time  enable  the  neutral  nation  which  your 
side  has  nominated  to  effectively  take  charge  of  the  pris- 
oners of  war  whose  number  according  to  your  side  runs 
into  tens  of  thousands?  How  would  your  side  maintain 
order  and  tranquility  in  the  prisoner  of  \v:ir  ciiinps? 
I  hope  that  your  side  will  clarify  these  questions?" 
5.  Unc:  "We  have  noted  your  questions. 
"We  consider  that  such  matters  can  be  readily  and 
effectively  solved  in  such  manner  that  custody  can  be 
exercised  efficiently  and  with  due  fairness  to  the  individual 
prisoners  concerned  and  to  our  2  sides. 

"We  have  asked  for  your  nomination  of  a  neutral.  It 
is  obvious  that  since  the  details  about  which  you  have 
asked  can  be  solved  without  serious  difficulty,  it  should 
be  no  real  problem  to  you  to  nominate  a  neutral  to  per- 
form the  custodial  functions.  We  therefore  ask  you  again 
the  name  of  your  nominee. 

"In  order  to  reach  accord  quickly,  we  ask  your  side 
to  agree  to  one  of  our  nominees  if  you  are  not  prepared  to 
make  a  nomination." 

6.  Communists:  "Our  side  considers  that  to  send  pris- 
oners of  war  to  a  neutral  nation  and  to  keep  them  in 
Korea  to  be  taken  into  custody  there  by  a  neutral  nation 
are  2  fundamentally  different  situations  which  require 
entirely  different  concrete  arrangements.  Since  your  side 
has  nominated  Pakistan  to  take  the  prisoners  of  war  into 
its  temporary  custody  in  Korea,  your  side  must  already 
have  your  idea  of  how  Pakistan  shall  perform-  its 
functions. 

"I  cannot  understand  what  necessity  there  is  for  your 
side  not  to  answer  the  simple  question  of  our  side.  What 
concrete  steps  would  your  side  take  to  remove  the  mili- 
tary control  of  the  detaining  side  so  as  to  free  the  pris- 
oners of  war  from  the  influence  of  the  detaining  side? 
How  does  your  side  propose  to  enable  the  neutral  nation 
which  your  side  has  nominated  to  effectively  take  charge 
of  such  prisoners  of  war? 

"Siieciflcally,  does  your  side  intend  to  invite  the  neutral 
nation  to  send  its  armed  forces  to  Korea  for  taking  the 
I)risoners  of  war  into  its  custody?  I  hope  that  your 
side  will  clarify  these  questions." 

7.  Unc  :  "Regardless  of  subsequent  negotiations  as  to 
the  detail's  of  the  arrangements  for  exercise  of  custody, 
that  custody  must  be  exercised  by  a  neutral  nation.  Unless 
we  reach  agreement  on  all  elements  of  the  matter  of  cus- 
tody and  final  disposition  of  the  prisoners,  there  will  not 
be  "an  armistice.  Therefore,  there  is  no  need  to  discuss 
these  details  prior  to  agreement  on  the  neutral  state. 
On  the  other  hand,  the  qualifications  of  the  state  selected 
is  a  primary  consideration  which  affects  all  of  the  other 
details.  Your  evasion  of  the  matter  of  agreeing  on  the 
neutral  merelv  causes  suspicion  as  to  your  motives  in 
view  of  our  efforts  to  meet  you  half-way.  Thi.s  evasion 
has  the  effect  of  making  us  recognize  more  than  ever 
the  importance  of  designating  the  custodial  state  before 
discussing  other  details  of  arrangement. 

"Unless  you  are  prepared  to  accept  one  of  our  nominees 
or  nominate  a  different  one,  we  have  nothing  further  to 

sav." 

8.  Communists:  "Since  your  side  has  nominated  Pakis- 
tan to  serve  as  a  neutral  nation,  we  consider  that  your 
side  has  the  obligation  to  make  it  clear  just  how  to  request 
Pakistan  to  accomplish  its  functions.  Our  side  considers 
that  while  nominating  Pakistan  to  serve  as  a  neutral 
nation  your  side  cannot  refuse  to  make  it  clear  where 
and  what  functions  you  want  this  country  to  perform. 

"Just  as  in  the  past  meetings,  when  either  side  puts 
forward  a  proposal.  It  has  the  obligation  to  clarify  it. 
We  consider  that  it  is  an  important  question  of  principle 
to  release  the  prisoners  of  war  not  directly  repatriated 
from  the  control  of  the  detaining  side  so  that  they  can 
he  freed  from  the  influence  of  the  detaining  side  and 

729 


also  at  the  same  time  to  enable  the  neutral  nation  to 
effectively  take  charge  of  the  prisoners  of  war  and  main- 
tain oriler  in  the  prisoner  of  war  camps. 

"We  would  still  like  to  know  the  concrete  views  of  your 
side  on  the  questions  I  have  put  forward." 

9.  Unc  :  "I  have  nothing  further  to  say." 

10.  Communists:  "I  hope  you  will  give  an  answer  to  my 
questions  tomorrow  morning.  I  suggest  that  we  recess 
until  11  o'clock  tomorrow  morning." 

11.  Unc  :  "We  agree." 

12.  Meeting  recessed  at  1159  hours. 


Summary  of  May  7  Plenary  Meeting 

1.  Delegations    reconvened    at    1100    hours    this    date. 
Substance  of  record  follows. 

2.  Communists:  "I  have  an  important  statement  to  make. 
"In  the  concrete  proposal  for  implementation  which  our 

side  put  forward  on  April  26,  the  disposition  of  the  re- 
maining prisoners  of  war  who  are  not  directly  repatri- 
ated is  based  upon  the  prerequisite  of  sending  them  to  a 
neutral  nation.  But  discussion  in  the  armistice  negoti- 
ations of  the  past  10  days  has  proved  that  your  side  has 
been  trying  to  obscure  this  prerequisite  of  our  side  by  the 
settlement  first  of  the  question  of  the  nomination  of  the 
neutral  nation,  thereby  attempting  to  realize  the  otlier 
prerequisite  which  your  side  has  put  forward,  namely, 
the  prerequisite  of  keeping  in  Korea  the  remaining  prison- 
ers of  war  who  are  not  directly  repatriated  with  the  neu- 
tral nation  coming  to  Korea  to  take  them  into  custody. 
We  consider  that  the  2  prerequisites  mentioned  above 
are  entirely  ditTerent.  Under  different  prerequisites,  there 
should  be  different  proposals  for  disposition.  The  pro- 
posal of  our  side  provides  that  the  Korean  and  Chinese 
prisoners  of  war  who  are  not  directly  repatriated  be  sent 
to  a  neutral  nation,  released  from  the  original  control  of 
your  side,  and  received  and  taken  into  custody  by  that 
neutral  nation  :  that  thereafter,  through  the  explanations 
made  to  them  by  the  personnel  sent  to  that  neutral  nation 
by  our  side,  they  be  freed  from  their  apprehensions  so  that 
it  will  be  possible  for  them  to  express  their  will ;  and  that 
thereafter,  the  authorities  of  the  neutral  nation  concerned 
ensure  that  all  those  prisoners  of  war  who  request  repatri- 
ation be  repatriated  to  their  fatherlands. 

"However,  the  proposal  of  your  side  provides  that  the 
remaining  prisoners  of  war  who  are  not  directly  repatri- 
ated still  be  kept  in  the  area  controlled  by  the  detaining 
side.  This  would  obviously  make  it  impossible  for  such 
prisoners  of  war  to  be  completely  freed  from  the  control 
of  the  detaining  side.  Moreover,  the  neutral  nation  would 
meet  great  difficulties  in  the  area  controlled  by  the  de- 
taining side  in  receiving  and  taking  into  custody  the 
prisoners  of  war,  who  according  to  the  assertion  of  your 
side  are  in  great  numbers.  At  the  same  time,  such  a  situ- 
ation would  not  afford  due  freedom  and  facilities  to  the 
side  concerned  for  its  explanation  work.  Between  these 
2  proposals,  the  proposal  of  our  side  best  embodies  the 
principles  of  the  Geneva  Convention  of  1949  and  inter- 
national practice,  and  can  thus  settle  the  question  of  the 
repatriation  of  prisoners  of  war  justly  and  reasonably. 

"But  in  the  discussions  of  the  past  10  davs.  vourside 
has  obstinately  insisted  upon  the  prerequisite"  of  your  side 
that  the  remaining  prisoners  of  war  not  directly  repatri- 
ated should  still  be  kept  in  Korea,  and  that  a  neutral 
nation  should  come  to  Korea  to  receive  them  and  take  them 
into  custody.  Such  an  obstinate  action  of  your  side  will 
again  hinder  the  realization  of  an  armistice  in  Korea  be- 
cause of  a  question  of  steps  and  procedure.  As  a  result 
the  ardent  desire  for  an  armistice  in  Korea  of  the  people 
of  both  sides  whose  sons  are  fighting  in  Korea  and  of  the 
peace-loving  people  of  the  whole  world,  will  again  receive 
a  blow.  In  view  of  this  fact.  I  now  declare  that  we  will 
continue  to  reserve  the  proposal  put  forward  bv  our  side 
on  April  26.      But  on  condition  that  your  side  accepts  the 

'  Bulletin  of  May  11, 1953,  p.  6S7. 
730 


following  new  proposal  which  our  side  puts  forward  now 
we  are  prepared  to  try  to  adopt  the  prerequisite  of  your 
side  that  the  remaining  prisoners  of  war  not  directly  re- 
patriated be  kept  in  their  original  places  of  detention  and 
be  handed  over  to  a  neutral  nation  which  shall  arrange 
for  tlieir  repatriation.  I  must  point  out  that  the  proposal 
put  forward  on  April  26  by  our  side  is  more  reasonable  as 
compared  to  the  new  one  which  is  based  upon  the  nre- 
requisite  of  your  side. 

"The  contents  of  our  new  proposal  are  as  follows : 

[For  text,  see  p.  727.] 

3.  Unc  :  "We  have  noted  your  proposal.     We  suggest  a 
recess  until  11  o'clock  9  May." 

4.  Communists:  "We  agree." 

5.  Meeting  recessed  at  1126  hours. 


U.S.  Delegations 

to  International  Conferences 

Fiscal  Commission  (ECOSOC) 

The  Fiscal  Commission  of  the  U.N.  Economic  and 
Social  Council  (Ecosoc)  is  scheduled  to  hold  its  fourth 
session  at  New  York,  beginning  on  April  27,  1953 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  April  24  (press 
release  212)  that  Edward  F.  Bartelt,  Fiscal  Assistant 
Secretary,  Department  of  the  Treasury,  who  is  the  U  S 
representative  on  the  Fiscal  Commission,  will  he  assisted 
by  Dan  Throop  Smith,  Assistant  to  the  Secretary  of  the 
Treasury,  who  will  serve  as  principal  adviser,  and  the 
following  other  advisers:  Eldon  King,  Head,  Office  of 
International  Tax  Relations,  Bureau  of  Internal  Revenue 
Department  of  the  Treasury  ;  Frederick  Livesev,  Adviser' 
Office  of  Financial  Development  Policy,  Department  of 
State ;  Raphael  Sherfy,  Legal  Advisory  Staff.  Department 
of  the  Treasury. 

Because  the  economic  development  of  many  areas  of  the 
world  is  dependent  upon  the  flow  of  private  investment 
capital  from  highly  developed  to  underdeveloped  coun- 
tries, the  Commission  will  devote  considerable  attention 
to  problems  relating  to  the  taxation  of  foreign  invest- 
ment, of  corporate  profits  and  dividends,  and  of  foreign 
nationals,  assets,  and  transactions. 

Among  other  items  on  the  agenda  for  the  fourth  session 
are  (1)  world  tax  service;  (2)  taxation  of  agriculture: 
(3)  government  finance  and  economic  development:  (4) 
government  financial  reporting;  (5)  public  finance  in- 
formation service  ;  and  (6)  problems  of  municipal  finance. 

President  Suggests  Study 

of  Immigration  and  Nationality  Act 

FoIIoioing  is  the  text  of  a  letter  dated  April  6 
from  the  President  to  Senator  Arthur  V.  Watkitis, 
chainnan  of  the  Joint  Committee  on  Immigration 
and  Nationality  Policy: 

Dear  Senator  Watkins  : 

Tliank  you  for  3'oiir  letter  of  March  20  inform- 
ing rne  of  the  plan  of  your  subcommittee  to  hold 
hearings  on  several  immigration  bills  now  pend- 
ing before  it.  I  am  particularly  grateful  to  have 
your  assurance  that  you  are  prepared  to  coop- 
erate in  the  formulation  and  implementation  of 
an  immigration  program,  insofar  as  you  can  con- 
sistently do  so. 

It  is  only  proper  to  point  out  to  you  that  I 
have  received  a  great  many  complaints  that  the 
Immigration  and  Nationality  Act  of  1952  does 

Department   of  State   Bulletin 


embody  many  serious  and  inequitable  restrictions. 

Wliile  I  recognize  that  the  act  contains  some 
provisions  which  represent  a  liberalizing  influ- 
ence in  the  field  of  immigration  law  and  that  a 
fundamental  revision  of  a  statute  cannot  be  ap- 
proachetl  without  searching  analysis,  I  suggest 
that  a  study  of  the  operation  of  many  of  the  ad- 
ministrative provisions  of  the  Immigration  and 
Nationality  Act  of  1952  should  be  immediately 
undertaken,  with  an  invitation  to  all  concerned 
to  testify  regarding  the  provisions  of  which  they 
complain. 

In  the  State  of  the  Union  Message  I  pointed 
out  that  "existing  legislation  contains  injustices."  ' 
Among  the  administrative  provisions  of  the  law 
which  it  is  claimed  may  operate  with  unwar- 
ranted harshness  are  the  following: 


The  provisions  which  make  inadmissible  any 
alien  who,  in  the  opinion  of  the  consul,  is  likely 
to  become  a  public  charge  at  any  time  in  the 
future.  This  places  upon  the  consul  the  burden 
of  forecasting  events  which  cannot  be  predicted 
and,  it  is  claimed,  would  permit  abuse  of  discre- 
tionary judgment. 


The  provisions  which  make  ineligible  for  a 
visa  any  alien  with  respect  to  whom  the  consular 
officer  knows  or  has  reasonable  grounds  to  believe 
probably  would,  after  enti-y,  engage  in  espionage, 
sabotage  or  "subversive"  activities.  It  is  asserted 
that  this  provision  vests  in  the  consul  the  author- 
ity, without  restraint,  to  determine  by  his  own 
mental  processes  the  probability  of  future  pro- 
scribed conduct,  thus  permitting  a  possible  abuse 
of  discretionary  judgment. 


The  provision  which  permits  an  immigration 
official  to  interrogate  without  warrant  "any  alien 
or  person  believed  to  be  an  alien  as  to  his  right 
to  be  or  to  remain  in  the  United  States."  It  is 
said  that  unless  the  word  "believed"  is  clarified 
so  as  specifically  to  require  "probable  cause,"  an 
abuse  of  this  authority  could  possibly  subject  any 
citizen  to  improper  interrogation. 

4 

The  provisions  under  which,  it  is  asserted,  nat- 
uralized citizens  have  only  "second  class"  citizen- 
ship because  they,  as  distinguished  from  native- 
born  citizens,  can  be  expatriated  because  of  resi- 
dence abroad  for  certain  periods  of  time,  without 
reference  to  any  other  conduct  on  their  part. 


Xew  I'estriction  upon  granting  leave  to  seamen 
while  ships  are  in  United  States  porta 

'  Bulletin  of  Feb.  9,  1953,  p.  211. 


6 

The  provision  which  exempts  from  the  criminal 
grounds  of  exclusion  those  aliens  who  have  been 
convicted  abroad  of  purely  political  offenses  fails 
to  define  the  term  "political."  It  is  asserted  that 
it  is  therefore  difficult  for  administrative  officers 
to  determine  whether  the  "criminal"  offenses  for 
which  individuals  have  been  convicted  are  indeed 
of  a  criminal,  as  distinguished  from  a  political, 
nature. 

7 

The  provisions  permitting  aliens  who  were  and 
are  believers  in  nazism  and  fascism  to  enter  the 
United  States  unless  it  can  be  affirmatively  shown 
that  they  advocated  the  establishment  of  those 
ideologies  in  the  United  States. 

8 

Deportation  provisions  that  permit  an  alien  to 
be  deported  at  any  time  after  entry,  irrespective 
of  how  long  ago  he  was  involved,  after  entry,  is 
an  activity  or  affiliation  designated  as  "subver- 
sive." Such  alien  is  now  subject  to  deportation 
even  if  his  prior  affiliation  was  terminated  many 
years  ago  and  he  has  since  conducted  himself  as 
a  model  American. 

9 

The  provision  which  authorizes  the  Attorney 
General  to  suspend  deportation  of  certain  de- 
portable aliens  if  "exceptional  and  extremely  ini- 
usual  hardship"  is  demonsti-ated.  It  is  asserted, 
however,  that  these  restrictive  terms  are  not 
explained  in  the  law,  thus  leaving  the  interpreta- 
tion of  the  phrase  open  to  administrative  deter- 
mination, subject  to  Congressional  approval  or 
"veto."  It  is  argued  that  the  law  sliould  more 
clearly  state  the  standards  upon  which  this  dis- 
cretionary relief  may  be  granted  by  the  Attorney 
General. 

10 

The  provisions  which  permit  the  continuation 
of  up  to  a  50  percent  mortgage  extending  far  into 
the  future  on  the  quotas  of  many  countries. 
Under  these  provisions  it  is  charged  that  Estonia 
has  its  quotas  partially  mortgaged  until  the  year 
2146;  2014  for  Greece;  Poland,  the  year  2000,  and 
Turkey,  1964. 

It  would  seem  desirable  for  the  Committee  on 
the  Judiciary  to  investigate  these  complaints  and 
the  other  critical  comments  which  have  developed 
as  a  result  of  the  operation  of  the  Immigration  and 
Naturalization  Law  of  1952  with  a  view  to  achiev- 
ing legislation  which  would  be  fair  and  just  to 
all.  I  shall  appreciate  it  if  you  will  present  these 
comments  to  the  members  of  the  committee  and 
to  the  chairman  of  the  Senate  Committee  on  the 
Judiciary. 

Sincerely, 

DwiGHT  D.  Eisenhower. 


May   18,    1953 


731 


May  11,  1953 


Ind 


ex 


Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  725 


Agriculture 

International     wheat     agreement     signed     at 

Washington 714 

American  Principles 

A  new  look  at  our  foreign  policy  (Smith)   .     .     .  703 

Areas  for  deeds,  not  words  (Dulles) 706 

Registering  public  opinion  (Foster) 712 

American  Republics 

Maintaining  mutually  advantageous  trade  with 

Latin  American   (Cale) 716 

Asia 

CHINA:  U.S.  properties  on  Chinese  mainland  .     .       722 
Developments    in    Laos,    Thailand,    and    Korea 

(Dulles) 708 

JAPAN: 

Anniversary     message     on     Japanese     peace 

treaty 721 

Notlflcation  regarding  prewar  agreements  with 

Japan 721 

KOREA: 

Communiques  regarding  Korea  to  the  Security 

Council 725 

Documents  on  Korean  armistice  negotiations  .       726 
Text  of  Communists'  proposal  for  settling  pris- 
oner   question 727 

LAOS:  "Free  Lao  Movement"  leader 709 

PAKISTAN:  The  Reed  Mission 723 

THAILAND:    Takes    measures    to   maintain   se- 
curity       709 

Australia 

Tax   treaty   negotiations  - 723 

Claims  and  Property 

U.S.  properties  on  Chinese  mainland 722 

U.S.    terminates    further    vesting    of    German 

property 720 

Communism 

Areas  for  deeds,  not  words  (Dulles) 706 

Developments    in    Laos,    Thailand,    and    Korea 

(Dulles) 708 

Congress 

Current  legislation   on  foreign   policy   ....       723 
President   suggests   study   of   Immigration   and 

Nationality  Act 730 

World  Trade  Week,  1953  (Presidential  proclama- 
tion)    716 

Check  List  of  Department  of  State 
Press  Releases:  May  4-9, 1953 

RelHa.ses  may  be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  tbe 
Special  Assistant  for  Press  Relations,  Department 
of  State,  Washington  23,  D.  C. 

Press  releases  issuefi  prior  to  May  4  which  api)ear 
in  this  issue  of  the  Bitlletis  are  Nos.  202  of  Apr.  20, 
211  of  Apr.  24,  212  of  Apr.  24,  217  of  Apr.  27,  218 
of  Apr.  27.  210  of  Apr.  27,  220  of  Apr.  28,  222  of  Apr. 
2S.  224  of  Apr.  29.  and  227  of  May  1. 
No.       Date  Subject 

2:i.">     .T/4     Rumania  :  Letter  of  credence 

2:i6    5/4     Egypt :  Letter  of  credence 

237     5/4     Lebanon  :  Letter  of  credence 
t2.39     5/4     Linder :  Resignation 
t240     5/4     German  documents.  1918^5 
t241     5/5     Dulles:  Msp  program 

242    5/5     Present  situation  in  Laos 
t24.S     5/5     World  Health  Assembly 
*244     5/5     Death  of  Tliurinan  Barnard 

245    r,/6    Threat  to  Thai  security 
t246     5/6     Committee  on  iierformance  (IcAO) 

247     !5/7    Dulles :  International  situation 
*24S    .5/7    Death  of  Edward  Torbert 

249    5/8     Smith  :  A  new  look  at  U.S.  foreign  policy 

2.50     5/8     Dulles  :  I  icparture  for  Near  East 
1251     5/8     Rubber  study  group 

252     .5/9     Secretary's  trip 

2."i;!     5/9     Dulles:  Laos.  Thailand  developments 

254    .5/9    Dulles :  Laos,  Thailand,  Korean  truce 
t255     .5/9    Greek  problems  discussed 
*Not  printed, 
tlleld  for  a  later  issue  of  the  Bulletin. 


Europe 

E^irope  strives  for  unity  (Cox) 710 

GERMANY:   U.S.  terminates  further  vesting  of 

German   property 720 

OEEC    group,    U.S.    officials    discuss    economic 

problems,  text  of  conmaunique 719 

POLAND:    Anniversary    of    Polish    constitution 

(Dulles)       m 

RUMANIA;  Letter  of  credence 709 

U.S.S.R. :    Soviet   proposal   for   five-power   peace 

pact 714 

Immigration  and  Naturalization 

President   suggests  study   of   Immigration   and 

Nationality  Act 730 

International  Meetings 

International  wheat  agreement  signed  at  Wash- 
ington      714 

The   working   party  of   the   International   Tin 

Study  Group   (Nichols) 724 

U.S.    DELEGATIONS:    Fiscal    Commission 

(Ecosoc) 730 

Mutual  Aid  and  Defense 

Thailand  takes  measures  to  maintain  security    .       709 

Mutual  Security 

A  new  look  at  our  foreign  policy  (Smith)  .     .     .  703 

Europe  strives  for  unity  (Cox) 710 

OEEC    group,    U.S.    officials    discuss    economic 

problems,  text  of  communique 719 

The  Reed  Mission  to  Pakistan 723 

Near  and  Middle  East 

Letters  of  credence  (Egypt,  Lebanon)    ....       709 

Secretary's  visit  to  Near  East  and  South  Asia  .     .       707 

Presidential  Documents 

President  suggests  study  of  Immigration  and 

Nationality  Act 730 

PROCLAMATIONS:   World  Trade  Week,  1953  .     .       716 

Prisoners  of  War 

Documents  on  Korean  armistice  negotiations  .     .       726 
Text  of  Communists'  proposal  for  settling  pris- 
oner   question 727 

State,  Department  of 

Registering  public  opinion  (Foster) 712 

Soviet  proposal  for  five-power  peace  pact  .     .     .      714 

Strategic  Materials 

The   working   party   of   the   International   Tin 

Study  Group  (Nichols) 724 

Taxation 

Tax  treaty  negotiations  with  Australia  ....      723 

Trade 

Maintaining  mutually  advantageous  trade  with 

Latin  America  (Cale) 716 

Treaty  Information 

Anniversary  mesage  on  Japanese  peace  treaty  .     .       721 

International  Wheat  Agreement  signed  at  Wash- 
ington      714 

Notification  regarding  prewar  agreements  with 

Japan 721 

Tax  treaty  negotiations  with  Australia  ....       723 

United  Nations 

Communiques  regarding  Korea  to  the  Security 

Council 725 

Documents  on  Korean  armistice  negotiations  .     .       726 
Fiscal  Commission  (Ecosoc) 730 

Name  Index 

Adenauer.    Chancellor 720 

Bartelt,  Edward  F 730 

Cale.  Edward  G 716 

Cox.  Henry  B 710 

Dulles.  Secretary 706.707,708,709,721 

Eisenhower,  President 716,  720,  731 

Foster.  H.  Schuyler 712 

Hussein.  Ahmed 709 

lonescu.  Marin  Plorea 709 

Malik.  Charles 709 

McDermott.    Michael    J 714 

Nichols.   Clarence   W 724 

Reed.  Harry 723 

Smith.    Under   Secretary 703 

Souphanouvong,  Prince 709 

Stassen,  Harold  E 707 


U.   S.  COVERNMENT  PR1NTIN6  OFFICE;  1953 


J/ie^  ^eha/y£one7i(/  aw  CHa{£^ 


d.  XXVIII,  No.  726 
May  25,  1953 


MUTUAL    SECURITY    PROGRAM    FOR    1954    PRE- 
SENTED TO  CONGRESS: 

Message  of  the  President  to  the  Congress  ....       735 

Statement  by  Secretary  DuUes 736 

Statement  by  Harold  E.  Stassen 740 

GERMAN   LIBRARIES    IN    ITALY    RESTORED    TO 

FORMER  OWNERSHIP 749 

SUPPORT  FOR  EXTENSION  OF  TRADE  AGREE- 
MENTS ACT  •  Statements  by  Secretary  Dulles  and 
Harold  E.   Stassen 743 


For  index  see  back  cover 


Boston  Public  Library 
Superintendent  of  Documents 

JUN18  1953 


'■*T«»   O* 


*.sv.-.-,y*.  bulletin 


Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  726  •  Publication  5060 
May  25,  1953 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents 

D.S.  Government  Printing  Office 

Washington  26,  D.O. 

Peicb: 

(2  issues,  domestic  $7.50,  foreign  $10.26 

Single  copy,  20  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has 
been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Budget  (January  22, 1962). 

Note:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  Items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  Department 
OF  State  Bulletin  as  the  source  wUl  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  BULLETIN, 
a  weekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publications, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  icith  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  work  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETIN  includes 
selected  press  releases  on  foreign  pol- 
icy issued  by  the  White  House  and 
tlie  Department,  and  statements  and 
addresses  made  by  the  President  and 
by  the  Secretary  of  State  and  other 
officers  of  the  Department,  as  well  as 
special  articles  on  various  phases  of 
international  affairs  and  the  func- 
tions of  the  Department.  Informa- 
tion is  included  concerning  treaties 
and  international  agreements  to 
which  the  United  States  is  or  may 
become  a  party  and  treaties  of  gen- 
eral international  interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
well  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  internatiotuil  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


Mutual  Security  Program  for  1954  Presented  to  Congress 


MESSAGE  OF  THE  PRESIDENT 
TO  THE  CONGRESS! 

I  recommend  to  the  Congress  the  passage  of 
legislation  extending  the  Mutual  Security  Pi-o- 
gram  in  order  to  enable  the  United  States  to  carry 
out  its  responsibilities  of  leadership  in  building 
up  the  security  of  the  free  world  and  the  prospects 
for  peace  both  for  ourselves  and  our  allies. 

The  basic  purpose  of  this  program  is  simply  the 
long-term  security  of  the  United  States  living  in 
the  shadow  of  the  Soviet  threat. 

The  program  being  submitted  to  you  includes 
approximately  $5,250  million  for  military  weap- 
ons and  support  directly  to  the  defense  efforts  of 
our  friends  and  allies.  It  also  includes  approxi- 
mately $550  million  for  technical,  economic,  and 
developmental  purposes  designed  to  promote  more 
effective  use  of  the  resources  of  the  free  nations 
and  thus  to  further  the  freedom  and  security  of 
all  of  us.  This  total  rejJresents  a  reduction  of 
about  $1.8  billion  from  the  previous  administra- 
tion's 1954  budget. 

The  devotion  of  so  large  a  portion  of  this  re- 
quest to  military  purposes  is  a  measure  of  the  peril 
in  which  free  nations  continue  to  live.  The  blunt, 
sober  truth  is  that  we  cannot  afford  to  relax  our 
defenses  until  we  have  seen  clear,  unmistakable 
evidence  of  genuinely  peaceful  purpose  on  the 
part  of  the  Soviet  Union.  As  I  strived  to  make 
clear  to  all  peoples  in  my  recent  appeal  for  real 
peace  and  trust  among  nations,^  we  continue  earn- 
estly to  hope  for  such  evidence,  so  that  the  world 
may  turn  its  energies  and  resources  to  serving  the 
needs,  rather  than  the  fears,  of  mankind. 

Until  Soviet  good  faith  is  proven  by  deeds,  the 
free  nations  must  rely  on  their  own  strength  for 
the  preservation  of  peace.  To  fail  to  continue 
vigorously  to  strengthen  our  military  forces 
would  be  to  risk  wasting  all  our  efforts  for  the 
past  five  years  in  defense  of  our  liberties. 

Since  the  initiation  of  our  major  bipartisan 
foreign  aid  program  in  1947,  the  accomplishments 

'  H.  doc.  140 ;  transmitted  May  5. 
'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  27,  1953,  p.  599. 


of  the  free  world  have  been  very  great.  In  Greece, 
the  onrush  of  communist  imperialism  has  been 
halted  and  forced  to  recede.  Out  of  the  ruins  left 
by  that  aggression,  a  proud,  self-reliant  nation  has 
re-established  itself.  Threatened  economic  and 
political  collapse  in  Western  Europe  was  averted 
through  the  intensive  efforts  of  the  great  peoples 
of  that  continent  aided  by  American  resources. 
Revitalized  economies  in  Europe  today  are  pro- 
ducing more  than  ever  before  and  are  in  a  far  bet- 
ter position  to  defend  themselves  from  external 
or  internal  aggression.  In  the  Near  East  and  Far 
East,  American  aid  is  helping  many  new  nations 
on  their  way  to  a  better  life  for  their  citizens. 
And  the  free  nations  everywhere — realistically 
facing  the  threat  of  Soviet  aggression — have  in 
addition  sought  to  create,  with  American  assist- 
ance, the  military  strength  essential  to  guard  their 
security. 

The  Mutual  Security  Program  for  1954  has  been 
developed  by  the  new  administration  after  the 
most  careful  study  and  deliberation.  All  ele- 
ments of  the  program  have  been  reviewed  in  great 
detail,  all  proposals  subjected  to  thorough 
scrutiny. 

From  this  study  I  have  come  to  certain  clear 
conclusions. 

First:  The  United  States  and  our  partners 
throughout  the  world  must  stand  ready,  for  many 
years  if  necessary,  to  build  and  maintain  adequate 
defenses. 

Second:  To  accomplish  this  objective  we  must 
avoid  so  rapid  a  military  buildup  that  we  seriously 
dislocate  our  economies.  Military  strength  is  most 
effective — indeed  it  can  be  maintained — only  if  it 
rests  on  a  solid  economic  base. 

Third:  We  must  help  the  free  nations  to  help 
themselves  in  eradicating  conditions  which  cor- 
rode and  destroy  the  will  for  freedom  and  de- 
mocracy from  within. 

Fourth:  It  is  necessary  to  do  more  in  the  Far 
East.  We  are  proposing  to  make  substantial  ad- 
ditional resources  available  to  assist  the  French 


May  25,   7953 


735 


and  the  Associated  States  in  their  military  efforts 
to  defeat  the  Communist  Viet  Minli  aggression. 

Fifth:  Since  it  is  impossible  to  forecast  pre- 
cisely the  year  and  moment  when  the  point  of 
maximum  military  danger  may  occur,  the  only 
prudent  course  calls  for  a  steady  military  buildup, 
with  our  partners  throughout  the  world,  sustained 
and  planned  so  as  to  use  our  joint  capabilities 
with  maximum  efficiency  and  minimum  strain. 

We  must  and  shall  keep  steadfastly  on  the 
course  we  have  set.  We  must — so  long  as  the 
present  peril  lasts — keep  constantly  growing  in  a 
military  strength  which  we  can  support  indefi- 
nitely. These  basic  principles  were  agreed  upon 
and  applied  in  the  successful  meeting  of  the  North 
Atlantic  Treaty  Council  just  concluded  in  Paris.^ 

While  the  amounts  requested  for  technical,  eco- 
nomic and  developmental  purposes  are  small  as 
compared  with  the  military  support,  these  pro- 
grams are  nonetheless  of  the  most  vital  impor- 
tance. They  will  be  applied  chiefly  in  South  and 
Southeast  Asia,  the  Middle  East,  Latin  America, 
and  Africa.  Through  these  programs,  the  United 
States  is  proving  its  interest  in  helping  the  peoples 
of  these  areas  to  work  toward  better  and  more 
hopeful  conditions  of  life,  to  strengthen  the  foun- 
dations of  opportunity  and  freedom.  To  guard 
against  the  external  military  threat  is  not  enough : 
we  must  also  move  against  those  conditions  ex- 
ploited by  subversive  forces  from  within. 

I  present  this  whole  program  to  you  with  con- 
fidence and  conviction.  It  has  been  carefully  de- 
veloped by  the  responsible  members  of  this  ad- 
ministration in  order  to  achieve — at  least  possible 
cost — the  maximum  results  in  terms  of  our  secu- 
rity and  the  security  of  our  friends  and  allies.  In 
my  judgment,  it  represents  a  careful  determina- 
tion of  our  essential  needs  in  pursuing  the  policy 
of  collective  security  in  a  world  not  yet  freed  of 
the  threat  of  totalitarian  conquest. 

Unequivocally  I  can  state  that  this  amount  of 
money  judiciously  spent  abroad  will  add  much 
more  to  our  Nation's  ultimate  security  in  the 
world  than  would  an  even  greater  amount  spent 
merely  to  increase  the  size  of  our  own  military 
forces  in  being. 

Were  the  United  States  to  fail  to  carry  out 
these  purposes,  the  free  world  could  become  dis- 
united at  a  moment  of  great  peril  when  peace  and 
war  hang  precariously  in  balance. 

This  is  the  way  best  to  defend  successfully  our- 
selves and  the  cause  of  freedom. 

DwiGHT  D.  Eisenhower 

The  WinTE  House, 
May  6,  1953. 


"Ibid.,  May  11,  lO.'SS,  p.  673. 


STATEMENT  BY  SECRETARY  DULLES* 

Press  release  241  dated  May  5 

I  am  pleased  to  have  this  opportunity  to  ap- 
pear before  the  Senate  Foreign  Relations  Com- 
mittee and  the  House  Foreign  Affairs  Committee 
in  support  of  President  Eisenhower's  Mutual 
Security  Progi-am  for  fiscal  year  1954.  Mr. 
Stassen,  Mr.  Wilson,  and  Mr.  Humphrey  will  join 
in  describing  this  progi'am.  Therefore,  my  dis- 
cussion will  deal  primarily  with  the  foreign- 
policy  aspects  of  the  program. 

A  main  objective  of  the  program  is  to  get  the 
most  security  for  the  least  cost.  The  way  to  do 
that  is  to  cooperate  with  others.  The  mutual 
program  will  produce  more  real  security  for  the 
people  of  the  United  States  than  we  could  get  by 
spending  the  same  amount  of  money  on  a  purely 
national  program. 

I  want  to  make  it  clear  at  the  beginning  that  this 
program  has  nothing  to  do  with  charity.  It  is 
based  on  solid  considerations  of  self-interest.  It 
is,  in  fact,  an  inseparable  part  of  our  own  national 
security  program. 

Let  me  describe  briefly  some  of  the  basic  prin- 
ciples which  underlie  the  program  as  a  whole. 

First,  our  country  is  confronted  by  a  very  grave 
threat.  There  is  not  yet  any  evidence  that  this 
threat  has  diminished  or  will  diminish  within 
the  foreseeable  future.  We  stand  ready  to  seize 
every  honorable  and  practical  opportunity  for 
a  peaceful  settlement  of  international  differences. 
But,  as  President  Eisenhower  said  in  his  recent 
message  to  the  North  Atlantic  Council,  "until  the 
conditions  for  genuine  peace  have  been  firmly 
established  it  would  be  foolhardy  for  us  to  delude 
ourselves  about  the  dangers  confronting  us."  ^ 
We  have  no  aggressive  purpose  ourselves.  But 
we  want  to  increase  the  likelihood  that  any  aggres- 
sive intent  of  others  will  be  curbed  by  the  knowl- 
edge that  the  cost  of  aggression  will  be  greater 
than  any  possible  gain.  That  is  not  yet  the  case 
everywhere.  But  where  it  is  the  case  there  is 
more  security. 

Second,  we  recognize  that  the  safety  of  the 
United  States  cannot  be  assured  by  the  strength 
of  the  United  States  alone,  indispensable  as  that 
is.  When  any  nation  falls  victim  to  Soviet  ag- 
gression, whether  internal  or  external,  the  Soviet 
Union  becomes  stronger  and  U.  S.  safety  is  less- 
ened. It  is  as  simple  as  A,  B,  C.  Aside  from 
the  tragedy  to  the  people  conquered,  Soviet 
domination  means  that  these  people  and  their 
resources  will  be  harnessed  to  the  Soviet  war 
machine  and  may  be  turned  against  us.  If 
Soviet  communism  is  permitted  to  gobble  up  other 
parts  of  the  world  one  by  one,  the  day  will  come 

'  Made  before  the  Senate  Foreign  Relations  Committee 
and  the  House  Foreign  Affairs  Committee  on  May  5. 
•  Bulletin  of  May  11, 1953,  p.  673. 


736 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


when  the  Soviet  world  will  be  so  powerful  that 
no  coi'ner  of  the  world  will  be  safe.  On  the  other 
hand,  if  the  free  nations  retain  their  freedom  and 
develop  their  strength  and  unity,  they  can  con- 
tinue to  make  a  vital,  positive  contribution  to 
peace  and  security.  Their  soldiers  will  continue 
to  stand  beside  our  own,  and  their  factories  will 
continue  to  work  with  our  own,  in  deterring  and 
resisting  aggression. 

Third,  other  free  nations  will  only  continue  to 
develop  their  strength  and  unity  effectively  if 
the  U.S.  is  pi'epared  to  provide  positive  leader- 
ship. We  cannot,  of  course,  assume  exclusive  re- 
sponsibility for  the  security  of  the  whole  world, 
and  there  are  areas  where  those  directly  concerned 
should  exercise  greater  responsibility.  But  un- 
less the  strongest  nation  in  the  free  world  takes 
an  initiative,  others  can  scarcely  be  expected  to 
do  so. 

Fourth,  this  program  of  mutual  security  has 
been  planned  on  a  global  basis.  We  cannot  safely 
see  only  one  area  and  be  blind  to  others.  All 
parts  of  the  world  are  interdependent. 

Fifth,  our  mutual-security  planning  must  be 
and  is  long  range.  We  cannot  affoi'd  to  exhaust 
ourselves  by  spasmodic  programs  designed  to 
meet  ever-recurring  emergencies.  We  cannot 
operate  on  a  day-to-day,  hand-to-mouth  basis. 
Instead,  we  must  think  in  terms  of  the  policies  and 
programs  that  we  can  afford  to  live  with  for  what 
may  be  a  long  period  of  years. 

Sixth,  this  program  is  based  on  the  principle 
that  we  and  our  allies  alike  must  maintain  an 
essential  balance  between  our  economic  health  and 
our  military  effort.  The  American  economy  is 
the  very  heart  of  the  strength  of  the  free  world, 
but  our  resources  are  not  unlimited  and  we  dare 
not  endanger  our  fundamental  economic  stability. 
The  same  is  true  of  our  allies.  If  economic  sta- 
bility goes  down  the  drain,  everything  goes  down 
the  drain. 

Seventh,  this  program  is  designed  to  get  maxi- 
mum value  for  all  the  money  spent.  The  burden 
of  this  program  is  too  great  for  us  to  finance 
"boondoggles."  This  program  represents  pru- 
dent investments  in  concrete  projects  which  bene- 
fit the  United  States  as  well  as  other  nations. 

Finally,  this  program  is  aimed  at  retaining  the 
initiative  for  peace  which  was  seized  in  President 
Eisenhower's  great  address  of  April  16.  We  do 
not  dance  to  any  Russian  tune;  we  take  the  lead 
in  the  search  for  peace.  There  are  some  indica- 
tions that  the  Soviet  leaders  have  already  begun 
to  react  to  the  growing  strength  of  the  free  world. 
It  is  imperative  that  we  continue  to  increase  this 
strength  and  thereby  increase  the  chances  for  the 
success  of  our  policies. 

The  principles  I  have  stated  relate  to  the 
Mutual  Security  Program  as  a  whole.    I  would 


now  like  to  discuss  briefly  the  program  proposed 
for  various  parts  of  the  world. 


Importance  of  NATO  Area 

A  large  part  of  the  total  amount  is  being  re- 
q^uested  for  the  European  area.  Most  of  this  as- 
sistance is  for  purposes  of  military  defense  within 
the  framework  of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Or- 
ganization. Let  us  consider  why  this  area  is  so 
important. 

As  I  mentioned  in  my  recent  report  to  the 
American  people  on  Nato,"  the  United  States  and 
its  N.^TO  allies  now  have  a  three-to-one  lead  over 
the  Soviet  bloc  in  the  production  of  steel.  If 
Russia  takes  all  of  Europe,  the  ratio  would  be 
about  50-50.  Today,  the  Nato  countries  as  a  whole 
have  a  five-to-two  lead  over  the  Soviet  bloc  in  the 
production  of  coal.  If  Russia  took  all  of  Europe, 
the  Soviet  empire  would  have  a  three-to-two  ad- 
vantage in  this  vital  fuel.  It  is  clear  that  Ameri- 
can security  would  be  gravely  imperiled  by  a 
Soviet  conquest  of  Europe. 

Now  let's  look  at  the  other  side  of  the  coin. 
While  our  European  allies  remain  free  and  strong 
they  can  make  a  substantial  positive  contribution 
to  the  defense  of  the  free  world,  including  the 
United  States.  Since  the  beginning  of  Nato,  we 
have  delivered  to  our  European  allies  over  $10 
billion  in  economic  and  military  aid  combined. 
But  during  this  same  period,  they  have  spent  about 
$30  billion  from  their  own  budgets  for  defense 
purposes.  The  principle  is  the  same  which  we 
apply  at  home  to  get  protection  against  fire.  We 
all  contribute  to  the  fire  department  and  get  better 
protection  more  cheaply  than  any  one  could  get 
by  himself. 

Today  there  are  approximately  75  Nato  divi- 
sions in  existence  across  the  Atlantic,  plus  sizable 
air  and  naval  forces.  It  is  true  that  many  of  these 
troops  need  more  training  and  equipment  before 
they  can  be  fully  effective.  However,  let  us  not 
underestimate  their  value.  The  Nato  forces  al- 
ready represent  a  significant  deterrent  to  Soviet 
aggi'ession  and  a  real  contribution  to  the  protec- 
tion of  all  Nato  peoples,  including  the  people  of 
the  United  States.  If  these  forces  did  not  exist, 
we  would  need  a  much  lai-ger  security  establish- 
ment in  the  United  States  with  an  immense  in- 
crease in  cost,  and  hundreds  of  thousands  more 
Americans  in  uniform. 

As  you  know,  the  Nato  Council  met  a  few  days 
ago  in  Paris.  All  agreed  that  it  was  vital  not  only 
to  maintain  Nato's  strength,  but  to  build  it  up. 
We  faced  a  problem,  however,  because  the  Nato 
members  have  about  reached  the  limit  of  their 
present  ability  to  improve  quality  and  at  the  same 
time  to  maintain  the  past  rate  of  buildup  in  size  of 
Nato  forces.  The  situation  obviously  demanded 
a  shift  of  emphasis.    Rather  than  continuing  to 


'Ihid.,  p.  671. 


May  25,   7953 


737 


exhaust  our  resources  in  a  precipitate  military 
buildup,  we  have  agreed  to  undertake  a  more 
gradual  and  more  steady  buildup  which  is  con- 
sistent with  U.S.  and  European  economic  capabili- 
ties. Greater  emphasis  will  at  this  time  be  placed 
on  the  improved  quality  of  Nato  forces  rather 
than  upon  immediate  quantitative  increases. 

I  do  not  want  anj'one  to  receive  the  impression 
that  Nato  is  cutting  back  its  program.  Our  plans 
call  for  Nato  to  move  forward  realistically  toward 
a  greater  defense  capacity.  The  program  upon 
which  we  agreed  for  the  calendar  year  1953  pro- 
vides for  a  moderate  increase  in  the  size  of  Nato 
forces  as  well  as  a  very  substantial  improvement 
of  their  quality.  If  these  plans  are  carried  out, 
it  is  the  judgment  of  our  military  experts  that  the 
Nato  forces  in  Europe,  by  the  end  of  this  year, 
will  be  nearly  30  percent  stronger  than  they  are 
now. 

Another  major  problem  in  Europe  today  is  the 
attainment  of  European  unity,  and  particularly 
the  integration  of  Germany  into  the  free  Euro- 
pean community.  Without  a  German  military 
contribution,  there  will  be  a  most  serious  gap  in 
the  Nato  defense  system. 

The  plan  which  Europeans  have  devised  for 
integrating  their  defense  efforts  and  achieving  a 
German  contribution,  as  you  know,  is  to  create  a 
common  army  under  a  European  Defense  Commu- 
nity (Edc).  The  French  Premier,  Rene  Mayer, 
Italian  Prime  Minister  de  Gasperi,  German  Chan- 
cellor Adenauer,  and  the  leaders  of  the  Benelux 
countries  are  all  solidly  behind  Edc.  They  have 
told  me  that  they  see  no  good  alternative.  They 
are  doing  their  best  to  secure  its  approval  by  their 
respective  national  parliaments.  It  is  inevitable 
that  legislative  bodies  should  want  to  give  careful 
consideration  to  any  step  as  far-reaching  as  Edc. 
But  the  reasons  for  Edc  are  so  compelling  that  we 
must  hope  these  parliaments  will  not  long  delay 
its  establishment.  I  believe  our  own  plans  can  be 
based  on  the  present  assumption  that  the  nations 
of  continental  Europe  will  continue  to  do  their 
share  of  the  job  of  creating  adequate  defenses,  and 
will  be  able  to  overcome  the  political  obstacles 
that  now  stand  in  the  w.ay  of  a  unified  effort. 

Turning  from  Europe  to  the  opposite  side  of  the 
world,  the  Far  East,  we  find  severe  Soviet  mili- 
tary pressures  combined  with  extreme  economic 
difficulties.  The  problems  of  this  area  are  closely 
linked  with  those  of  Europe  and  are  of  great 
consequence  to  American  security. 

Communist  Threat  to  Far  East 

Communist  aggression  in  Indochina  represents 
one  of  the  most  serious  present  threats  to  the  free 
world.  The  present  aggression  against  Laos  is 
an  extremely  disturbing  development.  The  pri- 
mary responsibility  for  conduct  of  military  opera- 
tions rests  upon  France  and  the  Associated  States. 
Their  manpower  must  do  the  fighting  and  they 


are  bearing  a  large  part  of  the  costs  of  the  militarj 
elTort.  But  they  are  clearly  incapable  of  bearing 
the  entire  cost.  Our  mutual-security  program 
provides  $400  million  and  some  military  end  items 
for  the  purpose  of  helping  the  French  and  Indo- 
Chinese  peoples  reduce  this  Communist  pressun 
to  manageable  proportions.  There  may  be  some 
modest  increase  in  aid  of  new  and  more  vigorous 
plans. 

We  must  materially  strengthen  the  effectiveness 
of  Chinese  forces  on  Formosa.  Defense  measures 
in  Formosa  are  closely  dependent  on  economic 
stability,  and  it  is  also  important  that  we  assist 
directly  in  improving  economic  conditions.  H 
Formosa  can  be  made  militarily  strong  and  eco- 
nomically healthy,  it  may  exercise  a  powerful 
attraction  upon  the  enslaved  people  of  Asia. 

Japan  is  one  of  the  prime  targets  of  CommunisI 
expansion  in  the  Far  East.  Under  the  Security 
Treaty  with  Japan,  it  is  expected  that  Japan  wifi 
increasingly  assume  responsibility,  within  its  eco- 
nomic capabilities,  for  its  own  defense  against  di- 
rect or  indirect  aggression.  This  Mutual  Security 
Program  provides  funds  for  weapons  for  Japa- 
nese internal  security  and  home  defense. 

We  are  also  requesting  moderate  funds  whicli 
can  be  used  for  Thailand,  the  Philippines,  and 
Indonesia,  each  of  which  faces  grave  problems  o? 
Communist  origin. 

Let  us  now  look  at  the  Near  East  and  South 
Asia.  The  Near  East  is  one  of  the  main  cross- 
roads of  the  world  and  has  great  strategic  im- 
portance. It  has  a  large  and  growing  population 
and  important  resources.  This  area  is  subject  to 
Soviet  pressures,  attempting  to  take  advantage 
of  political  unrest  and  economic  distress.  West- 
ern, and  even  American,  prestige  in  this  area  has 
been  deteriorating  steadily,  and  the  situation  re- 
quires urgent  and  decisive  remedial  measures. 
Some  of  us  are  leaving  Saturday  to  visit  this  aresu 
to  get  a  firsthand  impression  of  the  problem. 

Our  program  for  this  area  provides  for  a  con- 
tinuance of  technical-assistance  projects  at  ap- 
proximately current  rates,  maintenance  of  pro- 
grams of  relief  and  rehabilitation  of  refugees, 
and  a  limited  program  of  economic  aid  for  capital 
development.  We  also  seek  authority  to  under- 
take limited  military-aid  programs  to  the  coun- 
tries of  the  Near  East,  which  will  contribute  to 
their  internal  security  and  will  assist  in  promot- 
ing plans  for  peace  between  Israel  and  the  Arab 
Nations,  and  in  establishing  a  regional  defense 
organization.  Wiile  the  total  assistance  sought 
for  this  area  is  not  great,  it  can  be  vitally 
important. 

In  South  Asia,  which  includes  both  India  and 
Pakistan,  we  find  a  population  as  large  as  that 
of  China.  This  population  is  still  free  from  Com- 
munist control.  However,  present  economic  con- 
ditions in  this  area  provide  a  happy  hunting 
ground  for  the  Communists. 


738 


Deparfment  of  State  Bulletin 


It  is  vitally  important  in  South  Asia  to  move 
toward  a  solution  of  the  twin  problems  of  food 
and  health.  Both  India  and  Pakistan  have  well 
thought  out  plans  for  economic  development  and 
have  shown  great  initiative  in  going  forward  with 
these  plans  despite  very  limited  resources.  I  be- 
lieve that  we  are  justified  in  some  continuance  of 
aid,  though  at  a  rate  below  what  had  been  pre- 
viously planned. 

The  programs  of  special  economic  aid  planned 
for  these  areas  are  small  in  terms  of  total  need, 
but  can  be  of  immense  value,  especially  if  they 
can  be  continued  for  several  years. 

Increase  in  Aid  to  Latin  America 

Moving  finally  to  Latin  America,  I  want  to  state 
my  belief  that  the  United  States  in  the  past  has 
too  often  failed  to  give  proper  attention  to  our 
good  friends  with  whom  we  have  had  beneficial 
political  and  economic  relations  for  so  many 
years,  and  who  have  assumed  with  us  collective 
responsibility  for  the  defense  of  this  hemisphere. 
At  present  American  private  investment  provides 
large  amounts  of  capital  which  contribute  to  the 
improvement  of  economic  conditions  and  living 
standards  in  Latin  America,  and  we  believe  that 
private  enterprise  should  continue  to  take  the  lead 
wherever  it  can.  However,  there  are  certain  im- 
portant needs  which  cannot  be  met  by  private 
capital.  In  view  of  the  importance  of  this  area, 
the  program  being  presented  to  you  proposes  a 
moderate  increase  in  our  assistance  to  Latin  Amer- 
ica. This  aid  takes  the  form  of  technical  assist- 
ance designed  to  improve  living  standards 
through  divei'sification  and  increased  produc- 
tivity. It  also  includes  limited  military  assist- 
ance to  help  the  Latin  American  countries  to 
place  their  military  forces  in  a  better  state  of 
readiness,  so  as  to  be  able  to  cooperate  more  effec- 
tively in  the  defense  of  this  hemisphere. 

Tlie  total  requested  is  $1,772,000,000  less  than 
was  requested  by  the  so-called  "Truman"  budget 
for  the  fiscal  year  1954.  The  reduction  is  not  as 
great  as  many  of  us  would  like  to  see,  having  re- 
gard to  the  need  to  balance  the  budget,  to  restabil- 
ize  our  currency,  and,  eventually,  to  reduce  taxes. 
The  reduction  is,  however,  as  great  as,  in  our 
judgment,  can  be  reconciled  with  the  essential 
security  of  the  United  States. 

It  may  be  that  developments,  good  or  bad,  may 
make  it  unnecessary  or  imprudent  actually  to 
spend  all  the  sums  here  requested.  You  can  be 
confident  that  the  money  not  needed  will  not  be 
spent.  We  do,  however,  say  to  you  that  we  con- 
sider it  would  be  imprudent  and  dangerous  not 
to  have  available  at  least  the  sums  we  have  re- 
quested. Indeed,  it  may  well  prove  to  be  the 
case  that  we  have  not  asked  for  enough. 

In  these  matters,  it  is  impossible  to  avoid  taking 
risks.     I  believe  that  if  we  have  erred,  we  have 


erred  on  the  side  of  asking  for  too  little  rather 
than  for  too  much. 

We  should  not  disguise  from  ourselves  the  fact 
that  the  international  situation  is  critical.  For 
example,  all  of  Southeast  Asia  is  today  in  great 
peril,  and  if  Indochina  should  be  lost,  there  would 
be  a  chain  reaction  throughout  the  Far  East  and 
South  Asia.  Many  countries  which  have  always 
looked  to  the  Western  World  and  particularly  the 
United  States  as  the  source  of  greatest  power, 
both  moral  and  material,  are  beginning  to  wonder 
whether  the  center  of  power  has  not  shifted  from 
Washington  to  Moscow.  Even  in  the  AVestern 
World  there  are  non-Communist  elements  ready 
and  eager  to  take  power  upon  a  platform  of  ap- 
peasement of  Soviet  communism,  or  at  least  be- 
nevolent neutrality  toward  Soviet  communism. 

At  this  juncture  there  are  many  forces  at  work 
within  the  United  States  which  would  result  in 
a  further  abdication  of  leadership.  There  are 
those  who  would  sharply  raise  our  tariff.  There 
are  those  who  would  sharply  cut  foreign  aid.  There 
are  those  who  would  seek  to  impose  upon  our 
friends  and  allies  additional  restrictions  upon 
their  trade  with  the  Communist  world  even  in 
terms  of  nonstrategic  articles.  There  are  those 
who  would  sharply  cut  the  military  contributions 
of  the  United  States  to  Nato  and  other  alliances. 

If  these  things  happen,  then  the  United  States 
will  be  isolated  and  in  the  greatest  danger  of  its 
entire  history. 

In  testifying  yesterday  before  the  Ways  and 
Means  Committee,'  I  referred  to  the  fact  that  the 
present  foreign-aid  program  will  reduce  budget- 
ary and  unallocated  economic  aid  to  our  principal 
allies.  They  accept  this  in  good  spirit  as  a  neces- 
sary part  of  a  common  program  whereby  we  all 
try  to  bring  our  extraordinary  security  commit- 
ments into  line  with  economic  health.  But  if  we 
do  not  do  all  that  is  possible  within  the  limits  of 
our  economic  health,  then  our  purposes  will  be 
misinterpreted,  and  they  will  feel  that  their  fragile 
economies  are  being  subjected  to  multiple  blows 
^vhich  are  more  than  they  can  sustain. 

It  is  the  judgment  of  the  President  and  his  Cab- 
inet and  of  the  National  Security  Council,  after 
the  most  intensive  investigation,  that  the  program 
here  presented  is,  on  the  one  hand,  within  the  ca- 
pabilities of  the  United  States  and  consistent  with 
moving  as  rapidly  as  possible  toward  a  balanced 
budget,  and,  on  the  other  hand,  that  anything 
appreciably  less  woixld  be  dangerous  to  our  peace 
and  security. 

There  is  no  "water"  in  this  program  to  be 
squeezed  out  without  taking  greater  risks  than  we 
believe  are  acceptable  at  the  present  time.  I  be- 
lieve that  tliis  will  be  made  apparent  to  you  as 
you  hear  the  further  development  of  the  facts 
through  the  statements  to  be  made  by  Mr.  Stassen, 
Mr.  Wilson,  and  Mr.  Humphrey. 


'  See  p.  743. 


May  25,    J 953 


739 


STATEMENT  BY  HAROLD  E.  STASSEN 
DIRECTOR  FOR  MUTUAL  SECURITY « 

Following  upon  the  clear  and  cogent  policy 
statement  by  the  Secretary  of  State,  may  I  at  the 
opening  of  my  comments  express  my  appreciation 
to  the  chairmen  and  members  of  the  two  Commit- 
tees for  the  invitation  to  meet  with  you.     .     .     . 

It  is  my  responsibility  and  my  privilige  to  pre- 
sent for  your  consideration  the  broad  outlines,  the 
important  details,  the  concepts,  the  methods,  and 
the  objectives  of  President  Eisenhower's  new 
Mutual  Security  Program. 

This  program  is  a  reflection  of  the  philosophy 
and  the  principles  of  the  President  so  often  anci 
so  eloquently  expressed.  Its  objective  is  peace- 
peace  with  justice— peace  with  freedom— peace 
with  progress.  It  seeks  to  bring  about  among  the 
free  nations  mutual  strength,  mutual  confidence, 
mutual  understanding,  and  mutual  progress. 

Its  twin  consequences  will  be  a  rapid  buildup  of 
effective  defensive  strength  in  the  free  world  and 
a  steady  advance  in  the  standards  of  living  of  the 
free  peoples.  It  means  increased  security  for  the 
United  States. 

The  program  will  be  carried  out  under  the 
direction  of  the  President  in  a  manner  closely 
integrated  with  the  total  program  of  the  Govern- 
ment, taking  guidance  on  foreign  policy  from  the 
Secretary  of  State,  on  defense  policy  from  the 
Secretary  of  Defense  and,  through  him,  from  the 
Joint  Chiefs  of  Staff,  on  financial  policy  from  the 
Secretary  of  the  Treasury,  and  with  respect  to 
budgetary  practices  from  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Budget.  It  will  utilize,  whenever 
appropriate,  the  services  and  counsel  of  the  other 
departments  and  agencies  of  the  Government,  such 
as  the  Departments  of  Commerce,  Agriculture, 
Interior,  and  Health,  Education,  and  Welfare. 

In  its  administration,  we  will  faithfully  reflect 
the  decisions  of  the  Congress  and  will  ever  en- 
deavor to  serve  the  people  of  the  United  States. 

Details  of  the  Program 

With  this  broad  outline,  may  I  turn  to  specific 
important  details  of  the  proposed  Mutual  Security 
Program. 

As  the  President  and  the  Secretary  of  State 
have  indicated,  the  total  of  new  obligixtional  au- 
thority requested  in  the  Mutual  Security  Program 
has  been  reduced  from  the  previous  1954  budget 
by  $1.8  billion— from  $7.6  billion  to  $5.8  billion. 

Before  discussing  the  several  components  of  this 
total,  several  general  statements  concerning  this 
figure  seem  appropriate.  In  the  first  place,  it  is 
the  result  both  of  an  exhaustive  review  of  our  na- 
tional  security  policies  and  of  a  detailed  evalua- 

'  Made  before  the  Senate  Foreign  Relations  Committee 
and  House  Foreign  Affairs  Committee  on  May  5. 

740 


tion  of  the  operation  and  effectiveness  of  past  and 
present  mutual-security  programs. 

It  represents  the  product  of  months  of  work  by 
the  National  Secui'ity  Council,  where  each  of  our 
security  objectives  was  carefully  studied,  and  its 
importance  weighed  in  relation  to  the  fiscal  con- 
siderations that  the  Secretary  of  the  Treasury  will 
discuss  with  you.  It  reflects  the  findings  which 
resulted  from  the  careful,  local  studies  which  were 
recently  made  by  special  evaluation  teams,  com- 
prised of  nearly  60  outstanding  leaders  of  Ameri- 
can industry  and  finance,  in  12  countries  now  par- 
ticipating in  the  program.^  It  mirrors  the  expe- 
rience and  knowledge  which  were  gained  by  the 
Secretaries  of  State,  Defense,  and  Treasury",  and 
myself  during  our  several  trips  to  Europe  and 
particularly  in  the  course  of  the  recent  meeting 
of  the  North  Atlantic  Council  in  Paris. 

In  the  second  place,  as  the  President  has  already 
indicated,  we  are  hopeful,  as  a  result  of  our  present 
close  and  careful  scrutiny  of  the  present  Mutual 
Security  Program,  of  discovering  certain  savings 
in  currently  appropriated  funds  which  can  be  ap- 
plied to  reduce  somewhat  the  presently  requested 
authorization  for  new  obligational  authority.  The 
exact  amount  of  any  real  savings  can  only  be  de- 
termined as  we  approach  the  close  of  the  fiscal 
year.  They  depend  upon  the  extent  to  which  any 
of  the  specific  requirements  on  which  present  pro- 
grams were  based  have  been  eliminated  and  not 
replaced  by  new,  comparable  requirements,  the 
extent  to  which  reductions  in  the  originally  esti- 
mated prices  of  military  equipment  have  occurred, 
and  other  similar  factors. 

In  the  third  place,  I  should  note  in  passing  that 
the  foregoing  aggregate  figure  does  not  include 
something  under  $100  million  in  local  currencies 
which  are  already,  or  will  become,  available  to  the 
United  States  in  the  form  of  counterpart  or  as 
contributions  by  other  governments  and  which  are 
required  to  carry  out  the  program  presented. 
Finally,  I  should  caution  the  Committees  that  this 
is  a  tight  program  in  which  no  provision  has  been 
made  for  a  number  of  contingent  requirements 
which,  because  they  are  contingent,  we  felt  should 
not  be  included.  I  refer  particularly  to  possible 
requirements  for  additional  economic  assistance 
in  Korea,  especially  if  further  increases  are  to  be 
made  in  Rok  forces,  and  to  the  possible  need  for 
aid  in  averting  famine  in  Pakistan.  I  mention 
these  because  I  think  it  is  important  for  you  to 
know  precisely  what  is,  and  precisely  what  is  not, 
included  in  the  request  for  authorization  which  is 
now  before  you. 

Within  this  $5.8  billion  total,  slightly  over  $4 
billion  is  requested  for  mutual-defense  material 
and  training. 

Of  this  amount  approximately  $2.53  billion  is 

°  For  Mr.  Stassen's  announcement  of  the  appointment 
of  these  teams,  -see  Bulletin  of  Mar.  2,  1953,  p.  337 ;  for 
a  summary  of  the  teams'  reports,  see  Msa  press  release 
dated  May  8. 

Departmenf  of  State  Bulletin    j 


requested  for  the  European  area,  about  $1  billion 
for  the  Far  East,  slightly  under  $475  million  for 
the  Near  East,  and  $20  million  for  Latin  America. 

Within  the  $5.8  billion,  $995  million  is  requested 
for  mutual-defense  financing.  This  portion  of  the 
program  is  designed  to  assist  certain  countries 
m  Europe  and  the  Far  East  in  carrying  out  im- 
portant defense  objectives  in  a  manner  which  will 
prevent  their  own  budgets  from  remaining  in 
disastrous  imbalance. 

Of  this  amount,  $400  million  would  be  utilized 
for  the  procurement  of  equipment,  materials,  and 
services  which  are  required  by,  or  are  necessary 
for  the  support  of,  forces  of  France  which  are 
located  in  Indochina  and  forces  of  the  Associated 
States  of  Cambodia,  Laos,  and  Vietnam. 

Of  the  total  amount  of  $995  million  for  mutual- 
defense  financing,  $100  million  is  intended  for  the 
manufacture  in  France  of  artillery,  ammunition, 
and  semiautomatic  weapons  which  are  required 
by,  and  are  to  be  delivered  to,  French  forces 
assigned  to  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organiza- 
tion, and  another  $100  million  is  designed  for  the 
manufacture  in  the  United  Kingdom  of  military 
aircraft  required  by  United  Kingdom  forces  for 
the  defense  of  the  North  Atlantic  area. 

The  provision  of  these  amounts  in  the  manner 
indicated,  together  with  $100  million  which  is 
requested  to  finance  United  States  exports  to  the 
United  Kingdom  of  wheat,  cotton,  and  lard  would 
have  these  effects : 

Direct  defense-financing  assistance  to  the  United 
Kingdom  would  be  cut  in  half  from  1953  to  1954. 
There  would  be  a  further  reduction  the  following 
year,  and  early  termination  of  all  such  assistance 
is  contemplated.  The  resulting  loss  in  dollars  for 
balance  of  payments  would  be  partially  cushioned 
by  increased  earnings  on  jet  aircraft  and  other 
military  materiel  conti'acts  with  the  United 
States. 

For  France  approximately  40  percent  of  the 
cost  of  the  Indochina  war  would  be  covered  by 
contributions  in  various  forms  from  the  United 
States. 

In  both  of  these  situations,  if  the  average  tax- 
payers of  the  United  Kingdom  and  of  France  con- 
tinue, as  they  do  today,  to  pay  slightly  more  taxes 
proportionately  than  the  average  taxpayer  in  the 
United  States,  then  each  country  can,  with  able 
management,  adjust  to  the  new  program  reason- 
ably well  and  effectively  carry  out  their  extensive 
commitments  for  mutual  defense  and  national  se- 
curity. I  am  convinced,  however,  that  the 
amounts  recommended  are  the  very  minimum 
which  the  United  States  should  provide,  and  these 
amounts  are  directly  related  to  the  essential  ob- 
jectives of  our  country  as  well  as  theirs. 

Two  hundred  and  fifty  million  dollars  is  re- 
quested for  Mutual  Special  Weapons  Planning. 
This  does  not  affect  atomic  weapons,  which  are 
controlled,  as  you  know,  by  other  legislation.  It 
will  include  only  such  special  weapons  as  the 


President  may  determine,  after  the  study  of  new 
weapons  now  under  way  by  Shape  is  completed. 
Doulble  safeguards  should  be  included  to  insure 
that  the  security  interests  of  the  United  States 
are  served.  Specifically,  it  is  proposed  that  the 
President  be  responsible  for  determining,  first, 
the  wisdom  of  initiating  the  production  of  speci- 
fied weapons  of  this  type,  and  second,  for  any 
physical  transfer  of  equipment  or  to  provide 
training.  With  such  safeguards,  I  am  convinced 
that  this  $250  million  will,  in  the  course  of  the 
next  4  or  5  years,  prove  to  be  the  most  important 
$250  million  in  the  defense  portion  of  the  Mutual 
Security  Act. 

One  of  our  gi'eatest  assets  in  defense  is  the  pro- 
ductive and  scientific  genius  of  the  free  peoples. 
The  objective  of  Nato  defense  planning,  as  of 
American  defense  planning,  has  not  been  one  of 
matching  man  for  man  a  potential  army  of  ag- 
gression, but  rather  of  making  our  forces  as  effec- 
tive as  possible  through  a  combination  of  training 
and  modern  weapons.  The  special  new  weapons 
that  are  now  beginning  to  enter  production  or  are 
nearing  the  completion  of  development  must  be 
a  part  of  that  planning  if  we  are  to  create,  with  a 
minimum  cost,  the  most  effective  defensive  shield. 
We  are  thus  proposing  to  take  at  this  time  those 
steps  that  are  appropriate  that  will  make  possible 
the  sharing  with  our  allies  of  the  industrial  and 
scientific  advances  that  can  make  our  people  more 
safe  from  attack  and  our  collective  armed  forces 
more  secure  and  effective  in  combat. 

Smaller  amounts  are  involved  in  the  mutual 
development  and  technical-progress  programs, 
approximately  $315  million  for  economic  aid  di- 
rected toward  development  and  about  $140  million 
for  technical  cooperation.  Of  the  $315  million, 
$30  million  represents  a  request  for  an  authoriza- 
tion, but  not  at  this  time  for  an  appropriation, 
to  cover  anticipated  future  contributions  to 
Unrwa  (the  United  Nations  Agency  for  the  Re- 
lief and  Resettlement  of  Arab  Refugees).  These 
amounts  are  predominantly  for  India  and  Pakis- 
tan, for  Southeast  Asia,  for  the  Near  East,  and 
for  Latin  America  and  Africa.  These  amounts 
are  much  less  than  the  direct  defense  portions  but 
the  programs  which  they  cover  may  well  prove  to 
be  the  most  important  of  all  in  their  ultimate 
effect. 

India  has  a  well  conceived  plan  for  long-term 
development  now  under  way.  Moderate  assistance 
for  3  years  should  be  anticipated,  but  only  one 
year  is  included  in  the  1954  fiscal  year  program. 

The  multilateral  organizations  whose  work  ad- 
vances the  broad  security  and  humanitarian  ob- 
jectives of  the  Mutual  Security  Program  together 
require  a  little  more  than  $100  million.  This 
amount  includes  funds  for  our  proposed  contribu- 
tions to  the  United  Nations  International  Chil- 
dren's Emergency  Fund  (Unicef), United  Nations 
Technical  Assistance  (Unta),  the  Organization 
of  the  American  States,  the  United  Nations  Korean 


May  25,   7953 


741 


Reconstruction  Agency  (Unkra),  and  the  Inter- 
Governmental  Committee  for  European  Migra- 
tion. Our  support  of  these  programs  is  in  further- 
ance of  President  Eisenhower's  inaugural  state- 
ment that  "respecting  the  United  Nations  as  the 
living  sign  of  all  people's  hope  for  peace,  we  shall 
strive  to  make  it  not  merely  an  eloquent  symbol 
but  an  effective  force."  Because  of  the  great 
humanitarian  and  economic  importance  of  these 
international  programs  to  the  free  world,  we  must 
continue  to  assume  leadership  in  making  them 
succeed. 

Of  these  five  multilateral  imdei'takings,  three 
are  integral  parts  of  the  U.N.  system,  one  is  solely 
inter- American,  and  one  is  organizationally  out- 
side of  the  U.N.  framework.  The  total  effort  and 
accomplishments  of  all  of  these,  however,  have 
come  to  be  regarded  by  less  fortunate  people 
everywhere  as  concrete  evidence  that  the  leading 
free  nations  are  willing  to  back  expressions  of 
concern  and  interest  with  tangible  deeds. 

Vital  MSP  Objectives  Can  Be  Attained 

I  realize  that  some  will  sincerely  feel  that  this 
proposed  program  cuts  too  deeply  and  too  sharply 
into  the  amount  of  the  previously  planned  pro- 
gram. I  realize  that  others  will  sincerely  feel 
that  even  more  drastic  reductions  should  now  be 
made. 

It  is  our  considered  conclusion  after  careful 
study  that  the  vital  objectives  of  our  country  in 
the  Mutual  Security  Program  can  be  attained 
through  this  reduced  amount  if  wisely  used  in 
the  new  program. 

It  is  also  our  considered  conclusion  that  these 
recommended  amounts  are  urgently  needed  in  the 
interests  of  the  safety  and  security  of  our  country. 

It  is  our  pledge  that  these  funds  will  be  admin- 
istered with  extreme  care  and  that  throughout  the 
year  every  opportunity  will  be  seized  for  further 
savings  when  they  can  be  made  without  prejudice 
to  our  country's  objectives.  As  I  have  also  stated 
we  expect  to  make  moderate  but  important  savings 
in  the  1953  program  which  will  be  reported  to 
the  committees  later  and  can  be  credited  against 
the  amount  now  requested  for  the  new  progi'am. 

This  new  Mutual  Security  Program  in  Presi- 
dent Eisenhower's  administration  will  have  these 
characteristics : 

1.  Longer-range  planning  and  programing  with 
open  discussion  of  future  requirements,  subject 
always  to  the  annual  decisions  and  reviews  of 
Congress. 

2.  Earlier  attainment  of  strong  defense  capa- 
bilities through  more  rapid  deliveries  of  critical 
items  and  more  thorough  training  of  forces  in 
being. 

3.  Constant  insistence  on  the  importance  of  eco- 
nomic stability  and  an  expanding  gross  national 
product  among  the  free  nations  as  the  essential 
foundation  for  sound  defense. 


4.  Accelerated  planning  for  the  use  of  new 
weapons  for  the  defense  of  the  free  nations  against 
threatening  totalitarian  thrusts. 

5.  Full  enlistment  of  the  cooperating  defensive 
strength  of  all  nations  who  oppose  the  Soviet 
Communist  power. 

6.  Expanded  use  of  the  production  capacity  of 
Europe  through  a  combination  of  U.S.  and  multi- 
nation  orders  which  will  permit  efficient  mass  pro- 
duction of  Nato  arms  and  the  consequent  estab- 
lishment of  a  better  production  base  in  Europe. 

7.  Steady  development  of  the  natural  resources 
and  the  people's  capabilities  in  the  less  advanced 
areas  of  the  free  nations. 

8.  Gradual  expansion  of  fair  and  profitable 
trade  between  the  free  countries. 

9.  Broader  cooperation  with  voluntary  organi- 
zations engaged  in  similar  activities  with  em- 
phasis on  the  "people-to-people"  relationship. 

10.  Increased  reliance  upon  private  capital  for 
all  phases  of  economic  accomplishment. 

11.  Alertness  and  willingness  to  adjust  to  any 
new  conditions,  in  accordance  with  the  President's 
April  16  address. 

In  other  words,  we  seek  a  rapid,  sure-footed 
climb  with  our  partners  to  a  high  plateau  of  se- 
cure preparedness,  and  then,  shoulder  to  shoulder, 
an  advance  along  that  plateau  toward  peace  and 
better  living  for  ourselves  and  for  others. 

Without  minimizing  the  difficulties  and  obsta- 
cles we  face,  I  do  have  confidence  that  this  Mutual 
Security  Program  can  be  carried  through  suc- 
cessfully. This  confidence  is  rooted  in  my  deep 
and  abiding  faith  in  the  freedom  and  the  inherent 
dignity  of  men. 

It  is  strengthened  by  my  regard  and  apprecia- 
tion for  the  superb  abilities  and  excellent  team- 
work of  the  officials  of  the  administration  upon 
whom  so  much  of  this  program  depends,  the 
Secretary  of  State,  John  Foster  Dulles ;  the  Sec- 
retary of  Defense,  Charles  Wilson ;  the  Secretary 
of  the  Treasury,  George  Humphrey ;  and  the  Di- 
rector of  the  Bureau  of  the  Buclget,  Joseph  Dodge. 

It  is  fortified  by  my  knowledge  of  the  high 
caliber  and  the  devotion  to  duty  of  the  members 
of  the  uniformed  services  of  our  country,  the 
Army,  Navy,  Air  Force,  and  Marines,  upon  whom 
so  much  of  our  work  depends. 

It  is  fed  by  my  conviction  of  the  truly  great 
qualities  of  the  peoples,  and  of  the  leadership  of 
tlie  other  countries  with  whom  we  work  in  the 
Mutual  Security  Program. 

Regardless  of  the  cynics,  the  defeatists,  the 
timid  souls,  and  the  shortsighted  ones,  let  us  move 
forward  with  faith  and  determination,  with  real- 
ism and  sound  ])lanning.  Thus  will  we,  in  the 
United  States  of  America,  be  worthy  of  our  na- 
tional power  and  responsibility,  and  of  our  oppor- 
tunity in  1953,  under  the  leadership  of  President 
Eisenhower. 


742 


Department  of  Slate  Bulletin 


Support  for  Extension  of  Trade  Agreements  Act 


Following  are  texts  of  statements  made  hy  Sec- 
retavy  Dulles  and  the  Director  for  Mutual  Secu- 
rity, Harold  E.  Stassen.  hefore  the  Ways  and 
Means  Committee  of  the  house  of  Representatives 
on  May  4.  and  May  5  respectively. 

STATEMENT  BY  SECRETARY  DULLES 

Press  release  233  dated  May  4 

The  President  has  recommended  that  the  Con- 
gress extend  the  present  Reciprocal  Trade  Agree- 
ments Act  for  a  further  period  of  one  year.^  I 
wish  to  speak  in  support  of  that  recommendation. 

The  President  has  a  simple  purpose.  It  is  to 
avoid  a  committal,  or  appearance  of  committal,  to 
a  changed  tariff  policy  before  that  policy  can  be 
coordinated  with  other  new  and  related  policies. 
We  want  all  of  the  parts  to  add  up  to  a  coherent 
whole  and  not  cancel  each  other  out.  Only  thus 
will  they  truly  serve  the  welfare  of  our  people. 

The  President  proposes  to  use  this  year,  or  as 
much  of  it  as  is  required,  for  study  which  will 
have  the  full  participation  of  the  public  and  the 
Congress.  He  has  recommended  that  for  this  pur- 
pose a  Commission  be  established  consisting  of  five 
members  appointed  by  him,  three  by  the  Speaker 
of  the  House,  and  three  by  the  president  of  the 
Senate.-  Extension  of  the  Reciprocal  Trade 
Agreements  Act,  in  its  present  form,  for  an  in- 
terim period  of  one  year  will  give  the  time  needed 
to  make  a  fresh  appraisal  of  what  should  be  done. 

There  are  a  number  of  bills  which  have  been 
introduced  and  referred  to  this  Committee  which 
would  serve  this  purpose.  I  believe,  however,  that 
H.  R.  4294  is  not  in  accord  with  our  present  needs. 
It  would  not  only  enact  special  regulations  on  im- 
ports of  petroleum,  lead,  and  zinc  but  it  would 
basically  alter  the  operation  of  our  present  trade 
program.  That  would  be  to  commit  ourselves  to 
future  policy  before  we  can  be  sure  that  such 
policy  is  that  which,  added  up  with  others,  will 
pi'oduce  the  best  results. 

As  we  begin  the  task  of  reassessing  our  foreign 
economic  policy,  we  are  confronted  with  a  number 

'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  27, 1953,  p.  634. 

^  See  p.  747. 

May  25,   1953 


of  basic  facts.  This  nation  has  become  the  center 
of  the  economic  system  of  the  free  world.  We  in 
this  country  account  for  50  percent  of  the  total 
production  of  non-Communist  countries.  We  are 
the  world's  largest  exporter  and  the  world's  largest 
importer.  We  are  the  greatest  creditor  nation  in 
the  world  and  the  most  important  single  source 
of  the  free  world's  capital  needs.  We  lead  in  the 
development  of  new  inventions  and  new  skills. 

This  strength  of  ours  is  something  for  which 
we  are  all  devoutly  thankful.  In  part  it  comes 
from  the  good  fortune  which  spared  us  the  physi- 
cal destruction  of  two  world  wars.  In  part  it 
comes  from  an  abundance  of  natural  resources. 
Even  more,  it  comes  from  our  own  efforts  and 
from  the  national  policies  which  have  guided 
these  efforts — policies  which  on  the  whole  have, 
for  164  years,  served  our  nation  well. 

We  shall  not  continue  to  have  strength  and  to 
enjoy  national  health  except  as  we  continue  to 
follow  wise  policies.  Those  policies  will  not  be 
wise  unless  they  recognize  the  basic  truth  that  no 
nation  can  long  survive  as  a  citadel  of  self- 
indulging  privilege  surrounded  by  massed  human 
misery  and  despair.  The  United  States  is  today 
a  paradise  compared  to  most  of  the  world.  But 
it  could  be  a  fool's  paradise  if  we  thought  we 
could,  with  impunity,  so  act  as  to  impede  the 
honest  substantial  efforts  of  others  to  improve 
their  lot. 

It  is  enlightened  self-interest  for  the  strong  to 
be  considerate  of  the  weak. 

This  timeless  truth  always  operates.  Some- 
times it  operates  slowly.  But  today  it  operates 
quickly.  There  exists  in  the  world  a  vast  and 
powerful  conspiracy  directed  against  the  United 
States.  It  seeks  to  prevail  by  bringing  under  its 
control  those  peoples  who  feel  hopeless  and  who 
are  despairing,  and  who  thus  readily  lend  them- 
selves to  a  violent  program  of  world  revolution. 
Already  one-third  of  all  the  people  of  the  world 
have  been  made  first  the  victims  and  then  the 
tools  of  that  conspiracy.  A  further  reduction 
of  the  free  world  and  an  increase  of  the  captive 
world  cannot  but  have  ominous  consequences  for 
the  United  States. 


743 


Soviet  Concept  of  Western  Economy 

The  leaders  of  Soviet  communism  have  consist- 
ently proceeded  on  the  theory  that  economics  was 
the  Achilles  heel  of  the  West.  They  have  argued 
that  the  industrialized  West  depended  upon  raw 
materials  and  markets  of  the  underdeveloped 
areas,  and  that  if  these  areas  could  be  subtracted 
from  the  economic  domain  of  the  West  and  brought 
under  Communist  control,  the  Western  nations 
would  not  have  left  sufficient  scope  for  the  em- 
ployment of  their  industrial  machine.  Then,  it 
was  reasoned,  the  Western  nations  would  engage 
in  violent  competition  among  themselves  which 
would  put  them  at  loggerheads  so  that  they  would 
readily  fall  victims,  one  by  one,  to  Communist 
conquest. 

That  thesis  was  announced  by  Stalin  in  1924, 
and  his  last  political  publication,  that  of  October 
1952,  asserted  that  so  much  of  the  world  had  now 
been  alienated  from  the  West  that  Britain,  France, 
and  the  United  States  could  not  make  place  for 
the  postwar  commercial  activities  of  Germany  and 
Japan.  Stalin  concluded  that  the  Soviet  leaders 
could  now  reliably  assume  that  Britain  and  France 
would  gradually  "break  from  the  embrace  of  the 
United  States,"  and  that  Western  Germany  and 
Japan  could  be  counted  on  to  "try  to  smash  United 
States  domination."  Then  would  come  what 
Stalin  foresaw  in  1924  as  the  "moment"  for  the 
"decisive  blow." 

Stalin  reasoned  that  these  developments  were, 
as  he  put  it,  "inevitable."  In  that  he  was  surely 
wrong.  But  we  too  would  be  wrong  if  we  were 
blind  to  the  fact  that  the  Communist  thesis  in- 
cludes some  valid  elements.  We  could  by  our  own 
mistakes  make  Stalin's  predictions  come  true. 

Our  jiolitical,  our  security,  and  our  economic 
interests  mesh.  The  fact  is  that  the  ability  of 
other  free  countries  to  resist  Communist  aggres- 
sion and  their  willingness  to  unite  with  us  on 
certain  common-security  policies  depend  largely 
upon  their  economic  well-being.  That  in  turn 
is  influenced  by  our  own  economic  policies,  in- 
cluding our  tariff  policy. 

The  present  administration  is  attempting  to 
shape  U.S.  policies  to  what  it  believes  are  the 
overall  needs  of  our  nation.  That  involves  con- 
sideration of  our  own  budgetary,  monetary,  and 
tax  problems.  It  involves  reviewing  our  policies 
of  military  and  economic  aid  to  other  friendly 
countries.  It  involves  reconsideration  of  our  de- 
fense program.  It  involves  study  of  measures, 
such  as  the  Battle  Act,  designed  to  restrict  trade 
between  the  free  nations  and  the  captive  world, 
which  while  commercially  useful  to  the  free  world 
might  be  rnilitarily  useful  to  the  Soviet  world. 
It  will  also  involve  consideration  of  our  trade  and 
economic  problems  in  relation  to  the  welfare  of 
other  free  nations — a  welfare  to  which  we  cannot 
be  indifferent,  save  at  our  peril. 

The  variety  and  difficulty  of  the  problems  we 
face  emerge  sharply  as  we  consider  specific  areas 

744 


of  the  world.  Western  Europe,  through  its  own 
efforts  and  with  our  help,  has  made  large  gains 
since  1946.  Production  of  these  countries  has  in- 
creased by  40  percent  and  exports  have  risen  by  60 
Eercent  over  the  prewar  period.  Yet  the  Western 
iuropean  countries  are  unable  to  pay  for  all  of 
the  U.S.  goods  which  they  need,  even  though  they 
are  severely  denying  themselves  many  of  the  Amer- 
ican goods  their  citizens  want.  Their  gold  and 
monetary  reserves  are  very  low  in  relation  to 
current  needs  and  the  contingencies  they  face. 
They  feel  that  their  margin  of  safety  is  so  slight 
that  they  dare  not  be  venturesome. 

We  have  helped  these  countries  fill  their  current 
requirements  for  American  products,  including 
military  defense  items,  by  extraordinary  aid.  But 
this  situation  is  unhealthy.  It  is  not  a  basis  on 
which  a  lasting  alliance  of  mutually  self-respect- 
ing nations  can  long  continue.  It  can  be  corrected 
partly  by  measures  taken  by  the  countries  of 
Western  Europe  themselves  and  partly  by  action 
by  the  United  States. 

The  countries  of  Western  Europe  can  do  much 
for  themselves  by  increasing  their  economic  unity 
so  that  they  more  freely  exchange  their  goods  as 
between  themselves.  They  need  more  and  more 
to  back  their  currencies  with  sound  budgetary 
measures  and  productive  efforts,  so  that  their  cur- 
rencies will  be  a  medium  for  expanding  trade  abovi 
the  low  level  which  always  prevails  when  cur 
rencies  fail  to  lift  trade  above  what  is  virtually 
a  barter  basis.  Sound  U.S.  foreign  policies  can 
do  much  to  promote  the  unity  and  strength  in 
Europe  which  are  desired  and  sought  by  the 
peoples  themselves. 

Japan's  Need  for  Markets  i 

If  we  turn  to  Japan,  we  find  again  a. nation' 
which  buys  much  more  American  goods  than  it 
can  pay  for  by  sales  to  our  country.  Japan's 
problems  are  the  more  acute,  because  she  has  con- 
certed her  policies  with  those  of  the  United  States, 
which  call  for  a  very  sharp  curtailment  of  trade 
with  Communist  China.  Thus  Japan  has  been 
forced  to  turn  elsewhere,  and  largely  to  the  United 
States,  for  the  food  and  raw  materials  which  her 
population  requires.  But  also  Japan  needs  mar- 
kets which  provide  the  funds  to  pay  for  its  imports. 

In  this  connection,  again,  our  foreign  policies 
can  help  by  promoting  the  development  of  the 
underdeveloped  areas  of  South  and  Southeast 
Asia,  where  there  could  be  a  mutually  beneficial 
trade  with  Japan.  Here,  again,  however,  the  sit- 
uation is  complicated  by  Communist  aggression  in 
Indochina,  which  seeks  to  bring  the  "rice  bowl" 
area  of  Southeast  Asia  under  Communist  rule. 

There  are  underdeveloped  areas  of  Asia  and 
Africa  and  of  this  American  Hemisphere  which 
can  find  ways  of  better  utilizing  their  own  re- 
sources to  promote  their  development.    Here,  too, 

Deparfment  of  State  Bulletin 


I 


we  have  a  part  to  play.  By  encouraging  a  climate 
which  will  attract  American  private  capital  to 
such  areas,  by  extending  public  or  private  techni- 
cal assistance  where  it  will  help,  and  by  following 
trade  policies  which  take  sympathetic  account  of 
the  problem  of  nations  which  depend  on  the  pro- 
duction of  one  or  two  products,  we  can  play  a  part 
in  developing  an  amount  of  economic  health  and 
good  will. 

Also,  we  must  remember  that  the  internal 
strength  of  this  nation  depends  upon  wise  foreign- 
economic  policies.  Imports  are  occasionally  dis- 
turbing. But  a  check  on  exports  would  be  equally 
disturbing.  Vast  segments  of  American  agricul- 
ture, industry,  and  laoor  rely  on  large  export  mar- 
kets for  their  prosperity.  Our  cotton,  wlieat,  and 
tobacco  ^rowers  depend  largely  on  export,  as  does 
the  macninery  industry.  The  entire  industrial 
activity  of  the  United  States  is  heavily  dependent 
uiion  imported  raw  materials  and  will  grow  more 
dependent  on  those  materials  as  time  goes  on. 
Moreover,  our  American  taxpayers  should  not  be 
expected  indefinitely  to  shoulder  the  large  grants- 
aid  that  have  recently  been  supplied  by  the 


in 


United  States  to  bolster  foreign  economies.  Fin- 
ally, hundreds  of  thousands  of  private  Americans, 
as  well  as  the  Government  itself,  have  large  in- 
vestments throughout  the  world,  and  their  value 
is  seriously  affected  by  the  amount  of  dollars  for- 
eign countries  have  to  pay  for  interest  and  to  repay 
principal. 

Accordingly,  our  own  national  self-interest  will 
be  advanced  by  balanced  measures  which  take  into 
account  the  varied  interests  of  the  different  seg- 
ments of  our  national  life.  Sporadic  acts,  de- 
signed to  help  particular  interests,  without  regard 
to  the  whole,  will  not  in  the  long  run  be  beneficial. 

I  certainly  would  not  suggest  that  the  answer  to 
all  our  problems  is  to  be  found  in  a  new  U.S.  tariff 
act  which  would  further  reduce  our  customs  duties 
which  in  many  sectors  are  already  low.  I  do  not 
think  that  domestic  industry  and  agriculture 
should  be  sacrificed  in  the  interest  of  exporters  or 
that  local  business  should  alone  pay  the  price  of 
foreign  policies  designed  to  promote  international 
unity  and  economic  health. 

What  I  do  feel  strongly  is  that  every  segment 
of  our  nation  will  eventually  suffer  if  our  economic 
and  foreign  policies  are  a  maze  of  contradictions. 
This  would  happen  if  new  tariff  policies  were 
adopted  before  policies  in  other  areas  and  the  poli- 
cies of  other  countries  are  more  fully  developed. 
If  the  Congress  now  took  measures  which  fore- 
shadowed a  sharp  increase  in  tariff  protection,  that 
would  have  very  disturbing  repercussions  not  only 
upon  other  national  policies  which  are  being  for- 
mulated but  also  upon  the  policies  which  we  hope 
other  governments  will  adopt  as  a  contribution  to 
a  total  free  world  which  will  be  more  vigorous, 
more  healthy,  more  unified,  and  more  secure. 

As  the  President  said  in  his  letter  of  May  2,  this 
question  of  trade  needs  to  be  thoroughly  studied 


by  a  representative  commission  which  will  assume 
its  responsibilities  without  any  prior  commitments 
or  prejudices  whatever. 

"Standstill"  Urged  for  Study  Purposes 

I  want  to  say  to  you  that  as  Secretary  of  State 
I  have  no  preconceived  ideas  and  no  policies  to 
which  I  feel  committed.  I  have  a  completely  open 
mind.  That  is  why  I  can  conscientiously  urge 
that  there  be  in  effect  a  "standstill"  until  this  prob- 
lem can  be  studied  under  fresh  auspices  in  its  rela- 
tion to  the  complex  problems  into  which  tariff 
policy  must  be  fitted.  That  is  why  I  urge  that 
H.R.  4294  should  not  now  be  adopted.  Its  present 
adoption  would  have  serious  international  reper- 
cussions injurious  to  the  best  interests  and  welfare 
of  the  United  States.  It  would  be  taken,  through- 
out the  free  world,  to  forecast  U.S.  trade  policies 
which  would  make  it  impossible  for  them  to  live 
without  increasing  association  with  and  depend- 
ence on  the  Communist  world. 

In  Paris  last  week,  Secretary  Humphrey,  Secre- 
tary Wilson,  Mr.  Stassen,  and  I  had  talks  with 
representatives  of  various  foreign  governments 
and  we  forecast  a  coming  reduction  in  economic 
and  budgetary  aid  from  the  United  States.^  This 
was  accepted  in  good  spirit  by  our  friends.  But 
their  economies  are  still  too  fragile  to  absorb 
multiple  shocks.  Therefore,  we  strongly  believe 
that  the  United  States  should  not  take  tariff-lift- 
ing action  at  this  time,  before  such  action  can  be 
appraised  in  the  light  of  our  other  governmental 
policies  designed  to  permit  balancing  of  the  budget, 
stabilizing  our  currency,  and,  we  hope,  eventually 
cutting  taxes,  and  doing  all  of  this  without  jeop- 
ardizing the  international  relationships  upon 
which  our  security  largely  depends. 

Our  nation  has  lived  for  2  years  under  the  pres- 
ent Trade  Agreements  Act.  We  have  not  only 
lived  but  lived  well,  and  are  today  enjoying  a 
high  level  of  productivity  and  employment.  The 
present  act  contains  provisions  which  enable  spe- 
cial measures  to  be  taken  to  protect  special  situa- 
tions such  as  may  exist,  for  example,  in  relation 
to  the  lead  and  zinc  industries.  Surely  it  is  the 
course  of  wisdom  not  to  depart  from  legislation 
which  has  served  us  well  until  we  are  quite  sure 
that  the  legislation  to  replace  it  can  better,  or  at 
least  equally,  serve  our  national  welfare.  That 
we  cannot  know  until  the  entire  field  has  been 
studied  by  such  a  commission  as  the  President 
proposes.  Therefore  Mr.  Chairman,  in  closing, 
I  again  urge  that  no  change  be  made  in  the  exist- 
ing Trade  Agreements  Act;  that  it  be  retained 
unimpaired  in  its  present  form  in  the  interim 
period  of  study  which  lies  ahead;  and  that  the 
commission  asked  for  by  the  President  be  promptly 
established  and  put  to  work. 

'  For  material  on  the  North  Atlantic  Council  Meeting, 
Apr.  22-25,  see  Bulletin  of  May  11,  1953,  p.  671. 


May  25,  1953 


745 


MR.  STASSEN'S  STATEMENT  OF   MAY  5* 

I  wish  to  thank  you  for  this  opportunity  to  ap- 
pear before  you  to  express  the  views  of  the  Mutual 
Security  Administration  on  the  question  of  the 
extension  of  reciprocal  trade.  As  you  may  know, 
for  many  years — since  the  days  of  my  jfovernor- 
ship  in  Minnesota,  through  the  War,  the  San  Fran- 
cisco conference,  my  trips  through  Europe,  Asia, 
and  Africa,  and  more  particularly  now  as  Director 
for  IMutual  Security — I  have  been  following 
closely  the  interrelationship  of  U.S.  and  world 
economic  trends  and  conditions.  It  is  with  knowl- 
edge and  conviction  born  of  these  years  of  study 
and  observation  that  I  wish  to  speak  forthrightly 
with  3'ou  on  the  question  before  your  Committee. 

Under  President  Eisenhower's  inspiring  leader- 
ship, the  United  States  today  is  bringing  new  hope 
to  the  people  of  the  free  world — hojie  for  lasting 
peace  and  for  rising  standards  of  living.  You  re- 
call that  on  February  2  President  Eisenhower  in 
his  State  of  the  Union  message  to  Congress  set 
down  certain  fundamental  points  that  form  the 
basis  of  the  foreign  policy  of  an  administration 
which  received  a  powerful  mandate  from  the  peo- 
ple at  the  polls  last  November.  Among  these  pol- 
icy points,  and  these  form  the  context  within  which 
this  Government  approaches  the  question  of  recip- 
rocal trade,  President  Eisenhower  said : 

1.  That  no  single  country  can  stand  alone 
against  Communist  aggression,  as  he  said,  "mutual 
security  means  effective  mutual  cooperation." 

2.  That  our  foreign  policy  recognizes  the  im- 
portance of  profitable  and  equitable  world  trade. 

3.  That  we  aim  to  receive  from  the  rest  of  the 
world  in  equitable  exchange  greater  amounts  of 
important  raw  materials  which  we  do  not  now  pos- 
sess in  sufficient  quantity. 

4.  That  the  study  of,  and  extension  of,  the  Re- 
ciprocal Trade  Agreements  Act  be  carried  out. 

Then  on  April  7,  President  Eisenhower  fol- 
lowed up  his  State  of  the  Union  address  by  sending 
to  the  Congress  a  special  message  formally  recom- 
mending, first,  that  the  present  Reciprocal  Trade 
Agreements  Act  be  extended  for  one  year  and, 
second,  that  a  thorough  and  comprehensive  re- 
examination be  made  of  the  economic-foreign 
policy  of  the  United  States.  (He  has  now  rec- 
ommended to  Congress  that  a  Commission  of  11 
members  be  established  to  carry  out  this  study.) 

Finally,  in  his  great  address  of  April  16  to  the 
Newspaper  Editors  of  America,  President  Eisen- 
hower proclaimed  that  "We  are  prepared  to  re- 
examine with  the  most  concrete  evidence  our  readi- 
ness to  help  build  a  world  in  which  all  peojjles  can 
be  productive  and  prosperous." 

*  Released  to  the  press  on  May  5  by  the  Office  of  the 
Director  for  Mutual  Security. 


We  are  today  at  a  crossroads  in  our  foreign- 
economic  policy.  No  aspect  of  American  policy 
is  more  important  than  the  course  this  Congress 
chooses  to  adopt  in  our  economic  relations  with 
other  nations.  The  economic  stability  and,  there- 
fore, the  political  stability  of  the  free  world  will 
be  influenced  by  the  wisdom  of  your  decision. 

As  I  see  it,  the  one  guiding  principle  in  setting 
our  course  of  action  should  be:  Does  it  help  the 
U.S.  and  the  free  world  to  grow  in  strength  and 
unit}'  or  does  it  help  the  Soviet  in  its  program  to 
divide  and  conquer  the  free  world.  To  this  end 
we  should  have  as  our  objectives  maintaining  a 
high  level  of  production  and  employment  in  a 
sound,  dynamic,  expanding  xVmerican  economy 
and,  second,  the  positive  strengthening  and  uni- 
fication of  our  free  world  allies  in  rolling  back 
and  defeating  Communist  aggression.  Stalin  in 
his  article  in  the  Communist  publication  Bolshevik 
released  last  October  at  the  19th  Party  Congress 
regarded  as  inevitable,  because  he  hoped  and 
wanted  it  to  happen,  a  trade  war  between  the  na- 
tions of  the  free  world.  Malenkov  in  his  October 
5  report  to  the  19th  Party  Congress  was  even  more 
explicit : 

American  imperialism  is  acting  today  not  only  as  an 
international  exploiter  and  enslaver  of  nations  but  also 
as  a  force  that  is  disrupting  the  economies  of  the  other 
capitalist  countries.  ...  It  is  wrecking  the  historically 
established  multilateral  economic  ties  between  the  capi- 
talist countries  and  replacing  them  by  unilateral  ties 
between  these  countries  and  the  United  States.  Boosting 
their  exports  through  the  most  unscrupulous  dumping 
while  at  the  same  time  closing  their  home  market  to 
foreign  goods  .  .  .  the  economic  policy  pursued  by  Amer- 
ican imperialists  is  bound  to  aggravate  the  antagonisms 
between  the  United  States  and  other  capitalist  countries. 

If  we  wish  to  prevent  the  realization  of  Stalin's 
and  Malenkov's  predictions  and  hopes,  if  we  wish 
to  thwart  the  Communist  policy  objective  of  divid- 
ing the  free  world,  then  can  there  be  any  question 
at  all  that  we  do  not  want  to  reverse  the  trend  of 
the  past  two  decades  and  raise  again  trade  barriers 
to  the  goods  and  services  of  our  friends? 

In  terms  of  our  foreign-policy  objectives  set 
down  by  the  President  and  in  terms  of  the  objec- 
tives of  the  Mutual  Security  Act  which  require  me 
as  Administrator  to  "strengthen  the  mutual  se- 
curity of  the  Free  World"  and  "to  develop  their 
resources  in  the  interest  of  their  security  and  in- 
dependence and  the  national  interests  of  the 
United  States,"  let  me  cite  a  few  facts : 


Results  of  Reducing  Exports 

1.  If  we  reduce  our  exports  what  happens  ?  We 
hurt  America  and  we  hurt  our  friends  abroad.  In 
1952  we  exported  roughly  10  percent  of  the  total 
movable  goods  (agricultural  products,  manufac- 
tures, etc.)  that  we  produced.  Our  wheat  farmers 
exported  48  percent  of  their  total  production  in 
1952,  our  cotton  farmers  37  percent,  our  tobacco 
farmers  25  percent.  Our  machine  tool  manufac- 
turers 11  percent  of  their  production  in  1952,  our 


746 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


tractor  nifinufacturers  23  percent  of  their  produc- 
tion. These  are  but  a  few  examples  of  the  extent 
to  which  American  farmers,  hiborers,  and  business- 
men depend  on  exports  for  their  own  livelihood. 
With  large  surpluses  of  butter,  cheese,  dried  milk, 
and  cotton  in  our  storage  warehouses,  it  is  em- 
phatically important  that  we  must  export  more  not 
less  or  our  American  taxpayer  will  be  paying  more 
in  terms  of  price  supports.  If  we  reduce  our  ex- 
ports we  hurt  our  own  people  but  we  also  hurt 
our  friends  abroad  and  allies  who  are  dependent 
on  these  imports  which  are  vital  to  their  own  econ- 
omies and  to  the  free-world  defense.  For  ex- 
ample, the  United  Kingdom  in  1952  imported 
from  the  United  States  about  10  percent  of  its  total 
imports  and  its  total  imports  were  about  a  fourth 
of  the  U.K.  total  consumption.  Japan,  to  take  a 
country  on  the  other  side  of  the  world,  imported 
from  the  United  States  about  30  percent  of  its 
total  imports  which  too  represented  a  considerable 
portion  of  its  total  consumption. 

2.  If  we  try  and  balance  payments  by  continuing 
large-scale  aid  indefinitely  we  either  increase  our 
taxes  or  our  debt — perhaps  both.  We  weaken 
the  basic  moi'ale  and  initiative  of  our  friends. 
We  play  into  the  hands  of  the  Soviet  propa- 
gandists. 

Any  industrial  country  such  as  the  United  States 
which  depends  on  the  outside  world  100  percent 
for  its  tin,  100  percent  for  its  mica,  100  percent 
for  its  asbestos,  100  percent  for  its  chrome,  99  per- 
cent for  its  nickel,  93  percent  for  its  cooalt,  95 
percent  for  its  manganese,  67  percent  for  its  wool, 
65  percent  for  its  bauxite,  55  percent  for  its  lead, 
42  percent  for  its  copper  is  unwise  in  terms  of  its 
own  self-interest  to  raise  new  trade  barriers. 

I  submit  to  you  that  at  this  juncture  in  the  devel- 
opment of  unity  and  strength  among  the  free  na- 
tions the  present  Reciprocal  Trade  Agreements 
Act  should  be  extended  and,  as  the  President  has 
recommended,  a  thorough  study  and  re-examina- 
tion of  the  facts  should  be  carried  on  to  allow  us 
to  set  the  best  forward  course. 


President  Recommends  Commission 
To  Review  Commercial  Policy 

White  House  press  release  dated  May  2 

The  President  on  May  2  sent  the  foUotuing  letter 
to  Vice  President  Nixon  and  Speaker  of  the  House 
Joseph  W.  Martin,  Jr.  : 

In  the  Message  which  I  sent  to  the  Congress 
on  April  seventh  requesting  a  one-year  extension 
of  the  present  Reciprocal  Trade  Agreements  Act,^ 
I  referred  to  the  need  for  a  thorough  reexamina- 
tion of  our  whole  foreign  economic  policy. 

I  now  recommend  that  a  commission  be  esfab- 


'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  27,  1953,  p.  634. 
May  25,    7953 


lished  to  make  this  review.  The  review  should 
provide  tlie  basis  for  action  during  the  next  session 
of  the  Congress. 

It  is  my  belief  that  the  proposed  commission 
sliould  be  made  up  of  members  of  the  Congress 
appointed  by  the  Vice  President  and  the  Speaker 
of  the  House,  and  members  appointed  by  myself 
from  outside  the  Congress.  It  should  be  repre- 
sentative of  both  major  parties.  This  is  appropri- 
ate since  commercial  policy  is  an  integral  part 
of  our  total  foreign  policy  for  which  broacl  national 
support  is  vital. 

This  commission  naturally  should  work  within 
the  framework  of  our  foreign  policy  and  our  global 
defense  plans.  Close  liaison  should  be  maintained 
with  the  group  set  up  under  the  auspices  of  the 
State  Department  to  follow  up  the  economic  and 
financial  talks  held  earlier  this  spring  between  the 
United  States  and  various  European  countries. 

The  commission  should  study  all  existing  legis- 
lation and  tlie  regulations  and  administrative  pro- 
cedures stemming  from  it  which  bear  directly  on 
our  foreign  economic  relations.  This  review 
should  seek  to  determine  how  these  laws  can  be 
modified  or  improved  so  as  to  achieve  the  highest 
possible  levels  of  international  trade  without  sub- 
jecting parts  of  our  economy  to  sudden  or  serious 
strains. 

An  inquiry  of  this  nature  is  imperative.  The 
economic  policy  of  this  nation  exercises  such  a 
profound  influence  on  the  entire  free  world  that 
we  must  consider  carefully  each  step  we  take. 
Changes  in  foreign  economic  policy — even  those 
which  at  first  have  relatively  slight  consequences 
within  this  country — may  either  strengthen  our 
allies  or  plunge  them  into  a  downward  spiral  of 
trade  and  payment  restrictions,  lower  production, 
and  declining  living  standards. 

Our  foreign  economic  policy  also  has  important 
implications  here  at  home.  Declining  imports  will 
necessarily  mean  falling  exports,  resulting  in  a 
serious  loss  of  markets  for  our  agriculture  and 
other  industries.  Expanded  imports  may  require 
some  adjustments  in  our  country.  We  must  make 
sure  that  changes  in  foreign  economic  policy  con- 
sonant with  our  position  as  the  world's  greatest 
creditor  nation  do  not  benefit  particular  groups 
at  the  expense  of  the  national  welfare,  but  we 
must  also  make  sure  that  such  changes  do  not  place 
unequal  burdens  on  particular  groups. 

As  I  indicated  in  my  previous  Message,  the 
achievement  of  a  strong  and  self-supporting  eco- 
nomic system  in  the  free  world,  capable  of  pro- 
viding adequate  defense  against  aggression  and  of 
achieving  rising  standards  of  living,  must  be  a 
cooperative  effort.  Through  increasing  two-way 
international  trade  and  stimulating  in  every  prac- 
tical way  the  flow  of  private  investment  abroad 
we  can  strengthen  the  free  world,  including  our- 
selves, in  natural  and  healthy  ways.  By  so  doing, 
we  can  lessen  and  ultimately  eliminate  the  heavy 
burden  of  foreign  aid  which  we  now  bear.    Both 

747 


we  and  our  friends  abroad  earnestly  desire  to  see 
regular  trade  and  investment  replace  grant 
assistance. 

In  launching  a  broad-gauge  study  into  the  ques- 
tion of  what  our  foreign  economic  policy  should 
be,  I  think  we  can  prepare  the  way  for  a  fuller 
utilization  of  the  economic  strength  of  the  free 
world  in  the  cause  of  peace  and  prosperity. 
Sincerely, 

DwiGHT  D.  Eisenhower 


World  Trade  Week 

Statement  hy  Secretary  Dulles 

Press  release  267  dated  May  15 

The  special  significance  of  World  Trade  Week 
at  this  critical  time  in  international  affairs  is 
emphasized  by  President  Eisenhower  in  pro- 
claiming the  national  observance  of  this  week.^ 
He  stated:  ".  .  .  international  ti-ade  among 
the  nations  of  the  free  world  adds  to  the  economic 
strength  upon  which  their  common  defense  is 
based." 

Our  defenses  are  involved.  As  the  free  world 
seeks  to  build  its  defensive  strength  it  is  essential 
that  we  establish  a  solid  economic  foundation. 
Without  such  a  foundation  our  cooperative  polit- 
ical and  military  structure  is  built  on  quicksand. 
International  trade  plays  a  key  role  in  this 
program. 

The  Soviet  leaders,  past  and  present,  are  aware 
of  the  close  relationship  between  our  trade  policy 
and  the  West's  defense  effort.  They  have  con- 
sistently proceeded  on  the  theory  that  economics 
is  the  free  world's  Achilles  heel.  Stalin  and  his 
successors  have  predicted  an  inevitable  trade  con- 
flict between  the  nations  of  the  free  world  which 
will  bring  in  its  wake  the  certain  disintegration 
of  free  world  unity  and  the  ultimate  world 
triumph  of  communism.  More  than  that,  the 
Soviet  Union  is  working  constantly  to  encourage 
such  a  split  in  the  free  world. 

The  free  world  must  prove  these  predictions 
wrong.  But  we  cannot  do  so  if  we  are  blind  to 
the  fact  that  the  Communist  thesis  includes  some 
valid  elements.  We  could  by  our  own  mistakes 
make  the  Soviet  predictions  come  true. 

We  must  recognize  that  our  political,  security, 
and  economic  interests  cannot  be  divorced.  As 
a  matter  of  fact,  the  ability  of  the  free  nations 
to  resist  Communist  aggression  and  their  willing- 
ness to  cooperate  with  us  on  common-security 
policies  depends  upon  their  economic  well-being. 
That  is,  in  turn,  influenced  by  what  our  economic 
policies,  including  our  tariff  policy,  will  be. 

President  Eisenhower  has  recommended  the 
establishment  of  a  bipartisan  commission  to  de- 
velop recommendations  for  a  foreign-economic 

'  Bulletin  of  May  18, 1953,  p.  716. 


policy  adequate  to  the  needs  of  these  critical 
times.  Public  discussion  during  this  World  Trade 
Week  and  understanding  of  the  issues  involved 
will  help  this  Government  meet  the  responsibili- 
ties in  the  free  world  which  fate  has  thrust 
upon  us. 


Proposed  High-Level  Conference 
With  the  Soviets 

Following  is  the  text  of  a  statement  made  on 
May  13  hy  Michael  J.  McDermott,  Special  As- 
sistant for  Press  Relations,  regarding  a  high-level 
conference  with  the  Soviets,  which  Sir  Winston 
Churchill  proposed  in  the  House  of  Commons  on 
May  11  : 

Prime  Minister  Churchill's  statement  concern- 
ing a  high-level  conference  with  the  Soviets  is  a 
further  manifestation  of  his  own  high  purpose 
and  of  the  fervent  desire  of  all  the  peoples  of  the 
free  world  to  achieve  a  just  and  lasting  peace. 
Such  a  peace  is  a  goal  toward  which  we  and  our 
free  world  Allies  are  devoting  our  constant  effort 
so  that  we  may  help  all  peoples  toward  better 
standards  of  living.  Eecently  President  Eisen- 
hower stressed  his  willingness  to  do  all  within  his 
power  to  ameliorate  existing  international  ten- 
sions and  to  meet  the  other  side  halfway  when 
and  if  there  is  concrete  evidence  that  such  a  meet- 
ing would  produce  positive  results.  The  Presi- 
dent indicated  in  his  speech  of  April  16  ^  those 
places  in  Asia  and  Europe  toward  which  we 
should  look  for  such  evidence.  Indeed,  at  the 
present  time,  negotiations  at  Panmunjom  and 
pending  negotiations  with  respect  to  Austria  af- 
ford opportunity  for  the  Soviets  to  demonstrate 
the  sincerity  of  their  avowals  about  the  peaceful 
settlement  of  major  international  issues.  Such  a 
demonstration  would  help  to  pave  the  way  toward 
a  high-level  conference.^ 


'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  27,  1953,  p.  599. 

"  At  his  press  conference  on  May  14  the  President  said 
in  answer  to  a  question  about  Sir  Winston's  proposal  that 
the  State  Department  had  released  a  statement  with  his 
approval.  All  these  things,  he  said,  were  manifestations 
of  the  free  world's  great  longing  for  some  kind  of  peace- 
ful composition  of  our  difficulties  in  the  world.  The  ques- 
tion was  when  the  heads  of  state,  who  were  very  busy 
men,  could  meet  and  discuss  these  things  with  some 
promise  of  progress. 

He  personally  was  ready  to  do  anything,  the  President 
continued  ;  the  only  thing  he  believed  the  dignity  and  self- 
respect  of  the  United  States  demanded  was  that  we  had 
some  reasonable  indication  that  progress  could  be  made. 
He  did  not  insist  that  complete  progress  be  achieved  or 
that  any  great  blueprint  for  the  peace  of  the  world  come 
out  of  such  a  conference ;  just  that  something  that  could 
be  called  progress  be  made. 

He  had  no  objection  to  Sir  Winston's  proposal,  he  con- 
cluded, but  he  would  like,  before  he  committed  this  Gov- 
ernment to  participate,  something  that  would  be  evidence 
of  good  faith  all  around. 


748 


Departmenf  of  State  Bulletin 


German  Libraries  in  Italy  Restored  to  Former  Ownership 


Following  is  the  text  of  a  Department  announce- 
ment {press  release  £30  dated  May  1,  annotated 
by  Ardelia  R.  Hall,  Arts  and  Monuments  Adviser, 
Division  of  Overseas  Information  Centers),  to- 
gether with  the  text  of  an  agreement  signed  at 
Rome  on  April  30. 

DEPARTMENT  ANNOUNCEMENT  OF  MAY  1 

Clare  Boothe  Luce,  on  behalf  of  the  U.S. 
Government,  and  the  Ambassadors  of  the 
British  and  French  Governments,  the  Italian  Pre- 
mier and  the  Ambassador  of  the  German  Federal 
Kepublic  on  April  30,  1953  signed  an  agreement 
at  Rome  transferring  four  German  mstitutes  m 
Italy  and  their  libraries,  collections,  and  property 
to  the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany  for  restoration 
to  former  legal  ownership  and  administration. 

A  cultural  accord  was  signed  at  Rome  on  Feb- 
ruary 27,  1953,  by  Konrad  Adenauer,  Chancellor 
of  Germany,  and  Alcide  de  Gasperi,  the  Italian 
Premier,  in  accordance  with  the  prior  decision  o± 
the  United  States,  the  United  Kingdom,  and 
France  to  restore  the  institutes  to  the  Federal 
Republic.  The  signing  of  the  five-power  agree- 
ment marks  the  conclusion  of  the  negotiations. 

The  libraries  since  their  return  to  Italy  have 
been  under  the  joint  control  of  the  United  States, 
the  United  Kingdom,  and  France.  They  were 
stored  during  the  war  in  the  salt  mines  of  Austria 
and  in  a  monastery  in  Germany.  They  were  re- 
turned in  1946  from  the  American  Occupied  Zones 
by  Gen.  E.  E.  Hume  and  Gen.  Lucius  D.  Clay 
and  placed  under  the  control  of  the  Alhed  Com- 
mission for  Italy. 

The  restitution  of  the  institutes  is  in  conformity 
with  established  Allied  policies  of  respect  for 
German  cultural  institutions,  observed  throughout 
the  American,  British,  and  French  Zones  of  Ger- 
many. The  reopening  of  museums,  libraries,  and 
universities  was  among  the  earliest  acts  of  the 
Allied  Control  Council  in  Berlin.  The  American 
policy  specifically  stated  that  its  objectives  were 
to  protect  and  preserve  German-owned  cultural 
materials  and  works  of  art  and  the  contents  of 
museums,  libraries,  and  archives,  and  to  complete 

May  25,   7953 


the  transfer  of  administration  to  the  responsible 
German  agencies.^ 

The  history  of  the  four  institutes  in  Italy  under 
the  direction  of  learned  societies  in  Germany 
has  been  fully  published.  They  include  the 
German  Archaeological  Institute  of  Rome,^  the 
German  Historical  Institute,'  the  Hertziana  Li- 
brary,^ and  the  German  Institute  of  the  History 
of  Art  of  Florence.^  They  were  established  in 
1829,  1881,  1911,  and  1897  respectively,  for  the 
advancement  of  research  in  Italy  in  the  fields  of 


'Office  of  Military  Government  for  Germany  (U.S.), 
Military  Government  Regulations,  Title  18:  Monuments 
Fine  Arts  and  Archives  (Change  No.  1,  12  February  1947. 
Berlin)  par.  18-111  and  l.S-113:  Germany  19^7-19-^9— 
The  Story  in  Documents,  Department  of  State  pubUca- 
tlon  3550.  p.  619. 

=  The  German  Archaeological  Institute,  Rome  Branch 
(Deutsches  Archaologische  Institut,  Riimische  Zweigan- 
stalt)  was  administered  by  the  German  Archaeological 
Institute,  with  headquarters  in  Berlin.  The  foundat.on 
of  the  Institute  and  its  early  history  are  set  fortb  jn 
the  following  references:  Bullettino  degli  Annali  dell 
Institnto  di  corrispondenxa  archeologica  per  lanno  18W 
(Salvineci,  Rome,  1829),  pp.  iii-viii,  "Manifesto  di  asso- 
ciazione  "  and  pp.  66-70 ;  Annali  delV  Instxtuto  di  corrv- 
sZZenzaarcZlooica/yol.  1  (1829);  Gerhart  Roclen- 
waldt  Archdologisches  Institut  des  Deiitschen  Retches 
1S29-1929   (Walter  de  Gruyter,  Berlin,  1929). 

'The  German  Historical  Institute  (Deutsches  His- 
torisches  Institut)  was  founded  under  the  °ame  of J^! 
German  Historical  Station  of  the  Royal  Academj  of 
Sciences  following  the  opening  of  the  Papal  secret 
archives!  The  early  history  of  the  Institute  is  given  in 
the  following  volume:  Walter  Fviedensburg,  Das  Konjg- 
llch  Preussische  Historische  Instmt  "J  R""*  "^^«^ 
dreizehn  erstcn  Jahren  seines  Bestehens  188^-1901  (Xer- 
lag  der  Kcinigl.     Akademie  der  Wissenschaften,  Berlin, 

•The  Hertziana  Library  (Bibliotheca  Hertziana)  was 
bequeathed  to  and  administered  by  the  Kaiser  Wi  helm 
Gesellschaft  fiir  Kunstwissenschaft,  now  the  Max-Planck 
Gesellschaft.  An  account  of  the  Hertziana  Library  and 
of  the  Palace  Zuccari  and  its  frescoes  is  found  in  tne 
following  references:  Jean  Paul  Richter,  La  coUecitone 
Hertz  e  gli  affreschi  di  Giulio  Romano  nei  Palazzo  Zucc^ri. 
Con  una  prefazione  di  Robert  Mond.  (Romische  For- 
sZZn  der  BiUiotheca  Hertziana  V  1928.  Privately 
printed.  Leipzig)  :  Werner  Korte,  Der  Palazzo  Zuccari  m 
Rom  Sein  Freskenschmuck  vnd  seine  Geschichte  (Verlag 
Heinrich  Keller,  Leipzig,  1935),  also  contains  a  bibhog- 
raphv  on  the  Bibliotheca  Hertziana,  pp.  SS,  89. 

'The  German  Institute  of  the  History  of  Art  in  Florence 
(Kunsthistorisches  Institut  in  Florenz)  was  founded  and 

749 


classical  archeology,  Italian  painting,  and  Papal 
history.  They  were  permanently  located  in  Rome 
and  Florence,  cities  which  are  vast  repositories  of 
the  cultural  heritage  of  Western  Europe.  They 
were  ably  administered  for  over  a  half  a  century 
in  the  service  of  generations  of  scholars.  As  such 
they  come  under  the  protective  articles  of  inter- 
national law  in  The  Hague  conventions  of  1899 
and  1907,''  which  proclaim  the  inviolability  of  all 
institutions  dedicated  to  religion,  charity,  educa- 
tion, and  the  arts  and  sciences.  The  American 
position,  that  "the  libraries  are  regarded  by  this 
Government  as  cultural  property  to  be  excluded 
from  German  external  assets  and  to  be  returned 
to  their  rightful  owners,"  was  published  in  1951.' 
The  magnificent  libraries  of  these  institutes, 
among  the  finest  specialized  libraries  in  the  world, 
are  their  chief  scholarly  asset.  Valued  in  the  mil- 
lions of  dollars,  they  have  been  increased  over  the 
years  by  many  private  donors.  The  international 
group  of  scholare  and  patrons  which  founded  the 
Arcliaeological  Institute  in  1829  generously  sup- 
ported it.  Among  the  founders  was  the  distin- 
guished French  archaeologist,  Quatremere  de 
Quincy,  and  the  Institute  exemplifies  his  famous 
analogy  of  "the  universal  republic  of  arts  and 
sciences,"  as  a  spiritual  republic  in  which  peoples 
of  all  countries  are  members  and  share  its  lofty 
concerns.*  The  Institute  grew  with  the  acquisition 
of  the  von  Bunsen  collection  in  1838,  the  Parthey 
Library,  and  the  library  of  Baron  Platner  in  1878, 
and  in  recent  years  was  deeded  the  estate  of  one 
of  its  directors.  The  Historical  Institute  began  its 
library  with  a  collection  from  the  Royal  Library 
of  Berlin.  The  Florence  Institute  was  developed 
by  the  members  of  an  international  society  of 
friends  of  the  Institute. 

The  Hertziana  Library  is  a  unique  memorial  to 
international  good  will.  It  was  created  by  Hen- 
rietta Hertz  and  her  British  friends,  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Ludwig  Mond,  with  her  library  and  that  of  Mrs. 
Mond  as  a  nucleus.  Mr.  Mond  was  a  distinguished 
scientist  and  philanthropist.  The  Mond  family 
and  Miss  Hertz  are  famous  for  their  patronage  of 
the  arts,  and  they  will  always  be  remembered  for 


administered  by  the  Society  for  the  Maintenance  of  the 
Institute  of  Art  History  in  Florence  (Der  Verein  zur 
Erhaltung  des  Kunstliistorischen  Institutes  in  Florenz). 
Tlie  history  of  the  Florence  Institute  is  given  in  the  fol- 
lowing pamphlet  and  annual  reports:  Ktinsthistorisches 
Institut  in  Florenz  1897-1925  (pamphlet  published  on  the 
80th  birthday  of  Wilhelm  Bode)  ;  JahreshcricMe,  Verein 
zur  Erhaltung  des  Kunsthistorischen  Institutes  in 
Florence. 

'Convention  (II)  with  respect  to  the  laics  and  customs 
of  tear  on  land,  signed  at  The  Hague,  July  29,  1899,  annex 
to  the  convention,  article  56  (U.S.  Treaty  Series  No.  403)  ; 
Convention  (IV)  respecting  the  laws  and  customs  of  tear 
on  land,  signed  at  The  Hague,  Oct.  18,  1907,  annex  to  the 
convention,  article  56  (U.S.  Treaty  Series  No.  539). 

'  Bulletin  of  Aug.  27,  1951,  p.  345. 

'  Charles  De  Visscher,  "International  Protection  of 
Works  of  Art  and  Historic  Monuments,"  Documents  and 
State  Papers,  .Tune  1949,  p,  824;  reprinted  as  Department 
of  State  publication  3590. 


their  farsighted  beneficence  in  the  foundation  of 
the  Bibliotheca  Hertziana,  for  their  enrichment  of 
tlie  museums  of  London  and  Rome,  and  for  their 
generosity  to  the  academies  of  the  United  King- 
dom "  and  Germany. 

Miss  Hertz  acquired  a  16th  century  palace  on 
the  Piazza  Trinita  de'  Monti  from  Mr.  Mond  and 
bequeathed  it  to  the  Kaiser  Wilhelm  Gesellschaft 
(now  the  Max-Planck  Gesellschaft).  In  her  un- 
published will.  Miss  Hertz  has  clearly  and  beau- 
tifully expressed  her  intent  that  "the  Palazzo 
Zuccari  and  its  annexes,  true  to  their  tradition, 
may  for  all  time  serve  the  cultivation  of  art  and 
science.  With  this  in  mind  there  has  been  estab- 
lished in  the  lower  rooms,  painted  by  Frederico 
Zuccaro  (1542-1609)  himself,  a  library  of  the  his- 
tory of  art  which  is  to  be  located  there  perma- 
nently under  the  name  of  the  Bibliotheca 
Hertziana  .  .  ."  so  as  "to  establish  in  Rome  a 
permanent  seat  of  art  rich  in  accomplishments." 
With  the  same  objective.  Miss  Hertz  also  be- 
queathed her  collection  of  paintings  to  the  Italian 
State,  "as  a  token  of  my  affection  for  the  country 
that  I  hold  in  such  esteem  as  the  seat  of  art  in  the 
past  and,  I  hope,  also  in  the  years  to  come." 

It  is  to  honor  the  generous  spirit  of  such  bene- 
factors who  have  dedicated  their  gifts  to  the  public 
good  that  the  four  nations,  Italy,  France,  the 
United  Kingdom,  and  the  United  States,  have  re- 
stored the  institutes  and  all  their  resources  to  the 
German  learned  societies  in  order  that  they  may 
maintain  the  trust,  which  they  have  received  from 
past  generations,  unaltered  and  undiminished. 

TEXT  OF  AGREEMENT 

Whereas  the  Governments  of  the  French  Republic,  the 
United  Kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and  Northern  Ireland, 
and  the  United  States  of  America,  have  in  accordance  with 
the  right  to  dispose  of  German  assets  in  Italy  conferred 
upon  them  by  article  77,  paragraph  5,  of  the  Treaty  of 
Peace  with  Italy,  decided  to  release  from  custody  to  the 
former  German  owners  certain  libraries  and  collections  in 
Italy,  namely 

(a)   The  Hertziana  Library,  Rome ; 
(6)   The     German     Archeologlcal     Institute     Library, 
Rome; 

(c)  The  Library  of  the  German  Institute  of  Art  His- 
tory, Florence ; 

(d)  The  Library  of  the  German  Historical  Institute, 
Rome  (hereinafter  referred  to  as  "the  Libraries"), 

as  well  as  certain  properties,  namely 

(e)  The  Villino  Amelung,  Rome; 

(/)  The  Palazzo  Zuccari,  Rome  (hereinafter  referred 
to  as  "the  Properties"). 

AND  Whereas  the  Governments  of  the  French  Republic, 
the  United  Kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and  Northern  Ire- 
land, and  the  United  States  of  America  have  agreed  in 
the  case  of  the  Libraries  and  the  Properties  to  release  the 
Government  of  the  Italian  Republic  (hereinafter  referred 
to  as  "the  Italian  Government")  from  their  obligation 
under  Paragraph  3  of  the  Memorandum  of  Understanding 
regarding  German  assets  in  Italy  signed  in  Washington  ou 
14th  August  1947. 

The  Governments  of  the  French  Republic,  the  United 


"Proceedings  of  the  British  Academy,  191S-1914,  pp. 
10,  11. 


750 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and  Nortliern  Ireland,  the 
United  States  of  America,  tlie  Italian  Republic  and  the 
Federal  Republic  of  Germany  have  agreed  as  follows : 


The  Libraries  and  the  Properties  will  be  released  from 
custody  to  their  former  owners,  or  to  their  successors  in 
right,  title  or  interest ;  or,  in  the  event  of  there  being  any 
doubt  or  dispute  in  respect  to  any  such  right,  title  or 
interest,  to  the  custody  of  the  Government  of  the  Federal 
Republic  of  Germany  for  eventual  release  to  their  lawful 
owners.  All  of  such  disposition  shall  be  subject  to  the 
following  terms : 

(a)  The  Libraries  shall  remain  in  Italy. 

(6)  The  Libraries  shall  be  maintained  by  the  owners 
as  international  centres  of  scholarship  and  research  open 
to  all  nationals,  and  shall  be  administered  in  such  a  man- 
ner as  to  serve  impartially  and  without  discrimination 
the  interests  of  scholars  of  all  nations. 

(c)  The  Government  of  the  Federal  Republic  of  Ger- 
many waive  on  their  own  behalf  and  on  behalf  of  the 
former  owners  or  their  successors  all  claims  whatsoever 
against  the  Governments  of  the  French  Republic,  the 
United  Kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and  Northern  Ireland, 
the  United  States  of  America,  the  Italian  Republic  and 
all  the  agents  and  representatives  of  the  said  Govern- 
ments in  respect  of  the  aforesaid  Libraries  and  Properties, 
from  the  time  of  their  removal  from  the  control  of  the 
owners  until  their  release  as  provided  in  this  Article. 

II 

The  Italian  Government,  in  consideration  of  the  guar- 
antees exchanged  between  themselves  and  the  Government 
of  the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany  in  the  Exchange  of 
Letters  signed  in  Rome  on  27th  February  19.53  and  of 
their  desire  to  emphasize  the  universal  cultural  interest 
of  the  Libraries,  are  prepared  to  assist  in  finding  suitable 
premises  for  housing  the  Libraries  of  the  German  Arche- 
ological  Institute  and  of  the  German  Historical  Institute, 
and  to  grant  to  the  Libraries,  within  the  limits  of  the  law, 
the  same  facilities  which  they  enjoyed  in  the  past. 

Ill 

This  Agreement  shall  enter  into  force  upon  1st  May 
1953.  In  witness  whereof  the  undersigned,  being  duly 
authorised  thereto  by  their  respective  governments,  have 
signed  the  present  agreement. 

Done  at  Rome  in  quintuplicate  this  30th  day  of  April 
1953. 

For  the  Government  of  the  French  Republic 
Jacques  Fouques  Duparc 

For  the  Oovenunent  of  the  United  Kingdom  of  Great 
Britain  and  Northern  Ireland 
Victor  Mallet 

For  the  Oovemment  of  the  United  States  of  America 
Clare  Boothe  Luce 

For  the  Oovemment  of  the  Italian  Republic 
De  Gasperi 

For  the  Government  of  the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany 
Clemens  Von  Brent  and 


Unification  of  Austrian 
Exchange  System 

An  initial  par  value  for  the  Austrian  schilling, 
at  26  schillings  per  U.S.  dollar,  has  been  estab- 
lished by  agreement  between  the  Government  of 
Austria  and  the  International  Monetary  Fund, 
the  Fund  announced  on  April  30. 


The  Austrian  Government  has  informed  the 
Fund  that  it  is  discontinuing  all  multiple  currency 
practices  and  intends  to  pursue  fiscal  and  credit 
policies  designed  to  maintain  the  effectiveness 
of  the  par  value.  The  new  measures  represent  the 
latest  in  a  series  of  steps,  taken  in  consultation 
with  the  Fund,  to  achieve  domestic  monetary 
stability  and  make  possible  the  unification  of 
Atjstria's  exchange  rates. 

The  par  value  for  Austria  is  as  follows,  effective 
May  4, 1953 : 

0.0341796  grams  of  fine  gold  per  schilling; 

910.000  schillings  per  trov  ounce  of  fine  gold ; 

26.0000  schillings  per  U.S.  dollar; 

3.84615  U.S.  cents  per  schilling. 


New  Meeting  of  Austrian 
Treaty  Deputies 

Press  release  256  dated  May  11 

The  President,  in  his  speech  to  the  American 
Society  of  Newspaper  Editoi's  on  April  16,'  called 
upon  the  Soviets  to  prove  the  sincerity  of  their 
peaceful  words  by  performing  those  deeds  which 
are  now  unquestionably  within  their  power  and 
which  would  materially  enhance  the  prospects  for 
peace.  The  President  and  Secretary  Dulles  have 
both  pointed  out  that  the  Austrian  question  is  one 
of  several  the  resolution  of  which  would  demon- 
strate the  good  faith  and  peaceful  intentions  of 
the  Soviets. 

The  United  States,  in  concert  with  the  United 
Kingdom  and  France,  has  had  the  question  of  an 
Austrian  settlement  under  constant  consideration 
since  1946  with  a  view  to  re-establishing  the  free- 
dom and  independence  of  Austria  as  promised  in 
the  Moscow  Declaration  of  1943,  to  which  the 
United  States,  Great  Britain,  France,  and  the 
Soviet  Union  are  committed. - 

By  the  end  of  1952  a  total  of  258  meetings  of  the 
deputies  of  these  four  powers  had  been  held  with- 
out producing  final  agreement  on  a  treaty.  On 
December  20, 1952,  the  U.N.  General  Assembly  re- 
quested the  four  powers  to  do  everything  possible 
to  arrive  at  a  speedy  settlement  of  the  Austrian 
question.  Two  meetings  of  the  Austrian  treaty 
deputies  were  then  held  in  London  in  February 
1953,  but  no  substantial  progress  was  made. 

The  Secretary  General  of  the  treaty  deputies 
has  now  called  for  a  meeting  to  be  held  at  London 
on  May  27.  The  U.S.  deputy,  Walter  C.  Dowling, 
will  be  present  at  the  meeting  under  instructions 
to  do  everything  in  his  power  to  conclude  an  equi- 
table Austrian  settlement. 


'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  27, 1953,  p.  599. 

-  For  a  chronology  of  events  relating  to  the  Austrian 
treaty  question,  see  ibid.,  Aug.  11,  1952,  p.  222. 


May  25,    1953 


751 


Visit  of  Indian  Vice  President 

Press  release  263  dated  May  14 

Upon  the  invitation  of  this  Government,  S. 
Kadhakrishnan,  Vice  President  of  India,  will  come 
to  Washington  on  May  20. 

Mr.  Kadhakrishnan  will  stay  at  Blair-Lee 
Hpuse.  During  his  visit  the  Vice  President  will 
call  on  the  President  and  visit  Mount  Vernon  and 
the  Tomb  of  the  Unknown  Soldier  at  Arlington. 
On  May  21  a  dinner  will  be  given  in  his  honor 
by  the  Acting  Secretary  of  State.  On  May  22  the 
Vice  President  of  the  United  States  will  give  a 
luncheon  in  his  honor  at  the  Capitol,  and  on  the 
same  day  the  Ambassador  of  India  will  give  a 
reception  at  the  Embassy.  Mr.  Radhakrishnan 
will  leave  by  train  for  Canada  on  May  24. 


Laos  Constitution  Day 

Press  release  25T  dated  May  11 

Secretary  Dulles  transmitted  the  following  mes- 
sage to  the  Prime  Minister  of  Laos,  Souvanna- 
Phouma,  on  the  occasion  of  Laos  Constitution 
Bay,  May  11  {May  10,  U.  S.  thne)  : 

On  occasion  Laos  Constitution  Day,  I  am  glad  to 
express  sympathy  and  admiration  with  which  the 
United  States  Government  and  people  have  fol- 
lowed the  valiant  resistance  of  Laos  to  Communist 
aggression.  This  aggression  was  a  particularly 
shocking  act  against  a  free  constitutional  govern- 
ment which  has  shown  that  it  enjoys  full  support 
of  its  citizens  in  time  of  grave  crisis.  Your  armed 
forces  and  those  from  other  parts  of  the  French 
Union  are  giving  to  the  Free  World  a  heartening 
demonstration  of  a  brave  and  resourceful  fight 
against  aggression ;  a  fight  which  I  am  confident 
will  be  successful. 


Greek  Problems  Discussed 

Press  release  255  dated  May  9 

Spyros  Markezinis,  Minister  of  Coordination  of 
the  Government  of  Greece,  held  discussions  this 
week  with  the  President,  the  Secretary  of  State, 
the  Secretary  of  the  Treasury,  and  the  Director 
for  Mutual  Security  concerning  Greek  defense  and 
economic  conditions. 

The  Government  of  the  United  States  is  fully 
aware  of  the  severe  difficulties  which  have  con- 
tinuously confronted  the  Greek  people  during  the 
postwar  years  in  suppressing  armed  Communist 
subversions,  achieving  the  physical  rehabilitation 
of  Greece,  and  securing  the  internal  stability  of 
the  country.  It  stresses  once  again  its  admira- 
tion for  the  progress  achieved  by  the  efforts  and 
sacrifices  of  the  Greek  people  and  its  wholehearted 
and  continuing  interest  in  the  future  of  Greece. 


This  Government  views  with  deep  satisfaction 
the  state  of  readiness  of  the  Greek  Armed  Forces 
and  tlie  progress  made  by  Greece  with  her  friendly 
neighbors  for  defense  against  aggression.  It  rec- 
ognizes that  tlie  considerable  strides  of  Greece 
toward  economic  stability,  attained  by  the  vigor- 
ous action  of  the  Greek  Government,  provide  a 
sound  basis  for  future  economic  development  and 
I'epresent  a  most  encouraging  achievement. 

The  Government  of  the  United  States  welcomes 
the  intention  of  the  Greek  Government  to  develop 
a  long-term  investment  program.  We  hope  that 
such  a  program  will  command  support  in  Greece 
and  abroad  from  those  who  would  normally 
finance  such  a  progi'am.  The  U.S.  Government 
insofar  as  it  is  concerned  expects  to  continue,  sub- 
ject to  congressional  authorization,  economic  and 
military  assistance  to  Greece,  and  the  executive 
branch  has  asked  Congress  for  mutual-security 
funds  for  this  purpose  for  the  next  fiscal  year. 
Such  funds  as  well  as  funds  previously  appropri- 
ated for  the  current  fiscal  year  will,  we  expect,  help 
in  the  implementation  of  the  long-term  program 
referred  to. 


U.  S.,  Canada  Discuss 
Mutual  Problems 


Text  of  Joint  Communique 

White  House  press  release  dated  May  8 

The  President  of  the  United  States,  the  Secre- 
tary of  State,  and  other  members  of  the  Cabinet 
have  held  discussions  during  the  last  two  days 
with  the  Canadian  Prime  Minister,  Mr.  Louis  S. 
St.  Laurent,  and  the  Secretary  of  State  for  Ex- 
ternal Affairs,  Mr.  L.  B.  Pearson.  The  meeting 
continued  a  long  standing  practice  of  visits  ex- 
changed across  the  border  between  Prime  Min- 
isters of  Canada  and  Presidents  of  the  United 
States.  The  conversations  consisted  of  a  full  and 
frank  exchange  of  views  on  the  world  situation 
in  general  and  on  United  States-Canadian  rela- 
tions in  particular.  They  were  conducted  in  that 
spirit  of  friendship  and  cooperation  which  has 
long  been  characteristic  of  official  discussions  be- 
tween the  two  Governments  and  they  revealed  a 
far-reaching  identity  of  objectives. 

In  a  survey  of  the  world  situation  today,  the 
President  and  the  Prime  Minister  gave  particular 
emphasis  to  recent  developments  in  the  U.S.S.R. 
and  the  Soviet  orbit  and  their  effects  upon  the 
free  nations  of  the  world.  It  was  agreed  that 
while  every  effort  should  be  made  to  bring  about 
a  relaxation  of  current  tensions,  the  free  nations 
could  not  afford  to  diminish  their  efforts  toward 
the  achievement  of  united  strength  and  ability  to 
meet  aggression.  Acts,  not  words,  would  be  proof 
of  Communist  intentions.  Though  recent  devel- 
opments in  Korea  where  Canadian  and  United 
States  troops  are  fighting  side  by  side  have  seemed 


752 


Department  of  State  Bvlhtin 


more  hopeful,  nevertheless,  in  Laos  a  new  act  of 
ago-ression  has  been  committed  which  might  have 
serious  consequences  for  Thailand  and  the  whole 
of  Southeast  Asia.  These  developments  in  South- 
.  east  Asia  must  cast  doubt  on  Communist 
I  intentions. 

In  the  discussions  on  the  European  area,  em- 
phasis was  placed  on  the  necessity  of  maintaining 
the  momentum  of  vigorous  support  for  Nato. 
The  achievements  of  the  recent  Nato  Ministerial 
meeting  were  noted  with  satisfaction.  It  was 
ao-reed  that  both  countries  must  continue  to  do 
their  full  share  to  further  Nato  objectives. 

Views  were  exchanged  concerning  progress 
made  toward  the  expansion  of  world  trade.  It  was 
recalled  that  trade  between  the  United  States  and 
Canada  is  greater  than  that  between  any  other  two 
countries.  The  Prime  Minister  stressed  the  great 
importance  attached  by  Canada  to  the  liberation 
and  expansion  of  world  trade  and  expressed  the 
hope  that  the  United  States  would  play  a  role  of 
leadership  in  this  field.  The  President  stated 
that,  as  an  interim  step,  the  Administration  has 
recommended  to  the  Congress  the  one-year  re- 
newal of  the  Reciprocal  Trade  Act  and  intends  to 
submit  to  the  Congress  shortly  its  proposals  re- 
garding Customs  Simplification.  The  President 
also  pointed  out  that  he  has  recommended  to  the 
Congress  the  establishment  of  a  Commission  to 
study  all  aspects  of  United  States  economic  for- 
eign policy  so  that  future  policies  will  be  compre- 
hensive, constructive  and  consistent. 

The  Prime  Minister  emphasized  the  importance 
to  Canada  of  an  early  start  on  the  St.  Lawrence 
project  and  the  especial  urgency  to  Canada  of  the 
power  development.     The  President  assured  the 
Prime  Minister  that  the  United  States  is  fully 
aware  of  Canada's  urgent  need  for  St.  Lawrence 
power.     He  said  that  he  favored  the  development 
of  the  United  States  share  of  St.  Lawrence  power 
under  the  authority  of  New  York  State  and  that 
he  hoped  for  an  early  favorable  decision  by  the 
Federal  Power  Commission  in  this  matter.    The 
President  in  this  connection  referred  to  the  deci- 
sion of  the  Cabinet  on  this  subject  announced  to- 
day.^   The  Prime  Minister  said  that  the  Canadian 
Government  was  still  prepared  to  discuss  United 
States  participation  in  the  international  section, 
provided  that  arrangements  for  power  construc- 
tion are  completed  and  provided  the  whole  seaway 
would  not  be  delayed.    He  stressed  again  Canada's 
readiness  to  proceed  at  once  with  the  work  under 
the  Canadian  St.  Lawrence  legislation  of  1951. 

Recognizing  the  importance  to  the  free  world 
of  the  adequate  defense  of  the  North  American 
continent,  the  President  and  the  Prime  Minister 
emphasized  the  desirability  and  effectiveness  o± 
cooperation  on  the  basis  of  the  Ogdensburg  Decla- 
ration of  1910,  which  established  the  Permanent 
Joint  Board  on  Defense  between  Canada  and  the 


'  Infra. 
May  25,   1953 


United  States.  Post-war  arrangements  for  con- 
tinental defense  have  continued  in  this  framework. 
It  was  recognized  by  the  Prime  Minister  and  the 
President  that  joint  defense  facilities  erected  in 
Canada  under  these  arrangements  strengthen  the 
defense  and  the  security  of  both  Canada  and  the 
United  States.  The  President  assured  the  Prime 
Minister  that  the  United  States,  for  its  part,  in 
such  joint  actions  will  continue  scrupulously  to 
respect  Canadian  sovereignty. 

The  Prime  Minister  and  the  President  reafbrmed 
the  importance  of  continuing  the  wholehearted  co- 
operation between  the  two  countries  m  the  field 
of  continental  defense,  and  in  the  wider  field  of 
international  action  designed  to  preserve  and 
strengthen  peace. 


Special  Committee's  Report 
on  St.  Lawrence  Seaway  Project 

White  House  press  release  dated  May  8 

The  Cabinet  on  May  8  unanimously  approved 
a  report  by  a  special  Cabinet  Committee,  appointed 
by  the  President  to  study  the  St.  LawrenccvGreat 
Lakes  Seaway  project.  The  Committee  consisted 
of  representatives  of  the  Departments  of  State, 
Defense,  Commerce,  and  the  Interior.         ^  ,  .     , 

The  Committee  proposed,  and  the  Cabinet 
agreed,  that  participation  by  the  United  Stages 
in  the  seaway  project  is  highly  desirable,  provided 
such  participation  is  limited  to  the  international 
section  of  the  St.  Lawrence  between  Lake  H-rie 

and  Montreal.  .  -^.v    j-t. 

The  recommendation  is  consistent  with  the 
administration's  policy  of  considering  each  ma]or 
construction  project  on  its  merits  and  m  terms 
of  whether  it  should  be  a  Federal,  local,  or  private 
project  or  a  combination  of  any  two  or  all. 

The  recommendations  of  the  Committee,  as  ap- 
proved by  the  Cabinet,  follow : 

1.  The"  interests  of  the  United  States,  taken  as 
a  whole,  make  desirable  participation  in  the  St. 
Lawrence-Great  Lakes  Seaway  project,  limited  to 
the  international  section  of  the  St.  Lawrence  be- 
tween Lake  Erie  and  Montreal. 

2.  Participation  by  the  United  States  should, 
however,  be  expressly  conditioned  on :  (a)  Satis- 
f  actorv  assurance  that  the  underlying  power  proj- 
ect will  go  ahead,  pursuant  to  appropriate  author- 
ization; (i)  satisfactory  assurance  that  Canada 
will  go  ahead  with  its  part  of  the  navigation  proj- 
ect, in  cooperation  with  the  United  States;  and 
(c)  predication  of  the  project  on  a  self -liquidating 
basis.  The  Committee  is  of  the  opinion  that  these 
conditions  are  reasonable  and  consistent  with  na- 
tional policy. 

3.  Participation  by  the  United  States  now  m 
the  construction  and"operation  of  a  St.  Lawrence 
River  Seaway  would  increase  its  defense  advan- 

753 


tages  to  this  country,  and  would  in  time  of  emer- 
gency assure  it  of  full  benefits  of  joint  participa- 
tion. 

4.  Participation  by  the  United  States  now  in 
the  project  would  strengthen  our  strategic  position 
at  all  times  respecting  use  of  the  seaway  for  trans- 
portation of  basic  materials. 

5.  Construction  of  the  international  rapids  sec- 
tion canals  on  the  U.  S.  side  would  be  more  econom- 
ical than  construction  on  the  Canadian  side  and 
would  result  in  lower  tolls,  and,  because  of  its  de- 
sign, the  American  project  would  constitute  in 
certain  aspects  a  superior  navigation  facility. 

6.  The  Committee  is  of  the  opinion  that  the  St. 
Lawrence  Seaway,  Lake  Erie  to  Montreal,  so  con- 
structed and  operated,  would  be  self-liquidating 
over  a  projected  period  of  50  years. 

7.  The  Committee  feels  that  the  early  initiation 
and  completion  of  the  St.  Lawrence-Great  Lakes 
Seaway  project  in  accordance  with  the  recommen- 
dations contained  in  this  report  is  in  the  national 
interest. 


Visit  of  Jean  Monnet 

Press  release  259  dated  May  12 

Jean  Monnet,  Chairman  of  the  High  Authoritv 
of  the  European  Coal  and  Steel  Community,  will 
pay  a  visit  to  the  United  States  during  the  early 
part  of  June  at  the  invitation  of  the  U.S.  Govern- 
ment. He  will  spend  several  days  in  Washino-ton 
where  he  will  call  on  President  Eisenhower lind 
other  high  officials  to  discuss  the  affairs  of  the 
European  Coal  and  Steel  Community  and  other 
matters  relating  to  European  unity. 

Mr.  Monnet  will  also  visit  New  York  where  he 
will  receive  an  honorary  degree  from  Columbia 
University  on  June  2. 

Since  the  establishment  of  the  Coal  and  Steel 
Community  on  July  25,  1952,  Mr.  Monnet  has 
visited  the  six  countries  which  are  members  of  this 
Community— France,  Germany,  Italy,  Belgium, 
Luxembourg,  and  the  Netherlands.  He  has  also 
visited  certain  countries  which  are  closely  associ- 
ated with  the  Community,  including  the  United 
Kingdom  and  Sweden.  During  his  visit  to  the 
United  States,  Mr.  Monnet  will  be  accompanied  by 
a  small  group  of  other  members  of  the  Hio-h 
Authority.  "^ 

Mr.  Monnet  is  regarded  as  one  of  the  outstand- 
ing leaders  of  the  movement  toward  unity  in 
Europe.  He  has  had  a  distinguished  career  in 
business  and  public  service  dating  back  to  World 
War  I. 


From  1919  to  1923  he  served  as  fii-st  Assistant 
Secretary  General  of  the  League  of  Nations,  after 
which  he  devoted  himself  primarily  to  business 
afiairs  until  World  War  II.     During  the  war  he 
carried  out  a  number  of  important  assignments 
first  as  a  member  of  the  French  Purchasing  Mis- 
sion in  Washington,  later  as  a  member  of  the 
British  Purchasing  Commission,  and  still  later  as 
chairman  of  the  Anglo-American  War  Production 
Board.     In  1944  he  became  head  of  the  French 
Economic  Mission  in  Washington  and  negotiated 
the  lend-lease  agreement  with  the  U.S.  Govern- 
ment.    He  was  a  member  of  the  French  delegation 
to  the  Unrra  conference  in  Montreal  in  1944,  and 
to  the  U.N.  conference  in  San  Francisco  in  1945. 
Mr.  Monnet  continued  to  serve  the  French  Govern- 
ment in  various  capacities  in  the  years  following 
the  war  and  attained  international  recognition  as 
a  leading  proponent  of  the  "unified  market"  in 
Western    Europe.     Together    with    his    fellow- 
countryman,  Mr.  Schuman,  he  was  one  of  the  driv-    i 
mg  spirits  in  the  development  of  the  European 
Coal  and  Steel  Community  and  was  appointed 
Chairman  of  the  High  Authority  of  the  Coal  and 
Steel  Community  when  it  came  into  existence  in 
July  1952.     "Wliile  directing  Europe's  first  great 
experiment  in  a  merger  of  sovereignty,  Jean  Mon- 
net has  continued  to  urge  further  steps  toward  the 
more  complete  political,  economic,  and  military 
unification  of  Europe.' 

Brazilian  Loan  Agreement 

The  credit  of  $300,000,000  authorized  by  the 
Export-Import  Bank  on  February  21  =  to  assist 
Brazil  in  liquidating  its  past  due  U.S.  dollar  ac- 
counts was  formalized  on  April  30  with  the  sign- 
ing of  the  loan  agreement  at  the  offices  of  the 
Export-Import  Bank. 

Glen  E.  Edgerton,  Chairman  of  the  Board  of 
Directors,  signed  for  the  Export-Import  Bank 
with  Mario  Leopoldo  Pereira  da  Camara,  Finan- 
cial Counselor  of  the  Brazilian  Embassv,  signing 
for  the  Banco  do  Brasil.  Walther  More'ira  Salles, 
Ambassador  of  Brazil,  and  Ernani  do  Amaral 
Peixoto,  Governor  of  the  State  of  Rio  de  Janeiro, 
witnessed  the  signing. 

The  credit  will  be  administered  by  the  Banco 
do  Brasil.  All  exporters  entitled  to  payment 
should  seek  repayment  through  usual  commercial 
channels  from  the  Banco  do  Brasil  and  not 
through  the  Export-Import  Bank. 

'  For  an  article  ou  Mr.  Monnet,  see  Field  Reporter,  Jan- 
uary-February 1953,  Department  of  State  publication 
4874,  p.  27. 

"Bulletin  of  Jlar.  23,  1953,  p.  442. 


754 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Repatriation  of  Korean  Prisoners  of  War 


BASIC  U.  S.  POSITION  ON 
PRISONER  QUESTION  RESTATED 

Press  release  269  dated  May  15 

There  have  been  many  questions,  and  some  mis- 
understanding, about  the  present  status  ot  the 
armistice  negotiations  at  Panmunjom.  it  is  ap- 
propriate, therefore,  to  restate  our  basic  position 
and  to  make  clear  where  we  stand. 

The  Government  of  the  United  States,  like  the 
Governments  of  the  other  U.N.  members  partici- 
pating in  Korea,  has  always  wanted  peace  in 
Korea.  We  did  not  start  the  war  m  Korea,  but 
we  have  always  been  ready  to  end  it  on  an  honor- 
able basis.  For  almost  2  years  we  have  patiently 
and  persistently  sought  to  bring  an  end  to  the 
war  Our  efforts  to  bring  peace  to  Korea  were 
ignored  by  the  Communists  for  the  first  year  of 
the  fio-hting.  Wlien  armistice  negotiations  finally 
be'^an  in  July  1951,  the  U.N.  Command  made 
every  effort  to  reach  an  honorable  armistice.  We 
have  negotiated  in  good  faith  and  with  great 
patience.    We  are  continuing  to  negotiate  in  that 

tiie  negotiations  have  been  deadlocked  for 
more  than  a  year  on  the  question  of  prisoners  of 
war  Members  of  the  free  world  have  afhrmed 
that  there  can  be  no  force  used  to  compel  the  un- 
willing prisoners  to  return  to  the  Communists. 
That  is  the  fundamental  issue  between  us  and  the 
Communists  and  the  one  on  which  we  stand. 

Some  weeks  ago  the  Communists  for  the  first 
time  gave  some  basis  for  hoping  that  they  may 
be  prepared  to  meet  the  moral  judgment  of  the 
nations  of  the  world  on  the  prisoner  question. 
After  several  false  starts  they  finally  came  for- 
ward with  a  proposal  which,  with  necessary  mod- 
ifications and  clarifications,  could  form  a  basis 
for  an  honorable  agreement.^  On  May  13  the 
U.N.  Command  accepted  many  points  of  this 
latest  Communist  proposal  as  a  basis  for  negotia- 
tion and  proposed  some  modifications  to  make  the 
plan  workable.  These  suggestions  are  designed 
to  make  the  plan  for  taking  custody  of  the  pris- 
oners of  war  who  resist  repatriation  practicable 
and  fair,  to  protect  the  prisoners  in  question,  while 
at  the  same  time  satisfying  the  Communists  and 
the  peoples  of  the  world  that  the  decision  of  these 

'  Bulletin  of  May  18, 1953,  p.  727. 

May  25,   7  953 


persons  to  go  home  or  not  to  go  home  is  entirely 
their  own.  The  U.N.  Command  has  sought  to  re- 
duce the  scope  of  the  problem  to  give  maximum 
protection  to  all  the  prisoners,  as  well  as  to  make 
the  task  of  the  custodial  commission  manageable. 

On  one  point  there  can  be  no  question.  The 
principle  that  force  shall  not  be  used  to  compel 
resisting  prisoners  to  go  home  excludes  every  form 
of  coercion.  We  cannot,  consistently  with  that 
principle,  create  a  situation  where  such  persons 
are  offered  no  alternative  to  repatriation  other 
than  indefinite  captivity  or  custody.  The  prin- 
ciples for  which  we  have  been  striving  for  many 
months  and  which  have  been  approved  by  the 
United  Nations  require  that  the  prisoner  question 
should  be  finally  settled,  that  persons  who  wish 
to  go  home  should  be  allowed  to  do  so  and  that 
those  who  do  not  shall  be  released  withm  a  rea- 
sonable time  after  the  end  of  hostilities.      _ 

The  prisoner-of-war  question  is  no  technicality 
but  a  fundamental  point  of  fi-ee  world  philosophy 
on  the  integrity  and  rights  of  the  individual. 
Free  men  cannot  and  will  not  agree  to  regard 
human  beings  as  mere  chattels  to  be  held  and 
used  as  such.  The  U.N.  Command  will  continue 
to  explore  every  possibility  for  an  honorable  and 
reasonable  solution  in  Korea  but  it  will  not  sur- 
render a  fundamental  humanitarian  principle 
vital  to  the  whole  free  world. 

NEW  U.N.  PROPOSAL  FOR 
SETTLING  PRISONER  QUESTION 

Following  is  the  text  of  a  -proposal  submitted 
on  May  13  hy  the  U.N.  Command  to  the  Commu- 
nist negotiators  in  Korea. 

1  Within  2  months  after  the  Armistice  Agreement 
becomes  effective,  both  sides  will,  '^Ithout  offering  any 
hindrance,  repatriate  and  hand  over  m  groups  all  those 
Prisoners 'of  War  in  its  custody  who  insist  on  repatna^ 
tion  to  the  side  to  which  they  belonged  at  the  time  of 
capture  Repatriation  shall  be  accomplished  m  ac^cord- 
ance  with  the  related  provisions  of  Article  III  of  the 
Draft  Armistice  Agreement.  In  order  to  expedite  the 
processing  of  such  personnel,  each  side  shall,  prior  to  tlie 
signing  of  the  Armistice  Agreement,  exchange  the  total 
numbers,  bv  nationalities  of  personnel  to  be  repatriated 
direct  Each  group  delivered  to  the  other  side  shall 
be  accompanied  by  rosters,  prepared  by  nationali  y  to 
include  name,  ranli  (if  any)  and  internment  or  miUtary 
Serial  Number. 

755 


2.  A.  On  the  date  the  armistice  becomes  effective,  all 
Prisoners  of  War  of  Korean  nationality  who,  while  in 
the  custody  of  the  detaining  powers,  have  elected  not  to 
avail  themselves  of  their  right  to  be  repatriated,  shall 
be  released  to  civilian  status.  Those  who  may  subse- 
quently desire  to  return  to  the  area  under  the  military 
control  of  the  side  to  which  they  formerly  belonged  shall 
be  permitted  and  assisted  to  do  so  under  the  provisions 
of  Article  59  of  the  Draft  Armistice  Agreement. 

B.  Terms  of  reference  for  Prisoners  of  War  Custodial 
Commission. 

I.  General. 

1.  In  order  to  insure  that  all  Prisoners  of  War  have  the 
opportunity  to  exercise  their  right  to  be  repatriated  fol- 
lowing an  armistice,  Sweden,  Switzerland,  Poland,  Czecho- 
slovakia, and  India  shall  each  be  requested  by  both  sides 
to  appoint  a  member  to  a  Prisoner  of  War  Custodial 
Commission  which  shall  be  established  to  take  custody  in 
Korea  of  those  Prisoners  of  War  who,  while  in  the  custody 
of  the  detaining  powers,  have  elected  not  to  avail  them- 
selves of  their  right  to  be  repatriated,  and  who  are  not 
released  to  civilian  status  on  the  date  the  armistice  be- 
comes effective.  The  Prisoner  of  War  Custodial  Com- 
mission shall  establish  its  headquarters  within  the  de- 
militarized zone  in  the  vicinity  of  Panmunjom.  Subordi- 
nate bodies  of  the  same  composition  as  the  Prisoner  of 
War  Custodial  Commission  shall  be  stationed  at  those 
locations  at  which  the  Custodial  Commission  assumes 
custody  of  Prisoners  of  War. 

2.  The  Armed  Forces  and  any  other  operating  personnel 
required  to  assist  the  Custodial  Commission  in  carrying 
out  Its  functions  and  responsibilities  shall  be  provided 
exclusively  by  India,  whose  representative  shall  also  be 
Chairman  and  Executive  Agent  of  the  Custodial  Com- 
mission. Representatives  from  each  of  the  other  4  powers 
shall  be  allowed  staff  assistants  in  equal  number  not  to 
exceed  10  each.  The  arms  of  all  personnel  provided  for 
in  this  paragraph  shaU  be  limited  to  Military  Police  tvne 
small  arms.  " 

3.  No  force  or  threat  of  force  shall  be  used  against  the 
Prisoners  of  War  specified  in  paragraph  1  above  to  prevent 
or  effect  their  repatriation,  and  no  violence  to  their  persons 
or  affront  to  their  dignity  or  self-respect  shall  be  per- 
mitted in  any  manner  for  any  purpose  whatsoever  (but 
see  paragraph  7  below).  This  duty  is  enjoined  on  and 
entrusted  to  the  Prisoner  of  War  Custodial  Commission 
and  each  of  its  representatives.  Both  sides  shall  have 
representatives  with  appropriate  representatives  of  the 
Prisoner  of  War  Custodial  Commission  to  determine  that 
any  personnel  who  request  return  to  the  other  side  have 
not  been  coerced  into  making  this  decision.  Prisoners 
of  War  shall  at  all  times  be  treated  humanely  in  accord- 
ance with  the  specific  provisions  of  the  Geneva  Conven- 
tion, and  with  the  general  spirit  of  that  convention. 

II.  Custody  of  Prisoners  of  War. 

4  All  Prisoners  of  War  who  do  not  avail  themselves 
Of  the  right  of  repatriation  following  the  effective  date  of 
the  Armistice  Agreement,  or  who  are  not  released  to 
civilian  status  on  that  date,  shall  be  released  from  the 
military  control  and  from  the  custody  of  the  detaining 
side  as  soon  as  practicable,  and,  in  all  cases,  within 
60  days  subsequent  to  the  effective  date  of  the  Armistice 
Agreement  to  the  Custodial  Commission  at  locations  in 
Korea  to  be  designated  by  the  detaining  side. 

5.  The  locations  specified  in  the  preceding  paragraph 
shall  be  demilitarized  by  the  withdrawal  of  the  military 
forces  of  the  detaining  side  to  a  distance  of  at  least  2 
kilometers  from  the  perimeter  of  the  Prisoners  of  War 
installation  at  the  time  the  Custodial  Commission  assumes 
control  thereof. 

6.  Notwithstanding  the  provisions  of  paragraph  5  above 
the  Indian  representative  is  entitled  to  call  upon  the 
detaining  side  in  the  area  under  whose  military  con- 
trol Prisoners  of  War  installations  are  physically  located, 
to  provide  such  administrative  and  security  forces  as 
may  be  needed  to  augment  the  forces  provided  by  India. 

756 


Forces  so  provided  shall  be  under  the  operational  con- 
trol of  the  Senior  Officer  of  the  Indian  Security  Forces 

7.  Notwithstanding  the  provisions  of  paragraph  3 
above,  nothing  in  this  agreement  shall  be  construed  as 
derogating  from  the  authority  of  the  Custodial  Commig. 
sion  to  exercise  its  legitimate  functions  and  responsiblli- 
ties  for  the  control  of  the  prisoners  under  this  temporary 
jurisdiction.  | 

III.  Verification. 

8.  Each  side  shall  be  afforded  an  opportunity  to  verify 
or  ascertain  the  attitude  towards  repatriation  of  its 
captured  personnel  while  they  are  in  the  custody  of  the 
Custodial  Commission.  To  this  end,  its  representatives 
shall  be  afforded  access  to  its  captured  personnel  to  explain 
to  them  their  rights,  and  inform  them  on  any  matters 
relating  to  their  return  to  their  homelands,  under  the 
following  provisions : 

A.  The  number  of  such  verifying  representatives  shall 
not  exceed  1  per  thousand  Prisoners  of  War  held  In 
custody  by  the  Custodial  Commission,  but  the  minimum 
shall  not  be  less  than  5 ; 

B.  The  hours  during  which  the  verifying  representa- 
tives shall  have  access  to  the  prisoners  shall  be  as  deter- 
mined by  the  Custodial  Commission,  and  generally  in 
accord  with  Article  53  of  the  Geneva  Convention  relative 
to  the  treatment  of  Prisoners  of  War; 

C.  All  verifications  and  interviews  shall  be  conducted 
In  the  presence  of  a  representative  of  each  member  nation 
of  the  Custodial  Commission  ; 

D.  Additional  provisions  governing  verifications  shall 
be  prescribed  by  the  Custodial  Commission,  and  will  be 
designed  to  employ  the  principles  outlined  in  paragraph 
3  above. 

9.  Prisoners  of  War  in  its  custody  shall  have  freedom 
and  facilities  to  make  representations  and  communica- 
tions to  the  Custodial  Commission  and  to  representatives 
and  agencies  of  the  Custodial  Commission  and  to  inform 
them  of  their  desires  on  any  matter  concerning  them- 
selves, in  accordance  with  arrangements  made  for  the 
purpose  by  the  Custodial  Commission. 

IV.  Disposition  of  Prisoners  of  War. 

10.  Any  Prisoner  of  War  who,  while  in  the  custody  of 
the  Custodial  Commission,  decides  to  avail  himself  of 
the  right  of  repatriation,  shall  so  certify  to  a  body  con- 
sisting of  a  representative  of  each  member  nation  "of  the 
Custodial  Commission.  Upon  execution  of  such  certifi- 
cate, he  shall,  while  still  in  the  custody  of  the  Custodial 
Commission,  be  delivered  forthwith  to  the  Prisoner  of 
War  exchange  point  at  Panmunjom  for  repatriation  under 
the  procedure  prescribed  in  the  Armistice  Agreement. 

11.  Sixty  days  after  transfer  of  custody  of  the  Prisoners 
of  War  to  the  Custodial  Commission  is  completed.  Prison- 
ers of  War  who  have  not  availed  themselves  of  the  right 
to  be  repatriated  shall  be  released  to  civilian  status,  the 
Custodial  Commission  ceasing  its  function  and  being 
dissolved. 

V.  Red  Cross  Visitation. 

12.  Essential  Red  Cross  service  for  Prisoners  of  War 
in  custody  of  the  Custodial  Commission  shall  be  provided 
by  India  in  accordance  with  regulations  issued  by  the 
Custodial   Commission. 

VI.  Press  Coverage. 

13.  The  Custodial  Commission  shall  insure  freedom  of 
the  press  by : 

A.  Providing  for  observance  of  the  entire  operation  in 
South  Korea  by  representatives  of  the  press  accredited 
to  the  United  Nations  Command. 

B.  Providing  for  observance  of  the  entire  operation  in 
North  Korea  by  representatives  of  the  press  accredited 
to  the  Korean  People's  Army  or  the  Chinese  People's 
Volunteers. 

VII.  Logistical  Support  for  Prisoners  of  War. 

14.  Each  side  shall  provide  logistical  support  for  the 
Prisoners  of  War  in  the  area  under  its  military  control, 
delivering  required  support  to  the  Custodial  Commission 
at  an  agi-eod  delivery  point  in  the  vicinity  of  each  Prisoner 
of  War  installation. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


I  15.  The  cost  of  repatriating  Prisoners  of  War  from  the 
!xchange  point  at  Panmunjom  shall  be  borne  by  the  side 
)n  which  s;ul1  prisoners  depend  in  accordance  with  Article 
118  vt  the  Geneva  Convention. 

16.  The  Custodial  Commission  is  entitled  to  call  upon 
he  detaining  side  to  provide  specified  unarmed  personnel 

."or  the  operation  of  facilities  or  the  provision  of  services 
'.vithin  the  Prisoner  of  War  installations  within  the  area 
jnder  its  military  control. 

17.  The  Custodial  Commission  shall  provide  medical 
support  for  the  Prisoners  of  War  as  may  be  practicable. 
The  detaining  side  shall  provide  medical  support  as  prac- 
tical)le  upon  the  request  of  the  Custodial  Commission  and 
specifically  for  those  cases  requiring  extensive  treatment 
?r  hospitalization.  The  Custodial  Commission  shall  main- 
tain custody  of  Prisoners  of  War  during  such  hospitaliza- 
tion. The  detaining  side  shall  facilitate  such  custody. 
Cpon  completion  of  treatment,  Prisoners  of  War  shall  be 
returned  to  a  Prisoner  of  War  installation  as  specified  in 
paragraph  4  above. 

18.  The  Custodial  Commission  is  entitled  to  obtain  from 
both  sides  such  legitimate  assistance  as  it  may  require  in 
carrying  out  its  duties  and  tasks. 

VIII.  Logistical  Support  for  the  Custodial  Commission. 

19.  Each  side  shall  be  responsible  for  providing  logis- 
tical support  for  the  personnel  of  the  Custodial  Commis- 
sion stationed  in  the  area  under  its  military  control,  and 
both  sides  shall  contribute  on  an  equal  basis  to  such  sup- 
port within  the  demilitarized  zone.  The  precise  arrange- 
ments shall  be  subject  to  determination  between  the  Cus- 
todial Commission  and  the  detaining  side  in  each  case. 

20.  Each  of  the  detaining  sides  shall  be  responsible  for 
protecting  the  verifying  representatives  from  the  other 
side  while  in  transit  over  lines  of  communication  within 
its  area,  as  set  forth  in  paragraph  23  for  the  Prisoners  of 
War  Custodial  Commission,  to  a  place  of  residence  and 
while  in  residence  in  the  vicinity  of  but  not  within  each 
Prisoners  of  War  installation.  The  Custodial  Commis- 
sion shall  be  responsible  for  the  security  of  such  repre- 
sentatives within  the  actual  limits  of  Prisoners  of  War 
installations. 

21.  Each  of  the  detaining  sides  shall  provide  transporta- 
tion, housing,  communication,  and  other  agreed  logistical 
support  to  the  verifying  representatives  of  the  other  side 
while  they  are  ill  the  area  under  its  military  control. 
Such  services  shall  be  provided  on  a  reimbursable  bases. 

IX.  Publication. 

22.  The  terms  of  this  agreement  shall  be  made  known  to 
all  Prisoners  of  War  who,  while  in  the  custody  of  the  de- 
taining power,  have  failed  to  avail  themselves  of  their 
right  of  repatriation. 

X.  Movement. 

23.  The  movement  of  the  Custodial  Commission,  its 
personnel,  and  repatriated  Prisoners  of  War  shall  be 
over  lines  of  communication  as  determined  by  the  com- 
mand (s)  of  the  opposing  side  and  the  Custodial  Commis- 
sion. A  map  showing  these  lines  of  communication  shall 
be  furnished  the  command  of  the  opposing  side  and  the 
Custodial  Commission.  Movement  of  such  personnel,  ex- 
cept in  the  demilitarized  areas  established  in  paragraph 
5  above,  around  locations  as  designated  in  paragraph  4 
above,  shall  be  under  the  control  of,  and  escorted  by,  per- 
sonnel of  the  side  in  whose  area  the  travel  is  being 
undertaken. 

XI.  Procedural  Matters. 

24.  The  interpretation  of  this  agreement  shall  rest  with 
the  Custodial  Commission.  The  Custodial  Commission, 
and/or  any  subordinate  bodies  to  which  functions  are 
delegated  or  assigned  by  the  Custodial  Commission,  shall 
operate  on  the  basis  of  unanimity,  except  with  respect 
to  procedural  matters;  on  procedural  matters  decision 
shall  be  by  majority  vote. 

25.  The  Custodial  Commission  shall  make  reports  to 
the  opposing  commanders  once  each  week  concerning  the 
status  of  Prisoners  of  War  in  its  custody  and  any  other 
important  matters  relating  to  its  functions  and 
responsibilities. 

May  25,   1953 


26.  When  this  agreement  has  been  acceded  to  by  both 
sides  and  by  the  5  powers  named  herein,  it  shall  become 
effective  upon  the  date  the  armistice  becomes  effective. 


CORRESPONDENCE  WITH 
SENATOR  KNOWLAND 

Following  is  the  text  of  a  letter  addressed  to 

Secretary  Dulles  by  Senator  William  F.  KrMW- 

land  of  California  and  of  the  reply  from  Thruston 

B.  Morton.,  Assistant  Secretary  for  Congressional 

Relations :  ^ 

April  6, 1953. 

Dear  Mr.  Secretary  :  Enclosed  is  some  informa- 
tion =  relative  to  the  prisoner-of-war  situation 
which  was  forwarded  to  me  by  Mr.  Christopher 
Emmet.  I  believe  that  he  also  sent  the  same  ma- 
terial to  you,  but  knowing  how  busy  you  are  I  am 
not  sure  whether  you  have  had  a  chance  to  examine 
the  same  or  not.  I  believe  that  it  is  extremely  im- 
portant in  light  of  the  discussions  which  are  now 
going  on  and  may  be  contemplated  in  the  future. 

I  have  recently  received  some  figures  that  dis- 
turbed me  and  for  which  there  appears  to  be  no 
satisfactory  explanation  at  the  present.  On  May 
9,  1952,  the  following  situation  prevailed  among 
the  prisoners-of-war  in  Korea  relative  to  their  de- 
sire to  be  returned  to  Communist  hands  or  their 
determination  to  resist  being  returned  to  Com- 
munist hands.  Frankly,  I  have  never  been  satis- 
fied that  we  had  made  the  fullest  use  of  the 
opportunity  of  exploiting  the  adverse  effect  upon 
the  Communist  world  of  this  situation.  I  am 
satisfied  from  reports  reaching  me  that  the  ques- 
tions were  all  loaded  against  the  person  who  had 
the  desire  to  remain  outside  of  the  Iron  Curtain 
and  in  favor  of  his  returning.  It  was  only  those 
who  felt  so  strongly  that  they  said  they  would  re- 
sist return  by  force  that  were  included  in  the  "no" 
column.     The  figures  are  as  follows : 


1952,  May  9: 

Chinese 

North  Koreans 

South     Korean     Com- 
munists  


Total- 


1953,  Feb.  3  (no  breakdown 
by  nationality): 

Chinese 

North  Koreans 

South     Korean     Com- 
munists  


Total- 


No 
(would 

not 
return) 


15,  600 
42,  100 

12,  200 


69,  900 


39,  726 


Yes 
(would 
return) 


5,  100 
53,  900 

3,800 


62,  800 


83,  000 


Total 


20,  700 
96,  000 

16,  000 


132,  700 


21,  106 
101,  620 


122,  726- 


•  Reprinted  from  C(mg.  Rec.  of  May  1, 1953,  p.  4427. 
'  Not  printed  here. 


757 


Just  what  does  this  mean?  Have  we  permitted 
f  urtlier  Communist  propaganda  urging  the  return 
of  unwilling  prisoners  of  war  or  has  the  moral  ef- 
fect of  words  spreading  in  the  prisoner-of-war 
camps  that  while  the  Communists  can  return  to 
their  homeland,  the  best  that  the  prisoners  who 
want  no  part  of  the  Iron  Curtain  again  can  look 
forward  to  is  more  or  less  permanent  retention  by 
so-called  neutrals  who  at  almost  any  time  may 
finally  agree  to  surrender  them  to  the  tender  mer- 
cies of  the  Communists? 

With  best  personal  regards,  I  remain 
Sincerely  yours, 

William  F.  Knowland. 


April  22,  1953. 

Mr  Dear  Senator  Knowland  :  I  have  received 
your  letter  of  April  6,  1953,  acknowledged  by  tele- 
phone on  April  10,  concerning  prisoners  of  war 
held  by  the  U.N.  command  in  Korea,  and  enclosing 
a  study  about  the  Indian  cease-fire  plan,  which  I 
am  returning.  Thank  you  for  your  courtesy  in 
making  this  material  available  to  the  Department. 

The  officers  concerned  with  Korean  affairs  have 
made  a  careful  study  of  your  letter  and  have  given 
me  the  following  information :  During  the  course 
of  the  hostilities  in  Korea,  the  U.N.  command,  as 
required  by  the  Geneva  Convention,  notified  the  in- 
ternational committee  of  the  Red  Cross  of  the 
names  of  some  175,000  captured  personnel  and  the 
ICRO  transmitted  this  information  to  the  Com- 
munists. On  December  18,  1951,  when  the  U.N. 
command  and  the  Communists  were  first  dis- 
cussing the  Pow  exchange  at  Panmunjom,  the 
U.N.  command  gave  to  the  Communists  a  list  of 
approximately  132,500  Pow's,  consisting  of  ap- 
proximately 21,000  Chinese  and  more  than  111,000 
Koreans. 

The  difference  between  the  figure  of  175,000 
given  to  the  Icrc  and  the  132,500  subsequently 

fiven  to  the  Communists  is  accounted  for  by  the 
act  that  the  U.N.  command  had  reclassified  as 
civilian  internees  almost  38,000  persons  of  South 
Korean  origin  who  had  been  swept  into  U.N.  com- 
pounds during  the  rapid  northward  advance  of 
U.N.  forces  in  the  fall  of  1950;  there  were  also 
approximately  5,000  duplicated  names.  Of  the 
nearly  38,000  civilian  internees,  approximately 
28,000  expressed  the  desire  to  remain  in  South 
Korea  and  were  subsequently  released.  The  re- 
maining 9,500  indicated  their  desire  to  return  to 
North  Korea  and  continue  to  be  in  the  custody  of 


the  U.N.  command  for  ultimate  repatriation  to 
Communist  areas. 

Included  in  the  list  of  132,500  were  apjjroxi- 
mately  16,000  former  residents  of  South  Korea 
who  were  still  classified  as  Pow's.  Of  these,  some 
11,000  expressed  the  desire  to  remain  in  South 
Korea  and  were  later  reclassified  and  released  by 
the  U.N.  command.  The  remaining  5,000  ex- 
pressed the  desire  to  return  to  North  Korea  and 
continue  to  remain  in  the  custody  of  the  U.N.  com- 
mand for  ultimate  repatriation  to  Communist 
areas. 

Of  the  other  116,500  Pow's  not  included  in  the 
foregoing  category,  approximatel}'  34,000  North 
Koreans  and  14,000  Chinese  indicated  tliat  they 
would  resist  repatriation;  more  than  62,000  North 
Koreans  and  more  than  6,500  Chinese  were  found 
to  be  available  for  repatriation  to  Communist 
areas. 

Following  is  a  breakdown  of  persons  who  are 
presently  remaining  in  the  custody  of  the  U.N. 
command : 

Approximate 
ClasHfication  number 

Available  for  repatriation : 

Korean  POW's 68,000 

Korean  civilian  internees 9,  500 

Chinese 6,  500 

Total S4,  000 

Persons  resisting  repatriation : 

Koreans .34,  000 

Chinese 14,  500 

Total 48,  500 

There  has  been  no  significant  change  in  figures 
of  persons  desiring  to  return  to  Communist  areas 
in  the  period  from  late  June  1952,  when  the  screen- 
ing was  completed,  to  the  present  time.  It  should 
be  noted  that  on  May  9,  1952,  the  date  on  which 
your  first  tabulation  is  based,  the  screening  had 
not  as  yet  been  completed  and  the  release  of  per- 
sons in  the  civilian  internee  and  South  Korean 
Pow  categories  had  not  yet  taken  place. 

The  Department  is,  of  course,  aware  of  the  ef- 
fect on  prisoners  of  war  inherent  in  a  possible 
solution  which  would  only  provide  the  alternatives 
of  return  to  Communist  persecution,  or  more  or 
less  indefinite  detention  by  "neutrals."  You  may 
be  sure  that  if  the  armistice  negotiations  are  re- 
sumed at  Panmunjom,  General  Clark  will  have 
this  problem  very  much  in  mind. 
Sincerely  yours, 

Thruston  B.  Morton 

Assistant  Secretary 
(For  the  Secretary  of  State). 


758 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Conference  on  U.S.-Ecuadoran  Fishery  Relations 


A  conference  on  -fishery  relations  hettveen  the 
Governments  of  the  United  States  and  Ecuador 
was  held  at  Quito,  Ecuador,  from  March  25  to 
April  U,  1953.  Following  are  the  declarations, 
agreements,  resolutions,  and  recommendations 
approved  hy  the  conference: 


The  Conference  on  United  States-Ecuadoran 
Fishery  RehUions,  with  reference  to  Agenda 
Point  U 

Records  :  That  it  has  received  information  from 
and  views  of  the  Delegations  on  the  questions 
which  have  arisen  as  a  result  of  the  seizures  of 
the  United  States  fishing  vessels  Notre  Dame, 
Sun  Pacific,  Equator,  and  Venus. 

II 

The  Conference  on  United  States-Ecuadoran 
Fishery  Relations,  with  reference  to  Agenda 
Point  2,^ 

Agrees:  That  the  principal  causes  of  the  difficul- 
ties which  have  characterized  United  States- 
Ecuadoran  fishery  relations  include : 

1.  The  difference  in  views  of  the  Govern- 
ments of  the  United  States  and  Ecuador  with 
respect  to  the  principles  of  international  law 
applicable  to  the  extent  of  territorial  waters 
and  the  measurement  thereof.^ 

2.  The  difference  in  views  of  the  Governments 
of  the  United  States  and  Ecuador  with  respect 
to  the  principles  of  international  law  applicable 
to  innocent  passage  of  fishing  vessels. 

3.  The  withdrawal  of  the  privilege  of  ob- 
taining licenses  valid  for  fishing  in  Ecuadoran 
territorial  waters  on  the  continental  coast. 


'  "Questions  which  have  arisen  as  a  result  of  the  seiz- 
ures of  fishing  vessels  of  the  United  States  of  America." 

-  "Examination  in  toto  of  tlie  acts  which  caused  the  diffi- 
culties which  have  characterized  United  States-Ecua- 
doran fishery  relations." 

^  For  an  article  on  U.S.  policy  on  fisheries  and  terri- 
torial waters  by  William  C.  Herrington,  who  was  chair- 
man of  the  U.S.  delegation  to  this  conference,  see  Bulle- 
tin of  June  30, 1952,  p.  1021. 

May  25,    7953 


4.  The  withdrawal  of  the  privilege  of  obtam- 
ing  licenses  by  radio  to  fish  in  Ecuadoran  waters. 

5.  The  current  United  States  Government 
system  of  issuing  clearances  bearing  the  desti- 
nation "high  seas"  and  the  use  of  these  clear- 
ances and  of  "via  la  pesca"  by  United  States 
fishing  vessels. 

Ill 

The  Conference  on  United  States-Ecuadoran 
Fishery  Relations,  with  reference  to  Agenda 
Points,^ 

Considering  :  That  the  Conference  in  analyzing 
the  causes  of  difficulties  in  the  fishery  relations 
between  the  United  States  and  Ecuador,  m  con- 
nection with  the  seizures  of  the  fishing  vessels 
Notre  Dame,  Sun  Pacific,  Equator  and  Venus, 
studied  the  points  of  view  of  the  two  countries 
with  respect  to  territorial  waters  and  innocent 
passage ; 

That  the  Conference  heard  the  statements  of 
the  United  States  and  Ecuadoran  Delegations 
with  respect  to  the  legislation  and  jurispru- 
dence of  their  respective  countries  relating  to 
territorial  waters  and  innocent  passage; 

That  the  Conference  noted  the  substantial  dif- 
ferences in  the  positions  of  the  two  countries; 
and 

That  the  powers  of  the  Delegations  do  not  ex- 
tend so  far  as  reconciling  these  differences  or 
recommending  measures  in  the  international 
field  which  would  affect  world  interests ; 

Agrees:  That  it  is  not  within  its  competence  to 
resolve  differences  in  legal  dispositions  and  juri- 
dical concepts  of  the  United  States  and  Ecua- 
dor regarding  territorial  waters  and  innocent 
passage,  the  principles  of  which  in  any  event 
are  not  susceptible  of  bilateral  determination 
since  these  principles  are  matters  for  determi- 
nation only  by  the  general  agreement  of  mari- 
time States. 


*  '-AVays  and  means  of  bringing  about  greater  coopera- 
tion in  fishery  matters  of  mutual  interest  and  to  the  bene- 
fit of  the  two  countries." 

759 


IV 

The  Conference  on  United  States-Ecuadoran 
Fishery  Relations,  with  reference  to  Agenda 
Point  3, 

Resolv-es  :  To  take  note  tliat  natural  and  juridical 
persons  and  other  organizations  of  foreign  na- 
tionality which  conduct  fishery  operations  on 
land  or  sea  areas  under  Ecuadoran  jurisdiction, 
are  required,  in  their  relations  with  Ecuador,  to 
subject  themselves  to  Ecuadoran  fishing  laws, 
decrees,  and  regulations. 


The  Conference  on  United  States-Ecuadoran 
Fishery  Relations,  with  reference  to  Agenda 
Point  3, 

Recommends  : 

1)  That  as  an  interim  measure  and  as  soon  as 
may  be  convenient  the  validity  of  fishing  licenses 
issued  to  United  States  vessels  by  the  Government 
of  Ecuador  be  extended  to  include  the  territorial 
waters  of  her  continental  coast. 

2)  That  as  an  interim  measure  and  as  soon  as 
m(a)y  be  convenient  fishing  licenses  be  gi-anted 
by  radio  by  Ecuador,  subject  to  adequate  controls. 

3)  That  the  United  States  Government  review 
as  soon  as  may  be  convenient  its  current  law  and 
practice  with  respect  to 

a)  Clearances  for  United  States  fishing  vessels 
with  destination  "the  high  seas",  includmg  "via 
la  pesca",  and  "touch  and  trade",  and 

b)  Professional  qualifications  of  officers  and 
condition  of  navigability,  supplies,  and  so  forth, 
of  fishing  vessels  with  such  destination,  in  order 
to  determine  what  modifications  may  be  needed 
to  obviate  or  minimize  problems  in  the  terri- 
torial waters  of  Ecuador. 

4)  That,  being  convinced  that  there  are  other 
measures  to  be  considered  which  will  promote  the 
solution  of  problems  and  development  of  activi- 
ties beneficial  to  both  the  United  States  and  Ecua- 
dor, a  second  conference  on  fishery  relations  be 
held  as  soon  as  practicable,  preferably  by  the  end 
of  May,  1953  in  the  United  States,  to  deal  with  the 
following  agenda: 

a)  The  advantages  and  disadvantages  to  be 
achieved  by  making  permanent  the  measures 
recommended  under  1)  and  2)  above,  relating  to 
licenses  to  fish  including  Ecuadoran  continental 
waters,  and  to  the  issuance  by  radio  of  licenses 
to  fish,  to  determine  what  modifications  might 
be  needed. 

b)  Consideration  of  possible  changes  in  law 
and  practice  in  the  United  States  concerning  the 
issuance  of  clearances  to  United  States  fishing 
vessels  bearing  destination  "the  high  seas",  "via 
la  pesca",  and  "touch  and  trade". 


(?)  The  granting  to  fishing  vessels  holding 
fishing  permits  for  Ecuadoran  territorial  waters 
the  same  port  privileges  granted  to  merchant 
vessels. 

d)  The  granting  to  fishing  vessels  not  holding 
such  fishing  permits,  of  port  privileges  under 
circumstances  of  necessity,  and  a  point  by  point 
clarification  of  the  privileges  and  responsibil- 
ities of  vessels  permitted  such  entry. 

e)  The  {wssibility  of  the  Governments  or  pri- 
vate interests  of  the  United  States  or  Ecuador 
establishing  a  fueling  station  in  Ecuadoran  ter- 
ritory on  the  Island  of  San  Cristobal  of  the 
Colon  Archipelago,  or  on  whatever  other  island 
is  more  suitable,  to  take  care  of  fueling  require- 
ments of  the  merchant  and  fishing  fleets  of  the 
United  States  and  Ecuador  in  accordance  with 
existing  regulations. 

/)  The  development  of  measures  for  effective 
interchange  of  information  concerning  fishery 
laws,  decrees,  and  regulations  of  the  two  coun- 
tries affecting  foreign  fishing  vessels. 

g)  Consideration  of  the  objectives  and  re- 
search program  of  the  Inter- American  Tropical 
Tuna  Commission  and  the  advantages  which 
might  accrue  to  Ecuador  through  adherence  to 
the  Inter-American  Tropical  Tuna  Convention. 

h)  Consideration  of  other  problems  and  ac- 
tivities, the  inclusion  of  which  shall  be  agreed 
upon  by  the  Governments  of  both  countries. 

5)  That  the  Governments  of  the  United  States 
and   Ecuador  study  the  possibility  of  periodic 
meetings  for  the  analysis  of  their  fishery  problems 
and  for  the  consideration  of  recommendations  de-  j 
rived  therefrom.  | 

5)  That  the  Governments  of  the  United  States 
and  Ecuador  investigate  means  to  embody  in  a 
fishery  convention  the  results  achieved  at  this  Con- 
ference together  with  other  ways  and  means  of 
bringing  aoout  greater  cooperation  in  fishery  mat- 
ters of  mutual  interest  and  benefit  to  the  two 
counti'ies. 

! 

The  Conference  on  United  States-Ecuadoran 
Fishery  Relations 

Resolmcs  :  To  express  its  profound  thanks  to  His 
Excellency  Dr.  Jose  Maria  Velasco  Ibarra,  Pres-  ; 
ident  of  the  Republic  of  Ecuador,  for  the  pro-  | 
pitious  and   hospitable   atmosphere  which  he 
provided  for  the  Conference  and  which  led  to 
the  successful  outcome  of  its  deliberations. 

VII 

The  Conference  on  United  States-Ecuadoran 
Fishery  Relations 

Resolves  :  To  extend  to  their  Excellencies,  Minis- 
ter of  Economy  Mr.  Jaime  Nebot  Velasco,  Min- 
ister of  Foreign  Affairs  Dr.  Teodoro  Alvarado 
Caraicoa,  Minister  of  Defense  Dr.  Carlos  Julio 
Arosemena  Monroy  and  Minister  of  the  Treas- 


760 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


urv  Dr.  Wilson  Vela,  and  to  His  Excellency, 
Paul  C.  Daniels,  Ambassador  of  the  United 
States  of  America  to  Ecuador,  its  sincere  thanks 
for  their  wise  counsel  and  generous  cooperation 
in  meeting  all  material  requirements  for  the 
full  success  of  the  Conference. 
In  Witness  Whereof  the  respective  Delegates 
sim  this  Final  Act  this  Pan  American  Day,  April 
fourteenth,  nineteen  hundred  and  fifty  three,  in 
duplicate  in  the  English  and  Spanish  languages, 
both  texts  being  equally  authentic,  depositing  one 
set  in  the  two  languages  in  the  Ministry  of  I^or- 
eign  Affairs  of  Ecuador  and  the  other  set  in  the 
two  languages  in  the  Department  of  State  of  the 
United  States  of  America. 
For  the  United  States     For   the    Republic    of 

of  America:  Ecuador: 

William  C.  Herring-      Kene  Espindola 
ton  coronel 

octavio  donoso 
Warren  Francis  Velasco 

LooNEY  Gustavo  Salgado 

^  _,  Alberto  Barriga 

Thomas  J.  Maleadt  Ledesma 

•p-A^^rnTr  Part  MttTON  Montalvo 

Harold  J?.  CART  Marco  Varea  Donoso 

Donald  P.  LoKER  Cesar  Raza 


U.S.  Delegations 

to  International  Conferences 

U.N.  Opium  Conference 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  11 
(press  release  258)  that  Harry  J.  Anslinger,  Com- 
missioner of  Narcotics,  Department  of  the  Treas- 
ury, and  U.S.  representative  on  the  U.N.  Com- 
mission on  Narcotic  Drugs,  has  been  designated 
U.S.  delegate  to  a  U.N.  International  Opium  Con- 
ference which  is  to  open  at  New  York  on  May  11. 

Alfred  L.  Tennyson,  Bureau  of  Narcotics,  De- 
partment of  the  Treasury,  has  been  designated 
alternate  U.S.  representative;  and  George  A. 
Morlock,  Office  of  U.N.  Economic  and  Social  Af- 
fairs, Department  of  State,  has  been  designated 
adviser. 

The  purpose  of  the  conference  will  be  to  com- 
plete the  drafting  of  and  to  adopt  a  protocol  for 
the  limitation  of  the  production  of  opium. 

Invitations  to  the  forthcoming  conference  were 
issued  in  March  1953  to  all  States  members  of  the 
United  Nations,  as  well  as  to  those  nonmember 
States  which  are  parties  to  one  or  more  of  the 
existing  international  narcotic  treaties. 

international  Dairy  Congress 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  14  (press 
release  264)  that  the  U.S.  delegation  to  the  13th  Inter- 
national Dairy  Congress,  to  be  held  at  The  Hague,  Nether- 
lands, June  22-26, 1953,  wiU  include : 

May  25,   1953 


Chairman 

Ralph  E.  Hodgson,  Assistant  Chief,  Bureau  of  Dairy  In- 
dustry, Agricultural  Research  AdmimstraUon, 
Department  of  Agriculture 

Delegates 

Benjamin  F.  Castle,  Executive  Director,  Milk  Industry 
Foundation  ,    ^  ^  „^     i,  „„ 

Charles  W.  England,  Director  of  Research,  C.  Y.  Stephens 
Dairy  Industries,  Washington,  D.C. 

B.  S.  Graham,  Executive  Secretary,  Central  Oklahoma 
Milk  Producers  Association 

T.  Kline  Hamilton,  Past  President,  Milk  Industry  Foun- 
dation, Columbus,  Ohio 

Milton  Hult,  President,  National  Dairy  CouncU 

Otto  F.  Hunziker,  La  Grange,  111. 

Eugene  L.  Jack,  Division  of  Dairy  Industry,  University  of 
California  „  ^  , 

James  C.  Norgaard,  General  Manager,  Farmers  Union 
Co-operative  Creamery  Company,  Superior,  Nebr. 

Lester  S.  Olsen,  President,  Olsen  Publishing  Company, 
Milwaukee,  Wis.  . 

Arthur  C.  Ragsdale,  Chairman,  Department  of  Dairy 
Husbandry,  CoUege  of  Agriculture,  University  of 
Missouri 

Frank  E.  Rice,  Executive  Secretary,  Evaporated  Milk 
Association,  Chicago,  111.  .   . 

Harry  C.  Trelogan,  Dairy  Economist,  Assistant  Adminis- 
trator for  Marketing,  Agricultural  Research  Ad- 
ministration, Department  of  Agriculture 

George  M.  Trout,  Professor  of  Dairy  Husbandry,  Michigan 

StfitG  CollGge 
Herman  D.  Weihe,  Bureau  of  Dairy  Industry,  Agricultural 
Research  Administration,  Department  of  Agriculture 

Secretary 

Robert  A.  Brand,  Second  Secretary  of  Embassy,  American 
Embassy,  The  Hague 

The  scientific  program  of  the  forthcoming  Congress 
consists  of  subjects  on  which  there  can  be  a  profitable 
exchange  of  information  by  members  of  the  dairy  indus- 
tries of  the  United  States  and  of  European  countries. 

The  meetinas  of  one  section  of  the  Congress,  concerned 
with  "milk  as"  a  raw  material,"  will  study  such  topics  as 
the  influence  of  feeding  upon  the  quality  of  milk,  the 
production  of  bacteriologieally  good  milk,  the  avoidance 
of  deterioration  in  the  quality  of  milk  during  transporta- 
tion, and  procedures  for  grading  milk. 

A  section  concerned  with  the  "processing  and  utilization 
of  milk"  will  deal  with  topics  relating  to  the  concentra- 
tion (evaporation,  freezing,  drying)  of  milk,  the  ripening 
of  cheese,  changes  in  the  quality  of  butter  during  storage, 
and  the  use  of  milk  in  the  form  of  other  products,  includ- 
ing yogurt,  ice  cream,  and  chocolate  milk. 

Other  sections  of  the  Congress  will  deal  with  special- 
ized topics  of  concern  to  the  dairy  industry  in  respect  to 
"equipment  and  buildings,"  "fundamental  research,"  and 
"economics." 


Rubber  Study  Group 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  8  (press 
release  2.51)  that  the  U.S.  delegation  to  the  tenth  meeting 
of  the  Rubber  Study  Group,  scheduled  to  open  at  Copen- 
hagen on  May  11  will  be  as  follows : 

Delegate 

Willis  C.  Armstrong,  Deputy  Director,  Office  of  Inter- 
national Materials  Policy,  Department  of  State 

Alternate  Delegate 

George  H.  Alexander,  Chief,  Rubber,  Fibers  and  Hides 
Branch,  Agricultural  Products  Staff,  Department  of 
State 

761 


Congressional  Adviser 

Paul  Shafer,  House  of  Representatives 

Oovernment  Advisers 

John  R.  Blandford,  Counsel  of  the  Armed  Services  Com- 
mittee, House  of  Representatives 

George  K.  Casto,  Chief,  Rubber  Division,  General  Services 
Administration 

Edelen  Fogarty,  Assistant  Attach^,  American  Embassy, 
Copenhagen 

Everett  G.  Holt,  Assistant  Chief,  Rubber  Division,  Na- 
tional Production  Authority,  Department  of  Commerce 

Morton  Yohalem,  Special  Deputy,  Rubber  Facilities  Dis- 
posal, Reconstruction  Finance  Corporation 

Industry  Advisers 

John  L.  Collyer,  President,  B.  F.  Goodrich  Company 
Harvey  S.  Firestone,  Jr.,  Chairman,  Firestone  Tire  and 

Rubber  Company 
Frederick  T.  Koyle,  Partner,  Carl  M.  Loeb,  Rhoades  and 

Company 
William  F.  O'Neil,  President,  General  Tire  and  Rubber 

Company 
David  A.  Paterson,  Chairman,  H.  A.  Astlett  and  Company 
Thomas  Robins,  Jr.,  President,  Hewitt-Robins,  Inc. 
George  M.  Tisdale,  Vice  President,  U.S.  Rubber  Company 
Gilbert  K.  Trimble,  Executive  Vice  President,  Midwest 

Rubber  Reclaiming  Company 
A.  L.  Viles,  President,  Rubber  Manufacturers  Association 
Robert   S.   Wilson,    Vice  President,   Goodyear   Tire   and 

Rubber  Company 
R.   D.    Young,   President,   Rubber   Trade   Association   of 

New  York,  Inc. 

Following  exploratory  talks  concerning  rubber  which 
were  held  at  London  in  August  1944  by  representatives 
of  the  Governments  of  the  Netherlands,  the  United  King- 
dom, and  the  United  States,  the  Rubber  Study  Group  was 
organized  to  serve  as  an  advisory  body  for  the  study  of 
the  world  rubber  position,  of  measures  designed  to  ex- 
pand the  world  consumption  of  rubber,  and  of  means  of 
dealing  with  any  problems  which  might  arise  concerning 
international  trade  in  rubber. 

The  Study  Group  will  review  a  report  from  its  Statis- 
tical Committee  on  the  production  and  consumption  of 
rubber  throughout  the  world  and  will  receive  and  discuss 
statements  by  the  participating  delegations  concerning 
developments  within  their  respective  countries  having  an 
effect  on  the  production  and  consumption  of  rubber.  In 
addition,  the  Study  Group  will  receive  a  report  from  a 
working  party  which  was  established  by  the  Group  at 
its  ninth  meeting  (Ottawa,  May  .5-0,  lO-'C)  "to  consider 
whether  measures  designed  to  prevent  burdensome  sur- 
pluses or  serious  shortages  of  rubber  are  necessary  and 
practicable." 

Standing  Committee  on  Performance  (ICAO> 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  6  (press 
release  246)  that  the  U.S.  delegation  to  a  meeting  of  the 
International  Civil  Aviation  Organization's  Standing  Com- 
mittee on  Performance  which  opened  on  Jlay  6  at  Paris 
France,  will  include : 

U.S.  Member 

Raymond   B.   Maloy,    Civil   Aeronautics   Administration, 
Washington,  D.  C. 

Alternate  U.S.  Member 

Hugh  B.  Freeman,  Civil  Aeronautics  Board,  Department 
of  Commerce 

762 


Advisers 

P.  Stanley  Nowlan,  Jr.,  United  Airlines,  San  Francisco 
Calif. 

John  A.  Carran,  Civil  Aeronautics  Administration,  Wash- 
ington, D.C. 

W.  E.  koneczny.  Civil  Aeronautics  Board,  Department  of 
Cormjiercp 

World  Health  Assembly  (WHO) 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  Mav  5  (press 
release  243)  that  the  U.S.  delegation  to  the  Sixth  World 
Health  Assembly  which  convened  at  Geneva  on  May  5 
includes  the  following: 

Chairman   (Chief  Delegate) 

Leonard  A.  Scheele,  M.  D.,  Surgeon  General,  Public  Health 
Service,  Department  of  Health,  Education  and  Wel- 
fare 

Delegates 

Leonard  W.  Larson,  M.  D.,  Member,  Board  of  Trustees,, 
American  Medical  Association,  Bismarck,  N.  Dak. 

Franklin  D.  Murphy,  M.  D.,  Chancellor,  University  <rf 
Kansas,  Lawrence,  Kans. 

Alternate  Delegates 

Frederick    J.    Brady,    M.    D.,    Division    of   International 

Health,  Public  Health  Service,  Department  of  Health, 

Education  and  Welfare 
H.  van  Zile  Hyde,  M.  D.,  Chief,  Division  of  International 

Health,  Public  Health  Service,  Department  of  Health, 

Education  and  Welfare 
Howard  B.  Calderwood,  OflRce  of  United  Nations  Economic 

and  Social  Affairs,  Department  of  State 

Congressional  Advisers 

Homer  D.  Angell,  House  of  Representatives 
Wayne  L.  Hays,  House  of  Representatives 

Advisers 

Carol  C.  Laise,  Division  of  International  Administration, 
Department  of  State 

Carl  N.  Neupert,  M.  D.,  State  Health  Officer,  Wisconsin 
State  Board  of  Health,  Madison,  Wis. 

Ruth  Sleeper,  Director,  School  of  Nursing  and  Nursing 
Services,  Massachusetts  General  Hospital,  Boston, 
Mass. 

Robert  T.  Stormont,  Secretary,  Council  on  Pharmacy 
and  Chemistry,  American  Medical  Association,  535 
North  Dearborn  St.,  Chicago,  111. 

Knud  Stowman,  International  Health  Representative,  Di- 
vision of  International  Health,  Public  Health  Service, 
Department  of  Health,  Education  and  Welfare 

Thomas  F.  Whayne,  Colonel,  (M.  C),  U.S.A.,  Chief  of 
Preventative  Medicine,  Department  of  the  Army 

Secretary  of  Delegation 

Henry  F.  Nichol,  Conference  Attach^,  Resident  U.S.  Dele- 
gation for  International  Organization  Affairs  at  Gen- 
eva, Geneva,  Switzerland 

Administrative  Officer 

Mason  A.  LaSelle,  Assistant  Conference  Attache,  Resident 
U.S.  Delegation  for  International  Organization  Af- 
fairs at  Geneva,  Geneva,  Switzerland 

Besides  reviewing  the  work  and  program  of  the  Who 
the  participants  in  the  Sixth  World  Health  Assembly  will 
deal  with  such  questions  as  the  coordination  of  the  activi-  | 
ties  of  the  AViio  with  those  of  the  TTnited  Nations  and  * 
other  specialized  agencies,  the  rights  and  obligations  of 
associate  members,  the  frequency  of  sessions  of  the  As- 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


[ 

emlily  the  decentralization  of  the  work  of  the  organiza- 
ion  through  the  assignment  of  greater  responsibilities  to 
egional  committees,  and  the  budget  of  the  Who  for  1954. 
■he  delegates  to  the  Assembly  will  also  have  an  oppor- 
unitv  to  participate  in  technical  discussions  on  the  con- 
rol  of  tuberculosis,  syphilis,  and  typhoid,  and  on  the 
afferent  methods  of  applying  health  techniques. 

';otton  Advisory  Committee 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  1  (press 
■elease  231)  that  the  International  Cotton  Advisory  Com- 
nittee  will  hold  its  Twelfth  Plenary  Meeting  at  Washing- 
on,  D.C.,  beginning  on  May  4,  1953. 

The  U.S.  Government  will  be  represented  at  that  meet- 
ng  by  the  following  delegation : 

lelegate 

:iomeo  K.  Short,  Director  of  the  Foreign  Agricultural 
Service,  Department  of  Agriculture 

issociate  DeJegate 

3.  D.  White,  Deputy  Director,  Food  and  Agriculture  Divi- 
sion, Mutual  Security  Agency 

VI' mate  Delegates 

?.  Marion  Rhodes,  Director,  Cotton  Branch,  Produc- 
tion and  Marketing  Administration,  Department  of 
Agriculture 

iVillard  O.  Brown,  Chief,  Agricultural  Products  Staff, 
Office  of  International  Materials  Policy,  Department 
of  State 

iivisers 

irthur  W.  Palmer,  Head,  Cotton  Division,  Foreign  Agri- 
cultural Service,  Department  of  Agriculture 

Oscar  Zaglits,  Head,  Foreign  Agricultural  Trade  and 
Policies  Division,  Foreign  Agricultural  Service,  De- 
partment of  Agriculture 

Rene  Lutz,  Deputy  Assistant  Director  for  Foreign  Re- 
quirements and  Claimancy,  Office  of  International 
Trade,  Department  of  Commerce 

Bead  P.  Dunn,  .Tr.,  Foreign  Trade  Director,  National  Cot- 
ton Council,  Washington,  D.C. 

I  Adviser  and  Secretary 

Enlalia  L.  Wall,   International   Economist,  Agricultural 
Products    Staff,    Office    of    International    Materials 
Policy,  Department  of  State 
It  is  expected  that  the  Committee  will  be  chiefly  con- 
cerned at  its  forthcoming  meeting  with  reports  by  the 
participating  delegations  on  the  cotton  situation  in  their 
respective  countries  and  its  program  of  work  and  budget. 

Administrative  Council  (ITU) 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  1  (press 
release  226)  that  Francis  Colt  de  Wolf,  Chief,  Telecom- 
munications Policy  Staff,  Department  of  State,  and  U.S. 
representative  on  the  Administrative  Council  of  the  Inter- 
national Telecommunication  Union  (Itu)  will  attend  the 
session  of  the  Council  which  is  to  open  at  Gleneva  May  2, 
1953. 

Mr.  de  Wolf  will  be  assisted  at  the  forthcoming  Council 
session  by  the  following  advisers:  Helen  G.  Kelly,  Tele- 
communications Policy  Staff,  Department  of  State,  and 
Wayne  Mason,  Telecommunications  Attach^  of  the  Amer- 
ican Legation  at  Bern,  who  is  resident  at  Geneva. 

The  United  States  was  re-elected  to  membership  in  the 
Administrative  Council,  the  governing  body  of  the  Itu, 
at  the  Plenlpotenciary  Conference  of  the  Ittj  which  was 
held  at  Buenos  Aires  October  3-December  22,  1952.  The 
other  countries  elected  to  membership  at  that  conference 
are,  as  follows :  Argentina,  Brazil,  Canada,  China,  Czecho- 


slovakia, Egypt,  France,  India,  Italy,  Mexico,  Pakistan, 
Spain,  Switzerland,  Turkey,  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist 
Republics,  United  Kingdom,  and  Yugoslavia. 

Resolutions  adopted  at  the  Buenos  Aires  conference 
had  the  effect  of  increasing  the  powers  and  responsibili- 
ties of  the  Administrative  Council.  It  was  directed, 
among  other  things,  to  reclassify  the  personnel  of  the  per- 
manent organs  of  the  Itu  and  to  determine  the  salaries 
of  officials  in  accordance  with  a  scale  adopted  by  the  con- 
ference; to  study  questions  relating  to  revision  of  the 
existing  pension  system;  and  to  arrive  at  a  decision  re- 
garding the  provision  of  larger  headquarters  premises 
for  the  Union.  At  a  special  organizational  meeting  at 
Buenos  Aires  of  the  newly  elected  Council,  it  was  also 
agreed  that  one  of  the  most  important  matters  to  be  dealt 
with  by  the  Council  at  its  1953  spring  session  would  be 
the  election  of  a  new  Secretary  General  of  the  Itu. 


THE  FOREIGN  SERVICE 


William  H.  Draper,  Jr.,  Resigns 
as  U.S.  Special  Representative 

On  May  11,  1053,  President  Eisenhower  accepted  the 
resignation  of  William  H.  Draper,  Jr.,  as  U.S.  special  rep- 
resentative in  Europe,  effective  June  30.  For  text  of 
Mr.  Draper's  letter  of  resignation  and  the  President's 
reply,  see  White  House  press  release  of  May  11. 

Confirmation 

The  Senate  on  May  13  confirmed  Horace  A.  Hildreth  as 
Ambassador  to  Pakistan. 


Check  List  of  Department  of  State 
Press  Releases:  May  11-16, 1953 

Releases  may  be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  the 
Special  Assistant  for  Press  Relations,  Department 
of  State,  Washington  25,  D.  C. 

Press  releases  issued  prior  to  May  11  which  appear 
in  this  issue  of  the  Bulletin  are  Nos.  226  of  May 
1,  230  of  May  1,  231  of  May  1,  233  of  May  4,  241  of 
May  5,  243  of  May  5,  246  of  Jlay  6,  251  of  May  8,  and 
255  of  May  9. 
No.        Date  Subject 

256  5/11     Austrian  question 

257  5/11     Dulles :  Laos  Constitution  Day 
U.N.  Opium  Conference 
Visit  of  Jean  Monnet 
Cabot :  Technical  cooperation 
Australian  tax  conventions 
Film  projects  for  Iia 
Visit  of  Indian  Vice  President 
International  Dairy  Congress 
Remedial  Works  for  Niagara  Falls 
(Germany)  :  Edc,  contractual  conven- 
tions ratified 

Dulles  :  World  trade  week 
Dulles :  Armed  Forces  Day 
U.S.  position  on  prisoner  question 

*Not  printed. 

t  Held  for  a  later  issue  of  the  Bulletin. 


258 

5/11 

259 

5/12 

t260 

5/14 

t261 

5/14 

t262 

5/13 

263 

5/14 

264 

5/14 

1265 

5/15 

t266 

5/15 

267 

5/15 

*268 

5/16 

269 

5/15 

May  25,    1953 


763 


May  25, 1953 


Ind 


ex 


•  Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  726 


Correction 

Bulletin  of  May  IS,  1953  (No.  725)— Date 
in  upper  left-hand  corner  of  back  cover,  "May 
11,  1U53,"  should  be  corrected  to  read,  "May 
18,  1953." 


Aviation 

Standing  Committee  on  Performance  (IcAO)  762 

American  Republics 

BRAZIL:    Loan   agreement 754 

ECUADOR:  Conference  on  U.S.-Ecuadoran  fish- 
ery relations 759 

Asia 

INDIA:  Visit  of  Indian  vice  president     ....      752 
KOREA: 

Basic  U.S.  position  on  prisoner  question  re- 
stated       755 

Correspondence  with  Sen.  Knowland  on  pris- 
oners of  war 757 

New  U.N.  proposal  for  settling  prisoner  ques- 
tion        755 

LAOS:  Constitution  Day 752 

PAKISTAN;  Confirmation  of  Hlldreth     ....       763 

Canada 

Special  committee's  report  on  St.  Lawrence  sea- 
way project 753 

U.S.,  Canada  discuss  mutual  problems  (text  of 

Joint  communique) 752 

Congress 

Correspondence  with  Sen.  Knowland  on  prison- 
ers of  war 757 

Mutual  Security  Program  for  1954  presented  to 

Congress    (Eisenhower,    Dulles,    Stassen)      .       735 

President    recommends    commission   to   review 

commercial  policy 747 

Support  tor  extension  of  trade  agreements  act 

(DuUes,  Stassen) 743 

Europe 

AUSTRIA: 

New  meeting  of  Austrian  treaty  deputies     .     .  751 

Unification  of  Austrian  exchange  system     .     .  751 

FRANCE:  Visit  of  Jean  Monnet 754 

GERMANY:  Libraries  in  Italy  restored  to  former 

ownership  (text  of  agreement) 749 

GREECE:  Problems  discussed 752 

U.S.S.R.:    Proposed   high-level  conference  with 

the  Soviets  (McDermott) 748 

Finance 

Brazilian  loan  agreement 754 

Unification  of  Austrian  exchange  system     .     .     .       751 

Fisheries 

Conference  on  U.S.-Ecuadoran  fishery  relations  .       759 

Foreign  Service 

Confirmation  of  Hlldreth 763 

Resignation  of  Draper 763 


Industry 

International  Dairy  Congress 761 

International  Meetings 

Proposed  high-level  conference  with  the  Soviets 

(McDermott) 748 

UjS.  DELEGATIONS: 

Administrative  Council   (Itu) 763 

Cotton  Advisory  Committee 763 

International   Dairy   Congress 761 

Rubber   Study   Group 761 

Standing  Committee  on  Performance  (Icao)    .  762 

U.N.    Opium   Conference 761 

World   Health   Assembly    (Who) 762 

Mutual  Security 

Mutual  Security  Program  for  1954  presented  to 

Congress    (Elsenhower,    Dialles,    Stassen)      .       735 

Presidential  Documents 

President   recommends   commission   to   review 

commercial  policy 747 

Prisoners  of  War 

Basic  U.S.  position  on  prisoner  question  re- 
stated       755 

Correspondence  with  Sen.  Knowland  on  prison- 
ers of  war 757 

New  U.N.  proposal  for  settling  prisoner  question  .      755 

State,  Department  of 

Laos  Constitution  Day 762 

Trade 

President   recommends   commission   to   review 

commercial  policy       747 

Support  for  extension  of  trade  agreements  act 

(Dulles,  Stassen) 743 

World  trade  week  (Dulles) 74B 

Transportation 

Special  committee's  report  on  St.  Lawrence  sea- 
way project 753 

U.S.,  Canada  discuss  mutual  problems  (text  of 

Joint  communique) 752 

Treaty  Information 

Conference  on  U.S.-Ecuadoran  fishery  relations  .  769 
German   libraries   in   Italy   restored   to  former 

ownership  (text  of  agreement) 749 

New  meeting  of  Austrian  treaty  deputies   .     .     .  751 

United  Nations 

Administrative  Council  (Ittj) 763 

Basic  U.S.  position  on  prisoner  question  re- 
stated        755 

Correspondence  with  Sen.  Knowland  on  pris- 
oner of  war 757 

New  U.N.  proposal  for  settling  prisoner  ques- 
tions      755 

U.N.  Opium  Conference 761 

World  Health  Assembly  (Who) 762 

Name  Index 

Anslinger,     Harry    J 761 

Armstrong,   Willis    C 761 

de  Wolf,  Francis  Colt 763 

Draper,   William   H.,   Jr 763 

Dulles,  Secretary 736,  743.  748 

Eisenhower,  President 735,  747 

Hall,  Ardelia  R 749 

Hlldreth,  Horace  A 763 

Hodgson,  Ralph  E 761 

Knowland,  William  F 757 

Maloy.  Raymond  B 762 

McDermott,  Michael  J 748 

Monnet,  Jean 754 

Morton,  Thruston  B 758 

Radhakrishnan,  S 752 

Scheele,  Leonard  A 762 

Short,  Romeo  E 763 

Stassen,  Harold  E 740,  746 


U.  S.  GOVEUHMENT  PRINirHC   office:  I9S3 


i/ve/  ^efia^tmen^  ^ c/taie^ 


•  XXVIII,  No.  727 
June  I,  1953 


THE    COSTS   OF    SURVIVAL    IN   A   DANGEROUS 

WORLD    •    by  Assistant  Secretary  Morton 769 


U.S.  OBJECTIVES  IN  WESTERN  EUROPE  •  by  Ridg. 


uxty    B.  Knight 


773 


THE    VALUE    OF    TECHNICAL    COOPERATION    IN 

LATIN  AMERICA   •    by  Assistant  Secretary  Cabot      .      .     780 


THE  CONTINUING  NEED  FOR  VIGILANCE  AGAINST 

SOVIET    AGGRESSION    •    by   James  B.   Conant      .      .     767 


For  index  see  back  cover 


Eoston  Public  Library 
Superintendent  of  Documents 

JUN18  1953 


^.^„^yy«  bulletin 


Vol.  XXVIir,  No.  727  •  Publication  5067 
June  1,  1953 


For  sal^by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents 

U.S.  Government  Printing  OCBce 

Washington  25,  D.C. 

Pbice: 

C2  issues,  domestic  $7.eO,  foreign  $10.25 

Single  copy,  20  cents 

Tbe  printing  of  this  publication  baa 
been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Budget  (January  22,  1952). 

riote:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  tbe  Department 
OF  State  Bclletin  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  BULLETIN, 
a  weekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publications, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  tcith  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  work  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETIN  includes 
selected  press  releases  on  foreign  pol- 
icy issued  by  the  White  House  and 
the  Department,  and  statements  and 
addresses  made  by  the  President  and 
by  the  Secretary  of  State  and  other 
officers  of  the  Department,  as  well  as 
special  articles  on  various  phases  of 
interruitional  affairs  and  the  func- 
tions of  the  Department.  Informa- 
tion is  included  concerning  treaties 
and  international  agreements  to 
which  the  United  States  is  or  may 
become  a  party  and  treaties  of  gen- 
eral interruitioruil  interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
well  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


The  Continuing  Need  for  Vigilance  Against  Soviet  Aggression 

hy  James  B.  Conant 

U.  S.  High  Commissioner  for  Germany ' 


I  appreciate  very  much  this  invitation  to  speak 
to  the  Foreign  Press  Association  here  in  Bonn. 
I  had  hoped  to  get  together  with  you  and  your 
German  colleagues  before  this  in  a  press  confer- 
ence and  to  report  on  my  trip  to  the  United  States, 
when  I  had  the  privilege  of  being  there  at  the  time 
of  Chancellor  Adenauer's  visit.  But  on  my  re- 
turn to  Germany  I  found  myself  with  a  scheduled 
series  of  ti-avels  which  have  kept  me  away  from 
Bonn  for  most  of  the  last  10  days. 

Now,  assuredly,  it  is  much  too  late  for  me  to 
make  such  a  report,  or  to  tell  you  about  the  re- 
sponse which  the  Chancellor  received  in  the 
United  States,  except  to  underline  the  enthusiastic 
reception  he  was  accorded  wherever  he  went.  I 
was  particularly  pleased,  of  course,  that  he  saw 
fit  to  come  to  Harvard  University.  And  I  was 
greatly  impressed  and  gratified  at  the  spontaneous 
ovations  he  received  from  the  students  whenever 
he  came  out  of  the  various  buildings  he  was  visit- 
ing. I  am  familiar  enough  with  the  student  body 
at  Cambridge  to  know  that  they  represented  real 
entliusiasm  for  the  Chancellor  and  for  the  Ger- 
man Republic  he  represents.  This  and  similar 
experiences  point  up  the  fact  that  Dr.  Adenauer's 
visit  was  a  significant  contribution  to  the  further- 
ance of  lasting  friendship  between  the  German 
and  American  people. 

"WTiile  I  was  in  the  United  States,  President 
Eisenhower  made  his  historic  appeal  for  world 
peace.  May  I  remind  you  that  it  is  nearly  a 
month  since  he  said :  ^ 

.  .  .  Recent  statements  and  gpstures  of  Soviet  leaders  give 
some  evidence  that  they  may  recognize  this  critical 
moment.  We  welcome  every  honest  act  of  peace.  We 
care  nothing  for  mere  rhetoric.  We  care  only  for  sin- 
cerity of  peaceful  purpose  attested  by  deeds.  The  oppor- 
tunities for  such  deeds  are  many.  The  performance  of 
a  great  number  of  them  waits  upon  no  complex  protocol 

Address  made  before  the  Foreign  Press  Association 
at  Bonn.  Germany,  on  May  7. 
'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  27, 1953,  p.  601. 


but  upon  the  simple  will  to  do  them.  Even  a  few  such 
clear  and  specific  acts,  such  as  the  Soviet  Union's  signa- 
ture upon  an  Austrian  treaty  or  its  release  of  thou.sands 
of  prisoners  still  held  from  World  War  II,  would  be  im- 
pressive signs  of  sincere  intent.  They  would  carry  a 
power  of  persuasion  not  to  be  matched  by  any  amount  of 
oratory.  .  .  . 

What  have  the  Soviets  done  in  the  meantime 
to  show  their  willingness  to  join  in  a  genuine 
effort  to  eliminate  the  tensions  which  wrack  the 
world  and  which  have  created  the  atmosphere  of 
nervous  foreboding  in  which  we  live  today?  A 
few  naive  people  may  have  grasped  at  the  straw 
offered  by  the  recent  editorial  in  Pravda,  or  even 
considered  it  a  great  concession  that  Pravda 
printed  the  full  text  of  President  Eisenhower's 
speech.  I  think  we  are  all  agreed  that  any  open- 
ing of  the  Iron  Curtain  that  shuts  off  the  Soviet 
people  from  the  news  of  the  outside  world — how- 
ever small  the  crack  may  be — is  a  good  thing.  But 
such  an  act  of  grace  by  Soviet  censors  cannot  be 
considered  a  serious  reply  to  the  President's  pro- 
posals for  world  peace.  It  is  deeds  and  not  merely 
words  that  the  world  requires  if  we  are  to  begin 
to  witness  the  rebirth  of  trust  among  nations 
which  President  Eisenhower  has  called  for. 

Continued  Abuses  in  Soviet  Zone 

As  far  as  Europe  is  concerned,  no  basic  change 
has  occurred  in  the  past  weeks  as  far  as  I  can 
see — no  basic  change  to  alter  the  familiar  pattern 
of  Soviet  action.  You  correspondents  know  better 
than  anyone  else  the  deeds  by  which  we  can  judge 
the  new  Soviet  leadership.  Certainly  here  in 
Germany  the  gap  between  words  and  deeds  is 
obvious  to  all  of  us.  "We  find  no  indication  in  the 
Soviet  Zone  of  any  relaxation  of  the  pressures  to 
which  18  million  Germans  are  being  constantly 
subjected. 

Let  me  remind  you  of  a  few  facts  that  are  surely 
pertinent : 


June   J,   7953 


767 


1.  The  Communist  Government  of  the  Soviet 
Zone  in  recent  weeks  has  stepped  up  its  campaign 
of  attack  and  persecution  of  the  church.  Church 
liaison  officers  with  the  Government  have  been 
whisked  away  by  the  security  police.  Dozens  of 
church  officials,  ministers,  and  priests  have  been 
arrested  and  some  sentenced  in  show  trials  to  long 
terms  of  imprisonment  for  alleged  sabotage  of 
democratic  institutions.  Church  youth  organiza- 
tions have  been  dissolved  or  their  members  ex- 
pelled from  the  scliools  of  the  Soviet  Zone. 

In  order  to  restrict  the  activities  of  the  church 
in  public  life,  time-honored  payments  of  church 
taxes  required  for  pastors'  salaries  and  church 
expenses  have  been  reduced  or  withheld  by  the 
Government,  theological  training  has  been  re- 
stricted, and  church  publications  interfered  with. 
A  horde  of  police  spies  have  been  assigned  to  at- 
tend church  services  and  report  on  "deviations" 
from  the  official  Communist  ideology.  And  in 
some  places  youthful  Communist  rowdies  have 
even  been  given  the  task  of  breaking  up  religious 
services. 

Protest  against  these  measures  by  responsible 
church  bodies  and  German  religious  leaders  remain 
unanswered  or  are  attacked  as  lies  and  malicious 
propaganda.  Things  have  gone  so  far  that  the 
Protestant  synod  of  Germany,  including  the  Prot- 
estant bishops  of  the  Soviet  Zone,  felt  constrained 
to  send  a  letter  of  protest  to  General  Chuikov  in 
which  they  appealed  to  the  General  to  stop  the 
antichurch  measures  of  Soviet  Zone  authorities. 
And  only  a  few  days  ago  Bishop  Dibelius,  in  a 
courageous  attempt  to  prevent  further  Communist 
attacks  against  the  Protestant  youth  organization 
of  the  Soviet  Zone,  filed  suit  against  the  official 
publication  of  the  Communist  controlled  Fdj. 

This  Kirchenkainpf  taking  place  in  the  Soviet 
Zone  hardly  needs  further  comment.  At  the  very 
least,  it  is  "inhuman,"  as  the  recent  general  synod 
of  the  United  Evangelical-Lutheran  Church 
described  it.  But  this  effort  to  reduce  the  church 
in  the  Soviet  Zone  to  a  ghetto-like  existence  is  not 
an  encouraging  sign  to  those  looking  for  evidence 
of  Communist  acts  of  conciliation. 

2.  The  "Sovietization"  of  agriculture  and  in- 
dustry in  the  East  Zone  is  continuing — is  even  be- 
ing accelerated.  Farms  are  being  collectivized  on 
a  grand  scale,  private  enterprise  is  being  elimi- 
nated in  large  sectors  of  Soviet  Zone  economy, 
ration  cards  are  being  withdrawn  from  categories 
of  workers  and  white-collar  employees  which 
do  not  fit  in  with  the  Government's  plans  for 
collectivization  of  the  economy.  Unless  these 
measures  are  soon  reversed,  all  this  may  well  mean 
slow  death  for  millions  of  Germans.  Even  now, 
according  to  a  report  prepared  by  the  Bundestag 
Committee  for  All-German  Affairs,  13  million  in- 
habitants of  the  Soviet  Zone  are  living  on  a 
starvation  diet. 


768 


3.  The  terror  and  persecution  which  have  driven 
thousands  of  Germans  to  leave  their  homes  in  the 
Soviet  Zone  and  to  seek  refuge  in  the  West  con- 
tinues unabated.  The  flow  of  these  unfortunate 
people  into  Berlin  has  only  slightly  diminished  in 
recent  weeks,  and  the  pattern  of  their  stories  re- 
mains the  same — moral  and  material  pressures  ap- 
plied with  all  the  brutality  and  efBciency  of  a 
monolithic  police  state. 

4.  The  picture  remains  unchanged  in  all  other 
significant  areas  of  life  in  the  Soviet  Zone. 
Schools,  universities,  theaters — all  aspects  of  cul- 
tural life  feel  the  blighting  hand  of  the  censor 
and  the  political  commissar.  German  youth  are 
being  beguiled  or  dragooned  into  the  Soviet  Zone 
armed  forces,  which  now  have  adopted  a  Soviet- 
style  uniform,  and  have  been  enlarged  to  include 
air  units  as  well  as  land  and  sea  forces.  The  seal- 
inio:  off  of  the  zonal  border  continues.  In  the  scar 
of  plowed  land  which  the  Soviets  have  torn  up 
across  Germany  to  mark  their  zonal  border,  the 
final  stretches  of  barbed  wire  are  now  being 
planted. 

The  picture,  then,  has  not  changed.  Does  this 
continued  "Sovietization"  of  Eastern  Germany 
mean  that  the  recent  Soviet  overtures  are  not  gen- 
uine ?  Does  it  mean  that  the  directives  from  Mos- 
cow have  not  yet  seeped  down  through  the  rigid 
Soviet  Zone  bureaucracy?  Or  does  it  mean  that 
the  Communists  are  simply  consolidating  their 
position  in  the  Soviet  Zone?  I  do  not  pretend  to 
know.  But  I  do  know  that  we  would  be  very  fool- 
ish indeed  if  we  allowed  rumors  or  speculations 
about  Soviet  intentions  to  bring  about  a  relaxation 
of  our  vigilance  in  the  defense  of  the  free  world 
against  military  aggression.  Let  me  repeat,  Presi- 
dent Eisenhower  has  said :  "We  welcome  every  act 
of  peace,"  but  as  you  all  know,  American  rearma- 
ment, Nato,  and  the  plans  for  the  Edc  are  the  re- 
sult of  disappointments  in  the  past.  They  are  the 
fruits  of  the  bitter  experience  of  the  last  8  years. 

In  this  connection  it  seems  to  me  that  Secretary 
Dulles'  report  to  the  American  people  on  the  Nato 
Council  meeting '  needs  to  be  considered  carefully 
by  all  concerned  with  the  European  situation. 
Speaking  of  the  necessity  for  the  prompt  creation 
of  the  European  Defense  Community,  he  said: 
"There  is  no  other  good  solution  of  the  problem  of 
establishing  adequate  strength  and  peace  in  Eu- 
rope," and,  speaking  of  the  need  for  the  creation 
of  a  German  force,  he  remarked,  you  will  recall, 
"I  do  not  believe  that  Americans,  or  British,  or 
French  want  to  anticipate  fighting  to  defend  Ger- 
many while  the  Germans  look  on  as  spectators."  I 
venture  the  opinion  that  the  Germans  themselves 
will  not  long  remain  content  to  have  their  country 
defended  by  the  presence  of  American,  British, 
and  French  troops. 

'  Ihid.,  May  11,  1953,  p.  671. 

Depaiiment  of  State  Bulletin 


The  Ultimate  Goals 

Coming  as  I  have  to  Germany  so  recently,  and 
having  had  a  chance  to  talk  with  so  many  leaders 
of  different  political  parties  as  well  as  leaders  of 
industry,  labor,  and  of  your  profession,  I  have 
been  impressed  by  the  unanimity  of  feeling  here 
in  the  Bundesrepublik  in  regard  to  the  ultimate 
goals.  I  take  it  that  almost  without  exception 
thoughtful  Germans  would  agree  that  Germany 
should,  as  quickly  as  possible,  make  its  contribu- 
tion to  the  common  defense  of  Europe;  that  Ger- 
many should  have  a  closer  association  with  the 
other  nations  of  Europe;  and  that  the  goal  must 
be  the  reunification  of  Germany  under  conditions 
of  peace  and  freedom. 

The  differences  of  opinion  arise  when  it  comes 
to  discussing  methods  of  reaching  these  important 
goals.  About  these  differences  of  opinion  within 
the  Bundesrepublik,  I  do  not  propose  to  speak 
here  this  afternoon.  The  Germans  must  settle  the 
debate  themselves.  I  can  only  suggest  a  parallel. 
If  a  sea  has  broken  through  a  dike  and  flooded 
great  areas  of  fruitful  land,  isolating  countrymen 
froni  one  another,  and  if  new  storms  threaten  fur- 
ther disasters,  it  is  reasonable  to  suppose  that  those 


beyond  the  reach  of  the  flood  would  want  to  get 
ahead  as  rapidly  as  possible  in  building  a  new  dike. 
But  if  the  people  concerned  continued  to  debate  as 
to  how  the  dike  should  be  constructed — or  even  if 
it  should  be  built  at  all — and  how  the  flooded  area 
should  be  reclaimed,  then  the  danger  of  a  new 
catastrophe,  of  total  destruction,  would  be  very 
great  indeed.  In  such  a  situation,  surely  no  one 
can  deny  that  the  important  thing  is  to  get  on  with 
the  job  and  get  it  done.  Whether  there  be  any 
merit  in  the  parallel  I  have  drawn,  time  alone  will 
tell. 

Now  one  final  word.  President  Eisenhower,  in 
his  appeal  for  world  peace  to  which  I  have  re- 
ferred, spoke  of  the  "serious  and  specific  issues  be- 
tween the  free  world  and  the  Soviet  Union."  He 
went  on  to  say,  "None  of  these  issues,  great  or 
small,  is  insoluble — given  only  tlie  will  to  respect 
the  rights  of  all  nations.  Again  we  say:  The 
United  States  is  ready  to  assume  its  just 
part.  .  .  .  With  all  who  will  work  in  good  faith 
toward  such  a  peace,  we  are  ready,  with  renewed 
resolve,  to  strive  to  redeem  the  near-lost  hopes  of 
our  day." 

This  is  the  policy  of  our  country. 


The  Costs  of  Survival  in  a  Dangerous  World 

hy  Thruston  B.  Morton 

Assistant  Secretary  for  Congressional  Relations'^ 


As  we  in  Washington  see  it,  there  are  two  basic 
developments  which,  taken  together,  have  made 
this  the  sort  of  world  it  is. 

The  first  development  might  best  be  termed  the 
rise  of  Soviet  power  and  of  that  power's  insistence 
on  expansion  at  the  free  nations'  expense.  We  are 
not  threatened  by  a  tlieory  or  a  conspiracy  alone — 
we  are  also  menaced  by  a  material  force  which  to 
date  has  dedicated  itself  to  global  domination  and 
to  destruction  of  our  way  of  life. 

This  force  must  be  understood  and  clearly  un- 
derstood. 

What  is  the  nature  of  the  Communist  menace? 

It  is  a  total  menace.  It  seeks  domination 
through  the  use  of  every  conceivable  weapon;  it 
operates  in  global  terms  with  global  objectives. 

'  Excerpts  from  an  address  made  before  the  New 
Hampshire  Taxpayers'  Association,  at  Concord,  N.H.,  on 
May  20  (press  release  273  dated  May  19). 


It  uses  every  conceivable  weapon — propaganda, 
subversion,  economic  pressure,  outright  aggres- 
sion; further,  it  uses  these  weapons  singly  or  in 
various  combinations.  The  postwar  years  are 
replete  with  examples  of  this  dangerous  Commu- 
nist flexibility.    Let  me  cite  just  a  few. 

There  was  the  drive  to  subvert  the  legitimate 
Greek  Government  in  1946—47.  Greek  strength, 
supported  by  American  aid  and  technical  advice, 
drove  the  Communists  into  retreat. 

There  was  the  economic  pressure  of  the  blockade 
applied  to  Berlin  in  an  effort  to  drive  the  West 
out.  Free  world  strength,  brought  to  bear  by  the 
fabulous  airlift,  forced  the  jaws  of  that  blockade 
open  and  kept  the  free  world  in  west  Berlin. 

And  there  was  the  callous,  unprovoked,  naked 
aggression  in  Korea — an  aggression  that  was 
halted  and  driven  back  by  the  strength  of  U.N. 
forces.  For  the  first  time  in  modern  history,  col- 
lective security  has  operated  effectively  on  the 
battlefield. 


June   7,   7953 


769 


We  have  yet  to  achieve  peace  in  Korea — that  is 
true.  The  American  mother  or  father,  the  wife 
or  the  sister  with  a  loved  one  in  Korea  will  find 
little  comfort  in  the  fact  that  a<^gression  has  been 
checked  there  as  lonj^  as  the  battle  continues. 

I  am  well  aware  of  this.  But  the  Communists 
have  been  forced  to  negotiate  for  a  truce.  We  are 
negotiating,  and  we  are  doing  everything  possible 
to  achieve  a  peace  with  honor.    There  is  hope. 

Now,  it  is  true  that  the  pattern  of  Communist 
imperialism  of  the  past  half-dozen  years  has  taken 
on  some  new  wrinkles.  But — as  I  want  to  stress 
a  little  later — it  would  be  folly  to  take  these  new 
wrinkles  for  a  change  in  the  pattern. 

The  global  impact  of  a  Communist  conspiracy, 
whose  heart  lies  in  Soviet  power,  remains  the  first 
of  two  basic  developments  which  condition  the 
nature  of  the  unstable  world  we  live  in. 

What  is  the  second  ? 

You  might  call  it  the  technological  miracle 
which  has  turned  a  large  world  into  a  small  one. 
You  might  call  it  the  scientific  age. 

A  shot  fired  at  another  Concord  not  far  from 
here  some  175  years  ago  was  said  to  have  been 
heard  around  the  world.  Today,  a  shot  fired  any- 
where sets  phones  to  jangling,  pulses  to  pounding, 
and  nerves  on  edge  everywhere.  And  it  does  so  in 
a  good  deal  less  time. 

An  election  in  Italy  or  Indonesia  is  carefully 
analyzed  the  day  after  it  is  held  by  experts  in 
Washington,  London,  Paris,  and  Moscow.  Today, 
a  jet  bomber  can  fly  halfway  around  the  globe  in 
less  than  24  hours. 

Today,  "it's  a  small  world"  is  something  more 
than  a  casual  greeting.  There  is  no  such  thing  as 
an  isolated  nation.  Isolationism  is  as  out-of-date 
as  last  year's  Paris  gowns — even  more  so. 

In  a  small  world  beset  by  the  Soviet  menace,  we 
Americans  have  had  no  choice  but  to  look  at  our 
situation  realistically.  We  have  had  to  recognize 
that  our  national  security  is  dependent  upon  our 
assuming  certain  global  responsibilities  which 
your  fathers  and  mine  would  not  have  thought 
of  assuming. 

Edmund  Burke,  British  statesman  and  orator, 
once  said — and  I  quote :  ""WHien  bad  men  combine, 
the  good  must  associate,  else  they  will  fall,  one  by 
one." 

That  statement,  made  almost  2  centuries  ago,  is 
as  valid  today  as  it  ever  was. 

America  cannot  stand  alone  in  this  kind  of 
world.  The  security  of  our  nation  and  of  all  free 
nations  depends  upon  our  ability  to  maintain  and 
strengthen  our  united  defenses. 

It  depends  upon  our  willingness  and  our  ability 
to  meet  the  Conmiunist  menace  anywhere  and 
everywhere.  It  depends  upon  our  willingness  to 
assume  and  wear  the  mantle  of  free  world  leader- 
ship with  dignity,  firmness,  and  tact. 

We  Americans  have  not  sought  the  role  of  lead- 
ership. In  fact,  we  have  never  sought  it.  Look 
back  at  our  history.     What  do  you  see? 


I 


You  see  a  nation  primarily  concerned  with  its 
internal  development.  You  see  a  lusty  youth  com- 
ing of  age.  You  see  many  peoples  of  diverse  back- 
grounds and  national  origins  creating  a  great 
country  in  which  freedom  and  liberty  are  more 
than  mere  words. 

For  a  brief  period  in  the  closing  years  of  the  19th 
century,  the  cry  of  "manifest  destiny"  rang 
through  the  land.  Some  Americans  felt  that  their 
new  proud  nation  was  entitled  to  flex  its  political 
and  commercial  muscles  abroad.  But  the  America 
of  the  current  century  gave  short  shrift  to  this 
attitude. 

No,  we  Americans  have  not  sought  world  leader- 
ship. But  today  we  have  had  it  imposed  upon  us 
by  circumstances  for  the  most  part  beyond  our 
control. 

We  have  no  alternative  but  to  meet  the  tests  that 
leadership  implies.  These  tests  are  both  moral 
and  material.  They  demand  both  physical  power 
and  adherence  to  principle. 

Right  to  Differ  Inherent  in  Democratic  Unity 

Let  me  say  a  word  about  principle. 

Insofar  as  our  leadership  is  concerned,  we  are 
wise  not  to  forget  that  it  is  based  upon  democratic 
thought  and  democratic  practice. 

We  have  the  right  to  ask  that  our  friends  in 
Europe  and  elsewhere  carry  their  share  of  the 
mutual  defense  burden — and  we  have  done  so. 
We  do  not  have  the  right  to  dictate  to  them — and    . 
we  should  not  seek  to  do  so  even  if  we  could.  I 

The  free  peoples  are  working  together  in  com- 
mon cause  because  they  realize  that  unity  is  the 
only  sound  road  to  security  and  peace.  They  are 
bound  together  by  common  principle,  common 
purpose,  and  common  need — not  by  force  imposed 
from  Washington. 

Eecently,  there  has  been  a  good  deal  in  the  press 
about  differences  of  opinion  as  between  some  of 
our  European  allies  and  ourselves.  I  am  not 
going  to  comment  on  these  alleged  differences  in 
any  detail. 

I  would  only  )ioint  out  that  the  right  of  Ameri- 
cans to  hold  different  opinions  is  bedrock  to  our 
society.  Should  we  seek  to  deny  to  other  peoples 
the  very  right  we  ourselves  cherish? 

The  right  to  differ  is  one  of  the  crucial  strengths 
not  only  of  our  own  democracy,  but  of  democratic 
unity  in  a  difficult  world.  It  is  one  of  many  im- 
portant things  that  distinguishes  us  from  the  to- 
talitarian tyranny  which  threatens  us. 

The  fact  that  the  free  nations  may  differ  on  spe- 
cific policies  is  much  less  important  than  the  fact 
that  they  continue  to  agree  on  basic  principle  and 
to  work  together  toward  a  common  objective. 

So  much  for  the  moral  principle  involved  in 
American  leadership.  What  about  material 
strength  ? 

I  have  spoken  of  the  Communist  menace  as  a 
global  one.     This  means  that  our  foreign  policies 


770 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


have  had  to  be  thought  out  in  world  terms.  It 
also  means  that  we  require  the  material  strength 
to  support  such  policies. 

I  The  Soviets  have  made  it  clear  that  they  under- 
stand only  one  language— that  of  power.  We  and 
our  free  world  friends  have  had  to  speak  that  lan- 
guage.   And  we've  had  to  speak  it  on  a  global 

basis.  .  .     1  i   1  Tx 

The  conflict  in  Korea  is  not  an  isolated  one.  it 
is  related  to  what  is  happening  in  Malaya  and  in 
Indochina.  Furthermore,  what  is  happening  m 
Asia  is  related  to  the  situation  in  Europe. 

It  is  all  part  of  the  same  worldwide  Communist 
pattern  for  conquest. 

In  considering  that  pattern,  it  is  well  to  recog- 
nize that  Communist  words  are  related  to  Com- 
munist deeds,  even  if  the  words  and  deeds  do  not 
square  with  each  other. 

The  Communists  continually  talk  of  "peace. 
At  the  same  time,  they  carry  on  aggression  m 
Korea  and  in  Southeast  Asia,  and  apply  pressure 
to  Western  Europe. 
Wliat  lies  behind  this  seeming  contradiction? 
Shortly  before  his  death,  Stalin  wrote  an  article 
for  a  leading  Soviet  publication.     That  article 
may  well  have  been  Stalin's  last  political  will  and 
testament.     In  it,  the  Soviet  dictator  stated  that 
the  free  nations  were  bound  to  split.     Communist 
victory,   he  said,   would   be   assured   when   this 
occurred. 

Stalin  was  not  only  reiterating  a  basic  Marxist 
prediction.  He  was  also  setting  down  a  line  which 
Communists  everywhere  were  expected  to  follow. 
And  they  indeed  appear  to  be  following  it. 

By  talking  "peace"  while  they  practice  aggres- 
sion, the  Communists  hope  to  confuse  and  to  divide 
the  free  world.  Their  current  propaganda  offen- 
sive is  clearly  directed  at  exploiting  any  differ- 
ences that  might  exist  between  ourselves  and  our 
allies.  It  is  further  designed  to  play  upon  the 
deep-rooted  hopes  and  fears  of  a  humanity  which 
earnestly  desires  a  tnie  peace. 

In  carrying  through  the  obligations  of  leader- 
ship, we  Americans  would  do  well  to  bear  in  mind 
the  deadly  and  devious  aims  of  Soviet  propaganda 
as  well  as  of  the  various  other  methods  the  Com- 
munists employ  to  achieve  their  objectives. 

We  can  hope  for  the  best,  but  we  must  be  pre- 
pared for  the  worst. 

President  Eisenhower  put  it  very  well  when  he 

said  ^ — and  I  quote : 

]        Until  Soviet  good  faith  is  proven  by  deeds,  the  free 

I    nations  must  rely  on  their  own  strength  for  the  preserva- 

'     tion  of  peace.    To  fail  to  continue  vigorously  to  strengthen 

our   military   forces   would   be   to   risk   wasting  all   our 

efforts  for  the  past  live  years  in  defense  of  our  liberties. 

These  problems  are  obviously  complex  ones. 
They  can  be  met  only  through  a  well-rounded, 
positive  foreign  policy.  They  are  being  met  by 
just  such  a  policy. 

'  Bulletin  of  May  25,  19.53,  p.  735. 
June   I,   1953 


The  Premise  for  Today's  Foreign  Policy 

American  foreign  policy  today  is  not  a  hit-and- 
miss  operation.  Nor  is  it  designed  to  bow  out  of 
the  picture  at  the  end  of  a  given  calendar  year. 
American  foreign  policy  today  is  based  on  the 
assumption  that  the  Communist  challenge  will  be 
with  us  for  many  years,  regardless  of  any  imme- 
diate relaxation  of  international  tensions  that  may 
develop.  The  costs  of  that  policy  have  been  calcu- 
lated with  an  eye  to  spending  the  minimum  con- 
sistent with  our  long-run  security. 

The  gradual  buildup  of  Nato  forces  in  Europe, 
the  development  of  strong  measures  to  cope  with 
the  Communist  military  threat  in  Southeast  Asia, 
the  encouragement  of  a  unified  Western  European 
economy,  the  search  for  a  moderate  trade  policy 
which  will  give  other  nations  a  reasonable  cnance 
to  sell  in  the  American  market— all  of  these  things 
are  part  of  a  positive  foreign  policy. 

What  is  this  positive  policy  costing  us?  What 
does  it  mean  to  you — the  taxpayers— in  dollars 
and  cents? 

Wliat  is  the  new  team  in  Washington  doing  to 
minimize  the  costs  of  national  survival? 

In  answering  these  vital  questions,  it  is  well  for 
us  to  understand  that  Washington  bureaucrats 
do  not  necessarily  differ  from  other  taxpayers 
when  it  comes  to  spending  the  tax  dollar. 


The  new  team  in  Washington  is  not  interested 
in  squeezing  or  misleading  the  taxpayer.  In  fact, 
the  Eisenhower  administration  sees  taxes  pretty 
much  as  you  in  Concord  see  them.  We  are  tax- 
payers too.  And  we  are  concerned  with  reducing 
the  average  man's  tax  burden  to  the  lowest  prac- 
ticable level.  But— as  the  President  has  pointed 
out  time  and  again— it  is  not  sound  policy  to  re- 
duce taxes  before  making  reasonable  progress  to- 
ward balancing  the  budget. 

The  new  administration  has  already  taken  a 
number  of  important  steps  toward  a  balanced 
budget.  But  the  balancing  cannot  be  done  over- 
night. 

Now,  I  make  no  pretense  of  being  a  nscal  ex- 
pert. But  I  do  believe  that  your  Government  has 
begun  to  move  toward  creation  of  a  sounder  dol- 
lar and  a  sounder  credit  structure. 

As  for  specific  economies,  I  might  point  out 
tries©  \ 

The  foreign-aid  budget^ — and  that  includes  both 
our  military  defense  and  economic  expenditures 
abroad— was  submitted  to  Congress  only  after  1.8 
billion  dollars  was  trimmed  from  the  estimates 
made  by  the  preceding  administration;  several 
major  Government  departments  have  submitted 
budgets  which  are  well  below  last  year's  ceilings; 
the  national  defense  budget,  the  biggest  single 
item  of  Federal  expenditure,  has  been  trimmed 
by  some  5  billion  dollars. 

These  are  important  economies,  and  undoubt- 

771 


edly  others  are  being  made  and  will  be  made. 
But  I  think  we  need  to  be  thoroughly  realistic 
about  this  matter  of  Government  economy.  The 
cost  of  national  security  is  high.  It  is  going  to 
continue  to  be  high  for  some  time  to  come.  The 
cost  of  running  the  Federal  Government  as  a 
whole  is  high,  and  the  demands  of  national  se- 
curity are  not  the  only  reasons  for  this. 

Facing  the  Fiscal  Facts 

Congressmen   would   receive   fewer   letters   of 
complaint  and  people  generally  would  be  some- 
what less  impatient  for  a  drastic  tax  cut  if  more 
of  us  stopped  to  consider  the  fiscal  facts. 
What  are  the  facts? 

In  the  first  place,  inflation  does  not  play  favor- 
ites. Your  Government  is  required  to  pay  just 
as  much  for  the  things  it  needs  as  are  you  or  your 
next-door  neighbor. 

Things  have  changed  in  the  last  decade  or  so. 
Prices  have  skyrocketed.  For  example,  a  chair 
costing  the  Government  9  dollars  in  1940  today 
costs  32  dollars.  File  cabinets  have  gone  from 
$24.75  to  $61  in  the  same  period.  Desks  which 
went  for  $27.75  in  1940  now  cost  more  than  three 
times  as  much. 

Government  employees — and  they  have  to  eat 
just  like  other  people — have  had  their  wages 
raised  considerably,  even  as  have  those  who  are 
privately  employed. 

The  great  majority  of  Americans  are  living 
better  today  than  ever  before,  but  we  have  had  to 
pay  for  it. 

Another  factor  in  the  governmental  situation, 
which  those  who  are  impatient  for  drastic  tax 
action  might  well  keep  in  mind,  has  to  do  with 
the  Government's  complexity. 

A  generation  ago  the  executive  branch  of  the 
Government  was  composed  of  the  White  House, 
the  Cabinet  departments,  and  a  handful  of  spe- 
cialized agencies.  When  Franklin  Roosevelt  came 
to  power,  there  were  only  about  500,000  Federal 
employees.  The  Government's  responsibilities 
were  considerably  fewer  and  it  played  a  consider- 
ably lesser  role  in  the  economic  sphere. 

Today,  the  number  of  executive  agencies  has 
more  than  quadrupled.  There  are  five  times  as 
many  Government  employees,  and  the  Govern- 
ment's obligations,  both  at  home  and  abroad,  would 
have  staggered  the  imagination  of  even  the  most 
radical  of  thinkers  back  in  1930. 

There  are  several  important  conclusions  that  can 
be  drawn  from  observing  this  Government  of  ours 
in  operation  and  from  an  understanding  of  its 
responsibilities.  These  conclusions,  I  might  say, 
are  my  own. 

The  first  is  that  you  just  cannot  take  a  complex 
organization  of  two  and  a  half  million  people  and 
slice  off  a  quarter  or  a  half. 

To  use  the  meat-ax  approach  on  the  Federal 
budget — as   some   people   advocate — might   well 


imperil  our  existence.  With  government  func- 
tions being  as  complex  and  interrelated  as  they 
are,  there  is  always  the  danger  of  cutting  through 
a  bone  when  aiming  at  a  piece  of  fat. 

No,  the  meat-ax  approach  is  definitely  not  rec- 
ommended. The  scalpel  would  be  more  to  the 
point.  We  must  probe  for  waste  carefully.  And 
the  administration  has  been  doing  just  that. 

A  second  important  conclusion  is  that  the  new 
administration  in  Washington  is  not  in  position 
to  turn  back  the  clock.  No  man — no  matter  how 
clever — can  recapture  time.  And  I  strongly 
doubt  that  it  would  be  wise  to  do  so  if  it  were 
possible. 

The  administration  has  dedicated  itself  to  cer- 
tain specific  objectives.  It  is  seeking  to  maintain 
economic  stability  and  a  reasonable  level  of  de- 
fense within  the  framework  of  a  genuinely  demo- 
cratic economy.  It  is  striving  to  protect  and 
strengthen  private  enterprise. 

The  President  has  made  it  clear  that  Govern- 
ment activity  in  the  economic  sphere  will  be  kept 
to  that  minimum  consistent  with  the  public 
interest. 

This— it  seems  to  me — does  not  imply  a  return 
to  the  situation  which  existed  in  1920  or  even  in 
1940.  The  Government's  relationships  with  the 
domestic  economy  are  highly  complex  and  our  ob- 
ligations abroad  are  neither  short-term  nor  minor. 
For  these  and  other  reasons,  we  are  compelled 
to  gear  any  economic  steps  we  take  to  the  needs  of 
1953 — not  those  of  a  generation  or  even  a  decade 
ago. 

A  third  conclusion  that  I  believe  we  must  draw 
is  that  democratic  government  cannot  function  in 
a  straitjacket.     Nor  does  it. 

Ours  is  not  a  monolithic  state  like  the  Soviet 
Union.  Here,  governmental  decisions  are  the 
product  of  the  interplay  of  many  different  forces 
and  many  different  influences.  Such  is  the  essence 
of  democracy. 

There  are  those  who  seem  to  think  that  the 
President  can  issue  an  order  and  get  any  desired 
result.  It  is  true  that  Mr.  Eisenhower  can  issue 
instructions  to  the  executive  branch  of  which  he  is 
the  head.  But — as  many  chief  executives  have 
learned  through  sad  experience — he  can  neither 
coerce  the  Congress  nor  stampede  the  Supreme 
Court. 

The  President  does  have  power — much  power.  : 
But  he  has  been  given  that  power  by  the  American 
people,  who  have  trusted  him  to  use  it  wisely. 

Wisdom  demands  that  the  President  lead  more 
by  persuasion  and  reason  than  by  directive.  And 
that  is  exactly  what  the  President  is  doing.  i 

The  final  point  I  would  make  here  is  that  the 
President  cannot  be  expected  to  solve  every  prob- 
lem we  face  in  a  matter  of  hours,  days,  or  even 
months.  Further,  there  are  basic  problems  that 
cannot  be  solved  on  short  notice  even  if  he  were 
to  have  the  powers  of  a  dictator,  and  I  know  that 


772 


Department  of  Slate  Bulletin 


you  will  agree  that  we  have  no  use  for  a  dictator  in 
this  country.  „   ,     , 

I  also  know  that  one  of  the  best  ways  to  assure 
our  strength  and  our  security  as  a  democratic  na- 
tion is  to  recognize  that  democracy  imposes  re- 
sponsibilities, even  as  it  guarantees  rights  and 
privileges. 

Democracy  cannot  be  taken  for  granted— par- 
ticularly in  this  day  and  age.     It  must  be  worked 

at.  T  .         ■ 

Every  individual  American  and  every  American 
group  with  a  specific  interest  is,  I  believe,  obligated 
to  accept  the  fact  that  there  is  such  a  thing  as  the 
national  interest  and  the  general  welfare. 


Every  such  group  or  individual  must  also  appre- 
ciate that  his  particular  objective  is  subordinate 
to  the  national  interest.  In  short,  the  national 
well-being  demands  compromise  from  each  of 
us— a  certain  willingness  to  sacrifice  our  maxi- 
mum demands  for  something  more  moderate. 

In  this  willingness  and  ability  to  sacrifice  special 
interests  to  the  general  welfare  lies  one  of  the 
major  keys  to  the  American  democracy's  staying 
power. 

I'm  not  a  betting  man.  But  if  I  had  to  bet  I 
would  stake  everything  I  had  on  the  common 
sense  of  the  average  American  and  on  the  future 
of  America. 


U.S.  Objectives  in  Western  Europe 

hy  Ridgway  B.  Knight 

Dejmty  Director,  Office  of  Western  European  Affairs  ^ 


I  believe  it  is  unnecessary,  with  a  group  such 
as  this,  to  describe  in  any  great  detail  the  vital 
importance  of  Western  Europe  to  American  se- 
curity. The  hard,  cold  facts  of  modern  life  prove 
that  we  can  no  longer  think  of  American  defense 
solely  in  terms  of  our  own  manpower,  our  own 
weapons,  our  own  natural  resources,  and  our  own 
factories  and  farms.  Instead,  we  must  appraise 
our  security  situation  in  terms  of  the  combined 
strength  of  the  United  States  and  its  allies.  We 
must  think  not  only  of  how  much  we  would  lose 
if  the  nations  of  Western  Europe  should  fall  under 
Soviet  domination  but  also  how  much  they  would 
gain  tliereby.  We  must  think  of  how  much  we 
gain  if  these  nations  remain  on  our  side  and  de- 
velop their  strength.  Finally,  we  must  think  of 
the  significant  contributions  which  certain  of 
these  nations  are  making  to  the  security  of  other 
parts  of  the  free  world,  in  Korea,  Malaya,  and 
Indochina. 

I  cannot,  in  this  short  period  of  time,  catalog 
all  the  problems  we  face  in  Western  Eui'ope.  It 
is  better,  I  believe,  to  try  to  visualize  our  main  ob- 
jectives in  Europe  and  to  try  to  consider  the  major 
developments  which  affect  us  at  the  present  time. 

Our  main  objective  in  1953,  as  it  has  been  ever 
since  the  war,  remains  the  development  and  con- 
solidation of  U.S.  security  in  the  face  of  the  most 

'  Address  made  before  the  World  Affairs  Forum  of  the 
Foreign  Policy  Association  of  Pittsburgh,  Pa.,  on  May  7. 

June   ?,   1953 


direct  and  the  most  dangerous  threat  which  has 
ever  been  directly  leveled  at  our  country.  There 
is  no  evidence  whatever  that  this  threat  has  less- 
ened, despite  the  much  talked  of  "Soviet  peace 
oifensive. 

The  history  of  the  Soviet  dictatorship  and  more 
particularly  its  action  since  the  end  of  the  war 
constitute  positive  facts  which  speak  for  them- 
selves. 

In  fact,  the  last  Communist  ofiicial  pronounce- 
ment which  has  the  force  of  dogma  specifically  in- 
dicates that  one  major  aim  of  Soviet  policy  is  to 
dissolve  Western  unity.  Stalin's  pronouncement 
on  the  eve  of  the  19th  Congress  of  the  Soviet  Com- 
munist Party  last  October  re-emphasized  "the  need 
to  promote  conflict  and  exploitable  weaknesses  in 
the  non-Communist  world." 

On  the  other  side  of  the  ledger  we  have  as  facts 
only  a  very  limited  exchange  of  wounded  prisoners 
of  war  and  some  visas  granted  to  a  few  distin- 
guished American  travelers.  Otherwise  this 
much  publicized  "peace  offensive,"  which  Secre- 
tary Dulles  has  aptly  described  as  a  "peace  de- 
fensive," has  ironically  enough  received  its  impetus 
from  such  minor  causes  as  a  few  smiles  on  the  faces 
of  Soviet  diplomats  and  a  welcome  to  these  same 
American  visitors  in  Moscow — a  welcome  which  in 
every  other  country  in  the  world  would  be  consid- 
ered as  merely  normal. 

Considering  this  situation  it  is  essential  to  strive 
for  a  j  udicious  balance.     On  the  one  hand  we  must 

773 


obviously  refrain  from  being  so  frozen  in  our 
mental  attitudes  that  we  would  not  be  willing  to 
avail  ourselves  of  changed  conditions  in  Moscow 
which  may  result  from  the  death  of  Stalin.  On 
the  other  hand  we  must  realize  that  the  probability 
of  a  basic  change  in  attitude  of  the  Soviet  olig- 
archy is  slim  indeed  and  that  we  must  diligently 
preserve  those  policies  of  calm  and  strength  until 
we  have  received  positive  proof  that  the  leopard 
has  changed  his  spots.  By  lowering  our  guard  we 
could  well  fall  into  a  trap  set  for  us. 

In  the  meanwhile,  however,  we  should  seek  to 
avail  ourselves  of  any  opportunity  offered  to  us 
by  the  other  side  with  a  view  to  redressing  little  by 
little  the  still  unfavorable  balance.  In  each  case 
we  should  do  it  for  a  specific  objective,  and  we 
should  carefully  refrain  from  accepting  any  one 
of  these  single  objectives  as  a  final  t«st  of  a  change 
in  Soviet  policy  as  a  whole.  This  can  only  come 
from  overall  i^erformance  along  the  lines  set  down 
by  the  President. 

It  remains  that  the  basic  problem  which  faces 
not  only  our  country  but  also  our  Nato  partners  is 
how  to  develop  and  maintain  a  position  of  real 
strength  over  an  unpredictable  number  of  years. 
We  have  no  evidence  that  the  threat  to  our  security 
will  diminish  on  any  predictable  date,  nor  do  we 
have  evidence  that  would  permit  us  to  assume 
an  attack  on  any  particular  date.  In  this  situation, 
as  Secretary  Dulles  recently  said,  it  would  be  a 
mistake  "to  exhaust  ourselves  by  spasmodic  pro- 
grams designed  to  meet  ever-recurring  emer- 
gencies." 

It  is  obvious  that  one  of  the  most  important 
problems  connected  with  a  long-term  security  pro- 
gram is  the  economic  problem.  This  is  true  for 
two  reasons.  In  the  first  place,  military  strength 
alone  is  not  sufficient  for  our  security,  because  the 
Communists  have  proved  their  ability  to  take 
over  countries  which  are  weak  economically  and 
spiritually  without  the  use  of  military  force. 
There  can  be  no  stable  society  without  the  prospect 
of  an  acceptable  standard  of  living  for  the  people 
who  must  defend  that  society.  In  the  second  place, 
it  is  equally  clear  that  military  strength  itself 
cannot  be  developed  or  maintained  without  a 
sound  economic  base.  It  is  therefore  our  purpose 
to  keep  our  military  efforts  in  balance  with  U.S. 
and  European  economic  capabilities. 

If  we  are  to  increase  our  mutual  strength  in  the 
face  of  present  economic  and  political  limitations, 
there  are  two  things  we  must  do.  First,  we  must 
try  to  obtain  more  real  defense  from  the  present 
resources  devoted  to  defense.  Second,  we  must 
seek  to  utilize  other  resources  not  yet  tapped. 

Our  ability  to  achieve  a  better  use  of  present 
resources  requires  constant  striving  within  Nato 
to  eliminate  unnecessary  duplication  and  waste. 
It  requires  us  to  press  forward  with  the  principle 
of  balanced  collective  forces  adopted  by  Nato  in 
May  1951.  Under  this  principle,  we  seek  to  attain 
balance  among  the  various  elements  of  the  military 

774 


forces  of  the  Nato  countries  as  a  whole  rather  than 
balance  within  individual  national  forces.  Finally, 
it  is  evident  that  the  achievement  of  greater  unity 
among  the  nations  of  continental  Europe  will,  in 
the  long  run,  greatly  facilitate  the  effective  use  of 
available  resources. 

Collective  Security  Needs  France  and  Germany 

In  seeking  to  tap  new  reservoirs  of  strength, 
one  prospect  stands  out  at  this  time  above  all 
others.  I  refer,  of  course,  to  Germany.  The 
manpower,  industrial  plant,  and  technical  skill  of 
Western  Germany  can  add  substantially  to  the 
total  strength  available  for  the  defense  of  the 
Atlantic  community,  and  it  is  exceedingly  im- 
portant to  us  that  this  strength  be  utilized. 

Both  our  desire  to  encourage  European  unity 
and  our  interest  in  a  German  military  contribu- 
tion focus,  at  the  present  time,  on  the  European 
Defense  Community.  This  is  a  plan,  designed  by 
European  statesmen,  to  permit  Germany  to  con- 
tribute military  forces  to  Western  defense,  not  as 
independent  national  forces  but  as  part  of  a  com- 
bined European  army.  Thus,  Edc  would  not  only 
make  possible  a  German  military  contribution  but 
would  also  represent  an  important  step  toward 
closer  continental  unity,  which  should  have  sub- 
stantial political  and  economic  benefits  as  well  as 
political  and  military  advantages. 

American  policy  has  firmly  supported  this  Eu- 
ropean plan.  In  fact,  the  U.S.  Government  ha 
sometimes  been  criticized  on  the  grounds  that  i^ 
has  set  forth  no  alternative  policy  in  the  even^ 
Edc  should  fail  of  ratification.  However,  the 
point  of  the  matter  is  very  simple.  Theoretical^ 
alternatives  to  Edc  exist.  Practical  alternatives, 
given  the  political  facts  of  life  facing  us  today, 
have  not  yet  come  to  light. 

As  we  are  in  search  of  a  net  addition  of  strength, 
the  German  contribution  is  required  over  and 
above  the  existing  elements  of  strength  in  the  free 
world.  Were  it  only  possible  to  obtain  Germany's 
contribution  at  the  expense  of  defections  in  other 
quarters,  our  interests  would  not  be  served.  To 
])nt  it  bluntly,  our  collective  security  requires  the 
full  participation  of  both  France  and  Germany — 
not  of  Germany  or  France. 

As  matters  now  stand  the  only  political  frame- 
work within  which  the  French  people  may  accept 
the  military  collaboration  of  their  enemy  of  yes- 
terday is  the  Edc. 

As  long  as  this  remains  a  political  fact,  it  is 
quite  sterile  to  talk  of  alternatives. 

Fate  of  EDC  Largely  Dependent  on  France 

As  we  all  know,  the  fate  of  the  Edc  is  in  suspense 
at  this  time.  The  final  outcome  will  depend 
largely  upon  the  eventual  decision  reached  by  the 
French  parliament.  I  will  not  seek  to  express 
a  judgment  as  to  whether  French  hesitations  are 
justified  or  not.    Passing  judgment  on  others  is 

Department  of  Stale   Bulletin 


seldom  profitable.  In  the  field  of  foreign  rela- 
tions it  usually  complicates  rather  than  helps  a 
solution. 

In  my  opinion,  and  I  would  like  to  make  it  quite 
clear  that  I  am  only  expressing  a  personal  view, 
the  process  which  the  French  people  have  gone 
through  is  a  simple  one.  In  connection  with  the 
Edc,  the  French  people  weiit  through  a  first  phase 
wliich  can  be  called  intellectual  and  logical.  As 
a  German  contribution  appeared  to  be  necessary, 
and  was  being  insisted  upon  by  the  United  States, 
the  European  army  seemed  to  be  the  safest  frame- 
work therefor,  limiting  the  potential  future  threat 
of  a  dynamic  Germany  which  exists.  However,  to 
view  the  situation  as  it  was,  it  should  also  be  rec- 
ognized that  during  this  first  phase  the  European 
army  seemed  so  distant  that  the  general  public 
hardly  gave  it  serious  thought. 

The  second  phase  can  be  termed  affective  and 
sentimental.  Reason  had  no  part  therein.  The 
thousand  and  one  traditional  and  historical  fears 
and  suspicions  about  Germany  commanded  and 
determined  this  reaction  when  the  Edc  evolved 
from  a  dream  into  a  real  possibility.  This  reac- 
tion was  not  confined  to  extreme  nationalists.  It 
stennned  from  the  heart  of  the  vast  majority  of 
French  people  who  instinctively  revolted  against 
the  thought  of  any  kind  of  union  with  the  tradi- 
tional enemy  of  yesterday,  and  against  the  thought 
of  tlie  disappearance  of  the  French  Army  of 
which  tlie  most  outspoken  antimilitaristic  French- 
man remains  proud  deep  down  in  his  own  heart. 

Illogical  as  it  may  seem,  this  state  of  mind  is 
very  human  and  very  common.  Haven't  all  of 
us,  when  faced  with  personal  situations  in  which 
our  reason  has  told  us  to  do  one  thing,  done  quite 
the  contrary  ?  This  sentimental  reaction  was  un- 
avoidable and  was  foreseen  by  many. 

Our  hope,  and  I  believe  it  is  a  sound  one,  is  that 
this  second  and  sentimental  phase  will  gradually 
give  way  to  a  third  phase  in  which  reason  and 
logic  will  again  come  to  the  surface  and  gain  the 
day.  In  the  last  2  months  French  leaders  from 
the  Prime  Minister  down  have  spoken  to  the 
French  people  more  frankly  than  ever  before. 
They  have  shown  why  there  is  no  alternative  for 
France  and  that  there  is  no  turning  back  in  this 
great  forward  movement,  which  in  addition  to 
harnessing  the  strength  of  a  vital  Germany  to  the 
common  cause  should  usher  in  an  entirely  new 
historical  period  of  material,  spiritual,  and  intel- 
lectual development  in  a  gradually  uniting 
Europe. 

We  have  read  much  in  the  newspapers  about 
pi'otocols  to  the  Edc  treaty  and  other  conditions 
stipulated  by  the  French  Government  for  ratifica- 
tion of  the  treaty.  Wliile  politically  important 
because  of  the  ever  complex  parliamentary  situa- 
tion in  the  French  National  Assembly,  these  con- 
ditions in  my  opinion  represent  the  manifestations 
of  the  underlying  state  of  mind  of  France  as  a 
whole,  rather  than  absolute  requirements  in  them- 


selves. Given  an  instinctive  refusal  to  move  for- 
ward, new  conditions  could  be  expected  ever  to 
crop  up  so  as  to  justify  logically  the  sentimental 
unwillingness  to  move  ahead.  However,  given  a 
modification  in  this  underlying  state  of  mind, 
these  specific  conditions  can  and  will  be  met.  The 
mere  fact  that  a  month  ago  the  protocols  to  the 
treaty  were  agreed,  while  until  shortly  before  then 
they  seemed  insurmountable  obstacles,  is  one  of 
the  best  indications  of  improvement. 

As  you  know,  while  there  are  a  number  of  issues 
which  have  a  bearing  on  French  ratification,  the 
Saar  is  the  major  one.  Here  again,  given  the 
desire  on  both  sides  to  proceed,  an  acceptable  solu- 
tion to  both  will  be  found,  notwithstanding  the 
fact  that  in  many  ways  the  Saar  issue  provides  a 
synthesis  of  the  ditferences  in  many  fields  which 
have  pitted  France  against  the  forces  of  a  national 
(xermany  since  Frederick  the  Great  was  King  of 
Prussia. 

Quite  aside  from  substance,  one  of  the  most 
urgent  considerations  at  this  moment  is  speed. 
Barely  4  months  remain  before  the  national  elec- 
tions in  Germany  when  Adenauer,  a  truly  great 
European  statesman,  and  his  coalition  Govern- 
ment will  face  the  voters.  In  all  likelihood  his 
chances  at  the  polls  will,  as  in  every  democracy,  be 
conditioned  by  his  record.  If  the  Edc  has  not  been 
ratified  by  September  and  if,  therefore,  the  con- 
tractual relationship  with  Germany  has  not  come 
into  force,  and  Germany  remains  under  the  statute 
of  occupation,  the  opposition  will  see  to  it  that  the 
tremendous  improvement  in  everyday  life  of  the 
average  German  which  has  occurred  under  Chan- 
cellor Adenauer's  tenure  will  be  minimized.  The 
dc  facto  status  achieved  by  the  Bonn  government 
will  tend  to  be  forgotten  and  the  charge  will  be 
made  that  Adenauer  has  not  been  able  adequately 
to  promote  and  defend  the  interests  of  Germany. 
As  a  result,  it  is  well  within  the  realm  of  possibility 
that  the  German  Government  might  be  taken  over 
by  elements  which  now  oppose  ])lans  for  a  Euro- 
pean Defense  Community.  Whether  these  ele- 
ments would  eventually  modify  their  attitudes  is 
uncertain,  but  one  thing  seems  quite  certain. 
There  would  not  only  be  further  delay  in  obtain- 
ing a  German  defense  contribution,  but  there 
would  also  be  a  severe  loss  of  momentum  in  the 
movement  toward  European  unity.  In  fact,  it  is 
possible  that  the  European  idea  would  have  lost 
so  much  ground  that  it  would  be  unattainable  in 
this  generation. 

Let  us  now  return  to  France. 

Present  French  Situation 

"RHiile  France's  reactions  are  largely  sentimental 
and  historical,  they  are  also  materially  conditioned 
by  her  present  situation.  At  this  point  it  might 
be  useful  briefly  to  review  her  basic  position. 

France's  essential  trouble  is  that  she  is  over-ex- 
tended populationwise,  economically,  and  finan- 


June   7,   J  953 


775 


cially.  Perhaps  the  greatest  problem  at  this  time 
is  related  to  her  budget,  of  which  the  three  main 
components  are  her  Nato  effort  in  Europe,  the  In- 
dochina war,  and,  lastly,  reconstruction  and  de- 
velopment. The  latter,  while  largely  forgotten  in 
1953,  remains  a  very  heavy  one. 

In  seeking  to  face  this  three-fold  task  during 
the  past  few  years,  France  has  been  running  a 
budget  deficit  which  has  exceeded  20  percent  of 
the  total  in  1951  and  1952  and  is  accruing  in  1953 
at  a  rate  of  approximately  30  percent. 

As  in  every  country  there  are  three  ways  of  bal- 
ancing a  budget:  by  increasing  taxes,  by  deficit 
financing,  or  by  cutting  expenditures. 

If  we  look  at  the  first  possibility,  that  of  in- 
creasing taxes,  one  is  usually  met  by  the  argument 
that  if  only  the  French  paid  their  taxes  their 
budget  would  be  balanced.  What  is  thus  over- 
looked is  that  tax  evasion  is  an  ancient  custom  in 
France  and  that  the  State  takes  this  into  con- 
sideration when  establishing  tax  rates.  As  a  re- 
sult, certain  tax  rates  are  abnormally  high.  Even 
with  considerable  tax  evasion,  the  French  people 
actually  pay — in  taxes  collected — at  least  as  great 
if  not  a  higher  percentage  of  their  national  in- 
come than  the  percentage  paid  by  American  tax- 
payers to  Federal,  State,  and  local  governments 
combined.  In  other  words,  with  an  average  in- 
come of  about  one-third  the  average  American 
income,  the  French  taxpayer  must  turn  a  larger 
proportion  of  his  income  over  to  the  tax  collector 
than  the  average  American  does. 

If  we  look  at  the  second  possibility,  deficit 
financing,  we  find  little  reason  for  hope,  as  ever 
since  1914  the  French  people  have  had  a  virtually 
continuous  inflation  experience,  with  the  result 
that  the  franc  today  is  worth  about  one-half  of 
one  percent  of  what  it  was  worth  before  the  First 
World  War.  With  this  kind  of  personal  knowl- 
edge of  what  extreme  inflation  can  mean,  the 
average  Frenchman  is  most  reluctant  to  invest  in 
any  kind  of  bond,  be  it  a  state  obligation  or  a 
private  one.  Therefore,  before  the  French  will  be 
willing  to  invest  in  government  bonds  a  good 
many  years  of  financial  and  currency  stability 
will  be  required  before  sufficient  confidence  can 
be  established. 

In  view  of  what  we  have  said  about  the  first 
two  possibilities,  it  is  obvious  that  as  time  passes 
the  pressure  on  the  French  Government  to  resort 
to  the  third  method,  namely  reducing  expendi- 
tures, is  becoming  heavier  and  heavier.  As 
France's  main  hope  of  eventually  being  able  to 
support  herself  resides  in  expanding  her  basic 
economy  through  completion  of  her  reconstruc- 
tion and  development  program,  the  pressure  is 
therefore  increasingly  concentrated  on  the  reduc- 
tion of  her  military  expenditures.  Here  the  choice 
is  between  reducing  in  Indochina  or  in  Europe. 

As  the  average  Frenchman  places  the  security 
of  the  mother  country  first,  all  these  pressures  are 


gradually  being  concentrated  on  the  Indochina 
part  of  the  budget,  and  in  this  connection  I  might 
briefly  mention  that,  notwithstanding  the  very 
large  amount  of  aid  which  we  gave  to  France  last 
year,  this  did  not  amount  to  half  of  her  total 
budgetary  outlays  for  the  Indochina  war. 

I  mentioned  earlier  that  France  was  also  over- 
extended demographically  and  will  only  mention 
one  example.  At  the  present  time  about  30  per- 
cent of  her  officers  are  in  Indochina  or  on  rotation 
to  and  from  there,  as  are  40  percent  of  her  career 
noncommissioned  officers. 

As  a  result  of  what  I  have  outlined  above,  an 
inferiority  complex  definitely  exists  in  France 
with  respect  to  Germany.  Germany,  in  addition 
to  being  the  hard-working  dynamic  and  demo- 
graphically powerful  country  that  she  is,  has  no 
extra  European  commitments.  Consequently  in 
regard  to  ratification  of  the  European  Defense 
Community  the  French  fear  that  with  France's 
energies  divided  between  Europe  and  the  Far 
East,  Germany  will  inevitably  rise  to  the  domi- 
nating position  in  the  Edc. 

Italy  and  National  Elections 

In  a  summary,  however  brief,  dealing  with 
Western  Europe,  it  is  impossible  to  overlook  the 
Italian  national  elections.  These  are  the  first  to 
be  held  in  a  country  with  a  large  Communist  party 
since  the  death  of  Stalin  and  since  the  stepped-up 
divisive  efforts  of  the  new  Soviet  Government. 

The  problem  is  not  whether  the  Italian  Com- 
munist Party  and  the  Nenni  Socialists  will  obtain 
a  majority.  That  fortunately  can  be  excluded. 
The  problem  is  different.  The  Italian  parlia- 
ment has  adopted  a  law  giving  65  percent  of  the 
seats  to  the  party  or  to  the  several  parties  linked 
together — that  is  presenting  a  joint  common 
ticket — obtaining  50.1  percent  of  the  total  votes 
cast. 

So  that  the  Italian  democracy  can  continue  to 
function  in  an  orderly  fashion,  the  four  parties 
of  the  center  coalition — Christian  Democrats, 
Republicans,  Liberals,  and  Independent  Social- 
ists— must  achieve  the  fateful  percentage  of  50.1. 

The  danger  is  that  they  may  not  for  the  follow- 
ing reasons : 

1.  The  Communist  Party,  and  especially  the 
Nenni  Socialists,  which  pretend  to  be  independent, 
may  well  increase  their  voting  strength. 

2.  The  Msi,  or  Neo-Fascists,  may  gain  some- 
what. 

3.  But  more  dangerous  than  the  above,  many 
Italians  with  sentimental  attachment  to  the  House 
of  Savoy  who  voted  Christian  Democratic  in  a 
reflex  of  self-preservation  in  1948,  when  Italy 
seemed  to  be  on  the  verge  of  going  Communist, 
may  give  in  to  their  sentimental  impulse  and  vote 
Monarchist  now  that  the  Communist  danger 
seems  to  be  receding. 


776 


Deparlment  of  State  Bvlletin 


What  will  happen  if  the  center  list  does  not 
obtain  50.1  percent  of  the  total? 

At  best  a  situation  in  which  government  coali- 
tions will  have  to  depend  on  the  alliance  of  parties 
which  are  basically  antagonistic.  Governments 
would  be  short-lived,  of  the  French  variety,  but 
more  brittle  and  ineffective  as  the  additional  in- 
crement needed  to  make  up  a  majority  will  be 
even  more  foreign  and  more  basically  opposed  than 
is  the  case  in  France.  Thus  a  weakened  Italy 
would  be  a  basic  source  of  weakness  for  the  entire 
Mediterranean  flank  of  the  Western  alliance. 
Indeed  much  has  been  said  recently  about  the  in- 
creasing cooperation  between  Greece,  Turkey,  and 
Yugoslavia.  Little,  however,  has  been  said  about 
Italy,  which  backs  up  this  line.  If  the  worst  ever 
came  to  the  worst  and  war  should  break  out,  Italy 
would  be  not  only  the  base  for  logistic  support  of 
a  large  part  of  the  Balkan  area,  but  would  also 
be  the  base  for  air  support.  Just  as  Germany 
could  not  hold  back  a  Communist  attack  without 
the  backstopping  support  of  France  and  other 
Western  European  nations,  the  defense  of  South- 
eastern Europe  would  be  virtually  impossible 
without  maximum  Italian  cooperation  and 
strength. 

...  I  will  be  brief  in  my  conclusion.  Let  me 
stress  that  this  conclusion  is  also  quite  personal. 

Danger  Inherent  in  Present  Situation 

I  am  concerned  about  the  coincidental  and 
cumulative  effects  of  certain  developments  at  this 
particular  moment.  I  refer  to  the  fact  that  at 
the  very  time  when  the  impact  of  the  notorious 
Soviet  "peace  offensive"  is  beginning  to  be  felt  on 
the  Continent,  the  British  Government  has  an- 
nounced its  new  budget  with  tax  decreases,  and 
we  are  publicly  stressing  the  stretched-out  char- 
acter of  our  own  defense  effort. 

Now  the  U.K.  budget  is  based  on  a  fine  plan: 
one  which  by  offering  more  initiative  to  the  aver- 
age Britisher  should  quickly  result  in  a  larger 
economic  base  to  be  taxed  and,  therefore,  produce 
a  larger  tax  yield. 

Likewise  in  our  case  it  is  essential,  in  view  of 
the  nature  of  the  threat  which  we  face,  that  we  so 
adjust  our  affairs  that  our  house  will  be  in  good 
order,  in  an  order  acceptable  to  the  great  majority 
of  the  American  people,  to  enable  us  to  maintain 
our  effort  over  perhaps  many  years. 

However  the  fact  remains  that  these  simultane- 
ous developments  could  quite  erroneously  be  inter- 
preted on  the  Continent  of  Europe  as  proof  posi- 
tive that  the  United  States  and  the  United 
Kingdom,  regardless  of  their  public  pronounce- 
ments to  the  contrary,  consider  that  the  Soviet 
threat  has  appreciably  lessened.  This  could  set 
in  motion  a  train  of  events  which  could  well  dis- 
arm the  Continent  spiritually  as  well  as  materially. 

I  believe  Secretary  Dulles  stated  this  problem 
exceedingly  well  when  he  presented  the  Mutual 


Security  Program  to  the  Congress  and  urged  that 
the  Congress  make  no  reductions  in  foreign  aid 
beyond  those  already  made  by  the  administration.* 
He  pointed  out  that  our  allies  have  accepted  our 
reduction  in  foreign  aid  in  good  spirit,  as  a  neces- 
sary part  of  a  common  program  whereby  we  will 
all  try  to  bring  our  security  commitments  into 
line  with  economic  health.  But  he  went  on  to 
say  this : 

If  we  do  not  do  all  that  is  possible  within  the  limits 
of  our  economic  health,  then  our  purposes  will  be  misin- 
terpreted and  our  allies  will  feel  that  their  fragile  econ- 
omies are  being  subjected  to  multiple  blows  which  are 
more  than  they  can  sustain. 

He  added  that  a  further  reduction  in  our  com- 
mitments might  involve  risks  greater  than  are 
acceptable  at  the  present  time. 

Please  do  not  think  that  I  consider  war  unavoid- 
able.   I  do  not  now  and  never  have. 

But  I  do  consider  that  our  security  is  based  on 
a  strength  of  the  free  world  adequate  to  make 
the  other  side  think  twice  before  committing  an 
act  of  aggression  which  might  be  a  casus  belli. 

Therefore  I  am  convinced  that  we  must  seek 
to  maintain  that  most  difficult  balance  and  equi- 
librium between  defense  and  well-being — in  a 
sense  we  should  strive  to  give  concurrent  priorities 
to  these  naturally  contradictory  facts.  We  must 
preserve  solvency  and  standards  of  living  in  the 
free  world  which  will  protect  that  which  we  are 
determined  to  defend.  Also  we  must  accept  the 
heavy  burden  to  maintain  the  military  strength 
needed  to  protect  from  aggression  this  free  way 
of  life  of  ours  which  we  enjoy  today  and  which  is 
the  birthright  of  our  children. 


MSA  Allotment  to  Netherlands 
for  Productivity  Agreement 

The  Netherlands  has  become  the  third  European 
country  to  launch  a  stepped-up  producti\  ity  drive 
under  the  terms  of  the  "free-enterprise"  amend- 
ments to  the  Mutual  Security  Act,  the  Mutual 
Security  Agency  (Msa)  announced  on  May  7  in 
making  the  first  allotment  of  funds  under  its  new 
agreement  with  the  Dutch. 

It  is  planned  that  the  present  allotment  of 
$1,500,000  is  to  be  followed  before  July  1  by 
another  $1,500,000  allotment  of  defense-support 
funds,  which  will  be  used  to  provide  commodities 
needed  by  the  Netherlands  in  its  defense  buildup. 

The  Dutch  Government  is  depositing  an  equiv- 
alent amount  of  guilders  in  a  special  counterpart 
fund  to  finance  the  new  drive. 

Similar  agreements  have  been  concluded  by  Msa 
with  the  United  Kingdom  and  the  Federal  Re- 
public of  Germany  under  terms  of  the  "free- 
enterprise"  legislation,  and  others  are  being  nego- 

'  Bulletin  of  May  25,  1953,  p.  736. 


June   7,   1953 


777 


tiated.  These  amendments  to  the  Mutual  Security 
Act  direct  Msa  to  negotiate  productivity  agi-ee- 
ments  for  the  purpose  of  "stimulating  free  enter- 
prise and  the  expansion  of  the  economies  of  those 
countries." 

To  enable  Msa  to  carry  on  these  programs,  Con- 
gress stipulated  that  $100,000,000  of  Msa  funds 
should  be  used  to  develop  an  equivalent  amount  of 
European  currencies  to  finance  a  European-wide 
productivity  program. 

Negotiations  for  the  Dutch  program,  which  will 
expand  and  strengthen  the  effort  already  being 
made  under  the  Msa  technical-assistance  program 
to  increase  productivity,  have  been  under  way 
since  July  1952.  When  the  Dutch  announced  last 
January  that  they  would  not  require  Msa  defense- 
support  assistance  during  the  1953  fiscal  year,^  they 
indicated  their  continued  interest  in  participating 
in  technical-assistance  programs,  and  it  was  agreed 
that  the  productivity  program  would  not  be 
affected  as  a  result  of  the  action. 

The  D\itch  progi-am  proposes  to  seek  immediate 
increases  in  productivity  in  the  metal,  building 
trade,  and  clothing  industries  and  the  introduction 
of  new  techniques  of  distributing  consumer  goods. 
Guilder  grants  are  to  be  made  to  the  metal  in- 
dustry, including  foundries,  to  remedy  low  pro- 
ductivity in  small  firms.  This  assistance  is  de- 
signed to  enable  these  firms  to  qualify  for  sub- 
contracts from  larger  companies  and  permit  an 
increase  in  the  production  capacity  of  the  industry. 
The  metal  industry  figures  largely  in  the  defense- 
production  program  of  the  Netherlands. 

An  expanded  building  program  to  replace  war- 
destroyed  factory  facilities  and  housing  for 
workers  is  also  important  to  the  Dutch  economy 
and  defense  effort.  Grants  to  the  building  trade 
will  be  specifically  designed  to  help  it  incorporate 
new  techniques  in  its  activities  and  speed  the 
country's  construction  program. 

Previous  studies  that  have  been  made  under  the 
MsA  technical-assistance  program  have  pointed 
to  substantial  gains  that  can  be  made  in  meeting 
consumer  demand  for  clothing  provided  stand- 
ardization of  current  output  can  be  achieved.  To 
accomplish  this,  substantial  grants  are  planned 
for  the  clothing  industry. 

To  assist  in  the  effective  distribution  and  sale 
of  the  expanded  production,  grants  will  be  utilized 
in  improving  retail  marketing  practices. 

In  addition  to  the  grant  program,  productivity 
funds  will  also  be  used  as  loans  to  medium  and 
small  firms  in  these  three  vital  areas  to  assist  them 
in  modernization  of  plant  design  and  equipment 
layout. 

Paralleling  this  program,  which  has  been  de- 
veloped jointly  by  ]\Isa  and  appropriate  ministries 
of  the  Netherlands  Government,  is  a  similar  pro- 
ductivity program  of  the  Dutch  themselves.  This 
will  be  carried  on  entirely  by  Dutch  resources  and 
\vill  seek  similar  aims  through  the  intensive  use 

'  Bulletin  of  Feb.  9,  1953,  p.  217. 


of  technical-assistance  projects,  including  tech- 
nical-information programs,  and  a  Dutch  loan 
fund  to  be  used  for  the  benefit  of  small  and  medium 
private  industries.  Both  programs  have  been  de- 
veloped with  the  full  participation  and  concur- 
rence of  Dutch  private  industries,  labor,  and  con- 
sumers groups. 


Suspension  of  MSA  Aid  to  Iceland 

The  Mutual  Security  Agency  announced  on 
May  16  that  at  the  proposal  of  the  Icelandic  Gov- 
ernment, American  defense  support  aid  to  Iceland 
is  being  suspended.  A  similar  announcement  is 
being  made  in  Keykjavik  by  Icelandic  Minister  of 
Commerce  Bjorn  Olafsson. 

This  suspension  of  aid  follows  a  final  allotment 
to  Iceland  of  $3,250,000,  which  will  be  used  to  help 
Iceland  settle  its  intra-European  payments  posi- 
tion through  the  operations  of  the  European  Pay- 
ments Union  (Epu).  The  final  allotment,  made 
May  13,  makes  a  total  of  $5,450,000  in  defense  sup- 
port funds  for  that  country  in  the  1953  fiscal  year 
and  a  total  of  a  little  more  than  $37,000,000  in 
defense  support  and  economic  aid  for  Iceland  since 
the  initiation  of  the  Marshall  plan,  Msa's  prede- 
cessor, in  April  1948. 

In  proposing  that  Msa  defense  support  aid  be 
suspended,  Icelandic  Government  officials  pointed 
out  that  the  American  aid  in  the  past  2  years  has 
been  entirely  related  in  one  form  or  another  to  the 
carrying  out  of  three  projects  basic  to  the  Icelandic 
economy.  These  are  construction  of  two  hydro- 
electric plants  and  one  fertilizer  plant.  All  three 
are  scheduled  to  be  completed  this  summer. 

MsA  said  that  the  suspension  of  defense  support 
aid  does  not  affect  Iceland's  participation  in  the 
Msa  productivity  and  technical  assistance  pro- 
gram. It  also  does  not  affect  Iceland's  membership 
in  Nato,  the  Organization  for  European  Economic 
Cooperation  (Oeec),  and  the  Council  of  Europe. 

Since  Iceland  has  no  military  establishment,  it 
has  not  received  any  direct  military  aid  under  the 
Mutual  Security  Program.  It  is,  however,  the 
site  of  a  U.  S.  air  base. 


Three-Power  Meeting  To  Be  Held 


I 


Statement  by  the  President 

White  House  press  release  dated  May  21 

The  Governments  of  the  United  States,  Great 
Britain,  and  France  have  been  in  consultation 
with  the  view  of  holding  an  informal  high-level 
meeting.  We  have  agreed  that  such  a  meeting 
is  desirable  at  a  date  convenient  to  all  of  us.  A 
primary  purpose  will  be  further  to  develop  com- 
mon viewpoints  with  these  friends  on  the  many 
problems  that  must  be  solved  cooperatively  so 
that  the  cause  of  world  peace  may  be  advanced. 


I 


778 


Department   of  State   Bulletin 


An  Expression  of  Friendship 
for  tiie  People  of  India 

Remarks  by  Secretary  Dulles  ^ 

Press  release  282  dated  May  22 

I  greatly  appreciate  the  courtesy  of  the  Govern- 
ment of  India  in  giving  me  this  opportunity  to 
speak  directly  to  those  people  of  India  who  are 
listening  to  this  broadcast.  I  speak  to  you  as  the 
Cabinet  Minister  who,  under  President  Eisen- 
hower, is  responsible  for  foreign  policy.  It  has 
fallen  to  my  lot  to  be  the  first  Secretary  of  State 
of  the  United  States  ever  to  come  to  India  during 
the  160  years  of  our  national  existence.  That  is 
something  of  which  I  am  proud. 

The  President  has  asked  me  to  come  here  with 
Mr.  Stassen,  Director  of  our  Mutual  Security 
Agency,  in  order  to  carry  his  greetings  to  you,  to 
express  the  friendship  and  interest  which  we  feel 
for  the  people  of  India,  and  to  learn  from  you. 
Our  conference  with  Prime  Minister  Nehru,  with 
your  planning  commission,  and  with  other  officials, 
and  our  visits  to  some  of  your  national  monuments, 
all  help  us  to  better  undei-stand  the  spirit  of  India. 
This  knowledge  will  in  turn  help  the  United  States 
to  make  a  better  foreign  policy.     .  .  . 

The  United  States  feels  that  it  carries  a  very 
heavy  burden  and  responsibility  in  world  affairs. 
We  did  not  seek  that  responsibility  and  indeed 
many  Americans  regi'et  we  have  it.  But  since  we 
do  have  it,  we  want  to  act  wisely.  That  means  we 
should  sit  down  with  our  friends  and  discuss  com- 
mon problems  and  interests  so  that  we  may  know 
at  firsthand  the  views  of  other  countries  with 
whom  we  share  the  common  objective  of  assuring 
peace  and  striving  constantly  for  improvement  in 
the  welfare  of  all  mankind. 

Our  own  Declaration  of  Independence  declared 
that  we  owe  decent  respect  for  the  opinion  of  man- 
kind. We  have  sought  and  will  continue  to  seek 
opinions  of  other  nations,  and  we  will  take  these 
opinions  into  account  in  making  our  own  policies. 

May  I  remind  you  that  when  the  U.N.  Assembly 
was  discussing  Korea  last  year,  the  United  States 
voted  for  the  Indian  resolution  although  this  re- 
quired us  to  change  our  own  original  position.  It 
was  other  countries,  not  the  United  States,  which 
rejected  that  resolution  and  thereby  created  a  new 
situation. 

We  are  eager  for  peace.  It  is  true  that  the 
United  States  has  fought  three  times  in  this  cen- 
tury. We  fought  in  World  War  I,  we  fought  in 
World  War  II,  and  we  are  fighting  today  in  Korea 
alongside  South  Korean  and  other  U.N.  forces. 
But  we  can  hardly  be  accused  of  starting  either 
the  First  World  War  or  the  Second  World  War, 
for  both  these  wars  began  over  2  years  before  we 
came  in.     When  we  did  come  in,  we  were  almost 


'  Made  over  the  All-India  Radio  at  New  Delhi  on  May  22. 


wholly  unarmed  and  it  took  another  year  for  us 
to  be  ready  to  fight  effectively.  We  came  into 
those  wars  only  because  it  seemed  that  if  we  did 
not,  militaristic  dictators  would  crush  free  peoples. 

We  fight  in  Korea  in  response  to  a  June  25, 1950 
decision  by  the  IT.N.  Security  Council — a  decision 
in  which  India  joined.  That  decision  was  based 
upon  a  report  by  the  U.N.  Commission  in  Korea, 
of  which  India  was  a  member,  to  the  effect  that 
there  was  military  aggression  against  the  Republic 
of  Korea  which  might  endanger  the  maintenance 
of  international  peace  and  security. 

After  the  end  of  the  Second  World  War,  the 
United  States  quickly  disarmed  itself.  After  the 
Korean  aggression  we  rearmed,  but  although  we 
are  fortunate  to  be  endowed  with  great  material 
strength  our  military  establishment  today  by  no 
means  is  the  largest  in  the  world.  I  can  say  to  you 
that  the  American  people  are  passionately  devoted 
in  seeking  a  just  peace. 

Some  think  that  we  are  materialists.  It  is  true 
that  our  people  produce  a  high  standard  of  living 
and  that  it  is  talked  about  all  through  the  world. 
But  the  Americans  are  basically  idealists.  We 
are  not  ashamed  of  our  material  well-being,  but 
we  admire  and  respect  things  of  the  spirit.  We 
are  constantly  seeking  to  enrich  our  culture  by 
drawing  on  the  culture  of  others.  That  is  natural, 
perhaps,  because  we  ourselves  are  a  nation  of  immi- 
grants made  up  of  many  races,  colors,  and  creeds. 

We  read  literature  of  other  countries,  enjoy  their 
art,  and  listen  to  their  music.  Our  people  travel 
throughout  the  world  and  enjoy  works  of  beauty 
which  other  peoples  have  created.  Many  millions 
of  Americans  have  visited  your  wonderful  Taj 
Mahal  and  those  who  cannot  get  here  at  least  are 
familiar  with  it  through  photographs. 

Finally,  I  would  like  to  remind  you  that  those 
who  founded  our  Nation  nearly  two  centuries  ago 
did  it  in  the  hope  that  a  United  States  would  by 
its  conduct  and  example  promote  freedom  every- 
where. President  Lincoln  who  liberated  slaves 
declared  that  our  Declaration  of  Independence 
meant  liberty  not  only  for  the  people  in  our  coun- 
try but  "hope  for  the  world  and  for  all  future 
time."  "It  gave  promise,"  he  said,  "that  in  due 
course  weights  should  be  lifted  from  the  shoulders 
of  all  men."  That,  in  a  few  words,  has  been  and 
is  the  ideal  of  the  American  people. 

President  Eisenhower  expressed  the  same  ideal 
a  few  weeks  ago.  He  made  a  moving  appeal  to  all 
peoples  of  the  world  urging  concrete  steps  to  re- 
store peace  and  justice  in  the  world  and  to  relieve 
mankind  from  the  terrible  burden  of  armament. 
He  pledged  that  if  there  were  deeds  to  restore  in- 
ternational trust,  that  the  United  States  would  join 
with  others  to  help  all  peoples  of  the  world  to  live 
a  better  life.  That  appeal  has  received  tremen- 
dous response  throughout  the  world.  That  is 
because  it  was  based  on  principles  close  to  the 
hearts  of  all  free  men.     .  .  . 


June   1.    1953 


779 


The  Value  of  Technical  Cooperation  In  Latin  America 

by  John  M.  Cabot 

Assistant  Secretary  for  Inter-American  Affairs ' 


There  is  today  before  Congress  a  series  of  bills 
designed  to  grant  increased  protection  for  Ameri- 
can producers  of  oil,  lead,  zinc,  fish,  and  other 
products  which  Latin  America  exports  to  us.  No 
one  wants  to  see  legitimate  American  industries 
prejudiced  and  workmen  thrown  out  of  work. 
From  a  narrow  viewpoint  we  must  remember  that 
the  question  is  not  whether  we  can  or  cannot  pre- 
vent depression  in  the  oil,  lead,  zinc,  and  fishing 
industries.  Clearly  we  can.  The  question  is  how 
can  we  cause  the  least  possible  unemployment  and 
injury  to  our  production  as  a  whole.  To  save  the 
employment  of  tens  by  special  favors,  at  the  ex- 
pense of  throwing  hundreds  out  of  work — to  pro- 
tect millions  of  invested  capital  at  the  expense  of 
tens  of  millions —  is  not  wisdom.  It  is  the  road  to 
universal  misery — closed  factories,  breadlines, 
despair  the  world  over.  Let  us  not  choose  that 
road. 

Let  us  not  indeed  be  so  selfish  as  to  think  of  the 
effects  of  exaggerated  protection  from  the  domes- 
tic viewpoint  only.  Our  Latin  friends  produce 
many  items  which  we  buy  from  them  in  enormous 
quantities — coffee,  sugar,  copper,  tin,  lead,  zinc, 
oil,  bananas,  wool,  hides,  etc.  Their  very  subsis- 
tence depends  on  their  exports  of  those  commodi- 
ties. If  we  do  not  buy  what  they  are  accustomed 
to  produce,  they  will  certainly  have  to  give  up 
much  of  what  they  now  have.  Not  only  will  our 
normal  exports  to  them  be  choked  off,  we  shall  sub- 
stitute for  them  liberal  exports  of  resentment  and 
despair.  That  is  not  the  road  to  cooperation, 
friendship,  pan-Americanism.  Even  those  who 
care  nothing  for  the  unfriendliness  they  will  create 
in  our  sister  Republics  by  choking  off  imports 
from  those  countries  might  do  well  to  think  of  the 
help  that  would  thereby  be  given  to  communism 
in  neighboring  lands.  How  unctuously  the  Com- 
munists would  roll  over  their  tongues  this  further 


'  Excerpts  from  an  address  made  before  the  Board  of 
Directors  of  the  National  Foreign  Trade  Council,  Inc., 
at  New  York  on  May  15  (press  release  260  dated  May  14). 


evidence  of  the  inevitable  contradictions  of  capi- 
talism; and  how  easily  the  Latin  American 
worker,  who  has  lost  his  job  when  Uncle  Sam 
slammed  shut  the  door  of  international  commerce, 
would  accept  this  slick  argument.  Most  of  us  will 
want,  however,  to  think  of  good  relations  with  our 
sister  Republics  as  well  as  our  national  security. 

There  will  be  times  when  we  shall  liave  to  pro- 
tect domestic  industries  against  unfair  competi- 
tion. We  have  recently  been  compelled,  for 
example,  to  our  great  regret  to  levy  a  counter- 
vailing duty  on  Uruguayan  wool  tops.  Recogniz- 
ing the  resentment  that  such  decisions  will 
inevitably  cause,  I  nevertheless  hope  that  our 
friends  will  appreciate  that  we  did  only  what 
our  law  with  good  reason  required. 

On  the  other  hand,  I  think  it  is  vital  for  us  in 
the  United  States  to  realize  that  we  should  not 
interfere  with  legitimate  imports  from  other 
countries  which  have  built  up  their  trade  over  the 
years,  merely  because  conditions  in  the  domestic 
industry  are  not  quite  as  good  as  they  have  been. 
In  particular,  I  trust  we  are  not  prepared  to  repu- 
diate binding  trade  agreements  concluded  under 
the  authority  of  a  law  passed  by  Congress  in  order 
to  curtail  oil,  lead,  and  zinc  exports  from  our 
sister  Republics.  Surely  that  is  not  the  proper 
course  to  follow. 

Our  economic  well-being,  the  rising  standards 
of  living  in  our  sister  Republics  which  will  con- 
tribute to  that  well-being,  the  supply  of  materials 
vital  to  us  in  an  emergency,  and  above  all  that 
continental  solidarity  which  contributes  so  vitally 
to  our  national  security,  all  depend  upon  the  de- 
velopment of  normal  trade  with  our  sister  Re-  , 
publics.  Let  us  not  permit  any  individual  interest  1 
to  rise  above  our  clear  national  interests. 

To  this  may  I  add  a  word  for  our  Latin  friends. 
Our  economic  measures  are  not  always  wise  and 
farseeing,  nor  are  all  of  our  fellow  citizens  angels 
with  golden  harps  and  wings.  I  earnestly  hope, 
nevertheless,  that  our  friends  to  the  south  will 
not  blame  us  for  the  results  of  their  own  economic 


780 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


mistakes.  There  has  been  too  strong  a  tendency 
among  them  to  try  to  raise  living  standards  by 
an  assortment  of  panaceas,  such  as  currency  and 
credit  inflation,  heavy  export  taxes,  multiple  ex- 
change rates,  subsidies,  nationalizations,  controls, 
,  etc.  Basically  speaking,  there  is  only  one  way  that 
the  living  standard  can  be  raised  and  that  is  to 
produce  more.  It  is  impossible  to  divide  among 
consumers  what  is  not  produced.  It  is  indeed  im- 
portant that  what  is  produced  should  be  divided 
lairly.  but  it  has  to  be  produced  first.  Prosperity 
depends  not  upon  high  prices,  which  choke  off 
demand,  but  rather  upon  a  high  volume  of  produc- 
tion in  proportion  to  the  human  labor  involved. 
Production  can  be  increased  in  many  ways — in 
agriculture,  for  example,  by  better  seed,  plowing, 
fertilizers,  techniques  in  general.  But  in  this 
modern  world  the  greatest  aid  to  increased  pro- 
duction is  increased  capital.  The  worker  in  the 
United  States  is  intelligent  and  hardworking,  but 
so  are  many  others  in  this  world ;  the  reason  that 
our  worker  enjoys  the  highest  living  standards 
in  the  world  is  quite  simply  because  he  has  vastly 
the  greatest  store  of  capital  tools  to  help  him 
produce.  That  is  why  he  produces  more  and  has 
more. 


Need  for  Foreign  Capital 

I  earnestly  hope  that  our  sister  Republics  will 
transform  their  great  natural  resources,  as  we 
have,  into  the  capital  equipment  whicli  will  mean 
for  them  progressively  higher  standards  of  living. 
We  look  forward  with  them  to  the  day  when  their 
domestic  capital  can  cover  domestic  needs.  B'.it 
as  we  did,  they  will  need  foreign  capital  to  co- 
operate in  their  development.  In  this  connection, 
it  is  vital  to  remember  that  we  did  not  permit 
foreign  capital  to  plunder  our  national  resources 
but  we  also  treated  foreign  capital  fairly.  We  did 
not  kill  the  goose  that  laid  the  golden  eggs. 

It  is  rather  discouraging  to  receive  letters  read- 
ing like  this : 

Certain  foreign  capital  acts  as  a  retarding  force  in  these 
countries.  It  has  established  such  heartless  and  absolute 
monopolies  that  it  has  replaced  the  son  of  the  country  in 
every  activity — agricultural,  commercial,  industrial.  It 
has  oppressed  him,  denying  him  the  means  of  satisfying 
his  necessities,  and  using  its  influence  to  have  the  State 
do  the  same.  It  intervenes  in  the  internal  politics  of  the 
country.  It  secures  unwarranted  concessions  and  tax 
exemptions,  bribes  officials,  etc. 

These  things  are  said  of  companies  which  have 
poured  millions  of  capital  into  the  jungle  and  the 
desert  and  made  them  into  great  producers  of 
wealth;  that  pay  their  workers  higher  wages  and 
provide  better  housing,  working  conditions,  hus- 
pitals,  schools,  etc.,  than  can  be  found  anywhere 
else  in  the  respective  countries;  that  have  made 
vital  contributions,  without  thought  of  reward,  to 
various  phases  of  the  national  life;  and  that  in 
several  instances  have  regularly  furnished  a  rery 
substantial  part  of  the  exports  of  the  countries, 


without  which  the  economies  of  these  countries 
would  be  gravely  affected. 

We  can  only  deplore  the  fact  that  so  many 
sincere  people  should  have  swallowed  such  false 
and  misguided  propaganda.  That  the  Commu- 
nists are  pressing  it  is  only  to  be  expected;  that 
people  who  love  their  countries  should  espouse 
views  which  can  only  injure  their  countries  is 
difficult  to  understand.  If  foreign  capital  is 
guilty  of  abuses,  and  there  are  undeniably  cases 
where  it  has  been,  measures  can  be  taken  to  correct 
them  which  will  not  ruin  legitimate  foreign  in- 
vestors and  paralyze  development.  But  today  the 
picture  is  all  too  often  one  of  foreign  capital  which 
is  being  unreasonably  harassed.  That  is  tough 
on  the  foreign  capital  involved.  It  is  much 
tougher  on  the  country  where  it  is  invested,  for 
that  country  is  thereby  injuring  the  well-being  of 
its  people  and  its  national  development  while  the 
Kremlin  laughs. 

American  capital  has  a  great  responsibility  to 
demonstrate  to  the  people  of  the  country  in  which 
it  is  invested  the  tangible  benefits  it  is  bringing 
to  them.  The  governments  and  the  thinking 
people  in  those  countries  have  an  equal  responsi- 
bility to  their  own  countries  to  convince  their 
countrymen  of  the  advantages  which  accrue  to  the 
national  development  through  fair  treatment  of 
foreign  capital. 

Amid  all  these  difficulties  and  perplexities,  I 
have  nevertheless  a  heartening  message  for  you. 
I  have  just  returned  from  visits  to  11  of  our  sister 
Republics  in  the  Caribbean  area.  I  went  doubting 
that  the  tide  had  turned  in  the  battle  against 
hunger,  disease,  and  consequent  communism  in 
that  area.  I  return  convinced  that  it  has.  There 
are  some  bad  spots  in  the  generally  bright  picture; 
the  battle  is  far  from  over  and  I  must  solemnly 
warn  you  that  complacency  on  our  part  might 
easily  be  fatal.  But  the  trend  in  this  area  is 
generally  in  the  right  direction  and  with  stead- 
fastness and  wisdom  it  will  continue  so. 

Results  of  U.  S.  Technical  Cooperation 

I  wish  in  particular  that  you  might  have  been 
with  me  to  see  and  hear  as  I  did  what  our  tech- 
nical cooperation  is  meaning  to  them  in  improved 
living  standards.  Wlien  this  work  was  originally 
started  during  the  war  by  Nelson  Rockefeller  and 
his  organization,  I  must  confess  to  misgivings;  our 
Latin  friends  are  very  sensitive  and  it  seemed  to 
me  that  they  might  resent  our  offers  of  coopera- 
tion in  such  fields  as  education  and  public  health. 
In  self-defense  be  it  said  that  from  time  to  time 
there  has  been  enough  of  that  to  show  that  mis- 
givings were  not  altogether  unfounded;  but  they 
have  been  swept  away  by  the  striking  successes 
achieved  by  the  cooperative  services  we  have 
backed.  I  am  not  telling  you  what  our  people 
told  me;  I  am  telling  you  what  the  officials  of  the 
countries  I  visited  said.     The  closer  they  were 


June   7,   1953 


781 


to  the  work  the  more  appreciative  they  tended  to 
be. 

The  usual  pattern  is  for  the  two  governments 
to  set  up  a  cooperative  service,  say  in  health  or 
agriculture.  At  the  beginning  the  United  States 
furnished  the  bulk  of  the  project  funds  to  pay  the 
needed  American  technicians,  materials,  and 
training  grants;  the  other  government  furnished 
the  money  needed  for  local  expenses,  trainees, 
facilities,  etc.  The  purpose  is  for  the  U.S.  tech- 
nicians to  work  themselves  gradually  out  of  their 
job  as  the  other  government  develops  know-how, 
organization,  trained  personnel,  facilities,  etc. 
Today  on  an  average  the  other  government;  fur- 
nishes almost  %  of  the  technical-assistance  funds 
and  the  vast  bulk  of  the  personnel.  Let  me  say 
that  this  is  by  no  means  a  one-way  street ;  some  of 
our  technicians  working  in  the  various  countries 
with  their  local  colleagues  have  fathered  develop- 
ments of  value  to  all  of  us.  Interestingly,  one  of 
the  perpetual  troubles  of  the  cooperative  projects 
is  the  way  in  which  their  trained  personnel  get 
swiped,  particularly  by  other  agencias  of  the  local 
government.  Not  that  we  really  object  to  this; 
on  the  contrary,  we  are  glad  to  see  the  training 
they  have  been  given  put  to  good  use  by  the  other 
country. 

The  two  fields  in  which  our  technical  coopera- 
tion has  been  particularly  effective  are  those  of 
health  and  agriculture.  In  the  former,  great 
progress  has  been  made  in  eliminating  yaws  and 
malaria,  in  providing  pure  water  and  in  setting 
up  clinics  and  public  nursing.  Scarcely  a  house 
you  pass  in  Central  America  does  not  have  the 
Dot  sign  on  it  to  show  when  it  was  last  sprayed. 
In  these  countries  it  is  an  old  story  for  the  Stars 
and  Stripes  to  fly  beside  the  national  flag  as  pure 
water  systems  are  inaugurated  in  town  after  town 
and  the  women  find  that  they  no  longer  have  to 
carry  jugs  of  contaminated  water  for  long  dis- 
tances. Today  the  people  know  that  their  gov- 
ernments are  doing  something  for  them  and  they 
know  that  Uncle  Sam  is  helping. 

The  story  in  the  agricultural  field  is  much  the 
same.  The  agricultural  services  have  introduced 
better  seed,  plowing,  terracing,  erosion  control 
(vital  in  Central  America),  and  irrigation,  better 
fertilizers,  better  methods  generally.  At  first  I 
listened  to  these  stories  skeptically ;  they  were  all 
very  fine,  but  were  these  services  really  getting 
to  the  small  farmer,  were  they  being  reflected  in 
the  national  economy?  My  skepticism  was  un- 
warranted. In  El  Salvador,  for  example,  the  old 
native  rice  has  been  largely  supplanted  by  a  new 
rice  developed  by  the  cooperative  service  which 
gives  an  enormously  increased  yield.  In  a  coun- 
try as  crowded  as  El  Salvador  this  is  vital.  In 
Costa  Rica  instead  of  importing  corn,  sugar, 
beans,  and  rice  as  they  used  to  they  now  export 
them— rice  to  Japan,  they  proudly  told  me. 

Some  of  you  will  doubtless  think,  well,  that  is 


all  very  lovely  but  it  must  cost  us  a  pretty  penny 
and  what  do  we  get  out  of  it  ? 

The  total  cost  to  us  of  all  our  technical  coopera- 
tion with  19  American  Republics,  which  includes 
650  training  grants,  will  amount  this  fiscal  year 
to  $22,300,000.  If  we  must  regard  this  from  a 
dollars  and  cents  point  of  view,  I  understand  that 
it  has  been  a  good  investment  simply  from  the 
increased  sales  of  i\jnerican  tractors,  farm  ma- 
chinery, fertilizers,  medicines,  sanitary  supplies, 
etc.,  it  has  stimulated,  quite  apart  from  any  in- 
direct commercial  effects. 

But  personally  I  deplore  any  such  argument. 
It  was  not  the  reason  we  undertook  the  program 
and  it  is  to  my  mind  but  a  minor  part  of  the  case 
for  continuing  it.  The  major  advantages  of  the 
program  from  our  viewpoint  are  not  material. 
This  is  pan-Americanism  in  action.  This  is  a 
demonstration  that  we  do  care  for  their  well-being, 
that  we  do  value  their  friendship,  that  we  want 
them  to  rise  in  splendor  in  the  constellation  of 
nations.  It  shows  the  ignorant  peon  that  Com- 
munist propaganda  is  clap-trap  and  that  democ- 
racy is  the  path  of  progress  for  the  great  masses 
of  humanity. 

At  this  point  let  me  reiterate  my  introductory 
warning :  a  splendid  start  has  been  made  in  wiping 
out  miseries  and  raising  living  standards  through 
our  technical  cooperation,  but  it  is  only  a  start. 
An  enormous  task  still  lies  before  us.  As  we  turn 
over  some  services  to  other  governments,  there 
are  important  new  fields  which  can  and  must  be 
opened.  I  am  not  pleading  for  large  increases  in 
appropriations ;  the  very  men  working  in  the  field 
say  that  a  large  sudden  increase  in  available  fimds 
would  be  disastrous,  because  the  success  of  their 
operations  has  depended  on  their  being  small  and 
compact.  To  my  mind  the  important  thing  is  to 
give  our  technical-cooperation  program  continu- 
ity. If  we  want  the  friendship  of  our  sister  Re- 
publics, we  must  loyally  cooperate  with  them  in 
their  development  on  a  continuing  basis. 

And  another  point.  We  are  often  criticized  for 
recognizing  governments  that  have  come  to  power 
by  violence  and  remain  in  power  by  oppression. 
I  shall  not  at  this  time  refute  these  arguments  at 
length ;  suffice  it  to  say  that  democracy  cannot  be 
imposed  by  force,  but  must  be  built  painfully  from 
the  ground  up;  that  we  have  solemnly  pledged 
ourselves  not  to  intervene  in  the  internal  affairs 
of  any  other  American  Republic;  and  that  we 
have  found  that  interventions  of  one  sort  and  an- 
other, however  well  intentioned,  have  never  pro- 
duced democracy. 

I  think  that  if  there  is  anything  we  can  do  to 
help  democratic  forces  in  our  sister  Republics, 
our  technical  cooperation  is  it.  By  combating  il- 
literacy, by  improving  health,  by  giving  even  the 
poorest  something  more  than  the  bare  means  of 
subsistence,  by  interesting  everyone  in  civic  af- 
fairs, by  awakening  ])ride  in  national  progress, 
I  profoundly  believe  that  it  is  laying  solidly  a  few 


7C2 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


foundation  blocks  upon  which  a  sound  structure 
of  democracy  can  in  due  course  be  built.  And  we, 
IS  eldest  sister  in  the  American  family  of  nations, 
will  rejoice  if  our  cooperation  helps  our  sister 
Republics  to  attain  the  brilliant  destiny  which 
'must  surely  be  theirs. 


Monetary  Fund  Announcements 

j  The  International  Monetary  Fund  announced 
'on  May  11  the  establishment  of  the  initial  par 
value  for  the  Japanese  Yen  at  360  Yen  per  U.b. 

dollar.  .  J.      ij      J  • 

The  parities  for  the  Yen  in  terms  of  gold  and  m 
terms  of  the  U.S.  dollar  of  the  weight  and  fineness 
in  effect  on  July  1,  1944,  are  as  follows: 

I 

0.  00246853  grams  of  fine  gold  per  Ten ; 
12  600.  0  Yen  per  troy  ounce  of  fine  gold ; 

'  36o!  000  Yen  per  U.S.  dollar ; 

0.  277778      U.S.  cents  per  Yen. 


The  International  Monetary  Fund  has  concur- 
red in  a  proposal  by  the  Government  of  Bolivia  to 
establish  a  new  par  value  for  the  boliviano  and 
simplify  the  Bolivian  exchange  system.  The 
Fund  also  announces  a  purchase  of  U.S.  $2,500,000 
by  the  Bolivian  Government.  ,  ■  ,   . 

The  new  foreign-exchange  measures,  which  be- 
come effective  on  May  14,  were  proposed  as  part 
of  a  program  directed  toward  stabilization  of  the 
Bolivian  economy.  The  country  previously  had 
developed  a  complicated  restrictive  systeni  based 
on  simultaneous  use  of  quantitative  restrictions  on 
imports  and  payments,  and  multiple  currency 
practices.  Through  this  system  different  treat- 
ment was  given  to  various  mining  and  agricultural 
exports.  Essential  food  imports  were  maintained 
at  a  preferential  rate.  .   .  ^ 

The  new  par  value  established  for  Bolivia  s  cur- 
rency, previously  60  bolivianos  per  U.S.  dollar,  is 
190  bolivianos  per  U.S.  dollar.  In  terms  of  gold 
and  in  terms  of  the  U.S.  dollar  of  the  weight  and 
fineness  in  effect  on  July  1,  1944,  the  panties  for 
the  boliviano  are  as  follows : 

0.  00467722  grams  of  fine  gold  per  boliviano ; 
6, 650.  00  bolivianos  per  troy  ounce  of  fine  gold  ; 

190.  00  bolivianos  per  U.S.  dollar  ; 

0.  526316      U.S.  cents  per  boliviano. 

The  exchange  system  will  consist  of  an  official 
and  a  free  market.  The  official  market  will  be  for 
all  trade  transactions,  government  payments, 
registered  capital,  and  certain  specified  invisibles. 
All  present  exchange  taxes,  multiple  import  and 
export  rates,  retention  quotas,  compensation,  and 
divisas  propias  arrangements  are  eliminated.  An 
export  tax  equivalent  to  35  bolivianos  per  dollar 
will  be  levied  on  the  exports  of  the  government- 
owned  mining  corporation.  Ad  valorem  taxes  of 
50  and  100  percent  will  be  levied  on  less  and  non- 
June   T,   1953 


essential  imports.  A  legal  free  market  for  all 
remaining  items  will  be  established,  where  rates 
will  fluctuate. 

The  Fund  welcomes  the  substantial  simplifica- 
tion of  the  exchange  rate  structure  and  approves 
tlie  new  multiple  currency  practices  proposed  by 
Bolivia.  The  Fund  notes  that  quantitative  re- 
strictions will  still  be  maintained  on  international 
payments.  It  welcomes  the  efforts  being  made 
to  move  toward  monetary  stabilization  and  wishes 
to  emphasize  the  importance  of  firm  anti-inflation- 
ary measures  as  a  basis  for  further  progress  to- 
wards the  achievement  of  Bolivia's  international 
equilibrium.  The  Fund  will  follow  developments 
in  the  new  exchange  system  and  related  matters. 


Remedial  Works  for  Niagara  Fails 

Pre.ss  release  265  dated  May  15 

The  International  Joint  Commission  submitted 
on  May  12, 1953,  to  the  Governments  of  the  United 
States  and  Canada  its  report  and  recommenda- 
tions concerning  remedial  works  to  preserve  and 
enhance  the  scenic  beauty  of  Niagara  Falls  and 
Niagara  River.  The  report  and  recommendations 
were  submitted  in  response  to  a  reference  to  the 
Commission  by  the  two  Governments  on  October 
10, 1950,  in  accordance  with  article  II  of  the  treaty 
with  Canada  concerning  uses  of  the  waters  of  the 
Niagara  River  signed  on  February  27,  1950  (Tias 
2130;  lU.S.T.  694).^ 

Article  II  of  this  treaty  provides  that  the  Gov- 
ernments agree  to : 

.  .  complete  in  accordance  with  the  objectives  en- 
visaged in  the  final  report  submitted  to  the  United  States 
and  Canada  on  December  11,  1929,  by  the  special  Interna- 
tional Niagara  Board  (S.  Doc.  128,  71st  Cong.,  2d  sess.) 
the  remedial  works  which  are  necessary  to  enhance  the 
beauty  of  the  Falls  by  distributing  the  waters  so  as  to 
produce  an  unbroken  crestline  on  the  Falls. 

In  order  to  accomplish  this  result  this  article 
of  the  treaty  further  provides  that  the  Govern- 
ments : 

.  shall  request  the  International  Joint  Commission 
to  make  recommendations  as  to  the  nature  and  design  of 
such  remedial  works  and  the  allocation  of  the  task  of 
construction  as  between  the  United  States  of  America  and 
Canada. 

Accordingly  on  October  10,  1950,  a  reference 
was  sent  by  the  two  Governments  to  the  Interna- 
tional Joint  Commission  requesting  it  to  conduct 
investigations  and  make  a  report  containing: 

(1)  recommendations  concerning  the  nature 
and  design  of  the  works  necessary  to  enhance  the 
beauty  of  the  Falls  by  distributing  the  waters  so 
as  to  produce  an  unbroken  crestline  on  the  Falls 
in  accordance  with  the  report  of  the  special  Inter- 
national Niagara  Board; 

'  For  the  Department's  announcement  of  the  signing  of 
the  treaty,  see  Bixlletin  of  Mar.  20, 1950,  p.  448. 

783 


(2)  recommendations  concerning  the  allocation 
of  the  task  of  construction  of  remedial  works  as 
between  Canada  and  the  United  States,  having 
regard  to  the  recommendations  made  under  para- 
graph (1); 

(3)  an  estimate  of  the  cost  of  such  remedial 
works. 

The  treaty  provided  also  that  upon  approval 
by  tlie  United  States  and  Canada  of  such  recom- 
mendations, the  construction  of  the  remedial 
works  should  be  undertaken  under  the  supervision 
of  the  International  Joint  Commission  and  com- 
pleted within  4  years  after  the  date  on  which  the 
two  Governments  approved  the  Commission's  rec- 
ommendations. The  total  cost  of  the  works  is  to 
be  divided  equally  between  the  two  Governments. 

Upon  receipt  of  the  reference  of  October  10, 
1950,  the  International  Joint  Commission  estab- 
lished the  International  Niagara  Falls  Engineer- 
ing Board  which  has  conducted  extensive  studies 
and  has  constructed  models  for  testing  plans  in- 
tended to  carry  out  the  objectives  set  forth  in  the 
treaty.  A  comprehensive  joint  report  of  the  re- 
sults of  these  studies  and  tests  was  submitted  to 
the  Commission  at  its  semiannual  meeting  in 
Washington  beginning  April  7,  1953. 

After  study  of  the  Board's  report  the  Interna- 
tional Joint  Commission  has  submitted  its  report 
dated  May  5,  1953,  reviewing  the  results  of  the 
investigations  and  making  the  following  recom- 
mendations : 

1.  Recommendations  concerning  the  nature  and  design 
of  the  remedial  works  necessary  to  preserve  and  enhance 
the  scenic  beauty  of  the  Niagara  Falls  and  River. 

The  Commission  recommends  the  construction  of  the 
remedial  worlds  described  in  this  report  and  in  the  Board's 
report  which  is  attached  hereto  and  made  a  part  hereof, 
with  such  minor  modifications  as  the  Commission  may 
deem  advisable  at  the  time  of  construction,  the  worlis 
to  include : 

(o)  A  Chippawa-Grass  Island  Pool  control  structure, 
extending  out  from  the  Canadian  shore  approximately 
ir>r,0  feet  into  the  Niagara  River,  parallel  to  the  existing 
submerged  weir  and  about  225  feet  downstream  there- 
from ; 

(b)  An  excavation  in  the  Horseshoe  Cascades  lying 
immediately  upstream  from  the  Canadian  flank  of  the 
Horseshoe  Fails  and  a  crest  fill  on  that  flank  about  100 
feet  long ;  and, 

(r)  An  excavation  in  the  Horseshoe  Cascades  lying  im- 
mediately upstream  from  the  Goat  Island  flank  of  the 
Horseshoe  Falls  and  a  crest  fill  on  that  flank  about  300 
feet  long. 

2.  Recommendations  concerning  the  allocation  of  the 
task  of  construction  of  the  remedial  works  as  between 
Canada  and  the  United  States  of  America. 

The  Commission  recommends  that  the  task  of  construc- 
tion be  divided  between  the  two  countries  in  such  manner 
that  each  country  would  construct,  generally,  those  por- 
tions of  the  works  which  lie  within  its  national  bound- 
aries. On  this  basis,  Canada  would  construct  the  Chip- 
pawa-Grass Island  Pool  control  structure  and  the 
excavation  and  crest  fill  on  the  Canadian  flank  of  the 
Horseshoe  Falls;  and,  the  United  States  would  construct 
the  excavation  and  crest  fill  on  the  Goat  Island  flank 
of  the  Horseshoe  Falls,  including  the  small  amount  of 
excavation  on  the  Canadian  side  of  the  Boundary. 

784 


3.  The  Commission  further  recommends  that  the  con- 
struction of  the  proposed  remedial  works  be  initiated 
at  the  earliest  possible  moment  and  be  pressed  to  com- 
pletion as  rapidly  as  possible.  It  is  especiallv  important 
that  construction  of  the  Chippawa-Grass  Island  Pool 
control  structure  be  commenced  immediately  and  that 
it  be  constructed  to  its  ultimate  length  of  approximately 
],5.'J0  feet  unless  during  the  course  of  construction  the 
status  of  prospective  additional  power  diversion  should 
permit  consideration  of  a  shorter  structure  initially.  The 
excavation  and  fill  on  either  flank  of  the  Horseshoe  Falls 
should  be  started  as  soon  as  possible  and  substantially 
completed  before  work  is  begun  on  the  excavation  and 
flu  on  the  other  flank  in  order  to  minimize  temporary 
adverse  effects  on  the  scenic  spectacle  during  the  con- 
struction period. 

4.  The  Commission  also  recommends  that  the  two 
Governments  authorize  it  to  establish  a  Control  Board  to 
supervise  the  operation  of  the  proposed  control  structure 
to  insure  accomplishment  of  its  intended  purposes  and  to 
insure  that  the  levels  of  the  Niagara  River  and  Lake 
Erie  will  not  be  adversely  affected.  These  functions, 
deemed  properly  within  the  purview  of  the  Commission, 
are  closely  related  to  the  function  of  determining  the 
amount  of  water  available  for  the  purposes  of  the  Treaty  I 
of  February  27,  1950.  Accordingly,  it  would  seem  desir- 
able and  in  the  public  Interest  that  the  representatives 
of  the  United  States  and  Canada  to  be  designated  pursu- 
ant to  Article  VII  of  the  Treaty  be  appointed  bv  the  Com- 
mission to  serve  also  as  members  of  the  Control  Board 
which  the  Commission  desires  to  establish  and  hold 
responsible  for  the  operation  of  the  Chippawa-Grass 
Island  Pool  control  structure. 

With  respect  to  the  estimate  of  the  costs  of  such 
remedial  works,  the  Commission  reported  as 
follows : 

Cost  Estimates 

The  construction  cost  of  the  remedial  works  (not 
including  the  comparatively  small  amount  of  pre-con- 
struction  costs)  is  estimated  to  total  $17,536,000  at  July 
1952  construction-cost  levels. 

A  breakdown  of  this  estimate  is  shown  below: 

Chippawa-Grass  Island  Pool  Control 
Structure,  1,550  feet  long $14,594,000 

Excavation  and  Fill  in  the  Cascades  on 
the  Canadian  Flank  of  the  Horseshoe  Falls__       1,  5S2,  000 

Excavation  and  Fill  In  the  Cascades  on 
the  Goat  Island  Flank  of  the  Horseshoe 
Falls i_  360,  000 

Total $17,  536,  OOO 

Estimated  Annual  Cost  of  Operation  and 
Maintenance  of  the  Remedial  Works $100, 000 

_  The  report  and  recommendations  will  be  con- 
sidered by  the  interested  agencies  of  the  two  Gov- 
ernments and  a  decision  will  be  reached  regarding 
the  Commission's  recommendations. 


German  Ratification  of  EDC  Treaty, 
Contractual  Conventions 

Statement  ly  Acting  Secretary  Smith 

Press  release  266  dated  May  15 

It  is  heartening  to  hear  from  Bonn  that  the 
German  parliament  has  completed  ratification  of 
the  European  Defense  Treaty  and  Contractual 
Conventions.     These  agreements  will  permit  the 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Federal  Republic  to  play  an  honorable  and  im- 
portant role  in  the  family  of  free  nations,  in- 
cluding their  common  defense  against  aggres- 
sion. This  action  by  the  Bundesrat  also  con- 
stitutes one  more  basic  step  toward  European  inte- 
gration through  the  establishment  of  a  European 
army. 

I  realize  that  the  constitutionality  of  these 
treaties  may  still  be  tested  before  the  German 
Constitutional  Court.  Nonetheless,  I  am  con- 
vinced that  the  action  just  completed  in  Bonn 
will  greatly  encourage  those  forces  and  individ- 
uals throughout  free  Europe  which  are  devoting 
themselves  to  increasing  the  strength  and  unity 
of  the  free  world.  We  hope  most  sincerely  that 
the  other  Parliaments  of  the  developing  six-nation 
community  may  follow  suit  and  approve  the 
treaties  concerned  in  the  near  future. 

Military  Assistance  to  Ethiopia 

Press  release  279  dated  Ma;  22 

Acting  Secretary  Smith  and  the  Foreign  Min- 
ister of  Ethiopia,  Ato  Aklilou  Abte  Wold,  on  May 
22  signed  a  mutual-defense  assistance  agreement 
under  the  provisions  of  which  the  Government  of 
the  United  States  will  provide  military  equipment 
and  training  assistance  to  the  Ethiopian  Armed 
Forces.  The  agreement  follows  a  determination 
made  recently  by  the  President  that  Ethiopia  is 
eligible  for  grant  aid  according  to  the  provisions 
of  the  Mutual  Security  Act  of  1951,  as  amended. 
In  reaching  this  determination  the  President  took 
into  consideration  Ethiopia's  strategic  location 
within  the  general  Near  East  area  and  the  impor- 
tance of  Ethiopia's  defensive  strength  to  security 
in  that  area  and  to  U.S.  security.  The  federation 
of  Eritrea  with  Ethiopia  last  September  has  given 
Ethiopia  a  shoreline  on  the  Red  Sea  which  empha- 
sizes its  strategic  identification  with  the  Near 
East  area. 

This  agreement  is  similar  to  other  agreements 
concluded  with  countries  already  receiving  U.S. 
military  aid  and  provides  generally  for  the  terms 
and  conditions  under  which  such  aid  will  be  made 
available.  The  agreement  contains  the  customary 
provision  for  a  U.S.  Military  Assistance  Advisory 
Group,  which  will  be  sent  to  Ethiopia  to  observe 
the  use  made  of  the  aid  and  perform  such  other 
functions,  including  training,  as  are  required  in 
the  assistance  program.  This  program  is  de- 
signed to  facilitate,  to  the  extent  permitted  by  its 


manpower,  resources,  facilities,  and  general  eco- 
nomic condition,  the  full  contribution  by  Ethiopia 
to  the  development  of  its  own  defensive  strength 
and  the  defensive  strength  of  the  free  world. 

Ethiopia's  resolve  to  play  its  part  in  the  collec- 
tive defense  of  the  free  world  has  been  clearly 
demonstrated  by  its  contribution  of  combat  forces 
to  the  U.N.  Command  in  Korea,  and  the  outstand- 
ing fighting  record  of  those  troops  has  provided 
an  impressive  measure  of  Ethiopia's  military  ca- 
pacity, provided  it  has  modern  military  equipment. 


Release  off  William  N.  Oatis 
From  Czechoslovak  Prison 

At  a  7iews  conference  on  May  16  Lincoln  White, 
Deputy  Special  Assistant  for  Press  Relations, 
made  the  following  statement  on  the  release  of 
William  N.  Oatis,  Associated  Press  correspondent 
in  Prague,  after  2  years  of  imprisonment  in 
Czechoslovakia. 

Following  continuous  representations  to  the 
Czechoslovak  Government  since  the  imprisonment 
of  William  Oatis  on  April  23,  1951,  Ambassador 
George  Wadsworth  saw  Prime  Minister  Viliam 
Siroky  and  Foreign  Minister  Vaclav  David  at  6 
p.  m.  at  Prague  on  May  15.  The  Ambassador  was 
informed  by  the  Prime  Minister  that  in  accord- 
ance with  the  Czechoslovak  Constitution,  the 
President  of  Czechoslovakia,  Antonin  Zapotocky, 
was  pardoning  William  Oatis  on  the  basis  of  a 
petition  received  from  Mrs.  Oatis  in  November 
1952.  Arrangements  for  his  release  and  depar- 
ture from  Czechoslovakia  were  made  at  this  meet- 
ing. The  release  of  William  Oatis  removes  one 
of  the  obstacles  which  have  so  far  stood  in  the  way 
of  any  improvement  in  the  relations  between  the 
United  States  and  Czechoslovakia. 

The  Department,  of  course,  is  greatly  pleased 
by  the  release  of  Mr.  Oatis  from  an  incarceration 
which  this  Government  felt  from  the  outset  was 
a  gross  injustice.^ 

'  For  an  account  ,of  the  Oatis  trial,  including  (1)  a  con- 
densed version  of  the  indictment;  (2)  text  of  Czecho- 
slovak espionage  laws;  and  (3)  excerpts  from  the  pro- 
ceedings, based  on  notes  made  by  the  American  Embassy 
observers,  see  Bulletin  of  Aug.  20,  1951,  p.  283.  Also 
available  as  Department  of  State  publication  43.57.  For 
Department  statements  concerning  this  case,  see  Bul- 
letin of  July  16,  19.il,  p.  92 ;  Sept.  10,  1951,  p.  416 ;  Sept. 
24,  1951,  p.  489 ;  and  Oct.  20,  1952,  p.  625. 


June   J,   7953 


785 


INTERNATIONAL  ORGANIZATIONS  AND  CONFERENCES 


Calendar  of  Meetings ' 

Adjourned  During  May  1953 

Inter-American  Council  of  Jurists:  2d  Meeting Buenos  Aires Apr.  20-May  9 

Fourth  Commonwealth  Conference  on  Development  of  Design  &  In-  London Apr.  20-May  9 

spection  of  Military  Clothing  and  General  Stores. 
U.N.  (United  Nations): 

Ad  Hoc  Committee  on  Forced  Labor:  4th  Session Geneva Apr.  23-May  22 

Fiscal  Commission:  4th  Session New  York Apr.  27-May  8 

High  Commissioner's  Advisory  Committee  on  Refugees:  3d  Session  .  Geneva .\pr.  i7-May  2 

Social  Commission:  9th  Session New  York May  4-20 

Ad  Hoc  Commission  on  Prisoners  of  War:  4th  Session New  York May  11-29 

South  Pacific  Commission:   11th  Session Noumea Apr.  25-May  1 

Fad  (Food  and  .'\griculture  Organization) : 

Poplar    Congress:  5th    International    and    Poplar    Commission:  7th  Munster-Munich     .    .    .  Apr.  29-May  8 
Session. 

International  Cotton  Advisory  Committee:   12th  Plenary  Meeting    .    .  Washington May  4-5 

Upu  (Universal  Postal  Union) :   Meeting  of  Executive  &  Liaison  Com-  Bern May  4-15 

mittee. 

Who  (World  Health  Organization) :  6th  A.ssembly Geneva May  5-22 

Ic.\o  (International  Civil  .\viation  Organization) :  Standing  Committee  Paris May  6-30* 

on  Aircraft  Performance:  4th  Session. 

Ilo     (International     Labor     Organization):    Permanent     Agricultural  Geneva May  6-16 

Committee:  4th  Session. 

Caribbean  Commis,sion:   16th  Meeting Paramaribo May  11-16 

International  Symposium  on  Neurosecretion Naples May  11-23 

International  Rubber  Study  Group:   10th  Meeting Copenhagen May  11-15 

International  Cotton  Standards  Conference Washington May  13-15 

International    Commission   for   the    Northwest    Atlantic    Fisheries:  3d  New  Haven May  25-30 

Meeting. 

International  Seed  Testing  Association:   10th  Congress Dublin       May  25-30  ' 

In  Session  as  of  May  31,  1953 

International  Materials  Conference Washington Feb.  26    1951- 

Oeec  (Organization  for  European  Economic  Cooperation):  Conference  Paris Mar.  18- 

on  European  Inland  Transport. 
Itit  (International  Telecommunication  Union): 

Administrative  Council:  8th  Session Geneva May  2-  • 

International  Telegraph   Consultative  Committee:   8th  Plenary   As-  Arnheim May  26- 

sembly. 

U.  N.  (United  Nations):  International  Conference  to  Adopt  a  Protocol  New  York May  li- 
on Limitation  of  the  Production  of  Opium. 

Fao  (Food  and  Agriculture  Organization) :  Latin  American  Seminar  on  Sao  Paulo May  25- 

Land  Problems. 

Who  (World  Health  Organization):  Executive  Board:  12th  Session  .    .  Geneva May  26- 

Ilo  (International  Labor  Organization):  Governing  Body:  122d  Session  .  Geneva May  26- 

Cpm  (Council  of  Foreign  Ministers) :  Deputies  for  Austria London May  27- 

Unesco  (United  Nations  Educational,  Scientific  and  Cultural  Organiza-  Compi&gne May  30- 

tion):   International  Center  for  Workers  Education. 

Horticultural  Congress  and  Exposition Hamburg May- 
Scheduled  June  1-August  31,  1953 

U.  N.  (United  Nations): 

International  Law  Commission:   5th  Session Geneva June  1- 

3d  Regional  Meeting  of  European  Statisticians Geneva June  15- 

Trusteeship  Council:    12th  Session New  York June  16- 

Economic  and  Social  Council:   16th  Session Geneva June  30- 

Committee  on  Non-Governmental  Organizations Geneva June- 
International  Sugar  Conference London July  13- 

Technical  Assistance  Committee,  Working  Party Geneva July  15- 

Ad  Hoc  Committee  on  Factors New  York July  21- 

Committee  on  International  Criminal  Jurisdiction New  York July  27- 

EcAFE  Subcommittee  on  Iron  and  Steel Bangkok Aug.  31- 

'  Prepared  in  the  Division  of  International  Conferences,  Department  of  State,  May  22,  1953.      Asterisks  indicate 
tentative  dates. 

786  Department  of  Stale  BuUetin 


Meeting  of  Directing  Council  of  the  American  International  Institute  for 

the  Protection  of  Childhood. 
Fao  (Food  and  Agriculture  Organization) : 

Committee  on  Commodity  Problems:   21st  Session 

17th  Session  of  the  Council 

Ilo  (International  Labor  Organization): 

Annual  Conference:  36th  Session .    .  _•    •    ■    •    •    •    ■ 

Meeting  of  Experts  on  Systems  of  Payment  by  Results  in  the  Construc- 
tion Industry.  /c     ,.    t>     ■/:     <-. 
Ad  Hoc  Committee  on  Quarantme  Regulations  (South  Pacific  Commis- 

Unesco  (United  Nations  Educational,  Scientific  and  Cultural  Organiza- 
tion): 
Executive  Board:  34th  Session  .    .    .    .    ...    .    ...    -.   ..  .    •    •    • 

International  Conference  on  the  Role  and  Place  of  Music  in  Educa- 
tion. 

Second  Extraordinary  Session 

Eighth  Pan  American  Railway  Congress 

IcAO  (International  Civil  Aviation  Organization) : 

Assemblv:   7th  Session 

North  Atlantic  Ocean  Weather  Stations ._...._. 

Eighth  International  Dairy  Congress  and  International  Dairy  Exposi- 
tion- 
International  Whaling  Commission:  5th  Annual  Meeting    .    .    .    ... 

International  Commission  for  Criminal  Investigation:  22d  General  As- 
semblv. 

20th  International  Aeronautical  Exposition 

Icsu  (International  Council  of  Scientific  Unions): 

Committee  on  the  International  Geophysical  Year  1957-58     .... 

Executive  Board:   5th  Meeting 

Joint  Commission  on  High  Altitude  Research  Stations     .    .    .    .    .    . 

luPAP  (International  Union  of  Pure  and  Applied  Physics) :   Commission 
on  Cosmic  Rays. 

16th  International  Conference  on  Public  Education 

International  Wheat  Council:  12th  Session 

Second  International  Congress  on  Rheology 

13th  International  Congress  of  Pure  and  Applied  Chemistry  .    .    .    .    . 
17th   Conference   of   the   International   Union   of   Pure   and    Applied 

Chemistry. 
Wmo  (World  Meteorological  Organization) : 

Regional  Association  for  South  America ....... 

1st  Session  of  the  Regional  Association  for  North  and  Central  America . 

Commission  for  Aerology:  1st  Session _.    .    .    .    .    •    - 

Commission  for  Instruments  and  Methods  of  Observation:  1st  Session. 
Ninth  General  Assembly  of  the  Inter- American  Commission  of  Women . 

Fourth  International  Astronautical  Congress 

15th  International  Veterinary  Congress 

14th  International  Exhibition  of  Cinematographic  Art 

Eighth  International  Congress  on  Home  Economics 

Silent  Games  (Deaf  Mutes'),  7th  International , '  .■    " 

Third   International   Conference   on   Soil   Mechanics   and   Foundation 
Engineering. 

12th  Congress  of  the  International  Association  of  Limnology 

Ninth  International  Congress  of  Genetics 

Eighth  International  Congress  on  Rheumatic  Diseases       ....... 

Fifth  International  Congress  on  Tropical  Medicine  and  Malaria  .    .    .    . 

International  Association  for  Hydraulic  Research    ....._...•• 

Fourth   International    Congress   of   the    International   Association   on 
Quaternary  Research. 


Montevideo June  2- 


Rome     . 
Rome    . 

Geneva . 
Geneva . 


June  3- 
June  15- 

June  4- 
July  21- 


Noum^a June  8- 


Paris .    . 
Brussels 


Paris 

Washington    &    Atlantic 
City. 

Brighton  (England)    .    . 

Brighton 

The  Hague 


London . 
Oslo   .    . 


Paris . 


Brussels 

Strasbourg    .... 

Denver 

Bagnferes-de-Bigorre 


Geneva   .    . 
London   .    . 
Oxford     . 
Stockholm 
Stockholm 


Rio  de  Janeiro 
Toronto  .  .  . 
Toronto  .  .  . 
Toronto  .  .  . 
Asunci6n  .  . 
Ziirich .... 
Stockholm  .  . 
Venice  .  .  • 
Edinburgh  .  . 
Brussels  .  .  . 
Ziirich.    .    .    . 


Cambridge  &  Windemere . 

Bellagio 

Geneva 

Istanbul 

Minneapolis 

Rome  &  Pisa 


June  8- 

June  29- 

July 

1- 

June  12- 

June 

16- 

July  8- 

June  22- 

June  22- 

June 

24- 

June 

26- 

June  30- 

Julv 

6- 

Aug. 

22- 

July 

5- 

July 

6- 

July 

16- 

July 

26- 

July 

29- 

July 

29- 

July- 

Aug. 

3- 

Aug. 

10- 

Aug. 

10- 

Aug. 

- 

Aug. 

3- 

Aug. 

9- 

Aug. 

11- 

Aug. 

12- 

Aug. 

15- 

Aug. 

16- 

Aug. 

20- 

Aug. 

24- 

Aug. 

'24- 

Aug. 

28- 

Aug. 

30- 

Aug. 

30- 

Eighth  Pan  American 
Railway  Congress 

by  William  T.  Farley 

A  noteworthy  event  in  the  broadening  relation- 
ship among  xVmerican  Republics  in  the  industrial 
and  technical  field  will  occur  in  the  United  States 
this  June  when  the  Eighth  Pan  American  Rail- 
way Congress  will  be  held  at  Washington,  D.C., 
and  Atlantic  City,  N.J.  It  will  be  the  first  meet- 
ing the  Pan  American  Railway  Congress  Associ- 
ation has  held  in  this  country.  Previous  con- 
June   I,   J953 


gresses  have  been  held  at  Buenos  Aires,  Rio  de 
Janeiro,  Santiago,  Bogota,  Montevideo,  Habana, 
and  Mexico  City.  . 

The  objectives  of  the  Association,  which  was 
established  as  a  permanent  international  organi- 
zation in  1910,  include  the  improvement  of  rail- 
road facilities  and  services  in  the  American  Re- 
publics, reduction  of  frontier  barriers,  standardi- 
zation of  equipment,  interchange  of  technical  data, 
and  coordination  of  transport.  All  21  American 
Republics  are  members  of  the  Association,  the 
headquarters  of  which  is  at  Buenos  Aires;  many 
railroads,   institutions,   and   private   individuals 

787 


take  part  in  the  activities  of  the  organization. 
U.S.  participation  was  authorized  by  legislative 
enactment  in  1948  (Public  Law  794,  80th  Cong.). 

It  is  expected  that  the  Eighth  Congress,  which 
is  being  sponsored  by  the  Government  of  the 
United  States  and  the  U.S.  National  Commission 
in  the  Pan  American  Railway  Congress  Associa- 
tion (Parca)  in  collaboration  with  the  Permanent 
Commission  of  Parca,  will  reflect  and  emphasize 
the  heightened  interest  of  all  the  countries  of  the 
Americas  in  applying  the  most  advanced  scientific 
and  technical  developments  to  the  improvement 
of  transportation  by  rail. 

While  members  of  the  Congi-ess  are  in  Atlantic 
City,  the  Railway  Supply  Manufacturers'  Asso- 
ciation will  sponsor  an  exhibit  consisting  of  more 
than  20  million  dollars'  worth  of  railroad  supplies 
and  equipment,  the  largest  show  of  its  kind  ever 
held.  Participants  in  the  Congress  will  be  in- 
vited to  visit  these  exhibits  in  Convention  Hall 
and  on  nearby  railroad  tracks  and  see  the  latest 
developments  that  have  contributed  to  the  great 
advances  U.S.  railroads  have  made  in  recent  years 
in  the  efficiency,  economy,  safety,  and  depend- 
ability of  their  operations. 

Such  improvements  include  the  "push-button" 
yard,  which  provides  remote  control  of  switches 
and  car  speeds  for  smoother  and  faster  classifica- 
tion of  trains  in  yards;  the  use  of  radio,  radar, 
television,  and  other  electronic  marvels;  central- 
ized traffic  control,  interlocking  automatic  block 
signals  and  other  traffic-expediting  systems,  and 
new  and  improved  types  of  motive  power,  includ- 
ing the  diesel-electric,  gas  and  steam  turbine- 
electric,  and  the  Ignitron,  which  converts  alter- 
nating current  to  direct  through  the  use  of  recti- 
fier tubes. 

Technical  papers  to  be  presented  at  the  Congress 
are  expected  to  cover  such  facilities  and  equipment 
as  the  foregoing,  as  well  as  new  operating 
methods,  all  designed  to  increase  railroad  effi- 
ciency in  all  areas  of  the  Western  Hemisphere. 

Arrangements  for  the  Congress  are  being  made 
by  an  Organizing  Committee  established  in  March 
1952.  This  committee,  headed  by  James  G.  Lyne, 
president  of  the  Simmons-Biardman  Publishing 
Corporation  and  editor  of  Railway  Age,  consists 
of  members  of  the  U.S.  National  Commission  in 
the  Parca;  the  presidents  of  a  number  of  U.S. 
railroads;  officials  of  several  U.S.  companies  pro- 
ducing railroad  equipment  and  supplies,  and  gov- 
ernment officials  concerned  with  improvement  of 
international  transportation  facilities. 

The  Congress  will  open  at  Washington  on  June 
12  with  the  presentation  of  credentials  and  regis- 
tration of  the  participants.  Present  estimates  are 
that  attendance  from  the  Latin  American  Re- 
publics will  exceed  150  delegates  and  members  and 
that  the  enrollment  from  the  United  States  will 
be  about  200. 

The  Washington  portion  of  the  Congress  will 
begin  June  13  and  end  June  20.    This  period  will 


consist  primarily  of  meetings  of  technical  sections 
and  plenary  sessions  for  the  presentation  and  dis- 
cussion of  papers  on  problems  of  railway  construc- 
tion, rolling  stock,  operation,  administration  and 
public  policy.  A  total  of  147  subjects  have  been 
suggested  for  possible  treatment,  in  line  with 
which  an  estimated  200  papers  will  be  presented. 
In  accordance  with  past  practice,  honorary  diplo- 
mas and  monetary  prizes  will  be  awarded  for  the 
best  papers. 

In  addition  to  the  meetings  of  technical  sections 
and  plenary  sessions,  roundtable  discussions  will 
be  held  on  two  subjects  of  current  interest:  How 
the  U.S.  technical-cooperation  program  can  aid 
the  development  of  Latin  American  railroads  and 
international  traffic  problems. 

On  June  21,  the  participants  will  be  taken  by 
special  train  to  Atlantic  City.  There  they  will 
attend  the  annual  meetings  of  several  divisions  of 
the  Association  of  American  Railroads.  A  presen- 
tation of  awards  will  be  made  at  the  closing  ses- 
sion on  June  25. 

Detailed  information  on  the  Congress  may  be 
obtained  from  Loyd  J.  Kiernan,  Executive  Secre- 
tary, Organizing  Committee,  Eighth  Pan  Ameri- 
can Railway  Congress,  Division  of  International 
Conferences,  Department  of  State,  Washington 
25,  D.C. 

*Mr.  Faricy  is  chairman  of  the  U.S.  National 
Commission  in  the  Pan  American  Railway  Oonr 
gress  Association. 

U.  N.  Documents: 

A  Selected  Bibliography^ 

Economic  and  Social  Council 

Proposed  Unicef  Contribution  to  the  International  Chil- ' 
dren's  Centre,  Paris,  For  Operations  During  the  Tliree 
Year   Period   1954-56.     E/ICEF/220,   Mar.   10,   1953. 
14  pp.  mimeo. 

General  Progress  Report  of  the  Executive  Director 
[Unicef].  E/ICEF/221,  Mar.  15,  1953.  75  pp. 
mimeo. 

Unicef  Aid  to  Asia :  Statement  to  Unicef  Executive 
Board  104th  Meeting,  19  March  1953  by  S.  RI.  Keeny, 
Director,  Asia  Regional  Office.  E/ICEF/222,  Mar. 
21,  1953.     9  pp.  mimeo. 

Unicef  Aid  to  Latin  America :  Statement  to  the  Unicef 
Executive  Board.  104th  Meeting,  19  March  1953  by 
Robert  Davee,  Director,  Unicef  Regional  Office  for 
Latin  America.  E/ICEF/223,  Mar.  20,  1953.  7  pp. 
mimeo. 


'  Printed  materials  may  he  secured  in  the  United  States 
from  the  International  Documents  Service.  Columbia  Uni- 
versity Press,  2960  Broadway,  New  York  27,  N.  Y.  Other 
materials  (mimeographed  or  processed  documents)  may 
be  consulted  at  certain  designated  libraries  in  the  United 
States. 

The  United  Nations  Secretariat  has  established  an  Offi- 
cial Records  series  for  the  General  Assembly,  the  Security 
Council,  the  Economic  and  Social  Council,  the  Trusteeship 
Council,  and  the  Atomic  Energy  Commission  which  in- 
cludes summaries  of  proceedings,  resolutions,  and  reports 
of  the  various  commissions  and  committees.  Information 
on  securing  subscriptions  to  the  series  may  be  obtained 
from  the  International  Documents  Service. 


788 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Provisional  Agenda  for  the  Fifteenth  Session  of  the  Eco- 
nomic and  Social  Council.  Accession  of  Italy  to  the 
Convention  on  the  Declaration  of  Death  of  Missing 
Persons.  Memorandum  by  the  Secretary-General. 
E/2350/Add.  5,  Mar.  27,  1953.  3  pp.  mimeo. 
Consideration  of  the  Provisional  Agenda  for  the  Sixteenth 
Session  of  the  Council.  Note  by  the  Secretary-Gen- 
eral.    E/2352/Rev.  1,  Apr.  21,  1953.     7  pp.  mimeo. 

World  Economic  Situation ;  Aspects  of  Economic  Develop- 
ment in  Africa.  Report  by  the  Secretary-General. 
E/2377,  Mar.  20,  1953.     171  pp.  mimeo. 

Restrictive  Business  Practices.  Analysis  of  Govern- 
mental Measures  Relating  to  Restrictive  Business 
Practices.  E/2379,  E/AC.37/2,  Mar.  30,  1953.  122 
pp.  mimeo;  E/2379/Add.l,  E/AC.37/2/ Add.l,  Apr.  2, 
1953.  48  pp.  mimeo. 
i  Report  of  the  Ad  Hoc  Committee  on  Restrictive  Business 
Practices  to  the  Economic  and  Social  Council. 
E/2380,  E/AC.37/3,  Mar.  30,  1953.     60  pp.  mimeo. 

Report  of  the  Transport  and  Communications  Commission 
(Sixth  Session).  Draft  Protocol  on  a  Uniform  Sys- 
tem of  Road  Sifnis  and  Signals.  Note  by  the  Secre- 
tary-General. E/2387,  Mar.  31,  1953.  4  pp.  mimeo; 
Report  of  the  Economic  Committee.  E/2402,  Apr. 
14, 1953.     10  pp.  mimeo. 

Report  of  the  Population  Commission  (Seventh  Session). 
Report  of  the  Social  Committee.  E/2392,  Apr.  9, 1953. 
4  pp.  mimeo. 

Expanded  Programme  of  Technical  Assistance.  Report 
of  the  Technical  Assistance  Committee.  E/2.394,  Apr. 
13,  1953.  8  pp.  mimeo;  (Local  Costs  To  Be  Borne 
by  Governments),  E/2395,  Apr.  13,  1953.  20  pp. 
mimeo. 

Admission  of  Representatives  of  Non-Governmental  Or- 
ganizations Enjoying  Consultative  Status.  Memo- 
randum by  the  Legal  Department.  E/2397,  Apr.  10, 
1953.     4  pp.  mimeo. 

Consideration  of  the  Provisional  Agenda  for  the  Six- 
teenth Session  of  the  Council.  Report  requested 
under  Council  resolution  426  B  (XIV)  on  "Measures 
designed  to  reconcile  the  attainment  and  maintenance 
of  full  employment  with  the  avoidance  of  the  harmful 
effects  of  inflation."  Note  by  the  Secretary-General. 
E/2404,  Apr.  16, 1953.     6  pp.  mimeo. 

Commission  on  Narcotic  Drugs.  Agenda.  Note  by  the 
Secretary-General.  E/CN.7/248/Add.l/Rev.2,  Mar. 
30, 1953.     4  pp.  mimeo. 

DwiCEP  Aid  to  Africa.  Statement  to  Unicef  Executive 
Board,  104th  Meeting,  19  March  1953  by  Dr.  Charles 
A.  Egger,  Director,  Unicef  Regional  Office  for  Africa, 
Eastern  Mediterranean  Area  &  Europe.  E/ICEF/224, 
Mar.  24,  1953.     7  pp.  mimeo. 

Dnicef  Aid  to  the  Eastern  Mediterranean  Area :  State- 
ment to  the  Unicef  Executive  Board  on  20  March 
1953  by  Charles  Egger.  E/ICEF/225,  Mar.  25,  1953. 
11  pp.  mimeo. 

Provisional  List  of  Representatives  to  the  Fifteenth  Ses- 
sion of  the  Economic  and  Social  Council.  E/INF/55, 
Mar.  30,  1953.     30  pp.  mimeo. 


General  Assembly 

Report  of  the  Secretary-General  on  Personnel  Policy. 
Note  by  the  Secretary-General.  A/2376,  Mar.  27, 
1953.     3  pp.  mimeo. 

Complaint  of  Non-Compliance  of  States  Still  Detaining 
Members  of  the  Greek  Armed  Forces  With  the  Pro- 
visions of  Resolution  382  A  (V),  Adopted  by  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  on  1  December  1950,  Recommending 
"The  Repatriation  of  All  Those  Among  Them  Who 
Express  the  Wish  To  Be  Repatriated."  Report  of 
the  President.     A/2388,  Apr.  21,  1953.     4  pp.  mimeo. 

Question  of  Impartial  Investigation  of  Charges  of  Use 
by  United  Nations  Forces  of  Bacteriological  Warfare. 
Note  dated  27  March  1953  from  the  representative  of 
the  United  States  transmitting  statements  by  certain 


members  of  the  United  States  armed  forces.  A/C. 
1/L.37,  Mar.  27, 1953.  15  pp.  mimeo. 
Peace  Observation  Commission.  Balkans  Sub-Commis- 
sion. Fifth  Periodic  Report  of  the  United  Nations 
Military  Observers  in  Greece.  Letter  dated  8  April 
1953  from  the  Principal  Military  Observer  submit- 
ting report  covering  the  period  from  6  January  1953- 
5  April  1953.  A/CN.7/SC.1/41,  Apr.  14,  1953.  25 
pp.  mimeo. 


Trusteeship  Council 

United  Nations  Visiting  Mission  to  Trust  Territories  in 
West  Africa,  1952.  Report  on  Togoland  Under  United 
Kingdom  Administration.  T/1040,  Mar.  16,  1953. 
102  pp.  mimeo ;  Report  on  the  Cameroons  Under 
United  Kingdom  Administration.  T/1042,  Mar.  16, 
1953.  91  pp.  mimeo ;  Report  on  the  Cameroons  Under 
French  Administration.  T/1043,  Mar.  16,  1953.  93 
pp.  mimeo. 


THE  DEPARTMENT 


Department  To  Sponsor  Conference 
on  U.S.  Foreign  Policy 

Press  release  281  dated  May  22 

Representatives  of  approximately  200  national 
organizations  have  been  invited  by  Secretary 
Dulles  to  attend  a  conference  on  U.S.  foreign 
policy  at  the  Department  on  June  4  and  5,  1953. 

The  meetings  will  be  informal  in  character  and 
are  designed  to  give  leaders  of  national  nongov- 
ernmental organizations  an  opportunity  to  ex- 
change views  with  top  officials  of  the  Department. 

The  conference  program  includes  informal 
statements  by  Secretary  Dulles;  Carl  W.  McCar- 
dle,  Assistant  Secretary  for  Public  Affairs;  Liv- 
ingston Merchant,  Assistant  Secretary  for  Euro- 
pean Affairs;  Walter  S.  Robertson,  Assistant 
Secretary  for  Far  Eastern  Affairs ;  Henry  A.  By- 
roade,  Assistant  Secretary  for  Near  Eastern,  South 
Asian,  and  African  Affairs;  Robert  L.  Johnson, 
Administrator,  International  Information  Admin- 
istration ;  Stanley  Andrews,  Administrator,  Tech- 
nical Cooperation  Administration;  John  M. 
Cabot,  Assistant  Secretary  for  Inter-American 
Affairs;  Harold  E.  Stassen,  Director  for  Mutual 
Security;  and  Ambassador  Henry  Cabot  Lodge, 
Jr.,  U.S.  Representative  to  the  United  Nations. 
Joseph  B.  Phillips,  Deputy  Assistant  Secretary 
for  Public  Affairs,  will  deliver  the  closing  address 
June  5.  Names  of  other  speakers  representing 
major  areas  of  the  Department  will  be  announced 
later. 

Other  Department  officials  will  participate  in  a 
series  of  panel  discussions  with  organization  rep- 
resentatives on  the  morning  of  June  5. 

A  luncheon  meeting  will  be  held  in  the  National 
Press  Club  ballroom  on  June  4,  at  which  time  the 


June   I,   1953 


789 


speaker  will  be  Senator  Alexander  Wiley,  Chair- 
man of  the  Senate  Foreign  Relations  Committee. 
Those  attending  the  conference  represent  or- 
ganizations and  associations  from  various  sections 
of  the  country  which  have  a  continuing  interest 
in  international  affairs.  Among  the  gi'oups 
which  have  designated  representatives  for  the 
meeting  are  farm,  labor,  business,  women's,  re- 
ligious, veterans',  men's  service  and  educational 
and  professional  organizations. 

Resignation 

Harold  F.  Linder  as  Assistant  Secretary  for  Economic 
Affairs,  effective  May  15,  1953. 


Designations 

John  C.  Dreier,  U.S.  representative  on  the  Council  of 
the  Orgranization  of  American  States,  has  been  designated 
as  coordinator  of  preparations  for  the  Tenth  Inter-Ameri- 
can Conference,  which  is  scheduled  to  take  place  at 
Caracas  in  March  1954.  In  this  capacity  he  will  be 
directly  responsible  to  the  Assistant  Secretary  for  Inter- 
American  Affairs. 

The  acting  U.S.  representative  on  the  Inter-American 
Economic  and  Social  Council,  Julian  C.  Greenup,  will 
serve  as  deputy  coordinator,  with  responsibility  for  coordi- 
nating the  preparations  in  the  economic  field. 

Richard  S.  Wheeler,  Associate  Chief  of  the  Division  of 
International  Conferences,  will  serve  as  deputy  coordina- 
tor, with  responsibility  for  coordinating  the  organizational 
and  administrative  aspects  of  this  Government's  partici- 
pation in  the  Conference. 

The  coordinator  and  the  deputy  coordinators  will  serve 
in  this  capacity  in  addition  to  their  regular  duties. 


Information  Relating  to  the  IIA 

Press  Reports  Denied 

In  reference  to  press  reports  concerning  his  resifniation, 
Robert  L.  Johnson,  Administrator  of  the  International 
Information  Administration,  said  on  May  19  (press  re- 
lease 274)  that  the  stories  concerning  his  resignation  are 
completely  erroneous,  and  added  that  he  has  high  hopes 
•of  shaping  the  overseas  information  program  into  an 
effective  weapon   to  win  the  cold   war. 

Mr.  Johnson  said  there  is  no  basis  for  the  press  reports 
that  he  is  disgusted  over  the  extent  to  which  operations 
of  the  Voice  of  America's  radio  programs  were  being 
cut  back.  The  Administrator  pointed  out  that  he  took 
the  initiative  and  directed  a  series  of  cutbacks  to  comply 
•with  the  Bureau  of  the  Budget's  economy  directive,  of 
which  he  approves.     He  added  ; 

"The  actions  I  have  taken  within  the  last  6  weeks  will 
reduce  costs  and  increase  the  efBciency  of  our  operation. 
The  moves  I  have  made  are  a  contraction  to  establish 
the  essentials  of  a  revitalized,  flexible,  and  hard-hitting 
program  designed  to  achieve  maximum  effectiveness." 

He  added  that  he  is  considering  other  consolidation 
moves  which  will  reduce  operating  costs  without  jeopard- 
izing the  effectiveness  of  the  program. 

Closing  of  New  Yorl<  IPS  Office 

Robert  L.  Johnson,  Administrator  of  the  International 
Information  Administration,  announced  on  May  18  (press 
release  272)  the  closing  of  the  New  York  Office  of  the 
International  Press  Service,  effective  June  30,  as  a  means 
■of  reducing  operating  expenses. 

790 


The  International  Press  Service  is  one  of  five  media 
.services,  and  operates  the  press,  publications,  and  photo- 
graphic programs  of  the  State  Department's  International 
Information  Administration.  In  addition  to  photo  and 
news  coverage,  the  15  persons  working  in  the  New  York 
Office  of  IPS,  2:50  West  57th  Street,  provide  photo  and 
article  research  and  procurement  and  printing  coordina- 
tion, as  well  as  assistance  to  foreign  journalists  in  the 
United  States. 

As  a  result  of  this  move,  Mr.  Johnson  said,  the  domestic 
functions  of  the  International  Press  Service  will  be  cen- 
tralized in  Washington.  The  Administrator  added  that 
New  York  coverage  of  important  events  such  as  U.N. 
meetings  will  not  be  eliminated.  Such  assignments,  as  re- 
quired, will  be  accomplished  by  Washington  personnel. 


Administrative  Operations  Consolidated 

Robert  L.  Johnson,  Administrator  of  the  International 
Information  Administration,  announced  on  May  18  (press 
release  270)  that  the  functions  of  the  New  York  Admin- 
istrative Office  (Nad)  of  the  Iia  will  be  combined  with 
the  Office  of  Comptroller  of  the  International  Broadcast- 
ing Service  as  a  means  of  lowering  costs  and  improving 
efficiency. 

Frank  L.  Seymour  who  since  November  1952  has  been 
chief  of  the  New  York  Administrative  Office  handling 
auditing,  procurement,  contracting,  warehousing,  and 
general  services  for  all  of  Iia  in  New  Y'ork,  will  take  over 
on  May  18  as  acting  comptroller  of  the  International 
Broadcasting  Service  and  will  direct  the  consolidation  of 
these  two  administrative  operations.  The  position  of 
comptroller  of  the  International  Broadcasting  Service 
had  previously  been  held  by  Robert  J.  Francis,  who  is  at 
present  serving  as  acting  director  of  the  Voice  of 
America. 


Denial  of  Press  Statement  on  Film  Directors 


J 

m 

It* 


The  Department  of  State  on  May  13  (jiress  release  262)l| 
denied  statements  appearing  in  that  day's  press  that  an; 
film  directors  had  been  chosen  by  the  Dejiartment  to  work 
on  film  projects  for  the  International  Information  Ad- 
ministration (Iia).  There  is  no  foundation  to  press  state- 
ments that  28  Hollywood  directors  had  been  drafted  into 
service  to  guide  the  making  of  a  series  of  2-,  3-,  and  4-reel 
films  on  behalf  of  Iia. 

Robert  L.  Johnson,  Administrator,  International  Infor- 
mation Administration,  in  referring  to  the  misstatements 
appearing  in  the  press,  called  attention  to  the  fact  that 
last  month  he  had  announced  that  Cecil  B.  DeMille  had 
consented  to  serve  as  chief  consultant  on  matters  relating 
to  IiA  Motion  Picture  Service.'  With  the  assistance  of 
Mr.  DeMille,  it  is  expected  that  the  active  cooperation 
of  the  entire  motion-picture  industry  will  be  enlisted  in 
behalf  of  the  State  Department's  program. 

Nomination  of  Michael  J.  McDermott 

Press  release  278  dated  May  21 

The  President  on  May  21  sent  to  the  Senate  the 
nomination  of  Michael  J.  McDermott  of  Massa- 
chusetts to  be  Ambassador  to  El  Salvador. 

Mr.  McDermott  will  bring  to  his  new  assignment 
a  rich  experience  of  36  years  in  international 
affairs.  He  has  served  continuously  as  chief  press 
officer  of  the  Department  of  State  since  1927,  has 
served  on  various  policy  committees  within  the 
Department  of  State  and  has  attended  virtually 
every  major  international  conference  in  which  the 

'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  27, 1953,  p.  635.  j 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


i 


Jnited  States  has  participated  since  entering  the 
Department  in  1920. 

His  service  in  the  best  interests  of  his  country 
las  made  "Mike"  McDermott  known  to  and  re- 
|;pected  by  correspondent  and  diplomat  alike 
''hroughout  the  world.  In  recognition  of  this 
liervice  Mr.  McDermott  was  awarded  the  Superior 
Service  Award  bv  the  Department  of  State  in 
|i950. 

':  In  1917  Mr.  McDermott  came  to  Washmgton  to 
[he  Office  of  the  Provost  Marshal  General,  where 
'le  assisted  in  the  preparations  for  the  conduct  of 
he  first  draft.  He  was  then  assigned  to  the  "Wliite 
House  in  September  1917.  He  joined  the  Army  in 
December  1917,  and  was  commissioned  a  warrant 
officer  by  the  Secretary  of  "War.  He  was  then 
mmediately  assigned  to  overseas  duty  as  confi- 
lential  clerk  to  Gen.  Tasker  Bliss  in  the  American 
Section  of  the  Supreme  War  Council  at  Versailles 
md  on  the  American  Commission  to  Negotiate 
Peace.  He  served  under  General  Bliss  until  May 
1920  when  he  was  honorably  discharged. 

Mr.  McDermott  then  accompanied  Elihu  Root 
M  The  Hague.  Mr.  Root  was  then  a  member  of 
:he  Commission  of  Jurists  to  formulate  the  project 
for  an  International  Court  of  Justice.  He  re- 
gained with  Mr.  Root  until  August  1920  when 
16  came  to  the  Department  of  State  at  "Washington. 

Mr.  McDermott's  first  assignment  in  the  De- 
partment of  State  was  that  of  special  assistant. 
in  June  1923  he  was  assigned  as  private  secretary 
CO  Under  Secretary  of  State  "William  Phillips. 

In  1923  Mr.  McDermott  was  loaned  by  Secretary 
Charles  Evans  Hughes  to  the  "Wliite  House  to  ac- 
company President  "Warren  G.  Harding  on  his 
trip  to  Alaska  as  a  combination  secretary  and  press 
officer.  It  fell  to  his  lot  to  announce  the  tragic 
news  of  the  President's  death  August  2,  1923,  at 
the  Palace  Hotel  in  San  Francisco.  ... 

In  April  1924  Mr.  McDermott  became  Assistant 
Chief  of  the  Division  of  Current  Information. 
Three  years  later  he  became  Chief  of  the  Division. 
In  Januaxy  1944  he  became  special  assistant  to 
the  Secretary  of  State  for  Press  Relations  and  has 
served  in  that  capacity  under  six  Secretaries  of 
State. 

"While  serving  with  Mr.  Root  and  during  his 
early  days  in  the  Department,  Mr.  McDermott 
was  attracted  to  law.  He  attended  night  school 
at  the  National  University,  receiving  his  LL.B.  in 
1926  and  his  LL.M.  and  M.P.L.  in  1927. 

Mr.  McDermott  has  been  a  member  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  Publications  Committee  since 
1929.  He  was  the  representative  of  Secretaries 
Hull  and  Stettinius  on  the  Committee  on  "War 
Information  Policies  from  1942  to  1946.  He  was 
'  a  member  of  the  Committee  on  Political  Planning 
in  1942  and  1943.  During  1944  he  also  served  as 
member  on  the  Department  of  State  Policy  Com- 
mittee and  the  Committee  on  Postwar  Programs. 
Mr.  McDermott  has  been  assigned  to  eight  Latin 

June    1,    1953 


American  conferences :  as  special  assistant  on  the 
U.S.  delegation  to  the  6th  International  Confer- 
ence of  American  States  at  Habana  in  1928;  as 
press  officer  for  the  American  delegations  to  the 
8th  International  Conference  of  the  American 
States  at  Lima,  in  1938 ;  at  the  Second  Meeting  of 
the  Ministers  of  Foreign  Affairs  of  the  American 
Republics  at  Habana  in  1940;  at  the  Inter- Ameri- 
can Conference  on  Problems  of  "War  and  Peace  at 
Mexico  City  in  1945 ;  at  the  Rio  conference  in  1947 ; 
and  at  the  Bogota  conference  in  1948.  He  also 
served  as  press  relations  officer  at  the  Conference 
of  American  States  on  Conciliation  and  Arbitra- 
tion in  Washington  in  1928-29,  and  public  rela- 
tions director  for  the  8th  American  Scientific 
Conference  at  Washington  in  1940. 

Mr.  McDermott  participated  in  the  early  efforts 
to  avert  World  War  II,  serving  on  the  Mission  for 
Signature  of  a  Pact  for  the  Renunciation  of  War 
at  Paris  in  1928,  and  as  press  officer  for  the  Ameri- 
can delegation  at  the  London  Naval  Conference 
of  1930. 

During  World  War  II  he  also  served  m  inter- 
national efforts  to  lay  a  foundation  for  lasting 
peace  once  the  horrors  of  that  war  were  ended. 
He  served  as  chief  press  relations  officer  at  the 
three  major  conferences  looking  to  that  end :  the 
U  N.  Conference  on  Food  and  Agriculture  at  Hot 
Springs,  Va.,  in  1943 ;  at  the  U.N.  Monetary  and 
Financial  Conference  at  Bretton  Woods,  N.  H.,  in 
1944 ;  and  at  the  U.N.  Conference  on  International 
Organization  which  wrote  the  Charter  of  the 
Uiiited  Nations  at  San  Francisco  in  1945.  He  also 
served  as  press  officer  for  the  U.S.  group  at  the 
Dumbarton  Oaks  Conversations  on  International 
Organization  held  in  Washington  in  1944.  .  .  . 
He  served  as  press  officer  for  the  U.S.  delegation  to 
tJie  First  Session  of  the  General  Assembly  at 
London  in  1946. 

Mr  McDermott  accompanied  Secretary  of  State 
Cordell  Hull  to  Moscow  in  1943  at  a  conference 
which  pledged  the  restoration  of  Austrian  inde- 
pendence. He  also  witnessed  the  early  hopes  for 
and  later  disillusionment  of  the  Council  of  For- 
eign Ministers,  acting  as  press  officer  for  the  U.S. 
delegations  to  the  Paris  (1946), New  York  (1946), 
Moscow  (1947),  London  (1947),  and  Paris  (1949) 
Council  of  Foreign  Ministers  Meetings.  He  also 
served  as  press  officer  for  the  U.S.  delegation  to 
the  Paris  Peace  Conference  of  1946  which  wrote 
the  treaties  of  peace  with  Finland,  Hungary, 
Rumania,  Bulgaria,  and  Italy. 

Mr.  McDermott  saw  the  dream  of  the  North  At- 
lantic community  grow  to  reality  and  has  partici- 
pated in  most  of  its  subsequent  meetings.  He 
acted  as  chief  press  relations  officer  for  the  sign- 
ing of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization  at 
Washington  in  1949.  He  has  served  as  press  officer 
for  the  U.S.  delegations  to  the  New  York  (1950), 
Rome  (1951),  and  Paris  (1952)  meetings  of  the 
Council  of  Nato. 

791 


THE  FOREIGN  SERVICE 


Consular  Offices 

The  consulate  at  Bergen,  Norway,  is  being  closed  on 
May  31.  The  BerRen  consular  district  will  be  absorbed 
into  the  Oslo  district. 

The  consulate  at  Adelaide,  South  Australia,  is  being 
closed  to  the  public  as  of  May  30  and  will  officially  close 
on  June  15,  1953.  The  Adelaide  consular  district  is  being 
incorporated  into  the  Melbourne  district. 

Frederick  L.  Anderson  Resigns 

as  U.S.  Deputy  Special  Representative 

On  May  22,  1953,  President  Eisenhower  accepted  the 
resignation  of  Frederick  L.  Anderson  as  U.S.  deputy 
special  representative  in  Europe,  effective  September  1. 
For  text  of  Mr.  Anderson's  letter  of  resignation  and  the 
President's  reply,  see  White  House  press  release  of  May  22. 


PUBLICATIONS 


1935  Documents  on  U.S.  Policy 
in  Near  East,  Africa  Released 

Press  release  223  dated  April  29 

Foreign  Relations  of  the  United  States,  1935, 
Volume  /,  General;  The  Near  East  and  Africa,  re- 
leased on  May  9  by  the  Department  of  State,  pre- 
sents extensive  documentation  on  the  diplomacy 
of  a  year  marked  by  deteriorating  international 
relations  and  futile  efforts  to  check  the  drift  to- 
ward World  War  II.  The  record  explains  the 
increasing  threat  of  a  rapidly  rearming  Nazi  Ger- 
many, Fascist  Italy's  aggression  against  Ethiopia, 
and  the  confusion  and  lack  of  cooperation  among 
other  European  povpers.  Meantime,  the  United 
States  sought  to  avoid  involvement  in  European 
or  Near  East  problems,  adopted  new  principles  of 
strict  neutrality  designed  to  keep  the  United  States 
out  of  any  war,  and  endeavored,  by  use  of  its  moral 
influence,  to  preserve  peace  and  uphold  interna- 
tional obligations.  Unfortunately,  the  dictator- 
ships were  not  sufficiently  responsive  to  moral 
influence. 

The  records  of  the  Conference  for  the  Reduc- 
tion and  Limitation  of  Armaments  and  the  Lon- 
don Naval  Conference  reveal  frustration  and  fu- 
tility. Reasons  for  this  appear  in  the  reports  on 
these  conferences  and  in  analyses  by  American 
diplomatic  missions  of  political  events  in  Europe. 
Encouraged  by  her  victory  in  regaining  the  Saar, 
Nazi  Germany  repudiated  the  restrictive  provi- 
sions of  the  Treaty  of  Versailles  and  began  openly 
to  rearm.     Reports  from  American  missions  make 

792 


clear  the  seriousness  with  which  the  danger  was 
viewed  in  diplomatic  circles  and  also  indicate  the 
lack  of  any  effective  policies  to  meet  the  situation. 
The  desire  of  the  United  States  to  remain  aloof 
from  involvement  in  war  is  well  set  forth  in  a 
reply  to  a  dispatch  of  March  28,  1935,  from  Am- 
bassador Robert  P.  Skinner  at  Ankara  (pp.  209- 
211),  describing  the  danger  of  war  and  urging 
that  the  President  appeal  to  all  European  powers 
to  renounce  for  25  years  any  possible  claim  to 
additional  territories.  Under  Secretary  of  State 
William  Pliillips  wrote  on  May  9,  1935  (pp.  272- 
273),  that  this  Government  had  consistently  re- 
fused to  take  part  in  the  controversy  between  the 
"■status  quo  States"  and  the  "revisionist  States," 
that  sponsoring  such  a  proposal  would  give  rise  to 
a  claim  that  the  United  States  had  impliedly  prom- 
ised assistance  in  case  of  its  violation.  Further, 
it  was  doubted  that  the  revisionist  States  would 
adhere  to  a  25-year  guarantee  and  it  was  felt  that 
therefore  the  proposal  would  be  doomed  to  failure 
and  might  aggravate  still  further  the  situation.     ' 

A  somewhat  more  positive  policy  was  followed 
with  respect  to  the  Far  East.  At  a  White  House 
conference  on  November  19, 1935,  regarding  naval 
discussions  (pp.  144-149),  President  Roosevelt 
approved  a  Department  of  State  draft  formula  on 
political  cooperation  with  Great  Britain.  It  de- 
clared that  any  agreement  on  cooperation  was  out 
of  the  question,  but  that  the  delegation  to  the 
London  Naval  Conference  might  "emphasize  the 
inevitable  and  growing  community  of  interests  of 
the  British  Empire  and  the  United  States  through- 
out the  world,  and  particularly  the  Far  East,"  and 
that  the  LTnited  States  and  the  British  Empire 
were  "likely,  in  their  own  interests  and  in  the 
interests  of  the  community  of  nations,  to  follow, 
m  general  a  parallel,  though  independent  policy, 
notably  in  the  Far  East."     (p.  146.) 

Documents  on  the  activities  of  the  Nye  Commit-  I 
tee  mvestigating  the  munitions  industry  and  on 
the  rejection  by  the  Senate  of  a  resolution  for  the 
adherence  by  the  United  States  to  the  Permanent 
Court  of  International  Justice  help  explain  the 
caution  of  the  administration  in  its  international 
relations. 

A  good  deal  of  interest  centers  on  the  Ethiopian- 
Italian  conflict— the  efforts  bv  the  League  of  Na- 
tions and  by  France  and  the  United  Kingdom  to 
bring  about  a  peaceful  settlement;  the  invasion;  i 
and  efforts  to  end  hostilities;  and  American  ac-  ' 
tions  in  the  interest  of  peace  and  for  the  protection 
of  American  life  and  property. 

As  in  regard  to  European  problems,  the  United 
States  pursued  an  independent  policy.  It  did  not 
take  part  in  League  of  Nations  efforts,  but  made 
separate  appeals  for  a  peaceful  settlement.  When 
the  invasion  came  the  U.S.  Government  took  no 
part  directly  in  the  application  of  sanctions 
against  Italy,  though  it  adopted  neutrality  meas- 
ures which  redounded  to  the  benefit  of  Ethiopia. 

Other  sections  on  the  Near  East  and  Africa  in- 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


,volve  relations  with  Afghanistan,  Egypt,  Iran, 
Liberia,  Morocco,  and  Turkey.  Some  concern  was 
expressed  regarding  Soviet  ambitions  as  to  the 
Straits.  Turkey  desired  modiKcation  of  agree- 
ments in  order  to  make  possible  better  defense. 

Volume  II  of  the  Foreign  Relations  series  for 
'l935,  dealing  with  the  British  Commonwealth  and 
Europe  hasljeen  published.'  The  remaining  two 
!  volumes  for  the  year.  Volume  III,  The  Far  East, 
land  Volume  IV,  The  American  Republics,  will  be 
published  at  an  early  date. 

'  This  volume  was  compiled  in  the  Division  of 
^Historical  Policy  Kesearch.  Statements  in  the 
preface  give  the  rules  under  which  Foreign  Rela- 
!  tiom  is  compiled  and  a  list  of  the  staff  which  com- 
piled the  1935  volumes.  Copies  (xcv,  1,074  pp.) 
'may  be  purchased  from  the  Superintendent  of 
Documents,  Government  Printing  Office,  Wash- 
■  ington  25,  D.  C,  for  $4.25  each. 


Documents  on  German 
Foreign  Policy 

Press  release  240  dated  May  4 

The  contemporary  tragedy  of  the  smaller  states 
of  Eastern  Europe  which  began  with  their  subjec- 
tion to  Nazi  domination,  is  the  main  theme  of  the 
volume  of  captured  German  diplomatic  documents 
released  on  May  16  by  the  Department  of  State. 
The  new  volume,  the  fifth  in  the  series  of  Docu- 
ments   on    German    Foreign   Policy    1918-19^6, 
Series  D  (1937-45),  Vol.  V,  being  published  coop- 
eratively by  the  American,  British,  and  French 
I  Governments,    bears    the    subtitle:    Poland,    the 
t  Balhans,  Latin  America,  the  Smaller  Powers,  and 
I  gives  an  account  of  the  growing  Nazi  political  and 
economic  pressure  on  these  states  from  1937  until 
,  March  1939. 

I  The  largest  single  group  of  documents  in  the 
I  volume  deals  with  Polish-German  relations  and 
I  with  the  futile  attempt  of  the  Poles  to  play  a  lone 
I  hand  between  Germany  on  the  one  side  and  Kussia 
I  on  the  other. 

Although  Hitler  pretended  for  a  long  time  to 
honor  the  Polish-German  Non-Aggression  Pact 
,  of  1934,  and  even  signed  a  new  declaration  on 
I  mutual  respect  for  the  rights  of  minorities  in 
,  November  1937,  these  attitudes  were  revealed  to 
!  have  been  designed  to  lull  the  Poles  while  he  pur- 
I  sued  German  designs  upon  Austria  and  Czecho- 
slovakia. 
I  Within  a  few  weeks  after  the  surrender  of 
I  Czechoslovakia  at  Munich  on  September  29,  1938, 
I   the  Poles  were  presented  with  the  German  de 


mands  for  the  return  of  Danzig  and  the  Polish 
Corridor.  The  full  record  on  the  continuing 
German  demands  is  now  published  for  the  fii'St 
time. 


•  Bulletin  of  July  28, 1952,  p.  162. 
June   I,   1953 


There  are  also  revealing  documents  on  the  full 
control  of  the  Free  City  of  Danzig  exercised  from 
Berlin  despite  the  city's  nominal  independence 
and  the  presence  of  the  League  of  Nations  Com- 
missioner there. 

A  somewhat  parallel  situation  is  uncovered  in 
the  Memel  Territory,  held  by  Lithuania  under  the 
Versailles  treaty,  and  the  documents  now  published 
show  the  way  in  which  pressure  was  brought  to 
bear  on  the  Lithuanians  in  March  1939  to  compel 
them  to  cede  the  territory  back  to  Germany. 

In  Hungary,  Rumania,  Bulgaria,  and  Yugo- 
slavia it  was  the  weakness  of  their  economies  and 
their  dependence  on  favorable  trade  agreements 
which  the  Germans,  with  their  politically  directed 
and  totalitarian  economy,  exploited  to  bring  these 
states  into  the  German  orbit.  The  threat  which 
the  active  German  minorities  controlled  from 
Berlin  constituted  to  the  internal  security  of  these 
states  was  also  effectively  employed. 

In  the  Scandinavian  states  and  in  the  smaller 
states  of  Western  Europe  the  principal  concern 
of  German  policy  is  shown  to  have  oeen  to  cut 
these  states  away  from  their  ties  to  the  League 
of  Nations  collective-security  system,  and  to  in- 
sure that  in  the  event  of  war  they  would  stand  in 
isolated  neutrality. 

At  the  other  end  of  Europe  the  Germans  were 
engaged  in  an  attempt  to  revive  their  relations 
with  Turkey,  which  had  been  their  ally  in  World 
War  I.  They  pressed  for  a  revision  in  their  favor 
of  the  Montreux  Convention  which  governed  the 
status  of  the  Dardanelles  and  made  every  effort 
to  promote  economic  relations.  The  hardheaded 
Turkish  diplomacy,  while  recognizing  the  value 
of  German  trade,  followed  a  cautious  course  polit- 
ically and  irritated  German  Foreign  Minister 
Eibbentrop  by  its  concern  not  to  antagonize  either 
Russia  or  the  Western  Powers. 

At  the  same  time  the  Germans  were  busy  with 
efforts  to  undermine  the  British  position  in  the 
Near  East  where  they  sought  to  combine  diplo- 
matic intrigue  with  trade  in  arms.  In  this  area 
the  problem  of  Jewish  Palestine  brought  a  serious 
split  within  the  German  Government  between  the 
Nazi  Party  fanatics  who  wished  to  oppose  at  all 
costs  the  growth  of  a  Jewish  state  and  those  who 
saw  economic  advantages  in  encouraging  Jewish 
emigration  there. 

In  this  period  the  Germans  established  closer 
contacts  with  Arab  nationalism,  and  the  Grand 
Mufti  entered  into  Germany's  political  calcula- 
tions. 

The  extent  of  German  interests  in  the  Middle 
East  is  also  illustrated  by  negotiations  with  Ibn 
Saud  resulting  in  the  establishment  of  a  German 
mission  in  Saudi  Arabia. 

The  repeated  and  futile  efforts  of  the  Western 
Powers  to  get  Germany  to  cooperate  in  interna- 
tional plans  to  assist  refugees,  promoted  espe- 
cially by  President  Roosevelt  and  the  American- 
led  Rublee  conrmittee,  are  also  detailed. 

793 


Documents  are  published  on  the  operations  of 
German  policy  in  Latin  America  where  the  some- 
what crude  attempts  to  make  use  of  the  local  Ger- 
man communities  led  to  sharp  conflicts  with  sev- 
eral governments.  A  striking  episode  is  that  cen- 
tering on  the  alleged  Nazi  complicity  in  the  re- 
volt against  the  Vargas  Government  in  May  1938, 
and  the  Brazilian  decision  that  the  German  Am- 
bassador, Karl  Ritter,  must  leave  the  country. 

The  Nazis  once  enjoyed  a  reputation  for  being 
masters  of  psychological  and  political  warfare, 
and  the  captured  documents  provide  a  unique  op- 
portunity for  the  examination  of  the  inner  ma- 
chinery of  a  system  profoundly  antagonistic  to 
our  own  and  operating  all  over  the  world. 

The  research  on  this  volume  has  been  directed 
by  the  following  editors-in-chief :  For  the  United 
States,  Bernadotte  E.  Schmitt;  for  the  United 
Kingdom,  Margaret  Lambert;  for  France,  Mau- 
rice Baumont.  Copies  may  be  purchased  from  the 
Superintendent  of  Documents,  Government  Print- 
ing Office,  Washington  25,  D.C.,  for  $3.25. 

Recent  Releases 

Double  Taxation,  Taxes  on  Income.  Treaties  and  Other 
International  Acts  Series  2596.    Pub.  4898.    30  pp.    10^. 

Convention  between  the  United  States  and  Finland — 
Signed  at  Washington  Mar.  3,  1952. 

Letter  From  a  Woman  of  East  Germany.  European  and 
British  Commonwealth  Series  40.    Pub.  4918.    4  pp.    5(t. 

This  letter  tells  what  our  efforts  to  penetrate  the 
Iron  Curtain  by  radio  have  come  to  mean  to  hundreds 
of  thousands  living  under  Soviet  domination. 

Naval  Mission  to  Peru,  Renewing  Agreement  of  July  31, 
1940,  as  Extended.  Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts 
Series  2504.     Pub.  4772.     2  pp.  50. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Peru — Signed  at  Washington  Jan.  18  and  Mar.  24, 
1952. 

Economic  Assistance,  Relief  and  Resettlement  of  Refu- 
gees, Extension  of  Projects.  Treaties  and  Other  Interna- 
tional Acts  Series  2497.     Pub.  4774.     3  pp.     5<t. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Israel— Signed  at  Tel  Aviv  Feb.  27,  1952. 

Mutual  Defense  Assistance,  Transfer  of  United  States 
Naval  Vessels  to  Argentina.  Treaties  and  Other  Interna- 
tional Acts  Series  2442.     Pub.  4784.     4  pp.     5^. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Argentina — Signed  at  Washington  Jan.  4  and  8,  1951. 

Mutual  Defense  Assistance,  Transfer  of  United  States 
Naval  Vessels  to  Brazil.  Treaties  and  Other  Interna- 
national  Acts  Series  2443.     Pub.  4785.     3  pp.     5^. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Brazil — Signed  at  Washington  Jan.  4,  1951. 

Mutual  Defense  Assistance,  Transfer  of  United  States 
Naval  Vessels  to  Chile.  Treaties  and  Other  Interna- 
tional Acts  Series  2444.     Pub.  4786.     4  pp.     50. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Chile — Signed  at  Washington  Jan.  4,  1951. 

794 


1 


United  States  Educational  Commission  in  the  Federa 
Republic  of  Germany.  Treaties  and  Other  Internationa 
Acts  Series  2553.     Pub.  4809.    21  pp.     100. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  the  Fed 
eral  Republic  of  Germany — Signed  at  Bonn  July  18 
1952. 

United  States  Educational  Foundation  in  the  Union  ol 
South  Africa.  Treaties  and  Other  International  Act' 
Series  2554.     Pub.  4810.     12  pp.     100. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  the  Unior 
of  South  Africa — Signed  at  Cape  Town  Mar.  26,  1952 

United  States  Educational  Foundation  in  Finland.  Trea 
ties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2555.  Pub  4811 
13  pp.     100. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Finland- 
Signed  at  Helsinki  July  2,  1952. 

Air  Transport  Services— Kimpo  Airport.  Treaties  anc 
Other  International  Acts  Series  2432.  Pub.  4827  2t 
pp.     100. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Korea- 
Signed  at  Seoul  Jan.  14,  1950  and  letter  signed  at 
Seoul  Apr.  3,  1950. 

Radio  Communications  Between  Amateur  Stations  on  Be- 
half of  Third  Parties.  Treaties  and  Other  International 
Acts  Series  2433.     Pub.  4828.     3  pp.     50. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Ecuador— Signed  at  Quito  Mar.  16  and  17,  1950. 

Point  4  Profiles.  Economic  Cooperation  Series  38.  Pub 
4859.     38pp.     150. 

This  booklet  tells  the  stories  of  four  who  came  to  the 
United  States  from  Iran,  Ecuador,  India,  and  Chile 
in  search  of  knowledge  and  skill,  and  of  some  Amer- 
icans who  worked  closely  with  them  both  here  and 
abroad. 

Point  4  and  Liberia,  Partners  in  Progress.  Economic 
Cooperation  Series  40.  Pub.  4899.  12pp.  Limited  dis- 
tribution. 

This  booklet  presents  a  picture  of  the  program  for 
and  the  progress  in  technical  cooperation  with  Li- 
beria. 

United  States  Efforts  Toward  Disarmament.  Interna- 
tional Organization  and  Conference  Series  III,  89  Pub 
4902.     42pp.     200. 

Report  to  the  President  by  the  Deputy  U.  S.  Repre- 
sentative on  the  United  Nations  Disarmament  Com- 
mission dated  January  12,  1953. 

Military  Assistance  to  Latin  America.  A  background 
summar.v.  Inter-American  Series  44.  Pub.  4917.  8pp., 
map.     50. 

This  pamphlet  provides  the  answers  to  many  ques- 
tions relating  to  cooperative  military  assistance  ar- 
rangements in  the  Western  Hemisphere. 

International  Information  Administration.  International 
Information  and  Cultural  Series  32.  Pub.  4939.  32pp., 
charts.     250. 

The  "psychological  activities"  of  the  U.S.  Govern- 
ment in  the  Cold  War,  covering  the  period  ending 
June  30,  1952,  are  covered  in  this  pamphlet. 

Mutual  Defense  Assistance.  Treaties  and  Other  Inter- 
national  Acts   Series  2496.     Pub.   4732.     13pp.     100. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Colombia— Signed  at  Bogota  Apr.  17,  1952. 


Departmenf  of  Slafe  Bulletin 


Sconomic  and  Technical  Cooperation.  Treaties  and  Other 
tnteruational  Acts  Series  249S.    Tub.  4830.    Spp.    10<f. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  the  Philip- 
pines— Signed  at  Manila  Apr.  27,  1951. 

Public    Roads    Program    in    the    Philippines,   Amending 
.'\greement  of  Feb.  14,  1947.     Treaties  and  Other  luterna- 
ional  Acts  Series  2499.     Pub.  4831.     Spp.     50. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
j  the  Philippines — Signed  at  Manila  Dec.  16  and  21, 
I        1949,  and  July  6  and  17,  1951. 

Technical  Cooperation,  Jordan  Program.  Treaties  and 
Dther  International  Acts  Series  250u.     Pub.  4765.     20i]p. 

lOt'. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  .Jordan — 
Signed  at  Amman  Feb.  12,  1952. 

Technical  Cooperation,  Agricultural  Program.  Treaties 
ind  Other  International  Acts  Series  2513.  Pub.  4723. 
jpp.     5(t. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  the 
Dominican  Republic— Signed  at  Ciudad  TrujiUo  Jan. 
I        7  and  22,  1952. 

Technical  Cooperation,  Cooperative  Program  of  Agricul- 
ture and  Livestocit,  Additional  Financial  Contributions. 

Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2514.  Pub. 
1737.     4pp.     54- 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Chile— Signed  at  Santiago  Jan.  30  and  Feb.  5,  1952. 

Education,  Cooperative  Program  in  Peru,  Additional 
Financial  Contributions.  Treaties  and  Other  Interna- 
tional Acts  Series  2515.     Pub.  4738.     4pp.     5^. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Peru — Signed  at  Lima  Jan.  17  and  Feb.  15,  1952. 

Economic  Cooperation,  Guaranties  Under  Public  Law  472, 
SOth  Congress,  as  Amended.  Treaties  and  Other  Inter- 
national Acts  Series  2516.     Pub.  4748.     4pp.     5(}. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Austria — Signed  at  Washington  Feb.  14  and  16.  1952. 

Aviation,  Military  Air  Transit  Rights.  Treaties  and 
Other  International  Acts  Series  2518.     Pub.  4750.     6pp. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Costa  Rica — Signed  at  San  Jos6  Feb.  19  and  25,  1952. 

Health  and  Sanitation,  Cooperative  Program  in  Hon- 
duras, Additional  Financial  Contributions.  Treaties  and 
Other  International  Acts  Series  2519.    Pub.  4752.    4pp.    5<}. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Honduras — Signed  at  Tegucigalpa  Jan.  9  and  Feb.  14, 
1952. 

Radio  Communications  Between  Amateur  Stations  on  Be- 
half of  Third  Parties.  Treaties  and  Other  International 
Acts  Series  2520.     Pub.  4755.     4pp.     5^. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Cuba— Dated  at  Habana  Sept.  17,  1951  and  Feb.  27, 
1952. 

Fur  Seals,  Research  Programs  in  the  North  Pacific  Ocean. 

Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2521.  Pub. 
4758.     9  pp.     100. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States, 
Canada,  and  Japan — Signed  at  Toljyo  Jan.  31  and  Feb. 
S,  1952,  and  at  Ottawa  Feb.  7  and  Mar.  1,  1952. 

Health  and  Sanitation,  Cooperative  Program  in  Vene- 
Jone   J,   7953 


zuela,  Amending  Agreement  of  Mar.  6  and  15, 1951.  Trea- 
ties and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2522.  Pub. 
4761.     3pp.     5(* 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Venezuela— Signed  at  Caracas  Feb.  14  and  Mar.  0, 
1952. 

Technical  Cooperation.  Treaties  and  Other  International 
Acts  Series  2524.     Pub.  4768.     9pp.     100. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Libya — 
Signed  at  Tripoli  Jan.  21,  1952. 

Regulation  of  Production  and  Marketing  of  Sugar,  Proto- 
col Prolonging  the  International  Agreement  of  May  6, 
1937.  Treaties  ami  Other  International  Acts  Series  2525. 
Pub.  4724.     6pp.     5«(. 

Agreement  between  tlie  United  States  and  Other 
Governments — Signed  at  London  Aug.  31,  1950. 

Technical  Cooperation.  Treaties  and  Other  International 
Acts  Series  2527.     Pub.  4713.     12pp.     100. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  El  Salva- 
dor— Signed  at  San  Salvador  Apr.  4,  1952. 

Passport  Visas.  Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts 
Series  252S.     Pub.  4734.     5pp.     5«(. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Monaco — Signed  at  Monaco  and  Nice  Mar.  31,  1952. 

Participation  of  Netherlands  Forces  in  United  Nations 
Operations  in  Korea.  Treaties  and  Other  International 
Acts  Series  2534.     Pub.  4776.     Spp.     50. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  the  Nether- 
lands— Signed  at  Washington  May  15,  1952. 

Participation  of  South  African  Forces  in  United  Nations 
Operations  in  Korea.  Treaties  and  Other  International 
Acts  Series  2535.     Pub.  4777.    3pp.     5^. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  the  Union 
of  South  Africa — Signed  at  Washington  June  24,  1952. 


Check  List  of  Department  of  State 
Press  Releases:  May  18-22, 1953 

Releases  may  be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  the 
Special  Assistant  for  Pre.«s  Relations,  Department 
of  State,  Washington  25,  D.C. 

Press  releases  issued  prior  to  May  18  which  ap- 
pear in  this  issue  of  the  Bulletin  are  Nos.  223  of 
Apr.  29,  239  of  May  4,  240  of  May  4,  260  of  May  14, 
262  of  May  13,  265  of  May  15,  and  266  of  May  15. 

Subject 

IiA  functions  combined 
Foreign  Relations  volume 
N.Y.  office  of  iPS  closed 
Morton  :  Accounting  to  taxpayers 
Johnson  :  Press   reports 
Merchant :  St.  Lawrence  Seaway 
Smith :  Palestine  refugee  program 
Smith:  Admission  of  migrants 
McDermott :  Ambassador    to    El    Sal- 
vador 
Military  assistance  to  Ethiopia 
Johnson  :  Faith  of  free  men 
Conference  on  foreign  policy 
Dulles:  All-India  radio  broadcast 

*Not  printed. 

tHeld  for  a  later  issue  of  the  Bulletin. 


No. 

Date 

270 

5/18 

t271 

5/18 

272 

.5/18 

273 

5/19 

274 

5/19 

t275 

5/20 

t276 

5/20 

*277 

5/21 

278 

5/21 

279 

5/22 

t2S0 

5/22 

281 

5/22 

282 

5/22 

795 


June  1,  1953 


Index 


Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  727 


Africa 

ETHIOPIA:   Military   assistance  to 785 

American  Principles 

An  expression  of  friendship  for  the  people  of 

India    (Dulles) 779 

Costs     of     survival     In     a     dangerous     world 

(Morton) 769 

U.S.  objectives  In  Western  Europe  (Knight)   .     .       773 

Value  of  technical  cooperation  In  Latin  America 

(Cabot)        780 

American  Republics 

BOLIVIA:  Monetary  Fund  announcements  .  .  783 
Eighth  Pan  American  Railway  Congress  .  .  .  787 
EL  SALVADOR:   Nomination  of  Michael  J.  Mc- 

Dermott 790 

Value  of  technical  cooperation  In  Latin  America 

(Cabot)        780 

Asia 

INDIA:  An    expression    of    friendship    for    the 

people  of  India   (Dulles) 779 

JAPAN:   Monetary  F\ind  announcements  .     .     .       783 

Australia 

Consular  office  at  Adelaide 792 

Canada 

Remedial  works  for  Niagara  Falls 783 

Communism 

The  continuing  need  for  vigilance  against  Soviet 

aggression   (Conant) 767 

Europe 

CZECHOSLOVAKIA:  Release  of  William  N.  Oatls 

from  prison 785 

GERMANY : 

Continuing  need  for  vigilance  against  Soviet 

aggression   (Conant) 767 

Documents  on  German  foreign  policy    .     .     .       793 
Ratiflcation   of  Edc  treaty,  contractual  con- 
ventions       784 

NETHERLANDS:  MSA  allotment  for  productiv- 
ity agreement 777 

NORWAY:  Consular  office  at  Bergen  ....  792 
Three-Power  meeting  to  be  held 778 

European  Defense  Community 

German  ratiflcation  of  Edc  treaty,  contractual 

conventions 784 

U.S.  objectives  In  Western  Europe  (Knight)    .     .       773 

Finance 

Monetary  Fund  announcements 783 

Foreign  Service 

Consular  offices 792 

Frederick   L.   Anderson   resigns   as  U.S.   deputy 

special    representative 792 

Nomination  of  Michael  J.  McDermott     ....       790 

Iceland 

Suspension  of  Msa  aid 778 

International  Information 

Release  of  WlUlam  N.  Oatls  from.  Czechoslovak 

prison 785 


International  Information  Administration 

Information  relating  to  the  Iia 790 

International  Meetings 

Calendar  of  Meetings 786 

Designations  of  Dreler.  Greenup,  and  Wheeler  790 

Three-Power  meeting  to  be  held 778 

Mutual  Security 

MsA  allotment  to  Netherlands  for  productivity 

agreement 777 

Suspension  of  Ms*  aid  to  Iceland 778 

U.S.  objectives  in  Western  Europe  (Knight)  .     .  773 

Presidential  Documents 

Three-Power  meeting  to  be  held 778 

Publications 

1935    documents   on   U.S.   policy   In   Near   East, 

Africa  released 792 

Documents  on  German  foreign  policy    ....  793 

Recent   releases 794 

State,  Department  of 

Department  to  sponsor  conference  on  U.S.  for- 
eign  policy 789 

Designations  of  Dreler,  Greenup,  and  Wheeler     .  790 

Information  relating  to  the  lu 790 

Nomination  of  Michael  J.  McDermott    ....  790 

Resignation  (Under) 790 

Taxation 

The   costs    of   survival    In    a   dangerous    world 

(Morton) 769 

Technical  Cooperation  and  Development 

The    value    of    technical    cooperation    In    Latin 

America    (Cabot) 780 

Transportation 

Eighth  Pan  American  Railway  Congress    .     .     .  787 

Treaty  Information 

German  ratiflcation  of  Edc  treaty,  contractual 

conventions 784 

Remedial  works  for  Niagara  Falls 783 

United  Nations 

Current  U.N.  bibliography :  selected  documents  .  788 
Name  Index 

Anderson,   Frederick   L 792 

Cabot,  John  M 780 

Conant,   James   B 767 

Dreler,    John   C 790 

Dulles,  Secretary 779 

Eisenhower,  President 778 

Farley,  William  T 787 

Greenup,  Julian  C 790 

Johnson,  Robert  L 790 

Knight,    Rldgway   B 773 

Linder,  Harold  F 790 

McDermott,    Michael    J 790 

Morton,  Thruston  B 769 

Oatis,  William  N 785 

Smith,  Walter  Bedell 784 

Wheeler,  Richard  S 790 

White,   Lincoln 785 


D.  S.  •OVERNHEMT  ntHITIHC  OFFICE,  l»>9 


tJAe/  zlleha/yl^enl/  /(w  Cna(e^ 


J.  XXVIII,  No.  728 
Ju,.?  8,  1953 


REVIEW  OF  THE  AUSTRIAN  TREATY  QUESTION     .    805 


REQUEST  FOR  EXTENSION  OF  PALESTINE  REF- 
UGEE PROGRAM  •  Statement  by  Acting  Secretary 
Smith 822 


SUPPORT    FOR    U.    S.    PARTICIPATION    IN    ST. 

LAWRENCE  SEAWAY  •  Statement  by  Assistant  Secre- 
tary Merchant 824 


LAUNCHING   THE    EUROPEAN    COAL    AND    STEEL 

COMMUNITY  •  Article  by  Raymond  Vernon      ....     799 


For  index  see  back  cover 


Boston  Public  Library 
Superintendent  of  Documents 

JUN  2 1 1953 


M 


'le 


^,.^,yr..  bulletin 


Vol.  XXVIII.  No.  728  •  Publication  5072 
June  8,  1953 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents 

U.S.  Government  Printing  Office 

Washington  26,  D.O. 

Peick: 

82  Issues,  domestic  $7.60,  foreign  $10.25 

Single  copy,  20  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has 
been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Budget  (January  22, 1962). 

Note:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  DEPiETMKNx 
OF  State  Bulletin  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  BULLETH\, 
a  weekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publications, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  with  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  tvork  of  tlie  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETIN  includes 
selected  press  releases  on  foreign  pol- 
icy issued  by  the  White  House  and 
the  Department,  and  statements  and 
addresses  made  by  the  President  and 
by  the  Secretary  of  State  and  other 
officers  of  the  Department,  as  well  as 
special  articles  on  various  phases  of 
international  affairs  and  the  func- 
tions of  the  Department.  Informa- 
tion is  included  concerning  treaties 
and  international  agreements  to 
tchich  the  United  States  is  or  may 
become  a  party  and  treaties  of  gen- 
eral international  interest. 

Publications  of  tlie  Department,  as 
well  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


Launching  the  European  Coal  and  Steel  Community 


hy  Raymond  Vernon 


Americans  are  prone  to  draw  a  parallel  between 
the  problems  of  merging  the  nations  of  Western 
Europe  into  a  federation  and  the  problems  which 
the  13  American  States  faced  in  forming  a  Federal 
Government.  Among  Europeans,  this  analogy 
never  fails  to  evoke  automatic  dissent.  Apart 
from  pointing  out  how  heterogeneous  Western 
Europe  is  in  culture,  language,  and  outlook, 
Europeans  argue  that  the  difficulties  of  merging 
a  collection  of  mature,  industrialized  states  into 
a  common  entity  in  the  20th  century  are  far  more 
complex  than  were  those  of  merging  the  under- 
developed agricultm-al-mercantile  economies  in 
America  nearly  two  centuries  ago. 

The  issue  now  is  being  put  to  the  test — not  a 
full-scale  test,  perhaps,  but  one  which  should  pro- 
vide glinxmerings,  at  least,  of  the  problems  with 
which  a  full-scale  federation  would  have  to  deal. 
For  the  ratification  of  the  Treaty  Constitut- 
ing the  European  Coal  and  Steel  Community, 
the  nations  of  France,  Italy,  Germany,  Belgium, 
the  Netherlands,  and  Luxembourg  stand  com- 
mitted to  try  to  merge  their  coal  and  steel  indus- 
tries into  a  common  market.  The  implications 
of  this  commitment  need  some  elaboration. 

We  begin  with  six  sovereign  nations.  Each  has 
its  own  tariff  system  under  which  goods  coming 
into  the  country  are  taxed.  Each  regulates  the 
amount  of  goods  which  comes  in  and  flows  out 
of  the  country,  using  a  variety  of  devices  for  the 
purpose.  Some  subsidize  certain  gi-oups  of  indus- 
tries and  certain  types  of  consimiers  in  accordance 
with  their  own  conception  of  national  equity  and 
national  interest.  Each  has  its  own  currency  and 
each  regulates  the  uses  that  its  nationals  can  make 
of  the  currencies  of  other  countries.  Each  taxes 
its  enterprises  and  their  sales  in  accordance  with 
its  own  national  system.  Each  has  a  state-owned 
or  state-regulated  transport  system,  carefully  de- 
veloped in  response  to  the  political  pressures  and 
economic  requirements  of  its  own  national  econ- 
omy. Each  has  its  own  social-security  systems 
and  its  own  limitations  on  the  movement  of  for- 
eign labor  into  the  country. 


Wliat  must  emerge  after  a  5-year  period  of 
transition  and  adjustment  is  an  economy  for  coal, 
steel,  iron  ore,  and  scrap  which  operates  without 
national  distinctions.  Products  moving  within 
the  common  market  are  not  to  be  subject  to  tariffs. 
Products  are  to  be  priced  without  regard  to  the 
nationality  of  the  buyer  and  without  other  forms 
of  discrimination.  Nationals  of  one  country  buy- 
ing these  products  in  another  need  have  no  wor- 
ries about  obtaining  the  necessary  currencies. 
When  the  products  are  shipped  on  a  railroad  or 
barge  line,  the  fact  that  they  are  destined  for  an- 
other country  in  the  common  market  is  to  have 
no  effect  upon  the  freight  rate  which  the  carrier 
charges.  When  the  products  are  scarce  and  some 
system  of  allocation  is  called  for,  the  available 
supplies  are  to  be  shared  among  countries  in  the 
common  market  without  regard  to  nationality. 
Skilled  coal  or  steel  workers  are  to  move  freely 
across  the  national  boundaries  of  the  six  countries. 

The  Approach  to  the  Problem 

The  gap  to  be  spanned  in  moving  from  the  pre- 
treaty  situation  of  six  national  markets  to  the  even- 
tual system  of  one  common  market  is  sobering 
in  its  magnitude.  First  of  all,  there  are  the  differ- 
ences in  national  practices  and  national  laws  to 
be  eradicated.  Controls  exist  in  some  countries 
but  not  in  others.  Competition  exists  in  some 
areas  but  not  in  others.  Habits  of  work,  condi- 
tions of  investment,  availability  of  materials  all 
vary  greatly  in  the  six  countries. 

But  perhaps  the  more  important  problem  is  one 
which  would  have  existed  even  if  conditions  in 
the  national  markets  of  each  of  the  six  countries 
had  been  the  same.  This  is  the  possibility  that 
the  elimination  of  national  barriers — tariffs,  quan- 
titative restrictions,  labor  restrictions,  and  the 
like — might  confront  protected  national  industries 
with  such  new  competitive  conditions  that  great 
shifts  would  have  to  take  place  in  the  location  and 
activities  of  the  affected  industries. 

Faced  with  these  difficulties,  the  planners  of 
the  Community  had  to  decide  whether  to  take  a 


June  8,   1953 


799 


great  step  into  the  unknown — to  establish  such 
uniform  rules  for  the  common  market  as  circum- 
stances seemed  to  require,  to  abolish  all  national 
barriers  and  discriminations,  and  then  to  let  the 
chips  fall,  without  making  any  efforts  to  smooth 
the  transition.  This  approach  would  have 
avoided  the  possibility  that  devices  initially  ap- 
plied to  deal  with  transitional  difficulties — com- 
promises with  the  common  market  concept — might 
become  a  permanent  part  of  the  common  market. 
"Rien  est  plus  permanent,'"  say  the  wise  cynics, 
"que  la  provisoire." 

There  was  a  great  deal  to  be  said,  however, 
against  such  a  leap  into  the  dark.  Suppose,  as 
some  technicians  dourly  predicted,  this  simple 
course  led  to  a  great  upheaval  in  the  coal  and  steel 
markets  of  the  six  countries.  Suppose  that  here 
and  there  prices  were  to  rise  sharply,  or  to  drop 
suddenly;  suppose  scarcities  were  to  develop  or 
unemployment  were  to  result.  However  salutary, 
or  indeed  essential,  these  shocks  might  be  to  the 
ultimate  creation  of  a  common  market,  their  im- 
mediate effect  might  be  to  create  an  extreme  dis- 
taste for  the  common  market  concept  among  the 
nationals  of  the  six  countries.  This,  in  turn,  could 
adversely  affect  the  larger  projects  of  six-country 
integration  still  in  various  stages  of  creation,  such 
as  the  European  Defense  Community,  the  Euro- 
pean Political  Community,  and  the  Dutch  project 
for  a  full  customs  union.  A  choice  had  to  be 
made  between  these  two  sets  of  considerations. 

The  choice  was  foreshadowed  by  the  provisions 
of  the  treaty  itself,  and,  particularly,  of  the  re- 
lated Convention  Containing  the  Transitional  Pro- 
visions. "The  purpose  of  the  present  Convention," 
according  to  section  1  of  the  convention,  "is  to  set 
forth  the  measures  necessary  for  the  creation  of 
the  common  market  and  the  progressive  adapta- 
tion of  production  to  the  new  conditions  in  which 
it  will  take  place.  .  .  ."  [Italics  supplied.]  Sec- 
tion 24  of  the  convention  is  mucli  more  pointed. 
It  states  with  regard  to  coal  production: 

It  is  recognized  that  precautionary  mechanisms  are 
necessary  durinfc  the  transition  period  to  avoid  sudden 
and  harmful  shifts  in  production.  These  precautionary 
mechanisms  should  take  into  account  the  situations 
existing  at  the  time  the  common  market  is  created. 

Furthermore,  if  it  should  appear  that  harmful  and 
abrupt  price  increases  might  occur  in  one  or  more  regions, 
precautions  should  be  taken  to  avoid  such  effects. 

Section  29  contains  equally  cautionary  observa- 
tions as  regards  steel. 

In  keeping  with  this  approach,  the  convention 
allows  for  the  use  of  various  devices  and  the  main- 
tenance of  various  situations,  during  part  or  all 
of  an  initial  transitional  period  of  5  years,  which 
would  represent  aberrations  from  the  common 
market.  The  approach  is  that  of  feeling  one's  way 
gingerly  down  a  long,  dark  corridor,  while  im- 
pelled to  reach  its  end  within  a  given  period  of 
time.  It  may  be  useful  to  see  specifically  how  this 
approach  has  been  applied. 


Coal  and  Steel  Community:  First 
Important  Step  Toward  United  Europe 

By  the  setting  up  and  actual  working  of  this  new 
institution  a  first  important  step  toward  the  crea- 
tion of  a  United  Europe  has  materialized.  There,  in 
the  framework  of  democratic  institutions  of  a  Ind- 
eral character  with  a  Parliamentary  Assembly  and  a 
Court  of  Justice,  Belgians,  Dutchmen,  Frenchmen, 
Germans,  Italians  and  Luxembourgers  are  as  Eu- 
ropeans, not  as  citizens  of  their  respective  countries, 
taking  decisions  which  are  directly  applicable  in  the 
territories  of  these  six  nations.  In  the  field  of  coal 
and  steel  the  barriers,  which  have  so  long  divided 
Europe,  have  been  removed,  so  that  those  basic 
materials  enjoy  a  single  market  of  1.55  million  con- 
sumers like  that  of  the  United  States. 

At  the  request  of  the  six  Governments,  members 
of  the  Parliamentary  Assembly  of  the  coal  and  steel 
community  have  worked  out  the  project  of  a  consti- 
tution which  will  create  a  European  Parliament 
elected  by  the  people  and  an  Executive  responsible 
to  it.  This  is  the  political  authority  under  which 
the  European  Army  would  also  be  placed. 

President  Eisenhower,  while  in  Europe,  watched 
with  keen  interest  the  efforts  to  work  out  the  first 
steps  toward  European  federation.  His  experience 
there  convinces  him  that  the  uniting  of  Europe  is  an 
historic  necessity  for  the  peace  and  prosperity  of 
Europeans  and  of  the  world. 

The  United  States  is  following  these  vitally  im- 
portant undertakings,  of  which  the  coal  and  steel 
community  is  actually  proving  the  practicability, 
with  great  interest. 

— Statement  issued  on  June  S  hy  the  White 
House  during  a  visit  to  Washington  hy  Jean 
Monnet  and  Franz  Etzel,  President  and  Vice  Presi- 
dent, respectively,  of  the  High  Authority  of  the 
European  Coal  and  Steel  Community,  and  Dirk 
Spierenburg,  one  of  its  members. 


The  Common  Coal  Market 

On  February  10,  1953,  exactly  on  schedule, 
tariffs  and  quantitative  limitations  on  the  move- 
ment of  coal  among  the  six  countries  were  re- 
moved. As  a  corollary,  coal  ceased  to  figure  on 
that  date  as  an  item  in  the  carefully  balanced  bi- 
lateral trade  agreements  which  ordinarily  condi- 
tion the  movement  of  goods  between  the  countries 
in  the  Community;  previously,  coal  had  figured 
as  a  major  lever  in  such  bargains  and  as  a  major 
element  in  political  maneuvering  among  the  six 
countries. 

As  foreseen  in  the  convention,  a  few  exceptions 
to  the  general  pattern  of  the  common  market  were 
permitted.  Belgium,  for  example,  was  allowed  to 
retain  the  quantitative  restrictions  necessary  to 
prevent  the  more  efficient  mines  in  other  countries 
from  reducing  Belgium's  output  too  rapidly.  In 
addition,  a  transitional  system  was  set  up  under 
"which  the  more  efficient  mines  of  Germany  and  the 
Netherlands  are  taxed  in  order  to  subsidize  the  less 
efficient  mines  of  Belgium  and  Italy.  Production 
in  the  former  two  countries  is  now  taxed  at  the 
rate  of  1.1  percent  of  its  gross  value  in  order  to 
raise  half  of  the  33  million  dollars  annually  which 


800 


Deparfment  of  State  Bulletin 


the  High  Authority  estimates  is  needed  to  ease 
the  shock  for  Belgian  and  Italian  mines;  the  other 
half  of  the  subsidy,  in  accordance  with  the  conven- 
tion's provisions,  will  be  supplied  by  the  Belgian 
and  Italian  Governments. 

This  is  only  one  of  several  transitional  pain- 
easing  systems  of  subsidy  which  have  been  au- 
thorized. The  French  Government  has  been 
allowed  for  the  time  being  to  continue  an  internal 
system  of  levies  and  subsidies  which  had  pre- 
viously existed  among  the  various  coal  basins 
througliout  France.  The  general  purpose  of  these 
levies  and  subsidies  is  to  keep  in  business  for  the 
present  some  of  the  basins  of  France  which  other- 
wise might  have  been  shut  down  by  the  competi- 
tion of  the  more  efficient  basins  in  other  parts  of 
France.  This  system  is  to  be  supplemented  for 
the  time  being,  as  it  has  in  the  past,  by  a  system 
of  subsidies  on  coking  coal  and  coke  brought  into 
France  from  other  parts  of  the  common  market, 
in  order  to  bring  the  price  of  these  supplies  down 
to  the  French  price. 

The  drift  of  the  High  Authority's  thinking  in 
authorizing  the  limited  continuation  of  some  of 
these  subsidies  is  illustrated  by  its  letter  to  the 
French  Government,  on  the  continuation  of  sub- 
sidies on  imported  coking  coal.  France  imports 
most  of  her  coking  coal  from  Germany ;  at  the  time 
of  the  establishment  of  the  common  market,  its 
sale  was  being  subsidized  by  about  $4  a  ton.  In  3 
or  4  years,  the  High  Authority  pointed  out  to  the 
French  Government,  the  price  of  coking  coal  in 
France  is  bound  to  be  appreciably  lower  than  it  is 
today.  This  will  occur,  according  to  the  High 
Authority,  because  of  (1)  an  eventual  lowering 
of  German  national  transport  rates  for  coal,  which 
is  to  take  place  in  the  next  2  years,  and  (2)  grad- 
ual expansion  in  the  use  of  coal  from  the  Lorraine 
and  Saar  areas  which  is  in  process.  In  these 
circumstances,  the  High  Authority  thought  it  ad- 
visable to  avoid  the  sharp  rise  in  French  prices 
of  coking  coal  which  would  follow  on  discontinua- 
tion of  the  import  subsidy,  if  the  rise  is  eventually 
to  be  followed  by  a  decline  of  even  greater  magni- 
tude. Accordingly,  the  import  subsidy  is  con- 
tinued under  certain  specified  limitations. 

Still  another  type  of  subsidy  appears  in  the 
interim  mechanisms  of  the  common  market. 
These  are  the  subsidies  maintained  by  various  na- 
tional governments  in  favor  of  one  group  or 
another  of  coal  consumers.  The  German  system 
illustrates  this  sort  of  arrangement,  and  the  High 
Authority's  response  thereto  is  typical  of  its  re- 
action to  such  arrangements. 

One  of  the  rules  of  the  single  market,  it  will 
be  recalled,  is  that  any  seller  of  coal  must  charge 
the  same  price  of  all  buyers  within  the  common 
market,  whatever  the  nationality  of  the  buyers. 
For  Germany  this  meant  the  end  of  a  system  of 
"double-pricing,"  that  is,  charging  German  buy- 
ers one  price  and  buyers  of  other  nationalities  a 


higher  price  for  coal  in  periods  of  shortage. 
These  double  prices  were  eliminated  largely  by 
increasing  prices  to  German  buyers,  thereby  put- 
ting them  on  a  par  with  prices  to  French  and 
other  buyers  in  the  common  market.  However, 
this  decision,  standing  by  itself,  would  have  meant 
price  rises  for  many  German  consumers  which 
"for  economic  and  social  reasons"  the  German 
Government  felt  ought  not  to  be  borne  by  all 
classes  of  consumers  alike.  Accordingly,  the  Ger- 
man Government  proposed  that  some  coal  users, 
including  shippers,  deep-sea  fishernien,  house- 
holders, and  gas  and  electric  power  stations,  should 
be  exempted  from  the  price  rise  for  the  time  being; 
the  loss  in  revenue  resulting  from  the  exemption 
would  be  borne  by  the  German  mines. 

The  High  Authority  accepted  this  system  for 
domestic  consumers  and  deep-sea  fishermen,  but 
not  for  other  consumers.  And  the  High  Author- 
ity imposed  one  major  reservation  :  These  reduced 
prices  must  be  made  available  by  the  German 
mines  to  consumers  in  these  privileged  classes  in 
any  part  of  the  common  market,  whatever  their 
nationality  might  be. 

Tied  in  closely  with  the  question  whether  to 
maintain  subsidies  for  various  producer  and  con- 
sumer groups  was  the  question  whether  to  continue 
to  set  price  ceilings  on  sales  of  coal.  The  High 
Authority  was  faced  with  the  fact  that  ceilings 
were  in  eifect  in  all  the  member  states  but  could 
not  be  sure  whether  such  ceilings  were  actually 
preventing  substantial  rises  in  prices  or  whether 
they  were  only  a  means  by  which  sellers  were  able 
to  avoid  competition  in  the  fixing  of  prices.  In 
any  event,  the  prevailing  philosophy  of  the  con- 
vention was  controlling,  and  the  High  Authority 
decided  that  price  ceilings  on  coal  must  continue 
for  the  time  being. 

The  High  Authority,  in  determining  its  new 
price  ceilings,  acted  on  the  theory  that  the  new 
ceilings  should  serve  as  a  transition  between  the 
national  price  ceilings  which  heretofore  had  ex- 
isted and  a  system  of  prices  in  the  common  market 
which  made  sense  in  terms  of  the  common-market 
concept.  At  the  same  time,  the  High  Authority 
was  also  anxious  to  avoid  too  explicit  a  system  of 
price  fixing,  that  is  to  say,  a  system  so  detailed  as 
to  specify  the  price  for  each  of  the  many  types 
and  grades  of  coal  and  coke  produced  in  the  com- 
mon market.  Accordingly,  the  prices  enumerated 
for  many  of  the  basins  are  stated  in  terms  of  aver- 
age prices  for  major  classes  of  coal  such  as  anthra- 
cite, coke,  briquettes,  and  so  forth;  prices  for 
specific  types  are  enumerated  only  with  respect  to 
categories  for  which  there  is  believed  to  be  a  real 
shortage,  such  as  coking  fines. 

Taken  as  a  whole,  the  system  which  the  High 
Authority  has  set  up  for  the  sale  of  coal  in  the 
common  market  does  not  permit  unregulated  com- 
petition to  operate,  nor  does  it  allow  the  principle 
of  nondiscriminatory  treatment  to  have  full  sway. 


June  8,   1953 


801 


Yet  it  represents  movement,  substantial  move- 
ment, away  from  the  regime  of  national  markets 
which  preceded  it.  Discrimination  based  on  na- 
tionality is  gone,  for  all  practical  purposes,  both 
in  coal  sales  and  in  coal  haulage.  The  subsidiza- 
tion of  relatively  inefficient  producers  is  still  wide- 
ly prevalent,  though  perhaps  a  little  less  so  than 
before  February  10.  The  subsidization  of  privi- 
leged classes  of  consumers  continues  to  be  perva- 
sive, although  again  the  total  subsidization  is 
probably  less  than  it  was  before. 

But  there  has  been  movement  in  the  direction 
which  most  observers  would  agree  is  needed  to 
increase  the  efficiency  and  productivity  of  the 
coal  industry  of  the  six  countries.  Tlie  critical 
question  is  not  so  much  what  the  state  of  the  com- 
mon market  is  today  but  the  speed  and  direction 
in  which  the  common  market  is  moving.  The 
direction,  at  least,  is  reasonably  clear;  the  speed 
has  yet  to  be  determined. 

The  Common  Steel  Market 

The  approach  of  the  European  Coal  and  Steel 
Community  toward  the  common  steel  market  is 
rather  different  in  some  important  respects  from 
its  approach  with  respect  to  the  coal  market.  Coal 
is  a  mineral;  it  is  mined  where  it  is  found.  The 
locus  of  steel  production,  on  the  other  hand,  de- 
pends much  more  on  manmade  decisions.  As  a 
result,  the  Community's  approach  to  the  organiza- 
tion of  the  steel  market  has  been  a  great  deal 
closer  to  the  concept  of  a  simple,  competitive  en- 
terprise system  and  has  not  reflected  the  same 
tendencies  toward  the  regulatory  administration 
of  a  natural  resource  as  have  been  manifested  with 
respect  to  the  coal  market. 

The  common  steel  market  came  into  being  on 
May  1,  1953,  3  weeks  later  than  the  earliest  date 
on  which  the  market  could  have  opened  under 
the  terms  of  the  convention.  On  that  date,  tar- 
iffs, quantitative  restrictions,  and  discriminatory 
pricing  with  respect  to  steel  were  abolished  within 
the  single  market.  As  in  the  case  of  coal,  steel 
ceased  to  figure  in  bilateral  trade  bargains  be- 
tween any  of  the  six  countries. 

The  Community  permitted  two  aberrations  from 
the  concept  of  the  common  market,  however,  both 
of  which  had  been  recognized  in  the  convention. 
The  first  of  these  arises  from  the  fact  that  the  six 
countries  do  not  impose  exactly  the  same  tariffs  on 
steel  imported  from  countries  outside  the  common 
market.  The  Benelux  steel  tariffs,  by  and  large, 
are  very  much  lower  than  those  of  France,  and 
French  steel  tariffs  are  somewhat  lower  than  those 
of  Germany  and  Italy.  As  a  result,  until  the  proc- 
ess of  "harmonization"  of  these  tariffs  has  been 
completed,  there  is  a  risk  that  persons  in  the  com- 
mon market  who  want  to  buy  British  steel,  for 
example,  would  import  the  steel  through  the  Bel- 
gian customs  even  though  the  eventual  destination 
of  the  steel  might  be  Germany  or  Italy. 


To  deal  with  this  problem,  the  Benelux  countries 
will  apply  the  Benelux  rate  only  to  a  limited 
amount  of  steel  imports,  representing  the  total 
which  Benelux  could  have  been  expected  to  im- 
port in  satisfaction  of  its  domestic  demand;  the 
excess  over  that  amount  will  be  subject  to  higher 
duty,  representing  the  French  tariff  rate  appli- 
cable to  the  same  product. 

The  second  aberration  has  to  do  with  the  steel 
industry  of  Italy.  This  is  a  relatively  small  in- 
dustry, handicapped  by  high  costs  of  raw  materi- 
als and  modest  size.  This  industry  is  to  have  the 
benefit  of  a  gi-adual,  rather  than  an  abrupt,  im- 
mersion in  the  cold  waters  of  competition.  The 
tariffs  now  protecting  that  industry  are  to  be 
eliminated  by  stages  over  the  5-year  period,  in- 
stead of  all  at  once. 

Apart  from  these  special  provisions,  the  High 
Authority  possesses  during  the  transitional  period 
some  rather  extraordinary  powers  by  which  it 
could  intervene  in  the  functioning  of  the  common 
market  through  the  application  of  internal  re- 
strictions. So  far,  at  any  rate,  there  is  no  indica- 
tion that  the  High  Authority  proposes  to  do  so. 

Perhaps  the  most  difficult  problem  which  arose 
in  connection  with  the  opening  of  the  steel  market 
is  one  which  illustrates  a  fundamental  difficulty 
governing  all  the  operations  of  the  European  Coal 
and  Steel  Community — the  difficulty  of  attempt- 
ing partially  to  integrate  the  economies  of  a  group 
of  modern  states  while  trying  to  maintain  six 
distinct  national  economies  in  the  unintegrated 
area. 

The  problem  stems  from  the  fact  that  firms  in 
the  common  market  are  required  to  charge  non- 
discriminatory prices  to  buyers  in  the  common 
market,  irrespective  of  the  buyers'  nationality. 
Wliile  simple  in  concept,  the  application  of  the 
principle  presents  knotty  problems,  particularly 
because  of  the  impact  of  national  tax  systems. 
Take  the  case  of  a  German  firm  selling  to  a  French 
buyer:  Should  the  German  firm  quote  a  ]irice 
which  includes  German  sales  taxes,  even  though 
such  taxes  are  refunded  by  the  German  Govern- 
ment on  export  sales  ? 

After  much  soul-searching,  the  answer  which 
the  High  Authority  provided  was  "no."  The 
reasoning  behind  this  conclusion  was  that  a  buyer 
located  in  France,  in  choosing  as  between  a  French 
and  a  German  seller,  ought  to  be  choosing  between 
sellers  who  were  carrying  the  same  sales  tax  bur- 
den; the  German  seller  in  the  French  market, 
therefore,  ought  to  be  subject  to  the  French  sales 
tax,  not  the  German  sales  tax. 

But  this  conclusion,  self-evident  as  it  may  seem, 
was  not  an  easy  one  to  reach.  The  fact  is  that  the 
Germans  have  a  fairly  low  sales  tax,  whereas  the 
French  have  a  much  larger  sales  tax.  The  French, 
on  the  other  hand,  have  a  fairly  low  tax  on  cor- 
porate profits,  whereas  the  Germans  have  rela- 
tively high  taxes  on  the  profits  and  property  of 


802 


Department  of  State  Bulletin  [ 


corporations.  French  firms  selling  in  Germany, 
therefore,  bear  only  the  low  corporate  taxes  of 
France  and  the  low  sales  taxes  of  Germany,  while 
German  firms  in  the  French  market  bear  high  cor- 
porate sales  taxes  and  high  French  sales  taxes. 
'  The  High  Authority's  decision  therefore  presented 
obvious  problems  of  equity,  as  the  High  Authority 
itself  explicitly  recognized ;  yet  it  seemed  to  be 
the  only  answer  compatible  with  nondiscrimina- 
tory noimational  pricing. 

Here  we  have  in  concrete  form  an  illustration 
of  the  pervasive  difficulties  of  projects  of  partial 
integration.  Problems  of  this  sort  will  never 
realfy  be  answered  satisfactorily,  nor  will  any 
answer  really  be  a  final  solution,  as  long  as  national 
governments  are  free  by  fiscal  and  other  means 
substantially  to  influence  the  operations  of  enter- 
prises in  the  common  market. 

Each  product  in  the  common  market  has  pre- 
sented some  unique  problem  for  the  High  Au- 
thority and  has  tested  its  philosophy  and  ap- 
proach in  one  way  or  another.  In  the  case  of 
iron  ore,  the  High  Authority  felt  that  the  slight 
disturbance  that  might  result  from  the  institution 
of  the  coumion  market  was  worth  risking.  Ac- 
cordingly, the  free  market  for  iron  ore  went  into 
eflect  without  any  transitional  arrangements  to 
ease  the  shock,  and  without  any  limitation  upon 
the  movement  of  iron  ore  within  the  common  mar- 
ket. One  of  the  more  obvious  effects  of  this 
arrangement  was  the  elimination  of  the  discrim- 
inatory pricing  for  iron  ore  which  had  favored 
French  steel  firms  over  foreign  firms.  The  High 
Authority's  official  report  on  this  step  observes 
that  "the  effect  of  the  rise  in  prices  to  French 
clients  has  only  been  a  limited  one,  because  of 
the  cordial  relations  existing  between  the  mines 
and  the  consumers  in  general,"  presmnably  a  dip- 
lomatic way  of  acknowledging  the  existence  of 
some  corporate  ties  between  the  French  steel  plants 
and  the  sources  of  their  ore. 

The  market  for  steel  scrap  also  presented  some 
difficult  decisions  for  the  High  Authority.  Steel 
scrap,  unlike  coal,  steel,  and  iron  ore,  is  a  business 
with  a  great  many  more  sellers  than  buyers.  In 
some  of  the  national  markets  comprising  the  Com- 
munity, notably  those  of  Germany  and  Italy,  scrap 
dealers  had  joined  together  in  cartel-like  organi- 
zations, the  function  of  which  was  to  fix  the  price 
and  amount  of  scrap  coming  on  the  market.  As 
tlie  date  of  the  opening  of  the  common  market 
approached,  the  French  considered  setting  up  an 
organization  of  this  sort  to  parallel  the  existing 
organizations  in  Germany  and  Italy.  They  ap- 
parently abandoned  this  idea,  however,  when  the 
High  Authority  decided  that  the  German  and 
Italian  organizations  were  inconsistent  with  the 
treaty  and  must  be  dissolved. 

Having  dissolved  these  cartel-like  organiza- 
tions— a  step  with  few  precedents  on  the  Euro- 
pean scene — the  High  Authority  then  authorized 
the  operation  until  the  end  of  the  current  year 

June  8,   7953 


of  a  new  scrap  organization  covering  all  six  coun- 
tries. This  organization,  which  is  conceived  of 
as  a  transitional  arrangement,  is  to  confine  its 
actual  operations  to  the  import  of  steel  scrap  and 
is  not  to  be  involved  in  scrap  transactions  origi- 
nating within  the  common  market.  The  general 
theory  is  that  the  operation  of  this  organization, 
aided  by  an  equalization  fund,  will  prevent  the 
price  of  the  imported  scrap,  which  is  the  highest- 
priced  scrap  used  in  the  common  market,  from 
setting  the  price  for  all  scrap  in  the  common 
market. 

Whether  this  will  prove  to  be  the  case  remains 
to  be  seen.  But  the  more  important  test  which 
this  experiment  represents  is  whether  it  is  possible 
for  an  organization  to  confine  itself  to  the  essen- 
tially benign  function  for  which  the  organization 
was  conceived  without  eventually  engaging  also 
in  the  fixing  of  prices,  the  allocation  of  supply, 
the  suppression  of  new  participants  in  the  scrap 
business,  and  other  undesirable  practices.  This 
is  a  problem  of  which  the  High  Authority  is 
clearly  acutely  conscious. 

Future  Prospects 

Although  the  common  market  has  hardly  begun 
to  function,  it  is  not  too  early  to  draw  a  few  tenta- 
tive conclusions  regarding  the  market  and  its  in- 
stitutions. First  of  all,  the  European  Coal  and 
Steel  Community  seems  to  be  acting  as  its  creators 
conceived  it  should  act,  not  as  a  captive  creature  of 
six  national  governments  behaving  in  accordance 
with  the  negotiated  settlements  of  the  six,  but 
rather  as  a  distinct  government  operating  under 
the  constitution  which  created  it — responsive  to 
the  governments  of  the  six  member  countries  but 
distinguishable  from  them.  A  shift  in  this  at- 
titude'on  the  part  of  the  Community  could  alter 
basically  the  nature  of  its  decisions.  More  im- 
portant, such  a  shift  could  reduce  the  attractive 
force  of  the  Community  as  a  nucleus  of  further 
European  integration. 

Second,  it  is  apparent  that  the  kind  of  market 
that  is  coming  into  being  under  the  Community's 
aegis  is  a  peculiarly  European  institution,  reflect- 
ing ideas  and  habits  of  administration  somewhat 
different  from  our  own.  So  fai-,  it  represents  a 
mixture  of  competition,  state  intervention  in  favor 
of  certain  groups,  state  acceptance  of  the  responsi- 
bility of  easing  transitional  shocks,  and  participa- 
tion by  nongovernmental  groups  in  the  apparatus 
of  administration. 

Finally,  there  are  signs  of  real  movement  in 
the  organization  of  the  common  market  away  from 
some  of  the  restricting  practices  and  habits  which 
dominated  national  markets  toward  a  freer  and 
more  vigorous  regime.  For  example,  the  strength 
of  the  cartels  within  the  common  market  can  be 
assumed  to  be  much  lower,  for  the  present,  than 
the  strength  they  possessed  when  operating  in  six 
national  markets,  and  there  are  adequate  powers 

803 


within  the  Community  to  keep  such  cartels  weak, 
if  the  Community  determines  to  exercise  such  pow- 
ers. Moreover,  so  far  as  one  can  judge,  the  regu- 
lations imposed  by  the  Community  on  the  common 
market  seem  on  the  whole  to  be  less  pervasive  than 
the  national  regulations  they  replaced,  leaving 
more  room  for  the  play  of  market  forces.  But 
perhaps  the  most  important  result  of  all  has  been 
the  elimination  of  coal  and  steel  as  weapons  of 
economic  diplomacy  which  the  six  national  gov- 
ernments used  to  extract  concessions  and  strike 
bargains  that  did  little  to  advance  the  general 
welfare  of  Western  Europe.  On  the  whole,  these 
first  few  months  of  performance  have  justified  the 
expectations  of  the  founders  of  the  Community. 

*Mr.  Vernon^  author  of  the  above  article,  is 
Acting  Director  of  the  Office  of  Economic  De- 
fense and  Trade  Policy. 


Related  Materials 

Regional  Organizations:  Europe  and  the  North 
Atlantic  Area,  Department  of  State  publica- 
tion 4944,  April  19.53.  Contains  a  brief  account 
of  the  development  and  functions  of  eight  Euro- 
pean regional  organizations  including  the  Coal 
and  Steel  Community,  a  chart  showing  their 
interrelationship,  and  a  bibliography. 

'The  Schuman  Plan  Constituting  a  European  Coal  and 
Steel  Community.  Draft  treaty  and  draft  con- 
vention containing  the  transitional  provisions. 
Department  of  State  publication  4173.     1951. 

An  analysis  of  the  Schuman  Plan.  Department  of 
State  publication  4176.    1951. 

Understanding  the  Schuman  Plan.  Department  of 
State  publication  4281.  1951.  A  background 
summary. 

Raymond  Vernon,  "The  Schuman  Plan:  Sovereign 
Powers  of  the  European  Coal  and  Steel  Com- 
munity," The  American  Journal  of  Interna- 
tional Law,  April  1953,  p.  183.  The  legal  sig- 
nificance of  the  Schuman  Plan. 


Secretary  Dulles,  Mr.  Stassen 
Return  from  Near  Eastern  Visit 

Statement  by  the  Secretary 

White  House  press  release  dated  May  29 

Three  weeks  ago,  Mr.  Stassen  and  I  and  our  as- 
sociates left  Washington  to  visit  a  part  of  the 
world  with  which  we  seek  new  ties  of  friendship. 
It  is  an  important  part  of  the  world.  It  gave  us 
our  religion  and  it  contains  the  holy  places.  The 
Near  East  is  the  junction  of  three  continents — 
Europe,  Asia,  and  Africa.  South  Asia  and  the 
Near  East  together  contain  one-half  of  the  people 
of  the  world  not  already  under  Communist 
domination. 

These  people  we  visited  have  been  our  friends. 

804 


Most  of  them  were  long  under  the  political  domi- 
nation of  other  powers.  As  colonial  peoples  they 
looked  up  to  the  United  States  with  respect  and 
admiration.  We  had  gained  freedom  and  strength 
for  ourselves  and  we  sought  those  qualities  foi 
others. 

Now,  the  peoples  we  visited  have  won  political 
freedom.  Seven  of  them  have  become  independ- 
ent nations  within  10  years.  But  they  do  not  yet 
have  strength  and  well-being.  They  are  preoc- 
cupied by  quarrels  and  fears  which  deny  them 
tranquillity  and  endanger  their  national  existence 
They  want  and  need  the  friendly  inspiration  and 
guidance  we  once  provided.  But  they  feel  that 
in  our  maturity,  we  have  grown  materialistic  af 
the  expense  of  idealism  and  justice,  and  that  oiu 
friendship  has  grown  cold. 

The  Suez  Base  dispute  between  Egypt  and  Brit- 
ain, the  uneasy  armistice  and  economic  warfare  be- 
tween Israel  and  the  Arab  States,  the  problem  ol 
Arab  refugees,  the  India-Pakistan  dispute  ovei 
Kashmir,  the  prevalence  of  poverty,  are  typical  ol 
conditions  which  create  fear,  bitterness,  and  weak- 
ness. Only  communism  can  profit  from  these 
conditions.  It  strives  frantically  to  do  so  at  oui 
expense.  Wherever  we  went,  the  Communistj 
sought  io  disrupt  our  mission  and  prevent  it  fron: 
achieving  its  intended  purposes.  Everywhere 
they  failed.  Hostile  demonstrations  were  kept  at 
a  distance,  and  were  well-controlled.  The  aspect 
of  the  people  was  cordial  and  welcoming.  The 
leaders  were  abundantly  hospitable,  and  the.-^ 
talked  with  us  as  with  those  who  could  be  trusted. 

We  return  with  refreshed  ties  with  our  valiant 
allies,  Greece  and  Turkey,  and  with  information 
as  to  other  areas  and  their  problems  which  can  be 
of  great  importance  to  the  United  States.  We  of  ' 
the  State  Department  will  be  better  qualified  to 
advise  President  Eisenhower  in  relation  to  foreign 
policy,  and  Mr.  Stassen,  Director  of  Mutual 
Security,  will  be  better  able  to  help  that  program - 
implement  our  foreign  policy.  I 

Above  all,  we  laid  a  new  foundation  for  friend- 
ship. That  is  because  we  gave  new  hope  that  the 
United  States,  while  standing  firmly  against  any 
breach  in  the  ranks  of  the  Western  Powers,  and 
without  in  anywise  undermining  the  State  of  Is- 
rael, is  determined  to  find  a  way  toward  a  broader 
unity.  Tliis  would  be  to  the  advantage  of  all  con- 
cerned. We  could  then,  in  desired  ways,  help  the 
nations  of  the  Near  East  and  South  Asia  to  live 
together  in  amity  and  peace  and  allay  their  initial 
pains.  Thus,  they  may  move  on  to  a  healthy 
national  life  which  will  accept  the  responsibilities, 
and  add  to  the  strength,  of  the  free-world  com- 
munity. J 

Mr.  Stassen  and  I  have  at  once  made  a  prelimi-  ' 
nary  report  to  the  President  and  we  shall  report 
more  fully  to  him  and  the  Congress  with  reference 
to  our  conclusions,  particularly  those  which  may 
affect  our  foreign  policy.  Then  I  shall  have  more 
to  say  to  the  American  people. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Review  of  the  Austrian  Treaty  Question 


By  a  vote  of  48  to  0  the  Seventh  Session  of  the 
General  Assembly  of  the  United  Nations  on  De- 
cember 20,  1952,  adopted  a  resolution  urging  the 
early  conclusion  of  a  treaty  for  Austria.^  The  five 
states  of  the  Soviet  bloc  did  not  participate,  and 
Pakistan  and  Afghanistan  abstained. 

The  resolution,  sponsored  by  Brazil,  Lebanon, 
Mexico,  and  the  Netherlands,  had  the  full  support 
of  the  United  States.  Earlier,  Benjamin  V. 
Cohen,  alternate  delegate  for  the  United  States, 
speakin"  before  the  Political  and  Security  Com- 
mittee, declared :  ^ 

The  United  States  welcomes  the  resolution  .  .  .  call- 
ing upon  the  governments  concerned  to  reach  agreement 
on  an  Austrian  treaty  to  terminate  the  occupation  of 
Austria  and  to  restore  to  Austria  its  rights  to  sovereign 
statehood. 

Back  of  the  action  taken  by  the  General  As- 
sembly lies  the  story  of  a  major  postwar  tragedy. 
It  is  a  story  of  broken  pledges  on  one  hand  and 
frustrated  hopes  on  the  other.  It  is  an  illustra- 
tion of  the  methods  employed  by  the  Soviet  Union 
in  exploiting  other  peoples  and  other  nations,  re- 
gardless of  pledges  solemnly  given  and  repeatedly 
reaffirmed. 

Here,  in  capsule,  is  an  illuminating  picture  of 
Soviet  techniques  in  handling  nations  and  peoples 
who  refuse  to  knuckle  under.  The  Austrian 
treaty  negotiations  are  a  case  study  for  the  free 
world.  They  can  be  a  lesson  for  those  who  still 
trust  the  Soviet  word.  There  could  be  no  clearer 
picture  of  the  difficulties  of  dealing  with  the  men 
of  the  Kremlin. 

Since  1945  Austria  has  been  occupied  by  troops 
of  the  four  major  Allied  Powers  of  World  War 
II— the  United  States,  the  United  Kingdom, 
France,  and  the  Soviet  Union.  The  Three  West- 
ern Powers  are,  and  have  been,  eager  to  withdraw 
their  troops  and  restore  Austrian  independence. 
They  went  into  Austria  only  to  liberate  that  coun- 
try and  its  people  from  the  Nazis.  There  was  no 
thought  of  a  prolonged  stay. 

Emtok's  Note.     This  study  is   also   available   as  De- 
partment of  State  publication  5012. 
'  BiTXETiN  of  Jan.  12,  1953,  p.  68. 
'Ibid.,  p.  67. 

June   8,    1953 


The  Moscow  Pledge 

In  the  Moscow  Declaration  of  November  1, 1943, 
the  Four  Powers  pledged  themselves  to  regard, 
and  so  treat,  Austria  as  a  liberated,  not  an  enemy, 
country : 

The  Declaration  stated : 

The  Governments  of  the  United  Kingdom,  the  Soviet 
Union  and  the  United  States  of  America  are  agreed  that 
Austria,  the  first  free  country  to  fall  a  victim  to  Hitlerite 
aggression,  shall  be  liberated  from  German  domination. 

They  regard  the  annexation  imposed  upon  Austria  by 
Germa'ny  on  March  15th,  1938,  as  null  and  void.  They 
consider  themselves  as  in  no  way  bound  by  any  changes 
effected  in  Austria  since  that  date.  They  declare  that 
they  wish  to  see  reestablished  a  free  and  independent 
Austria,  and  thereby  to  open  the  way  for  the  Austrian 
people  themselves,  as  well  as  those  neighboring  states 
which  will  be  faced  with  similar  problems,  to  find  that 
political  and  economic  security  which  is  the  only  basis 
for  lasting  peace. 

Austria  is  reminded,  however,  that  she  has  a  responsi- 
bility which  she  cannot  evade  for  participation  in  the  war 
on  the  side  of  Hitlerite  Germany,  and  that  in  the  final 
settlement  account  will  inevitably  be  taken  of  her  own 
contribution  to  her  liberation. 

The  Declaration  was  signed  by  Foreign  Minister 
Molotov  for  the  Soviet  Union,  Secretary  of  State 
Hull  for  the  United  States,  and  Foreign  Secretary 
Eden  for  the  United  Kingdom.  Two  weeks  later 
the  French  Committee  for  National  Liberation 
signed  for  France. 

There  can  be  no  doubt  that  the  Soviets  fully 
understood  that  the  Declaration  was  a  pledge  and 
a  commitment.  In  a  proclamation  to  the  citizens 
of  Vienna,  March  1945,  the  late  Marshal  Tol- 
bukhin,  commanding  the  Eussian  forces  in 
Austria,  said: 

The  Red  Army  has  set  foot  on  the  soil  of  Austria  not 
to  conquer  Austrian  territory.  Its  aim  is  exclusively  the 
defeat  of  the  enemy  German-Fascist  troops  and  the  libera- 
tion of  Austria. 

The  Red  Army  backs  the  Moscow  Declaration  of  the 
Allied  Powers  on  the  independence  of  Austria. 

The  Moscow  Declaration  is  a  pledge  unre- 
deemed, but  it  is  still  binding,  morally  and  legally, 
on  those  who  made  it.  To  the  Western  Powers, 
who  wish  to  redeem  it,  it  must  be  the  basis  of  what- 
ever treaty  is  finally  concluded  with  Austria. 
Less  would  be  a  betrayal  of  faith. 

805 


Even  prior  to  the  Moscow  Declaration,  the  Al- 
lied position  on  Austria  had  been  clearly  stated. 
British  Prime  Minister  Churchill,  for  example, 
said  on  November  9,  1940 : 

Great  Britain  defends  the  cause  of  all  nations  for  whom 
she  has  drawn  the  sword,  namely,  Austria,  Czechoslo- 
vakia, Poland,  Norway,  Holland,  Belgium,  France,  and 
Greece.  Great  Britain  will  fight  until  final  victory  and 
with  it  liberation  for  all  these  countries  is  achieved. 

When  the  United  States  entered  the  war,  Presi- 
dent Roosevelt,  December  9, 1941,  named  the  coun- 
tries which  had  been  invaded  by  the  Axis  Powers 
and  wliich  must  be  liberated.  Austria  was 
included. 

Again  on  February  18, 1942,  Mr.  Churchill  said : 

With  the  victory  of  the  Allies,  liberated  Austria  will 
again  talie  up  her  place  of  honor. 

Declaration  on  Liberated  Europe 

Austria  was  not  specifically  discussed  at  the 
Three  Power  conference  at  Yalta  in  February 
1945,  but  Austria,  as  a  victim  of  Nazi  agg:ression, 
was  among  the  countries  affected  by  the  Declara- 
tion on  Liberated  Europe,  approved  at  Yalta. 
Marshal  Stalin,  Prime  Slinister  Churchill,  and 
President  Roosevelt  were  all  three  present  and 
assented. 

This  Declaration  pledged  the  Three  Powers  to 
"assist  the  people  in  any  European  liberated  state 
or  former  Axis  satellite  state  in  Europe"  (1)  to 
establish  conditions  of  internal  peace,  (2)  to  carry 
out  emergency  relief  measures,  (3)  to  form  "in- 
terim governmental  authorities  broadly  repre- 
sentative of  all  democratic  elements  in  the  popu- 
lation and  pledged  to  the  earliest  possible 
establishment  through  free  elections  of  govern- 
ments responsive  to  the  will  of  the  people,"  and 
(4)  to  facilitate,  where  necessary,  the  holding  of 
free  elections. 

This,  again,  was  a  promise  and  a  pledge.  At 
the  invitation  of  the  Three  Powers  present,  the 
provisional  French  Government  subsequently  en- 
dorsed the  Declaration  and  joined  in  the  pledges 
given. 

Later,  August  1945,  the  Potsdam  Agreement 
provided  that  "reparations  should  not  be  exacted 
fi-om  Austria."  According  to  the  terms  of  the 
agreement  the  reparation  claims  of  the  Allied 
Powers  (the  Soviet  Union  was  mentioned  specifi- 
cally) were  to  be  met,  in  part,  from  "appropriate 
German  external  assets."  This  provision  has 
caused  difficulties  in  the  negotiations  on  the  treaty, 
but  its  intent  was,  and  is,  perfectly  clear. 

Role  of  the  Soviet  Union 

There  has  been  no  disagreement  among  the  Gov- 
ernments of  the  United  States,  the  United  King- 
dom, and  France  as  to  their  responsibility  and 
duty  in  meeting  these  pledges  to  Austria,  specifi- 
cally stated  and  implied. 


The  single  stumbling  block  has  been,  and  is,  the 
Soviet  Union. 

The  Soviet  determination  to  stymie  an  Austrian 
treaty  has  become  increasingly  apparent. 

In  the  Seventh  Session  of  the  General  Assem- 
bly of  the  United  Nations  they  made  every  attempt 
to  bloclc  consideration  of  the  Brazilian  resolution 
or  any  action  pertaining  to  Austria.  "\Mien  the 
agenda  for  tlie  Assembly  was  under  consideration 
in  October  1952,  the  Soviets  objected  to  the  As- 
sembly's giving  any  kind  of  consideration  to  the 
Austrian  treaty.  They  based  their  objections  on 
article  107  of  the  Charter  of  the  United  Nations. 
Article  107,  they  said,  placed  the  Austrian  treaty 
outside  the  limits  of  U.N.  "competence."  In 
other  words,  the  United  Nations  had  no  right  to 
consider  it. 

Article  107  of  the  U.N.  Charter  reads : 

Nothing  in  the  present  Charter  shall  invalidate  or  pre- 
clude action,  in  relation  to  any  state  which  during  th« 
Second  World  War  has  been  an  enemy  of  any  signatorj 
to  the  present  Charter,  taken  or  authorized  as  a  result  ol 
the  war  by  Governments  having  responsibility  for  suci 
action. 

The  committee  on  the  Assembly  agenda  rejected 
this  position.  It  was  pointed  out  to  the  Soviets 
that  Austria  had  never  been  considered  as  an 
enemy  state,  that  Austria  had  never  declared  war 
against  any  member  of  the  United  Nations,  that 
no  U.N.  nation  had  ever  declared  war  against 
Austria,  and  that  the  position  of  Austria,  both 
during  the  war  and  later,  had  been  explicitly  de- 
fined in  the  Moscow  Declaration  as  that  of  a  lib- 
erated country.  Clearly,  article  107  did  not  per- 
tain to  Austria. 

Later,  both  in  the  Political  and  Security  Com- 
mittee and  before  the  Assembly  itself,  the  Soviets, 
or  one  of  their  puppets,  continued  to  bring  up 
article  107  as  a  bar  to  consideration  of  the  Aus- 
trian treaty.  The  Polish  delegate,  Mr.  Skrzese- 
zewski,  actually  used  the  term  "enemy"  in  speak- 
ing of  Austria.  The  Brazilian  resolution,  he  said, 
was  a  violation  of  the  Charter  "as  article  107  made 
clear,  beyond  any  doubt,  that  the  organization 
[the  United  Nations]  could  not  intervene  with 
regard  to  any  action  taken  in  relation  to  any  state 
involved  in  the  Second  World  War  as  an  enemy 
of  any  signatory  of  the  Charter." 

Defending  the  right  of  the  United  Nations  to 
speak,  delegate  after  delegate  pointed  out  to  the 
Soviets  that  Austria  was  not  an  enemy  country. 
It  was  brought  to  their  attention,  fuithermore, 
that  the  resolution  in  no  way  questioned,  much  less 
sought  to  invalidate,  any  action  in  relation  to  Aus- 
tria taken  or  authorized  as  a  result  of  World  War 
II.  It  concerned  solely  the  desirability  of 
speedily  concluding  a  treaty  for  Austria. 

Tlie  vote  of  the  General  Assembly  soundly  re- 
pudiated the  position  of  the  Soviets. 

The  delegate  of  Brazil,  Henrique  de  Souza 
Gomes,  introducing  the  resolution,  did  not  pro- 
pose a  review  of  the  actions  taken  by  the  occupying 
powers,  nor  did  he  suggest  the  substantive  pro- 


^ 


806 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


visions  which  should  go  into  the  treaty.  As  he 
explained,  all  the  resolution  did  was  to  urge  the 
occupying  powers  to  agree  promptly  upon  a 
treaty  which  would  carry  out  the  pledges  they 
themselves  had  previously  made  and  which  they 
had  never  publicly  renounced. 

Representatives  of  the  Soviet  Union  and  of  the 
Soviet-dominated  States,  however,  refused  to 
agree  to  even  the  mild  provisions  of  the  resolu- 
tion. In  the  committee,  and  later  in  the  General 
Assembly,  they  signified  their  disagreement  by 
refusing  to  participate  in  the  voting.  Their 
strategy  was  not  to  oppose  openly  but  to  obstruct. 

To  the  Western  Powers,  this  strategy  of  obstruc- 
tion on  the  part  of  the  Soviets  had  become  all  too 
familiar.  The  Soviet  Union,  to  be  sure,  had  never 
officially  renounced  the  Moscow  Declaration.  In 
preventing  the  conclusion  of  a  treaty  for  Austria, 
Soviet  tactics  had  been  to  quibble,  to  delay,  to 
introduce  extraneous  issues. 

The  efforts  of  the  three  Western  Powers  to 
conclude  a  treaty  and  to  bi'ing  about  the  evacua- 
tion of  Austria  had  been  continuous,  persistent, 
and  sincere.  They  had  been  willing  to  compro- 
mise with  the  Soviets  on  detail  and  had  asked 
only  that  the  principle  of  independence  for  Aus- 
tria be  observed. 

They  had,  themselves,  submitted  proposal  after 
proposal.  They  had  sat  patiently  through  lit- 
erally hundreds  of  meetings.  Between  1945  and 
the  time  of  the  Seventh  Session  of  the  General  As- 
sembly, there  had  been,  in  fact,  33  sessions  of  the 
Council  of  Foreign  Ministers  at  which  the  Aus- 
trian treaty  had  been  discussed,  258  meetings  of 
the  Austrian  treaty  deputies,  and  85  meetings  of 
the  Austrian  Treaty  Commission. 

At  each  of  these  sessions  the  Western  Powers 
had  met  the  representatives  of  the  Soviet  Union 
in  a  spirit  of  conciliation.  They  had  been  un- 
yielding only  on  the  basic  proposition  that  Aus- 
tria must  be  free  and  independent,  as  the  Moscow 
Declaration  had  promised.  They  had  insisted 
only  that  Austria  be  restored  to  sovereign 
statehood. 

The  resolution  adopted  at  the  Seventh  Session 
of  the  General  Assembly  had  the  full  support  of 
all  three  of  the  Western  Powers  involved  in  the 
Austrian  question.  It  had,  in  fact,  overwhelming 
support  in  the  Assembly.  No  less  than  30  repre- 
sentatives of  member  nations  spoke  in  its  favor. 

The  resolution  put  the  moral  weight  of  free 
world  opinion  behind  the  efforts  of  the  Western 
Powers  to  reach  an  agreement  with  the  Soviets 
on  the  Austrian  treaty.  It  did,  and  could  do, 
nothing  more.     But  as  Ambassador  Cohen  said : 

We  [the  Western  Powers]  are  entirely  willing  to  meet 
with  representatives  of  the  Soviet  Union  to  discuss  and 
conclude  such  a  treaty.  We  will  meet  again  and  again 
and  again.  But  our  experience  of  these  past  7  years 
leaves  little  hope  for  arriving  shortly  at  a  satisfactory 
conclusion  unless  soujething  more  is  added. 

Perhaps  this  resolution  is  that  something  more. 


Eight  Years  of  Negotiations 

As  a  study  of  Soviet  tactics,  the  details  of  the 
negotiations  on  the  Austrian  treaty  are  worth 
scrutiny.  For  convenience'  sake,  the  story  can  be 
divided  into  six  fairly  distinct  periods. 

The  first,  principally  introductory,  includes  the 
Moscow  Declaration  itself  and  the  events  pre- 
ceding. 

The  immediate  postwar  period  includes  roughly 
2  years.  As  far  as  progress  toward  a  treaty  is 
concerned,  it  was  almost  a  total  blank. 

In  the  third  period— 1947  to  the  middle  of 
1949 — negotiations  actually  got  under  way. 

The  fourth  period  opened  on  a  note  of  hope. 
The  Soviets  appeared,  briefly,  to  be  willing  to 
leave  Austria— but  at  a  price.  Abruptly,  how- 
ever, their  attitude  changed.  A  disturbing  pic- 
ture of  their  intent  began  to  take  shape.  The  hope 
faded. 

The  fifth  period,  continuing  down  to  the  end 
of  1950,  is  a  story  of  open  and  constant  Soviet  ob- 
struction against  persistent  efforts  on  the  part  of 
the  Western  Powers  to  conclude  a  treaty.  At  last 
the  Soviets  had  abandoned  any  pretense  of  con- 
cealing their  purpose. 

Finally  there  is  a  sixth  period,  beginning  with 
the  spring  of  1952  and  continuing  up  to  the  fail- 
ure of  the  meeting  called  at  London  by  the  West- 
ern Powers  pursuant  to  the  General  Assembly 
resolution. 

There  will  be  further  chapters  in  the  Austrian 
treaty  story.  They  may  be  highly  significant  in 
their  bearing  on  the  world  strategy  of  the  Soviet 
Union.  Their  full  significance,  however,  may  be 
illuminated  by  consideration  of  what  already  has 
taken  place. 

During  the  years  immediately  following  the 
end  of  hostilities  in  World  War  II,  the  problems 
in  Austria,  as  in  many  European  countries  occu- 
pied by  the  Nazis,  concerned  mainly  food,  shelter, 
transportation,  and  the  establishment  of  a  stable 
government.  For  Austria  the  latter  was,  of 
course,  complicated  by  problems  arising  from  the 
Anschluss,  problems  of  disentangling  the  coun- 
try's entire  political  and  economic  life  from  that 
of  Germany. 

These  were  serious  problems,  and  the  treaty 
seemed  of  minor  importance.  The  Austrian  peo- 
ple had  the  promise  of  the  Moscow  Declaration. 
Neither  they  nor  the  Western  Powers  were  aware 
of  the  real  plans  of  the  Soviets. 

Pending  the  first  Austrian  election,  the  four 
occupying  Powers  recognized  a  provisional  Aus- 
trian government.  Through  the  European  Ad- 
visory Commission  they  agreed  on  zones  of  occu- 
pation and  set  up  an  Allied  Council  through  which 
to  work. 

The  avowed  purpose  of  the  occupation  was, 
first,  to  divorce  Austria  completely  from  German 
control — to  undo  the  Anschluss  of  1938.  It  was, 
second,  to  root  out  Austrian  nazism  and  to  punish 


June  8,   1953 


807 


war  criminals.  Lastly,  it  was  to  aid  in  the  restora- 
tion of  a  free  Austria  in  the  spirit  of  the  Moscow 
Declaration. 

After  tlie  elections  of  November  19^5  the  Four 
Powers  recognized  the  new  Government,  and  by 
an  agreement  reached  in  1946  they  extended  con- 
siderably the  powers  of  that  Government.  This 
agreement,  still  in  force,  provided  for  the  pro- 
gressive relaxation  of  Four  Power  control.  As 
the  freely  elected  Austrian  Government  grew  in 
will  and  strength  to  maintain  a  democratic  regime, 
it  was  to  be  given  more  and  more  authority  in 
managing  the  affairs  of  the  country.  The  Allied 
Council  consisting  of  four  High  Commissioners, 
one  appointed  by  each  of  the  occupying  powers, 
remained  to  aid  and  advise  the  new  Government. 

The  question  of  a  treaty,  however,  was  not  for- 
gotten. In  April  1946  the  Council  of  Foreign 
Ministers  met  at  Paris.  The  U.S.  Secretary  of 
State,  Mr.  Byrnes,  proposed  that  the  Austrian 
treaty  be  included  on  the  agenda.  He  stated  that 
his  Government  felt  that  a  treaty  for  Austria,  a 
liberated  country,  should  be  given  consideration  at 
least  equal  to  that  planned  for  Germany's  former 
satellites. 

The  British  and  French  Foreign  Ministers 
agreed.  The  Soviet  Foreign  Minister,  Mr.  Molo- 
tov,  dissented.  He  said  that  tlie  Soviet  delega- 
tion was  not  prepared.  He  pointed  out  that  the 
Council's  agenda  was  crowded.  He  said  that 
Austria  was  not  sufficiently  denazified  to  be 
trusted. 

Pinned  down  to  a  possible  date,  Mr.  Molotov 
said: 

It  might  be  necessary  to  leave  troops  in  Austria  for 
another  year;  that  is,  two  years  in  all  from  the  end  of 
the  war. 

In  the  middle  of  May  it  was  proposed  tliat  the 
Council  recess  for  a  month.  Secretary  Byrnes 
took  this  opportunity  to  make  another  effort  in 
behalf  of  Austria.  He  suggested  that  during  the 
recess  the  deputies  of  the  Foreign  Ministers  could 
start  preliminary  work  on  a  draft  treaty. 

The  British  and  French  Foreign  Ministers  again 
agreed. 

Once  again  Mr.  Molotov  objected.  He  told 
Secretary  Byrnes  curtly,  "Wlien  we  are  ready,  we 
will  inform  the  other  delegates." 

Despite  this  rebuff  the  United  States  went  ahead 
and  prepared  a  draft  treaty.     So  did  the  British. 

When  the  Council  reconvened  in  June,  Secretary 
Byrnes  again  urged  that  the  Austrian  treaty  be 
scheduled  for  discussion.  After  much  hesitation 
Mr.  Molotov  agreed  but  insisted  that  it  be  the 
Austrian  "question"  rather  than  the  Austrian 
treaty  and  that  it  be  the  last  item  on  the  agenda. 

When  the  Council  finally  reached  the  Austrian 
"question,"  Secretary  Byrnes  said  he  felt  that 
prompt  action  should  be  taken  because  it  was  in- 
conceivable to  him  that  treaties  with  Italy  and  the 


Balkan  States  should  be  concluded  and  nothing 
done  about  Austria. 

The  Soviets,  however,  announced  three  new 
conditions  which,  they  declared,  must  be  met  be- 
fore the  Soviet  Union  would  agree  to  consider  an 
Austrian  treaty.  These  were  (1)  more  progress  in 
eliminating  alleged  Austrian  nazism,  (2)  the 
forcible  repatriation  of  displaced  persons  in 
Austria,  and  (3)  the  completion  of  the  Italian  and 
Balkan  ti'eaties. 

Obviously  there  could  be  no  action  on  the  treaty 
at  that  time.     None  was  taken. 

Treaty  Deputies  Appointed 

The  Council  of  Foreign  Ministers  met  again, 
this  time  at  New  York,  in  the  late  fall  of  1946. 
The  Italian  and  satellite  treaties  were  completed. 

Secretary  Byrnes  then  proposed  that  special 
Austrian  treaty  deputies  be  appointed.  The 
Soviet  Union  objected  but  finally  agreed.  The 
deputies  were  named  and  instructed  to  set  to  work 
immediately.  They  were  to  begin  consideration 
of  the  drafts,  agree  on  as  many  articles  as  possible, 
and  report  to  the  Council  at  its  next  session, 
scheduled  for  the  following  March  at  Moscow. 

The  story  of  this  first  postwar  year,  1946,  is 
important  insofar  as  it  provides  background  for 
what  was  to  follow.  It  was  a  curtain  raiser  for 
the  years  ahead. 

The  activities  of  the  Soviets  in  Austria  during 
1946  are  significant. 

The  Potsdam  Agreement  asserted  that  repara- 
tions would  be  permitted  from  "appropriate  Ger- 
man external  assets."  The  United  States,  tlie 
United  Kingdom,  and  France  interpreted  this  to 
mean  properties  in  Austria  owned  legitimately  by 
Germany  and  German  nationals  as  of  May  8, 1945. 
They  did  not  include  (1)  property  seized  after  the 
Anschluss  through  force  or  duress,  (2)  property 
owned  by  the  Austrian  Government,  or  (3)  prop- 
erty in  Austria  owned  by  nationals  of  the  U.N. 
nations. 

However,  from  the  first  the  Soviets  placed  a  far 
different  interpretation  upon  the  term.  Immedi- 
ately after  the  liberation  of  Austria  they  began 
to  dismantle  factories  and  plants  in  their  zone 
and  ship  the  equipment  to  the  Soviet  Union.  Esti- 
mates for  that  first  year  on  equipment  taken  from 
Austrian  metal-working,  machinery,  and  locomo- 
tive industries  alone  run  to  63,778  pieces.  The 
total  of  the  Soviet  "take"  probably  never  will  be 
known. 

When  the  special  treaty  deputies  met  at  Lon- 
don early  in  1947,  new  Soviet  delaying  tactics 
emerged.  Whereas  the  other  deputies  submitted 
concrete  outlines  of  all  treaty  articles,  the  Soviet 
deputy  offered  only  incomplete  proposals.  He 
spent  most  of  his  time  criticizing  the  proposals  of 
the  other  powers.  He  found  little,  if  anything, 
worth  while  to  say  for  them. 


808 


Department   of  State   Bulletin 


Nevertheless,  the  deputies  did  manage  to  accom- 
plish some  work.  They  disposed  of  all  but  20 
articles,  which  were  referred  to  the  Moscow  session 
of  the  Council  of  Foreign  Ministers. 

The  Council  in  Moscow 

"When  the  Council  met  at  Moscow  in  March, 
with  so  much  of  the  spadework  done,  the  Western 
Powers  had  high  hopes  for  an  early  agreement. 

In  his  book  My  Three  Years  in  Moscow,  Am- 
bassador Walter  Bedell  Smith  (now  Under  Sec- 
retary of  State)  reported: 

The  Western  representatives  were  not  entirely  sur- 
prised over  tiie  difficulties  they  encountered  in  attempting 
to  reach  an  agreement  on  Germany  but  they  expected 
progress  in  formulating  a  treaty  for  Austria.  Here,  at 
first,  tilings  went  well  and  agreement  was  reached  on 
all  but  a  few  points.  But  these  were  basic  and  of 
fundamental  importance. 

"German  assets"  overshadowed  all  other  issues. 
By  this  time  the  Soviets  had  seized  in  Austria 
more  than  300  enterprises,  valued  at  roughly  700 
million  dollars.  They  demanded  that  the  treaty 
give  them  permanent  possession. 

What  they  wanted  meant : 

1.  Two-thirds  of  Austria's  entire  oil  pro- 
duction, all  of  its  oil  reserves,  and  about  three- 
fourths  of  its  refining  capacity. 

2.  The  extensive  assets  of  the  Danube  Shipping 
Company  in  Austria,  Hungary,  and  the  lower 
reaches  of  the  river. 

3.  Three  hundred  industrial  plants,  including 
those  in  iron  and  metal  work,  machinery,  electri- 
cal equipment,  heavy  chemicals,  textiles,  glass, 
steel  construction,  and  optical  and  precision  in- 
struments. 

4.  Forty-one  percent  of  the  largest  bank  in  Aus- 
tria and  complete  control  of  four  other  large 
Austrian  banks. 

5.  A  large  proportion  of  the  insurance  com- 
panies in  Austria. 

As  a  second  issue  the  Soviet  Union  threw  into 
the  pot  certain  claims  of  Yugoslavia  against  Aus- 
tria for  reparations  and  for  the  cession  of  a  large 
part  of  the  Austrian  Province  of  Carinthia  and 
small  portions  of  Styria  and  Burgenland. 

The  Four  Powers  had  agreed  at  Potsdam  that 
there  should  be  no  question  of  reparations  so  far 
as  Austria  was  concerned.  Premier  Stalin  him- 
self was  a  party  to  that  agreement.  Moreover, 
the  claims  of  Yugoslavia  were  based  on  damages 
caused  by  Hitler's  armies.  Their  claims  to  rep- 
arations were  against  Germany,  not  Austria. 

As  for  Carinthia,  the  Western  Powers  recalled 
that,  in  1920,  there  had  been  a  plebiscite  in  that 
area  under  the  auspices  of  the  League  of  Nations, 
and  the  majority  of  the  people  had  voted  to  re- 
main Austrian.  The  rights  of  the  Slovene  mi- 
nority were  protected  under  the  new  Austrian 

June  8,   7953 


constitution.  Nevertheless,  the  Soviets  supported 
both  Yugoslav  claims. 

The  Western  Powers  were  not  unaware,  of 
course,  that  Soviet  championship  of  the  Yugo- 
slavs was  motivated  by  something  more  than 
sympathy  for  their  cause.  Ambassador  Smith 
wrote : 

.  .  .  from  remarks  made  by  members  of  the  Soviet  dele- 
gation and  finally  from  covert  proposals  made  by  Molotov 
during  the  final  stages  of  the  conference,  it  was  clear  that 
the  Soviet  Union  would  abandon  its  advocacy  of  Yugo- 
slavia's claims  at  once  if  the  Kremlin's  definition  of  what 
constituted  "German  assets"  in  Austria  .  .  .  was  accepted 
by  the  Western  powers. 

A  few  years  later  Ambassador  Smith's  inter- 
pretation of  the  Soviet  position  was  confirmed  in 
the  subsequently  published  exchange  of  notes  be- 
tween Tito  of  Yugoslavia  and  the  Kremlin.  From 
these  notes  we  learn  that  Molotov  and  Vyshinsky 
both  told  Yugoslavia  shortly  after  the  Moscow 
Conference  opened  that  there  was  no  hope  that  the 
Council  would  accept  their  claims.  To  quote  from 
one  of  these  notes : 

Foreign  Minister  Molotov  declared  to  Yugoslav  Foreign 
Minister  Kardelj  that,  despite  such  hopeless  proposals, 
the  Soviet  delegation  would  continue  to  keep  the  question 
of  Slovene  Carinthia  on  the  agenda  but  only  to  facilitate 
a  positive  solution  regarding  German  property  in  Austria 
en  behalf  of  the  Soviet  Union. 

Toward  the  end  of  the  Moscow  session  the  U.S. 
Secretary  of  State,  General  Marshall,  proposed 
that  the  discussion  of  the  Austrian  treaty  be  con- 
tinued by  the  deputies,  with  a  cutofi^  date  set  for 
September.  If  no  agreement  had  been  reached 
by  that  time,  the  Four  Powers  should  submit  all 
unsettled  questions  to  the  General  Assembly  of 
the  United  Nations.  The  British  and  French 
agreed.     The  Soviets  refiised. 

However,  a  proposal  was  accepted  by  the  Four 
Powers  to  set  up  a  special  Austrian  Treaty  Com- 
mission to  consider  all  disputed  articles. 

With  this  slight  gain  the  Moscow  Conference 
ended. 

The  Austrian  Treaty  Commission 

The  new  Austrian  Treaty  Commission  met  at 
Vienna  May  12,  1947.  The  Commission  held  85 
meetings.  There  was,  however,  no  agreement. 
If  anything,  the  Soviet  position  became  more  arbi- 
trary. For  example,  the  Soviet  member  repudi- 
ated an  earlier  commitment  to  claim  Austrian 
property  only  if  it  had  been  purchased  by  the 
Germans  at  a  fair  price.  The  Soviets  asserted 
claim  to  all  such  property,  even  if  it  had  been 
purchased  under  duress  and  regardless  of  price. 
The  Commission  adjourned  October  11. 

There  had  been  one  development.  In  the  fall 
the  French  Government  had  submitted  a  proposal 
under  which  certain  specified  "German  assets"  in 
Austria  were  to  be  assigned  to  the  Soviet  Union. 
Others  were  to  be  returned  to  Austria  for  a  lump- 
sum payment  of  100  million  dollars.     In  the  hope 

809 


of  breaking  the  deadlock,  arriving  at  a  treaty,  and 
ending  the  occupation,  the  United  States  and 
Britain  supported  tiiis  proposal. 

The  French  proposal  was  introduced  in  the 
Council  of  Foreign  Ministers  at  London  in  No- 
vember 1947.  The  Soviets  would  have  none  of  it. 
The  Conference  ended  with  no  progress  on  a  treaty. 

During  1948  the  question  of  the  Austrian  treaty 
did  not  come  before  the  Council  of  Foreign  Min- 
isters. The  deputies  met  repeatedly,  disagreed, 
and  adjourned. 

At  one  time  it  did  appear,  briefly,  that  the 
Soviets  were  ready  to  come  to  some  kind  of  under- 
standing. Early  in  1948  they  submitted  their 
own  specific  demands.  Adapting  the  French  pro- 
posal to  their  own  figures,  they  asked  for  a  cash 
settlement  of  200  million  dollars,  two-thirds  of  all 
oil  production  for  50  years,  all  the  assets  of  the 
Danube  Shipping  Company  in  eastern  Austria, 
and  other  properties.  And  they  continued  to  de- 
mand that  Yugoslavia's  claims  be  met. 

The  Soviet  proposal  was  unacceptable  to  Aus- 
tria and  was  rejected  by  the  Western  Powers. 

At  the  suggestion  of  the  United  States  the  depu- 
ties met  at  London  February  9,  1949.  By  mid- 
April  it  had  become  obvious  that  the  Soviet  dep- 
uty, acting  on  orders  from  Moscow,  was  pursuing 
deliberate  delaying  tactics.  It  was  useless  to  con- 
tinue until  after  the  meeting  of  the  Foreign  Min- 
isters scheduled  for  May  at  Paris. 

At  Paris  the  Western  Powers  made  their  posi- 
tion clear.  When  Austria  came  up  on  the  agenda, 
they  jointly  declared: 

Austria  i.s  a  liberated  country.  It  Is  extremely  difficult 
to  justify  continued  military  occupation  four  years  after 
Allied  troops  liberated  Austrian  territory  from  Nazi  domi- 
nation. The  Austrian  people  and  the  Austrian  govern- 
ment have  repeatedly  called  upon  us  to  fulfill  our 
responsibilities  and  to  complete  the  task  we  assumed. 
Surely  the  time  is  long  overdue  for  the  execution  of  these 
commitments. 

In  the  meanwhile  there  had  been  one  develop- 
ment. Relations  between  Yugoslavia  and  the 
Soviet  Union  had  cooled.  The  open  break  was  yet 
to  come,  but  notes  had  begun  to  fly  back  and  forth 
between  Tito  and  the  Kremlin. 

Approached  now  on  Yugoslavia's  claims,  the 
Soviet  Foreign  Minister,  Mr.  Molotov,  made  a 
gesture  of  defending  his  one-time  friends  and  then 
abandoned  them.     Their  claims  would  be  dropped. 

With  that  obstacle  removed,  the  Western 
Powers,  with  Austria's  approval,  made  an  ofl'er. 
They  agreed  that  the  U.S.S.R.  should  receive  60 
percent  of  Austrian  oil  production,  shares  in  the 
Danube  Shipping  Company,  and  a  150-million- 
dollar  cash  settlement.  It  was  a  high  price,  but 
putting  an  end  to  the  occupation  and  restoring 
Austrian  sovereignty  were  thought  to  be  worth  it. 
The  concessions  were  made  on  the  understanding 
that  they  would  be  incorporated  in  a  final  treaty 
to  be  completed  by  September  1,  1949.  With  the 
Soviets  apparently  agreeing,  the  deputies  were 


instructed  to  set  to  work  and  be  ready  with  the 
treaty  by  that  date. 

Austrian  hopes  rose  with  the  news  of  the  Paris 
"settlement."  "Now  we  shall  be  masters  in  our 
own  house,"  commented  the  Austrian  Foreign 
Minister,  Karl  Gruber.  He  was  given  a  trium- 
phant reception  when  he  returned  to  Vienna. 

And  so  the  deputies  met  July  1, 1949,  at  London 
to  finish  up  the  business — or  so  the  Austrians  and 
the  Western  Powers  thought. 

They  were  soon  disillusioned.  It  was  the  old 
question  of  "German  assets."  The  Soviets  had 
been  perfectly  willing  to  make  big  concessions  at 
the  expense  of  Yugoslavia,  but  wjien  it  came  to 
their  own  interests  even  slight  compromises  were 
out  of  the  question. 

For  e.xample,  tliere  was  a  large  amount  of  rail- 
road rolling  stock  which  the  Soviets  had  seized 
as  "war  booty."  At  Paris  the  Foreign  Ministers 
had  agreed  that  war  booty  was  to  be  returned  to 
Austria.  The  deputies  were  to  define  the  exact 
meaning  of  the  term.  The  Soviet  deputy  now  l 
refused  to  agree  that  these  railroad  items,  vitally  I 
important  to  Austrian  economy,  came  under  the 
heading  of  "war  booty." 

Under  the  Paris  agreement  the  Soviets  were  to 
receive  60  percent  of  the  oil  exploration  lands  in 
Austria.  In  London  the  Soviet  deputy  inter- 
preted this  clause  in  such  a  way  as  to  assure  a 
monopoly  for  the  Soviet  Union  on  virtually  all 
future  Austrian  oil  production. 

The  Paris  agreement  would  have  allotted  the 
Soviets  oil  refineries  in  Austria  with  an  annual 
refining  capacity  of  420,000  tons.  In  London  the 
Soviet  deputy  handed  the  other  deputies  a  long 
list  of  refineries  to  which  the  Soviets  laid  claim  i 
under  this  provision.  By  manipulating  produc-  i 
tion  figures,  they  had  enlarged  the  agreed  Paris 
total  to  include  all  major  Austrian  refineries. 

They  demanded  full  title  to  the  sole  pipeline    I 
running  from  the  producing  area  to  the  refineries. 
They  insisted  upon  rights  to  Danube  shipping 
properties,  even  in  excess  of  those  formerly  pos- 
sessed by  the  Danube  Shipping  Company. 

Thus  there  was  no  treaty  ready  for  the  Foreign 
Ministers  on  the  scheduled  date,  September  1, 1949. 

The  deputies  met  again  in  New  York  during  the 
last  week  in  September.  At  that  time  the  Foreign 
Ministers  of  the  Four  Powers  were  at  Lake  Success 
attending  a  session  of  the  General  Assembly  of 
the  United  Nations. 

The  first  few  meetings  of  the  deputies  produced 
no  results.  An  appeal  was  made  to  the  Soviet 
Foreign  Minister,  Mr.  Vyshinsky,  and  on  October 
6  Mr.  Vyshinsky  made  public  a  statement  to  the 
effect  that  the  unagreed  articles  presented  no 
problem  if  "German  assets"  could  be  settled  to 
Soviet  satisfaction. 

Briefly  there  was  hope.  The  Soviet  deputy, 
however,  announced  that  the  Soviet  Lfnion  would 
make  no  concessions.  He  concluded  his  statement 
with  an  abrupt  "That  is  all,  gentlemen." 


810 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


Finally,  on  November  11,  the  U.S.  deputy  an- 
nounced'that  the  United  States  would  be  willing 
to  accept  the  wording  of  the  Soviet  draft  on  "Ger- 
man assets."  It  was  clear,  however,  that  the 
United  States  was  not  taking  this  position  because 
it  agreed  in  principle  but  only  because  of  the 
wishes  of  Austria  to  be  free,  even  at  this  price. 
j  Word  went  out  from  Lake  Success  that  chances 
■  for  completion  of  the  treaty  draft  by  the  end  of 
the  month  were  very  good. 

The  "Dried  Peas  Debt" 

The  hopes  thus  raised  were  soon  dashed.     The 
Soviet  deputy  announced  that  he  could  not  agree 
until  he  knew  the  outcome  of  Soviet-Austrian  ne- 
gotiations on  Soviet  claims  for  compensation  for 
postwar  relief  supplies  allegedly  given  Austria. 
He  said  he  would  not  continue  the  discussion  until 
this  matter  had  been  settled. 
This  was,  of  course,  a  completely  extraneous 
i  issue.     It  had  nothing  to  do  with  the  treaty. 
The  Austrians  contended  that  the  supplies  in- 
volved   were    largely    dried    peas    taken    fi'om 
Wehrmacht  stores  in  Vienna  by  the  Soviets  at  the 
time  of  "liberation"  and  distributed  to  the  hungry 
population  in  the  days  immediately  following. 

The  Austrians  had  made  every  effort  to  settle 
the  business  with  the  Soviets,  but  the  Soviets  had 
refused  to  set  a  figure.  They  had  ignored  Aus- 
trian notes  on  the  subject. 

News  of  the  introduction  of  the  issue  as  a  bar 
to  the  treaty  was  received  in  Vienna  with  shock 
]  and  bewilderment. 

'  The  deputies  adjourned  to  reconvene  at  London 
January  9,  1950,  when,  presumably,  the  issue  of 
the  dried  peas  would  have  been  settled.  The  Aus- 
trians resumed  their  efforts  to  close  the  "dried 
peas  debt"  but  were  unsuccessful. 

The  issue  was  still  unresolved  when  the  deputies 
met  at  London. 

The  meeting  dragged  on  through  April.  With 
the  excuse  of  the  "dried  peas  debt"  wearing  thin, 
the  Soviet  deputy  came  up  with  an  entirely  new 
issue.  He  charged  the  Austrian  Government  and 
the  Western  Powers  with  encouraging  a  revival 
of  nazism  and  remilitarization  in  Austria.  Al- 
most identical  charges  had  been  examined  re- 
peatedly by  the  Allied  Council  in  Vienna,  where 
the  Western  High  Commissioners  had  found  them 
imconvincing,  vague,  and  unsupported  by  the 
evidence. 

Not  content  with  this,  the  Soviet  deputy  asked 
the  other  deputies  to  attend  a  special  meeting  on 
May  4,  1950,  where  he  said  he  would  have  "some- 
thing important"  to  say. 

That  "something  important"  was  a  denuncia- 
tion of  the  United  States  and  Great  Britain  for 
their  presence  in  Trieste. 

Despite  the  obvious  fact  that  the  Austrian 
treaty  had  no  direct  relationship  with  the  Trieste 
question,  the  Soviet  deputy  stated  on  May  22  that 

June  8,   7953 


"before  signing  the  treaty  with  Austria,  it  is  nec- 
essary that  the  Governments  of  the  U.S.A.,  Great 
Britain  and  France  should  reply  to  the  note  of 
the  Soviet  Government  of  April  20  on  the  question 
of  Trieste." 

Austria,  apparently,  was  to  serve  as  a  hostage 
to  force  compliance  on  the  part  of  the  Western 
Powers  on  this  entirely  irrelevant  issue.  If  this 
linking  of  two  unrelated  matters  prevented  the 
conclusion  of  a  treaty,  the  Soviet  exploitation  of 
Austria  could  continue. 

In  terms  of  progress  toward  a  treaty,  the  year 
1951  was  practically  a  blank.  At  a  meeting  at 
Paris  the  Western  cleputies  made  a  strenuous  ef- 
fort to  agree  upon  a  meeting  of  the  Council  of 
Foreign  Ministers  and  to  have  the  Austrian  ques- 
tion included  on  the  agenda  but  failed. 

In  September  U.S.  Secretary  of  State  Acheson, 
Foreign  Minister  Schuman  of  France,  and  For- 
eign Secretary  Morrison  of  the  United  Kingdom 
met  in  Washington.  They  discussed  the  Austrian 
treaty  and  on  September  14  issued  a  tripartite 
declaration,  which,  in  part,  stated : 

.  .  .  there  is  no  justification  for  any  further  delay  in  the 
conclusion  of  a  treaty  for  the  re-establishment  of  a  free 
and  independent  Austria.  This  has  been  a  constant  aim 
since  the  conclusion  of  hostilities.  They  [the  three 
Western  Powers]  will  not  desist  in  their  efforts  to  bring 
the  Soviet  Government  to  the  same  view  and  to  that  end 
they  have  decided  to  make  a  new  and  resolute  effort  in 
the  meetings  of  the  Austrian  Treaty  Deputies  to  fulfill 
the  long  over-due  pledge  to  the  Austrian  people. 

Speaking  before  the  Sixth  Session  of  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  of  the  United  Nations  in  Paris, 
November  1.3, 1951,  Secretary  Acheson  called  upon 
the  Soviet  Union  for  action.    He  said : 

For  more  than  five  years  now  the  United  Kingdom, 
France,  the  Soviet  Union,  and  the  United  States  have 
been  discussing  the  conclusion  of  a  treaty  for  Austria. 
The  four  powers  have  promised  the  Austrian  people  in- 
dependence. The  Austrians  have  long  ago  fulfilled  all  the 
conditions  for  the  restoration  of  their  complete  sov- 
ereignty. But  the  country  is  still  under  occupation  .  .  . 
the  Soviet  leaders  can  speak  the  word  which  will  fulfill 
their  promise  to  Austria. 

A  new  meeting  of  the  deputies  was  called  for 
January  29  at  London. 

The  Soviet  deputy  refused  to  attend.  No  meet- 
ing, therefore,  could  be  held. 


The  "Short  Treaty"  Is  Drawn 

In  the  spring  of  1952  the  Western  Powers  took 
an  important  step  in  an  effort  to  break  the  dead- 
lock in  the  negotiations. 

The  1949  agreement  on  the  basic  treaty  pro- 
visions had  included  a  provision  that  the  final 
treaty  should  be  ready  by  September  1  of  that 
year.     That  deadline,  however,  had  not  been  met. 

In  the  meantime  Austria  had  moved  ahead. 
The  situation  had  changed.  Many  of  the  provi- 
sions of  the  draft  treaty  were  no  longer  applicable. 
Others  were  too  punitive  for  a  country  wnose  de- 

8T1 


votion  to  democratic  principles  and  whose  ability 
to  put  them  into  effect  had  been  demonstrated. 

Austria  was  no  longer  on  trial.  She  had  proved 
herself. 

Accordingly,  the  Western  Powers  set  to  work 
to  prepare  a  new  draft.  The  result  of  their  labors 
was  a  short  treaty  of  just  eight  articles.^  Of 
these,  seven  were  agreed  articles  from  the  old  draft 
and  were,  as  the  Western  Powers  saw  them,  all 
that  was  needed  to  assure  Austria  her  freedom  and 
independence. 

One  article  was  new.     It  read : 

Each  of  the  Allied  and  Associated  Powers  shall  ...  re- 
linquish to  Austria  all  property,  real  and  personal,  of 
whatever  description,  held  or  claimed  by  them  as  German 
Assets  or  war  booty  in  Austria. 

The  matter  of  Soviet  rights  to  compensation  was 
not  disputed.  The  new  article,  however,  took 
into  consideration  the  7  years  of  exploitation  of 
the  Austrian  economy  by  the  Soviets. 

The  new  draft  proposed  to  put  an  end  to  that 
exploitation.  It  proposed  to  restore  to  Austria 
not  only  her  political  independence  but  the  where- 
withal to  make  that  independence  meaningful. 

The  new  draft  was  submitted  to  Moscow  March 
13,  1952.  With  it  went  notes  from  the  Western 
Powers  explaining  the  proposal  and  urging  the 
Soviet  Government  to  cooperate  in  this  latest  ef- 
fort to  fulfill  the  pledges  of  the  Moscow  Declara- 
tion. 

The  U.  S.  note  said :  * 

The  Government  of  the  United  States  considers  that 
failure  to  reach  an  Austrian  settlement  lias  placed  a  heavy 
and  unnecessary  burden  on  the  Austrian  people  and  has 
contributed  materially  to  the  maintenance  of  the  danger- 
ous tensions  which  unhappily  exist  in  international 
relations.  It  is  the  most  earnest  desire  of  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  United  States  to  do  everything  within  its 
power  to  remove  these  tensions.  The  conclusion  of  an 
Austrian  treaty  would  constitute  an  important  step  to- 
ward the  consolidation  of  peace. 

Weeks  and  months  slipped  by  without  a  reply 
from  the  Soviets.  The  Western  Powers  for- 
warded "reminders"  to  Moscow  from  time  to 
time  and  still  received  no  reply. 

In  July  the  Austrian  Government  itself  took 
action.  A  memorandum  was  circulated  among  the 
members  of  the  United  Nations  calling  attention 
to  the  situation  and  presenting  the  Austrian  case.' 

The  memorandum  said,  in  part: 

The  protracted  occupation  of  Austria,  the  duration  of 
which  can  now  not  even  be  estimated,  affects  Austrian 
political  and  economic  interests  in  the  most  serious 
manner. 

There  was  a  brief  survey  of  Austrian  properties 
now  in  the  hands  of  the  Soviets.  (For  text,  see 
Annex.) 

The  preference  of  the  Austrian  Government  for 
the  short  draft  treaty  was  stated : 

'Ibid.,  Mar.  24,  1952,  p.  449. 

'Ibid.,  p.  448. 

•  Ibid.,  Aug.  11,  1952,  p.  221. 


.  .  .  negotiations  cannot  be  resumed  on  the  basis  of  the 
old  treaty  draft  which  .  .  .  contains  a  number  of  financial 
and  economic  provisions  no  longer  bearable  .  .  .  and 
hardly  ever  acceptable  to  the  Austrian  Parliament  .  .  . 

Reaction  among  U.  N.  members  to  the  Austrian 
memorandum  was  definitely  favorable.  It  was 
hard  for  anyone  to  see  why  Austria  should  not 
be  restored  to  freedom  and  independence.  Senti- 
ment for  its  admission  to  the  United  Nations  itself 
was  strong. 

On  August  14, 5  months  almost  to  a  day  after  the 
short  treaty  draft  had  been  forwarded  to  Moscow, 
the  Soviets  replied." 

The  tone  of  the  reply  was  not  encouraging.  The 
Soviets  demanded,  first  of  all,  the  withdrawal  of 
the  new  draft.  Trieste  was  again  mentioned,  and 
there  were  references  to  demilitarization  and  de- 
nazification. The  Austrian  memorandum  was 
condemned  as  "notorious." 

Specific  criticisms  of  the  new  draft,  however,  I 
were  limited  to  charges  that  the  text  omitted  cer- 
tain agreed  articles  in  the  old  draft  guaranteeing  I 
democratic   rights   to   the   Austrian   people   and  | 
granting  the  Austrian  Government  the  right  to 
maintain  its  own  national  armed  forces.     The  last 
objection  was  curiously  inconsistent  in  light  of 
the  references  to  "demilitarization."     Actually,  of 
course,  Austria  has  no  national  armed  forces.     It 
owns  not  a  single  military  plane  or  planes  of  any 
description.     It  has  no  guns,  no  tanks,  no  ammu- 
nition, no  troops. 

The  Western  Powers  lost  no  time  in  replying 
to  the  Soviet  note.  They  sent  a  note  to  Moscow 
in  which  they  agreed  to  the  inclusion  in  the  new 
draft  of  the  articles  from  the  old  draft  covering 
the  points  raised  by  the  Soviets.'' 

The  Soviets  were  reminded,  however,  that  the  1 
present  Austrian  Constitution  and  Austrian  legis-  I 
lation  actually  in  force  provided  full  democratic 
rights  to  the  Austrian  people.  Three  free  elec- 
tions since  1945  had  been  held,  with  a  resulting 
Government  holding  the  full  confidence  of  the 
Austrian  people. 

Said  the  U.S.  note : 

Nonttheless,  appreciating  the  careful  consideration  given 
by  the  U.S.S.R.  during  the  past  five  months  to  the  pro- 
posal of  March  13,  1052,  and  anxious,  as  it  has  been 
since  the  Moscow  Declaration  of  1943,  to  restore  to  Austria 
full  independence,  the  Government  of  the  United  States 
therefore  proposes  that  there  be  added  to  its  proposal  of 
March  13,  1952  articles  7,  8,  and  9  of  the  long  draft  as 
previously  agreed  upon  by  the  four  powers. 

These  were  the  articles  of  the  old  draft  referring 
to  the  democratic  rights  of  the  Austrian  people. 

The  Western  Powers  agreed  also  to  the  inclusion 
in  the  new  draft  of  the  old  article  on  armed  forces 
for  Austria. 

Of  this  the  U.S.  note  said : 

With  reference  to  the  Soviet  Government's  objections 
to  the  proposal  of  March  13,  1952  in  that  it  passes  over 
the  right  of  Austria  to  have  its  own  national  armed  forces 


'  Ibid.,  Sept.  1,  1952,  p.  322. 
'  Ibid.,  Sept.  15,  1952,  p.  404. 


812 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


necessary  for  the  defense  of  the  country,  the  Government 
of  the  United  States  considers  that  the  right  to  maintain 
armed  forces  belongs  inherently  to  a  free  and  independent 
nation  and  should  not  have  to  be  specifically  granted  to  a 
nation  never  considered  to  have  been  an  enemy.  The 
Soviet  Government,  however,  implies  by  its  reference  to 
the  long  draft  of  the  State  Treaty  that  it  wishes  to  place 
limitations  upon  Austria's  right  to  have  national  armed 
forces  for  its  self-defense.  While  seeing  no  necessity  thus 
to  limit  Austrian  sovereign  rights  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment, in  order  to  reach  early  agreement  and  to  termi- 
nate the  occupation,  would  accept,  although  reluctantly, 
the  addition  of  Article  17  of  the  long  draft  to  its  proposal 
of  March  13,  1952. 

The  specific  objections  of  the  Soviets  having 
been  met,  the  Western  Powers  then  proposed  tliat 
a  meeting  of  the  deputies  be  scheduled  for  Sep- 
tember 29  in  London  to  initial  the  new  draft  as 
amended  to  meet  the  Soviet  objections. 

Said  the  United  States : 

The  Government  of  the  United  States  .  .  .  believes 
that  the  way  is  now  clear  for  the  conclusion  of  an  Austrian 
settlement     .     .     . 

But  the  meeting  called  for  September  29  was 
destined  never  to  take  place.  On  September  27 
the  Western  Powers  received  identical  notes  from 
the  Soviet  Government  reiterating  its  demand 
that  the  short  draft  be  withdrawn  before  any  fur- 
ther discussion  of  the  Austrian  treaty. 

The  emphasis  in  their  objections  to  the  new 
draft,  however,  had  shifted.  The  block  was  again 
"German  assets." 

This  time  the  mask  was  off.  The  Soviets  made 
little  attempt  to  conceal  their  determination  not 
to  discuss  any  treaty  which  would  require  them 
to  disgorge  their  loot.  They  wanted  that  thor- 
oughly understood  before  even  consenting  to  meet 
with  the  Western  Powers. 

There  was  no  meeting  in  London  on  the  date  set. 

The  next  development  was  the  effort  by  the 
Soviets  to  prevent  the  inclusion  of  the  Austrian 
question  on  the  agenda  of  the  General  Assembly. 
Then  came  the  fight  in  the  General  Assembly  to 
prevent  consideration,  and  later  approval,  of  the 
Brazilian  resolution.  On  both  points  the  Soviets 
were  unsuccessful.     The  resolution  was  adopted. 

On  January  12,  1953,  the  Western  Powers,  in 
identical  notes  ^  to  the  Soviet  Government,  called 
to  the  attention  of  Moscow  the  wishes  of  the  U.N. 
members,  clearly  expressed  in  the  vote  on  the 
Brazilian  resolution. 

Said  the  notes : 

It  is  proposed,  therefore,  rather  than  to  continue  the 
sterile  exchange  of  notes  .  .  .  that  a  meeting  of  the 
Austrian  Treaty  Deputies  be  held  at  an  early  date  for 
the  purpose  of  concluding  an  Austrian  Treaty. 

The  meeting  was  set  for  January  30,  1953,  at 
London. 

At  first  it  appeared  unlikely  that  the  Soviet 
deputy  would  attend.  In  another  note  Moscow  de- 
manded the  withdrawal  of  the  short  treaty  before 
any  meeting  was  scheduled. 

'liid.,  Jan.  26,  1953,  p.  135. 


The  Western  Powers  stood  firm.  The  meeting 
was  postponed  a  week.  February  6  was  the  new 
date. 

This  time  the  Soviet  deputy,  Andrei  Gromyko, 
put  in  his  appearance.  He  came  armed  with  his 
Government's  instructions  to  prevent  the  conclu- 
sion of  an  Austrian  treaty. 

He  declared  that  only  after  withdrawal  of  the 
new  draft  could  "other  matters  relating  to  the 
Austrian  question  be  discussed." 

The  Western  Powers  were  conciliatory.  They 
stated  that  the  meeting  had  been  called  simply 
to  discuss  an  Austrian  treaty.  The  French  dep- 
uty suggested  that  anything  could  be  discussed 
that  could  lead  to  the  desired  end. 

The  U.S.  deputy  proposed,  in  light  of  the  So- 
viets' objections  to  the  short  draft,  that  it  be  laid 
aside  and  work  be  resumed  on  the  old  long  draft. 
He  said  that  he  would  be  ready  to  withdraw  the 
abbreviated  treaty  if  they  could  conclude  a  just 
and  equitable  treaty  on  any  other  basis,  including 
the  long  draft,  without  further  delay.  As  the 
Soviet  Government  had  expressed  readiness  to 
conclude  a  treaty  on  the  basis  of  the  long  draft, 
he  formally  proposed  that  discussion  begin  by 
going  through  the  long  draft. 

Mr.  Gromyko,  however,  again  insisted  that  no 
discussion  could  take  place  until  the  new  draft 
was  withdrawn.  He  refused  to  enter  into  any 
discussion,  even  after  the  Western  deputies  agreed 
that  the  short  draft  would  be  withdrawn  if  a  just 
and  equitable  treaty  could  be  concluded  on  any 
other  basis  without  delay. 

The  Western  deputies  repeated  their  willingness 
to  begin  the  discussion  by  a  review  of  the  long 
draft.  To  this  the  Soviet  deputy  replied,  "I  have 
nothing  to  add  to  my  previous  position." 

Considering  that  the  Western  Powers  had 
agreed  to  resume  business  on  the  basis  of  the  old 
draft,  Mr.  Gromyko's  "position"  seemed  highly 
indefinite.  Since  he  refused  to  go  further  into 
the  subject,  it  became  more  than  apparent  that 
attempts  to  continue  the  discussion  would  be 
futile.     The  meeting  was  suspended. 

And  so,  in  the  spring  of  1953,  the  question  of 
freedom  and  independence  for  Austria  was  still 
unresolved.  The  attitude  of  the  Soviet  Union 
leaves  little  hope  for  a  satisfactory  conclusion  of 
a  treaty  in  the  immediate  future. 

Austria  is  still  occupied.  In  June  1947,  the 
United  States  waived  payment  from  Atistria  for 
occupation  costs,  but  Austria  still  foots  the  bill  for 
the  upkeep  of  the  troops  of  the  other  occupying 
powers.  Speaking  of  the  total  economic  burden 
borne  by  Austria,  Foreign  Minister  Gruber  has 
said : 

Had  it  not  been  for  the  generous  aid  of  friendly  nations, 
and  in  particular  the  United  States  of  America,  Austria 
would  be  an  economic  wreck  today. 

In  light  of  the  pledges  of  the  Moscow  Declara- 
tion, the  Austrian  people  resent  the  fact  that  their 
country  has  been  singled  out  for  such  treatment. 


June  8,   1953 


813 


Occupation  forces  have  been  withdrawn  from 
Italy  and  Japan,  admittedly  "enemy"  nations. 
Treaties  have  been  sijjned  with  Bulgaria,  Finland, 
Hungary,  Italy,  Japan,  and  Rumania. 

Austria,  by  solemn  agreement  a  "liberated" 
country  and  never  an  enemy,  now  asks  to  be  lib- 
erated from  her  "liberators."  She  asks  that  the 
pledges  of  the  Moscow  Declaration  be  fulfilled. 

The  United  States  backs  that  plea.  In  his  con- 
cluding remarks  before  the  Political  and  Security 
Committee,  Ambassador  Cohen  said : 

Austria  seeks  only  justice.  And  it  is  justice  long  de- 
layed. M.v  Government  believes  that  Austria  is  entitled 
to  its  freedom  and  independence  .  .  . 


ANNEX 

Losses  I ncurred  by  Austria  Through  the  Occupation ' 

A  complete  enumeration  of  all  losses  suffered  by  Austria 
through  the  occupation  which  has  now  lasted  for  more 
than  seven  years,  and  a  detailed  description  required  in 
this  connection  of  its  indirect  effects  on  Austria's  economy, 
which  can  only  be  fully  ascertained  after  the  withdrawal 
of  the  troops  of  occupation,  would  go  far  beyond  the  limit 
of  this  short  information.  Therefore,  only  a  few  partic- 
ularly important  facts  and  figures  indicating  the  extent 
and  diversity  of  the  losses  incurred  will  be  presented  in 
the  following  paragraphs. 

1.  Direct  costs  of  occupation  : 

From  1945  to  1951  Austria  has  paid  more  than  6400  mil- 
lion Austrian  Shillings  in  occupation  costs,  A.  S.  5200  mill, 
of  which  were  paid  directly  to  the  powers  of  occupation, 
while  the  remaining  A.  S.  1200  mill,  were  used  for  the 
exchange,  at  a  rate  of  1 :  1,  of  the  military  shilling  notes 
issued  by  the  occupying  powers  in  1045.  (It  should  be 
noted  here  that  the  American  occupation  authorities,  in 
recognition  of  the  fact  that  there  was  no  reason  to  con- 
tinue the  occupation  of  a  liberated  Austria  waived  their 
claim  to  occupation  costs.) 

To  this  day,  direct  occupation  costs,  converted  into 
Dollars  at  the  present  rate  of  exchange,  amount  to  ap- 
proximately .$300  mill. 

If  the  rate  of  exchange  of  1 :  10  in  force  from  1945  to 
November  1949  is  applied  to  the  occupation  costs  paid 
during  this  period,  the  sum  spent  on  occupation  costs  from 
1945  to  this  day  amounts  to  $530  mill. 

2.  Indirect  losses  suffered  by  the  state : 

All  goods  shipped  to  the  occupation  powers  are  exempt 
from  any  taxes,  dues  and  customs  formalities.  The  en- 
terprises seized  by  Soviet  Authorities  (UsiA-enterprises) 
do  not  pay  the  prescribed  taxes ;  similarly,  no  tax  is  paid 
from  the  illegal  sale  of  foreign  tobacco  products,  made 
possible  solely  by  the  fact  of  the  occupation. 

The  losses  in  taxes  and  dues  thus  incurred  by  the  Aus- 
trian state  up  to  the  end  of  1951  can  be  estimated  as 
follows : 

million  Shillings 

Custom   duties 1, 1'iO 

Direct  taxes 540 

Excise  taxes 123 

Tobacco-tax 1,  520 

Total 3,  343 

'  .-Vnnex  5  of  memorandum  presented  to  the  Department 
of  State  July  31,  1952,  by  the  Austrian  charge  d'affaires, 
announcing  his  Government's  intention  of  taking  to  the 
United  Nations  its  plea  for  the  conclusion  of  a  State 
treaty  to  end  the  occupation  of  Austria  and  restore  its 
national  sovereignty. 


This  sum,  calculated  at  the  present  rate  of  exchange 
of  A.S.  21,36  to  U.S.  $1  (disregarding  the  rate  of  A.S. 
10  to  $1  valid  until  1949)  corresponds  to  appr.  $150  milL 

3.  Seizures  and  dismantlements: 

Following  the  liberation  of  Austria  a  series  of  seizures, 
dismantlements  and  removals  of  all  kind  were  carried 
out.  The  losses  incurred  through  the  dismantlement  and 
removal  of  machinery,  semi-finished  products,  raw  mate- 
rials and  equipment  amount  to  appr.  $500  mill. 

4.  Tourist  traflJc  in  Austria : 

The  losses  suffered  by  the  Austrian  tourist  industry 
through  the  seizure  of  tourist  establishments  thus  di- 
verted from  their  original  use  amount  to  $24,5  mill.  The 
sums  necessary  f(u-  the  restoration  of  these  tourist  estab- 
lishments, which  have  suffered  severest  damage  by  such 
seizure  and  diversion  are  estimated  at  .$29  mill. 

Moreover,  the  exploitation  by  a  power  of  occupation 
of  the  oil  deposits  in  Austria  signifies  for  the  -Austrian 
economy  a  yearly  loss  of  many  millions  of  Dollars,  as 
illustrated  by  the  following  figures: 

1.  Production    in   1951 2,  236.  000  tons 

Value  based  on  the  price  of  crude 

oil  only  of  $17  per  ton  .  .  .  appr.  $38,000,000 
Considering  the  Austrian  refining 

capacity  of  1,300.000   tons,  and 

assuming  an   average  price  for 

refined     oil     products     of     .$30, 

the    above    figure    is    increased 

to appr.  $.55,000,000 

Deliveries  to  Austrian  consumers 

(finished  products) 813.000  tons 

Remaining     production,     exported  j 

after  deduction  of  the  quantities  | 

used  by  the  oil  plants  and  the 

Usi.\-enterprises 1, 180.  000  tons 

(53%) 
Thus,  the  los.ses  suffered  by  Austria 

in  convertible  currency  in  1951 

amounted    to $23,000,000 

On  the  other  hand,  in  spite  of  her 

own     oil     production,     53%     of 

which  is  being  exported,  Austria 

had  to  import,  in  1951,  mineral 

oil  products  of  a  value  of  ...  .     $4,  349.  000 

2.  An  area  of  I(i0.4."i2  hectares  (appr.  2T0.,30n  acres)  of 
arable  soil  has  been  seized  and  removed  from  Austria 
control. 

3.  One  half  of  Austria's  Danubian  river  fleet,  includ- 
ing practically  all  riparian  installation,  warehouses 
etc.  was  also  seized. 

4.  Nearly  000  railway  engines  and  thousands  of  rail- 
way coaches  were  removed  as  war  booty. 

5.  In  addition,  9  telephone  exchanges,  sixty  thousand 
switchboard  connections  and  30.000  telephones  were 
dismantled. 


U.S.S.R.  Declines  Participation 
in  Austrian  Treaty  Meeting 

Press  release  291  dated  May  26 

On  May  25  Soviet  Ambassador  Malik  at  Lon- 
don addressed  a  letter  to  the  Secretary  General^ 
of  the  Austrian  treaty  deputies  declining  the  Tat- 
ter's invitatio7i  for  participation  of  the  Soviet 
Government  in  a  meeting  of  the  treaty  deputies, 
^uhich  teas  to  hare  been  held  at  London  beginning 
on  May  27.  On  May  26  Ambassador  Malik  re- 
ceived a  reply  to  his  conununication  in  the  form 


814 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


?/  a  joint  note  delivered  iy  treaty  deputies  of  the 
United  States,  the  United  Kingdom,  and  France. 
Following  are  the  texts  of  Amhassador  Maliki's 
letter  and  of  the  reply  of  the  treaty  deputies: 

loviet  Communication  of  May  25 

In  confirming  receipt  of  your  letter  of  the  11 
iMay  in  which  it  is  proposed  to  call  in  London  on 
Ithe  27  May  a  meeting  of  the  deputies  for  the  prep- 
aration of  a  draft  state  treaty  for  Austria  I  con- 
sider it  necessary  to  call  your  attention  to  the 
following: 

First  of  all  it  should  be  recalled  that  the  Council 
of  Deputy  Foreign  Ministers  for  the  Austrian 
Treaty  is  not  in  any  way  a  permanent  quadri- 
partite organ  and  the  summoning  of  such  meet- 
ings lies  within  the  competence  of  tlie  Council  of 
Foreign  Ministers,  the  setting  up  of  which  was 
decided  at  the  Potsdam  Conference  of  19-45. 

Starting  from  the  year  1917,  the  question  of  an 
Austrian  treaty  was  submitted  on  a  number  of 
occasions  to  sessions  of  the  deputies  but,  in  spite 
of  the  efforts  made  from  the  Soviet  side,  agreement 
was  not  reached.  In  the  years  1947-49,  appro- 
priate meetings  of  the  deputies  were  held,  but  they 
did  not  lead  to  the  results  which  they  should  have. 
The  meetings  of  the  deputies  which  took  place  in 
the  year  1950  also  did  not  lead  to  a  solution  of 
the  question  of  an  Austrian  treaty.  Likewise  in 
view  of  the  position  taken  up  by  the  representa- 
tives of  tlie  three  powers,  the  meetings  of  the  dep- 
uties held  in  February  1953  did  not  alter  the 
position. 

In  view^  of  the  foregoing  circumstances,  there 
are  no  grounds  to  suppose  that  the  meeting  of  the 
deputies  which  is  now  proposed  would  give  any 
more  successful  results  than  the  preceding 
meetings. 

In  connection  with  the  foregoing,  I  propose 
that,  at  the  present  time,  it  would  be  more  expedi- 
ent to  consider  this  question  through  diplomatic 
channels  by  means  of  an  appropriate  exchange 
of  opinions. 

Treaty  Deputies'  Joint  Note  of  May  26 

In  his  letter  of  the  25  May  to  the  Secretary  Gen- 
eral of  the  Deputies  for  the  Austrian  Treaty,  the 
Soviet  Deputy  alleged  that  a  meeting  of  the  Treaty 
Deputies  could  be  called  only  at  the  request  of 
the  Council  of  Foreign  Ministers,  and  asserted 
that  there  were  no  grounds  for  believing  that  the 
meeting  called  for  the  27  May  would  be  successful. 
The  Deputies  of  France,  the  United  Kingdom  and 
the  United  States  fail  to  understand  the  Soviet 
Deputy's  position.  It  is  the  assigned  task  of  the 
Deputies  to  draft  an  Austrian  Treaty.  All  but 
a  few  of  their  260  previous  meetings  were  called 
without  specific  instructions  from  the  Council  of 


Foreign  Ministers.  Moreover,  at  the  last  meeting 
of  the  Deputies  on  February  9,  1953,  the  Soviet 
Deputy  agreed  to  an  adjournment  with  the  under- 
standing that  the  next  meeting  would  be  called  by 
the  United  Kingdom  Chairman  at  an  early  date. 

The  three  Deputies  consider  unwarranted  the 
assumption  by  the  Soviet  Deputy  that  the  meeting 
jjroposed  would  not  lead  to  the  conclusion  of  an 
Austrian  Treaty.  At  the  last  meeting  they  made 
it  i^erfectly  clear  they  were  prepared  to  accept  any 
treaty  in  terms  which  would  ensure  Austria's 
l^olitical  and  economic  independence.  They  are 
convinced  tliat,  given  goodwill  on  the  Soviet  side, 
it  would  still  be  possible  to  conclude  such  a  treaty. 

The  three  Deputies  deeply  regret  the  refusal  of 
the  Soviet  Deputy  to  meet  and  are  reporting  the 
position  to  their  respective  governments. 

Rumanian  Diplomat  Declared 
Persona  Non  Grata 

Press  release  2S9  dated  May  26 

The  Department  of  State  on  May  26  notified  the 
Legation  of  the  Rumanian  People's  Republic  that 
Christache  Zambeti,  First  Secretary  of  the  Lega- 
tion, is  persona  non  grata  for  activities  incompati- 
ble with  Mr.  Zambeti's  status  as  a  diplomat  ac- 
credited to  this  Government.  The  Department 
ordered  Mr.  Zambeti's  immediate  departure  from 
the  United  States. 

The  action  taken  was  based  on  carefully  verified 
information  which  revealed  that  Mr.  Zambeti  on 
May  20  called  at  the  home  of  V.  C.  Georgescu,  a 
naturalized  American  citizen  of  Rumanian  descent 
residing  in  New  York  City,  and  attempted  to  sub- 
vert Mr.  Georgescu  to  collaborate  politically  with 
the  Comnumist  regime  of  Rumania  to  the  detri- 
ment of  tlie  U.  S.  Government.  The  price  offered 
for  this  collaboration  was  to  be  the  welfare  of  Mr. 
Georgescu's  minor  sons  and  their  possible  restora- 
tion to  their  parents.  Mr.  Georgescu's  sons, 
Costantin  and  Peter,  ages  19  and  14  respectively, 
were  born  in  Rumania  and  have  been  refused  per- 
mission by  the  Rumanian  authorities  to  come  to 
this  country  to  rejoin  their  parents.  Mr.  Geor- 
gescu rejected  the  proposal  of  Mr.  Zambeti  and 
reported  the  matter  to  the  proper  authorities. 

Following  is  the  text  of  the  Department's  note 
to  the  Legation  of  the  Rumanian  People's  Republic 
regarding  the  status  of  Mr.  Zambeti : 

The  Acting  Secretary  of  State  presents  his  compliments 
to  the  Minister  of  the  Uiimanian  People's  Kepublic  aud 
invites  his  attention  to  the  following: 

The  Government  of  the  United  States  has  ascertained 
that  Christache  Zambeti,  First  Secret.ary  of  Lesation,  has 
engaged  in  activities  incompatible  with  iiis  status  as  an 
accredited  diplomatic  official. 

Therefore,  this  Government  is  impelled  to  declare  Mr. 
Zambeti  persona  non  grata.  The  Legation  is  requested 
to  make  arrangements  for  his  immediate  departure  from 
the  United  States. 


June  8,   ?953 


815 


Reiteration  of  Principles 

of  UNC  Position  on  POW  Issue 

Statement  hy  the  President 

White  House  press  release  dated  May  26 

The  attention  of  the  free  world  is  focused  upon 
the  armistice  negotiations  at  Panmunjom.  There, 
on  May  25,  the  U.N.  Command  renewed  its  efforts 
to  bring  an  honorable  peace  to  Korea  and  a  fair 
and  humane  settlement  of  the  Pow  issue.  To  speed 
these  negotiations  the  U.N.  Command  requested 
executive,  in  other  words  confidential,  sessions. 
We  are  continuing  to  observe  the  executive  nature 
of  those  sessions. 

There  are,  however,  certain  principles  inherent 
in  the  U.N.  Command  position  which  are  basic  and 
not  subject  to  change.  No  prisoners  will  be  re- 
patriated by  force.  No  prisoners  will  be  coerced 
or  intimidated  in  any  way.  And  there  must  be  a 
definite  limit  to  the  periotl  of  their  captivity.  The 
procedures  used  in  handling  the  prisoners  must 
reflect  these  principles. 

In  all  this,  our  allies  are  in  full  accord.  These 
principles  accord  also  with  the  prevailing  view 
of  a  representative  bipartisan  group  of  Senators 
and  Congressmen  who  have  been  consulted. 

Finally:  These  principles  on  which  we  stand 
are  the  same  as  those  which  were  formally  ap- 
proved by  54  members  of  the  United  Nations. 

The  Faith  of  Free  Men 

by  Robert  L.  Johnson 

Adminhtrator,   International   Information    Ad- 
ministration ^ 

Some  time  between  now  and  sunrise  tomorrow 
morning,  hundreds  of  people  who  are  waiting — 
hiding  out  in  the  forests,  along  the  river  banks, 
and  in  the  fields — will  risk  their  lives  to  escape  to 
freedom.  How  many  of  them  have  come  over 
from  the  Iron  Curtain?  The  answer  is  nearly  2 
million  persons,  more  than  150,000  of  whom  have 
crossed  this  great  divide  in  1953.  These  are  the 
people  the  Soviet  party  members  and  their  satel- 
lite henchmen  have  instructed,  indoctrinated,  and 
intimidated.     Yet  still  they  come. 

The  real  story  of  the  people  behind  the  Iron 
Curtain  is  told  also  in  the  recent  demonstrations  in 
Czechoslovakia— the  demonstrations  which  began 
when  the  Communists  tore  down  the  statue  of 
Tomas  Masaryk,  the  beloved  first  President  of  the 
Czech  Republic.  In  the  city  of  Brno,  school  chil- 
dren formed  into  a  procession  and  marched  to  the 
site.     When    the   police   tried   to    interfei-e,    the 

'Address  made  before  the  All-American  Conference  To 
Combat  Communism  at  Washington  on  May  23  (press  re- 
lease 2S0  dated  May  22). 


women  of  Brno  were  at  the  children's  side,  and 
they  were  followed  by  the  workers.  Surely,  as  the 
Voice  of  America  pointed  out  in  a  broadcast  to  the 
people  of  Czechoslovakia,  those  Communist  police- 
men must  have  sensed  their  ultimate  fate. 

Most  of  us,  of  course,  know  why  these  people 
have  revolted  from  communism.     They  seek  only 
what  a  former  citizen  of  the  Soviet  Ukraine  found 
here  in  the  United  States.     How  surprised  she  was 
to  discover  that  here  no  identification  papers  are 
required.     She  did  not  have  to  register  at  a  police 
station.     She  could  live  where  she  chose,  travel 
freely  from  place  to  place,  with  no  forbidden  zones.  | 
As  she  tells  it :  "Everything  here  depends  on  one's  ; 
own  initiative,  ability,  and  will  to  organize  one's  i 
own  life.     Such  is  life  in  America." 

How  well  this  woman's  expression  of  apprecia-  , 
tion  points  up  the  difference  between  the  free 
world  and  the  slave  world.  The  fabric  of  the  • 
free  world  is  a  deep  and  abiding  faith  in  our  free-  j 
doms.  The  fabric  of  international  communism  is 
fear— fear  of  oppression,  and  tyranny,  and  inhu-  j 
manity.  The  true  source  of  the  bonds  between  I 
free  nations,  as  President  Eisenhower  has  said,  is  j 
the  fundamental  faiths  we  share  together.  i 

Consider,  for  a  moment,  the  rich  heritage  passed  ' 
on  to  us  by  our  brave  ancestors.     They  left  their  j 
homes,  renounced  security,  and  with  their  families  i 
entered   the   wilderness   and   endured   incredible 
hardships.     They  came  in  quest  of  spiritual  goals. 
They  embedded  in  the  virgin  soil  of  a  new  conti- 
nent the  principles  and  convictions  which  have 
distinguished  our  Nation  from  all  the  empires  of 
totalitarianism,  past  and  present.     For  theirs  was 
the  true  revolution,  one  dedicated  to  making  a  real- 
ity of  individual  freedom — the  finest  ideal  that 
the  mind  can  conceive. 


What  Free  People  Really  Believe 

Wliat  do  free  people  really  believe?  It  comes 
down,  I  think,  to  certain  simple  and  yet  all- 
powerful  convictions : 

— That  a  man  can  better  himself  by  his  own 
efforts  and  be  respected  for  what  he  does,  regard- 
less of  color,  creed,  or  racial  origin; 

— That  wealth  is  something  to  be  created  by 
mutual  effort,  not  something  to  be  taken  away 
from  somebody  else; 

— That  the  privilege  of  citizenship  carries  with 
it  personal  responsibilities  for  the  improvement 
of  the  community; 

—That  the  "other  fellow"  has  his  side  of  the 
story  and  a  right  to  be  heard; 

— That  government  is  the  servant,  not  the 
master  of  the  people,  and  it  can  never  confiscate 
property,  mincls,  or  souls; 

— Above  all,  free  people  believe  that  men  live 
for  a  higher  purpose  than  their  own  small  aims 
under  the  laws  of  a  power  beyond  that  of  any 
man  in  any  state. 


816 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


'  These  convictions  are  intertwined  in  the  fabric 
of  our  faith.  They  give  us,  in  fact,  the  brawn, 
the  nerve,  and  the  mind  which  are  our  strength 
in  meeting  with  the  primary  task  that  faces  the 
United  States  and  the  free  world  today. 
'  Tliat  task  is  well-known  to  you.  It  is  to  coun- 
ter the  evils  let  loose  in  the  world  by  a  system  of 
i government  whose  basic  tenets  are  the  opposite  of 
'our  own,  and  whose  final  aim  is  to  engorge  the 
world.  This  system  is  now  developing  every  tech- 
nique of  propaganda  and  subversion,  in  a  cam- 
'paign  menacing  to  our  way  of  life.  Since  World 
War  II  it  has  spread  into  a  major  effort  to  divide 
'the  free  world.  Its  primary  effort  is  to  isolate 
'the  United  States  and  to  undermine  confidence  in 
our  strength,  the  sincerity  of  our  stated  purposes, 
and  our  leadership. 

'  In  short,  this  is  the  "campaign  of  hate,"  and  its 
proportions  are  staggering.  The  Soviet  Union 
and  its  satellites  are  now  spending  about  $1.5  bil- 
lion each  year  on  direct  propaganda  alone.  And 
Red  China  has  budgeted  almost  an  equal  amount 
for  propaganda.  These  expenditures  do  not  in- 
clude the  vast  sums  also  being  spent  in  support 
of  the  Communist  government  regimes  by  the 
Communist  parties,  nor  by  the  organizations 
which  are  curry-combed  by  the  followers  and  the 
travelers  to  serve  the  ends  of  communism. 

But  they  do  not  rely  solely  on  direct  propaganda. 
They  inspire  riots,  as  in  Paris,  Tokyo,  and  Essen 
in  1952.  They  create  the  threat  of  war  in  Asia 
and  in  Eastern  Germany.  They  infiltrate  under- 
ground, and  they  stir  up  conflicts  between  groups 
and  between  nations. 

To  meet  this  challenge  in  the  "war  of  ideas," 
the  U.S.  Government,  through  the  International 
Information  Administration  (Iia),  is  conducting 
a  program  of  information  and  educational  ex- 
change. The  purpose  is  twofold :  to  combat  com- 
munism and  to  inspire  hope  and  confidence  in  the 
unity  and  strength  of  free  men.  Both  aims  are 
basic. 

In  my  opinion,  we  should  bring  about  two 
things.  First,  we  must  use  all  of  our  power  to 
remove  the  misconceptions  about  the  United 
States  and  to  answer  the  lies  the  Communists  tell 
about  us.  For  example,  the  Soviets  chai'ge  that 
we  are  the  aggressor  in  Korea.  However  amazing 
that  charge  is  to  us,  unless  it  is  answered  with  the 
truth,  unless  we  bring  the  facts  in  the  case  to  the 
attention  of  millions  of  people,  the  charge  will,  to 
say  the  least,  influence  their  thinking  and  their 
actions. 

Second,  we  must  inform  the  world  by  the  ex- 
amples of  what  we  do  and  what  we  have  done 
that  we  are  not  an  aggressive  or  an  imperialistic 
nation.  We  must  tell  other  peoples  not  only  of 
what  we  do  each  day  but  of  our  historical  actions 
in  fostering  and  granting  independence  to  the 
Philippines  and  to  Puerto  Rico;  and  of  our  non- 
aggressive  aims  in  the  two  great  wars  of  the 


century.  Such  truths  as  these  will  carry  the  con- 
viction to  other  peoples  that  our  purposes  are  just 
what  we  say  they  are. 

As  I  see  it,  the  Iia  has  two  definite  assets.  On 
the  one  hand,  we  have  a  number  of  devoted  men 
and  women  working  at  the  task.  On  the  other, 
we  have  "all  the  arguments"  on  our  side. 

We  do  not  have  to  engage  in  deception  or  subter- 
fuge ;  we  do  not  have  to  twist  the  truth.  We  do 
not  have  the  problem  of  the  Soviets,  who  are  try- 
ing to  make  the  people  of  Poland  favor  a  system 
under  which  they  are  paying  higher  and  higher 
prices  for  bread,  meat,  housing,  and  other  bare 
necessities  while  the  Soviets  are  boasting  to  the 
world  about  lower  prices  in  the  U.S.S.R.  No  one 
in  Poland  needs  to  be  an  economist  to  realize  that 
his  personal  privations  and  denials,  the  draining 
of  his  country,  are  what  make  the  lower  prices 
possible  in  the  Soviet  Union. 

In  the  last  several  years,  the  U.S.  information 
and  exchange  program  has  developed  in  a  more  or 
less  topsy  fashion.  It  is  a  new  arm  of  our  Govern- 
ment. It  must  strengthen  the  other  means — 
diplomatic,  military,  and  economic — by  which  we 
pursue  our  objectives  abroad. 

Effectiveness  of  IIA 

Has  this  new  arm  of  government  done  its  job? 
Is  it  effective  now?  Should  the  citizen  continue 
to  pay  his  taxes  in  part  to  support  such  an 
undertaking? 

Most  people  who  know  something  about  this 
program,  I  believe,  have  no  hesitation  in  answer- 
ing these  questions  affirmatively.  They  know, 
moreover,  that  it  is  not  the  kind  of  program,  like 
making  bullets  or  tanks  or  ships,  where  you  can 
apply  the  slide  rules,  the  statistics,  and  the  cost 
factors,  and  then  come  up  with  a  measured  answer. 

More  and  more  people  have  realized  that  shower- 
ing a  thousand  leaflets  is  worth  while  if  only  one 
person  picks  up  a  copy  and  acts  on  it;  that  broad- 
casting is  worth  while  so  long  as  there  is  one 
radio  receiver  in  operation;  that  the  visit  of  one 
person  may  have  a  profound  effect  on  our  rela- 
tions with  another  country ;  that  a  single  film  can 
revolutionize  the  thinking  of  an  entire  village; 
and  that  a  book  vitalized  with  the  ideals  of  a 
Lincoln  will  open  the  minds  of  all  those  who  read 
it. 

This  new  program  is  effective,  perhaps,  only 
when  it  reaches  into  the  minds  of  other  people 
and  presents  the  truth  day  in  and  day  out.  We 
are  doing  just  that  in  many  ways,  but  the  Amer- 
ican people  know  very  little  or  nothing  at  all 
about  it. 

For  example : 

— When  the  Soviets  must  use  almost  1,000  trans- 
mitters to  hold  out  the  Voice  of  America  (VOA) 
at  a  cost  which  may  exceed  the  entire  budget  of 
our  radio  program;  and  when  the  VOA  receives 
four  times  as  much  audience  mail  as  the  BBC. 


June  8,   1953 


817 


— AVlicn  two  priests,  one  in  Italy  and  one  in 
tlie  Pliilippines,  can  say,  respectively: 

One  motion  picture  is  worth  a  hundred  sermons. 

The  thins  I  lil<e  [aliout  Iia's  films]  ...  is  that  they 
make  people  think.  Thinking  people  make  poor  Com- 
munists. 

— When  the  Secretary  of  the  Belgian  American 
Educational  Foundation  can  report  that  of  about 
650  Belgians  who  had  been  to  the  United  States 
under  the  auspices  of  the  foundation,  11  have  since 
become  Ministers  of  State  (3  have  been  Prime 
Mini.sters),  5  have  been  Senators,  5  have  been 
members  of  the  Chamber  of  Representatives.  14 
have  held  positions  in  international  organizations, 
and  nearly  300  were,  or  now  are,  faculty  members 
of  the  four  Belgian  universities  or  other  institu- 
tions of  higher  learning. 

— "\Anien  the  distribution  of  press  material  in 
several  European  countries,  used  by  free  trade 
unionists,  is  credited  with  the  failure  of  Com- 
munist-attempted general  strikes;  and  when  the 
only  course  of  retaliation  by  the  Communists  must 
take  the  form  of  bombing  and  burning  our  field 
posts,  as  they  have  done  in  Damascus,  Baghdad, 
and  Beirut. 

— When  the  proposed  elimination  of  informa- 
tion centers — our  libraries — in  Schweinfurt,  Ger- 
many, and  Hakodate,  Japan,  saw  civic  groups, 
churches,  and  labor  unions  successfully  petitioning 
to  retain  these  centers.  In  the  Japanese  city, 
40,000  persons  signed  such  a  petition. 

— And  when,  in  an  activity  begun  with  one  man 
in  1948,  nearly  800  projects  have  been  developed 
with  organizations  and  individuals  in  the  United 
States  so  they  could  participate  directly  in  this 
overseas  program. 

When  facts  like  this  become  known,  when 
the  reasons  for  spreading  the  truth  about  our- 
selves are  fully  understood,  I  am  sure  no  sane 
person  w^ould  ask:  "Can  we  afford  the  Ii.\  pro- 
gram?" He  would  say  instead,  "Can  we  afford 
to  be  without  it?" 

But  the  most  conclusive  measure  of  the  worth  of 
the  program  may  be  this :  Suppose  that  the  U.S. 
Government  had  no  overseas  program  of  this 
nature,  no  radio,  no  publications,  no  information 
centers,  no  exchange  of  persons,  no  motion  pic- 
tures. In  short,  no  explanation  to  the  great 
masses  of  people  in  tlie  world  of  U.S.  policy,  U.S. 
deeds,  and  what  Americans  stand  for. 

Quite  obviously,  few  among  us  would  favor 
such  a  negative  course  in  the  world  of  today. 

To  do  the  positive  job  of  spreading  the  truth, 
and  to  do  it  most  efficiently,  we  must  eliminate 
from  the  program  any  person  who  is  not  in  com- 
plete sympathy  with  the  aims  and  purposes  of 
our  Government.  W^e  must  bring  in  the  most 
brilliant  men  and  women  available  in  the  United 
States.  Every  individual  in  the  Iia,  and  every 
new  employee,  must  be  what  I  would  call  a  genuine 
American. 


For  mark  you  well :  This  program  is  important. 
It  is  an  undertaking  which  the  President  and  other 
leaders  regard  as  of  the  highest  importance.  For 
they  realize  this :  If  our  job  of  carrying  America's 
message  of  truth  and  hope  to  the  world  is  well 
done,  there  is  a  good  chance  that  it  will  be  the 
weapon  with  which  free  men  will  finallj'  overcome 
the  modern  day  challenge  to  freedom.  It  is  our 
best  hope  for  enduring  peace — backed  by  the  faith 
of  free  men. 


Reed  Mission  Reports 
on  Pakistan  Survey 

Press  release  287  dated  May  25 

The  food  survey  mission  to  Pakistan  under 
Harry  Reed,  dean  of  the  Agriculture  Extension 
Service  of  Purdue  University,  has  returned  and 
made  its  report  to  the  Department  of  State  and 
the  Mutual  Security  Agency. 

The  purpose  of  the  mission  was  to  make  an 
intensive  survey  of  Pakistan's  food  needs  for  the 
coming  year  in  the  light  of  that  country's  request 
for  U.  S.  assistance  in  supplying  a  quantity  of 
wheat.  This  objective  was  accomplished  with 
the  excellent  cooperation  of  Pakistan  officials  both 
in  Karachi  and  the  provinces. 

The  mission  reported  that  Pakistan  is  approach- 
ing a  very  critical  period  for  its  national  economy. 
The  most  urgent  problem  is  the  assurance  of  a  food 
supply  for  the  next  12  months.  Mr.  Reed  em- 
phasized that  the  people  of  Pakistan  are  fully 
aware  of  this  problem  and  have  taken  a  number 
of  steps  toward  its  solution.  However,  if  a  drastic 
food  shortage  is  to  be  averted,  the  efforts  of  the 
Pakistan  people  will  have  to  be  supplemented  with 
substantial  outside  assistance  for  the  procurement 
of  wheat. 

Mr.  Reed's  associates  on  the  mission  were  Nor- 
man J.  Volk,  associate  director  of  the  Agriculture 
Extension  Service  of  Purdue,  and  Peter  H.  De- 
laney,  Office  of  South  Asian  Affairs,  Department 
of  State. 

King  and  Queen  of  Greece 
Invited  To  Visit  U.S. 

White  House  press  release  dated  May  28 

During  his  present  visit  to  Greece,  the  Secre- 
tary of  State  extended  on  behalf  of  the  President 
an  invitation  to  Their  Majesties  the  King  and 
Queen  of  the  Hellenes  to  visit  the  United  States  in 
autumn  of  this  year. 

It  will  be  a  pleasure  for  the  Government  of 
the  United  States  to  welcome  for  the  first  time 
to  this  counti-y  the  rulers  of  a  nation  which  con- 
tributed so  much  of  its  classical  heritage  of  ideas 
to  the  concej^ts  which  animated  the  founders  of 
our  democracy.     The  United  States  and  Greece 


818 


Department  of  Sfate  Bulletin 


have  maintained  the  most  cordial  relations  since 
the  emergence  of  Greece  as  a  modern  State  more 
than  a  century  ago.  The  visit  of  Their  Majes- 
ties King  Paul  and  Queen  Frederika  will  provide 
the  American  people  an  opportunity  to  manifest 
the  warm  friendship  they  have  long  felt  for  a 
gallant  ally  whose  record  against  armed  aggi-es- 
sion  both  during  and  after  World  War  II  has  been 
an  inspiration  to  all  of  the  free  world. 

Signing  of  Tax  Conventions 
With  Australia 

Press  release  261  dated  May  14 

On  May  14,  1953,  Walter  Bedell  Smith,  Acting 
StH'i-etary  of  State,  and  Sir  Percy  C.  Spender, 
Australian  Ambassador,  signed  three  conventions 
(treaties)  between  the  United  States  and  Australia 
for  the  avoidance  of  double  taxation  and  the  pre- 
vention of  fiscal  evasion,  one  relating  to  taxes  on 
income,  one  relating  to  taxes  on  the  estates  of 
deceased  persons,  and  one  i-elating  to  taxes  on 
gifts. 

The  substantive  provisions  of  the  income-tax 
and  estate-tax  conventions  follow,  in  general,  the 
pattern  of  such  conventions  which  have  been 
entered  into  by  the  United  States  with  numerous 
other  countries.  The  gift-tax  convention  with 
Australia  is  the  first  convention  of  this  kind  which 
the  United  States  has  concluded  with  any  country. 
It  also  follows  the  general  pattern  of  tax  conven- 
tions, the  objective  of  which  is  to  eliminate  double 
taxation  as  far  as  practicable. 

The  three  conventions  with  Australia  are  sub- 
ject to  ratification  and  will  be  submitted  to  the 
President  for  transmission  to  the  Senate  for  ad- 
vice and  consent  to  ratification.  Upon  the  ex- 
change of  instruments  of  ratification  by  the  United 
States  and  Australia,  each  of  the  conventions  will 
enter  into  force  according  to  a  formula  set  forth 
in  the  particular  convention. 

Royal  Treasures  Returned 
to  Ryukyu  Islands 

Press  release  206  dated  May  28 

Treasures  of  the  former  Royal  Household  of 
the  Ryukyu  Islands  were  returned  to  the  Ryu- 
kyuan  Government  on  Okinawa  by  Maj.  Gen. 
David  A.  D.  Ogden,  the  Deputy  Governor  of  the 
Ryukyu  Islands,  on  "Friendship  Day,"  May  26, 
19.53,  which  terminated  a  week's  celebration  in  the 
Ryukyus  of  the  100th  anniversary  of  the  visit  of 
Commodore  Perry  to  the  Ryukyu  Islands  in  1853. 

These  treasures  were  recovered  earl}'  this  month 
in  the  United  States  by  the  Bureau  of  Customs, 
with  the  assistance  of  an  Army  sergeant,  W^illiam 
T.  Davis,  who  was  assigned  to  Okinawa  in  1949. 
At  that  time  he  learned  of  the  tragic  loss  of  the 
special  collections  and  archives  of  the  old  royal 


court  which  had  been  preserved  in  the  Shuri 
Castle  for  over  400  years.  These  irreplaceable 
documents  and  royal  regalia  were  believed  to  have 
been  destroyed  in  1945  when  the  cities  of  Naha 
and  Shuri,  the  ancient  capital  of  the  islands,  be- 
came a  battlefield.  In  April  1952  fewer  than  100 
works  concerning  Ryukyu  history  remained  in 
the  library  at  Shuri. 

A  gilded  headpiece  of  the  Sho  Royal  House  is 
among  the  items  being  restored  to  Okinawa  under 
U.S.  Govermnent  policies. 

The  return  of  the  Omoro  Soshi,  the  original  22 
manuscript  volumes  of  ancient  Ryukyuan  poems 
and  chants  dating  from  the  Ming  dynasty,  is  of 
unique  importance.  Volume  I  dates  back  from  the 
eleventh  year  of  Chia-ch'ing  (1532)  and  the  other 
volumes  date  from  the  third  year  of  Tien-chi 
(1623).  This  rare  manuscript  from  the  Shuri 
Castle  is  the  earliest  extant  copy  of  ancient  songs 
of  great  historic  and  religious  significance  for  the 
Ryukyuan  people.  Twenty-six  volumes  of  the  an- 
nals of  the  Royal  Household  and  genealogical  rec- 
ords of  the  princely  families  dating  from  1702  and 
1711  and  other  miscellaneous  works  are  also  being 
returned.  A  complete  record  on  microfilm  of 
these  rare  volumes  has  been  made  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  State. 

(VISA  andlDanish  Government 
Initiate  Productivity  Program 

The  Danish  Government  and  the  Mutual  Secu- 
rity Agency  on  May  15  put  into  motion  a  broad 
program  to  increase  Danish  production  and  pro- 
ductivity during  the  next  2  years.  Announce- 
ment of  the  undertaking  was  made  on  May  15  at 
Washington.  Simultaneously,  Msa  allotted  $1,- 
500,000  in  defense  support  funds  to  Denmark 
under  terms  of  a  new  agi-eement,  and  said  another 
$1,500,000  allotment  was  planned  before  July  1. 
These  dollars  will  be  used  for  the  procurement  of 
commodities  needed  in  Denmark's  defense  buildup. 
Danish  currency  generated  by  the  dollars  will  be 
used  to  finance  the  new  productivity  campaign. 

Under  terms  of  the  Danish  Government-MsA 
agreement,  Denmark  is  earmarking  31,720,000 
kroner  (equal  to  $4,597,102)  for  the  productivity 
progi-ams  of  which  about  two-thirds  is  to  be  gen- 
erated by  Msa's  new  $3  million  allocations  and  the 
remainder  taken  from  Danish  Government 
counterpart  funds  previously  generated  by  Msa 
dollar  aid. 

Denmark  is  the  fourth  country  to  enter  into 
such  an  agreement  with  Ms^\.  Tlie  others  are  the 
United  Kingdom,  the  Federal  Republic  of  Ger- 
many, and  the  Netherlands.  Negotiations  are  in 
progress  with  other  countries. 

MsA  is  directed  to  work  with  countries  partici- 
pating in  the  Mutual  Security  Program  to  develop 
intensive  productivity  programs  under  the  terms 
of  the  "free  enterprise"  amendments  to  Mutual 


June  8,   1953 


819 


Security  legislation.  These  amendments  provide 
that  MsA  use  up  to  $100,000,000  this  year  to  gen- 
erate foreign  currency  counterpart  funds  for  pro- 
ductivity programs  in  Western  European  coun- 
tries which  enter  into  agreements  with  Msa  "with 
a  view  to  stimulating  free  enterprise  and  the  ex- 
pansion of  the  economies  of  those  countries." 

The  Danish  fund  will  provide  10,565,000  kroner 
(equal  to  $1,531,160)  for  loans  and  grants  to  pri- 
vate enterprises  in  industry  and  commerce; 
4,500,000  kroner  (equal  to  $652,174)  to  support  a 
building  construction  program;  15,000,000  kroner 
(equal  to  $2,173,913)  to  increase  agricultural  pro- 
duction; and  1,655,000  kroner  (equal  to  $239,855) 
as  Denmark's  contribution  to  the  European  pro- 
ductivity agency  established  May  1  under  the  Or- 
ganization for  European  Economic  Cooperation 
(Oeec). 

The  agreement  specifies  that  commercial  enter- 
prises benefiting  from  the  program  are  to  share 
their  increased  profits  with  labor  and  consumers. 

A  key  part  of  the  program  is  the  development  of 
a  corps  of  Danish  consultants  who  will  be  avail- 
able to  aid  industry,  labor,  and  the  distributing 
and  building  trades.  Intensive  training  for  this 
personnel  will  be  provided  through  studies  in  Den- 
mark, other  parts  of  Europe  and,  when  necessary, 
the  United  States. 

On  completion  of  their  training,  the  consultants 
will  be  obligated  to  make  their  services  available 
to  private  enterprise  or  the  productivity  program 
for  at  least  1  year  in  close  cooperation  with  the 
Danish  Productivity  Council.  The  Council, 
which  includes  representatives  of  labor,  employ- 
ers. Government,  and  consumers,  will  supervise 
the  entire  productivity  program.  It  was  set  up 
in  1949  to  work  towarcl  higher  productivity  in 
Danish  industry  and  agriculture. 

The  industrial  consultants  will  advise  manage- 
ment on  the  application  of  scientific  principles,  and 
labor  consultants  will  advise  the  free  trade  unions 
regarding  their  role  in  the  productivity  campaign. 
Similarly,  construction  and  distribution  consult- 
ants will  work  closely  with  appropriate  organiza- 
tions in  advising  retailers  and  contractors  on  spe- 
cial methods  to  raise  the  level  of  productivity  and 
to  market  the  increased  production  which  results. 

To  spur  building  construction,  five  machinery 
depots  will  be  established  in  various  parts  of  Den- 
mark which  will  rent  equipment  and  machinery, 
such  as  cranes,  hoists,  scaffolds,  and  the  like,  to 
contractors  who  are  unable  to  afford  the  purchase 
of  such  equipment.  The  machinery  available  in 
these  warehouses  will  be  sufficient  to  permit  the 
construction  of  about  4,200  apartments  yearly,  or 
about  20  percent  of  Denmark's  total  annual  new 
construction. 

Another  major  part  of  the  program  is  a  4,000,000 
kroner  (equal  to  $579,710)  revolving  loan  fund  to 
be  devoted  to  the  modernization  of  existing  food 
stores  on  the  pattern  of  American  self-service 
stores.     Low-interest  loans  not  to  exceed  about 


30,000  kroner  each  (equal  to  about  $4,350)  are  to 
be  made  to  small-  and  medium-sized  stores  seeking 
to  convert  to  self-service  type  of  operation. 

Also  in  keeping  with  the  objectives  of  the  Msa 
legislation  is  a  project  for  the  protection  of  con- 
sumers' interests  in  the  form  of  developing  and 
strengthening  the  existing  Danish  consumers'  or- 
ganization. This  project  will  permit  a  substan- 
tial expansion  of  consumer  research  work  such  as 
the  testing  of  products,  educational  programs,  and 
demonstrations  to  housewives. 

A  key  segment  of  the  agricultural  productivity 
program  will  be  the  establishment  of  about  90 
pilot  farms  which  will  demonstrate  modern  and 
efficient  methods  of  feeding  cattle,  pigs,  and  poul- 
try. An  extensive  program  also  is  being  devel- 
oped to  instruct  farmers  in  the  efficient  use  of 
machinery,  largely  necessitated  because  the  num- 
ber of  tractors  in  use  in  Denmark  has  increased 
from  5,000  in  1945  to  nearly  40,000  today. 

Another  important  provision  of  the  agricultural 
productivity  program  is  the  setting  up  of  an  Agri- 
cultural Information  and  Technical  Service  Office, 
which  will  correspond  to  the  American  Agricul- 
tural Extension  Service.  This  office,  working 
with  the  Productivity  Center,  will  attempt  to 
spread  to  farmers  knowledge  of  improved  agri- 
cultural techniques  to  increase  food  and  fiber 
production. 


U.S.  Delegations 

to  International  Conferences 

Telegraph  Consultative  Committee  (ITU> 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  25  (press 
release  285)  that  the  International  Telegraph  Consulta- 
tive Committee  of  the  International  Telecommunication 
Union  is  to  hold  its  Seventh  Plenary  Assembly  at  Arnhem, 
Netherlands,  May  26-.Iune  13,  1953. 

The  United  States  will  be  represented  at  the  meeting 
by  the  following  delegation : 

Chairman 

Edward  M.  Webster,  Commissioner,  Federal  Communica- 
tions Commission 

Vice  Chairman 

Richard  T.  Blaclc,  Telecommunications  Policy  Staff,  De- 
partment of  State 

Advisers 

Robert  G.  Kreer,  Assistant  Chief  for  Telegraph,  Divi- 
sion of  Communications  and  Records,  Department 
of  State 

William  P.  Richmond,  Jr.,  Attach^,  American  Embassy, 
Paris 

Marion  H.  Woodward,  Chief,  International  Division, 
Common  Carrier  Bureau,  Federal  Communications 
Commission 

The  Committee  has  no  formal  agenda  for  its  Seventh 
Plenary  Assembly.  Its  work  will  consist  of  a  review  of 
the  reports  and  recommendations  prepared  by  the  various 
study  groups  on  their  assigned  subjects ;  the  adoption  of 
recommendations ;  the  formulation  of  new  questions  for 


820 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


study ;  and  the  taking  of  decisions,  as  necessary,  on  mat- 
ters connected  with  the  administration  of  the  Committee 
until  its  next  plenary  assembly. 

Both  the  U.  S.  Government  and  private  American  tele- 
communication companies  have  a  direct  interest  in  all 
recommendations  and  decisions  of  the  Committee  which 
may  affect  message  service.  Moreover,  the  United  States 
has  made  numerous  contributions  to  the  worlv  of  the 
various  study  groups  over  the  past  few  years. 


Northwest  Atlantic  Fisheries  Commission 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  25  (press 
release  2S3)  that  the  third  meeting  of  the  International 
Commission  for  the  Northwest  Atlantic  Fisheries  would 
convene  at  New  Haven,  Conn.,  on  that  day.  The  U.S. 
Government  will  be  represented  at  the  meeting  by  the 
fcilldwing  delegation: 

U.S.  Commissioner 

Jcilin  L.  Kaslj,  Chief,  Office  of  Foreign  Activities,  Fish  and 
Wildlife  Service,  Department  of  the  Interior 

Richard  Knollenberg,  Chester,  Conn. 

I'rancis  W.  Sargent,  Director,  Division  of  Marine  Fish- 
eries, Department  of  Conservation,  Commonwealth  of 
Massachusetts,  Boston,  Mass. 

Advisers 

Ilirbert  W.  Graham,  Chief,  North  Atlantic  Fishery  In- 
vestigations, Fish  and  Wildlife  Service,  Department 
of  the  Interior 

Lionel  A.  Walford,  Chief,  Branch  of  Fishery  Biology, 
Fish  and  Wildlife  Service,  Department  of  the  Interior 

Under  the  terms  of  the  International  Convention  for 
the  Northwest  Atlantic  Fisheries,  which  entered  into 
force  in  July  10.50,  the  Commission  provides  tlie  machinery 
fur  international  cooperation  in  the  scientific  investiga- 
tion and  development  of  the  fishery  resources  of  the 
waters  off  the  west  coast  of  Greenland  and  the  east  coasts 
of  Canada  and  New  England. 

While  the  Commission  has  no  direct  regulatory  powers, 
it  may  recommend  to  governments  the  regulator.v  meas- 
ures that  it  considers  necessary  for  maintaining,  at  a  max- 
inuira  level  for  sustained  production,  the  stocks  of  fish 
which  support  the  international  fisheries  in  the  convention 
area.  The  members  of  the  Commission  are  Canada,  Den- 
mark, France,  Iceland,  Italy,  Norway,  Portugal,  Spain,  the 
United  Kingdom,  and  the  United  States. 

It  is  expected  that  the  Commission  will  at  its  current 
meeting  adopt  a  comprehensive  research  program  which 
will  constitute,  in  effect,  a  master  plan  for  the  future 
research  activities  to  be  undertaken  in  the  convention  area 
by  the  member  governments  under  the  auspices  of  the 
Commission. 

Among  the  matters  of  great  interest  to  the  United  States 
which  the  Commission  will  have  before  it  are  recommenda- 
tions having  to  do  with  the  New  England  haddock  fisheries. 


THE  DEPARTMENT 


Appointment 

Robert  Richardson  Bowie  as  Director  of  the  Policy 
Planning  Staff  and  Department  representative  on  the 
Planning  Board  of  the  National  Security  Council,  ef- 
fective May  28. 


New  Series  of  Broadcasts  to  Latin  America 

Press  release  297  dated  May  28 

Robert  L.  Johnson,  Administrator  of  the  International 
Information  Administration,  announced  on  May  28  that 
Associated  Broadcasters,  Inc.,  of  San  Francisco,  has  been 
authorized  to  use  for  Latin  American  broadcasts,  until 
June  30,  two  shortwave  transmitters  which  they  are  pres- 
ently operating  under  contract  with  Iia.  The  new  series 
of  Latin  American  broadcasts  will  begin  May  28  and 
continue  through  the  month  of  June. 

This  shortwave  transmitting  plant  at  San  Francisco, 
now  to  be  used  for  the  new  series  of  broadcasts  under  pri- 
vate auspices,  was  one  of  those  affected  when  Dr.  Johnson 
gave  notice,  on  April  1,  that  Iia  contracts  for  facilities 
at  five  shortwave  transmitting  plants  would  not  be  re- 
newed. At  that  time  the  Administrator  said  that  in 
view  of  his  proposed  economy  cuts  in  the  Voice  of  America 
personnel  and  language  broadcasts,  Iia  would  not  need 
these  facilities  after  the  present  contract  expired  on 
June  30. 

The  daily  shortwave  programs  launched  by  Wesley  I. 
Dumm,  president  of  Associated  Broadcasters,  Inc.,  from 
6 :  30  to  9 :  30  p.  m.,  e.  s.  t.,  fill  approximately  the  same 
time  occupied  by  the  Voice  of  America's  Spanish  language 
broadcasts  which  terminated  May  23. 

This  new  series  of  programs,  broadcast  without  addi- 
tional cost  to  the  Government,  will  consist  mainly  of  music, 
sports,  and  news  currently  used  on  San  Francisco's  Sta- 
tion KSFO.  Associated  Broadcasters,  Inc.,  will  prepare 
the  selected  music  and  sports  programs  for  shortwave 
broadcast  with  Spanish  commentary  at  their  own  expense. 
Spanish-speaking  announcers  will  replace  the  usual  KSFO 
newscasts  with  items  of  particular  interest  to  Latin 
America. 

In  addition.  Dr.  Johnson  added  that  the  International 
Information  Administration  had  contracted  with  Asso- 
ciated Broadcasters,  Inc.,  to  produce  and  broadcast  to 
Latin  America,  under  the  supervision  of  the  Department 
of  State,  a  series  of  half-hour  dramatic  programs  in  Span- 
ish, designed  to  cultivate  friendships  with  the  people  of 
Latin  America.  The  programs  are  to  be  broadcast  some 
time  between  6 :  30  and  9 :  30  p.  m.,  e.  s.  t.  The  dramatic 
series  will  be  paid  from  funds  appropriated  by  Congress 
for  radio  programing  to  Latin  America  and  Western 
Europe  by  private  international  broadcasting  licensees. 


THE  FOREIGN  SERVICE 


Praise  for  the  Foreign  Service 

hy  Acting  Secretary  Smith  ^ 

I  had  not  intended  to  talk  shop  today,  and  yet 
I  came  here  wanting  in  some  way  to  pay  a  deserved 
tribute  to  a  career  service  and,  believe  me,  it  is 
possible  for  me  to  apply  a  very,  very  rigid  stand- 
ard of  comparison. 

I  have,  in  almost  40  years  of  service  as  an 
Army  officer,  believed  that  I  required  a  very  high 
standard  of  performance  in  my  subordinates,  that 


'  Transcript  of  extemporaneous  remarks  made  before 
the  Foreign  Service  Association  at  Washington  on  May 
27  (press  release  294). 


June  8,   1953 


821 


I  have  demanded  more  of  them  and  of  myself  than 
many  of  my  contemporaries,  and  indeed  my  sub- 
ordinates have  felt  the  same  way.  I  want  you  to 
know  that  during  the  time  I  have  been  associated 
with  the  Foreigrn  Service,  both  abroad  and  in  the 
Department  here,  I  have,  and  I  say  this  literally, 
been  astonished — pleased  and  astonished — by  the 
hijrh  qualities  of  intellectual  honesty,  integrity, 
and  devotion  to  duty  which  I  have  seen  continu- 
ously displayed.  I  don't  mean  just  the  long  hours 
of  thankless  work,  away  from  the  observation  of 
a  superior,  simply  of  getting  a  job  done,  but  the 
real  dedication  to  a  task,  to  a  service,  to  an  ideal. 
It  exceeds — it  certainly  equals  if  it  does  not  ex- 
ceed— anything  that  I  have  ever  seen  before,  and 
I  wanted  to  acknowledge  that  fact. 

This  service  does  two  things  for  you.  It  de- 
velops an  intellectual  honesty  which  permeates  the 
entire  personnel.     I  will  give  you  an  example. 

After  40  years  of  service  in  various  capacities 
in  Government,  after  being  responsible  for  our 
war  planning  on  a  high  level,  conducting  various 
large-scale  military  operations,  then  attending  the 
course  of  instruction  in  atomic  energy,  becoming 
Director  of  Central  Intelligence,  and  occupying 
other  positions  of  more  or  less  sensitivity,  I  joined 
the  State  Department  and  was,  of  course,  sub- 
jected to  a  full  field  investigation. 

During  the  course  of  that  investigation,  one 
of  the  officers  charged  with  conducting  it  wanted 
to  find  out  something  about  my  service  in  Moscow. 
The  only  man  who  was  immediately  available  who 
had  served  with  me  was  a  friend  and  a  son  of  a 
friend,  a  young  officer  whom  I  had  actually  fired 
out  of  Moscow  because,  while  I  think  he  is  a  very 
good  man,  he  was  misplaced  and  was  doing  a 
remarkably  poor  job.  I  am  afraid  I  didn't  handle 
him  very  well  on  his  report.  I  think  he  has  re- 
covered from  that.  In  any  event,  it  was  to  him 
that  the  Fbi  went  to  find  out  about  my  service 
and,  as  he  told  an  associate  that  had  reached  me 
about  third  hand,  the  first  thought  was,  "Well, 
the  mills  of  the  gods  grind  slowly."  Then  he  said, 
"I  thought  it  over  and  I  could  not  in  honesty 
think  of  anything  very  bad  to  say  about  the  old 
goat."  Weil,  there  is  the  opportunity  for  levity, 
but  it  means  what  it  says,  and  he  said  what  he  be- 
lieved and  not  possibly  what  he  would  like  to  have 
said — a  good  standard  for  relatively  junior  offi- 
cers in  the  service,  one  that  I  applaud"  and  one  that 
I  admire. 

Now,  with  regard  to  work  and  its  effectiveness, 
there  are  various  standards,  of  course.  While  in 
Moscow,  I  believe  it  was  in  company  with  your 
distinguished  President  that  I  visited  a  collective 
farm.  On  the  way  in,  our  interpreter,  who  was 
with  us,  stopped  to  speak  a  few  words  to  a  very 
old  Russian  woman  who  was  with  a  sickle  cutting 
brush  alongside  the  road.  He  said  to  her  among 
other  things,  "Mother,  how  are  things  on  the 
farm?"  She  said,  "Ah,  they  are  terrible.  On  this 
farm  nothing  works.     The  tractors  don't  work; 


the  plows  doni  work ;  the  trucks  don't  work.  The 
only  thing  on  this  farm  that  works  has  just  been 
made  a  heroine  of  Soviet  motherhood." 

There  have  been  times,  along  about  half  past 
7  or  8  or  9  o'clock  in  the  evening,  when  I  have 
thought  that  our  mechanical  processes  of  getting 
things  done  and  coordinated  in  the  Department 
were  about  like  that.  But  usually  in  the  morning 
when  I  get  to  my  desk  and  see  the  results  of  some 
clearheaded,  coordinated  thinking  in  the  field  of 
foreign  relations  and  realize  how  wrong  I  myself 
would  have  been  had  it  not  been  for  that  level- 
headed staff  advice,  I  reconcile  myself  to  any  loose 
motion  that  we  may  have  in  the  field  of  technical- 
staff  operations.  Those  are  easily  correctable. 
What  cannot  be  supplied  on  short  notice  is  the 
character,  the  quality,  the  integrity,  and  the  in- 
tellectual honesty  of  the  personnel.  That  we  have 
in  full  measure.  For  that  our  country  has  reason 
to  be  grateful.  I  have  reason  to  be  grateful.  I 
congratulate  you  for  it. 

Confirmations 

The  Senate  on  May  28  confirmed  Arthur  Gardner  as 
Ambassador  to  Cuba. 

The  Senate  on  May  28  confirmed  R.  Douglas  Stuart  as 
Ambassador  to  Canada. 

The  Senate  on  May  28  confirmed  William  T.  Pheiffer  as 
Ambassador  to  the  Dominican  Republic. 

The  Senate  on  May  28  confirmed  Michael  J.  McDermott 
as  Ambassador  to  El  Salvador. 


THE  CONGRESS 


Request  for  Extension  of  UNRWA 
Program  for  Palestine  Refugees 

Statement  hy  Acting  Secretary  Smith  ^ 

As  this  is  a  public  hearing,  it  is  necessary  to 
review  certain  matters  already  well  known  to  this 
Committee. 

I  shall  not  document  our  interest  in  the  Near 
Eastern  region,  which  is  fully  understood  in  re- 
sponsible circles  within  the  executive  and  legisla- 
tive branches  of  Goverimient. 

It  is  my  purpose  to  outline  the  nature  of  the 
refugee  jiroblem  and  the  efforts  of  the  U.N.  Re- 
lief and  Works  Agency  (Unrwa)  to  rehabilitate 
the  unhappy  Palestinians  who  lost  their  homes 
and  projDcrty  in  what  is  now  Israel. 

Our  conclusions  are  that  this  is  a  world  prob- 
lem which  it  is  proper  for  the  United  Nations  to 
deal  with;  that  we  should  continue  to  support  the 
U.N.  Relief  and  Works  Agency  in  its  efforts.    We 

'  Made  before  the  Near  Eastern  and  African  Affairs 
Subcommittee  of  the  Senate  Foreign  Relations  Committee 
on  May  20  (press  release  276). 


822 


Deparimeni  of  State  Bulletin 


'think  that  the  United  Nations  has  done  a  good  job 
under  difficult  conditions.  We  appreciate  the  full 
support  that  Congress  has  given  in  the  past  to 
this  etiort.  We  hope  that  we  can  look  to  Congress 
,for  continuing  support.  Past  concern  for  this  un- 
fortunate group  is  justified  on  gi-ounds  of  our 
national  interest  and  on  grounds  of  common 
humanity. 

Difficult  conditions  have  hindered  progress, 
stemming  from  the  background  of  hostilities  in 
Palestine.  Furthermore,  large-scale  projects  re- 
quire detailed  planning,  and  there  are  inevitable 
delays  in  putting  major  reclamation  and  irriga- 
tion plans  in  hand. 

This  in  brief  is  the  situation : 

As  a  result  of  hostilities,  upwards  of  750,000 
Arabs,  living  in  the  British  mandate  of  Palestine, 
in  1948  left  their  homes  and  possessions.  The  vast 
majority  of  these  people  have  received  no  com- 
pensation for  their  property,  and  many  express 
the  desire  to  be  repatriated. 

While  100,000  or  more  of  these  people  have  been 
able  to  find  means  of  self-support  in  Arab  com- 
munities, the  registry  rolls  of  the  United  Nations 
now  list  about  865,000  needy  refugees,  to  whom 
810,000  "rations"— the  equivalent  of  1,600  calor- 
ies daily,  are  being  distributed. 

This  problem  is  not  static,  as  our  best  evidence 
indicates  that  the  refugee  population  is  growing 
at  the  rate  of  25,000  annually,  as  births  exceed 
deaths. 

Present  projects  for  the  refugee  population, 
which  Mr.  Gardiner  =  can  describe  in  greater  de- 
tail later  and  which  will  take  some  years  to  im- 
plement fully,  hold  out  hopes  for  a  living  for  only 
about  400.000  souls. 

The  simple  fact  is  that  the  agricultural,  indus- 
trial, and  financial  resources  of  the  Arab  nations 
concerned  cannot  cope  with  this  problem  unaided. 

As  you  know,  Israel  occupied  territory  during 
the  conflict  considerably  beyond  the  boundaries 
allotted  to  it  by  the  U.N.  partition  plan  of  1947. 
From  the  lands  so  occupied  many  thousands  be- 
came refugees. 

The  refugee  problem  is  the  principal  unresolved 
issue  between  Israel  and  the  Arabs;  outstanding 
issues  are  generally  listed  as  compensation  to  the 
refugees,  repatriation  of  the  refugees,  adjustment 
of  boundaries,  and  the  status  of  Jerusalem  and  the 
Holy  Places.  None  of  these  issues  can  be  separated 
from  the  refugee  problem. 

Against  a  background  of  frustration  and  hostil- 
ity, fhe  U.N.  Relief  and  Works  Agency  has  done 
two  things :  Maintained  a  program  of  relief — food, 
shelter,  medical  care — and  developed  in  the  Arab 
countries  programs  of  self-support  for  the  refu- 
I  gees. 

I      The  Department  of  State  considers  that  this 
i  U.N.  agency  is  the  correct  instrument  for  these 

'  Arthur  Z.  Gardiner,  Politico-Economic  Adviser,  Bu- 
reau of  Near  Eastern,  South  Asian  and  African  Affairs. 

June  8,   1953 


purposes.  Through  the  establishment  of  such  an 
organization  by  the  General  Assembly,  widespread 
support  of  the  program  has  been  secured  from 
many  nations.  At  the  same  time,  the  direct  rela- 
tionship between  the  agency  and  the  principal 
contributing  governments,  through  the  Agency's 
Advisory  Commission,  has  enabled  us  to  keep  in 
close  contact  with  its  operations  and  to  have  a 
dii'ect  voice  in  its  policies. 

As  for  the  general  policies  of  the  agency,  its 
standards  for  relief  must  be  conditioned  by  the 
fact  that  poverty  prevails  among  nonrefugees. 
There  must  be  left  incentives  for  those  who  choose 
to  work  rather  than  to  receive  a  dole.  This  makes 
for  hardship  in  a  population  which  had  achieved, 
during  the  past  30  years,  higher  material  stand- 
ards than  those  of  its  former  neighbors  and  its 
present  hosts.  We  cannot  in  any  case  right  the 
wrongs  of  the  Arab  refugee  by  relief  payments, 
but  if  the  United  Nations  can  help  maintain  ade- 
quate levels  of  health  and  nutrition  we  shall  have 
some  cause  for  satisfaction. 

On  the  side  of  rehabilitation,  we  have  witnessed 
slow  but  steady  progress  in  attitudes  among  the 
Arab  governments  enabling  the  development  of 
specific  plans  to  permit  substantial  numbers  of  the 
refugees  to  improve  their  lot. 

The  U.N.  Relief  and  Works  Agency  for  Pales- 
tine Refugees  has  conducted  its  operations  in  a 
framework  of  humanitarian  and  economic  con- 
siderations and  has  attempted  to  avoid  any  direct 
connection  with  outstanding  political  issues. 
Within  these  limits,  and  without  prejudice  to  final 
solutions  of  political  issues,  it  has  negotiated 
agreements  to  benefit  the  refugees  by  substituting 
employment  for  relief. 

In  i952  the  General  Assembly  of  the  United 
Nations,  with  Arab  support,  voted  a  3-year  pro- 
gram estimated  to  cost  $250,000,000,  divided  as  to 
$50,000,000  for  relief  and  $200,000,000  for  proj- 
ects.'' Funds  to  start  this  program  have  been 
available  since  late  in  1951. 

The  agency  has  earmarked  funds  for  the  irri- 
gation of  the  Jordan  Valley.  A  project  is  now 
under  close  study  by  the  U.S.  engineers  attached 
to  the  Government  of  Jordan.  Intensive  irriga- 
tion of  the  valley  might  provide  for  200,000  people 
not  now  living  there.  This  is  a  bold  and  imagi- 
native proposal.  In  Jordan,  whose  resources  of 
water  and  arable  land  are  limited,  it  is  the  main 
hope.  Technical  problems  both  of  water  utiliza- 
tion and  of  land  settlement  lie  ahead.  More  than 
any  other  nation,  Jordan  has  been  the  sufferer  of 
the  Palestine  hostilities.  Jordan  nevertheless  rep- 
resents a  stabilizing  influence  in  the  Near  East  and 
needs  and  welcomes  outside  aid. 

The  Egyptian  Government  has  made  a  pro- 
posal for  aiding  refugees  now  concentrated  in 
Gaza,  through  developments  in  the  Sinai  Penin- 

'  For  text  of  resolution,  see  Bulletin  of  Feb.  11,  1952, 
p.  226. 

823 


siila.  Preliminary  engineering  advice  is  favor- 
able to  such  a  proposal,  involving  use  of  water 
from  the  Nile. 

In  Syria,  work  is  under  way  on  land  reclama- 
tion carried  out  by  refugees  on  lands  made  avail- 
able by  the  Government.  Proposals  for  rehabili- 
tation of  the  urban  refugees  are  under  study. 

The  record  of  the  Unrwa  has  until  recently  con- 
sisted chiefly  of  prospects.  It  is  now  possible  to 
report  that  projects  are  the  subject  of  continuing 
collaboration  and  concrete  planning  between 
Unrwa  and  governments.  This  marks  a  great  step 
forward.  You  may  recall  that  3  years  ago  when 
the  problem  was  first  studied  by  Gordon  Clapp, 
on  behalf  of  the  Palestine  Conciliation  Commis- 
sion, It  was  impossible  for  him  to  find  responsible 
Arabs  willing  to  discuss  more  than  a  program  of 
work  relief.  We  now  are  in  the  phase  of  economic 
development  from  which  refugees  and  host  coun- 
tries can  secure  permanent  benefits. 

It  is  unreasonable  to  expect  Arab  countries  to 
accept  refugees  as  workers  unless  means  are  found 
to  improve  conditions  of  their  own  citizens  at  the 
same  time.  The  refugees  cannot  be  the  sole  bene- 
ficiaries of  new  opportunities,  nor  can  they  hope 
to  elbow  settled  people  aside.  Here  lies  the  case 
for  general  economic  development  of  the  host 
countries,  which  deserves  to  be  considered  on  its 
own  merits  as  well  as  in  the  context  of  providing 
opportunities  for  the  refugees.  From  the  con- 
clusion of  hostilities  in  Palestine  until  today, 
little  tangible  progress  has  been  made  in  such  de- 
velopment in  Syria,  Jordan,  Lebanon,  and  Egypt. 
The  interest  and  plans  of  these  countries  holcf  out 
hope  for  the  future,  but  they  will  need  help  from 
the  banks  and  from  our  own  Government,  as  well 
as  from  the  Unrwa,  if  their  plans  are  to  mature. 

It  is  clearly  not  in  our  national  interest  to  ac- 
cept responsibility  for  the  welfare  of  the  refugees, 
for  either  a  long  or  a  short  period  of  time."  It 
seems  equally  clear  that  to  abandon  this  program 
of  relief  and  rehabilitation  now  would  have  seri- 
ous repercussions  on  our  national  interests.  Such 
action  would  involve  profound  unsettlement  in  the 
Near  East,  prejudicial  to  the  well-being  of  all  our 
friends  there.  It  is  equally  clear  that  the  goals  of 
the  present  program  cannot  be  achieved  by  its 
present  terminal  date  of  June  30,  1954.  It  is  our 
view  that  the  date  for  termination  of  the  program 
should  be  extended  for  a  further  2  years,  until 
June  30,  1956 ;  that  we  should  endeavor  to  main- 
tain the  target  of  $200,000,000  for  work  projects 
and,  as  circumstances  dictate,  continue  relief  ex- 
penditures for  at  least  a  further  2  years.  This  will 
necessitate  an  increase  of  the  relief  fund  originally 
projected  at  $50,000,000. 

The  success  of  other  programs  included  in  cur- 
rent MsA  legislation  for  the  area  will  have  a  great 
effect  on  the  progress  of  this  agency,  as  would  a 
settlement  of  other  issues  in  the  Near  East. 

824 


Support  for  U.S.  Participation 
in  St.  Lawrence  Seaway  Project 

Statement  hy  Livingston  T.  Merchant 
Assistant  Secretary  for  European  Affairs  ^ 

I  am  appearing  before  you  today  to  support 
U.S.  participation  in  the  St.  Lawrence  Seaway 
project.  As  Under  Secretary  of  Commerce  Wil- 
liams has  testified,  the  Cabinet  and  the  National 
Security  Council  have  both  seriously  studied  the 
question  of  U.S.  participation.^  Both  have  come 
to  the  conclusion  that  this  participation  is  desir- 
able, provided  that  it  is  limited  to  the  interna- 
tional section  of  the  St.  Lawrence  River,  substan- 
tially as  proposed  in  S.  589. 

The  decision  was  not  made  lightly.  It  was 
based  on  the  administration's  policy  of  consider- 
ing each  major  construction  project  on  its  own 
merits  and  on  the  basis  of  the  national  interest. 

The  conclusions  reached  by  the  administration 
are  predicated  on  several  conditions.  First,  satis- 
factory assurance  must  be  received  that  the  under- 
lying power  project  will  go  ahead.  In  this  con- 
nection I  have  been  gratified  to  learn  that  the  ex- 
aminer for  the  Federal  Power  Commission  has 
issued  his  report  and  has  recommended  the  issu- 
ance of  a  license  to  the  Power  Authority  of  the 
State  of  New  York.  Second,  satisfactory  assur- 
ance is  required  that  Canada  will  go  ahead  with 
its  part  of  the  navigation  project  in  cooperation 
with  the  United  States.  I  believe  that  we  have 
the  basis  for  this  assurance  in  the  communique 
issued  after  the  recent  meeting  of  the  President 
and  the  Prime  Minister  of  Canadaj^"  which  I  wiU 
refer  to  later.  Third,  the  project  must  be  self- 
liquidating. 

Testimony  on  the  third  condition  will  be  given 
by  other  witnesses  who  will  appear  before  you.  I 
do  not  intend  to  go  into  detail  on  the  many  aspects 
of  the  legislation  which  you  are  considering.  I  do 
want,  however,  to  set  the  record  straight  as  to  just 
what  the  present  arrangements  are  in  so  far  as  the 
international  aspects  are  concerned. 

Previous  administrations  consistently  sup- 
ported measures  for  the  development  by  the 
United  States  and  Canada  of  the  Great  Lakes-St. 
Lawrence  basin.  These  measures  envisaged,  for 
the  part  of  the  United  States,  development  of 
power  and  navigation  jointly  with  Canada  along 
lines  laid  down  in  the  1941  agreement  between  the 
two  countries.  Congressional  approval  of  these 
measures  was  never  secured. 

In  the  past  IS  months,  however,  the  situation 
changed.    Under  a  different  basis,  we  have  reached 

•  Made  before  the  Senate  Foreign  Relations  Subcom- 
mittee on  S.  589,  providing  for  the  creation  of  the  St. 
Lawrence  Seaway  Development  Corporation,  on  May  20 
(press  release  275). 

'  Bulletin  of  May  25, 1953,  p.  753. 

'  Ibid.,  p.  752. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


the  point  where  we  can  see  that  both  the  naviga- 
tion and  the  power  phases  of  the  St.  Lawrence 
project  will  go  forward.  The  power  potential 
oi  the  International  Rapids  section  of  the  St. 
Lawrence  is  to  be  developed  by  entities  of  the 
'United  States  and  Canada.  A  deep  sea  water- 
way into  the  Great  Lakes  is  to  be  provided  con- 
,;urrently  by  Canada. 

I  Before  us  we  have  a  simple  question.  Will  the 
United  States  join  with  Canada  in  constructing 
the  St.  Lawrence  Seaway,  as  proposed  in  S.  589, 
flT  will  it  abandon  by  default  any  control  over 
lihis  great  natural  waterway  so  important  to  North 
,Ajnerica's  security  and  economic  progress? 

The  recent  developments  which  have  led  to  the 
present  situation  can  briefly  be  summarized.  In 
1951,  when  it  appeared  that  congressional  ap- 
iproval  of  the  1941  agreement  would  not  be  ob- 
:ained,  the  Canadian  Government  suggested  that, 
ijnder  the  appropriate  provisions  of  the  Boundary 
VS^aters  Treaty  of  1909,  application  be  made  by 
,;he  United  States  and  Canada  to  the  International 
Joint  Commission  for  approval  of  certain  works 
for  the  development  of  power  in  the  Interna- 
donal  Rapids  section  of  the  St.  Lawrence.'*  The 
Canadian  Government  gave  assurances  that, 
should  the  power  plans  be  approved,  additional 
.Torks  would  concurrently  be  provided  to  insure 
ileepwater  navigation  into  the  Great  Lakes.  The 
,C!anadian  Government  obtained  Parliamentary 
assent  to  the  necessary  domestic  legislation  for  con- 
iitruction  of  the  seaway  on  the  Canadian  side  of 
I  he  St.  Lawrence.  It  also  negotiated  an  agreement 
i.vith  the  Province  of  Ontario  whereby  the  Ontario 
Hydro-Electric  Power  Commission  would  develop 
i  he  Canadian  share  of  the  power. 
j  The  Department  of  State,  working  with  other 
nterested  executive  agencies,  cooperated  with  the 
Canadian  Government  in  the  preparation  and  the 
isubmission  of  the  applications  of  the  two  Govern- 
ments for  power  development  to  the  International 
Joint  Commission.  After  some  months  of  hear- 
ings, the  International  Joint  Commission  issued 
its  Order  of  Approval  on  October  29,  1952.^ 
'shortly  thereafter,  on  November  4,  1952,  the 
iCanadian  Government  informed  the  United  States 
jthat  it  considered  the  agreement  of  1941  to  have 
jbeen  superseded  by  the  action  of  the  International 
'Joint  Commission.  It  was  further  stated  that  the 
'Canadian  Government  would  not  therefore  seek 
'Parliamentary  ratification  of  that  agreement. 

These  developments  left  the  situation  as  follows : 
(1)  the  power  would  be  developed  by  the  Province 
of  Ontario  and  an  entity  in  the  United  States,  and 
j(2)  the  seaway  would  be  constructed  by  Canada 
alone,  provided  no  action  is  taken  by  the  Congress 

I  *  For  an  announcement  of  the  meeting  on  Sept.  8,  1951 
between  President  Truman  and  Canadian  Prime  Minister 
Louis  S.  St.  Laurent,  when  the  latter  indicated  his  Gov- 
'ernment's  willingness  to  construct  the  seaway  as  a 
Canadian  project,  see  ibid..  Oct.  8,  1951,  p.  581. 
'Ibid..  Dec.  29,  1952,  p.  1019. 


to  authorize  U.S.  participation  in  the  navigational 
phase.  Once  plans  for  power  development  have 
been  completed,  the  Canadian  Government  has 
expressed  its  willingness  to  discuss  U.S.  participa- 
tion in  the  seaway. 


Canadian  Position  Indicated 

That  Canadian  willingness  is  expressed  in  a 
memorandum  given  to  the  American  Ambassador 
in  Ottawa  on  January  9,  1953,  by  the  Canadian 
Government.  I  would  like  to  quote  from  that 
memorandum  since  it  expresses  not  only  the  Ca- 
nadian Government's  attitude  toward  possible 
U.S.  participation  in  the  seaway  but  because  it 
also  emphasizes  the  importance  which  Canada 
attaches  to  power  development. 

While  the  Canadian  Government  Is  of  course  prepared 
to  discuss,  in  appropriate  circumstances,  joint  participa- 
tion in  the  Seaway,  the  demand  for  power  in  the  area 
to  be  served  by  the  International  Rapids  power  develop- 
ment is  so  urgent  that  the  Canadian  Government  is  most 
reluctant  to  engage  in  any  discussion  which  might  delay 
the  progress  of  the  plan  now  under  way  for  the  develop- 
ment of  power  in  the  International  Rapids'  Section  of  the 
St.  Lawrence  River  at  the  earliest  possible  moment. 

Once  an  entity  is  designated  and  authorized  to  proceed 
with  construction  of  the  United  States  share  of  the  power 
works,  if  the  U.S.  Government  wishes  to  put  forward 
a  specific  proposal  differing  from  that  put  forward  by 
the  Canadian  Government  for  the  construction  of  the 
seaway  in  the  International  section  which  proposal  would 
not  delay  the  development  of  power  under  arrangements 
agreed  upon  in  the  exchange  of  notes  of  June  .30th,  1952* 
and  approved  on  October  29th,  1952  by  the  International 
Joint  Commission,  the  Canadian  Government  will  be  pre- 
pared to  discuss  such  a  proposal. 

The  Canadian  Government  would  naturally  expect  the 
discussion  to  be  such  as  not  to  cause  any  serious  delay 
in  the  completion  of  the  whole  seaw-ay. 

The  most  recent  indication  of  the  position  of 
the  Canadian  Government  is  to  be  found  in  the 
communique  issued  at  the  conclusion  of  the  talks 
between  the  President  and  the  Prime  Minister  of 
Canada  on  May  8.  I  will  not  attempt  to  read  into 
the  record  the  whole  of  that  communique  which 
reveals  the  identity  of  view  and  the  close  coopera- 
tion in  many  fields  of  the  two  Governments,  but 
I  would  like  to  quote  that  portion  relating  to  the 
St.  Lawrence. 

The  Prime  Minister  emphasized  the  importance  to 
Canada  of  an  early  start  on  the  St.  Lawrence  project 
and  the  especial  urgency  to  Canada  of  the  power  develop- 
ment. The  President  a.ssured  the  Prime  Minister  that 
the  United  States  is  fully  aware  of  Canada's  urgent  need 
for  St.  Lawrence  power.  He  said  that  he  favored  the 
development  of  the  United  States  share  of  St.  Lawrence 
power  under  the  authority  of  New  York  State  and  that 
he  hoped  for  an  early  favorable  decision  by  the  Federal 
Power  Commission  in  this  matter.  The  President  in  this 
connection  referred  to  the  decision  of  the  Cabinet  on  this 
subject  announced  today.  The  Prime  Minister  said  that 
the  Canadian  Government  was  still  prepared  to  discuss 
United  States  participation  in  the  international  section, 
provided  that  arrangements  for  power  are  completed  and 
provided  the  whole  seaway  would  not  be  delayed.     He 

'  Ibid.,  July  14,  1952,  p.  65. 


June  8,   1953 


825 


stressed  ajrain  Canada's  readiness  to  proceed  at  once  with 
the  work  under  the  Canadian  St.  Lawrence  legislation  of 
1951. 

These  stiitements  are  illustrative  of  the  Cana- 
dian Government's  position.  They  show  Canada's 
cooperative  attitude  as  well  as  Canada's  desire  tx) 
get  on  with  the  job. 

Aspects  of  U.S.,  Canadian  Relations 

"We  see  that,  provided  a  Federal  Power  Commis- 
sion license  is  j^ranted.  then  power  and  navigation 
can  go  forward.  As  satisfactory  as  those  arrange- 
ments are,  I  should  like  to  emphasize  that  they 
are  not  as  advantageous  to  the  United  States  as 
would  be  the  case  if  the  United  States  were  a 
participant  in  the  navigational  development. 
Without  that  participation  the  United  States  will 
have  no  clear  right  to  a  voice  in  the  construction, 
control,  operation,  tolls,  and  amortization  of  this 
waterway  which  should  play  so  great  a  part  in  the 
economic  development  of  both  our  country  and 
Canada.  According  to  Corps  of  Engineers'  testi- 
mony, construction  of  the  seaway  on  the  U.S.  side 
of  the  boundary  would  cost  less.  Since  most  of 
the  traffic  using  the  canal  will  be  of  U.S.  source 
or  destination,  the  costs  of  amortization  will 
largely  be  borne  by  U.S.  shipping  and  shipments 
for  U.S.  account.  Construction  costs  and  amor- 
tization proposals  are,  therefore,  matters  in  which 
the  United  States  sliould  have  a  voice.  Joint 
U.S. -Canadian  operation  of  the  St.  Lawrence 
waterway  should  lessen  the  chances  for  friction 
between  the  two  countries.  For  the  above-men- 
tioned reasons,  I  believe  that  U.S.  participation 
is  highly  desirable  in  order  to  insure  adequate  pro- 
tection to  legitimate  U.S.  interests. 

In  this  matter  of  St.  Lawrence  development, 
the  State  Department  is  naturally  concerned,  espe- 
cially with  aspects  affecting  or  potentially  affect- 
ing our  relations  with  Canada.  These  relations 
have  historically  been  close  and  harmonious  and 
it  is  important  that  they  remain  so.  Most  Ca- 
nadians, and  certainly  the  Federal  Government  in 
Ottawa,  now  regard  the  carrying  out  of  St. 
Lawrence  development  as  the  single  most  impor- 
tant aspect  of  U.S. -Canadian  relations.  In  this 
connection,  St.  Lawrence  power  for  the  industrial 
centers  of  Ontario  is  regarded  by  Canadian  au- 
thorities as  urgent  because  all  other  major  sources 
of  hydroelectric  power  available  in  the  area  to  be 
served  by  St.  Lawrence  power  have  been  or  are 
being  developed.  A  serious  shortage  of  low-cost 
power  is  already  apparent  in  Ontario  and  is  ex- 
pected to  become  acute  by  1957.  Even  if  construc- 
tion were  to  start  today,  power  would  barely  be 
available  in  time.  For  this  reason,  the  Canadian 
Government  is  most  anxious  that  no  action  be 
taken  which  would  delay  a  start  on  the  power 
project. 

Meeting  Canadian  power  needs  is  in  our  interest. 
About  one-half  of  Canada's  total  manufacturing 


capacity  is  located  in  the  area  to  be  served  by  St.  | 
Lawrence  power.    That  growing  industrial  plant 
is  producing  goods  essential  to  our  defense,  to  Can-  ' 
ada's  defense,  and  to  the  needs  of  the  North  At-  . 
lantic   Treaty   Organization.    Critical   materials 
also  come  from  that  area.    About  90  percent  of  the 
free   world's   nickel,    for   example,   comes   from 
Ontario. 

You  can  readily  see  that  the  development  of  St. 
Lawrence  power  is  essential  to  Canada  and  will  ' 
add  to  our  strength.    Similarly,  the  seaw;iy  is  ! 
viewed  in  Canada  as  a  major  contribution  to  the  ' 
economy.  ! 

I  have  indicated  that  any  action  by  the  United 
States  which  would  delay  Canada's  plans  to  pro- 
ceed with  power  and  navigational  development 
would  be  harmful  to  our  relations  with  Canada. 
It  is  urgent,  therefore,  that  legislation  of  the  na- 
ture of  S.  589  be  enacted  during  this  session  of 
the  Congress,  if  the  United  States  is  to  join  in  this 
project  of  great  importance  to  our  national  security 
and  our  future  economy. 


PUBLICATIONS 


Recent  Releases 

For  sale  hy  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  Govern- 
ment  Printing  Offlce,  Washington  25,  D.  C.  Address  re- 
quests direct  to  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  except 
in  the  case  of  free  publications,  which  may  he  obtained 
from  the  Department  of  State. 

Disposal  of  Surplus  Military  Equipment  and  Materials. 

Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2537.  Pub. 
4789.     5pp.     50. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Greece — Dated  at  Athens  Dec.  21,  1951,  and  Jan.  7, 
1952. 

Relief  From  Taxation  on  Defense  Expenditures.  Treaties 
and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2538.  Pub.  4787. 
7pp.     100. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Luxembourg — Signed  at  Luxembourg  Mar.  10  and  13, 
1952. 

Relief  From  Taxation  on  Defense  Expenditures.  Treaties 
and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2546.  Pub.  4803. 
2pp.  50. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Denmark — Signed  at  Copenhagen  Apr.  7  and  9,  1952. 

Education,  Cooperative  Program  in  Honduras,  Additional 
Financial  Contributions.  Treaties  and  Other  Interna- 
tional Acts  Series  2549.     Pub.  4806.     4pp.  5<!. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Honduras — Signed  at  Tegucigalpa  Jan.  9  and  Apr.  7, 
1952. 

Relief  From  Taxation  on  Defense  Expenditures.  Treaties 
and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2557.  Pub.  4817 
3pp.  50. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
Iceland — Signed  at  Reykjavik  Mar.  5  and  IS,  1952. 


826 


Deparfment  of  State  Bulletin 


Foreign  Relations  Volume 
Dealing  with  American  Republics 

'Press  release  271  dated  May  18 

I 

,'  Efforts  for  the  establishment  and  maintenance 
~)i  peace  in  the  Western  Hemisphere,  negotiations 
for  reciprocal  trade  agreements,  and  representa- 
■:ions  to  secure  proper  treatment  for  American 
(Dusiness  interests  are  the  chief  subjects  of  diplo- 
uacy  dealt  with  in  Foreign  Relation,^  of  the 
Wnited  States,  1935,  Volume  IV,  The  American 
Repuhlics,  released  on  May  23  by  the  Department 
:)f  State. 

The  long-continued  Chaco  War  between  Bolivia 
iind  Paraguay  overshadowed  other  problems  in 
nter- American  relations  in  1935.  Hostilities 
vers  finally  brought  to  an  end  on  June  12  by  an 
irmistice  agreement  secured  through  the  media- 
lion  of  a  group  of  neutrals  consisting  of  the 
i[Jnited  States,  Argentina,  Brazil,  Chile,  Peru,  and 
jruguaj'.  The  armistice  was  followed  by  a  peace 
■onference  in  which  the  belligerents  joined  with 
he  mediators. 

The  correspondence  now  published  shows  that 
me  of  the  difficulties  was  to  secure  a  proper  ar- 
•angement  for  the  exchange  of  prisoners  of  war. 
X  is  of  interest  to  note  that  a  draft  peace  plan 
)resented  included  a  provision  for  "Return  of 
)risoners  of  war  on  signature  of  treaty  of  peace 
•xcept  those  who  make  written  application  to  re- 
nain."  (p.  152.)  The  year  ended  with  no  final 
igreements  having  been  reached.  (Repatria- 
ion  of  prisoners  was  carried  out  in  1936  through 
I  neutral  country,  Argentina,  where  the  prisoners 
vere  given  the  opportunity  either  to  return  to  the 
•ountry  by  which  they  had  been  captured,  or  con- 
'inue  the  journey  to  their  own  country.) 

Other  peace  efforts  recorded  in  this  volume  in- 
clude the  final  ending  of  the  dispute  between  Co- 
iombia  and  Peru  over  Leticia  and  the  reestablish- 
nent  of  diplomatic  relations  between  Costa  Rica 
^md  Guatemala. 

In  the  field  of  commercial  relations,  the  year  was 
narked  by  the  signing  of  reciprocal  trade  agree- 
nents  by  the  United  States  with  Brazil,  Colombia, 
iHaiti,  and  Honduras.  Negotiations  for  these 
Igreements  are  here  published  together  with  pre- 
liminary discussions  or  negotiations  for  similar 
'Igreements  with  eight  other  countries.  Exchange 
ifestrictions  adversely  affecting  American  business 
svere  also  the  subject  of  diplomacy  with  several 
countries. 

Relations  with  Mexico  receive  considerable  at- 
ention  in  this  volume.  Questions  at  issue  chiefly 
concerned  agrarian  and  oil  interests  of  American 
l^jitizens.  The  religious  situation  in  Mexico  also 
was  a  source  of  concern,  but  the  Government  of 
the  United  States  regarded  it  as  a  domestic  issue 
'in  which  it  should  not  intervene. 


Political  unrest  continued  in  Nicaragua  and  the 
habit  of  various  factions  looking  to  the  United 
States  for  support  had  not  disappeared.  The 
American  Minister,  however,  met  such  advances 
with  the  definite  statement  that  "intervention  is  a 
thing  of  the  past."  (pp.  843, 873.)  The  Minister 
was  authorized  to  express  the  earnest  hope  of  the 
Government  of  the  United  States  that  nothing 
would  occur  to  disturb  the  peace  of  Nicaragua, 
(p.  874.) 

There  is  little  indication  in  the  documents  here 
printed  that  the  threat  of  coming  world  war  re- 
ceived much  attention  in  the  relations  of  the 
United  States  with  its  neighbors  of  the  Western 
Hemisphere,  but  it  is  recorded  that  the  Brazilian 
Government  received  from  its  Ambassador  in 
Tokyo  "a  rather  alarming  picture  of  Japanese 
preparation  for  eventual  hostilities  with  the 
United  States."  In  such  an  emergency  the  United 
States  was  assured  of  "whole-hearted  Brazilian 
support  and  cooperation."     (p.  387.) 

Foreign  Relations  of  the  United  States,  1935, 
Volume  IV,  The  American  Repuhlics  (Ixxxix, 
988  pp.)  was  compiled  in  the  Division  of  Histori- 
cal Policy  Research  by  Victor  J.  Farrar  and 
Henry  P.  Beers,  under  the  direction  of  E.  R. 
Perkins,  editor  of  Foreign  Relations.  Copies  may 
be  purchased  from  the  Superintendent  of  Docu- 
ments, Government  Printing  Office,  Washington 
25,  D.C.,  for  $4.00  each. 


Check  List  of  Department  of  State 
Press  Releases:  May  25^29, 1953 

Releases  may  be  obtained  from  the  OflBce  of  the 
Special  Assistant  for  Press  Relations,  Department 
of  State,  Washington  25,  D.  C. 

Press  releases  issued  prior  to  May  25  which  ap- 
pear in  this  issue  of  the  Bulletin  are  Nos.  261  of 
May  14,  271  of  May  18,  275  of  May  20,  276  of  May 
20,  280  of  May  22,  283  of  May  25,  285  of  May  25, 
;5,  and  289  of  May  26. 

Subject 

Atlantic  fisheries  commission 

Exchange  of  persons 

Telegraph  consultative  committee 

Exchange  of  persons 

Reed  Mission  returns 

Smith  :  Admission  of  escapees 

Zambeti,  persona  non  grata 

Air  transport  pact  with  Cuba 

Notes  on  Austrian  treaty 

F.S.  Point  4  graduates 

Exchange  program 

Smith :  Praise  for  Foreign  Service 

Bowie :  Director  of  Policy  Planning 

Treasures  returned  tn  Rynkyus 

Broadcasts  to  Latin  America 

Harriman  :  German  bond  board 

•Not  printed. 

tHeld  for  a  latter  issue  of  the  Bulletin. 


287  of 

May  ; 

No. 

Date 

283 

5/25 

*284 

5/25 

285 

5/25 

*286 

5/25 

287 

5/25 

t28S 

5/26 

289 

5/26 

t290 

5/26 

291 

5/26 

•292 

5/27 

•293 

5/27 

294 

5/27 

t295 

5/28 

296 

5/28 

297 

5/28 

t298 

5/29 

June  B,   1953 


827 


June  8,  1953 


Ind 


ex 


Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  728 


Agriculture 

Reed  mission  reports  on  Pakistan  sxirvey     .     .     .      818 

American  Principles 

The  faith  of  free  men  (Johnson) 816 

American  Republics 

Foreign  Relations  volume  dealing  with  ....       827 
New  series  of  broadcasts  to  Latin  America     .     .      821 

Asia 

KOREA:  Reiteration  of  principles  of  Unc  posi- 
tion on  Pow  Issue   (Elsenhower)      ....       816 
PAKISTAN :  Reed  mission  reports  on  survey    .     .       818 

Australia 

Signing  of  tax  conventions  with  Axistralla     .     .      819 

Canada 

Support  for  U.S.  participation  in  St.  Lawrence 

Seaway  project  (Merchant) 824 

Congress 

Request   for   extension   of  Unrwa   program   for 

Palestine  refugees    (Smith) 822 

Support  for  U.S.  participation  in  St.  Lawrence 

Seaway  project  (Merchant) 824 

Europe 

AUSTRIA: 

Review  of  the  Austrian  treaty  question    .     .     .       805 
U.S.S.R.  declines  participation  in  treaty  meet- 
ing  {exchange  of  notes) 814 

DENMARK:  MsA  and  Danish  Government  initi- 
ate productivity  program 819 

Launching   the   European   coal   and   steel   com- 
munity (Vernon) 799 

RUMANIA :  Diplomat  declared  persona  non  grata 

(text  of  U.S.  note) 815 

Fisheries 

Northwest  Atlantic  Fisheries  Commission        .     .      821 

Foreign  Service 

Confirmations    (Gardner,    McDermott,    Pheiffer, 

Stuart) 822 

Praise  for  the  Foreign  Service   (Smith)      ...       821 

International  Information  Administration 

The  faith  of  free  men  (Johnson) 816 

New  series  of  broadcasts  to  Latin  America     .     .       821 

International  Meetings 

U.S.   DELEGATIONS: 

Northwest  Atlantic  Fisheries  Commission   .     .       821 
Telegraph  Consultative  Committee  (Itu)     .     .       820 

Mutual  Security 

MsA  and  Danish  Government  Initiate  produc- 
tivity program 819 

Reed  mission  reports  on  Pakistan  survey     .     .     .       818 

Near  and  Middle  East 

GREECE:  King  and  Queen  of  Greece  invited  to 

visit  U.S 818 

Request   for   extension   of   Unrwa   program   for 

Palestine  refugees    (Smith) 822 

Secretary  Dulles,  Mr.  Stassen  return  from  Near 

Eastern  visit   (Dulles) 804 


Prisoners  of  War 

Reiteration   of   principles   of  Unc  position   on 

Pow   issue    (Elsenhower) 816 

Publications 

Foreign  Relations  voltune  dealing  with  American 

Republics 827 

Recent    releases 826 

Refugees  and  Displaced  Persons 

Request   for   extension   of   Unrwa   program  for 

Palestine  refugees   (Smith) 822 

Ryukyu  Islands 

Royal  treasures  returned  to  Ryukjru  Islands    .     .      819 

State,  Department  of 

Appointment  (Bowie) 821 

Rumanian  diplomat  declared  persona  non  grata 

(text  of  U.S.  note) 815 

Strategic  Materials 

Launching   the   European   coal   and   steel   com- 
munity (Vernon) 799 

Taxation 

Signing  of  tax  conventions  with  Australia     .     .      819 

Telecommunications 

Telegraph  Consultative  Committee  (Ixu)  .     .     .      820 

Transportation 

Support  for  U.S.  participation  In  St.  Lawrence 

Seaway  project  (Merchant) 824 

Treaty  Information 

Review  of  the  Austrian  treaty  question  .  .  .  805 
Signing  of  tax  conventions  with  Australia  .  .  819 
U.S.S.R.     declines     participation     in     Austrian 

treaty  meeting  (exchange  of  notes)      .     .     .       814 

United  Nations 

Reiteration    of   principles    of   Unc   position    on 

Pow   issue    (Eisenhower) 816 

Request   for   extension   of   Unrwa   program   for 

Palestine  refugees   (Smith) 822 

Name  Index 

Bowie,  Robert  R 821 

Dulles.  Secretary 804 

Eisenhower,  President 816 

Frederika,  Queen 818 

Gardner,  Arthur 822 

Georgescu,  V.  C 815 

Johnson,  Robert  L 816,821 

Kask,  John  L 821 

Knollenberg,  Richard 821 

McDermott.  Michael  J 822 

Merchant,  Livingston  T 824 

Paul,  King 818 

PheilTer,  William  T 822 

Reed,  Harry 818 

Sargent,  Francis  W 821 

Smith,  Under  Secretary 821,822 

Stassen.  Harold  E 804 

Stuart.  R.  Douglas 822 

Vernon,   Raymond 799 

Webster,  Edward  M 820 

Zambetl,    Chrlstache 815 


■1 


Jne/  zl)eha^t^^en{/  ^^ t/taie^ 


XXVIII,  No.  729 
June  15,  1953 


ViENT  oj^ 


*"Ate3    O* 


REPORT  ON  THE   NEAR   EAST      •      AMress  by  Secretary 

Dulles 831 

REORGANIZATION  [OF  FOREIGN  AID  AND  INFOR- 
MATION PROGRAMS 849 

PRESIDENT'S     PROPOSAL     FOR     ADMISSION     OF 

EUROPEAN      MIGRANTS     •     Statement  by  Acting 
Secretary  Smith 857 

A  NEW  HUMAN  RIGHTS  ACTION  PROGRAM: 

Statement  by  Mrs.  Oswald  B.  Lord 842 

Texts  of  U.S.  Draft  Resolutions 847 


For  index  see  back  cover 


,«KT  o^ 


Boston  Public  Library 
Superintendent  of  Documents 

JUL  14  1953 


ij/ie 


Qje/ia^i^e^  ^/ ^lale    11)111161111 


Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  729»Publication  5090 
June  15,  1953 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents 

D.S.  Qovernraent  Printing  Office 

Wasliington  26,  D.O. 

Price: 

(2  issues,  domestic  {7.60,  foreign  $10.26 

Single  copy,  20  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has 
been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Budget  (January  22,  1952). 
Note:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  Depaetuknt 
OF  State  Bulletin  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  ItVLLETlN, 
a  weekly  piihlication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publications, 
Office  €>f  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  with  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  work  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  liVLLETlIS  includes 
selected  press  releases  on  foreign  pol- 
icy issued  by  the  White  House  and 
the  Department,  and  statements  and 
addresses  made  by  the  President  and 
by  the  Secretary  of  State  and  other 
officers  of  the  Department,  as  well  as 
special  articles  on  various  phases  of 
international  affairs  and  the  func- 
tions of  the  Department.  Informa- 
tion is  included  concerning  treaties 
and  international  agreements  to 
which  the  United  States  is  or  may 
become  a  party  and  treaties  of  gen- 
eral international  interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
well  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


Report  on  the  Near  East 


Address  hy  Secretary  Dulles  ^ 


About  3  weeks  ago,  the  Director  for  Mutual 
Security,  Mr.  Harold  Stassen,  and  I  and  our  asso- 
ciates set  out,  at  President  Eisenhower's  request, 
on  a  trip  to  12  countries  which  lie  in  between  the 
Mediterranean  in  Europe  and  China  in  Asia.  I 
shall  give  you  our  country-by -country  impressions 
and  then  our  general  conclusions. 

First,  let  me  say  that  everywhere  we  were  well 
received.  This  was  encouragmg,  for  several  of  the 
countries  feel  that  the  United  States  policies  have, 
in  recent  years,  been  harmful  and  even  antagonis- 
tic to  them.  The  Communists  have  vigorously  ex- 
ploited this  feeling.  They  staged  some  hostile 
demonstrations.  But  these  were  inconsequential. 
The  governments  received  us  with  warm  hospital- 
ity, and  as  we  drove  through  the  streets,  the  people 
usually  greeted  us  with  friendly  smiles  and  ap- 
plause. The  political  leaders  talked  intimately 
with  us,  and  we  gained  new  friendships  and  new 
understanding  which  will  stand  us  in  good  stead 
for  the  future.  Also  in  each  capital  I  spoke  to 
all  of  the  United  States  Foreign  Service  personnel. 
They  are  a  fine  body  of  men  and  women  of  whom 
we  can  be  proud. 

It  is  high  time  that  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment paid  more  attention  to  the  Near  East  and 
South  Asia,  which,  until  our  trip,  no  United  States 
Secretary  of  State  has  ever  visited.  Our  postwar 
attention  has  been  primarily  given  to  Western  Eu- 
rope. That  area  was  and  is  very  important,  but 
not  all-important. 

It  came  as  a  surprising  shock  when  the  450  mil- 
lion Chinese  people,  whom  we  had  counted  as 
friends,  fell  under  Communist  domination.  There 
could  be  equally  dangerous  developments  in  the 
Near  East  and  South  Asia.  The  situation  calls  for 
urgent  concern. 

The  area  we  visited  contains  about  one-fourth 


'  Delivered  to  tie  Nation  over  radio  and  television  net- 
works on  June  1  and  released  to  the  press  (no.  299)  on  the 
same  date.  Also  printed  as  Department  of  State  publica- 
tion 5088. 


of  the  world's  population.  It  represents  about  one- 
half  of  the  people  of  the  world  who  are  still  free 
of  Communist  domination. 

The  Near  East  possesses  great  strategic  impor- 
tance as  the  bridge  between  Europe,  Asia,  and 
Africa.  The  present  masters  of  the  Kremlin,  fol- 
lowing the  lead  of  past  military  conquerors,  covet 
this  position.  In  1940  Soviet  leaders  specified,  in 
secret  negotiations  with  the  Nazis,  that  Soviet  "ter- 
ritorial aspirations  center  ...  in  the  direction  of 
the  Indian  Ocean  and  .  .  .  the  Persian  Gulf." 

This  area  contains  important  resources  vital  to 
our  welfare — oil,  manganese,  chrome,  mica,  and 
other  minerals.  About  60  percent  of  the  proven  oil 
reserves  of  the  world  are  in  the  Near  East. 

Most  important  of  all,  the  Near  East  is  the 
source  of  three  great  religions — the  Jewish,  the 
Christian,  and  the  Moslem — which  have  for  cen- 
turies exerted  an  immense  influence  throughout 
the  world.  Surely  we  cannot  ignore  the  fate  of 
the  peoples  who  have  first  perceived  and  then 
passed  on  to  us  the  great  spiritual  truths  from 
which  our  own  society  derives  its  inner  strength. 

Egypt  and  the  Suez  Base 

Our  first  stop  was  in  Egypt.  There  we  had  3 
days  in  which  to  get  acquainted  with  General 
Naguib,  who  heads  the  Government.  He  is  a  pop- 
ular hero,  and  I  could  readily  see  why.  He  and 
his  associates  are  determined  to  provide  Egypt 
with  a  vigorous  government  which  will  truly 
serve  the  people.  Also,  they  seek  to  end  the  sta- 
tioning of  British  troops  and  exercise  of  British 
authority  at  the  Suez  base. 

Before  we  arrived  in  Egypt,  a  very  tense  situa- 
tion had  developed  between  the  British  and  the 
Egyptian  Governments.  Conversations  looking  to 
an  orderly  withdrawal  of  British  troops  had  been 
suspended,  and  there  was  danger  that  hostilities 
would  break  out. 

We  discussed  the  situation  with  General  Naguib. 
The  heart  of  the  trouble  is  not  so  much  the  pres- 


Ji/ne   75,   1953 


831 


ence  of  British  troops,  for  both  sides  agreed  that 
they  should  be  withdrawn,  but  the  subsequent  au- 
thority over  and  management  of  this  gigantic  base, 
its  airstrips,  and  its  depots  of  supplies.  Experi- 
enced administrative  and  technical  personnel  is 
needed  to  keep  the  base  in  operating  efficiency  and 
the  provision  of  this  personnel  causes  difficulty. 
The  matter  has  an  importance  which  goes  beyond 
Egypt,  for  the  base  serves  all  Near  Eastern  and 
indeed  Western  security. 

I  am  convinced  that  there  is  nothing  irreconcil- 
able between  this  international  concern  and  Egyp- 
tian sovereignty.  We  asked,  with  some  success, 
that  there  be  further  time  to  find  a  peaceful  solu- 
tion. The  United  States  is  prepared  to  assist  in 
any  desired  way. 

Egypt  stands  at  the  threshold  of  what  can  be  a 
great  new  future.  If  this  Suez  problem  can  be 
satisfactorily  solved,  I  am  confident  that  Egypt 
can  find  the  means  to  develop  its  land  and  lift 
up  its  people  and  add  a  new  bright  chapter  to  a 
glorious  past. 


e 


Israel,  Jerusalem,  and  Refugees 

Next  we  went  to  Israel.  We  were  impressed  by 
the  vision  and  supporting  energy  with  which  the 
leople  are  building  their  new  nation.  Inspired 
y  a  great  faith,  they  are  now  doing  an  impressive 
work  of  creation.  They  face  hard  internal  prob- 
lems, which  I  believe  they  can  solve.  Further- 
more, the  Prime  Minister,  Ben  Gurion,  and  other 
Israeli  officials  asserted  convincingly  their  desire 
to  live  at  peace  with  their  Arab  neighbors. 

Jerusalem  is  divided  into  armed  camps  split 
between  Israel  and  the  Arab  nation  of  Jordan. 
The  atmosphere  is  heavy  with  hate.  As  I  gazed  on 
the  Mount  of  Olives,  I  felt  anew  that  Jerusalem 
is,  above  all,  the  holy  place  of  the  Christian,  Mos- 
lem, and  Jewish  faiths.  This  has  been  repeatedly 
emphasized  by  the  United  Nations.  This  does  not 
necessarily  exclude  some  political  status  in  Jeru- 
salem for  Israel  and  Jordan.  But  the  world 
religious  community  has  claims  in  Jerusalem 
which  take  precedence  over  the  political  claims  of 
any  particular  nation. 

Closely  huddled  around  Israel  are  most  of  the 
over  800,000  Arab  refugees,  who  fled  from  Pales- 
tine as  the  Israeli  took  over.  They  mostly  exist  in 
makeshift  camps,  with  few  facilities  either  for 
health,  work,  or  recreation.  Within  these  camps 
the  inmates  rot  away,  spiritually  and  physically. 
Even  the  Grim  Reaper  offers  no  solution,  for  as 
the  older  die,  infants  are  born  to  inherit  their 
parents'  bitter  fate. 

Some  of  these  refugees  could  be  settled  in  the 
area  presently  controlled  by  Israel.  Most,  how- 
ever, could  more  readily  be  integrated  into  the  lives 
of  the  neighboring  Arab  countries.  This,  however, 
awaits  on  irrigation  projects,  which  will  permit 
more  soil  to  be  cultivated. 

832 


Throughout  the  area  the  cry  is  for  water  for 
irrigation.  United  Nations  contributions  and 
other  funds  are  available  to  help  refugees,  and  Mr. 
Stassen  and  I  came  back  with  the  impression  that 
they  can  well  be  spent  in  large  part  on  a  coordi- 
nated use  of  the  rivers  which  run  through  the 
Arab  countries  and  Israel. 

Jordan 

Irrigation  needs  became  most  vivid  as  we 
motored  from  Jerusalem  to  Amman,  the  capital 
of  Jordan.  The  road  goes  through  the  Dead  Sea 
area,  a  scene  of  desolation  with  no  sign  of  life  other 
than  the  tens  of  thousands  of  refugees  who  survive 
precariously  on  the  parched  land  largely  by  aid  of  T 
United  Nations  doles.  Later  on,  as  we  flew  north, 
we  observed  the  waters  of  the  Yarmak  River, 
which  could  perhaps  be  diverted  so  as  to  return 
some  of  this  vast  desert  valley  into  fertile  land. 

At  Amman  we  dined  with  the  charming  and  able  *'• 
new  King  Husein  and  his  Government.  They  are  ' 
preoccupied  with  the  problem  of  refugees  and  of  '' 
relations  with  Israel.  The  inflow  of  refugees  has  ^^• 
almost  doubled  the  population,  and  the  long  armis-  " 
tice  line  with  Israel  gives  rise  to  frequent  and 
dangerous  shooting  episodes. 

Syria,  Lebanon,  Iraq,  and  Saudi  Arabia 

From  Jordan  we  went  to  Syria.  There  we  were 
impressed  by  General  Shishakli.  He  is  eager  to 
develop  the  resources  of  his  country,  which  are 
substantial.  Thus,  the  living  standards  of  the 
Syrian  people  could  be  raised.  This  would,  in 
turn,  enable  them  to  receive  more  refugees  into  a 
land  which  relatively  is  sparsely  populated. 

From  Damascus,  the  capital  of  Syria,  we 
motored  to  Beirut,  the  capital  of  Lebanon.  The 
road  took  us  over  a  mountain  range,  with  refresh- 
ing snow  in  sharp  contrast  to  the  heat  of  the  desert 
plains.  I 

You  will  recall  that  Beirut  is  the  home  of  the 
American  University,  which  has  educated  many  of  I 
the  Arab  leaders  of  today.  President  Chamoun 
of  Lebanon  talked  to  us  of  his  high  hopes  for  his 
country  and  pointed  to  the  role  it  might  play, 
representing  uniquely  a  meeting  of  East  and  West 

Leaving  Lebanon  for  Iraq,  we  flew  over  the 
Tigris  and  Euphrates  Valleys.  This  was  the  site 
of  the  Garden  of  Eden.  Under  its  new  ruler, 
King  Faisal — who  visited  the  United  States  last 
summer — the  Government  of  Iraq  is  beginning  to 
develop  these  valleys  and  restore  their  former 
productivity.  The  revenues  from  the  oil  produc- 
tion are  being  largely  directed  to  this  and  other 
construction  purj^oses.  Iraq  can  be,  and  desires 
to  be,  the  granary  for  much  of  this  part  of  the 
world. 

In  Saudi  Arabia  we  were  received  by  King  Ibn 
Saud,  one  of  the  great  Near  Eastern  figures  of 
this  century,  conspicuous  in  his  dignity  and  single- 
ness of  purpose.   He  is  a  good  friend  of  the  United 

Department  of  Stale  Bulletin 


States,  as  he  has  shown  by  deeds.  Our  policy  will 
be  to  reciprocate  this  friendship.  In  Saudi  Arabia 
Americans  and  Arabs  are  working  together  in 
good  fellowship  in  the  vast  oil  fields  of  the  coun- 
try.   It  is  a  good  relationship. 


India  and  Pakistan 

We  left  the  Arab  area  to  go  first  to  India  and 

•  then  to  Pakistan.  These  two  nations,  although 
!  independent  for  less  than  6  years,  already  play  an 
liniluential  part  in  world  affairs. 

'  In  India  I  met  again  with  Mr.  Nehru,  one  of 
1  the  great  leaders  of  our  time.  "VVe  had  long  con- 
versations together  in  the  intimacy  of  his  home. 
His  calm  demeanor  and  lofty  idealism  impressed 
me.  We  reviewed  together  the  international  prob- 
lems which  concern  both  our  countries,  including 
the  problem  of  a  Korean  armistice  and  the  threat 

•  to  Southeast  Asia.  We  did  not  always  agree,  but 
we  did  clear  up  some  misunderstandings  and,  I 
felt,  gained  respect  for  the  integrity  of  our  re- 
spective purposes.  India  is  now  supporting  the 
armistice  position  of  the  United  Nations  Com- 
mand in  Korea. 

Jlr.  Stassen  and  I  also  obtained  a  clearer  view 
of  the  Government  of  India's  5-year  program  to 
improve  the  welfare  of  the  Indian  people. 

India  is  the  world's  largest  self-governing  na- 
tion. It  has  about  2,000  miles  of  common  bound- 
ary with  Communist  China.  There  is  occurring 
between  these  two  countries  a  competition  as  to 
whether  ways  of  freedom  or  police-state  methods 
can  achieve  better  social  progress.  This  competi- 
tion affects  directly  800  million  people  in  these  2 
countries.  In  the  long  run,  the  outcome  will  af- 
fect all  of  humanity,  including  ourselves.  Our 
interest  fully  justifies  continuing,  on  a  modest 
scale,  some  technical  assistance  and  external  re- 
sources to  permit  India  to  go  on  with  its  5-year 
plan. 

Pakistan  is  the  largest  of  the  Moslem  nations 
and  occupies  a  high  position  in  the  Moslem 
world.  The  strong  spiritual  faith  and  martial 
spirit  of  the  people  make  them  a  dependable  bul- 
wark against  communism. 

The  new  Prime  Minister,  Mohammed  Ali,  whom 
we  recently  knew  as  Ambassador  to  Washington, 
energetically  leads  the  new  Government.  We  met 
with  a  feeling  of  warm  friendship  on  the  part  of 
the  people  of  Pakistan  toward  the  United  States. 

A  grave  and  immediate  problem  is  the  shortage 
of  wheat.  Without  large  imports,  widespread 
famine  conditions  will  ensue.  Last  year  we  helped 
India  in  a  similar  emergency.  I  believe  that 
prompt  United  States  wheat  assistance  to  Paki- 
stan is  essential. 

It  is  not  possible  to  think  about  United  States 
aid  without  also  thinking  that  these  countries  can- 
not afford  to  waste  their  efforts  in  quarreling  with 
each  other  and  diverting  their  strength  for  pos- 
sible use  against  each  other. 


That  thought  applies  to  the  dispute  between 
India  and  Pakistan  about  Kashmir.  It  is  my  im- 
pression from  my  conversations  with  the  Prime 
Ministers  of  India  and  Pakistan  that  this  contro- 
versy can  be  settled.  Surely  it  needs  to  be  settled. 
We  tried,  tactfully  but  firmly,  to  make  clear  that 
the  United  States,  as  a  friend  of  both  countries, 
hopes  for  an  accord  which  would  make  more  fruit- 
ful such  economic  aid  as  we  render. 

Iran 

It  was  not  practical  to  include  Iran  in  our 
schedule.  However,  we  arranged  that  our  Ambas- 
sador to  Iran  should  meet  us  in  Pakistan.  Iran 
is  now  preoccupied  with  its  oil  disjjute  with  Great 
Britain.  But  still  the  people  and  the  Government 
do  not  want  this  quarrel  to  expose  them  to  Com- 
munist subversion.  They  have  not  forgotten  the 
Soviet  occupation  of  1941-1946. 

The  United  States  will  avoid  any  unwanted  in- 
terference in  the  oil  dispute.  But  we  can  usefully 
continue  technical  aid  and  assistance  to  this  agri- 
cultural nation  of  Iran  and  in  that  way  perhaps 
help  prevent  an  economic  collapse  which  would 
play  into  the  hands  of  predatory  forces. 

Turkey,  Greece,  and  Libya 

After  Pakistan,  we  went  to  Turkey  and  Greece. 
These  two  countries  have  clearly  demonstrated 
their  intent  to  stand  steadfast  against  Communist 
aggression  and  subversion.  Despite  their  heavy 
commitments  to  Nato,  both  countries  have  con- 
tributed valiantly  to  the  United  Nations  efforts  in 
Korea. 

We,  in  turn,  plan  to  continue  to  help  Greece  and 
Turkey  to  grow  stronger.  They  are  valiant  in 
spirit  and  hold  a  strategic  position  in  Europe  and 
Asia  which  enables  them  to  help  us.  While  in 
Greece  I  dined  with  the  King  and  Queen  and 
passed  on  to  this  charming  couple  President 
Eisenhower's  invitation  that  they  visit  us  this  fall. 

Our  last  stop  before  returning  to  the  United 
States  was  Libya,  the  newest  member  of  the  family 
of  nations.  This  country  is  located  at  a  key  spot  on 
the  North  African  coast  on  the  Mediterranean.  It 
has  recently  become  an  independent  nation  by 
action  of  the  United  Nations.  Libya  is  cooperat- 
ing with  the  United  States  and  the  United  King- 
dom in  strengthening  its  own  defenses  and  those 
of  the  Mediterranean  area. 

Let  me  turn  now  to  conclusions. 

1.  Colonialism.  Most  of  the  peoples  of  the  Near 
East  and  South  Asia  are  deeply  concerned  about 
political  independence  for  themselves  and  others. 
They  are  suspicious  of  the  colonial  powers.  The 
United  States  too  is  suspect  because,  it  is  reasoned, 
our  Nato  alliance  with  France  and  Britain  re- 
quires us  to  try  to  preserve  or  restore  the  old 
colonial  interests  of  our  allies. 

I  am  convinced  that  United  States  policy  has 


June   75,   1953 


833 


become  unnecessarily  ambiguous  in  this  matter. 
The  leaders  of  the  countries  I  visited  fully  recog- 
nize that  it  would  be  a  disaster  if  there  were  any 
break  between  the  United  States  and  Great  Britain 
and  France.  They  don't  want  this  to  happen. 
However,  without  breaking  from  the  framework 
of  Western  unity,  we  can  pursue  our  traditional 
dedication  to  political  liberty.  In  reality,  the 
Western  powers  can  gain,  rather  than  lose,  from  an 
orderly  development  of  self-government. 

I  emphasize,  however,  the  word  "orderly."  Let 
none  forget  that  the  Kremlin  uses  extreme  nation- 
alism to  bait  the  trap  by  which  it  seeks  to  capture 
the  dependent  peoples. 

2.  Living  Standards.  The  peoples  of  the  Near 
East  and  Asia  demand  better  standards  of  living, 
and  the  day  is  past  when  their  aspirations  can  be 
ignored.  The  task  is  one  primarily  for  the  gov- 
ernments and  the  peoples  themselves.  In  some 
cases  they  can  use  their  available  resources,  such 
as  oil  revenues,  to  better  advantage.  Tliere  are, 
however,  ways  in  which  the  United  States  can  use- 
fully help,  not  with  masses  of  money  but  by  con- 
tributing advanced  technical  knowledge  about 
transport,  communication,  fertilization,  and  use 
of  water  for  irrigation.  Mr.  Stassen  and  I  feel 
that  money  wisely  spent  for  this  area  under  the 
mutual  security  program  will  give  the  American 
people  a  good  return  in  terms  of  better  under- 
standing and  cooperation. 

3.  Arab  Good  Will.  The  United  States  should 
seek  to  allay  the  deep  resentment  against  it  that 
has  resulted  from  the  creation  of  Israel.  In  the 
past  we  had  good  relations  with  the  Arab  peoples. 
American  educational  institutions  had  built  up  a 
feeling  of  good  will,  and  also  American  business- 
men had  won  a  good  reputation  in  this  area.  There 
was  mutual  confidence  to  mutual  advantage. 

Today  the  Arab  peoples  are  afraid  that  the 
United  States  will  back  the  new  State  of  Israel  in 
aggressive  expansion.  They  are  more  fearful  of 
Zionism  than  of  communism,  and  they  fear  lest  the 
United  States  become  the  backer  of  expansionist 
Zionism. 


'Full  text  of  the  Declaration  is  as  follows: 
"The  GoTernments  of  the  United  Kingdom,  France,  and 
the  United  States,  having  had  occasion  during  the  recent 
Foreisn  Ministers  meeting  in  London  to  review  certain 
questions  affecting  the  peace  and  stability  of  the  Arab 
states  and  of  Israel,  and  particularly  that  of  the  supply 
of  arms  and  war  material  to  these  states,  have  resolved 
to  make  the  following  statements : 

1.  The  three  Governments  recognize  that  the  Arab 
states  and  Israel  all  need  to  maintain  a  certain  level  of 
armed  forces  for  the  purposes  of  assuring  their  internal 
security  and  their  legitimate  self-defense  and  to  permit 
them  to  play  their  part  In  the  defense  of  the  area  as  a 
whole.  All  applications  for  arms  or  war  material  for 
these  countries  will  be  considered  in  the  light  of  these 
primiples.  In  this  connection  the  three  Governments 
vrish  to  recall  and  reaffirm  the  terms  of  the  statements 
made  by  their  representatives  on  the  Security  Council  on 
August  4,  1949,  in  which  they  declared  their  opposition  to 
the  development  of  an  arms  race  between  the  Arab  states 
and  Israel. 


834 


On  the  other  hand,  the  Israeli  fear  that  ulti- 
mately the  Arabs  may  try  to  push  them  into  the 

sea. 

In  an  effort  to  calm  these  contradictory  fears  the 
United  States  joined  with  Britain  and  France  in 
a  Declaration  of  May  25,  1950,  which  stated  that 
"the  three  Governments,  should  they  find  that  any 
of  these  states  (of  the  Near  East)  was  preparing 
to  violate  frontiers  or  armistice  lines,  would,  con- 
sistently with  their  obligations  as  members  of  the 
United  Nations,  immediately  take  action,  both 
within  and  outside  the  United  Nations,  to  prevent 
such  violation."  -  That  Declaration  when  made 
did  not  reassure  the  Arabs.  It  must  be  made  clear 
that  the  present  U.S.  administration  stands  fully 
behind  that  Declaration.  We  cannot  afford  to  be 
distrusted  by  millions  who  could  be  sturdy  friends 
of  freedom.  They  must  not  further  swell  the  ranks 
of  Communist  dictators. 

The  leaders  in  Israel  themselves  agreed  with  us 
that  United  States  policies  should  be  impartial  so 
as  to  win  not  only  the  respect  and  regard  of  the 
Israeli  but  also  of  the  Arab  peoples.  We  shall 
seek  such  policies. 

4.  Peace  Between  Israel  and  the  Arab  Nations. 
There  is  need  for  peace  in  the  Near  East.  Today 
there  is  an  uneasy  military  armistice  between 
Israel  and  the  Arab  States,  while  economic  war- 
fare is  being  conducted  by  the  Arab  States,  in 
retaliation  for  alleged  Israeli  encroachments. 
The  area  is  enfeebled  by  fear  and  by  wasteful 
measures  which  are  inspired  by  fear  and  hate.       j 

Israel  should  become  part  of  the  Near  East  com- ' 
munity  and  cease  to  look  upon  itself,  or  be  looked 
upon  by  others,  as  alien  to  this  community.  This 
is  possible.  To  achieve  it  will  require  concessions 
on  the  part  of  both  sides.  But  the  gains  to  both 
will  far  outweigh  the  concessions  required  to  win 
those  gains. 

The  parties  concerned  have  the  primary  respon- 
sibility of  bringing  peace  to  the  area.  But  the 
United  States  will  not  hesitate  by  every  appro- 
priate means  to  use  its  influence  to  promote  a  step- 
by-step  reduction  of  tension  in  the  area  and  the 
conclusion  of  ultimate  peace. 

2.  The  three  Governments  declare  that  assurances  have 
been  received  from  all  the  states  in  question,  to  which 
they  permit  arms  to  be  supplied  from  their  countries,  that 
the  purchasing  state  does  not  intend  to  undertake  any 
act  of  aggression  against  any  other  state.  Similar  assur- 
ances will  be  requested  from  any  other  state  in  the  area 
to  which  they  permit  arms  to  be  supplied  in  the  future. 

3.  The  three  Governments  take  this  opportunity  of  de- 
claring their  deep  interest  in  and  their  desire  to  promote 
the  establishment  and  maintenance  of  peace  and  stability 
in  the  area  and  their  unalterable  opposition  to  the  use  of 
force  or  threat  of  force  between  any  of  the  states  in  that 
area.  The  three  Governments,  should  they  find  that  any 
of  these  states  was  preparing  to  violate  frontiers  or 
armistice  lines,  would,  consistently  with  their  obligations 
as  members  of  the  United  Nations,  immediately  take  ac- 
tion, both  within  and  outside  the  United  Nations,  to  pre- 
vent such  violation." 

The  above  Declaration  was  first  printed  in  the  BDij:.EaiH 
of  June  5,  1950,  p.  8S6. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


5.  Middle  East  Defense  Organization.  A  Mid- 
dle East  Defense  Organization  is  a  future  rather 
than  an  immediate  possibility.  Many  of  the  Arab 
League  countries  are  so  engrossed  with  their 
quarrels  with  Israel  or  with  Great  Britain  or 
France  that  they  pay  little  heed  to  the  menace  of 
Soviet  communism.  However,  there  is  more  con- 
cern where  the  Soviet  Union  is  near.  In  general, 
the  northern  tier  of  nations  shows  awareness  of  the 
danger. 

There  is  a  vague  desire  to  have  a  collective 
security  system.  But  no  such  system  can  be  im- 
posed from  without.  It  should  be  designed  and 
grow  from  within  out  of  a  sense  of  common  destiny 
and  common  danger. 

Wliile  awaiting  the  formal  creation  of  a  security 
association,  the  United  States  can  usefully  help 
strengthen  the  interrelated  defense  of  those  coun- 
tries which  want  strength,  not  as  against  each 
other  or  the  West,  but  to  resist  the  common  threat 
to  all  free  peoples. 

6.  Friendly  Understanding.  In  conclusion,  let 
me  recall  that  the  primary  purpose  of  our  trip  was 


to  show  friendliness  and  to  develop  understand- 
ing. These  peoples  we  visited  are  proud  peoples 
who  have  a  great  tradition  and,  I  believe,  a  great 
future.  We  in  the  United  States  are  better  off  if 
we  respect  and  honor  them,  and  learn  the  thoughts 
and  aspirations  which  move  them.  It  profits 
nothing  merely  to  be  critical  of  others. 

President  Eisenhower's  administration  plans  to 
make  friendship — not  faultfinding — the  basis  of 
its  foreign  policy.  President  Eisenhower  brought 
with  him  from  Europe  an  unprecedented  measure 
of  understanding  and  personal  friendships.  Be- 
fore he  was  inaugurated,  he  went  to  Korea.  Twice 
since  inauguration,  Mr.  Stassen  and  I  have  been  to 
Europe.  Now  we  have  been  to  the  Near  East  and 
South  Asia.  Later  this  month,  the  President's 
brother,  Dr.  Milton  Eisenhower,  and  Assistant 
Secretary  of  State  Cabot  will  go  to  South  America. 

Thus  your  Government  is  establishing  the 
worldwide  relationships  and  gathering  the  infor- 
mation which  will  enable  us  better  to  serve  you,  the 
American  people. 


President's  Letter  to  Syngman  Rhee  on  Proposed  Korean  Armistice 


Following  is  the  text  of  a  letter  dated  June  6 
from  the  President  to  Syngman  Rhee,  President 
of  the  Rejnihlic  of  Korea: 

Dear  Me.  President  : 

I  received  on  June  2  the  cabled  text  of  your 
communication  dated  May  30.^  I  have  given  it 
the  careful  and  sympathetic  consideration  it 
deserves. 

The  Kepublic  of  Korea  has  engaged  all  of  its 
resources,  human  and  material,  in  a  struggle  which 
will  go  down  in  history  as  one  of  the  epic  struggles 
of  all  time.  You  have  dedicated  your  all  without 
reservation  to  the  principle  that  human  liberty  and 
national  liberty  must  survive  against  Communist 
aggression,  which  tramples  upon  human  dignity 
and  which  replaces  national  sovereignty  with  a 
humiliating  satellite  status.  The  principles  for 
which  your  nation  has  fought  and  for  which  so 
many  of  your  youth  have  died  are   principles 


'  Not  printed  here. 
June   75,   J953 


which  defend  free  men  and  free  nations  every- 
where. 

The  United  States  has  stood  with  you,  and  with 
you  we  have  fought  for  those  principles,  as  part 
of  the  United  Nations  Command.  The  blood  of 
your  youth  and  our  youth  has  been  poured  out  on 
the  altar  of  common  sacrifice.  Thereby  we  have 
demonstrated  not  only  our  dedication  to  the  cause 
of  human  freedom  and  political  liberty,  but  also 
our  dedication  to  an  equally  important  principle 
which  is  that  there  cannot  be  independence  with- 
out interdependence,  and  there  cannot  be  human 
liberty  except  as  men  recognize  that  they  are  bound 
together  by  ties  of  common  destiny. 

The  moment  has  now  come  when  we  must  decide 
whether  to  carry  on  by  warfare  a  struggle  for  the 
unification  of  Korea  or  whether  to  pursue  this 
goal  by  political  and  other  methods. 

The  enemy  has  proposed  an  armistice  which 
involves  a  clear  abandonment  of  the  fruits  of 
aggression.  The  amiistice  would  leave  the 
Republic  of  Korea  in  undisputed  possession  of 

835 


substantially  tlie  territory  which  the  Eepublic 
administered  yirior  to  the  aggression,  indeed  this 
territory  will  be  somewhat  enlarged. 

The  proposed  armistice,  true  to  the  principle 
of  political  asylum,  assures  that  the  thousands  of 
Xorth  Koreans  and  Communist  Chinese  prisoners 
in  our  hands,  who  have  seen  libei'tv  and  who  wish 
to  share  it,  will  have  the  opportunity  to  do  so  and 
will  not  be  forcibly  sent  back  into  Communist 
areas.  The  principle  of  political  asylum  is  one 
which  we  could  not  honorably  surrender  even 
though  we  thereby  put  an  earlier  end  to  our  own 
human  and  material  losses.  We  have  suffered 
together  many  thousands  of  casualties  in  support 
of  this  principle. 

It  is  my  profound  conviction  that  under  these 
circumstances  acceptance  of  the  armistice  is  re- 
quired of  the  United  Nations  and  the  Republic 
of  Korea.  We  would  not  be  justified  in  prolonging 
the  war  with  all  the  misery  that  it  involves  in  the 
hope  of  achieving,  by  force,  the  unification  of 
Korea. 

The  unification  of  Korea  is  an  end  to  which 
the  United  States  is  committed,  not  once  but  many 
times,  through  its  World  War  II  declarations  and 
through  its  acceptance  of  the  principles  enunci- 
ated in  reference  to  Korea  by  the  United  Nations. 
Korea  is  unhappily  not  the  only  country  which 
remains  divided  after  World  War  II.  We  re- 
main determined  to  play  our  part  in  achieving 
the  political  union  of  all  countries  so  divided. 
But  we  do  not  intend  to  employ  war  as  an  instru- 
ment to  accomplish  the  world-wide  political  set- 
tlements to  which  we  are  dedicated  and  which  we 
believe  to  be  just.  It  was  indeed  a  crime  that 
those  who  attacked  from  the  North  invoked  vio- 
lence to  unite  Korea  under  their  rule.  Not  only 
as  your  official  friend  but  as  a  personal  friend  I 
urge  that  your  country  not  embark  upon  a  similar 
course. 

There  are  three  major  points  I  would  like  to 
make  to  you : 

1.  The  United  States  will  not  renounce  its  ef- 
forts by  all  peaceful  means  to  effect  the  unification 
of  Korea.  Also  as  a  member  of  the  United  Na- 
tions we  shall  seek  to  assure  that  the  United  Na- 
tions continues  steadfast  in  its  determination  in 
this  respect.  In  the  political  conference  which 
will  follow  an  armistice  that  will  be  our  central 
objective.  The  United  States  intends  to  consult 
with  your  Government  both  before  and  during 
such  a  conference  and  expects  the  full  participa- 
tion of  your  Government  in  that  conference. 

2.  You  speak  of  a  mutual  defense  pact.  I  am 
prepared  promptly  after  the  conclusion  and  ac- 
ceptance of  an  armistice  to  negotiate  with  you 
a  mutual  defense  treaty  along  the  lines  of  the 
treaties  heretofore  made  between  the  United  States 
and  the  Republic  of  the  Philippines,  and  the 
United  States  and  Australia  and  New  Zealand. 
You  may  recall  that  both  of  these  treaties  speak 


of  "the  development  of  a  more  comprehensive  sys- 
tem of  regional  security  in  the  Pacific  area."  A 
security  pact  between  the  United  States  and  the 
Republic  of  Korea  would  be  a  further  step  in  that 
direction.  It  would  cover  the  territory  now  or 
hereafter  brought  peacefully  under  the  adminis- 
tration of  the  ROK.  Of  course  you  realize  that 
under  our  constitutional  system,  any  such  treaty 
would  be  made  only  with  the  advice  and  consent 
of  the  Senate.  However,  the  action  which  the 
United  States  has  heretofore  taken,  and  the  great 
investment  of  blood  and  treasure  which  has 
already  been  made  for  the  independence  of  Korea 
are  certainly  clear  indications  of  American  temper  i 
and  intentions  not  to  tolerate  a  repetition  of  un-  j; 
provoked  aggression. 

3.  The  United  States  Government,  subject  to 
requisite  Congressional  appropriations,  will  be 
prepared  to  continue  economic  aid  to  the  Republic 
of  Korea  which  will  permit  in  peace  a  restoration 
of  its  devastated  land.  Homes  must  be  rebuilt. 
Industries  must  be  reestablished.  Agriculture 
must  be  made  vigorously  productive. 

The  preamble  of  the  Constitution  of  the  United 
States  states  the  goals  of  our  people,  which  I  be- 
lieve are  equally  the  goals  of  the  brave  people  of 
Korea,  namely  "to  form  a  more  perfect  union,  es- 
tablish justice,  insure  domestic  tranquillity,  pro- 
vide for  the  common  defense,  promote  the  general 
welfare,  and  secure  the  blessings  of  licerty.'" 
Manifestly,  not  all  of  these  conditions  now  prevail  , 
in  Korea.  Moi'eover,  in  existing  circumstances 
they  cannot  be  achieved  either  by  prolongation 
of  the  present  conflict  or  by  reckless  adventure 
with  a  new  one.  Only  by  peaceful  means  can 
these  things  be  achieved. 

With  the  conclusion  of  an  armistice  the  United 
States  is  prepared  to  join  with  the  Republic  of 
Korea  to  seek  for  Korea  these  ends.  We  believe 
that  in  Korea  there  should  be  a  more  perfect 
union  and,  as  I  say,  we  shall  seek  to  achieve  that 
union  by  all  peaceful  methods.  We  believe  that 
there  should  be  domestic  tranquillity  and  that  can 
come  from  the  end  of  fighting.  There  should  be 
provision  for  the  defense  of  Korea.  That  will 
come  from  the  mutual  security  treaty  which  we 
are  prepared  to  make.  The  general  welfare 
should  be  advanced  and  that  will  come  from  your 
own  peacetime  efforts  and  from  economic  assist- 
ance to  your  war-torn  land.  Finally,  a  peaceful 
settlement  will  afford  the  best  opportunity  to 
bring  to  your  people  the  blessings  of  liberty. 

I  assure  you,  Mr.  President,  that  so  far  as  the 
United  States  is  concerned,  it  is  our  desire  to  go 
forward  in  fellowship  with  the  Republic  of  Korea. 
Even  the  thought  of  a  separation  at  this  critical 
hour  would  be  a  tragedy.  We  must  remain 
united. 

Sincerely, 

DwiGHT  D.  Eisenhower. 


836 


Department  of  Stale  Bulletin 


New  Escapee  Program  in  Austria 

'ty  Llewellyn  E.  Thompson 
'Ambassador  to  Austria  ^ 

.  The  concept  of  the  fundamental  dignity  of  the 
individual  is  basic  in  our  Western  culture — it  is 
indeed  one  of  the  firm  foundations  upon  which 
our  society  rests.  When  governments,  usurping 
and  maintaining  power  in  defiance  of  the  will  of 
the  people  they  rule,  infringe  upon  or  deny  the 
basic  human  rights  of  the  individual,  we  find  the 
victims  seeking  in  increasing  numbers  to  escape 
from  conditions  they  can  no  longer  abide. 

In  the  free  world,  where  political  opposition  to 
government  is  accepted  and  expected,  the  political 
refugee  is  granted  shelter  and  asylum  as  a  matter 
of  course. 

But  more  than  asylum  is  needed— we  must  give 
adequate  and  sympathetic  support,  moral  and 
physical,  to  those  who  have  come  to  us  as  refugees. 
And  that  is  the  purpose  and  goal  of  the  program 
being  initiated  here  today. 

This  center  constitutes  a  shelter  and  a  way  sta- 
tion on  the  road  to  a  new  life.  Under  this  roof, 
men  and  women  and  even  children,  who  just  a 
short  time  ago  knew  the  terror  of  a  godless  system 
and  the  constant  fear  of  political  arrest,  are  pre- 
paring to  enter  a  new  life  of  dignity  and  peaceful 
endeavor.  In  this  place  they  can  pursue  their 
religious  faiths,  continue  their  education,  and  pre- 
pare themselves  for  useful  occupations  of  their 
own  choice. 

We  are  not  alone  in  this  work.  Responding  to 
the  initiative  of  the  U.S.  Government,  the  Gov- 
ernment of  Austria  has  been  very  active  in  estab- 
lishing this  reception  center.  It  has  staffed  the 
camp  with  experienced  personnel  and  provided  the 
basic  food,  fuel,  and  equipment.  Let  me  add  that 
this  is  but  a  small  portion  of  the  generous  contri- 
bution which  the  Austrian  people  have  made  to- 
ward easing  the  burdens  of  refugees.  It  gives  me 
great  pleasure  to  commend  the  sympathetic  and 
efficient  manner  in  which  this  problem  has  been 
met  and  the  spirit  of  cooperation  which  has  been 
so  consistently  translated  into  fruitful  deeds. 

We  recognize  that  Austria  is  burdened  with  the 
problem  of  providing  asylum  for  thousands  of 
other  refugees,  including  those  of  German  ethnic 
origin.  The  establishment  and  financing  by  the 
American  Government  of  a  special  program  will 
relieve  this  problem  by  supporting  the  resettle- 
ment and  re-establishment  of  escapees  overseas. 
In  the  few  short  weeks  that  this  center  has  been 
occupied,  over  .50  escapees  have  traveled  from  Wels 
to  countries  in  the  Western  Hemisphere.  Pro- 
grams are  under  way  to  improve  the  health, 
morale,  and  technical  knowledge  of  those  who  re- 

'  Remarks  made  on  May  26  at  the  opening  at  "Wels, 
Austria,  of  a  new  reception  center  jointly  established  by 
the  Governments  of  the  United  States  and  Austria  for 
escapees  from  Soviet-dominated  countries. 

June    15,   ?953 


main  to  be  settled  elsewhere  so  that  they  may  soon 
follow  to  new  homes  of  their  own  choosing  abroad. 
The  introduction  and  implementation  of  these 
programs  are  only  possible  through  the  skillful 
participation  on  the  part  of  the  voluntary 
agencies. 

Here  then,  in  these  modest  surroundings,  it  can 
truly  be  said  a  new  life  begins. 

The  presence  here  today  of  so  many  of  the  per- 
sons engaged  in  this  humanitarian  effort  is  proof 
to  escapees  that  they  are  not  a  forgotten  people. 
It  is  proof  that  the  victims  of  tyranny  are  the 
abiding  concern  of  all  who  respect  human  liberty 
anywhere. 

U.S.  Representative  on  Board 
for  Validation  of  German  Bonds 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  29 
(press  release  298)  the  appointment  of  Douglas 
William  Hartman  to  be  the  U.S.  representative 
on  the  Board  for  the  Validation  of  German  Dollar 
Bonds.  The  German  Government  has  selected 
Walter  Reusch  as  the  German  representative  on 
the  Board.  The  chairman,  who  will  be  a  U.S.  citi- 
zen, has  not  yet  been  selected. 

The  Validation  Board  was  created  by  an  agree- 
ment between  the  United  States  and  the  Federal 
Republic  of  Germany  signed  February  27,  1953,^ 
which  established  the  procedures  to  be  followed 
in  the  United  States  for  validating  German  dollar 
bonds.  The  Board  will  sit  in  New  York  City  and 
is  expected  to  begin  its  operations,  involving  ap- 
proximately one  million  bonds  of  an  estimated 
value  of  $700  million,  in  the  near  future.  At  the 
present  time  it  is  engaged  in  making  necessary 
administrative  arrangements  preparatory  to  en- 
tering upon  the  discharge  of  its  duties. 

Pending  the  commencement  of  validation,  bond- 
holders are  being  urged  to  hold  their  securities 
until  the  Board  issues  appropriate  public  an- 
nouncements in  newspapers  and  periodicals  of 
general  circulation,  infoi-ming  bondholders  of  the 
steps  to  be  taken  to  have  their  bonds  validated. 

The  Validation  Board  will  carry  out  an  opera- 
tion believed  to  be  unique  in  the  field  of  inter- 
national finance.  Under  the  procedure  provided 
for  in  the  agreement  of  February  27,  1953,  the 
Board  is  authorized  to  validate  German  dollar 
bonds  which  were  outside  Germany  on  January  1, 
1945.  This  twofold  criterion  of  time  and  place  is 
the  sole  test  which  the  Board  will  apply  in  deter- 
mining whether  the  bonds  submitted  to  it  shall  be 
validated.  This  does  not  mean  that  this  is  the 
only  way  U.S.  bondholders  can  obtain  validation. 
Holders  of  lawfully  acquired  securities  who  can- 
not establish  that  tliey  were  outside  Germany  on 
the  required  date  may  apply  for  validation  under 
the  procedures  established  in  the  Federal  Republic 
of  Germany. 


Bulletin  of  Mar.  9, 1953,  p.  376. 


837 


The  objectives  of  the  program  are  to  render  in- 
valid an  estimated  $350  million  of  German  dollar 
bonds  retired  for  cancellation  by  the  German  Gov- 
ernment and  seized  by  the  Soviet  armed  forces 
when  they  captnred  Berlin  at  the  end  of  World 
War  II,  and  to  validate  the  remainder  of  such 
bonds.  The  valid  securities  will  thus  be  able  to  be 
restored  to  the  U.S.  markets  and  the  holders  will 
become  eligible  for  the  benefits  provided  under  the 
German  debt  settlement.  The  Board  will  coordi- 
nate its  activities  closely  with  the  depositaries, 
trustees  and  paying  agents,  the  stock  exchanges, 
the  Securities  and  Exchange  Commission  in  this 
country,  and  with  the  issuers  and  the  German 
validation  agencies  in  the  Federal  Republic. 

The  Board  will  take  its  decisions  by  joint  action 
if  the  U.S.  and  German  members  are  in  agreement. 
Where  they  are  not  in  agreement  the  chairman  will 
decide,  and  his  decision  will  constitute  the  decision 
of  the  Board.  The  Board  is  already  at  work  plan- 
ning the  preliminary  phases  of  the  validation  pro- 
gram. During  this  initial  stage  the  Board  will 
be  occupied  with  such  tasks  as  the  staffing  of  its 
office,  the  selection  of  depositaries  for  the  safe- 
keeping and  processing  of  bonds,  the  preparation 
of  registration  forms  for  bondholders  to  fill  out 
in  applying  for  validation,  the  distribution  of 
these  forms  to  banks  throughout  the  United  States, 
and  the  issuance  of  public  announcements  which, 
in  addition  to  appearing  in  newspapers  and  peri- 
odicals of  general  circulation,  will  also  be  dis- 
tributed to  all  banks,  brokers,  and  securities  deal- 
ers, advising  bondholders  of  the  procedure  they 
should  follow  in  applying  for  validation.  The 
Board  is  making  every  effort  to  complete  these  and 
similar  administrative  details  as  soon  as  possible 
so  that  the  commencement  of  the  validation  pro- 
gram may  be  announced  at  an  early  date. 


U.S.  Claimants  to  German 
Assets  in  Switzerland 

Press  release  303  dated  June  3 

The  Department  of  State  has  been  informed 
through  the  American  Legation  at  Bern  that 
claimants  under  Article  7  of  the  Swiss-German 
Agreement,  which  became  effective  ISIarch  20, 1953, 
must  file  their  claims  by  June  29, 1953,  unless  they 
have  been  notified  otherwise  personally  by  the 
Swiss  Compensation  Office.' 

Article  7  of  the  Swiss-German  Agi'eement  pro- 
vides that  the  Swiss  Compensation  Office,  an 
agency  of  the  Swiss  Government,  is  required  to 
"despatch  requests  in  an  appropriate  manner  to 
all  owners  of  property  in  Switzerland  asking  them 
to  apply,  personally  or  through  agents,  within  two 
months  from  publication  of  such  requests  for  the 

'  For  previous  information,  see  Buixetin  of  Sept.  8, 
1952,  pp.  364  and  363 ;  ibid  May  4, 1953,  p.  654. 


unblocking  of  their  property  according  to  Article 
5." 

Under  Article  5  of  the  Swiss-German  Agi-ee- 
ment  protection  is  atiorded  to  persons  having  in- 
terests in  German  assets  in  Switzerland,  in  general, 
as  follows  : 

1.  Persons  having  assets  of  a  total  value  of  less 
than  10,000  Swiss  francs. 

2.  Persons  who  on  February  16,  1945,  were  dual 
U.S.-German  nationals,  provided  that  the  United 
States  supports  their  claim. 

3.  Persons  deprived  of  life,  or  substantially  of 
liberty,  or  of  full  citizenship  rights  under  Xazi 
discriminatory  laws. 

4.  Persons  who  can  prove  by  certain  certified 
statements  that  their  property  in  Switzerland  was 
returned  to  them  pursuant  to  the  laws  in  Germany 
on  restitution. 

5.  Non-German  persons  having  a  25  percent  or 
more  interest  in  firms  organized  under  German 
law,  which  firms  have  assets  in  Switzerland. 

6.  Non-German  beneficiaries  of  a  family  foun- 
dation. 

MSA  Productivity  Allotment  to  Italy 

The  allotment  of  $22  million  to  Italy  to  make 
possible  an  expansion  of  the  drive  to  increase  pro- 
ductivity and  production  in  Italian  industry  and 
agriculture  was  announced  on  May  26  by  the 
Mutual  Security  Agency  in  Washington  and 
Rome. 

Major  provisions  of  the  new  program,  developed 
by  MsA  and  the  Italian  Government,  provide  for 
the  establishment  of  a  revolving  fund  for  loans 
to  small-  and  medium-size  industrial  and  dis- 
tributive firms  cooperating  in  the  productivity 
program,  and  a  special  fund  to  stimulate  con- 
struction of  workers'  homes  by  housing  coopera- 
tives organized  by  free-trade  unions.  The  work- 
ers' housing  program  is  intended  to  provide  dem- 
onstration projects  of  modern  quality  construction 
at  the  lowest  possible  unit-cost. 

The  new  aid-grant  also  will  make  possible 
broadened  activities  of  the  Italian  national  pro- 
ductivity connnittee,  continued  support  for  the 
technical-assistance  program,  establishment  of  a 
research  and  education  fund  to  assist  productivity 
projects  in  these  fields,  and  necessary  funds  for 
Italian  participation  in  the  European  Productiv- 
ity Agency  established  May  1  by  the  Organization 
for  European  Economic  Cooperation   (Oeec). 

To  finance  these  segments  of  the  expanded  pro- 
ductivity program,  the  Italian  Government  is  set- 
ting aside  the  equivalent  of  $22  million  in  lire 
counterpart  funds. 

Italy  is  the  fifth  Western  European  country  to 
conclude  a  special  productivity  agreement  with 
MsA  as  provided  for  by  amendments  to  the 
Agency's  legislation.  Others  are  the  United 
Kingdom,  Western  Germany,  the  Netherlands, 
and  Denmark. 


838 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Air  Transport  Agreement  With  Cuba 

Iross  release  290  dated  May  26 

The  Department  of  State  on  May  26  aiinovnced 
the  signing  at  Habana,  Cuba,  by  Dr.  Miguel  Angel 
(/<  hi  ( 'ampa,  Minister  of  State,  Dr.  Pablo  Carrera 
J ii.\tl::,  Minister  of  Communication.^  and  7'ransport 
of  the  Cuban  Government,  and  U.S.  Ambassador 
Willard  L.  Beaulac  of  a  bilateral  air-transport 
agreement  between  the  United  States  and  the  Re- 
public of  Cuba.  This  agreement  is  substantially 
the  same  as  that  negotiated  by  the  United  States 
u-ith  more  than  JiO  other  countries. 

The  text  of  the  agreement  follows: 

Air  Transport  Agreement  Between  the  Govern- 
ment OF  the  Unitio)  States  of  America  and  the 
(toveenment  of  the  Republic  of  Cuba 

The  Goveniment  of  the  United  States  of  America  and 
the  Government  of  the  Republic  of  Cuba 

Desiring  to  conclude  an  Agreement  for  the  purpose  of 
pnimoting  direct  air  communications  between  tlieir  re- 
spective territories, 

Have  accordingly  appointed  authorized  representatives 
for  this  purpose,  who  agreed  as  follows : 

Article  1 

For  the  purposes  of  the  present  Agreement,  and  its 
Annex,  except  where  the  text  provides  otherwise : 

(a)  The  term  "aeronautical  authorities"  shall  mean  in 
the  case  of  the  United  States  of  America,  the  Civil  Aero- 
nautics Board  and  any  person  or  agency  authorized  to 
perform  the  functions  exercised  at  the  present  time  by 
the  Civil  Aeronautics  Board,  and,  in  the  case  of  the  Re- 
public of  Cuba,  the  Junta  de  Aeronautica  Civil  and  any 
person  or  agency  authorized  to  perform  the  functions 
exercised  at  present  by  the  said  Organization. 

(6)  The  term  "designated  airlines"  shall  mean  those 
airlines  that  the  aeronautical  authorities  of  one  of  the 
contracting  parties  have  communicated  in  writing  to  the 
i  aeronautical  authorities  of  the  other  contracting  party 
that  they  are  the  airlines  that  it  has  designated  in  con- 
formity with  Article  3  of  the  present  Agreement  for  the 
routes  specified  in  such  designation. 

(c)  The  term  "territory"  shall  have  the  meaning  given 
to  it  by  Article  2  of  the  Convention  on  International  Civil 
Aviation,  signed  at  Chicago  on  December  7,  1944. 

(d)  The  definitions  contained  in  paragraphs  a,  6,  and 
A  of  Article  96  of  the  Convention  on  International  Civil 
Aviation  signed  at  Chicago  on  December  7,  1944  shall  be 
applied  to  the  present  Agreement. 

Article  2 

Each  contracting  party  grants  to  the  other  contracting 
party  the  rights  specified  in  the  Annex  hereto  necessary 
for  establishing  the  international  civil  air  routes  and 
services  therein  described,  whether  such  services  be  in- 
augurated immediately  or  at  a  later  date  at  the  option  of 
the  contracting  party  to  whom  the  rights  are  granted. 

Article  3 

Each  of  the  air  services  so  described  may  be  placed  in 
operation  as  soon  as  the  contracting  party  to  whom  the 
rights  have  been  granted  by  Article  2  to  designate  an  air- 
line or  airlines  for  the  route  concerned  has  authorized  an 
airline  for  such  route,  and  the  contracting  party  granting 
the  rights  shall,  subject  to  Article  7  hereof,  be  bound  to 
give  the  appropriate  operating  permission  to  the  airline 
or  airlines  concerned ;  provided  that  the  airlines  so  desig- 
nated may  be  required  to  qualify  before  tlie  competent 
aeronautical  authorities  of  the  contracting  party  granting 


the  rights  under  the  laws  and  regulations  normally  applied 
b.v  lliese  authorities  before  being  permitted  to  engage  in 
the  operations  contemplated  by  this  agreement;  and  pro- 
vided tliat  in  areas  of  hostilities  or  of  military  occupation, 
or  in  areas  affected  thereby  such  operations  shall  be  sub- 
ject to  the  approval  of  the  competent  military  authorities. 

Article  4 

In  order  to  prevent  discriminatory  practices  and  to 
assure  equality  of  treatment,  both  contracting  parties 
agree  that : 

(a)  Each  of  the  contracting  parties  may  impose  or  per- 
mit to  be  imposed  just  and  reasonable  charges  for  the  use 
of  public  airports  and  other  facilities  under  its  control. 
I'^ach  of  the  contracting  parties  agrees,  however,  tliat 
the.se  charges  shall  not  be  higher  than  would  be  paid  for 
the  use  of  such  airports  and  facilities  by  its  national  air- 
craft engaged  in  similar  international  services. 

(6)  Fuel,  lubricating  oils  and  spare  parts  introduced 
into  the  territory  of  one  contracting  party  by  the  other 
contracting  party  or  its  nationals,  and  intended  solely  for 
use  by  aircraft  of  the  airline  of  such  contracting  party 
shall,  witli  respect  to  the  imposition  of  customs  duties, 
inspection  fees  or  other  national  duties  oi-  cliarges  by 
the  contracting  party  whose  territory  is  entered,  be  ac- 
corded the  same  treatment  as  that  applying  to  national 
airlines  and  to  airlines  of  the  most-favored-nation. 

(c)  The  fuel,  lubricating  oils,  spare  parts,  regular 
equipment  and  aircraft  stores  retained  on  board  civil 
aircraft  of  the  airlines  of  one  contracting  party  authorized 
to  operate  the  routes  and  services  described  in  the  Annex 
shall,  upon  arriving  in  or  leaving  the  territory  of  the  other 
contracting  party,  be  exempt  from  customs,  inspection  fees 
or  similar  duties  or  cliarges,  even  though  such  supplies  be 
used  or  consumed  by  such  aircraft  on  flights  in  that 
territory. 

Article  5 

Certificates  of  airworthiness,  certificates  of  competency 
and  licenses  issued  or  rendered  valid  by  one  contracting 
party,  and  still  in  force,  shall  be  recognized  as  valid  by  the 
otlier  contracting  party  for  the  purpose  of  operating  the 
mutes  and  services  described  in  the  Annex,  provided  that 
the  requirements  under  which  such  certificates  or  licenses 
were  issued  or  rendered  valid  are  equal  to  or  above  the 
minimum  standards  which  may  be  established  pursuant 
to  the  Convention  on  International  Civil  Aviation.  Each 
contracting  party  reserves  the  right,  however,  to  refuse 
to  recognize,  for  the  purpose  of  flight  above  its  own  terri- 
tory, certificates  of  competency  and  licenses  granted  to  its 
own  nationals  by  another  State. 

Article  6 

(a)  The  laws  and  regulations  of  one  contracting  party 
relating  to  the  admission  to  or  departure  from  its  terri- 
tory of  aircraft  engaged  in  international  air  navigation, 
or  to  the  operations  and  navigation  of  such  aircraft  while 
within  its  territory,  shall  be  applied  to  the  aircr.'ift  of 
the  airlines  designated  by  the  other  contracting  party, 
and  shall  be  complied  with  by  such  aircraft  upon  entering 
or  departing  from  or  while  within  the  territory  of  the 
first  party. 

(6|  The  laws  and  regulations  of  one  contracting  party 
as  to  the  admission  to  or  departure  from  its  territory 
of  passengers,  crew,  or  cargo  of  aircraft,  such  as  regula- 
tions relating  to  entry,  clearance,  immigration,  pass- 
ports, customs,  and  quarantine  shall  be  complied  with  by 
or  on  belialf  of  sucli  passengers,  crew  or  cargo  of  the  other 
contracting  party  upon  entrance  into  or  departute  from, 
or  while  within  the  territory  of  the  first  party. 

Article  7 

Notwithstanding  the  provisions  of  Article  10  hereof, 
each  contracting  party  reserves  the  right  to  withhold  or 
revoke,  after  thirty  (30)  days  prior  notice  to  the  other 
contracting  party,  the  exercise  of  the  riglits  specified  in 


June   15,    1953 


839 


the  Annex  to  this  Agreement  by  an  airline  designated  by 
the  other  contracting  i)arty  in  the  event  that  it  is  not 
satisfied  that  substantial  ownership  and  effective  control 
of  such  airlines  are  vested  in  nationals  of  the  other  con- 
tracting party,  or  in  ease  of  failure  by  such  airline,  or  the 
Government  desisnating  such  airlines,  to  comply  with  the 
laws  and  regulations  referred  to  in  Article  G  hereof,  or 
otherwise  to  perform  its  obligations  hereunder,  or  to 
fulfill  the  conditions  under  which  the  rights  are  granted 
in  accordance  with  this  Agreement  and  its  Annex.  In 
the  event  of  action  by  one  contracting  party  under  this 
Article,  the  riglit  of  the  other  contracting  party  to  request 
consultation  pursuant  to  Article  11  shall  not  he  prejudiced. 

Article  8 

This  Agreement  and  all  contracts  connected  therewith 
shall  be  registered  with  the  International  Civil  Aviation 
Organization. 

Article  9 

Existing  rights  and  privileges  relating  to  air  transport 
services  which  may  have  been  granted  previously  by 
either  of  the  contracting  parties  to  an  airline  of  the 
other  contracting  party  shall  continue  in  force  accord- 
ing to  their  terms. 

Article  10 

Either  of  the  contracting  parties  may  at  any  time 
notify  the  other  of  its  intention  to  terminate  the  present 
Agreement.  Such  a  notice  shall  be  sent  simultaneously 
to  the  International  Civil  Aviation  Organization.  In 
the  event  such  communication  is  made  this  Agreement 
shall  terminate  one  year  after  the  date  of  receipt  of  the 
notice  to  terminate,  unless  by  agreement  between  the 
contracting  parties  the  communication  under  reference  is 
withdrawn  before  the  expiration  of  that  time.  If  the 
other  contracting  party  fails  to  acknowledge  receipt,  no- 
tice shall  be  deemed  as  having  been  received  14  days  after 
its  receipt  by  the  International  Civil  Aviation  Organi- 
zation. 

Abticle  11 

In  the  event  either  of  the  contracting  parties  considers 
it  desirable  to  modify  the  routes  or  conditions  set  forth 
in  the  Agreement  and  attached  Annex,  it  may  request 
consultation  between  the  competent  authorities  of  both 
contracting  parties,  such  consultation  to  begin  within  a 
period  of  sixty  days  from  the  date  of  the  request.  When 
these  authorities  mutually  agree  on  new  or  revised  con- 
ditions affecting  the  Annex,  their  recommendations  on 
the  matter  will  come  into  effect  after  they  have  been 
confirmed  by  an  exchange  of  diplomatic  notes. 

Aeticle  12 

If  a  general  multilateral  air  transport  Convention  ac- 
cepted by  both  contracting  parties  enters  into  force,  the 
present  Agreement  shall  be  amended  so  as  to  conform 
with  the  provisions  of  such  Convention. 

Abticle  13 

Except  as  otherwise  provided  in  this  Agreement  or  its 
Annex,  any  dispute  between  the  contracting  parties  rela- 
tive to  the  Interpretation  or  application  of  this  Agreement 
or  its  Annex,  which  cannot  be  settled  through  consulta- 
tion, shall  be  submitted  for  an  advisory  report  to  a  tri- 
bunal of  three  arbitrators,  one  to  be  named  by  each 
contracting  party,  and  the  third  to  he  agreed  upon  by  the 
two  arbitrators  so  chosen,  provided  that  such  third  arbi- 
trator ^hall  not  be  a  national  of  either  contracting  party. 
Each  of  the  contracting  parties  shall  designate  an  arbi- 
trator within  two  months  of  the  date  of  delivery  by 
either  party  to  the  other  party  of  a  diplomatic  note  re- 
questing arbitration  of  a  dispute ;  and  the  third  arbitrator 
shall  be  agreed  upon  within  one  month  after  such  period 
of  two  months. 

If  either  of  the  contracting  parties  fails  to  designate 
its  own  arbitrator  within  two  mouths,  or  if  the   third 

840 


arbitrator  is  not  agreed  upon  within  the  time  limit  indi- 
cated, either  party  may  request  the  President  of  the  Inter- 
national Civil  Aviation  Organization  to  make  the  neces- 
sary appointment  or  appointments  by  choosing  the  arbi- 
trator or  arbitrators. 

The  contracting  parties  will  use  their  best  efforts  under 
the  powers  available  to  them  to  put  into  effect  the  opinion 
expressed  in  any  such  advisory  report.  A  moiety  of  the 
expenses  of  the  arbitral  tribunal  shall  be  borne  by  each 
party. 

Article  14 

Changes  made  by  either  contracting  party  in  the  routes 
described  in  the  schedules  attached  except  those  which 
change  the  points  sei-ved  by  these  airlines  in  the  territory 
of  the  other  contracting  party  shall  not  be  considered  as 
modifications  of  the  Annex.  The  aeronautical  authorities 
of  either  contracting  party  may  therefore  proceed  uni- 
laterally to  make  such  changes,  provided,  however,  that 
notice  of  any  change  is  given  without  delay  to  the  aero- 
nautical authorities  of  the  other  contracting  party. 

If  such  other  aeronautical  authorities  find  that,  having 
regard  to  the  principles  set  forth  in  Section  VII  of  the 
Annex  to  the  present  Agreement,  interests  of  their  airline 
or  airlines  are  prejudiced  by  the  carriage  by  the  airline 
or  airlines  of  the  first  contracting  party  of  traflSc  between 
the  territory  of  the  second  contracting  party  and  the  new 
point  in  the  territory  of  the  third  country,  the  authorities 
of  the  two  contracting  parties  shaU  consult  with  a  view 
to  arriving  at  a  satisfactory  agreement. 

Article  15 

This  Agreement,  including  the  provisions  of  the  Annex 
thereto,  shall  come  into  force  on  the  day  on  which  notice 
of  its  ratification  by  the  Government  of  the  Republic  of 
Cuba  is  given  to  the  Government  of  the  United  States  of 
America. 

In  witness  wHBatEOF,  the  undersigned,  being  duly  au- 
thorized by  their  respective  Governments,  have  signed 
the  present  agreement. 

Done  at  the  city  of  Habana  in  duplicate,  in  the  English 
and  Spanish  texts,  both  equally  authentic,  this  twenty- 
sixth  day  of  May  1953. 

For  the  Government  of  the  United  States  of  America: 
WrLLABD  L.  Beaulao 

For  the  Government  of  the  Republic  of  Cuba : 

Miguel  Angel  de  la  Campa 
Pablo  Carkeea  Justiz 

ANNEX 

Section  I 

The  Government  of  the  Republic  of  Cuba  grants  to  the 
Government  of  the  United  States  of  America  the  right  to 
conduct  air  transport  services  by  one  or  more  airlines  of 
United  States  nationality  designated  by  the  latter  country 
on  the  routes,  specified  in  Schedule  One  attached,  which 
transit  or  serve  commercially  the  territory  of  the  Republic 
of  Cuba. 

Section  II 

The  Government  of  the  United  States  of  America  grants 
to  the  Government  of  the  Republic  of  Cuba  the  right  to 
conduct  air  transport  services  by  one  or  more  airlines 
of  Cuban  nationality  designated  by  the  latter  country 
on  the  routes,  specified  in  Schedule  Two  attached,  which 
transit  or  serve  commercially  the  territory  of  the  United 
States  of  America. 

Section  III 

One  or  more  airlines  designated  by  each  of  the  con- 
tracting parties  under  the  conditions  provided  in  this 
Agreement  will  enjoy,  in  the  territory  of  the  other  con- 
tracting party,  rights  of  transit  and  of  stops  for  non-trafflc 
purposes,  as  well  as  the  right  of  commercial  entry  and 
departure  for  international  traflJc  in  passengers,  cargo 
and  mail  at  the  points  enumerated  on  each  of  the  routes 
specified  in  the  Schedules  attached. 

S 
Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Section  IV 

The  air  transport  facilities  available  hereunder  to  the 
traveling  public  shall  bear  a  close  relationship  to  the 
requirements  of  the  public  for  such  transport. 

Section  V 

There  shall  he  a  fair  and  equal  opportunity  for  the  air- 
lines of  the  contracting  parties  to  operate  on  any  route 
between  their  respective  territories  (as  defined  in  the 
A^reement)  covered  by  this  Agreement  and  Annex. 

Section  VI 

In  the  operation  by  the  airlines  of  either  contracting 
ixirty  of  the  trunk  services  described  In  the  present  Annex, 
tlio  interest  of  the  airlines  of  the  other  contracting  party 
slKiU  be  taken  into  consideration  so  as  not  to  affect  unduly 
till'  services  which  the  latter  provides  on  all  or  part  of  the 
same  routes. 

Section  VII 

It  is  the  understanding  of  both  contracting  parties  that 
services  provided  by  a  designated  airline  under  the  pres- 
rnt  Agreement  and  Annex  shall  retain  as  their  primary 
nlijiHtive  the  provision  of  capacity  adequate  to  the  traflSc 
ili'iiiands  between  the  country  of  which  such  airline  is  a 
ii;itii>nal  and  the  country  of  ultimate  destination  of  the 
irifiic.  The  right  to  embark  or  disembark  on  such  serv- 
iris  international  traffic  destined  for  and  coming  from 
third  countries  at  a  point  or  points  on  the  routes  specified 
in  the  present  Annex  shall  be  applied  in  accordance  with 
the  general  principles  of  orderly  development  to  which 
linth  contracting  parties  subscribe  and  shall  be  subject  to 
the  general  principle  that  capacity  should  be  related : 

id)  to  traffic  requirements  between  the  country  of  ori- 
gin and  the  countries  of  destination; 

ill)  to  the  requirements  of  through  airline  operation; 
and 

( c)  to  the  traffic  requirements  of  the  area  through 
which  the  airline  passes  after  taking  account  of 
local  and  regional  services. 

Section  VIII 

It  is  the  intention  of  both  contracting  parties  that  there 
should  be  regular  and  frequent  consultation  between  their 
respective  aeronautical  authorities  (as  defined  in  the 
Au'ieement)  and  that  there  should  thereby  be  close  col- 
lal'iiration  in  the  observance  of  the  principles  and  the  im- 
plementation of  the  provisions  outlined  in  the  present 
Agreement  and  Annex. 

Section  IX 

(n)  The  determination  of  rates  in  accordance  with  the 
following  paragraphs  shall  be  made  at  reasonable  levels, 
due  regard  being  paid  to  all  relevant  factors,  such  as  cost 
of  operation,  reasonable  profit,  and  the  rates  charged  by 
any  other  airlines,  as  well  as  the  characteristics  of  each 
service. 

(6)  The  rates  to  be  charged  by  the  airlines  of  either 
contracting  party  between  points  in  the  territory  of  the 
United  States  and  points  in  Cuban  territory  referred  to  in 
the  attached  Schedules  shall,  consistent  with  the  provi- 
sions of  the  present  Agreement  and  its  Annex,  be  subject 
to  the  approval  of  the  aeronautical  authorities  of  the  con- 
tracting parties,  who  shall  act  in  accordance  with  their 
obligations  under  the  present  Annex,  within  the  limits  of 
their  legal  powers. 

(e)  Any  rate  proposed  by  the  airline  or  airlines  of 
either  contracting  party  shall  be  filed  with  the  aeronauti- 
cal authorities  of  both  contracting  parties  at  least  thirty 
(30)  days  before  the  proposed  date  of  introduction;  pro- 
vided that  this  period  of  thirty  (30)  days  may  be  reduced 
in  particular  cases  if  so  agreed  by  the  aeronautical  au- 
thorities of  both  contracting  parties. 

(d)  The  Civil  Aeronautics  Board  of  the  United  States 
having  approved  the  traffic  conference  machinery  of  the 
International    Air    Transport    Association     (hereinafter 


called  Iata),  for  a  period  of  three  years  beginning  Jane 
30,  1952,  any  rate  agreements  concluded  through  this  ma- 
chinery during  this  period  and  involving  United  States 
airlines  will  be  subject  to  approval  of  the  Board.  Rate 
agreements  concluded  through  this  machinery  may  also 
be  required  to  be  subject  to  the  approval  of  the  aeronauti- 
cal authorities  of  the  Government  of  Cuba  pursuant  to 
the  principles  enunciated  in  paragraph  (6)  above. 

(f)  The  contracting  parties  agree  that  the  procedure 
described  in  pargraphs  (/),  ig)  and  (ft)  of  the  Section 
shall  apply. 

1.  If,  during  the  period  of  the  Civil  Aeronautics  Board's 
approval  of  the  Iata  traffic  conference  machinery,  either 
any  specific  rate  agreement  is  not  approved  within  a  rea- 
sonable time  by  either  contracting  party,  or  a  conference 
of  Iata  is  unable  to  agree  on  a  rate,  or 

2.  At  any  time  no  Iata  machinery  is  applicable,  or 

3.  If  either  contracting  party  at  any  time  withdraws  or 
fails  to  renew  its  approval  of  that  part  of  the  Iata  traflSc 
conference  machinery  relevant  to  this  Section. 

(f)  In  the  event  that  power  is  conferred  by  law  upon 
the  aeronautical  authorities  of  the  United  States  to 
fix  fair  and  economic  rates  for  the  transport  of  persons 
and  property  by  air  on  international  services  and  to  sus- 
pend proposed  rates  in  a  manner  comparable  to  that  in 
which  the  Civil  Aeronautics  Board  at  present  is  empow- 
ered to  act  with  respect  to  such  rates  for  the  transport  of 
persons  and  property  by  air  within  the  United  States,  each 
of  the  contracting  parties  shall  thereafter  exercise  its  au- 
thority in  such  manner  as  to  prevent  any  rate  or  rates 
proposed  by  one  of  its  airlines  for  services  from  the  terri- 
tory of  one  contracting  party  to  a  point  or  points  in  the 
territory  of  the  other  contracting  party  from  becoming 
effective,  if  in  the  judgment  of  the  aeronautical  authori- 
ties of  the  contracting  party  whose  airline  or  airlines  is  or 
are  proposing  such  rate,  that  rate  is  unfair  or  uneconomic. 
If  one  of  the  contracting  parties  on  receipt  of  the  notifica- 
tion referred  to  in  paragraph  (c)  above  is  dissatisfied 
with  the  rate  proposed  by  the  airline  or  airlines  of  the 
other  contracting  party,  it  shall  so  notify  the  other  con- 
tracting party  prior  to  the  expiry  of  the  first  fifteen  of  the 
thirty  (30)  days  referred  to,  and  the  contracting  parties 
shall  endeavor  to  reach  agreement  on  the  appropriate 
rate. 

In  the  event  that  such  agreement  is  reached,  each  con- 
tracting party  will  exercise  its  best  efforts  to  put  such 
rate  into  effect  as  regards  its  airline  or  airlines. 

If  agreement  has  not  been  reached  at  the  end  of  the 
thirty  (30)  day  period  referred  to  in  paragraph  (c)  above, 
the  proposed  rate  may,  unless  the  aeronautical  authori- 
ties of  the  country  of  the  air  carrier  concerned  see  fit  to 
suspend  its  application,  go  into  effect  provisionally  pend- 
ing the  settlement  of  any  dispute  in  accordance  with  the 
procedure  outlined  in  paragraph   (ft)   below. 

(g)  Prior  to  the  time  when  such  power  may  be  con- 
ferred by  law  upon  the  aeronautical  authorities  of  the 
United  States,  if  one  of  the  contracting  parties  is  dis- 
satisfied with  any  rate  proposed  by  the  airline  or  airlines 
of  either  contracting  party  for  services  from  the  terri- 
tory of  one  contracting  party  to  a  point  or  points  in  the 
territory  of  the  other  contracting  party,  it  shall  so  notify 
the  other  prior  to  the  expiry  of  the  first  fifteen  (15)  of 
the  thirty  (30)  day  period  referred  to  in  paragraph  (c) 
above,  and  the  contracting  parties  shall  endeavor  to  reach 
agreement  on  the  appropriate  rate. 

In  the  event  that  such  agreement  is  reached,  each 
contracting  party  will  use  its  best  efforts  to  cause  such 
agreed  rate  to  be  put  into  effect  by  its  airline  or  airlines. 

It  is  recognized  that  if  no  such  agreement  can  be  reached 
prior  to  the  expiry  of  such  thirty  (30)  days,  the  con- 
tracting party  raising  the  objection  to  the  rate  may  take 
such  steps  as  it  may  consider  necessary  to  prevent  the 
inauguration  or  continuation  of  the  service  in  question 
at  the  rate  complained  of. 

(ft)  When  in  any  case  under  paragraphs  (/)  and  (g) 
above  the  aeronautical  authorities  of  the  two  contracting 
parties  cannot  agree  within  a  I'easonable  time  upon  the  ap- 


Jwne   J  5,   J  953 


841 


propriate  rate  after  consultation  initiated  by  the  com- 
plaint of  one  contracting  party  concerning  tiie  proposed 
rate  or  an  existing  rate  of  the  airline  or  airlines  of  the 
other  contracting  party,  upon  the  request  of  either,  both 
contracting  parties  shall  submit  the  question  to  the  In- 
ternational Civil  Aviation  Organization  for  an  advisory 
report,  and  each  party  will  use  its  best  efforts  under  the 
powers  available  to  it  to  put  into  effect  the  opinion  ex- 
pressed in  such  report. 

List  of  Scheduled  LiDidint/s 

1.  An  airline  or  airlines  designated  by  the  Government 
of  the  United  States  shall  be  entitled  to  operate  air  serv- 
ices on  each  of  the  air  routes  specified  via  intermediate 
points,  in  both  directions,  and  to  make  scheduled  landings 
in  Cuba  at  the  points  specified  in  this  paragraph : 

1.  From  Miami,   Florida,   to   Camaguey,   Cuba,   and 
beyond. 

2.  From  Miami,  Florida,  to  Habana,  Cuba,  and  beyond. 

3.  From    New    York    and/or    Washington,    D.C.,    to 
Habana,  Cuba,  and  beyond. 


4.  From  Tampa,  Florida/St.  Petersburg,  Florida,  to 
Habana,  Cuba,  and  beyond. 

5.  From    Houston,     Texas,    and/or    New     Orleans, 
Louisiana,  to  Habana,  Cuba,  and  beyond. 

2.  An  airline  or  airlines  designated  by  the  Government 
of  the  Republic  of  Cuba  shall  be  entitled  to  operate  air 
services  on  each  of  the  air  routes  specified  via  intermediate 
points,  in  both  directions,  and  to  make  scheduled  landings 
in  the  United  States  at  the  points  specified  in  this 
paragraph : 

1.  From  Habana,  Cuba,  to  Miami,  Florida. 

2.  From  Varadero,  Cuba,  to  Miami,  Florida. 
.3.  From  Habana,  Cuba,  to  New  York. 

4.  From  Habana,  Cuba,  to  Key  West,  Florida. 

.'3.  From  Habana,  Cuba,  to  West  Palm  Beach,  Florida. 

6.  From  Habana,  Cuba,  to  St.  Petersburg,  Florida. 

.3.  Points  on  any  of  the  specified  routes  may  at  the 
option  of  the  designated  airline  be  omitted  on  any  or  all 
flights. 


A  New  Human  Rights  Action  Program 


A  new  U.S.  policy  stand  on  human  rights  was 
first  outlined  on  April  3  hy  Secretary  Dulles  in  a 
letter  addressed  to  Mrs.  Oswald  B.  Lord.  U.S. 
representative  on  the  U.N.  Commission  on  Human 
Rights.  On  April  7,  the  date  on  tohich  the  U.N. 
Commission  convened  at  Geneva,  President  Eisen- 
hower noted,  in  a  message  sent  to  members  of  the 
Commission,  that  the  United  States  wished  to  take 
a  new  approach  toward  the  creation  of  an  effec- 
tive worldwide  human-rights  policy.  In  a  state- 
ment made  on  April  8,  Mrs.  Lord  formally 
presented  the  U.S.  position  to  the  Commission. 
{For  texts  of  the  above  messages  and  statement,  see 
Bulletin  of  Apr.  20, 1953,  pp.  579-582.) 

Following  is  the  text  of  a  further  statement  by 
Mrs.  Lord,  7nade  before  the  Commission  on  May 
19,  which  discusses  three  U.S.  draft  7'esolutions  for 
the  development  of  a  new  humxin-rights  action 
program. 


MRS.  LORD'S  STATEMENT  OF  MAY  19 

At  the  second  meeting  of  this  session  of  the 
Commission  I  indicated  that  at  a  hiter  stage  of  this 
session  I  wonkl  put  forward  proposals  which  my 
Government  feels  are  best  suited  to  furthering  the 
Commission's  task  of  promoting  human  rights.  I 
want  to  tell  you  today,  at  the  outset,  that  these 
proposals  are  the  product  of  earnest  and  careful 


consideration,  and  they  have  been  framed  in  the 
sincere  belief  that  their  adoption  will  make  more 
significant  and  meaningful  the  work  of  the  United 
Nations  in  the  field  of  human  rights.  They  stand 
upon  the  charter  and  upon  the  Universal  Declara- 
tion of  Human  Rights;  upon  that  foundation  we 
hope  to  build  a  program  which  will  continuously 
advance  the  cause  of  human  rights — slowly  per- 
haps but  nevertheless  effectively.  My  countrj^  has 
since  its  inception  been  dedicated  to  the  advance- 
ment of  humaii  rights,  and  we  continue,  in  ac- 
cordance with  our  tradition,  to  supi)ort  their 
advancement  throughout  the  world.  We  recog- 
nize the  fundamental  and  intrinsic  importance  of 
human  rights;  we  have  learned  through  bitter 
experience  that  systematic  and  deliberate  denials 
of  human  rights  have  a  direct  relationship  to  the 
preservation  of  world  peace.  Peace  and  security  [ 
cannot  be  assured  in  a  world  in  which  peoples  who 
are  denied  their  individual  rights  are  pressed  to 
resort  to  measures  of  violence  against  their  op- 
pressors. And  the  governments  which  violate  the 
fundamental  human  rights  of  those  whom  they 
control  cannot  be  expected  to  respect  the  rights  of 
other  members  of  the  international  community. 

I  recall,  as  I  am  sure  all  of  my  colleagues  here 
do,  the  hope  for  a  better,  peaceful  world  which  in- 
spired the  efforts  of  those  who,  at  San  Francisco, 
drafted  the  Charter  of  the  U.N.  Organization. 
ily  Government  realized  then,  as  it  realizes  now. 


842 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


tlie  necessity  of  a  world  organization  which  would 
(li'ul  with  fundamental,  long-range  problems  in 
addition  to  those  problems  immediately  related 
to  tlie  settling  of  disputes  as  they  arise  among 
,  nations.  It  was  the  intention  of  my  Government 
1  then,  as  it  continues  to  be,  that  the  peoples  of  the 
world,  wearied  by  war  and  fear  of  war,  must  be 
assisted  by  the  world  organization  in  their  long 
struggle  to  achieve  a  better  life  wherein  the  in- 
dividual person  and  the  rights  which  he  possessed 
would  secure  full  recognition  everywhere.  It  was 
f(ir  these  reasons  that  express  provision  was  made 
in  tlie  charter,  in  articles  55  and  56,  for  a  state- 
ment of  the  obligation  of  all  members  with  re- 
spect to  human  rights,  and  in  article  68,  for  the 
establishment  of  a  commission  for  the  promotion 
of  human  rights.  And  it  should  be  the  constant 
purpose  of  the  members  of  this  Commission,  I  be- 
lieve, to  seek  those  ways  which  will  be  most  ef- 
fective in  bringing  about  the  attainment  of  the 
charter  goal  of  increased  respect  for  and  ob- 
servance of  human  rights  and  fundamental  free- 
doms for  all  without  distinction  as  to  race,  sex, 
language,  or  religion. 

In  the  Cliarter  of  the  United  Nations  there  are 
nil  words  more  inspiring  than  those  of  the  Pre- 
amble which  express  the  determination  of  the  peo- 
ples of  the  United  Nations  "to  reaffirm  faith  in 
fundamental  human  rights,  in  the  dignity  and 
worth  of  the  human  ]3erson,  in  the  equal  rights  of 
men  and  women  and  of  nations  large  and  small." 
These  words  reflect  the  age-old  desire  of  men  to  be 
free,  to  tliink  and  worship  as  they  please,  and  to 
speak  and  write  as  they  choose.  These  words  re- 
flect man's  desire  to  escape  from  the  tyranny  of 
other  men,  to  live  witliout  fear  of  the  secret  police, 
witliout  fear  of  the  unjust  trial — without  fear  of 
tlie  arbitrary  death  sentence  or  the  concentration 
camp.  These  words  are  but  the  latest  rendering 
of  tlie  historic  yearnings  that  have  made  men 
work,  and  fight,  and  die  that  they  and  their  fellow 
iiiiMi  might  know  freedom  and  justice. 

Much  has  been  done  since  the  San  Francisco  con- 
ference 8  years  ago  to  translate  these  words  of  the 
Preamble  and  the  later  provisions  of  the  charter 
into  action.  The  General  Assembly,  the  Eco- 
nomic and  Social  Council,  and  the  Commission  on 
Human  Rights  have  all  sought  to  define  general 
principles,  to  establish  criteria  of  conduct,  and  to 
expose  wholesale  violations  of  the  rights  of  man. 
The  Universal  Declaration  of  Human  Rights  is 
rlie  greatest  single  achievement  of  the  United  Na- 
tions in  the  promotion  of  human  freedom.  Presi- 
<lcnt  Eisenhower  said  in  the  message  to  the  Com- 
mission which  I  read  at  the  beginning  of  this 
session : 

For  the  people  of  tlie  United  States,  as  well  as  for  people 
everywhere,  the  U.N.  Universal  Declaration  of  Human 
Rights  is  a  signitieant  beacon  in  the  stead.v  inarch  toward 
achieving  human  rights  and  fundamental  freedoms  for  all. 

It  is  the  earnest  hope  of  the  U.S.  Government 
June   75,   1953 


that  the  Commission  on  Human  Rights  will  con- 
tinue to  move  steadily  forward  toward  finding 
ways  to  give  practical  expression  to  the  goals  and 
standards  set  forth  in  the  Universal  Declaration. 
For  the  past  several  years,  the  Commission  has 
been  preoccupied  in  the  drafting  of  covenants  on 
Human  Rights.  This  arduous  effort  to  translate 
the  moral  precepts  of  the  Universal  Declaration 
into  the  legal  pre-scripts  of  the  covenants  is  Hear- 
ing conii3letion,  thanks  to  the  devotion  and  per- 
severance of  the  members  of  this  Commission. 
Henceforth  the  Commission  will  be  freer  than  in 
the  past  to  devise  other  methods  for  insuring  the 
enjoyment  of  human  rights  and  human  freedoms. 

I  do  not  for  one  moment  wish  to  question  the 
Commission's  preoccupation  with  the  responsibil- 
ity of  drafting  the  covenants  or  to  belittle  in  any 
way  the  work  that  has  been  accomplished  in  this 
field.  I  merely  wish  to  point  out  that,  of  all  the 
functional  and  regional  commissions  established 
by  the  Economic  and  Social  Coimcil,  this  Com- 
mission is  tlie  only  one  that  has  been  limited  al- 
most entirely  to  the  drafting  of  international 
instruments.  The  time  has  come,  I  believe,  for 
this  Commission,  now  that  the  completion  of  the 
covenants  is  in  sight,  to  turn  its  attention,  like  the 
Social  Commission  and  other  Commissions,  to  the 
practical  problems  of  helping  all  governments 
and  peoples  to  move  ahead  in  the  advancement  of 
their  well-being. 

The  task  of  devising  new  methods  in  the  field 
of  human  rights  is  not  an  easy  one.  There  are 
many  possible  methods,  some  of  which  might  be 
practicable  and  some  of  which  might  prove  to  be 
fruitless.  It  is  with  a  view  to  helping  the  Com- 
mission to  develop  some  new  action  programs  that 
the  U.S.  delegation  is  introducing  today  these 
three  draft  resolutions  concerning  the  future  work 
of  the  Commission. 

A  New  Approach 

Before  explaining  each  of  the  three  draft  reso- 
lutions, I  should  like  to  make  a  few  general  ob- 
servations about  the  nature  of  the  new  action 
program  proposed  by  the  U.S.  delegation. 

First,  I  must  admit  that  these  three  proposals 
are  not  entirely  new  in  concept.  The  Commission 
has  had  similar  items  on  its  agenda,  but  it  has 
never  had  time  to  consider  tliem  thoroughly.  The 
former  Secretary-General,  in  his  Twenty- Year 
Program,  proj^osed  many  similar  ideas;  but,  again, 
the  Commission  lacked  the  time  to  explore  them. 
Both  governments  and  nongovernmental  organi- 
zations have  from  time  to  time  suggested  plans 
for  action  in  the  field  of  human  rights.  The  major 
purpose  of  the  U.S.  proposal  is  to  assemble  the 
most  practical  of  all  these  many  ideas  and  plans, 
together  with  several  new  procedural  devices,  into 
a  single  unified  program — a  program  that  offers 
the  best  hope  of  early  results. 


843 


Second,  these  draft  resolutions  are  merely  an 
outline  of  an  action  program — skeletons  on  which 
flesh  and  blood  are  still  to  be  added.  There  are 
still  many  technical  problems  yet  to  be  clarified. 
It  is  our  hope  that  the  Commission  at  this  session 
will  bring  these  skeleton  outlines  to  life. 

Third,  this  action  program — an  action  program 
in  three  parts — is,  quite  frankly,  experimental  in 
character.  This  program  would  take  the  Commis- 
sion into  new  fields  of  activity  and  would  present 
it  with  new  problems,  and  perhaps  even  with  new 
difficulties.  For  this  reason  our  delegation  has 
tried  to  limit  this  experiment  to  a  few  simple  and 
relatively  modest  proposals  that  show  real  promise 
of  success. 

Fourth,  these  three  proposals  do  not  by  any 
means  exhaust  the  possibilities  for  action  by  the 
Commission.  There  may  well  be  many  other  pro- 
grams which  could  be  used  to  supplement  the 
initial  proposals  submitted  by  our  delegations. 

Fifth,  the  initiation  of  this  action  program 
would  help  return  the  Commission  to  the  broad 
and  constructive  work  for  which  it  was  originally 
intended.  Because  the  Commission  has  been  pre- 
occupied with  the  drafting  of  the  covenants,  many 
of  the  activities  with  which  it  could  otherwise 
have  been  concerned — such  as  freedom  of  infor- 
mation, forced  labor,  slavery,  and  prisoners  of 
war — have  had  to  be  performed  by  other,  ad  hoc 
bodies. 

The  three  proposals  which  are  before  the  Com- 
mission are  thus  a  distillation  of  ideas  and  pro- 
posals from  many  different  sources.  They  are  an 
outline  of  a  new  approach  to  human  rights.  They 
are  an  experiment  in  new  ways  to  secure  and  safe- 
guard liberty,  and  a  mere  beginning  in  a  new  and 
broad  field  of  activity.  In  preparing  these  three 
draft  resolutions,  the  U.S.  delegation  has  consulted 
privately  with  other  delegations,  with  the  Secre- 
tariat, with  several  of  the  specialized  agencies, 
and  with  the  nongovernmental  organizations. 
These  preliminary  conversations  have  been  most 
helpful  in  clarifying  and  amplifying  the  general 
proposals  which  I  outlined  briefly  in  my  opening 
statement  at  this  session.  The  draft  resolutions 
before  you  incorporate  many  of  the  comments  and 
suggestions  we  have  received,  but  they  do  not  in- 
clude many  of  the  minor  details  that  may  be  re- 
quired as  the  program  develops.  I  invite  whatever 
further  suggestions  you  may  have. 

Preparation  of  Annual  Reports 

The  first  of  the  draft  resolutions  (doc.  E/CN'.4/ 
L.266)  proposes  a  new  program  for  annual  re- 
ports on  developments  in  the  field  of  human  rights. 
It  is  the  view  of  our  delegation  that,  if  the  Com- 
mission is  to  undertake  any  important  activities 
in  addition  to  the  drafting  of  the  covenants,  it 
must  have  adequate  information  on  which  to  base 
its  consideration  of  the  problems  of  human  rights. 
Much  of  that  information  is  now  available  in  one 


form  or  another,  especially  in  tlie  Yearbook  on 
Human  Rights.  What  is  now  required  is  an  an- 
nual review  of  the  major  developments,  the  prin- 
cipal achievements,  and  the  general  progress 
which  is  being  made  toward  attaining  the  goals 
set  forth  in  tlie  Universal  Declaration  of  Human 
Rights.  What  is  needed  is  an  examination  by 
each  member  government  of  its  own  shortcomings 
and,  more  important,  its  progress  toward  remedy- 
ing them.  Periodic  self-examination  is  good  for 
an  individual;  it  is  equally  good  for  a  govern- 
ment. The  annual  reports  which  we  are  pro- 
posing would  be  an  experiment  in  national  self- 
examination. 

Some  representatives  have  pointed  out  to  our 
delegation  that  this  request  for  yet  another  report 
might  place  an  excessive  burden  upon  govern- 
ments that  are  already  overburdened  with  pre- 
paring reports  to  the  United  Nations  and  the 
specialized  agencies.  But  what  we  envisage  is 
not  another  long  detailed  report  containing  masses 
of  statistics  that  would  tax  the  resources  of  our 
governments  and  the  patience  of  our  civil  servants. 
No,  what  we  envisage  is  a  relatively  brief  sum- 
mary of  developments  and  accomplishments,  high- 
lighting those  events  of  the  year  that  warrant  the 
attention  of  the  Commission.  The  Commission 
would  be  interested,  I  believe,  in  information  con- 
cerning the  enactment  of  a  new  bill  of  rights,  the 
repeal  of  a  repressive  law,  the  elimination  of  some 
form  of  discrimination,  or  the  development  of 
new  measures  or  agencies  for  protecting  the  civil 
rights  of  the  citizen.  A  short  but  precise  sum- 
mary of  developments  of  this  kind  would  be  pref- 
erable to  two  or  three  hundred  pages  of  statistics 
and  footnotes.  Such  a  report  could  summarize 
or  refer  to  more  detailed  reports  on  special  sub- 
jects that  had  been  transmitted  to  other  organs  of 
the  United  Nations  or  to  the  specialized  agencies. 
The  report  would  give  primary  attention  to  the 
specific  aspect  of  human  rights  selected  for  study 
in  accordance  with  the  second  proposal  I  shall 
place  before  you. 

Our  draft  resolution  proposes  that  each  mem- 
ber government  establish  a  national  advisory  com- 
mittee, composed  of  experienced  and  competent 
persons,  to  assist  the  Government  in  the  prepara- 
tion of  the  annual  report.  The  purpose  of  this 
provision  is  to  enable  a  government  to  supple- 
ment the  data  and  to  check  the  judgment  of  its 
own  officials  with  the  independent  data  and  judg- 
ment of  responsible  private  citizens.  Tliese  citi- 
zens might  be  representatives  of,  or  be  in  close 
touch  with,  national  nongovernmental  organiza- 
tions. 

So  far  as  the  United  States  is  concerned,  we 
would  envisage  a  small  advisory  committee,  per- 
haps of  8  or  10  outstanding  citizens,  who  would 
be  appointed  by  the  Secretary  of  State.  This  ad- 
visory committee  would  assist  the  Department  of 
State  and  other  Departments  and  Agencies  of  our 
Government  in  the  preparation  and  review  of  the 


844 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


i  report.  Tlie  Secretary  of  State  would  be  respon- 
sible for  tbe  final  text  of  the  annual  report,  but 
he  would  have  had  the  benefit  of  the  advice  of  a 
number  of  experienced  and  responsible  American 
citizens. 

'I  The  use  hj  our  Government  of  advisory  com- 
mittees of  this  nature  has  been  highly  successful 
in  many  different  fields  of  activity.  In  our  pre- 
liminary conversations,  our  delegation  has  received 
one  or  two  suggestions  that  this  technique  may 
perhaps  not  be  suitable  to  other  governments  and 
might  not  be  productive  of  good  results.  This  is 
one  of  the  many  points  on  which  I  solicit  the  com- 
ments of  other  Commission  members. 

The  objective  of  this  first  proposal  is  not  to 
create  a  system  of  reporting  merely  for  the  sake 
of  reporting  or  for  the  sake  of  filing  the  reports 
away  in  some  inaccessible  file  cabinet.     The  objec- 

itive  is  to  enable  the  Commission  each  year  to 

I  review  the  state  of  observance  of  human  rights 
in  the  world.  Each  year  the  Economic  and  Social 
Council  reviews  the  economic  state  of  the  world ; 
each  year  the  Social  Commission  reviews  the  social 
state  of  the  world.  Our  proposal  would  enable 
this  Commission  to  make  an  annual  review  of 
human  rights  with  special  emphasis  on  some  spe- 
cific aspects  of  human  rights,  as  we  propose  in  our 
second  draft  resolution. 

Specific  Studies  Proposed 

The  second  draft  resolution  before  the  Commis- 
sion today  (doc.  E/CN.4/L.268)  proposes  that  the 
Commission  initiate  a  series  of  studies  of  specific 
aspects  of  human  rights  on  a  worldwide  basis, 
i  We  consider  that  it  would  not  be  sufficient  for  the 
Commission  merely  to  undertake  each  year  a  gen- 
eral debate  on  the  whole  field  of  human  rights, 
,  valuable  and  novel  though  this  would  be.     We 
I  consider  that  each  year  the  Commission  ought,  in 
addition,  to  pay  special  attention  to  one  specific 
subject  and  endeavor  to  discover  just  how  well  the 
world  is  observing  and  respecting  that  particular 
right. 

The  particular  right  which  the  Commission 
might  study  next  year  is  of  less  importance  to 
our  delegation  than  the  establishment  of  the  pro- 
gram itself.  The  Commission  might  decide  to 
take  up  each  article  of  the  Universal  Declaration, 
one  after  another,  and  thus  embark  upon  a  25- 
year  plan.  It  might  be  more  useful,  in  our 
opinion,  for  the  Commission  to  begin,  on  an  ex- 
perimental basis,  with  some  specific  civil  or  politi- 
cal right  that  is  fairly  widely  observed  and  is  not 
involved  in  political  controversy.  The  studies 
should  not  include  topics  which  already  are  under 
consideration  by  some  other  organ  of  the  United 
Nations  or  by  one  of  the  specialized  agencies.  For 
example,  as  its  first  subject,  the  Commission  might 
select  freedom  of  conscience  and  religion,  the 
right  to  a  fair  trial,  or  freedom  from  arbitrary 
arrest  and  detention,  or  some  other  civil  and  polit- 


ical right  which  has  not  been,  or  is  not  being,  con- 
sidered elsewhere.  These  are  merely  suggestions, 
and  other  representatives  may  wish  to  suggest 
other  subjects. 

It  is  our  thought  that  the  Commission  would  re- 
quire special  assistance  to  do  this  kind  of  job  well. 
In  my  opening  statement,  I  had  suggested  that 
the  Commission  might  appoint  a  rapporteur  for 
this  purpose.  This  was  based  on  the  long  ex- 
perience of  the  League  of  Nations  and  the  more 
recent  experiment  of  the  Economic  and  Social 
Council  in  appointing  a  rapporteur  to  study  the 
subject  of  freedom  of  information.  After  further 
consideration,  and  after  consultation  with  other 
representatives  of  governments  and  organizations, 
our  delegation  concluded  that  it  might  be  prefer- 
able to  describe  the  person  who  would  conduct 
this  study  in  a  somewhat  different  way  and  to 
provide  for  the  appointment  by  the  Secretary- 
General  of  an  expert  adviser  for  each  study 
selected  by  the  Commission.  This  expert  adviser 
would  be  a  person  of  high  moral  standing  and  of 
recognized  competence  in  the  particular  subject 
selected — a  person  whose  professional  ability  and 
whose  objectivity  would  be  beyond  question. 
These  are  necessarily  high  qualifications  but  I 
feel  confident  that  in  every  region  of  the  world 
there  are  persons — scholars,  jurists,  statesmen — 
who  could  prepare  a  report  such  as  we  envisage  on 
some  particular  subject  and  later  assist  the  Com- 
mission in  its  consideration  of  the  report. 

The  U.S.  delegation  proposes  that  the  expert 
adviser  on  each  subject  should  have  access  to 
a  wide  variety  of  information.  This  informa- 
tion would  include  information  transmitted  to  the 
United  Nations  by  member  states,  information 
published  by  the  specialized  agencies,  information 
made  available  by  nongovernmental  organiza- 
tions, and  all  other  information  in  the  possession 
of  the  Secretary-General,  including  communica- 
tions received  by  the  United  Nations  concerning 
human  rights. 

The  U.S.  delegation  recognizes  that  it  is  making 
a  novel  and  significant  proposal  in  suggesting  that 
the  expert  adviser  should  have  access  to  communi- 
cations received  by  the  United  Nations.  Our 
delegation  suggeststhat  the  expert  adviser  should 
use  these  communications  only  as  part  of  the  mass 
of  raw  material  which  will  be  available  for  his 
study.  Using  the  techniques  of  the  scholar,  he 
would  appraise  the  communications  received  on  a 
particular  subject  against  all  the  other  informa- 
tion at  his  disposal.  He  would  not,  of  course, 
undertake  to  review  any  particular  case  or  report 
on  it  to  the  Commission.  He  would  take  account 
of  only  the  communications  of  a  responsible  char- 
acter, disregarding  those  which  were  obviously  of 
purely  propaganda  nature,  or  which  were  written 
to  serve  some  unique  personal  interest  of  its  author. 
It  is  our  thought  that  the  expert  adviser,  after 
studying  all  this  wide  variety  of  material,  start- 
ing with  the  vast  collection  already  available  in 


June  75,  1953 


845 


the  Yearbook  on  Human  Rights  and  working  his 
way  through  official  reports  and  private  com- 
numications,  would  present  the  Commission  with 
a  digest  of  his  findings.  This  would  be  a  personal 
report  made  on  his  own  responsibility,  as  a  spe- 
cialist, for  which  neither  the  United  Nations  nor 
any  member  government  would  have  official  re- 
sponsibility. The  Commission  would  then  discuss 
the  report  and  perhaps  formulate  some  general 
conclusions  upon  it. 

In  our  view,  neither  the  expert  adviser  nor  the 
Commission  would  try  to  find  fault  with  indi- 
vidual countries  nor  try  to  condemn  individual 
countries  for  their  shortcomings.  We  hope  that 
the  discussion  of  the  reports  will  not  degenerate 
into  mutual  recriminations.  Their  purpose, 
rather,  will  be — through  the  influence  of  publicity 
and  public  opinion — to  stimulate  and  induce  im- 
provement by  each  country.  The  emphasis  should 
be  on  progress  and  on  measures  needed  to  advance 
progress,  not  on  errors  of  omission  and  commis- 
sion. 


Establishment  of  Advisory  Services 

The  third  draft  resolution  (doc.  E/CN.4/L.267/ 
Rev.  1)  proposes  advisory  services  in  the  field  of 
human  rights.  This  draft  resolution  requires  less 
explanation  on  my  part,  because  it  proposes  the 
kind  of  technical  assistance  and  advisory  services 
that  are  already  familiar  to  all  the  members  of 
this  Commission.  In  our  view,  the  regular  tech- 
nical-assistance program  of  the  United  Nations 
in  the  field  of  public  administration  and  the 
social-welfare  advisoi-y  services  should  be  used  as 
models  for  this  new  and  closely  related  program 
of  advisory  services  in  the  field  of  human  rights. 
This  program  would  build  upon  those  already 
suggested  by  the  General  Assembly  in  the  field 
of  freedom  of  information,  by  our  Sub-Commis- 
sion in  the  field  of  discrimination,  and  more  re- 
cently by  the  Commission  on  the  Status  of  Women. 

Advisory  ser\aces  can  take  several  forms.  A 
country  needing  help  can  ask  for  the  services  of  an 
expert  or  team  of  experts  for  a  specific  job.  The 
job  might  be  to  draft  laws  to  assure  a  free  press, 
or  to  protect  the  interests  of  minority  groups.  Or 
the  job  rnight  be  to  outline  ways  to  bring  newly 
enfranchised  women  to  take  a  more  active  part  in 
national  and  community  affairs. 

Some  countries  will  need  help  in  training  young 
]>eople  seeking  careers  in  the  human-rights  field. 
If  the  professional  training  is  not  available  in 
their  own  country,  the  United  Nations  can  help 
provide  for  study  abroad  through  scholarships 
and  fellowships. 

Still  another  useful  advisory  service  is  the  inter- 
national seminar.  Under  U.N.  auspices,  experts 
of  a  region  can  be  brought  together  to  exchange 
ideas,  report  on  progress,  and  help  each  other  in 
dealing  with  common  problems. 

The  U.S.  Government  considers  that  respect  for 


and  observance  of  human  rights  can  best  be  ad- 
vanced through  the  processes  of  discussion,  per- 
suasion, education,  and  exchange  of  information. 
The  progi-ess  already  made  by  the  United  Nations 
and  the  specialized  agencies  \n  the  use  of  techni- 
cal assistance  and  advisory  services  in  promoting 
economic  and  social  development  gives  vitality 
to  these  international  organizations  and  hope  to 
millions  of  persons  throughout  the  world.  Our 
proposal  would  merely  extend  these  techniques  to 
the  whole  field  of  human  rights.  It  would  merely 
apply  these  proven  techniques  to  a  wider  variety 
of  subjects. 

These  activities  could  not  and  should  not  be  car- 
ried on  solely  by  the  United  Nations.  They  should 
be  supplemented  by  similar  activities  by  non- 
governmental agencies.  For  this  reason,  our 
draft  resolution  concludes  by  urging  international 
and  national  nongovernmental  organizations,  uni-  ' 
versities,  philanthropic  organizations,  and  other 
private  groups  to  supplement  this  U.N.  program 
with  similar  programs  designed  to  further  the 
exchange  of  information  and  assistance  in  the  field  i 
of  human  rights.  J 

There  is  one  problem,  common  to  all  three  of 
our  draft  resolutions,  that  deserves  careful  con- 
sideration by  the  Commission — that  is,  the  rela- 
tion of  these  three  proposals  and,  indeed,  of  any 
similar  programs  initiated  by  the  Conmiission, 
to  the  work  already  being  undertaken  by  other 
organs  of  the  United  Nations  and  by  the  special- 
ized agencies.  It  is  essential,  of  course,  that  there 
be  a  minimum  of  duplication  of  effort  by  these 
various  bodies.  Our  delegation  has  tried  to  avoid 
any  such  duplication.  It  may  well  be,  however, 
that  we  have  not  yet  been  entirely  successful  in  this  'i 
regard  and  we  should  welcome  "the  suggestions  of 
other  representatives,  the  Secretariat,  and  the  spe- 
cialized agencies  on  this  important  and  difficult  j 
jDoint.  \ 

Mr.  Chairman,  I  should  like  to  conclude  with 
the  general  observation  that  these  draft  resolutions 
are  submitted  by  our  delegation  as  the  basis  for  ii 
a  constructive  program  for  the  future  of  this  Com- 
mission. These  draft  resolutions  are  necessarily 
tentative  and  incomplete  in  scope.  They  are  de- 
signed to  serve  as  a  basis  of  discussion  and  as  an 
outline  of  what,  in  our  judgment,  the  Commission 
should  do  in  the  future  to  advance  the  cause  of 
liberty  to  which  its  members  are  devoted.  Our  | 
delegation  now  places  these  draft  resolutions  be- 
fore the  Commission  for  its  consideration.  I 
welcome  the  observations  of  other  representatives, 
of  the  Secretariat,  of  the  specialize4  agencies,  and 
of  the  nongovernmental  organizations^  and  I  shall 
gladly  attempt  to  revise  these  draft  resolutions  to 
accommodate  the  views  or  suggestions  here  ex- 
pressed, so  far  as  this  can  be  done  consistent  with 
the  underlying  purposes  of  these  resolutions. 

These  proposals  have  been  drawn  up  in  recogni- 
tion of  the  values  to  which  the  Secretary  of  State, 
John  Foster  Dulles,  referred  in  the  letter  which 


846 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


!ie  wrote  to  me  before  I  left  the  United  States  to 
ittend  this  session  of  the  Commission :  "The  vahie 
)f  briiig-inp  the  facts  to  the  light  of  day,  .  .  . 
he  value  of  common  discussion  of  problems  in  the 
,  nternational  forum  of  the  Commission  on  Human 
'Rights,  and  .  .  .  the  value  of  each  country 
Irawing  on  the  experience  of  other  countries  for 
inspiration  and  practical  guidance  in  solving  its 
3wn  problems."'  It  is  our  profound  hope  that 
these  draft  resolutions  will  help  to  enable  the 
Commission — and  the  world — to  move  forward 
toward  the  goals  laid  down  in  the  charter  and  in 
the  Universal  Declaration  of  Human  Eights.  We 
believe  that  this  three-point  program  can  be  ef- 
fective in  advancing  human  rights  in  our  time. 

TEXTS  OF  U.  S.  DRAFT  RESOLUTIONS! 
Draft  Resolution  on  Annual  Reports 

C.N.  doc.  E/CN.4/L.266 
Dated  May  7,  1933 

The  Commission  on  Human  Rights 

Recommends  that  the  Economic  and  Social  Council  re- 
quest the  General  Assembly  to  adopt  the  following 
resolution : 

'The  General  Assembly 

Considering  that  by  Articles  55  and  56  of  the  Charter 
the  Members  of  the  United  Nations  have  pledged  to  take 
joint  and  separate  action  to  promote  universal  respect  for, 
and  observance  of,  human  rights  and  fundamental  free- 
doms for  all  without  distinction  as  to  race,  sex,  language 
or  relirfon ; 

Considering  that  the  Universal  Declaration  of  Human 
Rights  sets  forth  the  goals  toward  which  all  Members  of 
the  United  Nations  should  strive  in  the  promotion  of 
human  rights  and  that  the  Declaration  has  inspired 
governments  and  peoples  in  the  writing  of  their  constitu- 
tions and  laws ; 

Desiring  to  advance  as  rapidly  as  possible  respect  for, 
and  observance  of,  human  rights  and  fundamental  free- 
doms and  to  stimulate  Member  Governments  to  press 
forwar<l  toward  attaining  the  goals  set  forth  in  the 
Universal  Declaration  of  Human  Rights ; 

Desiring  to  obtain  from  each  Member  of  the  United 
Nations  information  about  developments  and  achievements 
in  the  field  of  human  rights  in  its  country  and  measures 
taken  to  safeguard  human  liberty ;  and 

Bearing  in  7nind  the  special  responsibilities  of  other  or- 
gans of  the  United  Nations  and  of  the  Specialized  Agencies 
in  the  promotion  of  human  right.?, 

1.  Reeommends  that  each  Member  transmit  each  year  to 
the  Secretary-General  a  report  on  developments  and 
achievementsin  the  tield  of  human  rights  in  its  country  for 
consideration  by  the  Commission  on  Human  Rights,  such 
report 

(a)  to  summarize,  or  make  reference  to,  any  relevant 
portions  of  reports  already  submitted  to  another  organ 
of  the  United  Nations  or  to  a  Specialized  Agency ;  and 

(6)  to  give  primary  attention  to  the  specific  aspect  of 
human  rights  currently  selected  for  study  by  the  Com- 
mission in  accordance  with  Resolution ; 

2.  Recomtnends  that  each  Member  establish  a  national 
;  advisory  committee,  composed  of  experienced  and  compe- 


^  These  resolutions  have  lieen  forwarded  by  the  U.N. 
Commission  on  Human  Rights  to  the  Economic  and  Social 
Council  for  circulation  to  U.N.  member  governments  and 
specialized  a.cencies.  This  group  has  been  requested  to 
make  comment  on  the  resolutions  by  Oct.  1,  1953. 


tent  persons,  to  assist  its  Government  in  the  preparation 
of  its  annual  report ; 

3.  Requests  the  Secretary-General  to  prepare  a  brief 
summary  and  analysis  of  the  annual  reports  upon  a  topical 
basis : 

4.  Recommends  that  the  Economic  and  Social  Council 
request  the  Commission  on  Human  Rights  to  consider 
these  annual  reports  and  the  Secretary-General's  summary 
and  analysis  at  the  same  time  that  it  considers  the  studies 
submitted  by  the  Expert  Adviser  appointed  in  accordance 
with  Resolution  — ,  and  to  transmit  to  the  Economic  and 
Social  Council  such  comments  and  conclusions  thereon  as 
it  deems  appropriate ;  and 

5.  Recommends  that  the  Economic  and  Social  Council 
make  suitable  arrangements  with  the  Specialized  Agen- 
cies to  co-operate  in  carrying  out  this  resolution  and  to 
avoid  duplication  of  effort." 


Draft  Resolution  on  Specific  Aspects        < 
of  Human  Rights 

U.N.  doc.  E/CN.4/L.268 
Dated  May  T,  1953 

The  Commission  on  Human  Bights 

Desiring  to  strengthen  the  work  of  the  United  Nations 
for  wider  observance  of,  and  respect  for,  human  rights 
and  fundamental  freedoms  on  a  world-wide  basis ; 

Desiring  to  give  special  attention  in  future  sessions  to 
studies  of  specific  aspects  of  human  rights ;  and 

Desiring  to  obtain  for  its  consideration,  a  summary  and 
analysis  of  the  information  available  from  Member  States, 
tlie  .Specialized  Agencies,  Non-Government  Organizations, 
and  other  sources  on  specific  aspects  of  human  rights ; 

Bearing  in  mind  the  special  responsiliilities  of  the  Spe- 
cialized Agencies  as  regards  certain  human  rights ; 

1.  Decides  to  initiate  a  series  of  studies  of  specific  as- 
pects of  human  rights  on  a  world-wide  basis ; 

2.  Decides  that  at  each  session  the  Commission  shall 
select  a  specific  subject  or  specific  sub.iects  for  study,  pro- 
vided that  no  subject  shall  be  selected  which  is  under 
consideration  by  another  organ  of  the  United  Nations  or 
by  the  Specialized  Agencies. 

3.  Requests  the  Secretary-General  to  appoint  as  an  Ex- 
pert Adviser,  for  each  subject  selected  by  the  Commission 
for  study,  a  person  of  high  moral  standing  and  of  recog- 
nized competence  in  the  particular  subject,  who  shall 

(o)  prepare  the  study  in  his  own  name  and  under  his 
own  responsibility,  with  such  assistance  from  the  Secre- 
tariat as  he  may  require,  and 

(h)  assist  the  Commission  in  its  consideration  of  the 
study ; 

4.  Authorises  the  Expert  Advisers,  in  the  preparation 
of  their  studies,  to  have  access  to  the  following  sources  of 
information : 

(a)  information  transmitted  to  the  United  Nations  by 
Member  States ; 

( & )   information  published  by  the  Specialized  Agencies ; 

(c)  information  made  available  by  Non-Governmental 
Organizations  having  consultative  status  with  the  Eco- 
nomic and  Social  Council ;  and 

(d)  all  other  information  in  the  possession  of  the  Sec- 
retary-General, including  communications  received  by  the 
United  Nations  concerning  human  rights,  subject  to  para- 
graphs (a)  and  (b)  of  Resolution  75  (V)  of  the  Economic 
and  Social  Council,  as  amended,  concerning  the  identity 
of  communications ;  and 

5.  Recommends  that  the  Economic  and  Social  Council 

(a)  make  suitable  arrangements  with  the  Specialized 
Agencies  to  cooperate  in  carrying  out  tliis  resolution  and 
to  avoid  duplication  of  effort ;  and 


June   75,   1953 


847 


( 6 )  adopt  the  following  draft  resolution : 
"The  Economic  and  Social  Council 

1.  ApprovcH  the  decisions  of  the  Commission  on  Human 
Rights  concerning  the  initiation  of  studies  of  specific  as- 
pects of  human  rights ;  and 

2.  Amends  Resolution  75  (V),  as  amended,  to  authorize 
the  Expert  Advisers  to  have  access  to  the  communica- 
tions in  the  possession  of  the  Secretary-General  for  the 
purpose  of  taking  them  into  account  in  preparing  these 
studies." 


Draft  Resolution  on  Advisory  Services 

U.N.  doc.  E/CN,4/L.267/Eev.  1 
Dated  May  7,  1953 

The  Commission  on  Human  Rights 

Considering  that  by  Articles  5.5  and  56  of  the  United 
Nations  Charter  the  Members  of  the  United  Nations  have 
pledged  themselves  to  promote  universal  respect  for,  and 
observance  of,  human  rights  and  fundamental  freedoms 
for  all  without  distinction  as  to  race,  sex,  language,  or 
religion ; 

Recognizing  that  advisory  services,  by  the  international 
interchange  of  technical  knowledge  through  international 
co-operation  among  countries,  represents  an  effective 
means  for  the  promotion  of  the  human  rights  objectives 
of  the  United  Nations  Charter  and  the  Universal  Declara- 
tion of  Human  Rights ; 

Taking  note  of  Resolution  633  (VII)  of  the  General 
Assembly  which  requests  the  Secretary-General  to  elab- 
orate a  programme  of  action  for  the  development  of 
domestic  information  in  under-developed  countries  ; 

Taking  note  of  the  proposals  on  technical  assistance 
made  by  the  Sub-Commission  on  the  Prevention  of  Dis- 
crimination and  the  Protection  of  Minorities  (E/CN.4/670, 
Annex  I,  Resolution  K)  and  the  Commission  on  the  Status 
of  Women  (E/CN.6/L.106/Rev.l)  ;  and 

Taking  account  of  the  arrangements  previously  estab- 
lished by  the  General  Assembly  concerning  the  regular 
technical  assistance  programme  and  the  advisory  services 
of  the  United  Nations  (Resolutions  200  (III),  305  (IV), 
and  418  (V) )  ; 

Considering  that  the  Specialized  Agencies,  within  their 
competence  and  by  virtue  of  their  regular  programmes 
and  their  special  programmes  of  technical  assistance,  are 
already  rendering  important  services  to  their  Members 
with  a  view  to  ensuring  the  effective  observance  of  human 
rights; 

Recommends  that  the  Economic  and  Social  Council  re- 
quest the  General  Assembly  to  adopt  the  following 
resolutions : 

"The  General  Assembly 

A.  Authorizes  the  Secretary-General : 

1.  Subject  to  the  directions  of  the  Economic  and  Social 
Council,  to  make  provision  for  the  following  services,  with 
the  co-operation  of  the  Specialized  Agencies  where  appro- 
priate and  without  duplication  of  their  existing  services, 
and  in  consultation  with  non-governmental  organizations 
having  consultative  status,  the  subjects  listed  in  para- 
graph E  below : 

(o)  To  appoint  experts  to  provide  advisory  services  at 
the  request  of  Governments  which  show  the  need  for 
them ; 

(&)  To  enable  suitably  qualified  persons  to  observe,  and 
familiarize  themselves  with,  the  experience  and  prac- 
tice of  other  countries ; 

(c)  To  enable  suitably  qualified  persons  who  cannot  re- 
ceive professional  training  in  their  country  to  receive 
appropriate  training  in  foreign  countries  having  the 
necessary  facilities  for  such  training;  and 

848 


(d)  To  plan  and  conduct  seminars;  and 

2.  To  include  in  his  budgetary  estimates  of  the  United 
Nations  the  sums  necessary  for  carrying  out  an  effective 
operational  programme  based  on  the  provision  of  the 
above  services ; 

B.  Requests  the  Secretary-General  to  undertake  the 
performance  of  the  services  as  provided  in  A.l  above  In 
agreement  with  the  Governments  concerned,  on  the  basis 
of  requests  received  from  Governments  and  in  accordance 
with  the  following  policies: 

1.  Tlie  kind  of  service  to  be  rendered  to  each  cuuntry 
under  A.l  (a)  shall  be  acceptable  to  the  Government 
concerned  and  shall  be  determined  in  consultation  with 
that  Government ; 

2.  The  selection  of  the  persons  under  A.l  (b)  and  (c) 
shall  be  made  by  the  Secretary-General  on  the  basis  o( 
proposals  received  from  Governments,  which  shall  indi- 
cate their  preferences  with  regard  to  host  countries 
and  shall  be  acceptable  to  the  host  countries;  and 

3.  The  amount  of  services  and  the  conditions  under 
which  they  are  to  be  rendered  shall  be  decided  by  the 
Secretary-General  with  due  regard  to  the  greater  needs 
of  the  under-developed  areas  and  in  conformity  with  the 
principle  that  each  requesting  Government  shall  be  ex- 
pected to  assume  responsibility,  as  far  as  possible  for 
all  or  a  considerable  part  of  the  expenses  connected  with 
the  services  furnished  to  it,  either  by  making  a  contribu- 
tion in  cash,  or  in  the  form  of  services  for  the  purposes  of 
the  programme  being  carried  out ; 

C.  Requests  the  Secretary-General  to  report  regularly 
to  the  Commission  on  Human  Rights  and  as  appropriate 
to  the  Commission  on  the  Status  of  Women  on  the 
measures  which  he  takes  in  compliance  with  the  terms  of 
this  re.solution,  and  to  request  these  Commissions  to  for- 
mulate recommendations  from  time  to  time  concerning  the 
continued  action  required  to  carry  on  these  advisory 
services ; 

D.  Recommends  that  the  Specialized  Agencies  continue 
to  develop  their  technical  assistance  services  with  a 
view  to  aiding  Members  to  assure  the  effective  observance 
of  human  rights ; 

E.  Selects  the  following  as  subjects  to  which  the  above 
advisory  services  would  be  applicable : 

(a)  Improvement  of  administrative  and  judicial  nro- 
cedures : 

(6)  Establishment  and  improvement  of  techniques  of 
mass  information  media,  including  such  facilities  as  news 
agencies ; 

(c)  Prerequisites  for  increased  participation  in  gov- 
ernment, including  voting  and  public  otBce; 

(d)  Increased  participation  in  national  and  community 
CIVIC  affairs,  especially  for  women  recently  granted  the 
vote; 

(e)  Abolishing  slavery  and  institutions  and  practices 
akin  thereto ; 

(/)  Legislative  and  other  measures  for  the  prevention 
of  discrimination  and  the  protection  of  minorities;  and 

(g)  Establishment  of  non-governmental  and  govern- 
mental bodies  for  the  protection  of  civil  rights ; 

F.  Invites  the  Specialized  Agencies  to  communicate  to 
the  Economic  and  Social  Council,  for  transmission  to  the 
Commission  on  Human  Rights,  any  observations  which 
they  might  find  appropriate  on  the  above  services  and  on 
any  new  measures  of  assistance  which  they  may  deem 
necessary  with  a  view  to  assisting  Members  in  ensuring 
the  effective  observance  of  human  rights ;  and 

G.  Urges  international  and  national  non-governmental 
organizations,  universities,  philanthropic  foundations,  and 
other  private  groups  to  supplement  this  United  Nations 
programme  with  similar  programmes  designed  to  further 
research  and  studies,  the  exchange  of  information,  and 
assistance  in  the  field  of  human  rights." 

Department  of  State   Bulletin 


leorganization  of  Foreign  Aid  and  Information  Programs 


I  The  President  011  June  1  suhmitted  to  the  Con- 
gress plans  for  the  reorganization  of  various 
'•oreian-aid  function  and  agencies  and  of  foreign- 
nformation  functions.  Under  the  Reorganization 
\ct  of  19^9,  these  plans  will  go  into  effect  auto- 
\mtically  after  60  days,  unless  the  Congress  mean- 
\oUle  takes  action  to  reject  them.  The  Congress 
hould  put  the  plaris  into  effect  earlier  by  passing  a 
\'esolution  of  approval.  ,      .         ,        ^ 

,  On  June  1  the  President  also  issued  an  txecu- 
dve  order  providing  for  the  immediate  transfer 
'.0  the  Director  for  Mutual  Security  of  the  Tech- 
iiical  Cooperation  Administration  and  certain 
other  functions  relating  to  foreign  aid.  ^ 
'  Following  are  the  texts  of  the  Presidents  mes- 
\nge  stating  his  reasons  for  proposing  the_  two 
^reorganization  plans,  the  messages  transniittmg 
the  plans,  the  Executive  order  providing  for  the 
transfer  of  the  Technical  Cooperation  Admmis- 
\tration,  and  a  letter  from  the  President  to  depart- 
^.ment  and  agency  heads. 

MESSAGE  TO  THE  CONGRESS' 

I  The  history  of  recent  decades  has  brought  a  pro- 
found and  irrevocable  change  in  the  role  of  our 
I  Nation  in  world  affairs.  We  have  assumed  a  po- 
'  sition  of  leadership  among  the  free  nations  of  the 
,  world  in  our  united  quest  of  a  just  and  lasting 
peace.  No  national  ambition,  no  selfish  desire, 
:  but  the  sheer  force  of  circumstance— the  compel- 
'  Ung  need  of  freedom's  cause— has  brought  us  to 
I  this  position  and  this  responsibility. 

To  meet  this  responsibility,  our  Nation  today  is 
I  dedicated  to  international  action  m  concert  with 
I  other  nations— through  the  United  Nations  arid 
in  regional  arrangements  with  other  nations  tor 
collective  security,  for  economic  and  social  co- 
I  operation,   designed  to  foster   a   community   ot 
I  world  law.     We  have  come  to  know  that  national 
I  security  entails  mutual  security  with  other  free 
[  nations.    And  we  have  come  to  know  that  their 
'   freedom,    in    turn,    depends    heavily    upon    our 
{   strength  and  the  wisdom  with  which  we  use  it. 
To  meet  the  challenge  of  this  responsibility  ef- 
fectively—to convert  earnest  intent  into  construc- 

'      '  H.  doc.  156. 
June   ?5,   1953 


tive  fact— we  must  achieve  the  most  efficient  and 
cohesive  possible  organization  for  the  conduct  ot 
our  foreign  affairs.  Slackness,  confusion,  blurred 
authority  and  clouded  responsibility— any  ot  these 
can  defeat  the  noblest  purposes  of  any  foreign 

^°Our"  organization  for  the  conduct  of  foreign  af- 
fairs has  been  built  upon  a  patchwork  of  statutes 
which  needs  careful  restudy  as  a  basis  tor  new 
legislation.  The  development  of  new  legislation 
will  take  time.  By  early  next  year  we  will  be  pre- 
pared, with  appropriate  consultation  with  the 
Congress,  to  recommend  such  legislation,  in  the 
meantime  we  must  improve  the  present  arrange- 
ments within  the  framework  of  existing  legis- 
lation. „     ,  ,. 

To  date,  the  organization  of  the  executive 
branch  for  foreign  affairs  has  been  deficient  m  two 
maior  respects.  First:  there  has  been  no  clear 
assignment  of  central  responsibility  for  foreign 
policy  below  the  President.  Second:  a  number 
of  progi'ams  which  implement  our  foreign  policy 
have  been  scattered  within  the  executive  branch 
rather  than  being  grouped  together  for  the  most 
efficient  and  economical  administration. 

We  must  correct  these  deficiencies.  The  meas- 
ures proposed  are  directed  toward  that  ob]ective. 
The  consideration  of  new  legislation  will  open  up 
further  reorganization  possibilities. 

First  We  are  taking  the  necessary  steps  to 
confirm  the  historic  responsibility  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  State  as  the  agency  responsible  under  the 
President  for  the  development  and  control  ot  tor- 
ei<^n  policy  and  all  relations  with  foreign  govern- 
ments. Not  only  must  the  Department  of  State 
be  given  clear  authority  to  provide  guidance  on 
our  foreign  policies  to  all  other  agencies  ot  the 
Federal  Government;  it  is  equally  important  that 
each  Chief  of  Diplomatic  Mission  in  each  foreign 
country  provide  effective  coordination  of ,  and  f  or- 
ei<'n  policy  direction  with  respect  to,  all  United 
Stilt  es  Government  activities  in  the  country. 

Second.  We  must  bring  together  in  a  single 
organization  foreign  assistance  and  related  eco- 
nomic operations  now  dispersed  among  several 
ao-encies  of  the  executive  branch. 

''Third.  We  must  provide  a  new,  separate  or- 
ganization for  the  international  information  pro- 

849 


grams  now  adniiiiistei-ed  l>y  the  Department  of 
State  and  the  Mutual  Security  Agency. 

To  acliieve  the  organization  I  have  outlined  re- 
quires a  series  of  related  actions.  Accordingly,  I 
am  transmitting  to  the  Congress  today,  by  the  re- 
quired statutory  message  in  each  instance,  Reor- 
ganization Plans  Nos.  7  and  8  of  1953,  under  the 
Reorganization  Act  of  1949,  as  amended.  Those 
plans  take  many  of  the  necessary  steps.  I  am 
making  otlier  changes  by  executive  order.  I  am, 
in  addition,  setting  forth  in  a  letter  addressed  to 
department  and  agency  heads,  the  arrangements 
which  will  govern  relationships  among  executive 
branch  otiicials  in  the  conduct  of  our  international 
responsibilities. 

Reorganization  Plan  No.  7  has  as  its  major  pur- 
pose the  realignment  of  our  foreign  assistance  and 
related  economic  operations.  It  establishes  a  new 
Foreign  Operations  Administration  and  abolishes 
the  present  Mutual  Security  Agency  and  certain 
offices.  It  centers  in  the  head  of  the  new  Admin- 
istration the  functions  vested  in  the  Mutual  Se- 
curity Agency  and  the  Director  for  Mutual  Se- 
curity, including  the  Director's  functioiLs  uncler 
the  Mutual  Defense  Assistance  Control  Act. 

To  centralize  further  the  foreign  assistance  and 
related  economic  responsibilities  in  the  head  of  the 
new  Foreign  Operations  Administration,  I  am 
taking  certain  administrative  actions.  These  in- 
clude the  transfer  from  the  Secretary  of  State  to 
the  Director  of  the  Foreign  Operations  Admin- 
istration four  resj^onsibilities:  the  administration 
of  the  Act  for  International  Development ;  assist- 
ance to  private  foreign  relief  organizations;  pro- 
grams for  aiding  persons  who  have  escaped  from 
Connnunist  areas;  and  operating  functions  with 
respect  to  United  States  participation  in  the 
United  Nations  Technical  Assistance  Program, 
the  United  Nations  International  Children's 
Emergency  Fund,  the  United  Nations  Korean  Re- 
construction Agency,  and  the  Intergovernmental 
Committee  for  European  Migration.  These  ad- 
ministrative actions  also  inclucle  the  delegation  by 
the  President  to  the  Director  of  the  Foreign 
Operations  Administration  of  appropriate  respon- 
sibilities respecting  the  Palestine  refugee  program. 

The  new  Foreign  Operations  Administration 
will  have  as  its  direct  responsibility  two  major 
related  assistance  programs  which  previously  have 
been  separately  administered.  Both  the  Techni- 
cal Cooperation  Administration  in  the  Depart- 
ment of  State  and  the  INIutual  Security  Agency 
have  administered  technical  assistance  programs. 
At  the  very  least,  this  has  meant  some  duplication 
in  the  performance  of  certain  common  functions, 
including  the  recruitment  of  technicians  and  the 
formulation  of  general  policies.  It  has  made  dif- 
ficult the  achievement  of  a  balanced  progi-aming 
of  technical  assistance  on  a  world-wide  basis. 

The  transfer  of  the  Technical  Cooperation  Ad- 
ministration is  not  intended  to  modify  the  charac- 
ter of  the  United  States  technical  cooperatioi 


Department  off  State  Announcement ' 


SUBJECT:  President's  Reorganization  Actions 

1.  Oeneral: 

1.1  The  President  on  June  1  announced  reorgan- 
ization plans  for  foreign  aid  and  information 
operations  as  a  part  of  tlie  Administration's  pro- 
gram for  improving  tlie  conduct  of  our  foreign  rela- 
tions. Executive  Order  1U4.>S  of  June  1,  1953, 
transfers  to  the  Director  for  Mutual  Security 
responsibility  for  the  direction  and  supervision  of 
the  Technical  Cooperation  Administration.  Also 
delegated  to  the  Director  for  Mutual  Security  are 
certain  of  the  responsibilities  for  several  multi- 
lateral programs  in  which  the  United  States  partici- 
pates, including:  the  United  Xations  and  Organiza- 
tion of  American  States  teclmical  assistance  pro- 
grams, the  United  Nations  International  Children's 
Emergency  Fund,  the  United  Nations  Korean  Re- 
construction Agency,  and  the  Intergovernmental 
Conmiittee  for  European  Migrants.  Also  trans- 
ferred to  the  Director  for  Mutual  Security  are  the 
program  to  assist  Iron  Curtain  country  escapees 
and  the  activities  of  the  Voluntary  Foreign  Aid 
Staff. 

1.2  Under  Reorganization  Plan  No.  7  submitted 
June  1  to  the  Congress,  the  functions  of  tlie  Office 
of  the  Director  for  Mutual  Security,  the  Teclmical 
Cooperation  Administration,  and  the  Mutual  Se- 
curity Agency,  will  be  consolidated  in  a  new  Foreign 
Operations  Administration.  The  Institute  of  Inter- 
American  Affairs,  together  with  its  functions,  will 
also  be  transferred  to  the  Foreign  Operations  Ad- 
ministration under  tids  plan.  All  functions  vested 
in  the  Secretary  of  State  by  the  United  Nations 
Palestine  Refugee  Aid  Act  of  19.50  will  be  trans- 
ferred to  the  President. 

1.3  Under  Reorganization  Plan  No.  S  submitted 
June  1  to  the  Congress,  foreign  information  opera- 
tions would  be  consolidated  in  a  new  agency.  The 
Department  will  retain  responsibility  for  controlling 
a  program  under  which  official  statements  of  the 
United  States  position  on  major  issues,  specifically 
identified  as  such,  will  be  disseminated  on  a  world- 
wide basis.  The  educational  exchange  of  persons 
programs  will  also  be  retained  in  the  Department. 

1.5  These  plans  have  been  developed  by  the 
President  on  the  basis  of  intensive  study  by  com- 
mittees advising  him  and  with  full  participation  by 
the  departments  and  agencies  concerned.  One  of 
the  main  results  is  to  relieve  the  Secretary  of  State 
of  supervising  operating  programs,  freeing  his  time 
to  concentrate  on  the  important  problems  of  foreign 
policy.  The  reorganization  will  relieve  the  Depart- 
ment of  State  of  many  duties  extraneous  to  the 
main  foreign  policy  problems.  The  administrative 
burdens  falling  upon  the  Secretary  under  the  pres- 
ent arrangement  where  he  is  ultimately  held  respon- 
sible for  personnel,  budget,  regulations,  and  security 
of  operating  programs,  such  as  the  information 
program,  cannot  help  but  divert  him  and  his  princi- 
pal assistants  from  concentrating  on  the  primary 
role  of  the  Department. 


'  Excerpts  from  Department  Circular  No.  30  dated 
June  4.  Portions  not  printed  consist  of  a  quotation 
from  the  President's  message  stating  the  purposes 
of  the  reorganization  and  details  relating  to  the 
transfer  of  personnel. 


850 


Departmenf  of  S/ofe  Bullefin 


pioiiram  as  a  long-ranjje  effort  to  cooperate  with 
tlie  govermnents  and  peoples  of  other  countries 
in  tlevelopin<i  their  erononiies  and  raising  tlieir 
standards  of  living.  The  technical  cooperation 
program  will  be  carried  out  solely  in  furtherance 
of  the  purposes  of  the  Act  for  International  De- 
velopment. The  transfer  of  the  functions  vested 
in  the  President  by  the  Act  for  International  De- 
velopment includes  the  programs  under  that  act 
administered  by  the  Institute  of  Inter-American 
Affairs. 

The  new  Director  of  the  Foreign  Operations 
Administration  will  have  the  same  responsibilities 
as  his  predecessor  for  continuous  supervision,  gen- 
eral direction  and  coordination  of  all  foreign 
assistance  programs,  including  the  military  as- 
sistance responsibilities  vested  in  the  Secretary 
of  Defense. 

Reorganization  Plan  No.  7  of  1953  provides  for 
abolishing  the  offices  of  Special  Representative 
in  Europe  and  Deputy  Special  Representative  in 
Europe,  as  authorized  by  section  50-4  of  the  Mu- 
tual Security  Act  of  1951,  as  amended.  I  am 
establishing  a  new  United  States  mission  to  the 
North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization  and  Euro- 
pean regional  organizations.  The  chief  of  the 
mission  will  report  to  and  receive  instructions 
from  the  Secretary  of  State.  The  mission  will 
include  representatives  of  the  Secretary  of  De- 
fense, the  Secretary  of  the  Treasury  and  the  Di- 
rector of  the  Foreign  Operations  Administration. 

Reorganization  Plan  Xo.  8  establishes  a  new 
agency- — the  United  States  InfoiTnation  Agency- — 
for  the  conduct  of  our  information  programs. 
These  include,  with  certain  limited  exceptions, 
four  programs:  the  information  activities  now 
administered  by  the  International  Information 
Administration  of  the  Department  of  State;  the 
information  programs  financed  in  connection  with 
government  in  occupied  areas;  the  information 
program  of  the  Mutual  Security  Agency ;  and  the 
Technical  Cooperation  Administration  informa- 
tion program.  The  first  three  of  these  programs 
would  be  shifted  by  Reorganization  Plan  No.  8, 
while  the  last  would  be  reassigned  by  executive 
order. 

Various  arrangements  have  been  provided  in 
the  past  for  the  coordination  of  these  programs, 
but  the  placing  of  them  in  a  single  agency  seems 
the  one  sound  way  to  provide  real  unity  and 
greater  efficiency.  This  action,  moreover,  brings 
under  single  management  all  the  funds  to  be  ex- 
pended on  these  foreign  information  activities. 

These  information  activities  must,  of  course,  be 
subject  to  special  g-uidance  and  control  in  view  of 
their  direct  relation  to  the  conduct  of  foreign 
affairs  and  national  security  policy.  Therefore, 
Reorganization  Plan  No.  8  specifies  that  the  Secre- 
tary of  State  shall  provide  to  the  Director  of  the 
new  agency  on  a  current  basis  full  guidance  con- 
cerning the  foreign  policy  of  the  United  States. 
The  plan  also  specifies,  and  I  have  amplified  this 


in  my  letter  to  the  department  and  agency  heads, 
that  the  Secretary  of  State  shall  control  the  con- 
tent of  a  jirogram  setting  forth  official  United 
States'  positions  for  use  abroad.  The  program 
will  be  clearly  identified  as  such  by  an  exclusive 
descriptive  label.  I  have  likewise  instructed  that 
the  new  United  States  Information  Agency  shall 
report  to  the  President  through  the  National 
Security  Council  or  as  the  President  may  other- 
wise direct. 

In  administering  the  information  program  in 
the  Department  of  State,  the  Secretary  of  State 
has  relied  on  various  general  statutes  authorizing 
and  controlling  administrative  matters.  To  in- 
sure that  adequate  authority  may  be  vested  in  the 
new  Director,  Reorganization  Plan  No.  8  provides 
that  he  may,  in  carrying  out  his  functions,  exercise 
such  administrative  authorities  of  the  Secretary  of 
State  and  of  certain  other  officers  as  the  President 
may  specify. 

This  is  necessary  because  the  legislation  dealing 
with  the  information  programs  does  not  contain 
administrative  provisions.  For  example :  the  Di- 
rector of  the  new  United  States  Information 
Agency  will  need  personnel  authority.  I,  there- 
fore, plan  to  authorize  an  independent  personnel 
system  for  this  agency's  foreign  operations  under 
authority  of  the  last  subsection  of  section  2  of  Plan 
No.  8.  This  system  will  be  based  on  the  provisions 
of  the  Foreign  Service  Act  of  1946.  It  will  give 
authority  to  the  Director  to  appoint  personnel  and 
take  such  other  personnel  actions  as  are  necessary, 
thereby  relieving  the  Secretary  of  State  of  respon- 
sibility with  respect  to  personnel  actions.  Such 
personnel  would  receive  compensation,  allowances, 
and  other  benefits  applicable  to  Foreign  Service 
Reserve,  Staff,  and  alien  personnel.  It  is  not 
planned  to  extend  to  the  new  agency  any  authority 
with  respect  to  the  appointment  of  Foreign  Service 
Officers. 

Wliile  these  ai-rangements  will  enable  the  new 
agency  to  function  with  reasonable  effectiveness 
from  the  outset,  I  do  not  consider  them  perma- 
nently suitable.  There  is  need  for  a  critical  analy- 
sis of  the  various  systems  of  employment  and 
compensation  for  United  States  Government  over- 
seas civilian  personnel.  I  am  directing  that  this 
entire  matter  be  studied  with  a  view  toward  rec- 
onnnending  appropriate  legislation. 

While  divesting  the  Department  of  State  of  the 
foreign  information  programs,  the  reorganization 
plan  does  not  transfer  the  responsibility  of  that 
Department  for  the  educational  exchange  pro- 
grams authorized  by  various  acts  of  the  Congi'ess. 
Close  coordination  of  our  information  and  educa- 
tional exchange  programs  will,  of  course,  be  ef- 
fected by  the  Secretary  of  State  and  the  Director 
of  the  United  States  Information  Agency. 

The  Constitution  of  the  United  States  places  the 
duty  upon  the  President  for  the  conduct  of  our 
foreign  affairs.  Reorganization  Plans  Nos.  7  and 
8  and  the  related  Presidential  actions  are  designed 


June  15,  1953 


851 


to  protect  and  strengthen  the  role  of  the  Secretary 
of  State  as  tlie  principal  officer,  under  the  Presi- 
dent, in  the  field  of  foreign  afl'airs.  In  the  last 
analysis,  however,  the  ability  of  the  Secretary  of 
State  to  discharge  his  responsibilities  depends 
upon  the  backing  accorded  to  him  by  the  Presi- 
dent, including  consultation  with  the  Secretary 
on  the  appointment  and  maintenance  in  office  of 
the  directors  created  by  these  reorganization  plans. 
I  shall  continue  to  exercise  my  powers  of  appoint- 
ment so  that  these  offices  are  occupied  only  by  men 
who  support  and  enjoy  the  full  confidence  of  the 
Secretary  of  State. 

I  urge  the  Congress  to  give  its  full  support  to 
these  reorganizations. 

DWIOHT  D.  ElSENHOWEE 

TirE  White  House, 
June  1, 1953. 

MESSAGE  TO  THE  CONGRESS  TRANSMITTING 
FOREIGN  AID  REORGANIZATION  PLAN' 

I  transmit  herewith  Reorganization  Plan  No.  7 
of  1953,  prepai'ed  in  accordance  with  the  Reor- 
ganization Act  of  1949,  as  amended,  and  providing 
for  the  reorganization  of  various  foreign  aid  func- 
tions and  agencies.  My  reasons  for  proposing  the 
plan  are  stated  in  another  message  transmitted  to 
the  Congress  today. 

After  investigation,  I  have  found  and  hereby 
declare  that  each  reorganization  included  in  Re- 
organization Plan  No.  7  of  1953  is  necessary  to 
accomplish  one  or  more  of  the  purposes  set  forth 
in  section  2  (a)  of  the  Reorganization  Act  of  1949, 
as  amended.  I  have  also  found  and  hereby  de- 
clare that  it  is  necessary  to  include  in  the  accom- 
panying reorganization  plan,  by  reason  of  reor- 
ganizations made  thereby,  jsrovisions  for  the  ap- 
pointment and  compensation  of  officers  specified 
in  section  1  of  the  plan.  The  rates  of  compensa- 
tion fixed  for  these  officers  are,  respectively,  those 
which  I  have  found  to  prevail  in  respect  of  com- 
parable officers  in  the  executive  branch  of  the 
Government. 

The  statutory  authority  for  the  exercise  of  the 
functions  abolished  by  section  8  (a)  (5)  of  the 
reorganization  plan  is  section  413  (a)  of  the  Act 
for  International  Development,  as  amended.  The 
vesting  of  the  functions  of  planning,  implement- 
ing, and  managing  the  programs  authorized  by 
that  Act,  as  amended,  in  an  officer  other  than  the 
President  is  incongruous  with  the  pattern  of  the 
Act  as  a  whole,  whereby  other  functions  are  vested 
in  the  President,  with  power  of  delegation.  In 
the  interest  of  having  the  most  flexible  arrange- 
ments for  the  administration  of  the  Act,  the  func- 
tions in  question  could  be  either  abolished  or  trans- 
ferred to  the  President.  I  have  concluded  that 
they  overlap  the  authority  of  the  President  under 
the  Act  generally,  are  thus  dispensable,  and  should 
be  abolished. 

•  H.  doe.  157. 


I  expect  that  the  improved  organizational  ar- 
rangement provided  for  in  Reorganization  Plan 
No.  7  of  1953  will  lead  to  substantial  economies 
and  significantly  improved  effectiveness  of  admin- 
istration. It  is  not  practicable,  however,  to  item- 
ize at  this  time  the  reductions  in  expenditures 
which  will  probably  be  brought  about  by  the  tak- 
ing effect  of  the  reorganizations  included  in  the 
reorganization  plan. 

DwiGHT  D.  Eisenhower 

The  White  House, 
June  1, 1953. 

RE0RGANI2iA.TI0N  PLAN  NO.  7  OF  1953 

Prepared  by  the  President  and  transmitted  to  the  Sen- 
ate and  the  House  of  Representatives  in  Congress  as- 
sembled, June  1,  1953,  pursuant  to  the  provisions  of  the 
Reorganization  Act  of  1949,  approved  June  20,  1949,  as 
amended. 

FOREIGN  OPERATIONS  ADMINISTRATION 

Section  1.  Establishment  of  Foreign  Operations  Admin- 
istration.—  (a)  There  is  hereby  established  a  new  agency 
which  shall  be  known  as  the  Foreign  Operations  Admin- 
istration, hereinafter  referred  to  as  the  "Administration". 

(6)  There  shall  be  at  the  head  of  the  Administration 
a  Director  of  the  Foreign  Operations  Administration, 
hereinafter  referred  to  as  the  "Director."  The  Director 
shall  be  appointed  by  the  President  by  and  with  the  advice 
and  consent  of  the  Senate  and  shall  receive  compensa- 
tion at  the  rate  of  $22,500  a  year.  The  Secretary  of  State 
shall  advise  with  the  President  concerning  the  appoint- 
ment and  tenure  of  the  Director. 

(c)  There  shall  be  in  the  Administration  a  Deputy 
Director  of  the  Foreign  Operations  Administration,  who 
shall  be  appointed  by  the  President  by  and  vcith  the  ad- 
vice and  consent  of  the  Senate,  and  who  shall  receive  com- 
pensation at  the  rate  of  $17,500  a  year.  The  Deputy 
Director  shall  perform  such  functions  as  the  Director  shall 
from  time  to  time  designate,  and  shall  act  as  Director 
during  the  absence  or  disability  of  the  Director  or  In 
the  event  of  a  vacancy  in  the  office  of  Director. 

(d)  There  are  hereby  established  in  the  Administration 
six  new  offices  with  such  title  or  titles  as  the  Director  shall 
from  time  to  time  determine.  Appointment  thereto  shall 
be  by  the  President,  by  and  with  the  advice  and  consent 
of  the  Senate.  The  compensation  for  each  of  two  of  the 
said  offices  shall  be  at  the  rate  of  $16,000  a  year  and  the 
compensation  for  each  of  the  other  four  offices  shall  be 
at  the  rate  of  $15,000  a  year.  The  persons  appointed  to 
the  said  new  offices  shall  perform  such  functions  as  the 
Director  shall  from  time  to  time  designate,  and  are  author- 
ized to  act  as  Director,  as  the  Director  may  designate, 
during  the  absence  or  disability  of  the  Director  and  the 
Deputy  Director  or  in  the  event  of  vacancies  in  the  offices 
of  Director  and  Deputy  Director. 

Sec.  2.  Transfer  of  functions  to  the  Director. — There 
are  hereby  transferred  to  the  Director : 

(a)  All  functions  vested  by  the  Mutual  Security  Act 
of  1951,  as  amended,  or  by  any  other  statute  in  the  Direc- 
tor for  Mutual  Security  provided  for  in  section  501  of 
that  Act,  or  in  the  Mutual  Security  Agency  created  by 
that  Act,  or  in  any  official  or  office  of  that  Agency,  in- 
cluding the  functions  of  the  Director  for  Mutual  Security 
as  a  memljer  of  the  National  Security  Council. 

(&)  All  functions  vested  by  the  Mutual  Defense  Assist- 
ance Control  Act  of  1951  in  the  Administrator  created  by 
that  Act. 

(c)  The  function  vested  by  section  6  of  the  Tugoslar 
Emergencv  Relief  Assistance  Act  of  1950  in  the  Secretary 
of  State. 

Sec.  3.  Institute  of  Inter-American  Affairs. — The  Insti- 
tute of  Inter-American  Affairs,  together  with  its  functions. 


852 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


is  hereby  transferred  to  the  Administration.  All  fuuc- 
tious  vested  by  the  Institute  of  Inter-American  Affairs 
Act  in  the  Secretary  of  State  are  hereby  transferred  to 
the  Director.  Functions  with  respect  to  serving  as  em- 
ployees of  the  said  Institute  or  as  members  of  the  board 
of  directors  thereof,  including  eligibility,  as  the  case  may 
lie  to  be  detailed  as  such  employees  or  to  serve  as  such 
members,  are  hereby  transferred  from  the  officials  and 
employees  of  the  Department  of  State  to  the  officials  and 
! employees  of  the  Administration.  The  Institute  shall  be 
administered  subject  to  the  direction  and  control  of  the 
Director 

Sec.  4.  National  Advisory  Council— The  Director  shall 
be  a  member  of  the  National  Advisory  Council  on  Inter- 
national Monetary  and  Financial  Problems   (22  U.  S.  C. 

"  Sec'  5.  Performance  of  functions  transferred  to  the 
Director.— The  Director  may  from  time  to  time  make  such 
provisions  as  he  shall  deem  appropriate  authorizing  the 
piTformance  by  anv  other  officer,  or  by  any  employee  or 
oii^anizational  entity,  of  the  Administration,  of  any  func- 
tion of  the  Director,  except  the  function  of  being  a  mem- 
ber of  the  National  Security  Council  and  the  function  of 
being  a  member  of  the  National  Advisory  Council  on  In- 
ternational Monetary  and  Financial  Problems. 

Sec.  6.  Transfer  of  functions  to  the  President. — ^AII 
functions  vested  in  the  Secretary  of  State  by  the  United 
Nations  Palestine  Refugee  Aid  Act  of  1950  are  hereby 
transferred  to  the  President. 

Sec.  1.  Incidental  transfers.— {a)  Personnel,  property, 
records,  and  unexpended  balances  of  appropriations,  allo- 
cutions, and  other  funds,  employed,  used,  held,  available, 
or  to  be  made  available  in  connection  with  functions  trans- 
ferred or  vested  by  this  reorganization  plan  shall  be  trans- 
ferred, at  such  time  or  times  as  the  Director  of  the  Bureau 
of  the  Budget  shall  direct,  as  follows : 

(1)  So  much  of  those  relating  to  functions  transferred 
to  or  vested  in  the  Director  or  the  Administration  as  the 
Director  of  the  Bureau  of  the  Budget  shall  determine 
shall  be  transferred  to  the  Administration. 

(2)  Those  of  the  Institute  of  Inter-American  Affairs 
shall  be  transferred  along  with  the  Institute. 

(3)  So  much  of  those  relating  to  the  functions  trans- 
ferred by  section  6  hereof  as  the  Director  of  the  Bureau  of 
the  Budget  shall  determine  shall  be  transferred  to  the 
au'ency  or  agencies  of  the  Government  to  which  the  Presi- 
dent delegates  the  said  functions. 

(b)  Such  further  measures  and  dispositions  as  the  Di- 
rector of  the  Bureau  of  the  Budget  shall  deem  to  be  neces- 
sary in  order  to  effectuate  the  transfers  provided  for  in 
suli'section  (a)  of  this  section  shall  be  carried  out  in 
such  manner  as  he  shall  direct  and  by  such  agencies  as 
he  shall  designate. 

Sec.  8.  Abolitions.— {a)  There  are  hereby  abolished: 

(1)  The  offices  of  Director  for  Mutual  Security  and 
Deputy  Director  for  Mutual  Security,  provided  for  in  sec- 
tions *501  and  504,  respectively,  of  the  Mutual  Security 
Act  of  19.".1,  as  amended  (including  the  organization  in 
the  Executive  Office  of  the  President  known  as  the  Office 
of  the  Director  for  Mutual  Security). 

(2)  The  Mutual  Security  Agency. 

(3)  The  title  of  Administrator  provided  for  in  the  Mu- 
tual Defense  Assistance  Control  Act. 

(4)  The  four  positions  provided  for  in  section  406  (e) 
of  the  Mutual  Defense  Assistance  Act  of  1949,  as  amended. 

(5)  The  offices  of  Administrator  and  Deputy  Adminis- 
trator for  Technical  Cooperation,  provided  for  in  section 
413  (a)  of  the  Act  for  International  Development,  as 
amended,  together  with  the  functions  vested  in  the  Ad- 
ministrator by  the  said  section  413  (a),  as  amended. 

(6)  The  offices  of  the  Special  Representative  in  Europe 
and  Deputv  Special  Representative  in  Europe,  provided 
for  in  section  504  (a)  of  the  Mutual  Security  Act  of  1951, 
as  amended.  The  abolition  of  the  said  offices  of  Repre- 
sentative and  Deputy  Representative  shall  become  eflec- 

June   15,    J  953 


tive  on  September  1.  1953  (unless  a  later  date  is  required 
by  the  provisions  of  section  6  (a)  of  the  Reorganization 
Act  of  1949,  as  amended). 

(6)  The  Director  shall  wind  up  any  outstanding  af- 
fairs of  the  aforesaid  abolished  agencies  and  offices  not 
otherwise  provided  for  in  this  reorganization  plan. 

Sec.  9.  Interim  provisions.— The  President  may  author- 
ize the  persons  who,  immediately  prior  to  the  effective 
date  of  this  reorganization  plan,  hold  offices  or  occupy 
positions  abolished  by  section  8  hereof  to  hold  offices  and 
occupy  positions  under  section  1  hereof  until  the  latter 
offices"  and  positions  are  filled  pursuant  to  the  provisions 
of  the  said  section  1  or  by  recess  appointment,  as  the  case 
may  be,  but  in  no  event  for  any  period  extending  more 
than  60  days  after  the  said  effective  date,  as  follows: 

(o)  The  Director  and  Deputy  Director  for  Mutual  Se- 
curity as  the  Director  and  Deputy  Director  of  the  Foreign 
Operations  Administration,  respectively. 

(6)  The  Administrator  for  Technical  Cooperation  and 
the  person  occupying  the  senior  position  provided  for  in 
section  406  (e)  of  the  Mutual  Defense  Assistance  Act  of 
1949,  as  amended,  to  serve  in  the  two  senior  positions 
created  by  section  1  (d)  hereof.  „    ^   .     ,  ^ 

(c)  The  Deputy  Administrator  for  Technical  Coopera- 
tion and  the  persons  occupying  the  three  positions  pro- 
vided for  in  section  406  (e)  of  the  Mutual  Defense  Assist- 
ance Act  of  1949,  as  amended,  to  serve  in  the  four  positions 
created  bv  section  1(d)  hereof  which  have  compensation 
at  the  rate  of  $15,000  a  year. 

MESSAGE  TO  THE  CONGRESS  TRANSMITTING 
PLAN  FOR  U.S.  INFORMATION  AGENCY^ 

I  transmit  herewith  Keorganization  Plan  No. 
8  of  1953,  prepared  in  accordance  with  the  Ke- 
organization Act  of  1949,  as  amended,  and  pro- 
viding for  the  reorganization  of  foreign  informa- 
tion fnnctions.  ]\fy  reasons  for  proposing  this 
plan  are  stated  in  another  message  transmitted 
to  the  Congress  today. 

After  investigation,  I  have  found  and  hereby  de- 
clare that  each  reorganization  included  in  Ke- 
organization Plan  No.  8  of  1953  is  necessary  to 
accomplish  one  or  more  of  the  purposes  set  forth 
in  section  2  (a)  of  the  Reorganization  Act  of  1949, 
as  amended.  I  have  also  found  and  hereby  de- 
clare that  it  is  necessary  to  include  in  the  accom- 
panying reorganization  plan,  by  reason  of  reor- 
ganizations made  thereby,  provisions  for  the 
appointment  and  compensation  of  officers  specified 
in  section  1  of  the  plan.  The  rates  of  compensa- 
tion fixed  for  these  officers  are,  respectively,  those 
which  I  have  found  to  prevail  in  respect  of  com- 
parable officers  in  the  executive  branch  of  the 
Government. 

I  expect  that  the  improved  organizational  ar- 
ranc^ement  provided  for  in  Reorganization  Plan 
No.^8  of  1953  will  lead  to  substantial  economies 
and  significantly  improved  effectiveness  of  admin- 
istration. It  is  not  practicable,  however,  to 
itemize  at  this  time  the  reductions  in  expenditures 
which  will  probably  be  brought  about  by  the  tak- 
ino-  effect  of  the  reorganizations  included  in  the 
reorganization  plan. 

DwiGHT  D.  Eisenhower 

The  White  House, 
Jmie  1, 1953. 


'  H.  doc.  158. 


853 


REOKGANIZATION  PLAN  NO.  8  OF  1953 

Prepared  by  the  President  and  transmitted  to  the  Senate 
and  the  House  of  Representatives  in  Congress  assembled, 
June  1,  1!J.")3,  pursuant  to  the  provisions  of  the  Reorgani- 
zation Act  of  1949,  approved  June  liO,  1949,  as  amended. 

UNITED  STATES  INFORMATION  AGENCY 

Section  1.  Eatahlishment  of  aiiency. —  (a)  There  is 
hereby  established  a  new  agency  which  shall  be  known 
as  the  United  States  Information  Agency,  hereinafter 
referred  to  as  the  Agency. 

( li )  There  shall  be  at  the  head  of  the  Agency  a  Director 
of  the  United  States  Information  Agency,  hereinafter  re- 
ferred to  as  the  Director.  The  Director  shall  be  appointed 
by  the  President  by  and  with  the  advice  and  consent  of 
the  Senate  and  shall  receive  compensation  at  the  rate  of 
$17,ij00  a  year.  The  Secretary  of  State  shall  advise  with 
the  President  concerning  the  appointment  and  tenure  of 
the  Director. 

(c)  There  shall  be  in  the  Agency  a  Deputy  Director  of 
the  United  States  Information  Agency,  who  shall  lie  ap- 
pointed by  the  President  by  and  with  the  advice  and  con- 
sent of  the  Senate,  and  who  shall  receive  compensation 
at  the  rate  of  $16,000  a  .year.  The  Deputy  Director  shall 
perform  such  functions  as  the  Director  shall  from  time 
to  time  designate,  and  shall  act  as  Director  during  the 
absence  or  disability  of  the  Director  or  in  the  event  of 
a  vacancy  in  the  office  of  the  Director. 

(d)  There  are  hereby  established  in  the  Agency  so 
many  new  offices,  not  in  excess  of  fifteen  existing  at  any 
one  time,  and  with  such  title  or  titles,  as  the  Director  shall 
from  time  to  time  determine.  Appointment  thereto  shall 
be  under  the  classified  civil  service  and  the  compensation 
thereof  shall  be  fixed  from  time  to  time  pursuant  to  the 
classification  laws,  as  now  or  hereafter  amended,  except 
that  the  compensation  may  be  fixed  without  regard  to 
the  numerical  limitations  on  positions  set  forth  in  section 
50.5  of  the  Classification  Act  of  1949,  as  amended  (5  U.  g. 
C.  1105). 

Sec.  2.  Transfer  of  functions. —  (a)  Subject  to  subsec- 
tion (c)  of  this  section,  there  are  hereby  transferred  to 
the  Director,  (1)  the  functions  vested  in  the  Secretary 
of  State  by  Title  V  of  the  United  States  Information  and 
Educational  Exchange  Act  of  1948,  as  amended,  and  so 
much  of  functions  with  respect  to  the  Interchange  of  books 
and  periodicals  and  aid  to  libraries  and  community  cen- 
ters under  sections  202  and  203  of  the  said  Act  as' is  an 
integral  part  of  information  programs  under  that  Act, 
together  with  so  much  of  the  functions  vested  in  the 
Secretary  of  State  by  other  provisions  of  the  said  Act 
as  is  incidental  to  or  is  necessary  for  the  performance  of 
the  functions  under  Title  V  and  sections  202  and  203 
transferred  by  this  section,  and  (2)  functions  of  the  Secre- 
tary of  State  with  respect  to  Information  programs  re- 
lating to  Germany  and  Austria. 

(b)  Exclusive  of  so  much  thereof  as  is  an  integral 
part  of  economic  or  technical  assistance  programs,  with- 
out regard  to  any  inconsistent  provision  of  Reorganization 
Plan  No.  7  of  19,53,  and  subject  to  subsection  (c)  of  this 
section,  functions  with  respect  to  foreign  information 
programs  vestetl  by  the  Mutual  Security  Act  of  1951.  as 
amended,  in  the  Director  for  Mutual  Security  provided 
for  in  section  .501  of  the  said  Act  are  hereby  transferred 
to  the  Director. 

<(■)  (1)  The  Secretary  of  State  shall  direct  the  policy 
and  control  the  content  of  a  program,  for  use  abroad,  oil 
official  United  States  positions,  including  interpretations 
of  current  events,  identified  as  official  positions  by  an 
exclusive  descriptive  label. 

(2)  The  Secretary  of  State  shall  continue  to  provide  to 
the  Director  on  a  current  basis  full  guidance  concerning 
the  foreign  policy  of  the  United  States. 

(3)  Nothing  herein  shall  affect  the  functions  of  the 
Secretary  of  State  with  respect  to  conducting  negotiations 
with  other  governments. 

(d)   To  the  extent  the  President  deems  it  necessary  in 

854 


order  to  carry  out  the  functions  transferred  by  the  fore- 
going provisions  of  this  section,  he  may  authorize  the 
Director  to  exercise,  in  relation  to  the  respective  functions 
so  transferred,  any  authority  or  part  thereof  available  by 
law,  including  appropriation  acts,  to  the  Secretary  of 
State,  the  I>irector  for  Mutual  Security,  or  the  Director 
of  the  Foreign  Operations  Administration,  in  respect  of  ^ 
the  said  transferred  functions. 

Sec.  3.  Performance  of  transferred  functions. —  (o)  The 
Director  may  from  time  to  time  make  such  provisions  as 
he  shall  deem  appropriate  authorizing  the  performance 
of  any  function  of  the  Director  by  .-my  other  officer,  or  by 
any  employee  or  organizational  entity,  of  the  Agency. 

(6)  Representatives  of  the  United  States  carrying  out 
the  functions  transferred  by  section  2  hereof  in  each  for- 
eign country  shall  be  subject  to  such  procedures  as  the 
President  may  prescribe  to  assure  coordination  among 
such  representatives  in  each  country  under  the  leadership 
of  the  Chief  of  the  United  States  Diplomatic  Mission. 

Sec.  4.  In<-idental  transfers. —  {a)  So  much  of  the  per- 
sonnel, property,  records,  and  unexpended  balances  of  ap- 
propriations, allocations,  and  other  funds,  employed,  used, 
held,  available,  or  to  be  made  available  in  connection  with 
the  functions  transferred  or  vested  by  this  reorganization 
plan  as  the  Director  of  the  Bureau  of  the  Budget  shall 
determine  shall  be  transferred  to  the  Agency  at  such  time 
or  times  as  he  shall  direct. 

(6)  Such  further  measures  and  dispositions  as  the  Di- 
rector of  the  Bureau  of  the  Budget  shall  deem  to  be  neces- 
sary in  order  to  effectuate  the  transfers  provided  for  in 
subsection  (a)  of  this  section  shall  be  carried  out  in  sueli 
manner  as  he  shall  direct  and  by  such  agencies  as  he  shall 
designate. 

Sec.  5.  Interim  provisions. — Pending  the  initial  appoint- 
ment imder  section  1  of  this  reorganization  jilan  of  thi 
Director  and  Deputy  Director,  respectively,  therein  piM 
vided  for.  their  functions  shall  be  performed  temporarily 
but  not  for  a  period  in  excess  of  60  days,  by  such  officer- 
of  the  Department  of  State  or  the  Mutual  Security  Agenc.\ 
as  the  President  shall  designate. 


EXECUTIVE  ORDER  10458* 

Pbovidinq  for  the  Administration  of  Cfrtain  Foreion> 
Aid  Programs  and  Rta^AxEn  Activitif.s 

By  virtue  of  the  authority  vested  in  me  by  the  Mutual 
Security  Act  of  1951,  as  amended,  the  Act  for  Interna- 
tional Development,  as  amended,  and  sections  301  to  303, 
inclusive,  of  title  3  of  the  United  States  Code,  and  a» 
President  of  the  United  States,  it  is  hereby  ordered  as 
follows : 

Section  1.  International  development,  (a)  The  func- 
tions conferred  upon  the  Secretary  of  State  by  Executive 
Order  No.  10159  of  September  S,  1950,°  15  F.  K.  6103,  are 
hereby  transferred  to  the  Director  for  Mutual  Security; 
and,  accordingly,  the  said  Executive  order  is  amended 
by  striking  therefrom,  wherever  they  api>ear,  the  wordS' 
"Secretary  of  State"  and  inserting  in  lieu  thereof,  in  each 
instance,  the  words  "Director  for  Mutual  Security." 

(6)  Tlie  Technical  Cooperation  Administration  isi 
hereby  transferred  from  the  Department  of  State  to  the 
jurisdiction  of  the  Director  for  Mutual  Security  and  shall 
be  administered  under  his  direction  and  suix>rvision. 

Sec.  2.  Pfirticipation  in  certain  international  orgnnizn- 
tions.  There  are  hereby  delegated  to  the  Director  for 
Mutual  Security  the  functions  conferred  upcm  the  Presi- 
dent by  section  534  of  the  Mutual  Security  Act  of  1951,  as 
amended,  section  12  of  the  Mutual  Security  Act  of  19.52, 
and  section  3(>3  of  the  Mutual  Security  Act  of  1951,  as 
amended,  with  respect  to  the  Intergovernmental  Com- 
mittee for  European  Migration  (as  the  succes.sor  of  the 
Provisional  Intergovernmental  Committee  for  the  Move- 


'  18  Fed.  Reg.  31.59. 

'  Bulletin  of  Sept.  25, 1950,  p.  499. 


Department  of  State   Bullelinl 


ment  of  Migrants  from  Eiuope),  the  United  Nations  In- 
ternational Children's  Emergency  Fund,  and  the  United 
Nations  Korean  Reconstriic-tiou  Agency,  respectively. 

Sec.  3.  Ocean   p-cUjht   chnrges   on    relief  siiiiplics.   etc. 
The  Mutual  Security  Agency  is  herehy  designated  as  the 
,' agency  <if  the  Government  which  shall  hereafter  exercise 
'  the  authority  to  pay  ocean  freight  charges  on  shipments 
of  relief  supplies  and  packages  under  section  117  (c)  of 
the  Economic  Cooperation  Act  of  1948,  as  amended,  and 
section  535  of  the  Mutual  Security  Act  of  1951,  as  amended. 
Sec.  4.  Functions  of  Hecretarii  of  Slate  and  Department 
of  State,     {a)    Nothing  in  this"  order  shall  be  deemed  to 
modify  the  functions  of  the  Secretary  of  State  with  re- 
spect to  conducting  negotiations  with  other  governments. 
(6)  The  Secretary  of  State  and  the  Director  for  Mutual 
Security  shall  establish  and  maintain  arrangements  which 
will  insure  that  the  functions  of  the  said  Director  under 
this  order  shall  be  carried  out  in  conformity  with  the 
established  foreign  policy  of  the  United  States. 

(c)  The  Secretary  of  State  shall  be  responsible  for 
making  the  United  States  contributions,  under  subsections 
(a)  and  (b)  of  section  404  of  the  Act  for  International 
Development,  to  the  United  Nations  for  technical  co- 
operation programs  carried  on  by  it  and  its  related  or- 
ganizations, and  to  the  Organization  of  American  States, 
its  related  organizations,  and  other  international  organi- 
zations for  technical  cooperation  programs  carried  on  by 
them,  and  for  making  United  States  contributions  to  the 
international  organizations  referred  to  in  section  2  hereof. 
Tlic  Secretary  of  State  shall  also  be  responsiljle  for  for- 
mulating and  presenting,  with  the  assistance  of  the  Di- 
rector for  Mutual  Security,  the  policy  of  the  United  States 
with  respect  to  the  assistance  programs  of  the  inter- 
national organizations  referred  to  in  this  subsection  and 
in  section  2  hereof  and  for  representing  the  United  States 
in  those  organizations.  Sections  1(a)  and  2  hereof  shall 
be  subject  to  this  subsection. 

( (I )  The  Director  for  Mutual  Security  shall  allocate  to 
the  Department  of  State  funds  which  have  been  or  may 
be  appropriated  or  otherwise  made  available  for  contribu- 
tions of  the  United  States  to  the  international  organiza- 
tions referred  to  in  section  2  hereof  or  to  those  receiving 
contributions  under  subsections  (a)  and  (b)  of  section 
404  of  the  Act  for  International  Development. 

See.  5.  Miscellaneous  provisions,  (a)  Subsection  (a) 
of  section  2  and  sections  3  and  4  of  Executive  Order  No. 
10300  of  November  1,  1951,°  as  amended  by  Executive 
Order  No.  10368  of  June  30,  1952,  are  hereby  revoked. 

(6)  There  shall  be  transferred  to  the  jurisdiction  of 
the  Director  for  Mutual  Security,  consonant  with  law,  so 
much  as  the  Director  of  the  Bureau  of  the  Budget  shall 
determine  of  the  personnel,  property,  records,  and  un- 
expended balances  of  appropriations,  allocations,  and 
other  funds,  employed,  held,  used,  available,  or  to  be  made 
available  in  connection  with  the  functions  transferred, 
delegated,  or  assigned  to  the  Director  for  Mutual  Security 
or  the  Mutual  Security  Agency  by  this  order.  Such  fur- 
ther measures  and  dispositions  as  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Budget  shall  deem  to  be  necessary  in  order 
to  effectuate  the  transfers  provided  for  in  this  section 
shall  be  carried  out  in  such  manner  as  he  shall  direct 
and  by  such  agencies  as  he  shall  designate. 

(c)  To  the  extent  that  any  provision  of  any  prior  Execu- 
tive order  is  inconsistent  with  the  provisions  of  this  order, 
the  latter  shall  control  and  such  prior  provision  is 
amended  accordingly. 

(<?)  All  orders,  regulations,  rulings,  certificates,  di- 
rectives, agreements,  contracts,  delegations,  determina- 
tions, and  other  actions  of  any  officer  or  agency  of  the 
Government  relating  to  any  function  affected  by  this 
order  shall  remain  in  effect  except  as  they  are  inconsistent 
herewith  or  are  hereafter  amended  or  revoked  under 
proper  authority. 

DwiGHT  D.  Eisenhower 
The  White  House 
June  1,  1953 


'  Ibid.,  Nov.  19, 1951,  p.  826. 


LETTER  TO  HEADS  OF  DEPARTMENTS 
AND  AGENCIES 

White  House  press  release  dated  June  1 

JUxNE  1,  1953 

To :  The  Heads  of  All  Executive  Departments 
The  Director  for  Mutual  Security 

I  have  today  transmitted  two  reorganization 
plans  to  the  Congress  and  taken  other  actions  by 
Executive  order  providing  for  a  significant  reor- 
ganization of  the  executive  branch  for  the  conduct 
of  foreign  affairs.  This  letter  further  defines  re- 
lationships which  will  govern  executive  branch 
officials  in  the  conduct  of  our  international  respon- 
sibilities. 

The  over-all  foreign  affairs  reorganization 
which  I  desire  to  achieve  is  designed  to  emphasize 
the  primary  position  of  the  Secretary  of  State 
within  the  executive  branch  in  matters  of  foreign 
policy.  I  personally  wish  to  emphasize  that  I 
shall  regard  the  Secretary  of  State  as  the  Cabinet 
officer  responsible  for  advising  and  assisting  me  in 
the  formulation  and  control  of  foreign  policy.  It 
will  be  my  practice  to  employ  the  Secretary  of 
State  as  my  channel  of  authority  within  the  execu- 
tive branch  on  foreign  policy.  Other  officials  of 
the  executive  branch  will  work  with  and  through 
the  Secretary  of  State  on  matters  of  foreign  policy. 
I  shall  also  look  to  the  Secretary  of  Defense  as  the 
Cabinet  officer  responsible,  within  the  framework 
of  foreign  policy,  for  advising  and  assisting  me 
in  the  formulation  and  control  of  military  jjolicy. 
Similarly,  the  Secretary  of  the  Treasury,  within 
the  framework  of  foreign  policy,  shall  continue  to 
be  the  Cabinet  officer  responsible  for  advising  and 
assisting  me  in  the  formulation  and  control  of 
monetary  and  financial  policy. 

The  Secretary  of  State,  the  Secretary  of  De- 
fense, and  the  Secretary  of  the  Treasury,  as  appro- 
priate, shall  review  plans  and  policies  relative  to 
military  and  economic  assistance  programs,  for- 
eign information  programs,  and  legislative  pro- 
posals of  the  Foreign  Operations  Administration 
and  the  United  States  Information  Agency,  to  as- 
sure that  in  their  conception  and  execution,  such 
plans,  policies  and  proposals  are  consistent  with 
and  further  the  attainment  of  foreign  policy,  mil- 
itary policy  and  financial  and  monetary  policy  ob- 
jectives. The  Director  of  the  Foreign  Operations 
Administration  and  the  Director  of  the  United 
States  Information  Agency  will  assure  the  con- 
currence or  participation  of  the  appropriate  Secre- 
tary before  taking  up  with  me  any  policy  matters 
of  concern  to  that  Secretary. 

The  heads  of  these  new  agencies  should  furnish 
information  to  the  Secretaries  of  State,  Defense, 
and  Treasury  in  such  manner  and  form  as  may  be 
agreed  between  the  head  of  the  agency  and  the 
Secretary  concerned  to  insure  that  the  program  of 
the  agencies  and  the  implementation  of  such  pro- 
grams conform  with  foreign  policy,  military  pol- 


Jone   75,   1953 


855 


icy,  and  financial  and  monetary  policy  objectives. 

To  the  maximum  feasible  extent  consistent  with 
efficiency  and  economy,  the  internal  organization 
of  the  new  agencies  should  be  designed  to  permit 
ready  coordination  with  subordinate  levels  of  the 
Department  of  State.  This  would  suggest  paral- 
lel areas  of  responsibility  for  constituent  units  of 
the  State  Department  and  of  the  two  new  oper- 
ating agencies  wherever  feasible.  The  two  oper- 
ating agencies  should  also  enter  into  appropriate 
arrangements  to  insure  the  necessary  coordination 
with  each  other.  Overseas  regional  staffs  should 
ordinarily  be  established  for  the  operating  agen- 
cies only  where  there  is  a  regional  organization  or 
multilateral  activity  of  sufficient  importance  to 
warrant  the  establishment  of  a  diplomatic  mission. 
The  Chief  of  the  United  States  diplomatic  mission 
in  each  foreign  country  must  provide  effective  co- 
ordination of,  and  foreign  policy  direction  with 
respect  to,  all  United  States  Government  activities 
in  the  country.  To  the  maximum  practicable  ex- 
tent, there  should  be  integrated  supervision  of  per- 
sonnel performing  related  economic  or  informa- 
tion activities  in  each  foreign  country.  Appoint- 
ments of  all  chief  representatives  abroad  of  the 
two  new  agencies,  and  of  the  chiefs  of  military  as- 
sistance advisory  groups  abroad,  should  be  cleared 
with  the  Secretary  of  State. 

Tlie  Director  of  tlie  Foreign  Operations  Ad- 
ministration should  take  full  advantage  of  the 
advice  and  assistance  available  in  other  agencies. 
He  should  coordinate  his  operations  with  related 
operations  in  other  agencies.  At  the  same  time, 
I  expect  the  Director  of  the  Foreign  Operations 
Administration  to  maintain  full  control  and  direc- 
tion over  all  foreign  economic  and  technical  as- 
sistance programs  rather  than  turn  this  respon- 
sibility over  to  other  agencies.  We  must  have  an 
integrated  direction  of  technical  assistance  and 
other  foreign  assistance  activities. 

Since  I  am  assigning  to  the  Mutual  Security 
Agency  responsibility  for  paying  ocean  freight  on 
voluntary  relief  shipments,  I  wish  to  make  a  corre- 
sponding change  respecting  the  Advisory  Com- 
mittee on  Voluntary  Foreign  Aid.  This  Commit- 
tee, which  was  created  pursuant  to  the  President's 
letter  to  the  Secretary  of  State,  dated  May  14, 
1946,  operates  under  the  guidance  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  State,  and  coordinates  public  and  private 
programs  for  foreign  relief.  The  Committee 
sliould  hereafter  operate  under  the  guidance  of 
the  Director  for  Mutual  Security  or  the  Director 
of  the  Foreign  Operations  Administration,  as  the 
case  may  be,  and  the  State  Department  staff'  now 
assisting  the  Committee  should  be  transferred  to 
the  Mutual  Security  Agency  and  thereafter  to  the 
Foreign  Operations  Administration. 


The  reorganization  plan  which  creates  th( 
United  States  Information  Agency  also  assign; 
exclusive  responsibility  to  the  Secretary  of  State 
for  the  control  of  the  content  of  a  program  de- 
signed to  assure  accurate  statements  of  United 
States  official  positions  on  important  issues  ana 
current  developments.  It  is  my  desire  that  this 
program  be  so  administered  as  to  keep  these  offi- 
cial United  States  positions  before  the  govern- 
ments and  peoples  of  other  countries.  No  mate- 
rial which  is  not  a  statement  of  official  United 
States  views,  regardless  of  its  nature,  or  origin 
or  the  medium  used  for  its  dissemination,  should 
be  identified,  by  the  exclusive  label  which  is 
jDrovided. 

The  United  States  Information  Agency  will  be 
the  normal  outlet  for  this  program,  but  the  Secre- 
tary of  State  may  use  other  channels  for  dissemi- 
nating this  program  abroad  when  in  his  judgment 
the  use  of  such  channels  is  required.  The  Directoi 
of  the  United  States  Information  Agency  shoulc 
give  full  cooperation  in  providing  the  services  and 
facilities  necessary  for  the  preparation,  transla 
tion,  transmission,  and  distribution  of  materials 
for  this  program. 

The  Director  of  the  United  States  Informatior 
Agency  shall  report  to  and  receive  instructions 
from  me  through  the  National  Security  Counci' 
or  as  I  may  otherwise  direct.  I  am  directing  thai 
the  necessary  changes  be  made  in  existing  arrange- 
ments for  Government-wide  coordination  of  for- 
eign information  activities  to  enable  the  Directoi 
of  the  United  States  Information  Agency  to  serve 
as  Chairman  of  the  Psychological  Operations 
Coordinating  Committee. 

The  Secretary  of  State  has  an  obligation  to  de- 
velop means  of  providing  foreign  policy  guidance 
fully  and  promptly.  The  Foreign  Operations  Ad- 
ministration and  the  United  States  Information 
Agency  must  seek  such  guidance  and  establish 
appropriate  means  of  assuring  that  its  programs 
at  all  times  conform  to  such  foreign  policy 
guidance. 

The  instructions  in  this  letter  supplement  the 
actions  which  I  have  taken  by  Executive  order 
and  the  reorganization  plans.  They  will  in  turn 
be  supplemented  as  necessary  by  other  orders  and 
by  interagency  arrangements.  I  am  confident  that 
the  members  of  the  executive  branch,  under  the 
clear  assignments  of  responsibility  which  I  have 
provided,  will  continue  to  work  together  even  more 
effectively  as  a  team.  Such  teamwoi-k  is  essential 
to  our  success  in  the  conduct  of  foreign  affairs 
and  to  the  achievement  thereby  of  a  greater  meas- 
ure of  peace,  well-being,  and  freedom  throughout 
the  world. 

DwiGHT  D.  Eisenhower  .  a 


856 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


i 


President's  Proposal  for  Admission  of  European  Migrants 


Statement  hy  Acting  Secretary  Smith  ^ 


In  his  letter  of  April  22, 1953  ^  to  the  President 
of  the  Senate  and  the  Speaker  of  the  House  of 
Representatives,  President  Eisenhower  pointed  to 
the  tragic  developments  which  left  countless 
thousands  of  homeless  refugees  in  Europe,  and 

:  referred  to  the  steady  flow  of  persons  escaping 
from  Communist  oppression  to  seek  asylum  in  the 
free  world.  The  President  also  pointed  to  the 
problem  of  population  pressures  as  a  source  of  ur- 
gent concern  in  several  friendly  countries  in  Eu- 
rope. As  a  contribution  to  the  solution  of  these 
problems,  the  President  urged  earliest  considera- 
tion for  his  recommendations  for  emergency  im- 

'  migration  legislation. 

After  careful  study,  the  Department  of  State  be- 
lieves that  the  bill  introduced  by  you,  Mr.  Chair- 
man,='  and  17  of  your  colleagues  (S.  1917)  will  go 
a  long  way  toward  meeting  the  needs  outlined  by 
the  President. 

The  Department  of  State  is  interested  in  the 
proposed  legislation  primarily  because  of  its  for- 
eign-policy implications.  The  humanitarian  as- 
pects of  the  program  are  obvious.  Its  effect  upon 
our  relations  with  our  European  allies  will  be  most 
favorable.  It  will  assist  in  relieving  situations 
which,  under  certain  circumstances,  would  ad- 
versely affect  the  national  security  of  the  United 
States  by  undermining  the  economic  and  political 
stability  of  our  allies. 

We  are  faced  with  a  number  of  serious  prob- 
lems having  an  important  impact  on  the  political, 
economic,  and  social  life  of  friendly  countries  in 
Europe.  Some  of  these  problems  are  a  direct  out- 
growth of  World  War  II ;  others  trace  their  origin 

'Made  on  May  26  (press  release  288)  before  the  Sub- 
committee on  Immigration  and  Naturalization  of  the  Sen- 
ate Committee  on  the  Judiciary  on  the  President's  pro- 
posal for  the  admission  of  240,000  escapees,  expellees,  and 
persons  from  overpopulated  areas  in  Europe.  Acting  Sec- 
retary Smith  testified  on  May  21  before  the  Subcommittee 
on  Immigration  and  Naturalization  of  the  House  Commit- 
tee on  the  same  proposal  (press  release  277;  not  printed). 

'  Bulletin  of  May  4,  1953,  p.  639. 

'  Sen.  Arthur  V.  Watkins. 


to  totalitarianism.  They  are  problems  of  popu- 
lation pressures  and  of  escape  from  persecution, 
and  they  are  creating  situations  in  certain  Euro- 
pean areas  which  constitute  a  grave  threat  to  im- 
portant objectives  of  American  foreign  policy. 
During  and  after  World  War  II  the  pressures 
from  basic  overpopulation  increased  tremen- 
dously. This  is  attributable  in  part  to  the  virtual 
cessation  of  migration  during  the  war  years.  Mil- 
lions of  people  became  refugees;  other  millions, 
because  they  were  Germans,  were  expelled  from 
their  homes  in  Eastern  Europe.  There  has  also 
been  a  steady  stream  of  persons  fleeing  to  freedom 
from  Communist  terror  in  Eastern  Europe. 

Most  of  the  nations  of  the  free  world  have  made 
a  consiclerable  effort  to  alleviate  this  situation. 
Through  our  own  Displaced  Persons  Act  of  1948, 
this  Government  admitted  some  350,000  refugees 
from  Germany,  Austria,  and  Italy.  Through  the 
Intergovernmental  Committee  for  European  Mi- 
gration, the  United  States  and  21  other  govern- 
ments, including  Australia,  Canada,  Israel,  12 
AVestern  European,  and  6  Latin  American  coun- 
tries, have  worked  conscientiously  to  help  in  the 
solution  of  this  problem.  This  Committee,  with 
U.S.  assistance  and  leadership,  hopes  to  move 
120,000  from  Europe  in  1953  and  140,000  in  1954. 

Various  countries  have  participated  substan- 
tially in  receiving  migrants  from  Europe.  It  is 
estimated  that  some  350,000  migrants  are  moving 
annually  to  overseas  countries.  Since  1945,  Can- 
ada has  admitted  approximately  775,000  immi- 
grants from  Europe;  Australia  720,000;  Latin 
American  countries  approximately  125,000  an- 
nually. It  is  hoped  that  under  U.S.  leadership 
other  nations  will  further  increase  their  level  of 
immigration  from  Europe. 

The  problem  to  which  S.  1917  is  addressed  is  one 
of  great  concern  both  to  this  Government  and  to 
cur  North  Atlantic  Treaty  allies.  It  is  impera- 
tive to  reduce  the  population  backlog  created  dur- 
ing the  war  and  postwar  years  and  recently  ag- 
gravated by  the  flow  of  escapees  from  countries 


June   75,   J 953 


857 


under  Communist  control.  Serious  economic  and 
social  problems  have  been  created  in  areas  of  over- 
population and  where  refugees  and  escapees  have 
concentrated.  And  not  the  least  serious  is  that 
these  problems  become  a  factor  in  the  gi-owth  of 
communism.  The  result  is  a  drain  on  the  econ- 
omies of  our  Western  European  partners.  De- 
spite outside  assistance,  they  have  had  to  bear  the 
principal  burden  themselves.  West  Germany  and 
other  countries  have  absorbed  a  large  proportion 
of  the  backlog  into  their  own  economies,  but  they 
cannot  handle  this  problem  alone.  Only  through 
adequate  emigration  opportunities  can  the  popu- 
lation pressures  be  reduced  to  manageable  pro- 
portions. 

S.  1917  seeks  to  contribute  to  a  solution  of  two 
problems.  One  relates  to  overpopulation;  the 
other  to  refugees — German  expellees  and  escapees 
from  communism.  I  believe  it  important  to  em- 
phasize that  S.  1917  seeks  to  meet  these  problems 
witliin  tlie  framework  of  the  Immigration  and 
Nationality  Act  of  1952.  The  security  provisions 
of  the  Immigration  and  Nationality  Act  will  be 
fully  complied  with.  The  screening  of  candidates 
for  admission  will  be  fully  as  rigorous  as  that 
provided  under  normal  immigration.  To  protect 
the  American  labor  market  from  undue  over- 
crowding, S.  1917  contains  provisions  going  be- 
yond those  set  foi-th  in  the  Immigi'ation  and 
Nationality  Act.  The  Labor  and  Agi'iculture  De- 
partments will  describe  the  process  by  which  mi- 
grants under  this  program  will  have  been  assured 
of  suitable  employment  prior  to  the  issuance  of  a 
visa  and  will  testify  on  the  impact  of  the  program 
on  the  domestic  economy. 

S.  1917  is  a  temporary  measure  which  does  not 
alter  or  amend  the  Immigration  and  Nationality 
Act.  It  is  designed  to  meet  an  emergency  situa- 
tion through  the  issuance  of  240,000  special-quota 
visas  over  a  2-year  period. 

I  agi'ee  completely  with  you,  INIr.  Chairman, 
when  you  said  at  the  time  you  introduced  S.  1917, 
"All  the  necessary  protections  with  respect  to  se- 
curity are  provided  for  in  this  bill.  In  no  manner 
do  the  requirements  differ  from  those  of  the  Inter- 
nal Security  Act  or  the  security  provisions  of  the 
Immigration  and  Nationality  Act."  You  pointed 
to  another  basic  fact,  which  I  should  like  to  em- 
phasize, when  you  said,  "The  selection  of  immi- 
grants ...  is  to  be  carried  out  exclusively  by 
officials  of  the  U.S.  Government.  Without  ex- 
ception, all  determinations  of  eligibility  and  ad- 
missibility will  be  made  by  officials  of  this 
Government." 

Provision  for  Special-Quota  Visas 

The  program  proposed  by  the  bill  would  enable 
us,  over  a  2-year  period,  to  admit  110,000  escapees 
and  expellees  now  crowded  into  the  Western  Zones 
of  Berlin,  West  Germany,  and  Austria.  S.  1917 
defines  an  "escapee"  as  anyone  who  has  left  the 


Soviet  Union  or  other  Communist,  Communist-  ' 
dominated,  or  Communist-occupied  area  of  Eu- 
rope, and  has  refused  to  return  to  these  areas.  | 
Persecution  or  fear  of  persecution  on  account  of  | 
race,  religion,  or  political  opinions  is  the  estab-  i 
lished  yardstick.     An  "expellee"  is  any  person  of 
German  ethnic  origin,  expelled  from  Eastern  Eu-  , 
rope,  who  is  now  residing  in  Berlin,  Western  Ger- 
many, or  Austria.     Both  in  the  case  of  the  escapee  \ 
and  in  the  case  of  the  expellee,  only  those  who  are  i 
not  firmly  resettled  are  eligible.  i 

Well  over  8,000,000  people — expellees  and  es-  | 
capees  from  communism — have  already  been 
absorbed  by  the  Federal  Kepublic  of  Germany.  | 
Lai-ge  numbers  cannot  be  absorbed,  and  the  prob-  | 
lem  has  been  aggravated  by  a  steady  influx  of  \ 
those  fleeing  west  from  the  oppressive  heel  of  to-  | 
talitarianism.  Similarly  a  flow  of  East  Euro-  i 
pean  escapees  has  added  to  the  problem  in  Austria.  ] 
It  is  toward  these  problems  that  the  admission  i 
of  110,000  escapees  and  expellees  now  in  West  i 
Berlin,  Western  Germany,  and  Austria  is  directed. 

S.  1917  provides  for  the  admission  of  another  i 
15,000  escapees  from  communism  now  in  the  Euro- 
pean territories  of  our  Nato  partners,  including 
Turkey,  and  in  Trieste.  Here  again,  we  would 
be  offering  hope  to  those  who  have  left  their 
homes  and  braved  the  teiTors  of  Communist  fron- 
tiers in  a  perilous  quest  for  freedom. 

The  gi'eat  contributions  which  these  escapees 
have  made  here  and  in  other  Western  nations  are 
well  known  to  this  Committee. 

The  remaining  special-quota  numbers  are  made 
available  to  qualified  persons  from  the  territories 
of  our  Nato  partners,  Italy,  the  Netherlands,  and 
Greece. 

Italy's  struggle  to  meet  her  overpopulation 
problem  is  well  known.  The  President's  letter  of 
April  22  was  received  enthusiastically  by  the 
Foreign  Ministers  at  the  April  meeting  of  the 
North  Atlantic  Council,  offering  as  it  did  hope 
that  help  might  be  in  sight  for  our  common  allies. 
All  members  of  the  North  Atlantic  Council  have 
been  deeply  concerned  with  this  problem,  and  var- 
ious plans  for  increasing  mobility  of  labor  in 
Europe  are  being  explored. 

In  Italy,  the  population  problem  is  not  a  per: 
manent  and  insoluble  one.  It  results  largely  from 
the  policy  of  the  Mussolini  regime  of  discouraging 
normal  emigration;  the  high  birthrate  of  the 
1930's;  the  cessation  of  emigration  during  the 
war;  and  the  influx  of  approximately  one-half 
million  people  from  the  former  Italian  colonies 
and  from  Istria  and  Venezia  Giulia.  In  the  post- 
war period  Italy's  birthrate  has  been  below  that 
of  most  other  West  European  countries.  The 
current  birthrate  is  17.6  per  1,000  population,  com- 
pared, for  example,  with  19.4  for  France  and  24.6 
for  the  United  States.  The  Italian  problem  is 
primarily  one  of  handling  the  accumulated  back- 
log which  that  country,  despite  its  consistent  ef- 
forts, cannot  manage  by  itself. 


858 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


)ther  Countries  Help 

Over  a  period  of  time  we  have  urged  otlier 
friendly  countries  to  help  in  this  situation.  From 
1946  to  1951  approximately  750,000  Italians  have 
,jeen  received  by  these  countries.  Approximately 
'jne-half  million  have  gone  overseas,  while  the 
remainder  have  been  resettled  in  other  European 
countries.  The  adoption  of  S.  1917  would  pro- 
vide further  encouragement  for  others  to  increase 
their  etlorts.  Our  direct  contribution  under  this 
program  would  be  to  admit  75,000  Italians  from 
Italy  and  Trieste  over  a  2-year  period. 

The  bill  luider  discussion  would  also  provide  for 
the  admittance,  during  the  next  2  years,  of  20.000 
from  the  Netherlands.  The  desirable  level  of 
emigration  from  that  country  would  be  about 
60,000  annually.  Indonesian  independence  closed 
a  traditional  outlet  for  Dutch  migration.  Many 
Dutch  families,  settled  in  that  area  for  genera- 
tions, were  repatriated  to  the  Netherlands,  a  coun- 
try badly  devastated  by  the  war  and  already  se- 
riously overcrowded.  Last  winter's  flood  disaster 
dramatized  the  pressing  overpopulation  problem. 
Last  year  about  50,000  emigrated,  primarily  to 
Canada  and  to  Australia.  The  openings  provided 
in  the  United  States  for  20,000  immigi-ants  from 
the  Netherlands  in  the  next  2  years  would  not  only 
be  regarded  as  a  most  friendly  gesture  but  would 
do  nuich  to  strengthen  the  economy  of  one  of  our 
I  staunchest  allies. 

I     Greek  effoi-ts  to  contribute  eifectively  to  our 
Western  defense  against  communism  and  to  main- 
I  tain  decent  living  standards  could  be  defeated  by 
I  the  crushing  weight  of  surplus  population.     Eacla 
I  year  Greece  has  six  times  as  many  new  workers 
entering  the  labor  market  as  Belgium  and  Sweden, 
i  which  have  populations  of  comparable  size.    Lack 
I  of  resources  and  of  arable  land,  war  devastation, 
I  and  Communist  guerrilla  activity,  have  gravely 
I  heightened  the  population  problem.     Emigration 
to  Canada  and  Australia  is  beginning  to  help. 
The  admission  into  the  LTnited  States  of  an  addi- 
tional 20,000  Greeks  would  considerably  ease  the 
burden  on  the  local  economy  and  strengthen  the 
bonds  between  this  country   and  Greece  which 
stands  so  courageously  on.  the  easternmost  flank 
of  our  defenses. 

Mr.  Chairman,  I  thoroughly  agree  with  the 
statement  you  made  when  you  introduced  S.  1917. 
You  said,  "the  bill  now  being  introduced  is  a  good, 
honest  piece  of  proposed  legislation,  carefully 
drawn  to  protect  the  United  States,  and  it  is  drawn 
in  such  a  way  as  to  make  clear  what  it  is  intended 
to  be." 

In  summary,  may  I  say  again  that  the  problems 
dealt  with  in  the  President's  letter  and  in  the 
proposed  legislation  are  most  critical.  They  con- 
cern friendly  countries  confronted  by  acute  popu- 
lation pressures  and  burdened  with  an  increasing 


influx  of  escapees  from  communism.  These 
countries  have  made  magnificent  efforts  to  absorb 
as  many  people  as  possible.  The  United  States 
and  other  countries  of  the  free  world  have  supple- 
mented these  efforts  by  taking  steps  to  assist  in 
alleviating  the  problems.  The  program  provided 
by  S.  1917  would  be  our  most  effective  contribu- 
tion. Moreover,  our  example  in  adopting  this 
legislation  would  encourage  other  countries  to 
increase  their  efforts  and  enlarge  their  progi-ams. 
Altogether  we  would  be  strengthening  the  inter- 
nal soundness  of  our  Nato  allies  and  our  friends 
in  Europe  as  we  continue  in  our  common  efforts 
to  create  effective  defenses  against  threats  of  ex- 
ternal military  aggression.  And,  finally,  gentle- 
men, the  adoption  of  this  legislation  would  offer 
hope  of  a  life  in  freedom  to  many  who  risked 
their  lives  to  flee  from  Communist  tyranny  in 
search  of  liberty. 


THE  DEPARTMENT 


Confirmation 

The  Senate  on  June  4  confirmed  Samuel  C.  Waugh  as 
Assistant  Secretary  for  Economic  Affairs. 


THE  FOREIGN  SERVICE 


Consular  Offices 

Tlie  consulates  at  Hamilton,  Ontario,  and  Victoria, 
British  Columbia,  are  being  closed  to  tlie  public  as  of 
Ma.v  29.  Hamilton  will  officially  close  by  June  30,  while 
Victoria  will  be  officially  closed  by  June  12,  1953. 

The  consular  functions  of  Victoria  are  being  transferred 
to  the  consulate  general  at  Vancouver.  Those  of  Hamil- 
ton are  to  be  divided  between  the  consulate  at  Niagara 
Falls  and  the  consulate  general  at  Toronto  as  foUows : 

Niagara  Falls — Applications  for  visas  from  residents  of 
Hamilton  and  the  area  between  Hamilton  and  Niagara 
I'^alls. 

Toronto — All  consular  functions,  except  visa  work  origi- 
nating in  and  near  Hamilton,  as  stated  above. 


Chiefs  of  Mission  To  Remain 
at  Their  Posts 

The  President  announced  on  June  1  that  the  following 
chiefs  of  mission  are  to  remain  at  their  posts : 

Angus  Ward,  Ambassador  to  Afghanistan 
Paul  C.  Daniels,  Ambassador  to  Ecuador 
Edward  B.  Lawson,  Minister  to  Iceland 
Monnett  B.  Davis,  Ambassador  to  Israel 
Joseph  Flack,  Ambassador  to  Poland 


June    15,    J  953 


859 


June  15,  1953 


Index 


Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  729 


American  Republics 

CUBA:  Air  transport  agreement  (text  of  agree- 
ment)      839 

Asia 

KOREA :  President's  letter  to  Syngman  Bhee  on 

proposed   arm^lstlce 836 

Aviation 

Air  transport   agreement   with   Cuba    (text   of 

agreement) 839 

Claims  and  Property 

U.S.  claimants  to  German  assets  In  Switzerland  .      838 

Congress 

President's  proposal  for  admission  of  European 

migrants  (Smith) 857 

Reorganization  of  foreign-aid  and  information 

programs 849 

Europe 

AUSTRIA:   New  escapee  program 837 

GERMANY:   U.S.    representative    on    Board    for 

Validation  of  German  Bonds 837 

ITALY:  MsA  productivity  allotment  ....  838 
SWITZERLAND:   U.S.     claimants     to     German 

assets 838 


Check  List  of  Department  of  State 
Press  Releases:  June  1-4, 1953 

Releases  may  be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  the 
Special  Assistant  for  Press  Relations,  Department 
of  State,  Washington  25,  D.C. 

Press  releases  issued  prior  to  June  1  which  appear 
in  this  issue  of  the  Buxletin  are  Nos.  288  of  May  26, 
290  of  Hay  26,  and  298  of  May  29. 

Subject 

Dulles :  Report  on  Near  East  trip 
36th  session  of  Ilo 
Pan  American  Railway  Congress 
Friend.^hip  treaty  with  Germany 
U.S.  claims  on  German  assets 
U.S.  holders  of  Mexican  securities 
Exchange  program 
Exchange  program 

♦Not  printed. 

tHeld  for  a  later  issue  of  the  Bulletin. 


No. 

Date 

299 

(i/1 

tsoo 

6/2 

t301 

6/2 

t302 

C/3 

303 

6/3 

t304 

6/3 

*305 

0/4 

*306 

6/4 

Finance 

MsA  productivity  allotment  to  Italy     ....      838 
U.S.  representative  on  Board  for  Validation  of 

German  Bonds 837 

Foreign  Service 

Chiefs  of  mission  remaining  at  their  posts    .     .       859 
Consular  offices 859 

Human  Rights 

A  new  human  rights  action  program    (Lord), 

(texts  of  U.S.  draft  resolutions)      ....      842 

Immigration  and  Naturalization 

President's  proposal  for  admission  of  European 

migrants 857 

Mutual  Security 

MsA  productivity  allotment  to  Italy 838 

Near  and  Middle  East 

Report  on  the  Near  East  (Dulles) 831 

Presidential  Documents 

Reorganization  of  foreign-aid  and  information 

programs 849 

Refugees  and  Displaced  Persons 

New  escapee  program  in  Austria  (Thompson)   .      837 

State,  Department  of 

Confirmation    (Waugh) 859 

Department  announcement  on  President's  reor- 
ganization   actions 850 

Treaty  Information 

Air   transport   agreement   with   Cuba    (text   of 

agreement) 839 

United  Nations 

A  new  human  rights   action  program   (Lord), 

(texts  of  U.S.  draft  resolutions)      ....       842 

President's  letter  to  Syngman  Rhee  on  proposed 

Korean  armistice 835 

Name  Index 

Dulles,  Secretary 831 

Eisenhower,  President 835, 849 

Hartman,   Douglas  W 837 

Lord,  Mrs.  Oswald  B 842 

Rhee,  Syngman 835 

Smith,  Walter  Bedell 857 

Thompson,  Llewellyn 837 

Waugh,  Samuel  C 859 


U.   S.  GOVERNMENT  PRINTINS  OFFICE;  1953 


J/i€/  ^eha^t77tenl/  £^ t/tai& 


d.  XXVIII,  No.  730 
June  22,  1953 


*'-*TE3    O* 


NATIONAL  SECURITY  AND  THE  DEFENSE  OF 

FREEDOM  •  Address  by  the  President 863 

SUSTAINING     NATO'S      OBJECTIVES       •       by    General 

Matthew  B.  Ridguiay »"" 

TEXT  OF  AGREEMENT  ON  PRISONERS  OF  WAR     .    866 

THE    PIVOTAL    CONFLICT    DOMINATING    THE 

WORLD  •  by  Under  Secretary  Smith 874 

PROGRESS    TOWARD    MIGRATION    COMMITTEE'S 

GOALS  •  Article  by  George  L.  Warren 879 


For  index  see  back  cover 


Boston  Public  Library 
Superintendent  of  Documents 

JUL  14  1953 


,JAe  z/^eha/yl^e/ivt  jO^  t/^^    V^  W  x  J.  \D  LXJ.  1 


Vol. XXVIII,  No.  730  •  Publication  5094 
]iine  22,  1953 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents 

U.S.  Qovernment  Printing  Office 

Washington  2S,  D.O. 

Prick: 

62  Issues,  domestic  $7.50,  foreign  $10.25 
Single  copy,  20  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has 
been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Budget  (January  22,  1962). 

Note:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrlKhled  and  items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  Depaetmknt 
or  State  Bclletin  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  BULLETIN, 
a  weekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publications, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  with  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  work  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETIN  includes 
selected  press  releases  on  foreign  pol- 
icy issued  by  the  White  House  and 
the  Department,  and  statements  and 
addresses  made  by  the  President  and 
by  the  Secretary  of  State  and  other 
officers  of  the  Department,  as  well  as 
special  articles  on  various  phases  of 
international  affairs  and  the  func- 
tions of  the  Department.  Informa- 
tion is  included  concerning  treaties 
and  international  agreements  to 
which  tlie  United  States  is  or  may 
become  a  party  and  treaties  of  gen- 
eral international  interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
well  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  internatioruil  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


National  Security  and  the  Defense  of  Freedom 


Address  hy  the  President ' 


I  thank  you  sincerely  for  the  honor  of  your 
invitation  to  be  with  you  today. 

Yours  is  one  of  our  Nation's  most  distinguished 
and  enterprising  organizations.  You  are  young 
and  responsible  people  with  impressive  careers  and 
achievements  already  recorded  to  your  credit.  My 
own  life  has  been  spent  with  America's  young 
people.  The  grave  decisions  that  I  have  been 
compelled  to  make  have  been  vindicated  by  their 
skill,  their  sense  of  responsibility,  and  their  sac- 
rifice. My  faith  in  them  is  my  unbounded  faith 
in  America  itself. 

Because  you  are  both  young  and  responsible, 
you  know  what  is  your  greatest  responsibility  of 
all — tomorrow — the  whole  future  of  freedom. 

In  the  minds  of  all  of  you— as  in  my  own 
mind — is  a  long  list  of  critical  subjects  confront- 
ing our  people  today.  I  wish  I  could  discuss  all 
of  them  with  you— the  problems  of  healthy  foreign 
trade ;  the  regulation  of  Government  expenditures ; 
the  achieving  of  a  more  just  tax  structure;  the 
development  of  sound  agricultural  programs ;  the 
great  work  to  be  done  in  the  fields  of  education, 
health,  and  welfare. 

There  is,  however,  one  matter  that  overshadows 
all  of  these.  It  is  the  constant,  controlling  con- 
sideration in  our  national  life  today.  It  is — our 
Nation's  security. 

Quickly  we  can  see  how  this  one  issue  effectively 
rules  all  others.  It  alone  comes  close  to  fixing  the 
level  of  Government  budgets — when  two  of  every 
three  dollars  spent  by  our  Federal  Government  go 
to  defense  purposes.  It  thereby  almost  auto- 
matically sets  the  requirements  for  Federal  taxes. 
It  directly  affects  the  welfare  of  our  farms,  so  de- 
pendent upon  wide  opportunities  for  export.  And 
it  is  intimately  bound  up  with  foreign  trade — 
for  our  own  imports  of  such  critical  products  as 


'  Made  at  the  annual  convention  of  the  National  Junior 
Chamber  of  Commerce,  Minneapolis,  Minn.,  on  June  10 
and  released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  on  the  same 
date. 

June  22,  1953 


nickel,  and  cobalt,  and  mica  are  essential  to  our 
national  security. 

It  is  no  wonder  that  our  national  security  is  so 
vast  a  matter— for  the  struggle  in  which  freedom 
today  is  engaged  is  quite  literally  a  total  and  uni- 
versal struggle.  It  engages  every  aspect  of  our 
lives.  It  is  waged  in  every  arena  in  which  a 
challenged  civilization  must  fight  to  live. 

It  is  a  military  struggle— on  the  battlefields  of 
Korea,  of  Indochina,  of  Malaya. 

It  is  an  economic  struggle — in  which  the  equiva- 
lent of  a  lost  battle  can  be  suffered  in  a  ruined 
rice  crop  in  Asia,  or  in  the  lagging  of  a  critical 
production  line  in  America. 

It  is  a  political  struggle — speaking  at  the  con- 
ference tables  of  the  United  Nations,  in  the  daily 
diplomatic  exchanges  that  flood  the  cable  wires 
and  telephone  lines  of  the  world. 

It  is  a  scientific  struggle — in  which  atomic- 
energy  plants  and  colossal  research  projects  can 
produce  terrible  wonders  matching  in  fateful  effect 
the  inventions  of  the  wheel  or  of  gunpowder. 

It  is  an  intellectual  struggle — for  the  press  and 
the  radio,  every  spoken  and  printed  word,  can 
either  inspire  or  weaken  men's  faith  in  freedom. 

It  is  a  spiritual  struggle — for  one  of  commu- 
nism's basic  assumptions  about  the  nature  of  men 
is  that  they  are  incapable  of  ruling  themselves, 
incapable  of  attaining  the  spiritual  standards  and 
strength  to  solve  national  problems  when  these  re- 
quire voluntary  personal  sacrifice  for  the  common 
good.  This  is  the  Communist's  justification  for 
regimentation.  All  this  we  deny.  And  we  must 
seek  in  our  churches,  our  schools,  our  homes,  and 
our  daily  lives  the  clearness  of  mind  and  strong- 
ness  of  heart  to  guard  the  chance  to  live  in 
freedom. 

For  this  whole  struggle,  in  the  deepest  sense, 
is  waged  neither  for  land,  nor  for  food,  nor  for 
power — but  for  the  soul  of  man  himself. 

These  are  real,  tough  facts — not  mere  poetic 
fancies.  They  are  facts  as  true  and  as  compelling 
as  any  airj)lane  production  schedules,  or  the  fire- 

863 


power  of  our  guns,  or  the  armor  of  our  tanks,  or 
tlie  speed  of  our  jets. 

I  cannot  presume  today  to  speak  of  all  aspects 
of  so  vast,  so  all-embracing,  so  total  a  struggle — 
nor  of  all  the  truths  that  must,  I  believe,  guide  us 
steadfastly.  I  wish  to  speak  simply  of  two  of  these 
truths. 

The  first  is  this:  Our  militai-y  strength  and  our 
economic  strength  are  truly  one — and  neither  can 
sensibly  be  purchased  at  the  price  of  destroying 
the  other. 

The  second  is  this :  This  Nation  and  all  nations 
defending  freedom  everywhere  in  the  world  are 
one  in  their  common  need  and  tlieir  common 
cause — and  none  can  sanely  seek  security  alone. 

The  first  of  these  truths  concerns  our  military 
posture  of  defense.  The  second  concerns  our  whole 
concept  and  conduct  of  world  affairs.  Let  us  con- 
sider each  of  them  briefly,  for  the  mere  assertion 
of  a  general  truth  proves  nothing  and  convinces 
no  one. 


An  Age  of  Peril 

The  central  problem  of  our  military  defense  is 
not  merely  to  become  strong — but  to  stay  strong. 
The  reason  is  obvious ;  we  cannot  count  upon  any 
enemy  striking  us  at  a  given,  ascertainable  mo- 
ment. We  live,  as  I  have  said  before,  not  in  an 
instant  of  peril  but  in  an  age  of  peril — a  time  of 
tension  and  watchfulness. 

The  defense  against  this  peril,  then,  must  be 
carefully  planned  and  steadfastly  maintained. 
It  cannot  be  a  mere  repetition  of  today's  reflex  to 
yesterday's  crisis.  It  cannot  be  a  thing  of  frenzies 
and  alarms.  It  must  be  a  thing  of  thought  and 
order  and  efficiency. 

Precisely  such  a  defense  is  now  being  built  for 
our  country.  I  personally  believe  it  does  several 
things.  It  soberly  promises  more  efficient  military 
production.  It  realistically  assesses  our  long- 
term  economic  capacity.  It  demands  the  elimina- 
tion of  luxury,  waste,  and  duplication  in  all  mili- 
tary activity.  And  it  allocates  funds  as  justly  and 
wisely  as  possible  among  the  three  armed  services. 

Concretely :  these  defense  plans  allocate  60  cents 
out  of  every  defense  dollar  to  air  power.  With 
the  enactment  of  pending  legislation  our  Air 
Force  will  have  available  for  its  expenditure  more 
than  40  billion  dollars.  By  mid-1954  its  strength 
will  total  114  wings.  At  the  same  time  the  air 
arm  of  the  Navy  will  command  a  full  half  of  all 
the  funds  available  to  the  entire  naval  establish- 
ment. The  Navy  and  Marine  air  arms  will  alone 
total  almost  10,000  planes.  All  this,  I  believe, 
promises  both  powerful  air  defense  and  a  no  less 
powerful  deterrent  to  any  would-be  aggressor. 

Greater  efficiency  in  production  will  give  us  less 
costly  production  schedules — and  something  even 
more  vital :  fewer  planes  "on  order,"  more  planes 
in  the  air.  Today,  typical  production  schedules 
require  26  months  for  a  B-47,  34  months  for  a 


B-52.  We  believe  that  such  schedules  can  be  re- 
duced to  something  like  18  months.  I  repeat: 
that  will  mean  fewer  planes  in  theory,  more  planes 
in  fact — more  swiftly  and  less  expensively. 

How  many  planes— how  many  divisions — how 
great  a  Navy — should  we  have?  Such  (juestions 
are,  these  days,  earnestly  and  fervently  debated 
by  advocates  of  different  theories,  as  well  as  a  fair 
number  of  self-appointed  experts.  All  this  is 
healthy  and  proper  enough — provided  we  do  not 
lose  sight  of  certain  elemental  facts. 

First:  We  must  remember  always  that  reason- 
able defense  posture  is  not  won  by  juggling  magic 
numbei's — even  with  an  air  of  great  authority. 
There  is  no  wonderfully  sure  number  of  planes  or 
.ships  or  divisions — or  billions  of  dollars — that  can 
automatically  guarantee  security.  The  most  un- 
compromising advocates  of  such  magic  numbers 
have  themselves  changed  their  calculations  almost 
from  year  to  year.  Such  changes  are  reasonable, 
as  technological  advance  requires.  But  the  in- 
sistence that  the  latest  change  is  final,  definitive, 
and  unchallengeable — that  is  not  reasonable. 

Second :  We  must  remember  that  all  our  plans 
must  realistically  take  account — not  just  this  year 
but  every  year — of  colossal  and  continuing  techno- 
logical change.  We  are  living  in  a  time  of  revo- 
lution in  military  science.  Today  25  aircraft 
equipped  with  modern  weapons  can,  in  a  single 
attack,  visit  upon  an  enemy  as  much  explosive 
violence  as  was  hurled  at  Germany  by  our  entire 
air  effort  throughout  4  years  of  World  War  II. 

And  a  third  serious  truth  about  our  military  de- 
fense is  this:  there  is  no  such  thing  as  maximum 
security  short  of  total  mobilization.  This  would 
mean  regimentation  of  the  worker,  the  farmer,  the 
businessman — allocation  of  materials — control  of 
wages  and  prices — drafting  of  every  able-bodied 
citizen.  It  would  mean,  in  short,  all  the  grim^ 
paraphernalia  of  the  garrison  state. 

This  would  do  more  damage  than  merely  to 
strain  the  economic  fabric  of  America.  It  would — 
if  long  sustained — imperil  the  very  liberties  we 
are  striving  to  defend.  And  it  would  ignore  that 
most  elemental  truth — the  fact  that  this  total 
struggle  cannot  be  won  by  guns  alone. 

I  do  not  believe — in  a  word— that  we  can  wisely 
subscribe  to  what  I  would  call  the  "all-out"  mili- 
tary theory  of  defense — ignoring  the  other  de- 
fenses we  must  build  and  hold. 


The  "Fortress"  Theory 

There  is  another  theory  of  defense — another 
oversimplified  concept — which  I  believe  equally 
misleading  and  dangerous.  It  is  what  we  might 
call  the  "fortress"  theory  of  defense. 

Advocates  of  this  theory  ask :  Why  cannot  the 
strongest  nation  in  the  world — our  country — stand 
by  itself  ?  What  does  the  United  Nations  matter  ? 
And  particularly  in  Asia,  where  so  many  of  our 
sons  have  died  in  freedom's  name,  why  cannot  we 


864 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


make  our  own  decisions,  fight  and  stand  as  only 
we  ourselves  may  choose  ? 

There  are  many  answers.  I  shall  give  but  a 
few. 

A  total  struggle — let  us  never  forget  it — calls 
for  a  total  defense.  As  there  is  no  weapon  too 
small — no  arena  too  remote — to  be  ignored,  so 
there  is  no  free  nation  too  humble  to  be  forgotten. 
All  of  us  have  learned — first  from  the  onslaught  of 
Nazi  aggression,  then  from  Communist  aggres- 
sion-— that  all  free  nations  must  stand  together, 
or  they  shall  fall  separately.  Again  and  again  we 
must  remind  ourselves  that  this  is  a  matter  not 
only  of  political  principle  but  of  economic  neces- 
sity. It  involves  our  need  for  markets  for  our 
agricultural  and  industrial  products,  our  need  to 
receive  in  return  from  the  rest  of  the  world  such 
essentials  as  manganese  and  cobalt,  tin,  and  tung- 
sten. 

This  essential,  indispensable  unity  means  com- 
promise— always  witliin  a  clearly  defined,  clearly 
understood  framework  of  principle.  We  know 
the  need  of  compromise,  in  harmony  with  basic 
principles,  within  our  own  Nation.  It  is  the  es- 
sence of  the  democratic  process.  We  should  not 
be  surprised  that  it  applies  just  as  vitally  among 
nations — in  the  wide  community  of  the  world's 
free  peoples. 

How — where — can  there  be  retreat  from  this 
unity  ?  Surrender  Asia  ?  That  would  mean  leav- 
ing a  vast  portion  of  the  population  of  the  entire 
world  to  be  mobilized  by  the  forces  of  aggression. 
Surrender  Europe  ?  That  would  mean  more  than 
doubling  the  industrial  power  of  those  same  forces. 

Who  is  there  who  thinks  that  the  strength  of 
America  is  so  great — its  burdens  so  easy,  its  future 
so  secure — that  it  could  make  so  generous  a  gift  to 
those  challenging  our  very  lives? 

There  is  no  such  thing  as  partial  unity.  That  is 
a  contradiction  in  terms. 

We  camiot  select  those  areas  of  the  globe  in 
which  our  policies  or  wishes  may  differ  from  our 
allies — build  political  fences  around  these  areas — 
and  say  to  our  allies :  "We  shall  do  what  we  want 
here — and  where  you  do  what  we  want,  there  and 
only  there  shall  we  favor  unity."  That  is  not 
unity.  It  is  dictation.  And  it  is  not  the  way 
free  men  associate. 

We  all  hear — in  this  connection — a  good  deal  of 
unhappy  murmuring  about  the  United  Nations. 
It  is  easy  to  understand  the  dismay  of  many. 
None  of  us  is  above  irritation  and  frustration  over 


the  seemingly  vain  and  tedious  processes  of  politi- 
cal discourse  in  times  of  great  crisis. 

But  none  of  us  can  rightly  forget  that  neither 
the  world — nor  the  United  Nations — is  or  can  be 
made  in  a  single  image  of  one  nation's  will  or  idea. 
The  fact  is  that  from  its  foundation  the  United 
Nations  lias  seemed  to  be  two  distinct  things  to 
the  two  worlds  divided  by  the  Iron  Curtain.  To 
the  Communist  world  it  has  seemed  a  convenient 
sounding  board  for  their  propaganda,  a  weapon  to 
be  exploited  in  spreading  disunity  and  confusion. 
To  the  free  world  it  has  seemed  that  it  should  be 
a  constructive  forum  for  free  discussion  of  the 
world's  problems,  an  effective  agency  for  helping 
to  solve  those  problems  peacefully. 

The  truth  is  that  even  if  the  United  Nations 
were  to  conform  to  the  concept  held  by  the  free 
nations,  it  would  still  be  bound  to  show  infinite 
variety  of  opinion,  sharp  clashes  of  debate,  slow 
movement  to  decision.  For  all  this  is  little  more 
than  a  reflection  of  the  state  of  the  world  itself. 
An  image  of  perfect  symmetry  would  be  a  dis- 
torted image — the  false  creation  of  some  nation's 
or  some  bloc's  power-politics.  And  perhaps  the 
greatest  worth  of  the  United  Nations  is  precisely 
this :  It  holds  up  a  mirror  in  which  the  world  can 
see  its  true  self.  And  what  should  we  want  to 
see  in  such  a  mirror  but  the  whole  truth — at  such  a 
time  of  total  struggle? 

There  are — as  you  see — certain  common  de- 
nominators to  all  that  I  have  said,  certain  constant 
thoughts  I  believe  to  be  consistently  relevant  in 
facing  our  tomorrow.  We  must  see  clearly  that 
all  the  problems  before  us — from  farm  exports  to 
balanced  budgets,  from  taxes  to  the  vital  resources 
for  our  industry — all  are  dependent  on  our  Na- 
tion's security.  And  in  this  real  way  freedom's 
great  struggle  touches  all  of  us  alike — farmer  and 
businessman,  worker  and  student,  pastor  and 
teacher. 

We  know  this  to  be  true  because  we  know  that 
there  is  but  one  struggle  for  freedom — in  the 
market  place  and  in  the  university,  on  the  battle- 
field and  beside  the  assembly  line. 

We  know  that  strength  means  being  strong  in 
all  these  ways  and  places. 

We  know  that  unity  means  comradeship, 
patience,  and  compromise  among  all  free  nations. 

And  we  know  that  only  with  strength  and  with 
unity — is  the  future  of  freedom  assured.  And 
freedom,  now  and  for  the  future,  is  our  goal ! 


June  22,   J953 


865 


Text  of  Agreement  on  Prisoners  of  War 


Folloioing  is  the  text  of  the  agreement  on  prisoners 
of  tear  which  icas  signed  at  Panmunjoni  on  June  8  by  Lt. 
Gen.  William  K.  Harrison,  Jr.,  senior  delegate  of  the 
V.  N.  Command  delegation,  and  General  Ifam  II,  senior 
Communist  delegate: 

Within  two  months  after  the  armistice  agreement  be- 
comes effective  both  sides  shall,  without  offering  any 
hindrance,  directly  repatriate  and  hand  over  in  groups  all 
those  prisoners  of  war  in  its  custody  who  insist  on  repat- 
riation to  the  side  to  which  they  belonged  at  the  time  of 
capture.  Repatriation  shall  be  accomplished  in  accord- 
ance with  the  related  provisions  of  Article  III  of  the  draft 
armistice  agreement.  In  order  to  expedite  the  repatria- 
tion process  of  such  personnel,  each  side  shall,  prior  to 
the  signing  of  the  armistice  agreement,  exchange  the  total 
numbers,  by  nationalities,  of  personnel  to  be  repatriated 
direct.  Each  group  delivered  to  the  other  side  shall  be 
accompanied  by  rosters,  prepared  by  nationality,  to  in- 
clude name,  rank  (if  any)  and  Internment  or  military 
serial  number. 

Both  sides  agree  to  hand  over  all  those  remaining  pris- 
oners of  war  who  are  not  directly  repatriated  to  the 
Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission  for  disposition 
in  accordance  with  the  following  provisions : 

Tei!ms  of  Reference  for  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation 
Commission 

/,  General 

1.  In  order  to  ensure  that  all  prisoners  of  war  have  the 
opportunity  to  exercise  their  right  to  be  repatriated  fol- 
lowing an  armistice,  Sweden,  Switzerland,  I'oland,  Czecho- 
slovakia and  India  sliall  each  be  requested  by  both  sides 
to  appoint  a  member  to  a  neutral  nations  repatriation 
commission  wliic-h  shall  be  estal)lished  to  take  custody  in 
Korea  of  those  prisoners  of  war  who,  while  in  the  custody 
of  the  detaining  powers,  have  not  exercised  their  right 
to  be  repatriated.  The  neutral  nations  repatriation  com- 
mission shall  establish  its  headquarters  within  the  de- 
militarized zone  in  the  vicinity  of  Panmun.iom,  and  shall 
station  subordinate  bodies  of  the  same  composition  as  the 
neutral  nations  repatriation  commission  at  those  locations 
at  wliich  the  repatriation  commission  assumes  custody  of 
prisoners  of  war.  Representatives  of  both  sides  shall  be 
permitted  to  observe  the  operations  of  the  repatriation 
commission  and  its  subordinate  bodies  to  include  expla- 
nations and  interviews. 

2.  Sufficient  armed  forces  and  any  other  operating  per- 
sonnel required  to  assist  the  neutral  nations  repatriation 
commission  in  carrying  out  its  functions  and  responsi- 
bilities shall  be  provided  exclusively  by  India,  whose  rep- 
resentative shall  be  the  umpire  in  accordance  with  the 
provisions  of  Article  132  of  the  Geneva  Convention,  and 
shall  also  l)e  chairman  and  executive  agent  of  the  neutral 
nations  repatriatifm  commission.  Representatives  from 
each  of  the  other  4  powers  shall  l)e  allowed  staff  assistants 
in  equal  imniber  not  to  exceed  fifty  (50)  each.  When 
an.v  of  the  representatives  of  the  neutral  nations  is  absent 
for  some  reason,  that  representative  shall  designate  an 
alternate  representative  of  his  own  nationality  to  exercise 
his  functions  and  authority.  The  arms  of  all  personnel 
provided  for  in  this  paragraph  shall  be  limited  to  military 
police  type  small  arms. 


3.  No  force  or  threat  of  force  shall  be  used  against  the 
prisoners  of  war  specified  in  paragraph  1  above  to  prevent 
or  effect  their  repatriation,  and  no  violence  to  their  persons 
or  aft'ront  to  their  dignity  or  self-respect  shall  be  per- 
mitted in  any  manner  for  any  purpose  whatsoever  (but 
see  paragraph  7  below).  This  duty  is  enjoined  on  and 
entrusted  to  the  neutral  nations  repatriation  commission. 
This  commission  shall  ensure  that  prisoners  of  war  shall 
at  all  times  be  treated  humanely  in  accordance  with  the 
specific  provisions  of  the  Geneva  Convention,  and  with  the 
general  spirit  of  that  convention. 

//,  Custody  of  prisoners  of  icar 

4.  All  prisoners  of  war  who  have  not  exercised  their 
right  of  repatriation  following  the  effective  date  of  the 
armistice  agreement  shall  be  released  from  the  military 
control  and  from  the  custody  of  the  detaining  side  as  soon 
as  practicable  and,  in  all  cases,  within  sixty  ((iO)  days 
subsequent  to  the  effective  date  of  the  armistice  agree- 
ment to  the  neutral  nations  repatriation  commission  at 
locations  in  Korea  to  be  designated  by  the  detaining  side. 

5.  At  the  time  the  neutral  nations  repatriation  com- 
mission assumes  control  of  the  prisoner  of  war  installa- 
tions, the  military  forces  of  the  detaining  side  shall  be 
withdrawn  therefrom,  so  that  the  locations  specified  in 
the  preceding  paragraph  shall  be  taken  over  completely 
by  the  armed  forces  of  India. 

6.  Notwithstanding  the  provisions  of  paragraph  5  above, 
the  detaining  side  shall  have  the  responsibility  for  main- 
taining and  ensuring  security  and  order  in  the  areas 
around  the  locations  where  the  prisoners  of  war  are  in 
custody  and  for  preventing  and  restraining  any  armed 
forces  (including  irregular  armed  forces)  in  the  area 
under  its  control  from  any  acts  of  disturbance  and  intru- 
sion against  the  locations  where  the  prisoners  of  war  are 
in  custody. 

7.  Notwithstanding  the  provisions  of  paragraph  3  above, 
nothing  in  this  agreement  shall  be  construed  as  derogating 
from  the  authority  of  the  neutral  nations  repatriation 
commission  to  exercise  its  legitimate  functions  and  re- 
sponsibilities for  the  control  of  the  prisoners  of  war  under 
its  temporary  jurisdiction. 

///,  Explanation 

8.  The  neutral  nations  repatriation  commission,  after 
having  received  and  taken  into  custody  all  those  prisoners 
of  war  who  have  not  exercised  their  right  to  be  repatri- 
ated, shall  immediately  make  arrangements  so  that  within 
ninety  (90)  days  after  the  neutral  nations  repatriation 
commission  takes  over  the  custody,  the  nations  to  which 
the  prisoners  of  war  belong  shall  have  freedom  and  facili- 
ties to  send  representatives  to  the  locations  where  such 
prisoners  of  war  are  in  custody  to  explain  to  all  the 
prisoners  of  war  depending  upon  these  nations  their  rights 
anil  to  inform  them  of  any  matters  relating  to  their  return 
to  their  homelands,  particularly  of  their  full  freedom  to 
return  lu)me  to  lead  a  peaceful  life,  under  the  following 
provisions : 

A.  The  number  of  such  explaining  representatives 
shall  not  exceed  seven  (7)  per  thousand  prisoners  of 
war  held  in  custody  by  the  neutral  nations  repatriation 
commission;  and  the  minimum  authorized  shall  not  be 
less  than  a  total  of  five  (5). 

P..  The   hours   during   which   the   explaining   repre- 


866 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


sentatives  sliall  have  access  to  the  piisouers  shall  be  as 
determined  by  the  neutral  nations  repatriation  commis- 
sion, and  generally  in  accord  with  Article  53  of  the 
Geneva  Convention  relative  to  the  treatment  of  prisoners 
of  war. 

C.  All  explanations  and  interviews  shall  be  conducted 
1  in  the  presence  of  a  representative  of  each  member  nation 
I'l  of  the  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission  and  a 
representative  from  the  detaining  side ; 

II.  Additional  provisions  governing  the  explanation 
work  shall  be  prescribed  by  the  Neutral  Nations  Repatri- 
ation Commission,  and  will  be  designed  to  employ  the 
principles  enumerated  in  paragraph  3  above  and  in  this 
paragraph ; 

E.  The  explaining  representatives,  while  engaging  in 
their  work,  shall  be  allowed  to  bring  with  them  neces- 
sary facilities  and  personnel  for  wireless  communica- 
tions. The  number  of  communications  personnel  shall 
be  limited  to  one  team  per  location  at  which  explaining 
representatives  are  in  residence,  except  in  the  event  that 
all  prisoners  of  war  are  concentrated  in  one  location,  in 
which  case,  two  (2)  teams  shall  be  permitted.  Each 
team  shall  consist  of  not  more  than  six  (6)  communica- 
tions personnel. 

9.  Prisoners  of  war  in  its  custody  shall  have  freedom 
and  facilities  to  make  representations  and  communications 
to  the  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission  and  to 
representatives  and  subordinate  bodies  of  the  Neutral  Na- 
tions Repatriation  CommLssion  and  to  inform  them  of 
their  desires  on  any  matter  concerning  the  prisoners  of 
war  themselves,  in  accordance  with  arrangements  made 
for  the  purpose  by  the  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation 
Commission. 

IV,  Disposition  of  prisoners  of  tear 

10.  Any  prisoner  of  war  who,  while  in  the  custody  of 
the  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission,  decides  to 
exercise  the  right  of  repatriation,  shall  make  an  applica- 
tion requesting  repatriation  to  a  body  consisting  of  a 
representative  of  each  member  nation  of  the  Neutral 
Nations  Repatriation  Commission.  Once  such  an  applica- 
tion is  made,  it  shall  be  considered  immediately  by  the 
Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission  or  one  of  its 
subordinate  bodies  so  as  to  determine  immediately  by 
majority  vote  the  validity  of  such  application.  Once  such 
an  application  is  made  to  and  validated  by  the  Commission 
or  one  of  its  subordinate  bodies,  the  prisoner  of  war 
concerned  shall  immediately  be  transferred  to  and  ac- 
commodated in  the  tents  set  up  for  those  who  are  ready 
to  be  repatriated.  Thereafter,  he  shall,  while  still  in  the 
custody  of  the  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission, 
be  delivered  forthwith  to  the  prisoner  of  war  exchange 
point  at  I'anmunjom  for  repatriation  under  the  procedure 
prescribed  in  the  armistice  agreement. 

11.  At  the  expiration  of  ninety  (90)  days  after  the 
transfer  of  custody  of  the  prisoners  of  war  to  the  Neutral 
Nations  Repatriation  Commission,  access  of  representa- 
tives to  captured  personnel  as  provided  for  in  paragraph 
8  above,  shall  terminate,  and  the  question  of  disposition 
of  the  prisoners  of  war  who  have  not  exercised  their 
right  to  be  repatriated  shall  be  submitted  to  the  political 
conference  recommended  to  be  convened  in  paragraph  60, 
draft  armistice  agreement,  which  shall  endeavor  to  settle 
this  question  within  thirty  (30)  days,  during  which  period 
the  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission  shall  con- 
tinue to  retain  custody  of  those  prisoners  of  war.  The 
Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission  shall  declare 
the  relief  from  the  prisoner  of  war  status  to  civilian 
status  of  any  prisoners  of  war  who  have  not  exerci.sed 
their  right  to  be  repatriated  and  for  whom  no  other 
disposition  has  been  agreed  to  by  the  political  conference 
within  one  hundred  and  twenty  (120)  days  after  the 
Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission  has  assumed 
their  custody.  Thereafter,  according  to  the  application 
of  each  individual,  those  who  choose  to  go  to  Neutral 
Nations  shall  be  assisted  by  the  Neutral  Nations  Repatria- 
tion  Commission  and   the  Red   Cross   Society   of  India. 


Prime  Minister  Nehru  Congratulates 
President  on  Prisoner  Agreement 

27ic  summer  White  House  at  Custer  State  Park, 
S.  Dak.,  on  June  12  released  an  exchange  of  messages 
heticeen  the  President  and  Prime  Minister  Nehru  of  In- 
dia. The  latter's  message  had  been  transmitted  to  Sec- 
retary Dulles  on  June  9  hy  the  Indian  Ambassador, 
Gaganvihari  Mehta,  who  then  transmitted  the  President's 
reply  to  Prime  Minister  Nehru  in  London. 

Prime  Minister  Nehru's  Message 

Please  convey  to  President  Eisenhower  my  congratula- 
tions on  the  signing  of  the  P.  O.  W.  Agreement  at  Pan- 
muujom.  The  United  States  under  the  leadership  of  the 
President  has  played  a  wise  and  generous  part  in  these 
negotiations  which  have  resulted  in  an  Agreement  and 
I  should  like  to  offer  my  respectful  congratulations  to 
President  Eisenhower  for  liis  leadership  at  this  critical 
moment.  I  earnestly  trust  that  this  Agreement  will  lead 
to  peace  not  only  in  the  Far  East  but  elsewhere. 

Jawahaelal  Neheu 

President's  Reply  of  June  12 

My  dear  Mr.  Prime  Minister  : 

I  thank  you  for  your  message  received  June  9  regarding 
the  prisoner  of  war  agreement  reached  at  Panmunjom. 
I  greatly  appreciate  your  words  regarding  the  part  which 
the  United  States  has  played  in  this  matter.  It  is  my 
earnest  hope  that  this  agreement  will  speedily  lead  to 
an  armistice  and  just  peace  in  Korea,  and  to  a  relaxing 
of  world  tensions.  India's  participation  in  the  work  of 
the  Repatriation  Commission  will  mark  a  further  signifi- 
cant contribution  toward  these  ends. 
Sincerely  yours, 

DwiGHT  D.  Eisenhower 

This  operation  shall  be  completed  within  thirty  (30) 
days,  and  upon  its  completion,  the  Neutral  Nations 
Repatriation  Commission  shall  immediately  cease  its 
functions  and  declare  its  dissolution.  After  the  dissolu- 
tion of  the  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission, 
whenever  and  wherever  any  of  those  above-mentioned 
civilians  who  have  been  relieved  from  the  prisoner  of 
war  status  desire  to  return  to  their  fatherlands,  the 
authorities  of  the  localities  where  they  are  shall  be  re- 
sponsible for  assisting  them  in  returning  to  their 
fatherlands. 

V,  Bed  Cross  visitation 

12.  Essential  Red  Cross  service  for  prisoners  of  war 
in  custody  of  the  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commis- 
sion shall  be  provided  by  India  in  accordance  with  regula- 
tions issued  by  the  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation 
Commission. 

VI,  Press  coverage 

13.  The  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission  shall 
insure  freedom  of  the  press  and  other  news  media  in 
observing  the  entire  operation  as  enumerated  herein.  In 
accordance  with  procedures  to  be  established  by  the 
Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission. 

VII,  Logistical  support  for  prisoners  of  ivar 

14.  Each  side  shall  provide  logistical  support  for  the 
prisoners  of  war  in  the  area  under  its  military  control, 
delivering  required  support  to  the  Neutral  Nations  Re- 
patriation Commission  at  an  agreed  delivery  point  in  the 
vicinity  of  each  prisoner  of  war  installation. 

1.5.  The  cost  of  repatriating  prisoners  of  war  to  the 
exchange  point  at  Panmunjom  shall  be  borne  by  the 
detaining  side  and  the  cost  from  the  exchange  point  by 
the  side  on  which  said  prisoners  depend,  in  accordance 
with  Article  118  of  the  Geneva  Convention. 

16.  The  Red  Cross  Society  of  India  shall  be  responsl- 


June  22,    1953 


867 


The  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission 

Press  release  311  dated  June  10 

In  compliance  icith  the  terms  of  the  Prisoner-of- 
War  Agreement  reached  at  Punmunjom  on  June  S 
the  United  States,  actiny  in  hehalf  of  the  U.N.  Com- 
mand, on  June  9  transmitted  to  the  Governments 
of  Sweden.  Switzerland,  Poland,  Czechoslovakia, 
and  India,  through  their  Missions  in  Washington, 
an  Aide-Memoire  askino  if  theij  were  prepared  to 
serve  on  the  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commis- 
sion envisioned  hy  that  Agreement. 

The  text  of  the  Aide-Mfmoire  follows: 

The  Department  of  State  calls  the  attention  of 

the  Government  of  to  an  agreement  In 

regard  to  prisoners  of  war  signed  at  Panmunjom  in 
Korea  on  June  8,  1953  between  the  United  Nations 
Command  and  the  Communist  delegations. 

This  agreement  establishes  a  Neutral  Nations  Re- 
patriation Commission  and  sets  forth  the  terms  of 
reference  of  this  Commission.  The  introductory 
sentence  of  the  terms  of  reference  provides  : 

"In  order  to  ensure  that  all  prisoners  of  war 
have  the  opportunity  to  exercise  their  right  to  be 
repatriated  following  an  armistice,  Sweden, 
Switzerland,  I'oland.  Czechoslovakia  and  India 
shall  each  be  requested  by  both  sides  to  appoint 
a  member  to  a  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation 
Commission  which  shall  be  established  to  take 
custody  in  Korea  of  those  prisoners  of  war  who, 
while  in  the  custody  of  the  detaining  powers, 
have  not  exercised  their  right  to  be  repatriated." 

Paragraph  26  of  the  terms  of  reference  provides : 

"When  this  agreement  has  been  acceded  to  by 
both  sides  and  by  the  five  powers  named  herein, 
it  shall  become  effective  upon  tlie  date  the  ar- 
mistice becomes  effective." 

The  Department  of  State  would  appreciate  an  ex- 
pression by  the  Government  of 


that  it  is  prepared  to  serve  on  the  Neutral  Nations 
Repatriation  Commission  in  accordance  with  the 
terms  of  the  abo\e  prisoner  of  war  agreement. 

Enclosure : 

Text  of  Agreement  on  Repatriation  of  Prisoners 
of  War 

Department  of  State, 
Washington 


ble  for  providing  such  general  service  personnel  in  the 
prisoner  of  war  installations  as  required  by  the  Neutral 
Nations  Repatriation  Commission. 

17.  The  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission  shall 
provide  medical  support  for  the  prisoners  of  war  as  may 
be  practicable.  The  detaining  side  shall  provide  medical 
support  as  practicable  upon  the  request  of  the  Neutral 
Nations  Repatriation  Commission  and  specifically  for 
those  cases  requiring  extensive  treatment  or'  hos- 
pitalization. 

The  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission  sliall 
maintain  custody  of  prisoners  of  war  during  such  hos- 
pitalization. The  detaining  side  shall  facilitate  such 
custody.  Upon  completion  of  treatment,  prisoners  of  war 
shall  be  returned  to  a  prisoner  of  war  installation  as 
specified  in  paragraph  4  above. 

18.  The  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission  is 
entitled  to  obtain  from  both  sides  such  legitimate  assist- 
ance as  it  may  require  in  carrying  out  its  duties  and  tasks, 

868 


but  both  sides  shall  not  under  any  name  and  in  any  form 
interfere  or  exert  intluence. 

VIII,  Logistical  support  for  the  Neutral  Nations 
Repatriation  Commission 

19.  Each  side  shall  be  responsible  for  providing  logisti- 
cal support  for  the  personnel  of  tlie  Neutral  Nations 
Repatriation  Commissicm  stationed  in  the  area  under  its 
military  control,  and  both  sides  shall  contribute  on  an 
equal  basis  to  such  support  within  the  demilitarized  zone. 
The  precise  arrangements  shall  be  subject  to  determination 
between  the  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission  and 
the  detaining  side  in  each  case. 

20.  Each  of  the  detaining  sides  shall  be  responsible  for 
protecting  the  explaining  representatives  from  the  other 
side  while  in  transit  over  lines  of  communication  within 
its  area,  as  set  forth  in  paragraph  23  for  the  Neutral 
Nations  Repatriation  Commission,  to  a  place  of  residence 
and  while  in  residence  in  the  vicinity  of  but  not  within 
each  of  the  locations  where  the  prisoners  of  war  are  in 
custody.  The  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission 
shall  be  responsible  for  the  security  of  such  representatives 
within  the  actual  limits  of  the  locations  where  the  prison- 
ers of  war  are  in  custody. 

21.  Each  of  the  detaining  sides  shall  provide  transpor- 
tation, housing,  communication,  and  other  agreed  logisti- 
cal supiiort  to  the  explaining  representatives  of  tlie  other 
side  while  they  are  in  the  area  under  Its  military  control. 
Such  services  shall  be  provided  on  a  reimbursable  basis. 

IX,  Publication 

22.  After  the  armistice  agreement  becomes  effective,  the 
terms  of  this  agreement  shall  be  made  known  to  all  prison- 
ers of  war  who,  while  in  the  custody  of  the  detaining  side, 
have  not  exercised  their  right  to  be  reijatriated. 

X,  Movement  I 

23.  The  movement  of  the  personnel  of  the  Neutral 
Nations  Repatriation  Commission  and  repatriated  prison- 
ers of  war  shall  be  over  lines  of  communication  as  de- 
termined hy  the  command (s)  of  the  opposing  side  and 
the  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission.  A  map 
sliowing  these  lines  of  communication  shall  be  furnished 
the  command  of  the  opposing  side  and  the  Neutral  Nations 
Repatriation  Commission.  Movement  of  such  personnel, 
except  within  locations  as  designated  In  paragraph  4 
above,  shall  be  under  the  control  of,  and  escorted  by,  iier- 
sonnel  of  the  side  in  whose  area  the  travel  is  being  under- 
taken ;  however,  such  movement  shall  not  be  subject  to 
obstruction  and  coercion. 

XI,  Procedural  tnattcrs 

24.  The  interpretation  of  this  agreement  shall  rest  with 
the  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission.  The 
Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission,  and/or  any 
subordinate  bodies  to  which  functions  are  delegated  or 
assigned  by  the  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission, 
shall  operate  on  the  basis  of  majority  vote. 

2.3.  The  Neutral  Nations  Repatriation  Commission  shall 
submit  a  weekly  report  to  the  opposing  commanders  on 
the  status  of  prisoners  of  war  in  its  custody,  indicating 
the  numbers  reiiatriated  and  remaining  at  the  end  of  each 
week. 

20.  When  this  agreement  has  been  acceded  to  by  both 
sides  and  by  the  5  iiowers  herein,  it  shall  become  effective 
upon  the  date  the  armistice  becomes  effective. 

27.  Done  at  Pannuinjom.  Korea,  at  1400  hours  on  the 
8th  day  of  June  1953,  in  English,  Korean,  and  Chinese, 
all  texts  being  equally  authentic. 

Signed  Nam  II,  General,  Korean  People's  Armg  senior 
delegate,  delegation  of  the  Korean  People's  Army  and  the 
Chinese  People's  Volunteers. 

Signed  WiLi.tAM  K.  Harrison,  Jr.,  Lieutenant  General, 
Vnitril  States  Army  ^senior  delegate,  United  Nations  Com- 
mand Delegation. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Sustaining  NATO's  Objectives 


ly  General  Matthew  B.  Ridgway 
Supreme  Allied  Commander.  Europe  "■ 


I  consider  it  particularly  appropriate,  to  ]oin 
■with  members  of  the  American  Council  on  Nato 
m  discussing  the  role  of  this  international  organi- 
zation and  of  one  of  its  military  agencies,  Supreme 
Allied  Command,  Europe,  in  world  affairs.  I 
appreciate  greatly  your  invitation  to  address  you. 

It  is  of  major  importance  that  the  peoples  of 
the  United  States  and  all  other  Nato  countries 
receive  as  full  and  factual  information  concern- 
ing the  common  problems  we  face  together  and 
what  we  are  doing  to  solve  them  as  is  possible 
within  the  bounds  of  military  security. 

Free  peoples  only  give  their  wholehearted  sup- 
port and  accept  heavy  financial  burdens  when  they 
know  the  facts  and"  find  these  facts  justify  the 
costs. 

You  are  doing  our  country  and  the  free  world 
a  great  service  by  assuming  the  task  of  assisting 
in'^furnishing  Americans  the  facts  concerning  the 
purposes,  ob^'ectives,  and  status  of  Nato  and  of 
its  military  commands. 

What  is  the  Supreme  Allied  Command,  Europe  i 
Wliat  is  its  job? 

AVhere  is  its  place  in  Nato — the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty  Organization? 

Have  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  ^  nations 
chanired  their  declared  purpose  of  uniting  their 
efforts  for  their  collective  self-defense,  and  for 
the  preservation  of  peace  and  security? 

Has  the  threat  which  twice  already  in  this 
century  has  brought  them  untold  loss  of  life  and 
destruction  of  property,  and  which  but  3  short 
years  ago  revealed  the  possibility  of  enormously 
greater  catastrophe  for  them  and  for  all  of  the 
Western  AVorld  now  abated? 

Can  they  now  safely  relax  their  efforts  and  rele- 
gate military  security  to  a  secondary  place? 

All  these  questions  occur  and  recur  in  the  daily 
consideration  of  the  major  problems  now  facing 
Nato.  All  require  reasoned  answers.  The  an- 
swers,   which   the    Nato    govermnents    are    now 


'Address  made  before  the  American  Council  on  Nato 
at  New  fork  on  May  21.  Reprinted  from  Cong.  Rec,  June 
8,  1953,  p.  A3458. 

June  22,   1953 

259373 — 53 2 


pondering,  and  the  actions  which  these  govern- 
ments take  will  be  fateful  for  the  future  of  our 
people  and  for  all  those  who,  in  Nato  and  else- 
where throughout  the  world,  share  with  them  the 
ideals  of  human  dignity,  human  decency,  and 
liberty  under  Almighty  God. 

As  the  Supreme  Allied  Commander  in  Europe, 
I  want  to  outline  the  scope  of  our  job. 

I  want  to  outline  this  job  as  I  see  it  today, 
dependent  on  the  answers  given  by  the  govern- 
ments concerned  to  the  questions  I  have  pro- 
pounded. 

In  that  which  follows,  I  speak  as  an  inter- 
national military  commander,  deriving  my  re- 
sponsibilities ancl  authority  from  an  international 
political  body,  the  North  Atlantic  Council,  on 
which  the  United  States  Government  is  one  of 
fourteen  members. 

In  this  role,  while  I  express  my  personal  views, 
1  do  so  from  an  international,  not  solely  an  Ameri- 
can military  viewpoint.  I  speak  to  nationals  of 
all  14  Nato  nations,  not  just  to  Americans.  I 
speak  from  within  my  sphere  as  a  professional 
militai-y  man,  not  as  a  trespasser  into  the  political 
sphere,'whose  limits  I  well  recognize  and  scrupu- 
lously respect. 

Yet  there  will  be  found,  I  think,  in  what  I  say, 
something  particularly  pertinent  to  America's 
consideration  of  its  Nato  obligations.  It  could 
hardly  be  otherwise.  The  capabilities  of  the 
American  people  to  influence  the  course  of  the 
North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization  are  so  great, 
their  role  of  leadership  so  vitally  significant  for 
themselves  and  the  world,  that  America  does  carry 
a  heavy  share  of  responsibility  for  finding  solu- 
tions to  Nato's  problems.     .     .     . 

We  must,  in  any  analysis  of  a  problem  so  huge, 
commence  with  a  firm  foundation  on  which  to 
build. 

I  take,  as  my  foundation,  the  purpose  and  ob- 
jectives of  the  parent  organization,  Nato. 

The  purpose  is  to  preserve  the  peace  and  our 
freedom,  and  this  statement  is  simple,  clear,  all- 
inclusive,  and  unchallengeable.     It  is  the  truth. 

869 


The  objectives  of  tliis  organization  are  clearly 
set  forth  in  the  preamble  to  the  treaty : 

To  safeguard  the  freedom,  common  heritage,  and  civili- 
zation of  their  peoples,  founded  on  the  principles  of 
democracy,  individual  liberty,  and  the  rule  of  law;  to  pro- 
mote stability  and  well-being  in  the  North  Atlantic  area  ; 
to  unite  their  efforts  for  collective  defense  and  for  the 
preservation  of  peace  and  security. 

The  entire  history  of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty 
negotiations,  and  of  Nato  itself,  including  all  that 
has  been  done  from  its  inception  to  date,  is  com- 
pletely devoid  of  any  threat  to  any  nation.  Any 
allegation  of  aggressive  intent  constitutes  a  delib- 
erate and  malicious  fraud  against  humanity. 

Xow  from  this  foundation  of  fact  I  derive  two 
premises.  First,  it  was  the  threat  of  armed  ag- 
gi-ession  by  Soviet  Russia  and  Soviet-controlled 
military  power  which  brought  Nato  into  being. 
Second,  the  primary  objective  of  Nato  is  the 
preservation  of  peace  and  of  the  security  of  the 
peoples  and  territory  of  the  North  Atlantic  area. 

On  this  foundation  and  from  these  premises, 
the  Governments,  acting  through  the  Permanent 
Council  on  which  all  are  represented,  assigned  cer- 
tain missions  or  jobs  to  be  done.  Among  them  were 
the  military  missions.  If  not  the  most  important 
at  the  time,  certainly  they  were  then  the  most 
urgent.  If  Western  Europe  had  been  attacked  in 
1950  as  the  Republic  of  Korea  was  criminally  at- 
tacked in  June  of  that  year,  there  would  have  been 
no  doubt  of  its  fate. 

NATO's  Wartime  Mission 

The  urgent  job  at  the  time  of  foundation  was  to 
create,  at  the  earliest  possible  date,  the  military 
strength  which  would  deter  aggression  against 
Western  Europe  with  its  inevitable  expansion  into 
a  worldwide  conflict.  This  can  be  termed  the 
"peacetime  objective"  of  Nato. 

The  wartime  mission  stems  directly  from  this. 
If  an  attack  should  be  made  upon  us,  either 
through  miscalculation  or  the  deliberate  design  to 
precipitate  war,  then  Nato's  military  forces  must 
be  capable  of  repelling  and  defeating  the  aggres- 
sion with  the  least  cost  to  the  member  nations  in 
terms  of  manpower,  money,  and  those  values  dear 
to  us  all. 

This  then  is  the  problem.  It  is  the  No.  1 
problem  of  Nato.  It  is,  in  my  opinion,  of  no  less 
urgency  today  than  when  the  Council,  in  Decem- 
ber 1950,  acknowledged  it  as  such  by  asking  the 
Government  of  the  United  States  to  make  available 
to  help  solve  this  problem  my  predecessor,  now  the 
President  of  the  United  States. 

Now  we  consider  the  military  problem  given  my 
command. 

The  mission  of  my  command  is  naturally  inter- 
twined with  that  of  the  overall  Nato  organization. 
It  is  the  top  headquarters  in  Europe  which  con- 
trols and  guides  the  Nato  armed  forces  to  the  ac- 
complishment of  their  objective.  This  objective 
is  twofold  in  nature. 


Fh'sf,  to  deter  aggression  by  building  up  our 
military  forces  to  such  a  degree  that  potential 
breakers  of  the  peace  will  consider  their  chance  of 
successful  attack  doubtful. 

Second,  to  insure,  insofar  as  possible,  that  in  the 
event  we  are  attacked,  we  defend  the  peoples  and 
the  lands  of  the  Natc  nations.  I  would  like  to 
emphasize,  with  regard  to  the  latter  objective,  that 
there  are  no  qualifications  in  time.  The  responsi- 
bility for  this  defense  is  not  to  be  deferred  to  some 
future  day  when  adequate  forces  to  insure  success 
might  be  available.  This  responsibility  exists  to- 
day, if  the  dread  volcano  of  war  should  again 
erupt. 

This  is  the  first  of  two  fundamental  factors  af- 
fecting the  urgency  of  our  job. 

The  Nato  nations,  as  we  have  seen,  formed  their 
association  under  the  grave  peril  of  a  great  and 
menacing  threat.  They  evaluated  that  threat. 
They  analyzed  painstakingly  and  objectively  its 
nature,  its  magnitude,  its  potentialities  in  time  and 
space.  They  drew  certain  conclusions.  Their 
highest  military  authorities  put  their  official  stamp 
of  approval  on  these  conclusions,  and  furnished 
them  authoritatively  to  their  Supreme  Com- 
manders— Admiral  McCormick  in  the  Atlantic 
and  I  in  Europe. 

These  conclusions  included,  in  terms  no  one 
could  misconstrue,  estimates  of  the  size  and  com- 
position of  the  forces  the  potential  aggressors 
could  launch  against  us — in  which  directions,  for 
what  objectives,  when  and  in  what  sequence. 

They  included  a  statement  that  the  military 
forces  of  the  potential  aggressor  were  in  an 
advanced  stage  of  readiness  for  war.  They 
stated,  and  recent  history  gives  this  statement  an 
ominous  note,  that  there  might  be  only  relatively 
brief  warning,  or  none,  prior  to  the  outbreak  of 
hostilities. 

This  is  the  second  of  the  two  fundamental 
factors  affecting  the  urgency  with  which  Shape's 
[Supreme  Headquarters  Allied  Powers,  Europe] 
commander  views  the  need  for  getting  on  with  his 
job.  The  other  factor,  as  already  stated,  is  that  he 
has  the  responsibility  for  defense  in  Western 
Europe  right  now. 

We  have,  I  think,  shown  in  fairly  definite  out- 
line the  form  of  my  job,  what  it  is,  and  how  it 
came  into  being.  The  next  step  should  show  the 
situation  affecting  this  job,  as  that  situation  exists 
today. 

The  defense  of  Western  Europe  embraces  a 
multitude  of  elements.  They  concern  the  politi- 
cal, economic,  financial,  and  social  problems  of  the 
member  states.  They  relate  to  the  stability  of 
governments,  stability  of  currencies,  balance  of 
trade,  industrial  potential,  budget  structures  and 
cycles,  standards  of  living,  as  well  as  all  the  in- 
numerable military  problems  of  armies,  navies, 
and  air  forces — both  intra  and  interservice — in 
personnel,  equipment,  training,  and  leadership. 
These  various  elements  must  all  be  accorded  due 


870 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


consideration  if  Nato  is  to  be  a  sound  and  effective 
organization. 

i  It  is  well  to  mention  now  those  elements  which 
affect  the  situation  in  which  I  and  my  headquar- 
ters must  function. 

The  North  Atlantic  Council  is  the  top  body — 
the  political  authority — charged  with  the  respon- 
sibility of  considering  all  matters  concerning  the 
implementation  of  the  provisions  of  the  treaty. 
The  Council,  which  formerly  met  only  periodically 
when  the  several  national  Ministers  of  Foreign 
Affairs,  Defense,  and  Finance  attended,  is  now  in 
permanent  session  in  Paris,  with  permanent  repre- 
sentatives, each  with  rank  of  Ambassador,  in 
attendance. 

Several  times  a  year  these  sessions  become 
ministerial  meetings  of  the  Council  by  reason  of 
the  attendance  of  the  Ministers  mentioned.  The 
most  recent  of  these  was  held  in  Paris  last  month.- 

The  Council  is  served  by  an  international  staff', 
headed  by  a  Secretary-General,  Lord  Ismay,  and 
certain  committees  of  which,  from  the  standpoint 
of  my  headquarters,  the  military  committee  is  the 
most  important.  That  committee  is  composed  of 
one  of  the  Chiefs  of  Staff  of  each  of  the  member 
nations.  It  serves  as  a  military  advisory  body 
to  the  Council,  to  which  it  is  responsible. 

It  also  provides  general  policy  giiidance  to  its 
executive  body,  the  standing  group.  Tlais  latter 
body  is  composed  of  three  senior  officers,  one  each 
representing  the  Chiefs  of  Staff  of  France,  the 
United  Kingdom,  and  of  the  United  States.  This 
body  issues  instructions  and  guidance  on  military 
matters  to  the  various  Nato  commands,  including, 
of  course,  the  Supreme  Allied  Commander, 
Europe. 

A  further  important  element  in  the  situation  af- 
fecting the  job  of  my  command  is  the  i-elative  mili- 
tary weakness  of  the  Western  nations.  It  is 
important  to  emphasize  that  this  relative  weakness 
was  brought  about  largely  because  of  the  delib- 
erate and  precipitate  demobilization  of  our  mili- 
tary forces  following  the  close  of  World  War  II. 
Thus,  until  the  advent  of  Nato,  we  remained  criti- 
cally weak  to  ojjpose  actual  Communist  expansion. 
In  fact,  we  were  then,  except  for  our  atomic  capa- 
bility, almost  completely  lacking  in  the  principal 
deterrent  to  aggression  that  Communists  recog- 
nize— military  force.  In  some  areas  we  had  to 
start  practically  from  scratch. 


Potential  Enemy  Capabilities 

We  cannot  afford  to  guess  whether  a  potential 
enemy — whose  long-range  objectives  remain  un- 
changed and  whose  past  and  present  actions  speak 
for  themselves — will  or  will  not  attack  us.  We 
cannot  afford  to  wait  unprepared.  To  do  either 
woukl  invite  disaster. 

The  difference  between  intentions  and  capabili- 

''  For  information  regarding  this  meeting,  see  Btilletin 
of  May  11,  10.53,  p.  671. 


ties  is  of  the  utmost  importance.  The  civilian 
authorities  may,  in  fact  must,  estimate  and  evalu- 
ate the  intentions  of  those  who  threaten  our 
security. 

The  military  leaders  must  deal  with  the  capa- 
bilities of  the  potential  enemy — not  seek  to  fathom 
his  mind  for  his  intentions. 

At  my  headquarters  we  must — and  do — make 
our  estimates  and  plans  based  on  potential  enemy 
capabilities  and  the  minimum  forces  and  strength 
we  must  have  to  meet  that  threat. 

We  know  that  the  capabilities  of  Soviet  Russia, 
as  shown  in  its  air,  land,  and  sea  power,  consti- 
tute an  ever-present  threat  to  Western  Europe. 
We  know  that  the  Soviet  Communist  forces  could 
with  relatively  little  warning  strike  at  any  point 
of  their  choice  along  the  4,000-mile  line  stretching 
from  Norway  to  Turkey. 

We  know  that  we  must  also  face  the  threat  of 
the  Soviet's  atomic  capabilities,  and  we  ai'e  taking 
full  cognizance  of  the  possibilities  of  these  new, 
unconventional  weapons. 

Just  when  such  new  weapons  will  be  in  ade- 
quate supply  for  military  use  is  a  question  I  shall 
not  discuss.  We  cannot,  however,  delay  produc- 
tion of  those  arms  and  equii^ment,  or  delay  train- 
ing the  men  on  whom  we  know — atom  bomb  or 
no  atom  bomb — we  must  still  rely. 

During  the  past  3  days  I  have  presented  our 
situation  in  detail  to  the  committees  of  the  Con- 
gress which  consider  the  Soviet  threat  and  the 
problems  it  creates.  In  general,  the  factual  situ- 
ation is  that  while  we  have  made  steady  progress 
during  the  past  year,  we  still  have  major  defi- 
ciencies in  manpower,  support  imits,  ai'uis  and 
equipment,  logistical  establishments,  stockades  of 
ammunition,  and,  above  all,  in  planes. 

If  we  are  to  reach  the  threshold  of  real  secu- 
ritj',  our  full  effort  is  required.  The  momentum 
of  steady  progress  must  be  maintained,  even 
accelerated. 

The  effort  and  sacrifice  to  create  the  required 
forces  fall  upon  the  people  of  the  several  Nato 
nations.  This  fact  requires  in  them  a  determina- 
tion to  be  secure  in  their  capability  of  remaining 
free — a  determination  strong  enough  to  sustain 
their  support  for  the  financial  burdens,  for  the  na- 
tional military  service,  and  for  the  many  other 
measures  that  are  essential  to  the  building  of  an 
effective  force. 

In  tlie  fight  Nato  is  making  for  peace  by  peace- 
ful means,  it  is  of  vital  importance  that  our  politi- 
cal authorities  shall  have  their  voices  in  negotia- 
tions between  East  and  West  backed  up  by  the 
force  which  potential  aggressors  recognize.  We 
must  have  a  covering  force  in  being — land,  sea, 
and  air — fully  manned,  fully  and  adequately 
armed  and  equipped,  properly  trained  and,  above 
all,  properly  led. 

It  falls  upon  the  highest  civilian  authorities  of 
the  Nato  nations  to  make  their  separate  and  col- 
lective decisions  as  to  the  time  when  their  require- 


June  22,    1953 


871 


ments  of  security  will  be  met;  hence  the  rate  of 
building  toward  tliose  requirements. 

In  this,  tliey  looli  to  their  military  advisers  for 
honest  and  objective  estimates  of  requirements, 
for  advice  as  to  the  military  consequences  of  fail- 
ure to  meet  those  requirements,  and  for  advice  as 
to  tlie  most  efficient  and  effective  methods  of  build- 
ing toward  them. 

In  making  their  decisions  they  must  assess  many 
factors  and  many  demands,  knowing,  as  we 
all  do,  that  military  strength  cannot  long  endure 
on  a  foundation  of  economic  weakness.  Their 
judgment  must  be  the  balanced  judgment  which 
does  not  attempt  so  much  in  so  short  a  time  as 
to  impair  the  very  foundations  on  which  future 
military  strength  depends,  nor  produce  so  little 
as  to  prolong  unnecessarily  the  grave  threat 
to  security  in  which  the  free  nations  still  stand. 
The  military  authorities  ask  only  that  these  deci- 
sions be  made  with  full  cognizance  of  the  military 
factors. 

Economic  and  other  factors  may,  and  doubtless 
will,  profoundly  influence  the  capabilities  of  gov- 
ernments to  provide  these  requirements. 

Such  action  is  the  constitutional  prerogative 
and  responsibility  of  the  civil  authorities.  It  is 
for  them  to  decide  what  should  or  should  not  be 
provided,  and  for  any  reason  which  they  may 
deem  proper. 

The  military  commanders  will  accept  tliose  de- 
cisions with  complete  loyalty.  They  will  con- 
tinue, as  they  have  in  the  jjast,  to  do  the  utmost 
within  their  power  with  the  means  provided. 
They  will  also  continue,  as  they  have  in  the  past, 
loyally  yet  fearlessly,  to  point  out  the  military 
consequences,  as  in  the  light  of  military  reasons 
they  see  such  consequences,  of  any  failures  to  pro- 
vide the  requirements  they  consider  essential. 

Peril  Continues  Great 

I  believe  we  stand  in  just  as  great  peril  as  ever 
we  stood  before.  While  our  strength  has  in- 
creased, so  too  has  that  of  our  potential  adversary, 
and  the  discrepancy  remains  greater  than  could 
be  overcome  within  the  immediate  future  unless 
we  continue  to  make  great  efforts. 

On  the  basis  of  the  known  effort  the  Kremlin 
is  making  to  increase  its  offensive  capability  in 
conventional  fields,  its  assumed  effort  to  increase 
its  offensive  capability  in  unconventional  fields, 
including  the  atomic,  its  demonstrated  ruthless- 
ness,  and  its  implacable  hostility  toward  us,  I  see 
no  valid  grounds  for  complacency  or  relaxation. 

If  and  when  we  acquire  the  minimum  defensive 
strength  which  we  all  agree  we  must  have,  or  if 
and  when  there  is  reliable  evidence,  in  actions  not 
words,  of  a  major  abatement  of  Soviet  Russian 
hostility  toward  the  West,  with  a  concurrent  and 
corresponding  reorientation  of  its  policy  of  seek- 
ing to  subvert  other  governments,  then  and  only 
then  might  a  resurvey  of  our  position  perhaps 
justify  a  lesser  eff'oi-t. 


This  time  is  not  yet.  We  are  today  far  from 
that  minimum  defensive  strength. 

All  earthly  values  are  relative.  Costs  of  armed 
forces  and  equipment,  of  training  establishments 
and  maintenance,  of  salaries  and  all  the  multitudi- 
nous things  that  go  into  the  creation  and  mainte- 
nance of  military  establisliments  are  higher — very 
much  higher  today  than  ever  before.  But  spirit- 
ual values  remain  fixed,  and  it  is  those  which 
determine  the  relative  values  of  lesser  things. 

They  are  at  stake  now  as  in  few  other  historical 
epochs.  If  they  should  be  destroyed,  nothing  else 
would  have  value.  If  we  are  determined,  as  we 
say  we  are,  to  maintain  them  within  a  proper  mar- 
gin of  safety,  then  costs  of  material  things  assume 
quite  different  values. 

We  may  be  gambling  today  with  all  that  is  pre- 
cious— with  human  lives  and  spiritual  princij^les 
as  well  as  with  earthly  treasures. 

If  we  slow  down  and  are  not  assailed,  we  shall 
have  saved  some  money.  We  shall  have  attained 
an  easier  living.  If  we  slow  down  and  are  as- 
sailed, and  lose,  we  shall  have  seen  our  liberties 
perish,  our  institutions  destroyed,  ourselves  en- 
slaved, and  our  God  derided. 

These  are  the  reasons  which  I  think  give  ur- 
gency to  the  task  we  have  undertaken.  These  are 
the  reasons  which  should,  I  think,  impel  us  to 
quicken,  not  slacken,  our  pace,  to  lengthen  our 
patience,  to  freshen  our  courage,  and  to  renew  our 
faith  in  the  rightness  of  the  course  we  have  freely 
chosen  to  follow. 

The  military  commanders  would,  I  think,  be 
derelict  in  duty  if  they  did  not  point  out  what 
history  has  so  often  recorded,  and  governments 
so  often  forgotten.  No  amount  of  postwar  ex- 
planation can  explain,  no  postwar  excuses  can  ex- 
cuse the  needless  loss  of  lives  sacrificed  through 
compromise  of  principle  and  lack  of  sustained  res- 
olution— through  lack  of  timely,  adequate  prepa- 
ration to  meet  recognized  perils. 

War  tomorrow  would  make  infinitely  greater 
demands  on  human  bodies  and  human  spirits  than 
ever  before.  Only  through  training,  intelligently 
planned  and  persistently  pursued,  of  adequately 
ai-med  and  equipped  forces,  can  these  demands  be 
mitigated. 

Only  through  high  training  requirements, 
rigidly  enforced,  can  low  casualty  rates  be  pos- 
sible. Only  well-armed  and  equipped,  ade- 
quately trained,  and  efficiently  led  forces  can  ex- 
pect victory  in  future  combat. 

Only  nations  which  are  willing  to  provide  these 
things — and  all  of  them  take  much  time  and 
money — have  a  right  to  expect  victory.  The  na- 
tions of  Western  Europe,  and  their  allies  beyond 
the  Atlantic,  cannot  expect  this  unless  they  truly 
unite  their  efforts  for  their  collective  security  and 
their  common  defense,  and  do  it  in  time. 

Let  me  now  answer,  in  the  way  I  jDersonally 
think  they  should  be  answered,  the  questions  yet 
unanswered  with  which  I  began  this  discussion. 


872 


Deparfmenf  of  S/o/e  Bulletin 


— I  believe  the  Nato  nations  are  agreed  on  what 
their  purpose  is.     I  believe  their  purpose  has  not 
'   changed.     I  believe  it  still  is  to  unite  their  ell'orts 
for  their  collective  self-defense  and  for  the  preser- 
vation of  peace  and  security. 
,    — I  believe  the  Nato  nations,  collectively,  must 
I    take  new  and  more  forceful  decisions  as  to  how  to 
;    achieve  this  purpose  and  must  implement  these 

1'  decisions  with  new,  positive,  and  sustained  action. 
— I  believe  that  Nato  leadership  must  impart  new 
impetus  to  Nato  efforts  and  imjilant  new  faith  in 
Nato  capabilities;  I  believe  this  Nato  leadership 
must  be  provided  and  exercised  without  procras- 
tinating delay. 

— I  believe  that  the  present  ratio  of  Nato  defen- 
sive capability  to  the  offensive  capability  of  the 
Soviets  and  their  captive  peoples  emphatically 
does  not  justify  relaxation  of  efforts  to  achieve 
reasonable  military  security. 
— I  believe,  on  the  contrary,  that  the  scale  and 
tempo  of  these  efforts  should  be  increased,  even 
though  costs  are  high  and  burdens  heavy,  until 
we  have  achieved  a  reasonable  chance  of  success- 
fully defending  ourselves  if  we  should  be  attacked. 

Our  defensive  strength  has  grown  greatly  since 
the  North  Korean  plunge  across  the  38th  parallel 
in  brutal  and  unprovoked  aggression.  Greece  and 
Turkey,  with  their  valiant  fighting  forces,  have 
since  then  joined  our  Nato  alliance,  and,  since 
that  fateful  day  in  June  of  1950,  we  and  our  Nato 
partners  have  tripled  our  defense  expenditures,  a 
measure  of  our  great  collective  effort.  We  are 
moving  forward,  but  our  momentum  must  be 
maintained. 

Witli  the  unity  in  Western  Europe  for  which 
we  hope — including  ratification  of  the  European 
Defense  Community  Treaty  and  Western  Ger- 
many's contribution  to  the  common  defense — and 
with  continued  American  support  commensurate 
with  America's  responsibilities,  I  believe  all  these 
things  can  be  done. 

— ^I  believe  the  needed  Nato  leadership  can  be 
found,  the  Nato  purpose  carried  to  fulfillment,  if 
this  leadership  in  free  govei-nments  has  the  sup- 
port of  their  peoples.  I  believe  free  peoples  will 
support  this  leadership  if  it  will,  by  its  own  chosen 
methods  in  each  particular  country,  furnish  the 
people  the  facts. 

Finally,  I  believe — I  have  faith — that  out  of 
the  spiritual  reservoirs  of  the  Western  World  will 
come  leadership  with  the  vision  to  see,  the  integ- 
rity to  choose,  and  the  courage  to  carry  us  together 
along  the  only  road  which  can  lead  us  to  our  ob- 
jectives. To  follow  this  road,  we  shall  j^erhaps 
have  to  place  our  need  for  security  ahead  of  our 
desire  for  more  of  many  things  until,  through 
strength,  we  shall  have  largely  lessened  the  threat 
to  our  political  and  territorial  integrity  and  our 
spiritual  heritage,  or  shall  have  acquired  the 
means  for  successful  self-defense  if  an  attack 
should  be  loosed  against  us. 


Suspension  of  MSA  Defense 
Support  Aid  to  Denmark 

Harold  E.  Stassen,  Director  for  Mutual  Secu- 
rity, announced  on  June  11  that,  by  agreement 
between  the  United  States  and  Danish  Govern- 
ments, American  defense-support  aid  to  Denmark 
is  being  suspended. 

The  Danish  Government,  Mr.  Stassen  said,  pro- 
posed the  suspension  of  aid  since  its  dollar  gap 
has  been  closed  and  its  gold  and  dollar  reserves 
are  increasing. 

Commenting  on  the  suspension  of  defense-sup- 
port aid  to  Denmark,  Mr.  Stassen  said : 

The  fact  that  Denmark  has  been  able  to  close  its  dol- 
lar gap  is  another  example  of  the  fundamental  soundness 
of  the  Mutual  Security  Program.  As  a  nation  which  was 
occupied  b.v  the  Nazis  during  World  War  II,  Denmark 
faced  difficult  problems  in  rebuilding  its  economic  strength 
and  attaining  economic  stability  in  the  postwar  period. 
With,  first,  Marshall  Plan  dollar  help  and,  subsequently, 
MsA  dollar  aid,  that  economic  recovery  has  been  achieved. 
This  is  further  evidence  that  as  partners,  nations  of  the 
free  world  can  effectively  become  stronger  together. 

Denmark's  Msa  defense-support  funds  in  the 
current  fiscal  year  total  $7.5  million  of  which  $3 
million  was  specifically  earmarked  to  help  Den- 
mark expand  its  productivity  program.  The  first 
$1.5  million  of  the  $3  million  was  allotted  on  May 
15,  and  the  second  half  of  the  total  is  expected  to 
be  allotted  later  this  week. 

The  1953  fiscal  year  allotments  make  a  total  of 
$278.9  million  in  defense  support  and  economic 
aid  for  Denmark  since  the  initiation  of  the  Mar- 
shall plan,  Msa's  jDredecessor,  in  April  1948. 

U.S.S.R.  Queried  as  to  Text 

of  Austrian  Treaty  It  Would  Favor 

Press  release  314  dated  June  12 

Tlxe  following  note  was  delivered  on  June  11  to 
the  Soviet  Government  hy  U.S.  Ambassador 
Charles  E.  Bohlen  at  Moscow.  Similar  notes  were 
delivered  to  the  Soviet  Ministry  of  Foreign  Af- 
fairs hy  the  British  and  French  Embassies. 

The  Ambassador  of  the  United  States  presents 
his  comi^liments  to  the  Minister  for  Foreign  Af- 
fairs of  the  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Kepublics 
and,  under  instructions  from  his  Govermnent,  has 
the  honor  to  communicate  the  following : 

The  United  States  Govermnent  has  learned  with 
regret  of  the  refusal  of  the  Soviet  Deputy  to  at- 
tend the  meeting  of  Deputies  for  the  Austrian 
Treaty  called  for  the  27th  of  May  by  the  United 
Kingdom  Chairman.*  The  United  States  Govern- 
ment is  seriously  concerned  that  it  is  now  nearly 
ten  years  since  the  Austrian  people  were  promised 
the  restoration  of  their  freedom  and  independence 

'  For  test  of  the  Soviet  note  of  refusal,  see  Bulletin  of 
June  8,  1953,  p.  815. 


June  22,   7953 


873 


in  the  Moscow  Declaration.     It  is  more  than  eight 
years  since  the  end  of  hostilities  in  Europe  made 

Eossible  the  fulfillment  of  that  pledge.  The 
hiited  States  Government  cannot  accept  as  jus- 
tification for  this  further  delay  in  the  conclusion 
of  an  Austrian  Treaty  the  pretext  on  which  the 
Soviet  Deputy  has  based  his  refusal  to  attend  the 
meeting. 

In  1949  the  United  States  Government,  to- 
gether with  the  French  and  United  Kingdom  Gov- 
ernments, agreed  to  meet  the  Soviet  position  on 
major  outstanding  issues  of  the  treaty  provided 
early  agreement  could  be  reached  on  it  as  a  whole. 
Since  that  time,  the  Soviet  Government  has 
persisted  in  raising  obstacles  which  have  pre- 
vented substantive  negotiations,  although  the  Gov- 
ernments of  the  United  Kingdom,  the  United 
States  and  France  have  repeatedly  made  it  clear 
that  they  were  prepared  to  accept  any  treaty 


which  would  ensure  Austria's  political  and  eco- 
nomic independence. 

It  wa.s  in  that  spirit  that  the  representatives  of 
the  United  Kingdom,  the  United  States  and 
France  were  ready  in  London  on  the  27th  of  May 
to  attend  the  meeting  called  in  the  customary  man- 
ner as  agi'eed  at  the  previous  meeting.  The 
Soviet  Deputy,  however,  did  not  attend  and  pro- 
posed instead  that  consideration  of  the  Austrian 
Treaty  be  continued  through  diplomatic  channels. 

The  conclusion  of  an  Austrian  Treaty  is  not  a 
question  of  procedure  but  rather  of  good  will. 
To  avoid  further  unnecessary  delays  and  to  en- 
able the  Deputies  to  complete  the  work  already 
done,  the  United  States  Government  requests  the 
Soviet  Government  to  inform  it  of  the  exact  text 
of  the  treaty  which  the  Soviet  Government  is  pre- 
pared to  conclude  in  order  to  ensure  the  political 
and  economic  independence  of  Austria. 


The  Pivotal  Conflict  Dominating  the  World 


by  Under  Secretary  SmAth  '■ 


In  years  gone  by,  if  inspiration  failed  him,  a 
commencement  speaker  could  fall  back  on  a  pat- 
tern that  was  safe  and  sure.  He  could  open  with 
some  time-tested  bromides  about  the  youthful  and 
shining  faces  in  the  audience  and  the  challenge 
of  the  future.  Then  he  could  embark  on  one  of 
several  themes  which  came  under  the  vague  head- 
ing of  "inspirational."  In  my  generation,  I  re- 
call that  philosophic  discourses  on  the  meaning  of 
commencement  enjoyed  a  great  vogue. 

In  their  way,  these  talks  had  their  uses.  In 
listening  to  them,  the  more  inquiring  and  percep- 
tive minds  in  the  audience  could  pursue  their  pri- 
vate thoughts  without  interruption.  And  the 
more  worldly  listeners  could  employ  the  time  to 
plan  the  evening's  festivities  or  catch  up  on  their 
sleep.  There  was  no  harm  done  and  the  amenities 
of  the  situation  were  satisfied. 

Fortunately  or  unfortunately,  times  have 
changed.  It  is  no  longer  feasible  or  desirable  for 
the  speaker  who  is  up  against  it  to  withdraw  to 
previously  prepared  positions — if  I  may  employ  a 
military  term.  The  waste  of  time  is  a  luxury  we 
cannot  afford.  Bluntly,  we  live  in  a  world  rent  by 
tension.     We  have  been  forced  to  assume  the  lead- 


'  Address  made  at  Washington  and  Jefferson  College, 
Washington,  Pa.,  on  June  8  (press  release  307). 


ership  of  that  segment  of  the  world  community 
which  is  resolved  to  deal  with  present  problems 
and  work  out  its  future  in  the  manner  of  free  men. 
In  that  role,  we  confront  a  ruthless,  barbaric,  and 
power-hungry  clique  who  seek  to  subject  the  world 
to  their  tyranny.  And  I  speak  as  one  who  spent 
3  years  in  Moscow. 

In  essence,  the  struggle  is  between  free  and  inde- 
pendent societies  and  a  terror-ridden  dictatorship. 
It  is  a  struggle  which  all  of  you — like  it  or  not — 
will  be  forced  to  join.  It  is,  furthermore,  a  strug- 
gle which  is  certain  to  have  a  marked  impact  on 
your  future. 

It  seemed  to  me,  therefore,  that  a  member  of 
your  Government  who  had  been  given  the  high 
lionor  of  an  invitation  to  speak  to  you  was  under 
an  obligation  of  no  mean  proportions.  It  ap- 
peared that,  if  my  remarks  failed  to  take  into  full 
account  this  i^ivotal  struggle,  I  would  be  falling 
short  of  what  was  expected  of  me.  Moreover,  I 
believed  that  if  I  did  not  make  what  contribution 
I  could  to  your  understanding  of  this  struggle,  I 
would  be  wasting  an  opportunity. 

It  is  a  privilege  to  be  here.  I  feel  that  the  theme 
of  these  graduation  exercises  appropriately  high- 
lights the  significance  of  the  independent  college 
in  this  modern  democracy  of  ours.     A  society  that 


874 


Deparfment  of  State   Bulletin 


would  achieve  and  retain  freedom  must  be  an  in- 
formed society.  The  institutions  that  provide 
this  education  can  acknowledge  no  master  save 
the  principle  of  responsible  and  independent 
scholarship.  Our  universities  must  be  citadels 
where  the  individual  student  is  at  liberty  to  pursue 
his  studies  free  from  external  pressures  and  secure 
against  governmental  dictation. 

That  principle  has  been  an  integi-al  part  of  the 
long  and  distinguished  tradition  of  this  college. 
This  is  hardly  surprising  for  an  institution  which 
takes  its  nanie  from  two  leading  American  disci- 
ples of  liberty.  You  will  recall  that  it  was  Jef- 
ferson who  declared  that  "The  God  who  gave  us 
life  gave  us  liberty  at  the  same  time."  I  am  sure 
that  Jefferson  would  be  the  first  to  agree  that 
these  Divine  gifts  must  be  guarded  if  they  are 
to  be  retained.  It  has  long  been  a  firm  American 
conviction  that  our  God-given  liberty  can  only  be 
preserved  by  the  continuing  and  determined  ef- 
forts of  those  who  possess  it. 

We  need  only  inspect  the  condition  of  education, 
for  example,  in  the  Soviet  Union,  where  freedom 
is  denied.  Do  you  suppose  that  the  scholastic  or- 
ganizations of  the  Communists  are  places  where, 
in  the  words  of  the  poet  John  Milton,  one  "may 
utter  and  argue  freely"  ? 

Quite  to  the  contrary.  The  tyranny  of  the 
Soviet  state  demands  of  students  and  teachers, 
as  well  as  of  the  rest  of  their  subjects,  an  absolute 
conformity.  Those  who  deviate  are  severely  dealt 
with.  This  is  certainly  one  of  the  gravest  weak- 
nesses in  the  Soviet  structure — a  weakness  which 
we  in  this  country  shall  do  everything  in  our 
power  to  avoid. 

At  this  particular  moment,  the  principle  of 
academic  freedom  may  be  of  secondary  interest 
to  you.  It  is  natural  that  your  interest  should  be 
focused  on  a  matter  of  more  immediate  and  more 
personal  concern — that  is,  your  future.  It  may 
not  be  immediately  clear  to  you,  but  the  relation- 
ship between  the  "two  is  less  distant  than  it  ap- 
pears. The  concept  of  freedom  is  the  root-issue 
between  the  Communist  and  the  non-Communist 
spheres. 

Your  future  is  completely  wrapped  up  in  the 
way  this  issue  will  be  resolved.  Some  among  you 
may  take  a  very  pessimistic  view  of  the  prospect. 
This  is  an  easy  attitude  to  adopt.  You  may  have 
listened  too  attentively  to  the  voices  of  doom  which 
are  coming  from  some  quarters.  You  may  have 
believed  their  cry  that  the  world  is  in  a  mess; 
that  war  is  inevitable;  or  that  our  prosperity  is 
a  war-born  phenomenon  and  that  peace — if  we 
achieve  it — will  plunge  us  into  a  severe  economic 
depression. 

If  you  believe  this,  you  have  swallowed  a 
quantity  of  balderdash  which  no  human  system 
could  possibly  assimilate.  It  is  quite  probable 
that  your  queasy  feelings  about  the  future  stem 
from  indigestion. 

I  am  an  old  soldier,  turned  diplomat.    I  have 

June  22,   J  953 


seen  the  problems,  about  which  these  voices  cry 
disaster,  from  both  the  inside  and  the  outside. 
They  are  grave  problems,  sure.  But  the  gravest 
of  them  is  no  worse  than  many  of  the  difficulties 
with  which  we  have  successfully  dealt  in  the  past. 
And  some  of  the  lesser  are  already  well  advanced 
toward  a  solution. 

Let  us  examine  this  talk  about  peace  bringing 
on  an  economic  depression.  This  is  strikingly 
parallel  to  some  of  the  wishful  thinking  advanced 
by  Soviet  economists.  Happily,  the  facts  point 
quite  in  the  other  direction.  The  American  econ- 
omy is  operating  on  a  solid  base  of  peacetime  pro- 
duction. Our  economists  recognize  that  cutting 
off  military  buying  would  probably  result  in  _a 
period  of  readjustment,  but  they  believe  that  busi- 
ness activity  would  bounce  back  stronger  than  ever 
after  a  period  of  transition.  You  will  recall  that 
this  administration  has  promised  to  maintain  and 
increase  prosperity  at  home  and  to  provide  greater 
opportunities  for  individual  initiative.  I  rely  on 
that  promise — and  I  think  you  can. 

Very  well,  then,  what  about  the  inevitability  of 
war  and  the  "mess"  the  world  is  in?  These  are 
far  larger  matters  more  difficult  of  solution  than 
the  question  of  depression. 

I  do  not  believe  war  is  inevitable.  To  the  con- 
trary, I  think  that  a  general  war  is  avoidable. 
But  I  am  sure  that  if  we  meekly  accept  the  in- 
evitability of  war — if  we  fail  to  marshal  our  tre- 
mendous energies  and  resources  into  the  cause  of 
peace — we  will  one  day  find  ourselves  at  war ! 

Many  of  you  in  this  graduating  class  will  prob- 
ably take  up  the  sword  for  several  years,  either 
voluntarily  or  at  the  invitation  of  the  President 
of  the  United  States.  As  a  professional  soldier, 
my  views  on  this  experience  probably  differ  some- 
what from  yours.  I  will  grant  that  many  who 
enter  the  service  might  otherwise  have  found  a 
more  beneficial  and  certainly  a  more  lucrative  ac- 
tivity for  the  next  2  years.  But  I  assure  you  that 
2  years  of  the  Army,  the  Navy,  the  Air  Force,  or 
the  Marines  will  not  blight  your  careers.  More- 
over, the  experience  will  be  good  for  many  of  you. 


The  Two  Courses  Open  to  Us 

Certainly,  no  one  of  you  who  has  given  the 
matter  any  thought  will  argue  with  the  thesis 
that  bearing  arms  is  a  part  of  your  responsibility 
as  citizens.  Nor  do  I  think  you  will  deny  the 
necessity  of  building  up  American  military 
strength  in  these  times.  You  further  realize,  I 
am  sure,  that  a  buildup  of  the  strength  of  our 
allies  along  with  our  own  is  a  key  factor  in  pre- 
venting war.  To  a  degree  unmatched  anywhere 
in  the  world,  the  men  of  the  Kremlin  are  highly 
sensitive  to  the  power  factor  as  it  enters  world 
relations.  It  is  basic  to  their  calculations — their 
own  power  and  the  strength  of  their  adversaries 
as  well.  Wlien  we  talk  in  terms  of  heavy-bomber 
squadrons,  tank  corps,  and  infantry  divisions,  we 

875 


are  speaking  a  language,  perhaps  the  only  lan- 
guage, that  the  Soviet  leaders  never  misunder- 
stand. As  far  as  they  are  concerned,  military 
force  in  being  commands  their  respect.  If  we  are 
realistic,  we  must  give  such  a  force  a  high  place  on 
the  list  of  deteri-ents  to  Soviet  aggression. 

Actually,  of  the  two  courses  open  to  us  as  set 
down  by  President  Eisenhower  in  his  April  16 
speech,  the  buildup  of  military  power  for  an  in- 
definite period  is  by  far  the  less  desirable  from 
our  point  of  view.  It  is  the  hard  course — the 
expensive  course.  But  if  the  existence  of  this 
strength  contributes  to  the  achievement  of  real 
peace,  the  sacrifice  and  cost  involved  in  creating 
it  will  be  trivial  indeed. 

The  second  course  cited  by  the  President  is  far 
more  to  be  preferred  and  holds  a  promise  of  easing 
world  tension.  It  is  that  of  genuine  negotiations 
with  the  Soviet  Union.  At  this  moment  we  do 
not  see  sufficient  indications  that  the  U.S.S.R.  is 
ready  to  negotiate  a  genuine  settlement.  From 
our  sour  experience  in  diplomatic  dealings  with 
Stalin  and  his  successors  we  have  learned  to  watch 
for  meaningful  and  concrete  evidences  of  Soviet 
good  faith. 

In  the  hope  of  speeding  the  presentation  of  the 
necessai-y  evidence  we  have  publicly  asked  Soviet 
Russia  to  back  up  her  talk  of  peace  with  deeds  of 
peace.  And  we  have  further  made  clear  that 
token  gestures  will  carry  little  weight.  We  have 
made  no  secret  of  what  we  would  regard  as  evi- 
dence. We  have  suggested  that  an  early  and 
reasonable  Korean  truce  would  be  so  viewed. 

We  have  also  mentioned  the  conclusion  of  a 
treaty  of  peace  with  Austria  as  evidence  of  good 
faith.  On  this  last  matter,  the  Soviet  Union  has 
argued,  obstructed,  backed  and  filled — and  other- 
wise stalled  for  nearly  8  years.  It  has  been  a 
negotiating  marathon  during  which  the  Western 
Powers  gave  every  consideration  to  the  Soviet 
position.  We  are  reasonable  people.  From  this 
experience  we  can  only  conclude  that  the  Soviets 
do  not  want  a  free  Austria. 

But  the  Soviets  say  they  want  peace.  To  this 
I  say  that,  if  they  want  peace  one-tenth  as  ardently 
as  they  say  they  want  peace,  we  could  have  peace 
tomorrow. 

We  cannot  predict,  at  this  point,  whether  or 
not  the  Soviet  Union  will  decide  to  negotiate 
genuinely.  Until  the  decision  they  reach  becomes 
apparent,  we  shall  be  called  upon  for  patience, 
prudence,  and  firmness.  But  whatever  course  the 
Soviet  Union  elects,  there  is  much  that  is  fruit- 
ful that  M-e  may  undertake. 

We  can,  for  example,  continue  to  work  with  our 
European  partners  to  advance  European  integra- 
tion. We  can  strengthen  the  links  between  West- 
ern Germany  and  the  rest  of  Western  Europe 
through  economic,  political,  and  defense  measures. 
There  are  present  in  this  area  many  of  the  ingredi- 
ents of  a  solid  international  community — with  or 


without  Soviet  cooperation.     We  must  work  for 
its  fuller  development. 

In  the  Middle  East,  which  certainly  qualifies  as 
a  problem  area,  the  recent  trip  made  by  Mr.  Dulles 
gives  us  reason  to  think  that  there  is  a  chance  to 
make  important  progress  toward  easing  the  dan- 
gerous tensions  that  plague  the  region.  A  begin- 
ning has  been  made  towai'd  lessening  the  friction 
between  Israel  and  neighboring  Arab  States.  We 
have  reason  to  hope  that  the  British  and  the  Egyp- 
tians will  renew  their  efforts  to  arrive  at  an 
amicable  solution  of  their  differences  on  the  main- 
tenance and  use  of  the  extensive  military  installa- 
tions in  the  Nile  region. 


Where  Communist  Imperialism  Is  Most  Pressing 

Without  question,  Europe  and  the  Middle  East 
are  key  areas.  But  the  region  where  the  menace 
of  Communist  imperialism  is  most  pressing  is  the 
Far  East.  Can  we  reach  a  solution  there  short 
of  a  major  war?  I  believe  such  a  solution  is  pos- 
sible. I  make  this  statement  with  a  full  realiza- 
tion of  the  obstacles  to  a  solution. 

For  example,  after  protracted  and  tortuous  ne- 
gotiations, we  are  hopeful  that  an  honorable  con- 
clusion of  the  Korean  fighting  is  in  sight.  During 
the  last  months,  the  main  issue  of  difference  be- 
tween the  U.N.  and  the  Communists  centered  on 
the  prisoner-of-war  question.  This  question  has 
been  little  understood  here  in  this  country.  It  is 
no  minor  matter  but  involves  a  fundamental 
principle. 

Western  democracy  regards  the  rights  and 
privileges  of  the  individual  as  paramount.  Con- 
sequently, we  have  insisted  that  there  can  be  no 
forcible  repatriation  of  such  prisoners  as  are  held 
by  the  U.N.  command.  We  could  not  agree  on 
any  other  basis,  and  we  are  hopeful  that  an  agree- 
ment consistent  with  this  principle  might  soon 
be  reached. 

If  an  armistice  is  signed,  it  would  signalize  the 
achievement  of  the  purpose  for  which  the  U.N. 
forces  entered  Korea.  You  will  recall  we  in- 
tervened in  Korea  to  halt  an  unprovoked  Com- 
munist aggression.  That  we  will  have  done.  We 
will,  further,  have  taken  a  long  stride  toward  the 
restoration  of  peace  in  the  area — and  in  the  world 
as  well. 

A  Korean  armistice  certainly  would  be  cause 
for  rejoicing.  American  prisoners  of  war  would 
be  brought  home.  They  would  be  returned  with- 
out our  paying  a  blood  price  in  lives  of  prisoners 
held  by  us  who  would  resist  repatriation  by  force. 
American  and  other  U.N.  casualties  would  cease. 

For  the  Republic  of  Korea  in  particular,  the 
heavy  loss  of  life  suffered  by  their  troops  would 
be  ended.  The  suffering  and  sacrifice  of  the 
people  of  that  courageous  nation  would  be  over. 
We  could  then  set  about  the  urgent  task  of  re- 
habilitation. 

We  are  hopeful  that  the  leaders  of  the  Republic 


876 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


of  Korea  will  recognize  the  merits  of  the  armistice 
terms  and  the  benefits  which  would  accrue  to  them 
from  a  cease-fire. 

But,  and  I  must  emphasize  this,  we  must  not 
forget  that  the  problem  of  Korea  would  still  be 
short  of  final  settlement.  It  will  probably  be 
necessary  for  us  to  keep  forces  in  Korea  for  some 
period  in  the  interests  of  security.  Moreover, 
should  an  armistice  be  signed,  there  are  political 
questions  to  be  resolved  leading  toward  the  uni- 
fication of  Korea.  Without  attempting  to  fore- 
cast the  course  of  these  talks,  they  will  not  be 
quickly  or  easily  concluded. 

At  this  point  I  should  like  to  sound  a  note  of 
caution.  If  we  gain  an  armistice,  we  should  be- 
ware of  letting  down  our  guard.  We  cannot 
relax.  Korea  is  but  one  flank  of  a  conflict  which 
girdles  the  world.  Danger  spots  are  many.  We 
must  remain  alert  and  ready. 

Should  a  settlement  in  Korea  be  achieved,  there 
are  still  other  major  problems  in  the  Far  East. 
In  our  concern  over  Korea,  we  tend  to  overlook 
the  guerrilla  war  which  is  going  on  in  Malaya  and 
the  fighting  between  the  French  Union  forces  and 
the  Communist  insurgents  in  Laos  and  Vietnam. 
These  are  dangerous  situations.  Nevertheless,  if 
we  recall  the  conditions  that  prevailed  several 
years  ago  in  these  areas,  the  improvement  in  the 
free-world  position  is  marked. 

I  am  far  from  being  the  incurable  optimist.  I 
do  not  hope  for  one  gi'and  and  sweeping  settle- 
ment which  will  forever  ease  international  difi'er- 
ences  or  relax  world  tension.  Appealing  as  such 
a  development  would  be,  the  present  situation  is 
too  diverse  and  too  complex  to  allow  it.  A  surer 
approach  is  to  solve  what  we  can  when  we  can. 

Make  no  mistake.  I  propose  a  tedious  and  a 
taxing  procedure.  It  will  call  for  determination 
on  our  part,  maturity,  and  stamina.  We  shall 
have  to  maintain  a  discipline  in  our  thinking 
which  will  rule  out  ill-considered  or  emotional 
moves. 

As  new  members  of  the  society  of  educated  men, 
you  have  a  responsibility  to  make  a  maximum  con- 
tribution to  this  struggle  for  peace.  You  can- 
not do  so  unless  you  have  an  abiding  faith  in  your 
own  future  and  in  the  future  of  this  and  other  free 


Corrections 

In  the  Bulletin  of  June  8,  1953,  p.  799,  first 
column,  the  second  sentence  of  the  second  para- 
graph should  read  :  "For  with  the  ratification  of 
the  Treaty  constituting  the  European  Coal  and 
Steel  Community,  the  nations  of  France,  Italy,  Ger- 
many, Belgium,  the  Netherlands,  and  Luxembourg 
stand  committed  to  try  to  merge  their  coal  and 
steel  industries  into  a  common  market." 

In  the  same  issue  of  the  Bulletin,  p.  800,  first 
column,  the  11th  and  12th  lines  should  read :  "Rien 
n'est  phis  permanent,"  say  the  wise  cynics,  "que 
le  provisoire." 


nations.  Faith  of  this  nature  generates  the  confi- 
dence we  need— the  courage  to  discharge  with 
purpose  and  with  resolution  the  tremendous  re- 
sponsibilities that  have  devolved  upon  us.  From 
that  faith  we  can  draw  the  strength  necessary  to 
meet  any  crisis  that  may  confront  us. 

If  you  require  evidence  to  persuade  you  of  the 
necessity  of  faith  and  courage,  look  at  what  the 
antithesis  has  produced  in  the  Soviet  Union. 
There  is  a  regime  that  employs  fear  as  an  instru- 
ment of  power  and  shapes  its  policy  out  of  hatred. 
Can  there  be  any  doubt  in  your  minds  as  to  which 
is  the  stronger?     As  to  which  will  endure? 

In  the  last  analysis,  our  strength  is  the  strength 
of  the  free  which  develops  out  of  a  passionate  in- 
dividual devotion  to  liberty. 

We  would  do  well  to  adopt  the  sentiments  ex- 
pressed by  an  early  patriot,  Josiah  Quincy,  in 
1774,  which  he  incorporated  in  his  "Observations 
of  the  Boston  Port  Bill."  His,  I  believe,  was  a 
declaration  of  a  fundamental.     He  wrote : 

Blandishments  will  not  fascinate  us,  nor  will  threats 
of  a  "halter"  intimidate.  For,  under  God,  we  are  deter- 
mined that  wheresoever  .  .  .  whensoever  ...  or  how- 
soever we  shall  be  called  to  make  our  exit,  we  will  die 
free  men. 


Treaty  of  Friendship,  Commerce 
and  Consular  Rights  with  Germany 

Press  release  302  dated  June  3 

An  agreement  concerning  the  application  of  the 
Treaty  of  Friendship,  Commerce  and  Consular 
Rights  of  1923,  as  amended,  between  the  United 
States  and  Germany,  to  the  Federal  Republic  of 
Germany  and  AVestern  Berlin  was  signed  on  June 
.3  at  Bonn.  The  agreement  represents  another  im- 
portant step  toward  normalization  of  relations  be- 
tween the  two  countries. 

James  B.  Conant,  U.S.  High  Commissioner  for 
Germany,  signed  the  agreement  on  behalf  of  the 
United  States  and  Konrad  Adenauer,  Chancellor 
of  the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany,  signed  on 
behalf  of  the  Federal  Republic. 

The  negotiations  leading  up  to  signature  of  the 
agreement  were  mentioned  in  the  communique  of 
April  9,  1953,^  concerning  the  U.S.-German  talks 
during  the  Chancellor's  visit  to  this  country. 

The  agreement  will  in  due  course  be  submitted 
to  the  Senate  for  advice  and  consent  to  ratification. 

The  text  of  the  agreement  is  as  follows : 

AGREEMENT  CONCERNING  THE  TREATY  BETWEEN 
THE  UNITED  STATES  OF  AMERICA  AND  GER- 
MANY ON  FRIENDSHIP,  COMMERCE  AND  CON- 
SULAR RIGHTS  OF  DECEMBER  8,  1923,  AS 
AMENDED 

The  United  States  of  America  and  the  Federal  Republic 
of  Germany,  desirous  of  strengthening  the  bonds  of  friend- 
ship existing  between  them  and  of  placing  their  relations 
on  a  normal  and  stable  basis  as  soon  as  possible,  have 

^  Bulletin  of  Apr.  20,  1953,  p.  565. 


June  22,    1953 


877 


resolved  as  a  step  toward  that  end  to  restore  to  full  force 
and  effect,  except  as  otherwise  provided  in  the  following 
Articles,  the  provisions  of  the  Treaty  of  Friendship,  Com- 
merce and  Consular  Riuhrs  between  the  United  States  of 
America  and  Germany  signed  at  Washington  December  8, 
1923,  as  amended,  as  a  provisional  measure  pending  the 
conclusion  of  a  more  comprehensive,  modern  treaty  or 
treaties  for  such  purposes,  and  have,  through  their  duly 
authorized  representatives,  agreed  as  follows: 

Article  I 

The  provisions  of  the  Treaty  of  Friendship,  Commerce 
and  Consular  Rights  between  the  United  States  of  America 
and  Germany  signed  at  Washington  December  8,  1023,  as 
amended  by  an  exchange  of  notes  dated  March  19  and 
May  21,  192.5,  and  the  agreement  signed  at  Wasliington 
June  3, 193.5,  shall  be  applied  and  be  considered  fully  oper- 
ative between  the  United  States  of  America  and  the  Fed- 
eral Republic  of  Germany  on  and  after  the  effective  date 
of  the  present  agreement  insofar  as  either  High  Contract- 
ing Party  may  not  have  heretofore  notified  the  other  Party 
in  accordance  with  Article  XXXI  of  the  aforesaid  Treaty 
an  intention  to  modify  or  omit  any  of  its  Articles,  and 
except  as  otherwise  provided  in  the  following  Articles, 
without  prejudice  to  the  previous  status  of  any  provisions 
of  the  aforesaid  Treaty  which  may  have  remained  opera- 
tive or  may  have  again  become  operative  at  any  time  since 
the  outbreak  of  hostilities  between  the  United  States  of 
America  and  Germany. 

Article  II 

In  accordance  with  the  intent  of  Article  XIX  of  the 
aforesaid  Treaty,  that  Article  is  hereby  amended  by 
adding  the  following : 

The  Government  of  either  Party  may,  in  the  territory 
of  the  other,  acquire,  own,  lease  for  any  period  of  time, 
or  otherwi.se  hold  and  occupy,  such  lands,  buildings, 
and  appurtenances  as  may  be  necessary  and  appropriate 
for  governmental,  other  than  military,  purposes.  If 
under  the  local  law  the  permission  of  the  local  authori- 
ties must  be  obtained  as  a  prerequisite  to  any  such 
acquiring  or  holding,  such  permission  shall  be  given  on 
request. 

Article  III 

None  of  the  provisions  of  the  present  agreement  or  of 
the  aforesaid  Treaty  shall  be  considered  as  affecting  in 
any  way  (1)  the  rights  or  obligations  of  either  Party  in 
respect  of  measures  to  safeguard  essential  security  inter- 
ests or  (2)  the  status  of  the  United  States  of  America 
and  its  personnel  in  Germany.  Until  the  effective  date  of 
the  Conventions  signed  at  P.onn  on  May  26,  19.52  -  the 
provisions  of  legislation,  regulations  or  directives  which 
may  be  in  effect  by  virtue  of  the  status  in  Germany  of 
the" United  States  of  America  shall  prevail  over  any  incon- 
sistent provisions  of  the  present  agreement  or  of  the 
aforesaid  Treaty ;  and  tliereafter  the  provisions  of  the 
said  Conventions,  and  of  any  other  related  agreements 
that  have  been  or  may  be  entered  into,  shall  so  prevail 
in  case  of  any  such  inconsistency. 

Article  IV 

Pending  the  peaceful  reunification  of  Gennany,  the 
German  territory  to  which  the  aforesaid  Treaty  shall  be 
applied  and  considered  fully  operative  shall  he  under- 
stood to  comprise  all  areas  of  land,  water  and  air  over 
whicli  the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany  exercises  juris- 
diction. The  present  agreement  sliall  also  enter  into 
force,  and  the  aforesaid  Treaty  shall  be  applied  and  con- 
sidered fully  operative,  in  the  area  of  Berlin  (West)  when 
the  Government  of  the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany  fur- 
nishes the  Government  of  the  United  States  of  America 


'For  a  summary  of  the  conventions,  see  ibid.,  June  9, 
1952,  p.  888. 

878 


a  notification  that  all  legal  procedures  in  Berlin  necessary 
therefor  have  been  complied  with. 

Article  V 

It  is  agreed  that  negotiations  for  a  new  treaty  of 
Friendship,  Commerce  and  Navigation  shall  be  entered 
into  without  delay. 

Article  VI 

1.  The  present  agreement  shall  be  ratified,  and  the 
ratifications  thereof  shall  l>e  exchanged  at  Washington 
as  soon  as  possible. 

2.  The  present  agreement  shall  enter  into  force  on  the 
day  of  exchange  of  ratifications. 

.3.  Either  Party  may  terminate  the  present  agreement 
by  giving  six  months'  written  notice  to  the  other  Party. 

In  witness  whereof  the  respective  duly  authorized 
representatives  have  signed  the  present  agreement. 

Done  in  duplicate,  in  the  English  and  German  lan- 
guages, both  equally  authentic,  at  Bonn,  this  third  day  of 
June,  one  thousand  nine  hundred  fifty-three. 

For  the  United  States  of  America: 

James  B.  Conant 

For  the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany: 

Adenauek 


International  Bank  and  Japan 
Discuss  Financing  Power  Projects 

The  Government  of  Japan  and  the  Interna- 
tional Bank  for  Reconstruction  and  Development 
announced  on  June  3  that  they  are  opening  dis- 
cussions on  the  general  approach  of  the  Bank 
toward  the  financing  of  Japan's  economic  devel- 
opment. These  discussions  follow  the  visit  to 
Japan  of  a  Bank  mission  in  the  closing  months 
of  last  year/  which  examined  the  general  eco- 
nomic situation  and  prospects  as  well  as  the  in- 
vestment requirements  of  Japan.  Three  thermal 
power  projects,  one  for  a  66,000  KAV  unit  for 
the  Chubu  Electric  Power  Company,  another  for 
a  75,000  KW  unit  for  the  Kyushu  Electric  Power 
Company,  and  the  tliird  for  two  7.5,000  KW  units 
for  the  Kansai  Electric  Power  Company,  have 
been  mentioned  as  a  possible  basis  for  the  Bank's 
initial  investment  in  Japan. 


Registration  Period  for  Holders 
of  Mexican  Securities 

Press  release  304  dated  June  3 

The  Department  of  State  calls  attention  to  a 
recent  announcement  of  the  Minister  of  Finance 
and  Public  Credit  of  the  Government  of  Mexico, 
which  is  of  interest  to  certain  holders  of  Mexican 
Government  Direct  Debt  Obligations  and  Mexican 
Railways  Obligations. 

The  announcement  refers  to  a  Presidential  de- 
cree signed  May  19,  1953,  pursuant  to  which  the 
Mexican  Government  has  granted  a  3-month  pe- 
riod, from  August  19  to  November  19,  1953,  dur- 

'  Bulletin  of  Oct.  27,  1953,  p.  672. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


ing  which  holders  of  those  securities  who  have  not 
registered  them  to  indicate  nonenemy  ownership, 
in  accordance  with  a  decree  dated  August  4,  1942, 
as  amended  and  extended,  may  apply  for  permis- 
sion to  register  them.  The  announcement  states 
that  the  3-month  period  during  which  applications 
for  registration  may  be  made  will  be  the  final  op- 
portunity for  such  registration,  and  that  the  pe- 
riod will  not  be  extended.  A  translation  of  the 
decree  may  be  obtained  at  any  field  office  of  the 
U.S.  Department  of  Commerce. 

A  Registration  Commission  has  been  established 
which  will  pass  upon  all  applications  for  permis- 
sion to  register,  and  it  is  announced  that  the  de- 
cision of  the  commission  will  be  final  and  non- 


appealable. The  announcement  states  that  security 
holders,  whose  applications  for  registration  are 
already  on  file  with  the  Ministry  of  Finance  or 
with  the  Banco  de  Mexico,  need  not  reapply  for 
permission  to  register.  The  Registration  Com- 
mission will  review  such  applications  and  notify 
the  securitj^  holders  at  the  earliest  moment. 

Application  forms  may  be  obtained  from  the 
Banco  de  Mexico,  S.  A.,  Mexico,  D.  F.  and,  in  the 
United  States,  from  the  American  Trust  Co.,  70 
Wall  St.,  New  York  5,  N.Y.  Further  information 
about  applying  for  permission  to  register  may  be 
obtained  from  these  organizations  or  from  the  of- 
fice of  Hardin,  Hess  &  Eder,  attorneys  for  the  Gov- 
ernment of  Mexico,  74  Trinity  Place,  New  York. 


Progress  Toward  Migration  Committee's  Goals 

FIFTH  SESSION  OF  THE  INTERGOVERNMENTAL  COMMITTEE 
FOR  EUROPEAN   MIGRATION  > 


hy  George  L.  Warren 


The  fifth  session  of  the  Intergovernmental  Com- 
mittee for  European  Migration  was  held  at 
Geneva  from  April  16  through  April  24,  1953. 
The  Subcommittee  on  Finance  met  from  April  13 
to  April  15,  1953.  Twenty-one  of  the  twenty-two 
member  governments  were  represented  at  the  ses- 
sion; Luxembourg  was  the  only  member  not  in 
attendance.  The  Argentine,  Costa  Rica,  and  Nor- 
way had  joined  the  Committee  since  the  previous 
session.  Colombia,  Spain,  the  United  Kingdom, 
the  Holy  See,  Allied  Military  Government, 
Trieste,  and  government  and  nongovernmental 
organizations  were  represented  by  observers. 

The  Migration  Committee  was  established  pro- 
visionally for  1  year  at  Brussels  in  December 
1951  and  was  continued  in  operation  during  1953 
by  decision  of  the  Committee  at  its  fourth  session 
at  Geneva  in  October  1952.  The  purpose  of  the 
Committee  is  to  secure  the  movement  out  of  Eu- 
rope of  over  100,000  migrants  and  refugees  an- 
nually who  would  not  otherwise  be  moved.  The 
21  member  governments  participating  in  the  fifth 
session  were  Argentina,  Australia,  Austria,  Bel- 


'  For  articles  by  Mr.  Warren  on  earlier  sessions  of  the 
Migration  Committee,  see  Bulletin  of  Feb.  4,  1952,  p.  169 ; 
Apr.  21,  1952,  p.  638;  July  21,  1952,  p.  107;  and  Jan.  12, 
1953,  p.  64. 

June  22,   J953 


gium,  Brazil,  Canada,  Costa  Rica,  Chile,  Denmark, 
France,  Germany,  Greece,  Israel,  Italy,  the  Neth- 
erlands, Norway,  Paraguay,  Sweden,  Switzerland, 
the  TJnited  States,  and  Venezuela. 

The  following  were  elected  to  serve  as  officers  at 
the  fifth  session:  Sir  Douglas  Berry  Copland 
(Australia),  chairman;  H.  von  Trutzschler  (Ger- 
many), first  vice-chairman;  Fernando  Garcia- 
Oldini  (Chile),  second  vice-chairman;  Tyge 
Haarl0v  (Denmark),  rapporteur. 

Dr.  von  Trutzschler  was  elected  chairman  of  the 
Subcommittee  on  Finance  which  met  for  2  days 
preceding  the  fifth  session.  The  Subcommittee 
was  composed  of  Australia,  Canada,  France,  Ger- 
many, Italy,  the  Netherlands,  and  the  United 
States.  The  Subcommittee  considered  the  finan- 
cial statements  covering  the  period  from  February 
1, 1952,  through  December  31, 1952,  and  the  status 
reports  on  the  budgets  and  plans  of  expenditure 
for  1952  and  1953. 

With  respect  to  the  financial  statements  for 
1952,  the  Subcommittee  noted  that  the  gross  in- 
come of  the  organization  to  December  31,  1952, 
was  $26,114,357  and  gross  expenditure,  $19,446,549. 
The  Committee  carried  over  on  January  1,  1953, 
$6,667,808,  of  which  $2,490,624  had  been  com- 
mitted before  December  31,  1952  for  1953 
operations. 

879 


The  Subcommittee  found  tliat  between  Febru- 
'  1,  1952,  and  December  31,  1952,  the  Com- 
.tee  had  moved  77,626  persons  out  of  Europe 
inckiding  31,226  refugees.     The  sources  and  des- 
tinations of  the  emigrants  were  as  follows : 

Countries  of  Emigration 

Austria 11,  012 

Germany 38,  276 

Greece 495 

Italy  and  Trieste 12,278 

Netherlands 10,  052 

Others 5,  513 

Countries  of  Immigration 

Australia    and 15,486 

New    Zealand 397 

Canada 8,  853 

Argentina >_, 

Brazil 9,  797 

Other  Latin   American 2,812 

United  States 38, 102 

Others 2, 179 

During  the  session  the  Director  reported  that 
the  number  of  persons  moved  by  the  Committee 
from  February  1,  1952,  through  February  28, 
1953,  had  been  84,492. 

The  Subcommittee  noted  with  satisfaction  that 
all  government  members,  with  the  exception  of 
one,  had  paid  their  contributions  totaling  $2,283,- 
168  to  the  administrative  expenditures  for  1952. 
Additional  contributions  to  operational  income 
amounted  to  $23,831,189.  Financial  reimburse- 
ments to  the  Committee  for  movements  completed 
during  1952  were  most  satisfying,  but  it  was  not 
expected  that  the  rate  of  reimbursement  achieved 
during  1952  would  be  maintained  in  1953.  Addi- 
tional funds  would  therefore  be  required  to  sub- 
sidize certain  movements  which  would  not  produce 
reimbursement  of  the  costs  involved. 

In  considering  the  status  report  on  the  budget 
and  plan  of  expenditure  for  1953,  which  had  been 
adopted  at  the  fourth  session  in  October  1952, 
the  Subcommittee  found  that  there  had  been  de- 
lays in  the  payment  of  contributions  to  all  cate- 
gories of  expenditure  during  the  first  quarter  of 
1953  and  recommended  to  the  full  Committee  that 
all  government  members  be  urgently  requested  to 
speed  up  payments.  This  action  was  later  taken 
by  the  full  Committee.  The  U.S.  representative, 
supported  by  the  Director,  made  a  special  plea  to 
the  Governments  to  secure  more  members  for  the 
Committee  and  to  make  more  and  larger  contri- 
butions to  the  Committee's  funds  in  order  that 
an  adequate  reserve  for  operating  expenditures  of 
at  least  $3,000,000  might  be  built  up  and  addi- 
tional funds  made  available  to  cover  the  cost  of 
nonreimbursable  movements. 

The  Director,  Hugh  Gibson,  in  making  his  re- 
port on  progress  to  date  and  prospects  for  1953, 
cited  the  fact  that  worldwide  economic  and  politi- 
cal conditions  had  affected  the  operations  of  the 
Committee  during  1952,  a  period  during  which 
emigration  movements  in  general  had  been  at  a 
lower  level  than  in  the  period  from  1947  through 

880 


1950.  He  expressed  confidence,  however,  that  the 
volume  of  movement  out  of  Europe  would  increase 
during  1953  because  of  the  many  signs  in  this 
direction  that  were  already  apparent,  such  as  the 
adherence  of  Argentina,  prospects  of  larger  move- 
ment to  Canada,  improving  economic  conditions 
in  Australia,  and  increasing  interest  in  immigra- 
tion in  the  Latin  American  countries. 

Mr.  Gibson  made  particular  reference  in  his 
report  to  the  invaluable  assistance  of  the  voluntary 
agencies  which  participated  in  one  way  or  another 
in  the  movement  of  more  than  half  of  the  persons 
assisted  by  the  organization  during  1952  and  ac- 
counted particularly  for  the  movement  of  11,560 
refugees.  The  movements  fostered  by  the  volun- 
tary agencies  had  shown  a  substantial  increase 
during  the  second  half  of  1952  and  an  even  larger 
gain  in  the  final  quarter.  Tlie  Committee  found 
no  difficulties  in  securing  adequate  commercial 
transport  from  Mediterranean  ports,  but  found  it 
necessary  to  arrange  additional  shipping  for  traf- 
fic from  Northern  Europe  to  Australia  and  to  the 
United  States  and  Canada. 


Expansion  of  Services  Begun 

A  definite  start  had  been  made  in  expanding 
the  migration  services  of  the  Committee  through 
the  provision,  in  collaboration  with  the  Brazilian 
and  Italian  Governments  and  the  International 
Labor  Organization  (Ilo),  of  training  for  build- 
ing laborers  in  Italy  destined  for  Brazil ;  of  lan- 
guage training  in  Greece,  in  collaboration  with 
UNESCO,  for  preselected  migrants  for  Australia; 
in  the  distribution  of  information  to  potential 
migrants;  and  in  projects  of  preselection  in  Italy 
in  which,  again,  the  Brazilian  and  Italian  Govern- 
ments, Ilo,  ancl  the  World  Health  Organization 
are  collaborating.  New  services  for  placement  of 
migrants  have  been  organized  in  collaboration 
with  the  Government  of  Brazil,  and  other  projects 
of  a  technical  nature  are  under  immediate  study. 
In  the  area  of  land  settlement,  Brazil,  Argentina, 
Chile,  and  Venezuela  are  making  definite  progress, 
with  the  assistance  of  staff  members  of  the  Com- 
mittee, in  preparing  projects  for  the  placement  of 
migrants. 

The  response  to  the  Director's  report  was  in 
general  commendatory  and  optimistic.  State- 
ments by  the  representatives  of  individual  govern- 
ments tended  to  confirm  the  Director's  appraisal 
of  the  prospects  of  movement  for  1953.  The 
Australian  representative  stated  that  it  remained 
the  policy  of  his  Government  to  absorb  the  maxi- 
mum number  of  immigrants  within  the  limitations 
of  available  capital  for  general  economic  develop- 
ment. The  representative  of  Chile  stated  that  his 
Government  was  examining  a  series  of  projects, 
particularly  one  for  the  settlement  of  1,000  Dutch 
families. 

The  representative  of  Canada  reaffirmed 
earlier  statements  that  it  was  Canada's  policy  to 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


admit  the  largest  number  of  immigrants  who  could 
be  integrated  into  the  economic  life  of  the  country 
each  year.  He  also  reported  that  the  Canadian 
Government  had  reached  a  decision  to  participate 
as  a  member  of  the  Committee  during  1953  and 
1954  and  that  Canada  would  need  further  assist- 
ance in  shipping  during  1953.  The  representa- 
tive of  Brazil  spoke  of  the  development  of  plans 
presently  in  prospect  in  his  country  under  which 
larger  numbers  of  Italian,  German,  and  Dutch 
migrants  miglit  be  received.  This  general  op- 
timism was  heightened  by  the  letter  received  by 
the  Director  from  President  Eisenhower,  early 
in  the  session,  in  which  the  President  expressed 
the  continuing  support  of  the  United  States  in 
the  Committee's  efforts.^  News  was  received 
later  in  the  session  of  the  President's  letter  to 
the  Congress  urging  the  adoption  of  legislation 
to  admit  210,000  migrants  and  refugees  into  the 
United  States  over  a  period  of  2  years.^ 

The  representative  of  Colombia,  reporting  as 
an  observer,  gave  a  brief  description  of  land- 
development  projects  in  Colombia  which  are  well 
beyond  the  blueprint  stage  and  for  which  the  re- 
quired financing  is  now  being  planned.  The  Ar- 
gentine delegate  reported  that  his  Government 
was  presently  engaged  in  the  building  of  roads 
and  of  irrigation  in  the  development  of  over 
600,000  acres  of  land  which  would  be  opened  for 
the  settlement  of  immigrant  and  native  fai'mers. 
Tlie  representative  of  Italy,  in  commenting  on 
the  migration  services  initiated  by  the  Committee, 
expressed  the  hope  that  studies  could  be  made  of 
the  possibility  of  grouping  certain  processing  serv- 
ices in  four  cities  in  Italy  under  the  auspices  of 
the  Committee;  thus  standards  of  selection  and 
of  examination  might  be  so  developed  under  in- 
ternational auspices  as  to  win  the  confidence  of 
all  recruiting  governments  which  might  come  to 
use  such  services  in  common  as  an  assistance  to 
recruitment. 

The  representative  of  Germany  confirmed  the 
Director's  statement  that  it  is  the  policy  of  the 
German  Federal  Eepublic  to  facilitate  emigra- 
tion from  West  Germany  in  accordance  with  the 
following  priorities:  (a)  dependents  of  persons 
who  have  already  emigrated;  (b)  alien  refugees; 
(c)  farmers  and  farm  workers;  (d)  single  wom- 
en (domestics  and  nurses)  ;  (e)  unskilled  labor; 
and  (/)  skilled  workers.  The  representative  of 
the  Netherlands  referred  to  the  requirements  of 
his  Government  for  the  assistance  of  the  Com- 
mittee in  shipping  and  to  the  need  for  more  op- 
portunities for  Dutch  emigrants. 

The  Committee  readily  adopted  the  proposal 
to  make  Spanish  an  additional  official  language. 
This  action  was  received  with  enthusiasm  by  the 
Latin  American  government  members  and  was 
considered  by  all  present  to  increase  the  likeli- 


^  Bulletin  of  May  4, 1953,  p.  641. 
'76i(J.,  p.  639. 


hood  of  the  early  adherence  of  the  Governments 
of  Colombia  and  Spain  to  the  Committee. 


Draft  Constitution  Studied 

The  Committee  devoted  the  remainder  of  the 
session  to  the  consideration  of  the  preliminary 
draft  constitution  which  had  been  prepared  by 
the  Director  at  the  request  of  the  Committee  at  its 
fourth  session.  After  a  general  discussion  on  the 
draft  constitution  in  the  full  Committee,  a  draft- 
ing subcommittee,  composed  of  representatives  of 
Argentina,  Australia,  Brazil,  Canada,  Denmark, 
France,  Germany,  Italy,  the  Netherlands,  the 
United  States,  and  Venezuela,  prepared  a  revised 
draft  which  the  Committee,  at  the  final  meet- 
ing, decided  to  refer  to  the  Governments  for  com- 
ment, with  the  request  that  all  connnents  be  for- 
warded to  the  Director  at  least  2  months  in  advance 
of  the  next  session. 

The  general  discussion  developed  the  fact  that 
some  of  the  government  members  would  be  able 
to  accept  the  constitution  by  administrative  action, 
whereas  others,  including  the  United  States,  would 
find  it  necessary  to  submit  the  text  of  the  pro- 
posed constitution  for  legislative  action  and  ap- 
proval. Eventual  acceptance  of  the  constitution 
by  the  government  members  will  give  the  Com- 
mittee more  stability  and  an  anticipated  life  span 
of  from  3  to  5  years. 

Article  1  of  the  proposed  constitution  reads  in 
part  as  follows : 

1.  The  purpose  and  functions  of  the  Committee  shall  be : 

(a)  to  make  arrangements  for  the  transport  of  mi- 
grants, for  whom  existing  facilities  are  inade- 
quate and  who  could  not  otherwise  he  moved, 
from  European  countries  having  surplus  popu- 
lation to  countries  overseas  which  offer  oppor- 
tunities for  orderly  immigration ; 

(b)  to  promote  the  increase  of  the  volume  of  migra- 
tion from  Europe  by  providing,  at  the  request 
of  and  in  agreement  with  the  Governments  con- 
cerned, services  in  the  processing,  reception  and 
first  placement  of  migrants  which  other  interna- 
tional organizations  are  not  in  a  position  to 
supply,  and  such  other  assistance  to  this  pur- 
pose and  in  the  settlement  of  migrants  as  falls 
within  the  capacity  of  the   Committee. 

The  discussions  at  the  fifth  session  reflected  opti- 
mism that  the  Committee's  goal  of  movement  for 
1953  of  120,000  migrants  and  refugees  out  of  Eu- 
rope can  be  achieved  during  the  year.  A  consid- 
erable number  of  wives  and  dependents,  particu- 
larly in  Germany  and  Italy,  await  the  opportunity 
to  join  husbands  and  fathers  who  have  preceded 
them  to  overseas  coimtries  of  immigration.  The 
techniques  of  selecting  and  processing  migrants 
for  travel  are  being  constantly  improved,  and  bet- 
ter placement  services  in  the  countries  of  immigra- 
tion are  beginning  to  show  results  in  the  opening 
up  of  further  opportunities  for  additional  mi- 
grants. The  sessions  of  the  Committee  have  pro- 
vided  new   opportunities   for  the   conclusion   of 


June  22,    7953 


881 


agreements  between  emigration  and  immigration 
countries  with  respect  to  migi'ation. 

The  United  States  was  represented  at  the  fifth 
session  by  George  L.  Wari'en.  The  advisers  were 
Dorothy  D.  Houghton,  Assistant  Director  for 
Refugees  and  Migration,  Mutual  Security  Agency ; 
Guy  J.  Swope,  Cliief,  Displaced  Populations  Divi- 
sion, Office  of  the  U.  S.  Higli  Commissioner  for 
Germany;  Richard  R.  Brown,  Director,  Office  of 
Field  Coordination,  Escapee  Program,  Frankfoit 
on  the  Main;  David  E.  Christian,  Chief,  Man- 
power and  Labor  Economics  Section,  European 
Labor  Division,  Office  of  the  Special  Representa- 
tive in  Europe,  Paris;  and  William  Kurylchek, 
American  Embassy,  Vienna. 

The  Committee  decided  to  convene  its  sixth 
session  in  October  1953. 

•  Mr.  Warren,  author  of  the  above  article,  is 
Adviser  on  Refugees  and  Displaced  Persons,  De- 
fartment  of  State. 


Investigation  of  U.S.  Citizens 
on  U.N.  Secretariat 

EXECUTIVE    ORDER    10459' 

Amendment  of  Executive  Order  No.  10^22  of  Jan- 
uary 9,  1953,-  Prescribing  Procedures  for 
Making  Avail-able  to  the  Secretary  General  of 
the  United-  Nations  Certain  Information  Con- 
cerning United  States  Citizens  Employed  or 
Being  Considered  for  Employment  on  the 
Secretariat  of  the  United  Nations 

Wheeeas  Executive  Order  No.  10422  of  January  9, 
1953,  prescribe.s  procedures  for  making  available  to  the 
Secretary  General  of  the  United  Nations  and  the  executive 
heads  of  other  public  international  organizations  certain 
information  concerning  United  States  citizens  employed 
or  being  considered  for  employment  by  the  United  Nations 
or  other  public  international  organizations  of  which  the 
United  States  is  a  member ;  and 

Whkreas  the  said  Executive  Order  No.  10422  incorpo- 
rates by  reference  certain  of  the  procedures  provided  or 
authorized  by  Executive  Order  No.  983.5  of  March  21, 
1947,  as  amended  ;  and 

Whereas  Executive  Order  No.  983.5,  as  amended,  has 
been  revoked  by  section  12  of  Executive  Order  No.  104.50 
of  April  27,  19.53,  effective  thirty  days  from  that  date : 

Now,  therefore,  by  virtue  of  the  authority  vested  in  me 
by  the  Constitution,  statutes,  and  treaties  of  the  United 
States,  including  the  Charter  of  the  United  Nations,  and 
as  President  of  the  United  States,  it  is  hereby  ordered 
as  follows : 

1.  Paragraphs  3,  4,  5,  and  6  of  Part  I  of  Executive 
Order  No.  10422  are  amended  to  read  as  follows : 

"3.  The  preliminary  investigation  conducted  by  the 
Civil  Service  Commission  shall  be  a  full  background 
Investigation  conforming  to  the  investigative  standards 
of  the  Civil  Service  Commission,  and  shall  include  refer- 
ence to  the  following : 

(o)   Federal  Bureau  of  Investigation  files. 
(h)   Civil  Service  Commission  files. 


'  18  Fed.  Ren.  3183. 

'  Bulletin  of  .Ian.  12,  19.53,  p.  62. 


(c)  Military  and  naval  intelligence  files  as  appropriate. 

(d)  The  files  of  any  otlier  appropriate  Government 
investigative  or  intelligence  agency. 

(e)  The  files  of  appropriate  committees  of  the  Congress. 

(f)  Local  law-enforcement  flies  at  the  place  of  resi- 
dence and  employment  of  the  person,  including  municipal, 
county,  and  State  law-enforcement  files. 

(</)   Schools  and  colleges  attended  by  the  person. 
(h)   Former  employers  of  the  person, 
(t)   References  given  by  tlie  person. 
(i)   Any  other  appropriate  source. 

However,  in  the  case  of  short-term  employees  whose 
employment  does  not  exceed  ninety  days,  such  investiga- 
tion need  not  include  reference  to  subparagraphs  (f) 
through  (j)  of  this  paragraph. 

"4.  Whenever  information  disclosed  with  respect  to 
any  person  being  investigated  is  derogatory,  within  the 
standard  set  forth  in  Part  II  of  this  order,  the  United 
States  Civil  Service  Commission  shall  forward  such  in- 
formation to  the  Federal  Bureau  of  Investigation,  and 
the  Bureau  shall  conduct  a  full  field  investigation  of  such 
person :  Provided,  that  in  all  cases  involving  a  United 
States  citizen  employed  or  being  considered  for  employ- 
ment on  the  internationally  recruited  staff  of  the  United 
Nations  for  a  period  exceeding  90  days,  the  investigation 
required  by  this  Part  shall  be  a  full  field  investigation 
conducted  by  the  Federal  Bureau  of  Investigation. 

"5.  Reports  of  full  field  investigations  shall  be  for- 
warded through  the  United  States  Civil  Service  Com- 
mission to  the  International  Organizations  Employees 
Loyalty  Board,  established  by  Part  IV  of  this  order  and 
hereinafter  referred  to  as  the  Board.  Whenever  such  a 
report  contains  derogatory  information,  under  the  stand- 
ard set  forth  in  Part  II  of  this  order,  there  shall  be  made 
available  to  the  person  in  question  the  procedures  of 
the  Board  provided  or  authorized  by  Part  IV  of  this  order 
(including  the  opportunity  of  a  hearing)  for  inquiring 
into  the  loyalty  of  the  person  as  a  United  States  citizen 
in  accordance  with  the  standard  set  forth  in  Part  II  of 
this  order.  The  Board  shall  transmit  its  determinations, 
as  advisory  opinions,  together  with  the  reasons  therefor 
stated  in  as  much  detail  as  the  Board  determines  that 
security  considerations  permit,  to  the  Secretary  of  State 
for  transmission  to  the  Secretary  General  of  the  I'nited 
Nations  fur  his  use  in  exercising  his  rights  and  duties 
with  respect  to  the  personnel  of  the  United  Nations  as 
set  out  in  the  Charter  and  in  regulations  and  decisions 
of  the  competent  organs  of  the  United  Nations. 

"6.  At  any  stage  during  the  investigation  or  Board 
proceeding,  the  Board  may  transmit  to  the  Secretary  of 
State,  for  forwarding  to  the  Secretary  General,  in  as 
much  detail  as  the  Board  determines  that  security  con- 
siderations permit,  the  derogatory  Information  disclosed 
Ijy  investigation.  This  shall  be  for  the  purpo.se  of  as- 
sisting the  Secretary  General  in  determining  whether 
or  not  he  should  take  action  with  respect  to  the  employee, 
or  the  person  being  considered  for  employment,  prior  to 
the  completion  of  the  procedures  outlined  in  this  order. 
The  making  available  of  any  such  information  shall  be 
without  prejudice  to  the  right  of  full  hearing  as  pro- 
vided for  herein." 

2.  Paragraph  1  of  Part  II  of  Executive  Order  No.  10422 
is  amended  to  read  as  follows ; 

"1.  The  standard  to  be  used  by  the  Board  in  making  an 
advisory  determination  as  provided  for  in  paragraph  5 
of  Part  I  of  this  order  with  respect  to  a  United  States 
citizen  who  is  an  employee  of,  or  is  being  considered 
for  employment  by,  the  United  Nations,  shall  be  whetlier 
or  not  on  all  the  evidence  there  is  a  reasonable  doubt 
as  to  the  loyalty  of  the  person  involved  to  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  United  States." 

3.  Executive  Order  No.  10422  is  further  amended  by 
adding  the  following  new  part  at  the  end  thereof : 


882 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


"Part  IV — Infcrnafiondl  Oryaiiizntions  Employees 
Loyalty  Board 

"1.  There  is  hereby  established  in  the  Civil  Service 
Commission  an  International  Organizations  Employees 
Loyalty  Board  of  not  less  than  three  impartial  persons, 
tha  members  of  which  shall  be  officers  or  employees  of 
th*  Commission. 

"2.  The  Board  shall  have  authority  in  cases  referred 
to  it  under  this  order  to  inquire  into  the  loyalty  to  the 
Government  of  the  United  States  of  United  States  citizens 
employed,  or  considered  for  employment,  by  international 
organizations  of  which  the  United  States  is  a  memlier, 
and  to  make  advisory  determinations  in  such  cases,  under 
the  standard  set  forth  in  Part  II  of  this  order,  for  trans- 
mission Ijy  the  Secretary  of  State  to  the  executive  heads 
of  the  international  organizations  coming  under  the  ar- 
rangements made  pursuant  to  Parts  I  and  III  of  this 
order. 

"3.  The  Board  shall  make  necessary  rules  and  regu- 
lations, not  inconsistent  with  the  provisions  of  this  order, 
for  the  execution  of  its  functions.  There  shall  be  in- 
cluded in  such  rules  and  regulations  provisions  for  fur- 
nisliing  each  person  whose  case  is  considered  by  the 
liiiard : 

(n)  A  written  statement  of  the  alleged  derogatory 
information,  in  as  much  detail  as  security  considerations 
permit. 

(6)  An  opportunity  to  answer  or  comment  upon  the 
statement  of  alleged  derogatory  information,  in  writing, 
and  to  submit  affidavits. 

(c)  An  opportunity  for  hearing  before  the  Board,  or 
a  panel  thereof  of  at  least  three  members,  Including  the 
right  of  the  person  to  he  represented  by  counsel,  to  present 
witnesses  and  other  evidence  in  his  behalf,  and  to  cross- 
examine  witnesses  offered  in  support  of  the  derogatory 
iiifdrmation :  Provided,  that  the  Board  shall  conduct  its 
hearings  in  such  manner  as  to  protect  from  disclosure 
information  affecting  the  national  security. 

"4.  Based  upon  all  the  evidence  before  it,  including 
such  confidential  information  as  it  may  have  in  its  pos- 
session, the  Board  shall  make  its  determinations  in 
writing,  and  shall  send  to  each  person  who  is  the  subject 
tliereof  a  copy.  In  cases  in  which  hearing  or  other  action 
is  by  a  panel  of  three  members,  the  action  or  determina- 
tion of  the  panel  shall  constitute  the  action  or  determina- 
tion of  the  Board,  except  that  rules  and  regulations 
pursuant  to  paragraph  3  of  this  Part  shall  be  adopted  by 
arlion  of  the  Board  as  a  whole. 

"o.  Except  as  otherwise  specified  in  this  order,  the 
Civil  Service  Commission  shall  provide  the  necessary  in- 
vestigative and  other  services  required  by  the  Board. 
All  agencies  of  the  executive  branch  of  the  Government 
are  authorized  and  directed  to  cooperate  with  the  Board, 
and,  to  the  extent  permitted  by  law,  to  furnish  the  Board 
such  information  and  assistance  as  it  may  require  in  the 
performance  of  its  functions. 

"(3.  All  cases  arising  under  this  order  which  are  pending 
before  the  Regional  Loyalty  Boards  and  the  Loyalty 
lieview  Board  of  the  Commission  on  the  effective  date  of 
Executive  Order  No.  104.50  of  April  27,  1953,  shall  on  that 
date  be  transferred  to  the  Board." 

This  order  shall  become  effective  on  May  27,  1953. 

The  White  House, 
June  2, 1953. 


Confirmation  of  Trusteeship  Council 
Representative 

On  June  11  the  Senate  confirmed  the  nomination  of 
Mason  Sears  as  U.S.  representative  on  the  Trusteeship 
Council  of  the  United  Nations. 


IMC  Adopts  System  of  Guiding 
Quotas  for  Molybdenum 

The  Tungsten-Molybdenum  Committee  of  the 
International  Materials  Conference  announced  on 
June  10  that  it  has  decided  not  to  recommend  a 
formal  allocation  for  molybdenum  for  the  third 
calendar  quarter  of  1953.  Instead,  it  has  worked 
out  guiding  quotas  for  the  use  of  countries  con- 
cerned which  reflect  only  what  is  regarded  as  a 
normal  pattern  of  distribution  at  this  stage. 

The  Governments  of  all  13  countries  represented 
on  the  Committee  have  accepted  this  recommenda- 
tion. These  countries  are  Australia,  Bolivia, 
Brazil,  Canada,  Chile,  France,  the  Federal  Repub- 
lic of  Germany,  Japan,  Portugal,  Spain,  Sweden, 
the  United  Kingdom,  and  the  United  States. 

The  Committee,  after  careful  examination, 
noted  a  distinct  improvement  in  the  molybdenum 
supply  situation,  which  is  now  considered  satis- 
factory for  essential  needs.  Therefore,  a  firm 
plan  of  allocation  for  ores  and  concentrates  and 
primary  products  is  no  longer  deemed  necessary. 

The  plan  of  guiding  quotas  should  insure  that 
the  present  pattern  of  trade  will  be  maintained 
both  as  regards  the  exports  and  imports  of  ores  and 
concentrates  and  primary  products.  Member  gov- 
ernments have  agreed  that  if  tlie  arrangements 
are  found  to  be  working  satisfactorily,  the  Com- 
mittee will  be  dissolved  on  July  31, 1953. 


Appointments  to  Pan  American 
Railway  Congress  Association 

Press  release  301  dated  June  2 

The  White  House  announced  on  June  2  that  the 
President  had  appointed  Sinclair  Weeks,  Secre- 
tary of  Commerce,  and  John  M.  Cabot,  Assistant 
Secretary  of  State  for  Inter-American  Affairs,  to 
the  U.S.  National  Commission  of  the  Pan  Ameri- 
can Railway  Congress  Association. 

The  other  members  of  the  U.S.  National  Com- 
mission are  as  follows:  William  T.  Faricy,  Pres- 
ident, Association  of  American  Railroads,  Chair- 
man ;  George  P.  Baker,  Professor  of  Transporta- 
tion, Graduate  School  of  Business  Administration, 
Harvard  University;  J.  M.  Hood,  President,  the 
Amc  rican  Short  Line  Railroad  Association ;  James 
G.  Lyne,  President,  Simmons-Boardman  Publish- 
ing Corporation,  and  Editor  of  Raihvay  Age; 
Arlon  E.  Lyon,  Executive  Secretary,  Railway 
Labor  Executives  Association ;  and  Charles  D.  Ma- 
hatlie.  Commissioner,  Interstate  Commerce  Com- 
mission. 

The  aims  of  the  Pan  American  Railway  Con- 
gress Association,  which  was  established  as  a  per- 
manent international  organization  in  1910,  are  to 
contribute  to  the  progress  of  railways  in  the 
Americas  through  the  study  and  possible  solution 
of  the  problems  inherent  in  the  development  of 


June  22,   1953 


883 


railway  systems  and  through  tlie  making  of  ar- 
rangements to  facilitate  international  railway 
traffic.  All  21  American  Republics  are  members 
of  the  Association,  the  headquarters  of  which  is 
at  Buenos  Aii'es,  and  many  railroads,  institutions, 
and  private  individuals  are  also  members.  U.S. 
membership  in  the  Association  and  the  establish- 
ment of  a  U.S.  National  Commission  were  author- 
ized in  Public  Law  794  of  the  80th  Congress  (ap- 
proved June  28, 1948). 

The  functions  of  the  U.S.  National  Commission, 
under  the  terms  of  the  charter  of  the  Association, 
include  the  provision  of  assistance  in  the  prepara- 
tion of  special  studies  of  railway  questions  and  in 
the  organization  of  the  periodic  congresses  of  the 
Association.  The  members  of  the  Commission 
have  played  leading  roles  in  making  preparations 
for  tlie  Eighth  Pan  American  Railway  Congress, 
which  is  to  meet  first  at  Washington  and  then  at 
Atlantic  City  during  the  period  between  June  12 
and  25  of  this  year.^ 


U.S.  Delegations 

to  International  Conferences 

Pan  American  Railway  Congress 

The  Department  of  State  on  June  8  announced  (press 
release  308)  tliat  the  Eighth  Pan  American  Railway 
Congress  is  to  be  held  first  at  Washiuston,  D.C.,  and 
then  at  Atlantic  City,  N.J.,  during  the  period  .Tune  12-25, 
11J53.  The  Congress  is  being  sponsored  by  the  Government 
of  the  United  States  and  the  U.S.  National  Commission 
of  the  Pan  American  Railway  Congress  As.sociation 
(Pakca)  In  collaboration  with  the  Permanent  Commis- 
sion of  the  Parca. 

The  members  of  the  U.  S.  delegation  to  the  Congress 
are  listed  below.  Asterisks  indicate  members  of  the  U.S. 
National  Commission,  Pan  American  Railway  Congress 
Association. 

Chairman 

♦William  T.  Fnricy,  president.  Association  of  American 
Railroad.s ;  Chairman,  U.S.  National  Commission 

Vice  Chairman 

*James  G.  Lyne,  president,  Simons-Boardman  Publish- 
ing Corp.,  New  York,  N.Y. 

Delegates 

♦George  P.  Baker,  professor  of  transportation,  Graduate 
School  of  Business  Administration,  Harvard  Univer- 
sity, Cambridge,  Mass. 

♦John  M.  Cabot,  Assistant  Secretary  of  State  for  Inter- 
American  Affairs,  Department  of  State 

C.  W.  Floyd  Coffin,  president.  Railway  Supply  Manufac- 
turers' Association,  New  York,  N.  Y. 

Richard  M.  Connell,  U.S.  resident  member,  Permanent 
Commission,  Pan  American  Railway  Congress  Asso- 
ciation, American  Embassy,  Buenos  Aires 

♦.lames  M.  Hood,  president,  American  Short  Line  Rail- 
road Association,  Washington,  D.C. 

♦Arlon  E.  Lyon,  executive  secretary.  Railway  Labor 
Executives'   Association,   Washington,   D.C. 

♦Charles  D.  Mahaffie,  commissioner,  Interstate  Commerce 
Commission 


'  For  an  article  by  Mr.  Faricy  on  the  Eighth  Pan  Ameri- 
can Railway  Congress,  .see  Bulletin  of  June  1, 10.53,  p.  787. 


Chauncey  O.  Rowe,  acting  president,  Institute  of  Inter- 
American  Affairs,  Department  of  State 
♦Sinclair  Weeks,  Secretary  of  Commerce 

Advisers 

Herbert  Ashton,  director,  Transportation,  Communica- 
tions and  Utilities  Division,  Office  of  International 
Trade,  Department  of  Commerce 

Kenneth  N.  Hyues,  American  Republics  Division,  Office  of 
International  Trade,  Department  of  Commerce 

Henry  H.  Kelly,  chief.  Inland  Transport  Policy  Staff, 
Office  of  Transport  and  Communications  Policy,  De- 
partment of  State 

Charles  P.  Nolan,  officer  in  charge.  Transportation  and 
Communications,  Bureau  of  Inter-American  Af- 
fairs, Department  of  State 

Secretarii 

♦Walter  S.  Abernathy,  transportation  economist.  Office 
of  International  Trade,  Department  of  Commerce; 
executive  secretary,  U.S.  National  Commission 

This  will  be  the  first  meeting  held  in  the  United  States 
by  the  Pan  .\merican  Railway  Congress  Association,  an 
organization  which  has  been  devoted  since  its  formation 
in  1910  to  the  improvement  of  railroad  facilities  and  serv- 
ices in  the  -Vmerican  Republics.  Previous  Congresses 
have  been  held  at  Buenos  .\ires,  Rio  de  Janeiro,  Santiago, 
Bogota,  Montevideo,  Habana,  and  Mexico  City. 

The  Washington  portion  of  the  Congress,  which  will 
last  from  June  12  through  June  20,  will  consist  primarily 
of  plenary  sessions  and  meetings  of  technical  sections  for 
the  presentation  and  discus.sion  of  papers  on  problems  of 
railway  construction,  rolling  stock,  operation,  administra- 
tion, and  public  policy.  During  the  Atlantic  City  portion 
of  the  Congress,  lasting  from  June  21  through  June  25, 
the  participants  will  have  an  opportunity  to  view  a  major 
railway  exhibit  being  sponsored  by  the  Railway  Supply 
Manufacturers'  Association,  and  to  attend  the  annual 
meetings  of  several  divisions  of  the  .Association  of  Ameri- 
can Railroads.  On  June  2^)  awards  and  prizes  will  be 
presented  to  the  authors  of  the  best  papers  presented  to 
the  Congress. 


International  Labor  Conference 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  June  2  (press 
release  300)  that  the  U.S.  delegation  to  the  thirty-sixth 
session  of  the  International  Labor  Conference,  opening 
at  Geneva  on  June  4,  1953,  includes : 

Representing  the  Government  of  the  United  States: 

Delegates 

Irving  McNeil  Ives,  U.S.  Senate 

Philip  M.  Kaiser,  Assistant   Secretary  of  Labor 

Alternate  Delegate 

James  E.  Murray,  U.S.  Senate 

Advisers 

B.  Harper  Barnes.  -Assistant  Solicitor  for  International 

Labor  Affairs,  Department  of  Labor 
Clara   M.   Beyer,   Associate   Director,    Bureau   of  Labor 

Standards.  Department  of  Labor 
William   B.   Groat,   Judge,   Queens   County   Court,   Long 

Island  City,  N.  Y. 
Joseph  L.  Harmon,  Assistant  Chief,  Ilo  Division,  Office 

of  International  Labor  Affairs,  Department  of  Labor 
William   M.   Leiserson,    Industrial   Relations   Consultant 

and  Arbitrator,  Washington,  D.C. 
Bichard  F.  Pedersen,  Office  of  U.N.  Economic  and  Social 

Affairs,  Department  of  State 
Fernando  Sierra  Berdecia,  Secretary  of  Labor  of  Puerto 

Rico,  San  Juan,  P.R. 


884 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


David  M.  Walker,  Secretary,  Department  of  Labor  and 
Industry,  Harrisl)iirs,  Pa. 

Arnold  L.  Zempel,  Executive  Director,  Office  of  Inter- 
national Labor  Affairs,  Department  of  Labor 

Representing  the  Employers  of  the  United  States  : 

Delegate 

Charles  E.  Shaw,  Standard  Oil  Company  of  N.J. 

Advisers 

William  B.  Barton,  Chamber  of  Commerce  of  the  United 
States 

Robert  C.  Bassett,  Hearst  Newspapers 

Richard  P.  Doherty,  National  Association  of  Radio  and 
Television  Broadcasters 

James  W.  Haley,  Jewell  Ridse  Coal  Corp. 

Hoey  A.  Hennessy,  National  Association  of  Manu- 
facturers 

Milton  M.  Olander,  Owens-Illinois  Glass  Company,  Toledo, 
Ohio 

Herbert  M.  Ramel,  Moog  Industries,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

Charles  H.  Smith,  Jr.,  Steel  Improvement  and  Forge 
Company,  Cleveland,  Ohio 

William  G.  Van  Meter,  Chamber  of  Commerce  of  the 
United  States 

Representing  the  Workers  of  the  United  States  : 

Delegate 

George  Philip  Delaney,  American  Federation  of  Labor 


Advisers 

Alexander  J.  Cleland,  Bricklayers,  Masons  and  Plaster- 
ers' International  Union  of  America 
John  J.  DiifEy,  International  Brotherhood  of  Electrical 

Workers 
A.  D.  Lewis,  United  Mine  Workers  of  America 
Lee  W.  Minton,  Glass  Bottle  Blowers'  Association  of  the 

United  States  and  Canada 
Michael  Ross,  Congress  of  Industrial  Organizations 
Harry  Sayre,  United  Paperworkers  of  America 
Elwo'od  Swisher,  United  Gas,  Coke  and  Chemical  Work- 
ers of  America 

Members  of  the  resident  U.S.  delegation  for  Interna- 
tional Organization  affairs  in  Geneva  who  will  take  part 
are  Henry  F.  Nichol,  serving  as  secretary  of  delegation^; 
Mason  A.  LaSelle,  as  administrative  officer ;  and  John  F. 
Jason,  as  documents  officer. 

The  International  Labor  Conference  is  the  legislative 
body  of  the  International  Labor  Organization  (Ilo),  a 
specialized  agency  of  the  U.N.  system  which  seeks  through 
international  action  to  improve  labor  conditions,  raise 
living  standards,  and  promote  economic  and  social  sta- 
bility. 

The  item.s  on  the  agenda  for  the  thirty-sixth  session  of 
the  Conference  are  as  follows :  (1)  report  of  the  Director 
General,  (2)  financial  and  budget  questions,  (3)  applica- 
tion of  conventions  and  recommendations,  (4)  holidays 
with  pay,  (.5)  protection  of  the  health  of  workers,  (6) 
minimum  age  for  underground  work  in  coal  mines,  (7) 
organization  and  working  of  national  labor  departments, 
and  (8)   constitutional  amendment. 


Eight  Years  of  UNESCO  Progress 


FoIJoioing  is  the  text  of  a  letter  which  Walter. 
E.  C.  Laves^  Chairman  of  the  U.S.  National  Com- 
\ission  for  UNESCO,  sent  to  Senator  Karl  E. 


missic 


Mundt,  reforting  on  UNESCO''s  progress.^ 

]VL\T  11,  1953 
Mt  Dear  Senator  Mundt  : 

On  behalf  of  the  United  States  National  Com- 
mission for  Unesco,  it  is  my  pleasant  privilege  to 
recall  to  your  mind  an  historic  event  which  took 
place  8  years  ago  and  in  which  you  played  a  major 
part.  At  that  time  steps  were  talien  to  assure  in- 
ternational action  in  support  of  principles  basi- 
cally identical  with  those  found  in  the  United 
States  Constitution  and  the  Bill  of  Rights. 

On  May  22,  19-15,  the  House  of  Eepresentatiyes 
adopted  House  Resolution  215,  which  you  had  in- 
troduced, in  which  the  House  urged  ".  .  .the 
participation  by  the  Government  of  the  United 
States  in  the  creation  of  an  international  educa- 
tional and  cultural  organization.  .  .  ."  Two  days 
later  the  Senate  adopted  a  similar  resolution  intro- 
duced by  Senator  J.  William  Fulbright  and  Sen- 
ator Robert  A.  Taft.     Pursuant  to  these  resolu- 


^  Reprinted  from  Cong.  Rec.  of  May  19,  1953,  p.  5285. 
June  22,   1953 


tions,  the  United  States  helped  to  establish  the 
United  Nations  Educational,  Scientific  and  Cul- 
tural Organization.  Two  Members  of  Congress, 
Senator  James  E.  Murray  and  Representative 
Chester  E.  Merrow,  were  members  of  the  United 
States  delegation  to  the  Conference  at  which  the 
constitution  of  Unesco  was  drawn  up.  Subse- 
quently Congress  authorized  the  acceptance  of 
membership  in  Unesco  by  the  United  States  and 
the  establishment  of  a  National  Commission  to  ad- 
vise the  Government,  and  to  serve  as  an  agency 
of  liaison  on  Unesco  matters. 

In  view  of  the  personal  initiative  and  interest 
which  you  thus  showed  in  the  establishment  of 
Unesco,  together  with  these  colleagues  in  Con- 
gress, I  should  like  to  take  this  occasion  to  give 
each  of  you  a  brief  report — a  progress  report — 
about  the  Organization  and  the  National  Com- 
mission. 

Unesco  is  rendering  to  its  member  states  the 
services  which  you  envisaged  for  the  organization 
in  H.  R.  215:  ".  .  .  for  the  purpose  of  advising 
together  and  to  consider  problems  of  international 
education  and  cultural  relations  throughout  the 
world  and  more  particularly  to  organize  a  perma- 

885 


nent  international  agency  to  promote  educational 
and  cultural  relations,  the  exchange  of  students, 
scholars,  and  other  educational  and  cultural  lead- 
ers and  materials,  and  the  encouragement  with 
each  country  of  friendly  I'elations  among  nations, 
peoples,  and  cultural  groups." 

You  will  be  pleased  to  know  how  far  Unesco 
has  gone  in  living  up  to  these  expectations. 


UNESCO  Services 

UNESCO  has  responded  to  tlie  urgent  requests  of 
more  than  20  of  the  less  developed  nations  for 
help  in  raising  their  levels  of  education. 

It  has  pioneered  a  system  of  fundamental  educa- 
tion which  helps  improve  health,  nutrition,  and 
literacy,  and  thus  promises  to  raise  the  standard  of 
living  oif  tlie  more  than  half  of  tlie  world's  popula- 
tion which  can  neither  read  nor  write. 

It  has  brought  together  teachers  from  many 
countries  and  in  many  separate  conferences  for  the 
study  of  common  educational  problems. 

It  has  demonstrated  to  countries  without  public 
libraries  how  they  can  establish  these  and  use  them 
for  democratic  educational  purposes. 

It  is  helping  member  states  undertake  scientific 
research  to  improve  living  conditions.  Notably  it 
promotes  study  of  ways  in  which  semidesert  re- 
gions can  be  brought  into  cultivation. 

It  has  made  possible  the  renewal  of  contacts  be- 
tween scientists,  educators,  and  creative  artists  in 
the  postwar  world,  thus  upholding  the  free  ex- 
change of  knowledge  and  ideas. 

Schools  and  libraries  in  soft  currency  countries 
have  found  a  way  to  obtain  books,  laboratory 
equipment  and  other  necessary  supplies  from  hard 
currency  countries  through  the  Unesco  coupon 
plans.  In  1952  this  made  possible  purchases  from 
the  United  States  to  an  amount  of  over  half  a 
million  dollars. 

Fellowships  and  travel  grants  awarded  by 
Unesco  have  helped  educators,  scientists,  youth 
leaders,  and  trade  union  members  from  over  40 
countries  to  study  in  other  countries. 

The  international  interchange  of  students  and 
teachers  is  greatly  helped,  too,  by  Unesco's  publi- 
cations, Study  Abroad  and  Teaching  Abroad 
which  list  annually  the  fellowships  and  teaching 
opportunities  in  many  countries  that  are  open  to 
candidates  from  other  lands. 

Unesco  has  helped  people  in  the  free  world  un- 
derstand the  principle  of  collective  security,  as  de- 
fended by  the  United  Nations  in  Korea. 

Most  important  of  all,  Unesco  is  demonstrating 
to  the  people  of  the  free  world  how  they  can  secure 
social  and  economic  advancement  through  free  in- 
stitutions and  through  peaceful  international  co- 
operation. 

May  I  mention  a  few  typical  pieces  of  Unesco 
work  that  have  come  to  my  personal  attention 
recently. 

886 


Raising  Educational  Levels 

In  19.52  alone,  Unesco  was  asked  by  member 
governments  to  send  out  22  educational  missions. 
Tlie  purpose  of  these  was  to  provide  expert  help 
in  planning  public  educational  reforms,  to  recom- 
mend methods  of  financing  such  reforms,  and  to 
propose  ways  of  improving  school  administration. 
These  teams  of  international  composition  and 
character  would  have  been  impossible  without 
Unesco. 

This  large  number  of  advisory  services  was  re- 
quested because  previous  missions  sent  out  under 
Unesco  auspices  had  been  singularly  successful. 
I  talked  about  this  at  the  Paris  General  Conference  , 
of  Unesco  last  November  with  an  official  of  the 
Ministry  of  Education  of  Thailand.  He  told  me 
al)out  tiie  changes  that  have  been  undertaken  in 
the  Siamese  educational  system  as  the  result  of 
the  educational  mission  which  his  government 
had  requested  Unesco  to  send  2  years  ago.  A 
10-year  plan  for  educational  development  has  been 
approved  and  a  supplemental  scheme  is  already  in 
operation  in  one  area  where  all  types  and  grades 
of  educational  activities  are  being  reorganized. 

The  delegate  from  Burma  told  me  that  his  gov- 
ernment had  doubled  its  budget  for  public  edu- 
cation and  was  in  the  midst  of  building  1,000  new 
primary  schools,  240  secondary  schools,  and  a 
teacher  training  center.  This  was  the  direct  re- 
sult of  the  recommendations  of  a  Unesco  edu- 
cational mission  which  had  been  adopted  by  the 
Burmese  Government.  Important  progress  has 
been  made  in  Afghanistan  and  many  other 
countries. 

A  few  months  ago  I  was  in  Cairo  when  the  final 
plans  were  made  for  the  establishment  of  a  funda- 
mental education  center  for  the  Arab  states.  Il- 
literacy rates  in  this  region  range  from  50  to  70' 
percent.  This  center  has  now  opened  and  the' 
first  class  has  teams  of  5  trainees  from  each  of  the' 
6  cooperating  countries.  Within  a  year  therei 
should  be  200  trainees  enrolled.  The  center  is) 
modeled  on  the  Fundamental  Education  Center  im 
Mexico,  which  is  supported  by  Unesco,  the  Mexi- 
can Government,  and  the  Organization  of  the 
American  States.  Fifty  teachers  were  graduated 
this  year  from  the  Mexican  center.  They  liavei 
returned  to  their  countries  in  Latin  America  to  es-' 
tablish  similar  national  schools  run  by  their  owni 
governments. 

Methods  by  Wiiicli  UNESCO  Has  Worked 

These  services,  like  all  else  that  is  done  by  the 
organizations,  are  undertaken  by  Unesco  only 
on  the  request  of  the  member  states.  I  can  assure 
you,  from  personal  experience  as  Deputy  Director 
General  of  Unesco  for  nearly  4  years,  and  from 
subsequent  observation,  that  Unesco  carries  out 
in  the  letter  and  the  spirit  the  provision  of  its 
constitution  that,  "with  a  view  to  preserving  the 
independence,  integrity,  and  fruitful  diversity  of 
the  states  members  of  this  organization,  the  or- 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


i 


Fourth  Conference  of  U.  S.  National 
Commission  for  UNESCO  To  Be  Held 

The  U  S  National  Commission  for  Unesco  lias 
announced  that  its  Fourth  National  Conference  will 
be  held  in  Minneapolis  at  the  University  of  Minne- 
sota September  1.V17,  1953.  The  conference  is  au- 
thorized by  Public  Law  565  (Tilth  Cong.,  2d  bess.), 
and  this  year  will  have  as  its  theme  •■Americas 
Stake  in  International  Cooperation."  Seven  hun- 
dred delegates  representing  organizations,  institu- 
tions, and  individuals  will  attend.  The  12th 
annual  meeting  of  the  U.S.  National  Commission 
for  UNESCO  will  precede  the  conference. 


ganization  is  prohibited  from  intervening  in  mat- 
ters which  are  essentially  within  their  juris- 
diction." 

UNESCO's  work  throughout  its  program  rests  on 
and  supports  and  promotes  the  free  exchange  of 
knowledge  and  ideas.  It  is  a  continuous  attack, 
by  practical  action,  against  the  Iron  Curtain  phi- 
losophy. Fellowships  for  study  abroad,  inter- 
national seminars  for  scientists,  scholars,  and 
teachers,  expert  advice  given  on  request,  publica- 
tions bringing  the  concentrate  of  free  scholarly 
inquiry  or  divergent  opinions — these  are  its  chief 
methods  of  action. 

Increasing  UNESCO  Membership 

As  you  know,  this  agency  unites  the  American 
people  in  the  cause  of  freedom,  understanding, 
and  friendship  with  the  people  of  over  60  other 
countries. 

Six  years  ago,  when  Unesco's  first  conference 
was  held,  there  were  34  member  states.  The  num- 
ber has  increased  steadily  each  year.  At  its  last 
meetins,  Unesco  accepted  the  application  of 
Spain.Xibya,  and  Nepal.  Countries  which  have 
gained  their  independence  have  at  once  applied 
for  membership  in  Unesco— countries  such  as 
Indonesia,  Cambodia,  Viet  Nam,  Burma,  Ceylon, 
and  Pakistan.  Germany  and  Japan  have  sought 
and  received  admission;  thus  Unesco  brings  for- 
mer enemy  peoples  back  into  the  family  of  nations. 
I  am  sure  that  you  will  regret  with  me  that  the 
peoples  of  some  countries  are  kept  outside  Unesco 
by  the  will  of  their  governments,  but  it  is  easy  to 
understand  why  Soviet  Russia  has  refused  to  sub- 
scribe to  the  principles  of  Unesco,  and  why  the 
Governments  of  Poland,  Czechoslovakia,  and 
Hungary  have  withdrawn  from  Unesco,  since 
they  have  become  satellites  of  the  U.S.S.R.,  and 
since  Unesco  has  begun  to  be  eilective. 

The  Polish  Government,  in  its  letter  of  with- 
drawal, last  December,  alleged  that  Unesco  is 
turning  itself  into  an  obedient  instrument  of  the 
cold  war  launched  by  American  imperialism ;  that 
UNESCO  has  supported  Anglo-American  aggres- 
sion in  Korea. 

These  distortions  and  falsehoods  were  rejected 
by  the  General  Conference  of  Unesco,  which  de- 
June  22,   J 953 


clared  "that  the  allegations  contained  in  the  afore- 
said communication  are  completely  unfounded." 

Some  United  States  Misunderstandings 

I  should  like  to  remark  briefly  on  two  points 
about  which  some  misunderstanding  exists  m  the 
United  States. 

First,  all  who  sincerely  wish  that  international 
cooperation  through  organization  may  succeed  are 
concerned  lest  Americans  who  are  disloyal  or  are 
engaged  in  subversive  activities  should  find  em- 
ployment in  international  agencies.  The  Execu- 
tive Committee  of  the  United  States  National 
Commission  at  one  of  its  first  meetings  m  1947  de- 
clared that  persons  employed  by  Unesco  should 
be  truly  and  fully  representative  of  their  coun- 
tries, and  the  National  Commission  assisted 
Unesco  to  find  Americans  who  meet  this  standard. 
About  60  Americans  are  employed  by  Unesco 
headquarters  in  Paris,  which  has  a  total  staff  ot 
about  800,  and  some  50  other  Americans  are  em- 
ployed by  Unesco  in  other  parts  of  the  world. 
I  am  confident  that  the  great  majority  of  these 
Americans  employed  by  Unesco  are  completely 
loyal  citizens,  and  I  believe  that  measures  now 
being  taken  will  assure  that  no  American  will  be 
empfoyed  by  Unesco  except  those  known  to  be 

loyal.  . 

I  wish  also  to  touch  on  another  point  which  may 
have  come  to  your  notice— the  allega,tion  that 
UNESCO  is  trying  to  impose  some  doctrine  on  our 
schools,  designated  as  one-world  government. 
This  false  charge  was  first  aired  m  a  newsletter 
issued  by  a  certain  organization  and  has  been 
widely  repeated,  although  frequently  refuted. 
The  truth  is  that  in  several  pamphlets  for  teachers 
(not  for  pupils)  some  opinions  expressed  m  inter- 
national conferences  of  teachers  invited  from  var- 
ious countries  are  reported,  and  that  an  occasional 
sentence  among  these  opinions  indicates  a  belief 
that  a  world  organization  should  have  stronger 
powers  than  those  given  to  the  United  Nations. 
UNESCO  has  never  advocated  any  policy  with  re- 
si^ect  to  world  government.  The  Director  Gen- 
eral of  UNESCO  has  spoken  explicitly  on  this  point. 
"It  has  never  been  the  purpose  of  Unesco  to  turn 
citizens  from  their  national  loyalties  .  .  .  who- 
ever out  of  alleged  devotion  to  some  international 
ordeT,  repudiates  his  loyalty  to  his  own  country, 
does  not  really  love  his  own  country  nor  the  inter- 
national order  he  claims  to  admire." 

United  States  National  Commission  Active 

I  should  like  to  take  this  opportunity,  too,  of 
reporting  to  you  that  the  United  States  National 
Commission  has  carried  out  in  the  past  6  years 
many  of  the  functions  assigned  to  it  by  Congress. 
You  were  one  of  those  who  labored  to  insure  that 
the  Commission  should  be  a  body  widely  repre- 
sentative of  the  voluntary  citizen  groups  ot  this 
country.  It  consists  of  100  American  citizens,  of 
whom  '60  are  selected  and  nominated  by  national 

887 


organizations.  These  voluntary  organizations 
comprise  millions  of  members,  and  are  widely 
representative  of  the  educational,  cultural,  social, 
economic,  and  religious  life  of  this  country! 
Through  active  memoership  in  the  National  Com- 
mission they  have  linked  their  members  in 
Unksco's  work  for  international  friendship. 

The  Commission  has  been  continuously  con- 
sulted by  the  Department  of  State  on  many  mat- 
ters relating  to  United  States  participation  in 
Unesco.  It  has  been  represented  on  delegations 
to  all  sessions  of  the  General  Conference  of 
UNESCO,  at  which  the  program  and  budget  of  this 
organization  are  approved. 

Through  several  committees  and  panels  of  ex- 
perts, parts  of  UNESCO's  program  are  submitted  to 
citizen  groups  and  competent  specialists  for  con- 
sideration and  advice.  More  than  this,  hundreds 
of  American  citizens  have  volunteered  to  assist  in 
the  task  of  carrying  out  within  the  United  States 
those  portions  of  the  Unesco  program  that  can 
be  carried  out  in  this  country,  such  as  contributing 
ro  the  educational  needs  of  the  less  developed 
countries  and  the  study  of  the  United  Nations. 

A  special  featui-e  of  the  National  Commission's 
program  has  been  the  organization  every  2  years 
of  a  national  conference  for  the  purpose  of  con- 
sidering ways  to  improve  our  understanding  of 
and  participation  in  world  affairs,  particularly 
through  the  kinds  of  international  cooperation 
represented  by  Unesco.  Provision  for  such  con- 
ferences was  wisely  made  by  Congress  when  it 
authorized  the  establishment  of  the  National  Com- 
mission. All  interested  organizations  are  invited 
to  send  representatives. 

You  will  recall  the  First  National  Conference 
held  in  Philadelphia  in  1947  at  which  you  gave  a 
keynote  address.  Subsequent  conferences"  were 
held  in  April  1949  and  January  1952.  We  are  now 
making  plans  for  the  Fourth  National  Conference 
to  be  held  in  Minneapolis  in  September  at  which 
the  main  theme  will  be  "America's  Stake  in  Inter- 
national Cooperation." 

This  letter  [is]  ah-eady  too  long  by  ordinary 
standards — yet  it  barely  touches  upon  the  wide 
variety  of  important  activities  made  possible 
through  the  existence  of  Unesco. 

I  want  to  close  by  extending  you  the  thanks, 
appreciation,  and  congratulations  of  the  United 
States  National  Commission  for  Unesco  for  the 
great  public  service  you  performed  in  helping 
assure  the  establishment  of  Unesco  which  has 
been  so  essential  to  the  achievement  of  an  under- 
standing among  peoples  and  of  peace  itself.  Even 
at  this  early  date  the  wisdom  of  that  decision 
has  been  demonstrated  by  the  enthusiastic  sup- 
port given  Unesco  throughout  the  peace-loving 
world.  The  record  of  this  phase  of  postwar  co- 
operation has  already  shown  its  practicability  and 
necessity. 

Sincerely, 

Walter  H.  C.  Laves 


Current  U.N.  Documents: 
A  Selected  Bibliography  ' 

Economic  and  Social  Councit 

Full  Employment.     Iniiilementation  of  Full  Employment 
Polieie.s.     Replies  of  governments  to  the  full  employ- 
ment questionnaire  covering  the  period  iy51-.")2,  sub- 
mitted under  resolutions  221  E  (IX),  290  (XI)  and 
371  B   (XIII)   of  the  Economic  and  Social  Council. 
Contents :  India.     E/2232/Add.  10,  Apr.  13,  1953.     29 
pp.  mimeo. 
Economic  Commission  for  Europe.     Annual  Report  to  the 
Economic  and  Social  Council  covering  the  period  from 
19  March  1952  to  18  March  1953.     E/2382,  E/ECE/ 
162,  Mar.  28,  1953.     100  pp.  mimeo. 
Financial  Implications  of  Actions  of  the  Council.    Work 
Programmes  and  Costs  of  the  Economic  and  Social 
Activities   of    the   United   Nations.     E/2889/Add.   2. 
5  pp.  mimeo. 
United    Nations    Programme    of    Technical    Assistance. 
Under  General  Assemlily  resolutions  200   (III),  246 
(III),  418    (V)    and   Economic   and   Social   Council 
resolution   222  A    (IX).     Report  bv   the   Secretary- 
General.     E/2414,  Apr.  30,  1953.     139  pp.  mimeo. 
Freedom  of  Information.     Comments  and  suggestions  of 
governments  transmitted  for  information  and  assist- 
ance   of    Rapporteur    on    Freedom    of    Information. 
E/2427.     47  pp.  mimeo. 
Report     of     the     World     Meteorological     Organization. 

E/2428,  May  12,  1953.     72  pp.  mimeo. 
Report  of  the  Food  and  Agriculture  Organization  of  the 
United    Nations.     E/2432,    May    14,    1953.     27    pp. 
mimeo. 
Economic    Development    of    Under-Developed    Countries. 
Question  of  Methods  To  Increase  World  Productiv- 
ity   (Council   Resolution   416   E    (XIV)).     Working 
Paper  by  the  Food  and  Agriculture  Organization  on 
the  problems  of  productivity  in  agriculture,  fisheries, 
and  forestry.     E/2435,  May  18,  19.53.     13  pp.  mimeo. 
Calendar  of  Conferences  for  1954.     Memorandum  by  the 
Secretary-General.     E/2436,    May    19,    1958.     12   pp. 
mimeo. 
Commission  on  Human  Rights.  Ninth  Session.     Measures 
of  Implementation.     Statement  submitted  by  the  In- 
ternational  League  for  the  Rights  of  Man,   a  non- 
governmental   organization    in    Category    B    status. 
E/CN.4/NG0.45,  Apr.  10,  1953.     3  pp.  mimeo. 
United  Nations  International  Children's  Emergency  Fund, 
Executive  Board.     Report  of  the  Executive  Board  on 
Its  103rd  to  110th  Meetings  Held  19-26  March  19."i3. 
E/ICEF/227,  May  8,  19.53.     240  pp.  mimeo. 
Unicef-Who  Joint  Committee  on  Health  Policy  Report  of 
the  Sixth  Session  Held  at  the  Headquarters  of  the 
World   Health   Organization,   Geneva,   1  and  2   Mav 
19.53.     E/ICEF/228,  May  12,  1953.     12  pp.  mimeo.  " 
Consideration  of  the  Provisional  Agenda  for  the  Sixteenth 
Session  of  the  Council.     Preliminary  annotations  to 
the  draft  provisional  agenda  for  the  sixteenth  session 
contained  in  E/2352/Rev.  1.     Note  by  the  Secretary- 
General.     E/L.498,  Apr.  23,  1953.     8  pp.  mimeo. 


'  Printed  materials  may  be  secured  in  the  United  States 
from  the  International  Documents  Service.  Columbia  Uni- 
versity Press,  29<'.0  Broadway,  New  York  27.  N.  Y.  Other 
materials  (mimeographed  or  processed  documents)  may 
be  consulted  at  certain  designated  libraries  in  the  United 
States. 

The  U.N.  Secretariat  has  established  an  Official  Records 
series  for  the  General  Assembly,  the  Security  Council, 
the  Economic  and  Social  Council,  the  Trusteeship  Council, 
and  the  Atomic  Energy  Commission,  which  includes  sum- 
maries of  proceedings,  resolutions,  and  reports  of  the 
various  commissions  and  committees.  Information  on  se- 
curing subscriptions  to  the  series  may  be  obtained  from 
the  International  Documents  Service. 


888 


Deparfment  of  Sfafe   Bullef'm 


Congress  Urged  To  Make  Grant  of  U.  S.  Wheat  to  Pakistan 


MESSAGE  OF  THE  PRESIDENT  TO  THE 
CONGRESS! 


The  people  of  Pakistan  are  faced  with  famine, 
and  they  have  asked  our  help  in  meeting  disaster. 

We  are  fortunate  to  be  in  a  position  to  offer  help 
at  this  time,  for  we  have  an  abundance  of  wheat. 
I  strongly  believe  that  we  should  do  so.  Ac- 
cordingly I  urge  the  Congress  to  make  possible 
the  shipment  to  Pakistan  of  up  to  1  million  long 
tons  of  United  States  wheat. 

The  specter  of  famine  confronts  the  people  of 
Pakistan  at  a  crucial  time  in  their  growth  as  a 
young  free  nation.  Unchecked,  it  could  uncler- 
mine  the  very  democratic  principles  and  institu- 
tions to  which  Pakistan  is  dedicated. 

The  crisis  is  largely  a  result  of  a  calamity  of 
nature.  Pakistan  was  self-sufficient  in  food  until 
severe  drought,  in  2  successive  years,  struck  the 
wheat-producing  area  of  west  Pakistan. 

The  wheat  consumption  of  the  people  of  west 
Pakistan  averages  less  than  12  ounces  per  day  in 
a  diet  consisting  very  largely  of  this  grain.  To- 
day Government  wheat  reserves  have  fallen  to  the 
vanishing  point. 

The  immediate  need  of  Pakistan  is  to  obtain 
abroad  up  to  1.5  million  long  tons  of  wheat  both 
for  consumption  and  for  a  small  working  reserve 
during  the  next  11  months.  Of  this  total,  the 
Government  of  Pakistan  expects  to  be  able  to  ob- 
tain about  4:00,000  tons  of  wheat  with  its  own  and 
other  aid  resources.  Canada  and  Australia  have 
both  made  generous  grants  for  wheat  to  Pakistan. 
There  is  no  important  source  in  the  free  world 
other  than  the  United  States  able  to  furnish  ad- 
ditional help. 

Pakistan  has,  therefore,  appealed  to  the  United 
States  for  1  million  tons  of  wheat.  Its  approach 
has  been  one  of  dignity,  as  one  sovereign  democ- 
racy to  another,  stating  a  real  and  urgent  need. 
Between  the  people  of  Pakistan  and  the  people 
of  the  United  States  there  exists  a  strong  bond 
of  friendship.  I  am  sure  that  the  people  of  the 
United  States  desire  their  Government  to  respond 
rapidly  and  effectively  to  Pakistan's  request. 

Pakistan  has  endeavored  to  keep  its  request  for 

•H.  doc.  171. 
June  22,   1953 


United  States  aid  to  a  minimum.  The  Secretary 
of  State  and  the  Director  for  Mutual  Security  sent 
a  special  mission,  headed  by  Dr.  Harry  Reed,  dean 
of  the  College  of  Agriculture  of  Purdue  Uni- 
versity, to  study  at  first  hand  the  food  situation 
in  Pakistan.  Mr.  Dulles  and  Governor  Stassen 
have  also  visited  Pakistan  within  the  last  2  weeks. 
With  the  help  of  their  observations,  careful  con- 
sideration has  been  given  the  Reed  mission's 
recommendations. 

One  critical  fact  is  that  the  Government  of 
Pakistan  is  suffering  grave  financial  difficulties. 
It  has  already  taken  rigorous  steps  to  remedy  both 
the  food  outlook  and  its  general  economic  dis- 
abilities, and  these  efforts  give  some  hope  for 
future  self-sufhciency.  But  Pakistan's  gold  and 
foreign  exchange  holdings  are  barely  enough  to 
meet  its  legal  requirements  for  currency  backing 
and  essential  working  capital.  Moreover,  Paki- 
stan has  little  prospect  of  an  exportable  wheat  sur- 
plus which  would  permit  repayment  of  a  loan  in 
kind.  Its  export  earnings  and  all  its  prospective 
financial  resources  are  needed  to  meet  the  demand 
of  economic  development  essential  to  prevent  fu- 
ture food  and  financial  crises.  A  dollar  loan 
would  make  it  impossible  for  Pakistan  to  obtain 
further  necessary  development  loans  from  inter- 
national lending  institutions. 

These  considerations  make  certain  conclusions 
evident.  Pakistan  needs  a  grant  of  up  to  700,000 
tons  of  United  States  wheat  for  relief  purposes 
according  to  the  best  available  estimates.  The 
urgency  of  the  need  is  underscored  by  the  Reed 
mission's  recommendation  for  delivery  of  100,000 
tons  of  United  States  aid  wheat  in  Karachi  by 
August  15  of  this  year. 

This  grant  would  serve  a  double  purpose.  It 
would  meet  Pakistan's  immediate  and  pressing 
need  for  food  and  at  the  same  time  provide  local 
curi'ency  for  economic  development  programs. 
The  rupee  receipts  from  the  sale  of  wheat  would 
be  placed  in  a  counterpart  fund  under  joint  Paki- 
stan-United States  administration.  This  fund 
will  be  used  for  development  purposes  with  em- 
phasis placed  on  increased  food  production  in 

889 


Pakistan  to  lessen  the  danger  of  future  shortages. 
In  addition  to  the  700,000  tons,  Pakistan  may 
also  need  up  to  300,000  tons  as  a  necessary  working 
reserve  of  wheat.  The  exact  amount  needed  for 
this  purpose  can  only  be  determined  later;  and 
only  then  can  we  determine  whether  the  remainder 
of  our  aid  should  be  supplied  as  a  grant  or  a  loan. 

Fortunately,  we  do  have  the  capacity  to  help  at 
the  present  time.  Our  large  wheat  reserves  have 
created  a  grave  storage  problem,  demanding  un- 
usual and  sometimes  costly  storage  measures. 

I  propose,  therefore,  that  the  Congress  author- 
ize me  to  make  available  to  Pakistan  up  to  1  mil- 
lion tons  of  wheat  out  of  stocks  held  by  the  Com- 
modity Credit  Corporation.-  This  wheat  already 
is  owned  by  the  Commodity  Credit  Corporation, 
having  been  obtained  under  the  pi'ice-support  pro- 
gram. To  make  it  available  to  Pakistan  will  cre- 
ate no  additional  Government  expenditure  at  tliis 
time  other  than  the  cost  of  transportation.  In 
order  that  the  operations  of  the  Commodity  Credit 
Corporation  will  not  be  impaired,  I  am  recom- 
mending that  the  legislation  include  authority 
for  the  Commodity  Credit  Corporation  to  recover 
its  costs,  including  interest,  through  an  appropria- 
tion when  the  costs  of  the  programs  have  been 
ascertained. 

The  United  States  Government  proposes  to 
designate,  with  the  concurrence  of  the  Govern- 
ment of  Pakistan,  a  group  to  observe  the  receipt 
and  distribution  of  wheat  in  Pakistan.  The 
group's  reports  will  be  available  to  the  Congress. 

To  provide  sufficient  United  States  aid  in  time, 
it  is  imperative  that  the  grain  begin  to  move  from 
United  States  ports  by  the  end  of  this  month. 

I  strongly  urge  that  the  Congress  make  such 
prompt  action  possible. 

DwiGHT  D.  Eisenhower. 

The  White  House,  June  10, 1953. 

STATEMENT  BY  SECRETARY  DULLES  > 

Press  release  313  dated  June  12 

The  people  of  Pakistan  are  facing  a  food  short- 
age of  dangerous  proportions.  For  the  second  suc- 
cessive year,  there  has  been  a  drought  in  the  wheat- 
producing  area  of  West  Pakistan.  Wheat  is  the 
major  food  in  the  area.  When  the  crop  fails, 
starvation  ensues  unless  sufficient  wheat  is  brought 
into  the  country.  The  Government  of  Pakistan, 
faced  with  the  heart-rending  prospect  of  starva- 
tion in  its  country,  is  exerting  every  effort  to  solve 
this  critical  problem.  It  has  become  clear  that 
Pakistan's  own  efforts  and  the  help  it  is  able  to 
get  from  other  countries  will  fall  far  short  of 

^A  bill  embodying  this  proposal  (S.  2112)  was  passed 
by  the  Senate  on  June  16 ;  for  text,  see  Cong.  Rec.  of  June 
16,  p.  6S.31. 

'  Made  before  the  Senate  Committee  on  Agriculture  and 
Forestry  on  June  12.  The  Secretary  on  June  15  testified 
before  the  House  Committee  on  Agriculture  and  Forestry 
(press  release  316;  not  printed). 


bringing  enough  wheat  into  Pakistan,  and  the 
Government  has  turned  to  the  United  States  for 
assistance. 

On  April  22  the  Government  of  Pakistan  re- 
quested the  United  States  for  a  grant  of  one  mil- 
lion tons  of  wheat  as  a  part  of  its  total  import 
needs,  which  it  estimated  at  one-and-one-half  mil- 
lion tons.  The  request  was  made  reluctantly  and 
with  dignity,  but  with  an  anxiety  which  we  can 
easily  appreciate. 

President  Eisenhower  has  recognized  the  grav- 
ity and  immediacy  of  Pakistan's  food  situation 
and  the  help  needed  from  the  United  States  if  it 
is  to  prevent  disaster.  The  President  has  recom- 
mended that  we  give  Pakistan  700,000  tons  of 
U.S.  wheat  from  stocks  held  by  the  Commodity 
Credit  Corporation  and  that  this  grant  be  made 
immediately,  as  the  situation  in  Pakistan  de- 
mands. He  has  further  recommended  that  Pak- 
istan receive  up  to  an  additional  300,000  tons  of 
U.S.  wheat  if  it  is  determined  later  to  be  needed. 
This  action  will  meet  the  Government  of  Pak- 
istan's needs.  It  is  in  line  with  the  recommenda- 
tions of  the  special  mission,  headed  by  Harry  J. 
Reed.  Dean  of  the  College  of  Agriculture  of  Pur- 
due University,  which  Mr.  Stassen  and  I  sent  to 
Pakistan  in  May  to  make  an  on-the-spot  survey  ol 
Pakistan's  food  situation. 

I  am  gratified  with  the  recommendations  of  the 
President  and  urge  that  the  Congress  enable  ue 
to  translate  them  into  action  at  the  earliest  pos- 
sible moment.  That  will  be  concrete  evidence  tc 
our  friends  that  the  United  States  acts  promptly; 
and  effectively  to  alleviate  human  suffering  and 
the  threat  of  disaster  when  it  strikes  them.  It  wil: 
be  in  the  humane  tradition  of  the  American  people 

In  order  to  lay  all  of  the  facts  concerning  this 
matter  before  you,  several  of  us  have  come  here 
to  talk  to  you.  I  want  to  give  you  my  thoughts  on 
the  foreign-policy  aspects  of  Pakistan's  requestJ 
and  the  action  which  the  President  has  recom- 
mended. Mr.  Stassen,  who  was  with  me  in  Pak- 
istan on  our  recent  trip,  will  discuss  Pakistan's 
economic  and  financial  position  and  his  plans  foB 
administration  of  the  wheat  grant  if  it  is  author-l 
ized.  Under  Secretary  True  D.  Morse  of  the  De-| 
partment  of  Agriculture  is  here  and  will  explair 
our  own  wheat  situation.  Dr.  Reed  and  his  col^ 
league,  Dr.  Norman  J.  Volk  of  the  special  missioB 
which  made  the  survey  of  Pakistan's  actual  neeo 
are  here  to  report  to  you  on  their  findings. 

As  you  know,  I  have  just  returned  from  my  trip 
to  the  Middle  East  and  South  Asia.  I  spent 
days  in  Pakistan  and  talked  at  length  with  Prime) 
Minister  Mohammed  Ali,  who  formerly  was  Pak-j 
istan's  Ambassador  to  the  United  States  and  is 
good  friend  of  our  country,  as  well  as  wit 
Pakistan's  Governor  General,  Mr.  Ghulam  Mo-| 
hammed,  and  Foreign  Minister  Sir  Zafrtilla  Khan 
whom  I  have  known  for  many  years  and  who  wa 
extremely  helpful  at  the  San  Francisco  Japanese] 
peace  treaty  conference.     I  met  and  talked  witi 


890 


Department  of  State  Bulletin^ 


other  high  officials  of  tlie  Paliistan  Government. 

One  of  my  clearest  impressions  was  that  of  the 

outstanding  and   sincere   friendliness   which  the 

leaders  of  Pakistan  feel  for  the  United  States.     I 

was  greatly  impressed  with  their  understanding  of 

,  world  problems.     I  am  convinced  that  they  will 

■  resist  the  menace  of  communism  as  their  strength 

permits.     You  know  that  Pakistan  and  the  United 

States  have  conuuonly  supported  the  same  views 

in  the  United  Nations  and  that  Pakistan  was  a 

tower  of  strength  on  the  Japanese  treaty. 

Pakistan  occupies  a  strategic  location.  Com- 
munist China  borders  northern  territories  held  by 
Pakistan  and  from  Pakistan's  northern  border  one 
can  see  the  Soviet  Union.  Pakistan  flanks  Iran 
and  the  Middle  East  and  guards  the  Khyber  Pass, 
the  historic  invasion  route  from  the  north  into  the 
I  subcontinent.  With  their  religious  convictions 
'  and  courageous  spirit,  the  people  of  Pakistan  and 
!  their  leaders  make  their  country  a  real  bulwark. 
That  bulwark  deserves  strengthening  and  our 
grant  of  wheat  will  do  this.  Xo  country  or  gov- 
ernment can  remain  strong  if  its  people  are  starv- 
ing, and  I  am  convinced  that  Pakistan's  need  for 
wheat  to  avert  starvation  is  great  and  urgent. 
Failure  on  our  part  to  help  Pakistan  promptly  and 
in  the  measure  needed  would  permit  disaster. 

President  Eisenhower  has  recommended  that 
our  immediate  assistance  be  a  grant.  I  fully  sup- 
port this  recommendation.  My  review  of  the  situ- 
ation has  convinced  me  that  this  is  the  only  way 
which  makes  sense.  A  loan  to  be  repaid  in  the 
future  by  Pakistan  would  only  weaken  Pakistan's 
economy,  while  the  interest  of  the  United  States 
lies  in  helping  to  strengthen  Pakistan.  That  con- 
sideration applies  to  repayment  in  kind  as  well 
as  in  dollars.  We  join  the  Pakistan  Government 
in  its  hopes  to  build  up  Pakistan's  wheat  produc- 
tion so  that  it  can  avert  future  dangers  of  food 
shortage,  but  the  prospects  of  Pakistan's  having 
enough  wheat  to  permit  repayment  in  kind  are  not 
such  as  to  justify  that  requirement.  Repayment 
in  dollars  would  seriously  impair  Pakistan's  abil- 
ity to  continue  its  necessary  development  and 
probably  prevent  further  loans  for  development 
purposes. 

The  wheat  grant  which  has  been  recommended 
is  required  to  meet  an  emergency  situation  in 
Pakistan.  Wliile  serving  a  genuine  economic  pur- 
pose, it  does  not  meet  JPakistan's  needs  for  eco- 
nomic development  nor  take  the  place  of  technical 
assistance  and  economic  development  measures. 
However,  the  Pakistan  rupee  counterpart  of  the 
grant  would  be  of  substantial  help  to  Pakistan's 
efforts  to  strengthen  its  economy  and  would  fur- 
ther our  own  ability  to  assist  Pakistan  in  this 
regard. 

The  President  has  referred  to  the  urgency  of 
Pakistan's  need  for  wheat  arrivals  to  meet  its  situ- 
ation. Dr.  Reed  has  highlighted  that  in  his  re- 
port, recommending  that  the  United  States  extend 
aid  to  permit  the  arrival  of  wheat  shipments  from 


the  United  States  by  July  15  to  August  1  and  that 
100,000  tons  of  our  wheat  arrive  in  Pakistan  by 
August  15. 

We  are  fortunate  in  having  more  than  enough 
wheat  for  requirements  and  to  meet  this  emer- 
gency. I  know  that  the  Congress  has  many  im- 
portant matters  before  it,  but  humanity  and  our 
national  interest  will  be  served  by  prompt  and 
generous  action  on  our  part.  I  add  my  personal 
plea  for  such  a  response  to  President  Eisenhower's 
proposals. 


PUBLICATIONS 


Recent  Releases 

For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  Government 
Printing  Office,  Washington  25,  D.  C.  Address  requests 
direct  to  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  except  in  the 
case  of  free  publications,  which  may  he  obtained  from  the 
Department  of  State. 

Technical  Cooperation,  Economic  Assistance.  Treaties 
and  Other  luternational  Acts  Series  2561.  Pub.  4834. 
6pp.  50. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Israel — 
Signed  at  Tel  Aviv  May  9,  1952. 

Relief  From  Taxation  on  Defense  Expenditures.  Treaties 
and  Other  International  Acts  Series  256.3.  Pub.  4836. 
6pp.  50. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United   States  and 
the  Netherlands — Signed  at  The  Hague  Mar.  7,  1952. 

Administration  in  Zone  A  of  Free  Territory  of  Trieste. 

Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2564.  Pub. 
4837.     6pp.     5^. 

Understanding  between  the  United  States,  Italy,  and 
the  United  Kingdom — Dated  at  London  May  9,  1952. 


Check  List  of  Department  of  State 
Press  Releases:  June  8-15, 1953 

Releases  may  be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  the 
Special  Assistant  for  Press  Relations,  Department 
of  State,  Washington  25,  D.C. 

Press  releases  issued  prior  to  June  8  which  ap- 
pear In  this  issue  of  the  Bulletin  are  Nos.  300  of 
June  2,  301  of  June  2,  302  of  June  3,  and  304  of 
June  3. 

Subject 

Smith  :  The  pivotal  conflict 
Pan  American  Railway  Congress 
Johnson  :  Foundations  of  freedom 
Liberia  withdraws  from  Gatt 
Aide-memoire  on  repatriation  comm. 
Merchant :   U.S.  foreign-policy  aspects 
Dulles  :  Pakistan  wheat  grant 
Note  to  U.S.S.R.  on  Austrian  treaty 
Usis  broadcasts  in  Latin  America 
Dulles :  Transfer  of  wheat  to  Pakistan 

*Xot  printed. 

t  Held  for  a  later  issue  of  the  Bulletin. 


No. 

Date 

307 

6/8 

308 

6/8 

*309 

6/8 

t310 

6/9 

311 

6/10 

t312 

6/11 

313 

6/12 

314 

6/12 

t315 

6/12 

*316 

6/15 

June  22,   1953 


891 


June  22,  1953 


Ind 


American  Principles 

National  security  and  the  defense  of  freedom 

(Elsenhower) 863 

The    pivotal    conflict    dominating    the    world 

(Smith) 874 

American  Republics 

Appointments  to  Pan  American  Railway  Con- 
gress Association  (Weeks.  Cabot)     ....       883 

MEXICO:    Registration    period    lor    holders    of 

securities 878 

Asia 

JAPAN:  International  Bank  and  Japan  discuss 

financing  power  projects 878 

KOREA : 

The  neutral  nations  repatriation  commission  .       868 
Prime  Minister  Nehru  congratulates  President 

on  prisoner  agreement 867 

Text  of  agreement  on  prisoners  of  war     .     .     .       8d6 
PAKISTAN:    Congress   urged   to  make   grant  of 

U.S.  wheat   (Elsenhower,  Dulles)      ....       889 

Communism 

The    pivotal    conflict    dominating    the    world 

(Smith) 874 

Congress 

Congress  urged  to  make  grant  of  U.S.  wheat  to 

Pakistan   (Eisenhower,  Dulles) 889 

Eight  years  of  Unesco  progress  (Laves)  ....       885 

Europe 

DENMARK:  Suspension  of  Msa  defense-support 

aid 873 

GERMANY:  Treaty  of  friendship,  commerce  and 

consular  rights  with  Germany  (text)   .     .     .       877 

Sustaining  Nato's  objectives  (Rldgway)      .     .     .       869 

U.S.S.R.  queried  as  to  text  of  Austrian  treaty  It 

would  favor  (text  of  U.S.  note) 873 

Finance 

International  Bank  and  Japan  discuss  financing 

power  projects 878 

Registration    period    for    holders    of    Mexican 

securities 878 

International  Meetings 

Appointments  to  Pan  American  Railway  Con- 
gress Association  (Weeks,  Cabot)     ....       883 

IMC  adopts  system  of  guiding  quotas  for  molyb- 
denum      883 

Progress    toward    migration    committee's    goals 

(Warren) 879 

U.S.  DELEGATIONS: 

International    Labor   Conference 884 

Pan  American   Railway   Congress 884 

Mutual  Security 

Suspension  of  Msa  defense  support  aid  to  Den- 
mark   873 

North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization 

Sustaining  Nato's  objectives    (Rldgway)    .     .     .       869 


e  X  Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  730 

Presidential  Documents 

Congress  urged  to  make  grant  of  U.S.  wheat  to 

Pakistan   (Eisenhower.  Dulles)      .     .  889 

EXECUTIVE    ORDERS:     Investigation    of    U.S. 

citizens  on  U.N.  Secretariat 882 

National  security  and  the  defense  of  freedom     .  863 

Prisoners  of  War 

The  neutral  nations  repatriation  commission  .  868 
Prime  Minister   Nehru   congratulates  President 

on  prisoner  agreement 867 

Text  of  agreement  on  prisoners  of  war   ....  866 

Publications 

Recent  releases 891 

Refugees  and  Displaced  Persons 

Progress    toward    migration    committee's    goals 

(Warren) 879 

Strategic  Materials 

IMC     adopts     system     of     guiding     quotas     for 

molybdenum 883 

Transportation 

Appointments   to  Pan  American   Railway  Con- 
gress Association  (Weeks,  Cabot)     ....  883 
Pan  American  Railway  Congress 884 

Treaty  Information 

Text  of  agreement  on  prisoners  of  war  ....  866 
Treaty   of   friendship,    commerce   and   consular 

rights  with  Germany   (text) 877 

U.S.S.R.  queried  as  to  text  of  Austrian  treaty 

it  would  favor  (text  of  U.S.  note)   ....  873 

United  Nations 

Confirmation  of  Sears 883 

Eight  years  of  Unesco  progress  (Laves)  .  .  .  885 
International  Bank  and  Japan  discuss  financing 

power   projects 878 

Investigation  of  U.S.  citizens  on  U.N.  Secretariat .  882 

The  neutral  nations  repatriation  commission     .  868 

Text  of  agreement  on  prisoners  of  war  ....  866 

U.N.  documents:  A  selected  bibliography  .     .     .  888 

Name  Index 

Adenauer,   Konrad 877 

Cabot.  John   M 883 

Conant,  James  B 877 

Delaney.  George  P 885 

Dulles,  Secretary 890 

Eisenhower,  President 863, 867, 882,  889 

Farley,  William  T 884 

Harrison,  Lt.  Gen 866 

Ives,  Irving  M 884 

Laves,  Walter  H.  C 885 

Nam  II,  General 866 

Nehru,  Prime  Minister 867 

Ridgway,  General 869 

Sears,  Mason 883 

Shaw,  Charles  E 885 

Smith,  Under  Secretary 874 

Stassen,  Harold  E 873 

Warren,  George  L 879 

Weeks,  Secretary 883 


U.   S.  GOVERNMENT   PRINTING    OFFICE:  1B53 


jAe/  ~!l)efia^t'meni/  aw  c/tate^ 


:XVIII,  No.  731 
tune  29,  1953 


MORALS   AND  POWER  •  Address  by  Secretary  Dulles     .     .      895 

RELEASE  OF  ANTI-COMMUNIST  PRISONERS  FROM 

U.N.  CAMPS  IN  SOUTH  KOREA  •  Tc^tso/ Statements 

and  Correspondence    •      .      . ""5 

ACHIEVING    A    HEALTHY    WORLD    ECONOMY    • 

by  ffinthrop  W.  Aldrich 915 

SOME  ASPECTS  OF  AMERICAN  FOREIGN  POLICY  • 

by  Assistant  Secretary  Merchant "09 

SECOND    ANNIVERSARY    OF    SHAPE     •     Report  by 

Cen.  Matthew  B.  Ridgtcay 899 

U.S.-U.N.  COOPERATION  IN  U.N.  POSTAL  ACTIVI- 
TIES    •     Article  by  John  D.  Tomlinson 921 


For  index  see  back  cotter 


K&L 


Boston  Pu))Hc  Lr)rary 
Superintendent  of  Documents 

JUL  14  1953 


,JAe 


Zl^efia/it^me^  /)£  ^Cale    Jk_/  LI  1 1  Kj  L  i  i  1 


Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  731  •  Publication  5107 
June  29,  1953 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents 

U.S.  Government  Printing  OfBce 

Washington  25,  D.O. 

Price; 

62  Issues,  domestic  $7.60,  foreign  $10.26 

Single  copy,  20  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has 
been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Budget  (January  22,  1962). 
Note:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  ot  the  Dkpaktuent 
OF  State  Bulletin  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  oj  State  BULLETIN, 
a  weekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publications, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  with  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  work  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETIN  includes 
selected  press  releases  on  foreign  pol- 
icy issued  by  the  IThite  House  and 
the  Department,  and  statements  and 
addresses  made  by  the  President  and 
by  the  Secretary  of  State  and  other 
officers  of  the  Department,  as  irell  as 
special  articles  on  various  phases  of 
international  affairs  and  the  func- 
tions of  the  Department.  Informa- 
tion is  included  concerning  treaties 
and  international  agreentents  to 
which  the  United  States  is  or  may 
become  a  party  and  treaties  of  gen- 
eral international  interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
well  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


Morals  and  Power 


Address  'by  Secretary  Dulles  ^ 


Since  I  have  been  Secretary  of  State,  I  have 
been  to  Europe,  the  Near  East,  and  South  Asia. 
Before  that,  in  connection  with  negotiating  the 
Japanese  peace  treaty,  I  had  an  excellent  chance 
to  get  a  firsthand  look  at  our  foreign  representa- 
tives in  Japan,  Korea,  and  other  parts  of  the  Far 
East. 

One  of  the  things  that  most  impressed  me  in 
these  areas  was  the  down-to-earth  cooperation 
which  existed  between  our  civilian  and  military 
officials.  The  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organiza- 
tion is  an  outstanding  example  of  large-scale 
military-civilian  cooperative  effort. 

The  current  negotiations  in  embattled  Korea 
are  being  carried  on  by  General  Harrison.  And, 
to  my  way  of  thinking,  he  is  doing  an  excellent 
job  under  very  exacting  conditions. 

But  behind  General  Harrison  stands  a  team  of 

'  Defense  and  State  Department  officials  which, 
once  again,  testifies  to  the  effectiveness  of  mili- 

i  tary  and  civilian  cooperation. 

!  i  might  mention  that  one  of  my  first  acts  as 
Secretary  of  State  was  to  invite  the  Joint  Chiefs  of 
Staff  and  their  chairman  to  lunch  with  me  at  the 
State  Department.  They  kindly  responded  and 
the  five  of  us  had  an  intimate  exchange  of  views 

I  about  the  world  situation  and  U.  wS.  security.  Ever 

'  since,  we  have  cooperated  with  no  single  trace  of 
friction.  That,  I  am  glad  to  say,  is  typical.  Of 
course,  there  are  often  initial  differences  of  opin- 
ion. But,  by  and  large,  our  military  and  civilian 
officers  both  here  in  the  United  States  and  on 
duty  overseas  rise  above  differences  when  the  chips 
arc  down.  In  today's  world,  the  chips  are  down 
almost  everywhere. 

It  is  teamwork  between  the  military  and  civil- 
ian which  has  given  us  the  necessary  strength 
whenever  and  wherever  we  have  needed  it. 

I  should  like  to  talk  for  a  few  minutes  about 
power  in  a  material  sense,  such  as  is  represented 

;  by  our  splendid  military  establishment.  Wliat 
is  the  purpose  of  this  power  ?     Admiral  Mahan  is 

'  Made  before  the  National  War  College  at  Washington 
on  June  16  (press  release  321). 


credited  with  one  of  the  best  answers  to  this  ques- 
tion. It  is  that  the  role  of  power  is  to  give  moral 
ideas  the  time  to  take  root.  Where  moral  ideas 
already  are  well-rooted,  there  is  little  occasion  for 
much  military  or  police  force.  We  see  that  illus- 
trated in  our  own  communities.  Where  the  people 
accept  the  moral  law  and  its  great  commandments, 
where  they  exercise  self-control  and  self-disci- 
pline, then  there  is  very  little  need  for  police 
power.  Under  these  circumstances,  it  is  sufficient 
to  have  a  very  modest  force  to  take  care  of  the 
small  minority  always  found  in  every  community 
which  disregards  the  precepts  of  the  moral  law. 

Where,  however,  there  are  many  who  do  not 
accept  moral  principles,  then  that  creates  the  need 
of  force  to  protect  those  who  do.  That,  unfor- 
tunately, is  the  case  in  the  world  community  of 
today. 

At  the  present  time,  there  is  no  moral  code 
which  has  worldwide  acceptance.  The  principles 
upon  which  our  society  is  based — -the  principles 
which  we  believe  to  be  both  humanitarian  and 
just — are  not  accepted  by  governments  which 
dominate  more  than  one-third  of  mankind. 

The  result  is  that  we  have  a  world  which  is,  for 
the  most  part,  split  between  two  huge  combina- 
tions. On  the  one  hand,  there  is  the  United 
States  and  its  free-world  associates.  This  is  a 
voluntary  alliance  of  free  peoples  working  to- 
gether in  the  recognition  that  without  unity  there 
could  be  catastrophe. 

On  the  other  hand,  there  is  the  totalitarian  bloc 
led  by  the  Soviet  Union — an  artificial,  imposed 
unity  which  cannot  be  called  an  alliance  in  the 
sense  that  we  use  the  word. 

These  huge  concentrations  are  in  conflict  be- 
cause each  reflects  differing  aims,  aspirations,  and 
social,  political,  and  economic  philosophies.  We 
must  assume  that  they  will  continue  to  remain  in 
basic  conflict,  in  one  way  or  another,  until  such 
time  as  the  Communists  so  change  their  nature  as 
to  admit  that  those  who  wish  to  live  by  the  moral 
law  are  free  to  do  so  without  coercion  by  those  who 
believe  in  enforced  conformity  to  a  materialistic 
standard. 


June  29,   1953 


895 


/This  is  one  of  the  hard  facts  of  international 
^istence  which  we  must  accept.    We  cannot  close 
/our  eyes  to  it.     It  will  not  go  away  simply  because 
we  liope  that  it  will  do  so. 
We  must  plan  accordingly. 

"Know  Your  Enemy" 

There  is  a  sound  military  principle  which  we 
must  take  into  consideration  in  our  planning.  It 
is  "know  your  enemy." 

What  makes  the  Soviet  Union — the  fountain- 
head  of  world  communism — act  as  it  does?  Wliy 
do  the  Soviets  seek  power  and  more  power? 

These  complex  questions  are  not  simply  an- 
swered. There  are  many  forces  whicli  motivate 
the  Soviet  drive  for  power.  Among  these  forces 
are  these  which  I  should  like  to  mention :  ideology, 
the  historic  imperialistic  urge,  and  the  chronic 
insecurity  complex  which  besets  those  who  rule 
by  force. 

Take  first  the  question  of  Communist  ideology. 
Soviet  theorists,  as  you  know,  refer  to  tlieir  ide- 
ology as  Marxian-Leninist-Stalinism.  Whose 
name  will  next  be  added  remains  to  be  seen. 

Tlirough  the  years,  Communist  ideology  has 
taken  a  number  of  twists,  turns,  and  shifts  in  em- 
phasis. Upon  occasion,  it  has  almost  seemed  as 
if  the  ideology  has  been  stood  on  its  head  to  justify 
a  policy  which  Soviet  leaders  have  had  to  adopt 
to  meet  a  given  international  or  domestic  crisis. 
Thus,  in  October  1939,  the  Soviet  leadei'S  pro- 
claimed tliat  Hitler  was  the  peace  lover  and  the 
British  and  French  the  aggressors. 

Tliere  can  be  no  question  but  that  Soviet  leaders 
use  shifty  tactics. 

But  the  Soviet  leaders  have  never  departed  from 
a  certain  basic  thesis  laid  down  by  Marx.  It  is 
called  "dialectical  materialism." 

It  is  important  for  us  to  remember  that  this 
Marxist  principle  continues  to  be  basic  to  the  So- 
viet creclo  despite  any  changes  that  have  been 
made  by  Lenin  and  Stalin.  Stalin's  last  published 
article,  written  shortly  before  his  death,  was 
based  upon  original  Marxist  assumptions  when 
he  predicted  tliat  the  United  States  and  its  allies 
inevitably  would  split  because  of  imier,  economic 
contradictions. 

The  entire  creed  of  Soviet  communism  is  based 
upon  this  "dialectical  materialism,"  the  theory 
that  there  is  no  such  thing  as  a  moral  law  or 
spiritual  truth;  that  all  things  are  predetermined 
by  the  contradictory  movements  of  matter;  that 
so-called  capitalism  is  historically  fated  to  col- 
lapse; and  that  communism  is  the  movement  pre- 
destined to  effect  that  collapse. 

Now,  let  us  look  briefly  at  another  of  the  springs 
of  Soviet  action,  that  of  historical  imperialism. 
This  urge  to  expand  is  not  something  patented 
by  the  Communists  of  Soviet  Russia.  This  urge 
has  long  been  found  with  the  "Great  Russians" 
in  the  Eurasian  heartland.    It  is  a  national  urge. 


though  it  is  clear  that  today  communism  has 
greatly  intensified  it. 

The  present  Soviet  Communist  exertions  in  the 
Near  East,  Far  East,  and  East  Europe  are  a  du- 
plication of  many  past  performances.  Early  in 
the  19th  century  Tsar  Alexander,  the  most  power- 
ful ruler  of  his  time,  organized  the  so-called  "Holy 
Alliance"  in  an  effort  to  dominate  the  world. 

Has  tlie  historic  imperialist  urge  played  a  role 
in  tlie  Soviet  drive  for  power  ?  I  think  it  is  clear 
that  it  has. 

The  third  and  last  influence  which  I  will  men- 


Soviet  Moves  To  Prevent 
Western  European  Unification 

Press  release  319  dated  June  15 

Asked  for  an  evaluation  of  recent  Soviet  moves 
in  Europe,  Secretary  Dulles  made  the  following 
remarks  at  his  press  conference  on  June  15: 

I  believe  that  one  of  the  primary  purposes  of 
Soviet  foreign  policy  for  some  time  has  been  to 
prevent,  if  possible,  a  unification  of  Europe,  West- 
ern Europe,  which  would  create  a  strong  unified 
community  in  that  area.  Measures  looking  toward 
that  result  are  pretty  well  under  way.  You  have 
in  actual  operation  at  the  present  time  the  Coal 
and  Steel  Community  which  represents  a  consider- 
able measure  of  economic  unity  of  6  nations  with 
reference  to  two  key  commodities — coal  and  steel — 
and  that  has  created  a  single  market  and  is  a 
beginning  of  economic  unity  in  Western  Europe. 

There  is  the  treaty  for  the  creation  of  a  European 
Defense  Community  which,  as  you  know,  has  been 
signed  by  6  nations  and  is  before  the  parliaments 
of  the  6,  having  been  ratified  by  both  houses  in 
Germany. 

There  is  also  a  project  which  is  being  worked  out 
by  the  European  countries  wlio  are  participating 
in  the  Coal  and  Steel  Community  for  the  creation  of 
a  political  unity,  and  a  proposed  constitution  is 
pretty  far  advanced.  I  would  guess,  and  it  can  be 
no  more  tlian  a  guess,  that  the  present  Soviet  moves 
are  designed  to  eliminate  the  fears  of  the  Soviet 
Union  in  Western  Europe,  fears  which  are  one  of 
the  contributing  forces  toward  the  creation  of  this 
unity. 

Now,  I  believe  that  unity  is  going  to  prevail,  ir- 
respective of  Soviet  tactics,  because  it  is  important 
not  merely  as  a  measure  against  the  threat  of 
Soviet  communism ;  it  is  a  measure  to  create  unity 
iu  a  part  of  the  world  where  disunity  has  been  a 
cause  of  wars,  notably  the  disunity  between  France 
and  Germany. 

I  believe  the  statesmanlike  leaders  in  Europe 
realize  that  unity  is  essential  not  merely  to  meet 
a  peril  of  attack  from  the  Soviet  Union,  but  the  peril 
which  conies  to  all  of  them  from  their  own  dis- 
unity and  from  the  wars  that  have  arisen  in  the 
past  because  of  that  disunity.  Therefore,  I  believe 
tliat  unity  will  prevail,  but  I  think  the  Soviet  tactics 
are  designed,  if  possible,  to  frustrate  that  move- 
ment. 

I  see  no  reason  as  yet  to  attribute  these  Soviet 
moves  to  a  change  of  basic  approach  rather  than 
a  change  of  tactics.  Now,  I  don't  exclude  that  as  a 
possibility.  All  I  say  is  that  as  yet  the  evidence  is 
not  adequate  to  justify,  in  my  opinion,  the  assump- 
tion that  it  represents  more  than  a  change  in 
tactics. 


896 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


tion  is  that  chronic  sense  of  insecurity  which  per- 
vades police-stute  rulers.  Those  who  rule  by  force 
inevitably  fear  force.  In  a  police  state  the  rulers 
have  a  monopoly  or  near  monopoly  of  weapons. 
But  it  is  never  possible  to  arm  enough  policemen 
to  rule  an  unruly  mass  without  in  the  process 
arming  some  who  themselves  may  prove  unruly. 
Also,  the  rulers  of  a  police  state  greatly  fear  any 
\M':ipons  which  they  do  not  control,  and  they  seek 
(d  extend  their  power  to  bring  these  weapons 
under  control.  They  cannot  imagine  that  arma- 
ments in  the  hands  of  others  may  be  designed 
purely  for  internal  security  and  self-defense. 
That  is  why  the  Soviet  leaders  have  so  consistently 
and  so  violently  expressed  their  opposition  to  the 
North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization  and  fought 
the  creation  of  a  European  Defense  Community. 
To  us  their  fears  seem  mere  pretense.  But  per- 
haps they  do  have  fear,  because  they  do  not  under- 
stand that  if  force  is  in  the  hands  of  those  who 
I  are  governed  by  moral  law,  it  will  not  be  used 
as  a  means  of  aggi-ession  or  to  violate  the  prin- 
ciples of  the  moral  law. 

This  picture  which  I  have  given  of  the  inter- 
national situation  is  not  a  pleasing  one.  It  does 
not  hold  out  the  prospect  of  any  quick  change  for 
the  better  or  any  early  elimination  of  our  need 
for  power  in  order  to  permit  moral  principles  to 
take  root  rather  than  be  uprooted. 

However,  if  we  do  maintain  power,  and  if  we  do 
subject  it  to  moral  law  and  use  it  truly  to  enable 
moral  principles  to  survive,  and  thrive,  and  spread 
in  the  woi'ld,  we  can  have  hope  in  the  future. 
For  we  know  that  in  the  long  run  the  fruits  of  a 
spiritual  faith  prevail  over  the  fruits  of 
materialism. 

The  great  weakness  of  Soviet  Communist  doc- 
trine is  that  it  denies  morality.  That  is  its 
Achilles  heel,  of  which  we  must  take  advantage. 
We  can  take  advantage  of  it  if — but  only  if — we 
ourselves  accept  the  supremacy  of  moral  law. 


Recapturing  the  Mood  of  Our  Forebears 

Our  nation  was  founded  by  the  men  who  be- 
lieved that  there  was  a  Divine  Creator  who  en- 
dowed men  with  unalienable  rights.  They 
believed,  as  George  Washington  put  it  in  his  fare- 
well address,  that  religion  and  morality  are  the 
great  pillars  of  human  happiness  and  that  moral- 
ity cannot  prevail  in  exclusion  of  religious  prin- 
ciples. 

Our  Federal  and  State  Constitutions,  our  laws 
and  practices,  reflect  the  belief  that  there  is  a 
Being  superior  to  ourselves  who  has  established 
His  own  laws  which  can  be  comprehended  by  all 
human  beings  and  that  human  practices  should 
seek  conformity  with  those  laws. 

Seeking  first  the  Kingdom  of  God  and  His 
righteousness,  many  material  things  were  added 
to  us.  We  developed  here  an  area  of  spiritual,  in- 
tellectual, and  material  richness,  the  like  of  which 


the  world  has  never  seen.  What  we  did  caught 
the  imagination  of  men  everywhere  and  became 
known  everywhere  as  "the  Great  American  ex- 
periment." Our  free  society  became  a  menace  to 
every  despot  because  we  showed  how  to  meet  the 
hunger  of  the  people  for  greater  opportunity  and 
for  greater  dignity.  The  tide  of  despotism,  which 
at  that  time  ran  high,  was  rolled  back  and  we 
ourselves  enjoyed  security. 

We  need  to  recapture  that  mood. 

Today  some  seem  to  feel  that  Americanism 
means  being  tough  and  "hard-boiled,"  doing 
nothing  unless  we  are  quite  sure  that  it  is  to  our 
immediate  short-term  advantage ;  boasting  of  our 
own  merit  and  seeing  in  others  only  demerit. 

That  is  a  caricature  of  America.  Our  people 
have  always  been  generous  to  help,  out  of  their 
abundance,  those  who  are  the  victims  of  misfor- 
tune. Our  forebears  have  traditionally  had  what 
the  Declaration  of  Independence  refers  to  as  a 
decent  respect  for  the  opinion  of  mankind.  They 
sought  to  practice  the  Golden  Rule  by  doing  to 
others  as  they  would  have  others  do  unto  them. 
Their  conduct  and  example  made  our  nation  one 
that  was  respected  and  admired  throughout  the 
world. 

So,  in  conclusion,  I  say  to  you  who  graduate 
from  the  National  War  College :  Be  proud  of  your 
association  with  U.S.  power,  which  is  indispen- 
sable in  the  world  today ;  but  remember  that  that 
power  is  worthy  only  as  it  is  the  shield  behind 
which  moral  values  are  invigorated  and  spread 
their  influence;  and  accept,  as  citizens,  the  obliga- 
tion to  preserve  and  enhance  those  moral  values. 
They  are  the  rich  heritage  that  has  been  be- 
queathed us.  It  must  be  our  ambition  that  future 
generations  shall  look  back  upon  us,  as  we  look 
back  upon  those  who  preceded  us,  with  gratitude 
for  the  gift  to  our  Republic  of  the  qualities  that 
make  it  noble,  so  that  men  call  it  blessed. 

Repressive  Soviet  Measures 
Taken  in  East  Berlin 

Press  release  328  dated  June  19 

Following  is  the  text  of  a  joint  message  sent  on 
June  18  by  the  United  States,  United  Kingdom, 
and  French  Commandants  in  Berlin  to  the  repre- 
sentative of  the  Soviet  Control  Commission  con- 
cerning repressive  measures  taken  hy  Soviet 
authorities  in  East  Berlin: 

As  Commandants  of  the  French,  British  and 
U.S.  sectors  of  Berlin  and  in  the  name  of  the 
Allied  High  Commission  we  desire  to  express  our 
grave  concern  over  events  which  have  taken  place 
in  Berlin  in  the  past  few  days. 

We  condemn  the  irresponsible  recourse  to  mili- 
tary force  which  had  as  its  result  the  killing  or 
serious  wounding  of  a  considerable  number  of 
citizens  of  Berlin  including  some  from  our  own 
sectors. 


Jone  29,   1953 


897 


We  protest  the  arbitrary  measures  taken  by  the 
Soviet  authorities  which  have  resulted  in  the  in- 
terruption of  traffic  between  the  sectors  and  free 
circulation  throughout  Berlin. 

We  formally  deny  that  Willi  Coettling,  exe- 
cuted after  a  travesty  of  justice,  was  an  agent 
provocateur  under  the  orders  of  the  intelligence 
service  of  a  foreign  power.  His  condemnation  to 
death  and  his  execution  on  an  empty  pretext  ap- 
pear to  us  as  acts  of  brutality  which  will  shock 
the  conscience  of  the  world. 

As  the  highest  Soviet  authority  in  the  Soviet 
sector  of  Berlin  you  share  with  us  the  respon- 
sibility of  guaranteeing  the  well-being  and  the 
freedom  of  the  people  of  Berlin.  We  therefore 
demand  in  the  interest  of  Berlin  as  a  whole  that 
the  harsh  restrictions  imposed  on  the  population 
be  lifted  immediately  and  that  free  circulation 
within  Berlin  be  reestablished. 


$50  Million  Aid  for  Berlin 

Statement  hy  the  President 

White  House  press  release  dated  June  IS 

It  gives  me  particular  satisfaction  at  this  time 
to  announce  that  following  discussions  with  the 
authorities  of  West  Berlin  and  the  Federal  Repub- 
lic of  Germany,  the  United  States  is  granting  an 
additional  $.50  million  aid  for  West  Berlin.  This 
grant  of  Mutual  Security  Program  funds  will  be 
used  further  to  strengthen  West  Berlin's  economy 
and  eiuible  the  people  to  withstand  the  great  pres- 
sures to  which  they  are  constantly  exposed. 

_  About  one-third  of  this  sum  will  be  used  in  the 
city's  industrial  investment  progi-am.  This  aid 
will  help  provide  jobs  for  Berlin's  unemployed 
and  will  assist  the  city  in  paying  its  own  way! 

The  balance  will  contribute  to  the  fulfillment 
of  the  "stockpiling"  program  bolstering  the  West 
Berliners'  security  by  providing  stores  of  food, 
fuel,  raw  materials,  and  other  essentials. 

No  material  contribution  such  as  this,  however, 
can  adequately  express  the  admiration  of  the 
American  people  for  the  courageous  stand  of  the 
people  of  Berlin  in  the  face  of  existing  hazards 
and  economic  difficulties. 

Current  Legislation  on  Foreign  Policy 

state  Department  Information  Program — Voice  of  Ameri- 
ca. Hearings  liefore  the  Permiineiit  Subcommit- 
tee on  Investigations  of  the  Committee  on  Government 
Operations,  United  States  Senate,  Eighty-Third  Con- 
gress, First  Session,  Pursuant  to  S.  Res.  40.  A  Reso- 
lution Authorizing  the  Committee  on  Government 
Operations  To  Employ  Temporary  Additional  Per- 
sonnel and  Increasing  the  Limit  of  Expenditures. 
Part  1,  February  16  and  17,  19.53.  77  pp.;  Part  2, 
February  18  and  19,  1953.  71  pp.;  Part  3,  Febru- 
ary 20  and  28,  ig.'iS.  74  pp.;  and  Part  4,  March  2, 
1953.     104  pp. 


Legislation  To  Extend  the  Mutual  Security  Program. 
Message  From  the  President  of  the  United  States 
Transmitting  Recommendations  for  Legislation  To 
Extend  the  Mutual  Security  Program.  H.  Doc.  140, 
83d  Cong.,  1st  Sess.     3  pp. 

Extension  of  Export  Control  Act  of  1949.  Hearing  Before 
the  Committee  on  Banking  and  Currency,  House  of 
Representatives,  Eighty-Third  Congress,  First  Ses- 
sion, on  H.  R.  4882,  April  20,  1953.     27  pp. 

Study  of  the  Escapee  and  Refugee  Situation  in  Western 
Europe.     S.  Rept.  158,  83d  Cong..  1st  Sess.     2  pp. 

Commission  on  Foreign  Economic  Policy.  Report  (To 
accompany  S.  J.  Res.  78).  S.  Rept.  292,  83d  Cong., 
1st  Sess.     3    pp. 

Report  of  Special  Study  Mission  to  Pakistan,  India,  Thai- 
land, and  Indochina.  Committee  on  Foreign  Affairs, 
House  of  Representatives.  May  6,  1953.  Committee 
print.     83d  Cong.,  1st  Sess.     104  pp. 

Report  on  the  Operations  of  the  Department  of  State 
(Under  Public  Law  584).  Message  From  the  Presi- 
dent of  the  United  States  Transmitting  a  Report  by 
the  Secretary  of  State  on  the  Operations  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  Under  Section  2  of  Public  Law  584, 
Seventy-Ninth  Congress,  As  Required  by  That  Law. 
H.   Doc.   115,   83d   Cong.,   1st    Sess.     97   pp. 

Amendment  to  the  Export-Import  Bank  Act  of  1945. 
Hearings  Before  the  Committee  on  Banking  and 
Currency,  House  of  Representatives,  Eighty-Third 
Congress,  First  Session,  on  H.  R.  4465,  A  Bill  To 
Amend  the  Export-Import  Bank  Ait  of  1045,  As 
Amended.     April  20  and  21,  1953.     59  pp. 

Amendment  to  Export-Import  Bank  Act  of  1945.  Report 
(To  accompany  H.  R.  4465) .  H.  Rept.  320,  83d  Cong., 
1st  Sess.    7  pp. 

The  Mutual  Security  Program  for  Fiscal  Year  1054. 
Basic  Data  Supplied  liy  the  Executive  Branch.  Com- 
mittee print.     83d  Cong.,  1st  Sess.     109  pp. 

Investigating  Means  of  Expanding  Foreign  Investments. 
Report  (To  accompany  S.  Res.  25).  S.  Rept.  208, 
S3d  Cong.,  1st  Sess.     3  pp. 

Reorganization  Plan  No.  5  of  1953.  Message  From  the 
President  of  the  United  States  Transmitting  Reor- 
ganization Plan  No.  5  of  19.53.  Relating  to  the  Ex- 
port-Import Bank  of  Washington.  H.  Doc.  135,  83dl 
Cong..  1st  Sess.     4  pp. 

State,  Justice,  and  Commerce  Appropriation  Bill,  Fiscall 
Year  19.54.  Report  (To  accompany  H.  R.  4974).  H. 
Rept.  341,  S3d  Cong.,  1st  Sess.     29  pp. 

Agreements  Relating  to  the  Status  of  the  North  Atlanta 
Treaty  Organizatiim,  Armed  Forces,  and  Militaryi 
Headquarters.  Report  (To  accompany  Executives  T 
and  U,  82d  Congress,  2d  session,  and  Executive  B,; 
83d  Congress,  1st  session).  S.  Exec.  Rept.  1,  83r 
Cong.,  1st  Sess.     19  pp. 

Testimony  of  General  Alfred  M.  Gruenther.  Hearing  Be- 
fore the  Committee  on  Foreign  Relations,  Unitedl 
States  Senate,  Eighty-Third  Congress,  First  Session, 
on  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization.  April  1, 
19.53.     28  pp. 

Soviet  Schedule  for  War.  1955.     Executive  Hearings  Be- 
fore the  Committee  on  Un-American  Activities,  Houi 
of    Representatives,    Eighty-Third    Congress,    Firsl 
Session.     May  13  and  14,  19.53.     32  pp. 

Treaties  and  Executive  Agreements.  Hearings  Before  a 
Sulicommittee  of  the  Committee  on  the  Judiciary 
United  States  Senate,  Eighty-Third  Congress,  First 
Session  on  S.  J.  Res.  1,  Proposing  an  Amendment  to 
the  Constitution  of  the  United  States  Relative  to  thi 
Making  of  Treaties  and  Executive  .\greements,  and 
S.  J.  Res.  43,  Proposing  an  Amendment  to  the  Con- 
stitution of  the  United  States.  Relating  to  the  Legal 
Effect  of  Certain  Treaties.  February  IS,  19,  25, 
March  4,  10,  16,  27,  31,  April  6,  7,  8,  0,  10.  and 
1953.     1267  pp. 


i\ 


( 


898 


Department   of  State   BulletinfK 


Second  Anniversary  of  SHAPE  as  an  Operational  Headquarters 


Report  of  Gen.  Matthew  B.  Ridgway 
Supreme  Allied  Commander,  Europe"- 


[Excerpts] 

This  report  concerns  Allied  Command  Europe 
from  30  May  1952,  when  I  became  Supreme  Allied 
Commander  Europe,  to  date. 

The  purpose  of  this  report,  the  second  emanat- 
ino-  from  Supreme  Headquarters  Allied  Powers 
Europe  [Shape],  is  to  provide  an  assessment  of 
the  current  and  prospective  capability  for  dis- 
charging assigned  defense  responsibdities.  It 
includes^  brief  summary  of  the  situation  1  year 
ao-o;  an  examination  of  the  changes  which  have 
since  occurred;  an  appraisal  of  their  effects  upon 
the  capability  of  this  command  for  carrying  out 
its  assigned 'defense  mission;  a  resuryey  of  its 
military  requirements;  and  an  indication  of  the 
areas  of  existing  major  deficiencies.  The  report 
is  purposely  couched  in  somewhat  general  terms 
for  security  reasons.  Precise  figures  on  present 
stocks  of  ammunition,  on  fuel  for  aircraft,  tanks, 
and  tracks,  and  on  the  effectiveness  of  our  radar 
to  give  us  timely  warning  of  surprise  enemy  air 
attack  obviously  should  not  be  made  public.  AH 
matters  of  substance  in  this  report  have  been  in- 
cluded in  classified  reports  previously  made  to 
proper  authority.  They  have  been  covered  m 
adequate  detail  and  supported  by  appropriate 
recommendations. 

Notwithstanding  this  unquestioned  need  for 
withholding  certain  information  from  publication, 
I  wish  to  emphasize  at  the  outset  of  this  report 
the  importance,  in  fact  I  believe  the  crucial  im- 
portance, of  making  known  to  our  Nato  peoples 
the  main  facts  of  the  military  situation  in  which 
they  are  so  deeply  concerned.  In  no  other  way 
can  they  be  convinced  of  the  need  for  the  heavy 
burdens  they  are  asked  to  carry.  If  unconvinced, 
they  cannot  be  expected  to  support  Nato  pro- 

'  Released  to  the  press  by  Shape,  Public  Infoi-mation 
Division,  Paris,  on  May  30.  The  report  is  made  to  the 
chairman  of  the  Standing  Group,  North  Atlantic  Treaty 
Organization.  .,..  ^   i. 

For  text  of  the  first  report  on  Shape,  submitted  by 
General  Eisenhower,  see  Bui-letin  of  Apr.  14,  1952,  p.  572. 

June  29,    1953 


gi-ams,  even  on  the  minimum  scale  essential  to 
collective  security.  With  an  unshakeable  belief 
in  our  concept  of  democracy,  I  concur  whole- 
heartedly with  my  predecessor.  General  Eisen- 
hower, who  a  year  ago  questioned  why  there 
should  be  "confusion  in  the  minds  of  millions  of 
our  own  peoples  as  to  the  basic  aims  of  our  defense 
program,  the  necessity  for  it,  and  the  urgent  de- 
mand for  their  own  individual  efforts."  "Once 
the  truth  is  understood,"  he  stated,  "once  the 
critical  dangers  present  in  the  world  situation  are 
really  known,  there  will  be  less  complacency  con- 
cerning our  present  military  situation  and  the 
harmful  effects  of  delay  will  be  clearly  seen." 

It  has  been  my  constant  conviction  since  I 
assumed  command  that  public  understanding  is 
indispensable  to  progress  toward  the  minimum 
military  security  for  which  Nato  has  been  estab- 
lished. To  create  this  understanding,  Nato  and 
the  national  authorities  must  present  the  facts 
of  our  security  situation  through  a  coordinated 
and  sustained  information  program.  I  have  pre- 
viously submitted  recommendations  concerning 
such  action. 

The  search  for  solutions  to  the  many  ma]  or 
problems  encountered  in  the  effort  to  become 
secure  gives  rise  to  serious  political,  economic, 
financial,  and  social  difficulties  to  which  I  am 
acutely  alive.  Yet  early  solutions  must  be  found 
if  the  basic  objectives  which  brought  Nato  into 
being  are  to  be  reasonably  attainable  withm  the 
near  future. 

The  assessments  which  follow  constitute  a  mili- 
tary estimate.  In  preparing  it,  I  have  drawn 
heavily  upon  the  advice  and  assistance  of  the 
officers  assigned  to  this  command.  Of  all  services, 
and  from  all  the  countries  represented  in  this  com- 
mand, they  are  men  of  high-principled  integrity 
and  demonstrated  professional  competence,  in 
whom  their  countries  may  have  real  pride  and 
confidence.  This  report  is  based  on  their  honest 
and  objective  analysis  and  reflects  the  rigid  stand- 
ards of  austere  economy  consistent  with  minimum 

899 


acceptable  efficiency  which  are  our  common  aim. 
These  men  are  deeply  aware  of  the  waste  of  human 
life,  of  spiritual  values,  and  of  material  treasures 
which  past  wars  have  entailed;  they  are  dedicated 
to  the  effort  to  forestall  the  catastrophic  destruc- 
tion which  future  wars  could  bring. 

THE  SITUATION  ONE  YEAR  AGO 

I  turn  now  to  the  situation  of  a  year  ago,  the 
time  at  which  the  first  Annual  Report  of  the  Su- 
preme Allied  Commander  Europe  was  issued. 
The  military  mission  entrusted  to  the  European 
Allied  Command  then  as  now  was: 

a.  In     war    to    defend    Nato's    European 
territories.     .     .     . 
_  h.  In  peacetime  to  develop  an  integrated,  effec- 
tive force  capable  of  accomplishing  the  war- 
time mission  if  required.     .     .     . 

The  next  basic  consideration,  giving  concrete 
dimensions  to  the  tasks  involved  in  accomplishing 
the  assigned  mission,  was  the  Soviet  threat — its 
nature  and  magnitude.  There  were  two  particu- 
lar points  to  be  stressed  in  this  connection.  First, 
our  task  as  military  men  was  to  concern  ourselves 
with  Soviet  capabilities.  Military  planning  and 
recommendations  could  not  be  based  upon  specu- 
lative estimates  of  a  potential  aggressor's  inten- 
tions. If  the  mission  assigned  to  this  Command 
was  to  be  discharged,  our  forces  had  to  be  prepared 
to  meet  an  aggressor's  forces  as  they  actually  ex- 
isted and  could  be  brought  into  battle.  We  had  to 
reckon  with  military  realities.  We  could  not  rely 
on  attempts  to  fathom  the  minds  of  the  men  in 
the  Kremlin  nor  to  follow  their  frequent  reversals 
of  tactics.  Second,  it  was  necessary  to  react  effec- 
tively to  Soviet  actions  within  whatever  period  of 
warning  might  be  provided.  Of  all  the  basic 
principles  of  war,  none  could  have  more  devastat- 
ing effect  in  this  area  than  that  of  surprise.  The 
importance  of  Soviet  capability  and  of  time  as 
two  factors  of  fundamental  significance  could 
scarcely  be  exaggerated. 

The  Soviet  bloc  had  over  51/^  million  men  under 
arms,  roughly  4I/2  million  belonging  to  the  Soviet 
Union  itself.  The  U.S.S.R.  mounted  175  line  divi- 
sions. Satellite  strength  was  growing.  The  So- 
viet air  force  totaled  just  over  20,000  frontline  air- 
craft, with  a  large  aircraft  reserve.  The  Navy 
had  more  than  300  submarines,  including  a  num- 
ber of  the  latest  type.  The  Soviet  forces  were 
capable  of  rapid  expansion  in  case  of  war. 
Trained-reserve  manpower  and  reserves  of  equip- 
ment were  immediately  available.  Some  30  divi- 
sions were  located  in  occupied  Europe,  of  which 
the  22  in  East  Germany  constituted  an  ever  pres- 
ent threat  to  our  forces.  The  combat  effectiveness 
of  the  ground  forces  was  rated  high  and  their 
equipment  good— in  some  types  superior.     The 

900 


combat  efficiency  of  the  air  force,  while  rated  be- 
low Nato  standards,  was  improving,  particu- 
larly with  the  replacement  of  piston-type  with 
modern  jet  aircraft.  The  Soviets'  well-known  dis- 
regard for  their  own  casualties  further  increased 
their  offensive  capability. 

The  balance  sheet  of  Nato  security  in  Westerr 
Europe,  as  I  evaluated  it  in  May  1952,  showed 
major  assets  and  major  liabilities.  The  military 
assets,  such  as  the  multiple  elements  of  command 
structure  and  leadership,  plans  and  directives,  or- 
ganized combat  units  and  provision  for  their  sup- 
port, had  already  begun  to  give  the  basis  for  hope 
of  future  security. 

Against  these  assets  were  ranged  grave  liabili. 
ties.  In  May  1952,  security  in  Western  Europe 
was  still  heavily  overshadowed  by  the  enormous 
pi'eponderance  of  combat-ready  Soviet  military 
power  poised  behind  the  Iron  Curtain.  Further 
more,  there  were  grave  deficiencies  in  Allied  pre- 
paredness to  meet  a  Soviet  attack  had  it  come.  The 
total  fighting  strength  of  the  Allies  formed  but  { 
small  fraction  of  the  Soviet  forces  deployed  in  for- 
ward areas.  Land  forces  and  naval  strength  as- 
signed to  Allied  Command  Europe  were  entirelj 
insufficient. 

The  inadequacy  of  the  Air  Forces  was  partica 
larly  acute.  Many  imits  were  deployed  in  exposed 
areas  east  of  the  Rhine,  with  no  prepared  re* 
deployment  sites.  Command,  control,  and  warn- 
ing arrangements  were  fragmentary  in  the 
extreme.  A  large  number  of  our  aircraft  were 
of  obsolescent  piston-engine  type. 

The  principal  subordinate  commands  were  stil 
in  a  formative  state.  The  headquarters  would  not 
have  been  equal  to  the  demands  of  active  opera 
tions.  Signal  communications  were  seriously  in- 
adequate for  continued  effective  control  of  the 
fighting  elements. 

Particularly  in  the  status  of  supporting  ele 
ments,  the  deficiencies  would  have  weighed  heavily 
against  effectiveness  in  combat.  Stocks  of  am- 
munition were  extremely  low,  logistical  and  main- 
tenance systems  inadequate,  and  resupply  plans 
and  assignments  of  responsibilities  were  still  under 
discussion  and  proving  extremely  difficult.  Sup- 
ply lines  ran  parallel  to  the  front  and  were 
operationally  unbalanced. 

Shortages  of  specialists,  career  personnel,  and 
experienced  leaders  were  severe  in  many  unita 
and  would  have  had  a  substantial  adverse  effect 
on  combat  operations.  Many  reserve  elements 
lacked  the  degree  of  organization  and  training 
required  for  combat.  Finally,  although  expansion! 
goals  and  connnitments  for  1952  had  been  under- 
taken at  Lisbon,  it  was  increasingly  apparent  that 
the  requisite  steps  in  manning,  training,  and 
equipping  were  not  being  taken  in  full  and  on 
time. 


Deparimeni  of  State  Bulletin 


1« 


111 


CHANGES  OCCURRING  IN  THE  PAST  YEAR 

During  the  past  year  imicli  has  been  done  to 
increase  onr  defense  forces  and  to  make  them 
more  effective.  Measured  against  the  Soviet  ca- 
])aliility,  our  progress  is  insufficient  to  give  us 
at  tcptable  prospect  of  success  if  attacked.  We 
arc  still  far  short  of  the  minimum  requirements. 
We  lack  essential  supply  and  support.  But  a 
series  of  actions  have  been  taken  which  have 
strengthened  our  command  structure,  augmented 
our  operational  plans  and  directives,  and  ma- 
tei'ially  increased  our  land,  air,  and  naval  forces. 
Examination  in  more  detail  of  major  changes 
follows. 


Development  of  Command  Structure 

By  August  1952  arrangements  for  coordinating 
the  operations  of  the  forces  of  Greece  and  Turkey 
with  those  of  the  remainder  of  my  command  had 
been  established.  Headquarters  Allied  Land 
Forces  Southeastern  Europe,  with  Lt.  Gen.  Wil- 
lard  G.  AVyman,  U.S.  Army,  in  command,  were 
established  in  Izmir  directly  subordinate  to  Ad- 
miral Carney,  Commander  in  Chief,  Allied  Forces 
Southern  Europe.  In  December  1952  Admiral 
the  Earl  Mountbatten  of  Burma,  Royal  Navy,  was 
appointed  Commander  in  Chief  Allied  Forces 
Mediterranean.  In  March  1953  he  took  over  his 
Allied  (Nato)  Command,  which  in  wartime  would 
include  units  of  the  British  Mediterranean  Fleet 
plus  naval  forces  from  other  Nato  nations.  The 
U.S.  Sixth  Fleet,  with  a  striking  force  mission, 
remains  assigned  to  the  Commancler  in  Chief,  Al- 
lied Forces  Southern  Europe.  Thus  there  now 
exists  a  command  structure  to  control  our  united 
forces  along  a  4,000-mile  front  extending  from 
northern  Norway  to  the  Caucasus. 


Buildup  of  Forces 

At  Lisbon  in  February  1952  the  nations  had  set 
for  themselves,  for  the  first  time,  firm  goals  for 
the  buildup  of  their  forces  in  1952,  and  tentative 
goals  for  1953  and  1954.  As  1952  ended,  the  goals 
were  in  large  part  met  numerically  for  air  forces, 
naval  foi'ces,  and  for  active  army  divisions,  al- 
though there  was  a  substantial  shortfall  in  planned 
combat  effectiveness.  During  the  last  12  months' 
progress  in  the  buildup  of  forces  has  been  steady. 
Throughout  the  command  the  strength  of  units 
has  increased,  additional  major  items  of  equip- 
ment have  been  provided,  and  training  advanced. 
In  addition,  a  substantial  number  of  new  units 
have  been  organized.  Nevertheless,  for  all  serv- 
ices there  are  still  major  deficiencies  in  support 
units,  in  logistical  establishments,  and  in  stocks  of 
ammunition  and  other  supplies.  I  would  add 
parenthetically  at  this  point  that  our  reporting 
and    evaluating    system    has    been    considerably 


strengthened  throughout  this  period.  We  can 
provide  more  definitive  information  of  actual  con- 
ditions than  formerly  was  possible.  Thus  it  is 
now  possible  to  evaluate  combat-effective  units 
with  much  greater  confidence.  We  now  have  a 
much  more  reliable  knowledge  of  just  where  we 
stand. 

A  year  ago  the  outstanding  deficiency  was  in 
the  tactical  air  forces.  There  was  a  shortage  of 
aircraft,  of  crews,  of  supply  and  support.  A  con- 
siderable increase  during  the  year  in  the  number 
of  combat  aircraft,  mainly  from  deliveries  under 
the  U.S.  mutual  defense  assistance  program,  has 
since  bettered  our  position.  Not  only  have  the 
numbers  of  combat  aircraft  increased,  but  their 
combat  capability  has  improved.  The  increase  in 
the  number  of  pilots  and  technicians  for  these  air- 
craft, together  with  some  small  improvement  in 
aircraft  control,  warning  and  reporting  systems, 
has  been  encouraging.  Our  network  of  airfields 
has  been  enlarged  and  made  more  efficient.  Our 
various  exercises,  which  posed  difficult  problems  in 
coordination  and  communications,  demonstrated 
the  ability  of  national  forces  assigned  to  Shape  to 
work  together  as  a  team.  In  supply,  and  in  the 
development  of  the  system  for  distributing  fuel, 
we  have  improved  our  status  over  the  past  year. 
Nevertheless,  our  air  power  is  still  today  the  weak- 
est link  in  our  defense.  In  sj^ite  of  our  progress, 
our  air  forces  could  not  adequately  carry  out  their 
tasks.  The  increase  of  air  power  must  receive  far 
greater  attention  by  the  Nato  nations. 

During  the  past  year,  great  efforts  have  been 
made  to  improve  training  of  regular  forces  and 
at  the  same  time  to  achieve  better  training  and 
mobilization  procedures  for  reserve  forces,  on 
whom  so  much  of  our  defensive  strength  depends. 
Lack  of  proper  training  facilities  and  areas  has 
hampered  this  effort,  but  good  leadership  can  do 
much  to  offset  the  deficiency.  Accordingly, 
Shape  has  strongly  emphasized  the  need  for  lead- 
ership at  all  echelons.  Various  national  forces 
have  organized  additional  schools  for  junior  and 
noncommissioned  officers,  and  study  periods  for 
senior  officers.  Mobilization  and  training  exer- 
cises have  been  conducted  with  encouraging  re- 
sults. Problems  in  training  both  active  and  re- 
serve forces,  like  most  of  our  large  problems,  are 
now  becoming  more  clearly  defined,  and  some 
Nato  nations  are  requesting  and  using  training 
and  advisory  missions  organized  by  Shape.  Such 
missions  are  now  operating  in  the  Netherlands, 
Luxembourg,  and  Portugal.  Another  important 
development  has  been  the  recent  establishment  of 
atomic  indoctrination  courses  for  key  Nato  com- 
manders and  staff  officers.  The  courses,  which  are 
designed  to  acquaint  officers  with  the  use  of  atomic 
weapons  in  tactical  situations,  will  enable  Nato 
military  staffs  to  consider  the  implications  of 
atomic  warfare  in  the  defense  of  Western  Europe. 
With  all  this,  there  is  still  an  urgent  need  for  all 
countries  to  reexamine  critically  their  mobilization 


June  29,   7953 


901 


systems  and  to  insure  that  they  are  adequate  to 
provide,  in  the  time  required,  forces  sufficiently 
well  trained  to  perform  their  duties. 

Support  of  Armed  Forces 

The  growth  of  land  forces  during  the  past  year, 
while  not  satisfactory,  has  been  encouraging. 
This  situation,  however,  is  not  true  of  tlie  arrange- 
ments for  the  supply  and  support  of  those  forces. 
The  initial  emphasis  which  had  been  given  to  the 
creation  of  frontline  troops  resulted  in  a  grave 
shortage  of  the  operational  reserves,  of  certain 
critical  supplies,  and  of  service  troops,  without 
which  a  modern  army  cannot  maintain  itself  ef- 
fectively in  the  field. 

In  an  international  command,  the  problem  of 
providing  the  overall  logistic  support  is  unusually 
complicated,  because  each  nation  is  responsible 
for  the  support  of  its  own  forces.  This  arrange- 
ment results  in  a  lack  of  flexibility  in  the  supply 
system.  In  an  attempt  to  make  the  system  less 
rigid.  Shape,  in  October  1952,  after  discussion 
with  the  nations  concerned,  submitted  to  the 
Standing  Group  specific  proposals  which,  if 
adopted,  should  in  time  remedy  the  main  faults  in 
the  organization  of  our  supply.  But  merely  im- 
proving our  supply  organization  does  not  make 
good  the  present  lack  of  operational  reserve  stocks. 
The  nations  are  all  agreed  that  they  should  hold 
stocks  sufficient  for  several  months,  a  period  based 
on  an  estimate  of  the  time  to  begin  the  replenish- 
ment of  stocks  in  Europe  after  the  outbreak  of 
war.  Mainly  for  financial  reasons,  however,  their 
stocks  have  not  been  built  up  to  the  needed  level. 

On  the  other  hand,  progress  has  been  good  on 
the  third  part  of  the  program  of  infrastructure, 
that  is,  of  fixed  militai-y  installations  including 
airfields,  signal  communications,  and  command 
headquarters.  More  than  half  of  the  125  airfields 
approved  have  been  completed  to  the  point  where 
they  could  be  used  in  an  emergency,  and  construc- 
tion is  proceeding  well  on  all  but  a  few  of  the 
remainder.  Our  fixed  communications  net  is  be- 
ginning to  take  form. 

The  fourth  part  of  the  infrastructure  program 
was  approved  by  the  Council  in  December  1952, 
but  only  about  one-half  of  it  was  financed  at  that 
time.  Additional  airfields,  headquarters,  signals 
communications,  jet-fuel  storage  tanks,  and  dis- 
tribution pipelines  to  airfields  were  among  that 
portion  of  the  program  which  was  agreed  on.  The 
remainder,  financed  in  April  1953,  included  addi- 
tional airfields  and  items  such  as  naval  bases,  radar 
installations,  radio-navigational  aids,  and  train- 
ing installations.  In  April  1953,  the  Council  also 
approved  the  financing  of  a  long-range  infra- 
structure program  for  1954, 1955,  and  1956,  cover- 
ing the  additional  Nato  military  installations  re- 
quired to  be  built  during  this  3-year  period.  This 
farsighted  departure  from  previous  year-by-year 

902 


financial  approval  represents  a  long  step  forward. 
It  will  enable  us  to  improve  greatly  the  planning 
for  construction  by  placing  it  on  a  firm  long-range 
basis. 

The  oi'ganization  of  the  civilian  bodies  of  Xato 
has  been  progressively  strengthened  during  the 
past  year  as  a  result  of  the  creation  of  the  position 
of  Secretary  General  as  a  focal  point  of  civilian 
leadership.  Under  Lord  Ismay,  the  work  of 
building  a  more  cohesive  structure  has  gone  for- 
ward. Tlie  North  Atlantic  Council,  since  the 
decision  in  early  19.52  that  it  fimction  in  perma- 
nent session  through  the  appointment  of  penna- 
nent  representatives,  has  ]5rovided  increasingly 
firm  top-level  direction  to  Nato,  on  a  continuous 
basis.  Under  Lord  Ismay,  the  International  Staff 
has  been  developed  to  assist  and  advise  in  the 
discharge  of  complex  civilian  responsibilities. 
The  result  has  been  to  delineate  both  those  and  the 
military  responsibilities  more  clearly,  to  facilitate 
policy  decisions,  to  strengthen  defense  production, 
and  to  provide  more  effective  review  of  perform- 
ance in  meeting  accepted  goals.  The  military 
echelon  of  Nato  now  has  authoritative  civilian 
guidance  and  direction  available  on  a  permanent 
basis.  The  political  aspects  of  Nato  military 
exercises,  the  assessments  of  the  security  threat, 
the  administrative  and  budgetary  supervision  of 
Nato  airfield  and  other  infrastructure  programs, 
and  the  complex  tasks  of  setting  annual  goals  for 
the  buildup  of  military  forces  are  matters  on  which 
this  type  of  guidance  has  been  received. 


The  European  Defense  Community 

During  my  year  of  command  I  have  followed 
closely  the  plans  for  the  European  Defense  Com- 
munity. The  benefits  wliich  the  early  ratification 
of  the  treaty  would  have  brought  to  our  efforts 
and  to  European  unity  included  the  contribution 
of  West  Germany,  which  I  consider  indispensable 
to  our  defense  system.  Shape  has  maintained 
constant  liaison  with  tlie  Interim  Committee  of 
the  European  Defense  Community  and  has  ob- 
served and  assisted  in  its  planning.  Its  plans  are 
workable  and  sufficiently  advanced  to  avoid  delay 
in  developing  a  German  contribution. 

Shift  of  National  Emphasis 

Throughout  many  of  the  Nato  nations  the 
growth  of  defensive  power  has  reduced  the  sense 
of  fear  and  urgency  under  which  they  lived  in  the 
preceding  12  mouths.  Nations  are  beginning  to 
change  their  planned  military  programs  from 
rapid  rearmament  to  a  longer-term  policy.  Al- 
though this  change  may  be  dictated  by  the  eco- 
nomic situation,  we  must  not  forget  that  any  real 
slackening  of  the  defense  effort  may  itself  open 
the  way  to  aggression. 

Department  of  Slate  Bulletin 


APPRAISAL  OF  THE  EFFECTS  OF  CHANGES 


During  the  past  12  months,  the  U.S.S.R.  has 
systematically  strengthened  its  armed  forces  and 
those  of  its  European  satellites.  The  highly 
mechanized  group  of  Soviet  armies  stationed  in 
East  Germany  has  been  kept  at  a  high  level  of 
training ;  its  equipment  has  been  increased  and  its 
vehicles  modernized.  Many  Russian  air  squadrons 
have  been  reequipped  with  jet  aircraft.  A  huge 
program  of  airfield  constraction  has  been  nearly 
completed  throuo;hout  Eastern  Europe.  The 
Soviet  naval  shipbuilding  program  is  continuing 
steadily  and  now  includes  construction  of  new  im- 
proved ocean  patrol  submarines.  The  military 
strength  of  the  satellite  countries  has  been  in- 
creased considerably.  Since  January  1952,  when 
these  forces  numbered  approximately  1,000,000 
men  organized  into  65  divisions,  they  have  in- 
creased to  more  than  1,300,000  men  organized  into 
70-odd  divisions.  This  total  does  not  count  East 
Germany,  where  various  units  of  the  police  have 
been  converted  into  the  nucleus  of  a  Gennan  army 
which  now  numbers  about  100,000.  East  Ger- 
many is  also  forming  an  air  force  and  a  naval 
force.  The  foregoing  summary  relates  to  the 
strengthening  of  So\aet  conventional  forces.  It 
must  not  be  forgotten,  however,  that  Soviet  eilort 
in  the  atomic  field  has  also  continued. 

These  are  the  facts  about  the  increasing  strength 
of  the  Soviet  bloc.  Since  Stalin's  death,  there  has 
been  much  conjecture  about  possible  changes  of 
policy  by  the  rulei-s  of  the  Soviet  Union.  These 
are  matters  beyond  my  purview.  Moreover,  as 
a  soldier  I  cannot  afford  to  deal  with  conjecture. 
I  feel  it  my  duty  to  state  that  I  know  of  no  facts 
which  would  lead  me  to  conclude  that  the  military 
danger  from  the  East  has  lessened.  This  view 
coincides  with  the  official  communique  issued  by 
the  North  Atlantic  Council  at  the  conclusion  of  its 
Ministerial  session,  25  April  1953.-     .     .     . 

An  appraisal  of  the  present  power  ratio  goes 
far  beyond  the  military  field.  It  embraces  every 
aspect  of  our  political,  economic,  financial,  and 
social  systems.  All  but  the  military  aspects  are 
beyond  both  my  competence  and  responsibility. 
Yet  within  the  strictly  military  field,  I  find  the 
disparity  between  our  available  forces  and  those 
which  the  Soviet  rulers  could  bring  against  us  so 
great  as  to  warrant  no  other  conclusion  than  that 
a  full-scale  Soviet  attack  within  the  near  future 
would  find  Allied  Command  Europe  critically 
weak  to  accomplish  its  present  mission.  The 
potential  aggressor  retains  the  initiative.  He  can 
exercise  his  offensive  capability  at  will  and  choose 
the  time,  place,  weight,  and  direction  of  attack. 
To  allow  the  Nato  nations  to  maintain  their  status 
as  free  nations,  we  should  have  the  means  which 
can  be  committed  to  action  within  a  short  time  and 


'  Ibid.,  May  11,  1953,  p.  673. 
June  29,   1953 


which  can  give  us  the  capability  of  withstanding 
an  initial  attack  and  gaining  time  to  gather  our 
strength.  To  do  otherwise,  we  would  risk  need- 
lessly heavy  sacrifice  of  life  and  great  loss  of 
critical  equipment.  We  need  not  only  the  phys- 
ical means  but  the  driving  force  of  dynamic 
leadership  sustained  by  a  high  morale  through- 
out the  civilian  population  as  well  as  among  our 
fighting  forces. 


THE  TASKS  AHEAD 

Now,  in  May  1953,  the  Nato  nations,  which 
were  almost  defenseless  in  1950,  can  be  justifiably 
proud  in  looking  at  their  increased  strength. 
They  can  be  buoyed  up  by  their  accomplishments, 
not  weighed  down  by  their  fears.  The  result 
should  be  an  improvement  in  the  morale  of  their 
peoples.  Their  seriousness  of  purpose  and  their 
strength  of  will  should  have  been  made  clear  to 
the  world. 

Yet  pride  in  achievement  must  not  blind  us  to 
the  magnitude  of  the  tasks  ahead,  nor  hide  our 
true  military  position  today.  The  achievements 
during  the  past  year  have  been  considerable.  They 
reflect  great  credit  on  the  14  Nato  nations,  but 
the  efforts  of  the  last  2  years  could  all  be  wasted 
were  we  to  relax  now.  There  are  still  many  gaps 
in  our  defense  system  which  must  be  filled  without 
delay  if  our  homelands  are  to  have  that  reasonable 
minimum  of  security  which  it  has  been  Nato's 
primary  purpose  to  achieve. 

My  predecessor  reported  in  May  1952 :  "There 
is  no  real  security  yet  achieved  in  Europe ;  there 
is  only  a  beginning."  Knowledge  of  the  military 
situation  today  gives  no  grounds  for  believing  that 
this  security  has  been  achieved,  that  the  begin- 
ning, made  a  year  ago,  has  now  come  so  near  to  a 
successful  ending  that  our  efforts  can  be  relaxed. 

Northern  Europe  still  lacks  within  its  own  re- 
sources the  minimum  forces  required  to  give  ade- 
quate chances  of  success  against  a  major  attack. 
The  nations  in  that  area  will  have  to  receive  ex- 
ternal assistance,  and  this  is  contemplated  in  our 
plans.  The  continuing  magnitude  of  Soviet  of- 
fensive capabilities  in  Northern  Europe,  and  the 
special  requirements  for  coordinating  the  military 
measures  taken  by  the  nations  of  that  area  with 
the  contributions  of  other  Nato  partners  to  de- 
fense, create  a  problem  of  unusual  complexity 
and  difficulty.  The  pattern  of  solution  through 
collective  action  is  being  gradually  clarified. 
Further  efforts  by  all  concerned  are,  however, 
required. 

In  Central  Europe  we  have  made  material  prog- 
ress. It  is  clear  that  the  basic  elements  of  strength 
to  attain  a  capability  for  defense  of  that  area  can 
be  found.  What  is  required  is  the  continued  will 
and  effort  to  convert  this  potential  into  reality. 
If  such  effort  is  forthcoming,  and  especially  if  an 

903 


early  German  contribution  is  provided,  we  can 
look  forwai'd  to  the  day  in  the  near  future,  when 
if  attacked,  we  could  conduct  a  successful  defense 
in  that  area. 

Likewise  in  Southern  Europe  the  land  forces 
are  steadily  improving  and  a  successful  defense 
appears  attainable  in  the  foreseeable  future. 
There  continues  to  exist  a  serious  lack  of  support 
troops.  This  weakness  must  be  remedied.  Pow- 
erful naval  forces  could  make  u  contribution  of 
the  greatest  value  but  the  air  forces  here,  as  in 
other  areas,  are  still  dangerously  short. 

There  are  many  measures  that  apply  generally 
throughout  the  whole  Western  European  area. 
Active  land  forces  must  be  further  increased. 
Those  already  in  being  must  be  better  trained 
and  backed  by  proper  support  troops — at  present 
lacking.  The  system  of  training  and  mobilizing 
our  reserve  forces  must  insure  that  they  are  ready 
to  face  a  professional  enemy  on  equal  terms.  The 
naval  forces  must  receive  the  escort  vessels  and 
minesweepers  which  will  be  vital  for  defense 
against  a  potential  enemy  strong  in  submarines 
and  minelaying  capability. 

Our  greatest  weakness,  however,  is  in  the  air. 
For  the  next  year,  at  least,  higher  priority  should 
be  given  to  the  air  forces.  Not  only  do  we  lack 
the  number  of  modern  aircraft  indispensable  for 
our  defensive  tasks,  but  in  some  countries  the 
development  of  an  effective  air  warning  and  con- 
trol system  is  only  just  beginning. 

To  establish  a  workable  supply  system,  the 
nations  should  plan  to  meet  the  requirements  for 
their  forces  both  from  home  production  and 
through  negotiation  with  other  governments. 
National  stocks,  particularly  of  ammunition, 
should  be  increased  from  their  present  low  level. 

The  deficiencies  I  have  noted  are  correctible, 
provided  that  timely  action  is  taken  and  sustained. 
If  this  is  done,  this  command  could  be  capable, 
within  the  near  future,  of  effectively  defending 
"Western  Europe  against  full-scale  Soviet  ag- 
gression. If  these  deficiencies  remain  substan- 
tially uncorrected,  these  requirements  sub- 
stantially unfulfilled,  then  Allied  Command 
Europe  will  continue  to  be  critically  weak  in  its 
capability  of  accomplishing  its  present  mission; 
the  Nato  nations  of  Europe  will  remain  exposed 
to  the  peril  of  decisive  military  defeat  with  all 
its  catastrophic  consequences  to  them  and  to  West- 
ern civilization. 

Our  present  difficulties  would  be  lessened 
through  greater  unity  of  effort.  In  the  economic 
field,  this  would  help  solve  the  problems  of  mili- 
tary supply  and  equipment.  In  the  political 
field,  it  would  facilitate  our  efforts  to  mobilize  all 
our  available  military  resources. 

In  4  years  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organiza- 
tion has  demonstrated  that  free  nations,  working 
earnestly  together,  can  achieve  collective  security. 
We  have  become  seriously  aware  of  the  heavy 

904 


sacrifices  demanded  to  arm  nations  for  defense. 
Today  we  are  far  from  tlie  plateau  of  security. 
We  have  merely  gained  the  foothills  leading  to 
that  plateau.  A  leveling  off  now,  when  we  are  far 
below  minimum  force  requirements,  may  return 
our  European  peoples  to  that  grim  feeling  of  mili- 
tary weakness  and  futility  of  effort  only  recently 
left  behind. 

During  the  last  2  years  we  have  overcome  the 
natural  inertia  which  besets  all  human  endeavors. 
We  have  imparted  to  the  huge  and  complicated 
machinery  of  defense  a  momentum  of  incalculable 
power — the  results  of  faith  and  growing  strength. 
We  must  not  lose  that  momentum.  To  do  so  would 
be  to  nullify  all  our  labor  and  sacrifices,  to  re- 
pudiate our  principles,  and  to  perpetuate  our 
peril.  Were  the  momentum  once  lost,  the  efforts 
to  restore  it  would  be  many  times  those  we  have 
so  far  made. 

The  most  precious  assets  of  our  nations  are  their 
spiritual  values  and  their  youth.  The  most  sacred 
obligations  of  governments  are  to  nurture  and  pre- 
serve those  values,  and  to  assure  that  those  lives 
shall  not  be  hazarded  through  failure  to  recognize 
the  depth  of  the  threat  ranged  against  us. 

Joined  in  devotion  to  the  cause  of  peace  and 
security  of  all  we  prize,  convinced  of  the  aim 
and  the  urgency  of  our  individual  efforts,  we  have 
now  to  sustain  "the  momentum  that  has  brought  us 
thus  far  and  to  maintain  our  faith  in  the  values 
we  strive  to  defend. 


30  May  1952 


Matthew  B.  Kidgwat 


U.S.  Restricts  Fueling'of  Ships 
Bound  for  Communist  China 

Samuel  W.  Anderson,  Assistant  Secretary  of 
Commerce  for  International  Affairs,  announced  on 
June  8  a  move  by  the  Commerce  Department  to 
prevent  any  foreign  ship  or  aircraft  scheduled  to 
call  at  Communist  Chinese  ports  from  fueling 
at  U.S.  ports  without  prior  approval  by  the  De- 
partment. Applications  for  such  approval  will 
not  generally  be  granted,  Mr.  Anderson  stated. 

A  new  export  control  regulation  of  the  Office  of 
International  Trade,  effective  July  6,  will  require 
an  individual  validated  license  from  Oit  for  ex- 
port of  petroleum  products,  including  fuel,  for 
use  on  board  foreign  carriers  leaving  the  United 
States  or  its  territories  if  any  one  of  the  following 
conditions  exists: 

1.  The  foreign  carrier  requiring  the  petroleum 
products  has  called  at  Macao  or  any  point  under 
far  eastern  Communist  control  since  January  1, 
1953; 

2.  The  carrier  is  bound  for  any  such  point 
within  a  period  of  120  days  in  the  case  of  a  vessel 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


or  30  days  in  the  case  of  an  aircraft  from  the  date 
of  departure  from  the  last  U.S.  point  of  exit; 

3.  The  carrier  will  carry  any  commodities  of 
any  origin  within  these  same  periods  known  by 
the  owner,  master,  commander,  charterer,  or  agent 
to  be  destined  directly  or  indirectly  to  these  points 
unless  the  commodities  are  covered  by  an  export 
license  from  Oit  ;  or 

4.  The  carrier  is  registered  in,  or  under  charter 
to  a  Soviet-bloc  country  or  is  under  charter  to  a 
national  of  any  Soviet-bloc  country. 


Under  general  licenses  "ship  stores"  and  "plane 
stores,"  OiT  permits  exportation,  without  an  in- 
dividual validated  export  license,  of  usual  and 
reasonable  quantities  of  fuel,  food  stores,  etc.,  for 
use  or  consumption  on  board  the  vessel  or  plane 
during  the  voyage  which  are  not  intended  for 
unloading  in  a  foreign  country.  Under  the  new 
regulations,  howevei',  an  individual  validated  ex- 
port license  will  be  required  if  any  of  the  four 
conditions  specified  above  exists.' 


Release  of  Anti-Communist  Prisoners 
From  U.N.  Camps  in  South  Korea 


FoUowlng  are  texts  of  statements  and,  correspondence 
relating  to  the  release  of  anti-C otnmunist  prisoners  of  war 
in  South  Korea. 


U.N.  Command  Statement  of  June  18 

Between  midnight  and  dawn  today,  approximately  25,- 
000  militantly  anti-Communist  North  Korean  prisoners  of 
war  broke  out  of  United  Nations  Command  prisoner  of 
war  camps  at  Pusan,  Masan,  Nonsan  and  Sang  Mu  Dai, 
Korea. 

Statements  attributed  to  high  officials  of  the  Republic  of 
Korea  now  malie  it  clear  that  the  action  had  been  secretly 
planned  and  carefully  coordinated  at  top  levels  in  the 
Korean  Government  and  that  outside  assistance  was  fur- 
nished the  P.  O.  W.'s  in  their  mass  breakout.  R.  O.  K. 
security  units  assigned  as  guards  at  the  P.  O.  W.  camps 
did  little  to  prevent  the  breakouts  and  there  is  every  evi- 
dence of  actual  collusion  between  the  R.  O.  K.  guards  and 
the  prisoners. 


ROK  Action  a  Violation  of 
U.N.  Command's  Authority 

Statetnent  by  Secretary  Dulles 

White  House  press  release  dated  June  18 

I  have  been  in  conference  with  the  President 
regarding  the  unilateral  action  taken  by  the  Re- 
public of  Korea  to  release  prematurely  North 
Korean  prisoners  of  war.  This  action  was  in  viola- 
tion of  the  authority  of  the  U.N.  Command  to  which 
the  Republic  of  Korea  had  agreed.  On  behalf  of 
the  United  Nations  we  have  conducted  our  negotia- 
tions for  an  armistice  in  good  faith  and  we  have 
acted  and  are  acting  in  good  faith.  President 
Eisenhower  is  communicating  with  President  Rhee 
in  this  sense. 


During  the  past  year,  these  R.  O.  K.  security  guard  units 
have  been  especially  trained  for  their  duties  at  P.  O.  W. 
camps,  in  order  that  more  than  1.3,000  United  States  and 
R.  O.  K.  Army  combat  troops,  which  would  otherwise  be 
required  as  security  personnel,  might  be  made  available 
for  front-line  duty.  The  R.  O.  K.  security  guards  were 
considered  especially  suitable  for  the  camps  containing 
anti-Communist  Korean  prisoners  in  view  of  the  previous 
cooperative  attitude  of  the.se  P.  O.  W.'s. 

United  States  personnel  at  these  non-repatriate  camps, 
limited  in  each  case  to  the  camp  commander  and  a  few 
administrative  personnel,  exerted  every  effort  to  prevent 
today's  mass  breakouts,  but  in  the  face  of  collusion  be- 
tween the  R.  O.  K.  guards  and  the  prisoners,  their  efforts 
were  largely  unavailing.  The  large  quantities  of  non- 
toxic irritants  (tear  gas  and  other  non-poisonous  gases) 
employed  proved  ineffective  because  of  the  great  number 
of  prisoners  involved  in  the  night-time  breakouts.  Nine 
prisoners  were  killed  and  sixteen  injured  by  rifle  Are. 
There  were  no  casualties  among  United  States  personnel. 

As  of  1  o'clock  this  afternoon,  971  escaped  P.  O.  W.'s 
had  been  recovered. 

R.  O.  K.  security  guard  units  which  have  left  their 
posts  and  non-repatriate  camps  are  being  replaced  by 
United  States  troops. 


Lt.  Gen.  Harrison  to  Gen.  Nam  IL,  June  18 

Gen.  N.4M  IL, 

Senior  Delegate,  Delegation  of  the  Korean  People's 
Army,  and  the  Chinese  People's  Volunteers: 
Between  midnight  and  dawn  today,  approximately 
25,000  North  Korean  prisoners  of  war,  who  have  refused 
to  be  repatriated  following  an  armistice,  broke  out  of 
United  Nations  Command  prisoner  of  war  camps  Nos.  5, 
6,  7  and  9. 


'  The  list  of  commodities  subject  to  the  new  procedure 
and  further  information  on  this  change  in  regulations 
are  published  in  Oit's  Current  Export  Bulletin  705,  dated 
June  4,  19.53.  It  may  be  obtained  at  the  U.S.  Department 
of  Commerce,  Washington  25,  D.C.,  or  any  Field  Office  of 
the  Department. 


June  29,   1953 


905 


statements  attributed  to  high  oflBcials  of  the  Republic 
of  Korea  indicate  that  the  action  had  been  secretly 
planned  and  carefully  coordinated  at  top  levels  in  the 
Korean  Government  and  that  outside  assistance  was  fur- 
nished the  prisoners  of  war  in  their  mass  breakout. 
Kepublic  of  Korea  Army  security  units  assigned  as  guards 
at  the  prisoner  of  war  camps  did  little  to  prevent  the 
breakout,  and  there  is  every  evidence  of  actual  collusion 
between  the  Republic  of  Korea  Army  guards  and  the 
prisoners. 

The  Republic  of  Korea  Army  security  guard  units  used 
at  the  camps  containing  anti-Communist  prisoners  of  war 
had  been  considered  especially  suitable  in  view  of  the 
previous  cooperative  attitude  of  these  prisoners  while 
in  custody. 

These  Republic  of  Korea  Army  security  guard  units 
which  have  left  their  posts  at  nonrepatriate  camps  are 
being  replaced  by  United  States  troops. 

Efforts  are  being  made  to  recover  the  prisoners  now  at 
liberty  and  as  of  1  o'clock  this  afternoon,  971  escaped 
prisoners  of  war  had  been  recovered. 

WlIXIAM  K.  Habrison,  Jb., 
Lieutenant  General,  U.S.A.,  Senior  Delegate 
United  Nations  Command  Delegation. 


Pyun  Yun  Tae,  Acting  South  Korean  Premier, 
To  Gen.  Clark,  U.  N.  Commander,  June  18 

Deab  Genebai,  Ciakk  :  As  regards  the  question  of  re- 
leasing the  anti-Communist  Korean  prisoners  of  war, 
instead  of  handing  them  over  to  the  five-nation  custodial 
committee,  the  position  of  this  Government  has  long  been 
made  clear  through  frequent  representations,  oral  and 
written,  from  its  spokesmen.  This  position  is,  it  should 
be  noted,  also  what  the  United  Nations  cease-fire  delega- 
tion itself  once  took  as  its  own,  when  Lieut.  Gen.  William 
K.  Harrison,  its  senior  delegate,  in  the  course  of  enunciat- 
ing the  then  new  United  Nations  three-point  proposal  on 
May  13,  1953,'  said,  "Prisoners  of  war  of  Korean  nation- 
ality who  have  elected  not  to  avail  themselves  of  the 
right  to  be  repatriated  should  be  released  to  civilian 
status  on  the  date  the  armistice  becomes  effective." 

The  complete  reversal  of  this  United  Nations  stand 
does  not  so  much  reflect,  we  sincerely  believe,  a  change 
In  criteria  of  human  judgment  as  a  freakish  turn  in 
International  fortuity  favoring  the  ascendancy  of  ap- 
peasers,  to  whom  these  34,000  kin  of  ours,  all  loyal  to 
us,  just  look  as  many  unfeeling  wooden  pawns  to  be 
whisked  about  in  their  grand  game  of  "peace,"  alias  sur- 
render. We,  in  the  name  of  human  decency  and  dignity, 
revolt  at  this  sickening  order  of  things,  whatever  may 
ensue. 

I  need  not  reiterate  now  why  we  cannot  let  our  own 
citizens  liberated  from  Communist  domination,  interna- 
tionally miscalled  prisoners  of  war,  be  taken  away  to  any 
neutral  area  to  be  placed  under  the  jurisdiction  of  an  alien 
body  and  brainwashed  for  several  long  months  by  trained 
Communist  tormentors  supported  by  pro-Communist  alien 
armed  forces.  We  declare  time  and  again  that  this  na- 
tion cannot  suffer  this  to  happen  within  its  own  domain. 

We  need  not  point  out  the  fact  that  many  of  those 
prisoners  are  bona  flde  R.  O.  K.'s  captured  by  the  enemy 
but  forced  to  fight  on  his  side,  contrary  to  all  known  human 
practices,  to  say  nothing  of  the  Geneva  Convention. 
Where  is  the  justice,  if  the  United  Nations,  who  let  the 
Communists'  liquidating  or  forcing  more  than  50,000 
R.  O.  K.  prisoners  of  war  into  their  military  service  go 
unchallenged,  now  insists  on  even  these  bona  fide  R.  O.  K. 
troops  being  pressured  to  go  to  the  Communists  and  suc- 
ceeds? The  public  sentiments  are  so  strong  against  it 
that,  even  if  this  Government  wished  to  acquiesce  in  the 
tragic  international  development,  it  could  not  have  done 
so  without  completely  forfeiting  the  confidence  and  the 


respect  of  the  Korean  people,  which  this  Government  can- 
not be  justly  expected  to  risk. 

Recognizing,  however,  the  international  complications 
involved  in  the  prisoners  of  war  question  and  implicitly 
trusting  that  the  United  Nations  Command  would  do 
right  by  the  said  prisoners  by  somehow  restoring  them 
to  free  ways  of  life  in  the  end,  this  Government  has  been 
patiently  waiting  for  the  United  Nations  Command  to  take 
adequate  measures  to  set  them  free  from  the  prolonged, 
unjustifiable  incarceration.  You  know.  General,  what 
we  would  have  done  with  them,  if  they  were  in  our  custody. 
We  would  have  liberated  these  hapless  fellow-countrymen 
of  ours  long  ago.  If  we  had  entertained,  even  for  a  single 
moment,  any  idea  of  bartering  the  innocent  lives  of  these 
poor  fellow-citizens  for  the  transitory  ease  of  a  shameful 
peace  we  would  have  deserved  nothing  but  the  curse  of 
these  intended  victims  as  well  as  the  damnation  of  a 
Righteous  Deity. 

With  the  prisoners  of  war  agreement  reached  between 
the  United  Nations  Command  and  the  Communists,  how- 
ever, the  last  ray  of  hope  is  gone  of  seeing  them  ever 
freed,  for  that  agreement,  its  terms  being  what  they  are, 
will  end  up  in  forcibly  repatriating  all  of  them  against 
their  original  wishes,  sending  them  to  execution  or  con- 
centration camp.  Whoever,  Archbishop  or  layman,  has 
been  submitted  to  the  ordeals  of  Communist  inquisition 
has  never  survived  as  what  he  was. 

Foreseeing  this  tragic  eventuality,  this  Government 
could  not  have  done  otherwise  than  it  has  done  today.  It 
has  tried  every  means  to  avoid  causing  Inconvenience  to 
the  United  Nations  Command.  It  had  been  patient  to  the 
very  last  moment,  until  it  was  compelled  to  do  the  duty 
the  whole  nation  was  expecting  it  to  discharge. 

Today  our  President  instructed  the  Korean  authorities 
connected  with  the  guarding  of  these  prisoners  to  release 
them.  As  he  said  in  a  statement  released  today,  a  copy 
of  which  is  herewith  enclosed '  for  your  reference,  the 
reason  why  he  took  this  action  without  consulting  you  in 
advance  is  too  obvious  to  need  any  explanation.  What- 
ever interpretation  others  may  put  on  this,  his  sole  motive 
of  having  done  so  was  to  cause  as  little  embarrassment  as 
possible  to  the  United  Nations  Command.  It  is  clear  to 
him  that  no  matter  how  you  feel  about  the  stand  this 
Government  has  been  taking  on  the  P.  O.  W.  question,  you 
are  duty-bound  to  abide  by  the  agreement  terms,  which 
we  do  not  regard  as  equally  binding  on  us.  Even  to  be 
consulted,  however  slightly,  about  our  contemplated  action 
would  have  been  unbearably  embarrassing  to  you.  I 
hope  you  will  take  this  well-meant  silence  not  too  badly. 

We  feel  relieved  to  know  that  no  violence  occurred 
between  the  R.O.K.  and  United  Nations  P.O.W.  camp 
personnel,  though  we  regret  very  much  that  several  scores 
of  prisoners  were  killed  and  injured  by  United  Nations 
guards.  In  this  connection,  I  should  like  to  call  your 
attention  to  the  mutual  need  of  refraining  from  saying 
or  doing  anything  that  might  likely  provoke  passions  of 
the  masses,  which,  once  let  loose,  may  easily  get  out  of 
control.  If  there  is  any  talk  to  be  done,  it  had  better  be 
managed  quietly,  we  believe. 

As  regards  the  971  prisoners  said  to  have  been  retaken 
and  re-detained,  and  several  thousands  still  being  kept  in 
stockades,  I  ask  you  to  turn  them  over  to  us  to  be  released 
by  our  own  hands.  We  must  liberate  them  all,  preferably, 
if  possible,  in  a  manner  least  likely  to  cause  trouble.  For 
your  concurrence,  I  should  like  to  suggest  that  this  note 
will  be  released  with  a  view  to  publicly  clarifying  the 
situation  and  thus  forestalling  pernicious  doubts  that 
might  otherwise  multiply. 

Communist  Commanders  to  Gen.  Claris,  June  19 

We  have  received  the  letter  of  June  18,  1953,  from  Gen- 
eral Harrison  of  your  side  to  Gen.  Nam  II  of  our  side. 

In  the  letter  your  side  stated  that  25,000  captured  per- 
sonnel of  the  Korean  People's  Army,  detained  in  P.  O.  W. 


'  Bulletin  of  May  25,  1953,  p.  755. 
906 


'  Not  printed. 


Deparlm&nt  of  State  Bulletin 


1 


camps  Nos.  5,  6,  7,  and  9  of  your  side  "broke  out"  of  and 
"escaped"  from  the  P.  O.  W.  camps  on  June  18  under 
the  secret  planning  in  advance  and  careful  coordination 
at  top  levels  iu  the  South  Korean  Government  and  with 
the  aid  of  the  South  Korean  security  units  and  outside 
assistance.  Yet,  Syngman  Rhee  of  South  Korea  formally 
admitted  that  these  P.  O.  W.'s  were  "released"  on  his 
order  by  the  South  Korean  security  units. 

Only  ten  days  ago,  both  sides  had  just  signed  an  agree- 
ment on  the  question  of  repatriation  of  prisoners  of  war ; 
yet,  the  South  Korean  Government  and  Army  directly 
controlled  by  your  side  already  flagrantly  and  openly  vio- 
lated this  agreement  in  coercing  the  25,000  prisoners  of 
war  who  constitute  more  than  half  the  total  number  of 
prisoners  of  war  not  for  direct  repatriation,  into  leaving 
a  prisoner  of  war  camp  under  the  so-called  order  of  "re- 
lease" and  through  the  actions  of  the  secret  agents  and 
security  units  from  inside  coordinated  with  the  outside 
and  indicating  openly  that  they  were  prepared  to  press- 
gang  the  prisoners  of  war  into  the  South  Korean  Army 
so  as  to  achieve  the  aim  of  forcibly  retaining  prisoners 
of  war. 

Moreover,  this  situation  further  developed.  On  June 
19,  another  1,813  prisoners  of  war  were  forced  to  leave 
the  P.  O.  W.  camp.  Therefore,  we  cannot  but  consider  the 
nature  of  this  incident  as  extremely  serious. 

For  some  time  the  Syngman  Rhee  clique  of  South  Korea 
has  been  clamoring  for  "opposing  an  armistice  in  Korea," 
"advancing  to  the  north  and  unifying  the  whole  nation" 
and  "releasing  all  the  Korean  prisoners  of  war"  who 
"refuse"  repatriation.  Your  side  is  not  unaware  of  such 
a  question,  yet  your  side  did  not  adopt  any  actual  meas- 
ures to  prevent  and  stop  the  occurrence  of  the  Syngman 
Rhee  clique  in  carrying  out  its  long-premeditated  scheme 
of  violating  the  agreement  of  P.  O.  W.'s  and  obstructing 
the  realization  of  an  armistice.  We  consider  that  your 
side  must  bear  the  serious  responsibility  for  this  incident- 

Our  side  has  long  ago  and  repeatedly  called  the  atten- 
tion of  your  side  to  the  fact  that  so-called  "preventing 
the  forced  repatriation"  of  P.  O.  W.'s  which  your  side  has 
propagandized  all  along  is  completely  fabricated  and  does 
not  occur  at  all ;  on  the  contrary,  the  possibility  of  for- 
cible retention  of  prisoners  does  exist  and  is  increasing 
all  the  time,  which  is  what  our  side  shall  resolutely  op- 
pose. This  incident  of  "releasing"  and  coercing  P.  O. 
W.'s  by  Syngman  Rhee,  which  has  now  occurred,  proves 
that  the  forcible  retention  of  P.  O.  W.'s,  which  our  side 
is  against,  has  further  become  an  unquestionable  fact. 
The  wrong  stand  and  attitude  of  conniving  which  your 
side  has  taken  all  along  on  this  question  could  not  but 
have  directly  caused  the  occurrence  of  the  Incident  and 
affected  the  implementation  of  the  armistice  agreement 
ready  to  be  signed. 

In  view  of  the  extremely  serious  consequences  of  this 
Incident,  we  cannot  but  put  the  following  questions  to 
your  side: 

Is  the  United  Nations  Command  able  to  control  the 
South  Korean  Government  and  Army? 

If  not,  does  the  armistice  in  Korea  include  the  Syngman 
Rhee  clique? 

If  it  is  not  included,  what  assurance  is  there  for  the 
Implementation  of  the  armistice  agreement  on  the  part 
of  South  Korea? 

If  it  is  included,  then  your  side  must  be  responsible  for 
recovering  immediately  all  the  25,9.52  prisoners  of  war 
who  are  at  liberty,  that  Is,  those  who  were  released  and 
retained  under  coercion  and  to  be  press-ganged  into  the 
South  Korean  Army,  and  your  side  must  give  assurance 
that  similar  incidents  absolutely  will  not  recur  in  the 
future.     We  are  awaiting  the  reply  of  your  side. 

Supreme  Commander  of  the  Korean  People's  Army 
Kim  II  Sung 

Commander  of  the  Chinese  People's  Volunteers 
Peng  Teh-Huai 


Gen.  Clark  to  President  Syngman  Rhee,  June  20 

Deak  Mr.  President  :  In  the  summer  of  1950,  when  the 
United  States  and  other  nations  responded  to  your  appeal 
to  the  United  Nations  to  repel  the  armed  attack  upon  the 
Republic  of  Korea  by  forces  from  North  Korea,  the  United 
Nations  received  from  you  a  message  assigning  command 
authority  over  all  land,  sea  and  air  forces  of  the  Republic 
of  Korea  to  the  commander,  United  Nations  Command, 
for  the  duration  of  hostilities." 

The  United  Nations  Command  did  not  seek,  and  Indeed, 
did  not  consider  necessary  any  further  or  more  formal 
commitments  from  your  Government  regarding  the  par- 
ticipation of  Republic  of  Korea  armed  forces  in  the  United 
Nations  Command.  I  therefore  have  considered  and  do 
now  consider  that  I  have  full  command  authority  over  all 
land,  sea  and  air  forces  of  the  Republic  of  Korea.  Nothing 
In  our  long  association  during  our  mutual  prosecution  of 
our  common  cause  has  prepared  me  to  believe  that  I  should 
consider  otherwise. 

This  notwithstanding,  and  in  clear  violation  of  my  au- 
thority, certain  officers  and  men  of  the  Republic  of  Korea 
Army  willfully  permitted  the  escape  of  many  thousands 
of  lawfully  detained  prisoners  of  war  from  various  pris- 
oner of  war  installations  during  the  early  morning  hours 
of  18  June  1953,  such  officers  and  men  having  been  officially 
enjoined  with  responsibility  for  the  security  of  said  in- 
stallations and  for  the  detention  of  said  prisoners.  Fur- 
ther, I  have  received  information  through  the  public  press 
that  this  action  was  initiated  on  your  orders  and  issued 
through  an  official  who  is  not  within  the  forces  under 
my  command. 

I  must  inform  you  with  all  the  sincerity  which  I  possess 
that  I  am  profoundly  shocked  by  this  unilateral  abro- 
gation of  your  personal  commitment,  which  was  so  freely 
and  voluntarily  given  at  the  time.  As  a  matter  of  fact 
on  several  occasions  in  recent  weeks  you  have  personally 
assured  both  Ambassador  Briggs  *  and  me  that  you  would 
not  take  unilateral  action  with  reference  to  R.  O.  K.  forces 
under  my  control  until  after  full  and  frank  discussion 
with  me. 

Your  actions  today  have  clearly  abrogated  these  assur- 
ances. 

I  cannot  at  this  time  estimate  the  ultimate  consequences 
of  this  precipitous  and  shocking  action  on  your  part,  nor 
can  its  effect  on  the  common  cause  for  which  we  have  sac- 
rificed so  much  during  these  past  several  years  be  fore- 
cast at  this  time. 
Sincerely, 

Mark  W.  Clakk, 
General,  D.S.  Army 


Statement  by  General  Clark,  June  21 

The  actions  of  the  Government  of  the  Republic  of 
Korea  in  connection  with  the  recent  mass  outbreaks  of 
Korean  anti-Communist  prisoners  of  war  were  clearly 
a  direct  violation  of  the  authority  vested  in  me  as  Com- 
mander in  Chief,  United  Nations  Command.  The  Re- 
public of  Korea  has  acknowledged  this  authority  since 
the  summer  of  1950,  when  it  freely  and  voluntarily 
assigned  command  of  all  land,  sea  and  air  forces  of  the 
Republic  of  Korea  to  the  Commander,  United  Nations 
Command,  for  the  duration  of  hostilities— authority 
which,  prior  to  the  events  of  June  18,  1953,  it  has  never 
questioned. 

President  Eisenhower  has  forcefully  called  this  matter 
to  the  attention  of  President  Rhee,  and  I  have  made 
urgent  representations  to  President  Rhee  on  the  same 
subject.     The   actions   of  the  Government  of  Korea   on 


'For  text  of  President  Rhee's  letter  of  July  15,  1950, 
see  Bulletin  of  Aug.  7, 1950,  p.  206. 
*  Ellis  O.  Briggs,  U.S.  Ambassador  to  Korea. 


June  29,  1953 


907 


June  18  also  directly  violated  solemn  assurances  repeat- 
edly given  to  me  in  person  by  President  Rbee  over  the  past 
several  weeks  that  no  overt  and  unilateral  action  would 
be  taken  by  bis  Government  in  connection  with  tbe 
removal  of,  or  interference  witb,  Republic  of  Korea 
forces  under  tbe  United  Nations  Command  without  prior 
consultation  with  me. 

These  assurances  from  the  responsible  head  of  a 
sovereign  state  I  accepted  in  good  faith.  It  is  now  tragi- 
cally clear,  however,  that  President  Rhee  has  unilaterally 
abrogated  bis  previous  assurances  and  that  the  mass 
outbreaks  ot  Korean  anti-Communist  prisoners  of  war 
were  not  only  aided  but  actually  engineered  by  officials 
and  troops  ot  tbe  Republic  of  Korea  Government. 

It  was  realized,  of  course,  that  the  Republic  of  Korea 
Government  had  the  capability  of  taking  unilateral  action 
with  regard  to  tbe  release  of  prisoners  of  war.  It  was 
also  known  that  certain  elements  in  the  Republic  of 
Korea  Government  had  advocated  privately  and  publicly 
that  such  action  be  taken.  The  personal  assurances  of 
President  Rhee,  however,  were  considered  sufficient  guar- 
antee that  no  such  action  would  be  taken  without  prior 
consultation  with  me.  I  cannot  emphasize  too  strongly 
my  surprise  and  disappointment  that  this  very  serious 
step  was  taken. 

In  the  light  of  developments  over  the  past  few  weeks, 
during  which  the  intransigent  attitude  of  certain  Repub- 
lic of  Korea  officials  toward  an  armistice  became  in- 
creasingly apparent,  I  gave  careful  consideration  to  the 
advisability  of  replacing  the  Republic  of  Korea  security 
force  units  at  Korean  anti-Communist  F.O.W.  camps 
with  other  United  Nations  units.  With  the  full  knowl- 
edge of  my  Government,  decision  was  made  not  to  do  so 
for  sevei-al  reasons : 

First:  The  specially  trained  Republic  of  Korean  Army 
security  forces  which  had  performed  their  duties  in  a 
commendable  manner  had  given  no  evidence  of  disaf- 
fection. Because  they  are  of  the  same  race  and  speak  the 
same  language  as  the  prisoners  they  were  guarding,  they 
filled  the  need  which  could  not  be  fully  met  from  any  other 
sources  within  my  command. 

Second:  In  tbe  delicate  situation  which  prevailed,  any 
move  to  replace  Republic  of  Korea  units  would  have  re- 
flected on  the  trustworthiness  of  those  units  and  on  the 
Republic  of  Korea,  and  might  have  precipitated  the  very 
kind  of  situation  in  tbe  camps  with  the  Republic  of 
Korea  which  tbe  United  Nations  Command  has  been 
very  anxious  to  avoid. 

Third:  United  Nations  combat  units  were  critically 
needed  at  tbe  front,  particularly  in  view  of  the  desperate 
attacks  launched  by  the  enemy  during  the  past  few  weeks  ; 
te  have  withdrawn  the  several  thousand  men  necessary 
to  replace  the  Republic  of  Korea  Army  security  forces 
units  would  have  constituted  a  serious  drain  on  our  front 
line  forces. 

At  the  same  time,  I  directed  that  the  normal  informa- 
tion program  in  each  of  the  camps  concerned  be  expanded 
to  insure  a  full  understanding  on  the  part  of  the  anti- 
Communist  prisoners  of  the  position  which  the  United 
Nations  Command  had  taken  in  armistice  negotiations  on 
the  matters  pertaining  to  prisoners  of  war.  The  fact 
that  neither  force  nor  coercion  would  be  permitted  in  re- 
patriating prisoners  of  war  was  reiterated  day  after  day 
in  the  hope  that  it  would  allay  their  very  natural  fears 
and  apprehensions  as  to  their  future  disposition. 

In  addition,  I  directed  those  of  my  commanders  con- 
cerned with  the  security  of  these  prisoners  of  war  to 
devise  control  measures,  to  include  riot  control  tactics. 
All  my  directives  on  these  subjects  had  the  full  concur- 
rence of  my  superiors  in  Washington. 

Because  the  Republic  of  Korea  Government  has  uni- 
laterally and  without  previous  notice  abrogated  its  prom- 
ises volimtarily  given  and  because  of  the  collusion,  defec- 
tion, and  desertion  of  some  Republic  of  Korea  Army 
security  force  units,  large  numbers  of  anti-Communist 
prisoners  of  war  have  broken  out  of  their  camps  and  are 
now  dispersed  throughout   South   Korea,  with  apparent 


support  and  assistance  from  the  Republic  of  Korea  Gov- 
ernment. Such  measures  as  are  practicable  are  being 
taken  to  effect  their  return. 

Tbe  action  taken  by  President  Rhee  and  the  officials 
of  his  Government  in  making  possible  the  mass  breakout 
of  these  many  thousands  of  prisoners  has  been  a  deep 
and  personal  disappointment  to  me  and  to  my  entire  com- 
mand. It  has  given  rise  to  wholly  unfounded  suspicions 
of  collusion  on  the  part  of  tbe  Republic  of  Korea  Govern- 
ment and  the  United  Nations  Command  to  circumvent 
or  abrogate  the  prisoner-of-war  agreement  recently 
reached  at  Panmunjom.  There  has  been  no  such  col- 
lusion, nor  has  the  United  Nations  Command  in  any  way 
been  a  party  to  this  completely  unauthorized  action. 
The  entire  responsibility  rests  squarely  upon  President 
Rhee  and  the  Government  of  Korea. 


Political  Conference  on  Korea 

Press  Conference  Remarks  hy  Secretary  Dulles 

Press  release  318  dated  June  15 

In  response  to  questions  concerning  the  likely 
time,  place,  date,  and  agenda  of  the  political  con- 
ference following  an  armistice  in  Korea,  Secretary 
D idles  7nade  the  following  remarks  at  his  press 
conference  on  June  15: 

Under  the  i^rovisions  of  the  armistice,  there 
would  be  a  political  conference  to  be  held  within 
90  days  of  the  conclusion  of  the  armistice.  The 
General  Assembly  of  the  United  Nations  has  re- 
cessed with  the  understanding  that  they  would 
be  called  back  into  session  promptly  upon  the 
conclusion  of  an  armistice.  At  that  time  they 
would  presumably  designate  a  committee  of  its 
members,  a  delegation  of  U.N.  members,  to  take 
part  in  the  conference.  In  addition,  the  Republic 
of  Korea  will  certainly  take  part  in  the  conference. 
Who  will  take  part  on  the  other  side,  we  do  not 
know. 

Now,  as  to  the  agenda  of  the  conference.  The 
purpose  from  our  standpoint  will  be  to  endeavor 
to  assure  the  unification  of  Korea.  That  has  been 
our  objective  for  a  long  time.  It  was  expressed 
during  the  war  and  at  postwar  conferences.  It 
was  expressed  at  the  United  Nations  on  several 
occasions.  I  myself  was  a  member  of  the  U.S. 
delegation  which,  in  19^7  and  again  in  1948,  put 
through  the  resolutions  which  called  for  the  uni- 
fication of  Korea.  I  myself  am  a  great  believer 
in  that  unification,  just  as  I  believe  in  the  unifica- 
tion of  Germany  and  the  unification  of  Austria. 
I  believe  all  three  of  these  unifications  will  come 
about,  and  I  believe  that  we  can  expedite  their 
coming  about  bj-  appropriate  political  methods 
and  by  handling  our  case  properly  at  this  confer- 
ence and  at  other  opportunities  that  may  be 
offered.^ 


'Asked  whether  in  the  view  of  the  United  States  the 
agenda  of  the  political  conference  should  be  confined  to 
Korean  questions  or  include  other  Far  Eastern  problems 
such  as  Indochina,  the  Secretary  replied  that  no  conclu- 
sions on  this  had  yet  been  reached. 


908 


Deparfment  of  State  Bulletin 


U.S.  Mifitary  Mission 
To  Visit  Indochina 

Press  release  329  dated  June  20 

In  response  to  an  invitation  from  the  French 
Prime  Minister  when  he  visited  Washington  last 
March,  a  U.S.  military  mission  headed  by  Lt.  Gen. 
John  W.  O'Daniel,  presently  commander,  U.S. 
Army  Pacific,  will  arrive  at  Saigon  on  June  20. 
Its  purpose  will  be  to  pursue  discussions  with  Gen. 
Henri  Navarre,  Commander  in  Chief,  Indochina, 
on  the  manner  in  which  U.S.  material  and  finan- 
cial support  of  the  effort  of  the  French  and  Asso- 
ciated States  armed  forces  in  Indochina  may  best 


contribute  to  the  advancement  of  the  objective  of 
defeating  the  Communist  forces  there  and  of 
bringing  peace  and  security  to  Vietnam,  Cam- 
bodia, and  Laos.  It  is  believed  essential  to  insure 
an  increasingly  close  integration  of  U.S.  assistance 
with  the  plans  developed  by  the  authorities  of 
France  and  of  the  Associated  States. 

Arrangements  are  being  made  for  the  militai-y 
leaders  of  the  Associated  States  to  participate  in 
these  discussions.  The  vital  role  of  the  national 
armies  of  Vietnam,  Cambodia,  and  Laos  and  the 
increasingly  important  assumption  of  high  mili- 
tary responsibilities  by  the  Associated  States  will 
make  tliese  discussions  of  particular  interest. 


Some  Aspects  of  American  Foreign  Policy 

hy  Livingston  T.  Merchant 

Assistant  Secretary  for  European  Affairs  ^ 


I  have  frequently  been  impressed  by  the  diffi- 
culty of  discussing  foreign  policy  without  at  the 
same  time  discussing  a  lot  of  other  matters.  For- 
eign policy  today  involves  tax  policy,  budget 
policy,  tariff  policy,  immigration  policy,  military 
policy,  and  dozens  of  other  things. 

We  cannot  make  major  decisions  in  interna- 
tional affairs  without  affecting  to  some  degree  the 
domestic  scene.  Nor  can  we  safely  make  deci- 
sions on  matters  that  used  to  be  considered  purely 
domestic  without  taking  into  account  possible 
effects  upon  our  international  relations.  We're  in 
the  position  of  a  baseball  pitcher  who  has  to  keep 
one  eye  on  the  batter,  one  eye  on  the  base  runner, 
and  needs  still  another  eye  to  watch  the  manager's 
signals. 

Wliat  I'm  trying  to  say  is  already  fairly  obvious 
to  most  of  you.  In  this  century,  the  business  we 
call  foreign  affairs  has  become  extremely  com- 
plicated. I'm  sure  there  are  many  career  officers 
in  the  American  diplomatic  service  who  have  a 
certain  nostalgia  for  the  "good  old  days"  when 
life  was  simpler,  when  American  security  was  not 
seriously  threatened.  In  those  days,  our  work  was 
important,  of  course,  but  the  consequences  of  a 
mistake  were  not  quite  so  dangerous  as  they  are 
today. 

Our  foreign  relations  have  become  all-impor- 
tant to  our  national  security,  our  domestic  pros- 
perity, and  even  our  survival,  and  we  have  to  use 

'  Address  made  before  the  Machinery  and  Allied  Prod- 
ucts Institute  at  Washington,  D.C.,  on  June  11  (press 
release  312). 

June  29,   1953 

260392—53 3 


every  practical  technique  available  to  protect 
American  interests.     We're  playing  for  keeps. 

I  think  some  Americans  have  been  perplexed 
and  even  shocked  by  the  course  of  events  which 
have  converted  the  United  States  from  a  relatively 
secure  nation  at  the  turn  of  this  century  to  a  nation 
whose  security  is  gravely  imperiled  today.  Schol- 
ars and  philosophers  have  devoted  much  thought 
to  this  subject,  and  many  explanations  have  been 
offered.  If  we  were  able  to  live  the  last  half- 
century  over  again  perhaps  many  things  would  be 
done  differently.  The  world  looks  simpler  in 
hindsight. 

But  for  myself,  I  am  convinced  that  even  the 
most  enlightened  policies  on  the  part  of  national 
governments  could  not  have  reversed  the  tide  of 
insecurity  which  has  swept  the  earth  in  this 
century.  Our  greatest  problem  has  been  the  on- 
rush of  modern  technology.  Perhaps  if  we  had 
begun  in  the  latter  decades  in  the  19th  century  to 
jail  all  young  men  who  were  playing  around  with 
gasoline  motors,  trying  to  invent  flying  machines, 
investigating  electrodynamics,  and  studying  what 
was  then  considered  the  pure  and  harmless  science 
of  nuclear  physics,  we  could  have  avoided  many 
of  our  present  difficulties.  Then  perhaps  there 
would  have  been  no  planes  to  fly  the  oceans  and 
attack  our  shores,  no  atom  bombs  to  blast  our  cities, 
no  great  concentrations  of  economic  and  political 
strength  to  destroy  the  balance-of-power  system 
which  protected  us  for  so  many  years.  But  such 
a  course  of  action,  we  realize,  would  have  been 
absurd.  We  cannot  and  do  not  wish  to  stop  the 
march  of  science  and  teclinology.    Our  only  al- 

909 


tematire  is  to  try  to  develop  the  kind  of  national 
and  international  relationships  among  human  be- 
ings which  will  permit  these  advances  of  science 
to  be  used  for  our  benefit  rather  than  oar 
destruction. 

I  believe  we  must  accept  the  probability  that 
we  face  a  long  period  of  insecurity,  that  we  may 
not  achieve  complete  security  in  this  generation  or 
the  next.  Perhaps  we  can  find  some  satisfaction 
in  the  thought  I  recently  heard  expressed  by  the 
great  British  historian,  Toynbee,  that  nations 
gain  certain  advantages  from  insecurity.  Wliile 
I  think  Mr.  Toynbee  has  a  good  point,  I  also  feel 
that  we  could  get  along  with  a  little  less  insecurity 
than  we  have  at  this  moment. 

While  our  foreign  policies  today,  as  in  the  past, 
must  be  designed  to  serve  a  variety  of  American 
interests,  our  cardinal  purpose  is  to  preserve  the 
security  of  the  people  of  the  United  States.  We 
must  keep  constantly  in  mind  the  very  grave  dan- 
gers confronting  us,  and  seek  in  every  possible 
way  to  reduce  and  eliminate  these  dangers.  The 
decisions  of  the  Department  of  State,  and  of  many 
other  agencies  of  the  Government,  must  be  made 
with  the  problem  of  national  security  uppermost 
in  our  thoughts. 

I  suspect  that  some  Americans  are  convinced 
that  there  is  something  mysterious  and  esoteric 
about  the  process  of  formulating  foreign  policy. 
Wliile  the  process  is  often  intricate,  it  is  by  no 
means  mysterious.  Our  nation  has  certain  broad 
objectives  which  are  easily  understood  by  most 
Americans.  We  are  also  confronted  with  certain 
inescapable  facts  which  exist  in  the  world.  In 
essence,  our  job  is  to  find  methods  of  dealing  with 
these  facts  which  will  permit  us  to  reach  our 
objectives. 

I  think  it  may  be  useful  at  this  point  for  me  to 
discuss  briefly  a  few  of  the  most  important  facts 
which  we  must  recognize  and  take  into  account  in 
developing  American  foreign  policy  at  this  stage 
of  our  history. 

Soviet  Power 

First,  our  nation's  safety  is  threatened  by  an 
adversary  whose  power  is  virtually  unmatched  in 
the  records  of  human  civilization.  The  Soviet 
Union  controls  one-third  of  the  world's  popula- 
tion. It  dominates  a  large  part  of  the  world's 
land  area.  It  possesses  enormous  natural  re- 
sources, many  of  which  are  not  yet  fully  exploited. 
Its  present  rate  of  industrial  growth  is  greater 
than  our  own  and  considerably  greater  than  that 
of  Western  Europe.  It  has  the  largest  standing 
army  and  air  force  in  history.  Its  policies  and 
actions  are  not  inhibited  by  the  moral  and  hu- 
manitarian considerations  which  have  tradition- 
ally restrained  other  governments  and  peoples 
from  crimes  against  their  neighbors.  In  addition, 
the  Soviet  empire  has  achieved  a  tight  internal 
discipline  maintained  by  military  force,  by  the 

910 


secret  police,  and  by  a  philosophy  which  makes 
every  individual  a  creature  of  tne  state. 

The  Soviet  empire  also  has  unprecedented  ad- 
vantages in  the  field  of  political  warfare.  The 
Communists  have  already  seized  several  countries 
without  use  of  the  Soviet  armies.  They  also  have 
strong  support  in  many  other  countries  that  are 
still  free.  All  disasters,  weaknesses,  and  problems 
in  the  free  world  benefit  the  Communists  and  in- 
crease their  opportunities  of  expanding  their 
power.  Our  own  security  and  national  interests 
can  only  be  served  if  conditions  in  other  free 
countries  improve,  but  the  Communists'  purposes 
are  served  if  conditions  in  these  countries  become 
worse.  And  I  think  you  will  agree  that  it  is 
easier  to  disrupt  than  to  build. 

Because  of  the  Soviet  Union's  ability  to  com- 
bine a  military  threat  with  a  continuing  ideologi- 
cal campaign,  the  Soviet  leaders  are  able  to 
exercise  a  perpetual  squeeze  play  against  the  free 
world.  On  one  hand,  if  free  nations  fail  to  build 
their  military  defenses,  they  risk  being  overpow- 
ered by  the  Soviet  military  machine.  On  the  other 
hand,  if  they  concentrate  an  excessive  portion  of 
their  energies  and  resources  on  military  defense, 
they  risk  an  economic  and  political  collapse  which 
would  permit  the  Communists  to  seize  power  inter- 
nally. Thus,  the  Soviet  empire  is  constantly  at- 
tacking the  free  world  on  two  flanks  at  the  same 
time,  in  the  hope  of  taking  nations  one  by  one, 
exploiting  their  resources,  gaining  additional 
strength,  and  eventually  becoming  so  powerful 
that  the  remainder  of  the  free  world  can  no  longer 
resist  Communist  domination  of  the  planet.  The 
power  of  the  Soviet  empire  and  the  nature  of  Com- 
munist tactics  combine  to  present  a  threat  far 
greater  than  has  ever  been  presented  by  any  other 
aggi'essor. 

A  second  fact  we  must  recognize  was  recently 
stated  very  simply  by  President  Eisenhower  when 
he  said  that  the  United  States  needs  friends.  In 
fact,  the  friendship  and  assistance  of  other  free 
nations  is  absolutely  vital  to  our  national  security. 

I  am  convinced  that  a  great  deal  of  the  contro- 
versy which  arises  from  time  to  time  over  par- 
ticular proposals  and  actions  in  the  field  of  inter- 
national affairs  would  disappear  if  the  American 
people  as  a  whole  fully  appreciated  the  limitations 
upon  our  national  power.  We  are  a  strong  coun- 
try, but  one  of  the  most  foolish  things  we  could 
do  would  be  to  exaggerate  our  strength.  We  have 
only  6  percent  of  the  world's  population  and  a 
small  part  of  its  land  area.  We  have  tremendous 
and  valuable  natural  resources  but  only  a  minor 
part  of  the  total  resources  of  the  world.  We  are 
noted  for  our  enormous  industrial  power,  and  yet 
the  Soviet  conquest  of  Western  Europe  alone 
would  enable  the  Soviet  empire  to  achieve  indus- 
trial superiority.  Moreover,  we  could  not  main- 
tain our  industrial  production  and  our  standard 
of  living  without  raw  materials  which  we  import 
from  other  free  nations. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


n 

I 


U.S.  Needs  Strong  Friends 

Third,  I  want  to  stress  the  fact  that  we  not  only 
need  friends  but  also  need  friends  who  are  strong. 
In  the  overall  world  struggle  that  has  been  forced 
upon  us,  we  cannot  judge  our  capacity  for  re- 
sistance in  terms  of  our  own  national  army,  navy, 
and  air  force,  or  in  terms  of  our  own  economic 
and  industrial  production,  without  reference  to 
the  economic,  military,  and  political  capabilities 
of  other  free  nations.  It  would  be  just  as  foolish 
for  us  to  do  this  as  it  would  be  for  Florida,  Cali- 
fornia, or  Connecticut  to  assess  their  respective 
abilities  to  withstand  communism  without  refer- 
ence to  the  power  of  the  United  States  as  a  whole. 
If  we  view  the  world  picture  clearly  and  soberly, 
we  will  not  limit  ourselves  to  asking  whether  a 
division  encamped  along  the  shores  of  the  Potomac 
has  enough  guns  and  tanks.  We  will  also  concern 
ourselves  about  the  strength  of  a  French  division 
in  Indochina,  the  strength  of  a  British  division  in 
Western  Germany,  and  the  strength  of  a  Chinese 
division  on  Formosa.  We  will  ask  whether  the 
economic  systems  of  Italy,  and  Iran,  and  India, 
and  other  countries  are  strong  enough  to  permit 
the  people  of  these  countries  to  resist  the  appeals 
of  communism  and  to  make  a  positive  contribu- 
tion to  the  security  of  the  free  world. 

Once  we  begin  to  think  in  these  terms,  we  can 
appreciate  more  fully  another  important  fact 
which  we  have  learned  in  recent  years.  We  have 
learned  that  a  dollar  spent  in  creating  strength  in 
other  countries  often  buys  a  great  deal  more  total 
strength  than  it  will  buy  in  this  country.  In  our 
vast  economy  a  few  million  dollars  may  add  little 
or  nothing  to  our  ability  to  resist  Soviet  aggres- 
sion. But  these  same  dollars  spent  in  technical 
assistance  may  provide  the  decisive  margin  by 
which  countries  in  the  Middle  East  and  South  Asia 
can  reverse  a  downward  economic  trend  and 
change  it  into  an  upward  economic  trend.  And  in 
Europe  we  have  seen  that  our  military  and  eco- 
nomic assistance  exercises  a  similar  multiplier 
effect  in  the  development  of  defensive  strength. 
Because  the  Europeans  themselves  pay  most  of 
the  cost  of  their  defenses,  with  the  United  States 
supplying  only  the  critical  margin  which  the  Eu- 
ropeans cannot  provide,  the  military  forces  made 
possible  by  American  assistance  are  far  more  pow- 
erful than  the  United  States  could  build  for  the 
same  amount  of  money  in  this  country,  where  we 
would  have  to  pay  the  total  cost. 

A  final  fact  I  want  to  stress  today  is  the  im- 
portant relation  between  economic  health  in  other 
free  countries  and  our  efforts  to  achieve  world 
peace  and  security.  We  can  neither  keep  the 
friendship  of  other  peoples  nor  hope  to  see  them 
become  strong  unless  they  are  able  to  establish 
conditions  of  economic  stability  and  growth. 
Without  economic  health,  the  military  defense  we 
are  helping  to  build  will  be  limited  in  size  and 
effectiveness.    Without  economic  health,  free  and 


orderly  political  institutions  will  tend  to  disin- 
tegrate. If  economic  conditions  remain  stag- 
nant or  deteriorate,  the  Communists  will  have  an 
opportunity  to  seize  new  territories  without  firing 
a  shot.  Most  of  us  are  well  aware  that  economic 
collapse  in  other  countries  would  have  the  most 
serious  effects  upon  our  exports  and  imports  and 
upon  our  domestic  prosperity.  It  is  equally  im- 
portant to  understand  that  economic  conditions 
abroad  vitally  affect  our  national  security. 

In  this  connection,  I  would  like  to  draw  par- 
ticular attention  to  Europe,  the  area  for  which  I 
have  special  responsibility  in  the  Department  of 
State.  Secretary  Dulles  has  already  told  the  Con- 
gress and  the  general  public  about  the  substantial 
progress  which  Europe  is  making  in  the  develop- 
ment of  military  defenses.  We  have  also  wit- 
nessed, since  the  early  postwar  years,  a  steady 
decline  in  the  political  power  of  the  Communists 
in  free  Europe.  Today,  however,  there  are  omi- 
nous clouds  on  the  economic  horizon  which 
threaten  to  undo  much  of  the  good  work  which 
has  been  done. 

Europe's  Economic  Problems 

During  the  last  year,  the  steady  rise  in  overall 
European  production  which  began  with  the  Mar- 
shall plan  has  leveled  off.  Intra-European  trade 
has  declined.  Since  mid-1950,  living  standards  in 
Europe  as  a  whole  have  not  risen  significantly. 
Inflation  in  several  countries  has  continued  to  un- 
dermine economic  stability ;  since  the  Korean  war 
prices  in  France  have  risen  more  than  40  percent. 
Taxes  are  severe ;  it  may  astonish  many  Americans 
to  realize  that  the  percentage  of  national  and  in- 
dividual income  taken  by  taxes  in  the  European 
Nato  countries,  as  a  whole,  is  slightly  higher  than 
the  percentage  taken  by  all  Federal,  State,  and 
local  taxes  in  the  United  States.  Finally,  Europe's 
balance  of  payments  with  other  parts  of  the  world, 
especially  the  dollar  area,  remains  unfavorable. 

All  these  facts  were  recognized  by  the  Nato 
ministers  who  met  in  Paris  last  April  to  develop 
Nato  defense  plans  for  1953.  It  was  obvious  that 
the  defense  efforts  of  most  European  governments 
had  closely  approached  the  limits  of  their  eco- 
nomic capabilities.  Bather  than  waste  their  re- 
sources in  a  precipitate  buildup  to  a  defense  level 
that  could  not  thereafter  be  sustained,  Nato  has 
abandoned  any  fixed-date  target  and  is  seeking 
a  more  gradual  and  more  realistic  continuing 
buildup. 

But  the  acceptance  of  a  more  realistic  defense 

Erogram  has  not  by  any  means  solved  Europe's 
asic  economic  problems.  Some  of  these  prob- 
lems are  very  deep-rooted  and  can  only  be  solved 
over  a  long  period  of  years.  Despite  the  outstand- 
ing achievements  made  possible  by  the  Marshall 
plan,  it  is  evident  that  there  were  several  European 
economic  problems  which  it  did  not  and  could  not 
solve.    Let  me  give  a  few  examples. 


June  29,   7953 


911 


Before  the  war,  Europe  earned  a  substantial 
portion  of  its  income  from  capital  investments, 
services,  and  other  so-called  ''invisible  transac- 
tions." These  earnings  helped  to  compensate  for 
Europe's  recurring  import  surplus.  On  the  aver- 
age, prewar  Europe  received  a  net  income  from 
invisibles  amounting  to  approximately  11/2  billion 
dollars  per  year.  During  the  war,  much  of  Eu- 
rope's capital  was  destroyed,  stolen,  or  liquidated 
to  support  the  military  effort.  As  a  result,  in- 
visibles ceased  to  provide  Europe  a  net  income  and 
in  1947  represented  a  net  deficit  of  approximately 
500  million  dollars.  Wliile  Europe' s  economic 
position  has  greatly  improved  since  that  time, 
there  has  been  no  opportunity  for  the  Europeans 
to  re-accumulate  the  capital  needed  for  domestic 
and  overseas  investment. 

Next,  let  us  remember  that  several  European 
nations  during  and  after  the  war  lost  large  por- 
tions of  their  overseas  empires  which  had  formerly 
provided  markets  for  European  products  as  well 
as  sources  of  raw  materials.  While  the  independ- 
ence of  these  colonial  areas  will  probably  con- 
tribute, in  the  long  run,  to  the  strength  of  the 
free  world,  one  immediate  effect  was  to  disrupt 
traditional  patterns  of  trade  and  create  additional 
economic  problems  in  Europe. 

Normal  trading  patterns  were  further  disrupted 
by  the  Soviet  seizure  of  Eastern  Europe  which 
formerly  exchanged  large  quantities  of  coal, 
grains,  timber,  and  other  raw  materials  for  West- 
ern Europe's  industrial  products.  All  told,  trade 
between  Eastern  and  Western  Europe  is  now  only 
about  one-third  the  prewar  level.  As  a  result, 
Western  Europe  must  import  many  important 
raw  materials  from  areas  where  higher  prices 
prevail  and  pay  the  large  transportation  costs 
of  carrying  these  goods  across  oceans.  Some  trade 
between  Eastern  and  Western  Europe  continues, 
and  we  recognize  that  the  products  received  from 
the  East  contribute  significantly  to  Western  Eu- 
rope's economic  stability.  Without  this  trade  the 
strain  on  free  Europe's  economy  would  be  se- 
riously aggravated.  Despite  the  importance  of 
this  trade,  our  allies  are  cooperating  with  us  to 
deny  strategic  materials  to  the  Soviet  bloc,  and 
we  must  recognize  that  these  measures  limit  still 
further  the  possibility  of  acquiring  needed  im- 
ports from  that  area. 

Another  obstacle  to  full  economic  recovery  in 
free  Europe  has  been  the  drastic  shift  in  what  we 
call  the  "terms  of  trade."  Since  the  war,  the 
prices  of  the  goods  which  Europe  must  buy  from 
other  areas  have  substantially  outdistanced  the 
prices  of  the  goods  which  Europe  is  able  to  sell. 
The  effect  upon  Europe  is  very  similar  to  the  effect 
upon  an  American  manufacturer  who  finds  that 
the  cost  of  raw  materials  and  labor  have  pyi'a- 
mided  while  the  market  for  his  own  product  re- 
mains the  same. 

Finally,  we  must  remember  that  while  the  Mar- 
shall plan  helped  Europe  to  increase  its  industrial 


production  by  about  50  percent,  it  did  not  auto- 
matically provide  new  markets  for  these  products. 
Today,  Europe  still  must  import  goods  from  many 
parts  of  the  world  but  has  not  been  able  to  find 
adequate  export  markets  with  which  to  pay  for 
these  imports. 

This  problem  has  great  significance  for  Ameri- 
can businessmen,  including  those  in  this  audience. 
Slany  of  you  have  goods  which  you  would  like  to 
sell  to  Europe.  Europe  would  like  to  buy  these 
goods  and  will  probably  need  imports  of  this 
kind  for  many  years  to  come.  There's  just  one 
obstacle  to  what  would  otherwise  be  a  very  satis- 
factory business  relationship.  Unfortunately, 
you  gentlemen  prefer  to  be  paid  for  what  you 
sell.  And  the  Europeans  have  great  difficulty  in 
getting  their  hands  on  the  dollars  needed  to  pay 
you.  As  a  result,  you  lose  business,  the  European 
consumer  goes  without,  the  European  economy 
suffers,  the  European  defense  system  is  limited, 
and  American  security  is  endangered. 

As  I  have  said,  Europe's  economic  problems 
are  not  simple.  They  can  only  be  solved  over  a 
long  period  of  years,  and  the  fundamental  solu- 
tions must  be  found  by  the  Europeans  them- 
selves. However,  Europe's  economic  health  is  so 
important  to  us  that  we  have  a  vital  interest  in 
contributing  to  a  positive  solution.  Let  me  out- 
line some  of  the  policies  which  President  Eisen- 
hower's administration  is  pursuing. 

U.S.  Foreign  Economic  Policies 

First,  the  United  States  is  encouraging  Eu- 
ropean unity  by  every  reasonable  and  practical 
means.  At  tlie  moment,  our  interest  is  focused 
primarily  on  the  treaty  creating  a  European  De- 
fense Community  (Edc)  because  this  plan  offers 
a  practical  method  of  achieving  a  vitally  impor- 
tant military  contribution  from  Western  Ger- 
many within  the  framework  of  an  integrated 
European  defense  system.  But  the  ultimate 
values  of  unity  go  far  beyond  military  defense. 
It  is  hoped  that  the  Edc,  taken  together  with  the 
existing  Coal  and  Steel  Community,  and  other 
efforts  toward  integration,  will  provide  a  basis 
for  the  eventual  political  and  economic  federation 
of  Europe,  thereby  giving  Europe  the  advantages 
of  a  broad  common  market,  investment  area,  and 
productive  system  similar  to  what  we  have  in  the 
United  States. 

Second,  the  Government  is  continuing  direct  as- 
sistance to  certain  countries  in  Europe,  though  at 
a  reduced  level.  We  believe  that  economic  aid 
must  be  held  to  a  minimum,  both  because  it  is 
uneconomical  and  also  because  economic  aid  has 
many  unpleasant  psychological  and  political  con- 
sequences. Nearly  all  of  the  aid  President  Eisen- 
hower has  requested  for  Europe  is  to  be  used  for 
the  purpose  of  building  Europe's  military  de- 
fenses. However,  certain  parts  of  this  assistance 
will  have  the  secondary  value  of  enabling  Europe 


912 


Doparlment  of  State  Bulletin 


to  earn  U.  S.  dollars.  I  refer  primarily  to  the 
off-shore  procurement  program,  which  will  be  dis- 
cussed in  greater  detail  by  another  speaker. 

Third,  we  hope  to  encourage  greater  private 
investment  in  Europe.  The  role  of  the  Govern- 
ment in  stimulating  investment  is  of  course  lim- 
ited, but  we  are  carefully  exploring  prospects  for 
making  Europe  more  attractive  to  American  pri- 
vate investors. 

Fourth,  we  believe  that  our  technical  assistance 
and  capital-development  programs  in  the  under- 
developed areas  of  Asia,  Africa,  and  South  Amer- 
ica, in  addition  to  helping  strengthen  these  areas, 
will  indirectly  benefit  free  Europe  by  expanding 
supplies  of  raw  materials  available  from  non- 
dollar sources. 

These  measures  I  have  mentioned,  if  accom- 
panied by  European  efforts  to  attain  fiscal  sta- 
bility, to  achieve  freer  convertibility  of  currencies, 
and  to  expand  productivity,  may  be  expected  to 
exercise  a  favorable  effect  upon  the  overall 
European  economy.  However,  it  is  unlikely  that 
any  of  these  measures  can  provide  a  complete  and 
permanent  solution  to  one  of  Europe's  most  acute 
and  most  difficult  problems— the  dollar  shortage. 
If  we  want  the  European  people  to  continue  to 
maintain  vigorous  free  institutions,  if  we  want 
Europe  to  be  a  strong  shield  against  Soviet  ag- 
gression, if  we  want  to  sell  goods  to  Europe,  if  we 
want  Europe  to  continue  its  vital  contribution  to 
the  security  of  Asia  and  the  Near  East^we  must 
accept  one  hard,  inescapable  fact — Europe  must 
have  dollars.  Wliether  the  Europeans  sell  us 
goods  for  these  dollars,  earn  dollars  in  third  coun- 
tries, or  receive  dollars  as  gifts,  they  must  obtain 
dollars  in  some  way  if  they  are  to  cooperate  with 
us  effectively  in  the  struggle  for  freedom. 

I  am  not  a  trade  expert,  and  I  cannot  honestly 
tell  you  that  our  international  security  requires 
that  this  or  another  American  tariff  rate  or  other 
trade  restriction  should  be  modified  in  a  particu- 
lar way.  As  you  know,  President  Eisenhower 
recently  called  for  a  comprehensive  study  of 
American  economic  foreign  policies  including 
tariff  and  trade  policies.  This  study  will  take 
account  of  domestic  considerations  as  well  as  the 
problem  of  international  security.  Pending  the 
completion  of  this  study,  it  would  be  inappropri- 
ate for  me  to  attempt  to  make  any  proposals  con- 
cerning the  methods  by  which  the  nations  of 
Europe  can  increase  their  supply  of  dollars  by 
selling  goods  in  the  U.  S.  market.  However,  I 
believe  all  of  us  realize  that  we  are  faced  with  a 
limited  number  of  alternatives.  And  I  think  we 
all  agree  that  if  we  can  find  ways  to  help  the 
Europeans  market  their  products  in  the  United 
States  without  serious  damage  to  American  pro- 
ducers, we  will  be  able  to  establish  a  much  more 
satisfactory  economic  relationship  with  Europe 
than  can  ever  be  established  on  the  basis  of  eco- 
nomic grants. 

June  29,   J  953 


In  speaking  to  you  today,  I  recognize  that  I  have 
raised  a  great  many  more  questions  than  I  have 
answered.  Perhaps  this  is  typical.  Someone, 
I've  forgotten  who,  once  defined  a  diplomat  as 
"a  man  who  can  find  a  problem  for  every  solu- 
tion." However,  I  am  quite  serious  when  I  say 
that  I  believe  our  first  task  is  to  identify  and  rec- 
ognize our  problems  as  they  really  exist,  to  know 
the  facts  we  face,  and  to  understand  the  alterna- 
tives that  we  possess. 

A  great  American  once  said  that  "the  frontiers 
are  neither  east  nor  west,  north  or  south,  but 
wherever  a  man  faces  a  fact." 

Today,  I  believe  that  the  frontiers  of  human 
freedom  do  not  follow  the  long,  barricaded  line 
called  the  Iron  Curtain,  but  rather  are  to  be 
found  in  our  own  minds— in  our  own  willingness 
to  recognize  facts  and  our  determination  to  take 
whatever  action  may  be  required  to  insure  the 
survival  of  the  things  we  believe  in.  This  is  our 
challenge  and  our  strength.  I  shall  always  believe 
that  the  intellectual  and  spiritual  powers  which 
grow  in  the  environment  of  freedom  will  prove 
stronger  than  the  power  of  any  tyranny  that  man 
can  devise. 

Building  Closer  U.S.-Spanish  Relations 

hy  James  Clement  Dunn 
Ambassador  to  Spain  ^ 

The  reputation  of  the  Spanish  people  for  hard 
work  and  perseverance  in  the  face  of  difficulties 
is  well  known.  Since  my  return  to  Spain  I  have 
been  impressed  greatly  by  the  visible  signs  of 
reconstruction  and  economic  progress  which  have 
been  achieved  in  the  face  of  a  series  of  adverse 
developments,  including  civil  strife  followed  by 
the  disruption  of  the  Second  World  War  and  a 
decade  of  recurrent  droughts  with  their  terrible 
impact  on  agriculture  and  electric  power  avail- 
abilities. Spain's  economic  achievements  under 
such  difficult  circumstances  are  a  tribute  to  the 
tenacity  of  purpose  and  to  the  industriousness  of 
the  Spanish  people. 

The  short  time  I  have  been  in  Spain  has  not 
allowed  me  to  gain  an  intimate  knowledge  of 
specific  problems  of  Spanish-American  trade. 
But  I  am  aware  that  such  problems  exist— as  in 
fact  they  do  everywhere — and  that  you  gentlemen 
have  to  deal  with  them  every  day  of  your  lives. 
I  realize  that  what  you  can  accomplish  by  your 
individual  efforts  often  depends  on  factors  not 
entirely  within  your  control.  Of  these,  possibly 
the  most  important  single  factor  is  the  relation- 
ship between  the  Government  of  Spain  and  the 
Government  of  the  United  States. 

All  of  you  are  aware  that  for  more  than  a  year 

'  Translation  of  an  address  made  in  Spanish  before  the 
annual  meeting  of  the  American  Chamber  of  Commerce 
at  Barcelona,  Spain,  on  June  16. 

913 


negotiations  have  been  proceeding  between  our 
two  governments  looking  toward  a  much  closer 
and  more  intimate  relationship  than  lias  ever 
before  existed  between  our  two  countries.  You 
will  understand  that  while  these  negotiations  are 
in  progress,  it  is  not  proper  for  me  to  discuss  them 
in  detail.  But  it  is  entirely  proper  for  me  to  say 
that  they  have  been  conducted  in  the  most  frank 
and  friendly  atmosphere,  in  a  spirit  of  mutual 
respect  and  comprehension,  and  with  a  sincere 
desire  on  both  sides  to  understand  the  motives  and 
ideals  which  guide  us  and  to  reach  agreements 
which  will  contribute  not  only  to  the  best  interests 
of  both  countries  but  to  the  common  defense  of 
Western  Europe  as  well. 

Although  these  negotiations  are  primarily  for 
the  building  of  greater  facilities  for  mutual  de- 
fense, their  successful  conclusion  will,  I  am  con- 
vinced, provide  a  firm  foundation  for  the  develop- 
ment of  future  trade,  for  enlarged  private 
investment,  and  for  the  drawing  together  of  our 
two  peoples  in  an  increasing  measure  of  cultural, 
scientific,  and  commercial  interchange  to  the  bene- 
fit of  both.  Spain  and  the  United  States  already 
have  a  cultural,  historical,  and  traditional  back- 
ground of  mutual  interest  which  inevitably  draws 
them  together. 

In  the  world  today  there  is  one  issue  which 
transcends  all  others.  Our  heritage  of  culture 
and  civilization  faces  the  most  dangerous  spiritual 
and  material  threat  which  history  has  recorded. 
We  all  realize  that  to  resist  this  threat  successfully, 
each  nation  must  make  the  full  contribution  which 
its  strength  and  resources  permit.  The  foremost 
responsibility  of  all  of  us,  therefore,  is  to  insure 
the  survival  of  our  liberty  and  independence. 

U.  S.  Expenditures  for  Defense 

The  recognition  by  the  American  people  of  this 
peril  is  manifest  in  the  rapid  expansion  of  their 
own  military  forces,  in  the  large  sums  being  de- 
voted to  military  research  and  production,  and  in 
the  large  amounts  of  military  assistance  going  to 
like-minded  nations  in  many  parts  of  the  world. 
The  financial  sacrifices  which  the  American  peo- 
ple have  placed  upon  themselves  to  meet  the  dan- 
ger and  to  achieve  this  program  are  reflected  in 
the  fact  that  almost  73  percent  of  all  U.S.  budget- 
ary expenditures  are  for  security  purposes.  The 
strengthening  of  the  free  world's  military  defenses 
has  gone  far  beyond  financial  aspects,  as  evi- 
denced by  the  casualities  of  136,000  of  America's 
sons  in  nolding  the  line  against  aggression  in 
Korea. 

The  situation  I  have  set  forth  explains  why  a 
larger  proportion  of  U.S.  foreign-aid  funds  are 
now  devoted  to  military  assistance  and  why  the 
remainder  is  for  economic  purposes  which  directly 
support  the  defense  effort.  The  actual  admin- 
istration of  these  funds  is  a  matter  of  cooperation 
between  friendly  governments,  of  mutual  accom- 


modation and  decision  based  on  the  exchange  of 
ideas  concerning  the  common  objective  of  defense 
of  our  liberties.  Once  these  mutual  decisions  of  a 
basic  character  are  made,  it  is  the  responsibility 
of  each  government  within  the  area  oi  its  sover- 
eignty to  direct  and  control  their  implementation. 
Although,  as  I  have  said,  U.S.  economic-aid 
funds  are  oriented  toward  the  defense  effort,  it  is 
apparent  that  their  use  will  contribute  to  strength- 
ening the  economy  of  the  nations  receiving  them. 
We  recoOTize  that  a  strong  economy  is  an  integral 
part  of  the  free  world's  effort  to  combat  the  threat 
of  aggression.  Specifically  in  the  case  of  the 
Spanish  economy,  the  United  States  has  demon- 
strated its  interest  during  the  past  year  in  the  com- 
pletion of  allocations  of  the  $62.5  million  credit 
for  economic  development  projects  and  in  the  al- 
location of  two  credits  of  $12  million  each  for  the 
shipment  of  cotton  to  keep  Spain's  spinning  and 
weaving  mills  operating  at  reasonable  levels. 

Buildup  of  Moral  Strength  Vital 

Considerations  of  a  military  and  economic  char- 
acter are  of  great  importance,  but  above  all  we 
must  build  the  moral  strength  which  stems  from 
high  ideals  and  the  traditions  of  honesty  and  clear 
purpose. 

"VVhen  governments  assume  the  responsibilities 
that  are  inherent  in  the  concept  of  mutual  trust, 
mutual  aid,  mutual  defense — then  the  peoples  of 
such  nations  assume  like  responsibilities.  It  be- 
comes the  duty  of  all  of  us  to  direct  our  energies 
to  the  mutual  objective;  to  guard  ourselves  against 
the  kind  of  pettiness  that  separates  one  ally  from 
another — one  good  friend  from  another  good 
friend.  Our  Western  culture  is  a  synthesis  of 
various  national  elements  which  contribute,  like 
those  of  Spain,  to  its  greatness.  Our  immediate 
objective  in  this  difficult  time  is  to  preserve  this 
Western  culture  and  the  principles  upon  which  it 
is  based.  Our  enemies  are  constantly  attempting 
to  divide  and  destroy  the  nations  of  the  West  by 
exploiting  the  minor  differences  which  arise  when 
independent,  sovereign  nations  work  together. 
We  must  not  allow  them  to  succeed.  The  survival 
of  the  free  nations  depends  upon  their  ability  to 
compose  their  differences  and  to  work  together. 

Personally,  I  believe  that  we  can  look  forward 
with  confidence  to  the  future.  The  free  nations 
possess  not  only  the  material  resources  but  the  spir- 
itual and  moral  values  essential  to  defend  them- 
selves should  the  necessity  arise.  Americans,  like 
Spaniards,  believe  that  man  is  a  creature  of  God 
and  that  his  destiny  can  only  be  realized  through 
moral  law.  I  am  convinced  that  this  idealism, 
this  devotion  to  God  and  country  provides  a  sound 
basis  for  a  mutual  collaboration  between  our  two 
countries  which  will  express  our  common  deter- 
mination to  resist  the  forces  of  evil  and  lead  us  to 
a  common  destiny  of  peace,  progress,  and  pros- 
perity. 


914 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Achieving  a  Healtfiy  World  Economy 

hy  Winthrop  W.  Aldrich 
Ambassador  to  Cheat  Britain'^ 


We  stand  today  at  a  crossroads  in  the  develop- 
ment of  the  world  economy.  In  the  closing  years 
of  the  last  war,  eflforts  were  made  to  create  the 
elements  of  a  global  economic  system  which  would 
provide  the  much  needed  increased  production  and 
improved  standards  of  living  for  peoples  through- 
out the  world.  Attainment  of  these  objectives 
was  seen  to  be  dependent  on  encouragement  of  the 
international  flow  of  goods  and  services,  capital, 
and  money.  There  was  to  be  a  code  of  interna- 
tional rules  and  a  new  worldwide  institution  in 
each  of  three  fields:  The  International  Bank  to 
foster  investment  and  development;  the  Interna- 
tional Monetary  Fund  to  foster  orderly  foreign- 
exchange  patterns  and  to  help  finance  short-term 
fluctuations,  and  the  International  Trade  Organ- 
ization to  foster  an  expanding  world  trade  with- 
out discrimination.  The  latter  institution  did  not 
come  into  being,  but  substantial  progress  toward 
some  of  its  objectives  was  made  through  the  Gen- 
eral Agreement  on  Tariffs  and  Trade. 

These  concepts  and  institutions  have  been  of 
some  value.  The  World  Bank  in  particular,  under 
prudent  and  imaginative  management  has  come  to 
play  an  increasingly  constructive  role.  But  the 
dislocations  in  the  world  economy,  some  of  long 
standing,  all  vastly  intensified  by  the  war  itself 
and  further  aggravated  by  the  cleavage  of  East 
and  West  and  the  needs  of  Western  rearmament, 
proved  too  severe  to  be  dealt  with  by  the  concepts 
of  Bretton  Woods  alone. 

Over  the  last  8  years,  the  foundations  of  the 
free-world's  economy  have  been  maintained  with 
the  help  of  a  series  of  temporary  measures,  in- 
cluding Unrra,  the  Marshall  plan,  the  Mutual  Se- 
curity Program,  the  European  Payments  Union, 
and  others.  There  has  been  an  amazing  recovery 
in  production  in  war-torn  Europe  and  Japan.    In 

'  Excerpts  from  an  address  made  at  the  Harvard  Uni- 
versity Graduate  School  of  Business  Administration,  Cam- 
bridge, Mass.,  on  June  12. 


most  of  Europe,  internal  finances  have  achieved 
at  least  a  semblance  of  order.  The  free  world 
has  survived  the  shock  of  the  post-Korean  infla- 
tion and  some  subsequent  downturn.  The  immense 
dollar  chasm  of  the  immediate  postwar  years  has 
been  greatly  narrowed. 

Nonetheless,  the  problem  of  dollar  shortages 
throughout  the  free  world,  and  especially  in  Eu- 
rope, remains  a  critical  one.  It  is  made  manage- 
able today  only  by  crude  and  wasteful  devices: 
severe  restrictions  abroad  against  dollar  imports, 
complex  and  cumbersome  exchange  controls,  and 
the  abnormal  contributions  of  American  aid  and 
foreign  military  expenditures.  While  such  de- 
vices have  kept  crises  within  bounds  and  prevented 
utter  collapse,  they  cannot  be  reconciled  with  the 
healthy  and  durable  foundation  for  an  expanding 
world  economy  which  both  we  and  our  friends 
abroad  require  for  our  mutual  security  and 
prosperity. 

U.S.-U.K.  Washington  Talks 

This  fact  is  recognized  by  thoughtful  and  far- 
seeing  men  of  affairs  in  both  public  and  private 
life  the  world  over.  It  was  this  fact  which  led 
to  the  Commonwealth  Conference  in  London  of 
last  December.  Early  last  March,  shortly  after 
I  took  office  as  American  Ambassador,  I  returned 
to  Washington  to  attend  the  meetings  at  which 
British  Foreign  Secretary  Eden  and  Chancellor 
of  the  Exchequer  Butler  presented  to  our  new 
administration  the  results  of  the  Commonwealth 
Conference  and  besought  our  cooperation  in  work- 
ing out  jointly  policies  and  measures  which  would 
provide  a  sounder  foundation  for  international 
trade,  finance,  and  economic  development.^  The 
Washington  talks  would  have  been  noteworthy 
alone  for  the  personal  contacts  then  established 
between  the  responsible  leaders  of  our  two  Gov- 
ernments, for  the  pound  sterling  and  the  American 

•  BuiXKTiN  of  Mar.  16, 1953,  p.  395. 


June  29,   ]953 


915 


dollar  are  the  two  great  trading  currencies  of  the 
free  world.  But  the  talks  produced  more  than 
these  indispensable  personal  contacts :  they  elicited 
a  free  and  genuine  meeting  of  minds  on  "the  essen- 
tial elements  of  a  workable  and  productive  eco- 
nomic system  within  the  free  world."  These 
elements  were  defined  as  (a)  sound  internal  eco- 
nomic policies  by  debtor  and  creditor  countries 
alike;  (b)  freer  trade  and  currencies;  (c)  creation 
of  conditions  for  the  sound  development  of  free- 
world  resources;  (d)  constructive  use  of  inter- 
national institutions. 

Under  the  heading  "freer  trade  and  currencies" 
it  was  agreed  that : 

On  the  financial  side  the  objective  should  be  the  eventual 
convertibility  of  sterling  and  other  currencies  and  the 
gradual  removal  of  restrictions  on  payments.  On  the 
trade  side  the  objective  should  be  to  bring  about  the 
relaxation  of  trade  restrictions  and  discriminations  in  a 
way  which,  in  the  words  of  President  Eisenhower's  State 
of  the  Union  Message,  "will  recognize  the  importance  of 
profitable  and  equitable  world  trade."  It  Is  In  the  interest 
of  the  United  States  to  take  such  measures  as  are  exempli- 
fied in  the  President's  message  in  order  that  the  members 
of  the  free  world  may  the  better  pay  their  way  by  their 
own  efforts. 

Our  Government  stated  its  intention  to  under- 
take over  the  ensuing  months  an  intensive  review 
of  these  subjects,  to  arrive  at  a  sound  judgment  on 
specific  courses  of  action.  Since  that  time,  Presi- 
dent Eisenhower  has  initiated  a  series  of  steps  to 
move  forward  on  this  front.  He  has  assigned 
responsibility  within  the  administration  to  follow 
up  the  economic  and  financial  talks  held  with  the 
United  Kingdom,  with  the  Organization  for  Euro- 
pean Economic  Cooperation  in  Paris,  and  with 
the  representatives  of  other  European  govern- 
ments. He  has  requested  the  extension  without 
change  for  a  year  of  the  Reciprocal  Trade  Agree- 
ments Act,  pending  the  thorough  reexamination 
of  our  whole  foreign  economic  policy.  He  has 
requested  the  passage  during  the  current  session 
of  Congress  of  a  measure  to  simplify  customs  ad- 
ministration. He  has  supported  a  change  in  the 
drastic  method  of  controlling  imports  of  dairy 
products  and  other  agricultural  commodities  now 
required  by  section  104  of  the  Defense  Production 
Act.  Most  important,  he  has  recommended  the 
establishment  by  the  Congress  of  a  Commission, 
to  include  members  of  both  Houses  of  Congress 
and  members  appointed  by  the  President,  to  make 
a  review  of  our  whole  foreign  economic  policy  as 
the  basis  for  action  during  the  1954  congressional 
session. 

This  series  of  steps  reflects  the  considered  de- 
termination of  the  administration  to  develop  a 
foreign  economic  policy  which  is,  in  the  President's 
words  "consonant  with  our  position  as  the  world's 
greatest  creditor  nation."  This  is  a  complex  area 
which  touches  directly  the  interests  of  many  and 
varied  segments  of  our  economic  life.  Awareness 
of  this  closeness  of  interest  is  reflected  in  discussion 


and  debate  in  business,  farm,  and  labor  circles  over 
the  entire  nation.  I  am  greatly  encouraged  to 
see  a  growing  number  of  key  organizations  in  the 
country's  economic  life  emerging  from  this  proc- 
ess of  debate  with  a  recognition  of  the  changed 
position  of  the  United  States  in  the  world  and 
strong  endorsement  of  trade  and  investment  pol- 
icies a  ppropriate  to  our  creditor  st  atus.  The  views 
of  these  organizations  will  greatly  assist  the  new 
Commission  in  its  work. 

In  developing  its  recommendations  on  specific 
measures,  the  Commission  will  have  to  find  ways 
and  means  of  advancing  the  basic  national  interest 
by  striving  for  a  healthy  world  economy  with  due 
consideration  for  the  needs  of  our  domestic  econ- 
omy. I  cannot  anticipate  what  detailed  proposals 
will  be  evolved,  but  I  do  know  what  their  funda- 
mental direction  must  be.  That  is  an  increased 
readiness  to  admit  imports  in  open  competition 
in  our  own  markets  so  that  our  friends  abroad  can 
earn  the  means  to  buy  what  they  want  and  desper- 
ately need  from  us  and  what  it  is  in  our  interest 
to  sell  them.  To  achieve  this  is  essential  to  our 
own  economic  interest ;  it  is  also  vital  to  our  polit- 
ical and  security  interests  in  the  free  world. 

It  is  essential  that  our  policy  of  accepting  in- 
creasing imports  be  a  steady  and  a  continuing 
policy,  and  that  we  make  this  clear  to  producers 
and  suppliers  in  other  countries.  In  a  recent 
broadcast  to  the  nation.  President  Eisenhower 
stressed  the  need  for  a  "healthy  two-way  trade." 
A  healthy  trade  cannot  be  built  in  an  atmosphere 
of  uncertainty.  One  of  the  things  which  gives 
businessmen  abroad  the  most  concern  is  the  fear 
that  if  they  are  successful  in  building  up  a  good 
business  in  our  country,  it  will  suddenly  be  limited 
or  cut  off  by  governmental  action.  We  must  find 
ways  of  removing  the  grounds  for  this  fear. 

'Buy  American"  Policy  Arcliaic 

In  my  opinion  there  is  one  element  in  our  policy 
that  is  clearly  archaic.  I  am  sure  that  it  adds 
to  the  cost  of  our  Government.  It  certainly  de- 
creases the  opportunities  for  other  countries  to 
earn  their  way.  It  obviously  runs  counter  to  the 
principle  of  fair  business  competition.  It  is  regu- 
larly cited  abroad  as  one  more  indication  that  the 
United  States  is  not  prepared  to  act  as  a  good 
creditor.  I  am  convinced  that  it  is  totally  un- 
necessary as  a  support  to  American  industry. 

This  is  the  "Buy  American"  legislation,  under 
which,  as  a  Government,  we  buy  goods  from 
abroad  in  only  the  most  exceptional  cases.  Why 
should  we  not  be  sensible  and  abandon  this  ob- 
solete policy  ?  Unless  there  is  bona  fide  necessity 
or  other  clearly  demonstrable  national  interest 
considerations  to  the  contrary,  let  us  make  our 
public  purchases  wherever  goods  of  comparable 
quality  can  be  found  on  competitive  and  advan- 
tageous terms.  This  would  both  save  money  for 
our  taxpayers  and  promote  world  balance  by  re- 


916 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


moving  one  more  obstacle  to  competitive  business 
opportunities  for  our  friends. 

I  stress  American  trade  policy  not  as  the  sole, 
but  as  one  indispensable  element  in  a  constructive 
total  foreign  economic  policy.  There  are  other 
essential  elements :  the  promotion  of  private  in- 
vestment, expanded  tourism,  a  sound  strategic 
stockpiling  policy,  and  the  like.  Nor  can  a  healthy 
world  economy  be  built  by  the  United  States 
alone.  We  can  only  remove  obstacles  to  the  ef- 
forts of  others  to  earn  their  way  in  the  world; 
the}'  must  produce  the  right  goods  and  services 
at  the  right  prices  and  at  the  right  time,  and  they 
must  find  the  energy  and  drive  to  sell  them.  In- 
ternational financial  arrangements  must  be  de- 
signed to  facilitate  the  flow  of  goods  and  services, 
but  no  financial  arrangements  can  substitute  for 
a  pattern  of  balanced  physical  trade.  It  will  take 
unremitting  effort  and  close  cooperation  through- 
out the  free  world  to  create  such  a  pattern. 

I  think  it  is  right  that  time  should  be  taken 
for  the  most  thoroughgoing  canvass  of  all  aspects 
of  these  policies  and  their  implications.  But  the 
world  does  not  stand  still.  Failure  to  move  reso- 
lutely forward  can  easily  result  in  slipping  back- 
^^'arcl.  The  President's  target  for  decisive  for- 
ward action  is  the  congressional  session  which  be- 
gins next  January.  In  my  judgment,  that  is  none 
too  soon. 

To  achieve  a  healthy  world  economy  will  re- 
quire some  adjustments  at  home,  as  well  as 
abroad.  But  the  stakes  are  very  high.  Failure 
to  find  durable  solutions  would  mean  at  the  best 
a  continued  patchwork  of  unpalatable  stopgap 
remedies  and,  at  the  worst,  and  far  more  likely,  a 
shrinkage  of  world  trade  which  would  undermine 
our  own  prosperity  and  threaten  disaster  to  our 
allies  abroad.  The  United  States  has  learned  by 
painful  experience  that  it  cannot  afford  political 
or  military  isolation ;  we  are  also  learning  that  we 
cannot  afford  economic  isolation. 


Liberia  Withdraws  From  GATT 

Press  release  310  dated  June  9 

The  U.S.  Government  has  been  informed  by  the 
United  Nations  at  New  York  that  the  Government 
of  Liberia  has  notified  the  Secretary-General  of 
the  United  Nations  of  its  intention  to  withdraw 
from  the  General  Agreement  on  Tariffs  and  Trade 
(Gatt)  ,  effective  June  13, 1953.  Under  the  terms 
of  the  Protocol  of  Provisional  Application  of  the 
General  Agreement,  any  contracting  party  may 
withdraw  on  60  days'  written  notice  to  the  Sec- 
retary-General of  the  United  Nations. 

The  withdrawal  of  Liberia  from  the  General 
Agreement  will  not  result  in  any  alteration  in  U.S. 
duties.  The  only  concessions  which  the  LTnited 
States  made  to  Liberia  in  the  General  Agreement 
were  bindings  of  the  duty-free  statusof  latex  or 
crude  India  rubber   (not  including  jelutong  or 


pontianak)  (par.  1697)  ;  palm  oil  (par.  1732)  ;  and 
palmyra,  piassava,  and  palm-leaf  fibers,  not  else- 
where specified  (par.  168-1).  All  these  items  were 
also  bound  duty-free  in  Gatt  to  the  United  King- 
dom, and  this  status  continues. 

Import  Quota  Imposed 
on  Slielied  Filberts 

Background  Information 

White  House  press  release  dated  June  10 

The  President  on  June  10  issued  a  proclamation 
placing  a  limitation  on  the  importation  of  shelled 
filberts  during  the  1952-53  crop  year. 

The  proclamation,  which  puts  into  effect  the 
findings  and  recommendations  of  the  U.S.  Tariff 
Commission,  was  found  necessary  under  section 
22  of  the  Agricultural  Adjustment  Act  in  order 
to  keep  the  level  of  imports  consistent  with  the 
Department  of  Agriculture's  filbert  marketing 
agreement  and  order. 

The  proclamation  will  limit  to  4,500,000  pounds 
the  total  quantity  of  shelled  filberts  that  may  be 
imported  for  consumption  or  withdrawn  from 
warehouses  where  stored  as  a  result  of  importa- 
tion, during  the  period  October  1,  1952  to 
September  30, 1953. 

The  U.S.  filbert  industry  had  accumulated  ex- 
cessive inventories  during  the  2  previous  marketing 
years,  while  a  record  filbert  crop  was  harvested  by 
growers  last  fall.  Under  provisions  of  the  filbert 
marketing  agreement  and  order,  a  substantial  por- 
tion of  the  crop  had  to  be  shelled.  As  a  result, 
U.S.  production  of  filbert  kernels  during  the  1952- 
53  season  reached  an  alltime  high  of  3,300,000 
pounds.  This  production  has  been  in  competition 
with  lower-priced  imports,  resulting  in  a  return 
to  U.S.  filbert  growers  of  only  55  percent  of  parity 
for  the  1952  crop.  The  President  felt,  therefore, 
that  the  quota  restriction  was  necessary  to  fulfill 
the  objectives  of  the  filbert  marketing  agreement 
and  order  under  section  22. 

The  Tariff"  Commission,  which  instituted  its  in- 
vestigation of  the  filbert  marketing  situation  on 
April  13,  1952,  will  continue  its  studies  and  will 
report  its  fbidings  from  time  to  time  to  the 
President. 


Proclamation  3020  > 

1.  Whereas,  pursuant  to  section  22  of  the  Agricultural 
Adjustment  Act,  as  added  by  section  31  of  the  act  of 
August  24,  193.5,  49  Stat.  773,  reenacted  by  section  1  of 
the  act  of  June  3,  11(37,  50  Stat.  24G,  and  amended  by  sec- 
tion 3  of  the  act  of  July  3,  194S,  62  Stat.  1248,  and  section 
3  of  the  act  of  June  28,  19.50,  64  Stat.  261  (7  U.  S.  C.  624), 
the  President  caused  the  United  States  Tariff  Commission 
to  make  an  investigation  to  determine  whether  almonds, 
filberts,  walnuts,  Brazil  nuts,  or  cashews  are  being  or  are 
practically  certain  to  be  imported  into  the  United  States 
under  such  conditions  and  in  such  quantities  as  to  render 

^  IS  Fed.  Reg.  3453. 


iune  29,   1953 


917 


or  tend  to  render  ineffective,  or  materially  interfere  with, 
certain  programs  or  operations  undertaken  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  Agriculture  with  respect  to  almonds,  pecans,  fil- 
berts, or  walnuts,  or  to  reduce  substantially  the  amount 
of  any  product  processed  in  the  United  States  from  al- 
monds, pecans,  filberts,  or  walnuts  with  respect  to  which 
any  such  program  or  operation  is  being  undertaken  ;  and 

2.  Whkreas  the  said  Commission  instituted  such  in- 
vestigation on  April  13,  1950,  and  in  the  course  of  such 
investigation  has  from  time  to  time  reported  to  the  Presi- 
dent regarding  the  need  for  the  imposition  of  restrictions 
under  the  said  section  22  in  order  to  prevent  imports  of 
tree  nuts  from  rendering  ineffective,  or  materially  inter- 
fering with,  tree-nut  programs  of  the  Department  of  Ag- 
riculture; and 

3.  Whereas  the  said  Commission  reported  to  the  Presi- 
dent on  September  25,  1952,  regarding  the  need  for  action 
under  the  said  section  22  in  order  to  protect  tree-nut 
programs  of  the  Department  of  Agriculture  for  the  1952-53 
crop  year,  and  the  President,  on  the  basis  of  such  report 
and  recommendations  made  by  the  said  Commission  in 
connection  therewith,  issued  a  proclamation  on  Septem- 
ber 27,  1952  (Proclamation  2991 ;  17  F.  R.  8645),  carrying 
out  in  part  the  said  recommendations ;  and 

4.  Whereas,  on  the  basis  of  the  said  report  of  Septem- 
ber 25,  1952,  and  the  investigation  covered  thereby,  I 
find  that  shelled  filberts  (whether  or  not  blanched)  are 
practically  certain  to  be  imported  during  the  remainder 
of  the  12-month  period  ending  September  30,  1953,  in  such 
quantity  and  under  such  conditions  as  to  render  or  tend 
to  render  ineffective,  or  materially  interfere  with,  the 
program  undertaken  by  the  Department  of  Agriculture 
with  respect  to  filberts  pursuant  to  the  Agricultural  Mar- 
keting Agreement  Act  of  1937,  as  amended  ;  and 

5.  Whereas  I  find  and  declare  that  the  Imposition  of  the 
quantitative  limitation  hereinafter  proclaimed  is  shown  by 
the  investigation  of  the  said  Commission  to  be  necessary 
in  order  that  the  entry  of  Imported  shelled  filberts 
(whether  or  not  blanched)  will  not  render  or  tend  to 
render  ineffective,  or  materially  interfere  with,  the  said 
program  undertaken  by  the  Department  of  Agriculture 
with  respect  to  filberts : 

Now,  THEREFORE,  I,  Dwight  D.  Eisenhower,  President  of 
the  United  States  of  America,  acting  under  and  by  virtue 
of  the  authority  vested  in  me  by  the  said  section  22  of  the 
Agricultural  Adjustment  Act,  as  amended,  do  hereby 
proclaim  that  no  shelled  filberts  (whether  or  not  blanched) 
shall  be  permitted  to  be  entered,  or  withdrawn  from  ware- 
house, for  consumption  hereafter  and  prior  to  October  1, 
1953,  which  would  permit  the  total  quantity  of  such  filberts 
entered,  or  withdrawn  from  warehouse,  for  consumption 
during  the  period  October  1,  1952  to  September  30,  1953, 
both  dates  inclusive,  to  exceed  4,500,000  pounds,  which 
permissible  total  quantity  I  hereby  find  and  declare  to 
he  prot)ortionately  not  less  than  50  per  centum  of  the  aver- 
age annual  total  quantity  of  shelled  filberts  which  were 
entered,  or  withdrawn  from  warehouse,  for  consumption 
during  the  representative  period  hereinafter  mentioned. 

I  hereby  determine  that  the  period  October  1,  1949 
through  September  30,  1951  Is  a  representative  period  for 
the  purpose  of  the  first  proviso  to  section  22  (b)  of  the 
Agricultural  Adjustment  Act,  as  amended. 

I.N  WITNESS  WHEREOF,  I  have  hereunto  set  my  hand  and 
caused  the  seal  of  the  United  States  of  America  to  be 
affixed. 

Done  at  the  city  of  Washington  this  10th  day  of  .Tune 
in  the  year  of  our  Lord  nineteen  hundred  and 

[seal]     fifty-three,    and    of    the    independence    of   the 

United  States  of  America  the  one  hundred  and 

seventy-seventh. 


/^  C*J>-7- Z.^^VC<-iC<—  A<^<j^^ 


By  the  President : 

John  Foster  Dulles, 

Secretary  of  State. 


New  Import  Quotas  Placed 

on  Certain  Dairy  Products  and  Oils 

Background  Information 

White  House  press  release  dated  June  8 

Tlie  President  on  June  8  issued  a  proclamation 
putting  into  effect  tlie  findings  and  recommenda- 
tions of  the  U.S.  Tariff  Commission  under  section 
22  of  the  Agricultural  Adjustment  Act  as  amended, 
with  respect  to  certain  dairy  products,  flaxseed 
and  linseed  oil,  and  peanuts  and  peanut  oil. 

In  the  past,  regulation  of  imports  of  these  cer- 
tain dairy  and  other  farm  products  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  Agriculture  has  been  specified  under 
section  104  of  the  Defense  Production  Act,  which 
expires  on  June  30  unless  further  extended  by 
legislation. 

The  President's  action  places  the  Department 
of  Agriculture's  crop-control  and  price-support 
programs  for  these  products  in  the  same  status  as 
the  Department's  crop-control  and  price-support 
programs  for  other  agricultural  products. 

These  limitations  on  imports  are  found  to  be 
necessary  to  protect  the  U.S.  Department  of 
Agriculture's  crop-control  and  domestic  price- 
support  programs  for  these  products  from  being 
materially  interfered  with  by  excessive  imports 
from  foreign  countries. 

Under  this  new  arrangement  the  Department's 
crop-control  programs  for  these  products  are 
placed  on  a  more  consistent  basis  and  they  can  be 
patterned  to  meet  the  new  crop  conditions  as  they 
arise.  Also  under  section  22  of  the  Agricultural 
Adjustment  Act,  the  Government,  when  necessary, 
can  adjust  the  quotas  or  fees  on  imports  to  be  no 
greater  than  are  required  to  protect  adequately  the 
Department's  domestic  crop-control  and  price- 
support  programs  from  being  materially  inter- 
fered with  by  excessive  imports.  This  new 
arrangement  is  less  arbitrary  and  makes  these 
Government  programs  conform  more  with  the  re- 
quirements of  the  Government's  foreign  trade  and 
economic  policy  and  with  the  reciprocal  trade  i 
agreements  to  which  the  United  States  is  a  party. 

If  in  the  future  these  restrictions  should  prove 
to  be  either  excessive  or  inadequate,  the  fees  and 
quotas  on  imports  may  be  adjusted  under  section 
22  to  meet  the  situation  by  action  of  the  President 
upon  recommendation  of  the  Tariff  Commission. 

The  new  quotas  and  fees  will  become  effective 
July  1,  1953,  when  section  104  of  the  Defense 
Production  Act  expires,  unless  it  is  renewed  by 
further  legislation. 

In  addition  to  the  commodities  listed  in  the  i 
President's  Proclamation,  tlie  Tariff  Commission's 
investigation  covered  imports  of  tung  nuts  and 
tung  oil.  Imports  of  these  products  are  currently 
restricted  by  direction  of  the  Secretary  of  Agri- 
culture under  section  104  of  the  Defense  Produc- 
tion Act.     The  Tariff  Commission,  however,  re- 


918 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Article  ^^^'^  ^  Quantity 

Butter 707,000  pounds 

Dried  whole  milk 7,000  pounds 

Dried  buttermilk 496,000  pounds 

Dried  cream 500  pounds 

Dried  skimmed  milk 1 ,807,000  pounds 

Malted  milk,  and  compounds  or  mixtures  of  or  substitutes  for  milk  or  cream.    .    .  6,000  pounds  (aggregate  quantity) 

List  II 
Article  Quantity 

Cheddar  cheese,  and  cheese  and  substitutes  for  cheese  containing,  or  processed  2,780,100  pounds  (aggregate  quantity) 
from,  Cheddar  cheese. 

Edam  and  Gouda  cheese 4,600,200  pounds  (aggregate  quantity) 

Bluemold  (except  Stilton)  cheese,  and  cheese  and  substitutes  for  cheese  contain-  4,167,000  pounds  (aggregate  quantity) 

ing,  or  processed  from,  bluemold  cheese. 

Italian-type  cheeses,  made  from  cow's  milk,  in  original  loaves  (Romano  made  9,200,100  pounds  (aggregate  quantity) 

from  cow's  milk,  Reggiano,  Parmesano,  Provoloni,  Provolette,  and  Sbrinz). 

Peanuts,  whether  shelled,  not  shelled,  blanched,  salted,  prepared,  or  preserved  1,709,000  pounds  (aggregate  quantity): 
(including  roasted  peanuts,  but  not  including  peanut  butter).  Provided,   That   peanuts   in  the   shell 

shall  be  charged  against  this  quota  on 
the  basis  of  75  pounds  for  each  100 
pounds  of  peanuts  in  the  shell 


Article 


List  III 


Peanut  oil. 


Flaxseed  (except  flaxseed  approved  for  planting  pursuant  to  the  Federal  Seed 

Act) 
Linseed  oil,  and  combinations  and  mixtures  in  chief  value  of  such  oil 


Fee 

25%  ad  valorem  on  peanut  oil  entered 
or    withdrawn    from    warehouse,    for 
consumption    during    any    12-month 
period  f)eginning  July  1  in  excess  fo 
80,000,000  pounds 

50%  ad  valorem 

60%  ad  valorem 


ported  that  it  did  not  find  that  imports  of  tung 
nuts  and  tung  oil  would,  if  unrestricted  by  meas- 
ures taken  under  section  104  or  section  22,  be 
practically  certain  to  interfere  with  the  program 
of  the  Department  of  Agriculture  with  respect  to 
the  domestic  production  of  tung  nuts.  The  Com- 
mission therefore  did  not  recommend  that  any 
restriction  be  imposed  on  imports  of  these  prod- 
ucts. 

The  President  has  authorized  the  Tariff  Com- 
mission to  release  the  report  made  to  him  on  the 
investigation  of  imports  subject  to  restriction 
under  section  104  of  the  Defense  Production  Act.^ 

Proclamation  3019" 

Whereas,  pursuant  to  section  22  of  the  Agricultural 
Adjustment  Act,  as  added  by  section  31  of  the  act  of 
August  24,  1935,  49  Stat.  773,  reenacted  by  section  1  of 
the  act  of  June  3,  1937,  50  Stat.  246,  and  as  amended  by 
section  3  of  the  act  of  July  3,  1948,  62  Stat.  1248,  section 
3  of  the  act  of  June  28,  1950,  64  Stat.  261,  and  section 
8  (b)  of  the  act  of  June  16,  1951,  Public  Law  50,  82d 
Congress  (7  U.  S.  C.  624),  the  Secretary  of  Agriculture 
advised  me  that  he  had  reason  to  believe  that  upon  the 
expiration  of  section  104  of  the  Defense  Production  Act 
of  1050,  as  amended,  the  products  included  in  the  lists 
appended  to  and  made  a  part  of  this  proclamation  are 
practically  certain  to  be  imported  into  the  United  States 
under  such  conditions  and  in  such  quantities  as  to  render 
or  tend  to  render  ineffective,  or  materially  interfere  with, 
programs  undertaken  by  the  Department  of  Agriculture 
with  respect  to  certain  of  such  articles  or  with  respect  to 
products  from  which  certain  of  such  articles  are  processed, 
or  to  reduce  substantially  the  amount  of  one  or  more  of 

^  Copies  of  the  Commission's  report  may  be  obtained 
bv  addressing  requests  to  the  U.S.  Tariff  Commission, 
Sth  and  E  Sts.,  N.W.,  Washington  25,  D.  C. 

'  18  Fed.  Reg.  3361. 


such  articles  processed  in  the  United  States  from  agri- 
cultural commodities  with  respect  to  which  a  program 
of  the  Department  of  Agriculture  is  being  undertaken; 

Whereas,  having  agreed  with  the  Secretary  of  Agri- 
culture's reason  for  such  belief,  I  caused  the  United 
States  Tariff  Commission  to  make  an  investigation  under 
the  said  section  22  with  respect  to  the  said  articles; 

Whereas,  the  said  Tariff  Commission  has  made  such  an 
investigation  and  has  reported  to  me  its  findings  and 
recommendations  made  in  connection  therewith ; 

Whereas,  on  the  basis  of  the  said  investigation  and 
report  of  the  Tariff  Commission,  I  find  that  in  the  event 
section  104  of  the  Defense  Production  Act  of  1950,  as 
amended,  expires  under  its  present  terms,  the  articles  in- 
cluded in  the  lists  appended  to  and  made  a  part  of  this 
proclamation  are  practically  certain  to  be  imported  into 
the  United  States  under  such  conditions  and  in  such 
quantities  as  to  render  or  tend  to  render  inetfective,  or 
materially  interfere  with,  programs  or  operations  under- 
taken by  the  Department  of  Agriculture  or  agencies  op- 
erating under  its  direction,  pursuant  to  sections  101,  201, 
301,  and  401  of  the  Agricultural  Act  of  1949,  as  amended, 
and  Part  VI  of  Title  III  of  the  Agricultural  Adjustment 
Act  of  1938,  as  amended,  with  respect  to  certain  of  such 
articles  or  with  respect  to  products  from  which  certain 
of  such  articles  are  processed,  or  to  reduce  substantially 
the  amount  of  certain  of  such  articles  processed  in  the 
United  States  from  agricultural  commodities  with  respect 
to  which  the  said  programs  or  operations  of  the  United 
States  Department  of  Agriculture  are  being  undertaken ; 
and 

WHEREAS  I  find  and  declare  that  in  the  event  section  104 
of  the  Defense  Pi-oduction  Act  of  1950,  as  amended,  expires 
under  its  present  terms,  the  imposition  of  the  fees  and 
quantitative  limitations  hereinafter  proclaimed  is  shown 
by  such  investigation  of  the  Tariff  Commission  to  be  neces- 
sary in  order  that  the  entry,  or  withdrawal  from  ware- 
house, for  consumption  of  such  articles  will  not  render  or 
tend  to  render  ineffective,  or  materially  interfere  with,  the 
said  programs  or  operations,  or  reduce  substantially  the 
amount  of  products  processed  in  the  United  States  from 
agricultural  commodities  with  respect  to  which  certain 
of  the  said  programs  or  operations  are  being  undertaken : 


June  29,  1953 


919 


Now,  THEBEFORE,  I,  DwiGHT  D.  EisENHOwEB,  President 
of  tlie  United  States  of  America,  acting  under  and  by  vir- 
tue of  the  aiitliority  vested  in  me  by  the  said  section  22  of 
the  Aericnltural  Adjustment  Act,  as  amended,  do  hereby 
proclaim  tliat  on  and  after  July  1,  19.53,  articles  included 
in  the  lists  apjiended  to  and  hereby  made  a  part  of  this 
proclamation  shall  he  subject  to  quantitative  limitations 
and  fees,  as  follows : 

1.  Articles  included  in  Lists  I  and  II  (except  peanuts) 
shall  be  permitted  to  be  entered  only  by  or  for  the  account 
of  a  person  or  firm  to  whom  a  license  has  been  issued  by 
or  under  the  authority  of  the  Secretary  of  Asrieulture.  and 
only  in  accordance  with  the  terms  of  such  license.  Such 
licenses  shall  be  issued  under  regulations  of  the  Secretary 
of  Agriculture  which  he  determines  will,  to  the  fullest 
extent  practicable,  result  in  (1)  the  equitable  distribution 
of  the  respective  quotas  for  such  articles  among  importers 
or  users  and  (2)  the  allocation  of  shares  of  the  respective 
quotas  for  such  articles  among  supplying  countries,  based 
upon  the  proportion  supplied  by  such  countries  during 
previous  representative  periods,  taking  due  account  of  any 
special  factors  which  may  have  affected  or  may  be  af- 
fecting the  trade  in  the  articles  concerned.  No  licenses 
shall  be  issued  which  will  permit  any  such  articles  to  be 
entered  during  any  12-month  period  beginning  July  1  in 
excess  of  the  respective  quantities  specified  for  such  arti- 
cles in  Lists  I  and  II  and,  in  the  case  of  articles  included 
in  List  II,  during  the  first  4  months  and  the  first  8  months 
of  any  such  12-month  period  in  excess  of  one-third  and 
two-thirds,  respectively,  of  such  specified  quantities. 

2.  No  peanuts  included  in  List  II  shall  be  entered  dur- 
ing any  12-n]onth  period  beginning  July  1  in  excess  of  the 
quantity  specified  for  such  peanuts  in  the  said  List  II. 

3.  Articles  included  in  List  III  shall,  when  entered,  be 
subject  to  the  fees  respectively  specified  therefor  in  the 
said  List  III. 

I  hereby  determine  that  the  periods  specified  in  tlie  said 
report  of  the  Tariff  Oomniission  for  the  purpose  of  the  first 
proviso  to  section  22  (b)  of  the  Agricultural  Adjustment 
Act,  as  amended,  are  representative  periods  for  such 
purpose. 

The  provisions  of  this  proclamation  shall  not  apply  to 
articles  imported  by  or  for  the  account  of  any  department 
or  agency  of  the  Government  of  the  United  States. 

As  used  in  this  proclamation,  the  word  "entered"  means 
"entered,  or  withdrawn  from  warehouse,  for  consumption". 

This  proclamation  shall  be  without  force  and  effect  if 
section  104  of  the  Defense  Production  Act  of  1950,  as 
amended,  is  extended  beyond  June  30,  1953. 

In  witness  whereof,  I  have  hereunto  set  my  hand  and 
caused  the  seal  of  the  United  States  of  America  to  be 
affixed. 

Done  at  the  City  of  Washington  this  eighth  day  of  .Tune 
in  the  year  of  our  Lord  nineteen  hundred  and 

[seal]  fifty-tliree,  and  of  the  Independence  of  the 
United  States  of  America  the  one  hundred  and 
seventy-seventh. 


By  the  President : 

John  Foster  Dulles, 

Secretary  of  State. 


Xv   CjiS-^ /L-cZ^  Cl~iCu^  X-»l<J'-^ 


MSA'IVlakes  Additional  Grant 
of  $15  Million  to  Yugoslavia 

The  Mutual  Security  Agency  on  June  15  an- 
nounced a  special  grant  of  $15  million  to  help 
Yugoslavia  build  up  reserve  stores  of  raw  ma- 
terials and  food  wliich  were  depleted  as  a  result 
of  last  year's  disastrous  drought. 


Previously  this  fiscal  year,  $106,750,000  had 
been  allotted  to  Yugoslavia.  This  amount  in- 
cluded $31,000,000  as  emergency  drought  aid  to- 
finance  purchases  of  such  items  as  corn  and  wheat 
to  stop  an  immediate  threat  of  famine  in  Yugo- 
slavia, as  well  as  some  essential  raw  materials. 

Tlie  new  grant  of  $15  million  will  help  restock 
Yugo.slavia's  depleted  food  and  raw  material 
larders.  This  will  help  avoid  another  emergency 
before  new  harvests  are  in  and  raw  material  sup- 
plies are  replenished. 

The  balance  of  $75,750,000  was  allotted  bv  Msa 
under  the  $99,000,000  tripartite-aid  progriim  of 
the  United  States,  United  Kingdom,  and  France 
for  Yugoslavia.  The  U.S.  share  of  the  tripartite 
program  is  $78,000,000.  including  $2,250,000 
wjiicli  was  made  available  to  Yugoslavia  as  an 
advance  from  1952  fiscal  year  funds. 

Appointment  of  Chairman 

of  U.S.  Committee  for  U.  N.  Day 

Secretarj'  Dulles  announced  on  June  15  (press- 
release ;>17)  the  appointment  of  Tliomas  J.  Wat- 
son, Jr..  as  1953  chairman  of  the  U.S.  Committee 
for  U.N.  Day.  At  the  same  time,  he  announced 
that  Mrs.  Franklin  D.  Roosevelt  and  "Warren  E. 
Austin  had  accepted  his  invitation  to  serve  as 
honorary  chairmen  of  the  committee. 

In  a  telegram  to  Mr.  Watson,  Mr.  Dulles  de- 
clared that  tlie  U.N.  Day  program,  siiearlieaded 
by  the  U.S.  Committee  for  U.N.  Day,  "is  impor- 
tant to  administration  siipiiort  of  the  United 
Nations."  In  accepting  the  Secretary's  invitation, 
Mr.  Watson  said,  'T  will  be  delighted  to  serve  as 
chairman  of  the  U.S.  Committee  for  U.N.  Day 
and  will  bend  every  effort  to  carry  out  the  job  in 
the  way  you  and  your  associates  desire."  In  a 
later  statement,  Mr.  Watson  said,  "I  have  ac- 
cepted the  appointment  to  be  1953  chairman  of 
the  U.S.  Committee  for  U.N.  Day  because  I  be- 
lieve that  the  best  hope  for  peace  in  the  world  lies 
in  the  work  of  the  United  Nations." 

Warren  Austin  served  as  chief  of  the  U.S.  dele- 
gation to  the  U.N.  until  this  year.  Mrs.  Roose- 
velt was  a  member  of  the  U.S.  delegation  to  the 
General  Assembly  for  a  number  of  years. 

The  U.S.  Committee  for  U.N.  Day  (formerly 
called  National  Citizens'  Committee  for  U.N. 
Day)  was  established  by  the  U.S.  Government  in 
1948  in  response  to  a  U.N.  General  Assembly 
resolution  that  October  24  be  observed  annually 
as  U.N.  Day.  October  24  is  the  day  that  the  U.?^. 
Charter  came  into  force.  Each  year  the  Secre- 
tary of  State,  with  the  approval  of  the  President, 
appoints  a  chairman  for  the  U.S.  Committee  for 
U.N.  Day  which  organizes  the  observance  of  U.N. 
Day  in  this  country.  The  committee  is  composed 
of  more  than  100  national  organizations  represent- 
ing civic,  business,  labor,  agriculture,  veterans, 
religion,  education,  welfare,  youth,  women,  trade, 
and  service  associations. 


920 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


U.S.-U.N.  Cooperation  in  U.N.  Postal  Activities 


hy  John  D.  Tomlinson 


A  postage  stamp,  small  as  it  is,  has  a  significance 
■far  beyond  its  worth  either  in  cash  or  as  a  pre- 
payment for  postal  service.  The  postage  stamps 
of  all  nations  frequently  symbolize  their  ideals 
and  traditions,  their  leaders,  or  great  events  in 
their  history.  Because  of  their  material  and  sym- 
bolic values,  millions  of  people  throughout  the 
world  save  and  collect  them  as  a  hobby,  for  his- 
torical study,  for  personal  prestige,  or  occasionally 
for  investment.  But  the  postage  stamps  of  each 
nation  would  have  little  worldwide  interest  if 
they  were  not  universally  recognized  as  valid  for 
mailing  purposes  to  all  parts  of  the  world  through 
the  chain  of  national  postal  establishments  which 
form,  under  the  Universal  Postal  Union,  a  single 
postal  territory  for  the  reciprocal  exchange  of 
correspondence. 

Very  early  in  the  development  of  U.N.  head- 
quarters arrangements,  the  question  was  raised  of 
the  possible  establishment  of  a  U.N.  postal  admin- 
istration and  the  issuance  of  U.N.  stamps.  The 
unique  position  of  the  United  Nations  and  its 
impact  upon  all  peoples  prompted  a  considerable 
amount  of  interest  in  this  subject  on  the  part  of 
some  delegations  to  the  General  Assembly.  Al- 
though the  first  formal  proposal  on  the  matter 
was  made  by  the  Argentine  delegation  to  the 
second  session  of  the  General  Assembly  in  the  fall 
of  19J:T,^  the  possibility  of  such  a  development  had 
been  anticipated  in  the  negotiations  between  the 
United  States  and  the  United  Nations  in  the  head- 
quarters agreement.  This  agreement,  which  was 
approved  by  Congress,  August  4,  1947,-  provided 
that : 

In  tlie  event  that  the  United  Nations  should  propose  to 
organize  its  own  postal  service,  the  conditions  under 
which  such  service  will  be  set  up  shall  be  the  subject  of  a 
supplemental  agreement. 

The  Argentine  proposal  envisaged  a  U.N.  postal 
administration  which  would  issue  U.N.  stamps 

'  U.N.  doc.  A/367  dated  Ang.  28,  1947. 
•  P.  L.  357,  80th  Cong. 


and  provide  its  own  postal  facilities  for  official 
U.N.  mail.  These  facilities  would  be  provided  at 
headquarters  and  at  such  other  U.N.  offices  as 
might  be  established.  One  of  the  motives  under- 
lying the  Argentine  proposal  was  to  apply  reve- 
nues toward  the  amortization  of  the  cost  of  the 
U.N.  headquarters  building.  The  Secretary-Gen- 
eral, in  a  report  to  the  General  Assembly,^  sug- 
gested the  exploration  of  another  type  of 
arrangement  under  which  U.N.  postal  activities 
would  be  restricted  to  the  issuance  and  use  of  U.N. 
stamps  for  its  official  mail,  leaving  all  other  opera- 
tions to  the  national  postal  administrations  con- 
cerned, under  agreements  to  be  concluded  with 
them.  The  General  Assembly,  however,  was  not 
prepared  to  embark  on  either  course  without  con- 
siderably more  study  of  the  many  problems 
involved,  and  accepted  the  proposal  of  the  Secre- 
tary-General that  inquiries  be  made  into  the  ad- 
ministrative, technical,  and  financial  implications 
of  a  U.N.  postal  service  and  that  recommendations 
thereon  be  submitted  to  the  next  session.^ 

Pursuant  to  this  resolution,  U.N.  officials  sought 
the  advice  and  assistance  of  the  U.S.  Post  Office 
Department  with  regard  to  the  two  principal 
alternative  proposals.  After  extended  examina- 
tion of  each,  the  Secretary-General,  in  his  report 
to  the  third  session  of  the  General  Assembly  in 
1948  ^  concluded  that  in  view  of  the  limited  finan- 
cial prospects,  complicated  technical  and  adminis- 
trative operations,  and  limited  usefulness  to 
overseas  offices  and  specialized  agencies,  "it  would 
appear  that  there  would  be  no  financial  advantage 
in  pursuing  this  project  further  at  the  present 
time." 

In  the  discussions  on  this  report  in  the  Fifth 
Conunittee  of  the  General  Assembly,  it  was 
pointed  out  that  the  advantages  in  terms  of  pub- 
licity likely  to  result  from  the  issue  of  special  U.N. 
stamps   if    a   U.N.    postal    administration    were 

=  U.N.  doc.  A/C.5/191  dated  Oct.  31,  1947. 

*G.A.  Resolution  1.59   (II)   dated  Nov.  20,  1947. 

'  U.N.  doc.  A/655  dated  Sept.  28, 1948. 


June  29,    7  953 


921 


created  made  it  desirable  for  the  United  Nations 
to  pursue  the  inquiries  and  negotiations  already 
initiated.  Alternately,  it  was  proposed  that  fur- 
ther studies  and  negotiations  be  pursued  concern- 
ing the  issue  of  national  stamps  designed  for  U.N. 
purposes."  The  resolution  adopted  by  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  on  October  8,  1948,  approved  in 
principle  the  idea  of  establishing  a  United  Nations 
Postal  Administration,  authorized  the  Secretary- 
General  to  conclude  arrangements  with  various 
governments  for  the  issue  of  special  or  overprinted 
postage  stamps,  and  requested  him  to  pursue  the 
inquiries  and  negotiations  already  initiated.' 

Pursuant  to  this  resolution,  the  Secretary- 
General  approached  the  U.S.  Government  to 
ascertain  whether  it  would  be  possible  for  the 
United  States  to  issue  a  commemorative  or  special 
U.N.  stamp  or  an  overprinted  stamp.  Extensive 
consideration  was  given  to  this  matter  by  officials 
of  the  Post  Office  Department  and  the  Depart- 
ment of  State.  After  considering  various  alterna- 
tives, they  concluded  that  legislative  restrictions 
and  other  serious  difficulties  made  it  impossible 
at  that  time  for  the  United  States  to  issue  stamps 
with  a  U.N.  overprint  or  a  special  issue  of  a  dis- 
tinctive U.N.  stamp  for  exclusive  sale  at  U.N. 
headquarters. 

Tlie  Secretary-General  continued  active  study 
of  the  problem  of  establishing  an  autonomous 
postal  administration.  The  former  Director  of 
the  Netherlands  Postal  Service,  W.  E.  Van  Goor, 
was  called  in  to  survey  various  aspects  of  it,  and 
further  consultations  were  held  with  U.S.  postal 
officials.  Considerable  attention  was  given  to 
estimating  the  cost  of  operations  and  estimated 
revenues.  Although  the  experts  differed  in  their 
estimates,  the  Secretary-General,  in  his  report  to 
the  fourth  session  of  the  General  Assembly,' 
estimated  that  the  United  Nations  might  effect  a 
saving  of  $21,000  (based  on  1948  costs)  if  it  were 
to  operate  its  own  postal  service.  This  estimate 
did  not  include  any  revenues  which  might  be 
derived  from  the  sale  of  stamps  for  philatelic 
purposes. 

Tlie  discussion  in  the  General  Assembly  of  this 
report,  which  was  presented  without  recommenda- 
tions, revealed  a  cleavage  between  those  who 
wished  to  proceed  immediately  with  the  estab- 
lishment of  an  autonomous  postal  administration 
and  those  who  felt  further  study  was  necessary. 
Others  felt  it  was  a  burdensome  task  for  the  United 
Nations  to  undertake  such  an  operation  in  view  of 
the  excellent  services  being  rendered  by  the  U.S. 
Post  Office  Department.  Before  a  final  decision 
was  taken,  various  delegations  desired  more  clari- 
fication on  such  matters  as  the  nature  of  the  neces- 
sary agreement  with  the  United  States,  further 
study  of  costs,  and  the  relationship  with  the  Uni- 
versal Postal  Union.    The  U.S.  delegation  took  a 

•  U.N.  doc.  A/671  Rev.  I  dated  Oct.  7,  1948. 
'G.A.  KesoUition  2.32  (IV)  dated  Oct.  8,  1948. 
"  U.N.  doc.  A/988  dated  Sept.  21,  1949. 


neutral  position,  but  expressed  the  willingness  of 
tlie  United  States  to  continue  its  cooperation  with 
the  United  Nations  in  postal  matters  whatever 
decision  might  be  taken  with  regard  to  the  estab- 
lishment of  a  U.N.  Postal  Administration. 

A  compromise  resolution  was  adopted  request- 
ing the  Secretary-General  "to  continue  the  prep- 
aration of  necessary  arrangements  for  the  estab- 
lishment of  a  United  Nations  postal  administra- 
tion" and  to  submit  a  new  report  at  the  beginning 
of  the  next  session.^  The  term  "arrangements" 
was  interpreted  as  authorizing  the  Secretary-Cien- 
eral  not  only  to  continue  his  study  of  the  matter 
with  the  assistance  of  expert  advice  and  to  proceed 
with  essential  preparatory  work  incidental  to  the 
organization  of  a  postal  service,  but  also  to  enter  : 
into  negotiations  with  the  appropriate  U.S.  au- 
thorities. It  was  understood  that  such  negotia- 
tions and  other  preparatory  arrangements  under- 
taken would  be  the  subject  of  a  full  report  to  the 
General  Assembly  for  its  final  approval." 

Draft  U.S.-U.N.  Postal  Agreement 

Following  the  adoption  of  this  resolution,  U.S. 
officials  in  the  Post  Office  Department  and  in  the 
Department  of  State  collaborated  fully  with  U.N. 
officials  in  attempting  to  find  a  satisfactory  solu- 
tion to  give  effect  to  the  wishes  of  the  General 
Assembly.  In  February  1950  conversations  were 
held  at  Washington  between  U.S.  and  U.N.  officials 
resulting  in  a  first  draft  of  a  U.S.-U.N.  postal 
agreement  patterned  along  the  lines  of  the  Ital- 
ian-Vatican City  agreement.  This  draft  agree- 
ment envisaged  the  establishment,  operation,  and 
maintenance  of  a  U.N.  Postal  Administration 
within  the  headquarters  district  of  the  United 
Nations  in  New  York  and  included  arrangements 
between  the  U.N.  Postal  Administration  and  the 
U.S.  Post  Office  Department  on  various  matters 
including  the  local  transport  of  mail  and  the 
schedule  of  charges. 

The  principal  problem  which  emerged  for  the 
United  Nations  in  these  discussions  was  with  re- 
gard to  the  scope  of  service  to  be  offered  by  the 
ij.N.  Postal  Administration.  The  United  Nations 
proposed  a  limited  postal  service  including  ordi- 
nary letter  mail,  ordinary  printed  matter,  and 
parcel  post  and  took  the  position  that  the  agree- 
ment should  indicate  the  limited  nature  of  the  serv- 
ice to  be  offered  because  of  its  direct  bearing  on 
any  postal  charges  or  rates  to  be  worked  out  be- 
tween the  United  Nations  and  the  United  States. 
U.S.  representatives,  however,  took  the  position 
that  such  a  matter  was  not  a  proper  subject  for 
inclusion  in  the  U.S.-U.N.  agreement  since  the 
U.N.  Postal  Administration  was  presumably  free 
to  offer  whatever  services  it  saw  fit.  In  the  course 
of  these  discussions  it  became  more  and  more  ap- 

"  G.A.  Resolution  342  (iv)  dated  Oct.  20, 1949. 
"Report  of  the  Fifth  Committee  to  the  General  As- 
sembly, U.N.  doc.  A/1015  dated  Oct.  13, 1949. 


922 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


parent  to  U.N.  representatives  as  well  as  U.S. 
representatives  that  there  were  serious  disadvan- 
tages in  operating  a  U.N.  Postal  Administration 
offering  only  limited  services. 

During  these  discussions  reference  was  made  to 
an  agreement  between  Switzerland  and  Liechten- 
stein under  which  Switzerland  handles  all  Liech- 
tenstein postal  operations,  and  Liechtenstein 
issues  and  sells  a  Liechtenstein  stamp  which  is 
recognized  by  the  Swiss  postal  authorities. 
Liechtenstein  retains  the  proceeds  from  sales  of 
the  Liechtenstein  stamps  for  philatelic  purposes. 

Further  conversations  were  held  in  April  1950 
to  examine  the  possibilities  of  an  arrangement  be- 
tween the  United  States  and  the  United  Nations 
along  the  lines  of  the  Swiss-Liechtenstein  agree- 
ment. As  a  result  of  these  convereations,  a  second 
tentative  draft  agreement  was  drawn  up  under 
which  a  U.N.  post  office  station  would  be  estab- 
lished at  U.N.  headquartei-s  and  operated  by  the 
U.S.  Post  Office  Department,  using  stamps  pro- 
vided by  the  LTnited  Nations.  This  U.N.  station 
would  supply  all  the  services  offered  by  any  U.S. 
post  office  having  comparable  operations,  except 
that  the  U.N.  Post  Office  Station  would  sell  and 
use  only  U.N.  postage  stamps.  It  was  provided 
that  all  revenue  derived  from  the  sale  of  U.N. 
postage  stamps  by  the  U.N.  Post  Office  Station 
would  be  retained  by  the  U.S.  Post  Office  Depart- 
ment as  full  and  complete  compensation  for  its 
services.  The  United  Nations  would  provide  the 
U.S.  Post  Office  Department  with  quarters,  cus- 
todial services,  and  utilities  for  the  operation  of 
the  U.N.  Post  Office  Station.  The  United  Na- 
tions, on  the  other  hand,  would  maintain  a  sep- 
arate agency  for  the  sale  of  U.N.  postage  stamps 
for  philatelic  purposes  and  retain  all  revenue  from 
such  sales. 

The  advantages  of  an  agreement  along  the  fore- 
going lines  were  quite  obvious.  In  the  first  place, 
the  United  Nations  would  not  be  involved  in  any 
operations  other  than  the  handling  of  philatelic 
sales.  The  Post  Office  Department  on  the  other 
hand  would  operate  the  U.N.  Post  Office  Station 
in  the  same  manner  as  it  had  operated  a  U.S. 
branch  post  office  at  UN.  headquarters,  first  at 
Lake  Success  and  subsequently  in  the  headquarters 
district  in  New  York.  The  principal  remaining 
barrier  to  full  agreement  was  the  possibility  that 
U.N.  stamps  might  be  purchased  from  the  phila- 
telic agency  of  the  U.N.  Postal  Administration 
and  used  for  mailing  purposes  at  the  U.N.  Post 
Office  Station,  thereby  involving  the  handling  of 
mail  by  the  U.S.  Post  Office  Department  without 
reimbursement.  With  U.N.  headquartei-s  in  a 
city  such  as  New  York,  this  possibility  appeared 
quite  a  serious  obstacle  to  the  satisfactory  imple- 
mentation of  the  proposed  agreement.  Subse- 
quent conversations  were  held  to  iron  out  this 
difficulty,  and  a  provision  was  inserted  in  the  draft 
agreement  that  the  United  Nations  should  limit 
its  sale  of  stamps  for  j^hilatelic  purposes  only  to 


those  made  in  response  to  requests  sent  by  mail. 
Since  it  was  realized  that  various  difficulties  might 
arise  in  the  application  of  an  arrangement  of  this 
nature,  provision  was  included  in  the  agreement 
permitting  its  amendment  1  year  after  its  entry 
into  force. 

The  draft  agreement  as  finally  negotiated  was 
submitted  by  the  Secretary-General  in  his  report 
t-o  the  fifth  session  of  the  General  Assembly  in 
1950."  On  November  16  the  proposed  plan  was 
accepted  without  dissent  by  the  General  Assem- 
bly,'- which  noted  the  draft  agreement  between 
the  United  Nations  and  the  United  States  and 
requested  the  Secretary-General  to  proceed  with 
the  conclusion  of  the  agreement  and  with  the  neces- 
sary arrangements  for  the  establishment  of  a  U.N. 
Postal  Administration  at  the  earliest  possible  date. 
In  a  formal  ceremony  at  U.N.  headquarters  the 
agreement  was  signed  March  28,  1951,  by  Secre- 
tary-General Trygve  Lie,  on  behalf  of  the  United 
Nations,  and  by  Ambassador  Warren  R.  Austin, 
U.S.  representative  to  the  United  Nations,  and 
Jesse  M.  Donaldson,  Postmaster  General,  on  be- 
half of  the  United  States. 

Meanwhile,  preparations  were  being  made  by 
the  United  Nations  for  the  design  and  printing 
of  U.N.  postage  stamps  and  postmarks.  Under 
the  General  Assembly  resolution  provision  had 
been  made  for  the  appointment  by  the  Secretary- 
General  of  an  Advisory  Committee  on  Stamp 
Design.  With  the  advice  of  this  committee,  it 
was  decided  to  issue  15  denominations  ranging 
from  1^  to  $1. 

U.  N.  Stamps  Issued 

On  October  24, 1951,  the  date  of  entry  into  force 
of  the  agreement,  6  of  the  15  denominations  of  the 
regular  series  were  issued — 1^,  11/2^,  3(i,  50,  25^, 
and  $1.  On  November  16, 1951,  5  more  denomina- 
tions in  the  regular  sei'ies  were  issued — 2^4,  lOiji, 
15<*,  20^,  and  500.  On  December  14,  1951,  four 
airmail  stamjis  were  issued  in  denominations  of 
60,  100,  150,  and  250.  Following  the  announce- 
ment of  the  issuance  of  U.N.  stamps,  and  particu- 
larly during  the  period  October  15  to  December 
24,  1951,  orders  and  inquiries  from  the  public  and 
from  philatelists  averaged  1,200  pieces  per  work- 
ing day,  and  during  the  peak  rose  to  1,800  pieces 
per  day.  During  the  first  3  days  of  issue  approx- 
imately 1,100,000  first-day  covers  were  processed." 

During  1952  a  20  postcard  was  issued  on  July  18, 
an  air-letter  sheet  on  August  29,  a  U.N.  Day 
commemorative  stamp  in  a  50  denomination  cel- 
ebrating the  signing,  in  1945,  of  the  charter  at 
San  Francisco,  and  on  December  10,  two  stamps  in 
30    and    50   denominations    commemorating    the 


"  U.N.  doc.  A/1934  dated  Sept.  26,  1950. 

"G.  A.  Re.solution  454  (V)  dated  Nov.  16,  1950. 

"  See  Report  of  the  Secretary-General  to  the  Oeneral 
Assembly  on  the  United  Nations  Postal  Administration, 
U.N.  doc.  A/2191  dated  Sept.  19,  1952. 


June  29,   1953 


923 


rv 


adoption  in  1948  of  the  Universal  Declaration  of 
Human  Rights.  Eight  stamps  in  five  new  issues 
and  a  stamped  envelope  in  two  sizes  are  being 
issued  in  1953 :  "Refugee"'  stamp,  30  and  50  de- 
nominations, April  24 ;  "Universal  Postal  Union"' 
stamp,  30  and  50  denominations,  June  12;  em- 
bossed envelope,  30  denomination,  in  two  sizes,  in 
September ;  "United  Nations  Day"  stamp,  30  and 


U.S.  Postal  Authorities  Thanked 
for  Cooperation  With  United  Nations 

On  the  occasion  of  the  issuance  on  June  12  of 
U.ff.  stamps  commemorating  the  Universal  Postal 
Union.  (Upu),  the  Director  of  the  U.N.  Information 
Center  in  Washington,  Panl  V.  Johansen,  presented 
to  Postmaster  General  Arthur  E.  Summrrflcld  the 
first  issues  of  these  stamps.  In  making  the  presen- 
tation, Mr.  Johansen  paid  tribute  to  the  cooperation 
of  the  U.S.  Post  Office  Department  in  the  following 
terms: 

In  behalf  of  the  Secretary-General  of  the  United 
Nations  I  have  great  pleasure  in  presenting  to  you 
the  first  issues  of  a  stamp,  produced  by  the  United 
Nations  Postal  Administration  in  honor  of  the 
Universal  I'ostal  Union — established  in  1S74  and  in 
membership  the  largest  of  the  specialized  agencies 
of  the  United  Nations. 

In  making  this  presentation  I  am  asked  to  convey 
to  you  our  very  best  thanks  for  your  cooperation  in 
concluding  a  postal  agreement  witli  the  United 
Nations  and  also  for  your  kindness  in  facilitating 
our  philatelic  operations. 


50  denominations,  October  24;  "Human  Rights 
Day"  stamp,  30  and  50  denominations,  December 
10. 

As  an  indication  of  the  interest  in  the  purchase 
of  stamps  for  philatelic  purposes,  by  April  30, 
1953,  the  United  Nations  had  received  gross  rev- 
enues from  such  sales  totaling  $1,031,031.  Total 
expenses  to  the  United  Nations  in  this  activity 
from  January  1,  1951,  when  the  U.N.  Postal  Ad- 
ministration was  established  by  the  Secretary-Gen- 
eral, through  April  30, 1953,  amounted  to  $320,023, 
resulting  in  a  net  revenue  of  $711,008  to  the  United 
Nations  for  that  period.  These  revenues  are 
counted  as  miscellaneous  receipts  in  the  U.N. 
budget  and,  as  such,  help  reduce  the  contributions 
of  member  governments  to  the  United  Nations. 

During  the  first  year  of  operations  several 
problems  arose  in  connection  with  the  intorjireta- 
tion  and  application  of  the  U.S.-U.N.  Postal 
Agreement.  One  of  these  related  to  bulk  mailings 
from  the  U.N.  Post  Office  Station.  A  number  of 
requests  were  made  for  bulk  commercial  mailings 
using  the  U.N.  stamp.  In  view  of  difficulties  in 
connection  with  facilities  for  handling  such  mail- 
ings, as  well  as  the  policy  questions  involved,  it  was 
agreed  that  for  the  time  being  bulk  mailings  of 
over  1,000  pieces  would  not  be  accepted. 


Stamp  Sales  to  Public 

Anotlier  question  was  that  of  public  access  to  the 
U.N.  Post  Office  Station,  which  was  located  in  a 
restricted  area  of  the  headquarters  building.  Con- 
sequently tlie  general  public  did  not  have  the  same 
oi^iiortiinity  to  purcliase  stamps  or  post  mail  mat- 
ter at  the  U.N.  Post  Office  Station  as  at  a  U.S. 
Post  Office.  It  was  impractical  for  the  United 
Nations  to  make  more  satisfactory  arrangements 
for  the  public  before  the  completion  of  the  Gen- 
eral Assemljly  building.  On  the  other  hand,  both 
the  United  Nations  and  the  United  States  wished 
to  serve  the  general  public  at  U.N.  Headquarters 
and  to  find  a  means  for  allocating  proceeds  from 
the  sale  of  stamps  as  between  the  U.N.  and  the 
U.S.  Post  Office  Department.  The  U.N.  Post 
Office  Station  sold  U.N.  stamps  without  regard  to 
purpose,  and  the  revenues  from  all  such  sales  were 
retained  by  the  U.S.  Post  Office  Department  under 
the  terms  of  the  agreement.  But  its  only  cus- 
tomers, except  on  days  when  stamps  were  issued, 
were  U.N.  officials  and  others  on  official  business 
who  had  ready  access  to  the  building.  The  United 
Nations  under  the  agreement  could  not  sell  stamps 
to  visitors. 

In  anticipation  of  the  completion  of  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  building  and  the  provision  of  a 
reception  area  for  the  general  public,  further 
conversations  on  these  interrelated  problems  were 
held  in  September  1952  between  U.N.  and  U.S. 
officials.  Agreement  was  reached  on  a  plan  under 
which  the  U.N.  Postal  Administration  would  sell 
stamps  in  the  public  i-eception  center  in  the  new 
General  Assembly  building  for  both  philatelic  and 
mailing  purposes.  Mail  matter  bearing  U.N. 
postage  deposited  in  the  reception  center  was  to  be 
forwarded  to  the  U.N.  Post  Office  Station  in  an- 
other part  of  the  building,  with  the  United  Nations 
reimbursing  the  U.S.  Post  Office  Department  for 
the  face  value  of  postage  on  all  mail  matter  so 
forwarded. 

In  order  to  effect  this  arrangement  it  was  neces- 
sary to  modify  the  agreement  of  1951  by  deleting 
the  clause  which  restricted  the  sale  of  U.N.  stamps 
for  philatelic  purposes  to  orders  received  by  mail. 
Subsequently  the  United  States  officially  notified 
the  Secretary-General  that  it  was  prepared  to 
modify  the  agreement  by  deleting  this  clause,  and 
the  Secretary-General  so  recommended  to  the 
seventh  session  of  the  General  Assembly.  The 
General  Assembly  in  its  resolution  of  November 
6,  1952,  authorized  the  Secretary-General  to  "con- 
clude the  instrument  necessary  to  revise  the  postal 
agreement  with  the  United  States  of  America"  by 
deleting  the  words  in  par.  (ii)  of  section  3  read- 
ing, "in  response  to  orders  received  by  mail.''  In 
an  exchange  of  notes  between  the  Secretary-Gen- 
eral and  Ambassador  Ernest  A.  Gross  of  Novem- 
ber 7,  1952,  and  November  17,  1952,  respectively, 
the  formal  amendment  of  the  agreement  was  com- 
pleted.    This    amendment    became    effective    on 


924 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


November  17,  1952.  (For  text  of  the  agreement, 
incorporating  the  amendment,  see  Annex.) 

During  the  first  few  months  after  the  opening 
of  the  new  General  Assembly  building  in  Septem- 
ber 1952,  an  average  of  4  to  5  thousand  visitors  a 
week  were  received  at  the  reception  center  in  that 
building.  "Wlien  U.N.  stamps  were  placed  on  sale 
and  mailing  facilities  provided  in  that  area,  fol- 
lowing the  entry  into  force  of  the  amended  agree- 
ment, total  stamp  sales  averaged  $.S,300  a  week. 
About  85  percent  of  these  stamps  were  for 
philatelic  purposes;  the  remainder  were  used  for 
mail  matter  for  which  the  Post  Office  Department 
was  reimbursed. 

Although  U.N.  stamps  have  been  widely  pub- 
licized, as  manifested  by  the  volume  of  philatelic 
sales,  the  arrangements  between  the  United 
Nations  and  the  United  States  have  not  been  too 
well  understood.  Many  have  the  mistaken  im- 
pression that  the  U.S.  Post  Office  Department  is 
footing  the  bill  for  handling  U.N.  mail.  Ac- 
tually the  U.S.  Post  Office  Department  is  fully 
reimbursed  at  current  U.S.  postage  rates  for  all 
mail  matter,  official  and  unofficial,  deposited  ut 
the  U.N.  Post  Office  Station,  which  is  the  only 
station  where  U.N.  stamps  may  be  used  for  mail- 
ing. If  any  article  of  mail  matter  bearing  a  U.N. 
stamp  were  deposited  in  a  U.S.  Post  Office  or  mail 
box  it  would  be  considered  as  unpaid  and  would 
be  handled  accordingly  under  U.S.  Postal  Kegu- 
lations ;  that  is,  it  would  be  returned  to  the  sender 
or  sent  to  the  Dead  Letter  Office. 

U.S.  postal  officials  consider  the  operation  of 
the  U.N.  Post  Office  Station  quite  satisfactory 
from  the  standpoint  of  the  Post  Office  Depart- 
ment, although  working  out  mutually  agreeable 
arrangements  in  this  unique  situation  has  in- 
volved a  few  headaches.  It  is  generally  con- 
sidered that  the  cost  of  operations  of  this  station 
and  the  revenues  received  compare  favorably  with 
those  of  U.S.  Post  Offices  offering  similar  services. 

The  Universal  Postal  Congress  which  opened 
at  Brussels  in  May  1952  adopted  a  resolution 
recognizing,  from  a  postal  point  of  view,  the  es- 
tablishment of  the  U.N.  Postal  Administration  in 
accordance  with  the  U.N.  General  Assembly  reso- 
lution of  November  16,  1950,  and  the  Postal 
Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  the 
United  Nations.  As  a  result  of  this  action,  U.N. 
stamps  have  been  given  worldwide  recognition 
by  the  postal  administrations  of  93  countries 
members  of  the  Universal  Postal  Union. 

As  the  largest  contributor  to  the  United  Nations 
(35.12  percent  for  1953),  the  United  States  bene- 
fits more  than  any  other  member  of  the  United 
Nations  from  this  arrangement,  inasmuch  as  the 
revenue  derived  from  U.N.  philatelic  sales  reduces 
the  amount  of  its  contributions  to  the  annual  ex- 
penses of  the  United  Nations. 

The  interests  of  the  United  Nations  under  the 
arrangement  have  been  well  served.  U.N.  stamps 
have  helped  to  broaden  public  acquaintance  with 

June  29,    1953 


and  interest  in  the  United  Nations  as  an  institu- 
tion as  well  as  to  provide  the  United  Nations  with 
its  own  distinctive  stamp  for  its  official  mail. 
These  benefits,  in  addition  to  the  substantial  pro- 
ceeds from  philatelic  sales,  have  been  realized 
without  involving  the  United  Nations  in  the  com- 
plexities of  international  postal  operations. 

ANNEX 

Postal  Agreement 

Between 
THE  United  States  of  America 

AND 

THE  United  Nations 
AS  Amended   November  17,   1952 

Whereas,  a  certain  Agreement  between  the  United 
States  of  America  and  the  United  Nations,  dated  tlie  26th 
day  of  June,  1947,  regarding  the  Headquarters  of  the 
United  Nations  (said  Afireement  bein^'  hereinafter  re- 
ferred to  as  the  "Headquarters  Agreement")  provides  that 
in  the  event  that  the  United  Nations  should  propose  to 
organize  its  oven  postal  service,  the  conditions  under 
which  such  service  shall  be  set  up  shall  be  the  subject 
of  a  Supplemental  Agreement ;  and 

Whereas,  the  United  Nations  desires  to  establish  a 
postal  service  in  conformity  with  the  Headquarters 
Agreement, 

Now  Therefore,  the  Parties  hereto  agree  as  follows : 

Section  1 
Scope  of  Agreement 

(i)  Subject  to  the  provisions  of  this  Agreement,  there 
shall  be  established  a  United  Nations  Post  Office  Station 
in  the  Headquarters  District  of  the  United  Nations,  as 
defined  in  the  Headquarters  Agreement,  which  shall  be 
operated  by  the  United  States  Post  Office  Department. 

(ii)  The  United  Nations  Post  Office  Station  sliall  pro- 
vide at  the  prevailing  rates  all  the  services  offered  by 
any  United  States  Post  Office  having  comparable  op- 
erations except  that  the  United  Nations  Post  Office  Sta- 
tion  shall   use   only   United   Nations   postage  stamps. 

Section  2 

Supply  of  United  Nations  Postage  Stamps  and  Stamped 
Paper 

(i)  The  United  Nations  shall  at  its  own  expense  fur- 
nish all  United  Nations  postage  stamps  required  under 
the  terms  of  this  Agreement. 

(ii)  In  the  event  that  tlie  United  Nations  shall  produce 
or  authorize  production  of  stamped  envelopes  and  post- 
cards, such  envelopes  or  post-cards  shall  conform  to  the 
specifications  of  the  United  States  Post  Office  Department 
as  to  size  and  as  to  qualify  of  paper  used. 

(iii)  No  United  Nations  postage  stamps  shall  be  dis- 
tributed except  in  accordance  with  the  terms  of  this 
Agreement. 

Section  3 

Sale  of  United  Nations  Postage  Stamps 

(i)  The  United  Nations  Post  Office  Station  shall  sell 
only  United  Nations  postage  stamps  which  shall  be  pro- 
vided by  the  United  Nations  free  of  charge  in  such  quan- 
tifies as  may  be  necessary  to  fulfill  all  reasonable  needs 
of  the  United  Nations  Post  Office  Station.  All  revenue 
derived  from  such  sales  of  United  Nations  postage  stamps 
and  from  other  services  rendered  l)y  the  United  Nations 
Post  Office  Station  shall  be  retained  by  the  United  States 
Post  Office  Department  as  full  and  complete  compensa- 
tion for  performance  of  its  obligations  under  the  terms 
of  this  Agreement,  except,  however,  that  the  United 
States  Post  Office  Department  .shall  be  reimbursed  for 
performance  of  any  postal  services  resulting  from  use 
of   United   Nations   postage   stamps    sold   for    philatelic 

925 


purposes  under  the  provisions  of  paragraph  (ii)  of  this 
section  whit-h  are  used  as  postage  on  mail  matter  posted 
at  the  United  Nations  Post  Office  Station  by  being  paid 
an  amount  equal  to  the  face  value  of  any  such  stamps  so 
used  as  postage. 

(ii)  The  United  Nations  may  maintain  a  separate 
agency  for  the  sale  of  United  Nations  postage  stamps 
for  philatelic  purposes.  Suliject  to  the  provisions  of 
paragraph  (i)  of  this  section  all  revenue  derived  from 
such  philatelic  sales  of  United  Nations  postage  stamps 
shall  be  retained  by  the  United  Nations  for  its  ovs-n  use. 

Section  4 

United  Nations  Postmarks 

The  United  Nations  shall  furnish  all  postmarking 
stamps  to  be  applied  to  mail  posted  for  mailing  in  the 
Headquarters  District  and  shall  furnish  all  such  post- 
marking stamps  to  the  United  Nations  Post  Office  Station 
free  of  charge.  All  postmarks  shall  be  designated  as 
United  Nations  postmarks. 

Section  5 

United  Nations  Post  Office  Station  Premises 

The  United  Nations  shall  provide  the  United  States 
Post  Office  Department  at  the  expense  of  the  United 
Nations  with  the  quarters,  custodial  services  and  utilities 
necessary  to  enable  the  United  States  Post  Office  De- 
partment to  operate  the  United  Nations  Post  Office  Station 
in  the  Headquarters  District. 

Section  6 
Staff  and  Equipment 

Except  as  otherwise  provided  in  this  Agreement  the 
United  States  Post  Office  Department  will  provide  at  its 
own  expense  all  staff,  equipment  and  other  services  and 
facilities  necessary  to  enable  the  United  States  Post  Office 
Department  to  operate  the  United  Nations  Post  Office 
Station  under  the  terms  of  this  Agreement. 

Section  7 

Postal  Address  of  the  United  Nations 

The  postal  address  of  the  Headquarters  District  of  the 
United  Nations  shall  be  "United  Nations,  New  York". 

Section  8 

Duration  of  the  Agreement 

(i)  This  Agreement  shall  take  efifect  on  a  date  to  be 
agreed  upon  between  the  United  Nations  and  the  United 
States  Post  Office  Department. 

(ii)  This  Agreement  shall  be  subject  to  revision,  on 
the  written  proposal  of  either  contracting  party,  after  one 
year  from  the  date  of  commencement  of  operations. 

(iii)  This  Agreement  may  be  terminated  by  either 
party  giving  the  other  written  notice  of  its  intention  to 
terminate  such  Agreement  at  least  twelve  (12)  months  in 
advance  of  the  termination  date  fixed  in  such  notice. 

In  Witness  Whkreof  tlie  respective  representatives 
have  signed  this  Agreement  and  have  affixed  their  seals 
hereto. 

Done  in  duplicate  this  twenty-eighth  day  of  March  1951. 

FOR  THIC  GOVERNMENT  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES 
OF  AMERICA : 

Warren  R.  Austin        (Seal) 
Jesse  M.  DONALnsoN     (Seal) 

FOR  THE  UNITED  NATIONS : 

Trygve  Lie 
•  Mr.  Tomlinson,  author  of  the  above  article., 
is  an  adviser  in  the  Office  of  U.N.  Economic  and 
Social  A  fairs. 

926 


U.S.  Delegations 

to  International  Conferences 

Council  of  Food  and  Agriculture  Organization 

The  Department  of  State  on  June  IG  announced  (press 
release  320)  that  the  Council  of  the  Food  and  Agriculture 
Organization  of  the  United  Nations  (Fad)  had  convened 
for  its  seventeenth  session  at  Rome  on  June  15. 

President  Eisenhower  appointed  Knowles  A.  Ryerson, 
dean  of  the  College  of  Agriculture,  University  of  Califor- 
nia, Berkeley,  Calif.,  as  U.S.  member  on  the  Council  for 
this  session.  John  W.  Evans,  director  of  the  Office  of 
International  Materials  Policy,  Department  of  State,  and 
Robert  B.  Schwenger,  chief  of  the  Regional  Investiga- 
tions Branch,  Foreign  Agricultural  Service,  Department 
of  Agriculture,  have  been  designated  associate  U.S.  mem- 
bers for  this  session. 

Other  members  of  the  U.S.  delegation  are : 

Advisers 

Ursula   H.   Duffus,  Office  of  U.N.   Economic  and   Social 

Affairs,  Department  of  State 
L.  Wendell   Hayes,  Attach^  for  Fag  Liaison,  American 

Embassy,  Rome 
Robert  C.  Tetro,  Agricultural  Attach^,  American  Embassy, 

Rome 

Adviser  and  Secretary 

Thomas  E.  Street,  Foreign  Agricultural  Service,  Depart- 
ment of  Agriculture 

The  Council,  which  is  the  executive  body  of  the  Fao, 
will  be  primarily  concerned  at  its  forthcoming  session  with 
preparations  for  the  seventh  session  of  the  Conference  of 
the  Fao.  Among  the  items  to  be  considered  in  this  con- 
nection are  (1)  the  preparation  of  a  provisional  agenda 
for  the  Conference;  (2)  the  program  of  work  and  budgets 
for  the  Organization  for  1954  and  1955;  and  (3)  reports 
on  the  establishment  of  an  emergency  famine  reserve, 
methods  of  financing  agricultural  development,  and  the 
relationship  of  the  Fao  with  organized  representation  of 
producer  and  consuiuer  interests.  The  Council  will  also 
consider  reports  on  the  work  of  the  Organization  and 
administrative  and  financial  questions.  I 


THE  DEPARTMENT 


Locally  Produced  Broadcasts  in  Latin  America 

Press  release  315  dated  June  12 

Reports  from  our  Embassies  in  Latin  America  indicate 
that  much  of  the  local-broadcasting  time  previously  oC- 
cujiied  by  the  relay  of  the  Voice  of  America's  shortwave 
programs  is  now  being  used  by  public  affairs  officers  of 
the  International  Information  Administration  (Iia)  for 
locally  produced  shows. 

Some  212  broadcasting  stations  located  in  13  Latin 
American  countries  gave  a  total  of  about  1,02S  free 
hours  every  3  months  to  the  local  rebroadcast  of  Voa 
programs  transmitted  shortwave  from  the  United  States. 
Wlien  economy  measures  cau.sed  Iia's  Voice  of  America  to 
stop  beaming  Spanish  and  Portuguese  language  broad- 
casts south  of  the  border  on  May  23,  public  affairs  officers 
in  Mexico  City,  Panamd,  San  Salvador,  Habana,  and 
nine  South  American  countries  were  asked  to  "hold  that 
relay  time." 

Reports  to  date  show  that  the  speedy  offer  of  interest- 
ing,  locally  produced  programs  has  held  much   of  this 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


very  desirable  free  air  time  for  U.S.  information  pro- 
grams and  indicate  that  Usis  missions  probably  will 
have  the  opportunity  of  broadcasting  more  than  4,000 
additional  hours  this  coming  year. 

These  additional  broadcasts  can  be  handled,  for  the 
most  part,  with  existing  staff  and  funds.  Material  for 
the  locally  produced  shows  is  drawn  from  several  sources 
including"  news  and  commentary  from  the  Wireless  File 
received  daily  from  Iia's  International  Press  Service  in 
Washington,  features  and  dramatizations  adapted  from 
U.S.  newspapers,  books,  and  magazines,  as  well  as  tape 
and  disc  recordings  prepared  by  the  Iia's  International 
Broadcasting  Service  in  New  York. 

The  production  of  local  radio  programs  designed  to 
develop  greater  understanding  between  Latin  America 
and  the  United  States  has  been  a  regular  part  of  the 
Iia's  program  for  some  time.  The  local  Usis  employees 
and  other  Latin  American  talent  used  on  these  broad- 
casts have  helped  the  shows  to  achieve  wide  popularity. 
During  the  past  year,  42  such  programs  have  been 
broadc-ast  regularly  by  14  Usis  field  posts  in  Latin 
America.  Almost  500  radio  stations  gave  these  locally 
produced  programs  free  time  totaling  over  4,500  hours 
during  a  3-months'  period. 

In  addition  to  the  radio  programs  and  occasional  tele- 
vision shows  produced  by  Usis  missions,  Latin  America 
receives  the  Voice  of  America's  30-minute  worldwide 
program,  broadcast  shortwave  in  English. 


Mr.  Mcllvaine  To  Be  Special  Assistant 
to  Assistant  Secretary  McCardle 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  June  19  (press 
release  330)  that  on  that  day  Robinson  Mcllvaine  was 
sworn  in  as  Special  Assistant  to  the  Assistant  Secretary 
for  Public  Affairs,  Carl  W.  McCardle.  The  oath  was  ad- 
ministered by  Chief  of  Protocol,  John  F.   Simmons. 

Mr.  Mcllvaine  will  deal  primarily  with  the  domestic 
public  affairs  and  information  program  of  the  Depart- 
ment. With  the  reorganization  of  the  Department,  this 
phase  of  its  activities  is  being  given  increased  attention 
in  view  of  the  desire  of  Secretary  Dulles  to  provide  the 
American  people  with  a  fuller  picture  of  our  foreign 
policy.  In  this  capacity  Mr.  Mcllvaine  will  assume,  in 
addition  to  his  other  duties,  those  of  the  Director  of  the 
Office  of  Public  Affairs.  This  position  has  been  abolished 
by  Mr.  McCardle. 


THE  FOREIGN  SERVICE 


Diplomatic  Relations  Resumed 
With  Colombia 

Press  release  326  dated  June  18 

The  Ambassador  of  the  United  States  at 
Bogota,  Capus  M.  Waynick,  has  been  instructed 
to  resume  diplomatic  relations  with  Colombia 
on  June  18. 

This  action  is  being  taken  in  conformity  with 
the  desire  of  the  United  States  to  carry  on  normal 
diplomatic  relations  with  the  Colombian  Govern- 
ment, and  in  accordance  with  our  information  that 
the  new  Government  in  that  country  has  estab- 
lished effective  control  over  Colombian  territory 
and  has  given  assurances  of  its  intention  to  fulfill 
the  international  obligations  of  Colombia. 


Confirmations 

On  June  11  the  Senate  confirmed  the  nomination  of 
John  C.  Hughes  as  U.S.  permanent  representative  on  the 
North  Atlantic  Council  with  the  rank  and  status  of 
Ambassador. 

The  Senate  on  June  15  confirmed  Amos  J.  Peaslee  as 
Ambassador  to  Australia. 

Theodore  C.  Streibert  To  Be 
Consultant  to  Mr.  Conant 

Press  release  323  dated  June  17 

At  the  request  of  James  B.  Conant,  U.S.  High  Com- 
missioner for  Germany,  Theodore  C.  Streibert  of  New 
York  City  will  go  to  Germany  for  several  months  as 
consultant  on  the  public  affairs  program.  His  chief 
function  will  be  to  assist  Mr.  Conant  and  his  staff  in  the 
recently  announced  reorganization. 

Formerly  president  of  radio  station  WOR,  New  York, 
and  chairman  of  the  board  of  the  Mutual  Broadcasting 
System,  Mr.  Streibert  has  been  serving  as  consultant  to 
Robert  L.  Johnson,  Administrator  of  Iia,  who  has  ap- 
proved the  new  assignment  in  Germany.  After  working 
on  special  projects  for  Mr.  Johnson,  Mr.  Streibert  re- 
cently returned  from  abroad  where  he  made  a  field 
study  of  radio  programing  centers  and  organizational 
problems  under  a  separate  Information  agency. 


THE  CONGRESS 


President  Urges  U.S.  Loan 
To  Coal  and  Steel  Community 

White  House  press  release  dated  June  17 

On  June  17,  President  Eisenhower  made  public 
the  following  exchange  of  letters  with  Sen.  Alex- 
ander Wiley,  chairman,  Committee  on  Foreign 
Relations,  U.S.  Senate,  and  Robert  B.  Chiperfield, 
chairinan.  Committee  on  Foreign  Affairs,  House 
of  Representatives : 

Text  of  the  President's  Letter 

June  15, 1953 
Mt  De^vr  Senator  Wiley  :  (Mr  Dear  Mr.  Chip- 
EEFrELo)  :  While  in  Europe,  I  watched  with  keen 
interest  the  efforts  to  work  out  the  first  steps  to- 
ward European  federation.  My  experience  there 
convinced  me  that  the  uniting  of  Europe  is  a  neces- 
sity for  the  peace  and  prosperity  of  Europeans 
and  of  the  world. 

The  recent  visit  to  Washington  by  the  members 
of  the  High  Authority  of  the  European  Coal  and 
Steel  Community  has  given  me  the  opportunity  to 
review  with  them  the  work  and  plans  of  the  Com- 
munity.^ This  Community  seems  to  me  to  be  the 
most  hopeful  and  constructive  development  so  far 
toward  the  economic  and  political  integration  of 

'  For  text  of  a  White  House  statement  issued  on  June  3 
during  this  visit,  and  for  an  article  on  the  Coal  and  Steel 
Community,  see  Bulletin  of  June  S,  10.''i3,  p.  800,  p.  799. 


June  29,    1953 


927 


Europe.  As  such,  this  European  initiative  meets 
the  often  expressed  hopes  of  the  Congress  of  the 
United  States. 

M.  Monnet,  President  of  the  High  Authority, 
has  described  the  general  program  of  the  Com- 
munity for  the  development  of  its  coal  and  steel 
resources  which  will  require  extensive  investment 
for  increasing  production  and  improving  produc- 
tivity. The  new  Community  does  not  wish  to  ob- 
tain grants  for  these  purposes,  but  requires  loan 
capital.  The  proceeds  from  the  taxes  now  being 
levied  and  collected  by  the  Community  would  ap- 
pear to  provide  security  for  substantial  bor- 
rowing. 

In  due  time  the  Community  will  probably  seek 
loans  for  these  purposes  from  United  States  and 
European  sources  public  and  private.  It  appears 
to  me  tliat  a  portion  of  the  financing  of  this 
development  program  by  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment or  one  of  its  agencies,  out  of  moneys 
available  for  such  purposes  and  under  conditions 
insuring  proper  use  and  ultimate  repayment, 
would  foster  European  integration  in  a  tangible 
and  useful  way. 

Today  the  Common  Assembly  of  the  Commu- 
nity convenes  to  receive  the  first  Annual  Report 
from  the  High  Authority  regarding  the  activities 
of  the  Community.  Your  Committee  might  con- 
sider this  an  appropriate  occasion  to  express  its 
approval  of  the  progress  to  date  and  its  keen  in- 
terest in  the  success  of  this  and  future  steps  to- 
ward European  integration. 
Sincerely  yours, 

D WIGHT  D.  Eisenhower 


Senator  Wiley's  Reply 

Jotte  16, 1953 
Dear  Mr.  President  :  Thank  you  for  your  letter 
of  June  15,  1953,  regarding  the  recent  visit  to  the 
United  States  of  M.  Monnet,  President  of  the 
High  Authority  of  the  European  Coal  and  Steel 
Community.  You  point  out  that  the  creation  of 
this  Community  is  one  of  the  most  hopeful  and 
constructive  developments  so  far  toward  the  eco- 
nomic and  political  integi-ation  of  Europe.  I 
have  noted  also  that  the  Common  Assembly  of  the 
Community  convened  yesterday  to  receive  the  first 
Annual  Report  from  the  High  Authority  regard- 
ing the  activities  of  the  Community. 

As  you  know,  M.  Monnet  and  his  colleagues  had 
two  informal  sessions  with  members  of  the  Com- 
mittee on  Foreign  Relations  while  they  were  in  the 
United  States.  We  discussed  the  operations  of 
the  High  Authority  and  were  much  impressed  by 
the  vision  of  these  men  and  at  the  same  time  their 
realistic  approach  to  the  problem  of  the  integra- 
tion of  Europe. 

As  you  stated  in  your  letter,  European  initiative 
in  creating  the  Community  meets  the  often  ex- 
pressed hopes  of  the  Congress.  It  was  in  1949 
that  the  Economic  Cooperation  Act  was  amended 

928 


to  state  that  it  was  the  policy  of  the  "people  of 
the  United  States  to  encourage  the  unification  of 
Europe  .  .  .  ."  In  1950,  the  Act  was  again 
amended  to  emphasize  the  policy  of  the  United 
States  "to  encourage  the  further  unification  of 
Europe     .     .     .     ." 

Tlie  members  of  the  Foreign  Relations  Commit- 
tee have  asked  that  you  convey  to  the  Community 
our  best  wishes  for  its  success. 

It  is  my  deep  hope  that  the  European  Coal  and 
Steel  Community  will  be  able  to  weld  together  the 
European  economy  so  that  the  combined  strength 
of  free  Europe  will  enable  that  continent  to  main- 
tain its  freedom  and  develop  its  resources  to  the 
fullest  in  order  that  the  jieople  of  Europe  may 
prosper. 

Sincerely  yours, 

Alexander  Wiley 


Representative  Chiperfield's  Reply 

June  16, 1953 
Mt  Dear  Mr.  President:  Your  letter  of  June  15, | 
1953,  referring  to  the  European  Coal  and  Steel 
Community,    was    read    to    the    Committee    on 
Foreign    Affairs.     The    Committee    was    greatly 
interested  in  the  information  it  contained. 

The  Committee  and  its  members  have  followed 
the  progress  of  the  Community  with  great  inter- 
est, and  a  number  of  its  members  have  been  en- 
couraged by  their  meetings  with  the  president, 
M.  Monnet,  and  other  members  of  the  High 
Authority.  The  Committee  had  contemplated 
reference  to  the  real  progress  of  this  most  sig- 
nificant step  toward  European  integration  in  the 
legislation  now  pending  before  it.  In  view  of  the 
convening  of  the  Common  Assembly  of  the  Com- 
munity on  June  15th,  and  in  view  of  the  fact  that 
the  Community  is  not  an  applicant  for  funds 
authorized  in  the  pending  legislation,  the  Com- 
mittee adopted  the  enclosed  resolution  which  I 
have  the  honor  to  transmit  to  you.  It  is  our  hope 
that  you  will  see  fit  to  transmit  it  with  the  personal 
good  wishes  and  congratulations  of  the  Commit- 
tee to  the  Community  and  its  High  Authority. 

We  hope  that  this  is  a  symbol  of  prompt  action 
on  the  part  of  the  Eiu-opean  Defense  Community 
and  the  European  Political  Community  because 
we  believe  that  the  nations  of  Europe  must  pull 
together  to  achieve  not  only  military  integration 
but  political  federation. 
Respectfully, 

Roi'.ERT  B.  Chiperfielu      , 


[Enclosure] 


June  11,  1953 


RESOLUTION 


Whereas  the  Committee  on  Foreign  Affairs  of  tbe 
House  of  Representatives  has  followed  the  development 
and  progress  of  the  European  Coal  and  Steel  Community 
from  its  inception  with  great  interest,  through  hearings, 

Departmenf  of  Stafe  Bulletin 


i 


reports  and  unofficial  discussions  with  Its  officials;  and 
Whereas  this  is  the  most  signiflcaiit  step  toward  Euro- 
pean integration  to  date ;  and 

Whereas  the  Congress  has  repeatedly  expressed  its 
belief  in  the  paramount  importance  of  such  integration, 
liaving  stated  in  the  JIutual  Security  Act  of  1952  "The 
Congress  welcomes  the  recent  progress  in  political  federa- 
tion, military  integration,  and  economic  unification  in 
Europe  and  reaffirms  its  belief  in  the  necessity  of  further 
vigorous  efforts  toward  these  ends  as  a  means  of  building 
strength,  establishing  security,  and  preserving  peace  in 
the  North  Atlantic  area  ;"  and 

!  Whereas  the  Committee  has  learned  that  the  first 
annual  report  from  the  High  Authority  will  be  made  to 
the  Common  Assembly  of  the  Community  on  June  15th; 

Now  THEREFORE  BE  IT  RESOLVED 

1.  The  Committee  congratulates  the  Community  and 
its  High  Authority  under  the  leadership  of  its  president, 
M.  Jlonnet,  upon  the  substantial  progress  already  made, 
not  only  because  of  the  tangible  benefits  that  are  already 
apparent,  but  because  of  the  significance  of  tlie  Com- 
munity in  the  building  of  a  united  Europe. 

2.  The  Committee  notes  with  satisfaction  that  the 
Community  is  in  a  position  to  seek  capital  loans  for 
improving  productivity  on  a  sound  credit  basis.  Subject 
to  proper  qualification,  it  is  the  hope  of  the  Committee 
that  tlie  Community  may  be  able  to  obtain  a  portion  of 
such  loans  from  United  States  sources. 

3.  The  Committee,  reiterating  the  view  repeatedly  and 
officially  stated  by  the  Congress  of  the  importance  of 
European  unity  to  Europe  and  to  the  free  world,  ex- 
presses its  hope  that  the  European  Defense  Community 
and  the  European  Political  Community  which  constitute 
the  necessary  further  steps,  of  which  the  Coal  and  Steel 
Community  'is   the  first,    may   be   speedily   developed, 

I     ratified  and  put  into  force. 

President  Rejects  Increased  Duty 
on  Screen-Printed  Silk  Scarves 

White  House  press  release  dated  June  10 

The  Presklent  on  June  10  sent  identical  letters 
to  Eugene  D.  3IiUikin,  Chairman,  Committee  on 
Finance,  U.S.  Senate,  and  Daniel  A.  Reed,  Chair- 
man, Committee  on  Ways  and  Means,  House  of 
Representatives.  A  similar  letter  teas  sent  on  the 
same  date  to  Edgar  B.  Brassard,  Chairman  of  the 
V.S.  Tariff  Commission.  Text  of  the  President's 
letter  to  Chairmen  Millikin  and  Reed  follows: 

I  have  carefully  reviewed  the  report  of  the 
Tariff  Commission  of  April  13,  1953,  made  under 
Section  7  of  the  Trade  Agreements  Extension  Act 
of  1951,  on  screen-printed  silk  scarves,  in  which 
the  Commission  reported  that  screen-printed  silk 
scarves  provided  for  in  paragraph  1210  of  the 
Tariff  Act  of  1930  and  included  in  item  1210  of 
Part  I  of  the  Torquay  Schedule  XX  of  the  Gen- 
eral Agreement  on  Tariffs  and  Trade  are  being 
imported  into  the  United  States  in  such  increased 
quantities,  both  actual  and  relative,  as  to  cause 
serious  injury  to  the  domestic  industry  producing 
like  or  directly  competitive  products,  and  as  to 
threaten  continuance  of  such  injury. 

The  Commission  recommended  the  application, 
;  for  an  indefinite  period,  of  an  increase  in  the  rate 
of  duty  from  321^  per  centum  to  65  per  centum 
ad    valorem    on    imported    screen-printed    silk 


scarves  to  prevent  the  continuance  of  such  serious 
injury  to  such  domestic  industry. 

Because  of  international  conditions  which  de- 
mand our  most  earnest  efforts  to  maintain  friendly 
cooperation  with  other  countries  of  the  free  world, 
I  feel  keenly  the  necessity  of  acting  on  these 
escape-clause  cases  with  great  care  and  I  feel  that 
I  should  act  only  after  all  the  facts  involved  have 
been  clearly  established  and  well  authenticated. 
And  in  considering  such  cases,  they  must  be  care- 
fully reviewed  together  with  all  the  possible  inter- 
national implications  of  such  action. 

One  of  the  central  points  in  the  case  under  con- 
sideration is :  What  is  the  industry  for  which 
serious  injury  is  claimed?  The  Commission  it- 
self apparently  had  to  resolve  this  question  some- 
what arbitrarily.  It  appears  that  there  are  United 
States  entrepreneurs  who  buy  the_  raw  silk  in 
Japan,  pay  there  for  the  labor  at  piece  rates  for 
printing  and  finishing  which  is  all  done  under 
their  supervision  and  continued  ownership.  They 
then  export  the  finished  products  to  the  United 
States  and  merchandise  them  here.  Such  Ameri- 
can entrepreneurs  claim  to  be  the  domestic  in- 
dustry. There  are  other  firms  who  do  the  piece- 
rate  work  on  the  raw  material  by  screen-printing 
ancl  finishing  the  silk  into  scarves  in  this  country, 
but  who  never  own  or  control  the  scarves,  nor  have 
any  direction  of  the  industry,  except  as  it  pertains 
to  the  piece-rate  jobs  they  are  hired  to  do  and 
which  they  do  in  their  shops  in  this  country. 

To  complicate  matters  further,  most  of  these  lat- 
ter firms  were  not  engaged  in  the  processing  of 
scarves  alone  but  rather  in  providing  certain  serv- 
ices in  the  manufacture  of  scarves  and  of  other 
products  as  well.  Moreover,  these  firms  are  only 
a  fraction  of  all  the  domestic  firms  which  offer  the 
same  or  similar  services. 

It  is  also  questionable  whether  the  effective  in- 
crease of  some  9  or  10  cents  in  the  tariff  on  lower- 
priced  scarves  would  not  simply  increase  the  cost 
to  the  consumer  without  actual  benefit  to  the 
segment  of  the  apparel  industry  producing  the 
lower-priced  competitive  article.  It  is  not  con- 
vincingly shown  that  the  higher-priced  scarves, 
costing  in  excess  of  $4.50  per  dozen  abroad,  should 
be  subjected  to  a  doubling  of  our  tariff.  The  prob- 
lem is,  of  course,  inextricably  bound  up  with  the 
vagaries  of  style  considerations  affecting  the  ap- 
parel industry,  with  its  attendant  competitive  con- 
ditions and  speculative  risks,  and  in  many  cases 
to  the  handling  or  processing  of  items  other  than 
scarves  in  the  several  processing  steps. 

Another  aspect  which  bears  on  the  case,  and  con- 
cerning which  I  feel  further  information  is  re- 
quired, relates  to  the  returns  from  other  products 
which  the  industry,  as  it  may  be  defined  by  the 
Commission,  may  be  enjoying.  Question  has  also 
been  raised  as  to  whether  the  imported  silk  scarves 
do  not,  because  of  the  gi-eat  disparity  in  quality 
and  price,  reach  an  additional  market  beyond  that 
tapped  by  domestic  silk  scarves.     If  this  is  true, 


June  29,    1953 


929 


it  would  have  an  important  bearing  on  whether 
escape-clause  action  could  help  in  any  significant 
way  in  relieving  the  difficulties  of  the  domestic 
firms  which  have  applied  to  the  Commission. 

Because  of  these  questions  and  doubts,  I  am 
returning  the  report  to  the  Commission  with  the 
request  that  it  make  a  further  careful  examina- 
tion of  this  case  in  the  light  of  the  more  recent 
and  current  facts  and  conditions  in  the  industry 
producing  silk  scarves  and  report  its  findings  to 
me. 

As  you  know,  I  have  recommended  to  the  Con- 
gress that  a  Commission  be  set  up  to  study  our 
over-all  foreign  economic  policy,  including  our 
tariff  structure  and  trade  program.  Until  such 
a  study  is  concluded  and  our  future  international 
trade  policy  is  determined,  I  am  reluctant  to 
modify  the  concessions  granted  in  our  trade  agree- 
ments unless  the  evidence  clearly  demonstrates 
that  such  modifications  are  necessary. 

I  am  sending  this  report  to  you  in  compliance 
with  the  provision  of  section  7  (c)  of  the  Trade 
Agreements  Extension  Act  of  1951,  which  pro- 
vides that  should  the  President  not  take  the  ac- 
tion recommended  by  the  Tariff  Commission 
within  sixty  days,  he  shall  submit  a  report  to  the 
Committee  on  Ways  and  Means  of  the  House  of 
Representatives  and  to  the  Committee  on  Finance 
of  the  Senate,  stating  why  he  has  not  made  such 
adjustment  or  modification,  or  imposed  such 
quotas. 

Sincerely, 

DwiGHT  D.  Eisenhower 


PUBLICATIONS 


Recent  Releases 

For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  Oovern- 
nient  Printing  Office,  Washington  25,  D.  C.  Address  re- 
guests  direct  to  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  except 
in  the  ease  of  free  puhlications,  which  may  be  obtained 
from  the  Department  of  State. 

Vocational  and  Industrial  Education,  Extension  of  Coop- 
erative Program  in  Brazil.  Treaties  and  Other  Interna- 
tional Acts  Series  2475.     Pub.  4913.     5  pp.     5^. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Brazil- 
Signed  at  Rio  de  Janeiro  Oct.  14,  1950. 

Economic  Cooperation,  Guaranties  under  Public  Law  472, 
80th  Congress,  As  Amended.  Treaties  and  Other  Interna- 
tional Acts  Series  2517.     Pub.  4749.     4  pp.     5^. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  the 
Philippines — Signed  at  Washington  Feb.  18  and  19,  1952. 

Safety  of  Life  at  Sea.  Treaties  and  Other  International 
Acts  Sevies  2495.     Pub.  4728.     241  pp.     55^. 

Convention,  with  regulations,  between  the  United  States 
and  Other  Governments— Signed  at  London  June  10,  1948. 


tional  Financial  Contributions.  Treaties  and  Other  Inter- 
national Acts  Series  2.530.     Pub.  4739.     5  pp.     5<t. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Nica- 
ragua— Signed  at  Managua  Mar.  27  and  Apr.  25,  1952. 

General  Agreement  on  Tariffs  and  Trade,  First  Protocol 
of  Supplementary  Concessions.  Treaties  and  Other  In- 
ternational Acts  Series  2532.     Pub.  4769.     11  pp.     10^. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Other  Govern- 
ments—Dated at  Geneva  Oct.  27,  1951. 

Health  and  Sanitation,  Cooperative  Program  in  Haiti,  Ad- 
ditional Financial  Contributions,  Supplementing  Agree- 
ment of  Sept.  18  and  27,  19.50.  Treaties  and  Other  Inter- 
national Acts  Series  2536.     Pub.  4780.     4  pp.     5(f. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Haiti — 
Signed  at  Port-au-Prince  Oct.  17,  1951  and  Mar.  31,  1952. 

Education,  Cooperative  Program  in  Ecuador,  Additional 
Financial  Contributions.  Treaties  and  Other  Interna- 
tional Acts  Series  2539.     Pub.  4790.     5  pp.     50. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Ecua- 
dor-Signed at  Quito  Mar.  18  and  31,  1952. 

Health  and  Sanitation,  Cooperative  Program  in  Uruguay, 
Additional  Financial  Contributions.  Treaties  and  Othei 
International  Acts  Scries  2540.     Pub.  4791.     4  pp.     54. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Uru- 
guay— Signed  at  Montevideo  Jan.  16  and  Mar.  26,  1952. 

Education,  Cooperative  Program  in  Paraguay,  Additional 
Financial  Contributions.  Treaties  and  Other  Interna 
tional  Acts  Series  2541.     Pub.  4796.     6  pp.     5«(. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Para- 
guay— Signed  at  Asuncion  Jan.  31  and  Jlar.  25,  1952. 

Health  and  Sanitation,  Cooperative  Program  in  Ecuador 
Additional  Financial  Contributions.  Treaties  and  Othei 
International  Acts   Series  2542.     Pub.  4797.    5  pp.     5^, 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Ecua- 
dor— signed  at  Quito  Mar.  18  and  31,  1952. 

Agriculture,  Cooperative  Program  in  Paraguay,  Addi- 
tional Financial  Contributions.  Treaties  and  Other  Inter- 
national Acts  Series  2543.     Pub.  4799.     6  pp.     54. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Para- 
guay— Signed  at  Asuncion  Jan.  31  and  Mar.  31,  1952. 

Education.  Cooperative  Program  in  the  Dominican  Repub- 
lic, Additional  Financial  Contributions.  Treaties  and 
Other  International  Acts   Series  2544.    4  pp.     54.  L 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United   States  and  the" 
Dominican  Republic — Signed  at  Ciudad  Trujillo  Feb.  12 
and  Apr.  4,  1952. 

Customs  Concessions  on  Automobiles,  Provisional  Agree- 
ment. Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2545. 
Pub.  4801.     S  pp.  54. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Chile — 
Signed  at  Santiago  Apr.  8,  1952. 

Health  and  Sanitation,  Cooperative  Program  in  Haiti, 
Additional  Financial  Contributions.  Treaties  and  Other 
International  Acts  Series  2547.     Pub.  4804.     4  pp.     5^. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Haiti — 
Signed  at  Port-au-Prince  Mar.  3  and  Apr.  9,  19.52. 

Telecommunications,  Registration  of  Frequencies  Used 
in  Greenland  by  United  States  Authorities.  Treaties  and 
Other  International  Acts  Series  254S.  Pub.  4805.  3  pp. 
54. 


Education,   Cooperative    Program   in    Nicaragua,   Addi-  Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Den- 


930 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


mark— Dated  at  Washington  Mar.  25  and  Apr.  4,  1952. 

Air  Transport  Services,  Amending  Agreement  of  Mar. 

31  1949.  Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series 
2551.     Pub.  4773.     3  pp.  50. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Pan- 
aujfi—Signed  at  Washington  May  29  and  June  3,  1952. 

Health  and  Sanitation,  Cooperative  Program  in  Brazil, 
Additional  Financial  Contributions.  Treaties  and  Other 
International  Acts  Series  2552.     Pub.  4S08.     5  pp.     5(t. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Brazil- 
Signed  at  Rio  de  Janeiro  Feb.  28  and  Apr.  18,  1952. 

Relief  From  Taxation  on  Defense  Expenditures.  Treaties 
and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2556.  Pub.  4812. 
12  pp.     100. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and 
France — Signed  at  Paris  Mar.  13,  1952. 

Agriculture,  Cooperative  Program  in  Haiti,  Additional 
Financial  Contributions.  Treaties  and  Other  Interna- 
tional Acts  Series  2558.     Pub.  4818.     5  pp.     54- 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Haiti — 
Signed  at  Port-au-Prince  Jan.  29  and  Apr.  9,  1952. 

Relief  from  Taxation  on  Defense  Expenditures.  Treaties 
and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2559.  Pub.  4821. 
4  pp.     50. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  the 
United  Kingdom — Signed  at  London  Mar.  17  and  18,  1952. 

Mutual  Defense  Assistance.  Treaties  and  Other  Interna- 
tional Acts  Series  2560.     Pub.  4833.     12  pp.     100. 

Agreement   between   the   United   States   and   Ecuador — 

Signed  at  Quito  Feb.  20,  1952. 

Reciprocal  Trade,  Supplementing  Agreement  of  Novem- 
ber 6,  1939.  Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series 
2565.     Pub.  4753.     39  pp.     150. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Venezuela — 
Signed  at  Caracas  Aug.  28,  1952;  exchange  of  notes 
signed  Aug.  28,  1952. 

Economic  Cooperation,  Guaranties  under  Public  Law  472, 
80th  Congress,  As  Amended.  Treaties  and  Other  Interna- 
tional Acts  Series  2567.     Pub.  4S39.     4  pp.     50. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Nor- 
way—Signed at  Washington  Mar.  28  and  Apr.  1,  1952. 

Economic  Cooperation,  Guaranties  under  Public  Law  472, 
80th  Congress,  As  Amended.  Treaties  and  Other  Interna- 
tional Acts  Series  2568.     Pub.  4840.     4  pp.     50. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Greece — 
Signed  at  Washington  Apr.  21  and  23,  1952. 

Technical  Cooperation,  Joint  Fund  Program.  Treaties 
and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2570.  Pub.  4842. 
8  pp.     100. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Israel — 
Signed  at  Tel  Aviv  May  9,  1952. 

Emergency  Economic  Assistance.  Treaties  and  Other 
International  Acts  Series  2571.     Pub.  4849.     5  pp.     50. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Israel — 
Dated  at  Washington  May  1,  1952. 

Leased  Bases  in  Newfoundland,  Modifying  Agreement  of 
Mar.  27,  1941.  Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts 
Series  2572.     Pub.  4850.     5  pp.     50. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  the 
United  Kingdom— Signed  at  Washington  Feb.  13  and 
Mar.  19,  1952. 


Consular  Officers,  Exemption  from  Customs  Duties  and 
Related  Taxes.  Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts 
Series  2577.     Pub.  4863.     4  pp.     50. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Chile — 
Signed  at  Washington  Mar.  12,  Apr.  16,  and  May  12,  1952. 

Technical  Cooperation,  Education  Program.  Treaties  and 
Other  International  Acts  Series  2583.  Pub.  4880. 
3  pp.     50. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Libya- 
Dated  at  Tripoli  Apr.  30  and  May  20,  1952. 

Technical  Cooperation,  Assurances  under  Mutual  Secu- 
rity Act  of  1951.  Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts 
Series  2624.     Pub.  4847.    4  pp.  50. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Af- 
ghanistan—Dated at  Kabul  Jan.  2  and  24,  1952. 

United     States     Educational    Commission    in     Sweden. 

Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series  2653.  Pub. 
4925.     11  pp.  100. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Sweden — 
Signed  at  Stockholm  Nov.  20, 1952. 

Mexican  Agricultural  Workers,  Amending  and  Extending 
Agreement  of  Aug.  11,  1951.  Treaties  and  Other  Interna- 
tional Acts  Series  2531.    Pub.  4921.    6  pp.    50. 

Exchange  of  notes  between  the  United  States  and  Mex- 
ico— Signed  at  Mexico  Jan.  10  and  31,  Feb.  8,  Mar.  31,  and 
Apr.  9,  1952. 

Fourth  Meeting  of  Consultation  of  Ministers  of  Foreign 
Affairs  of  American  States.  International  Organization 
and  Conference  Series  II,  American  Republics  10.  Pub. 
4928.     88  pp.    250. 

A  brief  summary  of  the  activities  of  the  Fourth  Meeting, 
held  at  Washington  Mar.  26  to  Apr.  7,  1951. 


Check  List  of  Department  of  State 
Press  Releases:  June  15-19, 1953 

Releases  may  be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  the 
Special  Assistant  for  Press  Relations,  Department 
of  State,  Washington  25,  D.C. 

Press  releases  issued  prior  to  June  15  which 
appear  in  this  issue  of  the  Bulletin  are  Nos.  310 
of  June  9,  312  of  June  11  and  315  of  June  12. 

Subject 

Chairman  for  U.N.  Day 

Korean  political  conference 

Dulles:  Soviet  European  moves 

17th  session  of  F.\o 

Dulles  :  Morals  and  power 

16th  session  of  Ecosoc 

Streibert :  Consultant  to  Mr.  Conant 

Noone :  Consultant  to  Mr.  Johnson 

Cowdin  :  Head  of  Imps 

Colombia  :  Political  relations  resumed 

Draper  :  Conditions  in  Europe 

Joint  message  on  East  Berlin 

U.S.  military  mission  to  Indochina 

Appointment  of  McUvaine 

*Nnt  printed. 

tHeld  for  a  later  issue  of  the  Bulletin. 


No. 

Date 

317 

6/15 

318 

6/15 

319 

6/15 

320 

6/16 

321 

6/16 

*322 

6/16 

323 

6/17 

*324 

6/17 

*325 

6/17 

326 

6/18 

t327 

6/18 

328 

6/19 

329 

6/19 

330 

6/19 

June  29,   J  953 


931 


June  29,  1953 


Ind 


ex 


Vol.  XXVIII,  No.  731 


Africa 

UBERIA:  Withdraws  from  Gatt 917 

Agriculture 

Council   of   Fao 926 

American  Principles 

Achieving  a  healthy  world  economy  (Aldrlch)      .       915 

Morals  and  power  (Dulles) 895 

Some  aspects  of  American  foreign  policy  (Mer- 
chant)            909 

American  Republics 

COLOMBIA:  Diplomatic  relations  resumed  with 

Colombia 927 

Locally  produced  broadcasts  In  Latin  America    .       926 

Arms  and  Ajmed  Forces 

Morals  and  power  (Dulles) 895 

Second  anniversary  of  Shape  as  an  operational 

headquarters  (Ridgway  report) 899 

U.S.  military  mission  to  visit  Indochina     .     .     .       909 

Asia 

CHINA:  U.S.  restricts  fueling  of  ships  bound  for 

Communist  China 904 

INDOCHINA:  U.S.  military  mission  to  visit     .     .       909 
KOREA: 

Political  conference  on  Korea  (Dulles)     .     .     .      908 
Release    of    anti-Communist    prisoners    from 

U.N.  camps  in  South  Korea 905 

Commerce 

U.S.  restricts  fueling  of  ships  bound  for  Com- 
munist  China 904 

Congress 

Current  legislation  on  foreign  policy     ....       898 
President    rejects    increased    duty    on    screen- 
printed  silk  scarves 929 

President    urges   U.S.   loan    to   Coal    and    Steel 

Community 927 

Europe 

GERMANY: 

$50  million  aid  for  Berlin   (Elsenhower)      .     .       898 
Repressive  Soviet  measures  talten  in  East  Ber- 
lin (text  of  Joint  resolution) 897 

President   urges    U.S.    loan    to    Coal   and   Steel 

Community 927 

Second  anniversary  of  Shape  as  an  operational 

headquarters  (Ridgway  report) 899 

Some  aspects  of  American  foreign  policy  (Mer- 
chant)      909 

SPAIN:    Building   closer  U.S.-Spanish  relations 

(Dunn) 913 

U.S.SR.:    Repressive   Soviet   measures   taken   in 

East  Berlin   (text  of  joint  resolution)      .     .       897 

YUGOSLAVIA:   MsA  makes  additional  grant  of 

$15  million  to  Yugoslavia 920 

Finance 

Achieving  a  healthy  world  economy  (Aldrlch)     .      915 

Foreign  Service 

Confirmations  (Hughes,  Peaslee) 927 

Diplomatic  relations  resumed  with  Colombia     .       927 
Theodore  C.  Strelbert  to  be  consultant  to  Mr. 

Conant 927 

International  Information  Administration 

Locally  produced  broadcasts  In  Latin  America     .      926 

International  Meetings 

U.S.  DELEGATION:  Council  of  Pag 926 

Mutual  Security  Agency 

$50  million  aid  for  Berlin  (Eisenhower)      .     .     .       898 
MsA  makes  additional  grant  of  $15  million  to 

Yugoslavia 920 


North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization 

Second  anniversary  of  Shape  as  an  operational 

headquarters  (Ridgway  report) 899 

Presidential  Documents 

President  rejects  increased  duty  on  screen- 
printed  silk  scarves 929 

President    urges    U.S.    loan    to    Coal    and   Steel 

Community 927 

PROCLAMATIONS : 

Import  quota  imposed  on  shelled  filberts     .     .       917 
New   import   quotas  placed   on  certain  dairy 

products  and  oils 918 

Prisoners  of  War 

Release  of  anti-Communist  prisoners  from  U.N. 

camps  in  South  Korea 905 

Publ!  ,utions 

Recent  releases 930 

State,  Department  of 

Appointment  of  chairman  of  U.S.  Committee  for 

U.N.  Day 920 

Locally  produced  broadcasts  in  Latin  America     .       926 
Ml'.  McUvalne  to  be  special  assistant  to  Assistant 

Secretary  McCardle 927 

Trade 

GATT:    Liberia   withdraws 917 

Import  quota  imposed  on  shelled  filberts  (Presi- 
dential   proclamation) 917 

New  import  quotas  placed  on  certain  dairy  prod- 
ucts and  oils  (Presidential  proclamation)      .       918 

President  rejects  increased  duty  on  screen- 
printed  silk  scarves 929 

Some  aspects  of  American  foreign  policy  (Mer- 
chant)      909 

Transportation 

U.S.  restricts  fueling  of  ships  bound  for  Com- 
munist  China 904 

Treaty  Information 

U.S. -U.N.   cooperation   In   U.N.   postal   activities 

(Tomlinson;   text  of  agreement)      ....       921 

United  Nations 

Appointment  of  chairman  of  U.S.  Committee  for 

U.N.  Day 920 

Political  conference  on  Korea   (Dulles)      .     .     .       908 
U.S. -U.N.   cooperation   in   U.N.   postal   activities 

(Tomlinson;   text  of  agreement)      ....       921 

Name  Index 

Aldrich,  Winthrop  W 915 

Chiperfield,  Robert  B 928 

Clark,  General 906 

Dulles,  Secretary 895,905,908 

Dunn,  James  C 913 

Eisenhower,  President 898,  918,  920,  927 

Harrison,  Lt.  Gen 905 

Hughes,  John  C .     .     .     .  927 

Kim  II  Sung 907 

McUvaine,    Robinson 927 

Navarre.    Gen.    Henri 909 

O'Daniel,  Lt.   Gen 909 

Peaslee,  Amos  J 927 

Peng   Teh-Huai 907 

Ridgway,    General 899 

Ryerson,   Knowles   A 926 

Strelbert,  Theodore  C 927 

Tomlinson,    John    D 921 

Watson,  Thomas  J.,  Jr 920 

Waynick,  Capus  M 927 

Wiley.  Alexander 927 


0.    S.   GOTERMMEKT    PHINTINC   OFFICE:   19BS 


BOSTON 


PUBLIC  LIBBAB'' 


1 


SS  06352  753  3